Skip to main content

Full text of "Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales"

See other formats 


THE 


IPIROOIEIEIDIIISrGi-S 


LINNEAN  SOCIETY 


OF 


NEW   SOUTH  WALES. 


(SEOOISTID    SERIES.) 


VOL.  VI. 

WITH    FORTY-THREE    PLATES. 

(Plates  i.-xii.,  xii.  bis,  and  xiii.-xlii.) 


FOR    THIS    TEAE    1891. 


SYDNEY: 

PRINTED  AND  PUBLISHED  FOR  THE  SOCIETY 

BY 

F.  CUNNINGHAME  &  CO.,  146  PITT  STREET., 

AND 

SOLD  BY  THE   SOCIETY. 

1892. 


SYDNEY : 

F.    CUNNINGHAME  AND  CO.,   PRINTERS, 

PITT   STREET. 


CONTENTS  OP  VOL.  VI. 

(SEOOHSTD    SERIES-) 


PART  I. 

(Issued  September  9th,  1891.) 


PAGE 

Notes  on  the  occurrence  of  Stilbite  in  the  Eruptive  Rocks  of  Jamberoo, 

N.S.W.     By  B.  G.  Engelhardt.     (Plate  i.)  5 

Notes  on  a  small  Collection  of  Hymenoptera  from  Narrabri,  N.S.W. 
By  W.  W.  Froggatt      13 

Description  of  a  new  Species  of  Tortricidse.    By  J.  Hartley  Durrant     17 

On  the  Anatomy  of  some  Tasmanian  Land  Snails.     By  C.  Hedley, 

F.L.S.,  Corr.  Mem.     (Plates  ii.-m.) 19 

Stray  Notes  on  Lepidoptera.     No.  2.     By  A.  Sidney  Olliff 27 

Notes    on  Australian  Aboriginal    Stone  Weapons  and    Implements. 

Nos.  x.-xv.     By  R.  Etheridge,  Junr.     (Plates  iv.-viii.) 31 

On  the  Classification  of  Eucalypts.     By  the  Rev.  W.  Woolls,  Ph.D., 

F.L.S 49 

The  Land  Molluscan  Fauna  of  British  New  Guinea.     By  C.  Hedley, 

F.L.S. ,  Corr.  Mem.     (Plates  ix.-xii.  and  xn.  bis.)} ..     67 

On  the  Trail  of  an  Extinct  Bird.     By  C.  W.  De  Vis,  M.  A.,  Corr.  Mem.  117 

Note  on  an  Extinct  Eagle.     By  C.  W.  De  Vis.,  M.A.,  Corr.  Mem.  ...     123 

Elections  and  Announcements  1,9,45 

Donations  1,  9,  45 

Notes  and  Exhibits      8,43,125 


•27774 


IV.  CONTENTS. 

PART   II. 

(Issued  December  22nd,  1891.) 

PAGE 
On  the  Occurrence  of  Barite  (Barytes)  in  the  Hawkesbury  Sandstone 

near  Sydney.     By  H.  G.  Smith,  Technological  Museum,  Sydney...  131 

Notes  on  Australian  Economic  Botany.     No.  n.     By  J.  H.  Maiden, 

F.L.S.,  F.C.S 133 

On  the  occurrence  of   a  Gum   in  Echinocarpus  (SloaneaJ   Australis, 

Beitfh.    By  J.  H.  Maiden,  F.L.S.,  F.C.S 140 

Onyx  and  Dipeltis:  new  Nematode  Genera,  with  a  Note  on  Dorylaimus. 
ByN.  A.  Cobb     ...143 

In  confirmation  of  the  Genus  Owenia  so-called.      By  C.  W.  De  Vis, 

M. A,  Corr.  Mem.  (Plate  xiii.)  159 

A  Contribution  to  the  Geology  and  Petrography  of  Bathurst,  N.S.W. 

By  Rev.  J.  Milne  Curran,  F.G.S.     (Plates  xiv.-xviii.) 173 

Remarks  on  Post-Tertiary  Phascolomyidce.      By  C.  W.  De  Vis,  M.A., 

Corr.  Mem.  235 

Description  of  a  new  Marine  Shell.     By  C.  Hedley,  F.L.S.,  and  C. 

T.  Musson,  F.L.S.     (Plate  xix.,  figs.  1-3)     247 

Note  on  the  Ova  of  Helicarion  robustus,  Gould.     By  C.  Hedley,  F.L.S.  248 

Angophora  Kino.     By  J.  H.  Maiden,  F.L.S.,  F.C.S 253 

The  Incisors  of  Scejjarnodon.      By  C.  W.  De  Vis,  M.A.,  Corr.  Mem. 

(Plate  xxii.)  258 

Contributions  to  a  more  exact  Knowledge  of  the  Geographical  Distribu- 
tion of  Australian  Batrachia.     No.  n.     By  J.  J.  Fletcher  .    263 

Description  of  a  supposed  new  Cystignathoid  Frog.     By  J.  J.  Fletcher  275 

Description  of  a  new  Cone  from  Mauritius.      By  J.  Brazier,  F.L.S. 

(Plate  xix.,  fig.  4.)  276 

On  Queensland  and  other  Australian  Lepidoptera,  with  Descriptions 
of  New  Species.    By  Thomas  P.  Lucas,  M.R.C.S.E.,  L.S.A.     ...  277 

Elections  and  Announcements  127,169 

Donations  127,  169,  250 

Notes  and  Exhibits      166,248,307 


CONTENTS.  v. 

PART   III. 

(Issued  May  23rd,  1892.) 

PAGE 
The  Silurian  Trilobites  of  New  South  Wales,  with  References  to  those 

of  other  parts  of  Australia.  Part  i.  By  R.  Etheridge,  Junr., 
Palaeontologist  to  the  Australian  Museum,  and  Geological  Survey 
of  N.S.W.;  and  John  Mitchell,  Public  School,  Narellan.  (Plate 
xxv.)  311 

On  the  Synonymy  of  Helix  (Hadra)  gulosa,  Gould.  By  John  Brazier, 
C.M.Z.S.,  F.L.S 321 

Observations  on  the  Chloraemidae,  with  special  Reference  to  several 
Australian  Forms.  By  W.  A.  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc.  Edin.,  F.L.S. , 
Challis  Professor  of  Biology,  University  of  Sydney.  (Plates  xxvi.- 
xxviii.)      329 

Notes  on  Australian  Aboriginal  Stone  Weapons  and  Implements.  Nos. 
xvi.-xvii.  By  R.  Etheridge,  Junr.,  Palaeontologist  to  the  Aus- 
tralian Museum,  and  Geological  Survey  of  N.S.W.  (Plates  xxix.- 
xxxvi.)       357 

The  Examination  of  Kinos  as  an  Aid  in  the  Diagnosis  of  Eucalypts. 

Part  iii.— The  Turbid  Group.     By  J.  H.  Maiden,  F.L.S.,  F.C.S.  389 

Descriptions  of  two  new  Species  of  Carenum  from  West  Australia, 
with  Notes  on  the  Synonymy  and  Distribution  of  some  previously 
described  Species.     By  T.  G.  Sloane ■       427 

Jottings  from  the  Biological  Laboratory  of  Sydney  University.  By 
Professor  W.  A.  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc. — 

15.  On  a  simple  Method  of  substituting  strong  Alcohol  for  a  watery 

Solution  in  the  Preparation  of  Specimens 433 

Residue  of  the  Extinct  Birds  of  Queensland  as  yet  Detected.     By  C. 

W.  De  Vis,  M.A.,  Corr.  Mem.     (Plates  xxiii.-xxiv.)       437 

Observations  on  Plants  collected  during  Mr.  J.  Bradshaw's  Expedition 
to  the  Prince  Regent's  River.  By  Baron  von  Mueller,  K.C.M.G., 
M.D.,  Ph.D.,  F.R.S .  457 

Notes  on  Australian  Coleoptera,  with  Descriptions  of  new  Species. 

Part  x.     By  the  Rev.  T.  Blackburn,  B.A.,  Corr.  Mem 479 

On  a  Collection  of  Land  and  Freshwater  Shells  from  Queensland.  By 
C.  Hedley,  F.L.S.,  and  C.  T.  Musson,  F.L.S 551 


VI.  CONTENTS. 

PART  III.  (continued). 

PAGE 

Descriptions  of  some  new  Species  of  Pulmonate  Mollusca  from  Australia 
and  the  Solomon  Islands.  By  J.  C.  Cox,  M.D.,  F.L.S.  (Plates 
xx.  and  xxi.)        565 

Description  of  a  new  Diplomorpha.  By  W.  D.  Hartman,  M.D. 
(Communicated  by  J.  C.  Cox,  M.D.,  F.L.S.)  (Plate  xxi.,  figs.  1, 
3,  and  6)     571 

Some  New  South  Wales  Plants  illustrated.     No.  i.     By  R.  T.  Baker, 

Assistant  Curator,  Technological  Museum,  Sydney.  (Plate  xxxvn.)  572 

Elections  and  Announcements  308,  382,  383 

Donations  308,  383 

Notes  and  Exhibits      307,381,574 


PART   IV. 

(Issued  June  10th,  1892.) 

PAGE 

Revision  of  Australian  Lepidoptera,  By  E.  Meyrick,  B.A.,  F.L.S. 
Partv.        ...         581 

On  two  undescribed  Exudations  from  the  Leguminosse.  By  J.  H. 
Maiden,  F.L.S.,  &c 679 

The  Land  Molluscan  Fauna  of  British  New  Guinea.  (Anatomical 
Supplement,  continued  from  p.  115.)  By  C.  Hedley,  F.L.S. 
(Plates  xxxviii.-xlii.) 685 

On  a  Form  of  Womerah,  or  "Thro wing-stick,"  presumed  to  be  undes- 
cribed. By  R.  Etheridge,  jun.  (Palaeontologist  to  the  Australian 
Museum,  and  Geological  Survey  of  N.  S.  Wales)     699 


In  Memoriam— Sir  William  Macleay,  Kt.,  F.L.S 

Donations  

Notes  and  Exhibits      

President's  Address     

Office  bearers  and  Council  for  1892 


,  M.L.C 705 

579,683 

682,  703 

706 

723 


Title-page,  Contents,   Index  to  Vol.  vi.  (2nd  Ser.),  List  of  Plates,  a 
Corrigenda. 


LIST   OF   PLATES. 
VOL.  VI. 

(SECOND  SERIES). 


Plate  i.— Stilbite  from  the  eruptive  rocks  of  Jamberoo,  N.S.W. 

Plates  II. -in. — Tasmanian  Land  Snails. 

Plates  iv.  -viii. — Australian  Aboriginal  Stone  Weapons  and  Implements. 

Plates  ix. -xii.  and  xn.  bis. — British  New  Guinea  Land  Mollusca. 

Plate  xiii. — Euowenia  robusta,  De  Vis. 

Plates  xiv.-xviii. — Illustrative  of  the  Geology  and  Petrography  of  Bathurst. 

N.S.W. 
Plate  xix. — Marine  Mollusca :  Eulimella  moriiliforme,  Hedley  and  Musson, 

and  Conus  (Chelyconus)  worcesteri,  Brazier. 
Plates  xx. -xxi. — Australian  and  Solomon  Islands  Pulmonate  Mollusca. 
Plate  xxii. — Incisors  of  Sceparnodon  ramsayi,  Owen. 
Plates  xxiii.-xxiv. — Queensland  Extinct  Avian  Remains. 
Plate  xxv. — Australian  Silurian  Trilobites. 
Plates  xxvi. -xxviii. — Australian  Chlorsemids. 
Plates  xxix. -xxxvi.— Australian  Aboriginal  Implements. 
Plate  xxxvii. — Acacia  prommens,  A.  Cunn. 
Plates  xxxviii. -xlii. — Anatomy  of  New  Guinea  Land  Mollusca. 


CORRIGENDA. 


Page  51,  line  11 — for  E.  gneorifolia  read  E.  cneorifolia. 

Page  53,  line  25 — for  E.  melissodora  read  E.  melissiodora. 

Page  123,  line  22 — for  Haliastur  leucogaster  read  Haliastur  leucostemus. 

Page  474,  line  11 — for  Steliotropium  tenuifolium  read  Heliotropium 

TENUIFOLIUM. 

Page  558,  line  6— for  P.  pedicula  read  Pupa  pedicula. 
Page  563,  line  2 — for  B.  pryamidatus  read  B.  pyramidatus. 

(See  also  Errata  on  p.  698. ) 


^E^OOEEIDIDSr&S 


OF  THE 


LINNEAN  SOCIETY 

OF 

n^E'^y    SOUTH    WALES. 


WEDNESDAY,  28th  JANUARY,  1891. 


Dr.  J.  C.  Cox,  Vice-President,  in  the  Chair. 


Mr.  Walter  S.  Duncan,  Inverell,  was  elected  a  member  of  the 
Society. 


DONATIONS. 

Two  Pamphlets  entitled — "  Notes  on  West  Australian  Oology, 
&c."  and  "Notes  on  the  Zoology  of  Houtman's  Abrolhos."  By 
A.  J.  Campbell,  F.L.S.     From  the  Author. 

",  Journal  of  the  Marine  Biological  Association  of  the  United 
Kingdom."     From  the  Associatio7i. 

"The  Victorian  Naturalist."  Vol.  VIII.,  Nos.  8  and  9  (Dec, 
1890,  and  Jan.,  1891).  From  the  Field  Naturalists'  Club  of 
Victoria. 


2  DONATIONS. 

"  Proceedings  of  the  Zoological  Society  of  London  for  1890." 
Part  3  ;  "  Abstracts  "  for  Nov.  8th,  and  Dec.  2nd,  1890."  From 
the  Society. 

Asiatic  Society  of  Bengal— "  Journal."  Vol.  LI.  (1882),  Part  i., 
Nos.  1-4,  Part  ii.,  Nos.  14;  Vol.  LII.  (1883),  Part  i.  Nos.  1-4, 
Part  ii.,  Nos.  1-4  (in  2  without  title  page  and  Plates  i.,  ix.  and  x.); 
Vol.  LIII.  (1884),  Part  L,  Nos.  1,  2,  and  Special  No.  (  =  Nos.  3  and 
4),  Part  ii.,  Nos.  1-4  ;  Vol.  LIV.  (1885),  Parti.,  Nos.  1-4,  Partii., 
Nos.  1-4 ;  Vol.  LV.  (1886),  Part  i.,  Nos.  1-3,  Part  ii.,  Nos.  1  5  ; 
Vol.  LVII.  (1888),  Part  ii.,  No.  5  ;  Vol.  LVIII.  (1889),  Part  i., 
Suppl.  (  =  Part  4);  Vol.  LIX.  (1890),  Part  i.,  Nos.  1  and  2,  Part 
ii.,  No.  1  and  Suppl.  No.  1 ;  "Proceedings"  for  the  years  1882- 
1886,  and  1890,  Nos.  1-3.     From  the  Society. 

11  Comptes  Rendus  des  Seances  de  l'Academie  des  Sciences, 
Paris."     Tome  CXI.,  Nos.  14-20.     From  the  Academy. 

"Geological  and  Nat.  Hist.  Survey  of  Canada. — Catalogue  of 
Canadian  Plants.  Part  V. — Acrogens."  By  J.  Macoun,  M.A.  ; 
"  List  of  Canadian  Hepaticse."  By  W.  H.  Pearson.  From  the 
Director  of  the  Survey. 

"American  Naturalist."  Vol.  XXIV.,  No.  286  (Oct.,  1890). 
From  the  Editors. 

"Johns  Hopkins  University  Circulars."  Vol.  X.,  No.  83 
(Nov.,  1890).     From  the  University. 

"  U.  S.  Department  of  Agriculture. — Insect  Life."  Vol.  III., 
No.  3  (Nov.,  1 890).  From  the  Secretary  of  Agriculture,  Washing- 
ton. 

"  Proceedings  of  the  United  States  National  Museum."  Vol. 
XIIL,  Nos.  822-824,  826-828  (1890).     From  the  Museum. 

"Feuille  des  Jeunes  Naturalistes."  No.  242  (Dec,  1890). 
From  the  Editor. 

"  Societe  Botanique  de  Lyon. — Bulletin  Trimestriel,  1889,  No. 
3."     From  the  Society. 


DONATIONS.  3 

"  The  Perak  Government  Gazette."  Vol.  III.,  No.  34  (Dec.  12, 
1890).      From  the  Government  Secretary. 

"  The  Journal  of  Comparative  Medicine  and  Veterinary 
Archives."     Vol.  XL,  No.  11  (Nov.,  1890).      From  the  Editor. 

"Zoologischer  Anzeiger."  XIII.  Jahrg.,  Nos.  350  and  351  (Dec, 
1890).     From  the  Editor. 

"Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Royale  de  Geographie  d'  Anvers." 
Tome  XV,  Fasc.  1  (1890).     From  the  Society. 

"  Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Beige  de  Microscopie.  xvn.me  Annee, 
No.  1  (Oct.,  1S90).     From  the  Society. 

"  The  Spectrum — An  Australian  Journal  of  Science."  Vol.  I., 
No.  i.     From  the  Editor. 

"  New  Zealand  Journal  of  Science."  Vol.  I.,  new  Series,  No.  1 
(Jan.,  1891).     From  the  Publisher, 

"  Reichenbachia — Orchids  Illustrated  and  Described."  By  F. 
Sander.  Second  Series.  Vol.  I.,  Parts  1  and  2 ;  "  Berliner 
Entomologische  Zeitschrift."  LIIL  Band,  1  Heft  (1890); 
"Stettiner  Entomologische  Zeitung."  51  Jahrg.,  Nos.  4-6  (1890). 
Also  the  following  Journals,  Magazines,  &c,  for  1890,  as  pub- 
lished : — "  The  Athenaeum  ;"  "  Annals  and  Magazine  of  Natural 
History  ;"  "  English  Mechanic  ;"  "  Entomologist ;"  "  Entomolo- 
gists' Monthly  Magazine;"  "The  Field  ;"  "  Geological  Magazine  ;" 
"  The  Ibis  ;"  "Journal  of  Anatomy  and  Physiology  ;"  "Journal  of 
Botany ;"  "  Nature  ;"  "  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Geographical 
Society  ;"  "  Quarterly  Journal  of  Microscopical  Science  ;"  "  Science 
Gossip  ;"  "The  Zoologist ;"  "  The  Scottish  Geographical  Magazine." 
From  the  Hon.  Sir  William  Macleay,  F.L.S.,  M.L.C. 

"  Records  of  the  Geological  Survey  of  India."  Vol.  XXIIL, 
Part  4  (1890).     From  the  Director. 

"Department  of  Mines — Memoirs  of  the  Geological  Survey  of 
N.S.W.  Palaeontology,  No.  7.  The  Mesozoic  and  Tertiary 
Insects  of  N.S.W."  By  R.  Etheridge,  Junr.,  and  A.  S.  Olliff. 
From  the  Minister  for  Mines. 


4  DONATIONS. 

"  Reports  of  Geological  Explorations  (New  Zealand)  during 
1887-88";  "  Twenty -third  Annual  Report  on  the  Colonial 
Museum  and  Laboratory"  (New  Zealand);  "Report  on  a 
Journey  from  Adelaide  to  Hale  River."  By  H.  Y.  L.  Brown. 
From  R.  Etheridge,  junr.,  Esq. 

"Grundziige  der  Botanik"  (1877).  Von  Dr.  C.  Luerssen ; 
"  Methodisches  Lehrbuch  der  allgemeinen  Botanik"  (1880).  Yon 
Dr.  W.  J.  Behrens  ;  "  Lehrbuch  der  Botanik  fur  Mittelschulen  " 
(1876).  Yon  Dr.  K.  Prantl;  "  Grundziige  der  Zoologie"  (1876). 
Yon  Dr,  C.  Claus  ;  "  Entwickelungsgeschichte  der  Wirbelthiere  " 
(1861).  VonH.  Rathke;  "Zur  Morphologie  der  monokotylischen 
Knollen-  und  Zwiebelgewachse  "  (1850).  Yon  T.  Irmisch  ;  "All- 
gemeine  Befcrachtungen  iiber  die  Triebe  der  Thiere  "  (1773).  Yon 
H.  S.  Reimarus  ;  "  Geologie  oder  Entwickelungsgeschichte  der 
Erde  und  ihrer  Bewohner"  (1858).  2  Yols.  Yon  Sir  Charles 
Lyell ;  "  Recherches  Helminthologiques  en  Danemark  et  en 
Islande"  (1866).  Par  H.  Krabbe ;  One  bound  volume  of 
Pamphlets  on  biological  subjects.  From  Oscar  Katz,  Esq.,  M.A., 
Ph.D. 

"  Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Imperiale  des  Naturalistes  de  Moscou." 
Annee  1890,  No.  2.     From  the  Society. 

"  Annales  de  la  Societe  Royale  Malacologique  de  Belgique."  T. 
XXI Y.  (1889);  Proces-verbeaux  des  Seances"  (August,  1889,  to 
August,  1890).     From  the  Society. 

11  Australasian  Journal  of  Pharmacy."  Yol.  VI.,  No.  1  (Jan., 
1891).     From  the  Editor. 


PAPER    READ. 

NOTES  ON  THE  OCCURRENCE  OF  STILBITE  IN  THE 
ERUPTIVE   ROCKS   OF  JAMBEROO,  N.S.W. 

By  B.  G.  Engelhardt. 

(Plate  i.) 

This  zeolite  is  mentioned  by  Prof.  Liversidge,  M.A.,  F.R.S.,  as 
having  been  found  in  a  few  New  South  Wales  localities,*  but,  as 
far  as  I  am  aware,  it  has  not  yet  been  reported  from  Kiama  and 
its  vicinity.  While  collecting  specimens  of  the  different  eruptive 
rocks  in  the  neighbourhood  of  Jamberoo,  I  observed  a  bright  red 
mineral  in  some  pieces  of  a  dense,  fine-grained  basalt,  obtained 
from  the  northern  flank  of  "  Wallaby  Hill,"  an  eminence  on  the 
south  of  the  Minnamurra  Valley.  Shortly  after,  I  found  the 
same  mineral  in  a  porphyritic  dolerite,  not  far  from  the  locality 
just  mentioned. 

In  either  the  basalt  or  dolerite,  the  mineral  in  question  occurs 
almost  invariably  in  more  or  less  circular  crystalline  masses,  from 
5  to  100mm.  in  diameter;  but  in  one  instance  it  was  found  to 
have  filled  up  a  small  fissure  in  the  surrounding  rock,  having 
spread  itself  as  a  crust  of  small  crystals  over  the  adjacent  surfaces 
of  the  matrix.  The  cleavage  planes  of  the  individual  crystals 
in  the  stellate  groups  (in  which  form  the  mineral  occurs  most 
frequently)  show  the  characteristic  pearly  lustre  of  stilbite.  The 
crystals  are  flat  prisms  whose  cleavage  is  so  perfect,  parallel  to 
their  shorter  planes,  that  it  was  easy  to  split  off  laminse  sufficiently 
thin  and  transparent  for  microscopical  observation  by  transmitted 
light. 

In  colour  the  mineral  varies  from  a  yellowish-white  to  purple- 
brown,  but  the  most  usual  tints  are  flesh-red,  scarlet,  and  brick-red. 

*  Minerals  of  N.S.W. ,  1888,  p.  187. 


D  NOTES    ON    THE    OCCURRENCE    OF    STILBITE, 

Its  hardness,  tested  at  right  angles  to  its  cleavage,  is  above  3, 
calcite  being  easily  scratched  by  it.  Want  of  a  sufficiently 
delicate  balance  prevented  me  from  making  an  attempt  to  deter- 
mine its  specific  gravity.  The  crystals  are  subtranslucent  to 
opaque. 

Before  the  blow-pipe  the  mineral  gave  the  following  reactions  : 
it  exfoliated,  swelled  up  into  curiously  shaped  white  ramifications, 
fusing  easily  to  an  opaque  white  enamel.  Moistened  with  cobalt 
nitrate  and  strongly  ignited,  the  assay  gave  a  somewhat  dull  blue 
mass,  indicating  presence  of  alumina.  In  the  closed  tube  it  yield  eel 
water  readily.  The  powdered  mineral  was  decomposed  by  hot 
hydrochloric  acid,  leaving  after  evaporation  the  silica  as  a  some- 
what slimy  powder.  The  filtered  solution,  after  super-satuiation 
with  ammonia,  gave  with  oxalic  acid  a  distinct  white  precipitate 
of  oxalate  of  lime. 

I  next  examined  a  thin  cleavage  section  under  the  microscope. 
Its  appearance  by  central  illumination  when  magnified  50  diameters 
is  shown  in  PI.  I.,  fig.  1.  Bright  orange  bands,  more  or  less  recti- 
linear, and  of  varying  degrees  of  intensity  of  colour,  traverse  the 
section  of  the  mineral  parallel  to  each  other.  (The  greater  or  less 
vividness  of  the  tint,  no  doubt,  depends  on  the  thickness  of  the 
section  at  various  points,  as  well  as  on  the  mass  of  pigment 
injected.)  These  bands  are  crossed  at  right  angles  by  others 
having  either  the  same  colour  or  a  brownish  tint.  Between  these 
coloured  stripes  appear  colourless  or  faintly  yellow  portions,  while 
everywhere,  but  especially  in  the  deeply  coloured  regions,  groups 
of  black  dots  are  visible,  often  arranged  into  lines  running  parallel 
to  the  orange  bands  mentioned  above.  Irregularly  scattered  over 
the  colourless  or  faintly  yellow  parts  of  the  slide  are  small  patches 
of  a  bright  yellow  or  orange  tint,  encircling  a  greater  or  less 
number  of  small  black  particles.  At  the  point  marked  A  in  PI.  I., 
fig.  1,  these  crystallites  are  arranged  in  lines  concentric  with  the 
contour  of  the  surrounding  colour  patch.  Prof.  Zirkel,  in  his 
"  Beschaffenheit  der  Mineralien  und  Gesteine,"*  states  that  these 

*  Op.  ciL,  p.  167. 


BY    B.  G.   ENGELHARDT.  7 

black  spots  are  the  pigment  which  gives  to  stilbite  its  various 
shades  of  colour,  and  that  they  are  microscopic  crystals  of  either 
gothite,  limonite,  or  perhaps  red  hematite,  the  mineral  itself  being 
originally  colourless. 

PL  I.,  fig.  2,  represents  an  almost  colourless  section  of  stilbite, 
only  a  few  yellow  spots  being  visible,  but  the  orange  bands  are 
almost  totally  absent,  while  comparatively  few  of  the  black 
crystallites  are  present.  In  a  similar  specimen,  unfortunately 
lost  by  an  accident  in  mounting,  I  observed  some  beautiful 
dendrites  of  a  bright  sulphur-yellow,  and  as  perfectly  developed 
as  the  macroscopic  dendrites  of  manganese  oxide  so  often  found 
on  the  cleavage  planes  of  schists,  slates,  «tc. 

The  occurrence  of  these  dendritic  aggregates  tends  to  prove,  to 
my  mind,  conclusively,  that  the  pigment  of  red  stilbite  entered 
the  mineral  by  the  process  of  secondary  infiltration  of  a  solution 
of  hydrated  per-oxide  of  iron,  derived  from  the  hydration  of  the 
magnetite  in  the  surrounding  basalt.  The  solution  has  spread 
itself  between  the  thin  laniime  composing  the  prisms  of  stilbite, 
having  found  its  way  through  the  hair-like  cracks  (due  to  shrinkage 
caused  by  the  drying-up  of  the  fluid  in  which  the  zeolite  crystal- 
lized) which  can  be  seen  traversing  the  section  in  irregularly 
curved  lines. 

Between  crossed  Kicols  the  mineral  proved  to  be  anisotropic, 
suffering  four  extinctions  in  a  complete  revolution  of  the  section. 
It  is  also  very  slightly  pleochroic,  the  different  tints  darkening 
feebly  when  the  section  is  rotated  above  the  fixed  polariser. 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 

In  reference  to  Mr.  Engelhardt's  paper  Mr.  David  remarked  that 
the  occurrence  of  stilbite  at  Kiama  was  very  interesting.  He  too 
had  noticed  the  presence  of  the  same  mineral  with  remarkable 
persistence  in  the  lavas  which  are  interbedded  with  the  productive 
coal-measures  of  Raymond  Terrace,  Maitland,  and  Greta,  which 
lavas  are  probably  of  near  about  the  same  age  as  those  of  Kiama. 
Mr.  R.  L.  Jack,  F.G.S.,  the  Govt.  Geologist  of  Queensland,  has 
recorded  the  occurrence  of  a  similar  mineral  in  the  lavas  which 
there  underlie  the  Bowen  River  coal-field.  This  is  the  first  record 
however  of  the  occurrence  of  stilbite  at  Kiama. 

Mr.  Brazier  exhibited  a  lamp  of  native  pottery  from  the  Pelew 
Islands,  collected  by  Dr.  John  Rabe.  Also  on  behalf  of  Mr.  R.  C. 
Rossiter,  Corr.  Member,  of  Noumea,  New  Caledonia,  two  very  fine 
examples  of  Cyproza  tigris,  Linne,  having  the  dorsal  surface  of  a  fine 
bright  yellow  colour  with  very  few  spots,  the  margins  having  the 
spots  very  small  and  of  a  beautiful  cream  colour. 

Mr.  Froggatt  exhibited  two  specimens  of  a  grasshopper  (Fam. 
Gryllidce),  taken  at  Double  Bay,  which  frequents  the  flowers  of 
Eucalyptus  corymbosa  in  order  to  capture  the  common  honey  bees 
(Apis  mellificaj  visiting  the  blossoms. 

Also,  a  few  specimens  of  Hymenoptera  received  from  the  Rev. 
T.  Blackburn,  B.A.,  who  captured  them  on  the  snow  at  altitudes 
of  from  5,000  to  6,100  feet,  during  his  trip  to  the  Australian 
Alps,  Victoria,  last  November. 

Mr.  Musson  exhibited  on  behalf  of  Mr.  Moseley  of  Narrabri,  an 
example  of  the  freckled  duck,  Stietonetta  ncvvosa,  Gould,  obtained 
at  Narran,  near  Angledool,  not  far  from  the  Queensland  border, 
early  in  December  last. 

The  Rev.  R.  Collie  showed  an  interesting  collection  of  sponges 
from  Wollongong,  and  a  fine  specimen  of  Gorgonia  from  Thursday 
Island. 


WEDNESDAY,  25th  FEBRUARY,  1891, 


The  Hon.  James  Norton,  LL.D.,  M.L.C.,  in  the  Chair, 


Mr.  C.  J.  K.  Uhr  was  present  as  a  visitor. 


DONATIONS. 

Pamphlet  entitled    "The    Lejeuneae    of   Lindenberg's    Herba- 
rium."    By  W.  H.  Pearson.     From  the  Author. 

"Journal  of  the  Royal  Microscopical   Society,  1890."    Part  6 
(Dec).     From  the  Society. 

"  Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Beige  de  Microscopie,"  xvnme.   Annee, 
No.  2  (1890).     From  the  Society. 

"  The  Perak  Government    Gazette."     Vol.  iii.,  No.   35  (Dec, 
1890).     From  the  Government  Secretary. 

"  Report  upon  the  State  Forests  of  Victoria."     By  G.  Perrin, 
F.L.S.     From  the  Author. 

"  Hints  for  the  Preservation  of  Specimens  of  Natural  History  " 
(4th  edition).     From  the  Trustees  of  the  Australian  Museum. 

"Journal  and  Proceedings  of  the    Royal  Society  of  N.S.W." 
Vol.  XXIV.     Part  1  (1890).     From  the  Society. 

"  Proceedings  of  the  American  Academy  of  Arts  and  Sciences." 
Vol.  XXIV.  (1888-89).     From  the  Academy. 


10  DONATIONS. 

"  The  Journal  of  the  Cincinnati  Society  of  Natural  History." 
Vol.  xiii.,  No.  2  (1890).     From  the  Society. 

"  Bulletin  of  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  at  Harvard 
College,  U.S.A."  Vols.  I.,  II.  (wanting  No.  1),  III.  (wanting 
Nos.  1,  2,  5,  title-page  and  index),  IV.,  V.  (wanting  Nos.  2-5), 
VI.,  VII.  (No.  1  and  index),  VIII.,  IX.,  X.,  No.  1  (1863-82), 
and  XX,  Nos.  3  and  4  (1890);  "Annual  Report,  1889-90." 
From  the  Curator. 

"Johns  Hopkins  University  Circulars."  Vol.  X.,  No.  84 
(Dec,  1890).     From  the  University. 

"The  American  Naturalist."  Vol.  XXIV.,  No.  287  (Nov., 
1890).     From  the  Editors. 

Department  of  Agriculture,  U.S.A. — "Insect  Life."  Vol.  ill., 
No.  4  (1890).     From  the  Secretary  of  Agriculture. 

"  The  Canadian  Record  of  Science."  Vol.  IV.,  No.  4  (1890). 
From  the  Montreal  Nat.  Hist.  Society. 

"  The  Journal  of  Comp.  Medicine,  and  Veterinary  Archives." 
Vol.  XI.,  No.  12  (1890).     From  the  Editor. 

U.S.  National  Museum. — "Proceedings."  Vol.  XIII.,  Nos. 
821  and  825;  "Report,"  1887-88  (Ten  Parts,  pp.  3-84,  93-104, 
107-111,  225-386,  387-491,  493-529,  531-587,  589-596,  597-671, 
677-702).     From  the  Museum. 

"  L'Academie  Royale  de  Copenhague — Bulletin  pour  1890." 
No.  2  (Mars-Mai).     From  the  Society, 

"  Zoologischer  Anzeiger."  xiii.  Jahig.  No.  352  (Dec,  1890). 
xiv.  Jahrg.     No.  353  (Jan.,  1891).     From  the  Editor. 

"  Comptes  Rendns  des  Seances  de  l'Academie  des  Sciences  de 
Paris."  Tome  cxi.,  Nos.  21-23  (Nov.  and  Dec,  1890;.  From 
the  Academy. 


DONATIONS.  11 

Three  Government  Reports— [1]  "  Food-Fishes  of  Queensland" 
(1889);  [2]  "Pearl  and  Pearl-shell  Fisheries  of  Queensland" 
(1890);  [3]  "  Beche-de-Mer  and  Pearl-shell  Fisheries  of  N. 
Queensland ;"  also  two  Pamphlets,  "  Presidential  Address  to  the 
Queensland  Royal  Society"  (Nov.,  1890);  and  "Oysters  and 
Oyster-culture  in  Australasia."  By  W.  Saville-Kent,  FLS., 
F.Z.S.,  &c.     From  the  Author. 

"Victorian  Naturalist."  Vol.  XII.,  No.  10  (Feb.,  1891). 
From  the  Field  Naturalists'  Club  of  Victoria. 

"Feuille  des  Jeunes  Naturalistes — Catalogue  de  la  Bibliotheque." 
Fasc.  No.  10.     From  the  Editor. 

"The  Darwinian  Theory  of  the  Origin  of  Species."  By  F.  P. 
Pascoe,  F.L.S.     From  the  Author. 

"Transactions  of  the  Entomological  Society  of  London,  1890." 
Part  iv.  (Dec,  1890).     From  the  Society. 

"  Leitfaden  fiir  den  Unterricht  in  der  Zoologie."  Von  Dr.  Otto 
Vogel;  "Vorwort  zu  dem  Leitfaden;"  "Zoologische  Zeichentafeln;" 
"Leitfaden,  &c.,  in  derBotanik;"  "Die  Cryptogamen  Deutschlands." 
Von  Dr.  O.  Wiinsche  (1875) ;  "  Pflanzen-Tabellen."  Von  Dr.  A. 
B.  Frank  ;  "  Synopsis  der  Pflanzenkunde  "  (1847).  Von  Prof.  J. 
Leunis ;  "Die  Lebenden  Schnecken  und  Muscheln  der  Umgegend 
Berlins."     Von  J.  P.  E.  Stein.     From  Dr.  Katz. 

"Agricultural  Gazette  of  N.S.W."  Vol.  II.  Part  1  (Jan., 
1890).     From  the  Director  of  Agriculture. 

"Journal  of  Conchology."  Vol.  vi.,  No.  8  (Oct.,  1890).  From 
the  Conchological  Society  of  Great  Britain. 

"The  Minerals  of  New  South  Wales,  etc."  (1888).  By  A. 
Liversidge,  M.A.,  F.R.S. ;  "  Records  of  the  Geological  Survey  of 
N.S.W."     Vol.   II.     Part  ii.   (1890).      From  the  Department  of 

Mines. 


1 2  DONATIONS. 

"  Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Zoologique  cle  France."  Tome  XV., 
Nos.  8  and  9  (1890).     From  the  Society. 

"Bollettino  dei  Musei  di  Zoologia  ed  Anatoinia  Comparata  della 
R.  University  di  Torino."  Vol.  V.,  Nos.  74-93  (1890).  From 
the  Museum. 

"  Department  .of  Agriculture,  Brisbane — Bulletin."  Nos.  1-6 
(1890).     From  the  Under-Secretary  for  Agriculture. 

"  List  of  named  Insects  in  the  South  Australian  Museum, 
Adelaide."     Third  Series.     From  J.  G.  0.  Tepjier,  Esq.,  F.L.S. 


13 


NOTES  ON  A  SMALL  COLLECTION  OF  HYMENOP 
TERA  FROM  NARRABRI,  N.S.W. 

By  Walter  W.  Froggatt. 

I  beg  to  offer  the  following  brief  notes,  bearing  chiefly  on  the 
subject  of  geographical  range,  on  a  small  but  very  interesting 
collection  of  bees  and  wasps  obtained  in  the  neighbourhood  of 
Narrabri,  N.S.W.,  by  Mr.  C.  T.  Musson,  F.L.S,  and  forming 
part  of  the  general  collection  exhibited  by  him  at  the  meeting  of 
this  Society  in  December  last.  As  far  as  it  goes  it  is  a  typical 
collection  of  Australian  hymenoptera  ;  no  species  of  Formicidce  or 
Mutillidce  are  represented  in  it,  and  Mr.  Musson,  to  whom  I  am 
indebted  for  the  specimens,  tells  me  that  he  only  took  such  wasps 
and  bees  as  thrust  themselves  under  his  notice  while  collecting 
land  molluscs.  As  little  has  yet  been  done  in  systematically 
collecting  hymenoptera  in  this  part  of  New  South  Wales,  I  have 
no  doubt,  judging  from  the  specimens  now  before  me,  that  it 
would  prove  a  rich  field  to  anyone  devoting  his  time  to  this 
group. 

Altogether,  twenty-four  species  are  contained  in  Mr.  Musson's 
collection ;  but  several  of  them  are  not  in  sufficiently  good 
condition  for  determination. 

1.  Gen.  et  sp.  incert.  (Fam.  Ichneumonidce,  subfam.  Oryptmse). 
This  species  also  occurs  at  Adelaide,  S.A.,  in  Victoria,  and  at 

Sydney,  where  it  is  plentiful,  and  is  parasitic  on  the  larva  of 
a  common  garden  moth. 

2.  Gasteruption  sp.  (Fam.  Evannidw). 

A  species  which  also  occurs  about  Sydney. 

3.  Chrysis  sp.  (Fam.  Chrysididce). 

A  species  which  has  a  wide  range  from  Sydney  northwards. 
Several  species  are  parasitic  in  the  clay  nests  of  Alastor,  and 
other  genera  of  Eumenidte. 


14      ON  A  SMALL  COLLECTION  OF  HYMENOPTERA  FROM  NARRABRI, 

4.  Scolia  CORONATA,  Smith. 

A  large  black  wasp,  with  beautiful  deep  blue  wings  ;  one  of  our 
commonest  Sydney  insects,  but  with  an  extensive  range. 

5.  Pompilius  aurifrons,  Smith. 

Also  an  insect  with  a  very  wide  range,  having  been  recorded 
from  all  parts  of  Australia. 

6.  Pelopo:us  l^tus,  Smith. 

Two  specimens  of  this  handsome  slender-bodied  wasp  ;  unlike 
the  members  of  most  of  the  genera  of  the  family  S]ihegididce, 
it  constructs  clay  cells,  which  it  provisions  with  small  spiders. 
It  has  a  considerable  range  along  the  eastern  coast,  and  is  a 
common  insect  in  the  dry  western  or  central  lands. 

7.  Ammophila  suspiciosa,  Smith. 

This  species  has  a  range  from  South  Australia  to  Queensland, 
and  is  another  of  the  common  wasps  in  the  western  country, 
where,  in  company  with  the  last  species,  it  may  be  taken 
hovering  over  the  flowers  along  the  banks  of  creeks  and 
lakes. 

8.  Pison  spinol,e,  Shuckard  ;  and    | 

q    "D   ,T»T,^T^.^^   a     -4-u  c    (Farm  Larridce.) 

y.  P.  marginatus,  Smith.  J     v  ; 

Members  of  this  genus  construct  very  thin  clay  nests  of  an 

oval  or  elongate  form,  which  they  store  with  lepidopterous 

larva? ;  the  young  wasp  larva?,  when  full   grown,  form  strong 

cocoons  in  which  to  undergo  their  metamorphosis.      Both  the 

above  species  are  recorded  from  Adelaide  and  Sydney. 

10.  Odynerus  concolor,  Saussure.    ) 

11.  O.  bicolor,  Saussure.  j 

Both  species  range  from  North  Queensland  to  New  South 
Wales. 

12.  Disccelius  sp.? 

I  have  this  species  also  from  Adelaide  and  Sydney. 

13.  Polistes  humilis. 

This  large  red-coloured  paper  wasp  takes  the  place  of  our 
P.   variabilis,   Sauss.,  in  the  western  parts  of  New   South 


BY    WALTER    W.  FROGGATT.  15 

Wales,  and  is  much  dreaded  by  bushmen  on  account  of  its 
severe  sting.  It  is  most  likely  this  species  which  stung 
Major  Mitchell  ("Three  Expeditions,"  &c,  Vol.  I.,  p.  104), 
and  not  Abispa  australiana,  Mitch.,  as  generally  stated. 

Several  of  the  most  interesting  specimens  belong  to  the 
family  Thynnidce ;  and  though  so  many  species  of  this  large 
family  are  restricted  in  their  range,  no  part  of  Australia  is 
without  some  representative  of  this  fine  group.  Australia  is  the 
home  of  Thynnus,  the  only  other  parts  of  the  world  in  which 
the  species  are  found  being  several  of  the  islands  in  the  Pacific,  and 
the  western  coast  line  of  South  America.  According  to  Cresson's 
Catalogue  the  genus  does  not  extend  into  North  America. 

14.  Thynnus  sp.  (3  2s). 

The  females  being  wingless,  often  quite  unlike  in  markings,  and 
not  one-third  the  size  of,  the  males,  it  is  almost  an  impossi- 
bility to  determine  a  species  from  female  specimens  alone. 

15.  Thynnus  pulchralis,  Smith. 

This  beautiful  wasp  was  described  from  South  Australia,  and  is 
figured  in  Brenchley's  "Cruise  of  the  Curacoa"  (1873).  It 
has  also  been  recorded  from  Rockhampton  and  Port  Denison, 
Queensland,  and  the  northern  parts  of  New  South  Wales. 

16.  Thynnus  Brenchleyi,  Smith. 

This   distinctly   marked    insect    was  named    by    Smith    after 

Brenchley,  who   captured   it  at  Champion   Bay,  W.A.,  and 

presented  the  specimen  to  the  British  Museum.     This  species 

is  not  represented  in  any  of  the  collections  in  Australia,  and 

Mr.    Musson's   capture    of   it  on   the   opposite    side  of  the 

continent,  almost  in  the  same  latitude  (Champion  Bay  being 

about  100   miles   north  of  Narrabri),  is  a  very  remarkable 

discovery. 

While  referring  to  this  group  I  should  like  to  call  attention  to 

another  species  described  and  figured  in  Brenchley's  work,  under 

the  name  T.  conspicuus.  Smith,  from  the  N.W.  coast  of  Australia. 

A   number   of    specimens   of    this    species    are    in    the   Macleay 

Museum,   which    were   taken   by  me  feeding  on  the  flowers  of 


16      ON  A  SMALL  COLLECTION  OF  HYMENOPTERA  FROM  NARRABRI. 

Melaleuca  leucadendron  growing  on  the  banks  of  the  Fitzroy 
River,  near  Derby,  N.  W.  Australia.  Previous  to  this,  Smith 
(Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  London,  1868,  p.  233)  had  described  a  very 
different  species  from  South  Australia  under  the  same  specific 
name.  Both  specimens  are  in  the  British  Museum,  so  that  it  is 
hard  to  understand  why  the  error  has  not  been  rectified  before. 

I  should  propose  that  the  northern  species,  which  evidently  has 
no  right  to  the  specific  name  cons2ncuus,  should  be  re-named 
Smithii. 

17.  Xylocopa  muscaria,  Smith. 

Four  specimens  (£)  of  the  common  carpenter-bee,  which  con- 
structs nests  in  the  flower  stalks  of  the  grass-trees  {Xantlior- 
rhcea) ;  found  all  over  New  South  Wales. 

18.  Xylocopa  ^estuans,  Latr. 

Four  specimens  of  this  larger  species,  which  ranges  into  North 
Queensland. 

19.  Crocisa  nitidula,  Fabr. 

This  handsome  spotted  bee  has  a  wide  lange,  from  South 
Australia  to  North  Queensland. 

20.  Anthopora  pulchra. 

Three  specimens  of  this  fine  blue-banded  bee,  which  is  found 
over  the  greater  part  of  Australia. 

21-23.  Megachile  spp. 

Five  specimens  of  leaf-cutting  bees,  referable  to  three  species, 
all  of  which  are  also  to  be  found  about  Sydney. 


17 


DESCRIPTION  OF  A  NEW  SPECIES  OF  TORTRIClDiE. 

By  J.  Hartley  Durrant. 

(Communicated  by  A.  Sidney  Ollij}.) 

tortricim:. 

GRAPHOLITHINJE. 

PAL^OBIA,  Meyr. 
Pal^obia  longestriata,  sp.nov. 

Antennce  pale  cinereous. 

Palpi  ochreous-brown,  paler  above. 

Head  and  thorax  ochreous-brown. 

Forewings  elongate,  costa  slightly  arched  at  base,  apical  margin 
sinuate,  apex  hardly  produced  :  ochreous-brown,  above  the 
fold  a  longitudinal  white  line  extending  from  the  base, 
becoming  abruptly  attenuated  before  attaining  a  somewhat 
triangular  white  spot,  situated  above  the  fold  near  the  anal 
angle.  This  spot  is  convex  towards  the  base  of  the  wing,  and 
very  slightly  concave  externally ;  above  and  before  the 
triangular  spot  is  a  small  round  white  spot ;  between  this 
spot  and  the  longitudinal  line  the  ground-colour  is  slightly 
darker,  the  basal  two-thirds  of  the  wing  below  the  costa  are 
slightly  clouded  with  whitish,  the  veins  themselves  being 
indicated  by  the  brownish  ground-colour  ;  two  distinct  brown 
spots,  separated  by  the  paler  colour,  are  situated  on  the  apical 
third  of  the  costa,  the  outer  of  which  is  continued  across  the 
wing  as  an  indistinct  fascia,  becoming  most  noticeable  on  the 
outer  side  of  the  triangular  spot ;  this  darker  colouring  is 
margined  by  a  very  indistinct  paler  fascia  ;  cilia  slightly  paler 
than  the  ground-colour  with  a  darker  line  running  through 
them  near  their  base. 
2 


18  DESCRIPTION    OF    A   NEW    SPECIES    OF    TORTRICIDiE. 

Hinclwings     cinereous,     slightly     darker     externally ;      cilia 
cinereous,  faintly  tinged  with  ochreous  and  having  a  darker 
line  running  through  them  near  their  base. 
Abdomen  greyish-fuscous  ;  anal  tuft  paler. 
Legs  pale  greyish-fuscous. 
Exp.  al.t  15-17  mm. 
Hab :  Tumut  (C.  W.  Peel),  Mt.  Kosciusko,  N.S.  Wales,  6000ft., 

March,  1889  (R.  Helms,  Aust.  Mus.). 
Type,  <-££,  Mus.  Walsingham. 

This  species  agrees  in  neuration  and  structure  with  the  typical 
forms,  but  can  hardly  be  said  to  have  the  apex  of  the  forewings 
produced.     It  is  a  very  distinct  species. 


19 


ON  THE  ANATOMY  OF  SOME   TASMANIAN   SNAILS. 
By  C.  Hedley,  F.L.S.,  Corr.  Mem. 

(Plates  ii.  and  in.) 

The  material  for  this  paper  was  chiefly  collected  by  myself 
during  a  short  holiday  excursion  to  the  Island  of  Tasmania.  To 
Mr.  W.  F.  Petterd,  of  Launceston,  the  well-known  conchologist, 
and  to  Mr.  W.  R.  Dyer,  of  Scottsdale,  I  am  under  great  obligations; 
without  the  kind  assistance  of  these  gentlemen  my  scientific  booty 
would  have  been  but  small. 

As  far  as  the  shells  are  concerned,  the  molluscan  fauna  of 
Tasmania  has  been  closely  studied,  but  information  regarding 
structural  details  of  the  animals  is  much  needed.  For  until  we 
have  acquired  this  knowledge,  no  classification  worthy  of  the 
name  can  be  constructed.  Full  particulars  of  the  shells  whose 
soft  parts  I  am  about  to  describe  will  be  found  in  the  Monographs 
of  Dr.  Cox,  Messrs.  Legrand  and  Petterd,  and  further  notices  in 
the  writings  of  Reeve,  Semper,  Quoy  and  Gaimard,  Tenison- 
Woods,  Tryon,  Pilsbry,  &c.  It  will  therefore  be  unnecessary  for 
me  to  add  bibliographical  references  in  dealing  with  these  well- 
known  species. 

Bulimus  dufresni,  Leach. 

This  handsome  shell  has  attracted  the  notice  of  every  scientific 
visitor  to  the  island.  The  figure  of  the  animal  in  the  "  Voyage 
of  the  Astrolabe,"  Vol.  n,  pi.  x.,  fig.  1,  is  unsatisfactory,  showing 
as  it  does  a  well-marked  pedal  groove  where  none  exists.  I  have 
therefore  re-figured  it  in  the  accompanying  plate.  From  a 
specimen  of  the  small  variety  common  round  Hobart  I  drew  up 


20  ON    THE    ANATOMY    OF    SOME    TASMANIAN    SNAILS, 

the  following  description  : — Animal  35  mm.  in  total  length  and, 
measured  a  little  posterior  to  the  tentacles,  6  mm.  in  breadth,  and 
the  same  in   height;    colour   slate,  sometimes   with   a  yellowish 
tinge  on  the  body,  darkening  into  black  on  the  tentacles,  greyish- 
yellow  on  the  sole   of   the  foot  and  on   the  mantle-collar  ;    the 
muzzle  and  anterior  dorsal  area  (in  short,  4that  space  enclosed  by 
the  two  conspicuous  furrows  which  run  back  from  the  lips  to  the 
mantle,  which  I  will  call  the  facial  area)  are  ornamented  by  long 
narrow  tubercles,  arranged  in  about  a  dozen  longitudinal  rows, 
the  sides  and   tail   are  divided   into  irregular  polygonal  spaces, 
which  are  partially   subdivided  and   finely  granulated  ;    the  tail 
tapers  slightly,    is  rounded  posteriorly,   and  never  keeled ;    the 
tentacles  are  10  mm.  long,  tapering  gradually,  finely  granulated, 
the  bases  3  mm.  apart,  the  terminal  bulb  is  asymmetrical,  being 
only  developed  on  the  under  side  ;  the  genital  orifice  appears  just 
beneath  the  groove  bounding  the  facial  area,  5  mm.  behind  the 
risrht  oculiferous  tentacle.     Habits  bold  and  active  ;  the  tail  is  the 
first  portion  to  emerge  from  the  mantle  and  the  last  to  disappear 
within  it ;  when  the  animal  is  in  motion  the  axis  of  the  shell  is 
oblique  to  that  of  the  body,  the  initial  whorl  being  carried  on  the 
right  side  of  the  tail,  which  projects  2  or  3  mm.  beyond  it,  the 
penultimate  whorl  resting  on  a  wide,  smooth,  saddle-like  space.     It 
haunts  the  under  side  of  logs,  stones,  fallen  tree-ferns,  &c,  and 
ranges  over  the  whole  island.      Another  animal,  from  the  Kinga- 
rooma  district,   measured,   total  length  46  mm.,  height  12  mm., 
length  of  tentacles   15  mm.      The  egg  has  been   described    and 
figured  by  Tenison- Woods  (P.L.S.N.S.W.,  Vol.  m.,  p.  91,  pL  vii., 
fig.  la.).     Specimens  of  the  egg  of  this  species,  which  I  received 
from   Mr.   Petterd,    do   not    quite   accord  with    the  observation 
quoted ;  they  are   regularly  oval,    not  so   rounded   as  the  figure, 
pure  white,  shining,  minutely  granular,  the  granulations  viewed 
through   a   lens   recalling  those    on    an   emu's   egg ;    major  axis, 
11mm.;  minor   axis,  8  mm.     Mr.   Dyer  tells   me  that   they   are 


BY    C.   HEDLEY.  21 

deposited  in  the  ground  under  a  log  during  October  and  November. 
The  radula  and  genitalia  have  been  figured  by  Semper,  who 
incorrectly  locates  the  species  in  the  Sandwich  Islands  (Reis.  im 
Philip.  Vol.  in.,  p.  123,  pi.  xii.,  figs.  23,  24,  25,  and  pi.  xvi.,  fig.  7). 
The  jaw  I  find  to  be  boomerang-shaped,  smooth,  arcuate,  ends 
rounded,  with  no  median  projection. 

Bulimus  tasmanicus,  Pfeiffer. 

This  species  is  arboreal  in  its  habits,  and  confined  to  a  narrow 
belt  of  coast  country.  I  was  unable  to  visit  its  haunts  and  view 
the  creature  alive.  Mr.  Petterd  kindly  presented  me  with  some 
alcohol  specimens,  from  Maria  Island,  for  dissection.  He  informs 
me  that  the  animal  is  greenish-grey  in  colour,  with  flat,  thin, 
pointed  tail.  This  species,  as  might  be  inferred  from  the 
resemblance  of  the  shells,  closely  approaches  B.  mastersi,  Cox, 
(P.R.S.Q.,  Yol.  vi.,  p.  250,  pi.  xiv.)  in  its  dentition.  The  jaw  is 
thin,  membranous,  semitransparent,  light  horn-colour,  crossed 
obliquely  on  each  side  by  about  sixteen  delicate  folded  ribs 
denticulating  both  margins  ;  these  ribs  run  obliquely  towards  the 
median  line  of  the  jaw,  and,  meeting  in  the  centre,  form  a  median 
triangular  space.  The  radula  is  composed  of  130  rows  of 
84-5-1-5-84;  of  these  the  rachidian  presents  a  single,  ovate, 
lanceolate  cusp,  whose  extremity  reaches  the  margin  of  the  basal 
plate ;  this  is  flanked  by  five  laterals  having  the  distal  posterior 
angle  of  the  basal  plate  briefly  alate  and  a  small  cusp  developed 
upon  the  outer  base  of  the  main  cusp,  whose  stout  ovate  blade 
just  projects  over  the  base  of  attachment ;  seven  rows  from  the 
centre  the  marginal  type  appears,  the  main  cusp  becoming 
bicuspidate  ;  on  approaching  the  edge  of  the  ribbon  the  teeth  grow 
smaller,  and  assume  that  slender,  sinuous  aspect  so  characteristic 
of  extreme  marginals.  The  distinguishing  features  of  the  genitalia 
are  : — penis-sac  long  and  slender,  produced  into  an  extremely  long 
flagellum,  which  is  coiled  up  at  the  tip,  and  apparently  without  a 


22  ON    THE    ANATOMY    OF    SOME    TASMANIAN    SNAILS, 

retractor  muscle ;  prostate  aud  vagina  spirally  twisted,  the 
former  connected  by  a  short  but  much  convoluted  hermaphrodite 
duct  with  the  ovotestis,  a  compact  bilobed  body. 


Anoglypta  launcestonensis,  Reeve. 

This  species  is  confined  to  a  mountainous  district  in  the  N.E. 
of  the  island.  I  collected  it  among  the  fern-tree  gullies  on  Mr. 
Dyer's  estate,  where  it  was  plentiful.  The  animal  was  not  very 
different  in  form  from  B.  dufresni,  and  measured  (total  length) 
47  mm. ;  tentacles  10  mm.  ;  colour  dark  chestnut  shaded  to  choco- 
late on  the  back,  tentacles  shaded  to  black  on  the  tips.  Habits 
very  shy  and  timid,  crawling  very  slowly;  it  frequents  damp  places 
under  logs  and  decaying  stems  of  tree-ferns.  The  fire  and  axe  of 
civilisation  threaten  to  diminish  the  already  narrow  range  of  this 
splendid  and  interesting  species  ;  but  its  haunts  are  so  rugged  and 
remote  that  I  do  not  fear  its  extinction.  Mr.  Dyer  says  that  an 
egg  resembling,  though  different  from,  that  of  B.  dufresni  is  laid  by 
this  mollusc  at  similar  seasons  and  in  similar  localities.  The  jaw 
is  rather  straight  and  broad,  irregularly  slightly  dentate  on  the 
cutting  margin,  smooth  on  the  convex  margin,  closely  and  finely 
transversely  striate.  The  teeth  are  arranged  in  160  rows  of 
40-6-1-6-40  ;  the  rachidian  cusp  is  single,  straight,  slender,  smaller 
than  the  laterals,  the  cutting  point  reaching  four-fifths  of  the 
length  of  the  widely  expanded  basal  plate  ;  the  laterals  possess  a 
single  stout  cusp  with  a  rounded  cutting  point  overlapping  the 
posterior  margin  of  the  basal  plate,  whose  distal  margin  is  alate  ; 
from  these  the  marginals  differ  in  the  longer  more  inclined  cusp, 
the  extreme  marginals  having  their  cusps  low  and  irregularly 
notched.  The  genitalia  are  characterised  by  a  long,  flattened, 
twisted  penis-sac,  retractor  muscle  inserted  near  apex,  and  the 
spermatheca  on  a  long  slender  duct. 


BY    C.   HEDLEY.  23 

Rhytida  lampra,  Pfeiffer. 

This  carnivorous  mollusc  is  generally  distributed  throughout 
Tasmania.  Mr.  Petterd  relates  its  cannibal  propensities  as 
similar  to  those  of  its  Queensland  relative  (P.R.S.Q.,  Vol.  v., 
p.  152).  The  specimen  I  examined  measured,  when  expanded, 
40  mm.  from  head  to  tail ;  but  I  am  informed  that  the  species  in 
other  localities  attains  larger  dimensions.  Colour,  orange-brown 
on  the  edge  of  the  foot,  passing  through  chestnut-brown  to  black 
upon  the  head  and  tentacles,  mantle-collar  orange-brown.  Down 
the  centre  of  the  back  runs  a  small  groove  from  the  shell  to 
between  the  tentacles,  and  on  either  side  of  this  the  facial  area  is 
ornamented  by  three  longitudinal  rows  of  small  round  tubercles  ; 
tail  and  sides  divided  into  irregular  polygonal  spaces  which  are 
partially  sub-divided  and  finely  granulated.  The  tail  is  extremely 
short,  hardly  passing  the  shell,  while  the  anterior  portion  of  the 
body,  as  in  other  Agnatha,  is  capable  of  a  leech-like  extension, 
a  provision  for  enabling  the  creature  to  stretch  itself  into  the 
remoter  whorls  of  a  shell  whose  inhabitant  it  may  be  engaged  in 
devouring.  Habits  bold  and  active  ;  crawls  more  rapidly  than 
the  HelicidcB  usually  do.  The  radula  is  constructed  of  75  rows 
of  40-0-40,  is  strap-shaped,  measuring  15  mm.  in  length  and  4  in 
breadth,  each  half-row  curving  from  the  margin  and  meeting  its 
fellow  at  an  acute  angle  in  the  centre  of  the  ribbon ;  the 
rachidian  (as  is  usual  in  the  genus)  has  been  lost,  the  two  inner- 
most laterals  are  usually  rudimentary,  but  the  third  attains  its 
full  development,  having  a  basal  plate  the  shape  of  the  sole  of  a 
man's  foot  and  a  straight  slender  cusp  in  the  same  plane,  the 
whole  tooth  resembling  a  clasp  knife  with  the  blade  open  ;  the 
teeth  continue  of  the  same  size  to  the  margin,  the  pattern  differing 
slightly  by  the  basal  plate  of  the  remotest  becoming  triangular. 
In  the  genitalia  the  penis-sac  is  slender;  a  sessile  globose  sperma- 
theca  is  inserted  upon  a  short  pyriform  vagina. 


24  ON    THE    ANATOMY    OF    SOME    TASMANIAN    SNAILS, 

Helicarion  verreauxi,  Pfeiffer. 

This  is  the  southernmost  member  of  its  genus,  the  "enfant 
perdu"  of  its  race.  The  other  species  that  have  been  associated 
with  it,  fumosa,  Tenison-Woods,  and  milligani,  Pfeiffer,  may  be 
referred  to  Paryphanta  until  their  position  be  authoritatively- 
decided  by  scalpel  and  microscope.  Like  B.  dufresni  and  R. 
lampra,  this  species  ranges  over  the  entire  island,  hiding  in  dry 
weather  under  logs  and  stones.  The  animal  measures  37  mm.  in 
total  length,  resembles  in  form  the  continental  species,  //.  robustus, 
Gould,  and  H.  hyalinus,  Pfr.,  but  differs  in  colour,  the  entire 
body  being  coal  black  with  the  exception  of  the  tail,  whose 
extremity  is  lemon-yellow.  The  jnw  is  arcuate,  with  central 
projection,  smooth,  ends  rounded.  The  radula  consists  of  130 
rows  of  70-17-1-17-70  ;  the  rachidian  is  broadly  reflected  and 
overlaps  the  basal  plate  laterally  for  more  than  half  its  length, 
then  is  divided  into  a  slender  lanceolate  median  cusp  exceeding  in 
length  the  basal  plate  and  two  small  accessory  cusps  with  well 
developed  cutting  edges ;  the  laterals  have  the  outer  posterior 
margin  of  the  basal  plate  very  short  and  square,  the  main  cusp  is 
slightly  larger  than  that  of  the  rachidian  and  bears  at  its  outer 
base  a  well  developed  accessory  cusp,  which  increases  as  the  teeth 
retreat ;  the  marginals  possess  slender  inclined  knife-like  cusps 
which  become  bind  as  the  border  of  the  ribbon  is  approached. 
As  regards  the  genitalia,  the  penis-sac  is  long  and  slender,  twisted 
into  a  figure  of  eight,  and  terminating  in  a  round  knob,  retractor 
muscle  inserted  on  the  distal  curve  of  the  8  ;  vas  deferens  con- 
torted on  its  departure  from  the  prostate ;  spermatheca  large, 
slightly  dilated,  acuminate  above,  connected  with  the  genital 
system  by  a  short  wide  duct. 

Cystopelta  petterdi,  Tate. 

A  figure  and  description  of  this  mollusc  will  be  found  in  the 
preceding  volume  of  these  Proceedings  (PI.  i.,  p.  44).     I  took  the 


BY    C.   HEDLEY.  25 

opportunity  of  comparing  Tasmanian  specimens  with  those 
collected  by  Mr.  Helms  on  Mt.  Kosciusko,  also  with  some  taken 
by  Mr.  Musson  at  Eallarat,  and  I  find  no  differences  of  specific 
importance  between  them.  In  Tasmania  I  gathered  the  species 
under  the  guidance  of  the  gentleman  whose  name  it  bears,  from 
the  original  locality,  Cataract  Hill,  near  Launceston.  I  also 
found  it  at  Dennison  Gorge  and  on  Mr.  Dyer's  estate,  Scottsdale. 
In  the  first  locality  the  animals  lived  under  logs,  upon  a  dry, 
scantily-timbered  hillside  ;  in  the  two  latter  places  they  inhabited 
damp  fern-tree  gullies.  As  the  consequence,  probably,  of  more 
favourable  surroundings,  those  from  the  moist  situations  were 
larger  in  size  and  lighter  in  colour  than  the  type  variety.  Mr. 
Petterd  pointed  out  that  its  habits  were  gregarious.  A  dozen 
likely  pieces  of  fallen  timber  might  be  searched  without  result, 
yet  the  next  might  conceal  a  score  of  these  slugs.  The  larger 
form  was  pale  greenish-yellow  spotted  with  black  ;  the  black  spots 
on  the  shield  are  most  irregular  in  size  and  distribution.  The 
figure  I  published  from  a  spirit  specimen  gives  no  idea  of  the 
animal  in  life,  therefore  I  append  a  second  sketch  taken  from  a 
living  individual  on  the  spot. 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES. 
Plate  ii. 

R.,  Rachidian  tooth;  o.t.,  ovotestis  ;  h.d.,  hermaphrodite  duct;  ov. 
oviduct;  c.o.,  common  orifice;  sp.,  spermatheca  ;  p.,  penis-sac;  r.m.p. 
retractor  muscle  of  penis. 

Fig.     1.  Jaw  of  Bulimus  dufresni.     Magnified. 

Fig.     2.  Jaw  of  Bulimus  tasma,7iicus.     Magnified. 

Fig.     3.  Central  portion  of  radula  of  ditto.     Magnified. 

Fig.     4.  Genital  system  of  ditto. 

Fig.     5.  Jaw  of  Anoglypia  lauucestonensis.     Magnified. 


26  ON    THE    ANATOMY    OF    SOME    TASMANIAN    SNAILS 

Plate  ii.  (continued). 

Fig.  6.  Central  portion  of  radula  of  ditto.     Magnified. 

Fig.  7.  Genital  system  of  ditto. 

Fig.  8.  Radula  of  Rhytida  lampra.     Magnified. 

Fig.  9.  Genital  system  of  ditto. 

Fig.  10.  Jaw  of  Helicarion  verreauxi.     Magnified. 

Fig.  11.  Central  portion  of  radula  of  ditto.     Magnified. 

Fig.  12.  Genital  system  of  ditto. 

Plate  hi. 

Fig.  1.  Animal  of  B.  dufresni. 

Fig.  2.  Animal  of  A.  launcestonensis. 

Fig.  3.  Animal  of  It.  lampra. 

Fig.  4.  Animal  of  H.  verreauxi. 

Fig.  5.  Animal  of  G.  petterdi. 


27 


STRAY  NOTES  ON  LEPIDOPTERA. 

By  A.  Sidney  Olliff, 
Government   Entomologist,  New  South  Wales. 

No.  2. 

A  short  time  ago,  Mr.  Lionel  de  Niceville,  the  author  of  that 
admirable  handbook  "  The  Butterflies  of  India,  Burmah,  and 
Ceylon,"  in  offering  some  friendly  criticism  of  my  small  pamphlet 
on  Australian  Butterflies,*  published  by  the  Natural  History 
Association  (now  the  the  Field  Naturalists'  Society)  of  New 
South  Wales,  and  originally  written  for  a  weekly  newspaper, 
suggested  to  me  that  the  butterfly  which,  for  many  years  past, 
has  been  known  in  our  local  collections  as  Libythea  myrrha, 
Godart,  was  in  reality  quite  distinct  from  that  species.  Mr.  de 
Niceville,  I  believe,  arrived  at  this  conclusion  from  a  comparison 
of  the  rough  but  characteristic  figure  of  the  Australian  insect, 
contained  in  the  pamphlet  in  question,  with  typical  specimens  of 
L.  myrrha  ;  and  I  must  confess  that  the  suggestion  did  not  cause 
me  much  surprise,  as  I  had  noticed  some  months  previously,  when 
examining  a  series  of  Libythecv  from  New  Guinea,  that  certain 
specimens  from  Port  Moresby,  although  agreeing  in  every  particular 
with  the  Australian  species,  exhibited  certain  marked  differences 
from  the  true  L.  myrrha.  The  genus  Libythea  appears  to  have 
been  first  recorded  as  belonging  to  the  Australian  fauna  by  Sir 
William  Macleay,  who  called  attention  to  the  presence  of  a  species 
of  the  genus  (referring  to  the  insect  as  Libythea  myrrha)  in  a 
small  collection  of  Cape  York  lepidoptera  exhibited  at  a  meeting 
of  the  Entomological  Society  of  New  South  Wales  in  September, 

*  "Australian  Butterflies  :  a  Brief  Account  of  the  Native  Families,  &c." 
Sydney,  1889. 


28  STRAY    NOTES    ON    LEPIDOPTERA, 

1866.*  Mr.  G.  Masters!  included  the  species  in  his  Catalogue  of 
Butterflies,  on  the  authority  of  specimens  obtained  at  Somerset  by- 
Mr.  J.  A.  Thorpe,  the  taxidermist  of  the  Australian  Museum, 
during  a  collecting  trip  which  he  made  to  Cape  York  in  the  year 
1867-68,  and  others  subsequently  collected  in  the  same  locality  by 
Mr.  Darnel.  The  remains  of  one  of  the  former  specimens  is  in  my 
possession  owing  to  the  kindness  of  Mr.  Masters,  and  I  am  in  a 
position  to  definitely  state  that  the  insect  which  has  passed  for 
many  years  in  Australia  as  Libythea  myrrha  is  quite  distinct 
from  that  species,  and  is  identical  with  the  insect  here  descril  ed 
under  the  name  Libythea  Nicevillei. 

It  is  hardly  a  matter  of  surprise  that,  once  made,  the  mistake 
as  to  the  identity  of  our  butterfly  should  hitherto  have  escaped 
detection,  as  the  species  is  apparently  very  rare,  only  one  or  two 
specimens  existing  in  collections.  As  some  doubts  have  been 
raised  as  to  the  claims  of  the  genus  Libythea  to  be  regarded  as 
indigenous  in  Australia,  it  may  be  well  to  state  that  there  can  be 
no  question  as  to  the  authenticity  of  the  specimens  obtained  by 
the  collectors  mentioned  above. 

LEMONIID^E. 

LIBYTH.EIN.E. 

Libythea  Nicevillei,  sp.n. 

Head,  palpi,  antennae,  and  body  dark  brown.  Wings  above 
dull  smoky-brown,  darker  outwardly.  Forewing  inclining  to  dull 
ochreous-yellow  at  base  and  on  basal  two-thirds  of  inner  margin, 
with  the  following  bluish-white  markings : — an  elongated  spot 
near  costa  about  two-thirds  from  the  base,  divided  by  a  dark  vein, 
an  ovate  spot  at  end  of  discoidal  cell,  an  elongate  spot  between 
veins  4  and  6,  divided  by  vein  5,  and  a  much  larger  rounded  spot 
between  veins  2  and  4,  beginning  at  a  point  just  beyond  the  cell 

*Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.  Wales,  I.  p.  lxi. 
t  "  Catalogue  of    the   described    Diurnal    Lepidoptera    of    Australia." 
Sydney,  1873. 


BY   A.  SIDNEY    OLLIFF.  29 

and  extending  towards  the  hind  margin  ;  the  latter  spot  divided  by 
vein  3  at  about  its  anterior  fourth.  Hindwing  inclining  to  dull 
ochreous-yellow  at  the  base,  hind  margin  darker,  with  a  broad 
oblique  ochreous-yellow  discal  band  or  fascia,  which  extends 
posteriorly  from  vein  7  ;  this  band  is  of  uniform  width  through- 
out, clearly  defined  in  front,  and  gradually  effaced  behind.  Under- 
side : — Much  paler  in  colour  than  above.  Forewing  beyond  the 
anterior  markings  (which  correspond  with  those  of  the  upper  side) 
and  on  the  inner  margin  silvery-grey,  the  apical  portion  mottled  with 
small  irregular  transverse  brown  lines ;  the  discoidal  cell  occupied 
by  a  rather  bright  ochreous-yellow  patch,  which  is  somewhat 
suffused  on  the  costal  margin.  Hindwing  silvery-grey,  indistinctly 
irrorated  with  purplish,  and  closely  striated  with  brown  ;  with 
indications  of  two  indistinct  lighter  oblique  bands  extending  from 
the  costal  and  hind  margins  respectively  to  the  inner  margin  near 
the  base.     Cilia  ochreous-brown.     Expanse  53-55  mm. 

Somerset,  Cape  York,  N.  Australia  ;  and  Port  Moresby,  British 
New  Guinea. 

As  stated  before,  this  species  of  Libythea  has  been  confused  with 
a  species  (L.  myrrha,  Godart),  with  which  it  has  little  in  common, 
ever  since  the  first  specimens  from  Cape  York  were  recorded;  but  it 
will  be  evident  upon  even  the  most  cursory  comparison  of  the  Aus- 
tralian form  and  L.  myrrha  that  the  species  are  abundantly  distinct. 
In  the  Australian  insect  the  fore  wings  are  comparatively  broader, 
with  the  hind  margins  less  distinctly  angulated  below  the  apex, 
and  the  disk  ornamented  with  whitish  markings.  The  charac- 
teristic transverse  streak  in  the  cell  of  the  forewing  of  L.  myrrha 
is  replaced  in  our  species  by  a  single  rounded  spot,  in  which 
respect  it  resembles  the  Indian  L.  rohini,  Marshall,*  described 
from  the  Khasi  Hills.  The  latter  species,  indeed,  would  appear 
to  be  its  nearest  ally,  although  sufficiently  distinguished  by  having 
the  markings  on  the  hindwing  white  like  those  of  the  forewing, 
and  by  the  presence  of  additional  spots  near  the  costa  of  the 
former. 


*  Journ.  A.  S.  Bengal,  xlix.,  p.  248  (1880),  and  de  Niceville,  "Butterflies 
of  India,  &c,"  II.,  p.  303,  pi.  24,  fig.  114,  ?  (1886  . 


30  STRAY    NOTES    ON    LEPIDOPTERA. 

HESPERIID^E. 
Euschemon  RafflesijE,  Macleay. 

E.  albo-omatuS)  var.nov. 

A  striking  modification  of  this  remarkable  Hesperid  was  obtained 
at  Dunoon,  Richmond  River,  during  the  month  of  April  by  Mr. 
R.  Helms,  in  which  the  fore  and  hindwings  are  intense  blue-black 
in  colour,  and  the  markings  silvery-white  instead  of  bright  yellow 
as  in  the  typical  form.  Except  for  the  presence  of  a  larger  number 
of  blue  scales  near  the  hind  margin  of  the  forewing  (in  the  shape 
of  a  gradually  narrowing  band)  and  on  the  underside,  the  type  and 
the  modification  here  recorded  agree  marking  for  marking.  An 
examination  of  some  thirty  specimens  of  Euschemon  Rafflesice, 
from  various  localities,  has  revealed  little  or  no  tendency  to  vary 
in  colour  or  marking,  a  fact  which  increases  the  interest  attaching 
to  the  Dunoon  specimen. 


31 


NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  ABORIGINAL  STONE 
WEAPONS  AND  IMPLEMENTS. 

By  R.  Etheridge,  Jun.,  &c. 

(Paleontologist  to  the  Australian  Museum,  and  Geological 
Survey  of  New  South  Wales.) 

(Plates  iv. -viii.) 

I  am  able  to  continue*  investigations  in  this  interesting  subject 
through  the  kindness  of  several  collectors,  notably  Sir  W.  Macleay, 
Dr.  J.  C.  Cox,  and  Mr.  C.  W.  de  Vis,  M.A.,  Curator  of  the  Queens- 
land Museum.  To  the  first  I  am  indebted  for  the  loan  of  nine 
stone  weapons  from  "  various  parts  of  N.  S.  Wales,"  which  were 
exhibited  at  this  Society's  Meeting  on  October  31st,  1883,  by 
Mr.  J.  G.  Griffin,  C.E.f;  to  the  second  for  a  series  of  N.  S. 
Wales  tomahawks  in  different  stages  of  preparation ;  and  to  Mr. 
De  Yis  for  a  valuable  selection  of  implements  from  the  Queens- 
land Museum,  Brisbane.  There  will  also  be  found  descriptions  of 
the  remainder  of  Mr.  W.  W.  Froggatt's  specimens  from  North- 
west Australia  ;  some  from  the  Mining  and  Geological  Museum, 
and  a  few  others  from  different  sources,  which  will  be  suitably 
acknowledged  later  on.  I  am  indebted  to  my  colleague  Mr.  T 
W.  Edgeworth  David  for  assistance  in  determining  the  minera- 
logical  composition  of  the  rocks  used  for  the  weapons,  but  as 
microscopic  sections  could  not  be  made,  the  determinations  are 
tentative  only. 

x. — Knives. 

(PI.  v,  fig.  1  ;  PI.  vi,  fig.  1  ;  PI.  vii,  fig.  1.) 
Mr.  De  Vis  has   forwarded  to  me  five  knives,   three  of  the 
general  type  of  those   I   lately   described   as  used  in  the   Mika 
operation,  J  but  differing  in  an  important  particular  ;  one  of  a 

*  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1890,  v.  (2),  Pt.  2,  pp.  251,  289,  and  367. 
i  Ibid.  1884,  viii,  p.  442. 
X  Loc.  cit.  1890,  pp.  251,  289. 


32       AUSTRALIAN  ABORIGINAL  STONE  WEAPONS  AND  IMPLEMENTS, 

flesh-coloured  quartzite  resembling  therein  some  spear-heads  to  be 
noticed  later  on  ;  and  another  made  of  glass  (PI.  VI.,  fig.  1).  Four 
of  the  knives  are  mounted,  and  the  fifth  has  been,  as  evinced  by 
the  still  adherent  gum  at  the  butt.  Two  of  the  mounted,  and  the 
unmounted  knife  from  "  Northern  Queensland,"  are  flaked  from 
an  impure,  streaky,  flint-like  quartz,  but  which  does  not  produce 
so  fine  and  cutting  an  edge  as  those  formerly  described.  They 
are,  with  one  exception,  of  a  rather  different  type  to  the  latter.  It 
will  be  remembered  that  one  of  those  in  the  Australian  Museum 
was  described  as  more  scalpriform  than  the  others,  thicker  along 
the  back  than  at  the  cutting  edge,  the  surface  gradually  sloping 
off  from  the  former  to  the  latter,  without  any  angularity.  The 
three  knives  in  question  are  of  this  character,  altogether  stronger 
and  thicker  than  the  Mulligan  River  Alika-knife.  Evans  figures! 
such  a  knife  in  the  Christy  Collection  from  Queensland,  with  a 
"  thick  somewhat  rounded  back,  not  unlike  that  of  an  ordinary 
knife-blade,  the  butt  being  covered  with  fur  and  wound  round 
with  string." 

The  unmounted  knife  is  four  and  a  quarter  inches  long,  and 
three-quarters  of  an  inch  broad  at  the  back,  and  is  the  widest. 
The  cutting  edge,  in  two  instances  is  sharp  but  uneven,  in  the 
third  thicker,  and  blunter.  Both  lateral  surfaces  in  one  are 
smooth  and  unworked,  but  in  the  other  two  one  face  is  facetted 
by  chipping.  As  regards  the  hafting,  the  butts  of  the  two 
mounted  specimens  have  been  surrounded  with  a  fibre,  the  lower 
end  covered  with  a  piece  of  canvas,  or  worn  blanket,  and  a  handle 
so  formed.  Over  the  fore  part  of  this,  native  string  has  been 
wound,  and  this  coated  with  one  of  the  black  gum  preparations  so 
commonly  used  by  the  Aborigines.  The  string  used  on  one  of  the 
knives  is  made  of  yellow  fibre,  but  round  the  other  a  much  finer 
string  made  of  hair,  perhaps  human,  has  been  wound  alternately 
with  the  fibre-string.  In  this  instance  the  gum  coating  has  been 
continued  up  the  broad  back  of  the  knife,  nearly  to  its  apex  (PI. 
vii.,  fig.  1),  and  gives  one  the  idea  of  a  protection  to  a  fore-finger, 

T  Ancient  Stone  Implements,  &c,  Gt.  Brit.,  1S72,  p.  265,  f.  198. 


BY    R.  ETHER1DGE,  JUN.  33 

supposing  the  knife  to  be  so  held.  The  length  of  the  knives, 
complete,  is  respectively  eight  inches,  and  seven  and  a  half.  The 
surface  of  the  flints  is  smooth  and  shining.  When  describing  the 
Mika-knives  a  short  time  ago,  T  surmised  that  they  were  also  used 
for  other  purposes,  and  I  have  since  been  informed  that  such 
knives  are  employed  in  fighting,  practically  in  a  kind  of  duello. 

The  glass  knife  (PI.  vi.,  fig.  1),  also  from  "Northern  Queensland," 
is  exceedingly  interesting,  consisting  of  a  small  piece  of  bottle-glae-s 
chipped  to  an  oval  form,  and  mounted  with  black  gum  to  a  small 
wooden  handle,  which  Mr.  F.  Turner,  of  the  Department  of  Agri- 
culture, tells  me  is  probably  made  of  the  Acacia  sentis,  a  very  porous 
wood.  The  latter  is  to  some  extent  split,  and  conveys  the  idea  that 
the  glass  is  inserted  between  the  halves,  which  are  also  partially 
wound  round  with  fine  string  of  native  manufacture.  The  entire 
weapon  is  six  inches  in  length,  but  the  glass  blade  extends  beyond 
the  gum  mounting  for  one  inch  only.  Several  similar  knives  are 
figured*  by  Mr.  T.  Wilson  from  Southern  Utah  and  other 
localities,  hafted  with  wood,  the  attachment  being  made  with 
bitumen.  One  is  flint,  and  the  others  are  made  of  jasper.  Another 
knife  of  obsidian  has  the  base  wrapped  in  otter  skin.  The  general 
appearance  of  these  knives  closely  resembles  those  now  described, 
particularly  the  glass  knife. f 

The  quartzite  knife  is  granular  and  deep  flesh-coloured  (PI.  v., 
fig.  1).  It  is  very  interesting  as  being  intermediate  in  form  and 
character  between  the  Mika-knives,  |  formerly  described  by  me,  and 
a  spear-head  from  Torres  Straits,  in  the  Australian  Museum,  to 
which  my  attention  was  called  by  my  colleague  Mr.  Brazier.  That 
it  is  a  knife,  however,  appears  tolerably  certain  from  the  form  of  the 

*  A  Study  of  Prehistoric  Anthropology. — Handbook  for  Beginners.  U.S. 
Nat.  Mm.  Report,  1887-88,  p.  639,  f.  14,  p.  641,  f.  75-78. 

f  Glass  has  probably  been  used  by  the  Aborigines  for  a  long  time.  The 
York's  Peninsula  Tribe  made  their  knives  of  shells  and  afterward  of  glass, 
"for  they  related  that  they  used  occasionally  to  find  bottles  on  the  beach 
many  years  before  the  whites  came  to  reside  in  South  Australia."  Curr's 
Australian  Race,  1886,  n.,  p.  143. 

X  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1890,  v.  (2),  Pt.  2,  PI.  9  and  PI.  II,  figs. 
8  and  9. 

3 


34       AUSTRALIAN  ABORIGINAL  STONE  WEAPONS  AND  IMPLEMENTS, 

gum  handle,  which  resembles  that  of  the  Mulligan  River  knife*  ; 
whilst  the  blade  is  more  akin  to  one  of  those  from  "  Northern 
Queensland,"  in  the  Australian  Museum, f  angular  in  the  middle 
line  of  one  face,  flat  on  the  other.  The  specimen  is  five  and  a 
half  inches  long,  but  the  apex  is  a  little  broken.  The  cutting 
edges,  although  sharp,  have  not  that  degree  of  fineness  visible  in 
the  Mulligan  River  knife,  which  may  be  described  as  razor-edged. 
The  edges  in  the  present  case  are  uneven  and  a  little  notched, 
and  would  inflict  a  jagged  and  awkward  wound.  It  is  generally 
comparable  to  the  knife  figured  by  Smyth,  used  by  the  natives 
of  Booloo  and  Cooper's  Creek,  {  except  that  ours  does  not  possess 
a  handle.     It  is  from  the  Gregory  River. 

xi. — Spear-heads  from  Kimberley. 
(PL  v.,  fig.  2  ;  PI.  vi.,  fig.  2  •  PI.  vii.,  figs.  2  and  3  ;  PI.  viii.,  figs.  1-3.) 
Mr.  W.  W.  Froggatt  has  lent  me  twelve  spear-heads,  brought 
by  himself  from  the  Lennard  River.  They  are  similar  to  those 
lately  described  by  me  from  the  Ord  River, ||  now  in  the  Mining  and 
Geological  Museum.  One  is  of  bottle  glass,  one  of  a  chocolate- 
brown,  close-grained,  ferruginous  clay  shale,  another  of  an  olive- 
green  banded  quartzite,  two  of  opaque  white  chalcedonic  quartz, 
similar  to  those  before  described,  two  of  clear  rock  crystal,  and 
five  of  opaque  milky- white  quartz.  As  regards  shape  there  are 
two  forms,  the  elongately  lanceolate,  and  the  more  or  less  foliolate, 
corresponding  to  those  already  received  from  the  same  district. 
Examined  more  in  detail  there  are  four  types,  thus  : — 

a.  Elongately  lanceolate,  slightly  angular  on  both  faces. 

b.  Ditto,  angular  on  one  face. 

c.  Ditto,  flat  on  both  faces. 

d.  Foliolate,  slightly  angular  on  one  face,  and  thicker  than  a-c. 
The  bottle  glass  spear-head,  the  green  quartzite,  and  three  of 

the  milky  quartz  heads  are  chipped  to  an  exceedingly  fine  apex, 
especially    the    second    one    mentioned.       The    head     formed    of 

*  Loc.  cit.  pi.  9. 

f  Ibid.  pi.  11,  figs.  8  and  9. 

X  Aborigines  of  Victoria,  1878,  I.,  p.  380,  f.  200. 

||  Records  Geol.  Survey  N.  S.  Wales,  1890,  II.,  Pt.  2,  p.  61,  pi.  6. 


BY    R.   ETHERIDGE,  JUN. 


35 


chocolate-brown  clay  shale,  the  green  quartzite,  those  of  opaque 
white  jasperoid  quartz,  and  the  rock  crystal  heads  are  plain  edged 
and  without  serrations,  and  so  also  are  three  of  the  milky  quartz, 
but  two  of  the  latter  and  (hat  formed  of  bottle  glass  are  beauti- 
fully and  finely  serrated.  The  whole  of  the  faces  are  facetted  by 
percussion,  even  in  the  milky  quartz  and  rock  crystal  spear-heads, 
although  the  facets  on  the  former  of  these  are  less  apparent  than 
on  the  others.  When  we  take  into  consideration  the  refractory 
conchoidal  fracture  of  quartz  and  glass,  the  chipping  of  these 
spear-heads  is  a  remarkable  feat,  more  especially  that  of  the  milky 
quartz  heads  with  their  serrations.  This  teething  is  not  pointed, 
or  "  dog-toothed,"  but  each  serration  is  in  most  instances  square, 
or  at  right  angles,  and  corresponds  exactly  to  the  figure  given  by 
Rear- Admiral  King,  and  referred  to  in  my  previous  account. 

The  following  table  gives  the  measurements  of  the  eleven  spear- 
heads obtained  by  Mr.  JFroggatt,  with  their  forms  and  mineralcgical 
composition. 


No. 

Form. 

Length. 

Breadth. 

Thickness. 

Rock,  etc. 

1. 

EloDgately  lanceolate, 
angled  on  one  face. 

3|in. 

lfin. 

£in. 

Bottle  glass ;  edges  serrated. 

2. 

Ditto. 

3g 

H 

f 

White  opaque  milky  quartz ; 
edges  serrated. 

3. 

Ditto. 

H 

x4 

i 

White  opaque  milky  quartz. 

4. 

Elongately  lanceolate, 
angled  on  both  faces. 

3| 

i 

Ditto;  edges  serrated. 

5. 

Ditto. 

2£ 

1  1 

*8 

1 

White  opaque  milky  quartz. 

6. 

Foliolate. 

n 

§ 

Smoky  quartz. 

7. 

Ditto. 

h 

I 

1 

Ditto  ;  apex  broken. 

8. 

Elongately  lanceolate, 
flat  on  both  faces. 

2§ 

n 

i 

4 

Dirty     olive-green     banded 
quartzite ;  apex  very  sharp. 

9. 

Ditto. 

3| 

1 1 

A4 

1 

Brown-red  (ferruginous) 
clay  shale. 

10. 

H 

1 

White  chalcedonic  quartz. 

11. 

n 

1| 

1 

Ditto  ;  poor  specimen. 

.''(')      AUSTRALIAN  ABORIGINAL  BTQNE  WBAPONS  and  IMPLEMENTS, 

Thene  figures  show  bow  very  uniform  in  general  the  size  of  the 
spi'.u-  heads  is ;  or,  when  there  is  a  gradation,  it  is  regular  and 

gradual.      'Tin'  eleventh  specimen  is  rough  and  unfinished,  and  the 

twelfth  is  hardly  worth  recording  in  detail. 

Somewhat    similar    spearheads    are    figured    from    the     United 
States  l.y   Mr.  T.  Wilson,  especially  one  with  square  jagged  edge* 

and  marginal  facets.* 

Mr.  Froggatt  informs  me  that  the  Leonard  River  Blacks  use 

these  sjHMi-  heads  almost  wholly  in  personal  attaek  and  oneounters, 
seldom  in  sporting,  and  that  these  extremely  tine  heads  are  carried 
about  unmounted,  and  placed  in  position  on  the  spears  as  required. 
They  are  carried  in  a  chignon,  made  of  emu  feathers  matted 
together,  and  attached  to  the  hack  hair.  The  hair  is  worn  long, 
similar  to  that  of  the  Cooper's  Creek  natives,  who  do  it  up  in  a 
head  net.t  Inside  this  chignon  the  spear  heads  are  wrapped  in 
paper-bark.  Thanks  to  Mr.  Froggatt  1  have  much  pleasure  in 
exhibiting  one  of  these  ingenious  contrivances. 

The  Lennard  River  Aborigines,  like  those  of  the  Victoria  River 
described  by  Mr.  T.  B tines,  and  referred  to  in  my  former  paper 

On  similar  spearheads,  place  themselves  in  a  squatting  position 
when  preparing  these  weapons,  and  use  the  ball  of  one  of  their 
great  toes  as  a  cushion,  against  which  the  stone  to  be  chipped  is 
placed  and  then  struck. 

In  addition  to  the  foregoing,  Mr.  r-Yoggatt  has  also  brought  a 
curious  stone  weapon  which  appears  to  be  a  partially  prepared 
spear  head  of  a  rather  different  type  (PI.  IV.,  tig.  1).  A  small 
transversely  elongated  and  roughly  rounded  piece  of  black  lami- 
nated jasperoid  clay  stone,  arched  on  one  side,  and  flat,  or  a  little 
concave  on  the  other,  has  been  roughly  chipped  along  the  arched 
sides  producing  irregular  eonchoidal  facets.  The  weapon  is  three 
and  a  half  inches  long,  and  one  inch  wide  at  the  base.  The 
flattened  under  surface  has  not  been  worked  at  all,  but  presents 
the  naturally  worn  surface  of  the  stone.      The  central  line  of  the 

*  A  study  of  Pr«Ma&orio  Anthropology. —  Bandbook  for  Beginners.     ^'.^ 
yat.  Mat.  Report,  1887  88,  p.  688,  f.  1% 
+  A.  W,  Howitt  in  Smyth's  Aborigines  of  Victoria,  1S7S.  ii.,  p.  801. 


BY    H.  ETHERIDCE,  JUN.  37 

arched   side   bears    traced  of    longitudinal    facets.       The   apex  is 
obtuse  and  chipped,  and  the  section  irregularly  triangular. 

If  a  spear-head,  and  I  do  not  see  any  other  possible  interpreta- 
tion, it  is  certainly  different  to  any  others  I  have  seen  from 
Northern  Australia,  and  will  probably  form  a  separate  group, 
following  Nos.  1  and  2  in  the  classification  given  by  me  in  the 
first  account  of  the  Kimberley  spear-heads.*  At  the  same  time 
there  is  a  certain  resemblance  between  it  and  the  fine  long  axe- 
head  of  flesh-coloured  quartzitei  lately  figured. f 

xii. — Spear-heads  from  Settlement  Creek  and  Nicholson  River. 
(PI.  iv.,  figs.  2  and  3.) 

Tiie  three  spear-heads  now  to  be  noticed  are  a  part  of  the 
Queensland  Museum  Collection  forwarded  to  me  by  Mr.  De  Vis. 
Two  are  made  of  a  semi-granular  flesh-coloured  quartzite,|  similar 
to  but  coarser  than  the  knife  first  described  from  the  Gregory 
River,  and  perhaps  more  akin  to  the  stone  of  the  axes  from 
"North  Queensland,"  in  the  Australian  Museum.  Both  these 
spear-heads  have  still  adhering  to  their  bases  portions  of  the  gum 
used  in  mounting.  One  of  them  is  six  and  three-quarter  inches 
long,  by  one  and  a  quarter  wide ;  the  other  is  shorter,  six  and  a 
quarter  long,  and  broader,  being  one  and  five-eighths  wide.  The 
section  is  triangular,  flat,  or  partially  concave  on  one  facp,  acutely 
angular  and  sharp  in  the  middle  line  on  the  other,  tapering  to  a 
moderately  acute  apex. 

The  third  spear-head  is  composed  of  a  dark  chocolate  felsite 
with  flesh-coloured  orthoclase,  and  is  slightly  enlarged  at  the  base 

*  Records  Geol.  Survey  N.  S.  Wales,  1890,  n.,  Pt.  2,  p.  65. 
+  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1890,  v.  (2;,  Pt.  3,  PI.  12,  f.  14. 
%  The  blacks  near  the  Daly  River,  Arnheim's  Land,  are  said  by  A.  C. 
Gregory  to  possess  spears  formed  of  reeds  with  "large  heads  of  white 
Bands  tone"  (Journal*  of  Australian  Exploration,  by  A.  C.  and  F.  T 
Gregory,  1884,  p.  158,  8vo,  Brisbane).  It  is  possible  that  this  rock  may 
be  similar  to  the  quartzite  deseribed  above.  The  use  of  the  white  man's 
materials  for  aboriginal  weapons  is  again  illustrated  in  the  case  of  spear- 
heads. In  the  Queensland  Court  of  the  Indian  and  Colonial  Exhibition  of 
1880  were  righting  spears  from  the  Ktheridge  River,  pointed  and  barbed 
with  pieces  of  telegraph  wire,  exhibited  by  Mr.  W.  Samwell,  the  Warden 
at  Georgetown. 


38       AUSTRALIAN  ABORIGINAL  STONE  WEAPONS  AND  IMPLEMENTS, 

to  afford  a  good  grip  to  the  cementing  medium,  portions  of  which 
still  remain.  It  is  six  and  three-eighths  inches  long,  by  one  and 
two-eighths  wide,  with  an  acute  apex.  The  median  angular  line 
is  very  acute,  but  at  the  base  a  large  chip  has  been  taken  out  of  it 
(PI.  vi.,  fig.  3).  One  of  the  flesh-coloured  heads,  the  shorter  and 
broader,  has  a  similar  piece  flaked  off,  but  the  longer  of  the  two 
bears  a  narrow  longitudinal  facet,  extending  almost  the  whole 
length  of  the  weapon,  whilst  at  the  apex  there  is  a  small  supple- 
mentary triangular  facet,  and  a  larger  one  at  the  base.  The 
cutting  edges  of  all  are  sharp,  but  those  of  the  felsite  spear-head 
are  naturally  sharper  ;  they  are  not  strictly  parallel  edged  in 
either,  but  there  is  a  slightly  flexuous  or  curved  outline,  which 
throws  the  apex  more  or  less  to  one  side,  and  renders  it  excentric 
to  some  extent.  This  curved  appearance  is  well  illustrated  by 
Smyth  in  the  case  of  a  "  knife"  from  the  Paroo  River,*  the  base 
of  which  is  wrapt  in  'possum  fur,  but  otherwise  the  resemblance 
to  our  spear-heads  is  very  strong. 

A  glance  will  at  once  show  how  different  these  are  to  the 
Kimberley  spear-heads  of  glass  and  varieties  of  quartz,  but  of  the 
general  type  of  the  small  head  of  black  jasperoid  claystone 
obtained  by  Mr.  Froggatt.  In  fact,  the  latter  and  the  three  spear- 
heads now  under  discussion  will  probably  form  a  separate  section 
in  the  classification  of  Australian  stone  spear-heads  lately  proposed 
by  me,f  between  Nos.  2  and  3,  and  may  be  defined  thus  : — 

No.  2a.  Double-edged,  three-faced,  elongately-lanceolate,  slightly  curved 
heads,  with  a  more  or  less  entire  margin.  Nicholson  River  and  Settlement 
Creek,  North-west  Carpentaria 

At  the  same  time  their  resemblance  to  the  flesh-coloured  axe- 
heads  from  "North  Queensland"!  must  not  be  forgotten  any  more 
than  in  the  case  of  the  small  Kimberley  spear-head  of  jasperoid 
claystone.  A  comparison  with  these  renders  it  clear  that  these 
spear-heads  are  rather  longer  weapons,  more  slender  for  their  size, 
and  with  the  somewhat  curved  lateral  margins,  which  do  not  exist 
in  the  axe-heads. 

*  Aborigines  of  Victoria,  1878,  i.,  p.  380,  f.  201. 

+  Records  Geol.  Survey  N.  S.  Wales,  1890,  n.,  Pt.  2,  p.  65. 

t  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  8.  Wales,  1890,  v.,  Pt.  2,  p.  368,  pi.  12,  f.  14. 


BY    R.   ETHERIDGE,  JUN.  39 

xiii. — Talismanic  Stones,  or  Teyl. 
(PI.  via.,  figs.  4-6.) 

The  Teyl  from  Cooktown,*  in  the  cabinet  of  Mr.  G.  Sweet  of 
Brunswick,  Melbourne,  consisted  of  a  mass  of  quartz  crystals  in 
one  piece,  and  free  of  gum  mounting.  The  present  fine  example 
(PI.  VIII.,  fig.  4)  is  again  from  Northern  Queensland,  and  from 
the  Queensland  Museum  Collection,  and  consists  of  two  prismatic 
crystals  of  clear  quartz  united  at  the  base  by  gum,  and  set  along- 
side of  one  another.  The  cementing  medium  is  rendered  more 
coherent  by  being  mixed  with  hair,  which  seems  to  be  human.  It 
would  be  exceedingly  interesting  to  ascertain  from  what  portion 
of  the  pilous  system  this  hair  is  derived.  According  to  Police- 
Trooper  Gason  the  Dieyerie  Tribe  of  South  Australia  use  a  belt  of 
human  hair  called  Yinka,j  "ordinarily  three  hundred  yards  in 
length,  and  wound  round  the  waist."  It  is  said  to  be  greatly 
prized  owing  to  the  difficulty  of  procuring  the  necessary  material. 
Mr.  Howitt  also  mentions  that  the  Cooper's  Creek  natives  wear  a 
"  very  long  cord  wound  round  and  round  the  waist  like  a  belt,"J 
and  I  am  informed  by  my  colleague  Mr.  J.  E.  Carne,  who  has 
travelled  extensively  throughout  that  region,  that  the  hair  so  used 
is  pubic,  obtained  from  the  women,  and  only  worn  by  the  old  men 
of  the  tribe.  I  quote  these  facts  with  the  view  of  suggesting  that 
the  hair  used  in  this  tael  may  be  similarly  derived. 

Mr.  E.  C.  Blomfield,  of  Boorolong,  has  very  kindly  forwarded 
to  my  colleague  Mr.  W.  Anderson,  of  the  Geological  Survey,  three 
other  Taels.  The  first  of  these  consists  of  a  small  six-sided  prism 
of  slightly  smoky  quartz,  with  a  fairly  perfect  termination.  The 
crystal  is  one  and  a  quarter  inches  long.  The  second  stone  is  an 
irregularly  shaped  piece  of  clear  white  rock  crystal  (PI.  vin.,  fig.  5) 
excentrically  fractured,  about  half  the  size  of  a  walnut.  The 
third  and  fourth  charms  consist  of  opaque  coffee-coloured  quartz, 
one  in  the  form  of  an  irregular  rhomb  (PI.  VIII.,  fig.  6),  the  other 

*  Ibid.  p.  370 
+  The  Native  Tribes  of  S.  Australia,  edited  by  J.  D.  Woods,  1879,  p.  289  • 
and  Smyth's  Aborigines  of  Victoria,  1878,  I.,  p.  281. 

%  Smyth's  Aborigines  of  Victoria,  1878,  n.,  p.  302. 


40       AUSTRALIAN  ABORIGINAL  STONE  WEAPONS  AND  IMPLEMENTS, 

a  transversely  elongated  pebble,  two  and  a  half  inches  long.*  The 
angles  of  these  stones  are  all  well  rounded,  and  they  had  evidently 
undergone  considerable  attrition  before  selection  for  their  abori- 
ginal use.  The  longest  diameter  of  the  largest  is  two  and  a  half 
inches.  Touching  these  stones,  Mr.  Blomfield  makes  the  following 
remarks  in  his  letter  accompanying  them  : — "The  specimens  were 
obtained  by  my  brother  from  an  old  blackfellow  at  Mount  Mitchell, 
Eastern  New  England,  who  told  him  that  they  had  belonged  to  the 
last  '  medicine  man  '  of  the  tribe,  and  as  he  was  the  last  represen- 
tative, and  not  a  '  doctor,'  he  had  no  use  for  them,  and  seemed 
rather  glad  at  being  relieved  of  their  charge.  He  told  my  brother 
on  no  account  to  let  any  blackfellow  know  that  he  had  given  them 
to  him.  I  know  that  the  '  medicine  men  '  in  all  the  tribes  carry 
these  stones  and  attach  great  importance  to  them,  never  showing 
them  to  a  white  man.  I  have  been  told  by  the  blacks  that  if  a  gin 
dared  to  look  at  them,  she  would  be  instantly  killed.  They  pretend 
to  work  all  sorts  of  cures  with  these  stones,  and  I  believe  they  are 
never  shown  except  at  their  Bora  meetings.  These  are  the  only 
ones  I  ever  saw,  except  once,  when  an  old  'medicine  man'  was 
doctoring  one  of  my  black  boys,  and  pretended  to  suck  one  out  of 
his  head.  I  believe  they  descend  from  father  to  son,  and  those  I 
send  you  have  most  likely  been  in  use  for  generations.  The  blacks 
always  carry  them  in  a  small  dilly-bag  under  the  arm,  together  with 
the  bones  of  dead  relatives." 

xiv. — Gouge. 
(PI.  v.,  fig.  6.) 
Gouges,  such  as  the  specimen  exhibited,  and  sometimes  called 
chisels,  seem  now  to  be  very  rare,  and  little  has  been  written  on 
them.  The  present  specimen,  from  "  Northern  Queensland,"  was 
forwarded  by  Mr.  De  Vis,  and  also  forms  a  portion  of  the  Queens- 
land Museum  Collection.  It  appears  to  me  that  the  term  gouge 
is  preferable  to  that  of  chisel,  and  such  will  be  here  adopted.  The 
late  R.  Brough  Smyth  saysf  that  this  implement  is  "  formed  of  a 

*  According  to  Smyth,  some  of  the  white  toe£-stones  carried  by  the 
Victorian  "Doctors"  are  called  Warra-goop.  {Aborigines  of  Victoria, 
1878,  i.,  p.  464.) 

t  Aborigines  of  Victoria,  1878,  I.,  p.  379,  f.  199. 


BY    R.  ETHERIDGE,  JUN.  41 

fragment  of  quartzite,  firmly  set  into  the  end  of  a  rough  handle  of 
wood,  and  secured  in  its  place  by  gum."  His  example  was 
seventeen  inches  in  length.  In  the  tool  from  the  Queensland 
Museum  more  of  the  quartzite  head  is  exposed  than  in  Smyth's 
figure,  and  the  handle,  thirteen  inches  in  length,  is  proportionately 
more  slender  and  better  finished,  producing  altogether  a  handier 
though  slighter  instrument.  The  handle  is  gently  curved  in  the 
plane  of  the  breadth  of  the  chisel,  so  that  the  leverage  of  the 
operator's  hand  is  much  more  increased  than  if  the  stick  were 
straight.  It  is  thickest  in  the  middle,  tapering  off  at  both  ends, 
and  is  composed,  Mr.  F.  Turner  tells  me,  probably  of  a  species  of 
Myoporum,  one  of  the  sandal-woods  of  the  interior. 

The  small  stone-head  was  produced  by  chipping,  the  lower  side 
convex,  the  upper  more  or  less  flattened,  and  the  cutting  edge  gently 
curved.  The  gum  securing  the  head  to  the  handle  is  curiously  put 
on.  On  the  convex  face,  or  that  side  answering  to  the  convexity 
of  the  handle,  the  largest  amount  of  surface  is  left  exposed,  the  edge 
of  the  gum  curving  from  the  cutting  edge  in  a  concave  sweep.  On 
the  other  side,  or  that  answering  to  the  concavity  of  the  handle, 
the  edge  of  the  gum  in  the  centre  is  horizontal,  with  a  little  lappet 
on  each  side  projecting  forwards. 

According  to  Smyth*  this  implement  is  "  commonly  used  by  the 
natives  inhabiting  the  country  north-east  of  the  Grey  Ranges." 

It  is  also  met  with  in  West  Australia,  for  this  author  figures  a 
larger  instrument  of  a  similar  nature,  but  differing  in  detail.  He 
remarks  on  thisf  : — "  Below  the  lump  of  gum  in  which  the  stone 
is  fixed,  the  implement  for  the  length  of  an  inch  and  a  half  is 
smooth  ;  then  there  is  a  hollow,  and  below  that  the  round  stick  is 
grooved  longitudinally,  so  as  to  enable  the  mechanic  to  obtain  a 
firm  hold  of  it.  The  wood  is  not  heavy  "but  very  hard,  and  of  a 
dark  reddish-brown  colour.  It  is  used  for  cutting  and  shaping- 
boomerangs,  shields,  clubs,  &c,  and  is  employed  also  in  war  and 
hunting.  It  is  thrown  in  such  a  manner  as  to  turn  over  in  its  flight, 
and  if  it  strikes  a  man  or  a  kangaroo  death  is  certain."  Smyth 
adds  that  the  gouge  resembles  the  implement  used  by  the  Grey 

*  Aborigines  of  Victoria,  1878,  I.,  p.  379. 
t  Ibid.  p.  340,  f.  150. 


42      AUSTRALIAN  ABORIGINAL  STONE  WEAPONS  AND  IMPLEMENTS, 

Ranges  natives,  but  is  a  more  finished  tool.  Herein  it  resembles 
the  specimen  from  the  Queensland  Museum,  but  it  stands  to  reason 
that  so  much  slighter  an  instrument  as  the  latter  could  not  produce 
the  effects  ascribed  to  the  heavier  weapon  from  West  Australia. 
Iu  the  last-named  province  it  is  called  Dow-ak  or  Dhabba.* 

Tn  his  account  of  the  Aborigines  of  Cooper's  Creek,f  Mr.  A.  W. 
Hovvitt  refers  to  these  gouges,  and  says  that  they  are  used  "  by 
the  workman  sitting  down  upon  the  ground,  holding  the  piece  of 
wood  between   his   feet,  and  then  adzing  it,  with  the  tool  held 

towards  him." 

xv.  —  Spike  or  awl. 

(PI.  vi,  fig.  3.) 

Although  not  a  "  stone"  implement,  this  very  interesting  object, 
from  amongst  Mr.  Froggatt's  Kimberley  gatherings,  is  worthy  of 
notice.  It  appears  to  be  of  the  nature  of  a  spike  or  awl,  and 
is  formed  of  an  old-fashioned  cast-iron  four-sided  nail  sharpened 
at  one  end  and  inserted  in  the  proximal  half  of  a  human  left 
radius,  and  the  point  of  insertion  coated  in  the  usual  manner  with 
gum.  I  am  ignorant  whether  human  bones  were  much  employed 
by  our  Aborigines  in  their  manufactures,  but  I  believe  not, 
although  bones  of  marsupials  are  to  some  extent,  especially  for 
some  of  their  smaller  implements. 

Mr.  Froggatt  is  unable  to  explain  explicitly  to  what  use  this 
implement  was  put,  but  it  may  have  been  used  as  a  carver  in  the 
ornamentation  of  wooden  implements,  or  simply  as  an  instrument 
for  piercing  or  boring.  

EXPLANATION    OF  PLATES   IV. -VIII. 
Plate  iv. 

Fig.  1. — Spear-head,  partially  prepared,  of  black  laminated  jasperoid  clay- 
stone  ;  Kimberley.     Coll.  Froggatt. 

Fig.  2. — Spear-head,  granular  flesh-coloured  quartzite  ;  Settlement  Creek. 
Coll.  Queensland  Museum. 

Fig.  3. — Spear-head,  dark  chocolate  felsite,  with  flesh-coloured  orthoclase  ; 
Nicholson  River.     Coll.  Queensland  Museum. 

*  Curr  figures  a  very  different  form  of  chisel,  consisting  of  a  facetted 
stone  mounted  on  a  rough  wooden  handle  by  the  aid  of  wax  and  string. 
[Australian  Race,  1886,  i.,  11th  plate.) 

t  "  Notes  on  the  Aborigines  of  Cooper's  Creek."  Smyth's  Aborigines  of 
Victoria,  1878,  n.,  p.  300. 


BY    R.   ETHERIDGE,   JUN.  43 

EXPLANATION   OF   PLATES   (continued). 
Plate  v. 

Fig.  1. — Knife,  granular  flesh-coloured  quartzite ;  North  Queensland.    Coll. 

Queensland  Museum. 
Fig.  2. — Spear-head,  elongately  lanceolate,  with  serrated  edges,  of  white 

opaque  milky  quartz  ;  Kimberley.     Coll.  Froggatt. 
Fig.  3. — Gouge;  Northern  Queensland.     Coll.  Queensland  Museum. 

Plate  vi. 

Fig.  1. — Knife,  bottle-glass   mounted   on  wooden   handle  (Acacia  sentisj 

with  black  gum  ;    Northern  Queensland.      Coll.   Queensland 

Museum. 
Fig.  2. — Spear-head,    elongately    lanceolate  ;    of   bottle-glass   serrated   on 

edges  ;  Kimberley.     Coll.  Froggatt. 
Fig.  3. — Awl  (?)   formed   of   a  cast-iron   four-sided   nail    inserted   in    the 

proximal  half  of  a  human  left  radius ;    Kimberley.      Coll. 

Froggatt. 

Plate  vii. 

Fig.  1. — Knife,  of  streaky  flint-like  quartz,  broad  along  the  back,  mounted 
in  old  canvas  and  twine,  and  secured  with  black  gum  composi- 
tion, which  extends  along  the  back  ;  Northern  Queensland. 
Coll.  Queensland  Museum. 

Fig.  2. — Spear-head,  elongately  lanceolate,  of  white  opaque  milky  quartz  ; 
edges  unserrated  ;  Kimberley.     Coll.  Froggatt. 

Fig.  3. — Spear-head,  elongately  lanceolate,  and  with  a  very  sharp  apex  ; 
Kimberley.     Coll.  Froggatt. 

Plate  viii. 

Fig.  1.— Spear-head,  white  opaque  milky  quartz,  and  edges  serrated;  Kim- 
berley.    Coll.  Froggatt. 

Fig.  2. — Spear-head,  white  chalcedonic  quartz;  Kimberley.    Coll.  Froggatt. 

Fig.  3.— Spear-head,  foliolate,  of  smoky  quartz ;  Kimberley.    Coll.  Froggatt. 

Fig.  4. — Teyl,  of  two  prismatic  crystals  of  clear  quartz,  held  together  by 
gum  cement  mixed  with  hair ;  North  Queensland.  Coll. 
Queensland  Museum. 

Fig.  5. — Teyl,  irregular  shaped  clear  rock  crystal  ;  New  England.  Coll. 
Mining  and  Geological  Museum. 

Fig.  6. — Teyl,  rhomb  of  opaque  coffee-coloured  quartz  ;  New  England. 
Coll.  Mining  and  Geological  Museum. 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 

Mr.  Etheridge  showed  a  fine  collejtion  of  aboriginal  stone  knives 
and  implements  in  illustration  of  his  paper. 

Mr.  Olliff  exhibited  specimens  of  the  butterfly  described  in  his 
paper 


44  NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 

Mr.  Musson  showed  a  named  collection  of  about  sixty  species 
of  New  Zealand  mosses. 

Mr.  Hedley  showed  a  colony  of  the  nests  of  a  trap-door  spider, 
together  with  specimens  of  the  animal,  from  Rose  Bay.  These 
spiders  are  abundant  round  Sydney,  occurring  even  in  the  public 
parks  of  the  city.  A  favourite  spot  for  them  is  a  patch  of  mossy 
earth  in  the  crevice  of  a  sandstone  rock.  The  species  exhibited 
forms  a  wafer-like  lid,  not  as  in  some  species  a  thick  door  like  a 
gun-wad.  The  presence  of  several  egg-bags  in  the  larger  burrows 
would  indicate  that  the  present  month  (February),  is  the  breeding 
season. 

Mr.  Fletcher  exhibited  two  specimens  of  a  land  planarian 
{Bipalium  keivense,  Moseley),  collected  by  Mr.  J.  J.  Lister  at 
Upolu,  Samoa,  under  stones  in  the  bush  ;  and  a  specimen  of  the 
same  species  from  Eltham,  Victoria,  collected  by  Mr.  W.  W. 
Smith  ;  seeing  that  this  planarian  has  now  undoubtedly  been 
introduced  into  many  widely  separated  localities,  and  that  the 
species  of  the  genus  whose  habitats  are  certainly  known  belong 
to  the  Palsearctic  and  Oriental  regions,  there  seems  little  ground 
for  supposing  it  to  be  indigenous  in  Samoa. 

Also  two  instances  of  floral  prolification  in  the  "Flannel-flower" 
( Actinotus  helianthi),  in  which  from  the  ordinary  umbels  spring, 
in  one  case  about  seven,  in  the  other  eleven  small  secondary 
umbels,  each  with  its  involucre  of  woolly  bracts  ;  the  specimens 
were  gathered  at  Oatley  a  few  days  ago. 

Also  living  specimens  of  three  species  of  frogs  (Hyla  ccerulea,  H. 
peronii,  and  Limnodynastes  sahninii,  Stdr.),  brought  from  Goangra 
on  the  Namoi,  near  Walgett,  by  Mi-.  A.  Carson  ;  these  specimens 
offer  fresh  evidence  of  the  very  wide  distribution  of  these  three 
species  in  the  interior  of  the  colony ;  in  the  specimens  of 
L.  salminii  the  dorsal  stripes,  which  in  spirit  specimens  are  pink 
or  rose-reel,  are  of  quite  a  different  tint,  being  a  bright  ochreons- 
yellow.  Specimens  of  an  interesting  frog  (Hyla  gracilenta)  from 
the  Richmond  River  (collected  by  Mr.  R.  Helms)  were  also 
exhibited ;  the  species  has  not  previously  been  recorded  from 
N.S.W. 


45 


WEDNESDAY,  15th  MARCH,  1891. 


The  President,  Professor  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc.,  in  the  Chair. 


?vlr.  Oswald  B.  Lower,  Adelaide,  was  elected  a  member  of  the 
Society. 


DONATIONS. 

11  Gesellschaft  fur  Erdkunde  zu  Berlin — Verhandlungen."  Bd. 
xvii.,  Nos.  8-10  ;  "  Zeitschrift."  Bd.  xxv.,  Heft  5  (1890).  From 
the  Society. 

"The  Australasian  Journal  of  Pharmacy."  Vol.  VI.,  No.  62 
(Feb.,  1891).     From  the  Editor. 

"  Report  of  the  Board  of  Governors  of  the  Public  Library,  &c, 
of  South  Australia,  1889-90."     From  the  Board. 

"  Zoologischer  Anzeiger."  xiv.  Jahrg.,  Nos.  354  (Jan.  9,  1891), 
and  355  (Feb.  2,  1891).     From  the  Editor. 

"  Comptes  Rendus  de  Seances  de  l'Academie  de  Paris."  T. 
cxi.,  Nos.  24-26,  T.  cxii.,  Nos.  1  and  2  (1891).  "Tables  des 
C.  R."     T.  ex.  (1890).     From  the  Academy. 

"  Perak  Government  Gazette."  Vol.  IV.,  Nos.  1-3  (Jan.,  1891). 
From  the  Government  Secretary. 

"Zoological  Society  of  London. — Abstracts."  Jan.  6,  1891, 
Jan.  20,  1891,  and  Feb.  3,  1891.     From  the  Society. 

"  Reports  and  Statistics  of  the  Mining  Department,  Victoria, 
for  Quarter  ended  Dec.  31st,  1890."     From  the  Secretary  for  Mines, 


46  DONATIONS. 

"  List  of  Canadian  Hepaticse  "  By  W.  H.  Pearson.  From  the 
Author. 

Asiatic  Society  of  Bengal. — "Journal."  Vol.  lviii.  (1889), 
Part  i.,  No.  3  ;  Part  ii.5  No.  5  ;  Vol.  lix.  (1890),  Part  ii.,  Nos.  2 
and  3.—"  Proceedings,  1890."  Nos.  4-10  (April- December). 
From  the  Society. 

"  Memoires  de  la  Societe  des  Naturalistes  de  la  Nouvelle 
Russie,  Odessa."     Tome  XV.,  No.  2  (1890).     From  the  Society. 

"  Reichenbachia. — Orchids  illustrated  and  described."  By  F. 
Sander.  Second  Series,  Vol.  I.,  Part  3.  From  the  Hon.  Sir 
William  Macleay,  M.L.C.,  F.L.S. 

"  Entomologisk  Tidskiift."  Arg.  x.,  Haft  5  (1889)  ;  Arg.  xi., 
Haft  1-4  (1890).     From  the  Entomological  Society  of  Stockholm. 

"  Annales  de  la  Societe  Geologique  de  Belgique."  T.  XVI.,  2e 
Livr  ;  T.  XVII.,  4e  Livr.     From  the  Society. 

"  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  London."  Vol.  XXXIII., 
Nos.  218  and  219  ;  XXXIV,  No.  220.     From  the  Society. 

"Proceedings  of  the  United  States  National  Museum."  Vol. 
XII.  (1889).     From  the  Museum. 

"  Bulletin  of  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History,  New 
York."  Vol.  iii.  (1890),  No.  1,  and  pp.  113-128.  From  the 
Museum. 

"  Memoires  de  l'Academie  Imperiale  des  Sciences  de  St.  Peters- 
bourg."     viime-  Serie,  T.  xxxvii.,  Nos.  8-10.     From  the  Academy. 

"  Verhandlungen  der  k.  k.  zoologisch-botanischen  Gesellschaft 
in  Wien."     XL.  Bd.,  Parts  1  and  2  (1890).     From  the  Society. 

"  The  Pharmaceutical  Journal  of  N.S.W."  New  Series,  Vol. 
iii.,  Part  14  (Feb.,  1891).     From  the  Publishers. 

"  Proceedings  of  the  Second  Congress  of  the  Agricultural 
Bureau  of  South  Australia."     From  the  Secretary. 


DONATIONS.  47 

"Annali  del  Museo  Civico  di  Storia  Naturale  di  Genova." 
Serie  2%  Vols.  VII.-IX.  (1889-90).     From  the  Museum. 

"  Memoires  de  la  Societe  Zoologique  cle  France  pour  l'Annee 
1890."     T.  iii.,  Part  4  ;  "Bulletin."     T.  xv,  No.   10.     From  the 

Society. 

"  Report  of  the  Auckland  Institute  and  Museum  for  1890-91." 
From  the  Secretary. 

"  Notes  on  a  new  Tasmanian  Plant  of  the  N.O.  Burmamiiacece." 
By  Baron  von  Mueller,  K.C.M.G.,  F.R.S.  (Advance  copy). 
From  the  Royal  Society  of  Tasmania. 

"Victorian  Naturalist."  Vol.  vii.,  Nos.  11  and  12  (in  one, 
March  and  April,  1891).  From  the  Field  Naturalists'  Club  of 
Victoria. 

"Journal  of  Comparative  Medicine  and  Veterinary  Archives." 
Vol.  XIL,  No.  1  (Jan.,  1891).     From  the  Editor. 

"  American  Naturalist."  Vol.  XXIV.,  No.  288  (Dec,  1890). 
From  the  Editors. 

"  Bulletin  of  the  American  Geographical  Society."  Vol.  xxii., 
No.  4  (Dec,  1890).     From  the  Society. 

"  Bulletin  of  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  at  Harvard 
College."     Vol.  XX.,  Nos.  5-7.     From  the  Curator. 

Pamphlet  (4to)  entitled  "  Sculptured  Anthropoid  Ape  Heads, 
&c."     By  James  Terry.      From  the  Author. 

"Journal  of  Morphology."  Vol.  IV,  No.  2  (Oct.,  1890). 
Pamphlet  entitled  "Ueber  Temnocephala,  Blanchard."  Von  Max 
Weber.     From  Professor  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc. 

"  New  Zealand  Journal  of  Science."  Vol.  I.,  n.s.,  No.  2  (March, 
1890).     From  the  Publishers. 

"Insect  Life."  Vol.  V.,  No.  3  (Jan.,  1891).  From  the  Secre- 
tary, U.S.  Department  of  Agriculture. 


48  DONATIONS. 

"  Quarterly  Journal  of  the  Geological  Society,  London."  Vol. 
XLVIL,  Part  1  (1891).     From  the  Society. 

"  Annales  de  la  Societe  Beige  de  Microscopie,"  T.  XIV. 
(1890);  "Bulletin."    T.  XIV.-XVI.  (1889-90).     From  the  Society. 

"  Report  of  the  Second  Meeting  of  the  Australasian  Association 
for  the  Advancement  of  Science,  held  at  Melbourne,  1890."  From 
the  Association. 


49 


ON  THE  CLASSIFICATION  OF  EUCALYPTS. 

By  W.  Woolls,  Ph.D.,  F.L.S. 

No  genus,  whether  in  reference  to  the  identification  of  species, 
or  the  arranging  of  them  in  groups,  has  given  more  trouble  to 
botanists  than  that  of  Eucalyptus.  In  the  early  days  of  the 
colony,  when  only  a  few  species  were  known,  it  was  considered 
that  they  might  be  divided  into  sections  according  to  the  shape  of 
the  operculum  or  lid  of  the  flower-buds,  and  hence  Willdenow 
in  his  Species  Plantarum  (1799)  arranges  all  the  species  then 
known,  amounting  only  to  12  in  number,  under  the  two  divisions 
(1)  operculo  conico,  and  (2)  operculo  heniisphserico. 

With  the  exception  of  E.  obliqua,  L'Heritier  (which,  according 
to  Baron  F.  von  Mueller,  was  the  first  of  all  the  species  rendered 
known  in  Europe,  having  been  collected  in  Tasmania  shortly 
before  the  foundation  of  the  colony  of  N.  S.  Wales),  the  species 
recorded  by  Willdenow  were  found  in  the  primeval  forests  around 
Port  Jackson,  probably  on  the  spot  where  Sydney  now  stands. 
His  list  is  as  follows  : — 

(1)  Operculo  conico. 

E.  robusta,  Sm.  E.  resinifera,  Sm. 

E.  pilularis,  Sm.  E.  capitellata,  Sm. 

E.  tereticomis,  Sm.  E.  saligna,  Sm. 

(2)  Operculo  hemisphserico. 

E.  botryoides,  Sm.  E.  obliqua,  L'Her. 

E.  hcemastoma,  Sm.  E.  corymbosa,  Sm. 

E.  piperita,  Sm.  E.  paniculate/,,  Sm. 

(1)  As  far  as  can  be  ascertained  from  the  short  descriptions  of 
these  species,  E.  robusta  is  known  by  the  popular  name  of  "Swamp 


50  ON    THE    CLASSIFICATION    OF    EUCALYPTS, 

Mahogany  f  E.  pilularis,  "  Blackbutt  ";  E.  tereticornis,  "  Grey 
Gum  "j  E.  resinifera,  first  of  all  "  Red  Ironbark,"  but  according 
to  the  Flora  Australiensis  "Red  Mahogany";  E.  capiteUata,  the 
coast  form  of  "  Stringy-bark  ;"  and  E.  saligna,  "  Blue  or  Flooded 
Gum."  The  specific  name  is  not  appropriate,  as  the  leaves  are 
only  exceptionally  narrow  and  willow-like,  being  generally  of  the 
size  and  form  represented  in  Baron  Mueller's  Eucalyptograplma 
(Vol.  I.,  Dec.  2). 

(2)  E.  botryoides  is  known  as  "Bastard  Mahogany";  E.  hcemas- 
toma,  "White  Gum";  E.  piperita,  "Peppermint";  F.  obli qua,  the 
form  of  "Stringy-bark"  common  to  Tasmania,  Victoria,  and  the 
southern  part  of  N.  S.  Wales ;  E.  corymbosa,  "  Blood-wood  ";  and 
E.  paniculata,  "  White  Ironbark." 

The  plan  of  arranging  the  species  according  to  the  shape  of  the 
operculum  was  followed  by  D'Candolle  with  certain  modifications  ; 
and  George  Don,  F.L.S.,  in  enumerating  the  species  in  1832, 
gives  descriptions  of  them  in  a  similar  manner.  He  remarks,  on 
the  authority  of  R.  Brown,  that  there  were  in  New  Holland  (as 
Australia  was  then  called)  about  100  species,  but  "hardly  half  of 
tint  number  were  rightly  known."      His  list  is  as  follows  : — ■ 

I.  Alternifoli^e. 
*  Operculum  conical,  longer  than  the  calycine  cupula. 

1 .  E.  comuta,  Labill.  3.  E.  resinifera,  Sm. 

2.  E.  tereticornis,  Sm.  4.   E.  longifolia,  Link 

**  Operculum  conical,  equal  in  length  to  the  cupula. 

5.  E%robusta,  Sm.  11.  E.  virgata,  Sieb. 

G.  E.  marginata,  Sm.  12.  E.  micrantha,  DC. 

7.  E.  inerassata,  Labill.  13.  E.  stellulata,  Sieb. 

8.  E.  persicifolia,  Lodd.  14.  E.  oblonga,  DC. 

9.  E,  punctata,  DC.  15.  E.  vbninalis,  Labill. 
10.  E.  acervula,  Sieb.  16.  E.  capiteUata,  Sm. 

17.   E.  saligna,  Sm. 


BY    THE    REV.  W.   WOOLLS.  51 

** *  Operculum  nearly  conical  or  hemispherical,  shorter  than  the 

cupula. 

18.  E.  ovata,  Labill.  27.  E.  Lindleyana,  DC. 

19.  E.  scabra,  Dum.  Cours.  28.  E.  botryoides,  Sm. 

20.  E.  pilularis,  Sm.  29.  E.  piperita,  Sm. 

21.  JE.  radiata,  Sieb.  30.  E.  pallens,  DC. 

22.  E.  stricta,  Sieb.  31.  E.  obliqua,  L'Her. 

23.  E.  hcemastoma,  Sm.  32.   E.  corymbosa,  Sm. 

24.  E.  ligustrina,  DC.  33.    E.  paniculata,  Sm. 

25.  E.  amygdalina,  Labill,  34.  E.  gneorifolia,  DC. 

26.  E.  ambigua,  DC.  35.  E.  obtusifolia,  DC. 

**#*  Operculum  hemispherical,  much  broader  than  the  cupula. 
36.  E.  gomphocephala,  DC. 

*****  Mature   operculum  depressed  in  the  centre,    where  it  is 

umbonate,  shorter  than  the  cupula. 

37.   E.  globtdus,  Labill. 

II.  Oppositifoli^e. 

38.  E.  diver  sifolia,  Bon  pi.  40=  E.  cor  data,  Labill. 

39.  E.  pidvigeva,  Cunn.  41.  E.  pidveridenta,  Sims 

Doubtful  Sjiecies. 

*  Leaves  opposite. 

42.  E.  glauca,  DC.  45.  E.  Cunninghami,  Don 

43.  E.  piurpurascens,  Link  46.  E.  rigida,  Hoff. 

44.  E.  tuberculata,  Parm.  47.  E.  Iiy per  id  folia,  Dum.  Cours. 

**  Leaves  alternate. 

48.  E.  microphylla,  Willd.  51.   E.  elongata,  Link 

49.  E.  stenophylla,  Link  52.  E.  media,  Link 

50.  E.  myrti folia,  Link  53.  E.  reticulata,  Link 

54.  E.  umbellata,  Dum.  Cours. 


52  ON    THE    CLASSIFICATION    OF    EUCALYPTS, 

No  change  was  proposed  for  the  classification  of  the  Eucalypts 
until  1858,  when  Baron  Mueller,  in  a  paper  read  before  the 
Linnean  Society,  suggested  what  may  be  termed  the  "  cortical 
system,"  or  a  mode  of  arranging  the  species  according  to  the 
structure  of  the  bark,  whilst  at  the  same  time  he  directed  atten- 
tion to  the  valves  of  the  fruit  as  affording  an  additional  character 
for  the  identification  of  species.  The  Baron's  monograph  refers 
especially  to  the  Eucalypts  of  tropical  or  sub-tropi<al  Australia, 
but  the  suggestions  contained  in  it  may  be  applied  to  the  whole 
genus,  and  they  have  certainly  proved  exceedingly  useful  in 
determining  species  previously  doubtful,  and  of  showing  that  the 
comparative  length  of  the  operculum  is  not  always  a  safe  guide. 

The  Baron,  in  offering  the  cortical  system  as  a  contribution 
towards  the  better  arrangement  of  the  Eucalypts,  speaks  of  it  as 
one  accommodated  to  the  use  of  the  colonists,  regarding  it  evidently 
as  a  popular  way  of  grouping  the  species  according  to  their 
appearance  in  a  living  state,  and  of  ascertaining  whether  it  might 
not  ultimately  afford  a  means  of  placing  them  in  appropriate 
sections.  He  proposed,  therefore,  to  divide  the  genus  into  six 
sections  : — 

(1)  Leiophloice,  or  smooth-barked  trees,  such,  for  instance,  as  the 

"  White,"  "  Blue,"  and  "  Red  Gums." 

(2)  He?niphloicB,  or  half-barked  trees,  as  "  Box"  and  "  Blackbutt." 

(3)  Bhytiphloice,    or   trees    with     wrinkled    persistent   bark,    as 

"  Bloodwood,"  and  "  Peppermint." 

(4)  Pachyphloice,  or  trees  with  persistent  fibrous  bark,  as  "Stringy- 

bark  "  and  the  "  Mahoganies." 

(5)  Schizophloicr,  or  trees  with  persistent  deeply  furrowed  bark, 

as  the  "  Ironbarks." 

(6)  Lejridoiohloice,  or  trees  with  the  bark  persistent  on  the  trunk 

only,  and  forming  separate  pieces,  as  the  "  Moreton  Bay  Ash." 

The  38  species  enumerated  by  the  Baron  are  arranged  in  the 
following  manner  : — 


BY    THE    REV.  W.   WOOLLS. 


53 


1.  E.  tereticornis,  Sm. 

2.  E.  rostrata,  Schlecht 

3.  E.  signata 

4.  E.  variegata 

5.  E.  citriodora,  Hook. 

6.  E.  brevi folia 


II. 


13.   E.  tessalar 


16.  E.  poly  car  fa 

17.  E.  terminalis 

18.  E.  tectifica 

19.  E.  leptophleba 

20.  E,  microtheca 


26.  E.  fibrosa 

27.  E.  exserta 


30.  E.  crebra 


32.  E.  aurantiaca 


I.  Leiophloi^e. 

7.  E.  dichromophloia 

8.  /?.  hemilampra 

9.  i?.  bigalerita 

10.  i£.  latifolia 

11.  E.  platyphylla 

12.  ^.  aspera 

HEMIPHLOIiE. 

14.  ^.  semicorticata 
15.  i?.  confertiflora 

III.  Rhytiphloi^e. 

2\.  E.  patellar™ 

22.  ^.  trachyphloia 

23.  ^.  fo'co/or  A.C. 

24.  i?.  populnea 

25.  ^  ferruginea 

IV.  Pachyphloi^:. 

28.  i7.  ptychocarpa 

29.  #.  tetrodonta 

V.  Schizophloi^]. 

31.  i?.  melanophloia 
VI.  Lepidophloi^e. 

33.   ^.  phcenicea 
34.  i£.  melissodora. 


Sectio  dubia. 

35.  2?.  brachyandra  37.  i?.  odontocarpa 

36.  i£.  clavigera,  A.C.  38.   ^.  i~>achyphylla 

As  a  further  assistance  in  describing  species  of  Eucalyptus,  the 
Baron  next  suggested  that  attention  should  be  paid  to  the  shape 
and  opening  of  the  anthers  ;  and  in  his  Fragmenta  Phytographiaz 
Auntralice,  Vol.  n.  (1861),  in  which  he  devoted  38  pages  to  the 
consideration  of  the  genus,  he  notes  particularly  the  form  and 
colour  of  the  anthers.      I  am  not  aware  that  any  previous  botanist 


54  ON    THE    CLASSIFICATION    OF    EUCALYPTS, 

had  noticed  with  a  view  to  classification  that  the  variations  in  the 
stamens  afforded  a  means  whereby  species  might  be  grouped 
together;  but  Mr.  Bentham,  in  arranging  the  species  of  Eucalyptus 
in  the  Flora  Australiensis,  not  only  described  with  accuracy  the 
form  of  the  anthers  in  each  species,  but  made  the  variations  a 
basis  for  the  elaboration  of  his  anthereal  system.  In  the  Flora, 
Vol.  in.  (1866),  that  eminent  botanist  tells  us  of  the  difficulties  he 
had  experienced  in  grouping  the  species.  The  comparative  length 
of  the  operculum,  the  shape  and  position  of  the  leaves,  the  character 
of  the  inflorescence  and  fruit,  and  the  nature  of  the  bark  (of  which 
in  dried  specimens  he  was  totally  unable  to  judge),  had  all  failed 
to  give  him  a  satisfactory  mode  of  classification.  He  says  : — "  I 
have  thus  been  compelled  to  establish  groups  upon  such  characters 
as  appeared  to  me  the  most  constant  among  those  which  are 
supplied  by  the  specimens  :  in  the  first  place  upon  the  form  of  the 
anthers,  and  secondly  upon  that  of  the  fruit,  and  in  some  cases  on 
the  inflorescence  or  the  calyx."  It  is  evident  that  Mr.  Bentham 
regarded  his  arrangement  as  simply  provisional,  for  he  expresses  a 
hope  that  Baron  Mueller,  "  from  his  knowledge  of  the  gum-trees 
in  a  living  state,  might  be  able  to  devise  a  truly  natural  arrange- 
ment founded  upon  the  proposed  cortical  system,  or  any  other 
system  which  experience  may  induce  him  to  adopt." 

So  far  as  the  stamens  are  concerned,  Mr.  Bentham  grouped  the 
species  in  the  following  manner  : — 
Series  I. — Renantherce,  or  such  as  have  the  anthers  reniform  or 

broad  and  flat. 
Series  II. — Heterostemones,  or  those  which  have  the  outer  stamens 

anantherous. 
Series  III. — Porantherw,  or  those  that  have  small   and  globular 

anthers. 
Series  IV. — Micrantherce,  or  those  having  small  globular  anthers. 
Series  V. — Normales,  or  those  with  oblong-ovate  or  nearly  globose- 
anthers  opening  longitudinally. 
The  other  series  are  founded  on  the  inflorescence,  the  shape  of 
the  calyx,  the  position  of  the  valves  in  the  fruit,  and  the  nature  of 
the  fruit  itself. 


BY    THE    REV.  W.  W00LLS.  55 

In  his  preface  to  the  Eucalyptoyraphia,  1880,  (in  which  100 
species  are  figured  and  described),  Baron  Mueller  has  adopted  Mr. 
Bentham's  system,  with  certain  modifications,  for  all  the  Eucalypts 
in  Australia.  Whilst  still  retaining  the  opinion  that  the  "cortical 
system"  is  useful  for  work  in  the  field,  he  recognises  the  anthereal 
system  as  most  convenient  for  arranging  specimens  in  the  museum . 
Without,  however,  finally  arranging  his  figures  according  to  any 
fixed  plan,  the  Baron  says,  that,  on  full  consideration,  he  has 
deemed  it  best  to  leave  the  lithograms  unnumbered,  so  that  any 
one  who  "  had  occasion  to  utilise  his  work  might  arrange  the 
plates  either  in  accordance  with  the  method  derived  from  the 
stamens,  or  according  to  the  cortical  system,  or,  if  he  should  think 
it  more  convenient,  alphabetically." 

The  anthereal  system,  as  modified  by  the  Baron,  is  thus 
explained  : — 

I.  —Renantherece  \  ,..,.■,■,.    ,,      fco 

XT  V      as  already  indicated  in  the  flora. 

II.  — rorantkerece  ) 

III — Strongylantherecb)   having  anthers    not   or  scarcely   longer 

than  broad,  usually  round,  opening  by  longitudinal  slits. 
IV. — Orthantherece,  having  anthers  distinctly  longer  than  broad, 
opening  by  almost  parallel  slits. 

In  tracing  the  study  of  Eucalyptus,  it  may  be  seen  how  diflicult 
it  is  to  fix  on  any  peculiar  characters  for  the  determination  and 
grouping  of  species.  Before  R.  Brown  had  visited  these  shores 
and  had  returned  to  Europe  with  4000  specimens  of  plants  almost 
new  to  science,  few  species  of  Eucalypts  were  known.  Nor  do 
they  appear  to  have  received  much  addition  from  the  labours  of 
that  eminent  man,  for  as  his  collections  were  made  either  at  Port 
Jackson,  or  on  the  coasts  of  Australia  when  voyaging  with  Flinders 
(1801-1805),  he  had  no  opportunity,  of  discovering  any  inland 
species.  Brown,  however,  was  the  first  to  notice  that  some  of  the 
Eucalypts  had  a  double  operculum,  the  outer,  in  his  opinion,  being 
in  the  form  of  a  calyx,  and  the  inner  in  that  of  a  corolla.  The 
species  connected  with  his  name  are : — 

E.  calophylla,  R.Br.  ;  Western  Australia. 

E.  grandifolia,  R.Br.  ;  Northern  Australia. 


56  ON    THE    CLASSIFICATION    OF    EUCALYPTS, 

E.  perfoliate*,,  R.Br.  ;  Northern  Australia. 

JE.  Baxteri,  R.Br,  j  probably  from  Kangaroo  Island,  and  now 
regarded  as  a  variety  of  E.  santalifolia,  F.v.M. 

E.  hypericifolia,  R.Br.;  from  Risdon  Cove,  Tasmania,  and  now 
joined  with  E.  amygdalina,  Labill. 

E.  JRisdoni,  Hook.  ;  collected  by  Brown  at  Risdon  Cove. 

E.  clavigera,  A.  Cunn.  ;  collected  by  Brown  at  Careening  Cove, 
Northern  Australia. 

Caley,  who  resided  in  Parramatta  from  1800  to  1810,  when 
only  a  small  portion  of  the  colony  was  known,  could  not  have 
noticed  any  of  the  Eucalypts  excepting  in  those  parts  now 
distinguished  as  the  County  of  Cumberland  and  Hunter's  River, 
so  his  name  does  not  appear  to  be  connected  with  the  genus. 
Caley's  time  was  not  exclusively  devoted  to  botany,  for  he  made 
valuable  collections  in  every  department  of  natural  history.  It 
appears  that  he  was  the  first  to  send  to  Europe  specimens  of  the 
"  Red-flowering  Ironbark,"  and  the  large  variety  of  the  "  Swamp 
Mahogany."  He  also  collected  specimens  of  the  following 
species  : — 

E.  polyanthema,  Schau  E.  viminalis,  Labill. 

E.  bicolor,  A.  Cunn.  E.  metadata,  Hook. 

E.  longifolia,  Lk,  and  Otto.  E.  eugenioides,  Sieb. 

E.  siderophloia,  Benth. 

Caley  was  one  of  the  first  that  made  any  progress  in  crossing 
the  Blue  Mountains,  and  advanced  as  far  as  the  place  called 
iC  Caley's  Repulse,"  marked  by  a  heap  of  stones  near  Woodford  ; 
but  all  his  specimens  of  Eucalypts  were  collected  in  what  is  now 
known  as  the  County  of  Cumberland.  On  his  return  to  Europe, 
he  was  offered  by  the  King  of  Prussia  £350  for  his  collection  of 
birds,  but  he  refused  the  money  and  generously  presented  them  to 
the  Linnean  Society,  as  he  thought  it  discreditable  for  them  to  go 
out  of  England. 

It  was  not  until  the  Blue  Mountains  had  been  crossed  by 
Wentworth,  Blaxland,  and  Lawson  in  1813,  that  the  distin- 
guished botanist  and  explorer,  Allan  Cunningham,  had  an  oppor- 
tunity of  collecting  specimens  on  the  Mountains  and  beyond  the 


BY    THE    REV.  W.  WOOLLS.  57 

Dividing  Range.  He  accompanied  Lieut.  Oxley,  then  Surveyor- 
General  of  the  colony,  in  his  expedition  to  explore  the  Lachlan  in 
1817,  and  subsequently  visited  Liverpool  Plains  by  a  practicable 
pass  over  the  Range.  In  these  expeditions  he  discovered  several 
new  species,  whilst  about  the  same  period  Sieber  appears  to  have 
collected  specimens  on  the  Blue  Mountains.  Cunningham  was 
indefatigable  in  sending  collections  to  Europe,  but  such  was  the 
apathy  of  those  days  in  reference  to  botanical  discoveries  in 
Australia,  that  many  of  his  packages  remained  unopened  for  nearly 
a  quarter  of  a  century ;  and  it  was  not  until  Mr.  Bentham  was 
engaged  in  preparing,  with  the  assistance  of  Baron  Mueller,  his 
great  work  on  the  Flora  of  Australia,  that  Cunningham's  labours 
were  in  any  way  appreciated.  It  must  be  admitted  that  the  genus 
Eucalyptus  was  not  a  favourite  with  our  early  botanists.  They 
found  so  much  difficulty  in  distinguishing  one  species  from  another, 
that  it  used  to  be  said  the  workmen  at  Port  Jackson  knew  more 
about  the  different  kinds  of  Eucalypts  than  those  who  endeavoured 
to  define  species  by  the  usual  characters.  Even  within  my 
recollection,  it  was  maintained  by  some  that  many  of  what  are 
now  regarded  as  species  were  simply  varieties,  whilst  it  was 
asserted  by  others  that  a  process  of  hybridisation  was  going  on 
amongst  them.  In  the  English  Encyclopaedia,  which  was  published 
in  185  4,  a  writer  remarks  "in  many  species  the  leaves  are  so 
variable  in  their  form  and  other  characters  at  different  ages  of  the 
tree,  or  in  different  situations,  that  it  is  a  matter  of  difficulty  to 
know  how  they  are  to  be  botanically  distinguished  from  each 
other  ;  and  in  fact  the  subject  of  the  distinction  of  species  has 
hardly  yet  been  taken  up,  no  botanist  feeling  competent  to  under- 
take the  task  without  some  personal  acquaintance  with  the  plants 
in  a  native  state.  The  leaves,  instead  of  presenting  one  of  their 
surfaces  to  the  sky  and  the  other  to  the  earth,  as  is  the  case  with 
the  trees  in  Europe,  are  often  arranged  with  their  faces  vertical,  so 
that  each  side  is  equally  exposed  to  the  light."  He  then  goes  on 
to  lament  over  the  difficulty  of  understanding  the  names  by  which 
the  colonists  call  Eucalypts  in  different  parts  of  Australia,  and 
expresses  a  wish  that  some  settled  nomenclature  may  be  introduced. 


58  ON    THE    CLASSIFICATION    OF    EUCALYPTS, 

The  labours  of  Bentham  and  Mueller  have  formed  a  new  era 
in  the  history  of  Eucalyptus.  They  have  enabled  us  to  identify 
species  but  little  known  a  quarter  of  a  century  ago,  and  to  refer  to 
their  proper  places  in  a  systematic  arrangement  all  the  known 
Eucalypts.  It  is  to  be  hoped,  therefore,  in  due  course  that  a  "settled 
nomenclature  "  may  be  devised,  and  that  the  obscurities  arising 
from  '-local  names"  may  be  cleared  up.  In  reviewing  the 
different  modes  adopted  for  describing  and  grouping  the  species,  it 
will  be  seen  that,  whilst  some  of  the  former  characters  have  been 
abandoned,  or  are  now  only  partially  relied  on,  the  cortical  and 
anthereal  systems  have  thrown  much  light  on  a  subject  which  all 
botanists,  from  the  days  of  Brown  to  the  present  time,  have 
regarded  as  beset  with  many  difficulties. 

The  first  mode  of  arranging  species,  as  already  stated,  was 
founded  on  the  comparative  shape  and  length  of  the  operculum. 
This  method,  if  adopted  only  in  arranging  the  specimens  of  the 
last  century,  is  now  found  to  be  misleading,  for  the  operculum  of 
E.  saligna  is  sometimes  conical  and  sometimes  hemispherical,  and 
this  seems  to  have  led  to  some  confusion  in  mixing  together  the 
specimens  of  two  very  different  species,  the  one  a  gum-tree, 
generally  with  smooth  bark  (E.  saligna),  and  the  other  a 
mahogany  with  fibrous  bark  (E.  botryoides),  and  differing  very 
much  in  habit.  As  the  genus  became  better  known,  and  more 
species  were  added  to  Willdenow's  list,  it  was  found  that  some  had 
variable  opercula,  especially  in  E.  viminalis,  and  the  larger  forms  of 
E.  hcemastoma,  E.  resinifera,  and  E.  punctata,  and  that  the  double 
opercula  were  confined  to  a  few  species,  such  as  E.  globulus, 
E.  maculata,  E.  eximia,  and  E.  peltata.  For  a  long  time,  how- 
ever, the  system  of  classifying  by  the  operculum  was  continued  for 
the  want  of  any  better,  and  it  was  sought  by  means  of  noting 
other  peculiarities  in  that  organ,  and  by  recording  the  shape  and 
position  of  the  leaves,  to  distribute  the  species  with  some  degree  of 
regularity.  Those  who  paid  any  attention  to  Eucalypts  before 
Mueller  and  Bentham  devised  their  respective  systems,  are  well 
aware  of  the  mistakes  which  arose  from  trusting  to  any  descrip- 
tions founded  simply  on   the  character  of  the  opercula  and  the 


BY    THE    REV.   W.  WOOLLS.  59 

leaves,  and  they  recognise  the  difficulty  of  relying  on  brief 
descriptions,  which,  according  to  the  judgment  of  different 
observers,  were  sometimes  applied  to  very  different  trees.  In 
referring  to  some  of  the  lists  which  were  published  half  a  century 
since,  it  is  amusing  to  notice  the  mistakes  that  occurred  in  the 
misapplication  of  botanical  names.  Thus,  for  instance,  the  blue- 
gum  (E.  saliyna)  was  referred  to  E.  piperita,  or  the  peppermint ; 
the  stringy-bark  (E.  capitellata  or  E.  eugenioides)  to  E.  robusta  the 
swamp  mahogany  ;  white  gum  (E.  hcemastoma)  to  E.  tereticornis, 
grey  gum  or  bastard  box  ;  and  spotted  gum  (E.  maculata)  to  E. 
hcemastoma.  It  is  no  wonder  that  the  systematic  arrangement 
proved  so  fallacious,  when  it  is  considered  that  the  operculum, 
even  in  the  same  species,  is  subject  to  variation,  and  that  the 
leaves  are  of  various  shapes  and  sizes  on  the  same  kind  of  trees. 
This  is  seen  in  some  species  more  than  in  others,  whilst,  as  Mr. 
Bentiiam  found,  as  the  result  of  long  observation,  that  no  sure 
diagnostic  characters  could  be  taken  from  such  sources.  It  is  true 
that  in  some  species  the  venation  is  well  defined,  and  that  even 
a  few  may  be  determined  by  the  shape  of  the  leaf,  but  these 
are  exceptional  cases ;  and  perhaps  of  all  known  genera  no 
genus  affords  less  assistance  to  the  systematic  botanist  in  the 
character  of  its  foliage  than  Eucalyptus.  When,  therefore,  so 
many  difficulties  presented  themselves  from  previous  endeavours 
to  classify  our  Eucalypts,  Baron  Mueller's  plan  of  grouping  them 
according  to  the  nature  of  their  bark  was  hailed  with  satisfaction 
by  observers  in  these  colonies.  The  system,  it  is  true,  cannot  be 
appreciated  by  European  botanists,  or  those  who  have  not  an 
opportunity  of  seeing  the  trees  in  a  living  state;  but  to  persons  who 
are  studying  the  species  as  they  appear  in  their  native  forests,  it 
affords  an  easy  method  of  referring  them  to  a  recognised  position. 
Besides,  the  terms  "Gums,"  "Stringy-barks,"  and  "Iron-barks"  are 
so  natural  and  familiar  to  the  colonists,  that  any  system  founded 
on  the  smooth,  fibrous,  or  rugged  character  of  the  bark,  commends 
itself  to  them.  The  cortical  system,  therefore,  has  proved  a  step 
in  the  right  direction,  and  it  may  be  regarded  as  a  popular  method 
of  overcoming  some  portion  of  the  difficulty  which  has  attended 


60  ON    THE    CLASSIFICATION    OF    EUCALYPTS, 

the  study  of  our  Eucalypts.  But,  after  all,  as  the  learned  Baron 
himself  would  acknowledge,  the  system  is  only  an  instalment 
towards  the  object  sought  after,  for  as  certain  trees  are  as  variable 
in  their  bark  as  others  are  in  their  leaves,  his  sectional  arrange- 
ment does  not  hold  universally.  There  are  exceptions,  for 
instance,  to  the  Leiopthloice ;  for  E.  hcemastoma,  E.  saligna,  E. 
viminalis,  E.  stellidata,  and  E.  punctata  are  sometimes  half- 
barked,  whilst  instances  occur  in  which  E.  tereticornis  has  fibrous 
bark.  The  different  kinds  of  Box  are  not  always  half-barked,  and 
so  some  of  the  Hemiphloice  incline  to  the  Leiophloice  in  extreme 
age.  I  have  noticed  this  peculiarity  in  E.  largijiorens,  and  in 
some  of  the  blackbutts  (E.  pUularis).  The  fibrous-barked  trees, 
such  as  blood-wood,  stringy-bark,  and  mahogany,  are  less  liable  to 
variation  in  the  bark  ;  but  in  the  woolly-butt  (E.  longifolia),  of 
which  the  Baron  regards  the  bark  as  wrinkled,  somewhat  fibrous 
and  persistent,  I  have  seen  old  trees  which  might  have  been 
mistaken  for  E.  tereticornis,  their  trunks  having  completely  shed 
their  bark  and  become  similar  to  gum-trees.  This  species,  how- 
ever, is  well  defined  by  its  large  flowers  and  fruits,  usually 
in  threes  ;  but  the  specific  name  longifolia  is  scarcely  applicable 
to  the  trees  as  they  advance  in  age.  The  iron-bark  group  {Schizo- 
phloice)  is  less  liable  to  variation  in  the  nature  of  its  bark  than 
any  of  the  preceding  sections ;  and  yet  in  some  forms  of 
E.  paniculata  the  bark  is  less  rough  and  deeply  furrowed  than  in 
its  allies,  whilst  in  exceptional  cases,  when  it  goes  under  the 
popular  names  of  "Iron-bark  Box,"  and  "Bastard  Iron-bark,"  the 
wood  and  fruit  are  those  of  iron-bark,  but  the  bark  less  rugged. 
Some  years  ago,  when  the  late  Mr.  Thomas  Shepherd  was  residing 
with  Mr.  Bell,  at  Cabramatta,  he  called  my  attention  to  a  tree 
which,  so  far  as  its  general  characters  were  concerned,  appeared 
to  be  an  iron-bark,  the  shape  of  the  buds,  flowers,  and  fruit  being 
similar  to  those  of  E.  paniculata,  and  the  wood  being,  in  the 
opinion  of  the  workmen,  like  the  ordinary  iron-bark  of  the  neigh- 
bourhood. Mr.  Shepherd  called  the  tree  "Black  Box"  and  "Iron- 
bark  Box,"  and  entertained  an  idea  that  it  might  be  an  undescribed 
species.     Although  I  have  had  specimens  of  this  tree  for  some 


BY    THE    REV.  W.  WOOLLS.  61 

years,  it  is  only  of  late  that  I  have  come  to  the  conclusion  that 
the  tree  in  question  is  really  an  iron-bark,  for  on  Mr,  H.  Bray's 
property  at  Concord  a  similar  one  has  been  pointed  out  to  me. 
This  the  workmen  called  "  Bastard  Iron-bark,"  as  the  wood 
resembles  that  of  iron-bark,  whilst  the  bark  is  not  furrowed  as 
iron-barks  usually  are,  but  is  more  like  that  of  box  or  woolly-butt- 
Having  examined  the  fruit  and  leaves  of  this  tree,  and  having 
ascertained  that  the  wood  is  similar  to  that  of  iron-bark,  I  am 
now  convinced  that  the  tree  which  puzzled  Mr.  T.  Shepherd  and 
that  growing  in  Mr.  Bray's  paddock  are  identical,  both  of  them 
being  varieties  of  E.  paniculata.  If  hybridisation  were  possible 
in  the  sen  us,  one  would  think  that  the  "Iron-bark  Box"  is  a 
cross  between  iron-bark  and  box,  but  according  to  the  opinion  of 
the  late  eminent  naturalist  W.  S.  Macleay,  F.L.S.,  the  impregna- 
tion of  the  flowers  takes  place  before  the  operculum  falls  off,  and 
hence  in  such  a  case  crossing  cannot  be  effected.  As  this  matter 
has  never  been  carefully  investigated  by  any  observer,  nothing- 
like  certainty  can  be  affirmed  of  the  probability  or  improbability 
of  hybridisation.  If,  indeed,  such  a  contingency  might  be  supposed, 
it  would  relieve  us  of  many  difficulties  in  the  fixing  of  species,  and 
lead  to  the  belief  that  some  of  the  forms  which  resemble  each  other 
closely  in  flowers  and  fruit,  but  differ  only  in  wood  and  bark, 
are  merely  varieties.  If  nature  does  not  admit  of  crossing  in  the 
genus  Eucalyptus,  it  certainly  encourages  that  of  grafting,  for,  in 
the  neighbourhood  of  Mudgee,  "the  Apple"  ( Angoplwra  inter- 
media) may  be  seen  grafted  naturally  on  E.  rostrata,  whilst,  on 
the  Richmond  Common,  a  similar  eccentricity  may  be  seen  on  E. 
tereticomis.  Whatever  may  be  discovered,  however,  in  reference 
to  natural  changes  which  may  be  going  on  amongst  our  Eucalpyts, 
Baron  Mueller's  cortical  system  is  one  of  the  greatest  utility,  for 
although  there  are  exceptional  cases  in  which  there  is  some 
uncertainty  from  variation  of  the  bark  in  the  same  species,  yet, 
generally  speaking,  his  grouping  can  be  maintained,  and  in  cases 
where  the  bark  seems  abnormal  or  differing  from  the  ordinary 
type,  mistakes  may  be  obviated  by  an  examination  of  the  flowers 
and  fruits. 


62  ON    THE    CLASSIFICATION    OF    EUCALYPTS, 

The  anthereal  system,  which  was  in  some  degree  suggested  by 
Baron  Mueller's  descriptions  in  his  Fragmenta,  and  was  subse- 
quently worked  out  with  great  ingenuity  by  Mr.  Bentham  in  the 
Flora  Australiensis,  is  that  now  generally  adopted  by  botanists. 
The  Baron,  in  his  preface  to  his  Fuca/yptographia,  expresses  the 
opinion  that  it  is  most  convenient  for  the  arranging  of  specimens 
in  herbaria,  and  that  the  method  brings  also  into  close  contact 
most  of  the  Eucalypts  which  are  bound  together  by  natural 
affinity.  But  whilst  these  gnat  men  have  rendered  incalculable 
assistance  in  the  classification  of  the  genus,  it  remains  for  further 
investigation  to  clear  up  the  anomalies  which  still  exist  in  the 
anthereal  system.  Though  as  a  system  for  grouping  the  species  it 
proves  so  useful,  yet  it  must  be  confessed  that  it  is  not  so  satis- 
factory to  the  general  observer,  or  to  one  who  has  not  the  leisure 
for  microscopic  investigations.  When  the  anthers  are  small  or  in 
their  configuration  vacillating  between  two  sections,  a  powerful  lens 
or  even  a  microscope  may  be  necessary  for  accurate  determination. 
Few  persons  have  the  time  or  the  ability  for  such  examinations, 
and,  therefore,  whilst  the  system  may  give  great  assistance  to  the 
scientific  botanist  in  his  museum,  it  cannot  be  of  general  use  in 
the  field  or  to  the  majority  of  observers.  Nor,  indeed,  is  it  without 
its  difficulties  to  the  botanist,  for,  as  the  Baron  candidly  acknow- 
ledges, some  species  may  be  regarded  as  transits  from  one  section 
to  another,  and  that  the  characteristics  of  aberrant  forms  of  any 
species  are  not  covered  by  his  synopsis.  It  is  probable  that  as  the 
species  become  better  known  and  those  of  one  district  are  compared 
with  those  of  another,  the  general  characters  of  the  anthers  in  such 
species  may  be  more  accurately  determined;  but  still  the  difficulty 
must  remain  of  subjecting  the  floral  organs  to  minute  inquiry, 
or  indeed  of  finding  the  anthers  in  a  proper  state  for  examination. 
Though,  in  the  majority  of  instances,  the  anthereal  system  brings 
into  close  contact  species  allied  by  natural  affinity,  yet  there  are 
some  remarkable  exceptions  to  the  rule.  For  instance,  some  of  the 
"Iron-barks"  stand  in  Porantherea?,  and  others  in  Parallelanthereae. 
The  same  may  be  said  of  some  of  the  "  Mahoganies  ;"  whilst  a  few 
of  the  "  Gum  Trees  "  are  separated  from   those  very  similar  in 


BY    THE    REV.  W.  WOOLLS.  63 

appearance.  But  these  irregularities,  as  they  would  be  popularly 
regarded,  are  of  much  less  importance  than  mistakes  which  have 
arisen  from  a  too  rigid  application  of  the  an  thereat  system  without 
reference  to  the  bark,  wood,  or  habits  of  certain  trees.  In  the 
excellent  "  Forest  Flora  of  South  Australia"  by  Mr.  J.  E.  Brown, 
F.L.S.,  two  such  instances  occur,  the  first  in  E.  leucoxylon,  F.v.M., 
and  the  second  in  E.  panicidata,  Sm.  The  former  of  these  is  called 
in  South  Australia  "  White  Gum,"  "  Blue  Gum,"  and  "  Pink 
Gum,"  and  from  the  character  of  its  bark  it  stands  in  the  Baron's 
Leiophloice.  Its  specific  name  denotes  that  the  wood  is  white,  and 
the  tree  is  said  to  assume  a  variety  of  forms.  Now,  by  adhering 
too  strictly  to  the  anthereal  system,  this  gum  tree  is  said  to  be 
identical  with  our  "Red-flowering  Iron-bark"  of  Eastern  Australia, 
a  tree  remarkable  for  the  dark  colour  of  its  wood,  and  the  deep 
fissures  of  its  rough  bark.  There  is  certainly  great  similarity  in  the 
flowers  and  fruit,  but  to  those  who  have  had  opportunities  of  seeing 
the  two  trees  in  their  native  forests,  it  seems  marvellous  that 
they  should  be  regarded  as  the  same  species.  Our  red-flowering 
iron-bark  is  Cunningham's  E.  sideroxylon,  and  I  believe  that 
Baron  Mueller  now  recognises  it  as  such.  E.  paniculata  is  called 
in  South  Australia  the  panicle-flowered  "White  Gum,"  a  small 
tree  never  found  to  exceed  30  or  40  feet,  having  deciduous  bark, 
light-coloured  wood,  and  a  stunted  spreading  habit.  There  can  be 
no  doubt  that  the  true  E.  panicidata  belongs  to  Port  Jackson,  as 
it  was  one  of  the  first  of  which  specimens  were  forwarded  from 
N.  S.  Wales  to  Europe,  and  which,  since  the  publication  of  the 
Flora  Australie?isis,  has  been  identified  as  the  "  Pale  or  White 
Iron-bark  "  (so  called  to  distinguish  it  from  the  iron-barks  with 
darker  wood).  This  tree  rises  to  100  feet  and  upwards,  has  very 
tough  wood,  persistent  bark,  and  an  upright  habit.  The  two 
trees,  notwithstanding  the  close  resemblance  of  flowers  and  fruit, 
must  be  regarded  as  two  distinct  species.  Another  instance  occurs 
in  E.  polyanthema,  under  which  the  "Poplar-leaved  Box"  or 
"Lignum  vitas"  of  the  low  countrv  is  confused  with  the  "Red 
Box  or  Slaty  Gum  "  beyond  the  Dividing  Range  The  trees  differ 
very  much  from  each  other  in  bark,  wood,  and  habit,  for  whilst 


64  ON    THE    CLASSIFICATION    OF    EUCALYPTS, 

that  of  the  low  country  is  a  small  tree  with  hard  dark-coloured 
wood  and  little  esteemed,  the  "  Red  Box  "  beyond  Mudgee  is  a 
fine  tree  with  wood  highly  valued  in  the  building  of  bridges,  &c. 

In  the  consideration  of  specific  differences,  little  stress  has  been 
laid  on  the  nature  and  position  of  leaves,  because  they  are  so 
variable  even  iu  the  same  species.  It  is  true  that  some  have 
alternate,  and  some  opposite  leaves,  and  some  have  the  leaves 
opposite  when  young,  and  alternate  as  they  grow  older;  but  these 
variations  do  not  afford  any  character  for  sectional  division.  The 
trees  which  have  opposite  leaves  are  chiefly  : — 

E.  pidvemdeyita   (including        E.  tetragona  (nearly  so) 

E.  ciaerea)  E.  odontocarpa  )  (opposite  or 

E.  mehmopJdoia  E.  tetrodonta      J  alternate) 

E.  cordata  (Tasmania)  E.  gamophylla 

E.  macrocarpa        .  #.  setosa 

E.  perjo'iata  E.  pruinosa  (nearly) 

E.  erythrocorys  (nearly  so)        E.  doratoxylon  (nearly) 
Those  which  have  the  leaves  opposite  when  young  are  :  — 
E.  vimincdis  E.  Stuart iana 

E.  pilularis  E.  goniocalyx 

E.  globidus  E.  amygdalina 

To  these  may  be  added  a  few  species  which  appear  with  opposite 
leaves  simply  as  seedlings;  but  it  does  not  seem '  probable  that, 
even  with  a  more  extensive  knowledge  of  the  foliage  (desirable  as 
such  information  is),  much  advantage  would  be  gained  in  the  way 
of  classification. 

Some  have  thought  that,  in  the  determination  of  doubtful 
species,  the  texture  of  the  wood  should  be  considered.  It  is  no 
doubt  very  useful  for  cabinet  purposes  to  collect  specimens  of  the 
wood ;  and  the  late  Sir  William  Macarthur  was  in  the  habit  of 
having  such  neatly  arranged  in  the  form  of  books.  I  could 
imagine  that  a  set  of  Eucalypt  woods,  carefully  polished  so  as  to 
exhibit  the  grain  for  examination,  would  assist  materially  in  the 
identification  of  some  species,  but  I  caunot  think  that  150  different 
kinds  of  woods,  arranged  in  the  way  specified,  would  contribute 
much  towards  classification.  I  have  been  told  by  practical  men 
that  the  timber  of  some  trees  differs  very  much  in  proportion  to 


BY    THE    REV.  W.  WOOLLS.  65 

its  age,  and  that  even  in  some  cases  one  side  of  a  tree  has  better 
wood  than  the  other.  The  soil  also  is  said  to  affect  the  character 
of  the  wood.  Without  seeing  the  bark  as  well  as  the  wood,  even 
experienced  men  are  deceived,  and  I  have  heard  of  cases  in  which 
inferior  species  have  been  passed  off  as  iron-bark  for  railway 
sleepers. 

The  late  lamented  Tenison- Woods,  F.G.S.,  F.L.S.,  who  had  paid 
considerable  attention  to  the  genus  Eucalyptus,  was  of  opinion 
that  much  might  be  done  by  studying  the  shape,  size,  and 
peculiarities  of  the  seeds,  and  he  had  commenced  collecting  them 
with  that  view.  There  are  great  differences  in  the  seeds,  as  may 
be  seen  by  the  figures  in  Baron  Mueller's  Eitccdyptographia,  and  of 
the  100  species  there  illustrated,  the  following  have  a  membrane 
or  wing  attached  to  them. 

E.  abergiana.  E.  tetragona. 

E.  pachyphylla.  E.  ficifolia. 

E.  corymbosa.  E.  oldfieldii. 

E.  setosa.  E.  gamojihylla. 

E.  ptychocarpa.  E.  pyriformis. 

E.  foelscheana.  E.  santalifolia. 

E.  todtiana.  E.  tessalaris. 

It  is  well  to  place  on  record  any  further  differences  that  may  be 
noticed,  as  they  may  serve  as  notes  for  the  fixing  of  species  ;  but 
probably  nothing  is  of  greater  importance  than  the  shape  of  the 
fruit,  the  position  of  the  capsule,  the  number  of  its  cells,  and  the 
appearance  of  the  valves.  Some  years  ago,  when  writing  about 
Eucalyptus,  I  remarked  that,  "viewed  practically,  Baron  Mueller's 
method  of  grouping  our  Eucalypts,  according  to  the  nature  and 
texture  of  the  bark,  is  the  best  system  which  has  yet  been  promul- 
gated ;  and  whilst  future  observations  may  render  it  more  precise 
by  defining  with  accuracy  the  particular  group  under  which  each 
species  should  be  ranged,  the  basis  of  the  system  is  likely  to  be 
permanent."  The  anthereal  system  had  not  then  been  elaborated, 
nor  was  I  aware  that  the  cortical  system  was  liable  to  any  serious 
exceptions.  I  do  not  see,  however,  any  reason  to  alter  the  opinion 
I  expressed,  for  by  paying  more  attention  to  the  figure  and 
openings  of  the  anthers  than  was  thought  of  at  that  time,  any 
5 


66  ON    THE    CLASSIFICATION    OF    EUCALYPTS. 

mistakes  arising  from  the  abnormal  state  of  the  hark  may  be 
rectified.  To  the  passage  already  quoted  I  added,  "  As  regards 
the  fixing  of  species  and  of  ascertaining  the  amount  of  variation 
to  which  some  are  liable,  other  principles  must  be  applied.  Some 
species,  indeed,  are  marked  by  the  double  operculum,  some  by 
winged  seeds,  and  others  by  the  colour  of  their  stamens  ;  but  the 
shape,  cells,  valves,  &c,  of  the  seed-vessels  present  very  important 
notes  of  distinction  and  deserve  the  most  attentive  study.  Hence 
I  believe  that  these  considerations,  when  taken  in  connection  with 
the  cortical  group  to  which  the  respective  species  belong,  will  be 
found  most  efficacious  in  settling  many  difficulties."  Since  1860, 
Baron  Mueller  has  made  wonderful  progress  in  the  description  of 
new  species  and  in  illustrating  their  peculiar  properties,  but  I  still 
think  that  if  any  further  improvement  is  to  be  made  in  the  matter 
of  classification,  it  must  be  by  the  study  of  their  fruits.  To  collect 
the  fruits  of  all  known  Eucalypts,  and  to  form  groups  on  the  basis 
I  have  suggested,  would  be  the  work  of  time  and  might  need 
almost  a  specialist ;  but  if  it  be  true,  as  the  Baron  is  fond  of  saying, 
that  not  only  in  religion  but  in  the  study  of  the  vegetable  kingdom, 
species  are  known  by  their  fruits,  it  may  reasonably  be  expected 
that  to  the  cortical  and  anthereal  systems,  a  carpological  one  may 
yet  be  added,  which  will  dissipate  the  obscurity  which  still  rests 
on  the  true  characters  of  some  species,  and  render  the  study  of 
Eucalyptus  as  practicable  as  that  of  any  other  genus.  Some  of  our 
great  naturalists  have  been  so  impressed  with  the  importance  of 
the  fruit  and  its  seed,  as  *  constituting  the  crown  and  end  of  the 
whole  nature  and  vitality  of  plants/'  that  they  have  not  hesitated 
to  regard  them  as  superior  to  the  other  parts  in  dignity;  and 
probably,  if  the  fruits  of  all  our  Eucalypts  could  be  procured  and 
arranged  systematically  according  to  their  variations,  additional 
light  would  be  thrown  on  the  matter  of  classification.  Baron  F. 
von  Mueller  has  already  hinted  at  this  in  his  l£ucalyptographiaf 
and  should  he  be  spared  to  take  a  comprehensive  view  of  the 
whole  genus  (including  the  species  of  those  Eucalypts  which  at 
present  are  but  partially  known),  he  would  add,  if  it  were  possible, 
to  the  world-wide  reputation  he  has  already  acquired. 


67 


THE  LAND   MOLLUSCAN  FAUNA  OF  BRITISH  NEW 

GUINEA. 

By  C.  Hedley,  F.L.S.,  Corr.  Mem. 

(Plates  ix. -xi I.  and  XII.  bis.) 

To  naturalists  generally  the  "  Land  of  the  Bird  of  Paradise  " 
has  ever  been  a  source  of  interest,  but  to  Australian  students  such 
a  land,  whose  past  history  is  intimately  bound  up  with  that  of  our 
own  continent,  should  be  especially  attractive.  Many  archaic 
forms  doubtless  survive  in  that  vast  unknown  region  whose  moun- 
tains, the  loftiest  in  Australasia,  possess  every  climate  from  the 
cold  zone  above  the  tree  line  to  the  tropical  jungles  of  the  littoral. 
Twenty  years  ago  the  coast  of  British  New  Guinea  was  a  blank 
on  the  map,  being  less  known  than  that  of  any  country  outside  the 
Polar  regions,  and  to-day  the  interior  is  almost  entirely  unexplored. 
What  scanty  information  we  possess  concerning  its  fauna  and  flora 
is,  therefore,  of  recent  date.  The  first  fruits  of  the  conchological 
harvest  were  gathered  by  the  naturalists  of  H.M.S.  "Rattlesnake," 
who  visited  the  Louisiades  in  1849-50,  and  described  by  Forbes  in 
an  appendix  to  the  account  of  that  voyage.  Sir  W.  Macleay,  in 
1875,  touched  at  Yule  Island  in  the  "  Chevert,"  in  which  neigh- 
bourhood many  new  species  were  obtained  by  his  staff,  descriptions 
of  which  by  Brazier  will  be  found  in  the  earlier  volumes  of  this 
Society's  Proceedings.  During  the  same  and  following  years 
D'Albettis  amassed,  both  on  Yule  Island  and  the  Fly  River,  a 
fine  collection  of  mollusca  which  were  subsequently  treated  of  by 
Tapparone-Canefri  (Annali  del  Museo  Civico  di  Genova,  xix.).  A 
trader  and  collector,  Mr.  A.  Goldie,  procured  many  shells  during 
various  excursions  along  the  coast  and  in  the  interior,  most  of 
which  went  to  the  British  Museum,  and  were  described  by  Smith 
in  the  Annals  and   Magazine  of   Natural  History.      In  1889  a 


68       THE    LAND    MOLLUSCAN    FAUNA    OF    BRITISH    NEW    GUINEA, 

collection  was  made  by  Sir  W.  Macgregor's  party  in  the  Louisiades  ; 
this  was  presented  to  the  British  Museum  and  was  also  described 
by  Smith. 

British  New  Guinea  comprises  the  south-eastern  quarter  of 
Papua  with  the  adjacent  reefs  and  islands,  except  those  falling 
within  the  Queensland  boundary,  between  the  meridians  of  141° 
and  155°  of  E.  longitude,  and  the  parallels  of  8°  and  12°  of  S. 
latitude.  Though  these  political  boundaries  do  not  form  the 
natural  limits  of  the  fauna,  it  will  be  more  convenient  to  restrict 
ourselves  to  the  consideration  of  the  mollusca  of  the  British 
province.  For  while  the  collections  made  in  foreign  colonies  are 
described  by  foreign  writers  in  a  foreign  language,  and  the  types 
deposited  in  more  or  less  inaccessible  museums,  the  specimens 
obtained  in  the  British  area  are  naturally  referred  to  British  or 
Australian  naturalists.  Information  regarding  this  fauna  is  so 
scattered  through  various  publications  that  I  believe  that  I  have 
consulted  the  convenience  of  future  inquirers  by  adding  to  the 
results  of  my  own  researches  a  summary  of  the  labours  of  my 
predecessors. 

For  an  opportunity  of  investigating  this  interesting  region  T  am 
indebted  to  Sir  William  Macgregor,  M.D.,  K.C.M.G.,  Adminis- 
trator of  British  New  Guinea,  whose  guest  I  was  from  May  to 
August,  1890,  and  under  whose  auspices  I  was  enabled  to  visit 
the  St.  Joseph  River,*  Milne  Bay,  &c.  I  take  this  occasion  to 
record  my  thanks  both  to  his  Honor  and  to  the  gentlemen  of  his 
staff  who  so  often  and  so  kindly  assisted  me  in  my  scientific 
pursuits. 

Part  of  the  material  dealt  with  in  this  communication  I  collected 
personally,  part  was  spoil  of  the  Fly  River  expedition  of  the 
previous  year,  part  was  obtained  for  me  under  the  directions  of 
Sir  William  by  Messrs.  Kowald  and  Belford  in  the  Louisiade, 
Trobriand,  and  Woodlark  Archipelagos,  and  for  part  I  am 
indebted  to  Messrs.  Masters   and  Brazier,  of  the   Macleay  and 

*  Only  the  latest  maps  show  the  St.  Joseph  River,  which  rises  under  Mt. 
Yule  and  flows  into  Hall  Sound. 


BY    C.   HEDLEY.  69 

Australian  Museums  respectively.  To  Mr.  Brazier  I  am  particu- 
larly obliged  for  much  information,  assistance  in  determining 
species,  and  for  the  loan  of  notes,  papers,  and  specimens. 

The  land  shells  of  the  province  exhibit  four  rather  distinct 
geographical  divisions  : — 

(a)  The  alpine  fauna,  whose  sole  known  member  is  Rhytida 
ylobosa.  Judging  from  the  flora  of  these  altitudes,  as  studied  by 
Baron  von  Mueller  (Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Vic.  i.  pt.  2,  p.  1),  the 
mollusca  will  probably  exhibit  affinities  with  those  of  Tasmania  or 
Victoria.  Cystopelta  and  Paryphanta  are  forms  whose  discovery 
may  be  anticipated. 

(b)  Secondly,  that  region  lying  between  Port  Moresby  and  the 
Fly  River.  Typical  of  this  area  are  Hadra  broadbenti,  Geotroclius 
taylorianus,  and  Helicina  coxeni.  From  this  fauna  the  tropical 
mollusca  of  Queensland  were  perhaps  derived,  the  colonists 
migrating  across  the  dry  bed  of  Torres  Straits.  Proceeding  along 
the  coast  eastwards  from  Hula  and  Aroma  to  Orangerie  Bay,  we 
pass  through  a  district  quite  unknown. 

(c)  A  third  province  commences  at  South  Cape  Island  in  the 
west  and  includes  all  the  eastern  extremity  of  New  Guinea  with 
the  outiying  islands  of  Loggia,  Samarai,  Sarabai,  Seidea,  and 
Basilaki,  or  as  they  were  formerly  called  Heath,  Dinner,  Hayter, 
Basilisk,  and  Moresby.  I  believe  that  the  north-east  coast  will 
fall  within  this  province  whose  typical  members  are  Hadra  rehsei, 
Nanina  Jmnsteini,  and  Geotrochus  brmneriensis. 

(d)  The  fourth  fauna  inhabits  the  Louisiade,  the  Dentie- 
casteaux,*  the  Trobriand,  and  the  Woodlark  Archipelagos.  Charac- 
teristic forms  are  the  Geotrochi  allied  to  louisiadensis,  and  the 
gigantic  Pupinellse  allied  to  grandis.  Of  some  species,  Nanina 
divisa,  Chloritis  leei,  and  Helicina  insularum  for  example,  each 
island  appears  to  possess  a  form,  generally  a  variation  peculiar  to 
it.  Many  species  have,  through  the  blunders  of  unscientific 
collectors,  been  ascribed  to  the  Dentrecasteaux  Islands.     I  have 

*  The  spelling  of  this  name  here  adopted  is  not  the  version  usually 
accepted  but  that  of  the  official  account  of  Dentrecasteaux's  Voyages. 


70       THE    LAND    MOLLUSCAN    FAUNA    OF    BRITISH    NEW    GUINEA, 

myself  collected  G.  rollsianus  and  P.  brazierce  upon  Fergusson 
Island,  and  these,  with  the  ubiquitous  L.  vitreum,  are  the  only 
land  shells  yet  known  as  indigenous  to  the  group.  These  two 
characteristic  forms  would  indicate  that  the  fauna  of  these 
magnificent  mountain  islands  will  prove  to  be  related  rather  to  that 
of  the  distant  Louisiades  than  to  that  of  the  nearer  mainland. 


1.    OXYTES    HERCULES,    n.Sp. 

(Plate  ix.,  figs.  1-2.) 

Shell  narrowly  perforate,  solid,  large,  orbicular,  depressed, 
sharply  keeled  at  the  periphery  ;  colour,  above  brownish-yellow, 
darkening  as  the  whorls  increase,  on  the  base  chestnut  radiately 
painted  with  brownish-yellow,  these  tints  reside  solely  in  the 
epidermis  beneath  which  the  shell  is  livid,  peristome  pink  ;  whorls 
6  J,  slowly  and  regularly  increasing,  above  flattened  ;  sculpture, 
fiist  three  whorls  nearly  smooth  showing  minute  granulations 
under  the  lens,  on  the  outer  whorls  a  few  faint  impressed  spiral 
lines  are  decussated  by  coarse  irregular  oblique  costse,  between 
which  are  microscopic  waved  hair  lines,  at  right  angles  to  these 
are  short  straight  indentations,  on  approaching  the  aperture  the 
sculpture  grows  rougher  and  more  uneven  ;  apex  obtuse,  apical 
whorls  minute  with  no  break  in  colour  or  form  to  indicate  an 
embryonic  shell ;  suture  impressed,  deepening  as  it  proceeds ; 
bise  rounded,  gently  curving  in  to  the  umbilicus,  faintly  spirally 
and  radiately  striated  ;  epidermis  glossy,  scaling  off  readily  in 
large  flakes  ;  aperture  not  descending,  oblique,  angularly  lunate, 
peristome  thickened  internally,  the  base  of  the  columella  thickened, 
reflected  over  and  nearly  covering  the  perforation,  margins  of  the 
peristome  connected  by  a  thin  white  semi-transparent  callus. 
Diam.  maj.  66,  min.  55,  alt.  30  mm. 

Type  in  Queensland  Museum. 

H  a  b  i  t  a  t. — Fly  River  (Macgregor);  a  single  example.  There 
is  an  unlocalised  specimen  in  Dr.  Cox's  collection,  and  another  in 
the  Australian  Museum,  each  measuring  62  :  48  :  29  mm. 


BY-  C.   HEDLEY.  71 

This  fine  shell,  the  largest  yet  discovered  in  New  Guinea,  is, 
with  the  following  species,  closely  allied  to  iV.  dorice,  T.-C,  and 
probably  to  //.  achilles,  Braz.  Unfortunately  my  specimens 
consist  only  of  dead  shells,  and  as  Tapparone  gives  no  anatomical 
characters,  the  generic  position  of  the  group  remains  a  matter  of 

conjecture. 

2.   0.   flyensis,  n.sp. 

(Plate  ix.,  figs.  3-4.) 
Shell  hardly  perforate,  solid,  large,  orbicularly  turbinate,  acutely 
angled  at  the  periphery,  angle  disappearing  in  the  latter  part  of 
the  last  whorl ;  colour  shell  white,  a  broad  black  band  edged 
below  with  reddish-brown  encircling  the  base  beneath  the 
periphery,  epidermis  olive-green  through  which  the  peripheral 
band  is  visible,  peristome  pink  ;  whorls  6,  slowly  and  regularly 
increasing,  above  rather  convex;  sculpture,  first  three  whorls  nearly 
smooth,  showing  regular  delicate  oblique  ribs  under  the  lens,  outer 
whorls  with  coarse  irregular  oblique  striae,  between  which  are 
microscopic  waved  hair  lines,  confusedly  malleated,  sculpture 
coarser  on  the  last  whorl ;  apex  obtuse,  apical  whorls  minute,  no 
definition  of  embryonic  whorls  ;  suture  impressed,  deepening  as  it 
proceeds ;  base  rounded,  umbilical  region  impressed,  coarsely 
radiately  striated  ;  epidermis  glossy,  deciduous ;  aperture  oblique, 
angularly  lunate,  peristome  thickened  and  bent  inwards,  the  base 
of  the  columella  spread  over  almost  all  the  umbilicus,  margins  not 
connected  by  a  callus.     Diam.  maj.  60,  min.  49,  alt.  34  mm. 

T  y  p  e  in  Queensland  Museum. 

H  a  b  i  t  a  t. — Fly  River  (Macgregor)  ;  three  dead  shells. 

3.*  Nanina  citrina,  Linne,  1759. 

Illustrations. — Chem.  Conch.  Cab.  ix.  pi.  131,  figs.  1170, 
1172,  1173;  Pfeiffer,  Conch.  Cab.  2nd  ed.  pi.  35,  figs.  1,  2,  3 ; 
Voy.  "  Astrolable,"  Zool.  ii.pl.  11,  figs.  1,  2,  3,  4;  Voy.  "  Uranie 
et    Physicienne,"  Zool.  pi.   67,  figs.   2,   3  ;    Ostas.  Zool.   n.  pi.  6, 

*  Species  thus  distinguished  extend  beyond  the  boundaries  of  British 
New  Guinea. 


72        THE    LAND    MOLLUSCAN    FAUNA    OF    BRITISH    NEW    GUINEA, 

figs.  1-12,  pi.  7;  Reeve,  Conch.  Icon.  vn.  pi.  89,  fig.  482a, 
b,  c,  d;  Tryon,  Man.  Conch.  (2),  n.  pi.  20,  figs.  88-95;  &o.,  &c. 

Descriptions. — Linne,  Syst.  Nat.  ed.  10,  p.  771  ;  Mon. 
Hel.  Yiv.  i.  p.  53;  Voy.  "Astrolable,"  Zool.  n.  p.  140;  Voy. 
"  Uranie  et  Physicienne,"  Zool.  p.  471  ;  Voy.  "Coquille,"  Zool.  II. 
p.  306;  Ostas.  Zool.  II.,  p.  193;  Lamarck,  An.  s.  Vert.  vi. 
pt.  2,  p.  77  ;  Tryon,  Man.  Conch.  (2),  n.  p.  72  ;  &c,  &c. 

Anatomy. — Semper,  Reis.  Philipp.  ill.  p.  63,  pi.  3,  fig.  13a,  b, 
pi.  6,  fig.  30  ;  Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  8,  fig.  2. 

Type  in  Linnean  Society's  Museum,  London. 

Habitat. — Douglas  River  (Bevan),  Fly  River  (Froggatt), 
foot  of  Owen  Stanley  Range  (Goldie). 

4.  N.  hunsteini,  E.  A.  Smith,  1887. 

Ulusn—  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (5),  xix.  pi.  15,  figs.  6. 

Descrn—  L.c.  (5),  xix.  416. 

Type  in  British  Museum. 

Hab. — Not  foot  of  Astrolabe  and  Owen  Stanley  Ranges 
(Goldie  fide  Smith),  but  Milne  Bay  (Hedley). 

Found  upon  the  hills  under  rotten  palm  spathes.  Animal 
measures  70  mm.  from  pedal  horn  to  base  of  tentacles,  tentacles 
18  mm.,  pedal  horn  6  mm.  in  length  ;  colour  reddish-chestnut 
darkening  into  black,  tentacles  black  ;  mantle  margin  when  fully 
extended  reaching  in  front  over  the  proximal  third  of  the  neck, 
on  the  right  side  down  to  the  pedal  line,  right  shell  lobe  triangular 
covering  the  apex  of  the  shell,  and  reaching  past  it  to  the  ultimate 
whorl,  left  shell  lobe  narrow,  tongue-shaped,  stretching  along  the 
last  whorl  for  1 2  mm.  ;  tentacles  tapering  from  contiguous  bases  ; 
pedal  line  well  marked  ;  upper  surface  of  tail  impressed  deeply 
with  a  central  furrow,  whence  the  surface  slopes  upwards  to  an 
acute  keel  on  either  side  thence  descending  perpendicularly  to  the 
margin  of  the  foot;  horn  slender,  smooth,  as  is  also  the  adjoining 
portion  of  the  tail,  incessantly  waved  from  side  to  side  ;  mucous 
gland  excavated  into  the  tail  above  two  lobes. 


BY    C.  IIEDLEY.  73 

5.  N.  fraudulenta,  E.  A.  Smith,  1887. 
Descr11- — Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (5),  xix.  417. 
Type  in  British  Museum. 
Hab. — Foot  of  Astrolabe  Range  (Goldie  fide  Smith)  1 

6.  N.  cairni,  E.  A.  Smith,  1887. 
Illusn- — Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (5),  xix.  pi.  15,  fig.  5. 
Descr11— L.c.  (5),  xix.  417. 
Type  in  British  Museum. 

Hab. — Foot  of  Astrolabe  and  Owen  Stanley  Ranges  (Goldie 
fide  Smith). 

7.  N.   exilis,  Muller,  1774  (?) 
Ill  us11— Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (5),  xix.  pi.  15,  fig.  13. 
Descr11— L.c.  (5),  xix.  418. 
Specimens  I  gathered  near  Aipiana  resemble  Smith's  figure. 

8.  N.  divisa,  Forbes,  1852. 

Illusn- — Voy.  "Rattlesnake,"  n.  pi.  2,  figs.  5  a-b ;  Reeve, 
Conch.  Icon.  vn.  pi.  205,  fig.  1450  ;  Tryon,  Man.  Conch.  (2),  n. 
pi.  13,  fig.  70. 

Descr11- — Mon.  Hel.  Viv.  in.  p.  77;  Voy.  "Rattlesnake,"  II. 
Append,  p.  376 ;  Tryon,  Man.  Conch.  (2),  n.  39. 

T  y  p  e  in  British  Museum. 

Hab. — Sudest  Island, Louisiades  (Forbes,  Kowald  and  Belford). 

var.  inclinata,  Pfeiffer,  1863. 
1 11  us"-— Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (6),  iv.  pi.  13,  fig.  16. 
Descr11—  P.Z.S.  1863,  p.  526  ;  Mon.  Hel.  Viv.  v.  p.  129. 
Type  in  British  Museum. 
H  a  b. — St.  Aignan  or  Misima  (Thomson,  Kowald  and  Belford). 


74       THE    LAND    MOLLUSCAN    FAUNA    OF    BRITISH    NEW    GUINEA, 

var.  rosseliana,  Smith,  1889. 

1 11  us11— Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (6),  iv.  pi.  13,  fig.  15. 
Descr11  —  L.c.  (6),  iv.  200. 
Type  in  British  Museum. 
Hab. — Rossel  Island  (Thomson). 

var.  minor,  var.  no  v. 

Resembling  the  type  in  outline  but  smaller  and  lighter  in  colour. 
Diam.  maj.  22,  min.  19,  alt.  11  mm. 
Type  in  Queensland  Museum. 
Hab.—  Mita,  Milne  Bay  (Hedley). 

var.  woodlarkensis,  var.  no  v. 

More  globose  than  type,  much  inflated  around  the  umbilicus. 
Diam.  maj.  31,  min.  27,  alt.  17  mm. 
Type  in  Queensland  Museum. 
Hab.  — Woodlark  Island  (Kowald  and  Belford) ;  one  specimen. 

9.  N.  orbiculum,  Tapparone-Canefri,  1883. 

Illus11-— Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  5,  figs.  16,  17,  18. 

Descr11-— L.c.  p.  204. 

Anat. — L.c.  xix.  pi.  7,  fig.  7. 

Type  in  Genoa  Museum. 

Hab. — Fly  and  Katow  Rivers  (D'Albertis). 

10.  N.  bruijni,  Tapparone-Canefri,  1883. 

Illus"— Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  5,  figs.  13,  14,  15. 

Descr11— L.c.  p.  206. 

Type  in  Genoa  Museum. 

Hab. — Fly  and  Katow  Rivers  (D'Albertis). 


BY    C.  HEDLEV.  75 

11.  Conulus  starkei,  Brazier,  1876. 
(Plate  ix.,  fig.  5.) 

Descr11  — P.L.S.N.S.W.  (1),  I.  103;  Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  p.  98. 

Type  in  Macleay  Museum. 

H  a  b.  —Yule  Island  (Brazier) ;  in  scrub  on  the  hills  behind  the 
village  of  Maiva,  in  scrub  on  Mission  Hill,  beach  just  above  high 
tide  mark  Port  Moresby,  beach  ditto  Mita,  Milne  Bay  (Hedley). 
Mr.  Brazier's  type  specimen  is  here  figured  by  kind  permission  of 
Mr.  Masters. 

The  following  extract  from  my  note-book  refers  to  a  Mita 
specimen  : — Animal  translucent ;  when  extended  foot  not  reaching 
to  posterior  margin  of  shell,  tail  keeled  and  diagonally  grooved, 
terminating  in  a  mucous  pore,  surmounted  by  a  small  horn  ;  foot 
margined  with  a  pedal  line ;  tentacles  short,  cylindrical,  bases 
separate. 

This  species  should  be  compared  with  such  forms  as  subrugosa, 
Garrett,  from  Fiji. 

12.   C.   maino,  Brazier,  1876. 
(Plate  ix.,  fig.  6). 
D  e s c rn—  P.L.S.KS.W.  (1),  i.  101 ;  Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  p.  97 
T  y  p  e  in  Macleay  Museum. 
Hab. — Yule  Island  (Brazier). 
Figured  from  the  type. 

13.   Microcystina  sappho,  Brazier,  1876. 
(Plate  ix.,  fig.  7.) 
Descr11—  P.L.S.N.S.W.  (1),  i.  100;  Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  p.  95. 
Type  in  Macleay  Museum. 

Hab. — Yule  Island   (Brazier);    Maiva  and  Mission   Hill,  in 
company  with  C.  starkei  (Hedley). 
Figured  from  a  Maivan  specimen. 


76   THE  LAND  MOLLUSC  AN  FAUNA  OP  BRITISH  NEW  GUINEA, 
14.  M.  CALCARATA,  n.sp. 

(Plate  ix.,  fig.  8,  and  PI.  x.,  fig.  9.) 

Shell  small,  subdiscoidal,  perforate,  thin,  translucent ;  colour 
dark  chestnut,  apical  whorls  straw-coloured  ;  whorls  4  J,  rounded, 
slowly  increasing  ;  sculpture,  to  the  unassisted  eye  the  surface  is 
smooth  and  glossy,  but  the  microscope  shows  extremely  fine 
radiating  waved  hair  lines  ;  spire  scarcely  elevated,  embryonic 
whorls  2,  distinct ;  suture  channelled,  margined  beneath  by  a 
heavy  opaque  callus  ;  base  flattened,  umbilicus  narrow  triangular, 
circum-umbilical  region  funnel-shaped ;  aperture  not  descending, 
vertical,  ovate  lunate,  peristome  straight,  thin,  columellar  margin 
thickened  and  produced  into  a  callous  spur  overhanging  the 
umbilicus,  callus  on  body  whorl  thin  and  microscopically  granulated. 
Diana,  maj.  2-J-,  min.  1^,  alt.  1  mm. 

Type  in  Queensland  Museum. 

Hah. — Associated  with  C.  starkei  and  P.  pedicula  under 
sticks  and  stones,  near  the  beach,  200  yards  west  of  Mita  village, 
Milne  Bay  (Hedley). 

I  have  here  accepted  the  value  given  to  the  badly  defined  section 
of  Microcystina  by  Tryon  (Man.  Conch.  (2),  n.  124.)  These 
Papuan  species  are  probably  allied   to   the    Fijian   forms  there 

enumerated. 

15.  Helicarion  visi,  n.sp. 

(Plate  x.,  fig.  13.) 

Shell  depressed,  thin,  brittle,  glossy,  transparent ;  colour  pale 
yellow ;  whorls  3J,  rather  rapidly  increasing,  rounded  at  the 
periphery ;  sculpture  fine  incremental  striae ;  suture  margined, 
impressed,  base  imperforate,  impressed  in  the  centre,  swollen 
around  it ;  aperture  diagonal,  ovate  lunate,  peristome  thin,  simple, 
margins  joined  by  a  slight  callus,  columellar  margin  reflected. 
Diam.  maj.  8,  min.  7,  alt.  4  mm. 

Type  in  Queensland  Museum. 

Hab. — Basilaki  Island;  six  examples  under  sticks  and  stones 
in  the  jungle  (Hedley). 


BY    C.  HEDLEY.  77 

The  length  of  the  largest  spirit  specimen,  from  muzzle  to  mucous 
pore,  was  20  mm.,  the  tail  extending  posteriorly  half  that  distance 
from  the  visceral  hump.  General  colour  light  yellow,  upper  surface 
of  tail,  mantle  lobes,  neck,  and  tentacles  bluish-gray.  Tail  sub- 
keeled,  scarcely  diminishing  in  height  posteriorly,  suddenly 
increasing  at  caudal  extremity  and  terminating  abruptly,  bearing 
a  well-developed  mucous  pore  above  the  pedal  groove  ;  a  dorsal 
central  groove  runs  the  length  of  the  tail  distributing  oblique 
branches  which  reach  the  pedal  groove.  The  mantle  is  divided 
into  left  and  right  triangular  shell  lobes  and  two  neck  lappets. 
From  the  lips  a  well-defined  pedal  line  extends  to  the  mucous  pore, 
from  the  pulmonary  orifice  and  from  a  corresponding  position  on 
the  left  side  another  groove  runs  to  the  lips. 

The  jaw  is  that  of  a  typical  Relicarion,  smooth,  lunate,  with 
inferior  median  limb. 

In  the  odontophore  the  rows  of  teeth  curve  slowly  backwards 
from  the  rachidian,  which  has  a  slender  ovate  median  cusp  and 
two  small  accessory  cusps,  the  laterals  develop  only  the  distal  cusp, 
and  their  main  cusp  is  longer  and  broader  than  that  of  the 
rachidian  ;  after  being  repeated  for  twelve  rows  this  type  is 
succeeded  by  20  small  unicuspidate  marginals. 

This  species,  the  first  of  its  genus  recorded  from  New  Guinea,  is 
dedicated  to  C.  W.  de  Vis,  Esq.,  M.  A.,  Director  of  the  Queensland 
Museum,  as  a  slight  token  of  the  author's  regard  and  gratitude 
for  numberless  kind  actions. 

16.  H.  musgravei,  n.sp. 
(Plate  x.,  fig.  14.) 
Shell  globose,  thin,  brittle,  transparent ;  pale  yellow  ;  whorls  3-J, 
rounded ;  suture  impressed,  margined,  sculpture  minute  incre- 
mental strise ;  base  imperforate,  impressed  in  the  centre,  swollen 
around  it ;  aperture  oblique  ovate  lunate,  lip  thin,  simple,  margins 
connected  by  a  slight  callus,  columellar  margin  reflected.  Diam. 
maj.  6,  min.  5,  alt.  4  mm. 

T  y  p  e  in  Queensland  Museum. 


78       THE    LAND    MOLLUSCAN    FAUNA    OF    BRITISH    NEW    GUINEA, 

Hab. — Doura  (Hedley). 

Named  after  the  Hon.  A.  Musgrave,  of  British  New  Guinea. 

17.  |Thalassia  annula,  Brazier,  1876. 
(Plate  x.,  fig.  10.) 
Desc rn—  P.L.S.N.S. W.  ( 1),  1. 100  ;  Ann. Mus.  Gen,  xix.  p.  94. 
Type  in  Macleay  Museum. 

H  ab. — Village  of  Mowatta,  mouth  of  Katow  River  (Brazier). 
Figured  from  type. 

Doubtful, — T.  rustica,  Pfr.,  supposed  by  Mr.  Petterd  to  exist 
near  Port  Moresby  (vide  Journ.  of  Conch,  i.  p.  396  ;  Ann.  Mus. 
Gen.  xxiv.  p.  125  bis.). 

18.  -j-Trochomorpha  planorbis,  Lesson,  1830. 

IHusn._Yoy.  "Coquille,"  Moll.  pi.  13,  figs.  4,  4',  4";  Pfeiffer, 
Conch.  Cab.  2  ed.  Helix,  ii,  pi.  129,  figs.  16,  17  ;  Mousson,  Land 
Sussw.  Moll.  Java,  pi.  2,  fig.  9  ;  Martens,  Ostas.  Zool.  pi.  13,  figs.  4, 
5,  6,  7  i  Tryon,  Man.  Conch.  (2),  m.  pi.  16,  figs.  78-82  ;  &c,  &c. 

Descr11— Pfeiffer,  Mon.  Hel.  Viv.  i.  p.  122  ;  Voy.  "Coquille," 
Zool.  ii.  p.  312;  Tryon,  Man.  Conch.  (2),  in.  82  ;  &c,  &c. 

T  y  p  e  in  Museum  of  the  Jardin  cles  Plantes. 

H  a  b. — Fly  River  (D'Albertis,  Froggatt) ;  Katow  River 
(D'Albertis). 

19.  T.  lomonti,  Brazier,  1876. 

1 11  us11-— Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  2,  figs.  5,  6,  7  ;  Tryon,  Man. 
Conch.  (2),  in.  pi.  15,  figs.  50,  51,  52. 

Descr11—  P.L.S.N.S. W.  (1),  i,  101;  Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  p. 
91  ;  Tryon,  Man,  Conch.  (2),  in.  p.  82. 

A  n at. —Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  pi.  6,  fig.  2,  pi.  8,  fig.  3,  pi.  9,  fig.  4. 

Type  in  Macleay  Museum. 

Hab. — Yule  Island  (Brazier,  D'Albertis.) 


BY    C.  HEDLEY. 


79 


20.  T.  nigrans,  E.  A.  Smith,  1889. 
Illusn— Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (6),  iv.  pi.  13,  figs.  9,  10,  11. 
D  e  s  c  r"  —  L.c.  p.  200. 
T  y  p  e  in  British  Museum. 
Hab. — Rossel  Island  (Thomson,  Belford  and  Kowald). 

var.  cornea,  var.nov. 

Smaller  than  type,  horn-coloured.  Diam.  maj.  16,  min.  14,  alt. 
6  mm. 

Type  in  Queensland  Museum. 

Hab. — Sudest  Island  (Kowald  and  Belford)  ;  one  specimen. 

21.  Ochthephila  albertisi,  Brazier,  1876. 
(Plate  x.,  fig.  11.) 

Descr11—  P.L.S.KS.W.  (1),  I.  104;  Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix. 
p.  183. 

Type  in  Macleay  Museum. 

H  a  b. — Yule  Island  (Brazier). 

Figured  from  the  type.  The  generic  position  of  this  species  is 
doubtful. 

22.  Charopa  texta,  n.sp. 

(Plate  x.,  fig.  12.) 

Shell  depressed  turbinate,  thin,  perforate,  glistening ;  colour 
reddish-corneous ;  whorls  4 J,  rounded,  flattened  beneath  the 
suture  ;  sculpture  strong  sinuate  oblique  radiating  ribs,  of  which 
the  last  whorl  possesses  about  60,  in  each  interstice  and  parallel 
to  the  ribs  are  4  or  5  fine  raised  hair  lines,  decussating  these 
secondary  costse  and  of  the  same  calibre  are  raised  spiral  lines, 
which  are  most  prominent  on  the  spire  and  base ;  epidermis 
possessing  a  silky  sheen  ;  suture  deeply  impressed ;  apex  not 
prominent,  embryonic  whorls  1J,  shining,  nearly  smooth,  but 
faintly  repeating  the  adult  sculpture  ;  umbilicus  narrow,  deep, 
spiral ;  base  rounded  ;  aperture  oblique,  roundly  lunate,  peristome 


>, 


80       THE    LAND    MOLLUSCAN    FAUNA    OP    BRITISH    NEW    GUINEA, 

straight,  sharp,  columellar  margin  reflected.     Diam.  maj.  6,  min. 
5,  alt.  4  ram. 

Type  in  Queensland  Museum. 

Hab. — Mission  Hill,  Upper  St.  Joseph  River  (Hedley) ;  two 
living  specimens  occurred  to  me  under  fallen  timber  in  dense 
jungle. 

23.  Rhytida  globosa,  Hedley,  1890. 
(Plate  x.,  figs.  15-16.) 

Descr"' — Annual  Report  of  British  New  Guinea,  1888-89, 
p.  65. 

Shell  depressed-globose,  thin,  translucent,  perforate,  very  glossy  ; 
whorls  4^,  the  earlier  flattened,  the  later  rounded,  rather  rapidly 
increasing,  the  last  a  little  expanded,  not  descending  at  the 
aperture ;  colour  reddish-chestnut  above,  lighter  beneath,  first 
three  whorls  bleached  nearly  white ;  sculpture  almost  effaced  on 
the  body  whorl,  where  nearly  obsolete  spiral  impressed  lines  cross 
the  faint  irregular  growth  lines,  the  earlier  whorls  exhibit  fine 
close  oblique  stria?  cut  by  fine  spiral  grooves,  a  pitted  (not  striated) 
surface  is  offered  by  the  first  whorl  and  a-half,  which  seem 
embryonic ;  suture  impressed,  slightly  crenulated,  bordered 
beneath  by  a  narrow  white  band,  which  is  in  turn  edged  by  a 
black  line ;  aperture  ovate,  oblique,  peristome  simple  above, 
slightly  reflected  below  ;  interior  bluish-white,  probably  iridescent 
when  fresh,  columellar  wall  overlaid  by  a  thin  deposit ;  umbilicus 
narrow,  partially  hidden  by  the  reflected  peristome  at  its  j  unction 
with  the  base  ;  base  a  little  inflated.  Diam.  maj.  17,  min.  14, 
alt.  10  mm. 

T  y  p  e  in  Queensland  Museum. 

Hab. — Mt.  Victoria,  the  culminating  point  (13,000  ft.)  of  the 
Owen  Stanley  Range  (Macgregor). 

Near  a  village  on  the  south  shore  of  Milne  Bay  whose  name  I 
do  not  know,  but  which  may  be  identified  by  its  position  directly 
south  of  Mita,  I  found,  in  company  H.  rehsei,  C.  Jiorridus,  and  0. 
brazierij   a  shell  differing  from    but  closely   resembling   Patula 


BY    C.  HEDLEY.  81 

fabrefacta,  Pease.  I  cannot  venture  to  describe  the  species  from 
my  single  dead  and  bleached  specimen,  but  can  only  record  the 
existence  in  New  Guinea  of  a  group  hitherto  regarded  as  peculiar 
to  the  Eastern  Pacific. 

24.  Cristigibba  rhodomphala,  Tapparone-Canefri,  1883. 
Illusn- — Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  4,  figs.  12,  13. 
Descr11- — L.c.  xix.  p.  176. 
Type  in  Genoa  Museum, 
var.  alpha. 

H  a  b. — Fly    River    (D'Albertis,    Froggatt)  ;    Douglas    River 
(Bevan) ;  Mission  Hill  (Hedley). 

25.  C.  plagiocheila,  Tapparone-Canefri,  1883. 
II 1  u sn— Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  5,  figs.  4,  5,  6,  7. 
Descr11 — L.c.  xix.  p.  174. 
Anat. — L.c.  xix.  pi.  7,  fig.  6. 
T  y  p  e  in  Genoa  Museum. 
Hab.— Fly  and  Katow  Rivers  (D'Albertis). 

26.  C.  dominula,  Tapparone-Canefri,  1883. 
Illus11-— Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  4,  figs.  8,  9,  10,  11. 
Descr11- — L.c.  xix.  p.  178. 
Anat. — L.c.  xix.  pi.  7,  fig.  4,  pi.  9,  figs.  5,  14. 
Type  in  Genoa  Museum, 
vars.  alpha,  beta,  delta. 

Hab. — Fly  and  Katow  Rivers  (D'Albertis) ;  Douglas  River 
(Bevan). 

27.  C.  deaniana,  Ford,  1890. 

Descr11-— Proc.  Acad.  Sci.  Phil.  1890,  p.  188. 

Type  in  Phil.  Acad.  Museum. 

Hab. — British  New  Guinea  (Denton). 
6 


82        THE    LAND    MOLLUSCAN    FAUNA    OF    BRITISH    NEW    GUINEA 
28.    C.    MACGREGORI,  ll.Sp. 

(Plate  x.5  tigs.  17-19.) 

Shell  uuibilicated,  discoidal,  thin,  translucent  j  colour  reddish- 
brown  above,  lighter  beneath,  peristome  bright  lilac,  interior  of 
shell  subnacreous,  iridescent,  gleaming  bluish-white  ;  whorls  4J, 
rounded,  the  earlier  gradually  the  last  rapidly  increasing,  last 
descending  considerably  and  gradually  at  the  aperture  and 
furnished  with  the  gibbosity  characteristic  of  the  genus  ;  sculpture 
oblique  flat-topped  costse  whose  shallow  interstices  contain  two  or 
three  fine  radiating  striae,  both  costaa  and  strise  are  crossed  by 
minute  spiral  grooves ;  apical  whorls  sunken,  smooth ;  suture 
deeply  impressed ;  aperture  diagonal,  lunate,  peristome  widely 
expanded  above,  reflected  below,  margins  approaching,  connected 
by  a  thin  transparent  callus,  columellar  margin  expanded  over  a 
quarter  of  the  umbilicus ;  the  latter  narrow,  deep,  showing  every 
revolution  of  the  spire,  margin  abruptly  rounded.  Diarn.  maj.  28, 
min.  21,  alt.  12  mm. 

T  y  p  e  in  Queensland  Museum. 

Hab. — Village  of  Aipiana,  St.  Joseph  River  (Hedley).  Dead 
shells  were  seen  in  abundance,  animals  were  purchased  from  the 
natives. 

Dedicated  to  Sir  William  Macgregor,  M.D.,  K.C.M.G.,  whose 
zeal  for  science  has  greatly  increased  the  world's  knowledge  of  the 
Papuan  fauna  and  flora. 

Recorded  from  the  province  in  error. 
C.  corniculum,  Hombr.  et  Jacq. 

Vide  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (5),  xi.  190,  and  Ann.  Mus.  Gen. 

xix.  p.  179. 

C.  dentoni,  Ford,  1890. 

Vide  Proc.  Acad.  Phil.  1889,  p.  138  j  "  The  Nautilus,"  m.  p.  17, 
2  woodcuts. 

Mr.  Brazier  assures  me  that  this  species  is  identical  with  (H.) 
tuckeri.  Pfr.,  Queensland  specimens  of  which  frequently  possess  a 


BY    C.  HEDLEY.  83 

continuous  peristome,  on  which  feature  Ford  bases  his  distinction. 
Before  his  death  in  New  Guinea,  Professor  Denton  visited  Northern 
Queensland,  where  no  doubt  he  collected  Ford's  specimens. 

29.  Chloritis  dinodeomorpha,  Tapparone-Canefri,  1883. 
1 11  us11-— Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  4,  figs.  4,  5,  6,  7. 
Descr11- — L.c.  xix.  p.  168. 
An  at.—  L.c.  xix.  pi.  7,  fig.  5,  pi.  9,  figs.  2,  15. 
T  y  p  e  in  Genoa  Museum. 

Hab.- Fly  Kiver  (D'Albertis,  Froggatt) ;    Mission   Hill,   St. 
Joseph  River  (Hedley). 

30.  C.  leei,  Cox,  1873. 
Ill  us11-— P.Z.S.  1873,  pi.  48,  figs.  5,  5a. 

Descrn-L.c.   1873,  p.  565;  Mon.   Hel.    Viv.   vn.   p.    395; 
Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (6),  iv.  201. 
Type  in  Australian  Museum. 
H  a  b. — St.  Aignan  (Thomson^c/e  Smith,  Kowald  and  Belford). 

var.  woodlarhensis,  var.nov. 
Smaller  than  type,  lip  dark  purple,  umbilicus  nearly  hidden  by 
the   reflection   of  the  columella.     Diam.  maj.    25,   pain.    20,   alt. 
18  mm. 

Hab. — Woodlark  Island  (Kowald  and  Belford). 


var.  sudestensis,  var.nov. 

Larger  and  more  globose  than  type,  lighter  in  colour,  and 
umbilicus  less  overhung  by  the  reflection  of  the  columella.  Diam. 
maj.  34,  min.  25,  alt.  26  mm. 

H  a  b. — Sudest  Island  (Kowald  and  Belford). 

var.  imjmensis,  var.nov. 
More  elevated  than  type.     Diam.  maj.  33,  min.  25,  alt.  26  mm. 
H  a  b. — Mita,   Milne   Bay,   and   Mr.   Kissack's   selection    near 
Samarai  (Hedley). 


84       THE    LAND    MOLLUSCAN    FAUNA    OF    BRITISH    NEW   GUINEA, 

How  far  these  insular  forms  may  be  permanent  my  material  is 
too  scanty  to  satisfactorily  decide. 

31.  C.  subcorpulentus,  E.  A.  Smith,  1889. 

Illus11— Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (6),  iv.  pi.  13,  fig.  14. 

Descr11— L.c.  p.  201. 

Type  in  British  Museum. 

H  a  b. — Rossel  Island  (Thomson). 

In  the  jungle  near  Doura  I  found  living  with  H.  musgravei,  a 
new  species  of  Chloritis  allied  to  the  Queensland  yorteri.  My 
specimens  of  it  were  accidentally  crushed  before  reaching  Australia.* 

32.   j-Hadra  rehsei,  von  Martens,  1883. 

S  y  n  o  n  y  m — gerrardi,  Smith,  1883. 

Illus11-— Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (5),  xix.  pi.  15,  fig.  14. 

Descr11'— Jahrb.  Malak.  Gesell.  1883,  p.  83  •  Ann.  Mag.  Nat. 
Hist.  (5),  xi.  192  ;  l.c.  (5),  xix.  418. 

Type(?) 

Hab. — Not  Dentrecasteaux  Islands  (Goldie  fide  Smith),  nor 
Dinner  Island  (Smithurst  fide  Brazier),  but  south  shore  of  Milne 
Bay  (Hedley). 

33.  H.  beatricis,  Tapparone-Canefri,  1883. 
Illus13- — Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  4.  fig.  14. 
Descr11- — L.c.  xix.  p.  163. 
Anat. — L.c.  xix.  pi.  8,  fig.  16. 
Type  in  Genoa  Museum. 
H  a  b.— Fly  River  (D'Albertis,  Froggatt). 

34.  H.  hixoni,  Brazier,  1877. 

Illus11-— Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  5,  fig.  22  ;  Tryon,  Man.  (2) 
vi.  pi.  25,  fig.  91. 

Descr11— P.L.S.N.S.W.  (1),  n.  120;  Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  p. 
187  ;  Tryon,  Man.  (2)  vi.  p.  177. 

*  Since  this  has  been  in  type  a  description  of  this  species  as  C.  chloritoides 
Pilsbry,  has  reached  me. 


BY    C.  HEDLEY.  85 

T  y  p  e  in  Coll.  Hobson. 

Hab. — Seven  miles  inland  from  Hall  Sound  (Hixon  fids 
Brazier). 

35.  H.  broadbenti,  Brazier,  1877. 

Hlusn—  Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  5,  fig.  21 ;  Tryon,  Man.  (2) 
vi.  pi.  25,  fig.  100. 

Descr11—  P.L.S.N.S.W.  (1),  n.  25;  Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  p. 
188  ;  Tryon,  Man.  (2)  vi.  p.  176. 

Type  in  Queensland  Museum. 

Hab. — Not  Dentrecasteaux  Islands  (Goldie  fide  Smith),  but 
Laloki  River,  near  Port  Moresby  (Broadbent)  ;  village  of  Najabui 
(D'Albertis)  ;  St.  Joseph  River  (Heclley). 

Mr.  Brazier  has  kindly  furnished  me  with  the  following  descrip- 
tion : — 

36.  "  Helix  bevani,  Brazier,  n.sp. 

(Plate  xi.,  figs.  22-23.) 

"  Shell  umbilicate,  depressed,  sharply  carinated  at  the  periphery, 
thin,  obliquely  striated,  reddish-brown  with  a  dark  nearly  black 
narrow  line  at  the  centre,  epidermis  yellowish-brown  ;  spire 
slightly  elevated  ;  apex  dark  pink  ;  suture  moderately  impressed  ; 
whorls  41  very  slightly  convex,  last  largest  in  front ;  umbilicus 
narrow,  shallow  ;  base  flattened,  striae  finer  than  upper  surface  ; 
aperture  hatchet-shaped  ;  peristome  black,  slightly  expanded  and 
reflected,  right  margin  at  the  upper  part  thin  ;  columellar  margin 
broadly  expanded  and  reflected  over  the  umbilicus.  Diam.  maj. 
45,  min.  35,  alt.  18  mm.  ;  height  of  aperture  12,  breadth  21  mm. 

"Type  in  Australian  Museum. 

"  Hab. — Douglas  River,  British  New  Guinea  (Be van). 

"  This  fine  species  is  allied  to  Helix  Goldei,  Braz.  ;  a  single  dead 
specimen  in  a  good  state  of  preservation  was  found  by  Mr. 
Theodore  F.  Bevan,  F.R.G.S.,  during  his  exploration  of  British 
New  Guinea  in  1887." 


86        THE    LAND    MOLLUSCAN    FAUNA    OF    BRITISH    NEW    GUINEA, 

37.  Geotrochus  oxystoma,  E.  A.  Smith,  1883. 

(Plate  x.,  fig.  20,  and  PL  xi.,  fig.  21.) 

Syn. — goldiei,  Brazier. 

Descrn-- Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (5),  xi.  191  ;  P.L.S.N.S.W. 
(1),  ix.  804. 

Type  in  British  Museum. 

Hab. — Not  Dentrecasteaux  Islands  (Golclie  fide  Smith),  but 
foot  of  Astrolabe  Range  (Goldie)  and  Doura,  Galley  Reach 
(Hedley). 

By  adopting  Geotrochus  as  a  generic  title  the  necessity  is 
obviated  of  discarding  Smith's  name,  since  oxystoma  is  not  pre- 
occupied in  Geotrochus,  though,  as  Brazier  points  out,  it  is  in 
Helix.  The  figures  which  illustrate,  though  they  hardly  adorn, 
p.  173  of  Stone's  "  Ten  Months  in  New  Guinea,"  are  intended,  I 
believe,  to  represent  this  species. 

38.  G.  elisus,  n.sp. 
(Plate  xi.,  figs.  24-25.) 
Shell  umbilicate,  thin,  discoidal,  carinate  ;  colour  pale  straw, 
with  two  narrow  reddish  spiral  bands,  the  superior  midway 
between  the  suture  and  the  periphery,  the  inferior  encircling  the 
base  at  a  third  of  the  distance  from  the  keel  to  the  umbilicus, 
the  carina  is  sometimes  edged  above  and  below  by  similar  bands, 
peristome  white  ;  whorls  4J,  increasing  regularly  until  the  final 
whorl,  which  in  its  latter  half  contracts  a  little,  the  earlier  whorls 
slightly  convex,  the  latter  flat ;  sculpture  close,  irregular  oblique 
striations  above  and  below,  crossed  by  a  few  faint  impressed  lines 
in  the  neighbourhood  of  the  keel ;  apex  obtuse,  the  embryonic 
shell  apparently  constituting  the  first  revolution ;  suture  impressed 
above,  becoming  linear  as  it  proceeds,  margined  above  by  the  keel 
of  the  preceding  whorl ;  base  flattened  at  the  periphery,  slightly 
swollen  within  ;  umbilicus  narrow,  deep,  exhibiting  the  volutions; 
aperture  almost  horizontal,  abruptly  and  deeply  descending, 
peristome  thin,  widely  reflected  throughout  its  circumference, 
pinched  at  the  junction  of  the  carina,  margins  closely  approaching, 


BY    C.  HEDLEY.  87 

connected  by  a  transparent   callus.     Diam.  maj.  29,  min.  24,  alt. 
10  mm. 

The  Macleay  Museum  contains  four  dead  shells  of  this  species, 
which  appear  to  resemble  G.  2^elechy  stoma,  Tapp.-Can.,  purchased 
from  Mr.  Goldie,  who  collected  them  in  British  New  Guinea. 

39.  G.  taylorianus,  Adams  and  Reeve,  1851. 

Syn. — yulensis,  Brazier,  1876;  strabo,  Brazier,  1876;  katau- 
ensis,  Tapparone-Canefri,  1883  ;  roseolabiatus,  Smith,  1887. 

IHusn__Voy.  "Samarang,"  Zool.  pi.  15;  2a,  2b;  Ann.  Mag. 
Nat.  Hist.  (5),  xix.  pi.  15,  figs.  1,  la,  2;  Reeve,  Conch.  Icon. 
vii.  pi.  96,  No.  524,  a,  b;  P.L.S.N.S.W.  (2),  n.  pi.  21,  figs.  5,  6  ; 
Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  3,  figs.  1,  2,  3. 

jy  esc  rn-—  "Samarang",  Zool.  p.  59  ;  RL.S.N.S.W.  (1),  I.  106  ; 
Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  p.  123,  125;  Journ.  of  Conch,  vi.  p.  76; 
Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (5),  xix.  421,  &c. 

An  at. — Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  6,  figs.  1,  3;  pi.  8,  fig.  11. 

Type  in  British  Museum. 

H  a  b. — Yule  Island  and  Katow  River  (Brazier  and  D'Albertis) ; 
St.  Joseph  River  (Hedley) ;  Fly  River  (Froggatt) ;  Maclachie 
Point,  Krema  district,  foot  of  the  Albert  Range  of  mountains 
(Goldie). 

An  examination  of  a  large  series  of  shells  in  the  possession  of 
Mr.  Brazier  induces  me  to  consider  G.  taylorianus  as  a  most 
variable  form.  The  following  prominent  varieties  are  linked  each 
to  each  by  intermediate  graduations  :  — 

(a)  yulensis ;  smaller  than  type,  mottled  with  oblique  irregular 

black  dashes,   which  by  transmitted  light  appear  as  trans- 
lucent spaces.     (Yule  Island,  J.B.) 

(b)  katauensis ;    encircled   by  black    spiral   bands.       (Maclachie 

Point,  Goldie.) 

(c)  strabo ;  a  monochrome  form   with   no  clear  mottled  spaces  ; 

approaches     nearest     to     taylorianus.      (Maclachie    Point, 
Goldie.) 


88       THE    LAND    MOLLUSCAN    FAUNA    OF    BRITISH    NEW    GUINEA, 

(d)  roseolabiatus  ;  with  a  black  band  at  the  suture  and  the  peri- 
phery.    (Maclachie  Point,  Goldie.) 

This  form  is  confined  to  western  British  New  Guinea  and  the 
eastern  localities  quoted  by  Smith ;  South  Cape  and  Dentre- 
casteaux  Islands  are  to  be  discredited. 

The  history  of  the  original  specimen  appears  to  have  been  lost. 
Since,  before  G.  taylorianus  was  described,  H.M.S.  "Fly"  was 
the  only  European  vessel  that  visited  the  territory  inhabited  by 
this  species,  I  conjecture  that  the  type  was  procured  in  May, 
1845,  by  Jukes  or  MacGillivray  during  her  voyage  to  this  coast. 

40.  G.  tapparonei,  E.  A.  Smith,  1883. 
(Plate  xi.,  fig.  26.) 

Syn. — hunsteini,  Brazier,  MSS. 

Descr"-— Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (5),  xi.  190;  P.L.S.N.S.W. 
(1),  ix.  805. 

Type  in  British  Museum. 

Hab. — Not  Dentrecasteaux  Islands  (Goldie  fide  Smith),  but 
found  by  C.  Hunstein  fifty  miles  inland  from  Port  Moresby, 
north  of  the  Astrolabe  Range,  near  the  head  of  the  Laloki 
Biver. 

This  and  taylorianus  approach  the  Australian  G.  macgillivrayi. 

41.  G.  zeno,  Brazier,  1876. 
(Plate  xi.,  fig.  27.) 

Descrn—  P.L.S.N.S.W.  (1),  i.  107,  (1),  ix.  805;  Ann.  Mus. 
Gen.  xix.  p.  154. 

Type  in  Macleay  Museum. 

H  a  b. — Hall  Sound  (Brazier),  between  Rigo  and  Kappakappa 
(Hedley). 

var.  latiaxis,  Smith,  1887. 

Illus11-— Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (5),  xix.  pi.  15,  fig.  7  ;  Tryon, 
Man.  Conch.  (2),  vi.  pi.  17,  fig.  16. 


BY    C.  HEDLEY.  89 

Descr11— Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (5),  xix.  420  ;  I.e.  (5),  xi.  191. 

Type  in  British  Museum. 

Hab. — Foot  of  Astrolabe  and  Owen  Stanley  Range  (Goldie). 

42.  G.  diomedes,  Brazier,  1878. 

Ill  us11— Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  3,  fig.  12. 

Descr11- P.L.S.N.S.W.  (1),  n.  121;  Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix. 
122. 

Type  in  Australian  Museum. 

H  a  b. — Not  Brumer  Island  (Brazier),  but  Coutances  Island  * 
(Broadbent  fide  Brazier)  ;  and  therefore  not  a  member  of  the 
Louisiade  fauna,  as  stated  in  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (6),  vn.  135. 

A  dead  shell,  too  worn  to  be  described,  but  evidently  new,  and 
related  to  the  two  last  species,  was  collected  by  Sir  W.  Macgregor 
daring  his  expedition  to  the  Fly  River  in  1890. 

43.  |G.  brumeriensis,  Forbes,  1852. 

(Plate  xi.,  fig.  29.) 

Illusn— Voy.  "Rattlesnake,"  Appen.  pi.  2,  fig.  1,  a,  b ; 
Reeve,  Conch.  Icon.  vn.  pi.  205,  fig.  1448;  Tryon,  Man.  (2),  vi. 
pi.  12,  figs.  41,  42,  43. 

Descr11-— Voy.  "Rattlesnake,"  n.  p.  375;  Mon.  He].  Viv. 
in.  p.  189  ;  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (5),  xix.  419. 

Type  in  British  Museum. 

Hab. — Brumer  Island  (Forbes);  Millport  Harbour,  Amazon 
Bay  (Goldie  fide  Brazier)  ;  Bently  and  Milne  Bays,  South  Cape, 
Samarai,  Loggia  and  Basilaki  Islands  (Hedley). 

var.  albolabriSj  var.  nov. 
Lip  entirely  white. 
Type  in  Queensland  Museum. 
H  a  b. — Mita,  Milne  Bay. 
*  Coutances  Island  is  situated  in  148°  10'  E.  long.,  10°  15'  S.  lat. 


90   THE  LAND  MOLLUSCAN  FAUNA  OF  BRITISH  NEW  GUINEA, 

G.  brumeriensis  inhabits  heavy-limbed  trees,  preferring  those 
with  whitish  bark,  like  Hibiscus  tiliaceus  and  Artocarpits  incisus. 
In  its  favourite  perch,  on  the  under  side  of  the  larger  boughs,  its 
resemblance  to  a  knot  renders  it  difficult  to  detect.  Animal 
60  mm.  in  total  length.  Shell  placed  posteriorly.  Tentacles 
slender,  tapering,  15  mm.  long  when  fully  expanded,  bases  four 
mm.  apart.  Tail  flat,  pointed.  Tentacles  jet  black  ;  head  and 
neck  ornamented  by  narrow  white  longitudinal  tubercles  on  a 
black  ground  ;  foot  everywhere  bordered  above  by  a  narrow  band 
of  intense  black,  above  which  is  an  ill-defined  zone  of  greyish 
white  merging  above  into  black  ;  sole  of  foot  black  at  edges, 
whitish  within  ;  mantle  yellowish-white.  Mucus  unusually  dense 
like  that  of  the  arboreal  Limaces.     Egg  small,  soft,  white,  oblong. 

44.  G.  louisiadensis,  Forbes,  1852. 

Illus11, — Voy.  "Rattlesnake,"  Appen.  pi.  1,  figs.  8a;  b; 
Reeve,  Conch.  Icon.  vn.  pi.  205,  fig.  1449. 

Descrn- Yoy.  "Rattlesnake,"  Appen.  p.  376;  Mon.  Hel. 
Viv.  in.  p.  174. 

T y  p  e  in  British  Museum. 

H  a  b. — Sudest  Island,  Louisiades  (Forbes, Kowald  and  Belford). 

45.    G.    MILLICENTiE,   Cox,   1871. 

Illus11-— P.Z.S.  1871,  pi.  34,  figs.  2-2a. 

Descrn--L.c.  p.  323  :  I.e.  1873,  p.  566. 

Type  in  the  Cox  Collection. 

H  a  b.  — Louisiades  (Cox). 

This  is  intermediate  between  louisiadensis  and  rollsianits,  and 
is  probably  entitled  to  rank  as  a  distinct  species.  The  exact 
island  inhabited  by  it  is  still  unknown. 

46.  G.  rollsianus,  E.  A.  Smith,  1887. 
Illusn— Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (5),  xix.  pi.  15,  fig.  3. 
Descr11— L.c.  (5).  xix.  423. 


BY    C.   HEDLEY.  91 

Type  in  British  Museum. 

Hab. — Not  South  Cape  Island  (Rolls),  but  Seymour  Bay, 
Fergusson  Island  (Hedley).  As  Rolls  and  Goldie  landed  in 
Seymour  Bay,  I  have  no  doubt  that  they  collected  the  type  exactly 
where  I  found  the  species  several  years  afterwards.  I  make  the 
above  correction  with  the  more  confidence  since  I  have  searched 
South  Cape  in  vain  for  it.  It  is  interesting  to  note  that  both  G. 
rollsianus  and  P.  brazierve,  which  I  also  gathered  at  Seymour  Bay, 
find  their  allies  among  the  distant  Louisiades  and  not  with  the 
molluscs  of  the  nearer  mainland. 

Animal  slender  ;  colour  entirely  white  in  one  specimen,  bluish- 
white  in  another ;  tentacles  long,  slender,  tapering,  bases  wide 
apart.     Observed  crawling  upon  the  trunks  of  trees. 

47.  G.  albocarinatus,  E.  A.  Smith,  1887. 

Iliusn— Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (5),  xix.  pi.  15,  fig.  12. 

Descr11-— L.c.  p.  422  ;  I.e.  (6)  vn.  137. 

Type  in  British  Museum. 

H  a  b. — Woodlark  Island  (Dr.  Rabe  fide  Brazier) ;  another 
recorded  but  probably  erroneous  locality  is  South  Cape  Island 
(Goldie). 

48.  G.  thomsoni,  E.  A.  Smith,  1889. 

Illus11-— Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (6),  iv.  pi.  13,  figs.  12,  13. 

Descr11-—  L.c.  (6),  iv.  202. 

Type  in  British  Museum. 

var.  a. 

H  a  b. — St.  Aignan,  Louisiades  (Thomson. Kowald  and  Belford). 

49.  G.  woodlarkianus,  Souverbie,  1863. 
1 1 1  u  sn- — Journ.  de  Conch,  xi.  pi.  5,  fig.  2. 
Descrn—  L.c.  pp.  76  and  172;  Mon.   Hel.  Viv.  v.  p.   271  ; 
Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (6),  vn.  137. 
Type  in  Bordeaux  Museum. 


92       THE   LAND   MOLLUSC  AN   FAUNA   OF   BRITISH   NEW   GUINEA, 

Hab. — Woodlark  Island  (French  Missionaries,  Kowald  and 
Belford,  Dr.  Rabe  fide  Brazier) ;  Normanby  Island  (Dr.  Rabe), 
the  latter  a  doubtful  locality. 

50.    G.    TROBRIANDENSIS,  n.Sp. 

(Plate  xi.,  fig.  28.) 

Shell  imperforate,  trochiform,  thin,  translucent,  keeled  at  the 
periphery,  keel  becoming  obsolete  latterly  ;  colour  white,  encircled 
by  seven  chestnut  bands,  four  above  and  three  below  the  periphery, 
these  bands  are  very  variable,  each  or  all  may  disappear  or  coa- 
lesce, when  absent  a  translucent  band  marks  the  site,  the  bands 
fade  away  on  the  penultimate  whorl,  occasionally  as  in  allied 
species  opaque  alternate  with  translucent  dashes  radiating  from 
the  suture,  peristome  from  the  insertion  of  the  right  margin  to  the 
centre  of  the  base  an  intense  black ;  whorls  4J,  convex,  last  con- 
tracted ;  sculpture,  obliquely  finely  striated  and  finely  granulated  ; 
apex  obtuse,  embryonic  whorls  distinct,  1 J ;  suture  impressed  ; 
base  slightly  convex  ;  aperture  oblique,  scarcely  descending,  peri- 
stome expanded  and  reflected,  right  margin  sinuate,  columellar 
margin  straight  bearing  above  a  small  tubercle,  margins  connected 
by  a  thin,  transparent,  microscopically  granulated  callus.  Diam. 
maj.  24,  min.  18,  alt.  16  mm. 

Type  in  Queensland  Museum. 

Hab. — Trobriand  Islands  (Kowald  and  Belford);  on  trees  ; 
abundant. 

The  local  representative  of  the  G.  louisiadensis  group. 

51.  G.  taumantias,  Tapparone-Canefri,  1883. 

1 11  us11— Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  3,  figs.  13,  14. 

Descr"- — L.c.  p.  141. 

Anat. — L.c.  pi.  6,  fig.  4,  pi.  9,  figs.  16,  18. 

T  y  p  e  in  Genoa  Museum. 

vars.  alpha  and  beta. 


BY    C.  HEDLEY.  93 

Hab.— Katow    River   (D'Albertis)  j    Fly    Eiver   (D'Albertis, 
Froggatt,  Macgregor). 

var.  cingulatus,  var.nov. 

Yellowish-white  encircled  by  a  single   brown  peripheral  band 
margined  beneath  by  an  opaque  white  line. 
T  y  p  e  in  Queensland  Museum. 
Hab. — Village  of  Aipiana,  St.  Joseph  Eiver  (Hedley). 

52.  G.  tomasinellianus,  Tapparone-Canefri,  1883. 
Illusn— Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  4,  fig.  1,  pi.  5,  fig.  1. 
Descr11-—  L.c.  p.  148. 
Anat.— L.c.  p.  7,  fig.  3,  pi.  8,  figs.  6,  12. 
Type  in  Genoa  Museum, 
var.  alpha. 

Hab.— Fly  Eiver  (D'Albertis,  Froggatt) ;  400  miles  up  the 
Fly  (Macgregor) ;  Katow  Eiver  (D'Albertis). 

var.  azonatus,  var.nov. 
Bandless,  entirely  yellow. 
Type  in  Australian  Museum. 
Hab. — Douglas  River  (Bevan). 

53.  G    ridibundus,  Tapparone-Canefri,  1883. 
Illus11-— Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  3,  figs.  10,  11. 
Descr11- — L.c.  p.  142. 
Anat. — L.c.  pi.  6,  fig.  5,  pi.  8,  fig.  17. 
T  y  p  e  in  Genoa  Museum. 
Hab.— Fly  River  (D'Albertis). 

54.  G.  meditatus,  Tapparone-Canefri,  1883. 
Illus11- — Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  3,  fig.  15. 
Descr11, — L.c.  p.  144. 


94       THE    LAND    MOLLUSCAN    FAUNA    OF    BRITISH    NEW    GUINEA, 

An  at. — L.c.  pi.  6,  fig.  6. 
T  y  p  e  in  Genoa  Museum. 
Hab. — Katow  River  (D'Albertis). 

55.  G.  gestroi,  Tapparone-Canefri,  1883. 
1 1 1  u  s11— Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  4,  fig.  3,  pi.  5,  fig.  3. 
Descrn— L.c.  p.  150. 
Anat.-L.c.  pi.  7,  fig.  2,  pi.  8,  figs.  5,  14. 
Type  in  Genoa  Museum, 
var.  alpha. 
Hab.— Fly  River  (D'Albertis). 

56.  G.  siculus,  Brazier,  1876. 

Descr11— P.L.S.N.S.W.  (1),  I.  106;  Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  p. 
153. 

Type  in  Macleay  Museum. 

H  a  b. — Katow  River  (Brazier). 

Mr.  Brazier  informs  me  that  this  species  resembles  the  Solomon 
Island  shells  ambrosia,  Angas,  and  me?idana,  Angas,  the  latter 
particularly  in  coloration. 

57.  G.  braziers,  Brazier,  1876. 
1 1 1  u  s11 — Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  4,  fig.  2,  pi.  5,  fig.  2. 
Descrn— P.L.S.N.S.W.  (1),  I.  107;  Ann.   Mus.  Gen.  xix.  p. 
152. 

An  at.— L.c.  xix.  pi.  7,  fig.  1,  pi.  8,  figs.  7,  13. 

T  y  p  e  in  Macleay  Museum. 

Hab. — Yule  Island  (Brazier) ;  St.  Joseph,  Doura  (Hedley). 

58.  G.  lacteolatus,  E.  A.  Smith,  1887. 
Illus11-— Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (5),  xix.  pi.  15,  fig.  9. 
Descrn—  L.c.  (5),  xix.  420. 
Type  in  British  Museum. 
Hab.— Foot  of  Owen  Stanley  Range  (Goldie  fide  Brazier). 


BY    C.   HEDLEY.  95 

59.  G.  gurgusti,  Cox,  1880. 

I  Hub*—  P.L.S.N.S.W.  (1),  iv.  pi.  16,  fig.  1  ;  I.e.  (2),  n.  pi.  21, 
figs.  3,  4. 

Descr11— l.c.  (1),  iv.  114. 

Type  in  Australian  Museum. 

Hab. — Rossel  Island,  Louisiades  (Hovell). 

60.  G.  chapmani,  Cox,  1880. 

Syn. — coraliolabris,  Smith,  1887. 

Illus*-- P.L.S.N.S.W.  (1),  iv.  pi.  16,  fig.  2  ;  I.e.  (2),  n.  pi.  21, 
figs.  10,  11 ;  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (5),  xix.,  pi.  15,  fig.  4 ;  Tryon, 
Man.  (2),  vi.  pi.  17,  fig.  13. 

Descr11-—  P.L.S.N.S.W.  (1),  iv.  115;  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist. 
(5),  xi.  419  ;  I.e.  (6),  iv.  201. 

Type  in  Australian  Museum. 

Hab. — Rossel  Island,  Louisiades  (Hovell,  Thomson). 

61.  G.  canovari,  Tapparone-Canefri,  1883. 

Illus11— Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  3,  fig.  6. 
Descr11- — L.c.  xix.  p.  131. 
Type  in  Genoa  Museum. 

Hab. — Fly  River  (D'Albertis) ;  Observation  Point,  Fly  River 
(Froggatt). 

62.  G.  boyeri,  Fischer  and  Bernardi,  1857. 

Illus11- — Journ.  de  Conch,  v.  pi.  9,  figs.  8,  9. 

Descr11-— L.c.  v.  p.  297  ;  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (6),  vn.  137  ; 
Mon.  Hel.  Viv.  i v.  p.  201. 

Type  in  collection  of  Journ.  de  Conch. 

H  a  b. — Not  Admiralty  Island  (F.  &  B.),  nor  Louisiades  (Angas 
fide  Pfeiffer),  but  Woocllark  Island  (Dr.  Rabe  fide  Brazier, 
Kowald  and  Bel  ford). 


96       THE    LAND    MOLLUSCAN    FAUNA    OF    BRITISH    NEW    GUINEA, 

63.  fG.  dampieri,  Angas,  1869. 

Illus11-— P.Z.S.  1869,  pi.  2,  figs.  6  ;  1885,  pi.  36,  fig.  5. 

Descrn--L.c.  1869,  p.  47  ;  Mon.  Hel.  Viv.  vn.  p.  310. 

Type  (?). 

H  a  b. — Louisiade  Islands  (Angas)  1. 

No  definite  locality  in  the  Louisiades  is  known  for  this  shell, 
and  since  a  variety  is  recorded  from  the  Solomons  by  Smith 
(P.Z.S.  1885,  p.  592),  it  is  most  probable  that  the  type  was  derived 
from  thence. 

Recorded  from  the  province  in  error. 

G.  (?)  coniformis,  Ferusac. 

Jahrb.  deutsche  mal.  Gesell.  1880,  p.  15. 
Louisiade  Archipelago  (Kobelt,  I.e.). 

G.  horderi,  Sowerby. 

P.Z.S.  1889,  pi.  56,  fig.  1,  p.  577. 

May  belong  to  this  province ;  but  the  author  neglects  to  say 
where  or  by  whom  it  was  collected. 

64.    COCHLOSTYLA    PAPUENSIS,  n.Sp. 

(Plate  xii.,  fig.  30.) 

Shell  globosely  conical,  imperforate,  solid  ;  colour,  the  hydro- 
phanous  epidermis  when  wet  or  oiled  is  of  a  rich  chocolate  colour  ; 
when  dry,  a  pale  yellowish-brown  crossed  by  numerous  narrow 
spiral  brown  lines ;  deprived  of  the  epidermis  the  shell  is  a  pale 
yellow,  with  a  brown  sub-sutural  band,  first  two  whorls  purple- 
blue,  interior  of  shell  lustrous  pale  blue,  peristome  brown  ;  whorls 
5J,  convex,  regularly  increasing,  last  f ths  of  total  length  ;  sculp- 
ture, entire  shell  finely  obliquely  striated  and  encircled  by 
microscopic  close  regular  raised  lines  ;  apex  obtuse,  embryonic 
whorls  1 J  ;  suture  impressed,  margined  ;  aperture  oblique,  ovate 
lunate,  peristome  slightly  reflected,  a  thin  semi-transparent  callus 


BY    C.  HEDLEY.  97 

extends  over  the  axis  and  curves  up  to  the  insertion  of  the  right 
margin.     Alt.  55,  breadth  38  mm. 

The  Macleay  Museum  possesses  several  examples  of  this  species, 
purchased  from  Mr.  Goldie,  who  collected  them  in  British  New- 
Guinea.  Considerable  difference  in  size  and  form  exists  between 
these  specimens,  none  of  which  are  in  a  good  state  of  preservation. 
One  old  and  worn  shell  exhibits  on  the  inner  side  of  the  columella 
a  tubercle  10  mm.  long  and  2  mm.  wide.  Whether  this  be  a 
distinct  species,  the  adult  form,  or  merely  a  variety  of  the  species 
described  above,  requires  further  material  to  decide. 

65.  Calycia  isseliana,  Tapparone-Canefri,  1883. 

Ill  us11- — Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  p.  101,  figs,  b,  c. 

Desc  r"" — L.c. 

Type  in  Genoa  Museum. 

Hab.— Katow  River  (D'Albertis). 

The  systematic  position  of  this  mollusc  is  uncertain. 

66.  -j-Bulimus  macleayi,  Brazier,  1876. 

S  y  n. — beddomei,  Brazier,  MSS. 
Illus11-— Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  2,  figs.  16,  17. 
Descr"-—  P.L.S.N.S.W.   (1),   i.    108;  l.c.  (1),  iv.  395  ;  Ann. 
Mus.  Gen.  xix.  p.  104  ;  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  S.  Australia,  v.  p.  50. 
Type  in  Macleay  Museum. 
H  a  b. — Yule  Island  (Brazier,  D'Albertis). 

This  species   ranges  south   to   North   Queensland  and  west  to 
Port  Darwin. 

67.  Partula  similaris,  Hartman,  1886. 

Illusu— Proc.  Acad.  N.S.  Phil.  1886,  pi.  2,  fig.  1. 

Descr11-— L.c.  p.  30. 

Type.-(?) 

Hab. — Woodlark  Island  (Brazier). 

7 


OS       THE    LAND    MOLLUSCAH    FAUNA    or    BRITISH    NF.w    GUINEA, 

58,    T.  woopi.akiuana,  Hartman,  1886. 

Illus"-—  Proc  Acad,  N.s.  tdiil.  188(6,  pi.  2,  fig.  8, 

Desor11— L.C,  p.  33. 

Typo-v\ 

Bab. — WootHark  Islam!  (Brazier). 

After  examining  the  figures  and  descriptions  of  those  two 
species,  l  am  enable  to  graep  any  specific  distinction  between 
them.  Specimens  collected  at  the  Woodlarks  by  Messrs.  Kowald 
ami  Belford  during  the  cruise  of  the  "  Merrie  England  "  in  1890 
are  referable  to  both  or  either  forms. 

09.    P.  OCCIDENTALIS,  n.sp. 

(Plate  xii.,  tig.  31.) 

Shell  dextral,  ovate  elongate,  thin  ami    translucent  ;  colour  (t)  ; 

whorls  5,  rounded,  last  a  little  tlat toned  below  the  suture  ;  sculp- 
ture everywhere  encircled  by  close  sharply  impressed  spiral  lines. 
which  are  decussated  by  oblique  irregular  lines  of  growth,  at  the 
intersection  the  former  are  sometimes  distorted  by  the  latter  ; 
spire  slender,  elongate,  a  quarter  of  total  length  ;  apex  dome- 
shaped,  half  of  first  whorl  embryonic  ;  suture  impressed  ; 
umbilicus  small,  deep,  compressed]  aperture  roundly  ovate,  scarcely 
oblique,  lip  moderately  reflected  and  expanded,  margins  of  the 
peristome  connected  by  a  thick  callus.  Length  19,  breadth  10. 
length  of  aperture  9,  breadth  (>  mm.  ;  length  17,  breadth  10, 
length  of  aperture  9,  breadth  7  mm. 

Type  in  Queensland  Museum. 

Hab.  —  On  the  ground  under  bushes  upon  Samarai  Island 
1  collected  two  dead  shells  of  this  species. 

The  two  Partulw  described  by  Lesson  have,  as  Tapparone 
remarks,  a  doubtful  claim  to  Papuan  soil,  and,  omitting  these, 
the  above  species  is  the  first  described  from  New  Guinea  proper. 

70.   tSn-.NooYKA  SUBULA,  Pfeitt'er,  1839. 
S y u. — jiouwi,    Gould.    1846]    tuckrri,   Pfr.  1846]  octonc 
D'Orb,  1^11  ;j  .  Adams,  1846  ;  .  Oox,  1864  ;  upolensis, 


BY    C.   HEDLEY.  99 

Mousson,  1865  ;  panayensis,  Pfeiffer,  1846  ;  diaphana,  Gassies, 
1859  ;  souverbiana,  Gassies,  1863  ;  artensis,  Gassies,  1866  ; 
novemgyrata,  Mousson,  1870  ;  gyrata,  Mousson,  1885. 

II  lusn— Conch.  Icon.  pi.  68,  sp    481,  pi.  14,  No.  76;  Mon. 
Austr.  L.  Shells,  pi.  13,  fig.  9  ;  Gould,  Expl.  Exped.  Shells,  fig.  87 
Phil.  Is.  Land  Moll.  ill.  pi.  8,  figs.  14,  15  ;  Martens,  Ostas.  Zool. 
ii.  pi.  22,  fig.  8  ;  Faune  Nouv.    Caled.  pt.  1,  pi.  2,  fig.  5  ;  Journ. 
de  Conch.  1863,  pi.  xiv.  fig.  6;  &c,  &c. 

D  e s c  rn— Wiegm.  Arch.  i.  352;  Moll.  Cub.  i.  177;  P.Z.S. 
1846,  p.  30,  1887,  p.  185  ;  Mon.  Hel.  Viv.  n.  p.  158  ;  Mon. 
Austr.  L.  Shells,  p.  69  ;  Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.  n.  p.  35, 
191  ;  Journ.  de  Conch.  1859,  p.  370  ;  Faune  Nouv.  Caled.  pt.  1, 
p.  52 ;  &c,  &c. 

Anat—  Reis.  Phil.  Land  Moll.  ill.  pi.  XL  figs.  17,  21. 

Type  in  British  Museum. 

Hab. — St.  Joseph  River,  Port  Moresby,  Samarai,  and  Milne 
Bay  (Hedley). 

It  is  remarkable  that  this  common  and  ubiquitous  mollusc  has 
not  been  previously  recorded  from  the  New  Guinea  mainland. 

71.  Tornatellina  terestris,  Brazier,  1876. 

Descr"- P.L.8.N.S.W.  (1),  I.  109;  Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  p. 
102. 

Type  in  Macleay  Museum. 

H  a  b. — Yule  Island  (Brazier). 

72.   fPuPA  pedicula,  Shuttle-worth,  1852. 

Syn. — artensis,  Montronzier,  1859;  nitens,  Pease,  1860;  nacca, 
Gould,  1862  ;  hyalina,  Zelebor,  1868;  macdonnelli,  Brazier,  1875; 
recondita,  Tapparone-Canefri,  1883  ;  samoensis,  Schmeltz,  MSS. 

Illus11, — Journ.  de  Conch,  vn.  pi.  8,  fig.  4;  Faune  Nouv. 
Caled.  pt.  1,  pi.  6,  fig.  21;  P.Z.S.  1874,  pi.  83,  figs.  22,  23;  Ann. 
Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  2,  figs.  3,  4. 


100     THE    LAND    MOLLUSCAN    FAUNA    OF    BRITISH    NEW    GUINEA, 

Descr11— Bern.  Mittheil.  1852,  p.  296;  Mon.  Hel.  Viv.  ill. 
p.  557,  VI.  pp.  329,  330,  335  ;  Journ.  de  Conch,  vn.  p.  288  ;  Faune 
Nouv.  Caled.  pt.  1,  p.  54 ;  P.Z.S.  1860,  p.  439,  1874,  p.  669, 1887, 
p.  188  ;  Proc.  Boston  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.  vm.  p.  280  j  Otia  Conch,  p. 
237  ;  Quart.  Journ.  of  Conch.  1877,  p.  5;  Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix. 
p.  106. 

Type-(?). 

H  a  b. — Mita,  Milne  Bay,  Samarai  and  Loggia  Islands  (Hedley). 

73.   fSucciNEA  simplex,  Pfeiffer,  1854. 
(Plate  xii.,  fig.  32.) 

Descr11-— P.Z.S.  1854,  p.  123,  1885,  p.  595  ;  Mon.  Hel.  Viv. 
iv.  p.  813. 

Type  in  British  Museum. 

A  species  of  Succinea  occurs  in  abundance  upon  the  stems  of 
taro  leaves  in  the  hill  gardens  above  Mita  village,  Milne  Bay,  speci- 
mens of  which  answer  fairly  well  to  the  description  Pfeiffer  gives 
of  S.  simplex.  Being  unable  to  compare  my  specimens  with  a 
figure  or  authentic  named  examples,  I  refer  them  to  the  Solomon 
Island  species  with  some  hesitation. 

74.  jTruncatella  valida,  Pfeiffer,  1846. 

Syn. — vitiana,  Gould,  1847;  vitiacea,  Mousson,  1865;  con- 
spicua,  Bronn. 

Ill  us11-— Kuster,  Conch.  Cab.  ed.  2,  pi.  2,  fig.  7,  8,  19,  20,  21, 
23  ;  Cox,  Mon.  Austr.  L.  Shells,  pi.  20,  figs.  21,  21a,  21b. 

Descr11— Zeitschr.  Malak.  1846,  p.  182;  Mon.  Auric.  I.  p. 
184;  Conch.  Cab.  p.  11  ;  Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist,  n.  p.  208; 
P.Z.S.  1887,  p.  299;  &c.  &c. 

Type  in  British  Museum. 

Hab. — Port  Moresby,  Milne  Bay,  Samarai  (Hedley). 

75.  fT.  ceylanica.  Pfeiffer,  1856. 
Syn. — teres.  Pfr.  1856;  semicostata,  Montrouzier,  1862;  cerea, 
Gassies ;  nitida,  Gassies. 


BY    C.   HEDLEY.  101 

Illus11  —  Mon.  Austr.  L.  Shells,  pi.  15,  figs.  9,  9a,  9b;  Journ. 
de  Conch.  1862,  pi.  9,  fig.  10;  Faune  Nouv.  Caled.  pi.  8,  fig.  2. 

Descr11— P.Z.S.  1856,  p.  336;  1887,300;  Mon.  Auric.  I. 
pp.  186,  188;  Mon.  Austr.  L.  Shells,  p.  92;  Journ.  de  Conch. 
1862,  p.  243  ;  Faune  Nouv.  Caled.  p.  73 ;  &c,  &c. 

Type  in  British  Museum. 

Hab. — Port  Moresby  (Heclley). 

The  Truncatellre  are  characteristic  of  an  assemblage  of  forms 
which  may  be  termed  the  land  littoral  fauna,  other  members 
being  Stenogyra  tuckeri,  Pujm  pedicula,  Pythia  scarabwus,  and 
perhaps,  Conulus  starkei,  and  C.  russelli.  This  littoral  fauna 
always  inhabits,  but  is  not  invariably  confined  to,  the  neighbour- 
hood of  the  sea  beaches.  The  smallest  islands  which  possess  any 
life  at  all  are  usually  stocked  by  these  forms,  which  appear  to 
range  from  Ceylon  in  the  west  to  the  Sandwich  Islands  in  the 
east,  and  to  be  limited  north  and  south  by  the  tropics.  Within 
these  bounds  they  are  associated  with  many  widely  different  fauna?. 

76.  Omphalotropis  brazieri,  n.sp. 
(Plate  xil,  fig.  33.) 

Shell  acutely  ovate  ;  colour  corneous;  whorls. 5,  convex,  gradu- 
ally increasing ;  sculpture,  regular  oblique  striae,  last  whorl 
encircled  at  the  periphery  by  a  strong  keel  ;  suture  impressed  ; 
spire  conical,  a  quarter  of  total  length,  apex  acute  ;  base  flattened  ; 
umbilicus  small,  angled  at  the  margin  ;  aperture  oblique,  sub- 
circular,  angled  above,  peristome  double,  callus  on  body  whorl 
thin.     Operculum  not  observed.     Length  5,  breadth  3  mm. 

Type  in  Queensland  Museum. 

Hab.  — South  shore  of  Milne  Bay  and  Basilaki  Island  (Hedley)  ; 
one  example  collected  at  each  locality. 

77.  0.  protracta,  n.sp. 

(Plate  xii.,  fig.  34.) 
Shell    elevated    conical,   thin,    turreted,    glossy ;    colour    dark 
corneous;  whorls  6,  gradually  increasing,  rounded,  rather  flattened 


102     THE    LAND    MOLLUSCAN    FAUNA    OF    BRITISH    NEW    GUINEA, 

beneath  the  suture,  la.st  angled  at  the  periphery  ;  sculpture  faint 
oblique  striae  ;  suture  impressed  ;  spire  produced,  one-third  of  total 
length  ;  base  rounded  ;  umbilicus  ample,  funnel-shaped,  angled  at 
the  margin  ;  aperture  vertical,  subcircular,  angled  above,  peristome 
slightly  thickened  and  scarcely  reflected,  callus  on  the  body  whorl 
thin.     Operculum  not  observed.     Length  3^  breadth  2  mm. 

Type  in  Queensland  Museum. 

H  a  b. — Mission  Hill,  Upper  St.  Joseph  River  (Hedley)  ;  two 
examples  under  fallen  timber  in  dense  jungle. 

78.  Bellardiella  minor,  n.sp. 
(Plate  xii.,  fig.  35.) 

Shell  imperforate,  oblong ;  colour  ^ ;  whorls  6,  penultimate  and 
antepenultimate  bulging  above  the  suture,  last  rather  flattened  on 
the  periphery  and  more  so  on  the  base  ;  spire  inclined  to  the  right, 
Ipss  than  half  of  total  length ;  apex  acute,  first  two  whorls  devoid 
of  sculpture  appearing  embryonic ;  sculpture,  close  oblique,  sharp, 
thread-like  riblets  ;  suture  impressed  ;  aperture  circular,  peristome 
thick,  expanded  and  briefly  reflected,  body-whorl  overlaid  with  a 
thick  callus,  upper  canal  obsolete,  lower  one  converted  into  a 
closed  circum-umbilical  tube,  whose  orifice  is,  when  adult,  quite 
outside  the  peristome,  when  immature  the  tube  communicates 
with  the  adjacent  whorl  by  a  narrow  slit,  whose  position  is  later 
marked  by  a  scar.     Length  14,  breadth  9,  diam.  of  aperture  4  mm. 

Type  in  Queensland  Museum. 

Hab. — Mission  Hill,  near  the  village  of  Ngauauni,  upon  the 
upper  waters  of  the  St.  Joseph  ;  I  found  several  dead  specimens  in 
a  banana  garden. 

The  arrangement  of  the  lateral  canal  resembles  that  of  Puirinella 
minor  and  P.  macgregori. 

79.  Pupinella  macgregori,  E.  A.  Smith,  1889. 
Illus11-— Ann.  Mag   Nat.  Hist.  (6),  iv.  pi.  13,  fig.  1,  2. 
Descrn--L.c.  (6),  iv.  205. 


BY    C.  HEDLEY.  103 

Type  in  British  Museum. 

Hab. — Rossel  Island,  Louisiacles  (Thomson,  Kowalcl  and 
Belford). 

Tlie  Louisiade  Pupinellse  appear  to  fall  into  three  natural 
groups  :  (a)  comprising  P.  macgregori  and  P.  minor,  in  which  the 
lateral  canal  is  produced  into  a  tube  around  the  umbilical  region ; 
(b)  containing  P.  grandis,  P.  angasi,  P.  smithi,  P.  moulinsiana, 
and  P.  rosseliana,  in  which  the  canal  merely  notches  the  columellar 
margin,  the  five  in  the  order  named  being  a  graduated  series  whose 
notch  is  completely  cut,  half  cut,  and  scarcely  indented  ;  they  form 
an  easy  transition  to  (c)  P.  brazierce,  in  which  the  notch  is  absent. 

80.  P.  minor,  E.  A.  Smith,  1889. 

Illus11— Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (6),  iv.  pi.  13,  figs.  7,  8. 

Descru--L.c,  (6),  iv.  205. 

T  y  p  e  in  British  Museum. 

H  a  b. — Rossel  Island  (Thomson,  Kowald  and  Belford). 

The  single  specimen,  the  second  known  to  science,  collected  by 
the  latter  is  in  a  good  state  of  preservation.  The  colour  is  a  dark 
red  ;  the  sculpture  differs  remarkably  from  that  of  its  allies,  their 
coarse  malleations  being  entirely  absent,  instead  are  developed 
close,  raised,  oblique,  sinuate  hair  lines.  The  lip  and  callus  are, 
under  the  lens,  delicately  granulated. 

81.  P.  grandis,  Forbes,  1852. 

8  y  n.— forbesi,  Pfeiffer,  1852. 

1 1 1  u  sn- — Voy.  "Rattlesnake,"  Append,  pi.  2,  figs.  10,  a,  b,  c,  d  ; 
Pfeiffer,  Conch.  Cab.  ed.  2,  pi.  31,. figs.  19,  20;  Conch.  Icon. 
Pupinidse,  fig.  4. 

Desc rn  — Voy.  "  Rattlesnake,"  n.  p.  380  ;  Mon.  Pneu.  Viv.  I. 
p.  140. 

Type  in  British  Museum. 

Hab. — Sudest  Island  (Forbes,  Kowald  and  Belford). 


104    THE    LAND    MOLLUSCAN    FAUNA    OF    BRITISH    NEW    GUINEA, 

82.  P.  angasi,  Brazier,  1875. 
Syn. — louisiadensis,  Smith,  1889. 

Illusu— Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (6),  iv.  pi.  13,  figs.  3,  4. 
Descr11— P.L.S.N.S.W.  (1),  i.  5;  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.   Hist.  (6), 
iv.  204,  and  (6),  vn.  135. 
Type  in  British  Museum. 
Hab. — Rossel  Island  (Thomson). 

83.  P.  smithi,  Brazier,  1891. 

Syn. — angasi,  H.  Adams,  1875;  grandis  var.  minor,  Cox, 
1873. 

Illus11-— P.Z.S.  1875,  pi.  45,  figs.  2,  2a. 

Descr11-— Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (6),  vn.  136  ;  P.Z.S.  1873, 
p.  567 ;  I.e.  1875,  p.  389  ;  Mon.  Pneu.  Viv.  suppl.  3,  p.  412. 

Type  in  British  Museum. 

Hab. — Louisiade  Archipelago  (Adams,  &c). 

The  volume  containing  Adams'  diagnosis  of  angasi,  No.  2, 
bears  the  date  October  1st,  1875,  whereas  Brazier's  description  of 
angasi,  No.  1,  appeared  in  the  first  twenty  pages  of  these 
Proceedings,  which  were  printed  separately  and  published  May, 
1875,  giving  the  Australian  naturalist  the  priority  of  publi- 
cation by  four  months.  Until  the  present  year,  all  authors  who 
have  written  upon  Papuan  conchology  appear  to  have  overlooked 
Brazier's  account. 

84.   P.  moulinsiana,  Fischer  and  Bernadi,  1857. 

S  y  n. — intermedia,  Angas,  MSS.  ;  leucostoma,  Montrouzier, 
1857. 

Illus11- — Journ.  de  Conch,  v.  pi.  9,  figs.  6,  7 ;  Thes.  Conch,  in. 
pi.  265,  fig.  36. 

Descr11, — Journ.  de  Conch,  v.  299;  xix.  183;  Essai  sur  la 
Faune  de  Woodlark,  136  ;  Mon.  Pneu.  Viv.  n.  93  ;  P.Z.S.  1871, 
586. 


BY    C.   HEDLEY.  105 

Type  in  collection  of  the  Journ.  de  Conch. 
Hab. — Woodlark  Island  (Montrouzier). 

85.  P.  rosseliana,  E.  A.  Smith,  1889. 

Ill  us11— Ann  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (6),  iv.  pi.  13,  figs.  5,  6,  6a. 

Descr11- L.c.  (6),  iv.  205. 

Type  in  British  Museum. 

Hab. — Rossel  Island  (Thomson,  Kowald  and  Belford). 

86.  P.  braziers,  E.  A.  Smith,  1887. 
Syn. — typica,  Brazier,  MSS. 

Ill  us11-— Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (5),  xix.  pi.  15,  fig.  15. 
Descr11— L.c.  (5),  xix.  424,  and  (6),  vn.  136. 
Type  in  British  Museum. 

Hab. — Seymour    Bay,    Fergusson    Island    (Goldie,    Hedley)  ; 
Cape  Pierson,  Normanby  Island  (Dr.  Rabe^cfe  Brazier). 
Found  alive  on  the  ground,  under  logs  of  wood. 

var.  aignanensis,  var.no v. 

Larger  and  more  widely  umbilicated  than  the  type.     Length 
28  mm. 

Type  in  Queensland  Museum. 

Hab. — St.   Aignan,    Louisiades   (Kowald  and   Belford);    one 
dead  specimen. 

87.  P.  ckossei,  Brazier,  1877. 

Ill  us11— Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  10,  figs.  18,  19. 
Descr11—  P.L.S.N.S.W.    (1),   i.    HI;    Ann.   Mus.    Gen.  xix. 
267. 

Type  in  Macleay  Museum. 
H  a  b. — Yule  Island  (Brazier). 

I  am  indebted  to  Mr.  John  Brazier,  F.L.S.,  C.M.Z.S.,  for  the 
following  description  : — 


106     THF.    LAND    H0LLU9CAN    FAUNA    OF    BRITISH    NEW    GUINFA. 

vv    ••  r    rAPPARONSi,  Brasier,  n.sp. 

Hate  xi i..  tig.  56.) 

Shell  shortly  rimato.  oblong-o\  ate,  rather  solid,  regularly  and 
obliquely  tinely  striate,  light  brown  ;  spire  gradually  tapering 
towards  the  rather  pointed  apex]  whorls  o.  four  upper  convex, 
the  fifth  slightly  flattened  on  the  side  of  the  mouth,  the  last 
much  narrower;  aperture  vertical,  circular;  peristome  whitish, 
thieke  .aded  and   reflected,  with   two  channels  :   one  very 

small,  narrow,  and  deep  at  the  insertion  of  the  light  margin, 
the  second  shallow  and  surroundbd  with  thick  callus  between 
the  arcuate  body-margin  and  the  'eft  or  eolumellar.  Length  of 
largest  specimen  JL8,  breadth  S  ;  length  of  smallest  specimen  14, 
breadth  7  mm. 

••Type  in  Australian  Museum, 

••  llab. — Fly  River.  British  New  Guinea  (Froggatt). 

••  Pwo  specimens — one  living,  the  other  dead — of  this  very  rare 
species  were  collected  by  Mr.  \V.  \Y.  Froggatt  when  he  went  in 
the  Geographical  Society  >  Expedition  of  1885"  to  the  Fly  River. 

••  Some  dead  and  worn  specimens  of  this  St  -  .  .es  «  ere  found 
vS  g  I..  M.  O'Albortis   on    the  Fly    River  ;    they   are   men- 

tioned by  Dr,  Q  L'apparone-Canetri  in  his  valuable  paper  on  the 
•  Fauna  tfalaoologioa  Delia  Nuova  Guinea,'  l>Sc.  p.  268.  I 
take  great  pleasure  in  naming  the  species  after  my  Valued  friend 
and  correspondent,  Dr.  C  Bapparoni  Canefri." 

Sib    PUPINA    OVAUS,  n.sp. 

(Plate  xii..  tig.  37.^ 

Shell  ovate-oblong,  smooth  and  extremely  glossy  ;  colour 
reddish-horn;   whorls    '    .   -   g  shortly  ovate, 

total    length  ;  apex  obtuse  ;  suture   margined   by   a   callus, 
faintly  impressed  ;  aperture  subvertical,  circa 

deep  and  narrow,  parietal  lamella  a  stout  rib  curving  from  one 
canal  to  the  other,  columella   tlat,  widely  dilated,  deeply   notched 


BY    C.  HEDLEY.  107 

by  the  lateral  canal,  peristome  thickened  slightly  and  reflected. 
Length  8,  breadth  6  mm. 

Type  in  Queensland  Museum. 

Hab. — Mita,  Milne  Bay  (Hedley) ;  six  specimens,  under  logs 
in  dense  jungle  on  hillsides;  rare. 

90.  P.  gibba,  n.sp. 

(Plate  xii.,  fig.  38.) 

Shell  minute,  oblong,  smooth  and  extremely  glossy ;  colour 
pale  corneous  ;  whorls  5,  last  convex,  rather  flattened  below  the 
suture,  penultimate  gibbose,  tumid  ;  spire  J  of  total  length  ;  apex 
obtuse  ;  suture  margined  by  a  callus,  impressed  ;  aperture  sub- 
vertical,  circular,  anterior  canal  distinct,  lateral,  a  narrow  cleft 
across  the  peristome  developing  outside  the  lip,  a  circular  orifice, 
parietal  lamella  obscure,  peristome  slightly  thickened  and 
reflected.     Length  4;  breadth  2  mm. 

Type  in  Queensland  Museum. 

Hab. — Mission  Hill,  Ngauauni,  Upper  St.  Joseph  River 
(Hedley) ;  four  specimens  under  logs  in  jungle  upon  the  hillside. 

91.    DlPLOMMATINA    SYMMETRICA,  n.sp. 

(Plate  xii.,  fig.  39.) 

Shell  dextral,  rimate,  elongate,  ovate,  turreted,  thin,  trans- 
lucent; colour  reddish-corneous;  whorls  7,  rounded,  increasing 
regularly  as  far  as  the  antepenultimate,  which  equals  its  successor 
in  breadth  ;  sculpture,  closely  obliquely  ribbed  by  thin  white  erect 
lamellse,  not  continuous,  projecting  at  the  shoulder,  minutely 
spirally  striated  between  the  ribs  ;  suture  deeply  impressed  ;  apex 
obtuse;  aperture  subvertical,  circular,  columellar  margin  straight, 
bearing  a  moderate-sized  internal  tubercle,  peristome  double, 
greatly  expanded  round  its  entire  margin,  forming  a  broad  callus 
upon  the  penultimate  whorl.     Alt.  3-^,  breadth  ljmm. 

Type  in  Queensland  Museum. 


108     THE    LAND    MOLLUSCAN    FAUNA    OF    BRITISH    NEW    GUINEA, 

tflOhVUD 

rv»M.wi. 
Hab  — Basilaki  (formerly  called   Moresby)   Island   (Hedley) ; 
found  abundantly  upon  decaying  leaves  of  Pandanus  upon  a  steep 
hill  side. 

92,  Cyclotropis  papuensis,  Tapparone-Canefri,  1883. 
Hlusn._Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  10,  figs.  22,  23. 
Desc rn— L.c.  xix.  p.  279. 
Type  in  Genoa  Museum. 
Hab.— Fly  River  (D'Albertis). 

93.  Cyclotus  poirieri,  Tapparone-Canefri,  1883. 
1 1 1  u  sn— Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  10,  figs.  6,  7. 
Descrn— L.c.  xix.  254. 
Type  in  Genoa  Museum. 
Hab.— Fly  River  (D'Albertis). 

94.  C.  tristis,  Tapparone-Canefri,  1883. 
Illusn— Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  10,  figs.  4,  5. 
Descrn- — L.c.  xix.  255. 
Type  in  Genoa  Museum. 
H  a  b.— Fly  River  (D'Albertis,  Froggatt). 

95.  C.  horridus,  n.sp. 
(Plate  xii.  bis,  fig.  40.) 

Shell  depressed,  turbinate,  widely  and  perspectively  umbilicated; 
colour  fulvous  ;  whorls  5,  rapidly  increasing,  rounded,  last  des- 
cending at  the  aperture  ;  suture  deeply  impressed  ;  apex  acute ; 
sculpture,  numerous  close  regular  fine  spiral  lyrae,  crossed  by  longi- 
tudinal lines  of  small  stiff  epidermal  bristles  ;  aperture  scarcely 
oblique,  rounded,  subangled  above,  peristome  continuous,  thickened, 
straight.  Operculum  externally  concave,  white,  calcareous,  sub- 
circular,  5-whorled,  whorls  margined  within  by  a  deep  furrow. 
Diam.  maj.  9,  min.  7,  alt.  7  mm. 

T  y  p  e  in  Queensland  Museum. 


BY    C.  HEDLEY.  109 

H  a  b. — Milne  Bay,  Mita  and  South  shore  (Hedley) ;  twelve 
dead  and  immature  specimens,  in  jungle  under  logs.  The  best 
preserved  but  immature  specimen  which  furnished  the  figure  had 
not  attained  the  adult  peristome. 

96.  C.  kowaldi,  n.sp. 
(Plate  xii.  bis,  fig.  41.) 

Shell  turbinate,  openly  umbilicated ;  colour  fulvous,  faintly 
radiately  painted  with  dark  brown  ;  whorls  5^,  rounded,  obscurely 
bicarinate  ;  suture  channelled ;  apex  mammillate ;  sculpture,  the 
body  whorl  is  encircled  by  about  15  lyrse,  two  of  which,  one  at 
and  one  above  the  periphery,  attain  more  prominence  developing 
into  keels,  within  the  umbilical  funnel  the  lyrse  are  closer,  smaller 
and  more  numerous,  the  lyrse  are  decussated  by  costse  at  the 
junction  of  which  an  epidermal  bristle  is  generally  developed  ; 
peristome  in  the  individual  observed  thin  and  therefore  probably 
juvenile.  Operculum  not  received.  Diam.  maj.  9,  min.  7,  alt. 
6  mm. 

Type  in  Queensland  Museum. 

Hab. — Sudest  Island,  Louisiades  (Kowald  and  Belford)  ;  one 
specimen. 

97.  C.  belfordi,  n.sp. 

(Plate  xn.  bis,  fig.  42.) 

Shell  trochiform,  narrowly  umbilicated ;  colour  fulvous-brown  ; 
whorls  4  J  (juv.  ?),  acutely  carinated  ;  suture  channelled  ;  apex 
mammillate  ;  sculpture,  spiral  lyrse  decussating  radiate  costse,  the 
acute  carina  of  the  periphery  bearing  a  single  row  of  long  bristles, 
peristome  sharp  (juvenile  ?).  Operculum  wanting.  Diam.  maj. 
4J,  min.  4,  alt.  4  j-  mm. 

Type  in  Queensland  Museum. 

Hab. — Mita,  Milne  Bay  (Hedley) ;  two  specimens. 

I  describe  these  Cycloti  from  imperfect  material  with  some 
hesitation ;  none  have  been  before  recorded  from  this  neighbour- 
hood, and  I  trust  that  their  marked  characteristics  will  enable 


110     THE    LAND    MOLLUSCAN   FAUNA    OF    BRITISH    NEW    GUINEA, 

subsequent  observers  to  recognise  them.  The  two  latter  species 
are  named  after  Messrs.  Charles  Kowald  and  George  Belford  whose 
collections  have  been  so  frequently  referred  to  in  preceding  pages. 


98.  f  Leptopoma  vitreum,  Lesson,  1830. 

Syn. — hiteurn,  Quoy  and  Gaimard,  1832;  nitidum,  Sowerby, 
1843. 

Illus"-— Yoy.  "Coquille,"  Moll.  pi.  13,  figs.  6,  6vj  Yoy. 
«  Astrolabe,"  Moll.  pi.  12,  figs.  11,  12, 13,  14;  Sow.  Thes.  Conch.  I. 
pi.  29,  figs.  225,  226,  227  ;  Reeve,  Conch.  Syst.  pi.  183,  fig.  2  ; 
Reeve,  Conch.  Icon.  xn.  pi.  3,  fig.  15a,  b,  pi.  6,  fig.  32;  Chem. 
Conch.  Cab.  ed.  2,  pi.  16,  figs.  10,  16,  17,  18  ;  Adams,  Gen.  Moll, 
pi.  85,  figs.  7,  7a,  7b  ,  Chenu,  Man.  Conch,  figs.  3602,  3603 ; 
Cox,  Aust.  L.  Shells,  pi.  16,  figs.  2,  2a,  3;  Tryon,  Struct.  Syst. 
Conch,  ii.  pi.  76,  figs.  3,  4. 

Descr11-— Yoy.  "  Coquille,"  Zool.  n.  346;  Yoy.  "Astrolabe," 
Zool.  ii.  180  ;  P.Z.S.  1843,  p.  60  ;  Lamk.  An.  s.  Yert.  2  ed.  vm. 
367  ;  Mon.  Pneu.  Yiv.  I.  101  ;  Cox,  Mon.  Aust.  L.  Shells,  p.  98, 
&c,  &c. 

Ana  t. — Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  9,  figs.  7,  8. 

Type  in  Jardin  des  Plantes  Museum. 

Hab. — Yule  (D'Albertis),  South  Cape  (Smithurst),  Fergusson 
(Hedley),  Woodlark,  Trobriand,  and  Sudest  Islands  (Kowald 
and  Belford). 

99.  L.  gianelli,  Tapparone-Canefri,  1887. 

Illusn  — Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xxiv.  pi.  2,  figs.  10,  11. 

Descr11-— L.c.  xxiv.  183. 

Type  in  Genoa  Museum. 

var.  alpha,  T.-C. 

Hab.— Fly  River  (D'Albertis,  Froggatt). 


BY    C.  HEDLEY.  Ill 

100.  L.  parvum,  n.sp. 

(Plate  xn.  bis,  fig.  43.) 

Shell  small,  narrowly  perforate,  globosely  turbinate,  thin, 
translucent ;  colour  light  corneous,  apex  pink ;  whorls  5, 
rounded  ;  sculpture,  upon  the  body  whorl,  15  minute  raised  spiral 
lines,  10  above  the  periphery  and  5  below,  which  latter  are 
confined  to  the  outer  half  of  the  base,  penultimate  whorls 
encircled  by  10  such  lines,  everywhere  microscopically  obliquely 
striated ;  apex  acute ;  suture  impressed ;  aperture  subcircular, 
peristome  almost  continuous,  slightly  expanded  and  reflected, 
operculum  not  observed.     Length  6,  breadth  5  mm. 

Type  in  Queensland  Museum. 

Hab. — Milne  Bay  (Hedley)  ;  one  dead  specimen. 

I  overlooked  this  species  until  my  return  to  Australia,  when  I 
discovered  a  solitary  shell  in  a  bottle  filled  and  closed  in  Milne 
Bay.  I  was  in  the  habit  of  daily  purchasing  by  the  handful 
shells,  beetles,  and  other  small  fry  from  the  natives,  and  I  con- 
elude  that  I  received  this  shell  unnoticed  among  other  things. 

Recorded  from  the  province  in  error. 

L.  venustulum,  Tapp.-Can. 
Vide  Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  263,  and  xxiv.  185. 

101.  Helicina  coxeni,  Brazier,  1876. 

Illus"-— Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  pi.  9,  figs.  12,  13  j  p.  275,  fig.  g. 

Descrn— P.L.S.N.S.W.  (1),  i.  Ill;  Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  p. 
274. 

Type  in  Macleay  Museum. 

H  a  b. — Yule  Island  (Brazier,  D'Albertis)  ;  Pvigo,  Port  Moresby 
and  Maiva  (Hedley). 


112     THE    LAND    MOLLUSCAN    FAUNA    OF    BRITISH    NEW    GUINEA, 

102.  H.  dentoni,  Pilsbry,  1890. 
Descr"-- Proc.  Acad.  Philad,  1890,  p.  186. 
Type  in  Phil.  Acad.  Museum. 
Hab. — British  New  Guinea  (Denton). 

103.  H.  solitaria,  E.  A.  Smith,  1887. 
Illus11  — Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (5),  xix.  pi.  15,  fig.  10. 
D  e  s  c  r11  —  L.c.  (5),  xix.  425. 
Type  in  British  Museum. 
H  a  b. — Foot  of  Astrolabe  Range  (Goldie)  ? 

104.   H.  fischeriana,  Montrouzier,  1863. 

Syn. — novo-guineensis,  Smith,  1887  ;  congener,  Smith,  1889. 

Illusn- — Journ.  de  Conch,  xi.  pi.  5,  fig.  3;  Ann.  Mag.  Nat. 
Hist.  (5),  xix.  pi.  15,  figs.  11,  11a;  l.c.  (6),  iv.  pi.  13,  fig.  17. 

D  e  s  c  rn-— Journ.  de  Conch,  xi.  76,  171;  Mon.  Pneu.  Viv. 
in.  241  ;  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (5),  xix.  425  ;  l.c.  (6),  iv.  203. 

Type  in  Bordeaux  Museum. 

H  a  b. — Woodlark  Island  (Montrouzier,  Kowald  and  Belford) ; 
St.  Aignan  (Thomson)  ;  Rossel  (Kowald  and  Belford) ;  foot  of 
Owen  Stanley  Range  (Smith). 

A  large  series  collected  by  Messrs.  Kowald  and   Belford  at  the 

original  locality,   and   an  examination  of   duplicates  of   Smith's 

types  in  the  possession  of  Mr.  Brazier,  form   the  material  upon 

which  the   above  synonomy    is    based.      The   locality   of  Owen 

Stanley  seems  to  me  more  than  doubtful ;  the  species  is  probably 

confined   to  the    eastern  archipelagos.     The   radiate  painting  is 

rarely  absent,   and  with  the  coarser  lyrse  serves  to  define  this 

variable  form  from  its  equally  variable  kin  inhabiting  the  same 

islands. 

105.  H.  stanleyi,  Forbes,  1852. 

Illus11, — Voy.  "Rattlesnake,"  Append,  pi.  3,  figs.  4a,  b. 
Descrn—  L.c.  381  :  Mon.  Pneu.  Viv.  i.  401. 


BY    C.  HEDLEY.  113 

Type  in  British  Museum. 

Hal). — Duchateau  Islets,  Louisiade  Archipelago  (Forbes). 
106.  H.  insularum,  n.sp. 
(Plate  xn.  bis,  fig.  44.) 

Shell  depressedly  trochiform,  sharply  keeled ;  colour  light 
yellow,  usually  unicolorous,  occasionally  with  a  spiral  chestnut 
band  above  the  periphery,  occupying  the  central  third  of  the  space 
between  the  keel  and  the  suture,  more  rarely  the  band  broadens 
till  the  keel  and  a  sutural  thread  alone  remain  yellow  ;  whorls 
4 h,  flattened ;  suture  linear ;  apex  acute ;  sculpture,  9  spiral 
lyrse  above  the  periphery  and  20  below  it  crossed  by  close 
incremental  striae  ;  basal  callus  well  defined,  malleated,  centre  of 
base  smooth ;  aperture  subvertical,  lunate,  within  the  basal 
margin  containing  a  thread-like  rib  which  retreats  to  the 
columella,  peristome  everywhere  expanded.  Diam.  maj.  14,  min 
11,  alt.  10  mm. 

Type  in  Queensland  Museum. 

Hab. — Suclest  Island,  Louisiades  (Kowald  and  Belford); 
abundant. 

var.  sinus,  var.no v. 

(Plate  xn.  bis,  fig.  45.) 
Much   smaller  than   type,  six  lyrse  above,  sixteen  below  the 
periphery.     Diam.  maj.  8,  min.  7,  alt.  5  mm. 

Hab. — Village  of  Mita,  Milne  Bay,  and  village  of  Polatona, 
Bently  Bay  (Hedley)  ;  abundant,  found  crawling  upon  shrubs  and 
trees. 

var.  muruensis,  var.nov. 

Diam.  maj.  10,  min.  8,  alt.  6  mm. 

Hab. — Murua  or  Woodlark  Island  (Kowald  and  Belford); 
abundant. 

var.  trobriandensis,  var.nov. 

Diam.  maj.  11,  min.  9,  alt.  8  mm. 

Hab. — Trobriand  Islands  (Kowald  and  Belford);  eight 
specimens. 


V 


114     THE    LAND    MOLLUSCAN    FAUNA    OF    BRITISH    NEW    GUINEA, 


var.  rosselensis,  var.nov. 

Whorls  more  convex,  colour  rose  with  apex  and  callus  yellow. 
Diam.  maj.  9,  min.  8,  alt.  7  mm. 

H  a  b. — Rossel  Island  (Kowald  and  Belford) ;  abundant. 

This  species  is  evidently  a  dominant  form,  and  may  be  expected 
under  one  of  its  aspects  from  any  island  in  the  Louisiades  and 
neighbouring  archipelagos. 

Var.  sinus  is  almost  entitled  to  specific  rank  ;  it  makes  a  distinct 
advance  towards  II.  stanleyi,  and  in  another  direction  var.  ?'ossel- 
ensis  approaches  H.  woodlarkensis. 

107.  H.  woodlarkensis,  E.  A.  Smith,  1891. 
(Plate  xii.  bis,  fig.  46.) 

Descr"— Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist  (6),  VII.  138. 

Type  in  British  Museum. 

H  a  b. — Woodlark  Island  (Dr.  Rabe  fide  Brazier,  Kowald  and 
Belford). 

On  the  visit  of  the  "  Merrie  England"  in  1890,  Messrs. 
Kowald  and  Belford  collected  35  specimens,  which  are  coloured 
white,  yellow,  purple-brown  or  rose,  never  banded,  apical  whorls 
invariably  a  bright  lemon  yellow. 

My  figure  is  drawn  from  a  specimen  of  the  parcel  sent  to  Smith, 
kindly  lent  by  Mr.  Brazier. 

108.  H.  louisiadensis,  Eorbes,  1852. 

II  lus11- — Voy.  "  Rattlesnake,"  Append,  pi.  3,  figs.  5a,  b  ;  Sow. 
Thes.  Conch,  iv.  pi.  275,  figs.  349,  350  ;  Conch.  Icon.  xix.  pi.  29, 
figs.  257a,  b. 

Descr11-— Voy.  "Rattlesnake,"  n.  p.  382;  Mon.  Pneu.  Viv. 
i.  p.  385. 

Type  in  British  Museum. 

Hab. — Round  Island,  Coral  Haven,  Louisiades  (Forbes); 
Milne  Bay  and  Basil aki  Island  (Hedley). 

The  mainland  examples  are  rather  larger  and  more  depressed 
than  the  shells  described  by  Forbes. 


BY    C.   HEDLEY.  115 

109.  H.  maino,  Brazier,  1876. 
(Plate  xii.  Us,  fig.  47.) 

Descr11— P.L.S.N.S.W.  (1),  i.  112;  Ann.  Mus.  Gen.  xix.  276, 
xxiv.  p.  188. 

Type  in  Macleay  Museum. 

Hab. — Village  of  Mowatta,  Katow  River  (Brazier). 

Drawn  from  the  type  by  the  kind  permission  of  Mr.  Masters, 
Curator,  Macleay  Museum. 

"  Maino  "  signifies  "  peace  "  in  the  local  dialect. 

110.  H.    MULTICORONATA,  ll.sp. 

(Plate  xii.  bis,  fig.  48.) 

Shell  minute,  globosely  conical ;  colour  dull  yellow  ;  whorls  4^-, 
rounded,  slightly  turretecl ;  sculpture,  upon  the  last  whorl  a  fine 
thread-like  keel  at  the  periphery,  the  space  between  that  and  the 
suture  divided  by  three  similar  keels,  the  earlier  whorls  exhibit 
only  the  three  upper  keels,  each  keel  bears  minute,  erect,  epidermal 
bristles,  which  give  the  shell  a  somewhat  coronated  appearance 
under  the  lens  ;  base  rounded,  faintly  concentrically  and  longi- 
tudinally striated;  callus  smooth,  semi-transparent;  aperture 
vertical,  semi-lunate,  red  within,  lip  slightly  expanded.  Diam. 
maj.  4,  min.  3  J,  alt.  4  mm. 

T  y  p  e  in  Queensland  Museum. 

Hab. — Village  of  Mita,  Milne  Bay  (Hedley) ;  one  specimen. 

Doubtful. — H.  leucostoma,  Tapparone-Canefri  (Ann.  Mus.  Gen. 
xix.  p.  277,  fig.  h),  may  belong  to  this  province,  but  the  locality  is 
not  defined  by  the  author. 

(Anatomical  Supplement  to  follow.) 


Figs. 

1,  2. 

Figs. 

3,4. 

Fig. 

5. 

Fit?. 

6. 

Fig. 

7. 

Fig. 

8. 

EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES. 
Plate  ix. 
— Oxytes  hercules,  Hedley. 
— 0.  Jlyensis,  Hedley. 
— Conulus  starkei,  Brazier.     Magnified. 
— C.  maino,  Brazier.     Magnified. 
— Microcystina  sapjyho,  Brazier.     Magnified. 
— M.  calcarata,  Hedley.     Magnified. 


Fig. 

9. 

Fig. 

10. 

Fig. 

11. 

Fig. 

12. 

Fig. 

13. 

Fig. 

14. 

Figs. 

15,  16. 

116       THE  LAND  MOLLUSCAN  FAUNA  OF  BRITISH  NEW  GUINEA. 

EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES  (continued). 

Plate  x. 

— M.  calcarata,  Hedley.     Magnified. 

— Thalassia  annul  a,  Brazier. 

— Ochthephila  albertisi,  Brazier. 

— Charopa  texta,  Hedley.     Magnified. 

— Helicarion  visi,  Hedley. 

— H.  musgravei,  Hedley. 

— Rhytida  globosa,  Hedley. 
Figs.    17,  18,  19. — Cristigibba  macgregori,  Hedley. 
Fig.    20.  — Geotrochus  oxystoma,  Smith. 

Plate  xi. 

— Geotrochus  oxystoma,  Smith. 

— G.  bevani,  Brazier. 

— G.  elisus,  Hedley. 

— G.  tapparonei,  Smith, 

— G.  zeno,  Brazier. 

— G.  trobriandensis,  Hedley. 

— G.  brumeriensis,  Forbes. 

Plate  xii. 

— Cochlostyla  papuensis,  Hedley. 

— Partula  occidentalis,  Hedley. 

— Succinea  simplex,  PfeifFer. 

— Omphalotropis  brazieri,  Hedley.     Magnified. 

— 0.  protracta,  Hedley.     Magnified. 

— Bellardiella  minor,  Hedley.     Magnified. 

— Pnpinella  tapparonei,  Brazier.     Magnified. 

— Pupina  ovalis,  Hedley.     Magnified. 

— P.  gibba,  Hedley.     Magnified. 

— Diplommatina  symmetrica,  Hedley.     Magnified. 

Plate  xii.  bis. 

— Cyclotus  horridus,  Hedley.     Magnified. 

— C.  howaldi,  Hedley.     Magnified. 

— C.  belfordi,  Hedley.     Magnified. 

— Leptopoma  parvum,  Hedley.     Magnified. 

— Helicina  insidarum,  Hedley. 

—       ,,  ,,  var.  sinus.     Magnified. 

— H.  woodlarkensis,  Smith.     Magnified. 

— H.  maino,  Brazier.     Magnified. 

— H.  multicoronata,  Hedley.     Magnified. 


Fig. 

21. 

Figs, 

22,  23. 

Figs. 

,  24,  25. 

Fig. 

26. 

Fig. 

27. 

Fig. 

28. 

Fig. 

29. 

Fig. 

30. 

Fig. 

31. 

Fig. 

32. 

Fig. 

33. 

Fig. 

34. 

Fig. 

35. 

Fig. 

36. 

Fig. 

37. 

Fig. 

38. 

Fig. 

39. 

Fig. 

40. 

Fig. 

41. 

Fig. 

42. 

Fig. 

43. 

Fig. 

44. 

Fig. 

45. 

Fig. 

46. 

Fig. 

47. 

Fig. 

48. 

117 


ON  THE  TRAIL  OF  AN  EXTINCT  BIRD. 

By  C.  W.  De  Vis,  M.A.,  Corr.  Mem. 

The  function  of  the  wing  in  birds  is  in  kind  almost  uniform, 
though,  in  exercise  it  varies  greatly.  It  is  therefore  probable 
that  any  variation  observable  in  the  form  or  relative  dimensions 
of  a  constituent  bone  of  the  wing  (the  ulna,  for  example)  has  been 
brought  about  solely  by  the  habitudes  of  the  bird,  or  those  of  its 
ancestors,  in  the  use  of  the  power  of  flight.  The  extent  of  the 
variation  so  produced  will  be  comparatively  limited :  inconspicuous, 
indeed,  by  the  side  of  the  results  of  diverse  adaptation  acting  on 
the  corresponding  segment  of  the  mammalian  fore-limb.  We  are 
thus  prepared  to  find  the  ulna  maintaining  in  birds  a  general 
sameness  of  character.  If  we  compare  it  with  the  humerus  its 
uniformity  is  but  accentuated:  and  naturally  so  since  its  surface  is 
less  subjected  to  the  moulding  agency  of  muscular  origin  and 
insertion  than  is  that  of  the  proximal  segment  of  the  lever,  the 
recipient  of  the  muscles  moving  the  whole,  and  the  purveyor  of 
others  which  give  motion  to  the  distal  segments.  These  con- 
siderations may  serve  to  account  for  the  fact  that  the  differentia- 
tions of  the  ulna  have  been  found  too  insignificant  to  be  discussed 
by  comparative  osteology  ;  and  undoubtedly  the  bone  is  not  that 
part  of  the  bird's  skeleton  which  throws  most  light  on  its  general 
economy,  yet  it  may  be  that  it  is  not  altogether  impossible  to  find 
in  the  fossil  ulna  of  a  bird  some  guidance  to  the  systematic  place 
which  should  be  assigned  to  the  organization  of  which  it  formed  a 
part.  In  the  following  attempt  to  do  so  the  characters  which  have 
appeared  to  be  available  are  the  proportions  of  the  bone  discovered 
in  its  relative  length  and  thickness,  its  curvature,  the  number,  size 
and  disposition  of  the  tubercles  corresponding  to  the  secondary 
remiges,  the  shape  of  the  shaft  at  its  distal  end,  and  the  conforma- 
tion of  the  articulating  surfaces  and  parts  adjacent  to  them. 


118  ON    THE    TRAIL    OF    AN    EXTINCT    BIRD, 

Proportions :  The  ulna  being  in  correlation  with  the  rest  of  the 
wing  bones,  and,  in  conjunction  with  them,  determining  to  some 
extent  the  shape  of  the  complete  organ,  and  this  again  being  in 
relation  with  the  volant  activity  of  the  bird,  we  might  expect  to 
be  able  to  recognise  a  correspondence  between  the  proportion  of 
the  bone  and  the  bird's  habits  of  flight ;  and  in  certain  groups,  as 
the  petrels,  swifts,  and  eagles,  whose  livelihood  depends  on 
continuous  exertion  of  wing-power,  we  find  that  such  a  relation 
does  exist.  In  the  soaring  birds  there  is  a  notable  slenderness  of 
the  ulna,  accompanying  an  elongation  and  narrowness  of  the  wing, 
which  we  may  conceive  to  be  necessary  to  sustained  buoyancy 
upon  and  rapid  evolution  in  moving  air ;  and  had  adaptation 
persisted  in  being  the  sole  factor  in  the  formation  of  the  wing  the 
task  of  placing  an  unknown  bird  amongst  its  kindred,  as 
determined  by  their  powers  of  flight,  would  have  been  compara- 
tively easy.  But  it  is  clear  that  teleology  may  be  at  fault.  A 
similar  tenuity  of  the  ulna  is  found  in  birds  whose  flight  is  not 
habitually  sustained,  though  on  occasion  it  may  be  long  and  rapid 
— for  example,  in  storks,  swans,  and  pelicans;  nay  even  in  others, 
as  the  giant  kingfisher,  whose  wings  serve  only  for  short  and 
laboured  flight.  Looking  round  for  a  solution  of  the  difficulty,  and 
seeing  the  prevalence  of  long  necks  in  the  birds  last  mentioned, 
we  are  for  a  moment  tempted  to  abandon  adaptation  as  a  cause 
and  suppose  their  long  ulnas  to  be  due  to  correlation  of  growth  ; 
but  even  this  somewhat  violent  assumption  would  be  illegitimate, 
seeing  that  plovers  and  sandpipers,  with  long  ulnas,  have  short 
necks,  while  most  ducks  have,  with  long  necks,  short  ulnas.  The 
only  plausible  explanation  seems  to  be  offered  by  heredity. 
Though  forbidden  to  account  for  the  long  ulnas  of  many  existing 
birds  by  attributing  them  to  adaptive  modifications,  we  are 
permitted  to  conceive  that  they  have  been  handed  down  from 
ancestral  forms  whose  modes  of  flight  required  them,  and  retained 
by  the  prepotency  of  heredity  over  adaptation.  If  it  be  said  that 
heredity  as  thus  used  is  a  convenient  harbour  of  refuge  for 
ignorance,  be  it  so  until  we  know  better. 


BY    C.  W.   DE    VIS. 


119 


To  acquire  a  definite  notion  of  the  extent  to  which  the  bird 
ulna  varies  in  its  proportions,  the  writer  has  prepared  a  tabular 
statement  of  the  extreme  length  and  minimum  breadth  of  the  bone 
from  measurements  of  it  in  ninety-eight  representatives  of  the 
larger  sections  of  Australian  birds ;   and  from  the  measures  of 


length  and  breadth  has  by  the  use  of  the  formula, 


transverse 


xlOO, 


longitudinal 

derived  an  index  which  may  be  called  the  ulnar  index.  By  this 
proportions  may  be  conveniently  estimated,  slenderness  increasing 
as  the  index  diminishes.  The  lengthiness  of  the  entire  table 
prohibits  its  introduction  here ;  a  summary  may,  however,  be 
given  if  accompanied  by  the  warning  that  in  some  families  the 
indices  are  derived  from  one  or  two  species  only. 


Table  of  Ulnar 

FalconidsB 

Strigidse  .„. 

Corvidaa ... 

Paradiseidee 

Oriolidse  ... 

Campophagiclse 

Menu  rid  ae 

Ptilonorhynchidse  .. 

Cuculidae 

Alcedinida? 

Caprimulgidse 

Coraciadse 

Psittaci 

Columbae 

Megapodidse 

OtidicUe  ... 

Rallidae  ... 

Charadriidse 

Ardeidse  ... 

Anatidse... 

Pelecanid  ee 

Steganopodes 

Podicipitidse 


Indices  in  Birds. 


3-6    to 

5-37 

4-05  — 

4-64 

6-15  — 

6-25 

6-11  - 

7-94 

6-74  — 

7-6 

5-39  — 

7-55 

8-36  — 

8-75 

6-62  — 

6-85 

3-9    — 

7-53 

3-8    — 

4-7 

6-43  — 

— 

5-2     — 

— 

4-94  — 

8-6 

5-50  — 

9-33 

5-4    — 

10  51 

2-96  — 

3-14 

4-92  — 

8-28 

3  65  — 

5-91 

2-81  — 

4-67 

3-73  — 

7-46 

3-4    — 

5-16 

3-24  — 

3-58 

3-69  — 

4-69 

120  ON    THE    TRAIL    OF    AN    EXTINCT    BIRD, 

The  fossil  ulna  which  has  led  to  these  measurements  is  in  its 
greatest  diameter  47*5  mm.;  in  its  smallest,  3'5mm.;  it  has  con- 
sequently an  index  of  7*38. 

Proceeding  to  compare  it  with  those  of  recent  birds,  we  may  at 
once  exclude  from  further  consideration  those  which  have  a 
greatest  index  below  7*38,  or  a  smallest  index  above  it.  Nine 
families  will  then  remain,  the  Paradiseidce,  Oriolidce,  Gampo- 
pliagidce,  Cucididce,  Psittaci,  Columbce,  Megap>odidaz,  and  Anatidce. 

Form  of  Shaft:  The  ulnar  shaft  in  birds  assumes  towards  its 
distal  end  four  modifications  of  form,  which  may  be  distinguished 
as  cylindrical,  subcylindrical,  compressed,  and  trihedral.  It  is 
compressed  in  the  Paradiseidce  and  Cuculidce  ;  subtrihedral  in  the 
Megapodidce  ;  cylindrical  in  the  Psittaci.  In  the  remaining  five 
families,  and  in  the  fossil,  it  is  subcylindrical,  the  cylinder  being 
flattened  on  the  dorsal  surface. 

Curvature  of  Shaft :  To  afford  space  for  the  interosseous  bodies 
and  tendons  of  the  long  flexors  and  extensors  the  avine  ulnar 
curves  outwards,  the  curvature  varying  considerably  in  degree 
and  location.  In  the  majority  of  birds  the  curvature  is  almost 
confined  to  the  proximal  half  or  third  of  the  shaft,  which  becomes 
straight,  or  nearly  so,  for  the  rest  of  its  length  ;  in  others  the 
shaft  is  curved  throughout,  its  contour  forming  a  continuous  and 
almost  symmetrical  arch.  The  Gampophagidce,  Oriolidce,  Paradi- 
seidce, Rallidce,  and  the  larger  Anatidce  conform  to  the  general  rule. 
The  fossil  ulna,  on  the  other  hand,  is  regularly  arched,  as  it  is  in 
the  pigeons  and  ducks,  and  the  bird  represented  by  it  probably 
belonged  to  one  or  other  of  these  last  groups. 

Remigial  processes  ;  Arranged  in  a  single  or  double  row  along 
the  bone,  but  generally  more  or  less  indistinct  at  either  end,  these 
outgrowths  present  themselves  in  much  diversity  of  size  and 
number,  the  latter  in  correspondence  with  the  length  of  the  bone, 
the  former  exhibiting  no  such  correspondence,  but  being,  on  the 
contrary,  frequently  greater,  though  not  unfrequently  nearly 
obsolete,  in  the  shorter  winged  birds.  The  contrast  here 
indicated  is  exemplified  by  the  pigeons  and  ducks,  and  it  enables 
us  to  make  a  final  selection  in   our  determination  of  the  fossil. 


BY    C.  W.  DE  VIS.  121 

The  regularly  arched  ulnas  found  among  the  clucks  have  remigial 
tubercles  which  are  either  small  and  low,  or  evanescent.  The 
pigeons  have  them  constantly,  and  sometimes  in  pronounced 
development.  In  Lopholaimus  antarcticus  they  are  almost  as 
large  relatively  to  the  size  of  the  bone  as  in  Menura,  in  which 
they  attain  a  greater  size  than  in  any  other  bird  known  to  the 
writer.  In  the  fossil  ulna  they  are  as  distinct  as  in  Lopholaimus, 
although  the  bone  itself  is  much  more  slender  than  the  ulna  of 
that  pigeon.  It  is  amongst  the  pigeons,  therefore,  that  we  must 
place  our  extinct  bird.  It  remains  to  ascertain  its  position  among 
the  genera  of  the  Columbas.  It  cannot  be  a  Leucosarcia,  for  the 
ulnar  index  in  that  genus  is  much  too  high — namely,  9*33.  On 
the  other  hand,  Lopholaimus,  with  an  index  ranging  from  6 '43  to 
6*57,  Goura  with  a  range  from  5*50  to  5"71.  Myristicivora  with  an 
index  of  6*8,  and  Megaloprepia  with  one  of  6*64  may  be  excluded 
for  the  opposite  reason.  The  middle  terms  are  Macropygia, 
having  an  index  of  7*85  to  8*05,  Erythrauchen  (index  7*79  to  8), 
and  Chalcophaps  (index  7*18  to  7*79),  which  last  might  include  the 
fossil,  with  an  index  of  7*38.  But  though  in  proportions  it  is  at 
one  with  Chalcophaps,  on  a  close  comparison  of  its  arthral 
surfaces  with  those  of  the  genera  referred  to  it  is  in 
them  found  to  resemble  more  nearly  Megaloprepia  and 
Erythrauchen.  Finally,  a  glance  at  the  size  of  the 
remigial  tubercles  of  the  fossil  gives  decision  to  the 
opinion,  already  half  formed,  that  it  belonged  to  a  genus 
of  pigeons  distinct  from  all  three.  The  name  suggested 
for  the  supposed  genus,  Lithophaps,  is,  of  course,  pro- 
visional, since  it  connotes  distinctive  features  which 
J  I  may,  when  we  know  more  of  the  skeleton,  be  found  to 
coexist  with  characters  assimilating  it  to  some  known 
genus  ;  it  merely  records  a  seemingly  reasonable  judg- 
ment on  the  scanty  evidence  before  us. 
The  characters  of  the  genus  so  far  known  are  those  of  the  ulna. 
Ulna  stout,  index  7*38,  subcylindrical,  continously  arched,  with 
a  single  row  of  eight  strong  remigial  tubercles ;  arthral 
surfaces  nearly  as  in  Megaloprepia. 


122  ON    THE    TRAIL    OF    AN    EXTINCT    BIRD. 

The  species  may  be  distinguished  as  L.  ulnaris,  with  characters 
as  yet  undistinguishable  from  those  of  the  genus. 

Hob  :  Darling  Downs,  in  deposits  of  the  Nototherian  period. 
Collected  by  Mr.  H.  Hurst,  in  the  neighbourhood  of  Warwick. 


123 

NOTE    ON   AN    EXTINCT    EAGLE. 

By  C.  W.  De  Vis,  M.A.,  Cork.  Mem. 

In  company  with  Lithophaps  ulnaris,  Mr.  Hurst  found  a  femur 
of  an  eagle  which  is  irreconcilable  with  any  genus  known  to  the 
w liter.  But,  in  the  "Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  Queens- 
land" (Vol.  vi.,  p.  161),  a  humerus  of  an  eagle  has  been  noticed  by 
him  under  the  name  of  Uroaetus  brachialis.  The  bird  was  there 
referred  provisionally  to  the  extant  genus  as  being  in  accord  with 
it  so  far  as  one  extremity  of  a  long  bone  could  bear  witness.  It 
has  now  become  more  than  doubtful  whether  its  association  with 
Uroaetus  can  be  maintained.  If  we  are  not  prepared  to  consider 
it  more  probable  that  two  species  of  eagles  existed  in  practically 
the  same  habitat  than  that  the  two  bones  in  question  belonged  to 
the  same  bird,  and  of  this  there  is  nothing  valid  to  be  shown  to 
the  contrary,  then  the  specific  name  brachialis  must  be  placed 
under  a  new  genus,  for  the  femur  is  quite  distinct  from  those  of 
recent  genera.  For  this  probable  genus  the  name  Tapliaetus  is 
suggested  in  allusion  to  its  appearance  among  the  disentombed 
remains  of  its  contemporaries. 

Restoring  the  condylar  region,  which  is  wanting,  this  bone  is 
of  the  same  length  as  that  of  the  male  sea-eagle,  Haliastur  leuco- 
gaster,  and  1\  mm.  shorter  than  in  a  female  wedge-tailed  eagle, 
U.  audax.  The  femoral  index  9*4  separates  it  alike  from  the 
hawks  and  kites,  with  a  much  lower,^and  from  Baza  which  has 
for  a  hawk  the  exceptionally  high  one  of  10 -4  ;  it  likewise  excludes 
Haliaetus,  which  has  the  highest  observed  in  the  Falconidse,  1088, 
but  agrees  fairly  well  with  that  of  Uroaetus,  Nisaetus,  Haliastur, 
and  Pandion  ;  the  last  named  genus  is,  however,  put  out  of  court 
by  the  want  of  a  pneumatic  foramen  adjacent  to  the  trochanterian 
ridge,  an  abnormality  not  presented  by  the  fossil.     From  the  other 


[24 


NOTE   ON    an    i:\  i  [NOT    BAGLB, 


genera  it  differs  as  follows ;  The  "neck  "  being  Longer  the  proxi- 
mal end  »>t"  the  shaft  is  in  oonsequenoe  notably  broader  the  Deck 
itself  is  also  broader  in  the  opposite  direction  between  the  head 
ami  the  trochanter,  The  entoanconal  surface  of  the  upper  pari  of 
the  shaft  as  tar  as  the  extensor  cruris  ridge 
is  muoh  flattened,  and  between  the  head 
and  the  pneumatic  foramen  becomes  eon- 
oave.  The  pneumatic  foramen  is  remark- 
ably small,  about  half  its  oustomary  Bize  in 
leoent  genera,  and  is  partially  conoealed  by 
a.  defleotion  of  the  sharp  edge  of  the  trc* 
ohanterian  ridge.  When  the  bone  rests  on 
its  outer  side  the  flattening  iA'  the  anoonal 
surface  proximally  and  ^^  the  palmar  dis- 
tally  brings  into  prominence  the  pectineal 
ridge,  which  thus  forms  a  high  and  sharp 
inner  margin;  this  ridge  is  continuous  from 
the  entepioondyle  to  within  a  short  distanoe 
from  the  head,  where  it  ends  in  a  distinct 
tubercle  representing  a  third  trochanter,  a 
feature  rarely  occurring  in  the  femora  oi 
lards.  The  extensor  cruris  ridge  desoends 
much  further  on  the  anoonal  Burface  than 
in  existing  genera  o(  the  family.  On  the 
palmar  surface  the  linea  aspera  commencing 

low   down   as  a    faint    ridge  enlarges   into  a 

well  marked  eminence  opposite  the  interval 

between  the  end  <^'  the  pectineal  ridge  and 

the  medullary  orifioe,  sending  off  b  short 

branch  towards  the  latter,  and  continuing  its  main  course  upwards 

with  a  Btrong  ourve  towards  the  palmar  end  o(  the  musoular  area 

oi  the  trochanter,     The  pit  above  the  entepioondyle  absent   in 

llal'utctus  and  llaliastur  is  in   the  fossil   situated    in  the  mouth  of 

the  groove  between  the  condyle  and  epioondyle. 

The  characters  of  the  genUS  are  for  the  present    but  the  leading 

characters  of  the  femur. 


UY   0,  w.  DE    719.  125 

Femur  stout  (index  ciro.  9*4),  proximal  <mi<I  transversely 
expanded,  shaft  compressed,  pneumatic  foramen  Bmall  ;  a  rudi- 
mentary third  trochanter,  entepicondylar  pit  between  condyle  and 
epicondyle. 


NOTES   AM)    EXHIBITS. 

Mr.  Musson  sent  for  exhibition  a  collection  of  63  specie  oi 
New  Zealand  land  and  freshwater  mollusca  collected  by  him 
during  a  recent  visit,  and  determined  by  Mr.  Suter,  of  Christ- 
church. 

.M  r.  De  Vis  sent  for  exhibition  the  bones  of  fossil  birds  described 
in  bis  papers. 

Mr.  Eledley  exhibited  a  number  of  the  more  remarkable  land 
shells  from  New  Guinea  in  illustration  of  his  paper. 

Mr.  Trebeck  exhibited  galls  of  certain  diptera  (Phytomyzidce  and 

dfc.idmit i/idti)  from   Mount  Wilson. 

Dr.  Cox  exhibited  a  specimen  of  th<:  rock  lily  (Dendrobium 
speoiosum),  throwing  oil' a  bud  in  a  somewhat  remarkable  manner. 

Mr.  Bkuse  drew  attention  to  an  interesting  article  in  the  last 
number  of  the  Ph-armaceutical  Journal  <>f  N.S.W.,  on  insects 
injurious  to  drugs,  one  of  them  probably  the  sumo  species  of  moth 
as  was  exhibited  by  Mr.  Froggatt  at  the  Society's  meeting  in 
March,  1890,  the  insects  shown  having  pupated  in  a  tin  of  cayenne 
pepper. 

Mr.  Fletcher  exhibited  for  Mr.  J. "I  I.  Rose  two  living  specimens 
of  an  inland  species  of  frog  (Chiroleptes  platycephalus,  Gthr.), 
obtained  near  Walgett,  previously  only  recorded  from  Bourkeand 
Dandaloo,  N.S.W.  It  is  nocturnal  in  its  habits  and  an  expert 
burrower,  Mr.  Rose  reporting  that  he  has  never  met  with  it  above; 
ground  during  the  daytime. 


126  NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 

Mr.  A.  Sidney  Olliff  exhibited  specimens  of  the  cottony-cushion 
or  fluted  scale  (leery a  purchem,  Mask.)  and  a  number  of  larvae 
and  perfect  insects  of  Vedalia  cardinalis,  Muls.,  the  predatory 
lady-bird  that  was  introduced  into  California  last  year  by  the 
United  States  Department  of  Agriculture  for  the  purpose  of 
keeping  the  former  insect,  which  had  been  the  cause  of  great 
loss  to  orange-growers,  in  check.  The  lady-birds  had  been  kindly 
forwarded  to  him  from  Auckland,  N.Z.,  by  Mr.  T.  F.  Cheeseman, 
the  Curator  of  the  Auckland  Museum,  who  states  that  the  species 
is  at  present  (March  16th)  engaged  in  clearing  off  a  colony  of 
Icerya  on  a  hedge  of  Kangaroo  Acacia  not  far  from  his  house. 
Mr.  Olliff  said  that  Mr.  A.  Koebele  states  in  his  official  report  on 
his  mission  to  Australia  ("Report  of  a  Trip  to  Australia  to 
investigate  the  Natural  Enemies  of  the  Fluted  Scale":  Washington, 
1890),  that  he  had  obtained  the  Vedalia  at  Adelaide  and  Mannum 
in  South  Australia,  and  in  Melbourne,  and  Sydney;  but  it  was  a 
remarkable  fact  that  the  insect  was  not  known  to  our  most  active 
workers  at  the  Coleoptera,  and  that  it  was  not  represented  in  any 
well-known  Australian  collection.  As  the  Icerya  was  very 
common  in  many  places  near  Sydney,  Mr.  Olliff  hoped  that 
members  would  keep  a  look  out  for  Vedalia  cardinalis  with  a 
view  to  reporting  its  occurrence  to  the  Society.  It  was,  he 
thought,  a  matter  for  regret  that  we  had  not  a  more  definite 
knowledge  of  an  insect  whose  introduction  into  the  Californian 
orange  orchards,  under  the  auspices  of  the  U.  S.  Division  of 
Entomology,  was  likely  to  prove  a  land-mark  in  the  history  of 
applied  entomology.* 

*  Specimens  of  Vedalia  cardinalis  were  afterwards  found  by  Mr.  Olliff 
in  a  collection  of  Sydney  insects  obtained  by  Mr.  A.  Lea,  as  reported  at  the 
following  meeting  of  the  Society  {vide  Abstract  for  April  29th,  1891). — Ed. 


P.LS.N.S.W.(2nfiSei  i Voi  v. 


H-J.ABaron.  /ftfi. 


P.L.5.N.S.W.(2"dSer.)VoL.VI. 


PI  III. 


"<i^ 


kiiS^S' 


<» 


**SSK/S 


C.Hed/ey.  de/.adnat. 


fall  the  figures  natural  size.) 


MJABaro/i.  Ink 


PLS.N.S.W.(2ndSerjVoL.VI. 


PI.  IV 


HJ J. Bar  on.  Iith, 


P.  L.S.N.    ,  r.)  Vol.  VI. 


PLY 


'A Hat  size        I 


>'- 


HJ.AB.~- 


P.LS.N.S.W.(2nd5er.)VcL.VI 


■ 


- 


£M 


•  ■    i  ;- 


^pftr;f? 


xr*&# 


,':V*.'' 


\$& 


•  tw  litfi. 


P.L5.N.S.W.(2ndSer.)VoL.VI 


gr on.  I ith. 


P.LS.N.S.W.(2ndSer.)VoL.VI. 


P1VU1. 


-'• 


15&I*  m 


t 


i-$: 
lu 


I 


H.JJ.Baron  /irn. 


PL.S.N.S.W.(2nd  SeriVoL.VI 


Pl.K. 


,- 


C.Hed/ey-  de/.ad  nat 


HJJ.B3ron.J1m 


PLS.NS.W(2ndSer.)Vol.VI 


:\ 


-  .■■"- 
10 


0M 


14- 


'%%}-; 


13 


Stf 


.«£*■ 


,- .-^ 


«?</  naf. 


//.6./1  /;, 


P.LS  NS.W.(2nd  Ser)Vol.VI 


PI.  XI. 


i 


% 


23 


C.  Hed/ey.  del.  ad  nat 


H  LA.  Baron  hth. 


PL. 5  N.3W(2ndSer;Voi.VI 


PI    Ql 


31 


34 


+       i 


-.<*J~- 


A 


36 


■  -  i  I 


--'"J 


3  5 


, 


37 


l«J 


Hedley 


H.LA.Ba 


P.LS.N.SW.(2ndSer.)Vol.VI 


PI  Xll   bi 


>?& 


*< 


"b*. 


L 


+ 


42 


•H 


44 


/X 


v  + 


V: 


7 


+ 


\. 


-■•  ey  dzl  ad  nai 


H  LA.  Baron  iith. 


127 


WEDNESDAY,    29th  APRIL,  1891. 


The  President,  Professor  Haswell,  M,A.,  D.Sc,  in  the  Chair. 


Messrs.  George  Ellis,  C.  A.  Chesney,  and  Rainbow  were  intro- 
duced as  visitors. 


Mr.  C.  Hedley,  F.L.S.,  who  retires  from  the  position  of  Corres- 
ponding Member  in  consequence  of  taking  up  his  residence  in 
Sydney,  was  duly  elected  an  Ordinary  Member  of  the  Society. 


DONATIONS. 

"Agricultural  Gazette  of  N.S.W."  Vol.  ii.,  Part  2  (Feb.,  1891). 
From  the  Director  of  Agriculture. 

"Bulletin  de  la  Societe  d'Etude  des  Sciences  Naturelles  de 
Reims."     ire  Annee,  No.  1  (Jan.,  1891).     From  the  Society. 

"  Catalogue  of  the  Australian  Birds  in  the  Australian  Museum. 
Part  iii.,  Psittaci;"  "Records  of  the  Australian  Museum."  Vol.  i., 
No.  6.     From  the  Trustees. 

"  Perak  Government  Gazette."  Vol.  iv.,  Nos.  4-6  (Feb.-March, 
1891).     From  the  Government  Secretary. 

"  Zoologischer  Anzeiger."  xiv.  Jahrg.  Nos.  356-358  (Feb.- 
March,  1891).     From  the  Editor. 

"  Johns  Hopkins  University  Circulars."  Vol.  x.,  Nos.  85  and 
86  (Feb.  and  March,  1891).     From  the  University. 


128  DONATIONS. 

"  Journal  of  Comparative  Medicine  and  Veterinary  Archives." 
Vol.  xii.,  Nos.  2  and  3  (Feb.  and  March,  1891).     From  the  Editor. 

Pamphlet  entitled  "  Insect-larva  (Cecidomyia  sp.)  eating  Rust 
on  Wheat  and  Flax."  By  N.  A.  Cobb  and  A.  S.  Olliff.  From 
Dr.  Cobb. 

"  Bulletin  of  the  Department  of  Agriculture,  Brisbane."  No.  7 
(Botany,  No.  ii.,  March,  1891).     From  the  Colonial  Botanist. 

"Journal  of  the  Royal  Microscopical  Society,  1891."  Parti. 
(Feb.).     From  the  Society. 

"Transactions  of  the  Entomological  Society  of  London,  1890." 
Part  v.  (Feb.,  1891).      From  the  Society. 

"Pharmaceutical  Journal  of  Australasia."  n.s.,  Vol.  iv.,  Parts 
3  and  4  (March  and  April,  1891).     From  the  Editor. 

"  Australasian  Journal  of  Pharmacy."  Vol.  vi.,  No.  63  (March, 
1891).     From  the  Editor. 

"  Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Beige  de  Microscopic"  xviime  Annee, 
No.  4  (Jan.,  1891).     From  the  Society. 

"  Iconography  of  Australian  Salsolaceous  Plants.  Decades  i.-vi. 
By  Baron  von  Mueller,  K.C.M.C,  F.R.S."  From  the  Fremier 
oj  Victoria,  through  the  Librarian,  Public  Library,  Melbourne. 

"  Memoires  de  l'Academie  Imperiale  des  Sciences  de  St.  Peters- 
bourg."  viime  Serie,  T.  xxxvii.,  Nos.  11-13;  T.  xxxviii.,  No.  1. 
From  the  Society. 

"  Oefver3igt  af  Finska  Vetenskaps-Societetens  Forhandlingar." 
T.  xxxi.  (1888-89);  "Bidrag  till  Kannedom  af  Finlands  Natur 
och  Folk."     Haftet  xlviii.  (1889).     From  the  Society. 

"  Christiania  Videnskabs-Selskabs  Forhandlinger,  1889."  From 
the  Society. 

"Nova  Acta  cler  Ksl.  Leop.-Carol.  Deutschen  Akademie  der 
Naturforscher."  Bd.  xlix.,  No.  4 ;  Bd.  Ii.,  No.  1 ;  Bd.  lii.,  No.  4  ; 
Bd.  liv.,  Nos.  1,  3,  and  4 ;  Bd.  Iv.  No.  1  :  "  Leopoldina."  xxv. 
Heft  (1889).     From  the  Society. 


DONATIONS.  129 

"  Comptes  Rendus  des  Seances  de  l'Academie  des  Sciences  de 
Paris."     T.  cxii.,  Nos.  3-5  (1891).     From  the  Academy. 

"  United  States  National  Museum.  Bulletin."  No.  32  (1887). 
From  the  Director. 

"  Memoirs  of  the  Boston  Society  of  Natural  History."  Vol.  iv., 
Nos.  1-9  (1886-90);  "Proceedings."  Vol.  xxiv.,  Parts  3  and  4 
( 1 889-90).     From  the  Society. 

"United  States  Department  of  Agriculture ;  Division  of  Orni- 
thology and  Mammalogy — North  American  Fauna."  Nos.  3  and 
4  (1890).     From  the  Department. 

"  Bulletin  of  the  Scientific  Laboratories  of  Denison  University." 
Vol.  v.  (1890).     From  the  Editor. 

"Journal  of  the  Cincinnati  Society  of  Natural  History."  Vol, 
xiii.,  No.  3  (Oct.,  1890).     From  the  Society. 

"  Calif ornian  Academy  of  Science — Occasional  Papers."  Nos.  i. 
and  ii.  (1890).     From  the  Academy. 

"Gesellschaft  fur  Erdkunde  zu  Berlin — Verhandlimgen."  Bd. 
xiii.-xv.,  xvi.,  Nos.  1-8  (1886-89),  xviii.,  No.  1  (1891);  "  Zeit- 
schrift."  Bd.  xxi.-xxiii.,  xxiv.,  Nos.  1-4  (1886-89),  xxvi.,  No.  1 
(1891).     From  the  Society. 

"Zoological  Society  of  London — Abstracts  of  Proceedings." 
Feb.  17th  and  March  3rd,  1891.     From  the  Society. 

"Bureau  of  Agriculture,  South  Australia — Journal."  Vol. ill, 
No.  9  (April,  1891).      From  the  Secretary. 

"Proceedings  of  the  .Royal  Society  of  Victoria."  n.s.,  Vol.  ii. 
(1889).     From  the  Society. 

" Achter  Jahresbericht  des  naturwissensch.Verein  zu  Osnabriick" 
(1889  and  1890).     From  the  Society. 

"  Katalog  der  Vogelsammlung  im  Museum  der  Senckenbergis- 
chen  naturforschenden  Gesellschaft  in  Frankfurt  am  Main.  Von 
E.  Hartert  (1891)."     From  the  Society. 


130  DONATIONS. 

Pamphlet  entitled  "North  Italian  Bryozoa."  By  A.  W.  Waters, 
F.G.S.     From  the  Author. 

"United  States  Geological  Survey  —  Ninth  Annual  Report 
(1887-88);"  "Bulletin."  Nos.  58-61,  63,  64,  and  66  (1890); 
"Mineral  Resources  for  1888;"  "Monographs:  Vol.  i.— Lake 
Bonneville.     By  G.  C.  Gilbert  (1890)."     From  the  Director. 

"  Koniglieh-Bohmische  Gesell.  der  Wissenschaften  in  Prag. — 
Abhandlungen  der  mathemat.-naturwissenschaft.  Classe."  vii. 
Folge,  3Bd.  (1889-90);  "Jahresbericht,  1889;"  "Sitzungsberichte." 
Jahrg.  1889,  ii.  Bd. ;  Jahrg.  1890,  i.  Bd. :  "Uhlonosne  Utvary  v 
Tasmanii.  Napsal  Prof.  Dr.  O.  Feistmantel  (1890)."  From  the 
Society. 

"  Nederlandsche  Entomologische  Vereeniging.  —  Tijdschrift." 
xxxiii.  Deel,  Afl.  1  and  2  (1889-90).     From  the  Society. 

"  Royal  Society  of  N.S.W. — Journal  and  Proceedings."  Vol. 
xxiv.,  Part  2  (1890).     From  the  Society. 

"  Naturwissenschaftl.  Verein  des  Reg.-Bez.  Frankfurt — Monat- 
liche  Mittheilungen."  viii.  Jahrg.,  Nos.  8-11  (1890-91) :  "Socie- 
tatum  Litters."  iv.  Jahrg.  Nos.  10-12  ;  v.  Jahrg.  No.  1  (1890-91). 
From  the  Society. 

"American  Naturalist."  Vol.  xxv ,  No.  289  (Jan.  1891). 
From  the  Editors. 

Pamphlet  entitled  "  Supplement  to  the  Catalogue  of  Nests  and 
Eggs  of  Birds  found  breeding  in  Australia  and  Tasmania."  By 
A.  J.  North.     From  the  Author. 


131 


PAPERS    KKAI). 


ON   THE  OCCURRENCE   OF    BARITE   (BARYTES)    IN 
THE  BAWKESBURY  SANDSTONE  NEAR  SYDNEY. 

Ky  ii i:mcv  (i.  Smith,  Laboratory  Assistant,  Technological 

Muskum,  Syonky. 

(Com/nvunioaited  by  ■/.  II.  Maiden^  F.L.S.,  &c.t  Curator 
<>f  the  Museum,) 

Uninteresting  ;>«  the  Hawkesbury  sandstone  around  Sydney  is 
generally  considered  to  be,  especially  from  ;i  collector's  point  of 
view,  and  although  the  inducement  to  search  for  either  metallic 
or  Hon  metallic  minerals  is  not  great,  yet  sometimes  one  Is 
rewarded  for  a  diligent  search  among  the  cracks  and  crannii 
old  or  recent  excavations. 

In  a  quarry  not  far  from  Cook's  River,  five  miles  west  from 

Sydney,  and  adjoining  the  Tllawarra  road  in  the  borough  of 
Marrickville,  I  recently  found  Barytes  in  very  perfect  and  pure 
crystals.  They  have  a  vitreous  lustre,  which  on  the  most  perfect 
crystals  is  very  brilliant;  it  was  their  sparkling,  in  the  sun  that 
first  drew  my  attention  to  them.      They  are  in  many  instances  as 

transparent  as  glass,  and  crystallise  for  the  most  part  in  modified 
tables  of  the;  right  rectangular  pyramid,  the  domes  being  cut  off 

by  the  basal  pinakoids.  In  many  crystals  the  faces  of  the  right 
rhombic  prism  are,  distinct  ;  the  symbols  for  the  majority  of  the 
most  perfect  crystals  are,  therefore  : —  co  P  +  P  Go  +  P  cx>  +  OP. 
The  pinakoids  OoPoo  and  a,Pa>  being  occasionally,  although 
seldom,  developed.  The  faces  of  the  right  rhombic  prism  are 
extended  upon  the  macro-diagonal  axi«,  and  in  a  few  larger- 
crystals  the  extension  has  continued  to  the  almost  extinction  of 
tin;  macro-domes. 

The  purest  and  best  formed  crystals  are  of  small  size,  but  some 
measure  J  inch  on  the  macro-diagonal,  though  these  larger  crystals 
are  not  so  pure  nor  so  transparent ;  their  thickness  is  j\.  inch. 


132     THE  OCCURRENCE  OF  BARITE  IN  THE  HAWKESBURY  SANDSTONE. 

The  purest  crystals  were  taken  for  qualitative  analysis  j  just  a 
trace  of  calcium  was  found,  not  a  trace  of  strontium,  no  acid  but 
sulphuric,  the  crystals  consisting  almost  entirely  of  sulphate  of 
barium.  To  remove  any  adhering  ferric  oxide  or  other  accidental 
impurity  they  were  boiled  with  dilute  acid  before  fusion. 

An  exhaustive  quantitative  analysis  would  have  been  of  little 
value,  as  it  was  impossible  to  separate  the  crystals  from  the  grains 
of  sand  adhering  to  them  ;  but  two  determinations  were  made  to 
discover,  if  possible,  in  what  proportion  the  sulphate  of  calcium 
was  present.  In  the  first  -4478  gram.  S04  was  obtained ;  this  if 
combined  entirely  with  barium  would  give  1*0861  gram.  Ba  S04 ; 
the  bases  were  dissolved  and  precipitated  by  sulphuric  acid  and 
1*0876  gram,  obtained;  this  does  not  allow  for  any  calcium,  and  as 
the  second  determination  gave  almost  identical  results,  we  may 
consider,  allowing  for  slight  errors,  that  the  pure  transparent 
crystals  are  Ba  S04,  the  calcium  being  present  in  very  minute 
quantities.     Ba  =  136*84;  S  =  32.  ;  0  =  16. 

It  is  in  the  conglomerate,  which  consists  of  boulders  of  shale 
and  ironstone  cemented  together  with  hardened  sand,  that  the 
barytes  is  found.  The  conglomerate  overlies  the  upper  solid  rock, 
and  is  also  found  beneath  the  same  bed,  a  distance  of  10  or  12 
feet  separating  the  two.  Shale  is  found  embedded  in  the  solid 
rock,  but  the  barytes  does  not  appear  to  exist  there,  although  it  is 
found  both  in  the  upper  and  lower  conglomerates. 

The  shale  contains  much  mica. 

I  have  not  succeeded  in  obtaining  the  barytes  in  any  large 
quantity,  the  conglomerate  not  being  of  large  extent,  although 
there  is  no  reason  to  suppose  that  it  is  restricted  to  that  deposit, 
and  perhaps  now  that  its  presence  in  the  immediate  neighbourhood 
of  Sydney  has  been  ascertained,  larger  quantities  may  be  found. 

In  the  many  crystals  examined  no  new  faces  were  seen,  there- 
fore further  description  is  not  required. 

The  best  specimens  have  been  placed  in  the  Technological 
Museum  Collection. 


133 


NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  ECONOMIC  BOTANY— No.  II. 

By  J.  H.  Maiden,  F.L.S.,  &c., 
Curator  of  the  Technological  Museum. 

FOODS. 

Adansonia  Gregorii,  F.v.M.      N.O.  Malvaceae.      The  "Bottle- 
tree  "*  of  N. W.  Australia. 

From  Mr.  J.  Pentecost,  who  spent  some  months  in  the 
Kimberley  district,  I  learnt  the  following  particulars  in  regard  to 
these  singular  trees.  Two  or  three  were  usually  seen  at  a  time, 
with  a  long  interval.  The  fruits  are  rather  larger  than  an  emu 
egg  (one  in  my  possession  has  its  diameters  six  and  four  inches 
respectively).  The  blacks,  and  Europeans  too,  chew  the  slightly 
acidulous  pith  or  pulp.  The  seeds  embedded  in  this  pithy  pulp 
taste  like  hazel  nuts,  and  are  a  favourite  food  of  the  blacks.  So 
valuable  are  these  trees  to  them  that  they  never  notch  the  trunks 
nor  injure  the  trees  in  any  way  in  their  pursuit  of  the  fruit,  as 
they  do  in  the  case  of  other  trees. 

Cocos  nucifera,  Linn.     N.O.  Palmae.     "  Coco-nut  " 

This  is  a  tree  specially  protected  by  enactments  of  the  Queens- 
land Parliament  in  the  interests,  chiefly,  of  the  aboriginals  and 
Polynesians.  Legislation  of  this  kind  is  so  rare  in  the  colonies 
that  I  have  gathered  some  information  in  regard  to  this  particular 
instance.  Mr.  Lewis  Bernays,  F.L.S.,  Clerk  of  the  Parliaments, 
Brisbane,  kindly  informed  me  that  the  Acts  referred  to  are  the 
Pearl-shell  and  Beche-de-mer  Fishery  Act  of  1881,  and  also  its 
Amendment  Act  of  1886.     Through  his  kindness  in  forwarding 

*  For  a  fine  plate,  and  excellent  description  of  this  tree,  see  J.  R. 
Jackson  in  The  Student,  July,  1868. 


134:         NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  ECONOMIC  BOTANY, 

me  copies  of  both  Acts  I  am  able  to  quote  clause  1 3  of  the  Amend- 
ing Act,  which  is  as  follows  : — "Any  person  who  cuts  down  or 
injures  a  coco-nut  tree,  or  other  tree  bearing  edible  fruit,  or  any 
tree  of  the  kind  known  as  Galophyllum  inophyllum  .... 
shall  be  liable  to  a  penalty  not  exceeding  ,£10." 

I  wrote  to  the  Hon.  John  Douglas,  C.M.G.,  Government 
Resident,  Thursday  Island,  asking  what  was  the  effect  of  this 
legislation,  and  he  courteously  supplied  the  following  informa- 
tion:— "Coco-nut  trees  are,  I  think  I  may  say,  religiously  respected. 
We  have  not  many  matured  trees  in  this  immediate  neighbourhood, 
though  there  are  plenty  in  the  islands  in  the  Straits.  A  good 
many  have  lately  been  planted,  and  some  of  them  are  doing  pretty 
well,  but  there  are  a  good  many  failures.  The  Ccdophyllwm 
'nwpJn/Jlum,  of  which  there  are  very  few  specimens,  is  not  likely 
to  be  touched  by  ruthless  hands"  (July,  1890). 

Sterculia  diversifolia,  G.  Don.     N.O.  Sterculiacese.     A 
"  Kurrajong." 

It  has  been  recorded,  many  years  ago,  by  Macarthur  and  others, 
that  this  tree  possesses  an  edible  root,  but  I  give  the  following  more 
detailed  information.  The  tree  seems  hardly,  if  at  all,  known  in 
the  Candelo  district  by  the  above  name,  but  it  is  well  known  as 
the  "  Yam-tree,"  on  account  of  the  large  yam-like  root  the  tree 
possesses,  at  all  events  in  the  young  state ;  these  are  locally  known 
as  yams,  and  they  were  at  one  time  sought  after  by  the  aborigi- 
nals for  food.  In  the  case  of  some  small  trees,  less  than  one  inch 
in  diameter,  which  were  dug  up  for  planting,  they  had  yams  from 
eight  to  twelve  inches  long,  and  two  or  three  in  diameter,  weighing 
several  pounds.  They  have  been  got  eight  to  ten  pounds  in  weight, 
and  are  not  despised  by  Europeans.  The  outside  skin  or  bark  of 
these  yams  can  be  easily  removed,  and  looks  like  the  skin  of  a 
radish.  The  inside  is  beautifully  white,  a  little  sweetish  in  taste, 
but  otherwise  rather  insipid.  I  cannot  learn  whether  the  aborigi- 
nals used  to  eat  them  raw  or  subject  them  to  some  process  of 
cooking. 


BY    .J.    II.    MAIDEN.  I  35 

Eucalyptus  Gunwii,  J look,/.    N.O.  Myrtaceee. 

For  an  exhaustive  research  on  this  manna,  tee  "The  Carbc* 

hydrates  of  marina  from  E.  Gunnii  and  of  Eucalyptus  Honey." 
By  F.  W.  Passmore,  I'h.l).  (Pharm.  Jowrn.  [3],  xxi.  717). 

Perhaps  on  account  of  the  rain,  there  was  so  much  manna  on 
the  Monaro  last  year,  that  if  there  were  any  sale  for  it  it  would 
represent  a  large  sum  annually  for  the  district.  Under  large 
trees  of  E.  Gunnii  the  ground  is  often  literally  covered,  on  the 
high  lands  above  Cooma,  and  on  the  plains  where  both  E.  OwnfilU 
and  E.  viminalis  occur  there  is  a  great  deal  more.  A  family  of 
children  could  gather  a  targe  quantity  in  a  day,  so  that,  if  there 
were  any  sale  for  it,  manna-collecting  could  become  a  useful  minor 
industry  during  the  summer  months.  Although  last  year  it  was 
particularly  abundant,  large  quantities  are  obtainable  every  year. 

From  actual  observation,  the  production  of  manna  does  not 
seem  to  be  affected  by  either  wet  or  dry  weather,  although  of 
course  the  first  shower  of  rain  washes  away  all  that  has  been 
formed  since  the  previous  shower. 

Se8eli  Harveyanum,  F.v.M.     N.O.  Umbclliferac. 

The  "seed"  of  this  fragrant  plant  is  used  in  the  Snowy 
Mountains  as  a  substitute  for  caraways,  and  is  locally  known  as 
"  Anise."  The  seeds  do  not,  however,  resemble  anise,  particularly 
in  flavour,  but  they  are  most  like  Indian  fennel  (Fceniculum 
Vlllgare,  Gsertn.)  in  general  appearance  and  perhaps  in  flavour,  of 
all  umbelliferous  seeds  which  enter  into  commerce.  The  root, 
also,  is  aromatic.  The  plant  is  rather  plentiful  in  the  locality 
indicated,  above  5000  feet,  although  it  also  occurs  as  low  as  from 
3000-3500  feet. 

STOCK  POISONS. 

Bulbine  bulbosa,  Haw.     N.O.  Liliaceae.     "  Native  Onion." 

This  plant  is  recorded  as  poisonous  to  stock  in  Queensland  and 
South  Australia.      Two  years  ago  it  was  sent  to  me  from  near 


136        NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  ECONOMIC  BOTANY, 

Penrith,  in  this  colony,  with  the  report  that  it  had  poisoned  cows 
in  a  paddock  in  which  there  was  but  little  grass  owing  to  the  dry 
weather,  and  I  was  informed  that  horses  either  would  not  touch 
it  or  that  it  appeared  to  have  no  effect  on  them.  I  am  aware  that 
this  is  contrary  to  Queensland  experience. 

Nicotiana  suaveolens,  Lehn.     N.O.  Solanacea?.     "  Native 
Tobacco." 

So  many  contradictory  statements  have  been  made  in  regard  to 
the  poisonous  nature  to  stock,  or  the  reverse,  of  this  plant,  that 
specific  evidence  is  now  necessary  to  settle  the  point  once  for  all. 
In  the  Journal  Bureau  Agric.  S.A.,  Aug.,  1890,  it  is  stated  that 
the  plant  has  killed  a  number  of  cattle  and  pigs  at  Mannum, 
Terowie,  and  other  parts  of  South  Australia.  The  percentage  of 
nicotine  in  the  plant  at  various  stages  has  never  been  ascertained, 
so  far  as  I  am  aware  ;  meantime  we  are  ignorant  as  to  the  extent 
of  its  poisonous  nature. 

Cassia  sp.     N.O.  Leguminosse. 

I  have  received  some  leaves  (too  fragmentary  for  determination), 
of  a  Cassia  from  the  Wilcannia  district,  with  the  report  that  they 
cause  purging  in  cattle  and  horses  after  eating  only  a  small 
quantity.  The  leaves  of  various  species  of  this  genus  form,  as  is 
well  known,  the  sennas  of  commerce ;  it  would  be  interesting  to 
chemically  examine  any  of  our  purgative  native  sennas. 

ESSENTIAL  OILS. 

Eucalyptus  cneorifolia,  DC.     N.O.  Myrtaceae. 

This  is  another  Eucalypt  which  has  been  made  to  yield  its  oil 
for  commercial  purposes  during  the  past  twelve  months.  Messrs. 
W.  Cumming  &  Co.,  of  Adelaide,  have  established  works  at 
Kangaroo  Island,  South  Australia,  and  have  produced  an  article 
of  high  quality.  It  is  different  to  any  other  Eucalyptus  oil  I  have 
examined  in  that  it  has  a  secondary  odour  reminding  one  of  dill 
or  caraways. 


BY   J.  H.  MAIDEN.  137 

Santalum  cygnorum,  Miq.  (Syn.  Fusanus  spicatus,  R.Br.). 
Sandalwood  oil  from  Western  Australia. 

It  does  not  appear  to  be  easy  to  obtain  full  particulars  of  the  com- 
merce in  sandalwood  and  its  products,  which  form  no  insignificant 
item  in  the  trade  of  the  western  colony.  My  interest  in  the  matter 
has  been  re-awakened  by  observing  in  the  Sydney  newspapers  of 
September  last  a  telegram  from  Perth,  W.A.,  to  the  effect  that 
"  The  newly-established  Distillery  Company,  a  short  distance  from 
Albany,  shipped  the  first  instalment  of  20  cases  of  sandalwood  oil 
to  England."  The  resinous-smelling  West  Australian  sandalwood 
(pronounced  by  Schimmel  &  Co.  to  be  quite  unsuitable  to  European 
requirements)  goes  to  Singapore  and  China,  to  be  burned  as  incense 
in  Buddhist  temples,  and,  doubtless,  Malays  and  Chinese  have 
exploited  Western  Australian  sandalwood  for  centuries.  Western 
Australia  exported  in  1889  to  Singapore  and  China  4470  tons,  of 
the  value  of  £33,525. 

As  to  the  oil,  I  have  received  no  reply  from  the  Distillery 
Company  in  respect  to  it,  nor  have  I  observed  any  account  of  its 
reception  in  the  London  and  Continental  markets.'*' 

SUBSTANCE  REPUTED  MEDICINAL. 

Verbena  officinalis.  Linn.     N.O.  VerbenaceaB. 

I  have  received  this  plant  from  the  north-west  of  this  colony 
with  an  iutimation  that  it  is  employed  by  the  blacks  in  venereal 
complaints. 

TIMBERS. 

I  give  brief  notes  on  the  following  timbers,  which  have  not,  so 
far  as  I  am  aware,  been  previously  described. 

*  Since  the  above  was  written  I  have  obtained,  by  the  roundabout  way 
of  London  and  Leipzig  (Chemist  and  Druggist,  and  Schimmel  and  Co.),  a 
few  particulars  concerning  this  oil.  Its  specific  gravity  is  variously  stated 
at  "953  and  *962 ;  its  odour  as  "  much  more  fragrant  than  the  Madras 
kind  "  and  "  sharp."     Its  colour  is  pale  straw. 


138        NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  ECONOMIC  BOTANY, 

Acacia  penninervis,  Sieb.     "  Mountain  Hickory." 

Although  this  tree  is  so  abundant  in  the  south,  its  timber  does 
not  appear  to  have  come  into  general  use,  but  an  expert  in  the 
Bombala  district  considers  it  excellent,  being  very  durable  and 
very  tough,  on  which  account  he  prefers  it  to  anything  else  for 
axe  and  tool-handles.  It  is  said  that  the  timber  can  almost  be 
bent  double  upon  itself.  Trees  obtained  from  high  stony  ridges 
are  usually  sound.  The  timber  is  flesh-coloured,  has  a  pretty 
figure,  and  very  little  sap-wood.     It  is  not  easy  to  dress. 

Acacia  tetragonophylla,  F.v.M.     A  "  Dead  finish." 

Timber  very  hard,  heavy,  tough,  and  close-grained.  Its 
prevailing  colour  is  reddish-brown,  and  it  has  pinkish  stripes.  It 
is  well  adapted  for  small  turnery  and  cabinet  work,  but  it  is  hard 
to  work.     When  fresh  it  smells  like  violets.     An  interior  species. 

Ackama  Muelleri,  Benth.  (Syn.  Weinmannia paniculosa,  F.v.M.). 
N.O.  Saxifragese.     A  "  Corkwood." 

A  timber  likely  to  prove  of  value.  It  is  hardly  to  be  distin- 
guished from  that  of  Eucryphia  Moorei.  When  fresh  it  is  drab 
with  a  purplish  cast,  close  in  the  grain,  tough,  and  dresses  with 
facility.  In  the  uplands  in  the  county  of  Gloucester  and  further 
north  it  is  plentiful,  and  in  places  it  is  not  unfrequently  found 
three  feet  in  diameter. 

Callicoma  serratifolia,  Andr.     N.O.  Saxifragese.     Sometimes 
called  "  Coach  wood  "  in  the  Braid  wood  district. 

It  is  close  in  the  grain,  and  works  remarkably  well  to  a  nice 
smooth  surface.  It  has  no  figure  to  speak  of,  and  is  of  a  pinkish 
colour.  It  is  used  sometimes  for  wheelwrights'  work,  but  is  never 
of  sufficient  diameter  for  large  work.  The  young  saplings  used  to 
be  split  and  used  for  basket-making. 

Hakea  saligna,  R.Br.     N.O.  Proteaceae.     "Foley  Wood." 

The  tree  and  its  wood  go  under  this  name  over  a  considerable 
area  in  the  extreme  south-east  of  the  colony.     It  is  a  flesh-coloured, 


BY    J.  H.  MAIDEN.  139 

little-figured,  free-working  timber,  and  though  apt  to  rend  in  drying, 
repays  attention  to  seasoning.  A  Mr.  Foley,  who,  up  to  the  time 
of  his  death  a  few  years  ago,  was  a  road-maintenance  man  in 
the  Bombala  district,  used  to  make  pick,  hammer,  and  axe- 
handles  of  this  wood,  which  acquired  considerable  local  reputation 
and  were  readily  purchased.  This  is  the  origin  of  the  local  name, 
and  it  is  an  interesting  example  of  the  way  plant  names  have  been 
often  given  in  this  country. 

Lomatia  Fraseri,  R.Br.     N.O.  Proteacese.     "  Lancewood." 

Used  for  similar  purposes  to  the  preceding, — a  timber  which  it 
much  resembles.  It  is  close  in  texture,  has  a  pretty  oak  grain, 
and  is  of  a  very  pale  pink  colour.     It  is  difficult  to  plane. 

Pomaderris  cinerea,  Benth.     N.O.  Rhamnaceae. 

Tough,  close  in  the  grain,  dresses  up  fairly  well,  but  is  inclined 
to  warp  and  split.  It  is  moderately  heavy,  and  the  heartwood 
has  a  pleasing  brown  colour.  It  is  hardly  known,  and  appears  to 
be  never  used.  It  is  probably  useful  for  tool-handles.  Southern 
districts. 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

Mr.  C.  Hedley  informs  me  that  the  natives  of  Northern 
Queensland,  when  hotly  pursued,  have  often  escaped  from  their 
enemies  in  the  following  manner.  They  break  off  the  leaf-stalk  of 
a  water-lily,  disappear  in  the  waters  of  a  lagoon  or  river,  and 
breathe  by  means  of  this  porous  leaf-stalk,  which  extends  from 
their  mouths  to  the  surface  of  the  water.  They  have  been  known 
thus  to  remain  concealed  in  water  for  half  an  hour.  During 
President  Carnot's  tour  in  Corsica  in  1889,  it  was  related  in  the 
newspapers  that  a  Frenchman  had  escaped  from  brigands  by  means 
of  a  similar  expedient ;  he  used  a  hollow  reed,  and  made  the  state- 
ment that  he  had  been  under  the  surface  of  a  certain  lake  four 
hours. 


140   THE  OCCURRENCE  OP  A  GUM  IN  ECHINOCARPUS  AUSTRALIS, 


ON  THE  OCCURRENCE  OF  A  GUM  IN  ECHINOCARPUS 
(SLOANEA)  AUSTRALIS,  BENTH. 

By  J.  H.  Maiden,  F.L.S.,  &c. 

This  fine  tree,  usually  known  as  "  Maiden's  blush  "  on  account 
of  the  colour  of  its  timber,  belongs  to  the  Natural  Order  Tiliace?e, 
closely  allied,  of  course,  to  the  Sterculiaceje  and  Malvaceae,  many 
of  whose  species  yield  gums. 

The  Tiliacese  are  also  all  more  or  less  mucilaginous,  but  I  cannot 
trace  the  record  of  a  gum  having  been  found  on  a  plant,  whether 
endemic  in  Australia  or  not,  belonging  to  this  Natural  Order. 
Various  Tiliaceous  trees  have  their  mucilaginous  inner  barks 
utilized  in  India  as  demulcents,  and  doubtless  in  other  parts  of 
the  world,  while  that  of  an  African  species  (Grewia  mollis)  is 
stated  by  Barter  to  be  used  in  soups,  because  of  its  mucilaginous 
character.* 

The  discovery  of  gum  on  Echinocarpus  australis  by  Mr.  Bauerlen, 
collector  for  the  Technological  Museum,  is  therefore  of  interest. 

It  was  obtained  from  an  old  tree  about  60  feet  high  and  3  feet 
in  diameter.  The  tree  was  somewhat  injured  by  fire,  but  appeared 
otherwise  sound.  Some  younger  trees  close  by,  though  not  having 
gum  on  to  collect,  showed  signs  that  there  had  been  some  formerly. 
The  old  tree  also  showed  places  where  the  gum  had  been  dissolved 
or  washed  away. 

The  gum  reminds  one  irresistibly  of  ox-horn.  It  contracts  on 
drying,  forming  transverse  cracks,  at  which  it  breaks  with  a  bright 
conchoidal  fracture.     It  cuts  like  horn.     It  is  tough  and  tasteless 

*  Masters  in  Oliver's  Flora  of  Tropical  Africa. 


BY   J.  H.  MAIDEN.  141 

under  the  teeth.  It  swells  up  in  cold  water  to  many  times  its 
original  bulk,  the  outer  portion  becoming  so  transparent  that  it  is 
difficult  to  distinguish  it  in  the  liquid,  the  inner  portion  remaining 
translucent  and  whitish.  When  pressed  between  the  fingers  the 
soaked  gum  does  not  feel  gelatinous,  although  slightly  adhesive. 

In  water  it  does  not  dissolve  entirely  on  continued  boiling,  the 
liquid  becoming  slightly  cloudy,  with  small  filmy  particles  floating 
about  in  it.  On  acidifying  with  hydrochloric  acid,  the  cloudiness 
and  the  particles  alike  disappear.  The  whole  of  the  gum  is  pre- 
cipitated when  alcohol  is  added  to  this  acidified  solution.  If  this 
precipitate  be  then  filtered  off,  the  greater  part  is  soluble  in  water. 
The  undissolved  portion  is  soluble  in  potash  of  *1  per  cent.,  but 
not  in  acidified  solutions.  If  the  potash  solution  be  acidified  with 
either  acetic  or  hydrochloric  acid,  a  glairy  mass  results. 

It  is  instructive  to  compare  this  gum  with  Tragacanth  and 
Sterculia  gum.* 

This  gum  agrees  with  Tragacanth  in  regard  to  the  points  given 
in  the  table  at  p.  384  (oj>.  cit.),  with  the  following  exceptions : — 
It  does  not  entirely  dissolve  on  prolonged  boiling;  forms  a  granular 
jelly  like  Sterculia  gum  on  treatment  with  cold  water,  while 
Tragacanth  forms  a  smooth  viscid  mass  under  similar  circum- 
stances ;  contains  no  starch. 

It  agrees  with  Tragacanth  on  the  following  points : — A  yellowish 
colour  with  alkalis  on  heating;  formation  of  the  substance  denoted 
by  Giraud  as  pectic  acid.f  (I  have  in  another  place  J  commented 
on  the  unsatisfactory  position  of  these  so-called  pectic  bodies.) 

Conclusion. —  Echinocarpus  gum  appears  to  occupy  an  inter- 
mediate position  between  Sterculia  gum  and  Tragacanth,  with 
greater  resemblance  to  the  latter. 

The  specific  gravity  of  the  gum  is  1*481. 

*  See  my  paper,  "  Sterculia  Gum  ;  its  similarities  and  dissimilarities  to 
Tragacanth,"  Pharm.  Journ.  (3),  xx.  381. 
+  Pharm.  Journ.  (3),  v.  766. 
X  Chem.  and  Drugg.  of  Austral. ,  Feb.,  1890. 


142       THE    OCCURRENCE    OF    A    GUM    IN    ECHINOCARPUS    AUSTRALIS 

Its  composition  may  be  stated  as  follows  :  — 

Soluble  in  cold  water  (arabin) 12*05 

Soluble   in    -1%    soda    (metarabin) ;   yields 

arabin  on  precipitation  with  alcohol 39*8 

Vegetable    mucilage    of    Dragendorff;     in- 
soluble in  *1%  acid,  -1%  soda  solution,  but 

soluble  in  potash  solution 20*91 

Water 1873 

Ash* 4-486 


95-976 


Composition  of  the  Ash. 

Soluble  in  water  : — 

Potassium  sulphate 

Insoluble  portion  : — 

Calcium  carbonatef 3-769' 

Magnesium  carbonate *281 

Alumina trace 

Ferric  oxide tracer 

Total 


•436 


4-05 


4-486 


*  Placed  in  percentage  composition  for  convenience. 

t  Probably  originally  existing  as  oxalate,  as  calcium  oxalate  was   found 

in  the  original  gum. 


143 


ONYX  AND  DIPELTIS  : 

NEW  NEMATODE  GENERA,  WITH  A  NOTE  ON  DORYLAIMU3. 

By  N.  A.  Cobb. 

I. 

Fixation  and  Preservation  of  Cojupressed  Objects. 

Many  sub-microscopic  objects  require  to  be  compressed  in  order 
to  give  the  best  results  at  the  final  microscopical  examination, 
and  it  is  well  known  that  compression  cannot  be  accomplished 
conveniently  (if  at  all)  after  hardening. 

To  illustrate  by  an  example:  the  sub-cylindrical  larva?  of 
dipterous  insects  if  examined  fresh  are  best  seen  in  a  compressorium, 
but  much  histological  detail  is  thus  seen  with  difficulty,  or  escapes 
observation  altogether.  If,  however,  it  were  possible  to  fix,  stain 
and  mount  the  larva  while  compressed,  a  distinct  advantage  would 
be  gained.  To  describe  a  simple  way  of  doing  this  is  the  object  of 
these  preliminary  lines. 

The  object,  say  a  dipterous  larva  or  a  rotifer  or  a  tardigrade  or 
nematode,  is  compressed  between  two  small  coverglasses  of  the 
same  size.  The  amount  of  compression  must  be  regulated  by 
means  of  two  hairs,  or  better  by  two  pieces  of  spun  glass,  placed 
parallel  to  each  other  between  the  coverglasses.  It  will  be  found 
that  hairs  from  the  head,  eyebrows,  and  backs  of  the  hands  are  of 
different  diameters,  and  a  preliminary  experiment  will  indicate 
which  it  is  best  to  use.  Having  laid  the  animal,  together  with 
two  hairs  or  bits  of  spun  glass,  on  one  of  the  covers  in  a  drop  of 
water  which  is  too  small  to  entirely  fill  the  space  between  the  covers 
10 


144  ONYX   AND    DIPELTIS, 

when  they  are  finally  placed  together,  lay  the  other  cover  on.  The 
animal  is  compressed,  and  is  unable  to  move.  It  will  be  found 
convenient  to  have  laid  the  first  cover  on  a  minute  drop  of  water 
on  a  glass  object  slide  ;  by  this  means  it  will  be  held  firmly  in 
place  on  the  slide,  and  the  second  cover  can  be  laid  squarely  on ; 
furthermore,  after  the  second  cover  is  adjusted  the  slide  can  be 
placed  on  the  stage  of  a  microscope  and  the  animal  then  examined 
to  see  if  its  position  is  the  correct  one,  and,  if  not,  the  fault  can  be 
rectified  by  sliding  the  upper  cover  slightly  on  the  lower. 

Supposing  the  object  to  be  now  correctly  compressed  and 
arranged,  the  next  step  is  to  fix  the  covers  in  place.  This  is  done 
by  moving  the  two  covers  to  the  edge  of  the  slide  by  means  of  a 
needle  and  touching  first  one  side  of  the  pair  and  then  the  other 
side  with  the  wick  of  a  wax  taper  or  candle  which  has  been  just 
now  extinguished.  The  melted  wax  from  the  wick  serves  to  cement 
the  covers  together,  and  they  may  be  afterwards  handled  with 
considerable  impunity.  It  will  be  remembered  that  directions 
were  given  to  use  less  water  than  would  fill  the  space  between  the 
covers  ;  that  was  a  precaution  necessary  to  bringing  both  covers 
into  close  contact  with  the  hairs  that  were  placed  between  them, 
thus  securing  the  requisite  amount  of  compression,  and  also 
necessary  to  securing  a  firm  cementing  action  of  the  wax.  If  there 
is  space  between  the  covers  at  the  edge  unfilled  by  the  water,  the 
wax  enters  it,  and  if  melted  wax  is  then  also  painted  in  small 
quantity  on  the  adjacent  outside  edge  of  the  covers,  a  firm  union 
results. 

Allow  the  covers  thus  united  to  lie  until  all  or  nearly  all  the 
water  between  them  has  evaporated.  They 
will  then  present  the  appearance  illustrated 
in  the  adjacent  figure.  Of  course  a  small 
amount  of  water  will  sometimes  remain  imme- 
diately about  the  compressed  animal,  and  this 
is  often  desirable. 
FlGG^TEr?em"tSVto:  H  now  the  animal  could  be  fixed,  stained 
gether  with  wax  at  a  a,   an(j  mounted  without  beino-  allowed  to  change 

and  having  compressed  »  » 

between  them  an  object   its  attitude,  a  result  often  highly  desirable 


BY    N.  A.  COBB. 


145 


would  be  attained.  To  do  this,  proceed  as  follows: — Take  an 
elongated  piece  of  quill  or  other  similar  elastic  non-metallic  sub- 
stance and  make  in  it  two  cuts  as  shown  at  Fig  2  a,b.     It  will  be 


Fig.  2.— Two  Views  of  a  Piece  of 
Quill,  split  and  opened  so  as 
to  form  a  compressorium. 


Fig.  3.— Two  Round  Coyer- 
glasses,  cemented  to- 
gether and  placed  in  a 
quill  compressorium. 


found  that  the  piece  of  quill  can  then  be  opened  and  converted  into 
a  compressing  machine.  The  covers  are  to  be  placed  in  this  com- 
pressorium as  shown  in  Fig.  3.  Of  course  the  compressorium  of 
quill  should  be  stiff  enough  to  firmly  hold  the  covers  in  place,  but 
should  be  no  stiffer  than  will  serve  this  purpose  well. 

Our  compressed  animal  is  now  ready  for  treatment,  and  may  be 
handled  like  any  other  object.  The  quill  will  hold  the  covers 
firmly  in  place,  even  if  the  paraffin  should  become  dissolved  or 
melted.  If  no  substance  is  to  be  used  that  will  dissolve  or  melt  the 
paraffin,  then  of  course  the  compressorium  of  quill  is  unnecessary, 
as  for  instance  when  only  cold  solutions  of  glycerine  are  to  be  used 
and  the  object  is  to  be  mounted  in  glycerine.  If,  however,  one 
wishes  to  fix  in  hot  sublimate  or  to  proceed  at  once  to  alcohols  or 
other  liquids  that  would  have  a  loosening  or  solvent  action  on  the 
paraffin,  then  of  course  the  quill  compressorium  (or  a  different 
cement)  is  necessary. 

To  fix  the  object,  take  hold  of  the  quill  and  place  one  edge  of 
the  covers  in  the  fixing  fluid ;  the  fluid  runs  in  by  capillary 
attraction,  and  fixation  takes  place.  The  fixiug  fluid  may  be 
replaced  by  fresh  fluid  or  can  be  washed  out  by  the  use  of  blotting 
paper  in  the  ordinary  way,  i.e.,  place  one  edge  of  the  covers  in  the 
fluid  it  is  desired  to  draw  in  and  place  fresh  blotting  paper  in 
contact  with  the  opposite  edge  of  the  covers. 


146  ONYX   AND    DIPELTIS, 

An  excellent  way  is  to  make  the  whole  apparatus  represented  in 
Fig.  3  so  small  that  it  can  be  readily  introduced  into  the  object  box 
of  a  differentiator.  When  the  object  returns  from  the  differentiator 
the  compressorium  is  carefully  removed  and  the  object  will  be 
found  not  to  adhere  to  the  covers,  providing  they  were  originally 
clean.  It  would  be  difficult  to  exceed  the  perfection  of  objects  thus 
treated.  The  covers  should  not  lie  horizontal  in  the  differentiator, 
otherwise  the  time  occupied  in  treatment  will  be  lengthened  owing 
to  the  difficulty  with  which  the  fluids  will  enter  the  space  between 

them. 

II. 

The  New  Genus  Onyx. 

In  the  worms  constituting  the  genus  Onyx  the  structure  of  the 
head  and  neck  is  very  characteristic,  but  at  the  same  time  the 
kinship  with  the  genus  Dorylaimus  is  at  once  evident.  It  will  be 
presently  seen,  however,  that  the  two  genera  are  very  distinct 
from  each  other. 

As  one  would  expect  from  the  foregoing  remark  the  pharynx  in 
Onyx  is  armed  with  a  spear.  As  in  Dorylaimus,  so  here,  the 
spear  is  axial  and  attached  to  the  dorsal  side  of  the  pharynx. 
The  uncertainty  with  regard  to  the  length  of  the  spear  is  how- 
ever lessened  in  Onyx  by  the  presence  of  a  distinct  pharyngeal 
swelling  or  bulb,  which  is,  as  far  as  length  is  concerned,  nearly 
co-extensive  with  the  spear.  This  pharyngeal  bulb  is  an  elongated- 
ellipsoidal,  muscular  swelling,  several  times  wider  than  the  spear 
which  it  encloses  ;  its  function  is  by  longitudinal  contraction  to 
protrude  the  spear.  This  latter  organ  is  stout  and  tipped  with  a 
characteristic  horny  structure,  from  which  the  genus  takes  its 
name.  As  seen  under  the  microscope,  this  tip  presents  itself  as 
an  inverted  V-shaped,  or  more  properly  sagittate,  body  having  an 
opalescent  appearance.  It  is  not  quite  symmetrical,  for  the 
ventral  barb  is  uniformly  slightly  longer  than  the  dorsal.  I 
hardly  need  remark  that  this  description  refers  to  the  view  usually 
obtained,  that  is  to  say,  the  profile  or  lateral  view,  and  that  this 
body  is  in  reality  a  hollow  cone.  The  ring  so  constantly  present 
in  the  throat  of  Dorylaimus  is  paralleled  in  Onyx  by  a  three-fold 
growth  from  the  walls  of  the  anterior  part  of  the  pharynx,  whose 


BY    N.  A.  COBB. 


147 


function  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  ring  in  Dorylaimus,  namely,  to 
serve  as  a  guide  and  support  to  the  spear.  Because  of  its  affinity 
for  carmine  this  threefold  structure  is  usually  conspicuous  in 
specimens  treated  with  that  reagent.  That  portion  of  the 
oesophagus  lying  behind  the  pharyngeal  bulb  reminds  one 
forcibly  of  the  corresponding  part  in  Dorylaimus,  the  narrow 
anterior  half  being  surrounded  near  the  middle  of  the  neck  by 
the  nerve-ring,  and  joined  to  a  stouter,  nearly  cylindrical, 
muscular  posterior  half,  two-thirds  as  wide  as  the  body. 

Before  describing  the  head  it  is  necessary  to  premise  that  the 
cuticula  is  finely  striated.  The  stria?  in  the  single  known  species 
appear  like  plain  transverse  lines  '8^  apart,  so  that  the  total 
number  in  the  cuticula  of  an  adult  worm  is  calculated  at  about 
twenty-seven  thousand.  The  nearly  cylindrical  neck  terminates 
anteriorly  in  a  rounded  head,  which  bears,  far  forward,  two  large 
and  conspicuous  spiral  lateral  organs.  These  commonly  lie 
opposite  to,  or  a  little  in  front  of,  the  cap  of  the  spear.  The 
striatums  of  the  cuticula  cease  on  the  head  to  be  transverse.     One 


Fig.  4.— Lateral  View  of  the  Head  of 
Onyx  perfectcs,  with  the  mouth  open 
and  displaying  lips.  The  pharyngeal 
bulb  and  its  contained  spear  are 
clearly  shown,  as  is  one  of  the  spiral 
lateral  organs,  and  the  spear-guide. 
The  left  hand  side  of  the  figure  is 
dorsal,     x  400. 


Fig.  5.— Lateral  View  of  the  Head  of 
Onyx  perfectus,  with  the  mouth 
closed.  The  head  of  the  spear  is 
--shown  just  behind  the  spiral  lateral 
organ.  Under  the  cap  of  the  spear 
are  two  developing  caps  for  future 
use,  showing  neatly  the  manner  of 
dentition.  The  guides  for  the  spear 
are  partially  hidden  by  the  spiral 
organ.  The  right  hand  side  of  the 
figure  is  dorsal,     x  400. 


may  observe  them  passing  circularly  around  the  lateral  organs  and 
on  some  parts  of  the  head  they  are  arranged  longitudinally.    This 


143  ONYX    AND    DIPELTIS, 

latter  fact  harmonizes  with  the  manner  in  which  the  cuticula  at 
the  head  expands  to  allow  of  the  protrusion  of  the  lips,  which  are 
ordinarily  so  far  withdrawn  that  only  the  tips  of  their  papillse  are 
visible.  The  peculiar  action  of  the  cuticula  on  the  head  may  be 
compared  to  the  opening  and  shutting  of  an  inverted  umbrella. 
When  the  lips  and  other  mouth-parts  are  withdrawn,  the  cuticula 
is  drawn  together  and  disposes  itself  in  longitudinal  folds.  When 
the  mouth  parts  are  thrust  forth,  and  they  can  be  thrust  forth  to 
a  remarkable  extent  (see  Figs.  4  and  5),  the  cuticula  unfolds  to 
permit  the  action,  and  the  stria?  become  less  visible. 

I  am  not  altogether  clear  about  the  muscles  by  means  of  which 
the  foregoing  movements  are  accomplished.  It  is  possible  that  the 
mouth  may  be  closed  by  an  orbicular  muscle  or  even  by  the 
elasticity  of  the  cuticle.  Threads,  doubtless  muscular,  pass 
obliquely  backward  from  the  pharyngeal  bulb  and  attach  them- 
selves to  the  body  wall.  These  elements,  if  muscular,  are  of 
course  retractile  in  function.  The  pharyngeal  bulb  is  also  supplied 
with  internal  threads,  also  contractile,  which  if  followed  in  the 
direction  of  the  lips  are  found  to  pass  obliquely  outward.  These 
filaments  serve  to  protrude  the  spear.  The  action  of  the  various 
organs  of  the  head  and  neck  during  the  process  of  feeding  may, 
therefore,  be  thus  described.  The  lips  are  thrust  forth  and  applied 
to  the  organism  whose  juices  are  to  be  sucked.  This  operation  is 
facilitated  by  the  papillse  which  act  as  feelers  and  perhaps  also  by 
other  mouth  parts  acting  as  clutching  organs.  When  the  lips 
have  been  thus  applied,  they  are  made  to  adhere  by  suction  exerted 
in  the  muscular  posterior  portion  of  the  oesophagus.  The  spear  is 
next  brought  into  play,  an  operation  effected  by  the  muscles 
inside  the  pharynx  which  act  against  the  close  adhesion  of  the  lips 
as  a  resistance.  Thus  the  spear  is  made  to  glide  forward  through 
its  guide  and  to  pierce  the  surface  held  by  the  lips.  When  the 
surface  has  been  pierced,  the  liquid  food  beneath  it  is  made 
accessible  and  is  sucked  in  and  swallowed  by  means  of  the  large 
muscular  posterior  oesophageal  swelling. 

This  method  of  using  the  spear  is  somewhat  unique.  In 
Dorylaimus,  with  which   Onyx  will  naturally  be  compared  as  a 


BY    N.  A.  COBB.  149 

related  genus,  the  manner  of  using  the  spear  is  quite  different. 
The  differences  will  be  most  clearly  apprehended  if  their  considera- 
tion be  preceded  by  a  short  discussion  of  the  mechanics  of  the 
Nematode  spear  taken  in  a  general  sense.  The  office  of  the  spear 
is  to  puncture  membranes  which  enclose  the  food-materials  of  its 
possessor — in  most  cases  the  walls  of  cells.  For  this  operation 
it  is  necessary  to  have  an  opposing  pull  or  inertia  greater  than 
the  force  which  moves  the  spear  forward.  The  inertia  of  the 
animal  is  not  a  sufficient  reaction  because  of  its  small  size 
and  consequent  lightness ;  therefore  we  find,  for  the  production 
of  a  pull,  in  all  cases  where  a  spear  is  present,  well-developed 
lips  and  a  powerful  sucking  apparatus  in  the  shape  of  a 
highly  muscular  portion  of  the  oesophagus  specially  adapted 
to  producing  a  partial  vacuum.  The  lips  are  applied,  suction 
is  then  exerted,  and  the  mouth  is  thus  made  to  firmly  adhere 
to  the  membrane  to  be  pierced.  This  force  of  suction  is  the 
mechanical  "  base  of  operations  "  for  the  action  of  the  spear,  and 
the  pull  of  the  suction  must  be  greater  than  the  force  required  to 
thrust  the  spear  forward,  otherwise  the  lips  will  let  go  their  hold 
before  the  spear  can  accomplish  its  work. 

In  all  the  genera  possessed  of  a  spear,  the  action  of  the  lips 
in  obtaining  a  purchase  is  much  the  same,  and  in  this  respect, 
therefore,  Onyx  cannot  be  said  to  present  marked  peculiarities. 
When  we  come,  however,  to  the  manner  in  which  the  spear  is 
thrust  forward,  we  find  marked  differences,  and  Onyx  presents  one 
of  the  most  marked  types.  The  most  emphatic  morphological 
expression  of  the  difference  existing  between  Onyx  and  its  con- 
geners is  the  possession  by  the  former  of  a  distinct  muscular 
pharyngeal  bulb.  There  is  no  such  bulb  in  any  known  species  of 
Tylenchus,  Aphelenchus,  Dorylaimus,  or  other  spear-carrying 
genus.  In  Tylenchus  the  spear  is  believed  to  be  moved  backward 
and  forward  by  means  of  muscles  attached  to  the  three  chitinous 
bulbs  which  constitute  its  posterior  extremity.  I  believe,  however, 
that  no  such  muscles  have  been  observed  in  Dorylaimus;  in  fact  the 
spear  in  this  genus  appears  to  me  often  to  be  moved  forward,  not  so 
much  by  muscles  attached  to  itself  as  by  muscles  attached  solely 


150 


ONYX    AND    DIPELTIS, 


to  the  walls  of  the  body,  the  facts  being  as 
follows.  The  species  of  Dorylaimus,  as  they 
ordinarily  come  under  observation,  present 
a  rather  low  lip  region,  offering  anteriorly 
no  very  remarkable  peculiarities.  An 
examination  of  the  figures  given  by  various 
authors  of  various  species  of  Dorylaimus 
soon  discovers  a  peculiar  loop-like  appear- 
ance apparently  inside  the  head  just  behind 
the  base  of  the  lips.  I  say  apparently,  for 
these  loops,  which  are  visible  in  whatever 
position  the  animal  be  viewed,  are  in  reality 
the  optical  expression  of  an  infolding  of 
the  skin, — exactly  such  an  infolding  as 
occurs  in  the  skin  of  a  turtle's  neck  when 
the  head  is  drawn  partly  within  the  cara- 
pace. The  extended  condition  of  the  head 
of    Dorylaimus  latus*  an  unpublished    Australian   species,   are 


Fig.  6.— Extended  condition 
of  the  Head  of  Dory- 
laimus latus.  That  por- 
tion beyond  the  line 
marking  a  transverse 
constriction  can  be  re- 
tracted within  the  skin 
of  the  posterior  part. 
The  spear  is  slightly 
protruded,  and  the  ring- 
through  which  it  slides 
is  clearly  shown,    x  450. 


Dorylaimus  latus,  n.  sp. 


•4    8-5    25*     '52' 


„  - 1-75  to  2-5  mm.     The    trans- 
it     3"o      45     4*6  2"5 

parent  skin  of  this  interesting  species  is  destitute  of  hairs  and  is  possessed 
of  a  distinct,  finely  striated  sub-cnticula  in  which  are  to  be  seen  the  struc- 
tures denominated  "  pores  "  by  Bastian.  The  pores  did  not  seem  to  me  to 
perforate  the  outer  cuticula.  The  neck  is  conoid  to  somewhat  behind  the 
expanded  lip-region,  where  it  becomes  convex-conoid.  Each  of  the  six  lips 
is,  as  usual,  supplied  with  two  papillae.  I  could  observe  neither  eyes  nor 
lateral  organs,  unless,  indeed,  the  latter  be  the  external  openings  of  the 
glands  which  I  believed  to  be  discernible  in  the  anterior  part  of  the  neck 
when  the  head  was  protruded.  Under  those  circumstances  these  organs, 
each  longer  than  the  head,  lay  as  far  behind  the  fold  in  the  cuticula  as  the 
latter  was  behind  the  lips.  Each  appeared  like  a  unicellular  gland  with  a 
short  neck,  indistinct  ampulla  and  short  chitinous  lateral  (?)  outlet.  The 
pharynx  and  spear  are  normal.  The  oesophagus  expands  suddenly  near  the 
middle,  the  anterior  part  being  only  one-fourth  as  wide  as  the  neck,  while 
the  posterior  part  is  twice  that  width.  The  brownish-green  intestine  is 
two-thirds  as  wide  as  the  body,  and  is  set  off  from  the  oesophagus  by  a 
distinct  constriction  ;  the  intestine  is  composed  of  large  cells  filled  with 
small  granules.  The  pre-rectal  portion  of  the  intestine  is  twice  as  long  as 
the  adjacent  body  diameter,  its  anterior  end  being  less  distinctly  marked 


BY    N.  A.   COBB.  151 

represented  in  the  accompanying  cuts.  The  manner  in  which  this 
peculiar  arrangement  is  made  of  service  to  the  animal  may  be 
thus  reasoned  out.  The  head  having  been  thrust  out  and  the  lips 
having  obtained  a  purchase,  the  spear  is  moved  forward  by  con- 
tracting the  length  of  the  body  by  means  of  muscles  attached  to 
the  body  wall  inside  the  head.  This  contraction  results  in  an 
infolding  of  the  skin  of  the  head.  This  reasoning  is  exactly  in 
harmony  with  the  usual  position  of  the  spear  in  Dorylaimus,  for 
it  is  well  known  to  be  situated  well  forward,  being  in  fact  often 
normally  a  little  exserted.  Attention  might  also  be  called  to  the 
sinuous  condition  of  the  narrow  anterior  portion  of  the  oesophagus 
as  being  also  in  harmony  with  the  above  view.  The  apparent 
disproportion  between  the  length  of  the  neck  and  that  of  the 
oesophagus  might  be  thus  explained. 

We  return  now  to  Onyx.  Passing  from  the  oesophagus  the  food 
enters  the  intestine  through  a  narrow  cardia.  The  connection 
between  the  oesophagus  and  the  intestine  is  unusually  small,  the 
diameter  at  the  cardiac  collum  being  not  more  than  a  sixth  as 
great  as  that  of  the  base  of  the  neck.  The  thick  wall  of  the 
intestine  is  built  of  a  single  layer  of  large  cells,  which  are  of  such 
a  size  that  half-a-dozen  side  by  side  make  up  a  circumference. 
The  width  of  the  intestine  where  it  is  the  sole  occupant  of  the 
internal  cavity  is  not  far  from  four-fifths  as  great  as  the  width  of 

off  than  its  posterior.  The  distinct  lateral  fields  are  of  a  lively  brown  colour 
and  appear  to  terminate  posteriorly  in  pores  near  the  rounded  terminus  of 
the  tail.  Anteriorly  they  become  narrower  and  apparently  cease  altogether 
in  the  neighbourhood  of  the  nerve-ring.  This  latter  is  oblique  and  as  wide 
as  the  oesophagus  at  the  point  encircled.  The  short  tail  is  conical  to  the 
blunt  terminus  and  is  traversed  transversely  by  distinct  anal  muscles.  To 
the  indistinct  vulva  succeeds  a  vagina  Supplied  with  a  chitinous  lining 
and  the  usual  glands.  The  reflexed  portions  of  the  ovaries  are  narrow  and 
filled  with  double  rows  of  developing  ova,  and  extend  as  far  back  as  the 
vulva.  The  eggs  are  one-half  as  wide  as  the  body  and  two  to  three  times 
as  long  as  wide,  and  are  deposited  before  segmentation  begins.  The  male 
is  unknown. 
Hab.     Roots  and  stems  of  grass,  Sydney,  Australia,  at  all  seasons. 


152  ONYX   AND    DIPELTIS, 

the  body.     The  rectum  is  of  the  usual  form.     There  is  no  pre- 
rectal  portion  as  in  Dorylaimus. 

The  female  sexual  apparatus  is  double  and  symmetrical,  each 
ovary  being    reflexed.      The  vagina    is    well    developed,  and    is 


to 

h 


supplied  with  a  chitinous  lining 
and  the  usual  vaginal  glands.  The 
male  sexual  apparatus  is  double 
and    commonly    directed    forward 


Fig.  7.— Profile  View  of  the  Vulva  of 

Onyx  perfectis.    the  chitinous  vagina    throughout    its    extent,    but    SOme- 
is    shown   dark,   and   two   unicellular       .  . 

glands  are  shown  light,    x  225.  times  having  the  ends  or  the  tes- 

ticles reflexed.  The  ductus  ejaculatorius  extends  along  that 
portion  of  the  belly  occupied  by  the  row  of  accessory  organs, 
and  appears  to  be  composed  of  a  double  row  of  cells  much  flattened 
in  the  direction  of  the  axis  of  the  body.  The  free  extremity  of 
each  testicle  is  filled  with  from  fifty  to  one  hundred  elongated 
structures  arranged  radially,  but  directed  obliquely  towards  the 
axis  of  the  organ.  These  bodies  are  granular  and  stain  in  carmine. 
They  increase  rapidly  in  size  posteriorly  and  become  the  mother- 
cells  of  the  spermatozoa,  which  they  appear  to  do  by  a  conden- 
sation of  the  granular  matter  contained  in  them  into  a  distinct 
nucleus.  The  flattened  mother-cells  are  packed  in  two  or  three 
rows  after  the  manner  of  a  string  of  dried  figs,  but  begin  so  soon 
to  break  up  that  it  is  often  impossible  to  count  more  than  twenty 
of  them.  The  spermatozoa  resulting  from  the  breaking  up  of  the 
mother-cells  are  distinctly  nucleated,  spheroidal,  granular  bodies 
whose  diameter  is  one-fifth  to  one-fourth  as  great  as  that  of  the 
testicle.  There  are  two  spicula,  and  they  are  supplied  with 
accessory  pieces.  On  the  ventral  line  a  single  row  of  preanal 
accessory  organs  is  found,  coextensive  with  the  ductus  ejaculatorius. 
Caudal  glands  are  found  in  both  sexes.  The  posterior  part  of 
the  tail,  or  terminus,  is  larger  than  usual,  conical  and  destitute  of 
strise. 

In  another  journal*  I  have  called  attention  to  the  existence  of 
striae  in  the  cuticula  of  two  species  of  Dorylaimus,  and  ventured 

*  Jenaische  Zeitschrift  fur  Naturwissenschaft.  xxiii.  Bd. 


BY    N.  A.  COBB.  153 

the  remark  that  other  species  if  carefully  examined  would  perhaps 
prove  to  be  also  striated.  Since  making  those  observations  I  have 
continued  the  impression  under  which  they  were  written,  by  the 
discovery  of  stria?  in  a  number  of  other  species  of  Dorylaimus. 
These  stride  are  generally  most  clearly  visible  near  the  posterior 
extremity  of  the  animal.  The  occurrence  of  spiral  markings  on 
the  head  of  Onyx,  and  of  fine  transverse  stria?  in  its  cuticula, 
coupled  with  the  general  resemblance  to  Dorylaimus,  when  taken 
in  conjunction  with  the  observation  of  fiue  stria?  on  many  species 
of  the  latter  genus  and  obscure  spiral  markings  on  two  species, 
obviously  give  a  new  character  to  the  group  of  Nematodes  of 
which  Onyx  and  Dorylaimus  are  representatives,  and  suggest  new 
phylogenetic  probabilities. 

The  worms  belonging  to  the  genus  Onyx  are  readily  recognised 
by  the  cylindrical  neck  and  peculiar  head.  The  single  species 
now  first  described  is  called  on  account  of  the  perfection  of  its 
development 

Onyx  perfectus,  n.sp.  27  T>\  ^'l  '^  °Hr94  mm-  The  cuticula  is 
traversed  by  twenty-seven  thousand  transverse  stria?  and  bears 
throughout  the  length  of  the  body  very  slender  and  rather  long  hairs 
These  latter  are,  as  usual,  longer  and  more  numerous  near  the  head, 
where  their  length  is  about  half  as  great  as  that  of  the  diameter 
of  the  body.  When  the  mouth  is  closed  the  anterior  extremity  is 
hemispherically  rounded.  The  conspicuous  lateral  markings  are 
so  curved  that  the  right  hand  one  appears  as  a  left-handed  spiral 
passing  through  about  450°  of  angular  space,  and  the  left  hand 
one  as  a  corresponding  right-handed  spiral  When  the  worm  is 
placed  in  profile  the  spirals  appear  to  be  one-half  as  wide  as  the 
pharyngeal  bulb,  the  latter  being  itself  one-half  as  wide  as  the 
head.  There  are  no  eyes.  When  the  mouth  is  closed  the 
summits  of  the  twelve  pointed  papillae  with  which  the  lips  are 
armed  may  be  seen  crowded  together  at  the  small  orifice.  When 
the  mouth-parts  are  thrust  forward,  the  points  of  the  papilla? 
become  separated  from  each  other  and  then  sometimes  have  the 
appearance    commonly    presented    by    the    lips    and    papilla?    of 


154 


ONYX    AND    DIPELTIS, 


Chromadora.  The  pharyngeal  bulb  is  about  one-fourth,  the 
posterior  or  cardiac  bulb  about  two-fifths,  and  the  intermediate 

canal  about  one-third  as  long  as  the 
neck.  While  the  cylindroid  cardiac 
swelling  is  three-fourths  as  wide  as 
the  neck,  the  pharyngeal  swelling  is 
only  one-half  and  the  intermediate 
canal  only  one-third  as  wide  as  the 
neck.  The  slightly  oblique  nerve- 
ring  has  about  the  same  width  as  the 
oesophageal  canal  it  surrounds,  and 
is  accompanied  by  the  usual  groups 
of  nerve-cells.  The  tail  is  slightly 
convex-conoid  to  the  large  conical 
terminus,  which  begins  with  a  slight 
expansion.  The  widest  portion  of 
the  terminus  is  one-third  as  wide  as 
the  base  of  the  tail  The  caudal 
glands  are  situated  in  the  anterior 
part  of  the  tail,  and  are  three  in 
number.     The  reflexed  portion  of  the 

Fig.  8.— i,  The  Male  of  Onyx  perfec-  m  t      L 

tus(x40);  ii,  in,  iv  and  v,  the  tail   ovaries  reach  one-third  the  distance 

end,   head,   accessor y  organs    and 

anal    region,   respectively,    of    the  to  the  vulva. 

same  worm,  more  highly  magnified  now   n».c                     mi 

(ii,  x  750  ;  in,  x  225  ;  iv,  x  900  ;  v,  £_ h — »'8  =»   »«»  2-l  mm.        The    tail   of 

x  175).     In  the  anterior  part  of  i  .  2'8   2'9     3  3   3-3     3- 

the  oesophagus  is  shown,  surrounded   the  male  closely  resembles   that   01 

by  the  nerve-ring  (white);  following    ,,       »  i       ,i  i       tzt  -i     • 

the  oesophagus  is  the  intestine,  the  the  female,  the  only  difference  being 

view  of  which  is  interrupted  near  r  -,    , ,  £ 

the  middle  of  the  body  by  the   an  arcuate  iorm  and  the  presence  ot 
testicles  (drawn  lighter).  an  inconspicuous,  low,  broad,  ventral, 

bristle-bearing  papilla  near  the  middle.  The  ventral  series  of 
twenty  to  twenty-eight  equi-distant  accessory  organs  lies  imme- 
diately in  front  of  the  anus  and  occupies  a  distance  a  little  more 
than  twice  as  great  as  the  length  of  the  tail.  The  linear  spicula, 
two-thirds  as  long  as  the  tail,  are  cimetar-shaped,  being  of  quite 
uniform  diameter.  They  are  rather  strongly  and  uniformly 
arcuate  in  the  distal  four-fifths.  The  proximae  are  cephaloid  by 
unusually  great  expansion.  The  thin  accessory  pieces  are  one- 
third  as  long  as  the  spicula. 


BY    N.  A.  COBB.  155 

This  species  is  common  in  the  Bay  of  Naples,  living  in  sand  in 
situations  occupied  by  Amphioxus  lanceolatus.  The  absence  of 
lar^e  marine  alsre  in  its  habitat  leads  me  to  surmise  that  it  is  a 
carnivorous  species. 

III. 

The  New  Genus  Dipeltis. 

Nearly  thirty  years  ago  Eberth  described  in  his  "  Untersuchungen 
liber  Nematoden,"  under  the  name  of  Enoplus  cirrhatus,  a  peculiar 
marine  Nematode  whose  like  has  not  since  been  observed.  I  am 
interested,  therefore,  to  find  in  my  Ceylon  collection  a  similar 
worm  which  enables  me  to  confirm  Bastian's  statement  that 
Eberth's  species  mentioned  above  was  not  an  Enoplus,  The 
observations  I  have  made  on  the  Ceylon  species,  coupled  with 
observations  on  a  new  species  taken  in  the  Mediterranean, 
lead  to  the  establishment  of  the  new  genus  Dipeltis.  The 
characteristics  of  this  new  genus  are  not  numerous,  but 
they  are  well  marked.  The  head  was  described  by  Eberth 
as  bearing  on  either  side  a  peculiar  oval  plate.  These 
"  plates "  are  in  reality  an  hitherto  unknown  form  of  the 
lateral  organs.  Each  is  an  ellipsoidal  structure  nearly  as  wide 
as  the  head  and  having  a  thickened  margin.  Being  rather  more 
pointed  anteriorly  than  posteriorly  and  extending  to  the  very 
base  of  the  lips,  they  give  to  the  head  of  the  worm  when  seen  in 
profile  a  peculiar  eel-like  or  fish-like  appearance.  In  other  par- 
ticulars Dipeltis  is  in  nowise  very  remarkable. 

The  cuticula,  which  may  or  may  not  bear  conspicuous  hairs,  is 
very  finely  striated.  The  mouth  was  said  by  Eberth  to  be 
furnished  with  three  papilla?.  It  appears  to  me,  however,  that 
these  "  papillae  "  are  rather  to  be  denominated  lips.  One  of  them 
seems  to  be  more  pointed  than  the  others  —to  be,  in  fact,  spear- 
like. The  oesophagus  is  simply  conoid.  The  ventrally  arcuate 
tail  is  supplied  with  caudal  glands.  Ocelli  are  present  in  some 
species. 


156  ONYX    AND    DIPELTIS, 

1.  Dipeltis  minor,  n.sp.     Female  unknown. 

r?)  2-3  "s  a*  9i-9  r'26  mm-  ^he  ciiticLila,  bears  no  conspicuous  hairs. 
The  neck  is  conoid  to  near  the  slightly  oblique  nerve-ring, 
becoming  thence  more  and  more  decidedly  convex-conoid  until  it 
at  last  becomes  rather  suddenly  almost  acute  at  the  mouth.  The 
length  of  the  ellipsoidal  lateral  organs  is  one-fifth  as  great  as  the 
distance  between  the  mouth  and  the  nerve-ring,  and  they  are 
about  one-half  as  wide  as  long.  Their  thickened  margins  present 
a  double  contour.  Posteriorly  the  oesophagus  becomes  three- 
fifths  as  wide  as  the  neck.  The  portion  of  the  alimentary  canal 
immediately  behind  the  distinct  cardiac  collum  is  usually  pressed 
to  one  side  by  the  large  ventral  gland,  which  is  two-thirds  as  wide 
as  the  body  and  twice  as  long  as  wide.  The  position  of  the  porus 
is  unknown  to  me.  The  simple,  arcuate,  linear  spicula  are  of 
nearly  uniform  size  throughout  and  are  about  as  long  as  the  anal 
diameter.  An  accessory  piece  less  than  half  as  long  as  the  spicula 
is  seen  to  curve  inward  and  backward  from  the  anus.  The  tail  is 
conoid  to  the  convex  conical  terminus,  which  is  one-third  as  wide 
as  the  base  of  the  tail  and  is  supplied  with  an  outlet  for  the  caudal 
glands  similar  to  that  commonly  seen  in  species  of  Chromadora. 

Hah.  The  single  male  specimen  seen  was  taken  from  sand  on 
the  coast  of  Ceylon  in  the  month  of  March. 

2.  Dipeltis  cirrhatus,  Eb.  *  9;7  y  *  9£5gj*mp.  The  cuti- 
cula  is  said  to  be  smooth.  Submedian  rows  of  conspicuous  hairs 
occur  near  the  head,  extending  from  the  anterior  extremity  as  far 
back  as  the  two  eye  spots.  These  latter  are  situated  half  way 
between  the  nerve-ring  and  the  mouth.  The  neck  is  conoid  to  near 
the  head,  where  it  becomes  convex-conoid.  The  mouth  is  said  to  be 
surrounded  by  three  papillae.  The  conoid  oesophagus  is  on  the 
average  one-third  as  wide  as  the  neck.  The  cardiac  collum, 
shallow  but  distinct,  marks  off  the  beginning  of  an  intestine  which 
is  two-fifths  as  wide  as  the  body.  The  rectum  would  seem  to  be 
longer  than  the  anal  diameter.  The  conoid  tail  is  ventrally 
arcuate  and  ends  in  a  distinct  outlet  for  the  caudal  glands. 


BY    N,  A.  COBB 


157 


The  two  equal,  strongly  arcuate,  acute,  linear  spicula,  which  are 
a  little  longer  than  the  anal  diameter,  terminate  proximately  in  a 
distinct  expansion,  and  are  supported  by  a  single  accessory  piece 
one-third  as  loug,  situated  behind  them  and  curving  backward. 

Hab.     Mediterranean  Sea.     I  have  not  seen  this  species. 


3.  Dipeltis  typicus,  n.  sp.  -6~r?  i4  2-  'i-0r9mm-  is  the  formula 
for  the  only  female  seen.  The  sexual  organs  were  undeveloped, 
and  their  character  and  the  position  of  the  sexual  opening  remain 
unknown.  The  cuticula  is  traversed  by  about  one  thousand  eight 
hundred  and  fifty  transverse  striae  so  fine  and  obscure  as  to  escape 

notice  with  ordinary  powers.  The 
head  is  armed  with  stout  arcuate  hairs 
arranged  in  four  submedian  rows  of 
about  a  dozen  hairs  each.  These  rows 
extend  backward  to  the  region  of  the 
eye  spots.  The  complex  oval-shaped 
lateral  organs  are  somewhat  longer 
than  the  head  is  wide  and  one-half  as 
wide  as  long.  The  mouth  cavity  is 
very  small,  and  seems  to  be  armed 
with  a  minute  labial  spear.  The  oeso- 
phagus is  at  first  only  one-fourth  as 
wide  as  the  neck,  but  as  it  passes 
backward  it  gradually  increases  in 
diameter  and  becomes  at  last,  that  is 
to  say  somewhat  behind  the  oblique 
nerve-ring,  one-half  as  wide  as  the 
neck.  The  intestine  is  about  three- 
fourths  as  wide  as  the  body.  The 
rectum  "is  only  two-thirds  as  long  as 
the  anal  diameter.  The  conoid  tail  is 
ventrally  arcuate  and  ends  in  a  conical 
outlet  for  the  three  caudal  glands. 
The  large  unicellular  ventral  gland 
lies  as  far  behind  the  cardiac  collum 


Fig.  9.— i.  The  Male  ok  Dipeltis 
TYPICUS  (x40);  ii,  in,  and  iv,  the 
anal  region,  head  and  tail  end, 
respectively,  of  the  same  worm, 
more  highly  magnified  (n,  x  3fi0  ; 
in,  x  450  ;  iv,  x  350).  i,  shows,  in 
the  upper  part,  the  oesophagus 
surrounded  by  the  uorve-ring 
(white-  and  the  unicellular  excre- 
tory organ  and  its  duct  (hoth 
hlack) ;  near  the  middle  of  the 
hody  the  two  (?)  testicles  (light). 


158  ONYX   AND    DIPELTIS. 

as  the  latter  is  behind  the  head  ;  it  is  two-thirds  as  wide  as  the 
body  and  fully  twice  as  long  as  wide,  and  inasmuch  as  the  poms 
is  situated  just  behind  the  mouth  (-7)  empties  its  excretion 
through  an  unusually  long  duct.  This  duct  ends  in  a  distinct 
ampulla,  which  is  connected  with  the  exterior  by  the  usual 
chitinous  tube,  here,  however,  of  unusually  great  length. 

-6?)  i'-4  T-5  "*2-"(?>  9i'62'mm>  ^is  formula  is  based  on  the  measure- 
ments of  a  single  adult  male.  The  tail  is  more  strongly  arcuate 
than  that  of  the  female.  There  are  apparently  two  testicles  arranged 
symmetrically,  the  anterior  end  of  the  foremost  lying  near  the 
middle  of  the  body.  The  ductus  ejaculatorius  is  one-fourth  as  wide 
as  the  body,  and  is  composed  of  two  rows  of  cells.  The  two  equal, 
strongly  arcuate,  linear,  acute  spicula  compass  an  arc  of  180°. 
Their  proximse  are  hardly  cephaloid.  They  are  somewhat  longer 
than  the  anal  diameter,  and  are  supported  in  action  by  a  single 
accessory  piece  one-half  as  long  and  furnished  with  a  backward- 
pointing  process. 

Hab.  Coral-bank,  Secca  della  Gajola,  Bay  of  Naples,  at  a  depth 
of  thirty-five  metres. 


159 


IN  CONFIRMATION  OF  THE  GENUS  OWENIA 
SO-CALLED. 

By  C.  W.  De  Vis,  M.A.,  Corr.  Mem. 


(Plate  xiii.) 

Some  two  years  ago  a  few  fossil  bones  were  sent  to  me  from 
the  town  of  Warwick,  Queensland.  Unimportant  in  themselves 
they  begot  the  hope  that  others  would  follow,  but  the  hope  proved 
futile,  as  no  one  on  the  spot  was  sufficiently  interested  in  such 
matters  to  look  for  more.  As  it  seemed  important  to  ascertain 
whether  the  neighbourhood  were  indeed  fossiliferous,  Mr.  H.  Hurst 
was  commissioned  in  August  last  to  repair  to  the  district  and 
institute  a  careful  search.  This  he  did.  The  first  fruits  of  an 
otherwise  scanty  ingathering  were  a  Diprotodon  skull  in  fragments, 
and  the  greater  part  of  a  large  mandible  in  fairly  sound  condition. 
The  latter  at  once  met  with  a  hearty  recognition;  its  incisors  and 
premolars  were  those  of  the  genus  to  which  the  name  Owenia  had 
been  assigned. 

The  discovery  of  a  second  species  of  the  genus  is  opportune, 
inasmuch  as  it  establishes  a  validity  which  has  been  denied,  and 
offers  for  reconsideration  a  name  which  is  undeniably  liable  to 
extinction.  Suggested  by  a  strong  desire  to  commemorate,  in  even 
so  feeble  a  fashion,  the  labours  of  the  first  interpreter  of  the 
marsupiate  fossils  of  Australia,  the  name  was  proposed  in  spite 
of  its  declared  preoccupation  in  sundry  genera  of  recent  inverte- 
brates. The  hope  was  cherished  that  since  its  appropriation  to  an 
extinct  mammalian  genus  would  cause  little  or  no  inconvenience, 
it  might  be  allowed  to  pass  current.  But  sentiment  will  evidently 
11 


160       IN   CONFIRMATION   OF   THE   GENUS   OWENIA   SO-CALLED, 

not  avail  to  excuse  an  offence  against  the  letter  of  a  law  of  nomen- 
clature should  an  objector  choose  to  exact  the  penalty.  Conse- 
quently, the  writer,  brought  to  a  sense  of  duty  by  a  palaeontological 
friend  of  well  known  judgment  who  happened  to  be  in  Brisbane 
when  the  fossil  was  received,  now  begs  permission  to  withdraw 
the  name  Owenia  and  substitute  for  it  the  modification 

Euowenia. 

Characters  : — Dentition  i  ^-,  c  $,  ^4  j-,  m  f. 

Incisors  conical,  diverging,  curving  outwards  and  downwards,  the 

°      °'  °  upwards  ' 

lower  receiving  the  upper  upon  and  between  them,  the  posterior 
upper  incisor  subrudimentary. 

Premolars  subtriangular,  unilobate,  with  posterior  talon  and 
incomplete  external  cingulum.  Molars  of  the  normal  form  in  the 
Nototheriidce.  Nasals  narrow,  short,  not  covering  the  narial 
aperture  anteriorly.  Jugals  slender.  Naso-frontal  region  as  in 
Nototherium  (nee  Zygomaturus)  and  Diprotodon,  not  greatly 
depressed. 

The  almost  complete  reduction  of  the  upper  incisors  to  a  single 
functionary  pair,  and  the  strong  curvature  of  both  upper  and  lower 
incisors  are  good  generic  characters. 

The  newly  acquired  mandible,  for  which  a  suitable  name  may 
be  Euowenia  robusta,  indicates  a  species  far  removed  from  identity 
with  E.  grata,  mihi.  This  will  be  best  seen  from  the  following 
statement. 

Mandibular  characters  of  the  two  species  : — 

Habit   weak  ;   symphysial  gradient    steep ;   inferior  contour 

angular;  mesially  rather  concave  ;  incisors  rotund grata. 

Habit    robust ;   symphysial   gradient    low ;    inferior  contour 

parabolic  ;  incisors  compressed robusta. 

The  fossil  consists  of  the  inferior  moiety  of  the  articulating  limb 
with  the  dentary  limb  of  the  left  side  in  natural  conjunction  with 
the  anterior  half  of  the  dentary  limb  of  the  right  side,  all  the 
teeth  of  the  parts  preserved  being  in  place  except  m3  of  the  left 
side,  which  has  been  destroyed  by  a  recent  fracture  of  the  jaw. 


BY    C.  W.  DE    VIS.  161 

The  mandible  has  been  bequeathed  by  an  individual  well  stricken 
in  years. 

The  symphysis  is  194  mm.  in  length;  its  upper  surface  descends 
caudad  at  an  angle  of  20°,  in  strong  contrast  with  its  precipitous 
descent  in  E.  (/rata.  Beneath  the  posterior  end  of  the  symphysis, 
on  either  side  of  its  central  line,  is  a  deep  excavation,  confluent 
with  its  fellow  posteriorly  but  separated  from  it  anteriorly  by  a 
broad  backwardly  projecting  spine,  which  gives  a  reniform  shape 
to  the  excavation  as  a  whole.  The  posterior  half  of  the  diastema 
is  compressed  ;  its  edge  ascends  from  the  premolar  forwards  and 
about  the  middle  of  the  diastema  parts  from  that  of  the  anterior 
half  and  curves  downwards  and  forwards  upon  the  outer  surface 
of  the  incisive  socket,  but  no  tubercle  is  developed  upon  it  as  in 
E.  grata.  The  anterior  half  of  the  diastema  becomes  less  and  less 
compressed  as  it  approaches  the  incisive  outlet.  The  dentary  limb 
posteriorly  is  low,  thick,  and  convex ;  at  m4  it  has  a  height  of 
90  mm.,  with  a  thickness  of  67  mm.  Beneath  the  anterior  grinders 
its  outer  surface  becomes  concave  to  a  notable  degree,  but  resumes 
its  convexity  in  front  of  the  anterior  dental  foramen,  which  is  large 
and  placed,  as  to  its  posterior  margin,  in  the  vertical  of  the  anterior 
fang  of  the  premolar.  The  articulating  limb  presents  only  the 
lower  part  of  the  masseteric  fossa;  this  is,  for  a  Nototheroid, 
rather  deep,  and  has  its  surface  corrugated  by  ridges  and  furrows 
which  have  a  roughly  concentric  course  near  the  base  of  the  fossa, 
above  it  an  irregular  converging  course  towards  the  base.  On  the 
inner  side  the  post-molar  ledge  behind  the  last  molar  rises  into 
a  strong  abutment  against  the  base  of  the  tooth ;  this  tapers  off 
and  subsides  before  reaching  the  angle  of  the  ledge.  The  angle  is 
well  marked,  and  from  it  a  broad  low  ridge  runs  upwards  and 
backwards  to  the  posterior  dental  foramen,  which  is  large  and  is 
placed  further  from  the  angle  of  the  ledge  than  this  is  from  the 
last  molar.  The  channel  between  the  raised  margin  of  the  ledge 
and  the  coronoid  process  is  contracted;  the  hinder  surface  of  w4  is 
level  with  the  basal  edge  of  the  coronoid  process.  The  inferior- 
contour  of  the  mandible  would  be  a  regular  parabolic  curve  but 
for  a  slight  emargination  beneath  the  anterior  dental  foramen. 


162        IN    CONFIRMATION    OP    THE    GENUS    OWENIA    SO-CALLED, 

The  large  incisors  are  separated  at  the  base  by  a  space  of  15  mm. 
They  are  in  shape  compressed  twisted  cones,  diverging  strongly 
outwards  with  a  double  curve  which  brings  their  trenchant  apices 
nearly  parallel  with  the  axial  line  of  the  jaw.  The  surface  of  wear 
describes  a  convoluted  curve  from  the  middle  of  the  outer  upper 
edge  to  the  inner  face  of  the  extreme  tip  and  thence  downwards 
upon  the  anterior  surface  of  the  tooth  j  the  surface  of  wear  is 
much  larger  on  the  right  tooth  than  on  the  left.  The  apex  of  the 
tooth  is  unguiform,  a  shape  conferred  upon  it  by  the  coat  of 
enamel  investing  the  outer  surface  of  the  tooth. 

The  general  shape  of  the  premolar  is  triangular  with  the  trans- 
verse and  longitudinal  diameters  in  the  ratio  1  :  1*4.  Wear  has 
exposed  an  irregular  field  of  dentine  on  the  lobe  and  a  larger  one  of 
crescentic  shape  on  the  talon  ;  these  are  separated  by  their  respec- 
tive margins  of  enamel  and  these  again  by  the  remains  of  the 
depression  which  in  the  younger  tooth  separates  the  talon  from  the 
lobe.  From  the  middle  of  the  outer  surface  of  the  crown  a  pro- 
jecting fold  or  cingulum  runs  along  the  posterior  half  to  the  end 
of  the  talon ;  the  fore  end  of  the  crown  is  not  reached  by  the 
worn  surface  above,  showing  that  in  the  unworn  tooth  the  lobe 
had  a  backward  curve. 

Of  the  molars  there  is  little  to  be  said  ;  they  present  nothing 
which  would  compel  us  to  distinguish  the  mandible  from  that  of 
a  Nototherium.  The  premolar  and  first  molar  of  the  right  side 
are,  like  the  incisors,  much  more  reduced  by  attrition  than  those  of 
the  opposite  side,  and  the  greatest  amount  of  reduction  has  taken 
place  on  the  inner  side  of  their  crowns,  a  circumstance  which 
reminds  us  of  a  somewhat  similar  condition  of  things  in  E.  grata. 
In  a  large  number  of  mandibles  of  Nototherium  and  Diprotodon 
a  similar  detrition  of  the  inner  sides  of  the  anterior  cheek-teeth 
does  not  once  occur. 

Dimensions. 
Total  length  from  tip  of  incisor  to  base  of  condylar 

process 450mm. 

Height  atm4 90 

Transverse  diameter  at  ra4 67 


BY   C.  W.  DE   VIS.  163 

Length  of  molar  series  with  premolar 174 

Length  of  premolar 14 

Breadth  of  premolar 10 

Length  of  m4 48 

Breadth  of  m4 30 

Length  of  incisor,  upper  edge 47 

Breadth   of  incisor,   longitudinal,  at  upper  margin 

of  outlet  34 

Breadth  of  incisor,  transverse 22 

Length  of  symphysis 194 


Judging  by  the  general  facies  and  by  the  molars  only,  and 
allowing  for  changes  wrought  by  age  and  differences  possibly 
contingent  upon  sex,  the  Nototherium  jaw,  with  which  the  present 
one  might  readily  be  identified,  is  that  named  by  Owen  Noto- 
therium victorice.  So  great  is  the  resemblance  between  them  that 
the  writer  long  hesitated  to  think  them  distinct.  Possibly  they 
are  not  so,  but  after  much  pondering  he  has  come  to  the  conclusion 
that  he  would  not  be  justified  in  assuming  an  identity  for  which, 
in  the  absence  of  the  necessary  tests,  there  is  no  positive  warrant. 
Still  it  would  be  by  no  means  surprising  to  find  that  the  essential 
characters  of  N.  victorice,  at  present  unknown,  associate  it  with 
Euowenia. 

The  family  name  Nototheriidce  has  been  imposed  by  the  talented 
author  of  the  British  Museum  Catalogue  of  Fossil  Mammals, 
Vol.  V.,  upon  the  single  genus  Nototherium  as  understood  by  Owen, 
and  in  a  larger  sense  that  name  is  admissible,  nay  inevitable.  For 
the  genus  Diprotodon  Mr.  Lyddeker  writes  as  a  higher  term  Dipro- 
todontidce.  This  proposal  to  erect  Diprotodon  into  the  type  of  a 
distinct  family  must  be  ascribed  to  the  unfortunate  confusion 
perpetuated  between  Nototherium  and  Zygomaturus.  Compared 
immediately  with  Zygomaturus,  Diprotodon  stands  indeed  suffi- 
ciently far  aloof  to  be  invested  with  family  rank,  but  when  Noto- 
therium in  its  true  characters  is  placed  in  position  between  the 
two,  Diprotodon  seems  to  be  nothing  more  than  a  member  of  the 
Nototheriidce.     However  that  may  be,  the  term  Diprotodontidce  is 


164        IN    CONFIRMATION    OF    THE    GENUS    OWENIA    SO-CALLED. 

unfortunate,  in  fact  altogether  objectionable.  In  its  exclusive 
sense  it  can  only  be  properly  applied  to  the  wombats,  in  its  looser 
signification  it  cannot  be  accepted  as  the  name  of  a  division  of  the 
Diprotodontia  simply  because  it  involves  a  contradiction  ;  it 
inferentially  secludes  within  the  limits  of  a  genus  attributes  which 
the  term  Diprotodontia  predicates  of  the  whole  suborder  to  which 
the  genus  belongs.  The  infelicity  of  the  selection  of  Diprotodon 
as  a  generic  name  would  only  be  accentuated  by  raising  a  modifica- 
tion of  it  into  the  name  of  a  higher  generalisation. 

The  Nothotheriidce  include  the  genera  Notoiherium,  Diprotodon, 
Euowenia,  Zygomatarus,  and  probably  Sthenomerus,  but  of  the 
last  named  genus  the  dentition  is  insufficiently  known.  Proba- 
bility is  also  in  favour  of  Scapamodon  proving  to  belong  to  this 
family. 

Characters  of  the  Nototheriidce. 

Dentition  /  25p,  C  %t  P  {,  M  J. 

Posterior  upper  incisors  small.  Premolars,  except  in  Zygo- 
maturus,  subtriangular,  single-cusped,  with  a  posterior  talon. 
Molars  transversely  bilobed,  the  upper  without  longitudinal  ridges, 
talons  antero-posteriorly  narrow,  Scapula  long,  narrow.  Ilia 
greatly  expanded.  Limbs  gressorial,  approximately  equal ;  their 
proximal  bones  elongate,  simple.  Foot  broad.  Tail  short, 
tapering. 

Synopsis  of  genera  : — 
Incisors  § — 

Upper    premolars    subtriangular,    unicuspid ; 

cranial    habit    and     length     of     muzzle 

moderate. 

Crowns  of  first  incisors  contiguous  or  slightly 

diverging,  the  lower  incisors  proclivous. 

Posterior  upper  incisors  on  the  edge  of 

the  jaw ;  cusp  of  premolar   with   a 

shallow  posterior  cleft Nototherium. 


BY    C.    W.  DE    VIS.  165 

Posterior  upper  incisors  near  midline  of 
jaw ;  cusp  of  premolar  with  a  deep 

lateral  cleft Diprotodon. 

Upper  premolars  oval,  tuberculated  ;  cranial 
habit  very  massive,  with  short  expanded 

muzzle Zygomaturus. 

Incisors  \ — 

Crowns  of  first  incisors  above  and  below 
widely  diverging,  with  a  similar  strong 
double  curvature ; Euoivenia. 


Supplementary  Note  :  In  a  collection  of  fossils  received  since 
the  foregoing  remarks  were  remitted,  a  second  example  of  E. 
robusta  very  opportunely  occurs.  It  exemplifies  the  state  of  the 
teeth  and  jaw  at  an  early  stage  of  adult  life.  At  this  period  the 
following  unessential  differences  are  noticeable  : — The  corrugations 
of  the  ectocrotaphyte  fossa  are  much  less  pronounced,  the  curva- 
ture, descending  from  the  edge  of  the  diastema,  commences 
further  forward,  and  the  surface  of  wear  on  the  incisor  is  not  so 
extensive.  In  all  other  respects  it  is  identical  with  the  type.  In 
the  same  collection  is  an  isolated  incisor  and  a  fragment  of  jaw 
containing  a  premolar  and  first  true  molar,  much  worn. 


166 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 


Mr.  Maiden  exhibited  a  number  of  vegetable  products — fruits, 
seeds,  gums,  essential  oils,  and  timbers — in  illustration  of  his 
papers.  Also  specimens  of  a  number  of  interesting  indigenous 
(N.S.W.)  plants  including  Palmeria  scandens,  F.v.M.,  from  Bulli ; 
Calllcarpa  pedunculated,  R.Br.,  and  Alchornea  ilicifolia,  F.v.M., 
from  the  Richmond  River;  Telopea  oreades,  F.v.M.,  and  Persoonia 
chamcepeuce,  Lh.,  from  the  southern  portion  of  the  colony. 

Mr.  T.  W.  Edgeworth  David  exhibited,  on  behalf  of  Mr.  J.  E. 
Carne,  F.G.S.,  Mineralogist  to  the  Department  of  Mines,  Sydney, 
a  specimen  of  precious  opal  from  the  White  Cliffs  about  fifty  miles 
northerly  from  Wilcannia.  Precious  opal  and  common  opal  have 
lately  been  discovered  in  this  locality  in  a  formation  corresponding 
to  the  Desert  Sandstone  of  Queensland.  The  opal  occurs  dissemi- 
nated as  an  infiltrated  cement  throughout  the  mass  of  the  sand- 
stone in  places,  and  also  replacing  the  calcareous  material  of 
fossils.  It  also  occurs  in  cracks  in  the  sandstone  and  in  fossil 
wood,  which  is  somewhat  plentifully  distributed  throughout  the 
sandstone,  and  occasionally  replaces  part  of  the  original  woody 
tissues  of  the  silicified  trees. 

Mr.  A.  Sidney  Olliff  stated  that  he  had  recently  had  an  oppor- 
tunity of  examining  a  collection  of  Coccinellidce  gathered  by  Mr. 
A.  M.  Lea,  among  which  he  had  found  specimens  of  the  lady-bird, 
Vedalia  cardinalis,  obtained  at  Mossman's  Bay,  near  Sydney. 
This  capture  is  interesting  from  the  fact  that  the  species  has  not 
previously  been  observed  by  our  local  collectors.  Mr.  Olliff  also 
showed,  under  the  microscope,  specimens  of  larvae  and  females  of 
Phylloxera  vastatrix,  the  vine  pest ;  and  he  remarked  that,  so  far, 
he  had  not  yet  been  able  to  find  either  specimens  of  the  leaf-form 
of  the  pest,  or  reliable  records  of  its  having  been  observed  in  New 
South  Wales. 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS.  167 

Mr.  Whitelegge  exhibited  a  set  of  herbarium  specimens  of 
British  species  of  the  genus  Equisetum.  Also,  under  the  micro- 
scope, specimens  of  the  Peridinium,  to  the  presence  of  which  the 
recent  discoloration  of  the  waters  of  the  harbour  has  been  due  ; 
also  specimens  of  several  other  species  of  allied  organisms,  includ- 
ing a  second  species  of  Peridinium,  Prorocentrum  micans,  Ehr., 
Gymnodinium  sjrirale,  Bergh,  and  Glenodinium  sp. 

Dr.  Cobb  exhibited  an  inexpensive  dissecting  microscope  of 
simple  construction,  made  by  one  of  the  clerks  in  the  Agricultural 
Department,  Sydney.  Also,  under  the  microscope,  examples  of 
the  Nematodes  described  in  his  paper.  Also,  two  examples  of 
fungi,  one  a  species  of  Phallus  from  the  adjoining  garden,  the  other 
the  bird's-nest  fungus,  Cyaihus,  from  soil  near  a  pumpkin  vine  ; 
and  coloured  drawings  of  a  number  of  other  Australian  fungi 
which  he  had  recently  met  with. 

Mr.  Fletcher  exhibited  three  specimens  of  terrestrial  Nemer- 
tines  (Geonemertes  sp.) — one  from  the  Richmond  River,  N.S.W. 
(collected  by  Mr.  R.  Helms),  the  others  from  Tasmania  (collected 
by  Mr.  C.  Hedley).  The  Tasmanian  forms  seem  to  diner  in  colour 
and  pattern  from  the  Victorian  specimens  recorded  by  Dr.  Dendy 
and  Professor  Spencer,  Mr.  Hedley  describing  them  while  alive  as 
"  black  at  the  oral  extremity  for  about  a  quarter  of  an  inch,  the 
rest  of  the  body  dull  white."  The  New  South  Wales  specimen 
may,  perhaps,  belong  to  the  same  species  as  those  noted  by  Dendy, 
the  colour  being  brownish-orange,  except  for  a  lateral  band  on  each 
side.  If  G.  chalicophora,  Graff,  like  G.  palaensis,  Semper,  has  six 
eyespots,  in  two  groups  of  three  each,  then  the  specimens  exhibited 
to-night,  in  which  more  than  six  eyespots  are  present,  are  not  to 
be  identified  with  the  former,  which  is  supposed  to  have  been 
brought  with  palms  from  Australia  to  the  palmhouse  at  Frankfurt 
Zoological  Gardens. 

Also,  a  male  specimen  of  Peripatus  leuckarti,  Sang.,  (the  only 
male  out  of  a  total  of  five  specimens  obtained  on  the  Blue  Moun- 
tains), which  presents  the  exceptionally  remarkable  character  of 
possessing  a  pair  of  papillae — the  only  pair  present, — on  the  ventral 
surface  of  the  first  par  of  legs. 


168  NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 

Also,  fruits  of  Sechium  edule,  Swartz,  a  West  Indian  member 
of  the  natural  order  Curcurbitacece,  which  has  been  successfully 
acclimatised  in  Queensland  for  some  years  past.  From  a  specimen 
forwarded  from  Queensland  to  Sir  William  Macleay  a  nourishing 
plant  has  been  raised,  which  is  now  bearing  freely  in  Sir  William's 
garden,  the  specimen  exhibited  being  from  the  plant  in  question. 

Also,  a  living  specimen  of  Chiroleptes  australis,  Gray,  forwarded 
from  Herberton,  Queensland,  by  Mr.  F.  Christian.  This  species 
of  frog  inhabits  the  northern  half  of  the  continent,  and  has  not 
been  recorded  on  the  east  coast  from  further  south  than  the 
Clarence  Kiver. 


169 


WEDNESDAY,  27th  MAY,  1891. 


The  President,  Professor  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc,  in  the  Chair. 


Mr.  A.  Meston  of  Queensland  was  introduced  as  a  visitor. 


Mr.  Fred  Turner,  F.R.H.S.,  Department  of  Agriculture,  Sydney, 
The  Right  Rev.  Dr.  Camidge,  Bishop  of  Bathurst,  N.S.W.,  The 
Rev.  J.  G.  Buggy,  Kempsey,  N.S.W.,  and  Mr.  C.  A.  Chesney, 
C.E.,  Randwick,  were  elected  Members  of  the  Society. 


The  Chairman  called  the  attention  of  the  meeting  to  a  circular, 
copies  of  which  were  laid  on  the  table,  recently  received  from  the 
Department  of  Agriculture  of  N.S.W.,  offering  national  prizes 
among  other  things  for  the  best  Australian  Pathological,  Entomo- 
logical, and  Botanical  collections  submitted  to  the  Department. 


DONATIONS. 

"Transactions  of   the   Canadian    Institute."      Vol.  i.,   No.   1. 
From  the  Society. 

"  Bulletin  of  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  at  Harvard 
College."     Vol.  xx.,  No.  8  (Jan.,  1891).     From  the  Curator. 

"  Annales  de  la  Societe  Entomologique  de  France."     6e  Serie, 
T.  ix.  (1889).     From  the  Society. 


1 70  DONATIONS. 

"Bulletin  de  la  Societe  d'Etudes  Scientifiques  d'Angers." 
Nouvelle  Serie,  T.  xviii.  (1888).     From  the  Society. 

"  Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Zoologique  de  France  pour  l'Annee 
1891.''     T.  xvi.,  Nos.  1  and  2.     From  the  Society. 

"Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Royale  de  Geographie  d'Anvers."  T. 
xv.,  2me  Fasc.     From  the  Society. 

"  Memoires  du  Comite  Geologique,  St.  Petersbourg."  Vol.  iv., 
No.  2,  Vol.  v.,  Nos.  1  and  5,  Vol.  viii.,  No.  2,  Vol.  x.,  No.  1 
(1890) ;  "  Bulletins."  Vol.  ix.,  Nos.  7  and  8  (1890).  De  la  part 
du  Comite. 

"  Transactions  of  the  Cambridge  Philosophical  Society."  Vol. 
xv.5  Part  1;  "Proceedings."  Vol.  vii.,  Part  3  (1890).  From  the 
Society. 

"Zoological  Society  of  London. — Abstracts,"  March  17,  and 
April  7,  1891.     From  the  Society. 

"Agricultural  Gazette  of  N.S.W."  Vol.  ii.,  Part  3  (March, 
1891).     From  the  Director  of  Agriculture. 

"  Natuurkundig  Tijdschrift  voor  Nederlandsche-Indie,  uitge- 
geven  door  de  Koninklijke  Natuurkunclige  Vereeniging  in  N.-I." 
Deel  1.  (1890).     From  the  Society. 

"  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  Victoria."  n.s.,  Vol.  iii. 
(1890;;  "Transactions."  Vol.  ii.,  Part  1  (1890).  From  the 
Society. 

"Perak  Government  Gazette."  Vol.  iv.,  No.  7  (March  26, 
1891).     From  the  Government  Secretary. 

"Report  on  the  Ulooloo  Goldfield  "  (1887);  "Report  on  the 
Journey  from  Warrina  to  Musgrave  Ranges"  (1890);  "Report 
of  Geological  Examination  of  Country  in  the  neighbourhood  of 
Alice  Springs"  (1890);  "A  Record  of  the  Mines  of  South  Aus- 
tralia "  (1890) ;  "  Geological  Map  of  South  Australia  exclusive  of 
the  Northern  Territory."  From  II.  Y.  L.  Brown,  Esq.,  F.G.S., 
Government  Geologist  of  South  Australia. 


DONATIONS.  171 

"  Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Imperiale  des  Naturalistes  de  Moscou." 
Annee  1890,  No.  3;  "Beilage  zuni  Bulletin."  iime  Serie,  T.  iv. 
( 1 890).     From  the  Society. 

"Transactions  of  the  Entomological  Society  of  London  for 
1891."     Part  i.     From  the  Society. 

"The  Victorian  Naturalist."  Vol.  viii.,  No.  1.  (May,  1891). 
From  the  Field  Naturalists'  Club  of  Victoria. 

11  Twenty-seventh  Annual  Report  of  the  Zoological  and  Acclima- 
tisation Society  of  Victoria  (1890)."     From  the  Society. 

"  Transactions  of  the  Victorian  Branch  of  the  Royal  Geo- 
graphical Society  of  Australasia."  Vol.  viii.,  Part  2  (March, 
1891).     From  C.  Hedley,  Esq.,  F.L.S. 

11  Proceedings  and  Transactions  of  the  Queensland  Branch  of 
the  Royal  Geographical  Society  of  Australasia."  Vol.  vi.,  Part  1 
(1890-91).     From  the  Society. 

"Department  of  Agriculture,  Brisbane. — Bulletin."  No.  8 
(Feb.,  1891).     From  the  Under-Secretary. 

Pamphlet  entitled  "  Comparative  Methods  of  Digestion,  Circu- 
lation, and  Respiration  in  Fishes,  Amphibia,  and  Mammals."  By 
J.  B.  Wilson,  M.A.,  F.L.S.     From  the  Author. 

"  Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Linneene  de  Normandie."  4e  Serie, 
Vol.  iii.  (1888-89).     From  the  Society. 

"Journal  of  the  Asiatic  Society  of  Bengal."  Vol.  Iii.  (1883), 
Part  ii.,  Title-page,  &c,  and  PI.  i.,  ix.,  and  x. ;  "Proceedings, 
1891."  No.  1  (January);  "Annual  Address  to  the  Society" 
(Feb.,  1891).     From  the  Society. 

Pamphlet  entitled  "  Descriptions  of  two  new  Butterflies  and 
nine  Hawk-moths  (Sphingidaa)  found  in  Queensland."  By  Dr.  T. 
P.  Lucas.     From  the  Author. 

"  President's  Address  delivered  to  the  Royal  Society  of  N.S.W." 
(May  6,  1891).  By  A.  Leibius,  Ph.D.,  M.A.,  F.C.S.  From  the 
Author. 


172  DONATIONS. 

"  Zoologischer  Anzeiger."  xiv.  Jahrg.,  No.  360  (6th  April, 
1891).     From  the  Editor. 

"New  Zealand  Journal  of  Science."  Vol.  i.  (n.s.),  No.  3  (May, 
1891).     From  the  Publishers. 

"  Australasian  Journal  of  Pharmacy."  Vol.  vi.,  No.  65  (May, 
1891).     From  the  Editor. 

"  Proceedings  of  the  United  States  National  Museum."  Vol. 
xiii.,  Nos.  829-833  and  838  (1891).     From  the  Museum. 

"  United  States  Department  of  Agriculture — Division  of  Ento- 
mology. Bulletin."  No.  7  (1890) ;«  Insect  Life."  Vol.iii.,  No. 
6  (March,  1891).     From  the  Secretary  of  Agriculture. 

"  Bulletin  of  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History."  Vol. 
iii.,  pp.  195-210.     From  the  Museum. 

"Annual  Report  and  Prospectus  of  the  Stawell  School  of  Mines, 
1891."     From  the  Director. 

"The  Pharmaceutical  Journal  of  Australasia."  n.s.,  Vol.  iv., 
No.  5  (May,  1891).     From  the  Publisher. 


173 


PAPERS    READ. 


A  CONTRIBUTION   TO   THE   GEOLOGY   AND    PETRO- 
GRAPHY OF  BATHURST,  NEW  SOUTH  WALES. 


By  J.  Milne  Curran,  F  G.S. 
(Plates  xiv.-xviil) 

CONTENTS, 
i.  — Introduction. 
ii. — Area  dealt  with. 
hi. — Previous  observers, 
iv. — General  Geology. 
v.  — Formations  represented  . 
vi. — Minerals  of  Bathurst. 
vil— Rocks  of  Bathurst. 


A.  Igneous  Rocks 


B.  Sedimentary  Rocks- 


C.  Altered  Rocks 

viii. — The  Sedimentary  Rocks, 
ix.— The  Igneous  Rocks. 

Granite 


Basalt 

x. — Economic  Geology 
xi.— Other  points  of  interest, 
xil— Conclusion. 


Plutonic — Acidic. 

Volcanic — Basic. 

Arenaceous. 

Argillaceous. 

Calcareous. 

Hornfels. 

Schists. 

Knotenschiefer. 


a.  In  the  field. 

b.  Origin  of. 

c.  Microscopic  examination. 

d.  Chemical  composition. 

a.  In  the  field. 

b.  Microscopic  examination. 

c.  Chemical  composition. 


174   ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST,  N.S.W., 

i.  Introduction. 

The  material  embodied  in  the  following  paper,  is  the  result  of 
observations,  made  at  intervals,  during  the  last  ten  years.  A 
residence  of  some  eight  years  in  Bathurst  gave  me  special  facilities 
to  study  the  geology  of  the  district.  During  that  time  I  have 
carefully  examined  some  180  square  miles  of  country,  taking  the 
City  of  Bathurst  as  a  centre.  Although  I  am  conscious  the  paper 
deals  with  nothing  that  may  be  regarded  by  geologists  as  novel  or 
striking,  for  all  that,  it  may  be  acceptable  to  place  on  record  my 
observations  on  a  district  on  which  very  little  has  hitherto  been 
written.  The  present  contribution  will,  I  hope,  be  merely  an 
introduction  to  the  geology  of  a  portion  of  the  country  that 
presents  rare  facilities  for  the  study  of  many  of  the  great  questions 
connected  with  the  nature  of  metamorphism,  and  the  phenomena 
presented  by  altered  strata  in  the  regions  of  eruptive  rocks. 

The  hand-specimens  which  accompany  this  paper  will  help  to 
make  clear  descriptions  of  rocks  of  uncertain  affinities.  The 
micro-photographs  of  rock-slices,  on  Plate  xiv.,  will  also  help  to 
illustrate  the  structure  of  the  basalts.  This  is  all  the  more  useful 
in  the  present  unsettled  state  of  penological  nomenclature. 
As  there  is  a  growing  tendency  among  penologists  to  follow 
Professor  Rosenbusch's  classification  of  the  eruptive  rocks,  I  have, 
as  far  as  possible,  referred  the  Bathurst  rocks  to  his  system. 

There  are  many  interesting  questions  immediately  connected 
with  the  geology  of  Bathurst  not  touched  on  in  this  paper.  The 
contact  area,  for  instance,  that  forms  a  fringe  of  metamorphic 
rock  around  the  central  boss  of  granite,  would  demand  more 
knowledge  and  experience  in  the  refinements  of  modern  petro- 
graphic  methods  than  I  can  lay  claim  to.  In  fact  I  have  stu- 
diously avoided,  or  merely  pointed  out,  debatable  questions.  But, 
having  described  what  almost  all  geologists  are  agreed  on,  the  way 
is  clear  in  the  future  to  deal  with  the  more  obscure,  but  possibly 
the  more  interesting,  problems  that  may  be  studied  in  and  around 
Bathurst.     In  dealing  with  the  microscopic  structure  of  the  basalts 


BY    THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN.  175 

and  granites  I  have  received  much  kind  assistance  from  our  leading 
petrologist — A.  W.  Howitt,  Esq.,  F.G.S.,  now  Under  Secretary 
for  Mines,  Melbourne. 

ii.  Area  dealt  with. 

I  propose  to  deal  with  the  geology  of  the  country  immediately 
around  Bathurst.  Every  reference  contained  in  this  paper  deals 
with  localities  or  sections  that  are  included  in  a  circle  having  a 
radius  of  ten  miles,  taking  Bathurst  as  a  centre.  A  few  interesting 
features  outside  these  limits  will  be  referred  to  when  presenting 
points  of  interest  known  to  me.  These  may  serve  as  a  guide  to 
future  students. 

The  stretch  of  country  forming,  for  the  most  part,  the  well- 
known  Bathurst  "  plains  "  is,  in  reality,  part  of  a  plateau,  on  an 
average  about  2350  feet  above  sea  level.  Bathurst  Railway 
Station  is  2153  feet  above  sea  level,  and  the  highest  point  of  the 
Bald  Hills  is  some  630  feet  above  this  datum.  The  extreme  diffe- 
rence in  level  between  any  two  points  in  the  district  referred  to 
may  be  taken  as  740  feet. 

iii.  Previous  Observers. 

The  first  reference  I  can  find  to  the  geology  of  Bathurst  is 
contained  in  Captain  Wilkes'  "  Narrative  of  the  United  States 
Exploring  Expedition,"  Vol.  n.  p.  259.*  In  this  work  reference 
is  merely  made  to  the  fact  that  the  plains  of  Bathurst  were  at  no 
distant  date  an  inland  lake. 

Mr.  Stutchbury,  who  was  appointed  Geological  Surveyor  in 
1850,  made  frequent  reference  to  the  Bathurst  district  in  his 
reports  to  the  Colonial  Secretary.  ,  The  only  reference  of  his  to 
the  country  immediately  around  the  City  of  Bathurst  that  I  can 
find  is  contained  in  a  report,  dated  "  Belabula  Rivulet,  Carcoar, 
County  Bathurst,  April  12th,  1851." 

*  Narrative  of  the  United  States  Exploring  Expedition  during  the  years 
1838-1842,  by  Charles  Wilkes,  Commander  ;  Philadelphia,  1812. 
12 


176       ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST,  N.S.W., 

Speaking  of  the  country  on  the  Western  Road,  between  Junc- 
tion Hill  and  Bathurst,  he  says,*  "The  rounded  blocks,  which 
when  free  upon  the  surface,  appear  to  be  immense  boulders,  or 
erratic  blocks,  are  not  such,  but  large  glandular  or  globular  masses, 
often  connected  by  veins,  and  evidently  intruded  subsequently  ; 
these  may  be  seen  in  many  places  in  the  road-side  sections, 
imbedded  in  coarse  granite,  traversed  by  quartz  veins  in  all 
directions. 

"  The  foot  of  the  hill  is  composed  of  disintegrated  granite} 
forming  a  loose  sand.  About  one  mile  east  of  the  river  the  granite 
is  overlaid  by  clay  slate,  '  killas.'  Granite,  with  fragmentary 
trap-rock,  appears  to  form  the  whole  of  the  country  to  Macquarie 
and  Bathurst  plains  ;  the  plains  are  alluvium,  and,  judging  from 
the  debris  in  the  water-runs,  most  probably  investing  granite. 

"  Lead  mines  were  reported  as  occurring  at  Brucedale,  near 
Peel,  about  eight  miles  from  Bathurst,  a  little  eastward  of  north, 
the  residence  of  Mr.  W.  Suttor ;  the  road  then  contains  much 
micaceous  sand  and  quartz  pebbles. 

"  On  descending  the  last  hill,  about  two  miles  from  the  house, 
blocks  of  decomposing  granite  are  occasionally  observed  ;  upon 
crossing  the  creek  it  is  found,  in  place  upon  a  ridge  running  nearly 
east  and  west,  associated  with  mica  slate,  much  disturbed,  passing 
into  clay  slate ;  the  dip  of  the  clay  slate  is  west  north  west. 

"  To  the  eastward  of  south,  half  a  mile  from  Mr.  Suttor's  house, 
a  mine  has  been  opened,  in  which  the  following  varieties  of  ore 
have  been  found  : — 

"  Sulphuret  of  lead,  with  arsenical  pyrites. 
"  Green  phosphate  of  lead,  in  veins  in  the  clay  slate. 
"  Arsenio-phosphate  of  lead,  and 
"  Argentiferous  sulphuret  of  lead. 
"  The  cross  lodes  make  their  way  west  north  west  through  clay 
slate,  the  angle  of  dip  being  50°. 

*  Geological  Survey  Papers,  laid  upon  the  Council  Table  by  the  Colonial 
Secretary  and  ordered  by  the  Council  to  be  printed  ;  2nd  December,  1851. 


BY    THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN.  177 

"The  mines,  as  at  present  exhibited,  do  not  promise  to  be 
remunerative  ;  the  ore  appears  to  be  sporadic  rather  than  in 
regular  lodes. 

"  On  the  eastern  side  of  the  creek  there  are  numerous  fragments 
of  grit  stone,  containing  impressions  and  casts  of  Spirifirse, 
evidently  belonging  to  the  coal  measure ;  these  must  have  been 
transported  some  distance." 

In  a  paper  by  the  Rev.  W.  B.  Clarke  on  the  Transmutation  of 
Rocks  in  Australasia,  read  to  the  Philosophical  Society  of  New- 
South  Wales  in  May,  1865,  mention  is  made  of  metamorphic 
rocks  near  Bathurst.  Says  Mr.  Clarke,  "  One  of  the  most  remark- 
able changes  I  have  ever  noticed  in  the  neighbourhood  of  granite 
occurs  a  little  south  of  Bathurst.  .  .  slates  are  converted  into 
mica  schist  and  griesen,  and  limestone  is  changed  into  saccharoidal 
marble."* 

In  1867,  the  Rev.  W.  B.  Clarke,  M.A.,  F.R.S.,  published  the 
first  edition  of  his  "  Sedimentary  Formations."  He  refers  to  the 
"  existence  of  gneissoid  strata  and  of  schists,  of  very  ancient  aspect, 
at  Cow  Flat,  near  Bathurst."! 

In  his  annual  report  for  the  year  1878,  Mr.  C.  S.  Wilkinson, 
F.G.S.,  Government  Geologist,  refers  as  follows  to  the  geology  of 
Bathurst : — "  Immediately  north  of  the  village  of  Perth,  near 
Bathurst,  are  some  table-topped  hills — the  Bald  Hills — capped 
with  basalt.  The  basalt  rests  on  a  very  siliceous,  tertiary  pebble 
conglomerate,  which,  in  turn,  rests  on  granite.  ...  I  believe 
that  this  basalt  is  an  outlier,  or  remnant,  of  the  basaltic  stream 
which,  in  pliocene  times,  flowed  down  the  Campbell's  River  valley 
from  near  Swatch  field.  The  basalt  is,  in  places,  columnar,  and  on 
the  Bald  Hills  this  columnar  structure  is  splendidly  shown,  the 

*  Trans.  Phil.  Soc.  New  South  Wales,  1862-1865  ;  Sydney,  Reading  and 
Wellbank,  1866,  p.  267. 

t  Remarks  on  the  Sedimentary  Formations  of  New  South  Wales,  by  Rev. 
W.  B.  Clarke,  M.A.,  F.R.S.  (fourth  edition)  ;  Sydney,  Thomas  Richards, 
Government  Printer,  1878. 


178   ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OP  BATHURST,  N.S.W. 


five  and  six-sided  columns  being  of  considerable  length  and  well- 
formed  ;  sometimes  they  are  curved  in  a  remarkable  manner."* 

In  the  annual  report  of  the  geological  surveyor  in  chargef ,  for 
the  year  1879  (p.  214),  we  find  Mr.  Wilkinson  again  making  a 
short  reference  to  Bathurst  as  follows  : — "  Following  the  road 
from  Bathurst  to  Hill  End  the  first  eight  miles  is  over  granite, 
then  silurian  schists  to  Wyagdon,  then  granite  again  for  one  mile 
and  a  half  to  near  Wattle  Flat." 

The  Department  of  Mines  issued  a  volume  in  1882,  entitled 
"  Mineral  Products  of  New  South  Wales."  On  p.  39  of  this  work, 
Mr.  Wilkinson  says  : — "  Near  Bathurst  upper  silurian  rocks  have 
been  considerably  metamorphosed,  the  sandstones  passing  into 
quartzites,  slates  into  gneiss  and  hornblendic  schists,  and  the  coral- 
line limestone  into  crystalline  marbles  in  which  nearly  every  trace 
of  fossils  has  been  obliterated." 

Finally,  Mr.  W.  J.  Clunies  Ross,  B.Sc,  read  a  paper,  before  the 
Melbourne  meeting  of  the  Australian  Association,  on  the  Plutonic 
and  Metamorphic  Rocks  of  Bathurst,  New  South  Wales.  Up  to 
the  date  of  writing  it  has  not  appeared  in  print,  so  that  I  am 
unable  to  refer  to  the  paper  in  a  more  detailed  manner. 

iv.  General  Geology. 

Taking  a  general  view  of  the  district  round  Bathurst,  we  have 
presented  to  us  a  central  mass  of  granite,  forming  the  floor,  and 
partly  the  sides,  of  a  great  valley.  Higher  up  the  sides  silurian 
rocks  rest  on  the  granite.  On  the  floor  of  this  valley  a  great 
sheet  of  recent  alluvium  shingle  and  clay  deposit  is  spread,  and 
through  these  latter  deposits  the  Macquarie  has  eroded  its  present 
bed.  A  chain  of  basalt-capped  hills  rises  prominently  above  the 
granite  floor,  forming  a  line  generally  parallel  to  the  present  river. 

*  Annual  Report  of  the  Department  of  Mines,  New  South  Wales,  for  the 
year  187S  ;  Sydney,  the  Government  Printer,  187i>. 

t  Annual  Report  of  the  Department  of  Mines,  New  South  Wales,  for  the 
vear  1S79  ;  Sydney,  the  Government  Printer,  18S0. 


BY    THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN.  179 

An  aureole  of  altered  rocks  separates  the  granite  from  the  Silurian 
slates,  phyllites  or  limestones.  In  short,  we  have  a  great  saucer- 
like depression,  the  edges  of  which  are  silurian  rocks  ;  below  these 
there  is  a  belt  of  hornfels,  or  metamorphic  rocks,  and,  finally, 
granite  with  recent  superficial  deposits  fills  the  floor  of  the  valley. 

Through  this  valley,  as  stated  already,  rising  abruptly  from  the 
general  level,  there  ruDS  a  line  of  basalt,  burying  an  old  river-bed 
of  pliocene  age.  The  granite,  from  its  first  appearance  to  the  east, 
to  the  boundary  of  the  silurian  rocks  on  the  Bathurst-Orange  Road, 
measures  some  thirty  miles  across.  From  the  contact  rocks  on 
the  Winburnclale  Creek,  to  the  junction  of  the  slate  and  granite, 
south  of  Batburst,  the  distance  is  some  eighteen  miles,  that  is  540 
square  miles.  But,  allowing  for  a  very  irregular  line  of  junction 
and  the  small  patches  of  basalt,  I  take  the  granite  area  to  measure, 
at  a  very  moderate  estimate,  about  460  square  miles. 

In  this  area  the  lowest  rocks — granites  and  hornfels — are  the 
more  recent,  as  will  be  made  clear  in  another  section  of  this  paper. 

Surface  Geology. 

This  granite  country  presents  a  surface  of  gently  undulating  hills 
and  ridges  with  broad  valleys.  Except  in  cuttings  in  creeks,  or  on 
the  river-banks,  the  granite  hardly  ever  shows  on  the  surface,  and 
when  it  does  it  is  so  decomposed  as  to  disintegrate  readily  and 
rapidly.  As  is  usual  with  granite,  the  decay  commences  in  the 
felspar  grains,  thus  setting  free  the  other  constituents — quartz, 
hornblende,  and  biotite.  The  depth  to  which  decomposition  extends 
varies  much  ;  sometimes  to  a  few  feet,  and  sometimes,  in  cases 
that  came  under  my  notice,  to  a  depth  of  70  feet.  The  "  rolling 
downs  "  character  of  the  granite  country  contrasts  strongly  with 
the  surface  appearances  of  the  surrounding  slate.  The  hills  in  the 
slate  country  show  the  bed  rock  freely  in  escarpments  and  bars 
parallel  to  the  strike.  The  vegetation,  moreover,  assumes  a 
noticeable  change  on  passing  from  the  granite  to  the  slate  country. 
The  accompanying  photographs  show  in  an  admirable  way  the 
difference  in  weathering  in  granite  and  in  slate  country.     Fig.  1 


180   ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST,  N.S.W., 

shows  the  channel  of  the  Macquarie  in  typical  granite  rocks.  A 
short  distance  down  stream  (Fig.  2)  the  river  passes  into  silurian 
slates,  dipping  at  a  high  angle.  The  same  sharp  contrast  extends 
through  the  country,  as  a  whole,  and  may  be  studied  to  advantage 
in  the  hills  about  Cow  Flat  to  the  south  of  Bathurst,  and  in  the 
Winburnclale  Creek,  some  seven  miles  to  the  north  of  the  same  town. 
Immediately  round  Bathurst  the  granite  is  overlain  by  detrital 
deposits,  varying  in  age  from  pliocene  to  the  most  recent,  or  now 
in  process  of  formation.  This  applies  especially  to  the  strip  of 
country,  including  that  on  which  Bathurst  stands,  between  the 
chain  of  the  Bald  Hills  and  the  Macquarie  River.  Deep  water- 
courses have  cut  through  these  deposits,  exposing  beds  of  allu- 
vium from  two  to  fifteen  feet  in  thickness,  or  decomposed  granite 
in  some  instances  to  a  depth  of  thirty  feet.  That  these  erosions 
have  been  effected  rapidly,  that  is  within  the  past  fifty  years,  can 
be  readily  proved.  Some  of  the  old  settlers  recollect  a  time 
when  many  of  these  creeks  were  shallow  water  channels.  Roots 
of,  comparatively  speaking,  young  trees  may  oftentimes  be  seen 
stretching  from  one  wall  of  these  gullies  to  the  opposite  one, 
showing  that  the  very  beginning  of  the  erosion  must  have  taken 
place  at  a  time  when  the  trees  were  fairly  grown.  It  is  impossible 
not  to  be  struck  with  the  resemblance,  in  miniature,  that  some  of 
these  creeks  with  their  vertical  walls  bear  to  the  canons  of  Colorado. 
The  photographs  exhibited,  taken  about  one  and  a  half  miles  to 
the  south-west,  illustrate  these  features  very  clearly.  The  exact 
locality  lies  between  the  racecourse  and  the  slopes  of  the  Bald 
Hills.  The  oldest  of  these  detrital  deposits  are,  undoubtedly, 
those  that  flank  the  Bald  Hills,  and  the  more  recent  are  those 
that  form  terraces  to  the  present  river.  Further  on  we  shall  see 
that  the  line  of  basalt  that  crowns  the  ridges  of  the  Bald  Hills 
marks  the  course  of  the  one-time  bed  of  the  Macquarie.  From  the 
time  it  occupied  this  position,  the  river  has,  at  various  intervals 
eroded  channels  over  the  whole  country  between  the  Bald  Hills 
and  the  opposite  slopes  of  the  valley.  In  this  way  are  accounted 
for,  the  beds  of  shingle,  gravel,  and  detrital  matter  that 
conceal  the  granite.     Large  deposits  of  shingle  and   water-worn 


BY    THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN. 


181 


material,  marking  the  position  of  ancient  river  beds,  may  be 
studied  at  Kelso,  near  the  Railway  Gates ;  near  the  Church  of 
England  grounds ;  on  the  slopes  to  the  right  of  Kelso-Peel  Road, 
about  two  miles  from  Kelso  ;  on  the  gravel-topped  hills  between 
All  Saints'  College  and  the  General  Cemetery  ;  near  St.  Stanislaus 
College,  and  generally  on  the  ridges  between  the  Vale  Creek  and 
the  Macquarie. 

v.  Table  of  formations  represented  around  Bathurst. 


< 

H 

« 

Pn 


Most  recent  or  now  in 
process  of  forming  . . . 


'  PostJPliocene 


Volcanic. 
Pliocene 


Lower  Pliocene 


A.  Deposits  of  loam,  clay,  sand9 
gravels  and  decomposed 
granites. 


B.  Gravels  and  shingle  beds,  at 

various  levels,  between  the 
basalt  and  the  present 
river  bed. 

C.  Basalt  flow,  capping  hills. 

D.  Clays,  sand,  gravels,  and 
conglomerates  forming 
"  leads  "  under  basalt. 

E.  Silicified     conglomerates 

older  than  "leads." 


MESOZOIC  ROCKS.— Not  represented. 

d 

'  Igneous     and     Meta-       f  F.  Granites. 

i— i 
o 

morphic         ...          ...       G.  Hornfels      rock,      gneissic 

o 

1           schists,  spotted  schists,  mica 

* 

schists  and  marbles. 

< 

Silurian c  H.  Clay  slates,  phyllites,  lime- 

£* 

1          stones. 

1S2       ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST,  N.S.W., 

vi.  Minerals  of  Bathukst, 

Before  dealing  with  the  formations  and  the  rocks  in  detail,  it 

may  be  well  to  enumerate  the  minerals  and  rocks  I  have  found  in 

the  district. 

Minerals. 


1.  Calcite. 

15. 

Sphene. 

2.   Apatite. 

16. 

Galena. 

3.  Quartz. 

17. 

Green  phosphate  of  lead. 

4.  Garnet. 

18. 

Arsenio-phosphate  of  lead, 

5.  Olivine. 

19. 

Limonite. 

6.  Topaz. 

20. 

Mispickel. 

7.  Prehnite. 

21. 

Pyrites  (iron). 

8.  Felspar. 

22. 

Magnetite. 

a.  Orthoclase. 

23. 

Copper  (native). 

b.  Plagioclase,  Oligoclase. 

24. 

Malachite. 

c.  Albite. 

25. 

Copper  pyrites. 

9.  Augite. 

26. 

Grey  ore. 

10.  Hornblende. 

27. 

Azurite. 

11.  Actinolite. 

28. 

Argentiferous  galena. 

12.  Muscovite. 

29. 

Gold. 

13.  Biotite. 

30. 

Diamond. 

14.  Kaolin. 

31. 

Manganese  (black  oxide). 

Note. — The  following  are  also  reported  from  Glanmire : — 
Rhodonite  (Annual  Report  Dept.  Mines,  N.S.W.,  1885,  p.  141), 
manganese  ores,  and  baryta  (Annual  Report  Dept.  Mines,  N.S.W., 
1884,  p.  161). 

1.  Calcite. — Calcite  is  found  in  veins  in  the  limestones  on  the 
Cow  Flat  Road,  about  four  miles  south  of  the  village  of  Perth. 
It  also  forms  veins  in  fissures  in  the  granite.  This  seems  an 
unusual  occurrence,  and  only  two  instances  came  under  my  notice. 
It  was  rather  plentiful  in  a  joint  or  fissure,  cut  through  in  the 
large  well  of  the  water-works,  Bathurst.  There  is  little  doubt 
but  that  it  is  a  secondary  mineral,  formed  from  the  decomposition 
of  some  lime  felspar. 


BY    THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN.  183 

2.  Apatite. — Apatite  occurs  as  microscopic  needle-shaped  bodies 
in  the  quartz  and  felspar  crystals  of  granite.  It  is  very  conspicuous 
in  some  slices. 

3.  Quartz. — Quartz  is  very  abundant  in  the  district,  and  is 
found  as  veins  in  the  slate  rocks  adjoining  the  granite,  from  a  few- 
inches  up  to  some  feet  in  thickness.  It  may  be  easily  studied  in 
the  slate  hills  about  Peel,  eleven  miles  north  of  Bathurst,  and 
over  the  country  five  miles  south  of  Perth.  There  are  large 
quantities  of  water-worn  quartz  on  the  various  terraces  that  the 
river  has  left  in  eroding  its  way  from  the  level  of  the  Bald  Hills 
to  it  present  bed.  It  is  almost  unnecessary  to  refer  to  it  as  a 
constituent  of  the  granite.  In  fine,  a  very  pure  form  of  silica  is 
found,  as  silicified  wood,  in  drifts  that  have  been  denuded  of  a 
covering  of  basalt. 

4.  Garnet. — Garnet,  the  exact  species  not  determined,  occurs  in 
the  liver  sand,  and  when  sand  or  gravel  is  washed  for  gold 
some  garnets  are  always  found.  It  occurs  also  as  inclusions  in  the 
felspars  of  the  granite. 

5.  Olivine. — This  mineral  is  only  known  as  a  constituent  of  the 
basalt ;  it  rarely  attains  macroscopic  dimensions,  but  under  the 
microscope  it  is  found  in  crystals,  relatively  so  large  as  to  give  the 
basalt  a  micro-porphyritic  structure ;  this  is  well  shown  in  the 
rock-slices,  Plate  xiv.  In  polished  slabs  of  basalt  it  can  be  detected 
as  specks,  somewhat  darker  than  the  matrix,  and  easily  acted  on 
by  warm  hydrochloric  acid.  Infusible  before  the  blowpipe  ;  com- 
pletely soluble  in  hydrochloric  acid  ;  olive-green  in  colour  ;  colour- 
less by  transmitted  light. 

6.  Topaz. — Commonly  found  with  the  gem  sand  washed  from  the 
alluvial  deposits  in  searching  for  gold.  I  have  only  met  with  small 
stones. 

7.  Prehnite. — A  pale  green  to  almost  colourless  and  translucent 
mineral  was  found,  associated  with  calcite,  filling  a  fissure  in 
partly  decomposed  granite  at  the  water-works.  I  am  indebted  for 
my  specimen  to  Mr.  W.  J.  Clunies  Ross,  B.Sc.  It  answered  as 
follows  to   the  tests  applied — Streak :   colourless,   Hardness :    6, 


184      ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OP  BATHURST,  N.S.W., 

Fracture :  even  but  brittle.  Heated  in  the  closed  tube,  gave  off  a 
little  water.  Dissolves  completely  in  hydrochloric  acid.  Contains 
silica,  alumina  and  lime  ;  proportions  not  determined.  Before  the 
blow-pipe  intumesces  to  a  porous  mass.  This  mineral  I  take  to 
be  prehnite. 

8.  Felspar. — Orthoclase  occurs  as  a  leading  constituent  in  the 
Bathurst  granite.  Near  White  Rock,  and  other  places,  it  occurs 
in  a  porphyritic  granite  as  crystals  from  half  an  inch  to  two  inches 
long.  Under  the  microscope  it  is  more  cloudy  than  plagioclase, 
which  sometimes  accompanies  it.  In  most  old  rocks,  when 
examined  in  thin  slices,  orthoclase  usually  appears  more  or  less 
impure,  on  account  of  foreign  substances  and  cleavage  planes  that 
exist  in  it.  In  this  respect  Bathurst  orthoclase  follows  the  general 
rule.  No  analysis  of  this  mineral  has  been  made,  so  far  as  I  am 
aware  ;  but  from  the  intense  colours,  afforded  by  Szabo's  methods, 
I  am  inclined  to  think  the  percentage  of  potash  is  high.  Typical 
orthoclase  contains  silica  64*6,  alumina  18*5,  potash  16*9. 

Plagioclase. — It  is  rare  to  find  a  thin  section  of  Bathurst 
granite  entirely  free  from  plagioclase,  but  there  is  no  predominance 
of  this  mineral  anywhere  in  the  district  over  the  monoclinic  felspar, 
by  which  the  granites  might  pass  locally  into  quartz  diorites. 
About  four  years  ago  I  sent  some  slices  to  Mr.  A.  W.  Howitt, 
then  of  Sale,  and  he  determined  that  the  triclinic  felspar  of  the 
Bathurst  granite  was,  in  all  probability,  oligoclase.  Triclinic 
felspars,  as  one  should  certainly  expect,  are  abundantly  developed 
as  microscopic  lath-shaped  bodies  in  the  basaltic  rocks.  Any 
slice  of  the  Bathurst  basalt  will  show  this  clearly.     See  PI.  xiv. 

Albite. — Mr.  Howitt  detected  this  felspar  in  some  micro-slices  I 
submitted  to  him  in  1886.  It  occurred  as  minute  veins  in  ortho- 
clase, placed  approximately  in  the  direction  of  the  ortho  axis. 

9.  Augite. — This  monoclinic  pyroxene  is  known  only  as  a  micro- 
porphyritic  constituent  of  the  basalts.  Sections,  approximately 
parallel  to  the  clinopinacoid,  are  readily  obtainable.  It  also 
occurs  as  minute  grains  in  the  ground  mass  of  the  basalts.     Its 


BY    THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN.  185 

abundance  in  this  relation  can  be  ascertained  by  treating  a  rock- 
slice  with  acid  so  as  to  separate  the  soluble  olivine  and  magnetite. 

10.  Hornblende. — Is  found  as  a  macroscopic  mineral  in  the 
granite  ;  crystals  vary  in  size,  the  largest  I  have  noticed  measuring 
from  one-sixteenth  to  one-eighth  of  an  inch  along  the  vertical  axis. 

11.  Actinolite. — Found  to  the  south  of  Bathurst,  forming  veins 
in  quartz.  Most  of  my  specimens  come  from  Cow  Flat.  It  formed 
fibrous,  radiated  masses  of  dark  green  colour,  easily  fusible  before 
the  blow-pipe.  After  fusion  it  becomes  strongly  magnetic.  Specific 
gravity  3 -5. 

12.  Muscovite. — Muscovite,  or  common  mica,  is  found  as  an 
accessory  mineral  in  the  Bathurst  granites.  Towards  the  edges  of 
the  granite  mass  it  often  entirely  replaces  the  black  mica  so 
characteristic  of  the  typical  Bathurst  granite.  Muscovite  occurs 
in  considerable  quantities  in  the  river  sands.  When  fresh  it  is 
usually  colourless,  when  slightly  decomposed  it  appears  as  a  rich 
yellow,  and  an  opaque  golden  hue  is  very  common.  It  also  is 
found  in  the  sands  of  almost  every  creek  in  the  district. 

13.  Biotite. — Black,  magnesia,  iron  mica  occurs  as  small,  partly 
formed  crystals  and  scales,  disseminated  through  the  granite,  but 
occasionally,  particularly  near  the  edges  of  the  granite  rocks,  large 
plates  can  be  detected.  By  transmitted  light  it  sometimes  appears 
of  a  deep  green  colour.  After  long  heating  it  decomposes  in 
sulphuric  acid.  Fusible  without  much  difficulty.  Plates,  corre- 
sponding to  basal  sections,  are  easily  picked  out  in  decomposing 
granites.  The  dark  colour  of  the  granite  is  due  to  the  exceedingly 
large  proportion  it  contains  of  biotite  and  hornblende. 

14.  Kaolin. — Kaolin,  of  various  degrees  of  purity,  can  be  found 
both  as  decomposed  granite  in  situ,  and  in  small  beds  of  trans- 
ported material.  A  pure  white  kaolin  was  found  on  the  Bald 
Hills,  a  little  to  the  right  of  the  line  of  section  A  B  marked  on 
the  map.  When  washed  free  from  particles  of  quartz  it  formed  a 
tolerably  pure  kaolin,  but  the  percentage  of  iron  was  too  high  for 
a  marketable  article. 


186   ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST,  N.S.W., 

15.  Sphene. —  The  sands,  resulting  from  the  decomposition  of 
the  granites,  are  full  of  magnetic  ironstone  and  titaniferous  iron. 
This  material  is  so  plentiful  that  after  floods  it  will  be  found 
deposited  as  black  sand  in  the  creeks  to  the  south  of  Bathurst  and 
about  Kelso.  Mr.  A.  W.  Howitt  first  drew  my  attention  to  it  in 
the  micro  rock-slices.  I  have  since  detected  wedge-shaped  crystals, 
of  a  deep  brown  colour  showing  dark  borders  with  transmitted 
light,  in  slices  of  granite  from  near  Mt.  Stewart.  The  titaniferous 
ironsand  may  be  collected  in  large  quantities  by  passing  a  magnet 
through  the  dry  sand  in  any  of  the  creeks  within  the  granite  area. 
In  this  sand  I  have  frequently  detected  titanium  by  fusing  the 
mineral  with  bisulphate  of  potash  until  decomposed.  The  fused 
mass  is  then  warmed  in  water  in  just  sufficient  quantity  to  dissolve 
the  soluble  material.  A  few  drops  of  nitric  acid  are  added  to  the 
filtrate,  and  the  latter  diluted  with  six  or  seven  times  its  bulk  of 
water  and  boiled.  Titanic  acid  separates  as  a  white  powder.  The 
powder  can  be  further  tested  before  the  blow-pipe  in  a  bead  of 
microcosmic  salt. 

16.  Galena. — Is  known  to  occur  in  veins  and  lodes  in  connection 
with  quartz  reefs.  So  far  as  observed,  it  is  unknown  in  granite 
rocks,  but  is  found  at,  or  near,  the  junction  of  the  slate  and  granite, 
both  to  the  north  and  south  of  the  granite  formation.  A  typical 
occurrence  of  this  mineral  may  be  studied  near  the  residence  of  Mr. 
Suttor  at  Mt.  Grosvenor,  Peel.  As  has  been  found  in  other  parts 
cf  the  world,  the  galena  here  contains  variable  amounts  of  silver. 
It  is  not  found  in  such  large  quantities  as  to  make  it  profitable 
as  a  lead  ore.  The  silver  assays  are  always  low,  the  highest  not 
exceeding  20  oz.  per  ton  of  ore. 

17.  Phosphate  of  Lead. — Occurs  sparingly  as  an  incrustation  on 
decomposed  galena  ore  on  the  Grosvenor  Estate,  near  Peel.  1 
have  never  detected  the  arsenical  variety  of  this  mineral  referred 
to  by  Mr.  Stutchbury,  ante  p.  176. 

19.  Limonite. — Limonite  is  found  as  veins  filling  cracks  or 
joints  in  the  granite.     It  is  clearly  in  these  instances  a  secondary 


BY    THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN.  187 

product.  It  is  met  with  in  the  excavations  at  the  water-works, 
and  also  in  a  tunnel  driven  to  test  the  wash  in  the  Bald  Hills. 
Thin  layers  of  this  mineral  may  sometimes  be  noticed  in  dried-up 
water-holes,  near  the  decomposed  basalts  in  the  Bald  Hills.  Clayey 
ironstones  are  also  found  as  a  cementing  material,  binding  quartz 
pebbles  together,  forming  post-pliocene  river  drifts.  Peculiar  pea- 
shaped  concretions  of  ironstone  are  often  met  with  in  deposits 
formed  from  decomposing  basalts. 

20.  Mispickel. — Arsenio-pyrites  or  mispickel  is  tolerably  abun- 
dant in  the  schistose  and  slate  country  along  the  southern  granitic 
boundary.  It  occurs  both  massive  and  crystallized.  This  mineral 
was  found  in  a  well,  associated  with  iron  pyrites,  on  Mr.  Butler's 
selection  near  Green  Swamp,  on  the  Kelso-Hockley  B-oad. 

21.  Iron  pyrites. — Is  very  plentiful  in  the  slate  country  about 
Bathurst.  A  very  notable  occurrence  was  discovered  in  a  shaft 
put  down  by  Mr.  J.  Wilde  on  Butler's  farm,  to  the  south  of  Perth. 
The  crystals  were  mostly  cubes,  and  formed  the  greater  part  of 
the  rock.  Microscopic  crystals  of  pyrites  are  very  common  in 
some  of  the  slates  about  Cow  Flat.  I  have  also  noticed  yellow 
iron  pyrites  in  micro-slices  of  granite  from  a  railway  cutting 
beyond  George's  Plains  ;  also  in  slices  of  the  same  rock  from  the 
base  of  Mount  Pleasant.  It  can  easily  be  recognised  in  microscopic 
sections  by  reflected  light,  the  bright  yellow  of  the  pyrites  being 
clearly  seen. 

22.  Magnetite. — This  is  only  known  as  a  microscopic  constituent 
of  basalt.  It  will  be  referred  to,  in  detail,  in  dealing  with  the 
microscopic  structure  of  the  basalts. 

23-28.  Copper  Minerals. — It  has  been  already  remarked  that 
the  metalliferous  minerals  are  confined  to  the  zone  of  contact 
rocks.  It  is  in  these  rocks  that  native  copper,  malachite,  copper 
pyrites,  grey  ore,  and  azurite  have  been  discovered.  I  have  found 
native  copper  in  hornfels  rock  at  Duramana,  on  Kelly's  farm. 
Malachite  occurs  sparingly  at  Cow  Flat,  south  of  Bathurst.  In 
the  specimens  I  examined  it  seemed  to  result  from  some  alteration 
of  azurite  or  blue  carbonate  of  copper.     In  keeping  with  this  fact 


188   ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST,  N.S.W., 

I  have  often  noticed  fibrous  green  malachite  as  pseuclornorphs 
after  azurite  at  the  Cobar  copper  mines.  Grey  copper  ore  is 
recorded,  on  good  authority,  as  occurring  in  the  Cow  Flat  copper 
mines.     These  mines  are  now  closed. 

29.  Gold. — Gold  is  found  in  the  drifts  of  the  Macquarie,  and, 
more  or  less  abundantly  in  the  shingle  beds  forming  river  terraces 
back  to  the  pliocene  "  leads."  The  fact  that  gold  is  found  in 
water  courses  cutting  through  decomposed  granite  rocks,  such  as 
in  those  creeks  on  the  common  near  Bathurst,  is  thought  by  some 
to  prove  that  the  gold  has  been  shed  from  a  granitic  matrix.  While 
admitting  that,  in  some  instances,  gold  may  be  derived  from  a 
granitic  rock,*  yet,  in  our  case,  it  is  unnecessary  to  fall  back  on 
any  such  supposition.  I  venture  to  account  for  the  presence  of 
the  alluvial  gold  in  this  way.  The  Bald  Hills  are  some  600  feet 
above  the  Bathurst  Plains.  On  their  summits  there  rests  a 
layer  of  basalts  covering  pliocene  drift.  This  drift  has  been 
proved  by  tunnelling  to  carry  gold.  At  some  points  the  basalt 
and  underlying  drift  have  been  entirely  removed  by  denudations, 
while  along  their  whole  length  the  margins  of  the  drift  have  been 
eroded.  The  detrital  matter,  with  its  auriferous  deposit  thus 
obtained,  has  been  spread  out  between  the  hills  and  the  river, 
during  all  that  period  that  the  river  has  been  cutting  its  way  from 
its  old  position  to  its  present  level.  The  gold  now  obtainable  in 
the  granite  creeks  is,  in  fact,  a  re-distributed  pliocene  lead.  The 
character  of  the  gold  confirms  this  theory.  It  is  not  possible  to 
distinguish  the  gold  washed  from  the  creeks  from  some  flakes 
found  in  the  highest  drifts.  In  the  creeks  referred  to  the  precious 
metal  was  never  found  in  quantities  sufficient  to  pay  for  its 
recovery. 

30.  Diamonds. — Although  I  have  not  seen  a  diamond  from  any 
of  the  drifts  round  Bathurst,  it  may  be  well  to  refer  to  the  fact 

*  For  an  interesting  article  on  gold  in  granite,  see  Clarke's  "  Southern 
Gold-fields  :  Researches  in  the  Southern  Gold-fields  of  New  South  Wales, 
by  the  Rev.  W.  B.  Clarke,  M.A.,  F.G.S.  ;"  Sydney,  Reading  &  Wellbank, 
1860. 


BY    THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN. 


189 


that  the  Rev.  W.  B.  Clarke  records  four  diamonds  as  coming  from 
the  bed  of  the  Macquarie,  near  Suttor's  Bar.  None  have  been 
discovered  of  late  years. 

vii.  Rocks  of  Bathurst. 

In  enumerating  the  rocks  of  Bathurst,  1  think  it  well  to  define 
the  terms  used  in  describing  the  igneous  rocks.  It  makes  little 
matter  what  system  of  nomenclature  one  follows,  provided  always 
that  the  terms  are  clearly  understood.  Throughout  this  paper  the 
rock  names  will  be  made  use  of  in  the  sense  here  indicated. 


ROCKS  OF  BATHURST. 

Igneous  Division. 
A.  Plutonic  Acidic  Rocks. 


1.  Amphibole  granite. 

2.  Granulite. 

3.  Aplite. 


4.  Graphic  granite. 

5.  Greisen. 

6.  Porphyritic  granite. 
7.  Felsite. 


B.    Volcanic  Basic  Rocks. 
Basalt. 

Sedimentary  Rocks. 

A.  Argillaceous. 
1.  Clays.  2.  Slate. 

B.  Arenaceous. 
1.  Sands.                   2.  Sandstone. 

C.  Calcareous. 
Limestone. 


3.  Conglomerate. 


1.  Hornfels. 


Altered  Rocks. 
2.  Schists. 


3.  Nodular  schists. 


190   ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST,  N.S.W., 

vii.  Igneous  Division. 

a.   Plutonic  Acidic  Rocks. 

1.  Amphibole  granite. — A  crystalline,  granular  rock,  composed 
of  quartz  +  orthoclase  +  plagioclase  +  hornblende.*  This  corre- 
sponds to  the  granulite  a  amphibole  of  Fouque  and  Levy.  These 
authors,  in  the  splendid  work  just  referred  to,  define  granulite  as 
consisting  of  black  mica,  oligoclase,  orthoclase,  quartz  and  horn- 
blende. Granulite  a  amphibole  merely  differs  from  this  rock  in 
the  total  or  partial  substitution  of  hornblende  for  black  mica.f 

2.  Granitite. —  A  crystalline,  granular  rock,  consisting  of 
quartz  +  orthoclase  +  plagioclase -f  magnesian  mica.  This  agrees 
with  granitite  of  Fouque  and  Levy. 

3.  Aplite.  — A  granular  compound  of  potash  felspar  (orthoclase 
or  microcline)  and  quartz,  with  muscovite  mica  as  an  accessory. 

4.  Graphic  granite. — This  variety  of  aplite,  in  which  the  quartz 
laminae  form  figures  bearing  a  fancied  resemblance  to  Hebrew 
letters,  is  sometimes  found  as  water-worn  fragments  about  Poor 
Man's  Hollow  and  at  Perth. 

5.  Greisen. — Thin  veins  of  a  rock,  composed  of  quartz  and  mica, 
may  be  found  near  the  boundaries  of  the  granite  and  slate  country. 

6.  Porphyritic  granite. — In  very  many  parts  of  the  district  the 
felspar  crystals  of  the  granite  are  so  large  and  well-developed, 
being  frequently  two  and  three  inches  in  length,  as  to  entitle  the 
rock  to  be  called  porphyritic  granite. 

7.  Felsite. — An  intimate,  granular-crystalline  admixture  of 
orthoclase  and  quartz.     Common  in  the  drifts. 

*  Rosenbusch,  Mikroskopische  Physiographie  der  Massigen  Gesteine,  p. 
29  ;  Zweite  Auflage. 

\  Mincnilogie  Micro-graphique  Roches  Eruptives  Francaises,  pp.  156, 160. 


BY    THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN.  191 

b.  Volcanic  Basic  Rocks. 
Basalt. — An  intimate  dark  blue  or  black  compound  of  augite, 
labradorite  and  olivine,  with  some  glassy  matter.  Magnetite  and 
ilmenite  are  generally  present  as  well.  The  Bathurst  basalt  is 
micro-porphyritic  in  structure,  and,  according  to  Mohl's  classifica- 
tion, our  rock  is  a  plagioclase  basalt.  Boricky  would  call 
it  a  felspar-basalt.  Rosenbusch  makes  basalt  include  all  neo- 
volcanic  rocks  of  basic  composition,  which  essentially  contain 
plagioclase  and  augite.  Olivine,  this  author  does  not  consider  as 
an  essential  constituent.  As  regards  structure,  this  basalt  falls 
under  Division  4  in  Rosenbusch's  classification,  and  is,  therefore, 
termed  hypo-crystalline  porphyritic* 

vii.  Sedimentary  Rocks. 
Argillaceous  Bocks. 

1.  Clays. — Composed  of  hydrous  silicate  of  alumina.  The 
Bathurst  clays  contain  mixtures  of  sand  and  iron  oxides  in  various 
proportions. 

2.  Slate. — Indurated  clay,  sometimes  fissile  in  planes  forming 
an  angle  with  the  bedding,  but  more  often  fissile  in  the  direction 
of  the  bedding. 

Arenaceous  Group, 

1.  Sand. — Chemical  composition,  silica.  Mineral  components, 
quartz  or  flint,  Beds  of  sand  are  common  in  many  of  the  more 
recent  formations. 

2.  Sandstone. — The  shingle  of  the  drifts  consists  of  siliceous 
sandstones  to  a  very  great  extent ;  pure  quartz  and  felspar 
pebbles,  however,  predominate. 

3  Conglomerates. — This  rock  consists  of  rounded  pebbles  of 
quartz,  sandstone,  slate  and  jasperoid  rock,  cemented  either  by 
siliceous  or  ferruginous  matter.  As  stated  on  p.  181,  we  have  two 
conglomerates,  similar  in  composition  but  different  in  age,  near 
Bathurst. 

*  Rosenbusch,  Mikroskopische  Physiographie  der  Massigen  Gesteine,  p. 
728  ;  Zweite  Auflage. 
13 


192   ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST,  N.S.W., 

Calcareous  Bocks. 
Limestones. — Chemical  composition,  carbonate  of  lime.  Some 
of  the  crystalline  limestones,  of  a  clear  white  colour,  from  Cow 
Flat,  are  good  examples  of  this  rock.  At  the  limekilns,  some  18 
miles  north  of  Bathurst,  there  are  very  considerable  beds  of  lime- 
stone. Some  are  white,  but,  in  most  instances,  they  are  blue  or 
grey,  from  the  fact  that  the  last  remnants  of  organic  life  have  not 
been  destroyed. 

Altered  Rocks. 

1.  Hornfels. — A  black  or  bluish-black  rock,  close-grained  and 
heavy,  with  blebs  of  a  milk-blue  quartz.  In  hand  specimens  this 
rock  might  be  taken  for  a  fine-grained  gneiss  or  an  altered  schist. 
Study  of  the  rock,  in  situ,  shows  it  in  every  variety,  from 
massive  and  holo-crystalline  to  schistose. 

2.  Nodular  Schist  (Knotenschiefer).  —  Schists  in  which  small, 
rounded  concretions  are  present,  and  which  stand  out  like  knots 
on  the  planes  of  foliation.  Splendid  examples  of  this  rock  may 
be  found  in  a  creek  by  the  roadside  on  the  Bathurst- Peel  Road. 
The  exact  locality  is  at  a  point  where  a  small  bridge  or  culvert  on 
the  main  road  crosses  a  tributary  of  the  Winburndale  Creek,  near 
the  foot  of  a  steep  hill,  about  7  miles  from  Bathurst. 

3.  Schistose  Rocks. — The  schistose  rocks  about  Bathurst  might 
be  described  as  clay-slates  in  which  layers  of  mica  have  been 
developed  and  exhibiting  distinct  foliation.  A  typical  mica  schist 
is  an  aggregate  of  quartz  and  mica  only.  Hand  specimens  can  be 
found  about  Bathurst  that  cannot  readily  be  distinguished  from 
typical  mica  schists.  But,  as  a  rule,  the  rocks  that  I  have  noticed 
might  be  described  as  felspathic,  mica  schists,  in  fact  a  transition 
rock,  or  a  variety  between  the  normal  type  and  a  gneissic  schist. 
They  are  abundantly  developed  about  Cow  Flat  and  in  the  country 
round  the  upper  Winburndale  Rivulet  to  the  north-west  of 
Bathurst. 

viii.  Sedimentary  Formations. 

Upper  Silurian. — The  slates,   gneissic   schists,    and  limestones 
near  Bathurst,  have  been  regarded  by  all  our  geologists  as  of 


BY   THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN.  103 

upper  silurian  age.*  The  lithological  characters  of  the  rocks 
suggest,  almost  at  first  sight,  that  the  slates  and  limestones  are 
similar  in  age  to  well  known  silurian  formations.  Very  few 
fossils  have  been  discovered,  and  all  those  that  have  been  described 
point  to  the  same  conclusion.  De  Koninck  mentions  Slromatopora 
striatellaj  from  the  Limekilns  1 6  miles  north  of  Bathurst.  Recently 
I  have  collected  specimens  of  the  same  fossil  from  the  same  place. 
De  Koninck  also  mentions  Favosites  fibrosa  from  this  locality.  J  A 
short  time  ago  I  noticed  well  preserved  examples  of  the  silurian 
coral,  Phillipsastrcea,  near  the  Benglen  Caves  Limekilns.  Mr. 
Etheridge,  jun.,  palaeontologist  to  the  Australian  Museum,  to 
whom  I  submitted  my  specimens,  informed  me  that  the  Phillips- 
astraea  is  a  new  species. §     The  fossil  evidence  stands  thus  : — 

COLLECTED  BY.  IDENTIFIED  BY. 

Petraia  sp.  ...  ...     Suttor.  ...     Mines  Department. || 

Stromatopora  striatella   ...  \  '         ...     De  Koninck. 

(  Curran. 

Favosites  fibrosa  ...  ...  J  '  ...     De  Koninck. 

(  Curran. 

Phillipsastrcea  sp.  ...     Curran.         ...     Etheridge,  jun. 

*  Wilkinson,  Notes  on  the  Geology  of  N.  S,  Wales,  p.  39  of  Mineral 
Products  of  N.  S.  Wales  ;  Sydney,  Government  Printer,  1882. 

+  Recherches  sur  les  Fossiles  Paleozoi'ques  de  La  Nouvelle-Galles  du  Sud , 
p.  10. 

J  Fossiles  Paleozolques,  p.  22. 

§  Mr.  Etheridge  considers  the  Phillipsastrcea  a  new  species.  He  proposes 
to  describe  it  at  an  early  date  as  P.  Gurrani.  Regarding  this  coral,  he 
writes,  under  date  12th  February,  1S91  : — "  Phillipsastrcea. — This  is  a  very 
interesting  coral  and  does  not  appear  to  be  identical  with  any  of  the  European 
or  American  species,  so  far  as  the  works  of  reference  at  my  disposal  will 
enable  me  to  judge.  P.  Gurrani  is  peculiar  in  the  absence  of  all  trace  of  a 
columellarian  tubercle,  and  the  central  area'or  calici  being  entirely  tabulate- 
vesicular,  on  to  which  the  septa  do  not  pass.  De  Koninck  records  P. 
Verneuilii,  Ed.  &  H.,  as  a  New  South  Wales  species,  but  speaks,  in  his 
description,  of  the  corallum  as  composed  of  superimposed  layers,  and 
possessing  a  thin  columella.  Neither  of  these  features  are  present  in  your 
specimen." 

||  Annual  Report  of  the  Department  of  Mines,  New  South  Wales,  for  the 
year  1881,  Appendix  H.  p.  148 ;  Sydney,  Government  Printer,  1S82. 


194   ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST,  N.S.W. 

These  are  silurian  in  type.  There  can  be  no  question  that 
the  fossiliferous  limestones  are  interbedclecl  with  the  phyllites 
and  slates ;  so  the  whole  formation  may  be  unhesitatingly 
accepted  as  silurian  in  age.  There  is  still  additional  evi- 
dence pointing  in  the  same  direction.  Resting  unconformably 
on  the  slates  are  to  be  found  in  places  a  series  of  sandstones 
and  grits  containing  the  well  known  brachiopods  Spirifer 
disjunctus  and  Rhynchonella  pleurodon.  These  Devonian  rocks 
are  in  turn  overlaid  by  carboniferous  beds.  These  succes- 
sions can  be  studied  well  by  examining  the  country  to  the 
east  of  the  Bathurst-Limekilns  Road,  on  the  upper  reaches  of 
the  Winburndale,  and  generally,  from  the  spurs  of  the  Winburn- 
dale  Mountains,  in  the  same  neighbourhood,  across  to  the  Lime- 
kilns. To  sum  up,  we  have  evidence  from  the  fossils  enumerated, 
as  well  as  stratigraphical  and  lithological  proofs,  of  the  position 
of  the  slate  formations  in  the  geological  series. 

When  one  approaches  Bathurst,  from  any  side,  it  will  be  noticed 
that  as  the  granite  region  is  approached  the  slates  show  signs  of 
disturbance.  They  become  more  fissile  in  character,  and  faults  are 
frequently  developed.  Contorted  strata,  principally  slate,  are  to  be 
seen  in  every  creek  or  favourable  cutting.  Good  examples  of  this 
occur  about  Peel,  and  an  exceptionally  good  contorted  section  is 
exposed  in  a  road  cutting  on  the  right  of  George's  Plains  and  Cow 
Flat  Road.  Travelling  still  towards  the  granite,  glistening  plates 
of  mica  become  apparent  on  splitting  the  rock,  showing  a  new 
phase  of  crystallization.  Further  on,  the  mica  becomes  more 
plentiful,  so  much  so  as  to  be  recognisable  as  alternating  layers  along 
which  the  rock  easily  cleaves.  While  still  nearer  the  granite  the 
now  schistose  rock  exhibits  a  peculiar  puckered  and  wavy  surface 
with  a  satiny  sheen.  Then  dark  spots  make  their  appearance, 
and  knots,  ovoid  and  round,  stand  out  on  the  weathered  planes. 
These  spots  vary  in  size  from  a  pin's  head  to  a  pea.  In  this  we 
have  an  excellent  example  of  the  interesting  metamorphic  slate 
known  as  Knotenschiefer.  Finally,  a  mass  of  rock  is  met  with  of 
a  dark  blue  colour,  with  no  traces  of  schistosity  in  any  direction, 
forming  a  typical  hornfels.     This  interesting  succession  of  zones 


BY    THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN.  195 

of  contact  metamorphism  can  09  followed  in  a  line  clue  north 
from  Mr.  Coombe's  residence,  Glanmire.  Spotted  schists  and 
hornfels  can  be  followed  by  travelling  up  the  creek  (a  tributary  of 
the  Winburndale)  from  the  culvert  referred  to  on  p.  192.  The 
hornfels  will  be  found  exposed  between  the  head  of  the  creek  and 
the  road.  Hornfels  rock,  in  many  interesting  varieties,  can  be 
collected  too  at  Duramana,  where  it  is  used  for  road  purposes.  Good 
outcrops  of  the  same  rock  are  easily  accessible  in  a  road  cutting 
on  the  Orange  Road,  near  the  "  Rocks,"  as  well  as  on  the  Rockley 
Road,  south  of  Perth,  and  on  the  Blayney  Road,  near  the  granite 
boundary. 

The  aureole  of  metamorphic  rock  around  the  granite  may  be 
divided  into  three  zones,  but,  from  the  very  nature  of  the  case,  it 
is  evident  that  no  hard  and  fast  line  can  be  drawn  between  these 
belts.     The  zones  may  be  distinguished  as — 

1.  Zone  of  micaceous  clay  slate. 

2.  Zone  of  knotted  slate,  often  mica  slate  (Knotenglimmer- 

schiefer). 

3.  Zone  of  hornfels  rock. 

It  will  of  course  be  understood  that  these  zones  of  rock  do  not 
follow  each  other  in  due  succession  at  every  point.  That  this 
should  be  so  would  suppose  denudation  to  have  excavated  the 
river  valley  equally  on  all  sides — a  manifest  impossibility.  As  a 
matter  of  fact  knotted  and  altered  slates  may  be  found  at  times 
nearer  the  central  granite  mass  than  hornfels  rock.  But  this 
difficulty  is  easily  explained  by  assuming  an  underlying  mass  of 
granite  not  yet  exposed,  or  by  noticing  that  sometimes  the  granite 
dips  away  under  the  slate  rock  at  a  low  angle  and  further  on 
comes  once  more  to  the  surface. 

Relative  Age  of  the  Sedimentary  Rocks. — Silurian  slate  is  the 
oldest  rock  around  Bathurst.  At  first  sight  this  may  seem  rather 
puzzling.  The  position  and  structure  of  these  slates  show  them  to 
be  sedimentary  in  origin.  But  we  have  abundant  proof  that  they 
were  laid  down,  consolidated,  and  crushed  into  great  folds  long 
before  the  granite  was  erupted.     Of  course  we  might  suppose  the 


196   ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST,  N.S.W., 

granite  to  be  the  result  of  extreme  metamorphism,  as  possibly 
some  granites  are,  but  in  studying  the  geologj'-  of  Bathurst  one 
soon  abandons  all  hope  of  maintaining  such  an  origin  for  the 
granitic  mass  as  a  whole.     This  will  be  dealt  with  further  on. 

Wherever  I  have  studied  good  junctions  I  always  noticed  that 
the  slates  are  cut  off  suddenly  by  the  granite,  and  in  no  instance 
have  I  ever  seen  a  slate  rock  resting  on  a  granitic  floor  in  a  way 
that  would  suggest  it  was  originally  laid  doivn  there.  Indeed,  no 
idea  can  now  be  formed  of  what  may  have  been  the  character  of 
the  old  sea-bed  on  which  the  sediments  were  first  deposited.  No 
trace  or  vestige  of  it  remains.  The  granite  behaves  in  every 
respect  as  a  rock  that  was  erupted  into  overlying  slates,  and  is, 
therefore,  the  newer.  Slate,  then,  we  take  to  be  the  most  ancient 
formation.  Next  in  age  come  the  granites.  The  overlying 
Devonian  rocks  are,  of  course,  more  recent  than  either. 

From  the  character  of  the  material  forming  the  great  bulk  of 
the  slates,  we  can  surmise  that  the  rocks  were  formed  on  a  deep 
sea-bottom.  The  margins  of  any  sea-bed  would  naturally  be  made 
up  of  coarser  material.  Rocks,  corresponding  to  these  deposits, 
are  abundantly  represented.  The  lines  of  limestone  had  an  origin 
not  unlike  the  coral  reefs  of  our  own  day.  The  proximity  of  lime- 
stone to  conglomerates  points  to  the  presence  of  a  shallow  sea  or 
sea-beach.  The  old  silurian  ocean  had  its  lines  of  coast,  and 
there  must  have  been  a  continent  at  no  great  distance  off,  the 
wearing  down  of  which  supplied  the  material  to  form  the  rocks 
we  are  discussing.  In  what  direction  did  this  continent  lie  1 
What  was  the  nature  of  its  rocks  1  Has  it  disappeared  to  its  very 
foundations  1  These  are  questions,  full  of  interest  as  they  are  to 
the  geologist,  to  which  no  satisfactory  replies  can  be  given. 

The  onlv  formations  resting  on  the  granites  and  slates  are  the 
drifts-  These  are  all  of  tertiary  and  post-tertiary  age.  Between 
these  two  widely  separated  formations  there  exists  an  immense 
interval,  regarding  which  the  rocks  of  Bathurst  contribute  nothing 
to  our  knowledge.  It  is  difficult  to  think  that  no  other  rocks, 
Devonian,  Carboniferous,  or  Jurassic,   ever   existed  above   where 


BY   THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN.  197 

Bathurst  now  stands.  Evidence  is  accumulating  to  show  that  the 
Devonian  rocks,  found  both  to  the  east  and  west  of  Bathurst,  once 
formed  a  great  anticlinal  fold  over  the  granite.  This,  probably, 
formed  an  island  in  Carboniferous  and  Jurassic  seas.  But  all 
direct  proof  is  missing  and  practically  nothing  is  known  of  the 
physical  surroundings  of  this  district  from  Devonian  to  Jurassic 
rimes.  The  most  tenable  opinion  is  that  we  had  dry  land  here- 
abouts when  the  Carboniferous  formations  to  the  north  and  west 
were  being  deposited.  This  means  that  rivers  from  Bathurst 
mountains  flowed  into  Carboniferous  and  probably  Mesozoic 
seas,  and  that  our  hills  were  old  when  many  parts  of  Europe 
and  Asia  were  still  under  water. 

The  drifts  referred  to  are  all  alluvial,  marine  deposits  being 
quite  unknown.  Every  drift  about  Bathurst  owes  its  origin  to 
the  present  river.  The  oldest  deposit  is  some  540  feet  above  the 
present  bed,  so  that  the  amount  of  eroded  matter  is  very  consider- 
able. By  joining  the  basalt  hills  marked  F,  A,  H,  K,  on  the 
accompanying  map  (PI.  xvni.),  the  bed  of  the  old  pliocene  river  may 
be  approximately  traced.  These  basalt  hills  were,  there  is  no 
doubt,  once  continuous,  and  the  gaps  now  present  are  the  result  of 
subaerial  denudation.  The  history  of  the  changes,  since  the  days 
when  the  Macquarie  flowed  through  this  channel  nearly  600 
feet  above  its  present  level,  is  shortly  this.  The  river  was  the 
main  drainage  line  of  the  country,  therefore,  the  lowest  depression 
within  the  water-shed.  Active  volcanoes  were  pouring  out  floods 
of  lava  about  Swatchfield  and  Orange.  One  of  these  streams  of 
liquid  rock  flowed  down  and  filled  up  the  valley  of  the  Macquarie. 
The  river  waters  were  thus  displaced  and  forced  to  erode  for  them- 
selves a  new  channel.  The  granite  proved  more  yielding  than  the 
compact  basalt,  so  that  while  the  basalt  remains  the  granite  has 
been  subjected  to  every  agent  of  denudation.  In  effecting  this  we 
can  with  much  reason  suppose  the  river  to  have  been  a  far  greater 
stream  that  it  is  now.  Volcanic  eruptions  are  always  attended 
with  atmospheric  disturbance  and  heavy  rains ;  moreover,  the 
rainfall  was  undoubtedly  greater.     Then   the  rock   was,   in  all 


198   ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST,  N.S.VV,, 

probability,  suffering  from   la  maladie  du  granite  so  noticeable 
now.* 

A  glance  at  section  i,  PI.  xvi.  will  show  some  of  the  various  posi- 
tions of  the  river  from  its  oldest  bed  to  its  present  course.  The 
remnants  of  old  channels  on  the  slopes  between  the  river  and  the 
Bald  Hills  vary  in  age.  The  oldest  drift  we  know  to  be  Pliocene. 
The  newest  is  now  forming,  and  the  most  we  can  do  is  to  point 
out  that  the  drifts  cover  intervals  from  the  Pliocene  to  this  day. 

ix.  Igneous  Rocks. 

Granite — In  the  field. — There  is  no  lack  of  outcrops  of  granite, 
even  within  the  limits  of  the  sketch  map  appended.  Wherever 
the  granites  show  on  the  surface  they  are  decomposed.  This  is  so 
constant  a  character  that  it  may  be  taken  for  granted  that  the 
whole  surface  of  the  granite  is  undergoing  rapid  decomposition,  as 
stated  in  a  former  part  of  this  paper.  In  sinking  wells,  ten  and 
twenty  feet  of  decomposed  rock  are  frequently  met  with.  All 
along  the  river  valley  wherever  the  rock  crops  out  it  is  invariably 
decomposed.  Indeed,  Bathurst  affords  a  good  instance  of  the 
sickening  of  granite  referred  to  by  Dolomieu.  Even  when  the 
minerals  of  the  rock  hold  firmly  together,  their  slices,  cut  from 
surface  specimens,  show  cloudy  felspars  and  incipient  kaolin ization. 
For  microscopical  purposes  the  best  locality  to  procure  chips  for 
micro-slices  is  at  the  waterworks,  where  a  deep  shaft  has  been 
put  down,  and  among  the  broken  boulders  on  the  northern  slopes 
of  Mt.  Pleasant. 

Granite  is  exposed  up  the  river  to  O'Connell's  Plains,  and  along 
the  railway  line  to  Locksley.  Between  Locksley  and  Brewongle 
some  interesting  junctions  may  be  noted,  one  in  particular  at  a 
bridge  crossing  the  line  between  the  two  stations.     Following  the 

*  The  disintegration  of  granite  is  a  striking  feature  of  large  districts  in 
Auvergne,  especially  in  the  neighbourhood  of  Clermont.  This  decay  was 
called  by  Dolomieu  "la  maladie  du  granite."  The  phenomenon  may,  without 
doubt,  be  ascribed  to  the  continual  disengagement  of  carbonic  acid  gas  from 
numerous  fissures.    Lyell's  Principles  of  Geology,  11th  edition,  Vol.  I.  p.  409. 


BY    THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CUREAN.  199 

line  west,  good  junctions  of  the  Silurian  rock  and  granite  can  be 
seen  a  little  to  the  Bathurst  side  of  Newbridge  Station.  Decom- 
posed granite  is  exposed  in  a  cutting  on  the  river  bank  at  the  foot 
of  George  Street,  near  the  railway  gates,  Kelso,  near  the  rifle 
butts,  at  Rankin's  Bridge,  in  the  railway  cuttings  between  Bathurst 
and  Brewongle,  and  in  almost  any  of  the  creeks  on  the  slopes  of 
the  Bald  Hills.  Following  the  river  down,  junctions  of  slate  and 
granite  rocks  will  be  found  in  the  neighbourhood  of  the  "  Forge," 
some  sixteen  miles  from  Bathurst.  The  change  from  the  granite 
to  the  slate  country  is  very  marked  in  this  vicinity.  The  granite 
rocks  are  worn  into  smooth  boulders,  reminding  one  of  the  roches 
moutonnees  produced  by  ice  action,  while  the  slate  shows  jutting 
points  and  pinnacles  that  conform  more  or  less  to  the  strike  of 
the  slate.  Boulders  of  a  hard,  undecom posed  granite  are  to  be 
found  on  the  railway  line  beyond  Wimbledon.  Porphyritic 
granite  is  common,  but  limited  in  quantity,  in  each  locality. 
There  are  some  good  specimens  near  the  river  crossing  on  the 
road  to  White  Rock. 

A  rather  noticeable  feature  in  the  Bathurst  granite  is  the 
inclusions  that  are  by  no  means  rare.  These  vary  from  a  few  inches 
to  many  yards  in  length.  The  prevailing  tint  of  the  granite  is 
a  light  bluish-grey.  The  inclusions  are  always  dark  coloured. 
When  examined  minutely  they  are  found  to  consist  of  the  same 
material  as  the  body  of  the  granite  in  a  finer  state  of  division. 
These  inclusions  contain  a  considerable  amount  of  titanic  or 
magnetic  iron.  When  the  rock  is  powdered  a  magnet  will 
separate  it  readily.  If  the  Bathurst  granite  is  of  metamorphic 
origin,  then  the  inclusions  may  represent  fragments  of  the 
original  parent  rock  that  have  withstood  metamorphism.  On  the 
other  hand,  they  might  represent  fragments  of  slate  caught  up 
by  the  molten  granite.  After  studying  a  great  many  of  these 
inclusions,  I  find  it  hard  to  believe  that  they  are  the  result  of  any 
chemical  or  selective  influences  in  the  cooling  mass.  I  rather 
incline  to  the  view  that  they  are  mechanical.  Some  of  the 
inclusions  consist  entirely  of  black  mica,  felspar  and  quartz. 
There  is  no  sharp  line  separating  the  one  from  the  other. 


200   ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST,  N.S.W., 

In  weathering,  the  granite  gives  rise  to  a  rather  poor  and  barren 
soil.  Fortunately,  soils  resulting  from  either  granites  or  sand- 
stones are  seldom  found  alone.  Everywhere  there  is  spread  about 
a  certain  amount  of  alluvium  from  the  old  river  beds.  And  over 
large  tracts  traces  of  a  rich  soil,  resulting  from  the  decomposition 
of  basalts,  can  be  detected. 

Origin  of  the  Granite. — There  is  a  growing  belief  in  the  meta- 
morphic  origin  of  many  granites.  The  Bathurst  granite,  being 
limited  in  extent  and  easily  accessible  to  its  boundaries,  presented 
special  facilities  to  study  its  origin.  It  is  now  a  common  position 
for  geologists  to  hold  that,  although  in  many  and  perhaps  most 
instances,  granite  is  an  intrusive  rock  of  plutonic  origin,  yet 
granites  do  occur  which  are  the  result  of  extreme  metamorphism. 
Examples  are  eagerly  sought  for  to  show  that  granite  can  be  pro- 
duced by  the  metamorphism  of  sedimentary  materials  in  situ. 

At  the  very  outset  I  may  state  that  although  I  am  tolerably 
familiar  with  the  line  of  junction  between  the  slates  and  granites, 
I  have  never  met  with  one  instance  of  a  gradual  change  by  which 
granite  could  be  said  to  melt  away  on  all  sides  into  the  surrounding 
strata,  or  in  which  an  undoubted  granite  shades  off,  by  gradations, 
into  a  rock  of  clastic  origin.  In  studying  the  origin  of  the  granite, 
the  boundaries  and  junction  lines  will  naturally  afford  interesting 
material.  Are  these  boundaries  marked  by  a  hard  and  fast  line  1 
Does  the  granite  mass  behave  like  an  eruptive  rock  1  Does  it 
alter  the  rocks  it  touches  ?  Does  it  thrust  dykes  and  veins  into 
the  rocks  around,  or  do  the  many  square  miles  of  granite  melt 
away,  by  insensible  gradations,  into  slates  and  phyllites  ? 

Wherever  I  have  observed  contacts,  the  line  of  junction  has 
been  hard  and  fast.  The  granite  does  thrust  out  veins  into  the 
slates  near  it,  and,  without  doubt,  it  alters  clay  slates  to  hornfels. 
The  granite  is,  therefore,  in  a  sense  intrusive,  but  this  does  not 
exclude  the  view  that  it  may  have  been,  for  all  that,  derived  from 
pre-existing  sediments.  I  will  now  describe  a  few  instances  that 
will  maintain  my  position  as  to  the  intrusive  nature  of  the  granite, 
and  then  consider  the  probabilities  of  its  being  derived  from  pre- 
existing seclimentaries. 


BY   THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN.  201 

A  junction  of  granites  and  Silurian  rock  can  be  well  seen  near 
the  bridge  over  the  Winburndale  Creek,  on  the  Bathurst-Peel 
Road,  a  few  hundred  yards  up  stream.  Two  rocks  are  noticeable, 
one  of  flesh-coloured  granite,  which  is  very  marked  in  its  contrast 
with  the  other,  a  massive,  compact,  bluish  rock — a  hornfels  or 
altere  1  slate.  The  granite  is  mainly  binary  with  striugs  and  nests 
of  translucent  quartz.  There  are  occasional  flakes  of  black  mica, 
and  layers  of  white  mica  are  sometimes  developed  along  the  joints. 
The  flesh-coloured  porphyritic  granite  sends  veins  of  varying 
thickness  into  the  hornfels.  One  vein,  not  above  an  inch  in 
thickness,  is  shot  in  a  right  line  into  the  altered  slate  for  fully  20 
yards  ;  see  PI.  xv.  tig.  5. 

In  the  same  locality  I  noticed  a  granitic  vein  springing  from  the 
main  mass  of  granite  and  entering  the  hornfels  as  a  dyke  about  a 
foot  thick.  A  short  distance  away  it  is  narrowed  down  to  five 
inches,  at  the  same  time  bending  round  to  form  a  right  angle  with 
the  first  direction  and  then  continuing  in  a  right  line  in  its  new 
course.  Smaller  veins  connect  the  two  arms  at  the  angle.  A 
diagram  of  this  interesting  intrusion  will  be  found  on  PI.  xv.  fig.  6. 

A  little  further  along  the  same  road,  in  the  direction  of  Bathurst, 
a  tributary  of  the  Winburndale  is  crossed.  It  is  dry  at  most 
seasons  of  the  year.  By  following  up  this  creek,  a  variety  of 
rocks  will  be  met  with,  indicating  that  the  junction  of  the  slate 
and  granite  is  not  far  off.  Near  the  culvert,  in  fact  under  it, 
splendid  samples  of  "  spotted  slate  "  can  be  found  with  a  general 
strike  to  the  north-west. 

I  will  narrate,  in  the  order  they  are  met  with,  some  of  the 
varieties  of  rocks  that  may  be  studied  here,  following  the  creek  up 
from  the  road. 

1.  Some  three  hundred  yards  from  the  culvert  there  is  a  vein  of 
felspathic  rock,  containing  blebs  of  translucent  quartz,  silvery 
mica,  and  quartz  veins.  This  is  some  three  feet  in  thickness,  and 
contains  inclusions  of  a  schistose  hornfels. 

2.  Slate,  dipping  north-east  at  a  high  angle. 


202       ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST,  N.S.W., 

3.  A  granitic  dyke,  with  inclusions  of  a  schistose  hornfels.  The 
general  direction  conforms  to  that  of  the  slate.  It  consists  of 
felspar,  quartz  and  white  mica.  Besides  the  mica  distributed 
through  the  rock,  there  occur  nests  of  the  same  mineral,  oftentimes 
with  the  mica  contorted  and  broken. 

4.  Spotted  slate,  with  occasional  thin  veins  of  quartz. 

5.  A  dyke  of  granite,  with  large  felspars  and  white  mica.  There 
are  layers  of  white  mica  on  every  joint. 

6.  Slate. 

7.  Coarse  granite,  with  parallel  jointings. 

8.  Spotted  slate. 

9.  Granite  vein,  some  six  yards  wide,  in  places  almost  as  fine- 
grained as  a  felsite.  The  rock  is  rendered  porphyritic  in  places 
by  nests  of  silvery  mica  and  felspar.  There  are  also  thin  veins  of 
quartz. 

10.  A  thick  belt  of  spotted  slate,  nearly  two  hundred  yards 
wide,  with  occasional  thin  veins  of  quartz. 

11.  A  vein  of  granite,  with  black  mica. 

So  far,  although  we  are  approaching  the  main  granitic  mass, 
neither  black  mica  nor  hornblende  has  yet  been  developed. 

12.  Boulders  of  porphyritic  granite,  with  dark  fine-grained 
inclusions. 

13.  Beyond  these  last  named  rocks  there  are  few  exposures  of 
the  bed  rock,  but  some  hundred  yards  further  on  the  typical 
Bathurst  granite  is  met  with,  containing  both  hornblende  and 
black  mica. 

The  succession  here  detailed  points  out  that  the  actual  junction 
between  the  older  and  newer  rocks  is  a  wavy  line  with  sharp  and 
deep  bends.  In  one  place  the  granite  runs  into  the  slate  in  dykes 
and  veins,  while  between  these  there  are  left  jutting  points  and 
arms  of  the  old  rock  standing  between  walls  of  granite.  Junctions 
of  a  similar  nature  are  described  by  Mr.  A.  W.  Howitt  in  his  able 
paper  on  the  Diorites  and  Granites  of  Swift's  Creek.* 

*  Transactions  of  the  Royal  Society  of  Victoria,  Vol.  xvi.  pp.  11-87. 


BY   THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN.  203 

Near  Newbridge,  the  junction  of  the  igneous  and  sedimentary- 
rocks  presents  the  same  features.  In  a  cutting  on  the  Bathurst 
side  of  the  railway  station  bars  of  igneous  and  slate  rocks  can  be 
studied  in  actual  contact.  The  boundary-line  between  the  two  is 
still  sharp,  and  no  evidence  can  be  found  of  a  slate  merging  into 
a  granite.  On  the  contrary,  examples  can  be  found  where  the 
intrusion  of  the  granite  in  a  liquid  or  pasty  condition,  but 
evidently  under  great  pressure,  has  bent  and  crushed,  and  pushed 
on  one  side,  the  easily  yielding  slates.  In  cases  where  the  granite 
does  alter  the  rock  with  which  it  is  in  contact,  the  alteration 
consists  in  the  development  of  a  rock  not  in  any  way  resembling 
a  granite.  Where  the  alteration  is  most  complete,  a  hornfels  is 
the  result,  and  where  incipient  alteration  is  noticeable,  a  close 
examination  reveals  merely  a  rearrangement  of  old  minerals  and 
the  introduction  of  only  one  new  one.  Between  Locksley  and 
Brewongle,  on  the  railway  line,  a  good  example  is  exposed  of 
the  alteration  produced  by  the  intrusion  of  granite.  Near  a  high 
level  bridge,  between  these  two  stations,  a  mass  of  granite  will  be 
found  lying  partly  to  one  side  and  partly  under  a  micaceous  and 
schistose  rock.  The  granite  sends  veins  into  the  overlying 
beds.  This  upper  rock,  as  stated,  is  of  a  schistose  character,  and 
it  will  be  noticed  that  the  planes  of  schistosity  are  parallel  to  the 
mass  of  the  intrusive  rock.  In  this  instance  the  schistose  planes 
are  horizontal,  which  gives  the  rock  a  bedded  appearance.  But  in 
other  parts  of  the  district,  notably  on  the  Hockley  Road,  south  of 
Peel,  where  a  foliated  or  schistose  structure  is  developed,  the 
foliation  planes  are  vertical.  This  inclines  one  to  the  view  that 
an  envelope  of  foliated  rock  once  surrounded  the  granite  mass,  so 
that  when  a  portion  of  the  original  sediments  remain  above  the 
granite  the  schistose  structure  will  be  horizontal,  but  when  they 
are  seen  forming  a  vertical  boundary  to  the  intruded  granite  the 
planes  of  schistosity  will  be  vertical.  In  connection  with  this 
peculiar  structural  development,  it  may  be  mentioned  that  a 
schistose  structure  can  be  induced  in  wax  and  mixtures  of  oxide  of 
iron  and  pipeclay  by  pressure,*  and  that,  in  these  instances,  the 

*  See  Tyndall's  "  Fragments  of  Science,"  Vol.  I.  p.  366. 


204      ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST,  N.S.W., 

planes  of  the  laniinse  are  found  to  arrange  themselves  in  rudely- 
parallel  planes  perpendicular  to  the  lines  of  pressure.  Whatever 
may  be  the  explanation,  we  have  here  at  Bathurst  a  foliated  or 
schistose  structure  developed  in  sedimentary  rocks  when  in  contact 
with  an  intrusive  granite.  When  a  fragment  of  these  ancient 
sediments  is  found  above,  and  resting  on,  the  granite,  the  foliated 
structure  lies  horizontally,  and  when  found  adjoining  the  granite 
mass,  the  folia  stand  vertically.  A  diagram  showing  the  intrusive 
veins  at  Locksley  will  be  found  on  PI.  xv.  fig.  1.  The  sketches 
were  made  some  eight  years  ago,  when  the  face  of  the  cutting  was 
fresh.  I  examined  the  same  section  a  few  months  ago,  and 
although  the  rocks  have  disintegrated  a  little  and  vegetation  is 
beginning  to  take  hold  there,  the  intrusive  veins  can  be  easily 
studied. 

With  the  evidence  of  these  sections  before  us,  we  are  now  in  a 
position  to  enquire  into  the  origin  of  the  granite.  Everything 
that  we  know  points  to  the  one  conclusion,  that  the  Bathurst 
granite  is  intrusive.  The  granite  alters  rocks  with  which  it  comes 
in  contact.  It  sends  tongues,  veins  and  dykes  into  the  adjoining 
rocks.  Nowhere  can  we  trace  a  gradual  change  from  a  sediment 
to  a  rock  granitic  in  structure.  The  proximity  of  granite  has 
converted  phyllites  into  hornfels.  It  has  caused  a  rearrangement 
of  old  minerals  in  the  sedimentary  strata,  and  caused  the 
development  of  one  new  mineral  in  abundance,  namely,  mica. 
But  this  is  all.  Nothing  approaching  a  granite  can  be  found 
resulting  from  any  metamorphic  process,  and  in  no  one  section 
have  I  ever  discovered  anything  like  a  change  from  a  clastic  to  a 
holo-crystalline  rock,  granitic  in  composition. 

When  I  first  examined  the  rocks  around  Bathurst  the  prevailing 
impression  left  on  my  mind  was  that  the  granite  melted  away  by 
insensible  gradations  into  the  surrounding  rocks.  A  more  minute 
examination  rendered  this  position  untenable;  but  it  will  be 
interesting  if  we  can  yet  discover  a  granite  truly  metamorphic  in 
origin.  There  can  be  no  difficulty,  as  far  as  chemical  composition 
of  some  slates  goes,  in  believing  that  the  constituents  of  a  slate 


BY   THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN.  205 

rock  may  be  rearranged  so  as  to  give  rise  to  a  rock  that  may  not 
be  distinguished  from  granite.  The  evidence  advanced  in  support 
of  the  metamorphic  origin  of  many  granites  broke  down  when  the 
rocks  were  subjected  to  the  test  of  microscopical  examination. 
But  there  are  still  cases  where  all  the  refinements  of  modern 
geology  have  been  employed  without  shaking  the  conclusion  that 
some  granites,  at  least,  and  certainly  some  crystalline  schists,  can 
be  produced  by  the  metamorphism  of  rocks  in  situ* 

There  is  little  doubt,  then,  but  that  the  granite  was  intruded 
into  Silurian  rocks  after  their  folding  and  elevation.  Possibly  the 
granitic  intrusion  formed  an  anticlinal,  and  lifted  the  sediments 
yet  higher.  Silurian  rocks  once  occupied  the  place  now  taken  by 
the  granite.  Were  the  former  rocks  simply  lifted  or  thrust  aside, 
or  were  they  absorbed  by  the  molten  or  plastic  granite  %  Lifted,  I 
should  say.  There  is  little  proof  to  show  in  support  of  this  view, 
but  it  is  an  impression  left  after  a  study  of  the  whole  district.  I 
have  no  doubt  at  all  but  that  portions  of  the  Silurian  rocks  were 
absorbed  by  the  granite  in  its  intrusion.  When  we  examine  the 
outer  edges  of  the  granite,  we  find  that  for  a  short  distance  from  the 
contact  it  differs  from  the  typical  rock.  There  is,  for  instance,  an 
absence  of  hornblende,  the  mica  is  in  nests,  and  the  minerals, 
generally,  are  not  arranged  as  in  a  normal  granite.  Quartz, 
instead  of  filling  up  the  spaces  left  by  the  other  constituents,  is 
found  in  grains  and  blebs  through  a  much  larger  body  of  felspar. 
All  this  might  be  accounted  for  by  the  more  rapid  cooling  of  the 
margins  of  any  intrusive  rock.  But  I  consider  it  as  the  result  of 
the  absorption  of  a  certain  amount  of  the  pre-existing  phyllites. 

In  this  connection  I  would  like  to  draw  attention  to  some  views 
on  the  origin  of  crystalline  rocks  as  set  forth  in  the  volume  of  the 
International  Geological  Congress  for  1888.f 

In  a  paper  on  the  "  Archaean  Geology  of  the  Region  N.W.  of 
Lake  Superior,"  Dr.  A.  C.  Lawson  points  out  that  the  archaean 

*  See  Green's  "  Physical  Geography,"  Chapter  ix.,  second  edition. 
+  Congres  G^ologique  International  4me  Session  — Londres,  1888.    Etudes 
sur  les  Schistes  Cristallins. 


206       ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OP  BATHURST,  N.S.W., 

rocks  of  that  region  can  be  resolved  into  two  great  divisions.  The 
lower  composed  of  rocks  which  but  for  their  foliation  are  regarded 
as  of  plutonic  igneous  origin.  Resting  on  these  is  a  mass  of 
stratiform  rocks,  partly  detrital,  partly  volcanic.  These  latter,  or 
upper  series,  were  certainly  not  laid  down  on  the  lower.  The  old 
floor  on  which  they  were  deposited  has  disappeared  ;  and  again, 
Dr.  Lawson  points  out  that  the  lower  series  could  not  have  been 
the  crust  from  which  the  detritus  for  forming  the  upper  rocks  was 
derived. 

"  There  is  but  one  way  of  reconciling  these  statements.  It  is  a 
simple  conception,  and  one  well  in  accordance  with  established 
geological  truth,  that  certain  portions  of  the  earth's  crust  upon  which 
strata  are  accumulating  may  sink  gradually.  Now,  that  portion 
of  it  upon  which  the  upper  archean  was  accumulating,  to  a  thick- 
ness of  several  miles,  may  be  conceived  to  have  been  depressed, 
either  by  reason  of  the  superincumbent  weight  or  from  other 
causes,  till  it  came  within  a  zone  of  a  sort  of  fusion  compatible 
with  the  conditions  of  such  depths.  This  fusion  gives  us  the 
magma  which  is  implied  in  the  conception  of  the  laurentian  gneisses, 
granites,  and  syenites,  being  of  plutonic  igneous  origin."* 

Vancouver  Island  furnishes  another  example  that  may  throw 
some  light  on  the  origin  of  the  Bathurst  granite.  Dr.  Gr.  M. 
Dawson  has  described  the  relations  of  granites  to  triassic  beds  in 
Vancouver  and  the  adjacent  coasts.  Triassic  beds  are  frequently 
found  in  contact  with,  or  resting  upon,  granite  rocks.  They  were 
not,  however,  deposited  on  a  granitic  floor,  as  the  granites  are 
evidently  of  a  later  date.  "  The  circumstances  attending  the  line 
of  junction  of  the  granites  with  the  rocks  of  the  Vancouver 
(triassic)  series  have  been  carefully  examined  at  a  great  number 
of  points.  The  granites  near  this  line  are  usually  charged  with 
innumerable  darker  fragments  of  the  Vancouver  series,  which, 
when  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of  the  parent  rock,  are  angular 
and  clearly  marked,  but  at  a  greater  distance  become  rounded  and 
blurred  in  outline,  and  might  then  be  mistaken  for  concretionary 

*  Congres  Geologique  International,  Londres,  1889  ;  pp.  75,  76. 


BY    THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN.  207 

masses  in  the  granite,  into  the  substance  of  which  they  have  been 
in  process  of  being  absorbed.  The  width  of  the  belt  characterized 
by  these  fragments  is  very  variable,  and  where  the  plane  of  the 
present  surface  cuts  that  of  the  junction  of  the  two  classes  of  rocks 
at  an  acute  angle — as  is  often  the  case — it  is  considerable, 
frequently  exceeding  half  a  mile.  .  .  .  The  only  explanation 
which  appears  to  satisfactorily  account  for  the  appearances  met 
with,  is,  that  we  have  at  the  surface  a  plane  which  was  at  one 
time  so  deeply  buried  in  the  earth's  crust  that  the  rocks  beneath  it 
had  become  subject  to  granitic  fusion  or  alteration."* 

The  bearing  of  these  extracts  on  the  geology  of  Bathurst  is 
obvious.  Here  we  have  Silurian  rocks  resting  on  a  granite.  There 
must  have  been  a  solid  floor  on  which  they  were  deposited.  The 
granite  on  which  they  rest  was  certainly  not  the  pre-existing  base- 
ment. And  it  is  extremely  improbable  that  granitic  rocks  formed 
the  crust  from  which  the  sediments  were  derived.  Thus  far  the 
conditions  are  very  similar;  and  it  is  hard  to  resist  the  conclusion 
that  when  the  original  floor  of  the  Silurian  was  being  absorbed  in 
the  granitic  magma,  some  of  the  Silurian  rocks  suffered  a  like  fate. 

The  Devonian  and  Carboniferous  formations  are  now  estimated,  by 
Mr.  C.  S.  Wilkinson,!  to  measure  20,000  feet  in  thickness.  "With 
two  miles  of  strata  resting  on  our  Silurian  rocks,  we  can  see  the 
possibility  of  the  lowest  series  being  brought  within  a  zone  of 
fusion,  which  would  furnish  the  required  magma,  and  make  the 
Bathurst  granite,  in  a  sense,  at  once  metamorphic  and  intrusive. 

We  have  abundant  proof,  as  shown  above,  that  the  granite  is 
intrusive  in  character.  It  is  quite  another  question  to  decide 
whether  the  material  that  forms  the  granite  was  drawn  from  a 
deep-seated  source,  or  whether  it  is  the  result  of  the  profound 
metamorphism  of  a  previously  existing  sediment. 

*  Annual  Report  of  the  Geological  Survey  of  Canada,  1887  ;  Report  B., 
pp.  11-13. 

t  See  "  Notes  on  the  Geology  of  New  South  Wales,"  by  C.  S.  Wilkinson, 
F.G.S.,  contained  in  "Mineral  Products  of  New  South  Wales;"  Sydney, 
the  Government  Printer,  1887. 
14 


208   ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OP  BATHURST,  N.S.W., 

I  am  not  in  possession  at  the  present  time  of  sufficient  material 
to  deal  with  this  question,  but,  as  a  first  step  towards  a  solution 
of  the  problem,  I  may  state  that  there  is  abundant  reason  for 
believing  that  the  granite  exposed  about  Bathurst  is  but  a  small 
portion  of  a  very  large  mass  that  underlies  the  palaeozoic  rocks  on 
all  sides.  In  keeping  with  this  view,  we  find  that  the  granite  is 
exposed  for  a  much  greater  distance  up  and  down  the  river  than 
across  the  valley.  The  lowest  rock  for  miles  around  is  probably 
granite,  and  the  Bathurst  rock  shows  merely  where  the  overlying 
beds  have  been  denuded. 

Microscopic  Examination  of  the  Granite. — I  have  made  some 
twenty-five  slices  of  the  granite  for  microscopic  examination. 
Nearly  all  the  minerals  of  the  rock  can  be  seen  macroscopically, 
particularly  in  polished  specimens.  Certainly  there  are  fine-grained 
varieties,  but  the  average  Bathurst  granite  is  coarse-grained. 
Crystals  of  black  hornblende  are  not  unusual  of  9  mm.  in  length. 
Glistening  faces  of  felspars,  16mm.  long,  are  frequently  found. 
In  polished  specimens  the  silica  and  felspars  appear  in  about  equal 
quantity,  or  perhaps  with  felspars  slightly  in  excess.  The  minerals 
proved  to  be  present  by  a  microscopic  examination  are  : — 

Essential  Minerals.  Accessory  Minerals. 

Quartz.  Muscovite. 

Felspar.  Apatite. 

Hornblende.  Sphene. 

Biotite.  Garnet. 

Magnetite.  Calcite. 

Quartz. — Under  the  microscope,  in  plain  parallel  light,  the 
quartz  is  easily  distinguished  from  all  other  minerals  by  its  water- 
clear  appearance,  the  absence  of  inclusions,  and  its  fresh,  unaltered 
aspect.  It  is  found  tilling  up  the  spaces  left  by  the  other  consti- 
tuents. Under  higher  powers,  inclusions  will  be  noticed,  but  not 
in  such  quantity  as  to  lessen  the  contrast  between  the  clear  quartz 
and  the  cloudy  felspars.  The  hair-like  lines  that  cut  through  the 
quartz  in  every  direction  fall  under  the  heading  of  trichitcs, 
described  by  various  observers.     These  trichitea  can  be  noticed 


I5Y     THE    REV.  J.   MILNE    CUUKAN.  209 

striking  in  every  direction  through  the  clear  quartz.  A  power  of 
one  hundred  diameters  shows  them  in  great  abundance.  They 
branch,  Bometiraes  meet  at  a  point,  fifteen  or  twenty  diverge  Prow 
one  point,  and  sometimes  opaque  blebs  are  found  at  various 
points  along  their  length,  <>r,  more  often,  at  the  end.  I  can  offer 
no  explanation  as  to  their  real  nature.  Cavities  are  abundant  in 
the  quartz.  They  can  be  detected  in  every  slice.  I  have  noticed 
one  spontaneously  moving  bubble.  Besides  the  trichites  and 
bubbles,  tubes  oan  be  seen  in  the  silica  with  a  power  of  fifty 
diameters,  They  are  evidently  tracks  left  in  the  plastic;  mass  by 
moving  bubbles  of  gas. 

Examined  in  polarized  light,  with  crossed  Nicols,  the  quart/ 
displays  the  usual  gorgeous  bioad  sheets  and  bands  of  colour,  one 
colour  imperceptibly  shading  into  another.  In  very  thin  slices 
it  appears  a  dull  blue-grey.  The  great  abundance  of  cavities  in 
the  silica  of  all  the  slices  is  explained  by  (he  fact  that  the  quartz 
was  the  last  mineral  to  crystallize.  When  rocks  that  have  cooled 
from  an  igneous  magma  are  studied,  it  is  often  noted,  as  we  should 
expect,  that  the  most  fusible  mineral  was  the  last  to  crystallize. 
But  it  is  found  that  this  does  not  apply  to  granitic  rocks.  Every 
student,  knows  that  quart/,  is  commonly  called  infusible,  while  the 
felspars  are  considered  fusible  in  various  degrees.  In  the  con- 
solidation of  granite  from  an  igneous  fluid  or  paste,  felspar  was 
the  first  to  crystallize;,  while  tin?  more  infusible  quartz  filled  up 
the  interspaces  and  was  the  last  to  solidify.  Our  granite  is  no 
exception  to  the  rule,  for  the  silica  occurs  in  an  amorphous  stale, 
enclosing  tin;  other  minerals  as  in  all  true  granites.  This  is 
explained  by  supposing  that  the  original  plasticity  was  induced  in 

some  other  way  than   by    what-  we  understand  as  Avy  igneous 

fusion.      The    fluid    inclusions   prove    the    presence  of   water    and 

various  salts.     Tin;  quartz,  being  the  last  to  harden,  took  in  any 

fluid  residue  and,  from  its  enduring  nature,  retained  it.      A  notable 

feature  of  the  quartzes,  under  the  microscope,  is  the  presence  of 
microscopi<-  dust,  which  seems  to  have  accumulated  on  the  out  ide 
surfaces  of  the  quartz  granules. 


-10      ON"  T1IK  QSOLOGV  AND  PKTROG&APH?  OK  15ATHURST,  N.S.W., 

The  proportion  in  which  the  minerals  occur,  as  revealed  by  the 
microscope,  may  be  expressed  as  follows,  felspar  being  the  com- 
monest : — 1.  Orthoclase  ;  -.  Silica  ;  3,  Triclinic  felspars  ;  4.  Bio- 
tite  ;  o.   Hornblende  ;  6,    Magnetite  ;   7.   White  mica. 

-pars. — With   crossed  Nicols,  the   felspars   can   be  readily 

divided  into  orthoclase  and  into  felspars  with  distinct  triclinic 
striatums.  The  orthoclase  occurs  in  sub-crystalline  patches,  and, 
in  most  slides,  is  the  more  plentiful  of  the  two.  In  its  general 
appearance  the  orthoclase  is  always  cloudy,  even  in  the  thinnest 
sections.  The  cloudiness  and  opacity  of  the  orthoclase  is  a  constant 
character  in  all  the  slices  1  have  cut.  I  attribute  this  peculiar 
dimness  to  pores  and  fractures  that  no  doubt  hasten  incipient 
kaolinir.ation.  This  structure  has,  no  doubt,  a  great  deal  to  do 
with  the  "  sickening  of  the  rock"  before  referred  to.  Indeed, 
anyone  accustomed  to  micro-petrographieal  work,  would,  on 
account  of  these  characters,  at  once  decide  that  the  rock  was  not 
of  an  enduring  character. 

lime  Felspars. — The  banded  appearance,  so  characteristic  of 
the  triclinic  felspars,  is  at  once  noticeable  under  crossed  Nicols  in 
every  slice.  The  amount  of  plagioclase  relative  to  the  orthoclase 
varies  much.  The  plagioclase  is  often  in  excess,  and  sometimes 
the  two  felspars  seem  equal  in  quantity.  I  sent  a  few  slices  of 
this  rock  to  Mr.  A.  W.  Howitt.  our  leading  Australian  petrologist, 
and  he  decided,  from  the  structure  of  the  crystals  and  from  their 
obscuration  angles,  that  the  felspar  was  oligoelase.  Sections  are 
not  uncommon  with  the  tine  bands  of  colour  crossing  at  an  angle  of 
90°.  This  felspar  contains  inclusions  of  other  minerals  that  had 
ervstallized  before  itself.  Maguetite  is  a  common  inclusion,  as 
well  as  corroded  crystals  and  plates  of  hornblende. 

Ilornblend''. — Every  slice  will  show  hornblende  more  or  less 
plentifully  under  the  microscope.  The  crystals  are  generally  much 
corroded,  showing  that  they  were  formed  long  before  the  felspars. 
A  few  examples  show  the  exact  prismatic  hornbleude.  Most  of 
the  sections,  however,  are  in  zones  other  than  the  prismatic,  and 
show  only  one  set  of  cleavage  Hues.     In  thin  sections  it  appears 


BY    THE    REV.  J.   MILNE    CUBRAH.  211 

of  a  deep  brown  colour,  and  sometimes  of  a  rich  sap  green.     Nearly 

every  slice  has  a  favourable  section  on  which  the  angle,  formed  by 
an  axis  of  elasticity  and  a  crystallographic  axis,  can  be  measured. 
Sometimes  it  is  not  easy  to  distinguish  between  hornblende  and 
biotite  in  slices  of  the  Bathurst  granite.  For  the  information  of 
students  who  may  make  use  of  these  notes,  I  may  just  indicate  the 
difference.  The  micas,  including  of  course  biotite,  show  no  sensible 
dichroism  in  sections  parallel  to  the  base.  In  sections  across  the 
cleavage  the  biotites  will  show  very  strong  dichroism  on  rotating 
the  lower  Nicol  prism.  Hornblende  is  also  dichroic,  but  a  few 
sections  can  usually  be  found  on  the  slice  parallel,  or  nearly 
parallel,  to  the  base ;  these  will  show  two  sets  of  cleavage. 
Sections  of  hornblende,  parallel  to  the  vertical  axis,  show  but  one 
set  of  cleavage  lines,  and  in  this  resemble  mica.  But  the  cleavage 
planes  of  the  hornblende  are  generally  coarse,  or  seldom  so  close 
as  those  in  mica.  Mica,  too,  has  usually  a  more  ragged  look  than 
hornblende,  and  the  ends  of  the  lamina?  have  a  frayed-out  appear- 
ance. Finally,  unless  the  section  be  cut  exactly  parallel  to  the 
orthopinacoid,  hornblende  does  not  extinguish  when  the  cleavage 
lines  are  parallel  to  a  diagonal  of  the  Nicols.  Between 
crossed  Nicol  prisms  all  sections  of  biotite  will  be  black  when  the 
cleavage  corresponds  with  the  plane  of  vibration  of  either  Nicol,  since 
the  cleavage  corresponds  with  an  axis  of  elasticity.  With  horn- 
blende this  is  not  the  case,  and,  in  the  larger  number  of  its  sections, 
the  point  of  maximum  darkness  will  be  obtained  when  the  cleavage 
makes  a  certain,  though  not  great,  angle  with  the  plane  of  the  light. 

Biotite. — Biotite  is  common  in  all  the  slices.  It  appears  as 
irregular  plates,  with  parallel  striae,  corresponding  to  the  cleavage 
on  sections,  parallel  to  the  vertical  axis.  The  absorption  exhibited 
by  rotating  the  polarizing  prism  under  the  section  is  very  marke  J. 
Sometimes  flakes  show  of  a  light  brown  colour,  without  any 
cleavage  lines,  exhibiting  no  dichroism.  These  I  take  to  be 
biotites  cut  parallel  to  the  basal  planes  or  cleavage.  They 
resemble,  in  every  respect,  flakes  or  plates  cleaved  from  biotites 
and  mounted  separately  for  comparison. 


212   ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST,  N.S.W., 

Muscovite. — Muscovite  is,  comparatively  speaking,  rare.  Mr. 
A.  W.  Howitt  first  pointed  out  its  presence  to  me.  It  is  common 
enough  in  the  aplite  and  kindred  rocks  on  the  borders  of  the 
granite  country.  But  in  the  main  body  of  the  granite  it  has  been, 
up  to  the  present,  detected  only  under  the  microscope. 

Magnetite  is  readily  recognised  in  every  slice  by  its  remaining 
opaque  in  the  thinnest  sections,  and  by  its  peculiar  lustre  in 
reflected  light.  Sphene  is  another  rare  constituent.  It  appears 
in  clear  brownish-red  granules.  Sometimes  wedge-shaped  crystals 
can  be  seen  with  dark  or  almost  opaque  edges. 

I  have  selected  four  fairly  typical  slides  from  my  rock  slices, 
and  I  will  give  a  short  description  of  their  microscopic  characters. 

1.  (Slice  48).  The  general  appearance  of  this  slice  under  the 
miscroscope  is  that  of  a  holo-crystalline  rock.  Some  of  the  micas 
and  hornblende  show  ci'ystalline  faces,  but  the  quartz  and  felspars 
are,  for  the  most  part,  allotriomorphic.  With  crossed  Nicols,  a 
considerable  quantity  of  plagioclase  becomes  visible,  but  it  is 
altogether  subordinate  in  amount  to  the  orthoclase.  The  quartz 
occurs  in  broad  plates,  filling  up  the  interspaces  between  the  other 
minerals,  and  showing  in  polarized  light  the  customary  brilliant 
colours.  Glass  cavities  and  fluid  cavities  are  very  abundant  in  the 
quartz.  Fluid  cavities,  with  bubbles  of  gas,  can  be  readily  found 
with  a  magnifying  power  of  about  seventy -five  diameters.  By 
using  i  immersion  lens,  cavities  containing  spontaneously  moving 
bubbles  can  be  detected.  The  Bathurst  granite  affords  abundant 
material  for  studying  this  wonderful  phenomenon.  The  slide  I 
am  describing  contains  many  good  examples  of  spontaneously 
moving  bubbles.  Some  of  these  bubbles  move  round  the  cavities 
slowly,  reminding  one  of  the  movements  of  a  rotifer  in  search  of 
food.  Others  are  stationary  until  the  slice  is  slightly  heated,  when 
the  bubbles  are  seized  with  a  sort  of  trembling  motion  and  suddenly 
start  off  travelling  round  the  cavity.  I  have  noticed  many  in 
which  the  movements  are  so  rapid  that  it  is  difficult  for  the  eye  to 
follow  them  in  their  course.  In  this  slice  brown  dichroic  mica  is 
abundant.     It  becomes   almost  dark   in    some   positions   as   the 


BY   THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN.  213 

polarizer  is  rotated.  There  are  also  a  few  crystals  of  hornblende, 
which  is  also  strongly  dichroic  ;  but,  as  has  been  already  explained 
in  a  former  portion  of  this  paper,  there  is  little  danger  of  con- 
founding the  two  minerals.  The  orthoclase  felspar  is  cloudy, 
appearing  of  a  snowy  white  by  reflected  light.  The  hornblendes 
contain  some  bright  green  patches  of  decomposition  matter. 

2.  (Slice  38).  This  slide  contains  a  hornblende  crystal  4*6  mm. 
along  its  vertical  axis.  The  largest  patch  of  quartz  is  2  mm.  by 
1*8  mm.  Triclinic  felspars  are  present  showing  a  beautiful 
banded  structure  under  crossed  Nicols.  The  quartz  is  clear  and 
limpid,  containing  few  inclusions  other  than  the  fluid  cavities. 
The  hornblende  and  biotite  are  the  only  minerals  showing 
traces  of  boundary  planes. 

3.  (Slice  34).  The  minerals  present  are  quartz,  biotite,  felspar, 
orthoclase,  and  triclinic  felspar.  Fluid  cavities  are  very  plentiful 
in  the  quartz,  numbers  coming  into  the  focus  of  the  glass  as  the 
different  planes  are  reached  by  the  fine  adjustment.  The  felspars 
are  in  places  almost  impellucid.  A  few  crystals  of  magnetite  are 
included  in  a  flake  of  biotite. 

4.  (Slice  37).  Under  the  microscope  some  finely  striated,  clear 
brown  mica  is  seen.  Even  in  the  thinnest  section  it  is  strongly 
dichroic.  When  the  cleavage  lines  are  parallel  to  the  plane  of 
vibration  of  the  light,  the  sections  are  black  or  very  dark  brown. 
A  few  crystals  of  apatite  are  enclosed  in  the  quartz  and  biotite. 
A  reddish-brown  wedge-shaped  sphene  will  be  noticed  on  the 
margin  of  the  slice.  The  biotite  alters  to  a  leek-green  material 
that  often  preserves  the  dichroic  character,  but  the  cleavage  lines 
are  lost.  The  felspars  as  is  usual  are  impure  and  cloudy,  and  the 
quartz  beautifully  pellucid.  The  hair-like  microlites,  to  which 
reference  has  been  already  made,  are  abundant.  Triclinic  felspar 
is  present,  but  not  so  plentiful  as  orthoclase. 

Chemical  comjyosition  of  the  Granite. 

Specific  gravity  at  18-5°  C 2-85-2-93 

1  am  indebted  to  Mr.  Mingaye,  F.C.S.,  of  the  Geological  Survey 
Laboratory,    for  the   following   analysis    of    the   granite.       The 


214      ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST,  N.S.W., 

specimen  submitted  for  analysis  was  fairly  typical  of  the  general 
character  of  the  rock  :  — 

Hornblende-biotite-granite. 

Silica  66-69 

Alumina  17*03 

Ferric  oxide 3- 15 

Ferrous  ditto  *69 

Manganous  ditto trace 

Lime  (Ca  O) 1'82 

Magnesia  (Mg  O) 2-50 

Potash  (K2  O)  6-26 

Soda  (Na2  0) 1-21 

Phosphoric  acid trace 

Sulphuric  anhydride  trace 

Titanic  acid trace 

Moisture  -48 


99-83 
Comparing  the  above  with  well-known  granites,  it  will  be  seen 
that   the   Bathurst  rock  contains  about   10   per   cent,  less  silica 
than  the  normal  type  of  West  of   England   granite,  while  it   is 
richer  than  the  average  granite  in  alumina  and  potash. 

Basalt. 

The  basalts  have  been  defined  as  dark-coloured  lavas  of  basic 
composition  and  high  specific  gravity,  representing  the  extrusive 
or  volcanic  type  of  the  gabbros  and  dolerites.  Dr.  Geikie  limits 
the  term  basalt  to  the  contemporaneous  lavas  of  basic  composition.* 
They  consist  of  a  compact  or  finely  granular  ground-mass,  through 
which  crystals  of  plagioclase,  augite  and  olivine  are  scattered. 
Again,  some  authors  use  the  terms  dolerite,  anamesite  and  basaltf 
for  rocks  which,  chemically  identical  and  all  holo-crystalline,  differ 

*  British  Petrography,  by  J.  J.  Harris  Teall,  M.A.  ;  London,  1888,  p.  193. 
t  Professor  J.  G.  Bonney — Anniversary  Address  to  the  Geological  Society, 
London  ;  Quarterly  Journal  Geological  Society,  Vol.  xli.  p.  70. 


BY    THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN.  215 

in  the  coarseness  and  fineness  of  their  grains,  so  that  the  last  term 
is  applied  to  a  rock  which  either  may  be  holo-crystalline  or  may 
retain  a  glassy  base.  It  would  be  convenient,  then,  to  restrict 
the  term  dolerite  to  the  holo-crystalline  variety,  using  the  epithet 
coarse-grained  or  fine-grained  as  the  case  may  be  ;  to  apply  the 
name  anamesite  to  the  hemi-crystalline  varieties  ;  and  to  include 
in  the  term  basalt  all  that  retain  a  glassy  base. 

The  Bathurst  rock  I  shall  refer  to  under  the  name  of  basalt 
simply.  It  is  not  as  fine-grained  as  the  typical  anamesite,  nor  as 
coarse-grained  as  a  dolerite,  and  the  amount  of  glass  in  the  base 
is  variable.  I  would  describe  the  Bathurst  basalt  as  a  blue-black, 
compact,  apparently  homogeneous  rock,  that  breaks  with  a 
splintery  ana  conchoidal  fracture,  and  in  which  the  component 
minerals  can  be  studied  only  with  the  microscope,  unless  occa- 
sionally scattered  porphyritically  through  the  mass.  It  occurs  as 
a  contemporaneous  flow  and  consists  essentially  of  triclinic  felspar, 
augite,  olivine  and  magnetite,  with  small  portions  of  an  unindi- 
vidualised  glassy  base.*  Zirkel,  in  studying  the  basalts  of  the 
fortieth  parallel  of  North  America,  separated  the  felspar-bearing 
basaltic  rocks  into  four  distinct  groups. f  The  Bathurst  rocks 
would  naturally  fall  into  the  group  which  he  describes  as 
"possessing  a  microscopically  very  fine-grained,  totally  crystalline 
aggregation  of  crippled  microlites,  largely  felspar  and  augite, 
which  serve  as  a  ground-mass,  in  which  micro-porphyritical  and 
macro-porphyritical  larger  crystals  of  felspar  and  olivine,  with 
occasional  augites  are  distinctly  and  sharply  embedded."  Add 
magnetite  and  occasional  patches  of  a  glassy  base,  and  the  above 
description  answers  fairly  well  for  the  Bathurst  rock.  Of  course, 
in  speaking  of  basalts  generally,  we  would  call  our  rock  a  felspar 

*  The  fact  of  its  being  a  contemporaneous  flow  does  not  affect  the  classi- 
fication. I  agree  with  the  English  geologists  who  refuse  to  accept  the 
geological  age  of  a  rock  as  a  character  on  which  its  nomenclature  ought  to 
be  based.  See  Judd,  "On  the  Tertiary  Gabbros,"  &c,  of  Scotland, 
Q.J.G.S.,  Vol.  xlii.  p.  60. 

f  Zirkel,  Microscopical  Petrography  of  the  Fortieth  Parallel ;  United 
States  Geological  Exploration,  p.  253. 


216       ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST.  N.S.W., 

basalt,  which  would  distinguish  it  at  once  from  the  leucite  basalts 
that  are  known  to  occur  at  Harden,  Byrock,  and  Cobar.  Com- 
pared with  the  basalts  immediately  around,  those  of  Orange  and 
Carcoar  for  instance,  the  Bathurst  rock  is  distinctive  enough. 
This  is  most  easily  detected  in  preparing  thin  slices  for  the  micro- 
scope. Long  before  the  slice  is  sufficiently  thin,  the  Orange  basalt 
is  seen,  by  transmitted  light,  to  consist  of  a  felted  mass  of  plagio- 
clase,  with  augites  and  olivines  for  the  most  part  wedged  between. 
The  Bathurst  slice  on  the  contrary  will  show  micro-porphyritic 
minerals  in  a  holo-crystalline  base  with  an  abundance  of  magnetite 
and  drop-like  grains  of  augite.  Basalts  of  this  type  are  not 
uncommon  in  Europe  and  America.  The  resemblance  extends 
even  to  such  minute  details  as  the  serpen tinization  of  the  olivines, 
and  the  sharp  well-marked  features  of  the  iron  oxides.  Zirkel's 
remark,  relative  to  the  American  basalt,  applies  well  to  this 
Australian  example.  "  It  is  worth  while,"  he  says,  "  to  pause  and 
remark  that  in  these  widely  remote  quarters  of  the  globe  the 
product  of  the  solidification  of  a  molten  mass,  although  exposed 
to  many  casualties,  has  nevertheless  maintained  a  surprisingly 
close  identity  of  microscopical  composition."* 

Basalt  in  the  Field. — A  glance  at  the  map  accompanying  this 
paper  will  show  the  exteut  of  the  basalt.  It  marks  the  course  of 
an  old  river  valley.  At  the  outside  it  is  not  more  than  150  to  200 
feet  in  thickness  where  it  lies  deepest.  It  can  be  studied  well  at 
the  quarries  on  the  Bald  Hills,  where  stone  is  obtained  for  road 
purposes.  Perth  railway  station  is  very  convenient  to  the  hill 
marked  F.  Here  the  basalt  forms  one  of  those  table-topped  hills 
which,  in  the  western  district,  are  invariably  recognised,  even  from 
a  distance,  as  ba  sal  tic.  The  road  from  Perth  to  Evans'  Plains 
crosses  a  saddle  in  the  hills.  On  this  road  sections  of  decomposed 
granite  are  exposed,  where  the  weathering  of  the  rock  can  be 
noted.  About  half  way  up  the  hill  water-worn  pebbles  will  be 
found,  increasing  as  we  ascend.  These  have  weathered  out  from 
the  drift  that  lies  between  the  granite  and  basalt.     As  soon  as  no 

*  Zirkel,  I.e.  p.  233. 


BY    THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN.  217 

more  water-worn  pebbles  can  be  found,  it  may  be  taken  for  granted 
that  the  highest  point  of  the  drift  and  the  lowest  point  of  the 
basalt  have  been  reached.  The  weathered  surfaces  of  the  rock  on 
the  hill  tops  show  no  evidence  of  the  prismatic  structure  under- 
neath. This  prismatic  structure  may  be  seen  in  the  quarries 
referred  to.  They  are  situated  on  the  line  A — B.  The  columns 
are  utilised  in  their  natural  state  for  kerb  stones.  They  break  in 
some  directions  with  a  conchoidal  fracture,  while  in  other  directions 
the  stone  can  be  broken  in  parallel  flakes.  From  Perth  the  basalt 
may  be  followed  without  a  break  to  the  point  marked  L.  Here 
there  is  an  isolated  hill  with  a  basaltic  cap,  known  as  the  Pinnacle. 
The  table-topped  hill  overlooking  Evans'  Plains  is  the  next  remnant 
of  the  once  continuous  sheet.  Then  there  is  a  long  break  to  Mt. 
Pleasant,  near  Mr.  Stewart's  residence.  Perth  and  Mt.  Pleasant 
are  the  extreme  points  of  the  basaltic  flow  around  Bathurst.  Of 
course  these  points  were  not  the  original  limits  of  the  basalt 
plateaux.  Allusion  has  been  already  made  to  the  source  of  this 
basalt.  Mr.  Wilkinson  pointed  out  that  the  stream  came  down 
from  the  neighbourhood  of  Swatch  field.  Possibly  a  microscopic 
examination  of  the  Swatchfielcl  basalts  could  throw  light  on 
this  question.  It  is  certain,  however,  that  no  volcanic  "  neck  "  or 
traces  of  a  crater  exist  within  a  radius  of  ten  miles  of  Bathurst. 

Very  little  has  been  done  to  expose  the  drifts  under  the  basalt, 
so  that  some  idea  may  be  gathered  as  to  the  nature  of  the  old 
valley.  Along  some  points,  where  the  basalt  has  been  entirely 
worn  away,  there  is  an  abundance  of  silicified  wood  strewn  about 
the  surface.  This,  no  doubt,  has  been  derived  from  the  drift,  and 
shows  that  the  river  valley  flowed  through  a  forest-clad  region. 
At  the  present  time  the  ridge  of  basalt  forming  the  Bald  Hills 
stands  from  400  to  600  feet  above  the  surrounding  country.  In 
the  pre-volcanic  days  it  was  of  course  the  lowest  point.  We  have 
here,  then,  a  splendid  example  of  the  effects  of  subaerial  denuda- 
tion. The  old  mountains  and  valley  have  both  disappeared,  and 
the  untiring  hand  of  Nature  has  spread  out  the  material  of  which 
they  were  composed  over  the  great  tertiary  plains  of  the  interior. 
In  this  connection  I  must  draw  attention  to  a  fact  oftentimes 


218   ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST,  N.S.W., 

overlooked  when  dealing  with  our  geology.  We  are,  for  the  most 
part,  accustomed  to  consider  the  material  removed  by  denudation 
as  eventually  carried  to  the  sea.  None  of  the  material  removed 
by  denudation  from  around  Bathurst  in  Tertiary  times  ever  reached 
any  sea.  It  was  disposed  of  in  the  same  way  as  is  the  vast  amount 
of  material  brought  down  each  year  by  the  Macquarie.  None  of 
this  material  ever  gets  to  the  sea,  but  is  deposited  over  the  plains 
between  Dubbo  and  the  Darling.  "  The  precipitous  and  rugged 
country  about  the  Upper  Macquarie,  the  chains  of  basalt  capped 
hills  in  the  Bathurst  district,  and  all  the  surfaces  which  form  the 
valley  of  the  river  down  to  Wellington,  have  been  carved  into 
their  present  shapes  by  the  subaerial  influences  of  air,  frost,  rain, 
and  rivers.  Near  Dubbo  we  might  draw  the  line  which  would 
show  the  limit  of  deposition,  denudation  and  deposition  being 
synchronous  and  co-equal.  The  basaltic  hills  referred  to  have 
their  representatives  at  Dubbo,  but  with  their  summits  barely  on 
a  level  with  the  surrounding  country."*  Professor  A.  Geikie 
describes  geological  features  very  similar  to  our  own  in  a  paper  on 
the  "Tertiary  Volcanic  Rocks  of  the  British  Islands."  Referring 
to  the  ridge  of  Eigg,  he  says  : — "  In  Eigg  a  fragment  of  the  river 
valley  has  been  preserved  solely  because  it  has  been  sealed  up 
under  streams  of  vitreous  lava  which  could  better  withstand  the 
progress  of  waste.  Thus  the  Scur  of  Eigg,  like  the  fragments  of 
the  older  basalt-plateaux  of  Auvergne,  remains  as  a  monument 
not  only  of  volcanic  eruptions,  but  of  a  former  land  surface,  now 
effaced,  and  of  the  irresistible  march  of  those  slow  and  seemingly 
feeble  agencies  by  which  the  denudation  of  a  country  is  effected." 
It  is  very  probable  that  a  columnar  structure  is  developed  along 
the  line  of  hills,  but  unfortunately  there  are  no  natural  exposures 
of  this  interesting  phenomenon.  A  large  opening  has  been  made 
nearly  on  the  line  of  section  A  B,  PI.  xvi.  Here  the  columns  of 
basalt  show  well.  Many  are  curved  in  a  peculiar  manner,  but  for 
the  most  part  the  columns  are  straight.  Between  the  joints  they 
vary  in  length  from  two  to  seven  feet.      The  cup  and  socket 

*  J.  Milne  Curran,  "  Notes  on  Geology  of  Dubbo."     P.  L.  Soc.  N.S.W. 
Vol.  X.  p.  170. 


BY    THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN. 


219 


structure  so  characteristic  of  the  jointings  in  basalt  is  nowhere  to 
be  seen.  The  joints  are  planes,  sometimes  normal  to  the  sides  of 
the  columns  and  sometimes  forming  small  angles  with  them.  As 
regards  thickness,  there  is  no  uniformity  in  the  columns.  The 
average  size  might  be  taken  as  eighteen  inches  across.  The 
weathering  of  these  columns  is  rather  noticeable.  As  the  basalt 
decomposes  it  peels  off  in  layers,  and  the  centres  of  these  films  are 
fairly  fresh.     Plate  xvn.  shows  this  peculiar  weathering. 

The  columns  are,  for  the  most  part,  tetragons,  pentagons,  and 
hexagons.  With  regard  to  the  relative  frequency  of  the  various 
kinds,  the  following  may  be  taken  as  a  fair  estimate — tetragons 
4  per  cent.,  pentagons  20  per  cent.,  hexagons  65  per  cent. 

I  made  some  measurements  of  the  angles  of  the  basaltic  columns 
with  these  results : — 

Tetragons  (sum  =  360°)  : 

(i.)  a  93°  (ii.)  a  — 

b  110  b  — 

c  88  c  — 

d  68  cl  — 


(i.)a 
b 
c 
d 
e 


359° 
Pentagons  (sum  =  540°)  : 

-112°  (ii.)  a 

-121  b 

-  81  c 

-115  d 

■  95  e 


■113c 

■  81 

■  83 
.  82 


359c 

-133c 
■118 
-100 

-  98c 
■  89 


524c 


(iii.)  a 
b 


-114c 
130 
■  80 
•105 
.  96 


538c 


525c 


220   ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST,  N.S.W., 

Hexagons  (sum  =  720°) : 

(i.)  a 117°  (ii.)  a 113° 

b 132  b 133 

c 118  c 111 

d  120  d 111 

e 123  e 123 

f  107  f 124 


717°  715° 

In  hand  specimens,  the  Bathurst  basalt  bears  a  strong  resem- 
blance to  the  Rowley  Regis  basalt  of  Staffordshire.  It  is  not 
unlike,  in  its  texture,  a  basalt  in  my  own  collection  from  Madeira. 
It  differs,  however,  from  the  basalt  flows  of  the  same  age  about 
Orange  and  Dubbo.  It  is  commonly  known  as  "  blue  metal," 
and  I  think  that  the  Bathurst  rocks  have  a  decidedly  bluer 
shade  than  the  generality  of  western  basalts.  This  peculiar 
blue-black  is  noticeable  only  on  fractured  surfaces,  polished' 
surfaces  being  very  dark  or  almost  black. 

Microscopic  Structure  of  the  Basalt. — I  have  cut  thirty  slices  of 
this  basalt,  collected  at  various  points  between  Perth  and  Mt. 
Pleasant.  Five  slices  were  cut  from  rocks  from  the  high  hill 
overlooking  Perth.  Ten  slices  were  made  from  the  columnar 
basalt  in  the  quarries  already  referred  to,  and  were  taken  from  an 
average  depth  of  fifteen  feet  from  the  surface.  A  few  slices  were 
collected  from  the  hill  known  as  the  Pinnacle,  and  the  remaining 
number  from  Mt.  Pleasant.  Under  the  microscope  there  is  no 
essential  difference  between  any  of  the  slides.  In  fact  there  is 
not  even  a  structural  difference  between  the  slices  from  the  most 
widely  separated  localities. 

In  grinding  down  the  sections,  the  first  mineral  to  show  is 
olivine.  While  the  section  is  still  comparatively  thick,  the  micro- 
porphyritic  crystals  of  olivine  are  seen  as  clear  spots  in  the,  as  yet, 
opaque  slice.  The  next  mineral,  recognisable  is  invariably  the 
augite,  and  as  the  section  thins  down  the  plexus  or  network  of  the 
tiny  felspars  becomes  visible.     As  the  section  grows  thinner,  the 


BY    THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN.  221 

base  resolves  itself  into  tiny  globules  of  olivine,  augite  and  felspar. 
In  this  ground-mass  augite  is  much  more  abundant  than  would  be 
supposed  at  first  sight.  In  every  slice  black  grains  of  magnetite 
are  plentiful,  and  remain  opaque  in  the  thinnest  sections.  It  is 
usually  well  preserved  and  shows  no  signs  of  decomposition.  It 
was  the  first  mineral  to  separate  from  the  glassy  magma,  and  is 
the  only  primary  constituent  ever  enclosed  in  the  olivines. 
Broadly  speaking,  the  structure  is  decidedly  micro-porphyritic. 

A  "  streaming  of  the  felspars  "  is  a  very  characteristic  structure 
at  once  recognised  under  the  microscope.  It  is  hardly  pronounced 
enough,  however,  to  be  termed  a  fluxion  structure.  The  lath- 
shaped  plagioclases  are  often  seen  sweeping  round  the  larger 
olivines  aud  augites,  pointing,  without  doubt,  to  movements  in  the 
molten  magma.     This  structure  is  shown  on  PI.  xiv.  figs.  4  and  5. 

The  abundance  of  black  magnetite  which  remains  opaque  even 
in  the  thinnest  slices  is  the  next  feature  to  attract  attention. 
From  Professor  Judd's  researches,  I  could  conclude  from  this 
feature  alone  that  the  rock  cooled  at  or  near  the  surface.  As 
Professor  Judcl  remarks,*  in  most  deeply-seated  rocks  the  iron 
oxides  enter  into  complete  combination  with  the  silicates,  and  in 
other  cases  there  is  a  progressive  increase  in  the  quantity  of 
magnetite  which  is  separated  according  to  the  proximity  to  the 
surface  at  which  consolidation  has  taken  place. 

Magnetite  was  one  of  the  first  minerals  to  separate  from  the 
magma.  It  is  the  only  mineral  ever  included  in  the  olivine,  but 
its  enclosure  in  this  mineral  is  a  very  common  occurrence.  The 
large  olivine  crystal  on  PI.  xiv.  fig.  4,  shows  a  cube  of  magnetite. 
The  felspars,  too,  it  will  be  noticed,  seem  for  the  most  part  per- 
fectly fresh  and  unaltered.  These  plagioclases  exhibit  parallel 
twin-striation  in  polarized  light,  a  feature  common  to  rocks  of 
this  sort  throughout  the  globe. 

The  olivines  are  abundant  in  every  slice,  showing,  as  is  usual, 
that  peculiar  ground  glass   surface  which   helps  to   identify  it. 

*  Q.J.G.S.,  Vol.  xlii.,  p.  88. 


222       OX  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  P.ATIIURST,  N.S.W., 

Olivine  is  of  course  no  longer  regarded  an  essential  constituent 
of  basalt,  but  it  occurs  in  such  remarkably  tine  crystals  in  these 
rocks  that  their  presence  distinguish  it  at  once  from  all  Aus- 
tralian basalts  with  which  T  am  acquainted.  By  taking  a  micro- 
photograph  and  cutting  out  the  portions  representing  the  olivines, 
the  percentage  of  olivine  can  be  calculated.  With  the  porphyritic 
crystals  this  is  easily  done,  but  in  estimating  the  granular  olivines 
of  the  base  a  large  margin  for  error  must  be  allowed.  The  applica- 
tion of  this  method  is  common  with  penologists,  and  was  originally 
devised  by  Dr.  Sorby.*  I  have  cut  several  micro-photographs  in 
this  way  with  fairly  even  results  for  the  average  structure  of  the 

rock. 

Porphyritic  olivine    ...  ...  ...      13  percent. 

,,  augite       ...  ...        9  per  cent. 

This  comparatively  large  percentage  of  olivine  would  bring  the 
rock  under  Rosenbusch's  class  of  olivine-basalt.f 

Besides  the  large  crystals  of  olivine  there  is  the  granular 
olivine  which  with  augite  and  felspar  form  the  base.  Under  a 
magnifying  power  of  100  diameters  a  micro-photograph  can  be  got 
of  this  granular  base,  from  which  the  parts  representing  olivine 
can  be  cut.  My  experiences  gave  me  23  to  29  as  the  per- 
centage of  this  mineral  in  the  base. 

A  glance  at  the  micro-photographs  appended  will  show  the 
presence  of  porphyritic  augites.  But  there  is  also  a  very  large 
amount  of  augites  in  the  micro-granular  ground-mass.  The 
quantity  of  augite  is  easily  shown  by  treating  the  slice  (after  first 
getting  a  micro-photograph)  with  warm  hydrochloric  acid.  After 
four  hours'  digestion,  the  magnetite,  serpentinous  matters  and 
olivine  dissolve,  and  the  felspars  and  augite  only  remain ; 
olivine  and  magnetite  being  soluble  in  HC1.,  while  the  augite 
and  plagioclase  are  scarcely  affected. 

*  J.  J.  H.  Teall,  "  Penological  Notes  on  some  North  of  England  Dykes." 
Q.J.G.S.,Vol.  xl.,  p.  21G. 

t  H.  Rosenbusch,  Micro-Physiographie  der  Massigen  Gesteine,  Zweite 
Auflage,  p.  733. 


BY    THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN.  223 

Another  reaction  that  renders  the  olivine  of  the  ground-mass 
distinct  enough  from  the  augite  is  effected  by  treating  the  slice 
with  warm  HCL,  until  on  gently  drying  the  olivines  gelatinize 
slightly,  when  they  can  be  stained  by  fuchsin.  The  olivines  will 
then  stand  out  in  marked  contrast  to  the  augites. 

In  many  of  the  slides  patches  of  an  isotropic  glass  can  easily  be 
detected,  particularly  with  the  help  of  the  quartz  plate.  The  glass 
often  seems  of  a  light  wine-red  colour  by  transmitted  light.  I  notice 
that  prolonged  treatment  with  acid  has  no  appreciable  effect  on 
this  substance.  The  glass  is,  therefore,  not  of  a  tachylytic  nature, 
but  more  acid  in  character. 

From  what  has  already  been  said  it  will  be  gathered  that  there 
are  two  generations  of  olivine,  augite  and  felspars  in  tbe  Bathurst 
basalts.  This  is  quite  in  keeping  with  the  observations  that  have 
been  made  on  similar  rocks  in  the  Old  World.  In  the  peridotites 
it  is  common  to  find  olivine  in  the  ground-mass  and  the  same 
mineral  as  porphyritic  crystals.  In  many  dolerites  labradorite  and 
augite  form  the  principal  ingredients  of  a  ground-mass  in  which 
the  same  minerals  occur  porphyritically*  I  have  met  with  no 
explanation  altogether  satisfactory  of  this  common  condition  of 
igneous  rocks.  In  the  paper  just  referred  to  Dr.  Bonney  remarks 
that  although  an  explanation  of  these  anomalies  does  not  seem 
hopeful,  we  may  bear  in  mind  that  the  temperature  of  consolida- 
tion for  a  mineral  out  of  a  magma  is  not  necessarily  identical  with 
that  of  the  isolated  mineral,  as  one  substance  acts  as  a  flux  on 
another. 

As  throwing  some  light  upon  this  interesting  question  of  the 
separation  of  minerals  from  a  molten  magma,  the  following  extract 
from  a  paper  by  Professor  Judd  applies  to  our  own  rocks. 

"  In  some  instances  the  mechanically  injured  condition  of  the 
crystals  and  other  appearances  strongly  suggest  their  actual  trans- 
port from  below  in  the  midst  of  the  materials  of  the  surrounding 
ground-mass.  But  in  others  the  porphyritic  crystals  exhibit  zoned 
structures  and  other  characters  not  found,  perhaps,  in  the  deeper- 

*  See  Professor  T.  G.  Bonney,  Q.J.G.S.,  Vol.  xn.,  p.  79. 
15 


224   ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHUKST,  N.S.W., 

seated  rocks  of  the  class  in  the  same  area.  May  we  not  in  these 
cases  explain  the  phenomena  in  the  way  suggested  by  M.  Michel- 
Levy  by  the  consolidation  having  taken  place  at  two  different 
periods?  It  is  not  difficult  to  imagine  conditions  which  would 
bring  about  such  a  result.  If,  for  example,  a  mass  of  igneous 
materials  were  in  a  liquid  state  at  a  great  depth  from  the  surface, 
the  conditions  might  be  favourable  to  the  separation  of  a  felspar 
of  a  given  composition  from  the  magma.  The  continued  abstrac- 
tion of  certain  elements  from  the  base  would  alter  the  composition 
of  the  surrounding  magma,  and  this  would  modify  slightly  the 
conditions  causing  the  successively  formed  zones  'of  the  crystal  to 
vary  slightly  in  composition.  But  if  a  fissure  were  formed  above 
such  a  molten  mass,  then  the  pressure  upon  it  would  be  greatly 
and  suddenly  relieved,  even  though  no  actual  movement  occurred 
in  the  deeper-seated  portion.  Under  the  entirely  new  conditions 
thus  originated,  the  magma  surrounding  the  zoned  crystals  already 
formed  might  be  induced  to  crystallise  in  a  totally  different  manner, 
the  order  of  the  separation  of  the  minerals  and  the  forms  and 
relations  of  their  several  crystals  being  determined  by  these  new 
conditions." 

As  some  of  the  minerals  in  the  basalt  present  features  worth 
noticing,  I  may  refer  to  the  characters  they  present  when  seen 
under  the  microscope. 

Olivine. — The  porphyritic  crystals  of  olivine  are  so  abundant 
that,  with  very  few  slides,  sections  may  be  found  in  various  zones 
sufficient  to  study  its  leading  optical  properties.  I  have  noticed 
sections  close  to  basal  planes,  and  sections  approximately  parallel 
to  the  macropinacoid,  so  as  to  show  an  interference  figure  in  con- 
vergent polarized  light.  Sections  roughly  showing  the  form  of  an 
elongated  hexagon  are  plentiful.  The  peculiar  ground  glass 
surfaces,  due  to  its  high  refractive  index,  are  very  pronounced. 
In  fairly  thin  slices  the  mineral  shows  a  very  faint  yellow-brown 
colour.  But  the  most  remarkable  feature  in  the  olivine  is  the 
fact  that  it  is  the  first  mineral  in  the  rock  to  fall  a  victim  to 
alteration.      Every    large    crystal    shows   serpentinous    lines    of 


BY    THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN.  22o 

decomposition.  I  have  not  met  with  an  instance  where  the 
alteration  is  complete.  The  green  serpentinous  matter  follows  the 
cracks  and  cleavage  lines  and  gradually  eats  its  way  across  the 
intervening  spaces.  The  micro-photographs  on  PL  xiv.  figs.  2  and  4 
show  this  change  clearly  enough. 

The  edges  of  the  olivines  are  sharply  defined  and  show  little  or 
no  signs  of  corrosion.  The  form  of  the  crystals  does  not  seem 
affected  in  any  way  by  the  surrounding  minerals,  so  that,  to  use  a 
term  of  Rosenbusch's,  they  are  for  the  most  part  idiomorphic. 
Inclusions  of  magnetite  are  common,  as  well  as  patches  of  a  semi- 
devitrified  glassy  base.  It  is  more  than  probable  that  some  of  the 
large  olivines  were  formed  at  a  depth  and  floated  up  before  the 
pecond  generation  of  olivines  consolidated.  On  PI.  xiv.  fig.  1  will 
be  noticed  a  crystal  of  olivine  that  was  broken  along  a  central 
line  ;  one  half  is  seen  in  the  micro-photograph,  and  the  other  half 
is  found  on  another  part  of  the  slide. 

Augite. — The  augite  in  the  Bathurst  basalt  is  not  penetrated  by 
the  felspars,  so  as  to  give  rise  to  an  ophitic  structure.  But  the 
consolidation  of  the  augites  must  have  been  subsequent  to  that  of 
the  felspars.  The  augite  is  sometimes  to  be  seen  partly  moulded 
around  the  ends  of  the  laths  of  plagioclase.  An  example  is  shown 
on  PL  xiv.  fig.  5.  Here  a  large  zoned  augite  is  seen  partially 
penetrated  by  a  felspar  as  if  the  latter  was  forcibly  carried  against 
the  augite  when  the  pyroxene  was  still  in  a  plastic  condition. 

On  slide  41  an  augite  will  be  found  with  well  defined  edges. 
It  shows  a  figure  in  convergent  polarized  light.  Faint  traces 
of  cleavage  lines  seemingly  parallel  to  the  prism  can  be 
detected,  so  that  it  is  evidently  a  basal  section.  The  same 
slide  shows  some  good  examples  of  zoned  and  twinned 
augites.  On  slide  46  a  fine  example  can  be  found  of  a  porphyritic 
augite  sliced  in  the  clinopinacoidal  plane.  The  crystal  is  partially 
penetrated  by  a  felspar,  and  with  inclined  Nicols  shows  the  well 
known  hour-glass  structure  often  noticed  in  augites. 

Felspar. — Mr.  A.  W.  Howitt  made  some  measurements  of  the 
felspars  in  this  basalt,  and  noted  that,  as  all  the  obscuration  angles 


226       ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST,  N.S.W., 

measure  20°  in  the  zone  OP  coPgo,  the  felspars  were  not  more 
basic  than  andesine.  For  the  present  it  will  be  sufficient  to 
describe  the  felspar,  whether  andesine  or  labradorite,  as  plagio- 
clase.  Twin  crystals  are  very  common  in  every  slice.  Sometimes 
broad  cruciform  twins  are  seen,  one  good  example  of  which  may 
be  noted  on  slide  41. 

Magnetite. — T  have  never  isolated  the  black  crystalline 
bodies  which  I  have  provisionally  named  magnetite.  On  being 
analysed  they  may  prove  to  be  ilmenite  or  titaniferous  magnetite. 
By  drawing  a  magnet  through  detrital  matter,  near  the  basalt, 
large  quantities  of  a  magnetic  iron  can  be  collected.  This  gives  a 
strong  reaction  for  titanium.  I  have  not  been  able  to  decide 
whether  this  may  not  be  derived  from  the  adjoining  granite. 

The  magnetite  in  the  basalt  I  take  to  be  a  primary  constituent. 
It  is  invariably  sound  and  undecomposed.  It  can  be  noticed 
enclosed  in  clear  augites  and  olivines.  I  have  noticed  secondary 
magnetite  in  other  basalts,  but  in  that  case  the  olivine  and  some 
of  the  augite  had  disappeared,  and  the  iron  of  the  ferro-magnesian 
minerals  was  represented  by  the  magnetite.  The  augites  in  our 
rock  are  beautifully  clear,  and  no  olivines  are  wholly  decomposed. 

I  have  selected  three  slices  as  fairly  representing  the  microscopic 
character  of  the  whole  basalt.  I  will  describe  their  general 
structure. 

1.  (Slide  45).  The  micro-porphyritic  structure  of  this  slide  is 
just  visible  to  the  unaided  eye.  Under  the  microscope  large 
olivine  crystals  are  seen,  set  in  a  paste  or  granular  base  of  magne- 
tite, augite  and  felspar  microlites.  The  olivine  crystals  are  beauti- 
fully clear,  magnetite  and  blebs  of  glass  being  the  only  inclusions. 
The  olivines  are  better  preserved  than  it  most  slices,  showing 
very  little  signs  of  serpentinization.  The  streaming  of  the  felspars 
is  very  characteristic.  One  large  olivine  has  evidently  moved  when 
the  paste  was  partially  set,  as  it  is  seen  to  have  pushed  on  either 
side  a  collection  of  felspars.  Besides  the  lath-shaped  felspars, 
broad  rectangular  plagioclases  of  another  species  probably  are 
represented.  The  magnetite  crystals  seem  disposed  to  gather 
around  the  edges  of  the  augites  and  olivines. 


BY    THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN.  227 

2.  (Slide  48).  Large  twins  of  augite  can  be  detected  without 
the  use  of  the  microscope,  their  yellowish-brown  colour  contrasting 
with  the  other  almost  colourless  minerals  of  the  slice.  Under  the 
microscope  the  greater  number  of  the  lath-shaped  felspars  show 
incomplete  terminations.  A  few  small  olivines  are  seen  altered 
completely  to  a  light  green  serpentine.  Many  other  patches  of  a 
like  green  secondary  product,  that  show  no  definite  boundaries, 
originated  in  the  same  way.  All  the  magnetite  seems  a  primary 
constituent.  A  few  large  augites  show  lines  of  uncertain  inclusions 
just  inside  their  boundaries  and  parallel  to  the  outer  edges  of  the 
crystal.  With  inclined  Nicols,  faint  traces  of  zones  can  be 
detected.     There  is  very  little  glassy  matter. 

3.  (Slide  9).  Under  the  microscope,  shows  the  general  structure 
of  the  Bathurst  basalt.  Porphyritic  crystals  of  augite,  olivine  and 
plagioclase,  set  in  a  much  finer  ground  mass  of  the  same  minerals, 
with  cubes  of  magnetite  abundantly  developed.  The  felspars  flow 
round  the  augites,  but  are  not  seen  to  penetrate  them,  so  there  is 
no  arrangement  approaching  to  the  ophitic  structure.  Patches  of  a 
light  red  isotropic  body  are  seen  set  in  the  dark  hemi-crystalline 
base.  It  is  probably  glass.  The  large  compound  augite  has 
some  inclusions  of  the  same  material.  The  augite  contains  well 
marked  cubes  of  magnetite  as  inclusions.  The  olivines  are  seen 
cracked  in  directions  evidently  independent  of  the  cleavage  lines. 
They  are  also  somewhat  corroded  along  their  outer  edges. 

The  microscopic  structure  of  the  basalt  is  so  uniform  along  its 
length  in  the  field  that  the  above  descriptions  may  be  taken  as 
fairly  typical  of  the  whole. 

Chemical  composition  of  the  Basalt. 

Specific  gravity  at  18'5°  C 2-63-2-75 

Silica , 44-67 

Alumina  21*38 

Ferric  oxide 2-82 

Ferrous  ditto 5-99 

Lime  (Ca  0) 10-24 


228   ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST,  N.S.W., 

Magnesia  (Mg  0) 9-58 

Potash  (K3  0) 1-03 

Soda  (Na2  0) 270 

Phosphoric  anhydride -22 

Sulphuric  ditto trace 

Titanic  acid trace 

Moisture  -79 

99-42 

For  this  analysis  I  am  indebted  to  Mr.  J.  Mingaye,  F.C.S., 
Analyst  to  the  Department  of  Mines.  The  chemical  composition 
shows  a  basic  rock  quite  in  keeping  with  its  microscopical 
characters. 

To  facilitate  the  future  study  of  the  rocks  of  Bathurst,  I  now 
append  a  few  remarks  to  point  out  the  means  of  seeing  the  various 
features  of  interest  in  connection  with  the  district.  The  passage 
from  a  granitic  to  a  slate  country,  and  the  characters  that  accom- 
pany the  change,  can  be  observed  in  a  morning's  drive.  By  taking 
the  Peel  Road,  via  Kelso,  tertiary  drifts  are  seen  on  the  right 
from  Kelso  to  the  trigonometrical  station,  at  the  first  turn  to  the 
right.  Granite  country  continues  until  the  descent  is  begun  to  the 
valley  of  the  Winburndale  Creek.  In  this  creek,  and  in  a  small 
tributary  already  referred  to,  contact  rocks  can  be  noted.  When 
the  village  of  Peel  is  reached  the  student  finds  himself  in  the 
midst  of  slate  country.  Take  the  road  that  leads  back  to  Bathurst, 
via  Duramana.  Some  worked  out  alluvial  deposits  can  be  examined 
on  the  creek.  With  a  local  guide  then  follow  the  road  to  Rankin's 
Bridge,  via  Kelly's  farm  and  Duramana.  About  Kelly's  farm 
hornfels  rocks,  semi-granites,  and  the  weathering  of  granitic 
boulders  can  be  studied.  Getting  on  to  the  main  road  to  Rankin's 
Bridge  we  are  again  in  granite  country  ;  outcrops  of  the  rock  are 
plentiful  near  the  bridge.  From  the  road  near  Seage's  farms  good 
views  can  be  had  of  the  sheets  of  the  basalt  away  to  the  south, 
forming  the  Bald  Hills  at  one  extremity  and  Mount  Pleasant  at 
the  other. 


BY    THE    REV.  J.  MILNE    CURRAN.  229 

On  reaching  Peel  another  route  could  have  been  taken.  Beyond 
the  village  a  road  leads  away  to  the  right  through  Silurian 
slate  country.  This'road  joins  the  Bathurst  Limekilns  read,  which 
latter  can  be  followed  home.  At  the  bridge  crossing  the  Win- 
burndale,  good  casts  of  Brachiopods — Spirifer  and  Rhynchonella  — 
can  be  found  in  the  water-worn  pebbles  of  the  creek.  These  have 
been  washed  down  from  the  Devonian  sandstones  that  are  exten- 
sively developed  up  the  valley. 

A  very  good  idea  of  the  slate  and  schist  country  about  Cow 
Flat  can  be  gained  by  driving  south  through  Perth,  and  following 
the  Rockley  Road  to  the  top  of  the  first  range.  Here  contorted 
slate,  clay  slate  and  crystalline  limestone  crop  out.  A  road 
through  Cow  Flat  to  George's  Plains  railway  station  leads  away  to 
the  right.  Along  this  latter  road  splendid  examples  of  meta- 
morphosed rocks,  slate  country  and  quartz  reefs  can  be  seen. 

Basalt  is  best  seen  by  ascending  the  Bald  Hills  at  Perth,  and 
then  following  a  track  that  leads  along  the  hill  tops  to  Bathurst, 
via  the  basalt  quarries  and  Poor  Man's  Hollow.  A  separate  trip 
should  be  taken  to  study  the  drifts  and  basalt  on  the  hill  over 
Evans'  Plains,  and  the  same  rocks  at  Mount  Pleasant. 

The  localities  of  the  contact  rocks  have  been  already  referred  to 
in  sufficient  detail. 

x.  Economic  Geology. 

Gold. — There  is  little  prospect  of  finding  payable  gold  in  quantity 
immediately  round  Bathurst.  It  is  not  probable  that  it  has  been 
derived  from  the  granite.  We  therefore  fall  back  on  the  only 
alternative  that  it  has  been  drifted  from  a  distance.  And  the 
nearest  auriferous  country  whence  it  could  have  been  derived  is 
too  far  away  to  leave  any  hope  of  heavy  deposits. 

Granite. — For  building  purposes  the  granite  will  hardly  ever 
become  a  marketable  commodity.  Even  at  a  depth  the  felspars 
are  kaolinized  and  the  whole  rock  suffers  from  incipient  decom- 
position. True  it  will  take  a  polish,  but  I  have  had  an  opportunity 
recently  of  examining  a  polished  slab  of  Bathurst  granite  that  had 
been  exposed  to  the  weather  for  eleven  years.     Already  the  laminae 


230       ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST,  N.S.W., 

of  biotite  were  fraying  out,  and  the  large  hornblendes  were  honey- 
combed and  had  quite  lost  every  trace  of  polish.  Disintegrated 
granite  is  used  extensively  about  Bathurst  for  walks  and  gardens 
in  the  same  way  as  gravel  is  used  in  other  countries. 

Basalt. — The  basalt  is  used  extensively  for  road  making,  for 
which  it  is  admirably  suited.  It  is  fortunate  that  there  is  so 
large  a  reserve  of  this  useful  rock  in  the  vicinity  of  the  town.  It 
is  sometimes  used  for  building  purposes.  The  basalt  can  be  easily 
dressed  with  a  hammer  into  rectangular  blocks,  and  buildings  in 
which  it  is  used  must  be  of  an  enduring  nature.  Its  very  dark 
colour  is  its  only  fault.  It  is  as  durable  as  any  building  stone 
need  be.  Some  that  has  been  in  use  for  fifteen  years  shows  no 
trace  of  weathering,  being  so  dense  and  compact  that  not  even 
a  lichen  had  taken  hold  on  its  surface. 

Kaolin. — The  deposits  of  kaolin  have  been  frequently  tested  and 
condemned,  chiefly  on  account  of  a  rather  high  percentage  of  iron 
that  they  contain.  When  good  fire-clay  and  kaolins  are  so  easily 
procurable  in  the  colony,  it  is  hardly  likely  that  the  Bathurst 
article  will  prove  of  economic  value. 

Copper. — The  lodes  of  copper  about  Cow  Flat  were  at  one  time 
extensively  worked.  Many  who  are  familiar  with  the  under- 
ground workings  are  of  opinion  that  they  will  yet  prove  a  source  of 
wealth.  The  whole  country  about  Cow  Flat  is  highly  favourable 
for  mineral  deposits.  A  belt  of  highly  mineralized  country  runs 
from  here  along  the  granite  boundaries.  Large  deposits  of  pyrites 
occur  in  highly  metamorphosed  slates.  Very  little  has  been  done 
to  test  their  value. 

To  the  north  of  Bathurst  the  country  about  Pe^l  seems  favour- 
able for  auriferous  reefs.  Odd  samples  of  copper-stained  rocks  are 
occasionally  found  in  the  metamorphic  rocks  round  Duramina. 
These  point  to  the  occurrence  of  copper  lodes  not  yet  discovered. 

Clays. — Excellent  clays  for  brick-making  are  found  all  along 
the  alluvial  flats.  Where  the  alluvial  material  mingles  with  the 
decomposed  basalts  the  bricks  improve  both  in  quality  and  colour. 


BY    THE    REV.   J.   MILNE    CURRAN.  231 

xi.  Other  Points  of  Interest. 

About  eighteen  miles  to  the  north  of  Bathurst  some  very 
interesting  geological  country  is  easily  accessible,  particularly 
about  the  Limekilns  and  the  Ben  Glen  caves,  where  good  collec- 
tions of  Silurian  fossils  can  be  made. 

At  Blayney  a  finely  typical  example  of  the  interesting  rock 
diabase  occurs.  It  will  be  found  in  a  small  quarry  near  the  R.C. 
Church.  To  the  naked  eye  it  might  pass  for  a  diorite,  but  on 
slicing  the  rock  it  is  seen  to  consist  entirely  of  felspar,  magnetite, 
and  a  monoclinic  pyroxene,  augite.  The  augites  are  porphyritic, 
and  many  of  them  beautifully  zoned. 

At  King's  Plains,  near  B^ney,  rich  and  extensive  patches  of 
gold  bearing  drift  are  known  to  occur,  which  have  not  been  worked 
chiefly  on  account  of  the  great  body  of  water  that  has  to  be  con- 
tended with.  Gold  also  occurs  here  in  a  steatitic  slate,  which 
once  contained  large  quantities  of  pyrites.  The  pv  rites  has 
altogether  disappeared,  but  the  rock  is  full  of  cubical  cavities 
pointing  to  its  former  existence. 

I  have  in  my  own  collection  a  monster  twin  pseudomorph  of 
pyrites  found  here,  in  which  the  faces  of  the  cube  measure  two 
and  a  half  inches. 

About  Carcoar  some  highly  interesting  gabbros  are  extensively 
developed.  These  are  holo-crystalline  rocks  of  coarse  texture, 
consisting  of  pyroxene  and  felspar.  In  calling  these  rocks  gabbro 
I  follow  Professor  Jucld's  classification  in  his  paper  on  the  gabbros 
of  Scotland  and  Ireland.* 

At  the  Three  Brothers  Hills,  between  Bathurst  and  Blayney, 
an  interesting  basalt  is  found  with  a  flaggy  structure.  I  have  not 
examined  the  locality,  but  I  have  seen  slabs  of  basalt  brought  in 
from  there  varying  in  thickness  from  two  inches  to  four. 

Steatite  is  found  in  a  slaty  condition  about  Rockley  and 
Locksley. 

*  Q.J.G.S.,  Vol.  xlii.,  p.  61. 


232   ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST,  N.S.W., 

Wood  opal,  that  polishes  well,  can  be  collected  in  some  paddocks 
between  the  cemetery  and  Mount  Pleasant.  Good  fire  opals  are 
known  from  Rocky  Bridge  Creek,  where  they  occur  in  a  decom- 
posed trachytic  lava  flow.  Good  coloured  amethysts  and  rose 
quartz  are  frequently  brought  in  from  the  country  between 
O'Connell  and  Oberon. 

xn.  Conclusion. 

1.  Getting  results  together  we  find  that  about  Bathurst  granitic 
rocks  are  extensively  represented. 

2.  This  granite  area  is  surrounded  by  an  aureole  of  metamorphic 
rocks. 

3.  There  is  no  insensible  gradation  from  a  clastic  to  a  holo- 
crystalline  rock,  from  a  sedimentary  rock  to  a  granite. 

4.  The  granite  is  intrusive  as  regards  the  surrounding  slate 
rocks. 


5.  Tins  is  not  necessarily  opposed  to  the  view  that  part  of 
the  granite  may  have  been  formed  by  a  whole  or  partial  fusion  of 
pre-existing  sediments.  Like  the  granites  of  Vancouver,  the 
Bathurst  granite  is  probably  at  once  intrusive  and,  in  a  sense, 
metamorphic. 

6.  The  silurian  slates  are  the  oldest  rocks  now  represented  in 
the  district — older  than  the  underlying  granites. 

7.  The  granite  comes  next  in  order  of  time. 

8.  The  granite  rocks  underlying  the  slates  are  not  the  floor  on 
which  the  slate  rocks  were  originally  laid  down. 

9.  This  floor  has  entirely  disappeared  through  sinking  within  a 
zone  of  fusion,  or  through  being  absorbed  by  an  ascending  molten 
magma. 

10.  Under  the  microscope  the  granite  is  a  hornblende-biotite- 
granifce  with  a  triclinic  felspar. 


B\     in i:   REV.  J.  mil Nic  OURBAV,  2'.V.\ 

II.  On  a  microscopic  exaDiination  the  "blue  metal"  if  found 
to  be  •«  true  olivine  bftialtftnd  an  "!(l  lava  How  that  filled  up  an 
ancient  river  bed.     'I'll"  point  of  eruption  wan  near  Bwatohfield 

No  dot i Id,  pagee  ••'•ii*l  chapters  of  the  geological  record  are  mi 
but  the  foregoing  is  my  reading  of  the  bUtory  of  Batbur  I   m 

w lit i <•!!  iii  her  rocke. 


EXPLANATION  OP  PLATES, 

Plate  kiv.     Reproduced  frommiorophotographsol  thin  slices  oi  Bathurst 
baialti.    Fig.  I,  xfiO,  hIiowh  the  general  structure  of  the  basalt  at  Pinnae  Ic 
Hill.    To  thr  right  two  olivines  are  seen,  traversed  by  lerpentinoui  Lines  of 
decomposition      The  lower  olivine  represent!  one  ball  of  a  crystal,  tin: 
other  ball  <>f  erhiob  floated  away  to  a  considerable  distance.     The  lath 
shaped  felspars  show  a  tendency  to  stream  round  the  larg<   crystals.     Pig 
2  is  a  basalt  from  Mt.  Pleasant,  enlarged  60  diameters.     A  \n-.\y  eharactei 
istio  olivine  occupies  the  right  of  the  figure.    The  dark  lines  following  the 
cracks  are  bright  green  decomposition  products.    Ontheothei  sni<;  oi  the 
figure  there  is  a  large  plagioclaie,  containing  some  inclusions  of  the  base. 
i  [g  :;   Iiowh  a  thin  slice  of  basalt  iiotn  tin-  quarries  at  Bald  Kills,  enlarged 
00  diameters.    At  tin:  top  oi  this  figure  there  is  a  portion   ot  s  micro 
porphyritic  olivine,  and  Home  distance  below  a  basal  section  <>f  augifr 
'JIm:m<:  and  other  large  crystals  are  set  in  a  micro-crystalline  ground  mass 
The  lath  shaped  felspars  .show  a  decided  flow.     The  magnetite  is  very 
abundant  as  block  grains.     Pig.  4,  x  90 diameters     Under  this  magnifying 
power  magnetite  shows  clearly.    The  large  olivine  in  the  tipper  portion  of 
tin:  figure  shows  inclusions  of  this  mineral,  "in:  being  a  perfect  cube.    The 
other  large  crystal  is  an  Idiomorpbic  augite.     Between  these  two  i 
a  streaming  of  the  felspars  is  very  noticeable     It  will  be  remarked  that  the 
felspai     have  Incomplete  terminations  ami  sometimes  bifurcate  at  either 
extremity.     Pig.  5.    In  the  lower  left  band  portion  of  this  figure  a  large 
augite  is  seen  partially  penetrated  by  two  plagioi  la  ■>■  prisms.    The  smaller 
lath-shaped    felspars   flow  round   the  augite  in  an   Interesting   manner. 
Magnetite  is  scattered  through  the  slide.     The  two  clear  ipaoes  at  the  top 
are  olivines.    The  thin  slices  in  Figs    i  ami  0  were  ':nt,  from  basalt  used  for 
kerb-stones  in  Bathurst,  and  quarried  on  tin.  Bald  Hills  a  few  miles  south 
of  the  city. 

Plat*  xv.     Pig,   I  shows  ;j,  vein  oi  granite  Intruding  a  much  altered 
sedimentary  rock.    Between  Brewongleand  Locksleythi  po  ed 


234   ON  THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROGRAPHY  OF  BATHURST,  N.S.W. 

in  a  railway  cutting.  Fig.  2  shows  an  intrusive  vein  in  Silurian  slates,  on 
the  outer  boundary  of  the  granite,  near  Newbridge.  Fig.  3  is  a  sketch  of 
forking  veins  of  binary  granite,  near  Newbridge.  Fig.  4  shows  a  younger 
and  lighter- coloured  granite  penetrating  a  dark  coloured  rock  of  the  same 
character.  Figs.  5  and  6  show  veins  of  granite  cutting  through  altered 
sedimentary  rocks.  These  were  sketched  in  the  Winburudale  Creek,  above 
the  bridge  on  the  Bathurst-Peel  Road.  Fig.  7  represents  junctions  between 
slates  and  granite.  The  line  of  junction  is  very  sharp  and  well  defined, 
and  is  exposed  in  a  railway  cutting  on  the  Bathurst  side  of  Newbridge 
railway  station. 

Plate  xvi. — The  highest  point  of  the  basalt  is  about  600  feet  above  the 
river.  The  drift  which  is  shown  under  the  basalt  was  pierced  by  a  tunnel. 
The  relations  of  the  rocks  to  the  sections  are  drawn  from  notes  made  during 
the  progress  of  the  tunnelling  works.  Fig.  2  gives  the  relative  positions  of 
all  the  basalt  around  Bathurst.  Some  four  miles  of  the  ridges  do  not 
show  in  the  sketch,  as  at  the  left  of  the  section  the  chain  of  hills  bends 
away  south  at  right  angles  and  so  is  hidden  from  view.  The  view  is  from 
the  north. 

Plate  xvii. — Prismatic  basalt,  Bald  Hills.  This  quarry  is  very  nearly  on 
the  line  of  section  marked  A  B  on  the  map.  The  weathering  of  the  rock  is 
shown.  Large  flakes  of  decomposed  matter  peel  off  the  sides  of  the  prisms. 
These  flakes  are  from  half  an  inch  to  one  and  a  half  inches  in  thickness, 
and  often  contain  a  core  of  undecomposed  basalt.  As  work  goes  on  it  is 
probable  that  better  columns  will  be  exposed. 

Plate  xviii. — Sketch  map  representing  the  boundaries  of  the  basalt  as 
accurately  as  is  possible  on  this  scale.  It  is  easy  to  join  the  isolated  patches 
and  thus  trace  the  former  course  of  the  river. 


235 


REMARKS  ON  POST-TERTIARY  PHASCOLOMYIDM 

By  C.  W.  De  Vis,  M.A.,  Cork.  Mem. 

In  furtherance  of  some  future  catalogue  of  the  post-tertiary 
fossils  of  Queensland  locally  preserved,  the  wombat  contents  of  the 
collection  have  in  their  turn  undergone  examination.  From  that 
scrutiny  one  rises  with  the  impression  that  our  recorded  knowledge 
of  the  family  is  not  in  every  respect  as  certain  or,  on  the  whole,  quite 
as  complete  as  it  might  be,  and  there  ensues  a  desire  to  ask  that  one 
judgment  delivered  respecting  them  may  be  reconsidered,  and  one 
species  added  to  their  number.  But  before  all  things  it  is  obli- 
gatory to  declare  that  the  task  of  determining  the  extinct  species 
of  Phascolomys  could  not  have  been  undertaken  at  the  antipodes 
prior  to  the  publication  of  Mr.  Lyddeker's  Catalogue  of  Fossil 
Marsupials,  followed  by  the  Catalogue  of  Recent  Marsupials  placed 
in  our  hands  by  Mr.  Thomas.  To  the  labours  of  both  these  writers 
we  in  Australia  are  deeply  indebted.  But  we  may  presume  that 
neither  of  the  authors  would  insist  upon  his  determinations  being- 
considered  as  in  all  cases  final,  for  it  must  be  that  conclusions  based 
on  a  comparatively  small  number  of  specimens,  or  upon  descriptions 
alone,  will  undergo  some  modification.  More  especially  is  this  to 
be  expected  in  cases  of  opinion  founded  on  a  few  cranial  remains 
of  the  wombats  that  were.  Naturalists  will  agree  that  if  we 
neglect  the  "  personal  equation,"  observation  may  generally  be 
taken  to  vary  in  value  as  the  material  observed  varies  in  quantity, 
and  on  this  account  they  will  not  mistake  for  an  idle  vaunt  the 
statement  that  the  collection  of  wombat  fossils  examined  contains 
over  two  hundred  specimens,  exclusive  of  vertebra?,  and  so  forms, 
it  is  believed,  by  far  the  largest  series  as  yet  gathered  from  that 
prolific  field,  the  valley  of  the  Condamine. 


236  REMARKS    ON    POST-TERTIARY    PHASCOLOMYID.E, 

To  begin  with  a  general  conclusion,  the  opinion  which  I  have 
previously  ventured  to  express,  namely,  that  the  ossiferous  deposits 
of  the  Darling  Downs  and  those  of  the  Wellington  Caves  are  not 
upon  the  same  palseontological  horizon,  receives  support  from  the 
phascolomine  peculiarities  of  their  respective  contents.  So  far  as 
can  be  learned  from  the  British  and  Queensland  collections,  the 
cave  wombats,  P.  latifrons,  krefftii,  and  curvirostris,  were  not  in 
existence  when  the  Queensland  breccias  and  turbaries  were  laid 
down  ;  and,  on  the  other  hand,  P.  parvus  and  the  species  to  be 
described  in  the  sequel  had  disappeared  before  the  Wellington 
caves  received  their  contents.  It  would  not  be  reasonable  to 
accept  in  explanation  of  the  apparent  facts  the  supposition  that 
they  inhered  in  contemporaneous  but  diversely  conditioned  faunas. 
The  habitats  were  too  near  to  each  other  and  persisted  under 
geographical  conditions  too  similar  in  kind,  and  on  the  whole  too 
continuous  one  with  another  to  leave  any  plausibility  in  the 
suggestion.  But  if  the  faunas  were  successive,  as  the  alternative 
supposition  must  affirm,  they  denote  the  limits  of  a  great  interval 
of  time,  of  a  space  sufficient  to  effect  in  this  particular  instance  the 
extinction  of  two  and  the  development  of  three  species.  The  lapse 
of  some  considerable  part  of  this  interval  has  probably  been  notified 
to  us  by  certain  fossils  which  show  that  one  of  the  associations 
characteristic  of  the  Nototherian  age,  Ceratodus  with  a  fresh  water 
saurian,  was  still  permanent  in  Southern  Queensland  when  the 
denudation  of  the  basalt  had  so  far  progressed  as  to  cause  the 
formation,  in  suitable  positions,  of  deep  beds  of  "  black  soil." 
Teeth  of  the  fish  and  alligator  with  other  vertebrate  remains, 
(includinga  piece  of  a  chelonian  carapace  of  great  thickness  identical 
with  fragments  from  the  Downs),  all  evidencing  a  first  burial  in  situ, 
have  been  met  with  near  Brisbane  at  a  depth  of  80  feet  in  a  dark 
basaltic  loam  with  celestine  and  other  derivative  minerals.  These 
interesting  fossils  are  deposited  in  the  Queensland  Museum. 

A  second  conclusion  is  that  that  no  living  species  of  wombat  has 
come  down  to  us  from  the  age  of  the  Condamine  beds.  This  is  an 
assertion  which  contradicts  accepted  evidence,  and  will,  therefore, 


BY    C.  W.  DE    VIS.  237 

have  to  be  substantiated  by  further  and,  as  it  appears  to  me,  more 
conclusive  evidence.  Assuming  its  truth  for  the  moment  we  must 
accept  the  consequence,  that  the  cave  fauna,  in  which  we  are  told 
there  appears  an  existing  species  (P.  latifrons),  is  partially  of  later 
origin. 

Phascolonus,  Owen,  is  demonstrably  a  good  genus,  but  the 
ground  on  which  it  has  been  separated,  namely,  by  identification 
with  Sceparnodon,  a  determination  so  improbable  in  itself  that 
nothing  short  of  direct  proof  should  suffice  to  give  it  currency, 
appears  to  me  quite  inadequate,  to  say  the  least.  Owen's  suspicion 
that  this  great  wombat  in  skull  and  teeth  might  one  day  show 
itself  to  be  generically  distinct  from  Phascolomys  was  a  happy 
conception,  but  it  is  not  by  means  of  the  teeth  and  skull  exclu- 
sively that  its  differentiation  may  be  proved.  In  each  of  the  other 
known  parts  of  its  skeleton  there  are  departures  from  normal 
phascolomine  characters  amply  sufficient  to  determine  the  judgment 
in  favour  of  its  separation  from  Phascolomys.  It  is  unnecessary 
to  go  into  details  to  settle  an  undisputed  question,  but  to  anticipate 
an  objection  which  might  be  taken  to  proofs  derived  from  isolated 
bones  in  this  and  other  cases  on  account  of  the  uncertainty 
attaching  to  their  determination,  it  may  be  permissible  to  state 
the  process  by  which  the  identification  of  PhasColonus  bones  was 
,  ascertained. 

While  taking  measurements  of  the  bones  of  a  Phascolomys 
platyrhinus  for  comparative  purposes,  it  was  observed  that  the 
width  of  the  distal  end  of  the  humerus  corresponded  very  closely 
with  the  length  of  the  upper  molar  series,  the  millimetres  being 
5 4 '5  and  53*5  respectively.  Naturally  it  seemed  not  impossible 
that  a  similar  equation  might  obtain  in  an  extinct  species.  To 
put  the  notion  to  the  test  search  was  made  for  a  phascolomine 
humerus  which  should  be  in  width  about  equal  to  the  length  of 
the  series  of  upper  cheek  teeth  in  a  P.  gigas,  namely,  105  mm. 
The  bone  was  fortunately  discovered  and  found  to  measure 
104  mm.  It  was  then  assumed  with  some  degree  of  confidence 
that   twice    the    linear  dimensions  of  P.  platyrhinus  might   be 


238  REMARKS    ON    POST -TERTIARY    PHASCOLOMYID^E, 

adopted  as  a  metrical  guide  to  the  recognition  of  any  other 
Phascolonus  bones  in  the  collection,  or  conversely  that  any 
phascolomine  bones  found  to  yield  the  required  measurement  in 
two  dimensions  might,  with  the  consent  of  other  characters,  be 
taken  as  belonging  to  the  same  animal  as  the  skull ;  and  on  this 
basis  the  identifications  of  the  proximal  end  of  a  second  humerus, 
two  femurs,  three  tibias,  a  fibula,  two  scapulas,  two  ulnas,  a  radius, 
ischium,  trapezium,  trapezoides,  astragalus,  naviculare,  calcaneum 
and  cuboid,  or  characteristic  parts  of  them,  were  successively 
established.  It  may  be  well  to  state  distinctly  that  while  these 
bones  are  unmistakably  phascolomine  they  almost  invariably 
present  conspicuous  marks  of  differentiation  from  Phascolomys—  for 
examples,  the  bridge  across  the  entepicondylar  canal  of  the  humerus 
does  not  subside  at  once  into  the  shaft  as  in  the  pure  wombats, 
recent  and  extinct,  but  is  continued  upwards  as  an  elevated  ridge, 
merging  into  the  deltoid  ridge  above,  and  the  astragalus  has  its 
rotular  groove  deeply  sunken  and  all  its  ridges  elevated,  whereby 
it  is  easily  discriminated  from  the  smooth-surfaced  bone  of  P. 
medins  and  its  dwarfed  copy  in  the  recent  P.  platyrhinus.  At 
the  same  time  it  must  be  observed  that  the  extent  of  differentiation 
shown  by  these  bones  is  by  no  means  so  great  as  that  which  we 
shall  probably  find  to  be  correlated  with  the  non-phascolomine 
incisors  of  Scepamodon. 

In  addition  to  the  above-named  bones  of  the  tarsus,  there  are 
in  the  collection  several  which  show  that  although  the  animal  was 
as  a  rule  about  twice  the  length  of  P.  platyrhinus,  it  not  unfre- 
quently  exceeded  that  length  by  more  than  one-third.  The 
astragalus  referred  to  is  44  mm.  in  breadth,  against  22  mm.  in  the 
living  P.  platyrhinus,  but  by  its  side  is  a  second  measuring  51*5, 
another  55*5,  and  still  another  60  mm.,  yet  no  one  of  these  can  be 
specifically  distinguished  from  the  rest.  The  naviculare  again  is 
accompanied  by  two  others,  the  respective  lengths  of  the  three 
being  41*5,  54,  and  56.  With  the  largest  astragalus  are  associated 
its  naviculare,  calcaneum,  and  cuboid,  and  arranged  with  them  are 
the  four  metatarsals,  but  these  have  been  contributed  by  other 
feet.     Of  foot  bones  of  this  larger  size  there  are  in  all  sixteen 


BY   C.  W.  DE   VIS.  239 

examples,  or  nearly  a  third  of  the  whole  number  of  cranial  and 
appendicular  bones  of  Phascolonus  in  the  collection. 

Adverting  to  the  smaller  species — on  the  assumption  that  the 
liviug  P.  platyrhinus  is  identical  with  the  fossil  P.  mitchelli,  as  it 
is  said  to  be,  the  latter  is  the  only  recognizable  species  of  its  size 
as  yet  recorded  from  the  Darling  Downs.  P.  thomsoni,  Ow.,  is  an 
extremely  doubtful  species,  uniquely  represented,  and  dependent 
for  its  validity  upon  a  single  character,  the  backward  extension  of 
the  symphysis,  a  character  which  varies  with  age  and,  in  mandibles 
of  P.  mitchelli,  shows  its  inconstancy  thus  : — in  one  example  it 
extends  to  the  fore  lobe  of  m3,  in  four  to  the  interval  between  m3 
and  m2,  in  five  to  the  hind  lobe  of  m2,  and  in  four  to  the  interval 
between  m2  and  m1.  P.  thomsoni  should,  therefore,  be  expunged 
from  our  lists.  But  whether  it  be  so  or  not  is  of  slight  moment 
in  a  question  of  appeal  to  bones  other  than  those  of  the  head.  A 
species  which  has  left  us  but  a  single  fragment  of  its  jaw  is  not 
likely  to  have  handed  down  other  parts  of  its  skeleton  ;  at  any 
rate  it  is  not  entitled  to  priority  of  consideration  over  those  whose 
cranial  remains  are  numerous.  We  may,  then,  for  the  present 
proceed  on  the  assumption  aforesaid,  namely,  that  there  was  but 
one  wombat  of  the  size  of  P.  platyrhinus  to  remit  its  limb  bones 
for  study  ;  then  as  bones  of  a  wombat  of  that  size,  showing  the 
like  dimensional  correspondence  with  the  teeth  of  P.  mitchelli  as 
that  observed  in  the  case  of  P.  gigas,  are  extant,  the  question 
simply  is,  are  they,  as  the  identification  requires,  fossilised  bones 
of  P.  platyrhinus.  One  answer  alone  is  possible,  they  are  not. 
If  not,  then  either  the  numerous  cranial  and  mandibular  remains 
of  platyrhine  wombats  referred  to  P.  mitchelli  in  the  Queensland 
Museum,  and  there  constituting  it  the  commonest  species,  belong 
to  some  undescribed  species  unknown  in  the  British  Museum,  and 
not  to  the  species  also  most  numerously  represented  by  such 
remains  in  the  British  Museum,  or  the  identification  is  at  fault. 
It  is  now  incumbent  upon  me  to  show  that  these  bones,  which 
under  the  circumstances  must  necessarily  be  ascribed  to  mitchelli, 
are  not  bones  of  platyrhinus.  They  comprise  two  humeri,  three 
femurs,  a  tibia,  and  two  ulnas. 
16 


240  REMARKS    ON    POST-TERTIARY    PHASCOLOMYIDiE, 

The  humerus  is  seen  at  a  glance  to  be  much  stouter,  but  as  the 
condylar  region  of  the  more  perfect  specimen  is  wanting  its  rela- 
tive proportions  cannot  be  ascertained  with  precision.  With  an 
approximate  length  of  124  mm.,  against  122  in  platyrhinus,  the 
width  of  the  shaft  at  its  proximal  third  is  3  mm.,  its  antero- 
posterior thickness  2*5  mm.  greater  ;  it  is,  therefore,  2*5  mm  wider 
than  in  a  recent  bone  of  the  same  length  ;  at  the  proximal  end  the 
long  diameter  of  the  head  and  greater  tuberosity  is  2*5  mm.,  the 
short  diameter  across  the  head  only  0*8  mm.  greater  ;  in  this  region 
it  is,  therefore,  relatively  longer  and  of  a  different  form.  Although 
the  head  is  but  little  larger  antero-posteriorly,  it  is  produced 
downwards  upon  the  hinder  surface  of  the  shaft  much  more  than 
in  platyrhinus,  more  even  than  in  lati/rons,  and  with  a  still  more 
angular  margin  than  in  the  latter  species.  The  importance  of 
this  exaggeration  of  one  of  the  features  peculiar  to  lati/rons  should 
be  duly  appreciated.  The  ectotuberosity,  as  to  size,  is  in  about 
the  same  proportion  to  that  of  the  head  as  in  platyrhinus,  but  it  is 
smoother,  more  symmetrical  in  form,  wants  the  triangular  facet, 
and  descends  lower  on  the  shaft ;  the  extent  of  its  base  on  the 
thenal  side  is  platyrhine  rather  than  latifront.  In  the  extension 
of  the  transverse  diameter  of  the  proximal  end  of  the  shaft  we  see, 
on  the  other  hand,  a  second  latifront  character  in  excess.  The 
lesser  tuberosity  resembles  that  of  platyrhinus  but  is  not  so 
distinctly  grooved  off  from  the  head,  nor  does  it  descend  in  a 
pointed  form  on  the  entothenal  edge.  The  teretotriceps  ridge  is 
extremely  short  and  in  shape  oval,  very  different  both  in  form  and 
extent  to  that  of  either  of  the  living  species  ;  midway  between  it 
and  the  head  is  a  tuberiform  ridglet,  perhaps  an  outlier  of  the 
other.  The  pectoral  ridge  is  an  elevated  line  descending  con- 
tinuously from  the  greater  tuberosity,  in  other  structural  respects 
most  nearly  resembling  that  of  platyrhinus,  but  differing  in  position 
as  it  marks  off  the  inner  third  instead  of  the  inner  half  of  the  shaft. 
The  prominence  and  retroflexion  of  the  angle  of  the  deltoid  ridge 
are  intermediate  in  degree  between  those  exhibited  by  platyrhinus 
and  lati/rons.  The  deltoid  and  pectoral  ridges  do  not  converge 
distad,  the  surface  between  them  is  comparatively  flat,  and  the 


BY    C.  W.  DE    VIS.  241 

only  representative  of  a  predeltoid  ridge  is  a  low  prominence  just 
proximad  of  the  middle  of  the  long  oblique  margin  joining  the  ends 
of  the  two  ridges.  The  breadth  of  the  delto-pectoral  surface  is 
15  mm.  against  12*5  in  platyrhinus,  wherein  again  we  recognise 
an  intermediate  character.  The  triceps  ridge  on  the  anconal 
aspect  of  the  shaft  is  still  less  developed  than  in  platyrhinus. 
The  absence  of  the  supinator  ridge  and  of  the  condyles  precludes 
further  comparison,  but  perhaps  enough  has  been  said  to  render  it 
unnecessary.  It  may  already  appear  that  the  bone,  so  far  from 
representing  P.  platyrhinus,  has  several  characters  which  suggest 
that,  on  the  whole,  P.  mitchelli  was  less  specialised  than  are  the 
living  species  of  which  it  was  probably  the  common  source. 

Of  the  femur  the  length  and  the  least  transverse  diameter  are 
respectively  168  and  17*5  mm.,  in  P.  platyrhinus  they  are  163  and 
14-5,  in  P.  latifrons  141  and  17  ;  platyrhinus  it  would  seem  has 
retained  length  and  lost  thickness,  latifrons  has  lost  length  and 
retained  thickness.  The  breadth  of  the  distal  end  (39  mm.),  the 
transverse  diameter  of  the  head  (36*5),  and  its  antero-posterior 
diameter  (26)  are  all  greater  than  in  either  of  the  continental 
species  living.  As  in  the  humerus,  so  in  the  femur,  the  head 
descends  considerably  lower  and  overhangs  the  shaft  to  a  greater 
extent  than  in  existing  forms.  The  lesser  trochanter  is  relatively 
larger  in  all  its  dimensions  ;  the  rough-surfaced  excavation  in 
front  of  its  distal  extension  is  much  broader  and  deeper  but  has  no 
sunken  pit  at  its  proximal  end  ;  the  subtrochanterian  ridge  is  more 
exactly  reproduced  in  platyrhinus  than  in  latifrons.  Between  the 
summits  of  the  two  trochanters  the  distance  is  47-5  mm.  against 
44  in  living  species,  consequently  the  neck  is  proportionately 
broader.  The  inner  condyle  is  36  mm.  in  its  antero-posterior 
dimension,  that  of  platyrhinus  being  ljut  31,  and  its  superiority  in 
height  over  the  outer  condyle  is,  therefore,  more  conspicuous ;  the 
outer  condyle  is  more  distinctly  grooved  off  from  a  rather  broader 
ectepicondyle  ;  the  intercondylar  notch  is  wider,  the  anterior  limit 
of  its  surface  better  defined,  its  whole  surface  comparatively 
smooth  ;  a  convexity  of  the  surface  near  its  posterior  end  forms  a 
low  transverse  bar  between  the  condyles.      Of  the  deep  pit  seen  in 


242  REMARKS    ON    POST-TERTIARY    PHASCOLOMYID.E, 

the  shaft  at  the  base  of  the  outer  condyle  of  platijrhinus  there  is 
no  trace  in  the  fossil. 

Two  forms  of  tibia  present  themselves,  one  (with  three  examples) 
much  less  unlike  that  of  P.  platyrhinus  than  the  other,  but,  never- 
theless, to  be  preferred  for  reference  to  P.  mitchelli,  for  though 
unexpectedly  thin  and  angular  it  is  much  less  so  than  its  companion. 
With  extremities  no  greater  in  size,  the  fossil  of  this  form  is  in  its 
total  length  distinctly  (one-twelfth)  greater  than  in  recent  bones. 
Compared  with  the  humerus  it  must,  therefore,  be  considered 
slender.  In  general  shape  it  is  like  that  of  platyrldnus,  but  its 
shaft  has  a  little  stronger  curve  and  a  rather  greater  dilatation  of 
its  edge  at  the  junction  of  the  proximal  and  middle  third  of  its 
length.  The  posterior  surface  of  the  shaft  is  broader  and  flatter 
and  its  edges,  but  especially  the  distal  half  of  the  inner  edge,  are 
sharply  angular.  The  cavity  for  the  outer  condyle  of  the  femur 
is,  unlike  that  of  platyrhinus,  circular;  the  space  between  it  and 
the  procnemial  tuberosity  much  more  elevated,  causing  the  articu- 
lating part  of  the  head,  when  viewed  laterally,  to  appear  much 
longer  ;  the  tuberosity  is  shorter,  the  inner  edge  of  the  entocondylar 
surface  is  not  produced  into  a  point  adjacent  to  the  facet  for  the 
head  of  the  fibula,  and  the  spine  is  both  higher  and  sharper.  At 
the  distal  end  the  anterior  edge  of  the  shaft  is  more  compressed, 
the  scaphoid  moiety  of  the  inner  malleolus  is  narrower  and  more 
sharply  grooved  off  from  the  rest  of  the  malleolus.  Perhaps  no 
one  of  the  several  differences  which  have  been  noticed  would  be 
sufficient  of  itself  to  distinguish  this  tibia  from  others,  but,  taken 
together,  the  discrepancies  between  it  and  that  of  •platyrhinus  are 
altogether  prohibitory  of  specific  identity  between  the  two.  Of 
this  bone  the  collection  contains  one  nearly  perfect  from  the  right 
side  and  two  opposite  halves  from  the  left  side. 

Until  it  can  be  shown  that  the  fossils  which  have  been  brought 
forward  are  not  really  bones  of  P.  mitchelli,  that  is  until  genuine 
bones  of  P.  platyrhinus  are  found  fossil  on  the  Con  dam  in  e,  or 
until  another  species  of  extinct  wombat  to  which  they  can  more 
probably  be  referred  becomes  known,  it  may,  I  think,  be  accepted 


BY    C.  W.  DE    VIS.  243 

as  a  proved  fact  that  P.  mitchelli  is  not  synonymous  with  P. 
platyrhinus.  Against  this  it  will  be  urged  that  naturalists  of 
approved  sagacity  and  wide  experience  have  seen  reason  to  come 
to  the  opposite  conclusion.  That  they  have  done  so  is  not  at  all 
surprising.  There  is  no  difficulty  in  believing  that  there  is,  on  the 
whole,  sufficient  resemblance  in  cranial  and  dental  characters  to 
lead  observers  who  were  compelled  to  trust  to  those  characters 
alone  to  the  decision  they  have  announced.  But  it  is  questionable 
whether  we  ought  to  trust  to  them  alone  so  implicitly  as  to  pro- 
nounce an  unreserved  opinion  in  cases  where  material  is  scanty, 
specialization  feeble  and  apt  to  be  obscured  by  the  accidents  of 
burial,  and  where  the  question  is  between  a  living  animal  and 
a  companion  of  extinct  species.  The  present  is  not  the  first 
experience  which  has  convinced  me  that  such  a  course  may  lead 
to  error. 

P.  mitchelli  is,  however,  not  the  only  wombat  of  its  size  which 
found  burial  in  the  Darling  Downs  deposits,  though  the  only  one 
to  which  the  bones  already  noticed  could  have  belonged.  There 
was  a  species  distinguishable  almost  at  a  glance  by  the  narrowness 
of  its  teeth,  which  are  intermediate  in  breadth  between  those  of 
P.  parvus  and  P.  mitchelli,  though  serially  as  long  as  or  longer  than 
in  the  latter  species.  As  a  marked  reduction  in  the  width  of  the 
teeth  has  not  been  noted  in  the  descriptions  of  known  species,  and 
as  the  teeth  in  all  the  mandibles  of  P.  mitchelli  are  appreciably 
the  same  in  width,  I  must  perforce  regard  this  narrow-toothed 
wombat  as  a  new  species,  for  which  the  name  angustidens  may  be 
appropriate. 

Mandibular  characters : — Teeth  narrow,  in  a  relatively  long 
series  ;  posterior  molars  oblique  ;  premolar  large,  subrectangular, 
with  its  long  axis  in  the  axis  of  the  jaw ;  symphysis  rather  short. 

The  species  is  founded  on  four  mandibular  specimens,  two  of 
them  from  the  same  mandible.  The  more  perfect  of  the  latter 
shows  the  whole  of  the  dentary  limb  from  the  incisor  outlet  to 
the  base  of  the  coronoid  process  with  all  the  teeth  except  the 
incisor  in  place.     The  length  of  the  molar  series  is  52-5  mm.,  in  an 


244  REMARKS    ON    POST-TERTIARY    PHASCOLOMYID^E, 

average  jaw  of  mitchelli  it  is  51  ;  the  width  of  m3  is  6*8  mm., 
against  7*8  in  mitchelli,  the  difference  of  a  millimetre  throughout 
the  series  asserting  itself  plainly  to  the  eye.  The  premolar  is 
unusually  large  and  unusually  rectilinear  in  form  ;  the  midline  of 
its  flat  inner  side  is  sharply  impressed  with  a  vertical  groove,  and 
its  longitudinal  axis  is  all  but  coincident  with  the  longitudinal 
axis  of  the  alveolar  series.  The  lobes  of  m1  are  as  usual  nearly 
at  right  angles  to  the  line  of  teeth,  those  of  m2  are  distinctly 
oblique,  of  m3  more  so,  and  of  m4  still  more  so.  The  lower 
contour  of  the  jaw  is  flatly  arched,  being  rather  the  deepest  in  the 
middle  and  not  less  deep  beneath  p4  than  under  m4 — it  approaches 
that  of  platyrhimis  and  differs  much  from  that  of  mitchelli.  The 
coronoid  process  is,  at  its  base,  more  than  usually  exserted  from  the 
side  of  the  jaw,  is  thick  and  massive,  and  has  on  its  anterior  edge 
a  peculiar  character,  a  series  of  short,  strong,  oblique  ridges.  The 
symphysis  in  this  mandible  extends  only  to  the  middle  of  m l ,  but 
its  condition  shows  that  anchylosis  with  its  fellow  had  hardly 
begun,  and  that,  consequently,  its  shortness  is  attributable  to  its 
youth,  notwithstanding  that  m4  is  worn  down  to  smooth  surfaces. 
The  depth  of  the  jaw  opposite  m1  is  38,  that  of  P.  platyrhinus 
being  32-5. 

The  associated  limb  is  but  a  fragment  with  the  four  true 
molars  in  place  and  affords  no  further  information.  The  third 
example  is  a  right  dentary  limb,  containing  m1,  m2,  m3,  and  half 
of  m4,  the  teeth  being  equally  narrow  and  oblique  posteriorly. 
The  symphysis  in  this  example  extends  to  the  hinder  lobe  of  m2. 
The  fourth  subject  is  similar  to  the  last,  but  contains  only  m1, 
m2,  and  m3.  The  symphysis  is  indistinct,  but  appears  to  have 
extended  to  the  fore  lobe  of  m1.  The  teeth  are  similar  in  width 
and  obliquity. 

Fortunately  the  existence  of  this  species  is  affirmed  by  other 
than  mandibular  testimony.  Inferring  from  the  narrowness  of 
its  teeth  that  angustidens,  though  equal  in  size  to  mitchelli,  was 
more  delicate  in  structure,  I  refer  to  it  a  nearly  perfect  humerus 
and  a  tibia  which  convey  the  same  impression.  The  humerus  differs 
generally  from  that  of  mitchelli  in  its  comparative  slenderness,  and, 


BY   C.  W.  DE   VIS.  245 

indeed,  exceeds  in  this  respect  that  of  platyrhinus  ;  it  is  124*5  mm. 
long,  and  would  be  of  exactly  the  same  length  as  in  platyrhinus 
but  for  an  elongation  of  the  ectotuberosity  ;  both  the  breadth  of 
the  proximal  end  and  the  length  of  the  condyles  are  as  they  are  in 
the  living  species,  the  teretotriceps  ridge  is  of  the  same  extent  and 
form.  The  head  is  a  little  and  the  great  tuberosity  much  narrower, 
the  latter  is  altogether  different  in  shape  from  that  of  mitchelli  and 
platyrhinus  both,  it  rises  high  above  the  level  of  the  head  as  an 
obtusely  pointed  backwardly  inclined  peak  separated  from  the 
neck  by  a  low  transverse  ridge.  The  facet  on  its  posterior  aspect 
is  larger  than  in  platyrhinus  but  less  defined,  and  in  the  middle 
of  its  length  it  is  more  deeply  impressed.  The  lesser  tuberosity 
is,  on  the  other  hand,  much  less  elevated,  and  is  more  distinctly 
connected  with  the  greater  by  the  tumid  edge  of  the  anterior 
surface  of  the  shaft.  On  this  aspect  the  greater  tuberosity  is 
much  less  convex  than  in  other  species.  The  pectoral  ridge  is 
not  quite  so  distinctly  continuous  with  the  greater  tuberosity  as 
in  P.  mitchelli,  but  it  is  higher  and  at  its  distal  end  forms  a  larger 
and  better  denned  tubercle.  As  in  P.  mitchelli  the  deltoid  ridge 
terminates  in  a  retroflected  angle,  but  one  of  greater  expansion.  The 
prominence  on  the  long  oblique  edge  joining  the  ends  of  the  two 
ridges  is  much  larger  and  sharper,  and  from  it  a  thread-like  ridge, 
a  rudimentary  predeltoid,  runs  proximad  for  a  few  millimetres. 
The  breadth  of  the  shaft  at  its  proximal  third  is  22J  mm. ; 
at  this  point  it  is  but  12*8  in  antero-posterior  thickness  against 
14*5  in  platyrhinus  and  17*5  in  mitchelli.  The  length  of  the  shaft 
from  the  convex  edge  between  the  tuberosities  to  the  end  of  the 
pectoral  ridge  is  61*5  mm.,  in  platyrhinus  it  is  59,  and  in  mitchelli 
55.  As  in  mitchelli,  the  posterior  limit  of  the  head  descends  low 
and  angularly  upon  the  shaft,  overhanging  it  more  than  in  the 
stouter  bone.  The  ridge  for  the  humeral  head  of  the  triceps  is 
wanting,  or  it  may  be  represented  by  a  very  small  prominence 
near  the  edge  of  the  shaft.  The  anconal  and  coronal  pits  of  the 
distal  end  have  a  large  foramen  in  common.  The  condyles  are 
narrow  antero-posteriorly,  the  intercondylar  rotular  surface 
remarkably  so.     The  outer  condyle  is  almost  perfectly  globose. 


246  REMARKS    ON    POST-TERTIARY    PHASCOLOMYID.E. 

The  tibia,  like  the  humerus,  is  unusually  thin  and  angular.  It 
its  within  two  millimetres  of  the  same  length  as  that  of  platyrhinus^ 
but  in  general  form  it  most  resembles  that  of  latifrons,  the  curve 
of  the  shaft  and  more  especially  the  dilatation  of  its  anterior  edge 
between  the  proximal  and  middle  thirds  being  rather  pronounced. 
The  concave  area  beneath  the  popliteal  notch  is  deeply  excavated. 
The  proximal  end  of  the  hinder  side  of  the  shaft  is  broader,  the 
distal  end  of  this  surface  narrower  than  in  platyrhinus  and  its 
edges  are  sharper,  as,  indeed,  are  most  of  the  edges  of  the  bone. 
The  distal  articulation  is  reniform  in  shape,  not,  as  usual,  rhom- 
boid ;  the  articulating  surface  for  the  astragalus  is  elongated 
posteriorly,  and  is  more  distinct  from  the  shaft  than  in  platy- 
rhinus ;  the  inner  malleolus  is  longer,  and  its  scaphoid  facet  com- 
paratively small.  In  short,  a  wombat  tibia  could  hardly  present 
more  specific  differences  from  the  tibias  of  mitchelli  and  platy- 
rhinus  than  does  this  bone. 

We  have  thus  two  species  of  PJiascolomys  of  co-equal  size  repre- 
sented by  limb  bones  as  well  as  dental  remains  from  the  Darling 
Downs.  Not  one  of  these  bones  can,  without  violence  to  common 
sense,  be  identified  with  bones  of  platyrhinus.  It  would  be  absurd 
to  deny  that  any  of  them  belong  to  the  common  species  of  the 
period,  P.  mitchelli.  The  inference  is  irresistible  that  P.  mitchelli 
and  P.  platyrhinus  are  distinct  species. 

It  is  a  conclusion  which  is  supported  by  a  fine  series  of  mandibles 
of  P.  mitchelli  in  the  Queensland  collection. 


247 

DESCRIPTION  OF  A  NEW  MARINE  SHELL. 

By  C.  Hedley  and  C.  T.  Musson. 

(Plate  xix.,  figs.  1-3.) 

EULIMELLA    MONILIFORME,  n.Sp. 

Shell  minute,  thin,  transparent,  acicular,  conical,  with  a  small 
half  turned  over  discoidal  sinistral  tip,  whorls  rounded,  suture 
margined,  deeply  impressed ;  sculpture  fine  longitudinal  striae 
crossed  by  faint  microscopic  spiral  scratches  ;  colour  glossy  white  ; 
spire  long,  tapering  slowly ;  whorls,  besides  those  of  the  embryo, 
7,  rounded,  increasing  slowly,  last  constituting  two-thirds  of  total 
length  ;  mouth  long,  pear-shaped,  rounded  below  and  acute  above  ; 
inner  lip  thick,  defined,  straight,  reflected  anteriorly  over  a  minute 
rimation  ;  outer  lip  sharp. 

Length  3,  breadth  1  mm. 

The  nearest  ally  of  our  new  species  appears  to  be  E.  laxa,  Boog- 
Watson  (Challenger  Reports,  Zoology,  Vol.  xv.,  p.  497,  pi.  33,  fig. 
6),  which  it  resembles  in  its  rounded  whorls  and  pear-shaped 
mouth,  characters  in  which  it  differs  from  others  of  the  genus. 
Some  specimens  have  more  swollen  whorls  than  others ;  possibly 
this  is  a  sexual  feature.  We  collected  this  shell  in  the  brackish 
water  of  Manly  Lagoon,  near  Sydney ;  entangled  in  masses  of 
flannel-weed  (Sjyiroyyra)  these  tiny  molluscs  were  seen  in  abun- 
dance. This  lagoon  is  separated  from  the  ocean  by  a  narrow 
sandbank  thrown  across  the  mouth  of  a  small  stream ;  during 
floods  and  storms  this  barrier  is  broken  down  and  free  communica- 
tion then  exists  between  the  pond  and  the  sea. 

Type  specimens  have  been  deposited  in  the  Australian  Museum. 


248  NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 

Mr.  Hedley  submitted  the  following  "  Note  on  the  Ova  of 
Helicarion  robustus,  Gould." 

"  My  attention  was  lately  drawn  by  my  observant  friend  Mr. 
Fletcher  to  the  egg-capsules  of  Helicarion  robustus,  Gould.  No 
account  of  these  has  appeared  in  print,  and  it  may  be  advisable  to 
place  on  record  a  short  description.  Near  Sutherland  railway 
station,  a  few  miles  south  of  Sydney,  these  ova  were  so  plentiful 
the  first  week  in  April  that  scarcely  a  stone,  log  or  other  suitable 
shelter  was  raised  without  revealing  one  or  more  masses  ot  eggs. 
Mr.  Fletcher  tells  me  that  he  has  noted  their  occurrence  in  previous 
years  in  the  months  of  June  (1887),  January  (1888)  and  April 
(1890),  after  rain.  They  are  deposited  either  on  the  earth  or 
adhering  to  the  lower  surface  of  the  shelter,  usually  12  to  20,  and 
occasionally  40,  in  a  bunch,  each  individual  with  the  fluted  hemi- 
sphere outwards.  A  single  egg  measures  about  4  ram.  major  and 
3  mm.  minor  axis  ;  soft,  gelatinous,  white  when  fresh  laid,  growing 
yellow  as  it  matures,  probably  because  the  embryo  is  then  showing 
through  the  semi-transparent  wall,  ovate,  acuminate  at  one  end, 
from  the  acuminate  pole  nine  spiral  ribs  descend  to  the  periphery, 
where  they  gradually  vanish.  The  infant  mollusc  pierces  the  egg 
wall  near  the  apex  formed  by  the  conjunction  of  the  ribs,  and  on 
hatching  possesses  a  shell  of  one  and  a-half  whorls  quite  resembling 
the  adult  except  in  size." 

Mr.  Maiden  exhibited  ripe  fruits  of  Monstera  deliciosa  grown 
at  North  Sydney  by  Mr.  J.  Malbon  Thompson,  who  believes  that 
this  is  the  first  time  that  these  fruits  have  fully  ripened  in  Sydney. 
They  were  fifteen  months  in  ripening  after  the  fruit  had  set. 

Also,  specimens  of  the  "  vegetable  sponge,"  Luffa  aegyptiaca, 
grown  by  Mr.  James  Hurst  at  Summer  Hill  ;  and  an  abnormal 
growth  of  maize  cobs,  from  Bathurst. 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS.  249 

Mr.  A.  Sidney  Olliff  exhibited  (1)  two  species  of  a  small  fly 
(Diplosis  sppj,  recently  bred  at  the  Department  of  Agriculture 
by  Dr.  Cobb  and  himself  from  larvae  found  feeding  on  rust 
(Puccinia)  on  peach  and  sunflowers  ;  (2)  a  drawing  of  a  larva  of 
one  of  these  flies,  illustrating  the  anatomy  of  the  animal,  and 
exhibiting  the  embryo  and  larva  of  an  internal  parasite,  apparently 
belonging  to  the  Hymenoptera ;  and  (3)  specimens  of  a  dipteron 
(Tachina  sp.),  a  parasite  of  the  plague  locust,  Pachytylus  australis, 
Br.,  which  is  allied  to  the  recently-discovered  Masicera  pachytylis 
Sk. 

Mr.  P.  N.  Trebeck  showed  some  insects  collected  at  North 
Sydney. 

Mr.  Henry  Deane  exhibited  a  fine  specimen  of  Ophideres 
saliminia,  Cr.,  from  Casino,  a  moth  which  enlarges,  by  means  of 
its  auger-like  proboscis,  the  holes  made  by  fruit-flies,  &c,  in  the 
rind  of  oranges  and  bananas. 

Mr.  Deane  also  stated  that  last  month,  while  travelling  by  night 
through  the  Big  Scrub  in  the  Richmond  River  District,  his  interest 
was  aroused  by  the  remarkable  effect  produced  by  luminous  insects 
which  abounded  by  the  roadside.  Specimens  were  secured  and 
sent  off  in  the  hope  that  they  would  arrive  in  time  to  be  exhibited 
at  last  month's  meeting,  but  they  came  a  day  too  late,  and  in  the 
meanwhile  have  died.  From  their  general  resemblance  to  the 
larvae  of  Ceroplatus  mastersi,  Sk.,  which  are  also  phosphorescent, 
Mr.  Fletcher,  who  had  seen  the  specimens  forwarded,  was  of  the 
opinion  that  these  were  very  probably  also  dipterous  larvae. 

Mr.  David  made  some  remarks  on  certain  luminous  organisms 
which  he  had  observed  in  old  coal  mine  workings  in  Illawarra,  the 
identification  of  which  it  was  hoped  would  not  long  be  postponed. 


250 


WEDNESDAY,  24th  JUNE,  1891. 


The  President,  Professor  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc,  in  the  Chair. 


donations. 

"  Societe  Botanique  de  Lyon. — Bulletin  Trimestriel"  (1889). 
No.  4.     From  the  Society. 

"  Verhandlungen  der  Gesellschaft  fiir  Erclkunde  zu  Berlin." 
Bd.  xviii.,  Nos.  2  and  3  (1891).     From  the  Society. 

"  Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Beige  de  Microscopie."  xviime  Annee, 
No.  5  (1891).     From  the  Society. 

"American  Naturalist."  Vol.  xxv.,  Nos.  290  and  291  (Feb. 
and  March,  1891).     From  the  Editors. 

"  Bulletin  of  the  American  Geographical  Society."  Vol.  xxii., 
Supplement;  Vol.  xxiii.,  No.  1  (March,  1891).     From  the  Society. 

"  Zoologischer  Anzeiger."  xiv.  Jahrg.,  Nos.  361-363  (April- 
May,  1891).     From  the  Editor. 

"Journal  of  Comparative  Medicine  and  Veterinary  Archives." 
Vol.  xii.,  Nos.  4  and  5  (April-May,  1891).     From  the  Editor. 

"Journal  of  the  Royal  Microscopical  Society,  1891."  Part  2 
(April).     From  the  Society. 

"  Perak  Government  Gazette."  Index  to  Vol.  iii.  (Jan.-Dec, 
1890),  Vol.  iv.,  Nos.  8-12  (April-May,  1891).  From  the  Govern- 
ment Secretary. 

"  Annalen  des  K.  K.  Naturhistorischen  Hofmuseums,  Wien." 
Band  v.,  Nos.  1-4  (1890).     From  the  Director. 


DONATIONS.  251 

"  Videnskabelige  Meddelelser  f ra  den  naturhistoriske  Foreninw 
i  Kjobenhavn  for  Aaret  1890."     From  the  Society. 

"The  Canadian  Record  of  Science."     Vol.  iv.,  No.  5  (1891). 
From  the  Sot 


"Agricultural  Gazette  of  N.S.W."  Vol.  ii.,  Part  4  (April, 
1891).     From  the  Director  of  Agriculture. 

"  Report  on  the  Chillagoe  and  Koorboora  Mining  Districts 
(1891)."  By  R.  L.  Jack,  Government  Geologist,  Queensland. 
From  the  Author. 

"  Department  of  Mines,  Sydney — Palaeontology.  No.  5 — A 
Monograph  of  the  Carboniferous  and  Permo-Carboniferous  Inver- 
tebrata  of  N.S.W.  Part  i.— Coelenterata."  By  R.  Etheridge, 
Junr.     From  the  Hon.  the  Minister  for  Mines. 

"  Memoires  et  Publications  cle  la  Societe  des  Sciences,  des  Arts 
and  des  Lettres  du  Hainaut."  vme  Serie.  T.  ii.  and  iii.  (1889-90). 
From  the  Society. 

"Zoological  Society  of  London — Abstract."  April  21st,  1891. 
From  the  Society. 

"  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Physical  Society  of  Edinburgh 
(1889-90)."     Vol.  x.,  Part  2.     From  the  Society.  ■ 

"Journal  of  the  Bombay  Natural  History  Society."  Vol.  v., 
No.  4  (1890).     From  the  Society. 

"  Reichenbachia. — Orchids  illustrated  and  described."  By  F. 
Sander.  Second  Series.  Vol.  i.  Part  4  ;  "  Stettiner  Entomolo- 
gische  Zeitung."  51  Jahrg.,  Nos.  7-12  (1890).  From  the  Hon. 
Sir  William  Macleay,  F.L.S.,  M.L.C. 

"  Archives  Neerlandaises  des  Sciences  Exactes  et  Naturelles." 
T.  xxv.,  lre  Livraison.  From  the  Dutch  Society  of  Sciences  at 
Haarlem. 

"  Reports  and  Statistics  of  the  Mining  Department  of  Victoria 
for  the  quarter  ended  31st  March,  1891."  From  the  Secretary  for 
Mines. 


252  DONATIONS. 

"  Report  of  the  Manchester  Museum,  Owens  College,  1889-90." 
From  tlie  Keeper  of  the  Museum. 

"  Mitteilnngen  des  Vereins  fur  Erdkunde  zu  Leipzig,  1890." 
From  the  Society. 

"Australasian  Journal  of  Pharmacy."  Vol.  vi.,  No.  66  (June, 
1891).     From  the  Editor. 

"  The  Pharmaceutical  Journal  of  Australasia."  Vol.  iv.,  No.  6, 
(June,  1891).     From  the  Editor. 

"  Transactions  of  the  Connecticut  Academy  of  Arts  and 
Sciences."     Vol.  viii.,  Part  1  (1890).     From  the  Society. 

"  Proceedings  of  the  United  States  National  Museum."  Vol. 
xiii.  (1891),  Nos.  834,  835,  837,  839.     From  the  Director. 

"  Bulletin  of  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  at  Harvard 
College."     Vol.  xxi.,  No.  1.     From  the  Curator. 

"  United  States  Department  of  Agriculture — Division  of  Ento- 
mology—Bulletin," No.  24  (1891)  •  "Insect  Life."  Vol.  iii.,  Nos. 
7  and  8  (April,  1891).      From  the  Secretary  of  Agriculture. 

"  Zoological  Society  of  Philadelphia  —  Nineteenth  Annual 
Report."     From  the  Society. 

"  Geological  Survey  of  Canada  —  Contributions  to  Canadian 
Palaeontology."     Vol.  iii.  (4to),  No.  1  (1891).     From  the  Director. 

"  Geological  Survey  of  India — Memoirs."  Vol.  xxiv.,  Part  3  ; 
"  Records."  Vol.  xxiv.,  Part  1.  "  Contents  and  Index  of  Vols. 
i.-xxi.  of  the  Records  (1868-87)."     From  the  Director. 

"  Journal  of  the  College  of  Science,  Imperial  University  of 
Japan."     Vol.  iv.,  Part  1.     From  the  Director. 

"The  Quarterly  J  ournal  of  the  Geological  Society."  Vol.  xlvii., 
Part  2(1891).     From  the  Society. 

"  Johns  Hopkins  University  Circulars."  Vol.  x.,  Nos.  87  and 
88  (April-May,  1891).     From  the  University. 


253 


PAPERS    READ. 


ANGOPHORA  KINO. 
By  J.  H.  Maiden,  F.C.S.,  F.L.S. 

The  importance  of  the  genus  Eucalyptus  and  the  almost  universal 
occurrence  of  kino  in  these  trees  has  thrown  the  subject  of  kino  in 
the  closely  related  genus  Angophora  almost  entirely  into  the  shade. 
Although  some  species  are  very  common  and  yield  it  abundantly, 
a  prejudice  might  arise  against  Angophora  kinos  being  officially 
recognised  as  substitutes  for  that  of  Pterocarpus,  partly  because  an 
odour  is  inadmissible  in  this  substance.  If  a  use  should  be  found 
for  them,  I  believe  the  kinos  of  any  of  the  species  may  be  mixed 
without  detriment,  as  they  appear  to  have  practically  the  same 
composition  when  gathered  under  similar  circumstances. 

Angophoras  are  confined  to  the  east  coast  of  Australia ;  they 
are  five  in  number,  four  of  them  being  found  in  New  South  Wales, 
while  one,  A.  Woodsiana,  is  peculiar  to  Queensland.  A.  cordifolia 
is  peculiar  to  New  South  Wales  ;  A.  intermedia  has  the  widest 
range,  extending  from  Victoria  to  Queensland.  A.  lanceolata  and 
A.  subvelutina  are  found  in  Queensland  as  well  as  in  New  South 
Wales.  They  are  all  well  known  as  "apple  trees"  (although  some 
species  have  other  names  in  addition). 

The  timber  yielded  by  various  species  of  Angophora  is  often 
much  deteriorated  by  "  gum-veins "  consisting  of  kino,  which  is 
usually  disposed  in  thin  concentric  circles,  but  also  in  pockets.  It 
is,  nevertheless,  useful  for  wheelwrights'  purposes  and  for  fuel. 

Angophora  cordifolia,  Cav.,  is  a  coast  district  tall  shrub;  I 
have  not  observed  kino  on  it. 

Angophora  subvelutina,  F.v.M.  This  is  a  fair-sized  tree  ;  kino 
has  likewise  not  been  recorded  from  this  species,  but  this  is  doubt- 
less because  attention  has  not  been  drawn  to  the  matter. 


254  ANGOPHORA    KINO, 

Angophora  Woodsiana,  Bail.,  (Syn.  Queensland  Flora,  Bailey) : 
"Often  containing  large  quantities  of  liquid  red  gum  (kino)  in 
hollows  of  the  timber  like  the  bloodwood  {Eucalyptus  corymbosa, 
Sm.)  "  (Bailey)  ;  used  by  the  settlers  as  a  remedy  in  diarrhoea 
according  to  Dr.  J.  Bancroft. 

Angophora  intermedia,  DC.  This  is  the  species  (and  also  A. 
lanceolata  to  a  less  extent)  which  yields  a  watery,  slightly  astrin- 
gent liquid  when  the  trunk  (particularly  at  swellings)  is  tapped. 
I  have  described  this  substance  under  the  name  of  "liquid  kino  " 
in  a  paper,  Proc.  R.  S.  Victoria,  1889,  p.  82.  It  is  sometimes 
known  as  "  cider,"  and  it  is  worthy  of  note  that  some  country 
people  call  all  liquids  obtained  from  our  native  trees  "  cider," 
whether  they  are  drinkable  or  not. 

A.  intermedia  forms  a  fine  tree,  perhaps  the  handsomest  of  the 
genus.  The  bark  is  fibrous,  hence  the  kino  gets  entangled  in  it 
and  is  frequently  wasted.  I  describe  four  specimens  of  its  kino, 
illustrating  the  variability  of  its  appearance  and  composition. 

1.  From  Colombo  (Lyttelton),  near  Candelo,  N.S.W.,  gathered 
in  June.     Height  of  tree  30-50  ft.,  diam.  2-4  ft. 

This  kino  had  evidently  exuded  some  time  when  collected.  It 
is  of  a  reddish-brown  colour,  and  of  a  brittle  nature.  From  this 
circumstance,  the  small  masses  in  which  it  is  obtained  speedily 
lose  their  bright  fresh  appearance,  assuming  a  colour  very  like 
that  of  ordinary  dried  currants.  It  forms  a  dull-looking  powder 
of  a  pinkish-brown  colour.  Cold  water  acts  slowly  upon  it,  forming 
an  orange-brown  solution  which  may  readily  be  decanted.  The 
abundant  residue  (mainly  consisting  of  Catechin)  crumbles, 
forming  a  compact  sediment  of  an  Indian-red  colour,  and 
containing  a  quantity  of  woody  matter.  It  is  exceedingly  tedious 
to  extract  the  last  portions  of  soluble  matter.  Except  in  regard 
to  tints  of  filtrate  and  residue,  all  Angophora  kinos  behave 
in  the  way  just  described  when  treated  with  water,  and  yield, 
when  treated  with  alcohol,  a  turbid  liquid  with  a  filtrate  of  an 
orange-brown  colour. 


BY    J.  H.  MAIDEN.  255 

2.  Bangley  Creek,  near  Cambewarra,  collected  in  March,  from 
trees  in  diam.  1-2  ft. 

This  is  obviously  a  fresher  sample  than  A.  intermedia  No.  1. 
It  is  so  like  A.  lanceolata  No.  2  as  scarcely  to  be  distinguished 
from  it  in  bulk.  In  water  its  behaviour  is  similar  to  that  of  the 
preceding  sample,  but  the  solution  is  of  a  pale  orange  colour. 

3.  A  second  sample  from  Bangley  Creek,  Cambewarra,  collected 
in  April,  from  trees  height  60-80  ft.,  diam.  1-3  ft. 

It  is  a  very  clean  sample,  is  neither  perfectly  new  nor  very  old, 
is  in  smallish  pieces,  and  of  a  garnet  colour.  On  account  of  its 
friability,  it  can  be  reduced  to  a  light  orange  powder  between  the 
fingers  without  much  difficulty.  The  kino  in  bulk  has  a  slightly 
dulled  appearance,  although  individual  fragments  break  with  a 
bright  fracture. 

4.  From  Eastwood,  near  Sydney,  collected  in  April,  from  trees 
height  80  ft.,  diam.  2  ft. 

This  sample  much  resembles  No.  2.  It  is,  however,  decidedly 
darker  in  bulk,  even  inclining  to  liver-colour,  and  is  somewhat 
opaque.  It  readily  crushes  between  the  fingers  to  a  burnt  sienna 
powder,  slightly  darker  than  the  standard  tint.  It  is  evidently 
the  oldest  of  the  A.  intermedia  samples.  To  water  it  yields  a  rich 
orange-brown  liquid  when  filtered.  With  alcohol  the  filtrate  is  of 
a  dark  orange-brown. 

Angophora  lanceolata,  Cav.  "  Red  Gum,"  "  Orange  Gum," 
"  Rusty  Gum." 

In  collecting  kino  from  this  tree  it  may  be  well  to  remind  people 
that  the  smooth  trunk  might  perhaps  be  mistaken  by  a  careless 
observer  for  that  of  Eucalyptus  maculata,  but  the  two  kinos  cannot 
be  confused  even  by  a  tyro.  I  submit  notes  on  two  kinos  of  this 
species.  This  kino  is  abundant,  and  readily  gathered  on  account 
of  the  smoothness  of  the  bark.  The  tree  obtains  its  vernacular 
names  owing  to  the  kino  stains  on  the  pale-coloured  stem. 
17 


256  ANG0PH0RA   KINO, 

1.  From  Botany,  near  Sydney,  collected  in  March,  trees  50  ft. 
high,  and  1  to  2  feet  in  diameter.  When  freshly  gathered  this 
kino  has  a  smell  somewhat  like  sour  wine,  something  resembling 
that  of  E.  metadata  but  not  so  agreeable.  As  far  as  my  experience 
goes  it  is  quite  characteristic.  The  two  kinos  possess  other 
characteristics  in  common,  one  of  which  is  the  following.  If  they 
be  digested  in  water,  and  the  turbid  liquid  be  treated  with  ether, 
two  ethereal  layers  are  formed,  containing  catechin  in  solution. 
This  substance  may  readily  be  obtained  by  evaporation  of  the 
ether,  and  it  possesses  the  characteristic  odour  of  the  kino  from 
which  it  was  obtained,  the  residue  insoluble  in  ether  being  quite 
destitute  of  odour.  The  odoriferous  principle  (a  volatile  substance 
allied  to  cinnamene  or  styrol)  is,  however,  so  small  that  an  hour's 
exposure  of  the  ethereal  extract  to  the  atmosphere  removes  every 
trace  of  it. 

The  present  sample  had  freshly  exuded,  is  exceedingly  brittle,  has 
a  bright  fracture,  ruby  with  a  tinge  of  brown  ;  colour  of  powder 
orange-brown.  So  brittle  is  it  that  the  lumps  and  vessels  con- 
taining it  become  readily  coated  with  fine  powder. 

In  cold  water  it  dissolves  slowly,  forming  a  liquid  of  the 
colour  of  brown  sherry  if  left  undisturbed.  With  alcohol  it  yields 
a  pale  orange-brown  solution  with  a  slightly  muddy  residue. 

2.  The  Valley,  Blue  Mountains,  N.S.W.,  collected  in  April, 
height  80-150  ft.,  cliam.  1-2  ft. 

The  description  of  No.  1  will  apply  here  with  the  following 
exceptions.  In  bulk  it  is  hardly  so  red  as  No.  1,  while  its  powder 
is  of  a  dark  buff  colour.  To  cold  water  it  behaves  in  the  same 
way  as  No.  1  ;  it  is,  however,  less  turbid  and  lighter  in  colour. 
With  alcohol  it  yields  a  pale  orange-brown  solution. 

The  following  table  shows  the  composition  of  the  kinos  described 
in  this  paper,  and  I  may  observe  that  Angophora  kinos  would  (if 
Eucalypts)  be  placed  in  my  "Turbid  Group." 


BY    J.  H.   MAIDEN. 


257 


ANGOPHORA  KINO. 


INTERMEDIA. 

LANCEOLATA. 

No.  1. 

No.  2. 

No.  3. 

No.  4. 

No.  1. 

No.  2. 

Catechin  and  Tannic  Acid 

77-1 

79  0 

84-2 

81-98 

83  0 

83-75 

Aromatic  substance,  (?)  Cinna- 

mene  (Styrol) 

traces 

traces 

Ligneous  matter  and  other  im- 

purities 

4-4 

42 

•6 

•72 

•4 

•8 

Moisture 

168 

147 

15-1 

16-6 

16-5 

15-35 

Ash 

17 

21 

•1 

•7 

•1 

1 

100-0 

1000 

100  0 

10000 

100-0 

10000 

Tannic  Acid  (Lowenthall 

52-32 

57-4 

59-43 

53-84 

55-37 

50  3 

The  catechin  and  tannic  acid  in  these  kinos  were  determined 
together  by  extraction  with  alcohol.  The  tannic  acid  was 
separately  determined  by  LowenthaPs  process,  on  an  original 
aqueous  solution,  and  the  catechin  estimated  by  difference. 


258  THE    INCISORS    OP    SCEPARNODON, 

THE   INCISOKS   OF   SCEPARNODON. 
By  C.  W.  De  Vis,  M.A.,  Corr.  Mem. 

(Plate  xxii.) 

The  haze  of  ignorance  still  shrouding  the  origin  of  the  teeth  we 
call  Sceparnodon  would  be  lightly  lifted  if  only  we  could  opine 
with  the  author  of  Pt.  5  of  the  British  Museum  Catalogue  of 
Fossil  Mammals,  that  they  grew  in  the  upper  jaw  of  Phascolonus. 
But  even  in  the  realm  of  the  undemonstrable  it  would  be  well  that 
an  explanation  to  be  projected  thence  should  not  wholly  ignore 
the  fact,  intimated  by  Owen,  that  these  teeth  are  not  all  the  same 
teeth ;  well,  also,  that  it  should  not,  in  the  act  of  associating  them 
with  any  mammal  whatever,  raise  a  crop  of  difficulties  for  other 
explanations  to  eradicate.  To  a  waiter  on  reliable  means  of  judg- 
ment it  has  now  become  evident  that  any  attempt  to  refer  these 
teeth  to  an  animal  whose  lower  incisor  is  known  must  end  in 
disaster.  In  other  words,  it  is  patent  that  the  teeth  in  our  collec- 
tions are  not  all,  as  they  are  assumed  to  be,  upper  incisors,  but 
that  they  include  the  teeth  from  both  jaws  of  the  otherwise 
unknown  animal.  Though  the  assertion  is  a  bold  one,  it  is  made 
with  the  diffidence  which  arises,  not  from  any  weakness  in  the 
evidence,  but  from  the  reflection  that  the  means  of  distinguishing 
one  tooth  from  the  other  has  always  been  in  view  of  keen  and 
practised  eyes  yet  has  never  been  recognised.  Turning  to  Plate  1 1 
of  the  Philosophical  Transactions  of  London  for  1884,  and  com- 
paring fig.  5  with  fig.  7,  we  observe  that  the  length  of  the  working 
surface  in  fig.  7,  though  diminished  by  the  absence  of  somewhat 


BY    C.  W.  DE   VIS.  259 

more  than  the  cutting  edge,  is  very  much  greater  than,  in  fact 
nearly  twice  as  great  as,  that  of  fig.  5.  We  are  not  at  liberty  to 
attribute  so  great  a  difference  to  the  accidents  of  function  in  two 
individuals  or  to  specific  differentiation  until  we  have  failed  to 
explain  it  by  reference  to  any  known  rule  applicable  to  the  case, 
and  such  a  rule  we  find  maintained  in  the  conditions  of  the 
working  surfaces  by  all  marsupial  herbivores  having  procumbent 
incisors  in  the  lower  jaw;  in  these  the  long  slope  of  the  lower  tooth 
working  with  reciprocating  action  across  the  comparatively  vertical 
edge  of  the  upper  suffers  abrasion  to  the  extent  of  its  motion. 
Seen  in  this  light,  the  significance  of  the  relative  lengths  of  the 
surfaces  of  abrasion  in  the  teeth  figured  becomes  great,  and  it 
points  to  no  other  interpretation  so  likely  to  be  correct  as  this, 
that  they  are  due  to  the  interaction  of  opposed  teeth.  The 
inferiority  in  the  width  of  the  tooth,  which  from  this  point  of 
view  is  the  upper,  affords  no  ground  of  objection  since  this  is 
simply  a  sign  of  immaturity  ;  the  tooth  is,  as  Owen  rightly  inferred 
from  its  shape,  in  course  of  growth.  On  the  supposition  then  that 
this  identification  of  the  lower  incisor  is  admissible,  the  long  mid- 
rib on  its  concave  side,  in  which  its  describer  is  disposed  to  see  an 
indication  of  specific  difference,  becomes  merely  an  item,  but  an 
important  one,  in  its  diagnosis. 

So  far  we  have  deduced  all  we  can,  and  all  that  is  really  neces- 
sary, from  the  only  figures  of  the  teeth  extant,  and  very  probably 
it  is  not  enough  to  make  good  our  contention.  But  evidence  in 
reserve  shows,  first,  that  the  subject  of  fig.  5  is  really  an  upper 
tooth  ;  secondly,  that  the  characters  presented  by  fig.  7,  length  of 
working  surface,  the  longitudinal  rib,  even  a  peculiarity  in  the 
depression  marked  b  are  constant,  and,  therefore,  as  to  this  tooth, 
we  shall  have  to  choose  between  the  probability  of  its  being  the 
lower  tooth  of  S.  ramsayi,  and  the  improbability  that  it  is  from  a 


260  THE    INCISORS    OF    SCEPARNODON, 

second  species  whose  upper  tooth  is  constantly  abraded  to  an  extra- 
ordinary degree,  the  lower  tooth  in  both  species  being  unknown. 

The  Queensland  Museum  possesses  a  perfect  adult  incisor  of 
large  size  (PL  xxii.  fig.  1) ;  that  this  is,  without  shadow  of  doubt, 
an  upper  tooth  is  certified  by  the  presence  of  the  premaxillary 
bone  which  encases  it  to  a  distance  of  41  mm.  from  its  outlet,  and 
re-appears  distad  as  a  smaller  adherent  portion  from  the  root  end 
of  the  socket.  In  passing  it  may  be  noted  that  the  outer  edge  of 
the  premaxilla,  commencing  near  the  outlet,  folds  over  inwards 
and  downwards,  also  that  its  inner  edge  (17  mm.  in  length)  is 
smooth  and  entire,  showing  no  sign  of  sutural  union  with  its 
fellow,  both  features  foreign  to  the  near  kindred  of  Phascolonus. 
The  working  surface  of  this  tooth  has  the  same  general  length  as 
that  in  Owen's  fig.  5,  namely,  13-5  mm.  The  entire  breadth  of 
the  tooth  being  40  mm.,  or  three-eighths  greater  than  that  of  its 
younger  type,  we  may  gather  that  the  working  surface  did  not,  on 
the  whole,  lengthen  with  age,  a  fact  directly  opposed  to  the 
assumption  that  the  elongately  worn  teeth  are  from  the  same  seat 
of  growth,  and  at  the  same  time  rather  discouraging  than  other- 
wise any  suspicion  that  they  may  have  belonged  to  another  species. 
On  the  concave  side  of  this  tooth  there  is  not  the  slightest  trace  of 
a  median  longitudinal  ridge.  Assuming  for  a  moment  that  the 
subject  of  fig.  7  is  a  cast  of  a  lower  tooth,  its  breadth,  35  mm.,  is 
fairly  proportionate  to  that  from  the  upper  jaw,  40  mm. 

The  upper  tooth  being  ascertained  and  its  characters  definable, 
we  have  to  account  for  those  Sceparnodon  incisors  which  are  not 
at  all  in  accordance  with  it.  And  here  the  writer  must  take 
leave  to  confess  that,  until  the  last  piece  of  evidence  fell  into  his 
hands,  he,  relying  on  authority,  failed  to  appreciate  the  differential 
characters  of  the  teeth  and  casts  under  his  own  observation.  His 
attention  to  the  matter  was  aroused   by  the  appearance  of  the 


BY    C.  W.  DE    VIS.  261 

small  tooth  shown  in  PL  xxii.  fig.  2,  a  tooth  in  a  much  less  advanced 
stage  of  growth  than  that  of  Owen's  fig.  5,  and  so  distinctly  diffe- 
rent from  the  adult  tooth  now  figured  as  to  excite  a  doubt  in  his 
own  mind  as  to  their  specific  co-identity.  The  doubt  vanished  as 
soon  as  the  relative  extents  of  their  working  surfaces  suggested 
community  of  causation  between  them  and  similar  effects  else- 
where. The  length  of  this  surface  in  the  young  tooth  is  31  mm., 
more  than  twice  its  length  in  the  adult  upper  tooth,  but  consider- 
ably less  than  in  the  adult  lower  tooth  represented  by  Owen,  fig.  7. 
Bat  the  breadth  of  the  tooth  itself  at  the  fere  end  is  but  16  mm. 
against  35  mm.  in  the  type  adult,  so  that  its  working  surface  is 
even  longer  in  proportion  to  its  width  than  in  the  adult  state. 
The  identity  of  this  tooth  with  Owen's  subject,  fig.  7,  is  established 
by  the  presence  of  the  longitudinal  rib,  and  the  constancy  of  this 
character  again  is  deduced  from  a  third  appearance  of  it  in  Owen's 
fig.  2.  Tn  the  depression  b  of  fig.  7,  and  of  PI.  xxii.  fig.  2,  infra, 
we  have  a  proof  of  equal  persistency.  One  side  of  the  abraded 
surface  (the  left)  sends  backwards,  as  is  shown  in  the  figures,  a 
tapering  tongue  which  ends  in  a  point  depressed  in  the  outer  edge 
of  this  face  of  the  tooth,  and  more  than  half  of  the  surface  of  wear 
on  the  inner  side  loses  its  smooth  flat  character  posteriorly  and 
becomes  a  coarsely  roughened  depression  which  in  the  young  tooth 
is  seen  to  be  caused  by  the  direct  chopping  impact  of  the  sharp 
edge  of  the  upper  tooth  on  its  surface,  in  which  it  has  cut  distinct 
notches.  A  similar  depression,  accompanying  a  lateral  tongue  of 
abraded  surface  on  the  opposite  side,  occurs  in  the  immature  upper 
tooth  as  figured  by  Owen,  but  the  depression  there  is  small,  smooth 
and  limited  to  the  edge ;  the  surface,  moreover,  has  no  trace  of 
incisive  action  behind  the  regular  surface  of  wear.  There  are  thus 
three  features  constantly  present  in  these  teeth  which  are  absent 
from  the  others,  and  one  of  these  features,  an  extended  area  of 
abrasion,  is  normal  to  the  lower  incisors  of  other  marsupials.  The 
differently  conditioned  teeth  prove  to  be  upper  teeth.     The  plain 


262  THE    INCISORS    OF    SCEPARNODON. 

inference  is  that  their  companions  are  the  corresponding  lower 
teeth. 

The  inference  can  only  be  evaded  by  attributing  them  to  another 
species.  To  effect  this  we  shall  have  to  suppose  either  that  we 
know  only  the  upper  teeth  of  one  species  and  the  lower  of  another, 
a  supposition  which  its  responsible  originator  will  have  to  recom- 
mend by  the  doctrine  of  chances,  or  that  the  second  species  had 
abnormally  long  working  surfaces  on  its  upper  incisors  and  corre- 
spondingly enormous  elongations  of  those  surfaces  on  the  lower 
incisors.  The  probability  of  this  condition  of  things  it  is  hardly 
necessary  to  discuss. 

It  must  be  concluded  that  both  the  upper  and  lower  incisors  of 
Scepamodon  are  known,  and,  consequently,  that  Scepamodon  is 
not  a  synonym  of  Phascolonus. 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    xxn. 

Scepamodon  ramsayi,  Ow. 
Fig.  1. — Right  upper  incisor,  adult. 
Fig.  2.— Right  lower  incisor,  young. 


263 


CONTRIBUTIONS  TO  A  MORE   EXACT   KNOWLEDGE 

OF  THE  GEOGRAPHICAL  DISTRIBUTION  OF 

AUSTRALIAN  BATRACHIA.     No.  II. 

By  J.  J.  Fletcher. 

In  this  second  small  contribution  I  am  able  to  supply  some 
supplementary  details  of  interest,  to  record  several  additional 
collections  from  localities  in  New  South  Wales  west  of  the 
Dividing  Range — as  well  as  two  from  Victoria ;  and  to  give  some 
interesting  facts  kindly  communicated  to  me  by  two  of  our 
members,  about  the  habits  of  several  inland  species  which  town 
residents  rarely  get  the  chance  of  observing  in  the  natural 
haunts.  Though  the  number  of  species  (eighteen)  previously 
recorded  from  the  inland  division  of  the  colony  is  not  increased, 
the  particulars  now  given  offer  additional  evidence  of  wide 
distribution. 

(i.)  The  Coastal  Division  of  N.S.  W.  (East  of  the  Dividing  Range). 

(a  bis).  From  Dunoon,  Richmond  River  (collected  by  R.  Helms). 

Hyla  phyllochroa,  Gthr.  Hyla  gracilenta,  Ptrs. 

During  a  second  visit  to  Dunoon,  early  in  this  year,  Mr.  R. 
Helms  obtained  and  kindly  forwarded  to  me  alive  one  example  of 
the  former,  and  a  number  of  specimens  of  the  latter,  both  additions 
to  the  fauna  of  the  district,  and  the  second  of  them  to  New  South 
Wales  as  well,  the  species  having  been  previously  recorded  only 
from  Queensland  (N.  E.  Australia  and  Port  Bowen  by  Peters  ; 
Rockhampton,  in  B.  M.  Catalogue ;  specimens  obtained  for  the 
Macleay  Museum  by  Mr.  Froggatt  at  Cairns  were  exhibited  at  a 
Meeting  of  this  Society  in  August,  1886).  About  the  same  time 
Mr.  A.  Sidney  OllifF  kindly  handed  over  to  me  two  specimens  of 


264       GEOGRAPHICAL    DISTRIBUTION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    JBATRACHIA, 

the  same  species  from  Grafton,  collected  and  forwarded  by  the 
Right  Rev.  the  Bishop  of  Grafton. 

H.  gracilenta  appears  to  be  another  example  of  species  like 
Chiroleples  australis  and  others  whose  stronghold  according  to 
present  knowledge  is  Queensland,  and  which  find  their  southern 
limit  somewhere  about  the  northern  boundary  of  New  South 
Wales.  It  is  a  very  beautiful  frog  when  alive  ;  the  iris  has  an 
inner  portion  golden  shading  into  a  circumferential  ring  of  bright 
coppery -red  (visible  sometimes  even  in  spirit  specimens) ;  the  body 
above  green  or  yellowish-green  ;  in  the  males  the  throat,  part  of 
upper  arm,  shoulders,  a  line  along  the  flanks  bright  yellow;  the 
under  surface  of  the  body  and  limbs  tinged  with  yellow  ;  the 
back  of  thighs  purplish.  The  "  white  line  on  canthus  rostralis, 
outer  border  of  upper  eyelid,  and  above  the  tympanum  "  of  Mr. 
Boulenger's  description  is  absent  in  my  specimens. 

Mr.  Helms  says  "  this  species  may  almost  be  called  arboreal  ; 
most  of  the  specimens  were  found  on  the  leaves  of  the -arrow-root 
plant ;  during  the  day  time  they  sit  quite  still  with  their  eyes 
closed,  probably  asleep  ;  when  kept  in  the  dark  they  assume  a 
much  darker  colour."  I  kept  some  specimens  alive  for  some  time 
in  a  vivarium  along  with  specimens  of  //.  ccerulea  ;  individuals  of 
both  species  during  the  day  time  were  invariably  asleep,  either 
perched  on  the  leaves  of  an  Arum,  or  adhering  to  the  sides  of  the 
vivarium — to  glass  or  wood  indifferently. 

(d  bis).  From  the  Blue  Mts. 

Hyla  aicrea. 

Four  specimens  of  this  species  were  found  by  me  last  month 
near  Springwood,  the  first  time  I  have  happened  to  meet  with  it 
on  the  Blue  Mts.  In  the  same  locality  in  December  last  Mr. 
Sloane  and  myself  found  two  couples  of  H.  citropus  in  cop.,  in  a 
little  pool  overshadowed  by  a  fallen  tree-trunk  in  a  gully.  This 
is  the  first  time  I  have  seen  this  species  from  anywhere  on  the 
Blue  Mts.,  except  Mt.  Wilson. 


BY    J.  J.  FLETCHER.  265 

(ii.)  The  inland  division  of  N.S.  W.  (  West  of  the  Dividing  Range). 

(m)  From  Goangra  and  Euroka,  near  Walgett  on  the  Naraoi 
(collected  by  Messrs.  A.  Carson,  and  J.  H.  Rose). 

Limnodynastes  salminii  Ilyla  ccerulea 

Chiroleptes  platycephalus  peronii 

Living  specimens  of  all  the  above  were  exhibited  at  the  Society's 
Meetings  in  February  and  March  last.  As  I  then  pointed  out, 
the  stripes  on  the  back  which  in  spirit  specimens  of  L.  salminii 
are  pink  or  rose-red  were  in  the  living  animals  of  quite  a  different 
tint,  a  bright  ochreous-yellow  ;  when  put  into  spirit  subsequently 
the  colour  soon  changed,  the  glandular  fold  from  the  eye  to  the 
shoulder,  and  a  patch  on  each  upper  arm  also  assuming  the  rosy 
tint,  as  well  as  part  of  the  upper  eyelids.  Notaden  also  occurs  in 
the  Walgett  district,  but  specimens  did  not  happen  to  be  procur- 
able at  the  time  the  others  were  forwarded.  Mr.  Rose  has  very 
kindly  furnished  me  with  the  following  particulars  about  this 
species. 

"  Notaden  be?i7ietiii,  the  *  Catholic  frog  '  or,  as  I  have  heard  it 
called,  the  'Holy  Cross  toad'  I  first  noticed  in  January,  1885, 
after  a  heavy  fall  of  rain  lasting  ten  days,  off  and  on,  and  suc- 
ceeding a  long  and  severe  drought.  I  was  living. at  that  time  on 
the  Merri  Merri  Creek,  36  miles  from  Coonamble.  These  toads 
were  then  very  plentiful,  and  seemed  to  come  out  of  the  earth.  I 
have  seen  them  all  over  the  plain  country,  both  on  black  and 
sandy  soil.  Here  at  Euroka  I  have  dug  them  out  of  a  soft  loamy 
flower  bed  in  front  of  the  house  at  a  time  when  the  earth  was 
commencing  to  get  dry;  during  comparatively  dry  periods  they 
disappear,  but  reappear  as  soon  as  a  few  points  of  rain  have  fallen. 
I  can  safely  say  they  were  to  be  founds  here  at  all  times  during  the 
last  twelve  months,  though  at  times  during  the  hottest  part  of 
summer  only  under  logs  and  in  damp  places.  After  a  heavy  fall 
of  rain  in  summer  they  simply  swarm.  I  should  certainly 
incline  to  the  opinion  that  it  is  always  about  if  not  too  dry.  I 
have  seen  it  as  far  south  as  Forbes.     Some  that  I  have  seen  have 


266       GEOGRAPHICAL    DISTRIBUTION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    BATRACHIA, 

been  very  much  lighter  in  colour  than  others  ;  one  could  truth- 
fully have  called  them  yellow.  They  hop  along  with  short  quick 
strokes ;  and  if  teased  or  interfered  with  will  stand  up  with  bodies 
above  the  ground  on  all  fours,  and  puffing  themselves  out  to  an 
absurd  size  will  face  their  tormentor  in  a  defiant  manner." 

"  I  can  verify  the  statement  of  your  correspondent  that  Notaden 
is  partial  to  ants,  for  I  have  repeatedly  unearthed  them,  and  fed 
them  upon  the  wood-destroying  white  ants,  which  they  ate  in 
large  quantities  refusing  however  any  that  were  dead.  I  also 
tried  them  with  the  carrion  ants,  giving  them  eggs,  pupae,  workers, 
and  winged  ones.  The  last- mentioned  were  soon  disposed  of,  the 
eggs  and  pupse  taken  into  the  mouth  and  ejected,  but  the  workers 
they  refused  to  touch.  I  tried  them  with  other  food  such  as 
insects,  grubs,  &c,  but  did  not  observe  them  to  eat  any.  Perhaps 
their  partiality  for  white  ants  explains  their  being  frequently 
plentiful  about  homesteads,  deserted  yards,  and  buildings." 

As  further  confirmation  of  the  fact  that  Notaden  preys  upon 
ants,  I  may  say  that  the  bottle  in  which  eleven  living  specimens 
were  forwarded  to  me  from  Trangie,  as  noted  below,  by  the  Rev. 
J.  M.  Curran,  F.Gr.S.,  contained  on  opening  a  noticeable  quantity 
of  undigested  fragments  of  ants  voided  by  the  toads  while  in 
transit. 

Mr.  Curran  has  also  very  kindly  furnished  me  with  the 
following  observations  : — "  On  two  occasions  recently  I  have 
noticed  large  numbers  of  'Hervy's  frog'  (Notaden  bennettii)  on  the 
Macquarie  River,  about  four  miles  down  stream  from  the  locality 
known  as  the  Macquarie  Cataract.  On  each  occasion  there  had 
been  recent  rather  heavy  rains.  Before  the  rain  no  frogs  were 
visible,  but  after  a  downpour  of  five  hours  the  frogs  appeared  in 
thousands.  On  Monday,  January  26th,  1891,  I  rode  from  the 
Macquarie  to  the  Ewenmar  Creek,  and  for  some  twelve  miles  of 
well-grassed  country  a  dozen  specimens  could  have  been  easily 
collected  at  any  one  place  over  the  whole  distance.  Tuesday  was 
fine,  and  on  the  return  journey  I  did  not  see  a  single  specimen. 
I  noticed  the   same  frogs  plentiful   in   November,    1890,   about 


BY    J.  J.   FLETCHER.  267 

Tenandra  also  after  rain.  The  settlers  say  that  it  was  just  seven 
years  before  that  the  frogs  were  seen  in  such  large  numbers.  I  heard 
on  good  authority  that  the  blacks  used  to  use  these  frogs  for  food. 
I  myself  saw  an  old  gin  seemingly  enjoy  as  a  dainty  morsel  the 
muscular  thighs  of  the  frog,  eating  them  quite  raw  with  a  little 
salt.  They  are  called  Hervy's  frog  from  a  fanciful  resemblance  of 
the  pattern  on  the  creature's  back  to  the  letter  H,  this  being  Mr. 
Hervy's  sheep  brand." 

Notaden  when  alive  is  a  batrachian  of  quaint  and  striking 
appearance  ;  immersion  in  spirits,  however,  very  soon  produces  a 
washed-out  effect,  the  bright  tints  (yellow,  red,  and  green)  being 
entirely  discharged  or  much  bleached  ;  ordinary  spirit  specimens 
thus  quite  fail  to  suggest,  or  at  least  in  the  forcible  manner  which 
the  examination  of  the  living  animal  almost  immediately .  does, 
that  Notaden  is  probably  an  example  of  "  warning  coloration  " 
not  unworthy  to  rank  with  Darwin's  small  Brazilian  toad,  or  Belt's 
now  historic  little  Nicaraguan  frog.  The  dorsal  surface  presents 
a  characteristic  and  very  fairly  constant  pattern  which,  from  the 
inspection  only  of  spirit  specimens,  has  been  described  as  due  to 
the  presence  of  "  a  large  cross-shaped  blackish  marking  on  the 
back  "  (Boulenger)  :  or,  as  Dr.  Giinther  puts  it,  "  a  very  broad 
brownish  band,  marbled  with  black,  along  the  middle  of  the  back  ; 
it  bifurcates  anteriorly  on  the  head,  leaving  the  forehead  greenish, 
and  emits  a  transverse  bar  on  each  side  of  the  back  behind  the 
shoulder  ":  this  constitutes  the  cross-pattern  to  which  are  due  two 
of  the  local  vernacular  names  by  which  the  animal  is  known.  In 
the  lumbar  region,  however,  as  indicated  in  fig.  3  of  PI.  xxn.  of 
the  B.  M.  Catalogue  (2nd  edition),  the  median  band  emits  another 
transverse  band  on  each  side,  whence  arises  the  H-pattern  referred 
to  in  Mr.  Curran's  remarks,  the  H  being  thus  placed  transversely 
with  regard  to  the  animal's  back.  Inspection  of  the  living  animal 
at  once  renders  it  obvious  that  the  characteristic  pattern  is  not 
quite  satisfactorily  expressed  in  the  quotations  given  above. 
Rather  is  it  due  to  an  arrangement  of  very  dark  (black)  not  very 
much  raised  glandular  warts  or  papillae  of  several  sizes,  together 
with  small  isolated  spots  and  patches  of  ferruginous  or  orange-red, 


268       GEOGRAPHICAL    DISTRIBUTION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    BATRACHIA, 

and  in  places  white  spots,  on  a  greenish  background,  the  pattern 
being  thrown  up  and  emphasised  by  contrast  with  sundry  symme- 
trically arranged  insular  areas  free,  or  almost  so,  from  papillae,  and 
of  a  lighter  tint,  bright  yellow  or  greenish-yellow.  The  largest 
warts  for  the  most  part  outline  the  pattern,  and  border  the  insular 
patches  ;  there  is  little  more  than  only  an  anterior  edging  of  them 
in  the  posterior  or  lumbar  limb  of  the  H ;  the  others  with  the  red 
spots  and  patches,  and  in  the  lumbar  band  and  on  the  flanks 
white  spots,  are  scattered  over  the  surface  so  outlined ;  f  rom 
behind  the  eye  downward  and  outward  to  the  shoulder  and  along 
the  sides  and  flanks  on  each  side  is  another  dark  band,  but  with 
fewer,  more  scattered  and  still  smaller  papillae,  some  of  them  parti- 
coloured—black and  white.  Thus  six  areas  wholly  without  warts, 
or  occasionally  with  a  large  one  here  and  there,  are  enclosed, 
and  these,  as  mentioned  above,  are  of  a  lighter  and  yellower  tint : 
two  of  them  are  median,  an  anterior  cruciform  or  dagger-shaped 
one  between  and  behind  the  eyes,  and  a  posterior  coccygeal  narrow 
band,  these  two  representing  the  bifurcation  of  each  end — a  little 
extended — of  the  cross-bar  of  the  IT  :  the  others  are  in  pairs,  an 
anterior  pair  in  front  of,  and  a  larger  posterior  pair  behind,  the 
anterior  limb  of  the  H.  The  outer  surface  of  the  arms  and  legs, 
especially  the  latter,  are  also  spotted  with  red,  and  the  back  of  the 
thighs  with  white  on  a  dark  ground. 

Looked  at  in  the  laboratory,  for  example  in  a  white  dish, 
Notaden  is  brightly  coloured  and  conspicuously  marked  ;  when 
placed  on  the  grass  of  the  lawn,  however,  the  animal  was 
very  much  less  conspicuous,  and  as  long  as  it  kept  still 
even  a  good  observer  unaware  of  its  presence  and  unfamiliar 
with  the  animal  might,  I  think,  have  passed  close  to  it  with- 
out noticing  it.  Nevertheless  there  seems  little  need  to  doubt 
that  we  have  here  a  case  not  of  2^rotective,  but  of  warning  colora- 
tion. The  former  would  probably  have  been  amply  provided  for 
as  in  some  green  tree-frogs,  by  a  more  or  less  uniform  livery  of 
green  or  greenish-yellow,  without  the  elaborate  arrangement  of 
coloured  papillae,  and  specks,  &c.f  which  is  present ;  neither  are 
the  grass-lands  of  the  interior  quite  like  well   kept  city  lawns. 


BY    J.  J.  FLETCHER.  269 

Moreover,  as  implied  in  Dr.  Giinther's  name,  "  not  only  the  skin 
of  the  paratoid  region,  but  that  of  the  entire  hack  is  thickened  by 
numerous  glands  ;"  from  these  there  exudes  under  certain  circum- 
stances a  copious  yellow  secretion ;  Mr.  Rose  tells  me  that  he  has 
sometimes  observed  the  exudation  when  handling  the  toads,  and  I 
noticed  it  in  several  specimens  put  into  spirit,  and  also  in  a  speci- 
men which  had  but  recently  died.  On  the  supposition  that,  as  in 
other  toads  in  which  such  is  known  to  be  the  case,  the  glandular 
secretion  is  acrid  and  renders  the  animal  nauseous  and  inedible 
(except  perhaps  to  blackfellows  who  would  soon  learn  to  avoid  the 
integument  of  the  part  eaten),  and  taking  into  account  also  the 
animal's  habit  of  puffing  itself  out  when  interfered  with,  and  the 
conspicuous  colour  and  remarkable  character  of  the  markings  seen 
at  close  quarters,  it  is  possible  that  not  many  experiments  would 
be  necessary  to  teach  snakes,  predaceous  birds,  or  maybe  some  of 
the  larger  lizards  to  grasp  the  situation.  Such  an  immunity  from 
attack  would  also  render  intelligible  the  unusual  habit — unknown 
as  yet  in  the  case  of  any  other  Australian  frog — of  appearing  at 
times  in  great  numbers  in  the  open,  and  in  the  day  time,  without 
any  attempt  at  concealment,  as  established  on  the  independent 
evidence  of  capable  observers.  This  point,  however,  I  hope  to  be 
able  to  settle  at  no  very  distant  date  by  actual  .experiment. 

Of  Chiroleptes  platycephalic,  Gthr.,  Mr.  Rose  says  "this  frog  is 
also  a  bur  rower  ;  I  have  found  it  in  a  well-formed  hollow  just 
large  enough  to  contain  the  animal  comfortably,  about  one  foot 
underground.  I  have  dug  up  some  scores  of  them,  but  I  never 
found  any  water  in  the  cavities  containing  them  (i.e.  as  Mr.  Aitken 
says  is  to  be  found  in  the  clay  balls  formed  by  certain  frogs  in 
tropical  Australia  in  which  they  sojourn  during  droughts)  ;  neither 
is  the  surrounding  earth  particularly  hard  except  just  in  a  dry 
season  ;  just  now  (May)  the  walls  of  the  cells  are  about  as  hard  as 
potter's  clay  after  the  turning-table  period,  and  before  being  dried. 
I  send  you  a  portion  of  one  of  the  cavities  which  contained  a 
specimen  of  Chiroleptes,  and  from  the  knife  marks  you  will  see 
that  it  was  not  particularly  hard  when  first  found." 


270       GEOGRAPHICAL   DISTRIBUTION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    BATRACHIA, 

Mr.  Rose  kindly  forwarded  me  two  lots  of  living  specimens  in 
tins  of  earth,  and  I  kept  them  also  for  some  time  in  a  vivarium 
with  a  layer  of  earth  on  the  bottom  sufficiently  deep  to  allow  them 
to  burrow  comfortably  out  of  sight.  On  turning  them  out  of  the 
tins  of  earth  in  which  they  came  they  were  found  snugly  ensconced 
in  little  chambers  below  the  surface  ;  the  soil  being  clayey  it 
appeared  to  me  as  if  after  having  reached  the  bottom  of  the  tin 
the  frogs,  perhaps  by  puffing  themselves  out,  and  by  turning 
themselves  round  and  round,  had  succeeded  in  pushing  back  the 
earth,  and  by  pressure  in  puddling  the  clay  to  some  extent,  so 
forming  a  little  chamber  with  firm  walls,  a  supposition  to  which 
the  portion  of  the  chamber  sent  me  by  Mr.  Rose  also  lends  support. 
Those  kept  for  some  time  alive  by  me  were,  except  for  a  short  time  in 
one  solitary  instance,  not  on  view  during  the  day  time.  Partly 
owing  perhaps  to  nocturnal  habits,  and  partly  to  burrowing  habits, 
Mr.  Rose  tells  me  that  he  has  rarely  met  with  them  above  ground 
— once  on  a  wet  night,  and  once  in  the  case  of  a  specimen  which  fell 
into  a  box  let  into  the  ground  from  which  it  was  unable  to  make 
its  way  out.  Like  Notaden  it  has  the  habit  of  puffing  itself  out 
when  interfered  with  ;  and  a  similar  statement  is  applicable  to  a 
specimen  of  C.  australis  referred  to  below.  In  keeping  with  its 
retiring  habits,  C.  rplatycerphalus  is  clad  in  sombre  tints,  which  are 
not  very  seriously  interfered  with  by  the  action  of  alcohol ;  my 
specimens  when  alive  might  have  been  described  as  above  of  an 
olive-grey  or  greyish-brown  much  freckled  with  darker  spots  and 
blotches,  but  without  any  definite  pattern  ;  beneath  white,  the 
throat  of  the  male  slightly  and  finely  dotted  with  darker. 

This  may  perhaps  be  the  species  referred  to  in  a  letter  to  the 
Australasian  of  date  August  2nd,  1890,  as  occurring  on  the  Paroo, 
of  which  the  writer  says  "  all  those  that  I  saw  were  found  not  in, 
or  very  near,  water,  but  at  from  6-12  inches  below  the  surface  of 
the  ground,  each  in  a  cavity  just  large  enough  to  contain  it,  a 
great  peculiarity  being  that  for  several  inches  all  round  the  earth 
was  caked  as  hard  almost  as  a  brick.  Native  name  of  Darling 
blacks  '  cowari.'" 


BY    J.   J.  FLETCHER.  271 

Mr.  Boulenger  gives  as  a  generic  character  of  Chiroleptes  "pupil 
vertical."  In  the  six  specimens  of  C.  platycephalus  already  referred 
to,  and  in  one  of  C.  australis,  from  Herberton,  Queensland — some 
of  which  were  exhibited  at  the  Meetings  of  this  Society  in  March 
and  April  of  this  year — all  examined  alive  and  in  a  strong  light,  the 
pupil  was  certainly  horizontal  and  not  vertical.  My  determina- 
tion of  the  species  may  of  course  be  incorrect,  though  taking  the 
other  characters  into  consideration  I  do  not  think  so. 

No  doubt  most,  if  not  all  our  frogs,  under  stress  of  droughts  can 
or  do  betake  themselves  to  burrowing  when  activating.  This  is 
the  case  for  example  with  Pseudophryne  bibronii,  a  feeble  little 
toad,  and  one  which  is  certainly  not  habitually  a  burrower.  But 
Limnodynastes  dorsalis,  Notaden  bennettii,  Chiroleptes  platycephalic 
and  Heleioporus  pictus  are  habitual  burrowers.  I  have  seen  speci- 
mens of  each  of  these  species  either  actually  burrow  in  earth,  or 
go  through  the  burrowing  motions  in  a  dish  when  I  have  had  them 
under  observation,  in  this  case  evidently  a  little  surprised  at  the 
futility  of  their  efforts;  the  hind  legs  in  burrowing  are  moved 
outwards  and  downwards,  either  alternately  or  simultaneously,  the 
shovel-shaped  metatarsal  tubercle  evidently  coming  into  play.  All 
these  species  have  the  metatarsal  tubercles  of  this  character,  the 
presence  of  which  may  I  think  be  taken  as  prima  facie  evidence  of 
the  burro  wing  propensity  of  their  possessor.  I  have  not  seen  Limno- 
dynastes ornatus  and  Heleioporus  albopunctatus  alive,  but  from 
analogy  these  will  also  probably  turn  out  to  be  burrowers. 

L.  dorsalis,  judging  from  the  abundance  of  croakers,  must  be 
one  of  our  most  abundant  Sydney  frogs  ;  yet  it  is  precisely  one  of 
the  species  of  which  under  ordinary  circumstances  it  is  most 
difficult  to  procure  specimens;  a  condition  which  is  probably 
largely  due  to  its  nocturnal  and  burrowing  habits.  Once  and  only 
once  I  found  a  specimen  under  a  stone  ;  the  only  other  way  in 
which  I  have  obtained  specimens  about  Sydney  is  by  going  into 
the  water  after  them  when  breeding,  individuals  at  such  times 
often  allowing  themselves  to  be  caught  without  much  difficulty. 
On  the  other  hand,  except  in  very  dry  weather,  L.  tasmaniensis 
18 


272       GEOGRAPHICAL    DISTRIBUTION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    BATRACHIA, 

and  L.  peronii  are  generally  obtainable  without  difficulty  always 
in  the  cool  months  sheltering  under  logs  and  stones  ;  and  I  know 
of  no  reason  whatever  for  supposing  that  with  us  they  are  at  all 
addicted  to  burrowing  otherwise  than  exceptionally  and  as  a  last 
resource  for  sestivating  purposes.  Mr.  Rose  tells  me  as  follows  : 
"  I  have  taken  some  notice  lately  of  L.  salminii,  and  I  cannot 
find  that  it  burrows  like  Notaden  and  Chiroleptes;  it  finds  its  way 
under  logs  and  pieces  of  bark,  lying  very  close  but  not  appearing 
to  have  made  any  attempt  at  excavation  ;  the  same  is  true  of  the 
green  frog  (Hyla  ccerulea)." 

(n)  From  Bearbong,  Mundooran,  on  the  Castlereagh  (collected 
bv  Messrs.  W.  L.  Gipps,  and  G.  Macguire,  and  forwarded  to  me 
by  Mr.  F.  A.  A.  Skuse). 

Limnodynastes  salminii  Pseudophryne  bibvonii 

tasmaniensis         Hyla  ccerulea 
Hyla  rubella  (one  specimen,  juv.) 

(o)  From  Trangie   (collected  by  the  Rev.    J.    Milne  Curran, 

F.G.S.). 

Notaden  bennettii. 

Eleven  living  specimens  were  exhibited  at  the  Society's  Meeting 
in  December  last. 

(p)  From  Kiacatoo  Station,  on  the  Lachlan  20  miles  below 
Condobolin  (collected  by  Mr.  T.  G.  Sloane). 

Limnodynastes  salminii  Hyperolia  marmorata 

tasmaniensis        Crinia  signifera 
Hyla  peronii 

(q)  From  Emu  Plains,  Urana,  about  18  miles  from  the  Murrum- 
bidgee  at  Narrandera  (collected  by  Mr.  T.  G.  Sloane). 

Limnodynastes  tasinaniensis        Crinia  signifera 

dorsalis  Heleioporus  pictus 

Hyperolia  marmorata  Hyla  aurea 


BY    J.  J.  FLETCHER.  273 

Heleioporus  pictus  is  not  conspicuously  coloured,  resembling  some 
specimens  of  L.  dorsalis.  The  specimen  sent  me  by  Mr.  Sloane 
when  alive  might  be  described  as  follows  : — Pupil  erect ;  iris 
silvery  or  golden  veined  with  black,  the  anterior  half  with  a  dark 
horizontal  mark  forming  with  the  contracted  pupil  an  incomplete 
cross  (cf.  the  complete  cross  in  Hyla  peronii,  as  already  pointed 
out  by  Dr.  Giinther).  Colour  above  pale  olive  with  darker  spots 
and  patches,  tolerably  uniform  but  lighter  on  the  flanks  and  limbs, 
and  with  a  wash  of  bright  yellow  about  the  thighs  and  upper  arms, 
a  faint  light  vertebral  line  ;  beneath  blotched  on  each  side  of  the 
throat  [no  dark  streak  from  the  tip  of  snout  to  the  eye  in  this 
specimen].  Fingers  free,  toes  fully  webbed,  the  webbing  extending 
to  the  tips  of  the  digits  ;  [Mr.  Boulenger  says  "  toes  two-thirds 
webbed  ;"  in  my  Mudgee  specimen  the  toes  might  be  said  to  be 
about  two-thirds  webbed,  but  I  know  this  specimen  was  put  into 
strong  spirit,  and  I  fancy  the  webbing  is  somewhat  shrunk.]  The 
specimen  is  a  breeding  male,  40  mm.  long  from  snout  to  vent ;  as 
in  Limnodynastes  there  are  two  brownish  rugosities  on  the  inner 
side  of  the  two  inner  digits  of  each  hand ;  inner  metatarsal 
tubercles  black.  Mr.  Sloane  found  the  specimen  lying  very  close 
in  a  small  cavity,  with  only  his  back  visible,  under  a  log  close  to 
the  edge  of  a  swamp. 

We  know  so  little  of  Victorian  frogs  [Professor  McCoy  has 
figured  three  more  or  less  cosmopolitan  species  in  Decade  v.  of  the 
Prodromus  of  Victorian  Zoology;  and  seven  are  recorded  in  Mr. 
Boulenger's  Catalogue,  or  in  the  second  of  two  supplementary  lists] 
that  no  apology,  I  think,  is  needed  for  recording  the  two  following 
collections. 

Crinia  signifera  does  not  appear  to  have  been  previously 
recorded,  though  judging  from  the  presence  of  twelve  specimens 
in  Mr.  Froggatt's  collection,  it  would  seem  to  be  as  common  in 
Victoria  as  elsewhere. 

(a)  From  Benalla,  Victoria  (collected  by  Mr.  T.  G.  Sloane). 
Limnodynastes  dorsalis  Crinia  signifera 

Pseudophryne  bibronii 


274      GEOGRAPHICAL    DISTRIBUTION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    BATRACHIA. 

(b)  From  Ballarat,  Victoria  (collected  by  Mr.  W.  W.  Froggatt). 

Limnodynastes  tasmaniensis        Crinia  froggatti,  Fl. 
Crinia  signifera  Pseudophryne  bibronii 

Hyla  ewingii 

This  collection  comprised  sixty-two  specimens,  of  which  half 
were  tree-frogs  which  I  take  to  be  the  typical  form  of  Hyla 
ewingii,  that  is  to  say,  the  form  which  is  entirely  devoid  of  large 
dark  spots  on  the  flanks,  groin,  or  hinder  sides  of  the  thighs,  a 
species  recorded  from  Melbourne  in  the  B.  M.  Catalogue.  As  the 
statements  made  by  different  authors  as  to  the  characters  and 
distribution  of  H.  ewingii  disagree  in  several  not  unimportant 
points,  I  propose  to  offer  some  remarks  on  this  subject  on  a  future 
occasion.  I  may  here  remark  that  Mr.  Froggatt  brought  me  one 
Hyla  alive  because  of  its  different  appearance  compared  with  the 
others.  It  is  a  beautiful  little  frog,  light  silvery  bronze  above, 
reminding  one  something  of  H.  dentata,  but  with  a  bright  green 
broad  band  down  the  back  (and  specks  of  green  elsewhere),  a  not 
very  well  denned  dark  band  commencing  at  about  the  level  of  the 
shoulder  edging  the  green  on  each  side,  and  another  similar  lateral 
band  on  the  flanks  soon  disappearing.  Whether  this  is  H.  ewingii 
or  a  variety  of  it,  or  whatever  else  it  may  be,  I  leave  for  further 
consideration. 


275 


DESCRIPTION  OF  A  SUPPOSED  NEW  CYSTIGNATHOID 

FROG. 

By  J.  J.  Fletcher. 

Crinia  froggatti,  sp.n. 

Vomerine  teeth  in  two  small  groups  behind  the  choanse.  Snout 
rounded,  as  long  as  orbital  diameter ;  nostril  equally  distant  from 
the  eye  and  the  tip  of  the  snout ;  interorbital  space  broader  than  the 
upper  eyelid  ;  tympanum  hidden.  First  linger  hardly  half  as  long 
as  second  ;  toes  not  fringed  ;  subarticular  tubercles  indistinct ;  an 
inner  small  metatarsal  tubercle ;  no  tarsal  fold.  The  tibio-tarsal 
articulation  of  the  adpressed  limb  reaches  nearly  to  the  eye.  Skin 
above  with  small  scattered  tubercles  on  the  back  ;  beneath  smooth 
except  for  a  triangular  space  on  the  lower  and  hinder  sides  of  the 
thighs  on  each  side  of  the  median  line  which  is  very  granular. 
Colour  (a)  of  spirit  specimens : — greyish  above  with  blackish 
spots  ;  a  blackish  band  on  each  side  from  the  tip  of  the  snout 
through  the  eye  to  above  the  shoulder,  frequently  interrupted  ;  a 
blackish  transverse  patch  between  the  eyes  sending  off  posteriorly 
a  little  on  either  side  of  the  median  line  a  ragged  slightly  divergent 
narrow  longitudinal  stripe  at  length  becoming  broken  up  into 
spots,  sometimes  the  whole  stripe  much  broken  up ;  sides  of  body, 
and  limbs  a  lighter  grey  spotted  with  blackish  ;  lower  surfaces 
dirty  white  the  belly  and  limbs  marbled  or  spotted  with  blackish, 
in  the  males  the  lips  and  throat  also,  the  concealed  surfaces  of  the 
body  (axillae,  groin,  front  and  hinder  surface  of  thighs,  inner  surface 
of  tibiae,  and  upper  surface  of  tarsus)  with  carmine  patches  and 
spots  on  a  black  background  :  (b)  of  living  specimens,  the  whole 
dorsal  surface  is  a  reddish-  or  purplish-brown  obscuring  the  dark 
patch,  bands  and  spots,  disappearing  more  or  less  after  immer- 
sion in  spirit ;  the  sides  of  the  body  greyish-blue  ;  the  lower  surface 
pale  blue  marbled  with  blackish  ;  carmine  spots  and  patches  as 
above,  not  much  affected  by  spirit. 


276       DESCRIPTION  OF  A  SUPPOSED  NEW  CYSTIGNATHOID  FROG. 

Twelve  specimens  from  snout  to  vent  18-26  mm. 

Hab. — Buninyong,  and  Gong  Gong,  near  Ballarat,  Victoria  ; 
common  under  logs  in  valleys  (W.  W.  Froggatt). 

The  specimens  from  the  two  localities  differ  to  some  extent  in 
the  amount  of  the  dark  tint  present  on  the  ventral  surface,  five 
from  Buninyong  being  much  more  spotted  or  marbled. 

This  is  a  third  species  belonging  to  the  section  of  the  genus  in 
which  vomerine  teeth  are  present,  and  it  is  in  some  respects  inter- 
mediate in  character  between  C.  georgiana,  D.  &  B.,  and  C. 
victoriana,  Blgr.  It  resembles  the  former  in  having  carmine 
spots  present,  but  differs  in  having  the  lower  surface  less  granular, 
the  tympanum  quite  hidden,  the  belly  not  immaculate,  no  tarsal 
fold,  and  but  one  metatarsal  tubercle.  On  the  other  hand  it  is  in 
many  respects  allied  to  C.  victoriana,  but  differs  from  that  species 
in  not  having  the  skin  smooth  above  and  below,  as  well  as  in 
pattern  and  colour. 


DESCRIPTION  OF  A  NEW  CONE  FROM  MAURITIUS. 

By  John  Brazier,. C.M.Z.S.,  F.L.S. 

Conus  (Chelyconus)  Worcesteri,  n.sp. 

(Plate  xix.,  fig.  4.) 

Shell  turbinated,  thick,  ventricose  round  the  upper  part,  smooth  ; 
spire  acuminated,  apex  sharp,  with  minute  spiral  striae  below  the 
suture  ;  ivory  white  beneath  a  dirty  yellowish  epidermis,  variegated 
with  four  purple  or  pinkish-brown  bands  flowing  down  here  and 
there  in  flexuous  streaks  or  blotches,  columella  slightly  twisted  ; 
aperture  white,  lip  thin. 

Long  48,  diam.  maj.  25,  aperture  long  39  mm. 

Hab. — Island  of  Mauritius  (Mr.  Robillard). 

The  upper  half  of  this  very  pretty  Cone  shows  four  flexuous 
purple  or  pinkish-brown  blotches,  near  the  base  there  are  three, 
with  the  aperture  uppermost  four  are  to  be  seen,  two  above  and 
two  below. 

The  type  is  in  the  collection  of  Mr.  Worcester,  of  Frankston, 
Melbourne,  Victoria. 


277 


ON  QUEENSLAND  AND  OTHER  AUSTRALIAN   LEPI- 
DOPTERA,  WITH  DESCRIPTIONS  OF  NEW  SPECIES.* 

By  Thomas  P.  Lucas,  M.R.C.S.E.,  L.S.A.,  &  L.R.C.P.Ed. 

I  am  indebted  to  Mr.  G.  Barnard,  whose  collection  I  had  the 
pleasure  of  inspecting  during  a  most  pleasant  visit,  and  to  Mr.  R. 
Turner  for  much  of  the  information  contained  in  this  paper.  By 
their  assistance  I  have  been  able  to  describe  forty-two,  which  I 
believe  to  be  new  species,  and  record  localities  for  other  rare 
species. 

Family  SPHINGID.E. 
Sphinx  Eremophil^e,  Lucas,  "  Queenslander,"  April,  1891. 

As  this  species  is  so  nearly  allied  to  £.  marmorata,  and  as  the 
caterpillars  were  found  feeding  together  by  Mr.  Barnard,  I  repeat 
the  description  here  for  comparison;  the  descriptions  of  both 
were  first  sent  to  this  Society  in  July,  1890. 

gQ.  58-70  mm.  Palpi  grey.  Antennae  grey,  reddish  beneath. 
Head  dark  fuscous.  Thorax  fuscous,  shoulders  and  epaulettes 
grey.  Abdomen  cinereous  grey,  with  a  dark  brown  line  down  the 
centre  of  dorsum,  and  deep  dark  brown  angulated  lateral  lines  ; 
base  of  segments  rich  fulvous  brown,  deep  brown  angular  patches 
extend  from  sides  to  dorsum,  between  base  of  each  centre  segment 
and  next  segment.  Forewings  triangular,  elongate,  costa  nearly 
straight,  rounded  toward  apex,  hindmargin  obliquely  rounded  \ 
fulvous  grey,  with  darker  shadings  and  with  darker  fulvous 
broken  bands,  not  always  clearly  defined ;  1st   band  in   central 

*  The  following  paper  comprises  the  substance  of  two  communications 
read  before  the  Society  in  May  and  August,  1890,  and  now  published  by 
order  of  the  Council. — Ed. 


278   ON  QUEENSLAND  AND  OTHER  AUSTRALIAN  LEPIDOPTERA, 

third  of  wing  at  J  is  shaded  off  toward  base,  and  becomes  diffused 
toward  costa  ;  2nd  and  3rd  bands  rise  from  one  stalk  at  J  to  J 
inner  margin,  which  divides  into  two  in  a  curve  to  J  and  ■§  costa, 
and  in  some  cases  splits  into  three  or  four  bands  on  costa  ;  an 
interrupted  ill-defined  band  rises  at  J  inner  margin,  and  unites 
with  a  darker  band  from  §  inner  margin,  at  first  outwardly,  then 
inwardly,  to  f-  costa  ;  a  lighter  brown  space  separates  this  from 
the  next  band,  which  runs  nearly  parallel  from  J  inner  margin 
to  5  costa  ;  cilia  grey,  brown  at  base  and  on  veins.  Hindwings 
grey-brown  with  shades  of  dark  fulvous,  darker  toward  hind- 
margin. 

Caterpillar  slender,  attenuated  anteriorly  ;  blue  grey,  speckled 
with  grey  ;  stomata  red  ;  dorsal  and  lateral  bands  vermilion-red, 
in  interrupted  patches  ;  tail  black. 

Found  in  large  numbers  by  Mr.  G.  Barnard  at  the  Dawson 
River,  feeding  on  the  Eremoj)hila  Mitchelli,  locally  known  as 
sandalwood. 

Sphinx  marmorata,  sp.nov. 

Q.  60  mm.  Head  grey,  collar  black.  Palpi  blackish-grey. 
Antennae  brown.  Thorax  hairy,  mottled  grey  and  white.  Abdo- 
men ochreous,  dorsal  and  lateral  lines  black,  lateral  lines  connected 
by  dark  black  lines  with  base  of  each  segment,  and  so  forming  a 
square  figure  in  each  segment,  on  either  side  of  dorsum,  or  an 
oblong  of  ground  colour,  which  gives  a  singular  marbled  appearance 
to  the  insect ;  anal  segment  irrorated  grey  and  white  ;  underside 
light  grey.  Forewings  elongate,  triangular,  costa  nearly  straight, 
apex  rounded,  hindmargin  obliquely  rounded  ;  grey,  irrorated  with 
white  near  base,  and  with  fuscous  near  costa  :  two  oblique  fuscous 
diffused  lines  from  i  inner  margin  to  apex  of  costa,  and  from  J 
inner  margin  to  apex  of  hindmargin  :  veins  beyond  first  line  brown, 
four  or  five  black  arrow-shaped  lines  between  veins ;  cilia  white 
with  smoky-grey  spots  on  veins.  Hindwings  light  brown,  light 
ochreous-grey  at  base  :  veins  smoky-grey. 

Caterpillar  attenuated  anteriorly,  glaucous-green,  dorsal  and 
lateral  lines  white,  latter  with   tooth-like  projections  into  each 


BY    THOMAS    P.  LUCAS.  279 

segment  ;  tail  aunulated  green  and  brown.  Found  in  company 
with  preceding  by  Mr.  Barnard  on  Eremophila  Mitchelli.  Five 
caterpillars,  only  one  of  which  matured  to  imago.  Allied  to  *S'. 
Eremophilce,  but  easily  distinguishable  by  marbled  appearance  of 
abdomen,  and  by  darker  colour  and  fuscous  bands  on  wings. 
Duaringa,  Queensland. 

Family  ARCTIAD^E. 

Calligenia  Pilcheri,  sp.nov. 

(JQ.  17-19  mm.  Head  and  palpi  vermilion,  collar  marone-red. 
Antennae  grey,  vermilion  at  the  base.  Legs  vermilion,  grey  on 
under  side.  Thorax  deep  marone-red,  with  anterior  border  behind 
collar  ochreous-yellow,  base  of  epaulettes  yellow.  Abdomen 
vermilion.  Forewings  elongate,  strongly  dilated,  costa  moderately 
arched,  apex  obtuse,  hindmargin  obliquely  rounded  ;  deep  marone- 
red,  with  ochreous-yellow  spots  ;  an  irregular  square  spot  at  i 
costa  extends  to  ^  towards  inner  margin,  costal  half  vermilion  : 
between  this  and  inner  margin  is  a  small  dot  posteriorly  ;  adjacent 
to  it,  from  f  of  inner  margin,  an  irregular  row  of  six  spots  runs  to 
just  before  apex  of  hind  margin,  but  sixth  spot  does  not  touch 
hindmargin ;  the  inner  margin  of  first  spot  is  vermilion ;  a  con- 
spicuous spot  at  §  costa  ;  two  spots  on  hindmargin  in  a  line  with 
hindmarginal  sub-apical  spot  :  cilia  marone-red  tipped  with 
vermilion.  Hind  wings  with  basal  half  vermilion,  posterior  half 
rich  marone-red  ;  cilia  marone  tipped  with  pink. 

Rockhampton  ;  two  specimens,  caught  by  Mr.  Pilcher. 

Calligenia  melitaula,  Meyr. ;  Townsville  (Mrs.  Barnard). 

Asura(?)  bisecta,  sp.nov. 

(J.  18  mm.  Head  velvety-black,  collar  ochreous-yellow.  Palpi 
ochreous-yellow.  Antennae  bipectinated,  black.  Thorax  black 
with  tip  of  epaulettes  ochreous-yellow.  Abdomen  black,  anal  tuft 
ochreous-yellow.  Forewings  elongate,  triangular,  gently  dilated, 
costa  straight,  hindmargin   obliquely    rounded  ;  ochreous-yellow ; 


280       ON    QUEENSLAND    AND    OTHER    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA 

black  at  base  and  with  a  black  band  bisecting  the  wing  from  base 
to  hindinarginal  band  opposite  ^  hindmargin,  and  with  a  dentate 
projection  toward  inner  margin  from  middle  :  a  broad  black  hind- 
marginal  band :  cilia  grey.  Hind  wings  ochreous-yellow,  with 
broad  black  hindmarginal  band,  narrowed  to  a  band  of  black  hairs 
along  inner  margin,  but  more  spread  out  at  base  ;  cilia  grey. 

I  think  this  species  will  have  to  be  made  into  another  genus* 
but  place  it  here  provisionally.  I  caught  one  specimen  while  out 
with  Mr.  Barnard,  who  had  not  seen  it  before. 

Duaringa,  Queensland  ;  in  May. 

Family  HYPSIDJE. 

Nyctemera  secundiana,  sp.nov. 

This  species  of  Nyctemera  was  included  in  Meyrick's  description 
of  N.  tertiana.  I  got  specimens  of  both  species  and  of  N.  crescens 
at  Port  Douglas,  which  I  submitted  to  him.  I  believed  with  him 
at  the  time  that  both  were  varieties  of  one  species,  which  he 
named  new  as  N.  tertiana.  I  now  propose  to  separate  the  type  as 
above  from  the  type  tertiana. 

In  secundiana  the  spot  between  the  eyes  and  the  two  spots  on 
the  collar  are  prominent  and  deep  black  ;  in  tertiana  they  are 
faintly  represented  or  altogether  absent.  In  secundiana  the 
epaulettes  are  longer,  better  developed,  and  the  black  stripes  more 
prominently  shown.  In  secundiana  the  white  blotch  in  the  hind- 
wing  is  more  a  yellow-white  and  occupies  less  than  one-third, 
extending  from  just  before  centre  of  wing  with  \  depth  of  wing 
hindmarginal  border;  in  N.  tertiana  the  whole  of  the  hindwing 
is  more  a  snow-white,  with  an  angular  black  border  along  hind- 
margin  and  costa. 

X.  secundiana  is  common  at  Brisbane,  but  though  I  have  caught 
hundreds  of  N.  arnica  and  N.  secundiana,  I  never  caught  the 
form  with  the  hindwing  so  broadly  white,  and  to  which  I 
propose  to  restrict  Meyrick's  name  tertiana,  in  Brisbane.  Mr. 
Barnard  takes  N.  secundiana  but  never  tertiana  at  Rockhampton. 


BY    THOMAS    P.  LUCAS.  281 

Five  species  of  Nyctemera  run  very  closely.  It  will  be  interesting 
to  obtain  the  history  of  caterpillars  and  food  plants  of  all,  to 
ascertain  if  they  are  non-interbreeding  species,  or  if  they  are  but 
climatic  varieties.      I  may  sum  up  the  five  as  follows  : — 

N.  annnlata — very  black,  two  small  bars  of  dots  in  forewings, 
and  one  small  dot  in  hindwings,  white.     New  Zealand. 

ffi.  arnica — broad  bar  of  white  divided  by  black  veins  in  fore- 
wings,  small  round  white  spot  in  hindwings.  Melbourne  to  Bris- 
bane. 

i\r.  secundiana — broader  bar  of  yellowish-white  in  forewing, 
much  larger  blotch  in  hind  wing.     Brisbane  to  Cooktown. 

N.  tertiana — forewing  as  secundiana,  hindwing  §  white  with 
narrow  black  border.     Mackay  to  Cooktown. 

.V.  crescens — narrower  white  band  in  forewing;  veins  not  black, 
in  male  a  club-shaped  white  mark  in  middle  third  of  wing,  from 
base  outward  ;  hindwings  as  in  tertiana.      Mackay  to  Cooktown. 

Family  SYNTOMIDID.E. 

Hydrusa  recedens,  sp.  nov. 

^2-  1^-16  mm.  Head  orange,  with  a  black  mark  between 
antennae.  Antennae  black.  Thorax  black,  orange  anteriorly,  and 
with  orange  epaulettes.  Abdomen  iridescent,  orange,  with  base 
of  segments  narrowly  velvet  black,  apical  segment  orange,  with 
broader  black  band  at  base,  and  fringe  tipped  with  light  smoky- 
grey  Forewings  black  ;  spots  thinly  scaled,  light  orange,  and 
leaving  the  black  ground  colour  only  as  bands  or  borders  in  three 
series  ;  first,  a  clavate  spot  nearly  touching  inner  margin  at  \  to 
half-way  across  wing,  and  projecting  toward  base  ;  second  series  in 
the  transverse  middle  third,  nearly  touching  inner  margin,  but 
with  a  broad  costal  margin,  divided  by  two  lines  into  three,  a  sub- 
quadrate  costal  spot,  a  small  central  triangular  spot,  a  broader 
triangular  spot  near  inner  margin  ;  third  series  in  posterior  third 
of  wing,  divided  into  three  bar  lines  parallel  to  costa,  costal  one 
longer  than  the  other  two.     Hindwings  black;  spots  light  orange; 


282       ON    QUEENSLAND    AND    OTHER    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

first  spot  thickly  scaled,  occupies  basal  third  of  wing ;  second  spot 
in  posterior  third  of  wing  almost  touching  costa. 
Duaringa  (Mr.  Barnard). 

Group  BOMBYCINA,  Family  HEPIALID^E. 

Porina  Kershawi,  sp.nov. 

(J.  70-80,  9.  108  mm.  Head  and  thorax  ochreous-fuscous. 
Antenna?  ochreous-fulvous.  Abdomen  ochreous-fulvous.  Fore- 
wings  elongate,  costa  slightly  sinuous,  hindniargin  obliquely 
rounded  in  continuation  with  inner  margin,  light  ochreous,  with 
patches  of  fuscous  and  chains  of  creamy-white  spots  and  dots 
edged  with  fuscous ;  costa  dark  fuscous  in  basal  half,  lighter 
posteriorly  ;  a  creamy-white  longitudinal  streak  in  disc  from  base 
to  near  hindniargin,  along  inner  margin  of  vein  7  ;  six  rows  of 
creamy-white  spots,  bordered  with  fuscous  ;  1st  as  a  single  dot  on 
costal  border,  and  a  dot  and  line  on  inner  border  of  discal  streak 
at  1  ;  2nd,  dots  and  short  bars  from  -J  costa  to  §  inner  margin  ; 
3rd  from  costa  at  §  ;  4th  from  costa  immediately  beyond,  and  5th 
immediately  beyond  again  ;  all  as  necklaces  of  bead-like  dots  con- 
verge to  a  point  in  2nd  line  near  inner  margin  ;  6th  line  from  just 
before  apex  of  costa  to  junction  of  inner  and  hindniargin  is  doubled 
at  apex  and  in  middle  third  ;  a  sub-marginal  row  of  dots  of  light 
ground  colour  bordered  by  a  line  of  fuscous  ;  veins  fuscous  :  cilia 
fuscous.  Hind  wings  ochreous-fulvous  ;  veins  browner  fulvous  ; 
cilia  ochreous-fulvous. 

The  9  is  larger,  more  of  a  drab  tint,  and  less  fulvous,  but  the 
markings  are  similar  to  those  in  (J.  In  some  specimens  the  white 
bead  dots  are  absent,  in  others  they  are  only  defined  by  the 
fuscous  line  rings. 

Elthani  and  neighbourhood  of  Melbourne. 

I  have  great  pleasure  in  naming  this  species  after  the  late  Mr. 
David  Kershaw,  a  young  entomologist  in  Melbourne,  from  whom 
I  received  it,  and  who  was  cut  oft'  by  a  too  early  death  from  a 
zealous  and  useful  career. 


BY    THOMAS    P.  LUCAS.  283 

Hectomanes  fusca,  sp.nov. 

(J.  18-20  mm.  Head,  antennae,  thorax  and  abdomen  fuscous, 
or  fuscous-red.  Forewings  elongate,  costa  nearly  straight, 
apex  rounded,  hindmargin  rounded  in  continuation  with  inner 
margin,  chocolate-brown  or  deep  fuscous  ;  costa  darker  fuscous, 
with  a  few  dark  spots  ;  discal  spot  dark  fuscous,  almost  black  : 
cilia  ochreous-fuscous.  Hindwings  smoky-fuscous ;  cilia  as  fore- 
wings. 

£.  26-28  mm.  Head,  thorax  and  abdomen  light  drab  or 
ochreous-brown.  Forewings,  hind  border  more  obliquely  rounded 
than  in  <£,  grey-fuscous  or  dusty-drab — discal  spot  indistinct — a 
number  of  brownish  dots,  only  seen  with  glass,  give  wing  a  dusted 
appearance.     Hindwings  coloured  as  forewings  but  without  dots. 

Moe,  Gippsland,  1000  feet.  Much  smaller  than  H.  simulans, 
Walk.,  from  which  it  differs  in  colour  and  in  entire  absence  of 
any  white  mark  in  disc  ;  the  forewings  are  broader  than  in  that 
species. 

Hectomanes  crocea,  sp.nov. 

(J.  26-28  mm.  Head  and  thorax  mahogany-red.  Antennas 
fuscous.  Abdomen  ochreous.  Forewings  with  costa  gently 
rounded,  hindmargin  rounded,  continuous  with  inner  margin, 
mahogany-red  or  saffron-red  ;  small  black  discal  dot :  cilia  maho- 
gany-red. Hindwings  ochreous-red  or  saffron-brown ;  cilia  as 
forewings. 

Q.  36-38  mm.  Head  and  thorax  a  vermilion  or  brick-red. 
Abdomen  ochreous.  Forewings  more  a  light  vermilion-red,  hind 
margin  obliquely  rounded  to  inner  margin,  discal  spot  smoke 
colour ;  in  some  specimens  a  number  of  smoky-grey  dots  scattered 
over  wing  and  extending  along  hind  and  half  way  along  inner 
margin:  cilia  vermilion-red.  Hindwings  ochreous ;  cilia  vermilion 
red. 

Brisbane. 

The  mahogany-red  of  the  $  and  vermilion-red  of  the  £  distin- 
guish this  as  perhaps  the  most  showy  of  the  genus. 


284      ON    QUEENSLAND    AND    OTHER    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

Hepialus  Daphnandr^e,  sp.nov. 

Q.  80  mm.  Length  of  body  48  mm.  Head  green,  eyes  red. 
Thorax  green.  Abdomen  anterior  third  red,  posterior  |  green. 
Forewings  broadly  dilate,  triangular,  costa  rounded  towards  apex, 
hind  margin  nearly  straight ;  green  with  purple-brown  spots  along 
the  costa,  most  developed  in  middle  third,  numerous  indistinct 
transverse  bluish  short  lines  or  dots  and  forming  a  continuous 
dark  line  broken  between  veins,  from  J  costa  to  h  inner  margin  : 
veins  deeper  green ;  small  hindmarginal  purple-brown  spots 
between  veins  :  cilia  purplish-green.  Hindwings  with  basal  half 
and  inner  half  vermilion-red,  remainder  of  wing  yellow-green  ; 
cilia  olive-green. 

From  pupa  on  Daphnandra  mierantha  ;  allied  to  H.  Scotti, 
Scott. 

Brisbane. 

This  specimen  is,  I  believe,  small ;  other  larvae  were  promising 
to  be  much  larger. 

Hepialus  hilaris,  sp.nov. 

£.  58-62  mm.,  body  34  mm.  Head  green.  Antennae  red. 
Thorax  ochreous-green,  with  dark  green  lines  on  dorsum  and 
sides.  Abdomen  ochreous-green,  with  a  long  orange  tuft  on  either 
side  anteriorly.  Forewings  elongate  sub-trianguiar,  costa  slightly 
sinuous,  apex  sub-falcate ;  hindmargin  rounded  in  continuance 
with  inner  margin,  light  pea-green,  crossed  through  entire  length 
by  bead-like  ring  and  banded  lines  of  milky-blue  and  light 
glaucous-green,  enclosing  ground-colour  spots  and  lines,  giving  a 
very  pretty  mottled  appearance ;  costa  deep  sea-green  ;  a  row  of 
creamy -silvered  spots  from  opposite  |  costa,  but  not  touching 
costa,  to  vein  2  opposite  middle  of  inner  margin  ;  a  faint  row  of 
bead-like  milky-blue  rings  from  f  costa  to  §  inner  margin,  a 
lunulated  dentate  like  colour  line  immediately  beyond  and 
another  sub-marginal  with  lunules  concave  and  opposite  to  these  : 
cilia  olive-green.     Hindwings  milky-blue  :  cilia  olive-green. 


BY    THOMAS    P.  LUCAS.  285 

9-  75-90  mm.,  body  45  mm.  Head  and  thorax  green.  Antennae 
red.  Abdomen,  anterior  half  red,  posterior  half  green.  Forewings 
pea-green,  hindmargin  very  obliquely  rounded ;  costa  dotted  with 
short  purplish-red  bars  and  dots,  and  hind  and  inner  margins  bor- 
dered with  purplish-red  line,  interrupted  near  apex  by  veins  ;  pea- 
green,  and  covered  with  narrow  diffused  rings  of  sea-green  between 
veins,  which,  in  contrast  to  the  enclosed  ground-green,  gives  the 
appearance  of  a  tessellated  pavement.  This  is  more  distinct  and 
regular  in  posterior  half,  and  is  more  irregular  and  faintly  marked 
towards  base.  Two  small  discal  spots  of  white,  surrounded  by 
purple-brown  border  lines,  obliquely  to  each  other  at  opposite  § 
costa  :  cilia  ochreous-purple.  Hindwings  salmon-pink,  apex  of 
wing  and  hindmargin  light  olive-green ;  cilia  olive-brown. 

Gippsland  ;  in  stems  of  wattle  and  other  trees ;  allied  to  H. 
Scotti,  Scott. 

Family  LIPARID^. 

Teara  togata,  sp.nov. 

<J.  40  mm.  Head  ochreous-brown.  Palpi  ochreous-brown, 
tipped  with  lighter  brown.  Antennae  ochreous,  pectinations 
fuscous.  Thorax  rich  ochreous-brown.  Abdomen  black,  tipped 
with  a  fringe  of  ochreous-brown.  Forewings  with  costa  rounded 
from  § ,  hindmargin  obliquely  rounded,  inner  margin  from  base  to 
§ ,  a  large  discal  spot,  and  hindmarginal  fourth  of  wing  ochreous- 
brown,  remainder  of  wing  shining  purple-grey :  cilia  light  ochreous- 
brown.  Hindwings  light  ochreous-brown,  darker  toward  base  and 
inner  margin  ;  cilia  as  forewings. 

Allied  to  T.  Bdwardsi,  Newm.,  and  to  T.  albidescens,  but 
readily  distinguished  by  the  purple-grey  which  shades  forewings 
as  a  toga  cloak. 

Brisbane  ;  two  specimens. 

Teara  fimbriata,  sp.nov. 

<J.  24  mm.  Head  light  creamy-drab.  Palpi  blackish-brown, 
tipped  with  creamy-white.      Antennae  fuscous.     Thorax  fuscous. 


286       ON    QUEENSLAND    AND    OTHER   AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

Abdomen  light  creamy-drab.      Forewings,  costa   rounded,  hind- 
margin    rounded ;    purple-grey,   shining   and   darker   posteriorly, 
bordered  by  an  indented   hind  marginal  yellow  band  or  fringe : 
cilia  yellow.     Hind  wings  and  cilia  creamy-drab. 
Brisbane  ;  one  specimen  ;  May,  1890. 

Darala  expansa,  sp.nov. 

Q.  118  mm.  Head  and  antennae  creamy-ochreous,  collar  black. 
Palpi  brown.  Thorax  drab,  white,  downy,  resembling  wool. 
Abdomen  light  fawn-colour  with  a  ridge  of  light-coloured  long 
hairs  round  base  of  each  segment.  Forewings  triangular,  broadly 
dilate ;  costa  rounded,  apex  very  acute,  hind  margin  rounded  ; 
fuscous  with  irrorations  of  red  or  fuscous,  and  light  fuscous  and 
creamy-red  scales ;  basal  fifth  drab-white  or  wool-colour,  bordered 
by  a  smoke-colour  line  from  -(V  costa  to  ^  inner  margin ;  a  con- 
spicuous rich  black  line  from  J  costa  to  §  inner  margin,  bordered 
posteriorly  by  a  wool-colour  suffused  line ;  the  ground-colour 
between  1st  and  2nd  lines  is  a  darker  fuscous,  relieved  with 
smoky-grey  and  brown  suffusions ;  discal  spot  large,  just  before 
centre  of  wing  at  1  from  costa,  creamy  ochreous,  bordered  with 
black  ;  a  broad  suffused  band  of  reddish  cream-colour  beyond  2nd 
line,  bordered  posteriorly  by  wavy  crenulate  undefined  line  of 
diffused  brown,  which  suffusion  extends  to  hindmargin ;  hind- 
marginal  line  and  cilia  smoky-brown.  Hindwings  ochreous-brown 
for  basal  fourth  ;  creamy-ochreous  to  nearly  J  ;  a  broad  brown- 
ochreous  band  beyond  ^,  bordered  anteriorly  with  brown  line  and 
posteriorly  with  deep  rich  black  line  and  a  black  suffusion ;  a 
creamy-red  band,  suffused  with  smoky-brown  scales,  and  bordered 
posteriorly  by  a  wavy  crenulate  black-brown  line,  and  by  a  dark 
brown  suffusion  with  smoke-colour  scales  to  hindmargin ;  black 
patch  on  inner  margin  at  \  ;  cilia  smoky-brown. 

Dawson  River ;  one  specimen  (Mr.  G.  Barnard). 

Darala  magnifica,  sp.nov. 
^.   70  mm,  9.  100  mm.       £.  Head  black,  face  grey.      Palpi 
black.       Antenna?   white,   pectinations    black.       Thorax    brown, 


BY    THOMAS    P.  LUCAS.  287 

covered  with  orange  and  white  hairs,  and  posteriorly  by  a  tuft  of 
orange-tipped  hairs  on  either  side  and  with  two  small  tufts  of 
black  and  orange-tipped  hairs  on  dorsum.  Abdomen  ferruginous- 
orange,  and  with  extreme  tip  and  underside  white ;  legs  black, 
femora  with  yellow  spot  on  tip.  Forewings,  costa  rounded  toward 
apex,  hindmargin  rounded,  grey  with  black  markings  and  snow- 
white  irrorations  and  diffusions ;  five  transverse  black-brown 
fascia?,  more  or  less  interrupted  ;  1st  from  \  costa  to  near  inner 
margin  at  £  ;  2nd  immediately  beyond  ;  3rd  at  h  costa,  toward 
hindmargin,  then  deflexed  and  nearly  straight  across  middle  of 
wing  to  J  inner  margin,  this  the  broadest  and  richest  coloured  ; 
4th  immediately  beyond  ;  5th  beyond  this  again,  but  interrupted 
and  indistinct  toward  costa  and  toward  inner  margin  ;  there  is  an 
irregular  dentate  crenulate  interrupted  hindmarginal  fascia  from 
just  before  apex  of  costa,  to  just  before  anal  angle  of  inner  margin; 
there  is  a  black  patch  on  costa  at  -1-,  which  is  diffused  into  narrow 
lines,  which  disappear  on  wing  ;  a  rich  black-brown  band  starts 
from  1st  transverse  fascia  at  \  from  costa,  and  runs  nearly  parallel 
with  costa  to  \  hindmargin  ;  it  contains  a  small-snow-white  discal 
spot  as  it  crosses  2nd  fascia,  and  a  large  white  discoidal  spot  as  it 
crosses  3rd  fascia  ;  a  similar  band  starts  from  1st  transverse  fascia 
at  \  from  inner  margin  and  runs  parallel  with  inner  margin  to  i 
hindmargin ;  between  this  and  the  sub-costal  band  3  parallel  grey- 
brown  bands  occupy  the  space  between  the  veins  :  cilia  brown, 
white  opposite  the  veins.  Hindwings  brown,  with  grey  and 
smoky-white  along  outer  half  of  veins,  and  along  anal  third  of 
inner  margin ;  some  orange  diffused  hairs  near  inner  margin ;  cilia 
as  in  forewings.  Underside  grey,  with  ferruginous  in  basal  half 
of  forewings,  and  towards  costa,  with  rich  black-brown  band  from 
^  costa  of  forewings  to  h  inner  margin  hindwings,  where  it  is  lost  in 
black  suffusion.  Discal  and  discoidal  spots  are  large  on  forewings, 
discal  spot  is  small  and  white  on  band  in  hindwings ;  light-grey 
bands  stretch  across  J  to  J  of  both  wings. 

9  is  larger,  brown  on  face,  the  white  hairs  on  head  and  thorax 
completely  hide  the  ground-colour ;  the  abdomen  is  ferruginous 
rather  than  orange  ;  the  forewings  are  irrorated  and  suffused  with 
19 


288       ON    QUEENSLAND    AND    OTHER   AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

white  in  basal  third,  and  through  posterior  J  ;  the  middle  third  of 
hind  wings  is  suffused  with  grey  and  white  as  a  broad  dentate 
fascia. 

Dawson  River,  Queensland. 

This  beautiful  species  was  brought  to  Mr.  Barnard,  Dawson 
River,  by  the  blacks,  who  found  caterpillars  and  chrysalises  under 
bark  of  trees.  I  obtained  a  series  of  chrysalises  of  an  allied  species 
some  years  ago  under  the  bark  of  a  large  gum  tree  near  Deniliquin, 
N.S.  Wales.  Butler  named  the  moth  D.  stygiana,  and  remarked 
that  it  was  the  finest  species  yet  discovered.  The  species  here 
described  is  half  as  large  again  as  D.  stygiana. 

Darala  asciscens,  sp.nov. 

£Q.  96-110  mm.  Head  brown  tinted  with  grey.  Palpi  black. 
Antennae  black.  Thorax  black.  Abdomen  black,  with  brown 
diffused  laterally  and  posteriorly,  grey  on  under  surface.  Fore- 
wings,  costa  rounded  near  apex,  hindmargin  nearly  straight,  smoky- 
grey  with  black  markings  and  free  irrorations  of  ashy-grey ;  an 
irregular  wavy  tortuous  narrow  fascia,  brown-black,  from  ^  costa 
to  \  inner  margin  ;  the  ground  colour  from  this  to  base  of  wing  is 
lighter  drab-brown  posteriorly,  and  as  far  as  a  rich  black  band 
extending  from  J  costa  to  f  inner  margin  the  ground-colour  is  a 
darker  grey,  and  is  crossed  irregularly  near  its  anterior  border  by 
irregular  interrupted  patches  of  dark  fascia ;  on  anterior  border 
of  the  black  band  at  J  from  costa  is  a  prominent  round  white 
discal  spot,  bordered  with  black  ;  from  4  costa  to  J  inner  border 
a  narrow  rich  black  sinuous  line  is  bordered  posteriorly  with  a 
more  or  less  defined  white  line,  another  waved  denticulate  blackish 
line  from  just  before  apex  of  costa  to  just  before  anal  angle  of 
inner  margin  is  bordered  anteriorly  by  a  conspicuous  white  line  : 
cilia  brown-grey.  Hindwings  drab,  lighter  toward  base,  and 
crossed  by  darker  band  |  costa  to  £  inner  margin,  and  by  3  wavy 
dentate  lines  at  J,  the  anterior  smoky-grey,  the  middle  lighter 
grey,  and  the  posterior  one  white-grey ;  cilia  as  forewings. 
Underside  light-grey  with  a  brown  band  across  both  wings,  from 


BY    THOMAS    P.  LUCAS.  289 

\  costa  fore  wing  to  \  inner  margin  of  hind  wing ;  a  2nd  line, 
more  sinuous,  from  f  costa  of  forewing  parallel  with  hindraargin 
of  both  wings  to  £  inner  margin  hindwing.  On  front  wing  a 
brown  dot  is  bordered  by  black  and  a  conspicuous  white  spot  is 
bordered  by  black  ;  on  hindwing  there  are  two  brown  spots. 

The  9  is  slightly  larger  than  £  and  somewhat  lighter. 

Dawson  River  (Mr.  Barnard).  Allied  to  D.  magnified.  The 
cocoon  is  different,  being  as  Mr.  Barnard  says  a  hanging  cocoon, 
whereas  that  of  D.  magnified  is  spun  on  to  inner  side  of  bark 
through  its  whole  length. 


Darala  linearis,  sp.nov. 

Q.  60  mm.  Head,  palpi,  antenna?,  thorax,  and  abdomen  light 
cinnamon-brown.  Eorewings,  costa  slightly  wavy,  apex  slightly 
falcate  ;  hindmargin  rounded,  shining  cinnamon-brown  sparingly 
dotted  with  scattered  black  points,  and  seven  or  eight  straight  trans- 
verse smoky-brown  lines  and  fascise ;  two  wavy  lines  at  J  are  more 
or  less  indistinct,  and  more  or  less  run  into  each  other  ;  a  sinuous 
line  at  J  is  well  marked  and  contains  an  indistinct  small  black 
•discal  spot  at  J  from  costa;  another  line  at  ±  and  one  immediately 
beyond  are  distinct,  but  faint ;  a  very  deep  smoke-coloured  band 
at  I  costa  to  §  inner  margin  is  bordered  anteriorly  by  narrow 
edgiug  of  orange-brown,  and  suffused  posteriorly  into  a  deeper  shade 
of  ground  colour,  where  it  forms  an  indistinct  bounding  line;  a  sub- 
marginal  line  is  faintly  marked  ;  an  indistinct  black  discoidal 
spot  just  before  band  at  one-third  from  costa  :  cilia  cinnamon- 
brown,  darker  at  base.  Hind  wings  coloured  as  forewings,  but 
not  shiny ;  a  smoky  line  at  \  indistinct,  a  well-marked  smoke- 
colour  band  at  h  ',  a  broad  smoke-colour  fascia  or  suffusion  from  ■} 
to  near  apex  of  costa,  narrowing  to  one  half  its  expansion  toward 
inner  border  near  anal  angle ;  a  series  of  minute  sub-marginal 
black  dots  on  veins ;  cilia  as  forewings. 

Mackay  ;  one  specimen  (Mr.  R.  Turner.) 


290      ON    QUEENSLAND    AND    OTHER    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA 

Darala  succinea,  sp.nov. 

(JQ.  65-90  mm.  Head,  palpi,  antennae,  thorax,  and  abdomen 
amber-coloured.  Legs  black-brown.  Forewings,  costa  nearly 
straight,  hindmargin  obliquely  rounded,  amber-coloured  ;  some 
specimens  have  a  reddish  tint,  with  smoky-black  markings ;  an 
irregular  diffused  line,  lunulated  in  middle  3rd  toward  hind- 
margin  from  £  costa  to  \  inner  margin  ;  a  small  smoke-colour 
discal  spot  beyond  the  middle  of  wing  \  from  costa  ;  a  straight 
red  line  curved  inwards  at  costa  from  near  £  costa  to  J  inner 
margin  ;  immediately  beyond  and  parallel  is  a  crenulate  smoke- 
colour  line  deepened  into  a  spot  on  the  veins  :  cilia  ochreous- 
brown.  Hindwings  as  forewings,  first  smoky  line  and  red  line 
less  distinct,  second  smoky-colour  line  very  defined ;  cilia  as 
forewings. 

The  Wimmera,  Victoria  ;  taken  by  Mr.  Hill. 

Darala  scortea,  sp.nov. 

<J.  62,  £.  82  mm.  Head,  antenna?,  thorax,  and  abdomen  in 
£  ochreous-brown  or  the  colour  of  chamois  leather,  in  £  lighter 
chamois  tint.  Palpi  in  £  black-brown,  in  £  light  chamois  tint.# 
Legs  in  $  black-brown,  in  Q  colour  of  body,  head  of  femur  in 
both  with  a  snow-white  spot.  Forewings,  costa  rounded  toward 
apex,  hindmargin  rounded,  in  £  colour  and  appearance  of  chamois 
leather,  in  9  of  a  lighter  more  ochreous  shade  :  an  indistinct 
diffused  smoky  line  at  \  and  another  at  1  costa,  interrupted 
toward  each  other  at  \  from  costa,  whence  they  proceed  as  one 
line  wavy  and  interrupted  to  1  inner  margin,  and  thence  to  -J 
inner  margin  of  hindwings  ;  a  pale  fuscous  discal  spot  in  posterior 
line  and  another  more  distinct  beyond  middle  of  wing  at  .1  from 
costa ;  a  crenulate  smoke-colour  line  pointed  on  veins,  and 
bordered  posteriorly  with  red  from  |-  costa  to  |  inner  margin  : 
immediately  beyond  this  a  crenulate  smoky-colour  line,  darker  at 
veins,  and  diverges  further  apart  toward  inner  margin :  cilia 
reddish-brown.     Hindwings   as  forewings,  with   the  two   median 


BY    THOMAS    P.  LUCAS.  291 

lines  from  f  costa  to  close  to  first  line  at  J  inner  margin  ;  cilia 
as  fore  wings. 

Balranald,  N.S.  Wales  ;  two  specimens.' 

Allied  to  D.  succinea,  bnt  of  a  different  texture,  having  a 
leathery  appearance,  and  with  the  transverse  lines  differently 
coloured  and  arranged. 

Darala  rubriscripta,  sp.nov. 

£.  53  mm.  Head,  antennae,  thorax,  abdomen  brownish-yellow. 
Palpi  light  fuscous  tipped  with  cream-white.  Forewings,  costa 
gently  rounded,  hindmargiu  rounded,  brownish-yellow  with  shade 
of  ochreous  :  four  lines  or  fasciae  deep  gamboge-brown,  1st  from 
near  base  of  costa  for  a  short  distance  along  costa,  thence  as  an 
indistinct  crenulate  circular  line  to  \  inner  margin,  a  broad 
gamboge-brown  band  stretches  from  this  first  line  along  costa  to 
beyond  J,  thence  as  a  dentate  circular  line  to  near  centre  of  wing, 
where  it  winds  again  toward  base  and  runs  to  inner  margin  at  1, 
costal  half  dark,  inner  half  paler  :  a  deep  gamboge-brown  line 
from  a  blotch  at  f  costa  to  f  inner  margin  :  immediately  beyond 
this  and  parallel  is  a  light  yellow-brown  line,  and  beyond  it  again, 
a  row  of  indistinct  brown  dots  on  the  veins  :  cilia  ochreous- 
brown.  Hindwings  coloured  as  forewings  with  three  bands,  1st 
at  I  indistinct,  2nd  at  J  a  plain  line,  3rd  at  §  crenate. 

Mackay  (Mr.  R.  Turner.) 

DarAla  rosea,  sp.nov. 

(J.  3  2  mm.  Head,  palpi,  antennae,  thorax,  and  abdomen 
orange,  thorax  more  tinted  with  rose-red,  abdomen  less  so,  tip 
cream-colour.  Forewings,  costa  nearly  straight,  hindmargin 
rounded,  orange-drab,  with  rose-red  on  the  veins  and  minute 
black  dots  between  veins  :  a  dark  line  from  near  base,  crossed  by 
indistinct  transverse  smoky  line  at  ^,  and  extending  to  J  centre 
of  wing,  where  it  touches  a  smoky-colour  fascia  extending  from 
|  costa  to  jj  inner  margin :  a  sub-marginal  fascia  smoky-black 
mixed  with  rose-red  on  veins  :    cilia   cream-colour.     Hindwings 


292       ON    QUEENSLAND    AND    OTHER    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

orange,    tinted    with    rose-red ;    cilia    cream-colour.      The    9    *s 
slightly  larger,  but  similar. 

I  had  a  pair  from  Cooktown,  but  have  lost  the  $.  The  rose- 
red  veius  render  this  species  very  distinct  and  beautiful. 

Family  SATURNID^E. 

AntherjEA  Loranthi,  sp.nov. 

<$Q.  100-145  mm.  Head,  antenna?,  thorax,  and  abdomen  deep 
chocolate-brown.  Collar  deep  smoky-brown.  Forewings  with 
costa  rounded,  apex  rounded,  hindmargin  wavy,  oblique,  deep 
chocolate-brown.  Costa  at  base  deep  smoky-brown,  in  a  line  con- 
tinuous with  collar,  and  gradually  thinning  out  to  §  ;  discal  ring 
in  some  specimens  rather  angulated,  ovoid  to  rhomboid,  consisting  of 
a  fine  line  externally  black  on  outer  border,  brown  on  inner  border, 
and  lined  on  inner  border  with  lighter  brown,  and  an  inner  dark- 
brown  ring  lining  outer  border,  which  stretches  for  §  towards 
inner  border  and  contains  a  lighter  shade  within ;  a  broad  band 
from  f  costa  to  §  inner  margin,  deep  smoke-colour  with  lighter 
smoky-grey  on  either  border  :  cilia  chocolate-brown.  Hindwings 
coloured  as  forewings  ;  discal  rings  more  rounded,  darker  exter- 
nally with  lining  of  smoky-grev  ;  a  narrow  band  from  j  of  inner 
margin,  in  some  few  specimens  smoky-grey,  in  most  simply  a 
darker  ground-colour  and  almost  obsolete,  curving  parallel  to  hind- 
margin  toward  §  costal  margin,  but  in  all  cases  losing  its  smoky- 
colour  and  in  most  becoming  obsolete  before  reaching  costa. 
Undersurface  plain  brown  with  discal  rings  as  upper  surface,  and 
with  veins  prominent  and  brown. 

Brisbane  to  Duaringa. 

About  a  dozen  years  ago  or  more  Mr.  Illidge  climbed  a  eucalypt 
tree,  40  yards  high,  on  the  bank  of  the  Brisbane  river  on  what  is 
now  known  as  the  North  Quay.  He  succeeded  in  obtaining  a 
congregation  of  some  40  or  50  hard  woody  cocoons  on  a  large  plant 
of  mistletoe,  and  was  fortunate  to  breed  out  a  good  harvest 
of  this  moth.     One  specimen,  Mr.  Edwards  informs  me,  found  its 


BY   THOMAS    P.  LUCAS.  293 

way  to  the  British  Museum,  and  is  there  labelled  A.  Eucalypti. 
Mr.  Illidge distributed  his  find  to  the  Museum  and  toothers.  Mr. 
Barnard  and  his  sons  at  Duaringa  also  found  this  fine  species 
feeding  on  Loranthus.  It  is  thus  necessarily  a  gregarious  species, 
and  in  its  habits,  character,  and  in  fact  in  all  points  differs  from 
A.  Eucalypti.  It  comes  near  to  A.  Banksii,  Leach,  or  A.  Helence, 
Scott. 

A.  intermedia,  Luc,  may  be  a  climatic  variety  of  A.  Helence, 
but  it  is  not  nearly  so  large  nor  leathery  as  the  Newcastle  type. 

Group  GEOMETRINA,  Family  GEOMETRIDiE. 
lODIS  IMPLICATA,  Sp.nOV. 

9.  28  mm.  Head  blue,  fillet  white.  Palpi  grey.  Antennae 
red  above,  ochreous  beneath.  Thorax  blue-green.  Abdomen 
blue-green,  laterally  and  posteriorly  ochreous-green.  Forewings, 
costa  straight,  rounded  before  apex,  hindmargin  gently  rounded, 
dull  blue-green,  freely  covered  with  faintly  marked  short  trans- 
verse ochreous  strigulse  ;  costa  narrowly  ochreous ;  two  pale 
ochreous-green  lines,  first  line  from  A  costa,  angled  outward  near 
costa  to  j  inner  margin  ;  second  line  from  f  costa  to  f  inner 
margin :  cilia  ochreous.  Hindwings  as  forewings  in  colour, 
strigulae,  &c;  first  line  from  £  costa  as  far  as  vein  4  opposite  J 
inner  margin  ;  second  line  from  ^  costa  bent  round  on  vein  3, 
parallel  to  hind  border  to  §  inner  margin ;  cilia  ochreous,  on 
inner  margin  blue-grey. 

Rockhampton ;  one  specimen  (Mr.  Barnard).  Allied  to  /. 
ocyptera,  Meyr. 

lODIS    BARNARDiE,  Sp.nOV. 

$Q.  11-15  mm.  Head  rufous-brown,  fillet  white.  Palpi  brown. 
Antennae  white,  pectinations  carmine.  Thorax  yellow  in  front, 
becoming  greener,  light  green.  Abdomen  light  green,  ochreous 
beneath.  Legs  light  brown,  ochreous  on  under  side.  Forewings, 
costa  nearly  straight,  hindmargin  rounded,  light  green  :  an  indis- 
tinct milky  rounded  line  from  J  costa  to  J  inner  margin  :  beyond 


294       ON    QUEENSLAND    AND    OTHER   AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

this  at  J  from  costa  a  minute  brown  discal  spot:  a  second  milky 
line  from  |  costa  to  j  inner  margin  :  a  dentate  hindmarginal  line 
deep  purple-red  :  cilia  grey,  base  purple-red.  Hindwings  as  fore- 
wings,  with  first  line  wanting,  discal  spot  very  minute,  second 
line  J  costa  to  §  inner  margin  j  hindmarginal  line  a  series  of 
purple-red  spots  ;  cilia  as  forewings. 

I  took  a  specimen  at  Duaringa  station,  beaten  out  of  a  wattle 
bush  in  May.  I  found  Mr.  Barnard  had  a  pair  in  his  collection 
unnamed.  I  am  pleased  to  dedicate  the  species  to  Mrs.  Barnard, 
who  is  so  greatly  aiding  entomological  science  by  her  illustrations 
of  life-history,  larvae,  imago  and  food  plant.  I  have  this  season 
obtained  one  specimen  at  Brisbane. 


IODIS    CRENULATA,  Sp.llOV. 

£.  20  mm.  Face  red-brown,  fillet  and  crown  wool-colour 
white,  posteriorly  reddish-tinged.  Palpi  red,  terminal  joint 
ochreous-white.  Antenna?  white,  pectinations  ochreous-grey. 
Thorax  olive-green,  shoulders  red-brown.  Abdomen  olive- 
green,  underside  whiter.  Forewings  with  costa  nearly  straight, 
hindmargin  obliquely  rounded,  olive-green  j  costa  with  a  broad 
ochreous  line  attenuated  to  apex  and  bounded  posteriorly 
by  an  orange-ochreous  line,  broadened  at  the  base  ;  five  crenulate 
ochreous-green  lines  and  parallel  with  hindmargin  are  arranged  in 
two  groups ;  the  first  line  is  from  i  costa  to  -I  inner  margin,  the 
second  line  is  immediately  beyond,  just  beyond  which  again  and 
almost  touching  at  J  from  costa  is  an  indistinct  smoke-colour 
discal  spot ;  the  second  group  begins  with  the  3rd  line,  which  runs 
from  §  costa  to  §  inner  margin,  immediately  beyond  which  is  the 
4th  line,  and  again  the  5th  line,  contiguous  but  not  touching : 
cilia  ochreous  tinged  with  red.  Hindwings  with  colour,  the  two 
groups  of  lines  and  cilia  as  in  forewings. 

Near  Brisbane  ;  one  specimen  ;  taken  by  Dr.  T.  Bancroft.  This 
species  is  not  nearly  related  to  any  with  which  I  am  acquainted. 


BY    THOMAS    P.  LUCAS.  295 

IODIS    MULTITINCTA,   sp.nOV. 

£.  22  mm.  Head  blue-green,  fillet  darker  green.  Palpi 
bluish-grey.  Antennse  greenish-grey.  Thorax  blue-green. 
Abdomen  blue-green,  lighter  posteriorly,  and  milky-colour  under- 
neath. Forewings  with  costa  arched,  hindmargin  gently  arched, 
blue-green,  iridescent,  with  olive-green,  blue-grey,  milky-grey  and 
slaty-grey  scales  all  mixed  in  a  kind  of  chameleon  suffusion.  A 
minute  black  discal  spot,  in  some  specimens  indistinct,  a  suffused 
olive-green  band  from  \  costa  to  J  inner  margin,  often  indistinct, 
a  suffused  olive-green  bar  from  J  costa  to  §  inner  margin  :  cilia 
greenish- white,  greener  at  base.  Hind  wings  as  forewings, 
angulated  at  vein  4,  discal  spot  black,  indistinct  in  most  specimens, 
olive-green  suffused  band  as  in  forewings,  from  J  costa  to  §  inner 
margin,  arched  and  bent  opposite  hindmarginal  bend  at  vein  4  ; 
cilia  greenish-white,  greener  at  base. 

Brisbane  ;  rare. 

This  species  is  a  most  delicate  one,  and  is  difficult  to  obtain 
at  all  perfect.  I  have  not  yet  seen  the  9.  It  comes  near  /. 
centrophylla,  Meyr. 

IODIS    MILITARIS,   Sp.nOV. 

(j£.  26  mm.  Head  brownish-red,  fillet  light  green.  Palpi 
brownish-red.  Antennae  ochreous-brown.  Thorax  light  green. 
Abdomen  light  green,  whiter  at  sides,  with  golden  dots  bordered 
with  copper-red  on  dorsum,  finer  in  g  than  £.  Forewings  with 
costa  gently  arched,  hindmargin  obliquely  rounded,  very  light  pea- 
green  ;  costa  edged  with  a  fine  ochreous  line  with  six  or  seven 
very  fine  deep  chocolate  or  blackish  dots  ;  a  small  deep  chocolate  or 
blackish  discal  dot  at  ?  one-third  from  costa,  a  second  dot  at  \  one- 
fourth  from  costa  :  cilia  creamy-ochreous  with  fine  chocolate  or 
blackish  dots  on  veins.  Hindwings  as  forewings,  hindmargin 
rounded  on  vein  4,  discal  spot  as  in  forewings  at  I,  £  from  costa  ; 
cilia  creamy-ochreous  with  chocolate  or  blackish  dots  on  veins, 
more  conspicuous  than  in  forewings. 

Brisbane ;  two  specimens.     Allied  to  /.  leucomerata,  Walk. 


296       ON    QUEENSLAND    AND    OTHER    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 


Agathia  iodioides,  sp.nov. 

Q.  22  mm.  Head  black,  face  blackish-red.  Palpi  ochreous. 
Antennae  ochreous,  becoming  red  toward  base.  Thorax  pea- 
green,  posteriorly  on  dorsum  a  red-white  line  bordered  by  deep 
red.  Abdomen  grey  with  red  blotch  and  central  line  anteriorly, 
and  a  narrow  red  line  thinning  out  posteriorly.  Forewings 
rounded,  costa  rounded,  apex  rounded,  hindmargin  rounded, 
pea-green ;  costa  bordered  by  black-red  line  freely  irrorated  with 
black  scales,  broader  from  |  to  J,  at  each  of  which  points  is  a 
black  spot ;  the  hindmarginal  band  is  black-red  and  contains 
six  ochreous  dots,  and  is  broadened  into  a  projecting  angle  at  \ 
and  diffused  into  an  oblong  blotch  at  anal  angle  :  cilia  reddish- 
white.  Hind  wings  pea-green  with  hindmarginal  band  and  cilia 
as  in  forewings ;  hindmargin  rounded  at  vein,  the  band  pro- 
jecting inward  in  an  angle. 

Dawson  River ;  one  specimen  (Mr.  Barnard). 

This  species  at  first  appearance  reminds  one  of  a  half-sized 
ordinary  Agathia,  with  the  bands  in  the  forewings  wanting, 
excepting  in  the  margins. 

Agathia  distributa,  sp.nov. 

$Q.  28-32  mm.  Head  pea-green,  face  red,  collar  light  ochreous- 
red,  with  red  dots  anteriorly  in  centre,  on  either  side  and 
posteriorly.  Palpi  ochreous-grey.  Antennae  red,  ochreous 
beneath.  Thorax  pea-green,  with  an  oval  black  patch  posteriorly 
on  dorsum  and  containing  a  small  oval  pea-green  centre  pos- 
teriorly ;  hairs  on  either  side  of  thorax  posteriorly  brownish-red. 
Abdomen  ochreous,  dorsum  black-red,  narrowing  posteriorly, 
anal  3rd  ochreous.  Forewings  with  costa  rounded,  apex  acute, 
hindmargin  gently  rounded,  bright  pea-green  ;  costal  margin  with 
a  brown-red  border  freely  irrorated  with  ochreous  scales ;  a 
black-red  basal  fascia  :  an  ochreous-green  line  from  §  costa  to  £ 
inner  margin,  expanded  to  enclose  three  black  red  spots,  one  at 
costa,  second  almost  touching  first,  and  third  on  inner  border  :  a 


BY   THOMAS    P.  LUCAS.  297 

2nd  line  f  costa  to  anal  angle,  with  an  oblong  attenuated  spot  on 
costa,  a  second  rhomboid  spot  almost  touching,  and  a  minute  dot 
close  to  hindmargin  at  \  ;  a  black  red  spot  in  apex  of  wing ;  a 
terminal  hindmarginal  black-red  line,  expanded  into  dots  on 
veins :  cilia  reddish-ochreous,  with  reddish  dots  and  a  black  red 
spot  at  §.  Hindwings  coloured  as  forewings  ;  a  broad  ochreous 
line  from  apex  of  costa  to  f  hindmargin,  bordered  externally  by 
a  black-red  line,  broadened  at  apical  angle  into  an  elongated 
spot,  into  another  elongated  line  or  succession  of  dots  just  before 
hindmargin ;  a  hindmarginal  black-red  line,  in  some  interrupted, 
and  bordering  but  separated  from  a  black-red  angular  spot  at 
vein  4,  in  some  specimens  diffused  over  anal  angle  and  extending 
round  inner  margin,  in  others  more  or  less  absent ;  cilia  ochreous 
with  black-red  dots  opposite  spots,  on  inner  margin  whitish- 
ochreous,  anal  half  reddish-brown. 

Cairns,  and  Dawson  River  (Mr.  Barnard). 

This  differs  from  A.  lyccenaria  in  the  fascia  being  narrow, 
differently  distributed,  and  in  the  absence  of  the  broad  band  on 
hindmargin.     It  is  also  allied  to  A.  ketata,  Fab. 

Hypochroma  aurantiacea,  sp.nov. 

(J.  40  mm.  Palpi  blackish-grey.  Antenna?  dark  grey.  Head 
grey.  Thorax  grey,  with  darker  spot  in  centre  anteriorly. 
Abdomen  blue-grey,  with  short  black  lines  on  either  side  of  dorsum 
on  each  segment,  yellow  laterally,  yellow  on  underside.  Fore- 
wings  with  costa  nearly  straight,  hindmargin  gently  rounded,  blue- 
grey  with  darker  grey,  smoky  and  black  scales  and  suffusions ; 
lines  black,  a  waved  line  close  in  to  base ;  a  diffused  line  at  \  inner 
margin  becoming  obscure  just  before  costa  at  J ;  a  fine  rich  black 
line  dentate  and  wavy  from  J  costa, to  J  inner  margin  ;  a  second 
rich  black  fine  line  from  §  costa,  dentate  to  half  across  wing, 
thence  sharply  twice  angulated  toward  base  and  thence  again 
dentated  to  J  inner  margin,  a  short  line  branches  from  centre  of 
this  line  to  just  before  costa  at  J  ;  two  suffused  grey  wavy  lines 
beyond  this  and  parallel  to  hindmargin,  a  fine  black  sub-marginal 


298       ON    QUEENSLAND    AND    OTHER    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

crenate  line  ;  costa  and  inner  margin  darker  suffused-grey  :  cilia 
grey.  Hind  wings  as  fore  wings,  with  basal  half  of  inner  margin 
yellow  :  a  wavy  crenulate  line  from  ^  costa  to  J  inner  margin,  a 
crenate  sub-marginal  finely  defined  black  line,  a  suffused  not 
distinct  line  at  \,  and  another  suffused  indistinct  line  before  the 
sub-marginal  line — wing  with  dark  suffusions  toward  base ;  cilia 
grey.  Undersurface  :  forewings  orange  at  base  attenuated  toward 
apex  beneath  costa  ;  costa  grey  with  black  dots,  a  deep  band  of 
black  filling  outer  third  of  wing,  with  apex  grey  and  cilia  grey ; 
and  three  or  four  small  grey  dots  near  inner  margin  ;  a  triangle  of 
white,  subtended  by  costa,  and  upper  half  of  black  band,  occupies 
upper  half  of  wing  beneath  costa  and  contains  a  deep  black  spot 
near  its  base — between  this  and  inner  margin  a  triangle  of  smoky- 
grey  ;  inner  margin  lighter  grey.  Hind  wing  orange  in  basal  half, 
outer  half  deep  black  bordered  on  either  side  with  light-grey. 

Brisbane  ;  two  specimens  on  trees. 

Allied  to  H.  muscosaria ;  but  the  sharp  defined  markings  and 
the  orange  of  the  body  and  hindwings  readily  distinguish  it. 

Hypochroma  diffundens,  sp.nov. 

(J.  30  mm.  Head,  thorax,  and  abdomen  smoky-grey.  Antennas 
black.  Legs  irrorated  black  and  white.  Forewings  with  costa 
sinuous,  apex  acute,  hindmargin  crenulate  ;  grey  with  white  scales 
predominating  near  the  centre,  brown  scales  near  the  base,  and 
smoke-colour  scales  on  hind  border  ;  costa  smoke-coloured,  with 
numerous  minute  grey  and  black  dots:  an  indistinct  grey  trans- 
verse line  near  base  :  a  rich  black  line  from  J  costa  to  \  inner 
margin,  curved  outwards  anteriorly  and  inwards  posteriorly  : 
immediately  beyond  this  is  a  smoke-colour  line,  then  an  elongated 
linear  discal  spot,  and  again  a  tine  rich  black  line  from  |-  costa  to 
just  before  anal  angle  of  inner  margin,  twice  curved  outwards  and 
dentate  in  centre :  this  line  is  bounded  on  outer  edge  by  a  fine 
white  line  :  a  second  dentate  white  line  just  beyond  \  costa  to  half 
way  across  wing,  where  it  is  submerged  in  a  series  of  smoky-grey 
spots,  which  extend  from  costa  just  beyond  to  anal  angle  of  inner 


BY    THOMAS    P.  LUCAS.  299 

margin  ;  hindmarginal  line  fine  black  :  cilia  alternately  grey  and 
white.  Hindwings  as  forewings,  basal  line  indistinct  :  2nd  line 
indistinct  smoky-grey  :  discal  spot  rich  black,  elongated  :  3rd  line 
fine  rich  black,  from  f  costa  to  just  before  anal  angle  of  inner 
margin,  twice  waved ;  veins  smoky-grey  ;  hindmarginal  line  rich 
black ;  cilia  as  forewings.  Undersurface  white-grey :  discal  spot  an 
elongated  black  line  :  a  fascia  in  posterior  third  bounded  by  tine 
rich  black  line  on  inner  side,  contains  rich  black  suffused  spot  on 
inner  third,  but  diffused  smoky-grey  toward  hindmargin,  where  it 
is  bordered  by  black  marginal  line.  Hindwings,  discal  spot  a  deep 
black  lunule  :  fascia  in  posterior  third  deep  black  bordered  by 
black  line  anteriorly  and  indented  in  centre  with  veins  deeper 
black,  and  enclosing  on  posterior  border  dark  and  light  grey  spots ; 
hindmarginal  line  black. 

Dawsou  River  ;  one  specimen  (Mr.  Barnard). 

Family  MONOCTENIAD^. 

Xenomusa  metallica,  sp.nov. 

g.  32  mm.  Palpi  and  antennae  fuscous-ochreous.  Head, 
thorax,  and  abdomen  ochreous-brown.  Forewings,  costa  arched, 
hollowed  in  middle  and  arched  to  a  point  at  apex  ;  hindmargin 
arched  and  rounded,  ochreous-brown,  with  fulvous  and  smoky 
scales,  and  a  general  bronzy  metallic  gloss.  Two  fine  fulvous-grey 
Hues,  1st  from  inner  margin  just  beyond  base  to  just  before  costa 
at  J,  thence  sharply  angulated  to  costa  at  I ;  a  very  fine  discal 
point  beyond  angle  towards  2nd  line  ;  2nd  line  from  g  inner 
margin  to  just  before  costa  at  |,  thence  more  obliquely  to  costa  at 
apex  ;  costa  with  a  fine  smoky  line  from  ^  to  * ;  a  smoky-grey  spot 
at  apex,  and  a  smoky  diffusion  from  2nd  line  at  near  ^  costa  to 
anal  angle  :  cilia  smoky-brown.  Hindwings  with  colours  as  fore- 
wings, with  1st  line  from  J  costa  to  ^  inner  margin  ;  small  smoke- 
diffused  discal  point,  and  2nd  line  very  faint  or  wanting ;  cilia 
smoky-brown. 

Brisbane  ;  one  specimen  ;  at  light. 


300      ON    QUEENSLAND    AND    OTHER   AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

Some  five  years  ago  I  obtained  a  few  specimens  of  Xenomusa 
which  Meyrick  named  X.  monoda,  on  the  flowers  of  a  shrubby 
verbena  in  a  garden  at  Upper  Moe,  Gippsland,  Victoria,  at  a 
height  of  1200  feet.  I  have  not  found  it  here,  though  it  is  highly 
probable  I  may.  But  in  its  place  I  have  obtained  this  allied 
species,  which  is  smaller  and  distinctly  metallic. 

MONOCTENIA    DlGGLESARIA,  Gn. 

Of  this  species  Meyrick  says :  "I  have  seen  no  insect  agreeing 
with  it ;  it  appears  to  indicate  a  good  and  distinct  species."  I 
have  received  a  specimen  from  Mr.  Kershaw,  which  exactly 
answers  to  Guenee's  description. 

Family  MICRONIAD^. 
Anteia  canescens,  sp.nov. 

Q.  26-31  mm.  Head  black.  Palpi  grey,  very  short.  Antennae 
white.  Thorax  and  abdomen  grey-white.  Forewings  with  costa 
rounded,  hindmargin  gently  rounded  ;  white,  sparingly  dusted 
with  grey  scales,  and  numerous  short  water-grey  strigulse  ;  costa 
thickly  covered  on  basal  §  with  minute  strigulae ;  1st  fascia 
water-grey,  broad,  from  J  inner  margin  not  reaching  to  costa 
opposite  to  f,  attenuated  toward  costa,  darker  toward  borders  ; 
2nd  fascia  from  ?  inner  margin  to  near  costa  just  before  apex, 
attenuated  toward  costa  and  with  white  patches  in  median  line  ; 
an  interrupted  strigulous  crossed  line  from  \  inner  margin  to 
before  apex,  a  2nd  like  line  from  just  before  anal  angle  of  inner 
margin  to  a  point  just  before  apex  of  costa  with  2nd  fascia  and 
1st  line  ;  a  hindmarginal  line  black  from  near  apical  angle  to 
two-thirds  wing,  thence  diffused  grey  :  cilia  white,  edged  with 
grey.  Hind  wings  as  forewings,  1st  and  2nd  fasciae  in  a  direct 
line  with  those  on  forewings  ;  1st  near  base,  2nd  from  \  inner 
margin  to  \  costa  ;  a  third  fascia  from  f  inner  margin  to  *  costa, 
attenuated  at  both  extremities ;  two  sub-marginal  lines  from  near 
anal  angle  of  inner  margin,  interrupted  in  short  wavy  strigulse, 


BY    THOMAS    P.  LUCAS.  301 

to  a  point  just  before  apical  angle  ;  vein  4  bent  to  angle  with  a 
black  spot ;  cilia  as  forewings. 

Rockhampton  ;  two  specimens  (Mr.  G.  Barnard). 

Group  NOCTUINA,  Family  AGARISTID.E. 

Agarista  albamedia,  sp.nov. 

9.  52  mm.  Head  black  with  white  spots  on  either  side  of  eye 
and  behind  origin  of  antennae.  Palpi  black,  white  laterally. 
Antennas  black  and  white  finely  annulated.  Thorax  black  with 
white  dots  anteriorly.  Abdomen  black,  base  of  segments  grey. 
Forewings,  costa  slightly  sinuous  nearly  straight,  hindmargin 
rounded ;  black  with  scattered  minute  white  scales,  chiefly  near 
the  base ;  a  white  fascia  from  \  costa,  contracted  in  middle  of 
wing,  thence  extended  in  two  oblong  dots,  and  thence  in  a  round 
dot  to  just  before,  but  not  touching  hindmargin  at  J :  a  few  white 
very  fine  short  lines  almost  imperceptible  from  costa  at  \  to 
hindmarginal  end  of  median  fascia,  apex  of  wing  rounded,  with 
white  margin  :  cilia  black.  Hind  wings  black ,  median  white  band 
broad  from  5  inner  margin  for  three-fourths  extent  of  wing  to 
opposite  to  §  costa ;  apex  of  wing  rounded,  with  white  margin, 
divided  by  a  dentate  black  prolongation  into  two  portions  ;  cilia 
black. 

Brisbane ;  one  specimen  (Mr.  Illidge) :  Hills  near  Duaringa 
(Mr.  Barnard). 

Agarista  simplex,  sp.nov. 

<J.  60  mm.  Head  black,  spots  at  base  of  antennae  white.  Palpi 
and  antennae  black.  Thorax  black,  with  white  dot  on  dorsum  and 
on  either  side  anteriorly.  Abdomen  black,  tuft  orange.  Forewings 
elongate,  costa  rounded,  hindmargin  obliquely  rounded,  black  with 
a  median  broad  white  band,  from  near  but  not  touching  costa  at  £ 
to  J  extent  of  wing  toward  anal  angle :  cilia  black.  Hind  wings 
black  with  a  very  fine  white  linear  margin ;  cilia  white. 

Queensland ;  one  specimen. 


302       ON    QUEENSLAND    AND    OTHER    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

This  differs  from  A.  Latinus  in  the  median  white  band  of  fore- 
wings,  which  is  short,  stumpy  and  straight-edged  (not  indented  or 
crenulate  as  in  Latinus),  and  not  extending  to  inner  margin  ; 
there  is  not  a  white  band  with  black  dots  as  in  Latinus,  but  only 
a  very  tine  white  linear  margin.  This  may  turn  out  to  be  a  very 
striking  variety  of  Latinus,  but  the  wings  all  appear  narrower 
and  the  markings  are  quite  different. 

Agarista  tropica,  sp.nov. 

£Q.  46-58  mm.  Head  black  with  brick  yellow  dots  on  either 
side  of  eyes  and  at  base  of  antennse.  Palpi  black,  red-yellow 
laterally,  and  fringed  with  black  hairs  beneath.  Antenna  black 
and  yellow  annulated.  Thorax  black,  with  base  of  epaulettes 
yellow.  Abdomen,  anterior  third  black,  posterior  two-thirds 
orange  with  base  of  segments  narrowly  black.  Forewings,  costa 
rounded,  hiudmargin  obliquely  rounded,  black,  with  brick-yellow 
markings  ;  costa  with  fine  yellow  edge  near  base,  and  fine  white 
margin  at  apex  ;  twelve  brick-yellow  spots  arranged  as  follows  : 
an  arrow-shaped  one  in  centre  of  wing  near  base,  a  triangle 
between  its  posterior  portion  and  costa,  a  square  just  beyond  and 
opposite  costa  at  ^  a  group  divided  by  black  veins  into  three 
oblong  spots  between  this  and  hindmargin,  a  rhomb  divided  into 
two  oblong  spots  by  black  veins  between  these  and  costa  and 
opposite  t  costa,  similar  twin  spots  and  oblong  between  these  and 
middle  of  hindmargin,  and  twin  rounded  spots  near  costa  just 
before  apex  :  these  latter  are  paler  and  of  a  blue  tinge  ;  a  row  of 
hindmarginal  white  dots  between  veins  :  cilia  black.  Hindwings 
with  basal  fifth,  a  linear  costal  border,  a  broad  hindmarginal 
border,  and  an  oblong  prolongation  from  costa  at  |  to  vein  4, 
black ;  middle  third  of  wing  orange  or  brick-yellow,  irregularly 
dentate  into  the  black  of  both  borders,  with  black  veins  and  the 
black  prolongation  from  costa  very  conspicuous  ;  sub-marginal 
dots  white  ;  cilia  black. 

This  differs  from  A.  Donovani  in  many  particulars  ;  the  number 
of  spots  in  that  species  is  8,  arranged  in   three  couples  and  two 


BY    THOMAS    P.  LUCAS. 


303 


single  spots,  with  two  to  four  lighter  dots  or  shadings  present  or 
absent.  The  spots  in  this  species  are  larger  and  of  a  different 
colour  to  those  in  A.  Donovani,  which  are  ochreous-white.  The 
median  band  on  the  hindwings  is  as  broad  again  in  A.  tropica 
as  in  Donovani,  and  has  a  median  black  elongation  subtended  from 
costa,  which  is  absent  in  Donovani.  The  abdomen  is  different, 
the  segments  in  Donovani  being  broadly  black  and  narrowly 
ochreous-white,  the  anal  segment  orange  dotted  with  black,  while 
in  A.  tropica  the  anterior  third  is  deep  black,  with  the  posterior 
segments  deep  orange  narrowly  based  with  black. 

Tropical  Queensland. 

A.  Donovani,  Melbourne  to  Cape  York. 

Agarista  c^ruleotincta,  sp.no v. 

9.  36  mm.  Head  black,  cream-colour  round  orbits.  Palpi 
and  antenna?  black.  Thorax  black,  with  grey  tufts  anteriorly. 
Abdomen  grey  with  linear  grey  tufts  anteriorly  and  black  bands 
through  segments.  Forewings,  costa  straight  or  slightly  sinuous, 
hindmargin  rounded;  black  with  a  purplish  tinge  and  a  few 
small  blue  spots  over  basal  fifth  :  a  white  discal  spot  just  before  \ 
and  nearer  costa  than  inner  margin,  a  white  fascia  divided  into 
six  spots  by  black  veins,  from  §  costa  to  |  the  depth  of  wing 
towards  anal  angle,  the  costal  spot  is  elongated  and  with  a  grey  or 
bluish  tint;  a  minute  speck  near  costa  at  \  and  another 
immediately  beyond,  subtending  two  rows  of  minute  white-blue 
dots  on  veins  extending  and  meeting  in  anal  angle  of  inner 
margin,  and  a  linear  dash  of  white  at  apical  extremity  of 
hindmargin  :  cilia  white  irrorated  with  purplish-brown.  Hind- 
wings  rich  black  with  a  linear  streak  of  blue  in  centre 
of  base,  and  extending  for  fully  a-  third  the  expanse  of  the 
wing  ;  there  are  two  white  spots  with  a  blue  tinge,  the 
smaller  near  the  ^  of  inner  margin,  and  the  larger  in  the  centre  of 
the  wing ;  there  is  a  row  of  marginal  white  linear  spots  ;  cilia 
black,  but  white  subtending  white  spots.  Underside,  base  of 
wings  to  \  bright  blue. 
20 


304   ON  QUEENSLAND  AND  OTHER  AUSTRALIAN  LEPIDOPTERA, 

Mackay  (Mr.  Turner).  Allied  to  A.  Semyron,  H.  Sch.,  of 
Sumatra. 

Family  OPHIUSID^. 

Ophiodes  parcemacula,  sp.nov. 

<£$.  65  mm.  Head,  thorax,  and  abdomen  light  ochreous. 
Palpi  black-brown.  Antennae  black.  Fo rewinds  elongate,  costa 
straight,  apex  rounded  ;  hindmargin  straight,  light  ochreous ;  a 
minute  black  spot  at  £,  a  deep  black  discal  spot  at  -J,  a  row  of 
minute  black  dots  between  veins  from  ^  costa  to  two-thirds  across 
wing  to  opposite  ^  inner  margin  :  a  large  black  lunule  at  f  costa, 
subtending  a  curved  line  of  brown  aggregations  of  dots  to  %  inner 
margin  ;  a  sub-marginal  line  of  minute  dots,  and  a  marginal  faint 
brown  line  beyond  :  cilia  ochreous-brown,  with  darker  line  at 
base.  Hindwings  ochreous-brown,  shiny  and  tinted  with 
ferruginous,  with  a  deep  black  fascia  from  apex  of  costa 
extending  to  one-third  along,  but  not  touching  hindmargin. 

Brisbane  and  Dawson  River. 

This  species  comes  near  to  0.  disjungens,  Walk.,  but  it  is  a 
smaller  insect,  and  differs  in  its  uniformity  of  colour,  the  thorax, 
abdomen,  and  wings  being  a  light  ochreous,  while  in  disjungens 
the  thorax  and  forewings  are  dark  fuscous,  and  the  abdomen 
and  hindwings  orange.  The  markings  in  parcemacula  are  fewer, 
and  the  lines  are  differently  distributed  ;  while  the  hindmarginal 
band  in  the  hindwings  is  scant  in  parcemacula,  as  compared  to  the 
broad  band  in  disjungens,  and  which,  in  that  species,  extends  to 
fully  J  of  hindmargin. 

Family  EUCLIDID^. 
FODINA    GLORIOSA,  Sp.IlOV. 

$.  24  mm.  Head  black,  annulet  ochreous.  Palpi  black. 
Antennae  grey,  ochreous  beneath.  Thorax  black  with  a  median 
transverse  line  and  a  line  posteriorly  ochreous,  epaulettes  black. 
Abdomen  orange-ochreous,  with  a  black  spot  on  dorsum  at  base. 
Forewings  triangular,  dilate,  costa  slightly  wavy,  hindmargin 
nearly  straight,  reddish-ochreous  with  black  markings :  border  of 
costa  for  basal    I   ochreous,  freely  dusted  with  black  scales  and 


BY    THOMAS    P.  LUCAS.  305 

edged  with  black  Hue,  in  apical  §  red-ochreous  :  a  basal  triangle 
of  rich  black,  apex  not  touching  costa  at  |,  bordered  on  inner  half 
by  red-ochreous :  a  rich  velvet-black  patch  is  joined  to  basal 
triangle  on  inner  margin,  thence  free  to  just  before  |-  costa,  where 
it  bends  over  to  just  before  f  inner  margin,  twice  denticulate 
outwards  and  a  lunar  excavation  inwards  in  middle  third  ;  a 
triangle  with  base  almost  touching  costa  at  J  to  ?  reaches  to  two- 
thirds  of  wing  obliquely  towards  anal  angle  :  abroad  sub-marginal 
band  from  close  to  costa  beyond,  narrowing  toward  anal  angle  : 
the  ground-colour  between  these  two  patches  is  brick-red  bordered 
with  ochreous :  a  hindmarginal  black  line  broadened  into  dots  on 
the  veins,  bordered  posteriorly  by  brick-red  :  cilia  red  and  grey. 
Hindwings  brick-red,  with  red-orange  suffusion  over  anal  half  of 
hindmargin  :  a  broad  hindmarginal  black  band  attenuated  and 
divided  toward  anal  angle  into  two  lines,  marginal  one  to  vein  4 
and  enclosing  a  line  of  red-orange  :  a  large  black  spot  on  inner 
margin  close  to  but  not  touching  hindmarginal  line ;  cilia  red  and 
grey. 

Duaringa  ;  one  specimen  (Mr.  Barnard.) 

Group  PYRALIDINA,  Family  PYRALIDIDiE. 
Endotricha  crobulus,  sp.nov. 

(J^'  15-22  mm.  Head  golden.  Palpi  orange-brown.  Antennae 
ochreous-grey.  Thorax  fulvous.  Abdomen  dark  fulvous.  Fore- 
wings,  costa  straight,  hindmargin  gently  rounded,  chocolate-red 
with  golden-yellow  lines ;  costa  with  light  minute  yellow  dots 
over  middle  two-fourths ;  basal  fourth  of  wing  darker  chocolate, 
bounded  by  a  golden  line  bordered  on  either  side  by  chocolate 
black  lines  ;  middle  two-fourths  of  wing  lighter  chocolate  with 
small  black  discal  spot,  bordered  with  ochreous ;  a  golden-yellow 
line  from  J  costa  to  f  inner  margin,  outwardly  dentate  in  middle 
and  bounded  on  either  side  by  narrow  black  line  ;  hindmarginal 
line  golden-yellow  :  cilia  golden-yellow.  Hindwings  as  forewings, 
central    third   lighter   chocolate    with  three   light   ochreous  and 


306       ON    QUEENSLAND    AND    OTHER    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA. 

golden  alternating   lines ;    hindmarginal  band  and    cilia  golden- 
orange. 

Peak  Downs  and  Kockhampton  (Mr.  G.  Barnard). 

Endotriciia  dispergens,  sp.nov. 

ftQ.  22-26  mtn.  Head,  palpi,  thorax,  abdomen,  and  legs 
reddish-chocolate.  Patagia  in  ft  very  elongated.  Antennae 
ochreous-brown.  Forewings  with  costa  rounded,  in  ft  square  on 
apical  fourth  as  if  cut  off,  hindmargin  rounded,  red-brown  inter- 
mixed with  chocolate  and  purple,  and  freely  dusted  with  minute 
black  scales ;  costal  edge  interruptedly  annulated  with  ochreous 
and  black-brown  dots ;  discal  spot  of  diffused  black  near  costa  at 
g,  a  black  line  from  J  costa  to  \  inner  margiu,  lighter  toward 
inner  margin  ;  cilia  chocolate-grey.  Hind  wings  purplish-brown, 
redder  toward  costa  and  lighter  ochreous-red  toward  base  ;  in 
ft  a  line  tinted  with  black  scales  from  §  costa  to  J  inner  margin, 
in  some  specimens  not  very  distinct,  in  Q  there  are  two  blackish 
lines  from  J  costa  to  just  before  ^  inner  margin,  and  from  §  costa 
to  I  inner  margin  plainer  than  line  in  ft  ;  cilia  as  forewings. 

The  £  is  like  some  specimens  of  E.  pyrosalis  in  general 
appearance,  but  is  differently  marked  ;  the  ft  is  specially  distinct 
by  the  square  tip  of  forewings. 

Scrub  near  Brisbane  ;  very  rare. 

CEdematophora  oacaalis,  sp.nov. 

ftQ-  18-20  mm.  Head,  antennas,  thorax,  and  abdomen  light 
cinnamon-brown.  Palpi  chocolate-red,  long,  ascending.  Legs 
deep  chocolate-red,  lighter  beneath.  Forewings  elongate,  trian- 
gular, costa  slightly  arched  in  middle,  hindmargin  obliquely 
rounded,  light  cinnamon-brown  dusted  with  fine  black  scales,  and 
having  apical  third  deep  chocolate,  narrowed  toward  anal  angle  of 
hindmargin  :  costal  edge  with  minute  chocolate  dots,  more  scanty 
towards  base ;  an  indistinct  darker  brown  mark  extends  from  ^ 
costa  to  5  inner  margin  :  cilia  deep  chocolate.  Hindwings  light 
cinnamon-brown,  crossed  at  regular  distances  by  three  black  lines, 
the  outer  one  being  the  least  distinct ;  cilia  purple-brown. 

Brisbane  ;  three  specimens. 


P  L.S.N.  S.W  (2n-dSer) 


Ye.  Nat  Ske 


RLSN.SW(2ndSer.)VoL.VI 


PI  XIV. 


X   75  diams 


X   15  dial 


J-M  C.Del. 


BATHURST       BASALT   S  . 
Drawn      from     Mjcrophofoqraphs 


ST- Leigh  a  Co.,////) 


RLS.N.S.W.(2ndSer.)VoLVI 


PIXY 


£•        S.T  Leigh  i  C.f  lith 


P L.S.N  S.W.(2ndSer)  Vol. VI 


PI.  XVI. 


J  99 J  009 


OS 


<0 


1     I 


Leigh  t  Of  lith 


PLSN.S.W.(2ndSer)VoL.VI 


P1.XV11 


.,<^/J\ 


J-MC,Del  BASALTIC      COLUMNS,   BALD     HILLS,         s-T-LetftCoJith 

BATHURST 


PLS.N.S.W.(2ndSer)VoL.VI 


pi.xvm 


J -M  C.Del 


3-7- Leigh  i  Cn  !ifh 


P.LS.NS.W.(2"d  Ser)VoLVI 


P1.X1X. 


C  Hsdley  Del  ad  naf 


F,gs   1-3  .   EU  LI  MELLA      MONILIFORME 
Fig  4.  CONUS(Chelyconus)W0RCESTERI. 


S-Uei£ti  t  C°  hth 


P.L.S.N.S.W.,   Vol.         f2MJ  3er,' 


PL. XX, 


G.H.H  ammon.  Del 


P.LS.N.SW.    Vol. VI.  (21°     S  r) 


PL, XXI. 


\slV-.- 


\f*P*~~) 


PLSN.S.W(2ndSer.)  Vol. VI 


PI.  Mil 


RIGHT      LOWER 
f    Young     ) 


RIGHT       UPPER 
f  Ad u/f-J 


NCISORS    OF    SCEPARNODON     RAMSAYI.      STLeighd  Co.,  lith. 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS.  307 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 

Mr.  C.  Darley  exhibited  some  very  large  examples  of  the  shells 
of  the  mud  oyster  (Ostrcea  edulis  var.  angasi)  obtained  during 
dredging  operations  in  Rozelle  Bay,  Sydney  Harbour.  They 
occur  in  great  numbers  at  a  depth  of  10-12  feet  below  low  water- 
mark beneath  a  layer  of  black  mud  3-4  feet  thick ;  and  are  much 
larger  than  specimens  now  to  be  found  living  in  the  harbour ;  the 
two  valves  of  one  pair  weigh  3  lbs.  12ozs.,  and  measure  about  8x6 
inches.  Mr.  Darley  also  exhibited  portions  of  the  shell  of  Voluta 
magnified,  recently  picked  up  by  him  on  one  of  the  northern 
beaches,  and  presenting  numerous  superficial  borings  and  channel- 
lings  made  by  some  undetermined  organism. 

Mr.  Maiden  exhibited  samples  of  the  kino  of  Angophora  inter- 
media and  A.  lanceolata  in  illustration  of  his  paper. 

Mr.  Fletcher  showed  a  number  of  Batrachians  referred  to  in  his 
paper. 

Mr.  Froggatt  exhibited  a  collection  of  insects,  including  about 
200  species  of  Coleoptera,  from  the  Ballarat  district,  Victoria, 
collected  during  the  months  of  March,  April,  and  May. 

Also  specimens  of  a  rare  saw-fly,  Perga  afii7iis,  Kir  by,  likewise 
from  Ballarat,  and,  for  comparison  with  it,  specimens  of  P.  dorsalis, 
Leach,  the  common  Sydney  species  to  which  it  is  closely  allied. 


21 


308 


WEDNESDAY,  29th  JULY,  1891. 


The  President,  Professor  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc,  in  the  Chair. 


Dr.  C.  J.  Martin  and    Mr.  W.  S.  Dun   were   introduced   as 
visitors. 


The  Chairman  directed  attention  to  the  proposed  arrangements 
for  the  next  meeting  of  the  Australasian  Association  for  the 
Advancement  of  Science  to  be  held  at  Hobart  in  January,  1892, 
as  set  forth  in  a  printed  programme,  copies  of  which  were  laid  on 
the  table. 


DONATIONS. 

"  Agricultural  Gazette  of  N.S.W."  Vol.  ii.,  Parts  5  and  6  (May 
and  Jane,  1891).     From  the  Director  of  Agriculture. 

"Victoria — Annual  Report  of  the  Secretary  for  Mines  for  1890." 
From  the  Secretary  for  Mines. 

"  Proceedings  of  the  Zoological  Society  of  London  for  the  year 
1890."  Part  4;  "Abstracts,"  5th  May  and  2nd  June,  1891. 
From  the  Society. 

"  Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Beige  de  Microscopic"  xviiime  Annee, 
Nos.  6  and  7  (April,  1891).     From  the  Society. 

"Calendar  of  the  University  of  Sydney  for  the  year  1891." 
From  the  University. 

"  Catalogue  of  Fossil  Cephalopoda  in  the  British  Museum"  (Nat. 
Hist.).  Part  ii.  (1891).  By  A.  N.  Foord,  F.G.S.  ;  "  Catalogue  of 
Fossil  Fishes  in  the  British  Museum."  Part  ii.  (1891).  By  A.  S. 
Woodward,  F.G.S.,  F.Z.S.     From  the  Trustees. 


DONATIONS.  309 

''Journal  of  Conchology."  Vol.  vi.,  Nos.  9-10  (Jan.  and  April, 
1891).     From  the  Conchological  Society  of  Great  Britain. 

"Zeitschrift  der  Gesellschaft  fur  Erdkunde  zu  Berlin."  Band 
xxvi.,  No.  2  (1891).     From  the  Society. 

"  Mittheilungen  aus  der  Zoologisclien  Station  zu  Neapel." 
ix.  Bd.,  4  Heft  (1891).     From  the  Director. 

"  Abhandlungen  herausgegeben  von  der  senckenbergischen 
naturforschenden  Gesellschaft.  xvi.  Bd.,  2  Heft  (1890).  From 
the  Society. 

11  Records  of  the  Australian  Museum."  Vol.  i.,  No.  7  (June, 
1891).     From  the  Trustees. 

"Transactions  of  the  Royal  Society  of  Victoria."  Vol.  iii., 
Part  1  (1891).     From  the  Society. 

"  Zoologischer  Anzeiger."  xiv.  Jahrg.,  Nos.  364-365  (May- 
June,  1891).     From  the  Editor. 

"Perak  Government  Gazette."  Vol.  iv.,  Nos.  13-17  (May- 
June,  1891).     From  the  Government  Secretary. 

"  Department  of  Agriculture,  Brisbane — Bulletin."  No.  9 
(May,  1891).     From  the  Colonial  Botanist. 

"  Journal  of  the  Marine  Biological  Association  of  the  United 
Kingdom."    n.s.   Vol.  ii.,  No.  1  (May,  1891).    From  the  Association. 

"  Transactions  of  the  Victorian  Branch  of  the  Royal  Geogra- 
phical Society  of  Australasia."  Vol.  viii.,  Part  1  (August,  1890). 
From  C.  Hedley,  Esq.,  F.LS. 

"Handbook  of  the  Destructive  Insects  of  Victoria."  Part  1. 
By  C.  French,  F.L.S.  (1891).  From  the  Secretary  for  Agriculture, 
Victoria. 

"  Tables  des  Comptes  Renclus  des  Seances  de  l'Academie  des 
Sciences,  Paris."     T.  cxi.  (1890).     From  the  Academy. 

"  Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Royale  de  Geographie  d'Anvers."  T. 
xv.,  3me  Fasc.     From  the  Society. 

"Archiv  fur  Naturgeschichte."  liv.  Jahrg.,  ii.  Bd.,  3  Heft; 
lvi.  Jahrg.,  i.  Bd.,  3  Heft ;  lvii.  Jahrg.,  i.  Bd.,  1  Heft.  From  the 
Editor. 


310  DONATIONS. 

"  The  Victorian  Naturalist."  Vol.  viii.,  Nos.  2-3  (June-July, 
1891).     From  the  Field  Naturalists'  Club  of  Victoria. 

"  Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Imperiale  des  Naturalistes  de  Moscou." 
Annee  1890,  No.  4  ;  "  Beilage  zum  Bulletin."  2me  Serie,  T.  iv. 
(1891).     From  the  Society. 

"  Journal  of  the  Bombay  Natural  History  Society."  Vol.  vi., 
No.  1  (1891).     From  the  Society. 

"  Bollettino  clei  Musei  di  Zoologia  ed  Anatomia  Comparata  della 
R.  Universita,  di  Torino."  Vol.  vi.,  Nos.  94-103  (1891).  From 
the  Museum. 

"  Records  of  the  Geological  Survey  of  India."  Vol.  xxiv., 
Part  2  (1891).     From  the  Director. 

"The  American  Naturalist."  Vol.  xxw,  No.  292  (April, 
1891).     From  the  Editors. 

"  Johns  Hopkins  University  Circulars."  Vol.  x.,  Nos.  89  and 
90  (June,  1891).     From  the  University. 

"  The  Australasian  Journal  of  Pharmacy."  Vol.  vi.,  No.  67 
(July,  1891).     From  the  Editor. 

11  The  Pharmaceutical  Journal  of  Australasia."  Vol.  iv.,  No.  7 
(July,  1891).     From  the  Editor. 

"  Proceedings  of  the  United  States  National  Museum."  Vol. 
xiii.,  Nos.  836,  840  and  841  (1891).     From  the  Director. 

"  Papers  and  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  Tasmania  for 
1890."     From  the  Society. 

"  Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Zoologique  de  France  pour  l'Annee 
1891."     T.  xvi.,  No.  4  (April,  1891).     From  the  Society. 

"  Records  of  the  Geological  Survey  of  N.S.W."  Vol.  ii.,  Part 
3  (1891).     From  the  Hon.  the  Minister  for  Mines. 


311 


THE  SILURIAN  TRILOBITES  OF  NEW  SOUTH  WALES, 

WITH  REFERENCES  TO  THOSE  OF  OTHER 

PARTS  OF  AUSTRALIA. 

By  R.  Etheridge,  Junr. — PaljEontologist  to  the  Australian 
Museum,  and  Geological  Survey  of  N.  S.  Wales — and  John 
Mitchell,  of  the  Public  School,  Narellan. 

Part  I. 

(Plate  xxv.) 

Introduction. 

In  this  and  following  papers,  we  purpose,  as  stated  in  a  late 
communication  to  this  Society,*  to  give  descriptions  of  the 
Silurian  Trilobites  of  New  South  Wales,  with  passing  references 
to  those  found  in  other  parts  of  Australia.  In  the  paper  referred 
to  we  briefly  mentioned  the  sources  of  our  material.  We  shall 
endeavour  to  comprise  the  whole  of  the  species  of  one  genus 
within  the  compass  of  each  paper,  both  as  a  means  of  comparison 
inter  se,  and  with  the  view  of  convenient  subdivision  of  the 
subject.  Unless  otherwise  stated,  the  figured  specimens  are  all 
taken  from  the  collection  of  one  of  us. 

We  commence  with  the  family  Proetidae. 

Family  PROETID.E. 

Our  knowledge  of  the  Silurian  Proetidse  of  Australia  is  com- 
prised in  four  descriptions  of  species  by  Sir  F.  McCoy,  the  late 
Messrs.  de  Koninck  and  Ratte,  and  one  of  us.  The  first-named 
naturalist  describedf  from  the  Wenlock  shale  of  Broadhurst  Creek, 

*  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1890,  v.  (2),  Pt.  3,  p.  501. 
t  Prod.  Pal.  Vict.,  Dec.  m.,  1876,  p.  17,  t.  22,  f.  10,  10a. 


312  THE    SILURIAN    TRILOBITES    OF    NEW    SOUTH    WALES, 

near  Kilmore,  Victoria,  a  species  under  the  name  of  Forbesia 
euryceps,  which  is  peculiar  from  the  great  width  of  the  cephalic- 
shield,  widely  divergent  genal  angles,  and  the  long  spines  attached 
thereto. 

Prof,  de  Koninck  referred  three  small  pygidia  from  Yarralumla, 
N.  S.  Wales,  to  the  British  Proetus  Stokesii,  Murchison,*  but  the 
only  distinctive  character  which  can  be  seized  on  is  the  presence 
of  six  or  seven  axis  rings.  These  tails  probably  belong  to  one  or 
other  of  the  forms  described  later,  and  not  to  P.  Stokesii  at  all. 

The  late  Mr.  F.  Ratte  described!  a  Trilobite  from  Bowning, 
referring  it  to  Proetus  ascanius,  Corda,  as  figured  by  Barrande. 
This  form  will  be  discussed  later  on. 

On  two  separate  occasions  a  Proetus  and  a  Cyphaspis  have  been 
described  by  one  of  us,  the  former  as  P.  bowning 'ensis,  t  from  the 
Lower  Trilobite  Bed  at  Bowning,  the  latter  as  C.  boivningensis,§ 
from  the  same  locality  and  similar  horizon.  These  will  be  forth- 
with re-described. 

This,  so  far  as  we  know,  is  an  epitome  of  all  that  has  been 
written  on  the  Proetidse  of  Australian  Silurian  rocks. 

Genus  Proetus,  Steininger,  1831. 
(Mem.  Soc.  Geol.  France,   I.,  p.  355.) 

The  groups  which  have  been  proposed  within  the  wider  generic 
term  Proetus  are  the  following  : — 

1.  Photon,  Barrande,  1846.     Pygidium  with  the  pleurae  pro- 

duced into  spines,  forming  a  fimbriated  circumference. 

2.  Forbesia,  McCoy,  1846.     Genal  angles  produced  into  long 

spines ;  pleurse  of  the  pygidium  segmented ;  glabella 
furrows  present ;  and  large  tubercles  terminating  the 
neck-furrow. 

*  Foss.  Pal.  Nouv.-Galles  du  Sud,  1876,  Pt.  1,  p.  56. 

t  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  I.  (2),  p.  1066,  t.  15,  f.  1-4. 

X  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1887,  II.  (2),  Pt.  3,  p.  439,  t.  16,  f.  4-6. 

§  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  18S7,  II.  (2),  Pt.  3,  p.  438,  t.  16,  f.  3. 


BY    R.  ETHERIDGE,  JUN.,  AND    JOHN    MITCHELL.  313 

3.  Xiphogonium,  Corda,  1847.     Pleurae  of  the  pygidium  unseg- 

mented  ;  nine  segments  to  the  thorax. 

4.  Celmus,   Angelin,    1878.      Two  pairs  of   glabella  furrows; 

twelve  thoracic  segments. 
The  non-acceptance  of  these  terms  by  naturalists  in  general 
would  seem  to  imply  a  difficulty  in  distributing  the  species  under 
them.  To  us,  however,  Phceton  appears  a  sound  section  of  Proetus, 
and  had  any  species  occurred  possessing  its  peculiar  features 
we  should  have  felt  disposed  to  use  it.  Our  inclination,  also, 
would  lead  us  to  adopt  Sir  F.  McCoy's  Forbesia,  were  it  not  that 
the  characters  assigned  appear  to  be  more  specific  than  even  sub- 
generic.  For  instance,  his  F.  euryceps  does  not  show  two  of  the 
most  important  characters  used  for  its  generic  separation — the 
neck  tubercles  and  glabella  furrows.  Some  Proeti  have  segmented 
pygidial  pleurae,  without  the  presence  of  genal  spines,  e.g.,  P. 
bohemicus,  Barr.*;  others  again  possess  genal  spines,  but  no 
glabella  furrows,  and  a  well-segmented  pygidium,  as,  for  instance, 
P.  lepidus,  Barr.  f ;  a  third  species  is  provided  with  glabella 
furrows  and  genal  spines,  but  the  pleurae  of  the  pygidium  are 
almost  smooth  ;  lastly,  many  species  have  well-developed  neck 
lobes  and  genal  spines,  without  the  presence  of  neck  lobes,  and 
genal  spines  alone  in  the  absence  of  glabella  furrows,  such  as  P. 
Prouti,  Shumard,  P.  Powi,  Green,  sp.J  Under  these  circum- 
stances, Forbesia  does  not  appear  to  have  sufficient  stability  to 
form  even  a  sub-genus. 

Proetus  bowningensis,  Mitchell  (PI.  xxv.,  figs.  1,  la-c). 

Proetus  bovmingensis,  Mitchell,   Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales, 

1887,  I.  (2),  Pt.  3,  p.  439,  t.  16,  f.  4-6. 

Sp.  Char. — Body  subelliptical.  Cephalic  shield  larger  than  the 
pygidium  or  thorax,  equal  in  axial  length  to  the  pygidium,  greater 
than  the  axial  length  of  the  thorax  by  the  width  of  the  neck  ring 
and  furrow ;  limb  moderately  wide,  the  margin  thickened,  flattened 

*  Syst.  Sil.  Boheme,  1852,  I.  Atlas,  t.  16,  f.  1-15. 
t  Syst.  Sil.  Boheme,  1852,  I.,  t.  16,  f.  28-30. 
%  Hall,  Pal.  N.  York,  111.  Dev.  Fossils,  t.  21. 


314  THE    SILURIAN    TRILOBITES    OF    NEW    SOUTH    WALES, 

in  front  of  the  glabella,  striated  at  the  side  of  the  free  cheeks  ; 
glabella  conoid,  obtusely  pointed  forwards,  very  moderately  convex, 
no  lateral  furrows  visible ;  neck  furrow  narrow,  straight ;  neck 
segment  rather  wide,  gently  arched,  sub-tumid  at  each  extremity ; 
axial  furrows  rather  faint ;  facial  sutures  from  the  eyes  to  the 
frontal  margin  straight,  thence  outwards  at  an  angle  of  about  60°, 
curved  posteriorly,  and  cutting  the  posterior  margin  about  the 
middle  of  the  side  lobes  of  the  cephalic  shield;  fixed  cheeks  small, 
with  large  eye-lobes ;  eyes  large  and  crescentic ;  free  cheeks 
moderately  large,  with  a  well  denned  and  striated  margin  ;  genal 
angles  continued  into  stout  spines,  which  reach  to  and  include  the 
fourth  pleura  of  the  thorax.  Thorax  of  nine  segments,  with 
rather  straight  lateral  margins,  length  equal  to  the  combined 
width  of  the  pleurae ;  axis  at  its  anterior  end  much  wider  than 
the  side  lobes,  posteriorly  they  are  equal,  moderately  arched  : 
segments  inclined  slightly  forwards ;  axial  grooves  distinct  and 
narrow;  pleurae  moderately  arched,  distinctly  grooved,  the  grooves 
widest  medially,  diminishing  towards  the  proximal  and  distal 
ends.  Pygidium  large,  subelliptical  or  triangular,  proportion  of 
width  to  length  as  about  16  :  14;  axis  prominent,  terminated 
distally  somewhat  abruptly  and  obliquely,  twice  as  wide  at  the 
proximal  as  the  distal  end ;  segmentation  faint,  of  eight  or  nine 
rings  ;  axial  furrows  moderately  distinct ;  pleura?  five,  wider  than 
the  axis,  less  arched  than  those  of  the  thorax,  and  the  first  three 
pairs  distinctly  furrowed;  limb  wide,  striate,  and  slightly  thickened. 
Obs. — Additional  specimens  enable  us  to  form  a  much  better 
idea  of  the  structure  of  this  Trilobite  than  when  it  was 
originally  described.  The  principal  characters  of  the  species  are 
a  conoid  glabella,  ill-defined  glabella  furrows,  moderately  large 
genal  spines,  a  thoracic  axis  of  nine  segments,  the  axis  of  the 
pygidium  of  eight  or  nine,  and  the  pleurae  of  the  same  five  in 
number.  The  original  specimen  of  P.  boioninyensis  figured  was 
one  in  which  the  mutilated  cephalic  shield  was  in  the  form  of  an 
impression,  and  the  pygidium  as  a  decorticated  relief.  The  test 
of  this  shield  is  beautifully  ornamented  with  anastomosing  lines, 
which  on  the  genal  angles  and  base  of  the  spines  become  concentric 


BY    R.  ETHERIDGE,  JUN.,  AND    JOHN    MITCHELL.  315 

and  semi-imbricating.  Similar  sculpture  exists  in  Proetus  decorus, 
Barrande,*  but  the  Trilobites  do  not  otherwise  agree.  The 
normal  number  of  ten  thoracic  segments  is  here  departed  from  in 
favour  of  nine,  a  character  which  P.  bowningensis  possesses  in 
common  with  the  Bohemian  species  P.  sculptits,  Barr.,f  and  the 
American  Devonian  P.  longicaudus.  Another  peculiarity  exists 
in  the  rather  long  genal  spines,  which  extend  to  and  include  the 
fourth  thoracic  segment,  a  feature  which  is,  however,  exceeded  by 
some  Bohemian  species,  as  well  as  by  P.  latifrons,  McCoy,  £  and 
one  Australian  form,  P.  australis,  nobis.  In  P.  latifrons,  the 
genal  spines  reach  as  far  as  the  sixth  thoracic  segment. 

P.  bowningensis  does  not  closely  resemble  in  its  general  specific 
characters  any  of  the  numerous  Bohemian  species,  having  too 
conoid  a  glabella  and  far  too  triangular  a  pygidium.  Proetus 
parviusculus,  Hall,§  of  the  Hudson  River  Group,  is  much  like  our 
PI.  xxv.  fig.  1c.  about  the  glabella,  and  generally  in  regard  to  the 
whole  cephalic  shield,  but  the  outline  of  the  pygidium  is  much  too 
semicircular. 

From  P.  Rattei,  nobis,  the  present  species  is  distinguished  by 
the  absence  of  the  longitudinal  sulci  on  the  glabella  of  that  form, 
and  from  P.  austrcdis  by  the  almost  circumscribed  condition  of 
the  basal  lobes.  The  large  plain  glabella  and  wide  diverging 
genal  spines  separate  the  Victorian  P.  euryceps,  McCoy, ||  from  our 
species  at  once. 

Individuals  from  the  Middle  Trilobite  Bed  of  the  Bowning 
Series  have  a  more  prominent  thoracic  axis  than  those  from  the 
Upper  Trilobite  Bed,  whilst  the  specimens  obtained  from  the  latter 
horizon  have  not  been  observed  to  possess  anastomosing  ornament. 

*  Syst.  Sil.  Boheme,  1852,  Ir,  Atlas,  t.  17,  f.  13. 

t  Syst  Sil.  BohSme,  1852,  I.,  Atlas,  t.  15,  f.  1 

+  Forhe.ua,  Brit.  Pal.  Foss.,  Fas.  1,  1851,  p.  174. 

§  Hall  and  Whitfield,  Report  Geol.   Survey,  Ohio,  II.,  Pt.  2,  Pal.,  1875, 

p.  109,  t.  4,  f.  18. 

||  Prod.  Pal.  Vict.,  Dec.  III.,  1S76,  p.  17,  t.  22,  f.  10,  10a. 


316  THE    SILURIAN    TRILOBITES    OF    NEW    SOUTH    WALES, 

Loc.  and  Horizon. — Bowning  Creek,  Bowning,  Co.  Harden 
(Coll.  Mitchell)  ;  Middle  and  Upper  Trilobite  Beds  of  the  Bowning 
Series — Upper  Silurian  (1  Wenlock). 

Proetus  Rattei,  sp.nov.  (PI.  xxv.,  figs.  2,  2a-d). 

Proetus  ascanius,  Ratte  (non  Barrande),  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S. 

Wales,  I.  (2),  Pt.  4,  p.  1066,  t.  15,  f.  1-4. 

Sp.  Char. — Body  oval  and  flattened.  Cephalic  shield  large, 
semicircular,  and  slightly  convex  ;  limb  wide,  flattened,  or  slightly 
concave,  with  anastomosing  striae.  Glabella  short,  square,  and 
somewhat  trilobed  by  two  shallow  longitudinal  furrows,  extending 
from  the  neck  furrow  to  the  front ;  basal  pair  of  lateral  furrows 
present,  uniting  the  longitudinal  furrows,  and  so  dividing  each 
lateral  lobe  into  two;  neck  furrow  distinct,  narrow;  neck  segment 
wide,  slightly  convex  about  the  middle ;  axial  furrows  rather  faint, 
continuing  round  the  front  of  the  glabella;  facial  sutures  ante- 
riorly rather  straight,  and  gently  directed  outwards  to  the  margin, 
behind  they  cut  the  posterior  margin  at  a  distance  from  the  glabella 
equal  to  that  of  one-third  the  width  of  the  thoracic  pleurae ;  fixed 
cheeks  very  small ;  free  cheeks  large,  very  moderately  convex  ; 
genal  angles  continued  into  stout  spines,  directed  outwards  slightly 
from  the  thorax,  and  extending  as  far  as  the  fourth  segment  of  the 
latter.  Thorax  of  eight  segments,  the  axis  and  pleurae  at  the 
anterior  end  being  about  equal  in  width,  but  posteriorly  the  latter 
are  much  the  wider ;  lateral  margins  straight ;  axis  flat  or  very 
slightly  arched ;  pleurae  flat  and  bent  backwards  towards  their 
outer  ends,  terminating  in  rather  claw-shaped  spines,  those  of 
the  third  pleurae  apparently  longer  than  the  others.  Pygidium 
relatively  large,  about  three-fourths  as  long  as  the  head-shield, 
subsemicircular  ;  axis  conical,  of  eight  rings,  the  terminal  ones 
very  faint ;  contracting  rapidly  to  the  margin  of  the  limb,  thence 
continuing  to  the  circumference  as  an  acicular  ridge,  axial  furrow 
distinct ;  pleurae  eight,  distinctly  furrowed,  the  furrows  extending 
across  the  limb  to  the  circumference  ;  limb  wide,  marked  off  by  a 
faint  concentric  depression,  and  faintly  striated  with  concentric 
wavy  striae. 


BY    R.  ETHERIDGE,  JUN.,  AND    JOHN    MITCHELL.  317 

Obs. — Proetus  Rattei  was  figured  and  partially  described  by  the 
late  Mr.  Felix  Ratte,  and  provisionally  referred  to  P.  ascanius, 
Corda,  but  though  the  cephalic  shield  does  to  some  extent  agree 
with  that  of  this  species,  as  figured  by  Barrande,*  there  are 
differences  which  we  consider  sufficiently  important  to  separate 
the  two,  and  therefore  beg  to  associate  with  it  the  name  of  our 
deceased  friend. 

The  glabella  in  P.  Rattei  is  much  squarer  than  in  P.  ascanius, 
and  approaches  nearer  to  the  hinder  border  of  the  limb.  The 
longitudinal  furrows  also  are  longer,  extending  farther  forward, 
whilst  the  basal  lobe  is  smaller.  At  the  same  time,  both  Trilo- 
bites  possess  a  great  development  of  cephalic  shield  exterior  to 
the  glabella,  and  it  was  probably  this,  with  the  character  of  the 
furrows,  which  caused  Mr.  Ratte  to  make  the  reference  to  P. 
ascanius.  Mr.  Ratte  appears  to  have  copied  Barrande's  figures 
rather  than  the  Australian  fossils  before  him.  P.  Rattei  is  quite 
distinct  from  either  of  the  other  Australian  species. 

In  some  respects  the  pygidium  of  P.  Rattei  resembles  that  of 
P.  decorus,  Barr.,f  but  differs  in  being  nearly  semicircular  instead 
of  sub  triangular.  In  the  great  proportionate  size  of  the  limb  of 
the  pygidium,  our  species  approaches  some  forms  of  Bronteus;  and 
in  the  short  glabella  and  expanded  cephalic  shield  it  resembles 
Arethusina.  On  the  other  hand,  the  Proetiform  characters  of 
eight  thoracic  segments,  and  eyes  close  to  the  glabella,  overbalance 
these  peculiarities. 

A  similar  acicular  ridge  to  that  at  the  posterior  termination  of 
the  pygidium  axis  is  also  present  in  Proetus  corycazus,  \  Conrad,  a 
characteristic  species  of  the  Niagara  Group.  One  of  the  most 
peculiar  features  in  P.  Rattei,  and  unobserved  by  us  in  any 
other  species  of  the  genus,  is  the  enlargement  of  the  pleural 
spine  of  the  third  thoracic  segment.     Is  this  a  sexual  character  1 

We  have  detected  what  we  believe  to  be  the  larval  condition. 
In  the  earliest  stage  the  glabella  is  rudimentary,  the  eye  exceed- 

*  Syst.  Sil.  Boheme,  1852,  I.,  Atlas,  t.  15,  f.  41. 

f  Syst.  Sil.  Boheme,  1852,  I.,  Atlas,  t.  17,  f.  13. 

X  Hall,  Pal.  N.  York,  II.,  t.  67,  f.  13. 


318  THE    SILURIAN    TRILOBITES    OF    NEW    SOUTH    WALES, 

ingly  small,  the  thoracic  segments  five  in  number,  and  the  pygidium 
almost  as  large  as  the  thorax  and  cephalic  shield  combined  (PI.  xxv. 
fig.  2d).  In  the  next  stage  the  glabella  is  more  fully  developed, 
but  the  segments  of  the  thorax  remain  the  same  in  number. 

Log.  and  Horizon. — Bowning  Creeek,  Bowning,  Co.  Harden 
(Coll.  Mitchell)  ;  Lower  Trilobite  Bed  of  the  Bowning  Series — 
Upper  Silurian  (?  Wenlock). 

Proetus  australis,  sp.nov.  (PI.  xxv.,  figs.  3,  Za-e). 

Sp.  Char. — Body  oval  or  elliptical.  Cephalic  shield  semi-ellip- 
tical ;  axial  length  greater  than  that  of  the  thorax,  and  much 
greater  than  that  of  the  pygidium.  Glabella  rather  short,  squarish 
or  subrectangular,  moderately  prominent,  equal  in  length  to  the 
pygidium ;  basal  pair  of  lateral  furrows  distinct,  and  nearly 
circumscribing  the  basal  lobes  ;  neck  furrow  moderately  distinct ; 
neck  segment  wide,  gently  arched ;  axial  furrows  moderately 
distinct  and  continuous  in  front  of  the  glabella;  facial  sutures 
anteriorly  straight  to  the  thickened  edge  of  limb,  thence  incurving 
along  it,  behind  cutting  the  posterior  margins  of  the  shield  at 
about  one-third  their  distance  from  the  axial  grooves ;  fixed 
cheeks  small  :  eyes  moderately  large  and  reniform  ;  free  cheeks 
large  and  somewhat  tumid ;  genal  angles  produced  into  very  long 
and  gently  incurved  spines,  which  completely  embrace  the  thorax  ; 
limb  wide,  with  a  thickened  edge,  and  striated  on  the  under 
surface,  the  shield  between  it  and  the  anterior  edge  of  the  glabella 
being  much  flattened.  Thorax  of  eight  segments,  width  twice 
that  of  the  length  ;  axis  moderately  arched,  tergal  portion  rather 
flat,  almost  twice  as  wide  anteriorly  as  posteriorly  ;  axial  furrows 
distinct ;  pleurae  gently  directed  or  curved  backwards,  terminating 
distally  in  short  claw-shaped  spines.  Pygidium  semi-elliptical, 
twice  as  wide  as  long  j  axis  short,  half  the  length  of  the  pygidium, 
more  or  less  in  the  form  of  a  truncated  cone  j  pleurae  flat,  five  or 
six  in  number,  faintly  furrowed  ;  limb  striated  ;  surface  present- 
ing a  faint  appearance  of  granulation.  • 

Obs. — Proetus  australis  is  an  interesting  species,  as  by  the 
nearly  circumscribed  basal  lobes  it  shows  a  tendency  to  take  on 


BY    R.  ETHERIDGE,  JUN.,  AND    JOHN    MITCHELL.  319 

the  Cyphaspis  type,  in  which  it  agrees  with  P.  decorus,  Barr.,* 
P.  striatus,  Barr.,f  P.  archiaci,  Barr.|  It,  however,  retains  its 
connection  with  Proetus  by  possessing  eight  thoracic  segments. 

The  nearly  complete  isolation  of  the  basal  lobes  also  separates 
P.  austrcdis  at  once  from  P.  bowningensis  and  P.  Rattei. 

The  genal  spines  are  of  great  length,  embracing  the  whole  of  the 
thorax,  a  marked  increase  in  this  particular  structure  on  that  of 
P.  bowningensis  and  P.  Rattei.  Herein  P.  australis  agrees  with 
P.  Loveni,  Barr.,§  and  a  similar  length  of  spine  occurs  in  P. 
Stokesii,  Murchison,  for  McCoy  ||  describes  the  genal  spines  of  this 
species  as  extending  to  the  pygidium,  and  thus  embracing  the 
whole  of  the  thoracic  segments. 

Loc.  and  Horizon. — Bowning  Creek,  Bowning,  Co.  Harden 
(Coll.  Mitchell)  ;  Lower  Trilobite  Bed  of  the  Bowning  Series — 
Upper  Silurian  (?  Wenlock). 

In  our  next  communication  we  shall  treat  of  the  Genus  Cyphaspis. 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE. 

Proetus  bowningensis,  Mitchell. 
Fig.  1.   — A  specimen  wanting  the  free  cheeks  and  genal  spines. 
Fig.  la. — A  similar  one  with  less  of  the  glabella  preserved. 
Fig.  lb. — A  more  or  less  complete  individual. 
Fig.  ]  c.  — Side  view  of  Fig.  lb. 

Proetus  Rattei,  Eth.,fil.,  and  Mitchell. 

Fig.  2.    —The  left  half  of  a  somewhat  curved  individual,  showing  the  large 
third  thoracic  pleural  spine,  -x  2. 

*  Syst.  Sil.  Boheme,  1852,  Atlas,  t.  17,  f.  13. 

t  Syst.  Sil.  Boheme,  1852,  Atlas,  t.  17,  f.  46. 

t  Syst.  Sil.  Boheme,  1852,  Atlas,  t.  17,  f.  42. 

§  Syst.  Sil.  Boheme,  1852,  Atlas,  t.  16,  f.  25  and  26. 

II  Brit.  Pal.  Foss.,  1851,  Fas.  1,  p.  174. 


320  THE    SILURIAN    TRILOBITES    OF    NEW    SOUTH    WALES. 

Proteus  Rattei,  Eth^fl.,  and  Mitchell  (continued). 

Fig.  2a. — Cephalic  shield  and  portion  of  thorax,  the  lateral  portions  of  the 

former  rather  displayed,   x  2. 
Fig.  26. — Remarkably  small  head  of  a  young  individual,   x  5. 
Fig.  2c.  — Pygidium  showing  the  surface  sculpture  and  acicular  termination 

to  the  thoracic  axis,   x  2. 
Fig.  2d. — Larval  form,  x  5. 

Proetus  australis,  Eth.,fil.>  and  Mitchell. 
Fig.  3.  — A  more  or  less  perfect  individual. 
Fig.  3a. — Portion  of  a  cephalic  shield. 
Fig.  3&.  — A  somewhat  more  perfect  specimen  than  fig.  3,  showing  the  long 

genal  spines  embracing  the  whole  of  the  thorax,  x  2. 
Fig.  3c.  — A  glabella  showing  small  basal  furrows,  x  2. 
Fig.  3d. — A  free  cheek. 
Fig.  3e.  — Another  free  cheek,  x  2. 


321 


ON  THE   SYNONYMY  OF   HELIX   (HADEAJ   GULOSA, 

GOULD. 

By  John  Brazier,  C.M.Z.S.,  F.L.S. 

The  subject  of  this  present  contribution,  Helix  (Hadra)  gidosa, 
Gould,  was  first  obtained  by  me  at  Port  Hacking  and  other  places 
included  in,  and  now  known  as,  the  National  Park  in  1859-1860; 
also  between  Cook's  and  George's  Rivers,  at  places  now  called 
Kogarah,  Rockdale,  and  Hurstville,  then  known  as  Gannon's 
Forest,  and  at  Bulli  Pass  in  1864,  1865,  1866.  Specimens  were 
named  and  submitted  in  1868  to  Messrs.  George  French  Angas 
and  Henry  Adams  for  identification,  and  were  duly  returned  as 
identical  with  H.  gulosa  as  defined  by  Gould  in  1846.  Gould's 
specimens  were  first  obtained  by  Mr.  J.  Drayton,  of  the  United 
States  Exploring  Expedition,  in  the  Illawarra  district  in  the  year 
1839,  and  were  re-described  by  Pfeiffer  in  1847  as  H.  coriaria  from 
specimens  reputed  to  have  come  from  Ceylon.  The  shell  was  next 
characterised  by  Morelet  in  1853,  under  the  title  H.  morosa,  as 
coming  from  Moreton  Bay  ;  and  in  1859  Pfeiffer,  under  the  name 
of  H.  coriaria,  originally  described  from  Ceylon  by  himself,  in 
1847,  recorded  this  species  as  occurring  in  Western  Australia. 
Gould,  in  the  Otia  Conchologica  in  1862,  p.  243,  suggests  a  new 
generic  name,  Badlstes,  for  his  H.  gulosa.  In  the  same  year  this 
author  also  published  an  account  of  the  occurrence  of  the  species  in 
Australia.  In  1864  Dr.  Cox  re-described  H.  gulosa  under  two 
distinct  specific  designations,  viz.,  II.  Master  si  and  77.  Scotti,  the 
former  regarded  by  him  as  an  intermediate  form  between  H. 
Grayi,  Pfr.,  and  H.  Jervisensis,  Quoy  and  Gaimard. 

Four  years  subsequently,  1868,  Pfeiffer  sinks  H.  gulosa  as 
merely  a  synonym  of  H.  Lessoni,  disregarding  Cox's  supposed 
species. 


322      ON    THE   SYNONYMY    OP    HELIX  (HADRA)  GULOSA,  GOULD. 

Pfeifter,  in  the  Nomenclator  Heliceorum  Viventium  in  1881 
drops  the  specific  name  gulosa  as  synonymic  with  Lessoni  from 
Port  Curtis  and  reinstates  the  species  under  the  sub-generic  title 
Bxdistes.  Paetel,  in  his  Catalog  der  Conchy lien-Sammlung,  1889, 
makes  //.  gulosa  synonymic  with  Lessoni,  Pfr.  The  latest 
published  account  of  this  species  in  question  is  that  by  Mr.  H.  A. 
Pilsbry,  in  Tryon's  Manual  Conchology  (second  series  Pulmonata, 
vol.  vi.,  1890),  where  this  author  evidently  is  inclined  to  regard  //. 
coriaria,  H.  Scotti,  H.  monacha,  and  //.  morosa  as  merely  varietal 
forms  of  the  original  H.  gulosa,  Gould. 

In  the  following  paper  I  have  enumerated  a  complete  synonymy 
of  H.  gulosa,  Gould  ;  and  from  the  examination  of  a  very  large 
number  of  specimens,  both  living  and  dead,  I  cannot  hesitate  to 
confirm  Pilsbry's  surmise  that  //.  coriaria,  H.  Scotti,  H.  monacha, 
II.  morosa  are  undoubtedly  identical  with  //.  gulosa,  Gould.  It 
is  some  years  since  I  came  to  the  conclusion  that  Dr.  Cox's 
species,  Mastersi  and  Scotti,  were  not  good  species.  According  to 
Drayton,  as  mentioned  by  Gould  (U.  S.  Exploring  Expedition, 
vol.  xn.  p.  65,  1852),  the  living  animal  does  not  glide  from  place 
to  place  as  other  Helices,  but  proceeds  by  flexing  the  foot  in  an 
undulating  manner,  and  on  this  account  Gould,  in  1862,  bestowed 
upon  the  species  the  sub-generic  name  Badistes.  Having 
examined  many  hundreds  of  living  specimens,  both  in  their 
natural  haunts  and  in  confinement,  I  am  compelled  to  contradict 
the  statement  that  this  mollusc  "  flexes  the  foot ;"  it  moves  in 
the  ordinary  gliding  manner.  I  find  that  I  made  a  marginal  note 
to  this  effect  in  1879  in  a  copy  of  Gould's  Otia  Conchologica, 
kindly  presented  to  me  by  my  valued  friend  and  correspondent, 
Mr.  John  Howland  Thomson,  C.M.Z.S.,  New  Bedford,  U.S.A. 
Consequently,  as  pointed  out  by  me  to  my  young  friend,  Mr. 
Chas.  Hedley,  who  has  lately  commenced  to  write  upon  the 
Australian  Land  Mollusca,  and  is  about  to  publish  an  account  of 
the  anatomy  of  this  species,  the  sub-genus  Badistes  has  been 
created  under  an  erroneous  impression,  and  in  my  opinion  //. 
gulosa,  Gould,  is  attributable  to  the  old  sub-genus  Hadra,  as 
placed  by  Pilsbry.     I  have  seen  specimens  of  this  species  exhibited 


BY    JOHN    BRAZIER.  323 

before   this  Society  as  large  varieties  of  H.   Grayi,  Pfr.,   from 
Bottle  Forest. 

Hanley  and  Theobald,  in  their  Conchologia  Indica,  state  that 
Australian  specimens  cannot  be  distinguished  from  the  shell 
delineated  in  their  figure ;  to  my  eye  the  figure  indicates  dwarf 
specimens  found  by  me  on  Comerong  Island,  Shoalhaven.  The 
species  may  have  been  introduced  into  the  Island  of  Ceylon  in 
boxes  of  plants  taken  from  New  South  Wales,  specimens  having, 
perhaps,  been  sent  by  the  late  Sir  William  Denison,  when 
Governor  of  N.S.W.,  to  the  Indian  Museum,  as  that  gentleman 
was  constantly  contributing  specimens  to  the  Indian  colony. 

Helix  (Hadra)  gulosa,  Gould. 

1846.  Helix  gulosa,  Gould,  Proc.  Boston  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  vol.  n. 

p.  165  ;  Expedition,  Shells,  p.  17 

1847.  //.  coriaria,  Pfeiffer,  Zeitschr.  f.  Mai.,  p.  145 

1847.  H.  coriaria,  Pfeiffer  in  Martini  and  Chemnitz  Conch.  Cab., 

2nd  edition  (Kuster),  p.  265,  pi.  120,  fig.  1-2 

1848.  H.  gulosa,  Gould,  Pfeiffer  in  Monogr.  Hel.  Viv.,  Vol.  I.  p. 

339 

1848.  H.  coriaria,  Pfeiffer,  Monogr.  Hel.  Viv.,  Vol.  I.  p.  445,  sp. 
501a 

1852.  H.  gulosa,  Gould,  United  States  Exploring  Expedition, 
Mollusca  and  Shells,  Vol.  xn.  pp.  64,  65,  pi.  3,  fig.  43, 
animal  with  shell ;  43a,  the  aperture  ;  43b,  the  base  of 
the  shell 

1852.  H.  gulosa,  Gould,  Forbes  in  Appendix  to  Macgillivray's 
Voyage  of  H.M.S.  Rattlesnake,  Vol.  n.  p.  370,  No.  32 

1852.  H.  coriaria,  Reeve  in  Conch.  Icon.,  Helix,  Vol.  VII.  pi.  79, 

fig.  417 

1853.  //.  gulosa,  Gould,  Pfeiffer  in  Monogr.  Hel.  Viv.,  Vol.  Hi.  p. 

229,  No.  1302 
22 


■Un    OF    HELIX  IHADR.0  GULOSA,  GOULD, 

H.  norxMa,  M  mJ  lie  Conchy!..  Vol.  iv.  p.  369, 

-    15 

H.  coriaria,  Monogr.  Hel.  Viw.  Vol.  in.  p.  150, 

N 

.  V?\  H.   and  A.  Adams,  Genera 
of  recent  Mollusc*,  Vol.  n.  p.  \ 

EL    coriario*    Pfr.,    Tenn«=: 

Island — Physical.  Historical,  and  Topographical— 

23£ 

;     '. 
1049 

H.  vhIm,  Gould,  Pfeiifer  in  Monor 

i  a  synonym  of  H.  Lt&cni  Pfr. 

H.  moroia,  Morelet,  Pfeiflerin  Monogr.  Hel.  V-; -.-..  VoL  n\ 

1559.  H.  miwirUn,  Pfeiffer,  Proc  ZooL  Soc  London. 

43,05.7 
I860.  H.  (Had™)m>orw*L.  Albers,  Die  Heliceen,  p.  166 

391 
1863.  H.  fmJbm,  Gould,  Oaa  Conchologica.  p,  17 

1  R.  (BmteksJfmlaML,  Gould,  Oaa  Gmchologica,  p.  243 
1S64.  R.  mmmekm,  Co,  Catalogue  of  A  nana  Han  Land  Sheik,  p. 

Skelk>  p,  1- 

18&L  E.  Midterm*  Cox,  Anaak  and  Mag.  Nat.  HklL,  3rd 
VoL  rnr.  p.  15L,  No.  6;  Catalogue  of  Aaatralim 
Skdk,  pL  19,  No.  109 

18W,  g  Sartfc  Cox,  CVilnfflBi  of  AwttraKm  Tamd  SfcriK  p.  36, 


BY    JOHN    BRAZIER.  325 

1868.  //.  coriaria,  Pfeiffer,  Monogr.  Hel.  Viv.,  Vol.  v.  p.  236,  No. 

1428 
1868.  E.  Mastersi,  Cox,  Pfeiffer  in  Monogr.  Hel.  Viv.,  Vol.  v.  p. 

237,  No.  1431 

1868.  H.  monacha,  Pfeiffer,  Monogr.  Hel.  Viv.,  Vol.  v.  p.  27S, 
No.  1785 

1868.  II.  gulosa,  Gould,  Pfeiffer  in  Monogr.  Hel.  Viv.,  Vol.  v.  p. 
320 ;  quotes  it  as  a  synonym  of  H.  Lessoni,  Pfr. 

1868.  H.  morosa,  Morelet,  Pfeiffer  in  Monogr.  Hel.  Viv.,  Vol.  v. 
p.  320,  No.  2117 

1868.  K  Scotti,  Cox,  Pfeiffer  in  Monogr.  Hel.  Viv.,  Vol.  v.  p.  340, 

No.  2230 
1868.  //.  (Pomatia)  coriaria,  Cox,  Monogr.  Aust.  Land  Shells, 

p.  36,  No.  92,  pi.  2,  fig.  7,  pi.  8,  fig.  10,  pi.  10,  fig.  5 

1868.  B..  (Pomatia)  monacha,  Cox,  Monogr.  Aust.  Land  Shells, 
p.  38,  No.  98,  pi.  18,  fig.  13,  from  Proc.  Zool.  Soc. 
London,  1859 

1868.  H.  (Camama)  morosa,  Cox,  Monogr.  Aust.  Land  Shells,  p. 
60,  No.  151 

1868.  H.  (Pomatia)  Scotti,  Cox,  Monogr .    Aust.Land  Shells,  p. 

39,  No.  100,  pi.  10,  tig.  4,  4a 

1869.  Galaxias    monacha,    Frauenfeld,    Verh.    k.-k.    Zool.    Bot. 

Ges.  Wien,  p.  875 

1876.  H.  coriaria,  Pfeiffer,  Monogr.  Hel.  Viv.,  Vol.  VII.  p.  272, 

No.  1803 
1876.  H.  monacha,  Pfeiffer,  Monogr.  Hel.  Viv.,  Vol.  VII.  pp.  322, 

579,  No.  2227 

1876.  H.  coriaria  (var.),  Hanley  and  Theobald,  Conchologia 
Indica,  Land  and  Fresh  Water  Shells  of  British  India, 
p.  25,  pi.  53,  fig.  10 

1876.  Fruticola  coriaria,  Theobald,  Catalogue  of  the  Land  and 
Fresh  Water  Shells  of  British  India,  p.  25 


326  ON  THE  SYNONYMY  OF  HELIX  (HADRA)  GULOSA,  GOULD, 

1876.  H.  gulosa,  Gould,  Pfeiffer  in  Monogr.  Hel.  Viv.,  Vol.  vn. 
p.  367  ;  quotes  it  as  a  synonym  of  H.  Lessoni,  Pfr. 

1876.  E.  morosa,  Pfeiffer  in  Monogr.  Hel.  Viv.,  Vol.  vn.  p.  367, 
No.  2618 

1876.  E.  Scotti,  Cox,  Pfeiffer  in  Monogr.  Hel.  Viv.,  Vol.  vn.  p. 

394,  No.  2788 

1877.  E.  coriaria,  Pfr.,  Monogr.  Hel.  Viv.,  Vol.  vm.  p.  574 

1878.  E.    (Badistes)    gulosa,    Gould,    Pfeiffer   in    Nomenclator 

Heliceorum  Viventium,  p.  189  ;  quotes  it  as  a  synonym  of 
E.  Lesson  I,  Pfr. 
1888.  E.  coriaria.  Cox,  Handbook  of  Sydney,  for  the  use  of  the 
members  of  the  Australasian  Association  for  the  Advance- 
ment of  Science,  p.  84,  No.  34 

1888.  E.  monacha,  Cox,  Handbook  of  Sydney,  for  the  use  of  the 

members  of  the  Australasian  Association  for  the  Advance- 
ment of  Science,  p.  84,  No.  35 

1889.  E.  fPomatia)  coriaria,   Paetel,    Catalog   cler   Conchylien- 

Sammlung,  p.  120 
1889.  E.  (Pomatia)  monacha,  Paetel,  Catalog  cler    Conchylien- 
Sammlung,  p.  157 

1889.  E,  gulosa,  Gld.  ist  Lessoni,  Pfr.,  Paetel,  Catalog  der  Con- 

chylien-Sammlung,  p.  137 

1890.  E.  (Pomatia)  gulosa,  Gould,  Ethericlge,  junr.,  Records  of 

the  Australian  Museum,  Vol.  I.  No.  1,  p.  26 

1890.  //.    (Eadra)  gulosa,   Pilsbry  in  Tryon's   Manual  of  Con- 

chology,  second  series,  Pulmonata,  Vol.  VI.  p.  131,  pi.  33, 

figs.  66,  67 
1890.  //.    (Eadra)  coriaria,  Pilsbry  in  Tryon's  Manual  of  Con- 

chology,  second  series,  Pulmonata,  Vol.  vi.  p.  132,  p].  43, 

figs.  48,  49,  51 
1890.  //.    (Eadra)   Scotti,   Pilsbry  in  Tryon's   Manual  of  Con- 

chology,  second  series,  Pulmonata,  Vol.  vi.  p.  133,  pi.  43, 

fig.  47 


BY    JOHN    BRAZIER.  327 

1890.  II.  (Iladra)  monacha,  Pilsbry  in  Tryon's  Manual  of  Con- 

chology,  second  series,  Palmonata,  Vol.  vi.  p.  133,  pi.  43, 

fig.  39 
1890.   //.  (Iladra)  morosa,  Pilsbry  in  Tryon's  Manual  of  Con- 

chology,  second  series,  Pulmonata,  Vol.  vi.  p.  134,  pi.  34, 

fig.  10 

1890.  //.  (Iladra J   gulosa,    Pilsbry  in  Tryon's  Manual  of  Con- 

chology,  second  series,  Pulmonata,  Vol.  vi.  p.  304 

1891.  Iladra  gulosa,   Hedley   (Anatomy),  Records  of    the  Aus- 

tralian Museum,  Vol.  i.  No.  9,  October,  p.  196,  pi.  29 

Habitat. — Illawarra  (Mr.  J.  Drayton,  1839);  Port  Hacking, 
Sutherland,  353  ;  Heathcote,  626  ;  Waterfall,  720-800  feet  above 
sea  level  (J.  Brazier,  1859-1860) ;  Rockdale,  Kogarah,  Hurstville, 
55,  69,  217  feet  above  sea  level,  Bulli  Pass,  1000  feet  (./.  Brazier, 
1864,  1865,  1866) ;  Merimbula,  Kiama,  Ulladulla  (Mr.  George 
Masters,  1864,  1865,  1866) ;  Moss  Vale,  Blue  Mountains,  2205  feet 
above  sea  level  (J.  Brazier,  1865) ;  Clarence  River  (Mr.  John 
Macgillivray,  1865,  1866) ;  Nullo  Mountains,  County  of  Hunter 
{Mr.  Edward  King  Cox,  1867) ;  gullies  in  Cabbage-tree  Scrub  at 
head  of  Waterfall  Gully,  Illawarra  railway  line,  at  base  of  ranges 
and  gullies  in  the  Mulgoa  Valley,  running  into  the  Nepean  River, 
Kurrajong  (Dr.  James  C.  Cox,  1868,  1888);  Wingham,  Upper 
Manning  River  (J.  Brazier,  June,  1870)  ;  Comerong  Island, 
Shoalhaven  River  (J.  Brazier,  October,  1874) ;  Blackheath,  Blue 
Mountains,  3494  feet  above  sea  level  (J.  Brazier,  1875)  ;  Erskine 
Valley,  Nepean  River  (J.  Brazier,  1864,  1866,  1888);  Cambe- 
warra  (Mr.  T.  Whitelegge,  1885);  Sassafras  Tableland,  5000  feet 
above  sea  level  (Messrs.  R.  Etheridge,  Junr.,  and  J.  A.  Thorpe, 
August,  1889) ;  Lawson,  Blue  Mountains,  2399  feet  above  sea 
level  (Mr.  E.  G.  W.  Palmer,  June,  1891) ;  Kangaroo  Valley,  in 
ranges  above  the  Shoalhaven  River  (Messrs.  J.  A.  Thorpe  and  C. 
Harris) ;  Ash  Island,  Hunter  River  ( Mr.  Alexander  Walker  Scott) ; 
Mount  Keira,  Wollongong,  1863  {Mrs.  Edward  Forde) ;  Kiaina 
{Mr.  Simeon  P.  Hitchcock,  August,  1891)  ;  flank  of  Mount  Keira 
(Mr.  Simeon  P.  Hitchcock,  December  12,  1891). 


328     ON   THE   SYNONYMY   OF   HELIX  (HADRA)  GULOSA,  GOULD. 

The  whole  of  these  localities  are  in  the  colony  of  New  South 
Wales.  Doubtful  localities  :  Ceylon  (Dr.  Pfeiffer  on  the  authority 
of  Mr.  Hugh  Cuming,  1847) ;  Moreton  Bay  (on  the  authority  of 
Monsieur  Morelet,  1853)  ;  Western  Australia  (Dr.  Pfeiffer  on  the 
authority  of  Mr.  Hugh  Cuming,  1859).  The  correct  spelling  of 
one  of  the  localities  is  Nullo  Hills,  or  Mountains,  not  "  Nulla," 
as  quoted  by  some  authors. 


329 


OBSERVATIONS  ON  THE  CHLORAEMIDAE,  WITH 
SPECIAL  REFERENCE  TO  CERTAIN  AUSTRALIAN 
FORMS. 

By  William  A.  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc.,  Edin.,  F.L.S.,  Challis 
Professor  of  Biology,  University  of  Sydney. 

[Plates  xxvi-xxviii.] 

The  following  notes  have  reference  chiefly  to  a  remarkable 
member  of  this  family  which  occurs  on  the  Queensland  coast ;  but 
the  opportunity  has  been  taken  to  give  some  account  at  the  same 
time  of  two  other  Chloraemids  which  have  been  found  by  the 
author  in  Port  Jackson,  and  which  have  not  hitherto  been 
described.*  A  specimen  of  Stylarioides  monilifer  was  investigated 
for  comparison  with  the  new  species,  and  a  few  remarks  on  its 
structure  will  be  found  here  and  there  in  the  following  pages. 

I.  Description  of  Coppingeria  longisetosa,  n.g.  et  sp. 

I  have  seen  only  two  specimens  of  this  remarkable  Chaetopod. 
One  was  dredged  in  1881  by  Dr.  Coppinger  and  myself  in  Port 
Molle,  Queensland  (lat.  20°  S.),  at  a  depth  of  15  fathoms.  The 
other  was  got  long  before  by  the  Hon.  Sir  William  Macleay 
during  his  expedition  to  Torres  Straits  and  New  Guinea  in  the 
11  Chevert,"  and  was  dredged  off  Darnley  Island.  I  have  figured 
both  of  these  specimens,  as  one  is  more  complete  in  one  respect 
and  the  other  in  another ;  and  I  find  it  advantageous  to  describe 

*  The  only  previously  known  Australian  species  of  this  family  appears 
to  be  the  Siphonostomum  affine  described  by  me  in  a  paper  published  in  the 
Proceedings  of  this  Society.  The  same  name  had,  unfortunately,  been 
applied  previously  by  Leidy  to  another  species  ;  but  the  latter,  as  pointed 
out  by  Grube,  is  probably  a  Stylarioides. 


330  OBSERVATIONS    ON    THE    CHLORAEMIDAE, 

their  external  characters  separately.  The  Port  Molle  specimen 
has  been  cut  into  sections  ;  the  Darnley  Island  specimen  remains 
in  the  Macleay  Museum,  in  the  University  of  Sydney. 

Specimen  A  (that  from  Port  Molle)  has,  apparently,  had  a 
portion  of  the  posterior  extremity  broken  off.  Otherwise  it  is 
admirably  preserved — particularly  as  regards  the  branchiae,  the 
tentacles  and  papilla?.  Specimen  B  is  entire  as  regards  the  seg- 
ments ;  but  the  praestomium  has  been  broken  off,  and  the 
branchiae  and  tentacles  are  therefore  lost. 

Specimen  A  (plate  xxvi.  tig.  1). — The  body  is  sub-cylindrical, 
tapering  gradually  posteriorly,  the  greatest  breadth  being  at  a 
little  distance  behind  the  cephalic  extremity,  where  there  is  a 
slight  dilatation.  Round  the  latter  is  a  circlet  of  sixteen  very 
large  setae,  which  are  nearly  as  long  as  the  body,  thick  at  the  base, 
finely  tapering,  and  slightly  curved  towards  the  distal  end.  They 
are  marked  transversely  by  tine  transverse  lines,  giving  them  the 
appearance  of  being  'composed  of  a  number  of  segments.  In  most 
cases  there  is  situated  close  to  the  base  of  each  large  seta  a  very 
much  smaller  accessory  seta.  All  the  large  setae  in  this  specimen, 
as  in  the  other,  have  attached  to  them  numerous  individuals  of  a 
species  of  Loxosoma. 

There  are  twenty-six  segments  in  the  body  (from  which  the 
posterior  portion  has  been  broken  off).  The  number  of  the 
segments  can  only  be  reckoned  by  counting  the  bundles  of  setae, 
except  in  the  case  of  a  few  of  the  most  posterior,  which  are 
separated  from  one  another  by  distinct  constrictions.  All  the 
segments  behind  the  head  bear  setae  ;  but  the  parapodia  are  not 
distinguishable.  All,  except  the  first  seven,  have  dorsal  and 
ventral  sets  of  setae  separated  from  one  another  by  a  short  space. 
The  dorsal  setae  alone  are  present  in  the  first  seven  segments,  or, 
at  least,  if  ventral  setae  are  present  in  these  segments,  they  do 
not  project  on  the  surface.  In  the  first  segment  (behind  those 
that  bear  the  cephalic  setae)  there  are  four  very  long  and  very 
fine  dorsal  setae,  stouter  and  longer  than  those  of  the  succeeding 
segments,    and    directed    forwards.      The    following    segments, 


BY    WILLIAM    A.  HASWELL. 


331 


except  the  first  six,  which  have  only  dorsal  setae,  have  each  a 
bundle  of  four  fine,  tapering  dorsal  setae  and  three  stouter,  short 
ventral  setae,  which  are  curved  at  the  ends.  (Plate  xxvu.  fig.  9.) 
The  dorsal  setae  are  in  fan-like  groups  directed  forwards  and  out- 
wards. 

The  body  wall  is  tolerably  firm.  The  surface  is  covered  with 
closely-set  papillae,  which  vary  in  size,  some  being  elongate,  others 
very  short ;  a  number  of  those  around  the  bases  of  the  anterior 
large  setae  are  very  long  and  slender,  with  slightly  enlarged 
rounded  ends  :  a  detailed  account  of  the  papillae  is  given  further 
on. 

The  head  (fig.  2)  consists  of  a  stout  base,  bearing  distally  a 
pair  of  tentacles,  and  a  pair  of  branchiferous  lobes.  The  base  is 
8  mm.  in  length,  and  at  its  posterior  end  is  about  half  the  thick- 
ness of  the  anterior  part  of  the  body,  narrowing  slightly  towards 
its  distal  end  ;  closely  embraced  behind  by  the  bases  of  the  ring 
of  large  anterior  setae  and  by  the  elongated  papillae ;  its  surface 
is  dotted  over  with  papillae  similar  to  those  covering  the  body, 
but  smaller.  It  consists  of  the  greatly  produced  peristomium 
surrounded,  as  by  a  sheath,  by  a  thin  prolongation  of  the  first  body- 
segment.  The  praestomium  is  produced  in  front  laterally  into 
the  compressed  bases  of  the  branchiferous  lobes ;  mesially  in 
front  is  a  small  lobe  bearing  two  pairs  of  eyes ;  in  front  of  the 
mouth  are  borne  the  two  tentacles.  The  branchiferous  lobes  are 
somewhat  club-shaped,  a  little  shorter  than  the  head,  and  covered 
with  branchiae,  about  sixty  on  each.  The  two  tentacles  are 
cylindrical,  longitudinally  grooved  bodies,  which  taper  slightly 
towards  the  end,  rather  longer  than  the  head,  but  scarcely  a 
third  of  the  diameter,  devoid  of  papillae. 

The  total  length  of  the  specimen,  including  the  setae,  was 
5  cm. ;  of  the  body  excluding  setae  and  head-lobe,  2  J  cm.  The 
head  lobe  with  the  branchiae  was  1*2  cm.  in  length.  The  greatest 
breadth  of  the  body  was  -5  cm. ;  the  breadth  at  the  posterior  end 
•2  cm. 

Specimen  B  (fig.  3). — The  form  of  the  body  is  approximately 
cylindrical,  broadest  near  the  anterior  end  and  gradually  tapering 


332  OBSERVATIONS    ON   THE    CHLORAEMIDAE, 

backwards.  There  are  forty-three  segments,  which  are  quite  distinct 
behind,  but  in  front  are  not  to  be  distinguished  but  for  the 
bundles  of  setae.  The  latter  are  situated  on  slight  transverse 
elevations ;  there  are  four  slender  dorsal  setae  directed  forward 
and  three  curved  ventral  seta? ;  the  latter  first  appear  on  the  fifth 
segment.  The  head-lobe  is  similar  to  that  of  specimen  A,  but  its 
extremity  with  the  tentacles  and  the  branchiae  has  been  lost ;  it 
is  separated  into  two  parts  by  a  distinct  narrow  annular  groove. 
The  large  setfe  surrounding  the  head  are  twelve  in  number. 

The  total  length,  inclusive  of  the  setae,  is  1  decimetre ;  that  of 
the  long  setae  4  cm.  The  remnant  of  the  head-lobe  is  1  cm.  in 
length. 

II.  Position  and  relations  of  Coppingeria. 

There  can  be  no  doubt  of  the  relationship  of  this  remarkable 
Polychaet  to  the  members  of  the  family  Chloraemidae,  both  in 
external  features,  and,  as  will  subsequently  be  shown,  in  internal 
structure.  But  there  can  I  think  be  little  more  doubt  that  it  is 
sufficiently  far  removed  from  its  nearest  relative — Stylarioides — 
to  require  a  distinct  generic  appellation.  The  anterior  seta? 
constitute  the  most  striking  feature ;  but  perhaps  a  more 
important  characteristic  is  the  bifid  and  produced  branchial 
apparatus  with  its  numerous  branchial  filaments.  I  propose, 
to  call  the  new  genus  Coppingeria*  and  the  species  longisetosa. 
The  characteristic  features  of  the  genus  may  be  thus  summarised: — 

Body  not  greatly  elongated,  swollen  in  front,  composed  of  a 
moderate  number  of  segments  which  are  not  distinct  except  in 
the  posterior  portion  of  the  body.     Parapodia   not   prominent, 

*  After  my  friend  Dr.  R.  W.  Coppinger,  M.D.,  Fleet-Surgeon,  R.N., 
surgeon  of  H.M.S.  "Discovery,"  during  the  Arctic  Expedition  of  1875-6, 
and  of  H.M.S.  "Alert"  during  her  southern  cruise.  In  the  account 
which  he  published  of  the  latter  voyage  Dr.  Coppinger  thus  refers  to  the 
worm  under  consideration  : — "Among  the  Annelids  was  one  with  long 
glassy  opalescent  bristles  surrounding  the  oral  aperture  and  projecting 
forwards  to  a  distance  of  one  and  a  half  inches  from  the  praestomium. " — 
(Cruise  of  the  "Alert,"  p.  187.) 


BY    WILLIAM    A.  HASWELL.  333 

with  two  sets  of  setae,  except  in  a  few  of  the  most  anterior  seg- 
ments ;  seta3  of  both  sets  few  in  number ;  those  of  the  dorsal  set 
very  fine,  tapering  ;  those  of  the  ventral  set  stouter,  curved  at  the 
ends.  The  seta?  of  the  most  anterior  segments  greatly  prolonged, 
forming  a  complete  circlet  directed  forwards.  The  praestomium 
with  two  pairs  of  eyes.  Branchiae  numerous,  cylindrical,  borne  on 
a  pair  of  club-shaped  prolongations  of  the  praestomium. 
Tentacles  very  long,*  cylindrical,  smooth,  with  a  ventral  longi- 
tudinal groove.  Peristomium  produced,  capable  of  being  retracted 
together  with  the  praestomium  (and  the  branchiae?)  within  a 
sheath  formed  for  it  by  the  following  segment.  Papillae  very 
numerous,  not  arranged  in  rows,  and  equally  developed  on  all 
sides  of  the  body  ;  some  of  those  around  the  bases  of  the  anterior 
large  seta?  extremely  produced. 

Ill — Description  op  two  species  of  Stylarioides*. 

Stylarioides  cinctus  (Plate  xxvi.  fig.  4). 

The  total  length  (exclusive  of  the  setae)  is  2 -2  5  cm.  The  longest 
seta?  of  the  anterior  segments  are  nearly  one  centimetre  in  length. 
The  greatest  breadth  of  the  body  is  3  mm.  The  total  number  of 
segments  is  48. 

The  praestomium  (fig.  5)  is  produced  forwards  Jon  the  dorsal 
side  into  a  curved  lamina,  on  the  anterior  edge  of  which  are 
situated  the  branchiae.  Of  the  latter  there  are  ten,  all  cylindrical 
filaments,  the  central  pair  considerably  longer  than  the  others 
and  not  very  much  shorter  than  the  tentacles  :  each  branchia 
presents  a  pair  of  longitudinal  crimson  bands.  The  antennae  are 
dorso- ventral ly  compressed,  transversely  corrugated,  with  a  deep 
longitudinal  ventral  groove,  about  -the  length  of  the  first  four 
segments. 

The  body  is  cylindrical,  somewhat  dilated  in  the  anterior  portion, 
narrowing  suddenly  behind  the  twentieth  segment ;  the  posterior, 
narrow  part  tapering  posteriorly.     In  a  second  specimen  the  ten 

*  A3  defined  by  Grube. 


334  OBSERVATIONS    ON    THE    CHLORAEMIDAE, 

most  anterior  segments  are  constricted.  The  surface  is  of  a  dull 
brown  colour,  without  a  distinct  layer  of  mucus,  encrusted  on  the 
dorsal  surface  for  some  little  distance  at  the  anterior  end  with 
firmly  fixed  and  closely  set  sand-grains.*  The  papillae  are  not 
very  numerous  or  very  prominent,  scattered  over  the  surface, 
with  a  tendency  to  the  formation  of  irregular  transverse  rows  ; 
they  are  equally  developed  on  the  dorsal  and  on  the  ventral 
surface.  On  the  elevations  from  which  the  elongated  setse  of 
the  two  anterior  segments  spring,  there  are  papillae  of  a  slightly 
greater  length  than  those  on  the  general  surface  of  the  body. 
Each  papilla  is  situated  on  a  little  elevated  area. 

The  segments  are  not  very  distinct  in  the  anterior  swollen 
part  of  the  body,  but  are  much  more  evident  behind.  The 
parapodia  do  not  project  from  the  surface.  The  seta?  of  the 
first  two  segments  are  40-50  in  number,  slender,  slightly  curved 
inwards,  directed  forwards.  On  each  of  the  other  segments  there 
are  three  or  four  very  slender  dorsal  seta3  and  three  stouter 
ventral  seta?.  The  former  are  transversely  striated,  as  is  usual 
in  this  family  ;  they  are  rather  longer  than  the  segments  ;  the 
latter  have  a  short  terminal  segment,  which  is  unjointed,  curved, 
and  pointed,  articulating  with  the  elongated,  transversely  striated 
basal  portion ;  the  ventral  seta?  project  more  prominently  from 
the  surface  in  the  anterior  segments  than  in  the  posterior. 

Specimens  of  this  species,  together  with  the  following,  were 
got  with  the  dredge  near  Watson's  Bay  in  Port  Jackson.  It 
belongs  to  that  section  of  the  genus  to  which  Grube  refers  S. 
parmatus,  Gr.,  S.  Cariboum,  Gr.,  and  S.  cingulatus,  Gr.,  and  to 
which  also  S.  cajiensis,  Mcintosh,  belongs — all  these  forms  being 
characterised  by  the  presence  on  the  dorsal  surface  of  the  anterior 
part  of  the  body  of  a  space  covered  with  closely  cemented  sand- 
grains.  I  cannot  identify  the  Port  Jackson  species  with  any  of 
these. 

*  A  similar  feature  is  described  by  Grube  ["Annulata  Semperiana,"  'M6m. 
de  l'Acad.  Imp.  des  Sci.  de  St.  Petersbourg,'  vii.  serie,  t.  xxv.  (1878)]  in  his 
Stt/larioides  parmatns  from  the  Philippines,  and  by  Mcintosh  in  Troj>honia 
capemis  ("  Challenger"  Reports,  Annelida). 


BY    WILLIAM    A.   HASWELL.  335 


Stylarioides  Horstii,  (Plate  xxvi.  figs.  6-8). 

Both  of  the  specimens  of  this  species  that  are  at  my  disposal 
are  imperfect ;  the  more  complete  of  the  two  is  1*5  cm.  in  length. 
The  longest  seta?  are  2*5  mm.  in  length.  The  greatest  breadth  is 
3*5  mm.     The  number  of  segments  is  39. 

The  head  and  branchial  apparatus  are  retracted  in  both  speci- 
mens, but,  when  dissected  out,  showed  the  following  features  : — 
The  tentacles  are  of  about  the  length  of  the  first  six  segments  of  the 
body  ;  their  greatest  breadth  is  about  one-seventh  of  their  length. 
They  are  deeply  grooved  longitudinally  on  the  ventral  side — the 
ridges  bordering  the  groove  being  convoluted — and  are  very  finely 
and  closely  corrugated  transversely  on  the  opposite  side.  The 
branchiae,  six  (?)  in  number,  are  very  long,  cylindrical,  and  pig- 
mented at  the  ends. 

The  body  is  cylindrical,  of  nearly  uniform  breadth  as  far  as  the 
33rd  segment,  though  rather  narrower  at  the  anterior  end ; 
narrowing  suddenly  behind  the  33rd  segment.  There  is  no 
encrustation  of  sand-grains.  The  seta?  of  the  first  two  segments, 
about  a  dozen  in  number  on  either  side  in  each,  are  greatly 
prolonged  ;  they  do  not  form  a  ring,  but  are  arranged  in  definite 
lateral  bundles.  They  are  exceedingly  fine,  and  are  divided  by 
transverse  lines  into  numerous  joints;  they  are  covered  with  stalked 
infusoria  like  the  rest  of  the  setae.  The  setso  of  the  third  segment, 
4-5  in  number,  are  more  conspicuous  than  those  of  the  rest  of  the 
body,  and  are  about  half  the  length  of  the  second  segment ;  there 
appear  to  be  no  ventral  setae  on  this  segment.  The  remaining 
segments  all  have  dorsal  and  ventral  setae,  which  are  both  longer 
than  is  usual  in  this  genus.  Of  the  dorsal  setas  there  are  five  to 
eight  in  each  bundle,  many-jointed,  very  slender,  tapering, — their 
length  nearly  half  the  breadth  of  the  body.  The  ventral  setae,  of 
which  there  are  4-6 — usually  5 — in  each  fasciculus,  are  much 
thicker  than  the  dorsal,  unjointed,  laterally  compressed,  often 
twisted,  slightly  hooked  at  the  ends,  much  longer  in  the  anterior 
segments  than  they  are  further  back. 


336  OBSERVATIONS    ON    THE    CHLORAEMIDAE, 

A  remarkable  feature  is  the  arrangement  of  the  papilla?.  Those 
of  the  first  two  segments  are  elongated,  especially  round  the  bases 
of  the  fasciculi  of  setae.  On  the  dorsal  surface  of  the  body  each 
papilla  is  elevated  on  a  conical  wart-like  protuberance,  while  on 
the  ventral  surface  these  elevations  are  absent.  They  are  more 
numerous  than  in  the  preceding  species,  smaller  and  with  a 
tendency  to  form  transverse  rows  only  on  the  dorsal  surface. 

I  am  not  quite  clear  as  to  the  position  of  this  species ;  but  if 
Grube's  definitions  of  the  genera  Trophonia  and  Stylarioides  be 
followed,  the  retractile  praestomium  would  place  it  in  the  latter 
^enus.  At  the  same  time,  the  considerable  development  of  the 
setae  behind  the  head  brings  it  nearer  the  species  of  Trophonia. 
It  has  considerable  resemblance  to  the  European  T.  plumosa, 
Miiller ;  but  the  tubercles  on  that  species  are  described  as  being 
found  all  over  the  body  instead  of  being  confined  to  the  dorsal 
surface. 

IV. — Integument  and  papilla. 

In  Goppingeria  the  cuticle,  which  is  of  considerable  thickness 
over  all  parts  except  the  branchiae,  is  covered  superficially  with  a 
layer  of  a  granular-looking  substance  with  included  irregular 
particles,  which  is  evidently  the  layer  of  mucus  with  entangled 
granules  of  foreign  matter  present  in  other  members  of  this 
family.  This  layer,  however,  though  represented  in  all  parts 
except  the  prae-  and  peristomium,  with  the  branchiae  and  ten- 
tacles, is  comparatively  thin,  being  for  the  most  part  of  about  the 
same  thickness  as  the  cuticle.  A  similar  layer  of  tough  gela- 
tinous matter  has  been  noticed  by  all  who  have  given  attention 
to  the  structure  of  this  family  of  Polychaeta.  In  Siphonostomum 
it  is  separable  with  a  little  trouble  from  the  body  of  the  worm  ; 
but  in  the  present  form,  as  in  Stylarioides,  it  is  firmly  adherent, 
so  as  to  appear  as  a  definite  layer  of  the  integument. 

In  Coppingeria  the  cuticle  has  the  appearance  of  consisting  of 
a  single  layer.  But  in  Stylarioides  ductus  (PI.  xxvu.  fig.  15)  there 
are  two,  the  more  internal  having  many  papillae  and  ridges,  which 
penetrate  into  the  outer. 


BY    WILLIAM    A.  HASWELL.  337 

The  epidermis  (plate  XXVI I.  fig.  15)  is  a  very  thin  layer  save  in 
certain  situations,  only  reaching  a  considerable  development  on  the 
praestomiurn  and  part  of  the  peristomium,  the  grooves  of  the 
tentacles  and  the  branchial  filaments.  Beneath  each  of  the 
papillae  the  epidermis  becomes  modified  as  described  below.  It 
consists  of  flattened  cells  (fig.  16)  of  polygonal  outline,  the  reticu- 
lated protoplasm  of  which  presents  smaller  and  larger  vacuoles. 
The  reticulated  substance  of  neighbouring  cells  is  separated  by 
narrow  uncolourable  bands,  which  anastomose  and  present  the 
appearance  of  a  branching  system  of  fine  channels,  which  may  be 
connected  with  the  secretion  of  the  mucus. 

Like  the  adherent  layer  of  mucus  the  papillce  are  specially 
characteristic  of  the  Ohloraemidae,  and  appear  to  be  present  in 
one  form  or  another  in  all  the  members  of  the  family.  They 
have  been  described  under  various  names,  "  mucus-secreting 
papillae,"  "  poils,"  "tubercles,"  "granules."  They  attain  their 
greatest  development  as  regards  length  in  Sijyhonostomum,  where 
they  are  greatly  elongated,  so  as  to  penetrate  to  the  surface 
through  the  relatively  very  thick  layer  of  mucus.  In  Coppingeria 
(plate  xxvn.  figs.  11-14)  they  occur  over  the  entire  surface  of  the 
body,  giving  it  a  very  remarkable  appearance  when  examined 
with  a  lens,  owing  to  their  resemblance  to  the  tube-feet  of  a 
sporadipodous  Holothurian.  They  are  not  of  uniform  length, 
but  vary  considerably  in  this  respect,  a  fact  which  might  be  apt 
to  produce  the  erroneous  impression  that  they  are  extensile  and 
retractile.  They  are  specially  developed  around  the  bases  of  the 
cephalic  setae,  where  they  attain  a  length  of  as  much  as  3  or  4  mm. 
In  other  parts  they  are  much  shorter,  on  an  average  -5  mm.  in 
length.  Their  form  is  subcylindrical,  with  a  slight  terminal  knob- 
like enlargement ;  in  the  shorter  forms  there  is  usually  a  consider- 
able amount  of  constriction  at  the  base,  and  in  these  also  the  apex 
is  pushed  in  to  form  a  shallow  cup-like  concavity,  which  may, 
however,  though  very  regular,  have  been  produced,  or  at  least 
increased,  by  the  action  of  the  alcohol. 

The  memoirs  of  Delle  Chiaje  not  being  at  present  accessible  to 
me,  the  earliest  detailed  account  of  these  papillae  which  I  have 


338  OBSERVATIONS    ON    THE    CHLORAEMIDAE, 

met  with  is  that  of  Dujardin.  In  hi3  account  of  Chloraema 
Edwardsii*  he  speaks  of  the  sort  of  fleece  or  felt  with  which  it  is 
covered,  composed  of  hollow  flexible  filaments,  club-shaped  at  the 
extremity,  and  constituting  a  series  of  minute  stalked  glands 
secreting  the  mucus.  Costaf  in  his  account  of  Siphonostoma 
diplochaitos  makes  mention  of  the  papillae  or  stalked  glands,  as  he 
regards  them.  Those  of  Lophiocephalus  he  describes  as  vascular 
and  as  having  an  aperture  at  the  extremity  for  the  discharge  of 
the  mucus. 

Leuckart  in  his  "Beitrage  zur  Kenntniss  der  Fauna  von  Island"  J 
also  describes  the  papillae  of  Siphonostomum  vaginiferum  as 
appendages  of  the  vascular  system ;  but  he  contends  that,  though 
the  extremity  may  present  a  pit-like  depression,  it  is  never  per- 
forated. He  is  inclined  to  favour  Rathke's  and  Costa's  view  that 
they  have  to  do  with  the  secretion  of  the  mucus,  but  suggests  that 
they  may  also  be  concerned  in  the  process  of  respiration, 

Schmarda§  in  his  description  of  Trophonia  xanthotricha  men- 
tions the  presence  in  each  segment  of  a  transverse  row  of  little 
suckers  which  when  retracted  appear  like  minute  warts.  These, 
he  states,  the  animal  uses  to  fasten  itself,  and  also  employs  them 
in  locomotion,  like  the  tube-feet  of  the  Echinoderms. 

Quatrefages||  gives  the  following  account  of  these  structures 
in  Chloraema  Dujardinii : — "  Les  poils  recouvrent  le  corps  tout 
entier  a  l'exception  de  la  face  ventrale.  lis  sont  formes  par  une 
tige  tres  grele,  qui  se  renfle  brusquement  a  l'extremite.  Ce  ren- 
flement  est  ordinairement  presque  piriforme  aux  poils  voisins  des 
pieds  et  simplement  arrondi  sur  le  reste  du  corps.  A  l'interieur, 
on  distingue  des  cloisons  cellulaires  irregulieres,  qui  rappellent 

*  "  Observations  sur  quelques  Annelides  marines."  'Ann.  des  Sci.  Nat.' 
2e  sene,  tome  xi.  (1839),  p.  289. 

+  "Description  de  quelques  Annelides  nouvelles  du  Golfe  de  Naples." 
'Ann.  des  Sci.  Nat.'  2e  s6rie,  tome  xvi.,  1841. 

%  Archiv  f.  Naturg.  xxix.  (1849). 

§  Neue  wirbellose  Thiere. 

||  Histoire  Naturelle  des  Annoys,"  tome  i.,  p.  474  (1865). 


BY    WILLIAM    A.  HASWELL.  339 

celles  de  l'ame  d'une  plume     .     .     .     Partout  ils  sont  noyes  dans 
une  mucosite  parfaiternent  transparente."     .     .     . 

In  his  "Memoire  sur  la  famille  des  Chlorerniens,"*  he  had 
previously  expressed  the  opinion  that  the  granular  contents,  in 
the  case  at  least  of  some  of  the  papillae,  were  continuous  with 
the  epidermis. 

Claparedef  gives  the  most  complete  account  of  the  papillae.  In 
Stylarioides  monilifer  he  states  that  their  form  appears  usually 
cylindrical,  but  adds  that  that  is  due  to  the  encrusting  layer  of 
mucus,  on  the  removal  of  which  the  papilla  appears  in  the  form 
of  a  spherical  button  at  the  end  of  a  pedicle.  Both  pedicle  and 
button  are  formed  of  two  layers,  the  more  external  of  which  is 
homogeneous  and  is  a  continuation  of  the  cuticle,  while  the  other, 
finely  granular,  is  the  subcuticular  layer.  He  had  not  succeeded 
by  means  of  any  re-agent  in  discovering  any  nuclei  in  the  granular 
layer.  The  same  structures  in  Trophonia  eruca  he  describes  in 
similar  terms. 

In  the  case  of  SipJwnostoina  diplochditos  the  same  author 
describes  the  peduncle  of  the  papillae  as  formed  of  a  cuticular 
envelope  and  an  axial  granular  layer  with  ill-defined  longitudinal 
fibrillation.  In  this  axial  substance,  numerous  elliptical  nuclei, 
having  their  long  axes  parallel  with  the  axis  of  the  peduncle,  are 
brought  into  view  under  the  action  of  acetic  acid.  The  base  of 
the  club-like  enlargement  is  filled  with  globular  finely  granular 
masses  without  cellular  structure.  Further  on  the  central  sub- 
stance re-assumes  its  ill-defined  fibrillar  structure,  and  terminates 
in  several  pyriform  bodies  of  a  sulphur-yellow  colour.  He  denies 
the  asserted  vascularity  of  the  papillae,  and  sets  them  down  as 
without  doubt  tactile  organs. 

Grubej  comes  back  to  the  view  of  Costa  and  Leuckart  that  the 
papillse  are  concerned  with  the  secretion  of  the  layer  of  mucus. 

*  'Ann.  Sci.  Nat.'  3e  sene,  tome  xn.  (1849),  p.  277. 
t  "  Les  Annelides  Ch^topodes  du  Golfe  de  Naples,"  p.  357  (1868). 
%  "  Bemerkungen  iiber  die  Familie  der  Chlorhaeminen."      *  Bericht  der 
Schles.  Gesellsch.'  1876,  p.  37. 
23 


340  OBSERVATIONS   ON   THE   CHLORAEMIDAE, 

Studer  in  his  acoount  of  Brada  mammillata*  describes  the 
epithelium  as  consisting  of  narrow  cylindrical  cells,  and  gives  an 
account  of  certain  sac-like  structures  formed  from  groups  of 
modified  epithelial  cells,  which  he  regards  as  glands,  leading  by 
a  duct  to  a  pore  on  the  summit  of  one  of  the  tubercles.  These 
so-called  glands  are  the  basal  ganglia  of  the  papillae  described 
below.  Joyeux-Laffuie  holds  with  Kolliker  that  there  is  every 
reason  to  regard  the  papillae  as  tactile  organs. 

In  most  respects  my  own  observations  on  this  point  agree  with 
those  of  Claparede;  and  I  have  been  able  to  add  some  details 
regarding  the  structure  of  the  appendages  in  question  which  go 
to  confirm  his  opinion  of  their  function.  In  Coppingeria  (figs. 
11-14)  all  the  papillae  have  essentially  the  same  structure.  Most 
externally  is  a  thick  firm  layer  continuous  with  the  cuticle  of  the 
general  surface.  Immediately  below  this  is  a  thin  layer  continuous 
with  the  epithelium.  These  layers  bound  a  cylindrical  cavity,  which 
is  continued  at  the  base  into  a  narrow  canal.  Immediately  below 
the  base  of  each  papilla  is  a  little  ganglion  composed  of  a  rounded 
group  of  cells  with  a  mass  of  granular  matter  on  its  deeper  face.f 
Delicate  strands  run  outwards  from  this  basal  ganglion  and, 
passing  through  the  narrow  neck  of  the  papilla,  enter  a  second 
ganglion  in  the  base  of  the  latter.  From  this  there  runs  to  the 
extremity  of  the  papilla  an  axial  strand  of  fibres  with  occasional 
nuclei,  and  from  this  run  out  a  few  similar  but  finer  branch 
strands,  which  end  in  the  epithelium.  The  axial  strand  breaks 
up  at  the  end  into  a  few  delicate  radiating  fibres,  which  terminate 
in  a  group  of  cells,  constituting  what  might  be  regarded  as  a  third 
ganglion  at  the  extremity  of  the  papilla. 

In  view  of  their  structure,  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  these  are 
sensory  papillae.  They  contain  no  muscular  elements,  and,  there- 
fore, can  have  nothing  to  do  with  locomotion  or  fixation.  They 
contain  no  cells  that  can  be  construed  as  gland-cells,  and  therefore 

*  "Beitrage  zur  Naturgeschichte  wirbelloser  Thiere  in  Kerguelensland. " 
'Arch,  f.  Naturg.'  1878. 

t  The  granular  matter  is  not  present  in  the  case  of  the  elongated  papillae 
at  the  anterior  end  of  the  body. 


BY   WILLIAM   A.  HASWELL.  341 

they  cannot  have  specially  to  do  witli  the  secretion  of  mucus.  Their 
structure  is  almost  exactly  similar  in  all  essential  particulars  to 
that  of  the  papillae  on  the  elytra  of  the  Polynoidae  (fig.  18),  and 
I  have  no  doubt  that  the  function  is  the  same  in  both  cases.* 

In  Stylarioides  ductus  the  form  of  the  papillae  (fig.  15)  is 
similar  to  that  of  those  of  Copping evict ;  but  each  papilla  here  is 
situated  on  the  summit  of  a  conical  elevation,  in  which  is  contained 
the  relatively  large  basal  ganglion.  In  Stylarioides  Horstii  the 
papillae  (figs.  17a  and  176)  are  very  long  and  slender,  not  unlike 
those  of  Siphonostomum,  but  with  only  a  very  faint  terminal 
swelling.  Each  is  covered,  except  at  the  extreme  end,  by  a  very 
thick  layer  of  tough  mucus.  In  Stylarioides  monilifer  (fig.  19) 
the  form  and  structure  of  the  papillae  is  essentially  similar  to 
those  of  S.  cinctus,  the  basal  part  being,  however,  relatively 
longer. 

V. — Blood-vascular  system;  branchiae;  unpaired  gland. 

Considerable  discrepancies  exist  between  the  descriptions  of 
the  vessels  in  the  Ghloraemidae  given  by  different  authors. 

Dujardinf  simply  states  that  he  had  seen  the  green  blood  circu- 
late in  dorsal  and  ventral  longitudinal  vessels  with  numerous 
transverse  branches. 

CostaJ  describes  the  ventral  vessel  ("vaisseau  abdominal  ou 
veineux  ")  in  Lophiocephalus  as  not  extending  through  the  length 
of  the  body  and  not  adhering  to  the  body-wall,  but  as  free,  arising 
from  the  lower  part  of  the  oesophagus,  increasing  in  size  as  it 
extends  backwards,  attaching  itself  to  the  walls  of  the  stomach, 
again  becoming  reduced  in  size  and  losing  itself  in  ramifications 
on  that  organ  as  well  as  on  the  wall  of  the  body.  From  the 
ventral  vessel  it  passes  to  the  branchiae,  by  which  it  returns 
through  the  dorsal  vessel  or  heart,  which  in  turn  breaks  up  into 

*  Vide  Jourdan,  "Structure  des  elytres  de  quelques  Polyuoes,"  '  Zool. 
Anz.,'  8,  p.  128. 

+  L.c.  (8). 
JL.C.  (6). 


342  OBSERVATIONS    ON    THE    CHLORAEMIDAE, 

branches  on  the  stomach.  In  Siphonostoma  diplocliciitos  he  des- 
cribes the  circulation  as  similar  to  that  of  Lophiocephalus,  with 
the  exception  that  both  dorsal  and  ventral  vessels  have  a  dilatation 
situated  much  nearer  the  head. 

Qnatrefages*  states  that  in  Chloraema  Dujardinii  there  are 
two  dorsal  trunks,  which  are  united  in  front  and  behind  in  all 
the  extent  of  the  narrow  part  of  the  intestinal  tube.  But  they 
become  isolated  and  attain  a  more  considerable  size  on  arriving  at 
the  dilated  portion  possessing  a  layer  of  hepatic  cells.  Here  each 
of  them  becomes  cemented  to  one  of  the  sides  of  the  digestive 
tube,  and  they  become  united  anew  in  the  region  of  the  oesophagus 
to  form  a  thick  fusiform  contractile  trunk,  which  drives  the  blood 
towards  the  branchiae. 

Claparedef  describes  the  dorsal  and  ventral  vessels  inStylarioides 
as  both  being  simple,  with  lateral  branches  in  each  segment ;  the 
intestine  is  accompanied  by  two  inferior  enteric  vessels  situated 
close  together.  G rube J  merely  mentions  the  presence  of  dorsal 
and  ventral  vessels  with  transverse  branches. 

In  his  "Recherches  sur  le  systeme  vasculaire  des  Annelides"§ 
Jacquet  describes  at  considerable  length  the  vascular  system  in 
Sijihonostoma  diplocha'itos.  He  alludes  to  the  observations  of 
Delle  Chiaje,  Costa,  Quatref ages,  and  Claparede,  already  referred  to, 
with  regard  more  especially  to  their  interpretation  of  the  character 
of  what  he  calls  the  dorsal  vessel.  Referring  to  the  statement  of 
Claparede  that  the  structure  in  question  is  a  gland  which  has 
been  mistaken  for  a  blood-vessel  owing  to  its  colour,  he  expresses 
the  opinion  that  this  soi-disant  gland  only  differs  from  the  ordinary 
blood-vessels  in  its  deeper  colour,  which  is  due  to  its  larger  size 
and  the  larger  quantity  of  liquid  which  it  contains  as  well  as  to 
the  presence  of  pigmented  elements  in  its  walls. 

*  "Memoire  sur  la  famille  des  Chloremiens,"  'Ann.  Sci.  Nat.'  3e.  serie, 
t.  xii.  (1849). 

t  "  Annelides  Ch^topodes  du  Golfe  de  Naples,"  p.  363. 
X  "Bemerkungen  iiber  die  Familie  der  Chloraeminen,"  'Bericht  der  Schles. 
Gesellsch.,'  1876,  p.  39. 

§  "  Mittheil.  a.d.  zool.  Stat,  zu  Neap.,"  vi.  Bd.  (1SS5),  pp.  370-379. 


BY    WILLIAM    A.  HASWELL.  343 

His  description  begins  with  the  branchial  vessels.  In  each 
bianchia  there  are  two  vessels,  communicating  with  one  another 
at  the  extremity  of  the  filament.  To  the  bases  of  the  branchiae 
the  blood  is  carried  by  a  canal  coming  from  the  neighbourhood  of 
the  end  of  the  dorsal  contractile  trunk.  This  canal  divides  into 
branches  for  the  branchial  filaments  (one  to  each),  and  also  gives 
off  a  pair  of  branches  to  the  tentacles. 

The  dorsal  contractile  trunk  or  heart,  he  states,  is  united 
directly  with  the  ventral  at  a  point  below  a  pigmented  spot 
which  he  regards  as  a  visual  organ.  Further  back  it  gives  off 
various  branches,  the  course  of  which  is  described.  One  of  the 
two  largest  pairs  of  these  is  directed  forwards  ;  it  is  cemented  to 
the  inner  surface  of  the  skin  in  its  dorsal  part.  The  second  pair, 
which  is  the  larger,  takes  origin  a  little  below  the  first  and  runs 
backwards  ;  it  is  also  cemented  to  the  skin,  and  it  terminates 
abruptly  at  the  sixth  pair  of  parapodia.  Behind  this  there  is  no 
dorsal  vessel  proper.  The  heart  terminates  behind  in  the  wall  of 
the  stomach  in  a  system  of  sinuses,  and  Jacquet  conjectures  that 
the  anterior  dilated  part  may  have  a  glandular  wall  secreting 
some  digestive  substance,  which  is  carried  to  the  stomach  in  the 
blood ;  the  plexus  of  sinuses  extends  backwards  in  the  wall  of  the 
intestine.  A  ventral  vessel  extends  from  one  extremity  of  the 
body  to  the  other.  In  the  neighbourhood  of  the  mouth  it  divides 
into  two  branches,  which  pass  round  the  cesophagus  to  unite  with 
the  anterior  end  of  the  heart.  He  contrasts  the  arrangement 
described  with  that  which  is  given  by  Quatrefages  for  Chloraema, 
and  draws  the  inference  that  there  is  a  considerable  amount  of 
difference  in  internal  structure  between  the  two  genera. 

There  would  thus  appear  to  be  a  considerable  amount  of  diffe- 
rence in  the  arrangement  of  the  vessels  in  the  various  genera. 
As  far  as  my  own  observations  on  this  subject  extend,  the 
following  would  appear  to  be  the  general  features  of  the  vascular 
system  in  this  family.  There  is  a  peri-intestinal  sinus  or  plexus 
of  sinuses  in  the  wall  of  the  alimentary  canal.  This  terminates 
in  front  at  the  cardiac  end  of  the  stomach,  and  from  it  runs 
forwards  a  large  median  dorsal  vessel  or  heart,  which  is  subject 


344  OBSERVATIONS    ON    THE    CHLORAEMIDAE, 

to  regular  peristaltic  contractions,  driving  the  blood  from  behind 
forwards.  This  vessel  contains  the  unpaired  cardiac  gland,  to 
which  reference  is  made  below.  In  the  peristomial  region  it 
divides  into  two  main  afferent  branchial  vessels,  each  of  which 
divides  to  give  rise  to  the  corresponding  tentacular  and  branchial 
branches. 

In  Coppingeria  the  arrangement  of  the  vessels  conforms  in  all 
essential  respects  to  that  described  by  Claparede  for  Stylarioides 
(Trophonia)  monilifer.  There  is  a  peri-intestinal  sinus  or  rather 
plexus  of  sinuses  in  the  wall  of  the  stomach.  From  this,  at  the 
anterior  end  of  the  stomach,  passes  forwards  the  short  dorsal 
vessel  or  heart,  almost  parallel  with  and  on  the  dorsal  side  of  the 
oesophagus.  This  bifurcates  in  the  anterior  part  of  the  peris- 
tomium.  Each  branch  enters  the  branchial  stalk  and  breaks  up 
anteriorly  into  a  number  of  afferent  branchial  vessels  (fig.  25,  br.), 
each  running  to  the  end  of  one  of  the  branchiae.  The  blood 
returning  from  the  extremities  of  the  branchiae  by  means  of  the 
efferent  branchial  vessels  must  be  carried  back  by  a  trunk,  which 
appears  in  my  sections  as  a  vessel  of  small  size,  running  backwards 
just  above  the  oesophagus.  This  bifurcates  behind,  the  two 
branches  thus  formed  embracing  the  oesophagus  at  its  posterior 
end  and  uniting  below  with  the  ventral  vessel.  The  latter  runs 
forwards  only  a  short  distance  in  front  of  this  junction,  but  is 
continued  backwards  throughout  the  body.  On  the  dorsal  side 
there  is  given  off  from  the  heart  a  dorsal  vessel  which  runs  back- 
wards throughout  the  length  of  the  body  on  the  dorsal  aspect 
above  the  alimentary  canal. 

Claparede  (I.e.,  p.  360)  describes  the  branchial  vessels  in  Styla- 
rioides monilifer  as  having  lateral  diverticula  ("anses"),  and  in  his 
figure  of  a  portion  of  a  branchia  (plate  xxv.,  1b.)  transverse  dotted 
bands  are  described  as  the  diverticula  in  question,  covered  with 
brown  pigment.  There  are  no  lateral  diverticula  in  Coppingeria  nor 
in  Stylarioides  cinctus.  The  branchial  vessels  in  the  former  are 
accompanied  by  bands  of  a  granular  material  which  colours 
deeply  with  haematoxylin  and  which  may  contain  pigment;  in 
the  latter  there  is  a  reddish-brown  pigment.     These  pigmented 


BY    WILLIAM    A.  HASWELL.  345 

elements  remind  one  of  the  structures  called  "  pigmented  lymph- 
glands"  by  Eduard  Meyer,*  found  on  the  branchial  vessels  of 
Terebellidae  and  Cirratulidae,  and  probably  are  of  a  similar 
character. 

The  epithelium  covering  the  branchise  is  peculiarly  modified  in 
Coj)pingeria,  the  cells  as  seen  in  sections  having  straight  sharply- 
defined  lateral  borders,  as  if  they  had  acquired  a  stiff  and  rigid 
character  ;  as  there  is  no  internal  supporting  layer,  it  is  likely 
that  this  is  actually  the  case,  and  that  the  ciliated  epithelium  acts 
to  some  extent  as  a  supporting  structure. 

Considerable  confusion  has  existed  regarding  the  relations  of 
an  unpaired  gland  situated  in  the  dorsal  region  of  the  anterior 
part  of  the  body  ;  it  has  been  noticed  and  described  by  various 
observers,  but  by  nearly  all  its  position  has  been  incorrectly 
interpreted. 

The  structure  in  question  seems  to  be  represented  in  Costa's 
figures,  though  it  is  neither  referred  to  in  the  text  nor  in  the 
explanation  of  the  plates.  It  does  not  seem  to  have  been  noticed 
by  Dujardin,  by  Quatrefages,  or  by  Leuckart. 

ClaparedHf  states  that  it  had  been  observed  by  Delle  Chiaje  in 
Stylarioides  and  regarded  by  him  as  a  ccecum  of  the  alimentary 
canal.  Claparede  describes  it  as  a  ccecal  tube  of  an  intense  black 
colour,  sometimes  inclined  to  green,  extending  backwards  as  far  as 
the  stomach,  to  which  it  adheres  by  its  blind  posterior  extremity. 
It  appears  to  open  in  front  on  the  dorsal  wall  of  the  buccal  cavity. 
It  is  formed  of  two  layers  —  an  outer,  very  thick,  colourless, 
muscular,  and  rich  in  vascular  plexuses,  the  inner,  an  epithelium 
of  intense  blackness — the  cells  being  loaded  with  dark  granules. 
The  functions  of  the  gland  he  looks  upon  as  entirely  problematical. 

In  his  account  of  Siphonostoma^diplocha'itos  the  same  author 
remarks  (p.  370)  that  Max  Miiller,  following  Costa,  had  fallen 
into  a  grave  error  in  describing  this  structure  as  a  large  blind 
vessel. 

*  "Studien  uber  den  Korperbau  der  Anneliden."  'Mittheil.  a.  d.  Zool. 
Stat,  zu  Neapel,'  vh\,  p.  645  (1887). 

tL.c.p.  362. 


346  OBSERVATIONS    ON    THE    CHLORAEMIDAE, 

Grube  follows  Claparede  in  his  view  of  the  structure  in  question. 

Langerhans*  describes  in  Brada  inhabilis  three  glands  as  opening 
in  the  neighbourhood  of  the  mouth,  a  median  one,  the  cells  of 
which  contain  brown  pigment  granules,  and  a  pair,  in  the  cells  of 
which  are  round  concretions. 

Studerf  describes  the  unpaired  gland  as  opening  in  front  over 
the  oesophagus. 

Jacquet  comments  (I.e.,  p.  373)  on  the  numerous  misconceptions 
to  which  the  dorsal  vessel  has  given  rise,  and,  after  quoting  the 
opinion  of  Claparede,  to  which  reference  is  made  above,  goes  on 
to  say  : — "  Nous  verrons  que  Claparede  en  voulant  relever  une 
donnee  qu'il  considerait  comme  erronee,  retombe  dans  les  idees 
de  quelquesuns  de  ses  predecesseurs,  idees  que  je  suis  arrive  a 
considerer  comme  fausses.  Cet  auteur  croit  avoir  trouve  la  cause, 
qui  a  induit  en  erreur  Costa,  dans  la  couleur  de  cette  glande.  Si 
cette  soi-disant  glande  est  plus  foncee  qu'un  vaisseau  sanguin 
ordinaire,  cela  depend  de  deux  motifs.  Comme  cet  organe  pre- 
sente  dans  sa  partie  la  plus  renflee  un  diametre  de  plus  de  vingt 
fois  celui  d'un  canal  sanguin,  il  est  naturel  que  contenant  une 
beaucoup  plus  grand  quantite  de  liquide,  celui-ci  paraitra  plus 
fonce.  En  outre,  on  remarque  que  les  parois  de  cet  organe  con- 
tiennent  des  elements  pigmentes."  Further  on  he  conjectures 
that  the  anterior  dilated  part  of  the  dorsal  vessel  may  have  a 
glandular  wall  secreting  a  substance  calculated  to  facilitate  diges- 
tion. He  thus  denies  entirely  the  presence  of  anything  but  a 
thick  dorsal  vessel  or  heart  with  a  pigmented  and  perhaps 
glandular  wall. 

Horstj  was  the  first,  so  far  as  I  have  been  able  to  determine, 
who  gave  an  accurate  account  of  this  structure.  He  shows  that 
it  is  the  dorsal  vessel  enclosing  in  its  interior  an  elongated  narrow 

*  "Die  Wurmfauna  von  Madeira,"  'Zeitschr.  f.  wiss.  Zool.'  xxxiv.  Band. 

(1880). 

f  "  Beitrage  zur  Naturgeschichte  wirbelloser  Thiere  in  Kerguelensland" 
♦  Archiv  fur  Naturgesch.'  1878. 

+  "  Ueber  ein  rathselhaftes  Organ  bei  den  Chlor?emiden,"  'Zool.  Anz.' 
vm.  (1885). 


BY   WILLIAM    A.  HASWELL.  347 

dark  body,  which  is  continuous  behind  with  the  wall  of  the 
stomach.  This  peculiar  dark  body  is  composed  of  different 
strands  irregularly  entwined  and  mostly  with  an  oval  transverse 
section,  formed  of  cells  filled  with  brown  granules,  the  cell-struc- 
ture not  being  always  distinctly  visible.  He  does  not  definitely 
suggest  any  function  for  the  dark  glandular  body,  but  points  out 
that  it  has  its  homologues  in  various  sedentary  Annelids — such  as 
Terebella  and  Cirratulus — as  well  as  in  Polyophthcdmus,  Cteno- 
drilus,  and  Enchytraeus. 

Cunningham*  states  that  in  Trophonia  plumosa  the  somewhat 
cylindrical  cords,  of  which  the  cardiac  body  is  made  up,  are  seen 
in  sections  not  to  be  composed  entirely  of  cells,  but  in  most  cases 
to  possess  a  lumen,  the  cells  around  which  form  a  glandular- 
looking  epithelium  of  several  layers — the  more  internal  clear  and 
vacuolated.  He  finds  no  trace  of  any  opening  either  in  front  or 
behind.  In  Flabelligera  affinis  (  Siphonostoma)  the  organ  in 
question  is  very  different ;  it  is  relatively  narrow  and  occupies 
only  a  small  part  of  the  lumen  of  the  heart ;  it  has  the  form  of  a 
narrow  irregular  flat  band,  which  in  transverse  section  appears  as 
an  irregularly  branching  narrow  tract  without  distinct  lumen, 
the  walls  being  in  close  contact.  The  clear  vacuolated  cells  are 
absent — the  epithelium  consisting  entirely  of  elongated  columnar 
nucleated  cells ;  and  the  granules  are  smaller  and  less  numerous. 
Cunningham  dissents  from  Horst's  view  that  the  organ  in 
Enchytraeus  is  homologous  with  the  cardiac  body  of  the  Chlorae- 
midae.  He  states  that  in  Tropihonia  there  is  no  connection 
between  the  cardiac  body  and  the  intestinal  epithelium. 

In  Goppingeria,  Stylarioides  cinctus,  and  S.  Horstii,  and  Sip>honos- 
tomum  affine,  this  cardiac  body  is  a  greatly-elongated  dark-coloured 
structure,  which  lies  in  the  interior  of  the  heart  or  contractile 
dorsal  vessel.  In  front  it  is  very  narrow  (fig.  20  c.  b.)  and  does  not 
nearly  fill  up  the  lumen  of  the  vessel ;  but  further  back  it  is 
broader,  and  in  sections  appears  completely  to  block  up  the  cavity. 

*  "Some  points  in  the  Anatomy  of  the  Polychseta,"  'Quart.  Journ.  Micro. 
Sci.'  vol.  xxviii. 


348  OBSERVATIONS    ON    THE    CHLORAEMIDAE, 

In  a  living  specimen  of  Siphonostomum  affine,  however,  it  was 
seen  that  the  vessel  in  a  dilated  state  is  considerably  larger  than  the 
enclosed  cardiac  body.  The  latter  consists  of  longitudinally  arranged 
lobes,  which  in  all  the  specimens  examined  had  lost  their  cellular 
structure, — this  being  represented  in  the  case  ofCoppingeria  merely 
by  nuclei  and  faint  traces  of  cell-bodies.  An  examination  of  n^ 
sections  confirms  Cunningham's  statement  that  there  is  no  connec- 
tion whatever  between  the  cardiac  body  and  the  intestinal  epithel- 
ium. In  front  it  is  continuous  with  the  wall  of  the  vessel ;  behind 
it  is  completely  free  and  moves  passively  with  the  peristaltic  con- 
tractions. Cunningham  describes  a  lumen  as  being  present  in  the 
cardiac  body,  but  in  this  I  think  he  is  mistaken.  The  lobes  are 
in  some  parts  slightly  separated  from  one  another,  leaving  fissures 
here  and  there  ;  sometimes  there  is  a  star-shaped  fissure  in  the 
middle,  but  where  this  is  the  case  the  space  is  filled  with  blood. 
Whatever  may  be  their  condition  at  an  earlier  stage,  the  lobes  in 
the  specimens  I  have  examined  are  solid  and  contain  no  lumen. 

VI.  Alimentary  canal  and  nephridia. 

The  special  features  of  the  alimentary  canal  in  this  family  have 
been  described  by  various  authors,  and  I  have  little  to  add  with 
regard  to  Copjringeria  to  what  has  been  already  published.  The 
anterior  part  is  in  the  form  of  a  narrow  oesophagus,  with  a  high 
epithelium  of  ciliated  cells.  The  wide  stomach,  with  its  anteriorly 
projecting  ccecum,  is  thin-walled,  with  a  low  epithelial  lining ;  it 
is  filled  with  particles  of  mud  containing  the  remains  of  many 
microscopic  organisms.  The  narrow  intestine  has  a  comparatively 
thick  wall,  with  an  epithelial  layer  of  elongated  ciliated  cells ;  its 
lumen  contains  no  food  particles.  The  peculiar  orange  colour  of 
the  stomach  in  its  anterior  portion,  which  appears  to  be  general 
in  this  family,  is,  of  course,  not  to  be  detected  in  a  specimen  so 
long  preserved  in  spirits,  but  is  well-marked  in  Stylarioides  cinctus. 
In  this  species  the  hinder  part  of  the  stomach  (fig.  21)  is  bent  on 
itself  so  as  to  run  obliquely  forwards  for  a  little  distance  before 
passing  into  the  intestine ;  the  latter  is  bent  round  in  the  way 


BY    WILLIAM    A.  HASWELL.  349 

represented  in  the  figure,  before  pursuing  its  straight  course  back- 
wards towards  the  anus. 

The  nephridia  were  described  by  Otto  as  salivary  glands,  and 
the  same  view  of  their  natu/e  was  taken  by  Quatrefages*  as  well 
as  by  Dujardin.  They  are  only  very  obscurely  referred  to  by 
Costa. 

Leuckart  (I.e.,  p.  166)  expresses  a  doubt  as  to  the  correctness  of 
Rathke's  view  that  these  represent  salivary  glands,  and  suggests 
that  they  may  be  comparable  to  the  Polian  vesicles  of  Echinoderms. 

Claparede,  to  whom  we  owe  the  earliest  recognition  of  the  true 
nature  of  these  bodies,  statesf  that  they  had  been  seen  by  Delle 
Chiaje  and  Rathke  as  well  as  Kblliker.  He  remarks  that  there 
is  a  great  resemblance,  as  had  already  been  pointed  out  by  the 
last-named  observer,  between  these  organs  and  the  renal  organs 
of  the  Gasteropoda.  He  describes  them  in  Stylarioides  as  tubular 
glands  opening  externally  near  the  mouth  and  terminating  behind 
in  a  cul-de-sac  at  the  sides  of  the  stomach,  in  the  eighth  segment. 
They  are  full  of  spherical  bodies  resembling  cells,  but  without 
evident  nuclei,  and  each  of  them  containing  a  single  spherical 
concretion  or  several. 

Grube's  statement  regarding  these  bodies  is  essentially  a  repe- 
tition of  Claparede's. 

Langerhans,J  as  already  mentioned,  describes  three  glands  as 
opening  in  the  neighbourhood  of  the  mouth  in  Brada  inhabilis, 
Rathke,  the  unpaired  one  being  evidently  the  cardiac  body  and 
the  lateral,  containing  round  concretions,  the  nephridia. 

Studer  describes  these  excretory  glands  as  opening  in  front  into 
the  anterior  part  of  the  pharynx. 

In  Coppingeria  these  glands  are  of  large  size  and  deeply  lobed. 
They  extend  from  the  posterior  part  of  the  praestomium  backwards 
through  the  following  two  or  three  segments,  and  are  prolonged 

*  "Memoire  sur  la  famille  des  Chlor^miens."  'Ann.  Sci.  Nat.'  2e  serie, 
tome  xii.  (1849),  p.  277. 

t  L.c,  p.  362. 
X  "Die  Wurmfauna  von  Madeira,"  'Zeitsch.  f.  wiss.  Zool.'  xxxiv.  (1880). 


350  OBSERVATIONS    ON    THE    CHLORAEMIDAE, 

for  some  distance  further  back  in  the  form  of  two  comparatively 
narrow  tubes,  which  lie  close  together  on  either  side  of  the  middle 
line  of  the  dorsal  part  of  the  body-qavity.  Their  ducts  meet  in 
front  below  the  oesophagus,  and  the  median  duct  thus  formed 
appears  to  open  on  the  ventral  aspect  of  the  praestomium,  but 
defects  in  the  sections  leave  this  doubtful.  The  glands  are  lined 
with  an  epithelium  of  large  irregularly-shaped  cells  (tig.  22)  with 
vacuolated  protoplasm  containing  numerous  rounded  granules  of 
various  sizes,  some  of  which  are  stained  darkly  by  haematoxylin, 
the  largest  having  the  appearance  of  being  made  up  by  the  coales- 
cence of  numerous  extremely  minute  particles. 

In  Stylarioides  miotics  these  glands  are  in  the  form  of  narrow 
twisted  tubes,  the  cells  lining  which  are  similar  to  those  just 
described.  The  granules  do  not  become  stained  by  borax-carmine 
and  a  nucleus  becomes  revealed  in  each  cell.  In  Siphonostomum 
affine  the  cells  have  the  form  represented  in  figure  23,  mostly 
narrow  at  the  base,  with  a  rounded  bulging  at  the  free  extremity, 
containing  numerous  minute  granules  scattered  through  their 
protoplasm  and  some  larger  ones  at  the  base,  where  there  is  in 
most  a  zone  of  protoplasm  which  stains  more  deeply  with  haema- 
toxylin than  the  rest. 

VII. — Nervous  system,  eyes,  and  tentacles. 

The  remarkable  position  occupied  by  the  ventral  nerve-chain  in 
the  members  of  this  family  was  remarked  upon  by  Leuckart  in  his 
account  of  Siphonostomitm  vaginiferum,  Kathke  (I.e.,  p.  165).  It  is 
completely  separated  from  the  epidermis,  and  lies  within  the  layer 
of  circular  and  oblique  muscular  fibres  of  the  body  wall.  The 
cord  presents  very  distinct  ganglionic  swellings,  which  are  bilobed 
externally,  though  completely  fused  internally  ;  between  the 
ganglia  the  cord  is  distinctly  double.  The  oesophageal  commis- 
sures are  of  great  length  in  co-ordination  with  the  retractility  of 
the  prse-  and  peristomia.  The  anterior  part  of  the  nerve  cord  in 
Stylarioides  ductus  is  represented  in  plate  xxviii.  fig.  24. 

The  presence  of  eyes  in  members  of  this  family  has  frequently 
been  overlooked  owing  to  the  retractile  character  of  the  praesto- 


BY    WILLIAM    A.   HASWELL.  351 

mium  on  which  they  are  situated.  Quatrefages  describes  Chloraema 
Dujardinii  as  possessing  a  single  pair  of  eyes  placed  close  together. 
Leuckart  describes  two  pairs  of  eyes  in  Siphonostomum  vaginiferum, 
and  Johnston*  states  that  Siphonostomum  uncinatum  possesses 
four  eyes.  This  is  confirmed  by  Jourdanf  as  regards  S.  diplochaitos, 
and  by  Joyeux-LaffuieJ  as  regards  Chloraema  Dujardinii.  I  have 
observed  the  same  to  hold  good  in  regard  to  Siphonostomum  ajfine, 
Stylarioides  cinctus,  S.  Horstii,  and  Copping eria  longisetosa.  It 
seems  probable  in  fact  that  the  presence  of  four  eyes  is  general  in 
this  family. 

The  two  pairs  of  eyes  in  Coppingeria  (fig.  26)  are  situated  on  a 
lobe,  which  is  a  process  from  the  praistomium  between  the  bases  of 
the  branchiae.  Into  the  interior  of  the  oculiferous  lobe  projects  a 
group  of  nerve-cells,  forming  an  optic  ganglion,  which  is  really  a 
lobe  of  the  brain,  with  which  it  is  in  immediate  connection — the 
optic  nerves  mentioned  by  Quatrefages§  not  being  represented. 
Both  eyes  project  prominently  on  the  surface,  those  of  the  anterior 
pair  being  the  larger.  The  cuticle  forms  a  concavo-convex 
thickening  (cu.)  over  the  eye,  immediately  internal  to  which  is  a 
layer  of  cells  (c),  which  present  no  regular  arrangement.  Then 
follows  a  layer  of  thick  crystalline  rods  (r),  which  are  probably 
continuous  with  elements  composing  a  cup-shaped  layer  of  darkly 
pigmented  substance  (pi.),  outside  of  which  are  the  nerve-cells. 
In  Siphonostomum  ajfine  and  Stylarioides  cinctus  the  eyes  are  less 
prominent,  and  are  buried  in  the  substance  of  the  prsestomial  lobe. 

In  Siphonostomum  affine  (fig.  27)  they  differ  slightly  from  those 
of  Coppingeria.  The  pigment  (pi.)  forms  an  almost  complete 
capsule,  with  only  a  small  opening.  Enclosed  within  this  are  a 
series  of  thick  rods,  which  fill  up  the  whole  of  the  cavity — there 
beiug  no  nucleated  elements  in  the  inferior  of  the  pigment  capsule. 

*  "  Catalogue  of  British  Non-Parasitical  Worms." 

t  "  Etude  anatomique  sur  le  Siphonostoma  diplochaitos,   Otto."   'Ann. 

Mus.  d'Hist.  Nat.  Marseille,'  Zool.  t.  3,  Mem.  No.  2.     This  is  known  to 

me  only  through  the  abstract  in  the  "Zool.  Jahresb."  (1887,  Vermes,  p.  64). 

X  "Sur  l'organisation  des  Chloremiens."  '  Compt.  Rend.'  t.  104,  p.  1377. 

§  "  Hist.  Nat.  des  Annel6s,"  tome  I.,  p.  471. 


352  OBSERVATIONS    ON    THE    CHLORAEMIDAE, 

There  is  a  sort  of  cornea-lens,  however,  formed  of  a  number  of 
elongated  epidermal  cells,  which  pass  over  the  outer  side  of  the 
eye. 

The  tentacles  in  Copjrinyeria  are  slightly  corrugated  transversely, 
and  are  marked  by  a  deep  longitudinal  groove  on  the  ventral 
surface.  They  are  hollow,  and  the  cavity  is  divided  by  a  dorso- 
veutral  longitudinal  septum.  In  the  septum  runs  the  main  blood- 
vessel. The  wall  of  the  tentacle  contains  a  thin  circular  or  oblique 
and  a  much  thicker  longitudinal  layer  of  muscular  fibres.  The 
cuticle  is  very  thin  ;  the  epidermis  has  the  cells  more  elongated 
than  in  the  body  ;  here  and  there  is  a  cell  which  stains  more 
strongly  than  the  others,  of  a  spindle-like  shape,  perhaps  a  sensory 
cell.  The  epithelium  (fig.  28)  on  the  inner  faces  of  the  ridges 
bounding  the  ventral  groove  is  specially  modified.  Many,  or  all, 
of  the  cells  are  provided  with  close-set  short  cilia.  They  are  very 
long  and  narrow — many  almost  fibre-like, — and  from  their  inner 
ends  pass  delicate  fibres  to  a  nerve  situated  (n)  at  the  base  of  the 
ridge.  We  have  here  evidently  an  epithelium  which  is  specialised 
not  only  in  the  direction  of  bearing  cilia  for  driving  food  towards 
the  mouth,  but  also  in  that  of  possessing  numerous  sensory  cells, 
connected  either  with  a  specially  developed  tactile  sense  or  with 
a  sense  of  taste  or  smell. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  CHLORAEMIDAE* 

1 .  Beneden,  P.  J.  van.    Notice  sur  un  nouveau  genre  de  Siphonos- 

tome.     Bull.  Acad.  Belg.  t.  21,  2  p.  583  (1854). 

2.  Blainville,  M.  H.  D.  de.    Dictionnaire  des  Sciences  Naturelles. 

Vers. 

3.  [Chiaje,   St.   Delle.      Memoria  sulla  storia  e  notomia  degli 

animali  senza  vertebre  (1822-29).] 

4.  [Chiaje,  St.  Delle.     Descrizione  e  notomia  degli  animali  senza 

vertebre  (1831-41).] 

*  The  titles  of  papers  to   which  I  have  not  had  access  are  placed  in 
brackets. 


BY   WILLIAM   A.  HASWELL.  353 

5.  Claparede,  R.     Les  Annelides  Chetopodes  du  Golfe  de  Naples 

(1868). 

6.  Costa,  0,  G.     Description  de  quelques  annelides  nouvelles  du 

Golfe  de  Naples.  Ann.  des  Sciences  Nat.,  2e  Serie,  tome 
xvi.  (1841). 

7.  Cunningham,  J.  T.      Some  points  in  the  Anatomy  of  the 

Polychaeta.     Quart.  Journ.  Micro.  Sci.,  Vol.  xxviii. 

8.  Dujardin,  F.     Observations  sur  quelques  annelides  marines. 

Ann.  des  Sciences  Nat.,  2e  Serie,  tome  xi.,  p.  289  (1839). 

9.  Edwards,  Milne.     Regne  Animal  de  Cuvier,  edition  accom- 

pagnee  de  planches  :  Annelides. 

10.  Grube,  E.    Annulata  Oerstediana.    Naturhist.  Foren.  Yidensk. 

Meddelelser.  (1858). 

11.  Grube,  E.     Familien  der  Anneliden. 

12.  Grube,  E.      Beschreibungen  einiger  von  Georg  Ritter   von 

Frauenfeld  gesammelten  Anneliden  und  Gephyreen  des 
Rothen  Meeres.  Verhandl.  der  k.-k.  Zool.-bot.  Gesell- 
schaft,  xvm.  (1868). 

13.  Grube,  E.     Annulata  Semperiana.     Memoires  de  l'Acad.  Imp. 

des  Sci.  de  St.  Petersbourg,  vii.  Serie,  t.  xxv.  (1878). 

14.  Grube,  E.     Beschreibungen  neuer  oder  wenig  bekannten  von 

Hrn.  Ehrenberg  gesammelten  Anneliden  des  Rothen  Meeres. 
Monatsber.  der  Kgl.  Akad.  der  Wissensch.  zu  Berlin  (1869). 

15.  Grube.  E.     Bemerkungen  iiber  die  Familieder  Chlorhaeminen. 

Bericht  der  Schles.  Gesellsch.,  1876,  p.  37. 

16.  Grube,    E.       Annelidenausbeute     von     S.M.S.     "  Gazelle." 

Monatsber.  der  Kgl.  Akad.  der  Wissensch.  zu  Berlin, 
1877. 

17.  Haswell,   W.  A.      Observations   on  some   Australian   Poly- 

chaeta.    Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  Vol.  x.,  p.  733. 

18.  Horst,  R.     Ueber  ein  rathselhaftes  Organ  bei  den  Chlorae- 

miden.     Zool.  Anz.,  vin.,  p.  12  (1885). 

19.  Horst,  R.     Mr.  Cunningham  on  the  Cardiac   Body.     Zool. 

Anz.,  xi.,  p.  135  (1888). 


354  OBSERVATIONS    ON    THE    CHLORAEMIDAE, 

20.  Jacquet,  M.     Recherches  sur  le  systeme  vasculaire  des  Anne- 

lides.  Mittheil.  a.  d.  Zool.  Stat,  zu  Neapel,  6  Bd.  pp.  370- 
379  (1885). 

21.  Johnston,  G.     Catalogue  of  British  Non-Parasitical  Worms 

(1865). 

22.  Jourdan,  E.     Structure  de  la  vesicule  gerrainative  du  Sipho- 

nostoma  diplochaitos,  Otto.  Compt.  Rend.  t.  102,  pp. 
1494-1496. 

23.  [Jourdan,  E.     Etude  anatomique  sur  le  Siphonostoma  diplo- 

chaitos, Otto.  Ann.  Mus.  d'Hist.  Nat.  Marseille,  Zool., 
t.  3,  Mem.  No.  2.] 

24.  Joyeux-Laffuie.     Sur  l'organisation  des  Chlore  miens.    Compt'. 

Rend.,  t.  104,  p.  1377. 

25.  Joyeux-Laffuie.      Sur  le  Chloraema  Dujardinii  et  le  Siphonos- 

toma diplochaitos.     Compt.  Rend.,  t.  105,  p.  179. 

26.  Kinberg,   J.      Annulata    nova.       Of  vers   af   K.   Vet.-Akad. 

F6rh.  (1866). 

27.  [Kolliker,  A.     Lineola,   Chloraema,  Polycystis,  neue  Wurm- 

gattungen  und  neue  Arten  von  Nemertes.  Yerhandl.  d. 
Schweitz.  naturf.  Gesellsch.,  29  (1844).] 

28.  Langerhans,  P. v.     Die  Wurmfauna  von  Madeira.     Zeitschr. 

f.  wiss.  Zool.,  xxxiv.  Bd.  (1880). 

29.  Leuckart,  R.     Beitrage  zur  Kenntniss  der  Fauna  von  Island. 

Arch.  f.  Naturg.  xxix.  (1849). 

30.  Leidy,  J.     Contributions  towards  a  Fauna   of   the   Marine 

Invertebrate  Animals  of  the  coasts  of  Rhode  Island  and 
New  Jersey.  Journ.  Acad.  Philad.,  2nd  Series,  Vol.  in. 
(1855). 

31.  Mcintosh,  W.  C.     Report  on  the  Annelids  of  the  "Valorous" 

(1877). 

32.  Mcintosh,  W.  C.    Report  on  the  Annelida  of  the  "Challenger" 

Expedition. 

33.  Malmgren,  A.  J.     Annulata  Polychaeta  Spetsbergiae  (1867). 


BY    WILLIAM    A.  HASWELL.  355 

34.  [Miiller,  Max.     Observationes  Anatomicae  de  Vermibus  qui- 

busdam  Marinis  (1852).] 

35.  [Otto,  A.     De  Sternaspide  thalassemoide  et  Siphonostoniate 

diplochaeto.     Nova  Acta  Nat.  Cur.,  10  Bd.] 

36.  Quatrefages,  A.  de.    Mernoire  sur  la  Famille  des  Chloremiens. 

Ann.  Sci.  Nat.,  3e  Serie,  t.  xn.  (1849). 

37.  Quatrefages,  A.  de.     Note  sur  la  Classification  des  Annelides. 

Ann.  Sci.  Nat.  Zool.,  5e  Serie,  t.  in. 

38.  Quatrefages,  A.  de.     Histoire  Naturelle  des  Anneles  (1865). 

39.  [Rathke,   H.     Beitrage  zur  Anatomie  unci   Physiologie,  iv. 

Neueste  Schriften   der  Naturforschenden  Gesellschaft   zu 
Dantzig  (1842).] 

40.  [Rathke,  H.     Beitrage  zur  Fauna  Norwegens.     Nova  Acta 

Nat.  Cur.,  xx.  (1843).] 

41.  Sars,  G.  0.     Diagnoser  af  nye   Annelider  fra  Christianiaf- 

jorden.     Vidensk.-Selsk.  Forhandlingar  (1871). 

42.  Schmarda,  L.  K.     Neue  wirbellose  Thiere,  I.  n.  (1861). 

43.  Studer,  Th.     Beitrage  zur  Naturgeschichte  wirbelloser  Thiere 

in  Kerguelensland.     Archiv  f.  Naturgeschichte,  1878. 

44.  Theel,  H.     Les  Annelides  Polyene  tes  des  mers  de  la  Nouvelle 

Zemble.       Kongl.    Svensk.   Yetensk.    Akad.    Handlingar, 
Bd.  16. 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES. 

Plate  xxvi. 

Fig.  1.— Port  Molle  specimen  of  Goppingeria  longisetosa,  three  times  the 
natural  size. 

Fig.  2. — Produced  peristomium  and  praestomium  with  tentacles  and 
branchiae  seen  from  the  dorsal  aspect:  br.,  branchiae;  te., 
tentacle. 

Fig.    3. — Darnley  Island  specimen,  thrice  the  natural  size  ;  lateral  view. 

Fig.    4. — Stylarioides  ductus,  magnified. 

Fig.  5. — Anterior  extremity  of  the  same  with  the  tentacles  and  branchiae  ; 
ventral  view  :  br.,  branchiae  ;  te.,  tentacles. 

Fig.    6. — Anterior  end    of    Stylarioides  Horstii,  from    the    dorsal    side ; 
magnified. 
24 


356  OBSERVATIONS    ON    THE    CHLORAEMIDAE. 

Fig.    7. — The  same,  from  the  side. 
Fig.    8. — Ventral  view  of  the  same. 

Plate  xxvii. 

Fig.    9. — Ventral  seta  of  Goppingeria  longisetosa,  x  100. 

Fig.  10. — Ventral  seta  of  Stylarioides  ductus. 

Fig.  11. — Section  of  one  of  the  shorter  papillae  of  Coppingeria. 

Fig.  12. — Section  through  one  of  the  longer  papillae   of  the   same:   m., 

mucus  ;  g2.,  g3.,  ganglia. 
Fig.  13. — A  papilla  of  the  same  with  the  extremity  inverted  :  m.,  mucus  ; 

92-,  <J3-,  ganglia. 
Fig,  14. — Papilla  of  the  same  showing  the  basal  ganglion,  gl.  ;  cu.,  cuticle; 

mus.,  outer  muscular  layers  of  body  wall. 

Fig.  15. — Section  of  the  integument  of  Stylarioides  cinctus :  g'.,  basal 
ganglia;  m.,  layer  of  mucus;  c'.,  external,  and  c" .,  internal 
layers  of  cuticle  ;  e. ,  epidermis  ;  mus. ,  muscular  layer. 

Fig.  16. — Surface  view  of  epidermal  cells  of  Stylarioides  cinctus. 

Figs.  17a  and  17b. — Papilla  of  Stylarioides  Horstii. 

Fig.  18. — From  section  of  an  elytron  of  a  species  of  Polynoe,  showing 
sensory  papilla  :  n.,  nerve-branch;  g.,  ganglion. 

Fig.  19. — Papilla  of  Stylarioides  monilifer  :  g'. ,  basal  ganglion  ;  m.,  mucus. 

Fig.  20. — Transverse  section  of  the  anterior  part  of  the  body  of  Coppnngeria 
longisetosa  to  show  the  position  of  the  cardiac  body:  h., 
"heart ;"  cb.,  cardiac  body  ;  vv.,  ventral  vessel ;  02s.,  oesopha- 
gus ;  lm.,  longitudinal  bundles  of  muscular  fibres. 

Fig.  21. — Stomach,  with  oesophagus  and  beginning  of  intestine  of  Stylari- 
oides cinctus. 

Fig.  22. — Part  of  a  section  through  one  of  the  nephridia  of  Goppingeria 
longisetosa. 

Fig.  23. — Part  of  a  section  through  nephridium  of  Siphonostomum  ajffine. 

Plate  xxviii. 

Fig.  24.  — Anterior  part  of  ventral  chain  of  ganglia  in  Stylarioides  cinctus  : 
c,  commissures  connecting  cerebral  and  first  ventral  ganglia. 

Fig.  25. — Section  (nearly  transverse)  through  the  preestomium  of  Coppin- 
geria in  the  region  of  the  cerebral  ganglion  (g )  :  dr.,  two 
main  branches  of  the  dorsal  vessel ;  br.,  afferent  branchial 
vessels;  pi.s  pigmented  (?)  cords  accompanying  branchial 
vessels  ;  tv.,  tentacular  vessel ;  m.,  mouth. 

Fig.  26. — Section  of  eye  of  Goppingeria:  cu.,  cuticle  with  its  thickening 
over  the  eye  ;  c,  layer  of  modified  epidermal  cells  ;  r.,  crys- 
talline rods  ;  pi.,  pigment  cup  ;  g.,  nerve-cells. 

Fig.  27.— Section  of  eye  of  Siphonostomum  affine :  co.,  cornea-lens;  pi., 
pigment  cup  ;  r.,  crystalline  body. 

Fig.  28. — Lateral  and  ventral  part  of  a  transverse  section  through  a 
tentacle  of  Coppingeria :  gr.,  ventral  ciliated  groove  ;  n.,  nerve. 


357 


NOTES    ON    AUSTRALIAN    ABORIGINAL    STONE 
WEAPONS  AND  IMPLEMENTS. 

By  R.  Etheridge,  Jun. 
(Paleontologist  and  Librarian,  Geological  Survey  of  New 
South  Wales,  and  Paleontologist  to  the  Australian 
Museum.) 

(Plates  xxix.-xxxvi.) 

xvi. — Tomahawks  and  Axes. 

It  was  explained  in  my  last  Paper*,  communicated  to  this 
Society  on  February  25th  last,  that  for  an  opportunity  of  describ- 
ing the  present  fine  series  of  stone  tomahawks  and  axes,  thanks 
are  primarily  due  to  Sir  W.  Macleay,  Mr.  C.  W.  De  Vis,  Dr.  J. 
C.  Cox,  and  others  to  be  severally  mentioned  under  their 
respective  specimens. 

In  such  descriptions  much  difficulty  is  experienced  from  the 
want  of  some  satisfactory  method  of  classification,  whether  it  be 
from  the  point  of  view  of  their  physical  characters,  mode  of  pre- 
paration, or  apparent  use  by  those  who  employed  them  in  their 
daily  avocations.  At  present,  no  such  classification  exists,  so  far 
as  I  know,  nor  do  I  at  present  feel  prepared  to  propose  a 
permanent  one.  The  difficulties  attending  this  will  be  touched 
on  more  at  length  on  another  occasion.  No  doubt  the  most 
convenient  place  to  attempt  some  such  classification  would  be  an 
extensive  museum  collection,  any  series  formed  by  a  private 
collector  being  of  too  limited  a  nature  for  the  object  under 
consideration.  With  the  view,  however,  of  simplifying  the 
descriptions  which  follow,  I  have  tentatively  grouped  the  imple- 
ments under  the  succeeding  three  groups,  and  two  other  subsidiary 
sections,  divisible  into  various  types. 

*  Abst.  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  February  25th,  1891,  p.  iii. 


358     AUSTRALIAN    ABORIGINAL    STONE    WEAPONS    AND    IMPLEMENTS, 

Group  i. — Tomahawks. 
Section  a. —  Without  a  ha/ting  groove. 

1.  Oblong-ovate  type. 

2.  Ovate  type. 

3.  Deltoid,  or  subtriangular  type. 

4.  Gad-shaped  type. 

5.  Chisel-shaped  type. 

Section  b. — With  a  hafting  groove. 
1.   Ovate  type. 

Group  ii. — Hafted  Axes. 
Group  hi. — Hand-axes  and  Wedges. 
In  the  succeeding  descriptions  the  following  terminology  has 
been  made  use  of : — The  lateral  surfaces  are  the  more  or  less 
broad  sides  of  the  tomahawk ;  the  cutting  edge  the  generally 
curved  sharp  edge,  produced  by  grinding  the  lateral  surfaces ;  the 
portion  of  the  latter  ground  at  the  anterior  end  is  the  bevel ;  the 
opposite  end  to  the  cutting  edge,  or  posterior  end,  is  the  butt;  the 
secondary  surfaces,  caused  by  striking  off  flakes,  and  usually  con- 
choidal,  are  the  facets. 

i. — Tomahawks. 

Section  a.  —  Without  a  hafting  groove. 

I  opine  that  this  section  will  comprise  by  far  the  largest 
number  of  aboriginal  stone  implements  commonly  known  under 
the  name  of  "  tomahawks,"  excepting  perhaps  those  of  Western 
Australia,  which  will  require  separating  as  a  distinct  group. 

1.  Oblong-ovate  Type.  Of  this  form  an  excellent  example  has 
been  lent  for  examination  by  Mr.  Herbert  Lowe,  of  Gooree, 
Mudgee,  unchipped,  and  partially  polished.  It  is  composed  of  a 
very  dark  green  hornblende  and  epidote  rock*,  and  was  originally 
an  oblong,  narrow  pebble,  with  a  highly  roughened  surface, 
arising  from  attrition.      The  broader  end  has  been  ground  to  a 

*  I  am  indebted  to  Prof.  T.  W.  E.  David  for  assistance  in  determining 
the  petrological  characters  of  the  various  specimens,  but  from  macroscopical 
inspection  only. 


BY    R.  ETHERIDGE,  JUN.  359 

sharp  cutting  edge,  the  bevel  smoothed  off  and  polished.  The 
cutting  edge  is  sharp,  and  fairly  equal  in  its  curvature. 

The  following  are  the  measurements  of  this  tomahawk:  — 
Length,  5£in.;  breadth,  2|in. ;  thickness,  If  in. ;  weight,  lib.  loz. 

Similar  to  Mr.  Lowe's  tomahawk  are  two  from  Braidwood,  New 
South  Wales,  for  which  I  am  indebted  to  Mr.  J.  W.  Penney,  of 
Braidwood,  forwarded  through  Mr.  C.  Roberts,  J. P.,  of  Boro. 
Both,  originally  pebbles,  have  been  reduced  in  bulk  by  chipping, 
one  much  more  so  than  the  other.  The  least  chipped  (PI.  xxix., 
figs.  1  and  2)  is  composed  of  very  hard  greenish  diorite,  probably 
containing  a  little  free  quartz,  and  has  been  thinned-off  at  both 
ends,  leaving  the  centre  the  thickest  part.  The  anterior  end  has 
been  sufficiently  ground  to  produce  a  sharp  and  very  symmetrical 
cutting  edge,  and  a  flat  bevel.  This  implement  measures  :  — 
Length,  5^in.;  breadth,  2fin.;  thickness,  lfin.  ;  weight,  14oz. 

The  amount  of  chipping  is  not  great,  the  working  being 
confined  to  a  few  large  facets  near  the  butt.  The  second 
Braidwood  specimen,  on  the  other  hand,  is  highly  facetted  by 
chipping,  the  rock  of  which  it  is  composed,  a  greenish-black 
dioritic  aphanite,  lending  itself  to  the  process  admirably,  with  a 
strongly  marked  conchoidal  fracture.  The  cutting  edge  is 
remarkably  true,  and  like  the  bevel,  well  executed,  with  the 
polished  surface,  which  is  exceedingly  smooth  and  glossy,  continued 
backwards  for  quite  half  the  length  of  the  implement ;  the  gently 
convex  surface  is  quite  equal  on  both  sides.  The  measurements 
are:— Length,  4|in. ;  breadth,  2Jin. ;  thickness,  lfin.;  weight, 
13oz. 

Another  illustration  of  this  group  is  the  well  executed  toma- 
hawk already  described  in  our  "Proceedings,"*  from  Brisbane 
Water,  near  Gosford,  composed  of  a  dense,  greenish-black,  f rag- 
mental,  basic  rock,  forming  a  very  compact  and  neat  implement. 

The  next  specimen  of  this  type  is  from  Sir.  W.  Macleay's 
Collection,  and  although  larger,  is  not  so  truly  or  excellently  made. 

*  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1S90,  v.  (2),  Pt.  2,  p.  292. 


360     AUSTRALIAN    ABORIGINAL    STONE    WEAPONS    AND    IMPLEMENTS, 

It  is  composed  of  a  dark  green  greywacke,  perhaps  an  altered 
mudstone,  and  has  been  formed  from  an  unchipped  elongated-oval 
pebble  by  grinding  one  side  flat,  and  partially  so  the  other.  By 
this  means  the  bevel  of  the  cutting  edge  has  been  reduced  to  a 
minimum,  and  to  a  low  angle  not  often  met  with  in  our  aboriginal 
tomahawks,  whilst  the  cutting  edge  is  very  obliquely  rounded, 
protruding  at  what  was  probably  the  lower  anterior  corner.  The 
surface,  where  not  smoothed,  is  much  pitted  and  worn.  The 
measurements  are  : — Length,  5lin. ;  breadth,  3 Jin. ;  thickness, 
lfin.:  weight,  lib.  4oz. 

An  excellent  example  of  the  flaked  form  in  this  type  is  afforded 
by  a  tomahawk  from  New  England,  presented  by  Mr.  H.  W. 
Blomfield  (PL  xxix.,  figs.  3  and  4).  The  original  size  of  the  stone 
has  been  entirely  reduced  by  chipping,  leaving  a  rude  and  uneven 
anterior  end,  partially  bevelled  oft"  by  friction.  In  its  present 
condition  the  cutting  edge  is  rough  and  broken.  The  facets  do 
not  show  that  marked  diminution  forwards,  usually  seen  in 
aboriginal  tomahawks,  but  on  one  side  are  as  large  at  the  anterior 
end  as  at  the  butt.  The  stone  of  which  this  implement  is 
composed  is  a  silicified  claystone  allied  to  lydianstone.  The 
measurements  are  : — Length,  4-Jin. ;  breadth,  2f  in. ;  thickness, 
lfin.;  weight,  lO^oz. 

Appertaining  to  this  group  are  two  small  tomahawks  presented 
to  the  Mining  and  Geological  Museum  by  the  Rev.  J.  Milne 
Curran,  from  the  Macquarie  River,  but  beyond  their  rather 
diminutive  size  they  are  not  remarkable.  Both  are  converted 
pebbles,  one  (a)  simply  by  friction,  the  other  (b)  by  chipping 
and  friction.  The  former  (a)  is  composed  of  a  greenish-black 
aphanitic  diorite,  and  is  slightly  triangular  in  shape,  increasing  in 
breadth  from  the  butt  forwards.  The  cutting  edge  and  bevel  are 
both  good,  the  former  being  straighter  and  less  curved  than  usual. 

In  the  second  of  these  diminutive  tools  (6)  the  stone  is  a 
greenish-black  diorite,  speckled  with  small  aggregates  of  triclinic 
felspar.  The  cutting  edge  is  less  true,  having  what  my  colleague, 
Mr.  W.  Anderson,  has  termed   "a  curvature  in  the  line  of  its 


BY    R.  ETHERIDGE,  JUN.  361 

greatest  width."*  The  bevel  is  the  only  portion  polished,  the 
remainder  showing  strong  traces  of  either  fracture  or  chipping. 
Measurements  : — (a)  Length,  3|in. ;  breadth,  2in.  ;  thickness, 
l£in.;  weight,  6oz.  (6)  Length,  3£in.;  breadth,  2£in.;  thickness, 
l|in.j  weight,  6oz. 

As  a  last  representative  of  this  group  may  be  mentioned  a 
tomahawk  of  a  dark  green  indurated  diabasic  tuff  in  the  Mining 
and  Geological  Museum,  from  Dilga  West,  of  an  elongately  oval 
shape.  It  has  been  a  pebble,  much  weather-worn  on  the  surface, 
and  was  evidently  selected  by  its  owner  on  account  of  the  appro- 
priate shape  of  the  pebble,  the  only  reduction  it  has  undergone 
being  a  little  chipping  at  the  butt,  which  is  square  ended.  The 
cutting  edge  is  limited,  and  the  bevel  angle  low.  The  measure- 
ments of  this  stone  are  : — Length,  4 Jin. ;  breadth,  2fin. ;  thick- 
ness, If  in. ;  weight,  21b.  loz. 

2.  Ovate  Type.  By  this  form  I  intend  to  convey  the  impression 
of  a  tomahawk,  less  elongated  transversely  than  in  Type  1,  and 
wider  in  proportion  in  a  contrary  direction,  but  still  too  long  to 
be  absolutely  oval.  Such  implements  are  also  usually  larger.  No 
better  example  of  this  form  can  be  taken  than  one  in  Sir  W. 
Macleay's  Collection,  formerly  exhibited  by  Mr.  J.  G.  Griffin, f 
and  said  to  have  been  dredged  from  the  Hawkesbury  River. 
It  is  a  pebble  of  diabasic  dolerite,  quite  untouched  with  the 
exception  of  the  ground  bevelled  edge,  the  remainder  of  the 
surface  being  smooth  and  unpolished.  The  bevelled  edge  does 
not  show  the  same  amount  of  finish  as  many  other  implements  of 
a  similar  nature,  as  the  scratches  arising  from  the  process  of 
grinding  still  remain,  and  have  not  been  removed  by  the  after 
process  of  polishing  which  many  aboriginal  tomahawks  certainly 
have  undergone.  The  scratches  in  question  show  that  the  friction 
employed  to  produce  the  bevelled  edge  was  not  confined  to  one 
direction,  for  some  of  the  stride  are  in  that  of  the  longer  axis, 
others  in  that  of  the  shorter,  and  a  third  set  have  an  oblique 


Records  Geol.  Survey  N.  S.  Wales,  1890,  ii.,  Pt.  2,  p.  74. 
t  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  18S4,  viii.,  p.  442. 


362     AUSTRALIAN    ABORIGINAL    STONE    WEAPONS    AND    IMPLEMENTS, 

direction.     The  measurements  of  this  implement  are  : — Length, 
5Jin.  ;  breadth,  3|in.  ;  thickness,  2in.  ;  weight,  lib.  loz. 

Of  a  similar  type,  but  both  partially  polished  and  chipped,  is 
another  tomahawk  from  the  same  collection,  of  a  reddish-hue, 
and  composed  of  a  felspathic  quartzite  (PI.  xxx.,  figs.  1  and  2). 
Like  the  preceding,  it  also  appears  to  have  been  a  pebble,  of 
which  the  end  selected  to  serve  as  the  butt  has  been  much  flaked 
off,  a  process  to  which  the  stone  seems  to  have  readily  yielded. 
The  anterior,  or  fore  end,  has  a  long  and  well  executed  bevel, 
the  curve  of  the  cutting  edge  being  one  of  the  most  perfect  I 
have  yet  seen  on  a  tomahawk  of  this  description.  If  an  imaginary 
line  be  drawn  across  the  centre  of  the  tomahawk,  in  the  direction 
of  its  longer  axis,  the  curve  of  the  cutting  edge  will  be  found  to 
be  almost  equilateral.  Although  the  bevelled  surface  bears  an 
excellent  polish,  the  friction  striae  still  remain,  and  are  chiefly 
transverse  in  their  direction.  The  flakes  at  the  butt  have  also 
been  chipped  in  a  similar  line,  and  to  such  an  extent  as  to  render 
the  anterior  end  the  thicker  by  far.  The  measurements  are  :  — 
Length,  4|-in.  ;  breadth,  3fin.  ;  thickness,  If  in.  j  weight,  14oz. 

A  somewhat  heavier,  larger,  and  longer  weapon,  but  of  this 
type,  is  before  me  from  the  Queensland  Museum.  It  is  composed 
of  a  hornblende  schist,  extensively  flaked  at  the  posterior  end,  and 
partially  polished  anteriorly.  The  locality  is  Fraser's  Island, 
( ?  Hervey  Bay).  It  would  appear  to  have  been  a  pebble,  reduced 
at  the  butt  by  percussion,  and  laterally  ground  to  some  extent. 
The  bevel  is  rather  a  high  one,  and  the  cutting  edge  again  shows 
an  irregularity  of  curvature,  tending  much  towards  one  side. 
This  is  not  a  shapely  or  well  finished  implement,  but  is  heavy  and 
formidable.  The  measurements  are  :—  Length,  5£in.  ;  breadth, 
3 Jin.  ;  thickness,  1  |in.  ;  weight,  1  fib. 

A  smaller  and  much  ruder  tomahawk  is  from  the  same  locality 
and  contained  in  the  same  collection.  It  is  composed  of  a  similar 
rock,  and  has  been  prepared  in  a  like  manner,  but  the  cutting 
edge  is  much  broken. 

Another  Queensland  example  of  this  series,  and  a  rather 
peculiar    one,    is    from     Bulloo,    Mogul    Creek,    Bulloo    River, 


BY    R.   ETHERIDGE,  JUN.  363 

Thargomindah,  presented  to  the  Mining  and  Geological  Museum 
by  Mr.  H.  A.  Maclean.  It  clearly  belongs  to  this  type,  but  has 
been  much  reduced  by  the  violent  usage  to  which  the  butt  has 
been  subjected,  breaking  off  large  conchoidal  and  irregular  pieces 
until  hardly  more  than  the  bevelled  sides  are  left.  The  latter, 
however,  are  very  fine,  long,  quite  smooth,  well  polished,  and 
unequally  convex.  The  cutting  edge  is  broad  and  symmetrical. 
Measurements  in  this  case  are  unnecessary.  The  rock  is  a  dark 
green  chloritic  quartzite  showing  faint  lines  of  lamination. 

3.  Deltoid,  or  subtriangular  Type.  This  is  perhaps  one  of  the 
less  common  forms  of  stone  tomahawk,  the  specimens  exhibited, 
three  in  number,  being  certainly  peculiar  in  shape.  The  first  is 
from  Normanton  (PL  xxx.,  figs.  3  and  4),  again  communicated, 
like  so  many  of  these  fine  implements,  by  Mr.  C.  W.  De  Vis,  from 
the  Queensland  Museum  Collection.  It  is  a  remarkably  short 
and  broad  tomahawk,  oval-deltoid  in  shape,  originally  a  flattened 
pebble  of  dark  green  diabase  or  hypersthene  gabbro.  The  butt 
has  been  chipped,  but  the  remainder  of  the  surface  is  quite  smooth 
and  glazed.  The  broader  end  has  been  ground  on  both  sides  to  a 
cutting  edge  possessing  a  wide  circular  sweep,  moderately  sym- 
metrical in  its  curvature.  The  measurements  are : — Length, 
3  Jin. ;  breadth,  3Jin.  ;   thickness,  If  in.  ;  weight,  11  oz. 

Supposing  this  weapon  to  be  hafted  it  would  not,  by  any  means, 
be  unlike  some  of  the  small  single-handed  battle  axes  used  by  the 
knights  of  old.  Of  a  similar  type  to  the  present  is,  I  believe,  the 
tomahawk  figured  by  Smyth  from  the  Munara  district,*  composed 
of  a  highly  polished  aphanite.  It  is  much  larger,  however,  than 
our  example,  and  weighed  two  pounds  four  and  a-half  ounces.  It 
is,  of  course,  possible  that  this  implement  may  appertain  to  the 
next  general  group,  which  I  have"  termed  "axes"  in  contradis- 
tinction to  "  tomahawks,"  but  its  resemblance  in  shape  to  the 
Normanton  tomahawk  has  induced  me  to  refer  to  it  here. 

The  second  of  these  deltoid  implements  is  from  the  Macquarie 
River,  by  the  Rev.  J.  Milne  Curran.     It  is  an  obtuse  sub-deltoid 

*  Aborigines  of  Victoria,  1878,  i.,  p.  368,  f.  181. 


364    AUSTRALIAN    ABORIGINAL    STONE    WEAPONS    AND    IMPLEMENTS, 

piece  of  rock  produced  by  chipping  and  friction,  with  the  butt  end 
squared-off,  or  hammer-head  shaped.  The  bevelled  faces  are  longer 
than  in  the  first  example  of  this  type,  and  the  cutting  edge  but 
little  curved.  It  is  composed  of  a  dark  green  diorite  with  triclinic 
felspar,  macroscopically  developed  in  an  aphanitic  base,  and  is 
heavy  for  its  small  size.  Its  measurements  are  :—  Length,  2  Jin.  ; 
breadth,  2§in.  ;  thickness,  1-Jin.  ;  weight,  8oz. 

The  third  tomahawk  of  this  series  is  equally  peculiar  with  either 
of  the  others,  if  not  more  so,  from  its  very  short  and  broad  pro- 
portions, the  high  angle  of  the  bevelled  faces,  and  particularly 
straight  cutting  edge.  It  seems  to  have  been  made  out  of  a  rough 
haphazard  piece  of  grey  diorite  (triclinic  felspar  and  hornblende) 
very  much  weathered,  certainly  not  from  a  pebble.  As  sometimes 
happens  in  these  implements,  one  face  is  longer  than  the  other, 
and  thus  destroying  the  bilateral  symmetry  of  the  tomahawk. 
The  cutting  edge  is  straight  and  long.  The  measurements  are : — 
Length,  2-|in.  ;  breadth,  2§in.  ;  thickness,  1  Jin. ;  weight,  lOoz. 

4.  Gad-shaped  Type.  This  is  a  very  interesting  and  well  marked 
section,  and  does  not  seem  to  have  been  much  noticed  by  authors. 
The  form  is  always  long,  the  transverse  always  greatly  exceeding 
the  longitudinal  diameter,  the  section  almost  always  more  or  less 
rounded,  sometimes  slightly  flattened  at  the  sides,  and  very  rarely 
quadrangular. 

Two  examples  of  this  form  are  lent  by  Sir  W.  Macleay,  but 
beyond  the  fact  that  they  are  New  South  Welsh,  no  further  history 
is  known.  Both  have  been  pebbles.  One,  of  greenish  syenitic 
granite,  is  square-headed  at  the  butt,  whilst  the  original  rotundity 
of  the  pebble  has  not  in  any  way  been  interfered  with.  The 
anterior  end  is  very  narrow,  remarkably  so  for  an  aboriginal 
tomahawk,  and  in  consequence  the  cutting  edge  is  much  reduced, 
and  the  curvature  very  slight.  The  other  example  is  composed  of 
a  fine-grained  dark  green  diorite,  and  has  had  the  natural  rotundity 
of  the  pebble  reduced  by  friction,  producing  flattened  sides,  and 
the  butt  is  obtusely  pointed.     The  cutting  edge  is  broader  than 


BY    R.  ETHERIDGE,  JUN.  365 

in  the  last  specimen,  though  by  no  means  greatly  curved,  whilst 
the  bevel  is  at  a  very  low  angle.  The  measurements  are  :  — 
Granite:  Length,  5in.;  breadth,  2in.;  thickness,  ljin.;  weight,  lib. 
Diorite  :  Length,  5Jin.  ;  breadth,  2  fin.  ;  thickness,  If  in.  ;  weight, 
1ft).  loz. 

A  very  typical  specimen  of  this  section  is  from  the  Collection  of 
the  Mining  and  Geological  Museum,  consisting  of  a  dark  green, 
fine-grained  diorite  (PL  xxxi.,  figs.  1  and  2).  It  was  originally 
a  transversely  elongated  weather-bitten  pebble,  which  has  been 
reduced  to  the  required  dimensions  both  by  partially  rubbing  at 
the  sides  and  chipping  at  the  butt,  which  is  square-headed,  like 
that  of  syenitic  granite,  already  described.  The  cutting  edge  is 
very  narrow,  and  obtusely  pointed,  the  bevelled  surface  being 
small  but  beautifully  smoothed  off  and  partially  polished.  Length, 
6in. ;  breadth,  2in.  ;  thickness,  lfin. ;  weight,  lib.  3oz. 

The  largest  example  of  this  type  is  one  kindly  presented  to  the 
Mining  and  Geological  Museum  by  Dr.  J.  0.  Cox,  an  elongated 
pebble  of  grey  argillite,  with  an  imperfect  cleavage,  which  has 
either  been  slightly  ground  all  over  and  smoothed,  or  become  so 
from  gentle  attrition  in  a  river  bed.  The  butt  is  the  narrower 
end,  and  has  been  fractured.  The  anterior  end  is  narrow,  and 
the  cutting  edge  limited  in  extent,  bluntly  ground,  with  many  of 
the  scratches,  especially  those  in  a  transverse  direction,  remaining. 
It  seems  probable  that  this  stone  wTas  selected  on  account  of  a 
certain  small  degree  of  curvature  in  the  direction  of  its  greatest 
length,  a  circumstance  also  noticeable  in  the  last  tomahawk 
described.  Length,  8Jin. ;  breadth,  lfin.  ;  thickness,  lfin.  ; 
weight,  1ft).  7oz. 

The  last  implement  of  this  section  is  equally  interesting  from 
the  fact  that  it  is  quadrangular  in  section,  the  fissile  nature  of  the 
rock,  a  hornblende  schist,  apparently  having  been  taken  advantage 
of  to  cleave,  rather  than  chip,  the  weapon  out  of  an  irregular 
fragment  of  rock.  The  cutting  edge  is  narrow,  but  well  rounded, 
the  well-polished  bevel  being  only  on  two  of  the  faces  of  the 
roughly-shaped  rhomb.  Length,  4fin.;  breadth,  lfin.;  thickness, 
lfin.  ;  weight,  8oz. 


366     AUSTRALIAN    ABORIGINAL    STONE    WEAPONS    AND    IMPLEMENTS, 

The  length  and  shape  of  the  two  largest  of  the  tomahawks 
described  under  this  section  impresses  me  with  the  idea  that  they 
may  have  been  held  in  the  hand  when  used,  without  any  form  of 
hafting,  probably  grasped  in  the  palm  rather  than  held  by  the 
fingers  as  represented  by  the  late  Rev.  P.  MacPherson.*  In  such 
a  case  it  would  be  necessary  to  transfer  them  to  the  third  section 
of  our  arrangement. 

5.  Chisel-shaped  Type.  A  form  of  tomahawk  rarely  met  with. 
I  have  lately  figured  one  from  Port  Stephens,!  and  have  two 
additional  now  before  me.  The  first  was  ploughed  up  from  recent 
alluvium  near  Hexham,  and  presented  to  the  Mining  and  Geo- 
logical Museum  by  Mr.  R.  W.  Thompson,  M.L.A.  (PI.  xxxn.,  figs. 
1  and  2).  It  is  composed  of  chert  of  a  dull  drab  colour,  derived, 
Prof.  T.  W.  E.  David  has  no  doubt,  from  a  chert  bed  in  the 
Upper  Coal  Measures  at  Nobbys,  Newcastle.  Tl.e  implement  is 
oblong,  perfectly  flat  on  both  sides,  slightly  increasing  in  width 
towards  the  anterior  end,  flat  along  the  top  and  bottom  edges, 
and  bevelled  on  one  lateral  face  only.  The  bevel  is  smooth  and 
a  little  full,  but  the  cutting  edge  is  remarkably  true  and  well 
rounded.  It  is  slightly  flaked  at  the  base.  The  measurements 
are  : — Length,  8in.;  breadth,  2|in.;  thickness,  lin.;  weight,  lib.  4oz. 

The  physical  character  of  the  matrix  has  in  this  instance 
accommodated  itself  to  the  preparation  of  this  implement  by 
breaking  up  into  more  or  less  transversely  tabular  pieces.  This 
the  aboriginal  owner  improved  on  by  grinding  the  two  faces  of 
one  of  the  ends. 

The  second  tomahawk  of  this  description  is  rather  less  in  size 
and  thickness  than  the  first.  It  is  probably  the  one  described  in 
the  record  of  the  exhibit  of  Mr.  Griffin's  tomahawks,  "  as  a  flat 
piece  of  slate."  The  composition,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  is  greenish- 
grey  altered  mudstone  or  sandy  slate.  The  sides  of  the  tomahawk 
are  smooth  and  flat,  but  not  polished,  square  edged,  and  as  might 
be  expected  from  the  comparative  tenuity,  the  amount  of  the 

*  Journ.  R.  Soc.  N.S.  Wales  for  1885  [1880],  xix.,  2nd  PL,  f.  7. 
t  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1890,  v.  (2),  Pt.  2,  p.  291,  t.  13,  f.  11. 


BY    R.  ETHERIDGE,  JUN.  367 

bevelled  surface  is  small,  and  the  cutting  edge  rather  obliquely 
curved.  Length,  6Jin.  ;  breadth.  2-Jin.  ;  thickness,  fin. ;  weight, 
6oz. 

In  the  note  of  explanation  referred  to,  the  suggestion  is  made 
that  these  flat  tomahawks  are  "  probably  used  to  cut  bark."  I 
would  enlarge  the  scope  of  this  happy  suggestion  by  enquiring,  is 
it  possible  that  they  were  also  used  for  incising  the  figures  and 
designs  employed  in  decorating  trees  around  graves,  or  perhaps 
even  Bora  grounds  % 

The  late  Rev.  P.  MacPherson  figured*  a  rather  similar  toma- 
hawk to  the  above  and  described  it  as  a  "chisel." 

Section  b. —  With  a  hafting  groove. 

1.  Ovate  Type.  A  very  fine  specimen  of  the  grooved  tomahawk, 
for  the  better  reception  of  the  withy,  or  handle,  in  hafting,  has 
been  communicated  by  Mr.  C.  W.  De  Yis,  from  the  Queensland 
Museum  collection.     (PI.  xxxi.,  figs  3  and  4). 

I  am  not  at  present  prepared  to  enumerate  the  number  of  types 
which  may  be  found  under  this  heading,  the  number  of  illustra- 
tions representing  them  being  remarkably  small,  and  their 
occurrence  in  collections  equally  so.  I  infer,  however,  that  they 
indicate  a  higher  type  of  implement  than  in  those  cases  where 
the  stone  head  is  only  hafted  with  gum. 

This  tomahawk  from  Northern  Queensland  is  a  long  oval  in 
shape,  composed  of  a  brown,  fine  quartzite,  heavy  and  bluntly 
rounded  at  the  butt,  the  bevelled  anterior  sides  without  signs  of 
friction,  but  the  surfaces  roughened  and  unpolished.  The  cutting 
edge  has  a  similar  irregularity  of  outline  to  so  many  others,  and 
is  not  sharp.  The  groove  for  the  reception  of  the  handle  is 
six-eighths  of  an  inch  wide,  two-eighths  of  an  inch  deep,  and  is 
almost  equi-clistant  from  both  ends.  .The  course  of  the  groove  is 
not  directly  across  the  pebble,  but  is  directed  forwards  on  the 
sides  of  the  tomahawk  towards  the  anterior  end.  This  was 
doubtless  intended  to  give  the  handle  a  better  grip  of  the  stone. 
The  measurements  are : — Length,  5-J-in.  ;  breadth,  3-Jin.  ;  thick- 
ness, 2in.  ;  weight,  lib.  12oz. 

*  Journ.  R.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales  for  1885  [1886],  xix.,  1st  PI.,  f.  3. 


368     AUSTRALIAN    ABORIGINAL    STONE    WEAPONS    AND    IMPLEMENTS, 

According  to  Smyth*  this  is  a  rare  form  of  tomahawk,  and  is 
known  as  Pur-ut-three  in  Victoria.  He  figured  one  from  a  kitchen- 
midden  at  Lake  Condah,  and  it  was  identified  by  an  aboriginal  as 
used  for  splitting  open  large  trees.  It  is  rather  larger  than  the 
Queensland  implement,  being  eight  inches  long  and  five  wide, 
with  a  weight  of  four  pounds  eight  and  a-half  ounces  ;  the  groove 
is  also  much  nearer  the  butt. 

Two  examples  of  the  grooved  tomahawk  are  given  by 
MacPhersonf  from  Telligerry  Creek,  Port  Stephens,  N.  S.  Wales, 
both  slightly  larger  and  heavier  than  the  Queensland  implement. 
The  figured  example  is  also  much  broader  across  the  cutting  edge. 
Mr.  MacPherson  appeared  to  be  in  doubt  whether  or  no  these 
stones  might  not  be  used  as  sinkers  as  well  as  tomahawks,  but  I 
think  little  doubt  need  be  entertained  that  the  latter  supposition 
is  their  true  use.  The  occurrence  of  grooved  tomahawks  at 
distances  so  far  apart  as  North  Queensland,  Port  Stephens,  and 
Lake  Condah,  Normanby,  Victoria,  establishes  the  wide  distribu- 
tion of  this  method  of  hafting. 

That  we  have  under  the  present  heading  more  than  one  form 
of  tomahawk  is,  I  think,  manifest  from  another  figure  given  by 
Smyth  J  of  an  implement  found  at  Winchelsea,  in  Victoria.  In 
shape  it  is  allied  to  the  small  deltoid  type  of  out  first  section,  the 
butt  truncate,  and  the  groove  situated  far  back:  It  was  polished 
all  over  and  had  a  keen  cutting  edge. 

This  method  of  hafting  is  not  confined  to  the  rarer  form  of 
Australian  tomahawk,  but  was  in  practice  amongst  the  men  of 
the  so-called  Neolithic  Period,  throughout  Central  and  South- 
western Europe,  and  was  used  in  connection  with  tools  regarded 
as  hammer-stones  or  mauls,§  and  found  usually  in  the  neighbour- 
hood, if  not  actually  in,  old  mines,  "  principally  copper  mines." 

*  Aborigines  of  Victoria,  1878,  I.,  p.  368,  f.  183. 

t  Joum.  R.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales  for  1885  [1886],  xix.,  p.  114,  1st  PI.,  f.  4. 

t  Aborigines  of  Victoria,  1878,  L,  p.  372,  f.  195. 

§  Evans,  Ancient  Stone  Implements,  &c,  Gt.  Brit.,  1872,  p.  208. 


BY    R.  ETHERIDGE,  JUN.  369 

ii.— Hafted  Axes. 

Under  this  name  I  propose  to  separate  one  of  the  largest  forms 
of  stone  "  tomahawk  "  used  by  the  Australian  aborigines.  That 
such  very  large  and  heavy  implements  as  described  by  the  Rev. 
P.  MacPherson  from  the  Paterson  River,*  measuring  8 J  x  5 J  x  1^ 
inches,  and  weighing  4ft).  7oz. ;  from  Lake  Tyers  by  Smyth,-)" 
measuring  6  J  x  3£  x  1  J,  and  weighing  IS).  12^oz.  ;  and  by  myself 
from  Ki  in  be  Hey,!  were  put  to  the  same  purposes  as  the  generally 
smaller  tools  usually  known  under  the  name  of  tomahawks,  is,  I 
think,  very  improbable,  if  not  negatified  by  their  own  weight  and 
appearance.  Mr.  Smyth  also  quotes§  a  similar  large  axe  from  the 
Paroo  River,  South-west  Queensland.  "  It  is  an  oval-shaped 
weapon,  highly  finished,  and,  for  a  great  extent  around  the 
cutting  edge,  well  polished,"  measuring  Sin.  x  6in.  x  2in.,  and 
about  four  pounds  in  weight. 

He  again  remarks  :  "  The  natives  of  some  parts  of  Victoria 
had  large  stone  axes  made  of  basaltic  rock,  which  were  used  for 
splitting  trees."  One  was  8x5x2,  and  four  pounds  eight  ounces 
in  weight.  Another  found  at  Ballarat  was  8x4,  and  about  five 
pounds  avoirdupois.  These  were  grooved,  and  "implements  of 
this  size  are  very  rare."|| 

The  forms  of  these  axes,  in  themselves  typical,  at  once  dis- 
tinguish them  from  the  ordinary  tomahawk. 

A  very  fine  example  has  been  presented  to  the  Mining  and 
Geological  Museum  by  Mr.  H.  A.  Maclean,  from  Mogul  Creek, 
Bulloo  River,  Thargomindah.  It  is  a  very  large  and  heavy  oval 
pebble  of  dark  green  diorite,  the  shape  of  which  has  been  cleverly 
taken  advantage  of  to  produce  a  large,  beautifully  curved,  and 
very  perfect  cutting  edge.  The  widest  portion  of  the  axe  is 
immediately  at  the  hind  termination  of  the  latter.  At  the  butt 
slightly  and  along  one  of  the  edges,  the  bulk  has  been  reduced 

*  Journ.  R.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales  for  1S85  [1886],  xix.,  p.  115,  1st  PI.,  f.  5. 

t  Aborigines  of  Victoria,  1878,  I.,  p.  366,  f.  178. 

%  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1890,  v.  (2),  t.  14. 

§  Loc.  cit>,  p.  376. 

||  Loc.  cit.,  p.  361. 


370     AUSTRALIAN    ABORIGINAL    STONE    WEAPONS    AND    IMPLEMENTS, 

somewhat  by  chipping,  and  then  quite  two-thirds  of  the  surface 
smoothed  by  polishing,  many  of  the  transverse  strise  being  still 
visible  in  places.  The  measurements  of  this  fine  implement  are: — 
Length,  7 -Jin. ;   breadth,  6in.  ;  thickness,  2Jin. ;  weight,  51b.  loz. 

The  existence  of  these  large  implements  along  the  Bulloo  River 
is  mentioned  by  Curr,  who,  speaking  of  the  Wonkomarra  Tribe, 
inhabiting  the  river  within  a  radius  of  twenty  miles  of  Thargo- 
mindah,  says*:  "Their  tomahawks,  before  they  obtained  iron  ones 
from  the  Whites,  were  of  green  stone,  as  large  as  an  American 
axe,  the  sides  rather  roughly  chipped,  and  the  edges  ground  and 
smoothed." 

As  another  example  of  this  type  may  be  taken  the  axe  brought 
from  Kimberley  by  Mr.  W.  W.  Froggatt,  and  described  in  a  late 
paper  by  myself,  f  As  compared  with  the  present  one  it  is  smaller 
and  lighter. 

A  second  axe,  sent  to  me  by  Mr.  De  Vis,  is  slightly  larger,  and 
is  more  securely  mounted  (PI.  xxxiii.).  It  is  one  of  the  finest 
examples  I  have  seen,  and  is  from  Thornborough,  N.  Queensland. 
Like  so  many  others,  it  is  simply  a  large  pebble,  oval  and  flat,  and 
more  or  less  in  the  rough,  the  only  manipulation  it  has  undergone 
being  the  grinding  of  the  cutting  edge,  which  has  produced  a  much 
less  perfect  curve  than  the  axe  just  described  from  Mogul  Creek. 
The  pebble  is  a  dolerite.  The  measurements  are  as  follows: — Length, 
8f  in. ;  breadth,  5in.  ;  thickness,  If  in.  ;  weight,  41b.  The  handle 
is  a  heavy  split  cane,  bent,  and  passed  round  the  stone,  and  held 
in  place,  like  another  axe  from  the  Herbert  Gorge,  by  whipping 
the  handle,  immediately  below  the  head,  with  cane  riband,  but 
no  gum  is  used.  The  whip  is  made  doubly  secure  by  passing  the 
free  ends  over  and  under,  thus  as  it  were  forming  a  collar.  The 
length  of  the  handle  doubled  is  about  two  feet  ten  inches.  The 
general  aspect  of  this  axe  strongly  recalls  to  mind  the  similar 
weapons  from  Lake  Tyers  in  Gippsland  figured  by  Smyth,  J  more 
particularly  as  regards  the  method  of  tying,  the  absence  of  gum 
mounting,  and  the  shape  of  the  stone  heads. 

*  The  Australian  Race,  1886,  ii.,  p.  37. 

f  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1890,  v.  (2),  p.  370,  t.  14. 

t  Aborigines  of  Victoria.  1878,  I.,  p.  366,  f.  177,  178. 


BY    R.  ETHERIDGE,  JUN.  371 

The  late  Rev.  P.  MacPherson  has  described  large  axes  from 
N.  S.  Wales,  on  which  "  numerous  dints,  abrasions,  and  scratches 
are  strongly  suggestive  of  the  device  of  driving  stone  pegs  between 
the  handle  and  the  hatchet  for  the  purpose  of  tightening  the 
handle."*  Neither  of  the  foregoing  axes  shows  such  traces,  nor 
has  any  example  with  similar  markings  yet  come  under  my  notice. 
It  is  a  very  peculiar  and  at  the  same  time  suggestive  fact  that  by 
the  means  of  a  bent  wooden  handle,  the  whole  of  the  Australian 
tribes,  except  some  of  the  West  Australians,  who  have  used 
tomahawks  or  axes,  have  so  fastened  them.  They  do  not 
appear  ever  to  have  hit  upon  the  plan  of  boring  the  stone 
heads  for  the  insertion  of  a  single  handle,  similar  to  some  of 
the  perforated  Neolithic  hammers  of  the  Old  World,  f  Indeed,  a 
very  interesting  circumstance  is  related  by  Col.  A.  Lane-Fox,  | 
bearing  on  this  peculiarity.  He  states  §  that  a  European  axe-head 
was  found  at  an  old  native  camping  place,  the  hole  of  which  the 
natives,  unable  to  comprehend  its  object,  had  carefully  filled  with 
their  cementing  medium,  and  hafted  by  means  of  a  withy,  bent 
round  the  outside  of  the  axe-head,  in  accordance  with  their 
traditional  custom. || 

So  far  as  I  can  gather,  the  distribution  of  these  large  axes 
appears  to  be  limited.  We  have  evidence  that  they  were  used  in 
Queensland  from  north  to  south;  the  Rev.  P.  MacPherson  knew  of 
their  existence  in  N.  S.  Wales.  On  the  other  hand,  Smyth  states  :U 
"  I  have  never  seen  any  of  these  large  implements  in  the  hands  of 
the  natives  of  Victoria."  At  the  same  time,  they  were  evidently 
in  use  in  the  latter  colony  in  former  days,  for  the  same  author 
remarks  :**  "  There  are  found  also  in  the  mirrn-yong  heaps  and  in 
the  soil  very  large  tomahawks  of  different  forms,  which,  it  is  said 

*  Journ.  R.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales  for  1885  [1886],  xix.,  p.  114. 

t  See  Evans'  Ancient  Stone  Implements.  &c,  Gt.  Brit.,  1872,  p.  196  et  seq. 

X  Now  General  Pitt-Rivers. 

§  Report  Brit.  Assoc.  Adv.  Sci.  for  1862  [1863],  p.  160. 

||  Aborigines  of  Victoria,  1878,  1.,  p.  374. 

IT  Ibid.,  p.  lv. 

**  Ibid.,  p.  liv. 

25 


372     AUSTRALIAN    ABORIGINAL    STONE    WEAPONS    AND    IMPLEMENTS, 

by  the  natives,  were  employed  in  splitting  trees."  One  of  these, 
found  at  Daylesford,  was  nearly  fourteen  inches  in  length  and  five 
inches  in  breadth. 

Such  large  and  heavy  implements  are  not  tomahawks  in  the 
strict  sense  of  the  word,  applying  the  latter  term  to  forms  similar 
to  those  described  under  Section  A.  Indeed  the  appearance  of 
the  fine  tool  from  Thornborough,  with  its  strong  and  firmly  fixed 
handle,  stamps  it  at  once  as  an  implement  more  in  accordance 
with  our  idea  of  an  axe,  and  could  not  have  been  put  to  such  a 
use  as  the  implement  from  the  Herbert  Gorge,  to  be  described 
shortly. 

in. — Hand-Axes  and  Wedges. 

By  this  term  I  wish  to  designate  those  axes  which  bear  evidence 
of  having  been  simply  held  in  the  hand,  and  so  used,  or  used  as  a 
wedge,  rather  than  mounted  in  a  withy.  The  Rev.  P.  MacPherson 
has  drawn  attention  to  this  form  of  axe  in  the  following  words :  * 
"Three  of  the  third  class  of  large  hatchets  are  distinguished  by 
another  peculiarity :  they  have  a  piece  knocked  out  of  one  corner 
so  as  to  fit  to  the  broad  part  of  the  thumb  where  it  spreads  out  into 
the  hand.  They  could  thus  be  used  without  a  handle,  or  when  it 
came  off."  Speaking  of  the  Cooper's  Creek  tribes,  Mr.  A.  W. 
Howitt  says  :  "  They  grasp  the  tomahawk  with  the  fingers  and 
thumb,  holding  the  blunt  end  in  the  hollow  of  the  hand."f 

A  tool  unmistakably  meant  to  be  held  in  the  hand,  although  no 
finger-holds  are  seen,  has  been  forwarded  by  Mr.  C.  W.  De  Vis, 
found  at  Toowong,  near  Brisbane.  It  seems  to  have  been  a  rough 
weather-worn  piece  of  rock,  with  traces  of  flakes  struck  off  round 
the  edges,  but,  generally  speaking,  advantage  appears  to  have  been 
taken  of  its  flattened,  large,  oval  form.  A  naturally  weathered 
bevelled  margin  exists  on  one  face,  but  the  other  is  ground  and 
polished.  The  peculiarity  of  this  tomahawk,  however,  lies  in  the 
cutting  away  of  the  sides  at  the  butt,  until  a  handle  has  been 
formed  capable  of  being  grasped  by  the  hand.     This  is,  I  think, 

•  Journ.  R.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales  for  1885  [1886],  xix.,  p.  115. 
+  Smyth's  Aborigines  of  Victoria,  1878,  I.,  p.  388  (note). 


BY    R.   ETHERIDGE,  JUN.  373 

self-evident  from  the  shape  of  the  implement,  for  in  this  state  it 
coulcl  hardly  have  been  securely  fastened  between  the  halves  of  a 
bent  handle  ;  but  in  whatever  way  it  was  held,  the  implement  was 
awkward  and  unwieldy.  The  cutting  edge  is  unsym metrical,  and 
the  bevel   on  each   face  unequal.     The  stone  is  a  basalt,  much 


in. 


weathered.       Measurements : — Length,     9fin.  ;    breadth,    6 
thickness,  1  Jin. ;  weight,  5JJb. 

The  Queensland  Museum  possesses  two  remarkably  good  oval 
axes.     One  of  these  (PL  xxxiv.),  a  large  flat  tool  composed  of  a  fine 
micaceous  mudstone,  from  the  Herbert  Gorge,  and  a  travelled  stone 
or  pebble,  has  had  its  original  form  utilised  by  the  cunning  abori- 
gine, who  has  reduced  its  pristine  bulk  by  rubbing,  the  irregularly 
concentric  stria?  on  the  surface,  arising  from  the  grinding  process, 
being  still   visible.     The  broader  end  has  been  bevelled  off  to 
produce  a  cutting  edge  with  a  similarly  wide  sweep  and  truthful- 
ness of  outline  to  the  specimen  last  described.     The  butt  is  rather 
attenuated,  the  size  here  having  been  again  reduced  by  friction 
above  and  below.     The  extremity  of  the  butt  is  grasped  by  the 
flimsiest  of  withies — a  supple  stick  of  Eremophila,  so  Mr.  Turner 
thinks,  passed  round  it  and  retained  in  position  by  a  "  stop  "  of 
black  gum,  with  which  the  butt  is  enveloped,  but  without  in  any 
way  impinging  on  the  withy,  which  remains  free  and  loose.     The 
withy  is  simply  bent  round  the  stone  head  without  being  fastened 
in  any  other  way,  whether  by  pegs  between  the  stone  and  handle, 
as  described  by  the  Rev.  P.  MacPherson,*4  or  otherwise.     In  this 
condition  it  is  held  precisely  as  a  blacksmith  holds  his  cold  chisel 
when  about  to  be  struck  by  the  hammer.     The  two  portions  of 
the  handle  are  held  together,  immediately  under  the  head,  by  a 
piece  of  thin  split  cane.     The  withy  is  in  one  piece,  about  twenty- 
two  inches  long  when  doubled,  and  where  bent  the  bark  has  been 
removed  and  the  fibre  separated  to  render  the  bend  supple.     The 
bevel  is  rather  flat.     The  general  measurements  are  : — Length, 
81in.  ;  breadth,  5±in. ;  thickness,  1-J-in. ;  weight,  31b.  2oz. 

One  of  the  most  remarkable  implements  I  have  yet  met  with  is 
an  axe,  triangular  in  shape,  and  to  some  extent  resembling  the 

*  Journ.  R.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales  for  1885  [1886],  xix.,  p.  114. 


374    AUSTRALIAN   ABORIGINAL   STONE   WEAPONS   AND    IMPLEMENTS, 

old-fashioned  wood-cutter's  axe.  It  is  from  Fraser's  Island,  and 
is  again  from  the  Queensland  Museum.  The  cutting  edge  is  the 
longest  side,  the  butt  being  obtusely  pointed,  the  rapidly  increasing 
width,  with  the  slightly  concave  edges,  giving  to  it  the  old  axe- 
like form  referred  to,  and  which  effect  may  possibly  have  been 
heightened  by  friction.  The  sides  are  flat,  and  the  edge  is  bevelled 
on  one  only.  It  is  composed  of  a  hard  drab  sand-rock,  and  the 
cutting  edge,  as  might  have  been  expected,  is  somewhat  blunt. 
The  concavity  of  the  upper  and  lower  edges  gives  to  the  cutting 
edge  at  its  ends  an  upwardly  swelling  appearance.  There  are  no 
signs  of  a  hafting  groove,  flaking  of  the  surface,  or  abrasions 
caused  by  pegs  driven  to  tighten  a  handle.  The  measurements  of 
this  implement  are  : — Length,  8Jin.  ;  breadth,  6|in. ;  thickness, 
If  in. ;  weight,  2ftt>. 

Triangular  tools  of  this  description  seem  to  be  rare,  but  Smyth 
records  one  from  Coranderrk,  Victoria,  but  it  is  not  clear  whether 
it  was  an  axe  or  a  tomahawk. 

The  question  naturally  arises,  are  the  implements  from  Toowong, 
the  Herbert  Gorge,  and  Fraser's  Island,  axes  or  wedges?  I  see 
nothing  to  prevent  them  from  being  wedges,  but,  on  the  contrary, 
a  good  deal  in  favour  of  such  a  use.  In  describing  the  Paterson 
axe,  Mr.  MacPherson  said* — "its  size  is  suggestive  of  its  having 
been  used  as  a  wedge  for  splitting,"  and,  "  there  is  an  appearance 
about  the  edge  of  this  instrument  which  gives  the  idea  of  its 
having  been  forced  through  hard  wood."  The  shape  of  the 
implements  from  Toowong  and  Fraser's  Island  renders  it  difficult 
to  imagine  a  handle  attached,  whilst  their  size  is  against  a  simple 
grasping  by  the  hand.  On  the  other  hand,  the  slight  withy  placed 
round  the  Herbert  Gorge  instrument,  provided  it  is  genuine,  is 
enough  to  denote  its  use,  that  of  being  held  in  one  hand  and  struck 
by  some  other  body,  probably  a  piece  of  wood.  The  presence  of 
the  withy  indicates  that  it  was  not  a  manual  weapon  in  the  strict 
sense  of  the  word,  whilst  the  lightness  of  the  withy  equally  forbids 
the  use  of  the  instrument  as  an  axe. 

*  Journ.  R.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales  for  1885  [1886],  xixM  p.  115. 


BY    R.  ETHERIDGE,  JUN.  375 

Before  concluding  this  part  of  the  subject,  I  wish  to  draw 
attention  to  a  portion  of  a  tomahawk,  which  is  with  difficulty 
referred  to  its  proper  place  in  the  series.  It  forms  one  of  Sir 
Wm.  Macleay's  Collection,  and  is  from  N.  S.  Wales.  Originally 
a  flattened  pebble,  it  has  been  further  reduced  by  rubbing,  and  is 
unflaked.  The  interest,  however,  centres  itself  in  the  sharp  point 
the  anterior  end  has  been  brought  to,  an  unusually  pointed  end 
and  acute  cutting  edge  for  an  Australian  tomahawk.  The  finish 
of  the  tool  is  excellent,  although  the  scratches  still  remain  caused 
by  the  lateral  reduction  it  has  undergone.  These  are  all  in  one 
direction.  It  is  composed  of  a  dark  green  chloritic  greywacke, 
showing  faint  schistose  structure.  The  rock  has  probably  been 
derived  from  the  alteration  of  a  mudstone. 

It  may  not  be  out  of  place  to  point  out  in  conclusion  a  few 
facts  deducible  from  the  study  of  Australian  stone  tomahawks 
in  relation  to  what  may  be  termed  their  physical  structure, 
derived  from  the  observations  of  Smyth, *  Cox,f  MacPherson,| 
Knight,§  Anderson,||  other  minor  observers,  and  my  own  investi- 
gations. 

Except  on  the  broad  lines  laid  down  in  the  present  communica- 
tion there  is  no  uniformity  in  size  or  shape,  but  whether  toma- 
hawks or  axes,  they  are  usually  longer  than  broad,  the  exception 
being  our  third  type  of  Section  a,  Group  i. 

There  appear  to  have  been  three  well  marked  methods  of 
preparation  : — (1)  Shaped  by  directed  blows  only;  (2)  The  same 
accompanied  by  the  polishing  of  the  cutting  edge ;  (3)  Selected 
pebbles,  polished  at  the  cutting  edge,  but  not  shaped  or  flaked. 

As  a  rule,  stones  flattened  laterally  were  selected,  and  following 
this  conception,  the  choice  seems  to  have  been  given  to  water-worn 
pebbles. 

*  Aborigines  of  Victoria,  187S,  I.,  pp.  liv.  and  365. 

+  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1875,  I.,  p.  21. 

t  Journ.  R.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales  for  1885  [1886J,  xix.,  p.  113. 

§  Report  Smithsonian  Institution  for  1879  [1880],  p  213. 

||  Records  Geol.  Survey  N.  S.  Wales,  1890,  ii.,  Pt.  2,  pp.  73-81. 


376     AUSTRALIAN    ABORIGINAL    STONE    WEAPONS    AND    IMPLEMENTS, 

The  smoothed  and  polished  portions  of  these  implements  vary 
greatly  in  extent  and  finish,  and  seem  to  have  been  studied  only 
so  far  as  to  produce  an  efficient  cutting  edge.  Grinding  may 
have  taken  place  alone,  or  grinding  and  polishing  may  occur 
conjointly  in  the  same  implement.  Such  a  thing  as  a  wholly 
polished  tomahawk,  without  the  assistance  of  a  natural  agent,  has 
never  come  under  my  notice. 

The  cutting  edge  is,  with  remarkably  few  exceptions,  always 
curved,  and  the  curvature  very  rarely  amounts  to  a  semicircle. 
Mr.  William  Anderson,  however,  cites  two  exceptions  to  this  rule, 
one  a  pebble  from  the  conglomerate  of  the  Gunclabooka  Mountain, 
to  the  west  of  Bourke,  in  which  the  cutting  edge  is  "nearly 
straight."  A  straight  cutting  edge  is  also  exemplified  in  the 
third  tomahawk  of  the  deltoid  or  subtriangular  type  under 
Section  a.  The  cutting  edge  is  at  times  ground  very  sharp;  "so 
sharp,"  says  Rear- Admiral  P.  P.  King,  "  that  a  few  blows  serve  to 
chop  off  the  branch  of  a  tree.** 

The  butt  is  never  worked,  only  chipped ;  but  the  production  of 
tomahawks  by  chipping  alone  is  very  rare  throughout  Central  and 
Eastern  Australia,  although  common  in  Western  Australia.  Mr. 
Anderson  mentions  two  examples  from  N.  S.  Wales. f  Chipped 
weapons  are  flaked  from  the  edges  inwards,  the  size  of  the  flakings 
decreasing  in  size  forwards.  The  sides  are  sometimes  grooved  to 
assist  in  firmly  attaching  the  handle. 

Single  stones  appear  to  have  been  universally  used  over  the 
entire  Continent,  with  the  exception  of  Western  Australia,  where 
two  are  employed,  attached  to  the  same  handle,  placed  butt  to 
butt,  and  united  in  the  hafting. 

Tomahawk  or  axe-heads  perforated  for  the  reception  of  a  handle 
are  unknown,  with  the  exception  of  an  instance  recorded  by  Dr. 
J.  C.  Cox,t  which  appears  to  point  in  that  direction.  He  says — 
"  But  specimens  I  have  only  recently  received  from  the  Macdonald 

*  Intertrop.  Coasts  of  Australia,  ii.,  p.  69. 

+  Records  Geol.  Survey,  loc.  cit.,  p.  77- 

%  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1875,  I.,  p.  23. 


BY    R.  ETHERIDGE,  JUN.  377 

River,  a  tributary  of  the  Hawkesbury,  lead  me  to  assume  that  in 
some  instances  the  handles  were  fixed  in  the  centre  of  the  stone, 
so  that  both  edges  were  used." 

The  bevel  varies  considerably,  and  depends  for  its  extent  on 
the  original  thickness  of  the  stone  employed.  It  is  always  convex 
or  arched,  but  seldom  ever  bilaterally  symmetrical. 

It  is  possible  for  general  classificatory  purposes  to  separate  our 
stone  implements  of  this  description  into  three  broad  sections  : — 
A.  Tomahawks ;  b.  Axes ;  c.   Hand- Axes  and  Wedges. 

The  use  of  such  stone  implements  is  not  universal  throughout 
Australia,  for  Curr  informs*  us  that  certain  tribes  in  his  Western 
Division,  and  the  western  part  of  his  Central  Division,  or  the 
Minung  Tribes  do  not  use  tomahawks  at  all. 

As  regards  the  halting  of  tomahawks,  six  methods  were 
known  : — (1)  The  handle  formed  of  a  single  piece,  and  attached 
by  a  heavy  swathing  of  gum  ;  (2)  As  a  withy  passed  over  the 
stone  head  and  secured  (a)  with  gum  alone,  or  (b)  gum  and 
lashing;  (3)  As  a  withy  reposing  in  the  grooved  sides  of  the 
head ;  (4)  Similar  to  last,  but  handle  twisted  on  itself  ;f  (5) 
Head  lashed  to  the  handle  after  the  fashion  of  the  New  Zealander 
or  Dyak  ;\  (6)  Head  fixed  with  lashing  and  gum  in  a  cleft  stick. § 

The  composition  of  the  cementing  medium  varies  considerably 
in  different  tribes. 

xvit. — Modernised  Aboriginal  Tomahawks. 

In  a  recent  Paper,  after  describing  some  flint  knives,  I  showed 
the  adoption  and  continuity  of  the  aboriginal  idea  when  brought 
in  contact  with  articles  of  European  manufacture.  The  rapidity 
with  which  the  black  abandons  his  stone  tomahawk  in  favour  of 
the  white  man's  iron  instrument  is  well  known,  but  amongst  the 

*  Australian  Race,  1886,  I.,  pp.  287  and  367. 
t  In  South  Australia,  see  Knight,  Report  Smithsonian  Inst,  for  1879  [1880], 

p.  237,  f.  38b. 

Said  to  be  Australian  by  J.  G.  Wood,  Nat.  Hist.  Man.  1870,  p.  32,  f .  2. 

§  Evans,  Stone  Implements  Gt.  Brit.,  1872,  p.  151. 


378     AUSTRALIAN    ABORIGINAL    STONE    WEAPONS    AND    IMPLEMENTS, 

half-civilized  this  seems  to  have  been  preceded  by  the  adoption  of 
both  aboriginal  and  civilized  materials.  Thanks  again  to  Mr. 
De  Vis,  I  am  able  to  show  this  by  the  four  following  implements, 
all  made  of  scrap-iron,  picked  up,  or,  more  probably  stolen,  and 
converted  into  tomahawks  in  the  usual  way  by  passing  a  withy 
round  and  securing  the  head  with  gum. 

The  first  implement  is  formed  of  a  large  piece  of  flat  iron,  nine 
and  a-half  inches  long  and  three  and  a-half  wide  ;  but  it  is  very 
difficult  to  say  what  it  has  formed  a  part  of,  unless  it  be  part  of  a 
wheel  tire  (PI.  xxxiv.).  It  has  been  severed  at  the  butt  from  the 
remainder  simply  by  means  of  cutting.  The  two  faces  of  the 
anterior  end  have  been  ground  in  the  usual  way,  producing  the 
bevelled  surfaces  and  cutting  edge.  The  handle  is  one  foot  in 
length,  and  it  weighs  three  pounds  eleven  ounces.  This  probably 
represents  an  axe. 

The  second  implement  has  been  made  in  a  precisely  similar 
manner,  but  the  top  edge  of  the  iron  is  concave,  and  the  bottom 
horizontal.  Had  the  lower  edge  been  convex,  I  should  have 
suggested  that  this  had  once  formed  a  portion  of  a  small  wheel 
tire.  The  head  is  held  in  place  by  gum,  and  a  string  collar  is 
passed  round  under  it.  I  think  we  may  justly  regard  this  as  a 
tomahawk  ;  it  measures  four  and  a-half  inches  long  and  two  and 
a-half  wide.     The  handle  is  ten  inches. 

The  third  presents  no  difficulties  whatever  in  regard  to  the  object 
selected  to  form  the  head.  It  is  a  piece  of  a  horse-shoe  (PL  xxxvi.), 
six  inches  in  length,  and  differs  from  the  former  specimens  in 
that  it  is  single-headed.  The  iron  is  securely  fastened  by  an  over 
and  over  lashing  of  a  rush-like  plant,  and  the  whole  enveloped  in 
gum.  The  handle  is  fifteen  and  a-half  inches  long,  and  together 
with  the  head  producing  a  very  handy  and  efficient  weapon  as 
well  as  implement.  It  is  from  the  Walsh  River,  and  forcibly 
recalls  to  mind  the  peculiar  quartzite-headed  axe  I  figured*  some 
time  ago  from  Northern  Queensland. 

The  fourth,  and  last,  is  equally  cunningly  adapted,  and  is  formed 
either  of  a  cold-chisel  or  a  ship's  bolt.     The  head  of  the  chisel 

*  Froc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1890,  v.  (2),  t.  12,  f.  14. 


BY   R.  ETHERIDGE,  JUN.  379 

forms  the  butt,  and  the  chisel  edge  the  cutting  portion.  The 
former  is  exposed  from  the  gum  mounting,  and  probably  served 
the  purpose  of  a  hammer.  The  lashing  in  this  instance  seems  to 
be  string,  and  is  thickly  coated  with  gum.  The  chisel  is  five  and 
a-half  inches  long,  and  the  handle  one  foot  three  inches. 

The  horse-shoe  iron  and  the  chisel  are  not  confined  by  a  collar 
holding  the  two  halves  of  the  handle  together,  but  are  held  in 
position  as  described  by  string  and  gum.  Neither  of  the  handles 
is  tied  at  the  base,  similar  to  the  method  of  doubly  securing  some 
of  those  of  stone  tomahawks.* 


EXPLANATION   OF  PLATES. 
Plate  xxix. 

Fig.  1.— Tomahawk  (oblong-ovate  type),  highly  finished,  of  greenish-black 
diorite.     Braidwood ;  Mr.  J.  W.  Penney.     J  nat. 

Fig.  2. — Side  view  of  the  same. 

Fig.  3.— Tomahawk  (oblong-ovate  type),  flaked,  of  silicified  claystone. 
New  England  ;  Mining  and  Geological  Museum  (Mr.  Blomfield). 

Fig.  4. — Side  view  of  the  same. 

Plate  xxx. 

Fig.  1.— Tomahawk   (ovate    type),    of    a  felspathic  quartzite.      Macleay 

Collection. 
Fig.  2. — Side  view  of  the  same. 
Fig.  3.— Tomahawk  (deltoid  type),  of  dark  green  diabase  (?)     Normanton, 

Queensland  ;  Queensland  Museum  (Mr.  C.  W.  De  Vis). 
Fig.  4. — Side  view  of  same. 

Plate  xxxi. 

Fig.  1. — Tomahawk   (gad-shaped  type),  of  a  dark  green  diorite.     N.  S. 

Wales  ;  Mining  and  Geological" Museum. 
Fig.  2. — Side  view  of  the  same. 

Fig.  3. — Tomahawk  with  a  hafting  groove  (ovate  type).     North  Queens- 
land ;  Queensland  Museum  (Mr.  C.  W.  De  Vis). 
Fig.  4. — Side  view  of  the  same. 

*  See  Smyth,  Aborigines  of  Victoria,  1878,  I.,  p.  367,  f.  179,  p.  368,  f.  181. 


380    AUSTRALIAN   ABORIGINAL   STONE   WEAPONS   AND    IMPLEMENTS. 

Plate  xxxii. 

Fig.  1. — Tomahawk  (chisel-shaped  type),  drab-coloured  chert.  Hexham, 
N.  S.  Wales;  Mining  and  Geological  Museum  (Mr.  R.  W. 
Thompson). 

Fig.  2.— Side  view  of  the  same. 

Plate  xxxiii. 

Axe,  hafted ;  a  large  pebble  of  dolerite.  Thornborough,  Queensland ; 
Queensland  Museum  (Mr.  C.  W.  De  Vis). 

Plate  xxxiv. 

Wedge,  with  a  slight  withy  handle.  Herbert  Gorge,  Queensland ;  Queens- 
land Museum  (Mr.  C.  W.  De  Vis). 

Plate  xxxv. 

Axe,  modernised  ;  made  of  portion  of  a  wheel  tire.  North  Queensland  ; 
Queensland  Museum  (Mr.  C.  W.  De  Vis). 

Plate  xxxvi. 

Tomahawk,  modernised ;  formed  of  portion  of  a  horse-shoe.  Walsh  River ; 
Queensland  Museum  (Mr.  C.  W.  De  Vis). 


381 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 


Rev.  Dr.  Woolls  sent  for  exhibition  specimens  of  lerp  or  manna 
— some  still  in  situ  on  the  branchlets — from  Eucalyptus  pulveru- 
lenta,  Sims,  found  at  Buckley's  Crossing  ;  manna  is  frequently- 
met  with  on  E.  viminalis,  Labill.,  (formerly  called  E.  mannifera), 
and  a  few  other  species,  and  occasionally  on  E.  punctata,  DC, 
but  this  is  the  first  instance  of  its  occurrence  on  E.  pulverulenta 
known  to  Dr.  Woolls. 

Also,  portion  of  an  unusually  fine  specimen  of  a  lichen,  Usnea 
articulata,  Ach.,  several  feet  long,  recently  brought  from  New 
England  by  Mr.  C.  S.  Wilkinson,  F.G.S.  ;  and  a  specimen  of 
another  remarkable  lichen,  Cladonia  retipora,  Flcerke,  a  species 
common  to  Australia,  Tasmania,  and  New  Zealand. 

Rev.  J.  Milne  Curran  exhibited  a  stalactite  of  metallic  copper, 
showing  obscure  crystalline  facets.  The  mass,  which  weighs  7^1bs., 
was  found  at  Cobar  in  a  cavity  in  carbonate  of  lime,  hanging  by 
a  single  thread  of  metallic  copper.  The  copper  was  evidently 
deposited  from  solution  by  some  inexplicable  reactions. 

Mr.  Etheridge  exhibited  a  very  fine  series  of  Aboriginal  Toma- 
hawks and  Axes  in  illustration  of  his  Paper. 

Mr.  Maiden  sent  for  exhibition  a  quantity  of  seeds  of  the  sugar- 
cane from  Barbadoes,  with  the  intimation  that  he  would  be  glad 
to  furnish  growers  in  the  Northern  River  Districts  with  samples 
for  experimental  cultivation. 

Mr.  Eroggatt  exhibited  some  living  beetles  (Axionichus  insignis, 
Pascoe,  fam.  Curculionidae),  which  afford  a  good  example  of 
protective  coloration.  They  were  found  a  few  days  since  at 
Wellington,  N.S.W.,  on  the  trunks  oi  Kurrajong  trees  (Sterculia), 
the  bark  of  which  they  resemble  so  closely  in  tint  and  general 
appearance  that  it  was  quite  by  accident  he  first  recognised  their 
true  character. 


WEDNESDAY,  26th  AUGUST,  1891. 


The  President,  Professor  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc,  in  the  Chair, 


The  Minutes  of  the  previous  Meeting  were  read  and  signed. 


The  Chairman  announced  to  the  Meeting  with  deep  regret  the 
death,  only  that  morning,  of  the  Government  Geologist,  Mr. 
Charles  Smith  Wilkinson,  F.G.S.,  F.L.S.  Mr.  Wilkinson 
was  an  Original  Member  of  the  Society,  for  several  years  was  a 
Member  of  the  Council,  in  the  years  1883  and  1884  was  President, 
and  since  1885  had  been  one  of  the  Vice-Presidents.  His  enthu- 
siasm in  the  cause  of  Geological  Science,  his  extensive  knowledge 
of  the  geological  features  of  Eastern  Australia,  his  many  personal 
qualities,  and  his  decease  at  the  comparatively  early  age  of  47, 
combine  to  render  his  loss  one  which  will  be  severely  felt. 

On  the  motion  of  Mr.  Henry  Deane  it  was  resolved  that  a  letter 
of  sympathy  from  the  Meeting  be  sent  to  Mrs.  Wilkinson. 

The  reading  of  papers  and  other  business  was  deferred,  and  the 
Meeting  then  adjourned  to  September  30th. 


383 


WEDNESDAY,  30th  SEPTEMBER,  1891. 


The  President,  Professor  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc.,  in  the  Chair. 


Dr.  F.  Pick,  Sydney,  was  elected  a  member  of  the  Society. 


A  letter  from  Mrs.  C.  S.  Wilkinson,  thanking  the  Members  of 
the  Society  for  their  expression  of  sympathy,  was  read  to  the 


The  President  announced  that  the  Council  had  elected  Professor 
Sven  Loven,  M.  &  Ph.  D.,  of  Stockholm,  and  Professor  S.  P. 
Langley,  LL.D.,  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution,  Washington, 
Honorary  Members  of  the  Society. 


donations  (received  since  the  July  Meeting). 

"Journal  of  the  Royal  Microscopical  Society,  1891."  Parts  3 
and  4  (June  and  August).     From  the  Society. 

"  Transactions  and  Proceedings  of  the  New  Zealand  Institute." 
Vol.  xxiii.  (1890).     From  the  Directory  Colonial  Museum. 

"  Transactions  of  the  Royal  Society  of  South  Australia."  Vol. 
xiv.,  Part  1  (1891).     From  the  Society. 

"  Zoologischer  Anzeiger."  xiv.  Jahrg.,  Nos.  366-370  (June, 
July,  and  August,  1891).     From  the  Editor. 

"Perak  Government  Gazette."  Vol.  iv.,  Nos.  18-28  (June, 
July,  and  August,  1891).     From  the  Government  Secretary. 

"  Abhandlungen  herausgegeben  vom  naturwissenschaftlichen 
Vereine  zu  Bremen."     xii.  Bd.,  1  Heft  (1891).     From  the  Society. 

"The  Victorian  Naturalist."  Vol.  viii.,  Nos.  4  and  5  (August 
and  September,  1891).  From  the  Field  Naturalists'  Club  of 
Victoria. 


384  DONATIONS. 

"  Plants  Indigenous  and  Naturalised  in  the  Neighbourhood  of 
Sydney."  By  W.  Woolls,  Ph.D.,  F.L.S.  New  Edition  (1891). 
From  the  Field  J\Taticralists'  Society  of  N.S.  W. 

"Zoological  Society  of  London — Transactions."  Vol.  xiii., 
Parts  1  and  2  (1891) ;  "  Proceedings,  1891,"  Part  1.  "Abstract," 
June  16th,  1891.     From  the  Society. 

"  Sydney  Free  Public  Library — Report  from  Trustees  for  1890." 
From  the  Trustees. 

"  Department  of  Agriculture  of  Victoria — Bulletin."  Nos.  8 
and  12  (August,  1890,  and  July,  1891).  From  the  Secretary  for 
Agriculture. 

"Transactions  of  the  Entomological  Society  of  London,  1891." 
Part  2  (June).     From  the  Society. 

"  Bulletin  of  the  American  Geographical  Society."  Vol.  xxiii., 
No.  2  (June,  1891).     From  the  Society. 

"  Kongliga  Svenska  Vetenskaps-Akademie — Handlingar."  Bd. 
v.  (Part  2)  -xxii.  and  three  Atlases  (1864-87);  "  Bihang  till 
Handlingarne."  Bd.  i.-xi.,  xii.  (Parts  1  and  2),  xiii.  (Parts  1  and 
2),  xiv.-xv.  (1872-90) ;  "  Oefversigt  af  Forhandlingarne."  Arg. 
1865-1889;  "  Lefnadsteckningar."  Vols,  i.,  ii.  (1869-85);  "  For- 
teckning  ofver  innehallet  i  K.  Vet.  Akads.  Skrifter  (1826-83)  ;" 
"  Carl  von  Linne's  Brefvexling — Forteckning  af  E.  Ahrling"  (1885); 
"K.  Svenska  Fregatten  Eugenies  Resa  omkring  Jorden,  1851-53;" 
"Insecta  Caffraria.  Auctore  C.  H.  Boheman."  Parts  1  and  2 
(1848-57);  "  Monographia  Cassididarum.  Auctore  C.  H.  Bohe- 
man." T.  i.-iv.  (1850-62);  "  Hemiptera  Africana  descripsit  C. 
Stal."  T.  i.-iv.  (1864-66):  and  the  following  works  by  C.  J. 
Sundevall— "  Die  Thierarten  des  Aristoteles,"  &c.  (1863) ;  "  Con- 
spectum  avium  Picinarum "  (1866);  "  Methodi  naturalis  avium 
disponendarum  Tentamen"  (1873).  From  the  Royal  Swedish 
Academy. 

"  Proceedings  of  the  American  Academy  of  Arts  and  Sciences." 
Vol.  xxv.  (1889-90).     From  the  Academy. 

"Journal  of  the  Cincinnati  Society  of  Natural  History."  Vol. 
xiii.,  No.  4.     From  the  Society. 


DONATIONS.  385 

"  New  York  Academy  of  Sciences — Annals."  Vol.  v.,  Nos.  4-8, 
and  Index  to  Vol.  iv. ;  "Transactions."  Vol.  ix.,  Nos.  3-8  (1889- 
90).     From  the  Academy. 

''Johns  Hopkins  University  Circulars."  Vol.  x.,  No.  91  (July, 
1891) ;  "  Studies  from  the  Biological  Laboratory."  Vol.  iv.,  No.  7 
(1890).     From  the  University. 

"  Proceedings  of  the  American  Philosophical  Society."  Vol. 
xxviii.,  No.  134  (July-December,  1890).     From  the  Society. 

"Journal  of  Comparative  Neurology."  Vol.  i.,  Part  2  (June, 
1891).     From  the  Editor ;  Professor  C.  L.  Her  rich. 

"  Proceedings  of  the  Rochester  Academy  of  Science."  Vol.  i., 
Brochure  1  (1890).     From  the  Academy. 

"  Proceedings  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Phila- 
delphia for  1890."     Parts  2  and  3.     From  the  Academy. 

"  Annual  Report  of  the  Board  of  Regents  of  the  Smithsonian 
Institution  for  the  Year  ending  June  30,  1888."  From  the  Smith- 
sonian Institution. 

"  The  Missouri  Botanical  Garden."  First  Annual  Report 
(1890).     From  the  Director. 

"Journal  of  Comparative  Medicine  and  Veterinary  Archives." 
Vol.  xii.,  Nos.  6-8  (June- August,  1891).     From  the  Editors. 

"  Bulletin  of  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  at  Harvard 
College."  Vol.  xxi.,  Nos.  2-4  (May  and  June,  1891).  From  the 
Curator. 

"United  States  Department  of  Agriculture — Division  of  Ento- 
mology—Bulletin." Nos.  23  and  25  (1891).  "  Insect  Life."  Vol. 
iii.,  Nos.  9  and  10  (June,  1891).  From  the  Secretary  of  Agricul- 
ture. 

"Geological  and  Natural  History  Survey  of  Canada — Contribu- 
tions to  Canadian  Palaeontology."  Vol.  i.,  Part  3  (1891).  From 
the  Director. 

"  Verhandlungen  der  k.  k.  zoologisch-botanischen  Gesellschaft 
in  Wien."     xl.  Bd.,  3  u.  4  Heft  (1890).     From  the  Society. 

"  Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Beige  de  Microscopic"  xviime  Annee, 
No.  8  (1891).     "  Annales."     T.  xv.  (1891).     From  the  Society. 


386  DONATIONS. 

"  Gesellschaft  fiir  Erdkunde  zu  Berlin — Zeitschrift."  xxv.  Bd., 
6  Heft  (1890);  "  Verhandlungen."  Bd.  xviii.,  Nos.  4  u.  5  (1891). 
From  the  Society. 

"  Koniglich-Bohmische  Gesell.  der  Wissenschaften  in  Prag — 
Sitzungsberichte."  Jahrg.  1890,  ii.  Bd. ;  "  Jahresbericht,  1890." 
From  the  Society. 

"Catalogue  of  Mammalia  in  the  Indian  Museum,  Calcutta." 
Part  2.  By  W.  L.  Sclater,  M.A.,  F.Z.S.  (1891).  From  the 
Trustees. 

"  Queensland — Report  on  the  Gympie  Gold  Field  "  and  "  On 
the  Albert  and  Logan  District."  By  W.  H.  Rands  (1889). 
From  R.  Ether  idge,  Jun.,  Esq. 

"  Queensland — Report  on  proposed  Boring  for  Water  at  Bris- 
bane." By  R.  L.  Jack  (1890);  "  Second  Report  on  Tin  Mines  near 
Cooktown."  By  R.  L.  Jack  (1891);  "Notes  on  Broken  Hill." 
By  R.  L.  Jack  (1891):  "  Report  on  Cape  River  Gold  Field."  By 
W.  H.  Rands  (1891);  "Report  on  Paradise  Gold  Field."  By 
W.  H.  Rands  (1891);  "Report  on  Coolgarra  Tin  Mines,  &c." 
By  A.  G.  Maitland  (1891);  "Report  on  the  Geology  of  the 
Cooktown  District."  By  A.  G.  Maitland  (1891).  "Report  on 
Geology  and  Mineral  Resources  of  the  Upper  Burdekin."  By  A. 
G.  Maitland  (1891).    From  the  Government  Geologist,  Queensland. 

"  Reports  on  the  Zoological  Collections  made  in  Torres  Straits 
by  Professor  A.  C.  Haddon,  1888-89  "— "  The  Land  Shells,"  by 
E.  A.  Smith  ;  "  Lepidoptera  from  Murray  Island,"  by  G.  H. 
Carpenter,  B.Sc. ;  "  Hydroida  and  Polyzoa,"  By  R.  Kirkpatrick. 
From  Professor  Haddon. 

"  Societe  Zoologique  de  France — Memoires."  T.  iv.,  Nos.  1  and 
2  (1891) ;  "  Bulletin."  T.  xvi.,  Nos.  5  and  6  (May  and  June, 
1891).     From  the  Society. 

"  Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Royale  de  Geographie  d'Anvers."  T. 
xv.,  4me  Fasc.  (1891).     From  the  Society. 

"  The  Australasian  Journal  of  Pharmacy."  Vol.  vi.,  Nos.  68 
and  69  (August  and  September,  1891).     From  the  Editor. 


DONATIONS.  387 

"The  Pharmaceutical  Journal  of  Australasia."  New  series, 
Vol.  iv.,  Nos.  8  and  9  (August  and  September,  1891).  From  the 
Editor. 

Technical  Education  Series,  No.  6 — "  Wattles  and  Wattle- 
barks,  being  Hints  on  the  Conservation  and  Cultivation  of 
Wattles.  Second  Edition  (1891)."  By  J.  H.  Maiden,  F.L.S., 
F.C.S.     From  the  Author. 

"  Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Imperiale  des  Naturalistes  de  Moscou." 
Annee  1891,  No.  1.     From  the  Society. 

"Proceedings  and  Transactions  of  the  Queensland  Branch  of 
the  Royal  Geographical  Society  of  Australasia."  Vol.  vi.,  Part 
ii.  (1891).     From  the  Society. 

"  Records  of  the  Australian  Museum."  Vol.  i.,  No.  8  (July, 
1891).     From  the  Trustees. 

"  Annual  Report  of  the  Department  of  Mines,  New  South 
Wales,  for  the  year  1890."    From  the  Hon.  the  Minister  for  Mines. 

"  Academie  Royale  Danoise  des  Sciences  et  des  Lettres, 
Copenhague— Bulletin  pour  1890."  No.  3;  "Bulletin  pour  1891." 
No.  1.     From  the  Society. 

Pamphlet  entitled  "  On  Chilostomatous  Characters  in  Melicer- 
titidce  and  other  Fossil  Bryozoa."  By  A.  W.  Waters.  From  the 
Author. 

"  Tillseg  til  Viridarium  Norvegicum  af  Dr.  F.  C.  Schiibeler." 
No.  1  (1891).     From  the  Royal  University  of  Norway. 

"  Jaarboek  van  de  Koninklijke  Akademie  van  Wetenschappen 
gevestigd  te  Amsterdam  voor  1890."     From  the  Society. 

"  Agricultural  Gazette  of  New  South  Wales."  Vol.  ii.,  Part  7 
(July,  1891).     From  the  Director  of  Agriculture. 

"  Department  of  Agriculture,  Brisbane — Bulletin."  No.  10 
(August,  1891).     From  the  Under  Secretary  for  Agriculture. 

"  Royal  Irish  Academy,  Dublin — Transactions."     Vol.  xxix., 
Parts  1-16  (1887-91) ;  "  List  of  Papers  published  in  the  Transac- 
tions,  &c,   1786-1886";    "Proceedings."     Third    Series,  Vol.  i. 
(1888-91).     From  the  Academy. 
26 


388  DONATIONS. 

"  Journal  of  Conchology."  Vol.  vi.  No.  11  (July,  1891).  From 
the  Conchological  Society  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland. 

"  Iconography  of  Australian  Salsolaceous  Plants."  By  Baron 
von  Mueller,  K.C.M.G.,  F.R.S.  Decade  vii.  (1891).  From  the 
Premier  of  Victoria,  through  the  Librarian,  Public  Library, 
Melbourne. 

"  Mittheilungen  aus  der  Zoologischen  Station  zu  Neapel."  viii. 
Band,  2  Heft  (July,  1888).     From  the  Zoological  Station. 

"Quarterly  Journal  of  the  Geological  Society."  Vol.  xlvii. 
Part  3  (August,  1891).     From  the  Society. 

"American  Naturalist."  Vol.  xxv.,  No.  293  (May,  1891). 
From  the  Editors. 

"United  States  National  Museum — Proceedings."  Vol.  xiv., 
Nos.  842-850  (1891);  "Bulletin,"  No.  39,  Part  A.  From  the 
Museum. 

"  Asiatic  Society  of  Bengal — Journal.'"  Vol.  lix.  (1890),  Part 
i.,  Nos.  3  and  4;  Part  ii.,  Nos.  4  and  5,  and  Supplement  No.  ii.  : 
Vol.  lx.  (1891),  Part  i.,  No.  1  ;  Part  ii.,  No.  1  ;  "  Proceedings  for 
1891."     Nos.  2-6  (February- June).     From  the  Society. 

"  Memoires  de  la  Societe  de  Physique  et  d'Histoire  Naturelle 
de  Geneve.  T.  xxxi.,  Premiere  Partie  (1890-91).  From  the 
Society. 

"Department  of  Mines,  Victoria. — Annual  Reports  for  1889 
and  1890";  "  The  Goldfields  of  Victoria— Reports  of  the  Mining 
Registrars  for  the  years  1886,  1887,  and  for  quarter  ended  31st 
December,  1889  ";  "  Reports  and  Statistics  of  the  Mining  Depart- 
ment for  quarter  ended  30th  June,  1891";  "Geology  and  Physical 
Geography  of  Victoria."  By  R,  A.  F.  Murray  (1887).  From  the 
Secretary  for  Mines. 

University  of  Melbourne — Examination  Papers;  October  and 
December,  1890;  February,  1891;  and  May  (Matriculation),  1891. 
From  the  University. 

"  Royal  Society  of  Tasmania — Abstracts  of  Proceedings,  April 
August,  and  September,  1891."     From  the  Society. 

"Journal  of  Morphology."  Vol.  iv.,  No.  3  (Jan.  1891)  ;  Vol. 
v.,  No.  1  (June,  1891).     From  Professor  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc. 


389 


PAPERS    READ. 


THE  EXAMINATION  OF  KINOS  AS  AN  AID  IN  THE 
DIAGNOSIS  OF  EUCALYPTS. 

PART  III.— THE  TURBID  GROUP. 

By  J.  H.  Maiden,  F.L.S.,  F.C.S. 

My  third  large  group  of  kinos  I  call  the  turbid  group, — 
certainly  a  descriptive  name,  as  the  members  of  it  all  form  turbid 
solutions  in  water,  owing  to  the  presence  of  catechin.  This 
sharply  defines  them  from  the  other  two  groups.  Another 
characteristic  is  their  extreme  friability. 

This  group  contains  a  more  heterogeneous  collection  of  sub- 
stances than  do  the  other  two,  but  beyond  submitting  a  few 
suggestions  as  to  the  affinities  of  certain  kinos  comprehended  in 
it,  I  do  not  propose  to  form  additional  groups  at  present,  until 
the  number  of  authentic  specimens  worked  at  by  other  observers 
or  myself  is  very  largely  increased. 

It  follows,  from  the  friable  nature  of  kinos  of  this  group,  and 
the  way  in  which  they  fall  to  pieces  as  soon  as  they  get  dry,  that 
"Turbid  Kinos"  are  always  in  small  fragments,  while  the  ruby 
and  gummy  ones  are  frequently  in  agglutinated  masses  of  a  con- 
siderable size,  which  require  some  force  to  break  up.  As  a 
consequence  of  the  foregoing  the  percentages  of  moisture  are 
comparatively  low. 

Description  of  a  typical  Kino  of  the  Turbid  group. 

Colour  reddish-brown,  with  the  following  exceptions  :  E. 
maculata,  E.  microcorys.  Most  of  them,  perhaps  all,  possess  an 
odour,  at  least  when  perfectly  fresh.    Bright  looking  when  perfectly 


390  THE    EXAMINATION    OF   EUCALYPTUS   KINOS, 

fresh  and  unhandled,  but,  in  a  few  weeks  in  small  fragments,  dulled 
by  their  own  disintegration.  They  powder  readily  between  the 
fingers,  forming  a  fine  powder  which,  in  the  majority  of  instances, 
is  of  a  buff  colour. 

What  this  Kino  research  enables  us  to  do. 

1 .  To  pronounce  whether  a  kino  is  the  product  of  a  Eucalypt 
belonging  to  the  Renanthereaa  or  not. 

2.  To  confirm  the  affinity  existing  between  stringybarks, 
ironbarks,  boxes,  &c.  It  is  a  useful  adjunct  to,  and  check  upon, 
the  cortical  system,  which  is  of  course  founded  on  external 
characteristics  merely.  Eucalypts  sometimes  have  variable  bark, 
but,  as  far  as  known,  the  kino  of  a  particular  species  is  constant 
in  character. 

3.  To  furnish  a  guide  in  points  of  difficulty  which  arise  in 
cases  where  diagnosis  in  the  ordinary  manner  (e.g.,  by  flowers  and 
fruits)  breaks  down.     See  leucoxylon,  fasciculosa,  infra. 

4.  To  name,  in  some  instances  (e.g.,  maculata,  corymbosa),  a 
species  from  kino  alone. 

5.  To  state  whether  a  kino  contains  catechin  from  physical 
characteristics  alone. 

6.  To  pronounce  what  species  are  suitable  for  tincture- 
making  and  what  are  unsuitable.  Partly  dependent  on  the  fore- 
going we  are  now  in  a  position  to  indicate  what  species  satisfy 
the  requirements  of  pharmacopoeias  for  kino,  and  what  do  not. 

It  must  be  remembered  that  the  systematic  examination  of 
kinos  is  only  just  beginning. 

I  desire  to  express  my  obligations  to  Mr.  H.  G.  Smith,  Labora- 
tory Assistant,  Technological  Museum,  for  valuable  assistance  in 
this  research. 

Attention  is  drawn  to  the  fact  that  the  kinos  of  Eucalyptus 
maculata  and  E.  microcorys  are  anomalous;  they  differ  from  the 
others  in  regard  to  colour,  so  much  so,  that  they  can  be  singled  out 
from  all  others  (so  far  as  is  at  present  known)  by  this  colour-test 


BY    J.  H.  MAIDEN.  391 

alone.  At  the  same  time,  other  kinos  tend  to  this  colour,  and  it 
may  be  that  a  regular  gradation  of  kino-colours  will  be  found,  as 
our  knowledge  of  authentic  species  of  these  substances  increases. 
It  is  also  worthy  of  note  that  E.  microcorys  is  the  only*  kino  of 
the  turbid  group  belonging  to  the  Renantherese.  Its  resemblance 
to  that  of  E.  maculata  is  very  marked,  and  it  is  as  different  as 
possible  from  any  other  Eenantherous  kino.  It  is  worth 
enquiring  of  what  value  this  observation  may  be,  as  bearing  upon 
the  affinities  of  E.  microcorys. 

The  order  in  which  kinos  belonging  to  this  group  are  placed  is 
only  provisional,  as  at  present  under  30  species  belong  to  the 
group  as  the  result  of  absolute  experiment,  and  very  much  more 
material  requires  to  be  accumulated,  in  order  that  one  may  be  in 
a  position  to  subdivide  it  with  any  degree  of  finality.  It  promises 
to  be  the  largest  of  the  kino  groups,  and  while  already  I  can 
predict  a  number  of  species  which  will  fall  into  it,  I  confine 
myself  strictly  to  facts.  Following  are  the  species  referred  to  in 
this  paper : — 

E.  hemiphloia 

„  ,,         var.  albens  =  E.  albens 

E.  odorata 

E.  luelliodora 

E.fasciculosa  (non  E.  panicidata,  Sm.) 

E.  corynocalyx 

E.  leucoxylon  (non  E.  sideroxylon,  A.Cunn.) 

E.  corimta 

E.  rostrata 

E.  viminalis 

E.  Stitartiana 

E.  Maideni 

E.  Gunnii 

E.  goniocalyx 

E.  Bauerleni 

*  The  only  species  of  the  Renantherese  I   have   not   examined   is  E. 
acmenoides  ;  see  p.  606,  Vol.  iv.,  Series  2. 


392  THE    EXAMINATION    OF    EUCALYPTUS    KINOS, 

E.  punctata 
E.  longifolia 
E.  corymbosa 
E.  terminalis 
E.  eximia 
E.  clavigera 
E.  tessellaris 
E.  maculata 
E.  microcorys 
and,  as  the  results  of  the  experiments  of  others  : — 
E.  calophylla 
E.  globulus 
E.  trachyphloia 


"Box"  Provisional  Sub-Group. 

E.  hemiphloia 
E.  odorata 
E.  melliodora. 
E.  fasciculosa  kino  seems  to  form  a  kind  of  connecting  link 
between  these  and 

E.  corynocalyx 
E.  leucoxylon 
E.  comuta 


Eucalyptus  hemiphloia,  F.v.M.,  B.F1.  iii.  216. 

No.  35.  "Box"  or  "White  Box."  Nerriga,  N.S.W.  Kino 
collected  October,  1888.  Height  of  trees,  80-120  feet.  Diam., 
2-3  feet. 

A  freshly  exuded,  more  than  ordinarily  bright-looking  kino.  It 
very  much  resembles  light  seed-lac  in  colour  and  general  appear- 
ance.    Friability  and  colour  of  powder  normal.      Its  composition 


BY   J.  H.  MAIDEN. 

Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ... 

...     784 

Gum 

...     nil 

Ligneous  matter,  &c. 

...       2-3 

Moisture     ... 

...     19-2 

Ash             

•1 

393 


100-00 

Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal),  34  539  per  cent.  This 
kino  was  analysed  November,  1888. 

The  catechin  and  tannic  acid  in  these  kinos  were  determined 
together  by  extraction  with  alcohol.  The  tannic  acid  was 
separately  determined  by  Lowenthal's  process  (on  an  original 
aqueous  solution).  I  cannot  go  further,  in  this  place,  into  the 
chemical  questions  involved;  this  will  be  dealt  with  in  a  mono- 
graph on  the  whole  subject  of  kinos.  I  may  mention,  however, 
that  Lowenthal's  process  is  only  of  limited  application  in  the 
determination  of  tannic  acid  in  turbid  kinos,  and  the  figures 
given  in  this  paper  of  Lowenthal  determinations  have  comparative 
values  only.  For  medicinal  or  tanning  purposes,  the  results 
obtained  by  Lowenthal's  method  will  be  a  guide  as  far  as  practical 
astringent  value  is  concerned. 

No.  36.  "Box."  Dromedary  Mountain,  Tilba  Tilba,  N.S.W.  ; 
collected  September,  1889,  from  trees  80-120  feet  in  height,  and 
with  a  diameter  of  2-4  feet. 

This  kino  resembles  the  previous  one  so  closely  that  no  second 
description  is  necessary. 

No.  37.  Sample  from  Wagga  Wagga,  N.S.W. ;  collected  October, 
1889.     Tree  known  locally  as  "  Grey  Box." 

Collected  and  presented  by  Mr.  J.  J.  Fletcher,  M.A.,  B.  Sc, 
Director  of  this  Society,  who  described  its  appearance  as  like  a 
boss,  and  that  it  had  thrust  up  the  bark  of  the  tree  as  if  it  had 
been  so  much  paper.  The  sample  principally  consists  of  a  large 
oval  mass,  over  an  inch  in  thickness;  it  had  solidified  in  this  shape 
while  adherent  to  the  bark  ;  externally  it  is  of  a  dull  brown 
colour ;  on  the  freshly  fractured  surface  it  is  bright  in  appearance. 


394  THE    EXAMINATION    OP    EUCALYPTUS    KINOS, 

Friability  normal,  the  colour  of  the  powder  being  a  very  light  buff. 
It  contains  a  large  amount  of  catechin.  This  sample  may  be 
taken  as  one  of  the  most  strongly  defined  of  the  kinos  of  this 
group  yet  examined  by  me,  and  may  be  considered  as  an  extreme 
type  ;  the  amount  of  catechin  remaining  as  a  very  light  yellowish 
powder  after  the  tannic  acid  has  been  dissolved  out  with  cold 
water  is  very  large ;  on  standing  the  water  does  not  become  clear. 
Analysis  (made  August,  1891)  shows  its  composition  to  be  : — 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ...     84*43 

Ligneous  matter,  &c.       ...  ...       4*0 

Moisture 9-94 

Ash  1-63 


10000 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal),  15-2  per  cent. 
No.  38.  I  have  received  a  specimen  of  kino,  also  from  the 
Wagga  Wagga  district,  labelled  "  White  Box,  E.  populifolia." 
From  its  composition  and  general  appearance,  and  also  partly 
because  E.  hemiphloia  is  the  common  "  White  or  Grey  Box  " 
about  Wagga,  I  am  inclined,  as  I  am  unable  to  get  herbarium 
specimens  to  settle  the  matter,  to  place  this  kino  with  E.  hemi- 
phloia. In  fact,  I  look  upon  this  as  an  instance  of  the  usefulness 
of  kinos  as  a  check  upon  species-naming. 

This  kino  is  dull  in  appearance.  Friability  normal ;  colour  of 
powder  light  buff  or  raw  sienna.  It  does  not  dissolve  entirely  in 
water,  the  catechin  remaining  as  a  light  yellow  powder;  the 
colour  of  the  water  is  that  of  a  weak  infusion  of  tea ;  it  remains 
slightly  turbid. 

Analysis  (made  August,  1891)  shows  it  to  be  composed  of  : — 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ...     90-05 

Ligneous  matter,  &c.       ...  ...         *4 

Moisture 8-71 

Ash -84 


100-00 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal),  14*5  per  cent. 


BY   J.  H.  MAIDEN.  395 

No.  39.  I  have  received  (July,  1891)  a  sample  of  kino,  most 
probably  collected  in  Victoria,  and  labelled  "  E.  hemiphloia."  It 
is  tough,  not  the  least  friable,  of  a  dark  reddish-brown  colour 
externally,  but  by  transmitted  light  it  is  of  a  bright  ruby  colour. 
Its  physical  characteristics  are  quite  different  from  kinos  of  the 
turbid  group  hitherto  examined  by  me.  I  do  not  hesitate  to  say 
that  the  tree  producing  it,  although  ranking  under  E.  hemiphloia, 
is  specifically  distinct.  I  draw  attention  to  the  subject,  as  a  revision 
of  the  trees  grouped  under  E.  hemiphloia  may  be  desirable. 

Eucalyptus  hemiphloia,  F.v.M.   var.   albens  (Syn.  E.   aliens, 
Miq.),  B.F1.  iii.  219. 

No.  40.  "  Northern  Box "  of  South  Australia.  Kino  from 
South  Australia,  received  from  Baron  von  Mueller,  August,  1891. 
Physical  properties  same  as  the  normal  species,  and  as  will  be  seen 
below,  the  chemical  properties  are  very  similar  also.  Composition 
(determined  August,  1891): — 

Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ...     89-112 

Ligneous  matter  ...  ...         -89 

Moisture  9-008 

Ash        -99 


100-000 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal),  16*9  per  cent. 

Eucalyptus  odorata,  Behr;  B.F1.  iii.  215. 

No.  41.  Kino  from  a  variety  known  as  "  White  Box "  at 
Wongrabell,  near  Eden,  N.S.W.  Diam.,  6-8  feet.  Height, 
100-150  feet;  collected  February,  1887.  Apparently  an  old  sample, 
and  much  contaminated  with  bark.  Dull-looking,  prevailing 
colour  brown,  and  readily  crumbling  between  the  fingers  to  a 
brown  powder.  Its  composition  (determined  October,  1888)  is  as 
follows : — 

Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ...     78-24 

Ligneous  matter,  &c.       ...  ...        1*66 


396  THE    EXAMINATION   OF   EUCALYPTUS   KINOS, 

Moisture 193 

Ash  -8 


100-00 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal),  23-873  per  cent. 

Eucalyptus  melliodora,  A.  Cunn.,  B.F1.  iii.  210. 
No.  42.  The  ordinary  "  Yellow  Box."  Kino  received  from 
Baron  von  Mueller,  July,  1891.  In  very  small  pieces  of  a  light 
brown  colour,  both  in  colour  and  appearance  resembling  small 
currants ;  powders  between  the  fingers  to  a  light  yellow  colour. 
I  have  not  sufficient  for  a  complete  investigation,  but  I  place  it 
here  from  a  general  examination. 


ov 


Eucalyptus  fasciculosa,  F.v.M.  in  Trans.  Vict.  Inst.  Vol.  I. 

(1854). 

This  species  has  long  been  looked  upon  as  a  form  of  E.  paniculata, 
Sm.  (see  B.F1.  iii.  211,  and  Decade  5,  Mueller's  Eucalyptographia). 
As  the  discrimination  of  the  two  species  is  important,  I  think  it 
necessary  to  go  into  the  matter  with  a  little  detail. 

Under  the  name  of  E.  paniculata  are  usually  enumerated  two 
distinct  trees,  viz.  : — A  New  South  Wales  ironbark  (the  tree  on 
which  Smith  founded  the  species),  and  a  (Victorian  and)  South 
Australian  white  gum,  with  smoothish  white  bark  as  its  name 
denotes.  The  timbers  of  the  two  trees  are  also  totally  different. 
This  confusion  caused  Bentham  to  write  (B.F1.  iii.  211),  "The 
notes  on  the  bark  uncertain."  In  making  a  rough  grouping  of 
Eucalypts  according  to  the  vernacular  names,  he  adopts  the  name 
"  White  Gum,"  B.F1.  iii.  189,  and  leaves  it  out  of  the  list  of 
"  Ironbarks." 

I  give  a  few  notes  on  the  trees  known  as  E.  paniculata  in  the 
colonies  of  New  South  Wales,  Victoria,  and  South  Australia.  I 
have  not  dwelt  upon  the  inflorescence  and  fruits,  as  these  are 
palpably  similar  in  the  various  trees  referred  to,  and  afford  an 
instance  in  which  determinations  from  such  material  break  down. 
To  discriminate  between  certain  Eucalypts,  the  bark,  timber,  or 
kino  (or  all  three),  should  be  taken  into  consideration. 


BY    J.  H.  MAIDEN.  397 

New  South  Wales.— "She  Ironbark  "  (Woolls,  B.F1.  iii.  211). 
It  is  the  "Red  Ironbark"  of  the  Southern  Coast  districts  (E. 
paniculata)  ;  var.  angustifolia  is  "  Narrow-leaved  Ironbark " 
(Woolls,  B.F1.  iii.  212). 

Victoria. — Bark  persistent,  hard  and  rough,  or  by  outer  decorti- 
cation whitish  and  smooth  outside.  "The  Box-Ironbark  Tree" 
(Mueller),  Dichotomous  Key.     This  is  E.  fasciculosa. 

South  Australia.— "White  Gum  "  (Behr,  B.F1  iii.  212).  It  is 
gured  in  Brown's  Forest  Flora  of  S.A.  and  called  by  him 
"  Panicle-flowered  White  Gum  "  in  order  to  distinguish  it  from 
the  other  white  gums  of  that  colony.  From  the  description  of  the 
bark,  and  the  figure  of  it  given,  it  is  at  once  seen  that  the  South 
Australian  paniculata  (E.  fasciculosa)  is  quite  a  different  species 
from  our  New  South  Wales  ironbark  of  that  name.  The  colour 
of  the  South  Australian  timber  is  not  given  ;  that  of  our  ironbark 
is  medium  red. 

No.  43.  Kino  received  from  W.  Gill,  Esq.,  F.L.S.,  Conservator 
of  Forests,  South  Australia,  July,  1891.  Known  locally  as 
"  White  Gum." 

The  physical  properties  of  this  kino  resemble  those  of  a  typical 
kino  of  the  group.     Composition  (determined  August,  1891)  : — 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ...      83*384 

Ligneous  matter,  &c.     ...  ...  '6 

Moisture  15-78 

Ash         -236 


100-000 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal),  24-1  per  cent. 

Eucalyptus  corynocalyx,  F.v.M.  B.F1.  iii.  218. 

The  Sugar  Gum  of  South  Australia.  "  Slowly  but  completely 
soluble  in  water  ;  solution  slightly  acid,  yellow-red,  on  cooling- 
turbid,  no  gum-resin.  Broken  reddish-brown  lumps,  fatty  lustre, 
mixed  with  particles  of  bark"  (Wiesner,  Zeitschr.  d'allg.  (Est. 
Apotheker-Vereines,  1871  ;  Pharm.  Journ.  [3]  ii.  102). 


398  THE   EXAMINATION   OF   EUCALYPTUS    KINOS, 

No.  44.  A  specimen  received  from  W.  Gill,  Esq.,  F.L.S.,  Con- 
servator of  Forests,  S.A.,  July,  1891,  is  in  small  pieces,  very  dull 
externally.  Friability  normal.  Colour  of  unground  kino  a  dull 
sienna-brown,  colour  of  powder  ochre-yellow. 

It  does  not  entirely  dissolve  in  cold  water ;  the  supernatant 
liquid  is  pale  yellowish,  and  it  does  not  entirely  dissolve  in  alcohol ; 
the  liquid  becomes  clear  on  standing,  but  on  agitation  has  a  very 
turbid  appearance.  Its  composition  (determined  August,  1891) 
is : — 

Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ...     82-471 

Ligneous  matter,  &c.     ...  ...       3*827 

Moisture  13*370 

Ash         -332 


100*000 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal),  26*2  per  cent. 

Eucalyptus    leucoxylon,  F.v.M.  B.F1.  iii.  209,  and  Decade  1, 
Mueller's  Eucalyptographia. 

Under  the  above  name  two  distinct  trees  have  been  included, 
viz.  : — A  New  South  Wales  ironbark,  and  a  white  or  blue  gum 
found  in  Victoria  and  South  Australia.  The  New  South  Wales 
tree  is  E,  sideroxylon,  A.  Cunn.,  the  southern  one  is  E.  leucoxylon, 
F.v.M.,  a  tree  with  a  pale-coloured  wood  as  its  name  denotes, 
while  the  N.S.W.  ironbark  has  red  timber,  and  also  one  of  quite 
a  different  character  to  the  other.  I  give  notes  under  the  heading 
of  each  colony  to  help  to  set  the  matter  clear,  and  would  point 
out  that  in  this  instance  examination  of  the  kinos  is  a  valuable 
help,  showing  that  the  products  of  the  N.S.W.  ironbark  and  the 
Victorian  or  South  Australian  white  gum  are  very  different. 

New  South  Wales.  Syn.  E.  sideroxylon,  A.  Cunn. — The  "  Red 
Flowering  Ironbark  " ;  it,  however,  sometimes  has  white  flowers. 
Red  ironbark  of  Mudgee  district  (Hamilton)  and  other  parts  of 
the  colony. 

In  a  "Note  on  Eucalyptus  leucoxylon,  F.v.M.,"  by  the  Rev.  Dr. 
Woolls  (P.L.S.N.S.W.  [2],  i.  859),  this  matter  of  the  confusion 


BY   J.  H.  MAIDEN.  399 

which  has  arisen  between  the  two  trees  is  clearly  set  forth,  and  I 
am  but  emphasizing  Dr.  Woolls'  remarks  in  the  paper  referred  to. 
I  have  for  some  years  been  impressed  with  their  specific  differences, 
and  the  use  of  the  name  leucoxylon  in  my  former  paper 
(P.L.S.N.S.W.  [2],  iv.  1277)  for  sideroxylon  is  a  slip  of  the  pen. 

Victoria. — Bark  either  rugged,  hard,  dark  and  persistent,  or 
decorticating  and  then  smooth  and  whitish  outside.  The 
"Victorian  Iron-bark  Tree"  (Mueller,  Dichotomous  Key)',  see  also 
Eiicalyptographia,  where  it  is  stated  : — "  This  is  the  iron-bark  tree 
of  Victoria  and  many  districts  of  New  South  Wales."  This  is  a 
slip  of  the  pen  as  regards  Victoria,  the  tree  being  not  a  true  iron- 
bark  in  that  colony,  although  sometimes  having  rugged  bark  about 
the  butt.  The  Victorian  species  varies  somewhat  in  bark  in 
different  localities. 

Mr.  W.  R.  Guilfoyle,  exhibiting  Victorian  E.  leucoxylon  timber 
at  the  Sydney  International  Exhibition  of  1879,  describes  it  as 
"  Milk  white  Gum  or  Spurious  Iron-bark.  Said  to  be  synonymous 
with  E.  sideroxylon,  the  true  iron-bark,  although  very  distinct 
in  appearance." 

It  is  called  "Iron-bark  "  in  Howitt's  paper  (Trans.  R.  S.  Vict. 
II.  pt.  1).  It  is  called  "  Box"  at  p.  215,  and  "Spurious  Ironbark" 
at  p.  226  of  the  Official  Record,  Intercol.  Exh.  of  Australasia, 
Melbourne,  1867,  a  scientific  publication  of  great  value. 

South  Australia. — Figured  as  the  "Blue  Gum"  in  J.  E.  Brown's 
"  Forest  Flora  of  S.  A."  The  specimens  on  which  the  species-name 
leucoxylon  was  founded  by  Baron  Mueller,  were  obtained  from 
near  Adelaide.     Known  also  in  South  Australia  as  "White  Gum." 

"  On  the  matured  trees  the  bark  upon  the  stem  is  hard,  woody, 
rugged,  and  of  a  dark  bluish-grey — sometimes  almost  black — on 
the  surface  and  brown  beneath  ;  it  falls  off  in  curled,  broken  up, 
longitudinal  pieces  two  or  three  feet  long,  and  from  a-half  to  one 
inch  in  thickness "  (J.  E.  Brown).  This  is,  of  course,  quite 
different  to  an  ironbark. 

Queensland. — The  following  note  on  a  Queensland  form  of 
leucoxylon   has    no    direct    bearing   on    the  point    at  issue  (viz. 


400  THE    EXAMINATION    OF    EUCALYPTUS    KINOS, 

sideroxylon  and  leucoxylon  being  distinct  species),  but  I  give  it 
for  completeness.  The  typical  E.  sideroxylon  does  not  appear  to 
extend  to  Queensland. 

"  E.  leucoxylon":  bark  white  on  the  branches,  more  persistent 
on  the  trunk  ;  var.  minor,  C.  Ext.  (Bailey).  See  also  Scortechini, 
P.L.S.N.S.W.  viii.  248,  who  states  that  this  variety  barely  crosses 
the  boundaries  of  Queensland,  near  Wilson's  Peak,  South  .Queens- 
land. 

Memo. — Bentham  (B.F1.  iii.  210)  states  "this  variety  seems 
almost  to  pass  into  E.  melliodora"  and  certainly  the  kino  of  that 
species  and  that  of  E.  leucoxylon,  F.v.M.,  strongly  resemble  each 
other. 

No.  45.  "Blue  Gum"  of  South  Australia.  Kino  received  from 
Mr.  W.  Gill,  F.L.S.,  Conservator  of  Forests,  South  Australia, 
July,  1891. 

This  is  apparently  a  freshly  exuded  sample,  being  very  bright 
and  sparkling  in  appearance.  Its  general  colour  is  a  warm  sienna- 
brown  ;  it  is  easily  reducible  to  a  powder  between  the  fingers, 
such  powder  having  a  bright  yellow  colour,  almost  chrome.  It  is 
very  new,  which  accounts  for  some  of  the  brightness  of  colour. 
Its  general  behaviour  at  once  places  this  kino  in  the  turbid  group. 

Behaviour  and  appearance  iu  water  similar  to  E.  corynocalyx 
sample.  In  alcohol  it  does  not  entirely  dissolve  ;  the  supernatant 
liquid  is  bright,  clear,  and  of  a  reddish-brown  colour  ;  the  liquid 
is  very  turbid  when  agitated. 

Its  composition  (determined  August,  1891)  is  : — 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ...     79*279 

Ligneous  matter,  &c.     ...  ...        4-9 

Moisture  14*95 

Ash         -871 


100-000 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal)  21*5  per  cent. 
MM.   E.   Heckel    and    Fr.  Schlagdenhauffen  ( Le   Naturaliste, 
July  1,  1890,  p.  151)  have  been  experimenting  upon  some  kinos 


BY    J    H.  MAIDEN. 


401 


of  E.  Uucoxylon  and  E.  viminalis  received  from  M.  Ch.  Naudin 
of  the  Villa  Thuret,  Antibes,  France,  where  is  a  celebrated  planta- 
tion of  many  species  of  Eucalyptus.  I  will  refer  to  E.  viminalis 
under  that  heading,  and  would  observe  that  apart  from  the 
evidence  yielded  by  the  experiments  on  the  kinos  themselves,  the 
leucoxylon  trees  must  have  been  raised  from  seed  of  trees 
indigenous  to  Victoria  or  South  Australia. 
Following  is  their  analysis  : — 

Eau  hygroscopique  ...  ...      18*94 


Sels  fixes  ... 

1-32 

Tannin  et  catechine 

74-95 

Gomme     ... 

2-74 

Debris  cellulaires... 

1-51 

Perte         

0-54 

100-00 
The  constituent  in  the  above  analysis  worth  noting  is  the  gum. 
Obviously  the  conditions  under  which  these  trees  grow  favour  the 
development  of  gum,  as  this  substance,  though  always  carefully 
looked  for,  is  absent  in  turbid  kinos  obtained  from  Australian 
grown  trees.  In  several  species  I  have  believed  that  I  have  found 
gum  (never  much  more  than  a  barely  weighable  quantity,  however), 
but  on  more  thorough  examination  the  substance  is  found  not  to 
be  precipitable  by  alcohol.  Care  must  be  taken  to  remove  all 
catechins  before  the  alcohol  is  added. 

Eucalyptus  cornuta,  Labill.  B.F1.  iii.  234. 

No.  46.  The  "  Yeit"  or  "  Yate"  of  Western  Australia.  Speci- 
men of  kino  received  from  Baron  von  Mueller,  July,  1891. 

General  appearance,  friability,  and  colour  of  powder  normal. 
It  does  not  entirely  dissolve  in  cold  water;  it  forms  a  dirty  brown 
liquid,  which  does  not  settle  readily.  It  does  not  entirely 
dissolve  in  alcohol,  the  supernatant  liquid  is  clear  and  bright,  but 
when  agitated  it  forms  a  very  turbid  liquid  of  a  dirty  brown 
colour. 


402  THE   EXAMINATION   OF    EUCALYPTUS    KINOS, 

Its  composition  is  as  follows  :  — 

Catechin  and  tannic  acid 
Ligneous  matter,  &c. 
Moisture  ... 
Ash  

100-00 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal)  36*1  per  cent.     It  was 
analysed  August,  1891. 


80-9 

2-51 

15-72 

•87 

The  following  species,  viz.  : — 

E.  rostrata  E.  Maideni 

E.  viminalis  E.  Gunnii 

E.  Stuartiana  E.  goniocalyx 

and  perhaps  E.  Bauerleni 

yield   kinos   possessing   many   points   of    resemblance,    and   are 

grouped  together  provisionally. 

Eucalyptus  rostrata,  Schlecht.,  B.F1.  iii.  240. 

The  well-known  "  Red  Gum  "  of  Victoria  and  the  Murray  and 
Edwards  Rivers,  KS.W. 

The  kino  of  this  species  is  perhaps  the  best  known  of  all 
Eucalyptus  kinos,  chiefly  through  the  enterprise  of  Mr.  Joseph 
Bosisto,  of  Melbourne. 

It  is  a  useful  astringent,  and  it  seems  to  be  increasing  in 
favour  with  medical  men  in  England,  America,  and  Australia. 

The  official  kino  (Pterocarpics)  contains,  I  believe,  no  substance 
which  is  not  contained  in  this  and  some  allied  kinos,  for  which 
they  appear  to  be  a  perfect  substitute.  See  Pharm.  Journ.  [3], 
xx.  221,  321. 

The  kino  of  E.  rostrata  will  be  found  mentioned  in  all  modern 
works  on  Materia  Medica.  In  Martindale  and  Westcott's  Extra 
Pharmacopoeia,  for  instance,  we  have  the  following  : — "  E.  rostrata 
and  E.  corymbosa,  and  probably  other  species  imported  from 
Australia.     It  is   semi-translucent   and    garnet-coloured,    not   so 


BY   J.  H.  MAIDEN.  403 

dark  as,  but  resembling  kino  in  appearance,  soluble  in  water, 
tough,  difficult  to  powder  [not  correct  as  applied  to  these  two 
kinos,  J.  H.  M.],  it  adheres  to  the  teeth  when  chewed,  is  intensely 
astringent  to  the  mucous  membrane,  useful  in  diarrhoea,  relaxed 
throats,  and  given  with  success  to  check  the  purging  of  mercurial 
pills." 

But  the  following  statements  pertaining  to  the  percentage  of 
tannic  acid,  and  the  solubility,  are  somewhat  misleading,  since  I 
have  shown  the  enormous  variation  in  the  properties  of  kinos 
caused  by  age. 

11  Of  100  parts  90  are  dissolved  in  cold  water,  the  solution  being 
clear.  27  parts  of  isinglass  precipitate  all  the  astringent  matter." 
Squires'  Companion  to  the  B.P. 

Dr.  Wiesner  says  of  a  sample  : — "  Easily  soluble  in  water  and 
alcohol ;  solution  neutral,  free  from  gum-resin.  Broken  masses  of 
a  zircon-red,  sometimes  light  brown,  mixed  with  bits  of  dark." 

47.  "  Red  Gum;"  purchased  in  Sydney,  22nd  November,  1888. 
Of  Victorian  origin. 

In  lumps  up  to  the  size  of  peas,  though  angular.  Prevailing 
colour  purplish- brown.  Is  readily  powdered  between  the  fingers, 
forming  an  ochrey-brown  powder.  The  mass  of  kino  has  not  the 
brilliant  appearance  of  the  kinos  of  the  ruby  group,  owing  to  this 
friability. 

In  cold  water  it  dissolves  fairly  readily  and  almost  entirely  to  a 
reddish-brown  liquid. 

Its  composition  (determined  November,  1888)  is  : — 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ...     84*3 

Ligneous  matter,  &c 3 

Moisture  ...  ...  ...  ...     15*2 

Ash  ;         ...         -2 


100-00 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal)  46*22  per  cent. 
No.  47.  E.  rostrata,  var.     "  Creek  Gum,"  Tarella,  Wilcannia, 
23rd  August,  1887.     Diam.,  1-2  feet.     Height,  30-40  feet. 

27 


404  THB    EXAMINATION    OF    EUCALYPTUS    KINOS, 

Only  obtainable  in  rather  small  quantities,  and  in  rather  small 
pieces.     Pale,  as  kinos  go,  very  bright-looking,   and  of  a  ruby 
colour.     Powders   fairly   readily,   forming  a  powder  of   a   light 
brown  tint. 

It  dissolves  almost  immediately  to  a  pale  brownish  or  almost 
orange  solution,  leaving  a  sediment  of  a  whitish-salmon  colour, 
with  a  few  dark-coloured  particles,  like  those  of  E.  goniocalyx, 
only  cleaner  looking. 

Its  composition  (determined  October,  1888)  is  : — 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ...     82*7 

Ligneous  matter,  &c.       ...  ...  *6 

Moisture  ...         ...         ...         ...     15-8 

Ash  -9 


100-00 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal)  47*746  per  cent. 

Eucalyptus  viminalis,  Labill.  (Syn.  E.  fabrorum,  Schlecht.), 
B.F1.  iii.  239. 

Dr.  Wiesner  says  of  two  samples  of  kino  belonging  to  this 
species  : — "  E.  viminalis.  Only  partly  soluble  in  water,  with 
light  brown  colour;  contains  a  little  gum-resin.  Brittle,  like 
kino.  Add  hydrochloric  acid  to  the  solution,  then  ammonia,  a 
precipitate  is  obtained  which  blackens  in  the  air." 

"  E.  fabrorum.,  not  readily  soluble  in  water :  solution  yellowish, 
faintly  acid,  turbid  on  cooling;  contains  gum-resin.  Particles 
dark  black-red,  slightly  transparent  shiny  fracture." 

The  following  statement  occurs  in  the  Report  Intercol.  Exhib., 
Melbourne,  1861  : — "The  resin  (sic)  of  E.  viminalis  in  its  decom- 
posed state  furnishes  a  real  pigment." 

No.  48.  "Ribbony  Gum,"  "Manna  Gum."  This  is  a  variety  with 
bluish,  broad  leaves.  Quiedong,  near  N.S.W.  :  Victorian  border, 
26th  March,  1887.     Height,  60-80  feet.     Diam.,  3-4  feet. 

In  small  fragments,  prevailing  colour  reddish-brown  of  all 
depths  of  tint.  Bright-looking.  Easily  reducible  to  a  powder 
between  the  fingers.     Colour  of  powder  light  orange-brown. 


BY    J.  H.  MAIDEN.  405 

In  cold  water  it  forms  a  solution  of  an  orange-yellow  colour, 
something  like  linseed  oil.      Residue  of   a  pale  salmon  colour, 
with  a  few  dark  particles.     Of  the  strength  of  1  grm.  to  1  litre  a 
beautiful  clear  solution  of  a  dark  amber  colour  is  formed. 
Its  composition  (determined  October,  1888)  is  : — 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid    ...  ...   82*9 

Ligneous  matter,  &c.  ...  ...        -8 

Moisture       ...  ...  ...  ....   15-8 

Ash -5 


100-00 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal)  31*99  per  cent. 
No.  49.  A  sample  procured  by  me  from  Mt.  Victoria,  N.S.W., 
March,  1889,  was  perfectly  fresh,  and  some  of  it  was  even  treacly 
when  collected,  though  like  other  kinos  of  this  group  it  dries 
almost  immediately.  It  is  orange-brown  of  all  tints,  and  very 
crumbly,  new  as  it  is.  I  have  not  sufficient  for  a  complete 
investigation. 

It  was  from  a  tree  which  may  provisionally  be  known  as  the 
variety  multiflora  of  this  species. 

Messrs.  Heckel  &  Schlagdenhauffen  (op.  cit.,  p.  151)  have  ex- 
amined kinos  of  this  species  grown  in  the  South  of  France. 
Following  is  their  analysis  : — 

Eau  hygroscopique         ...  ...       7*083 

Cendres 0*250 

Tannin  et  catechine       ...  ...     92*667 


100*000 
on  which  they  make  the  following  remarks  : — 

"La  quantite  de  tannin  renfermee  dans  le  kino  d'  E.  viminalis 
est  extraordinairement  considerable,  et  semble  en  promettre  un 
emploi  industriel  assure." 

Eucalyptus  Stuartiana,  F.v.M.,  B.F1.  iii.  243. 

No.  50.  The  collector  of  this  kino,  Mr.  W.  Bauerlen,  states 
that  when  collecting  it  on   the   borders   of  Victoria  and   New 


406        THE  EXAMINATION  OP  EUCALYPTUS  KINOS, 

South  Wales,  some  ladies,  who  saw  him  thus  occupied,  assured 
him  that  they  knew  of  nothing  which  cleanses  the  teeth  so 
quickly  and  so  effectually  as  this  kino.  Its  friability  combined 
with  its  astringency  have  doubtless  secured  it  this  reputation  as 
a  dentifrice.     E.  rostala  kino  is  similarly  used  on  the  Murray. 

"Apple-tree,"  Quiedong,  24th  April,  1887.  Diam.,  3-4  feet. 
Height,  80-100  feet. 

This  is  a  comparatively  dull-looking  kino,  having  somewhat  the 
appearance  of  seed-lac,  and  the  particles  are  equally  variable  in 
point  of  colour.  Exceedingly  brittle  and  forming  a  powder  of  a 
dull  sienna-brown. 

In  twenty-four  hours  it  completely  disintegrates  under  water, 
forming  two  well-defined  layers.  The  sediment  is  of  an  ochrey- 
brown  colour,  while  the  supernatant  liquid  is  of  a  dark  reddish- 
brown.  The  behaviour  of  this  kino  is  very  much  the  same  as 
that  of  E.  viminalis. 

Its  composition  (determined  October,  1888)  is  : — 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ...  .  .     83-0 

Ligneous  matter,  &c.  ...  ...        1*0 

Moisture 15-3 

Ash  -7 


100-00 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal)  26-412  per  cent. 

Eucalyptus  Maideni,  F.v.M.,  in  P.L.S.KS.W.  [2],  iv.  1020. 
"  Blue  Gum  "  ;  called  also  "White  or  Spotted  Gum." 
Until  quite  recently  this  tree  had  been  only  cursorily  examined  ; 
it  was  for  many  years  looked  upon  as  E.  globulus,  and  surprise 
was  expressed  that  E.  globulus  had  such  a  wide  range  in  New 
South  Wales.  The  Eev.  Robert  Collie  found  it  several  years 
ago  between  Braiclwood  and  Araluen,  announced  it  to  be  E. 
globulus  (to  which,  indeed,  it  bears  much  resemblance),  and  this 
statement  has  been  copied  into  several  books.  Had  not  sucli 
prominence  been  given  to  the  statement,  it  would  not  now  be 


BY   J.  H.  MAIDEN.  407 

necessary  to  contradict  it  at  such  length.  To  be  specific,  E. 
globulus  does  not  occur  in  the  county  of  St.  Vincent,  or  so  far 
east ;  it  is  only  here  and  there,  and  then  sparsely,  found  on  the 
N.S.W.  side  of  the  Murray.  E.  Maideni  is  a  common  tree  on  the 
mountains  about  Araluen,  where  it  is  called  "  Blue  Gum."  E. 
globulus  has  been  specially  looked  for,  during  six  seasons,  from 
Shoalhaven  to  the  Victorian  border,  but  without  success,  and  the 
specimens  seen,  referred  to  E.  globulus  by  local  people,  all  belong 
to  the  species  named  E.  Maideni  by  Baron  von  Mueller. 

No.  51.  From  Colombo,  Candelo,  N.S.W.,  «  Blue  Gum." 
Height,  80  to  120  feet.     Diam.,  2  to  5  feet. 

This  sample  has  a  brighter  appearance  externally  than  the 
majority  of  kinos  belonging  to  this  group  ;  it  is  of  a  dark  sienna 
colour,  powders  readily  between  the  fingers,  the  powder  having  an 
ochrey  colour.  Dissolves  in  water  almost  entirely  to  a  dirty  brown 
colour,  the  water  remaining  very  turbid. 

Its  composition  (determined  August,  1891)  is  : — 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ...      79*75 

Ligneous  matter,  &c.       ...  ...       3*2 

Moisture 15*77 

Ash  1*28 


100  00 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal)  25*5  per  cent. 
No.  52.  "Blue  Gum,"  from  Bolaro  Mountain,  gathered  Sept., 
1890.     Height  of  tree,  150  feet.     Diam.,  2  feet. 
Resembles  previous  specimen  in  appearance. 

Eucalyptus  Gunnii,  Hook.,  B.F1.  iii.  246. 

No.  53.  The  kino  examined  is  from  a  variety  known  as  "  Flooded 
or  Bastard  Gum,"  and  was  obtained  from  Delegate,  near  the 
Victorian  border.  Collected  May,  1887.  Height  of  trees,  60-80 
feet.     Diam.,  2-3  feet. 

Appearance  and  friability  normal.  Cold  water  yields  a  pale 
orange  solution,  leaving  a  quantity  of  sediment  of  a  salmon  colour, 
in  which  are  interspersed  a  few  dark  coloured  particles. 


408  THE    EXAMINATION    OF    EUCALYPTUS    KINOS, 

Its  composition  (determined  October,  1888)  is: — 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ...     79*22 

Ligneous  matter,  &c.        ...  ...  "78 

Moisture  ...  ...  ...  ...     19-6 

Ash  -4 


100-00 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal)  34-032  per  cent. 

Eucalyptus  goniocalyx,  F.v.M.,  B.FL  iii.  229. 

Usually  known  as  "  Spotted  Gum  "  in  Victoria,  but  not  to  be 
confused  with  the  common  N.S.W.  "  Spotted  Gum  "  (E.  maculata). 

No.  54.  Specimen  of  kino  from  Bonang,  near  Delegate,  where 
the  tree  is  known  as  "  Mountain  Gum."  Height  of  trees,  100- 
180  feet.     Diam.,  4-8  feet.     Kino  collected  May,  1887. 

This  sample  is  the  dullest  looking  of  all  the  kinos  examined, 
friability  normal.  It  yields  a  brown  powder.  The  general  colour 
of  the  unground  portion  is  purplish-brown.  The  bulk  of  this 
sample  is  much  older  than  that  of  the  sample  of  E.  rostrata  (No. 
47),  but  specimens  taken  from  bulk  cannot  in  any  way  be  dis- 
tinguished from  it  from  outward  appearances. 

In  cold  water  it  forms  a  light  reddish-brown  turbid  liquid, 
leaving  a  muddy-looking  residue  of  a  salmon  colour  ;  like  most 
kinos  of  this  group,  it  is  exceedingly  tedious  to  extract  the  last 
portions  of  soluble  matter. 

Following  is  its  composition  (from  analysis  made  October, 
1888)  :— 

Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ...      76*02 

Ligneous  matter,  <kc.       ...  ...        1*02 

Moisture 22-1 

Ash  -86 


100-00 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal)  35-555  per  cent. 


BY   J.  H.  MAIDEN.  409 

Eucalyptus  Bauerleni,  F.v.M.  in  Victorian  Naturalist,  October, 

1890. 

No.  55.  This  species  is  confined  to  South-eastern  New  South 
Wales.  Sample  of  kino  obtained  from  Sugar-loaf  Mountain, 
Braid  wood,  N.S.W.,  September,  1890,  from  trees  40  feet  high, 
with  a  diameter  of  6  inches. 

A  fresh,  bright-looking  kino  of  a  reddish-brown  colour,  friability 
and  colour  of  powder  normal.  I  have  not  sufficient  kino,  at 
present,  to  make  a  complete  examination  of  it. 


The  kinos  of  the  following  species 

E.  punctata 

E.  longifolia 
differ  from  each  other,  and  appear  to  have  no  close  affinities  with 
any  of  the  previously  described  kinos. 

Eucalyptus  punctata,  DC. 

No.  56.  "  Grey  Gum  "  or  "  Leather-jacket."  The  Valley,  Blue 
Mountains,  N.S.W.,  3rd  April,  1888.  Height,  80  feet.  Diam., 
3  feet. 

This  kino,  especially  when  in  large  masses,  somewhat  resembles 
hepatic  aloes  in  appearance,  but  it  is  far  more  brittle  than  that 
substance,  crumbling  without  much  difficulty  by  pressure  of  the 
fingers.  Its  colour  may  be  described  as  of  very  dark  brown,  with 
a  slight  orange  tint,  and  comparing  it  with  still  another  substance, 
one  from  the  mineral  kingdom,  it  is  much  like  the  so-called 
melanite  garnets  from  Franklin,  New  Jersey,  U.S.A.  The 
colour  of  this  and  many  other  gums,  resins,  &c,  cannot  be 
distinctively  described  without  making  a  comparison  with  the 
tint  of  some  well-known  substance.  The  powder  is  of  an  ochre 
colour,  slightly  more  brown  than  Oxford  ochre. 

When  freshly  gathered  it  has  a  vinous  odour,  somewhat  similar 
to,  but  less  powerful  than  that  of  the  kino  of  E.  maculata.  I 
happened  to  tap  quite  a  reservoir  of  8  or  lOIbs.  of  this  kino,  which 


410  THE    EXAMINATION    OF    EUCALYPTUS    KINOS, 

was  as  fluid  as  molasses  at  first,  but  on  a  few  moments'  exposure 
to  the  air  it  hardened,  and  became  quite  brittle. 

In  cold  water  the  bottom  layer  of  liquid  is  of  a  rich  reddish- 
brown,  the  rest  of  the  liquid  becoming,  by  diffusion,  of  the  colour 
of  olive  oil.     Abundant  sediment. 

Following   is   the   composition   of  this   kino    (analyses    made 
October,  1888). 

Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ...  ...     81*3 

Ligneous  matter,  &c.         ...  ...         '9 

Moisture 17-6 

Ash  -2 


100-00 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal)  31-99  per  cent. 
No.  57.  Cambewarra  (Bangley  Creek),  21st  and  27th  April, 
1888.     Height,  50-60  feet.     Diam.,  2-3  feet. 

The  collector  of  this  specimen  said,  "  the  kino  of  this  Eucalypt 
is  very  rare,  and  very  seldom  shows 'itself  outside  on  the  tree  ;  it 
usually  collects  in  blisters  under  the  bark,  and  those  blisters  are 
mostly  on  the  branches  or  high   up  on  the  stem."      My  own 
experience    is    that,    while    this   is   not   a   plentiful    kino,    one 
occasionally  comes  upon   masses  containing   several  pounds,  by 
following  a  fissure  in  the  bark,  near  the  ground.     The  present 
sample  has  evidently  remained  long  on  the  trees,  and  is  therefore 
of  a  dull  colour  for  the  most  part,  but  individual   pieces  are 
exactly   described    by   the    description    already    given    of    the 
preceding  specimen. 

No.  58.  Bangley  Creek,   Cambewarra,   May  and  June,    1888. 
The  descriptioD  of  No.  57  will  apply  here. 

Analysis  of  this  kino  (made  October,  1888)  gave  : — 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ...  ...     81*8 

Ligneous  matter,  &c.  ...  ...  *4 

Moisture 17*5 

Ash  -3 


100-00 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal)  34-031  per  cent. 


BY   J.  H.  MAIDEN.  411 

Eucalyptus  longifolia,  Link  et  Otto,  B.F1.  iii.  226. 

No.  59.  Usually  known  as  "  Woolly  Butt."  "  The  timber 
often  traversed  by  kino-sediments"  (Mueller).  Specimen  of  kino 
from  Dromedary  Mountain,  Tilba  Tilba,  N.S.W.,  where  it  is 
locally  known  as  "Peppermint."  Collected  13th  September,  1889. 
Height,  80-100  feet.     Diam.,  2  to  6  feet. 

This  kino  is  dull  looking,  and  of  a  dark  brown  colour,  it  does 
not  powder  readily  between  the  fingers,  it  has  a  very  bright 
fracture. 

It  dissolves  almost  entirely  in  water,  the  liquid  remaining  very 
turbid.  In  alcohol  the  colour  is  lighter  than  in  the  majority  of 
kinos  of  this  group ;  the  appearance  of  turbid  kinos  when  dissolved 
in  alcohol  is,  however,  often  so  much  alike,  that  it  is  sometimes 
difficult  to  point  out  any  distinction  in  their  behaviour  in  this 
solvent. 

Analysis  (made  August,  1891)  gives  : — 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid 
Ligneous  matter,  &c. 
Moisture  ... 
Ash  

10000 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal)  19 '5  per  cent. 


77-76 

2-0 

19-83 

•41 

11  Bloodwood"  Provisional  Sub-Group. 
including : — 

E.  cormybosa,  E.  tessellaris  appears  to  connect 

E.  terminalis,  this  group  with 

E.  eximia,  E.  maculata  and 

E.  clavigera,  E.  microcorys. 

Eucalyptus  corymbosa,  Smith,  B.F1.  iii.  256. 

"  Bloodwood."  This  tree  is  perhaps  as  fortunate  in  its  ver- 
nacular name  as  any  of  the  Eucalypts.  When  freshly  exuded, 
the  kino  has  all  the  appearance  of  a  stream  of  blood,  and  so  freely 


412  THE    EXAMINATION    OF    EUCALYPTUS    KINOS, 

does  it  flow  that  sometimes  the  appearance  of  the  ground  at  the 
foot  of  one  of  these  trees  is  quite  startling.  It  dries  almost 
immediately,  except  in  damp  weather,  becoming  exceedingly 
brittle.  When  freshly  exuded  it  has  a  distinct  smell,  which  as 
far  as  I  know,  is  characteristic,  and  soon  recognised.  It  is 
something  of  a  vinous  odour.  Much  of  the  kino  exuded  becomes 
entangled  in  the  scaly  porous  bark,  but  one  frequently  comes 
across  quite  a  store  of  the  substance  through  tapping  the  com- 
munication with  a  reservoir  which  has  collected  behind  the  bark, 
or  between  the  concentric  circles  of  the  wood ;  the  passage  gets 
choked  up  with  indurated  kino,  but  picking  off  the  substance  often 
causes  the  stream  to  flow  afresh. 

Lindley  (Vegetable  Kingdom,  p.  737),  says,  "  E.  robusta  contains 
large  cavities  in  its  stem,  between  the  annual  concentric  circles  of 
wood,  filled  with  a  most  beautiful  red  or  rich  vermilion  coloured 
gum."  This  description  can  only  apply  to  E.  corymbosa,  as  the 
very  fresh  kino  is  of  an  exceedingly  brilliant  colour,  approaching 
to  vermilion,  but  with  a  tinge  of  purple  in  it.  So  bright  is  even 
the  old  kino,  that  I  believe  I  can  infallibly  recognise  the  produce 
of  this  species  by  this  colour  test  alone. 

"  That  (kino)  from  a  species  called  '  Blood-tree '  is  heated  (sic) 
in  sheds  (sic)  by  the  blacks  of  Lake  Macquarie,  New  South  Wales, 
and  applied  to  external  wounds  to  make  them  heal."  (Curtis' 
Bot.  Mag.,  Vol.  69,  4036). 

"  This  kino  is  chiefly  obtained  by  wood-cutters,  being  found  in  a 
viscid  state  in  flattened  cavities  in  the  wood,  and  soon  becoming 
inspissated,  hard  and  brittle.  Minor  quantities  are  procured  in  a 
liquid  state  by  incising  the  bark  of  living  trees,  forming  a  treacly 
fluid  yielding  35  per  cent,  of  solid  kino  on  evaporation."  (Lock, 
Sporis  Encyclopedia).  This  35  per  cent,  is  absurdly  small,  as  the 
kino  inspissates  immediately ;  95  to  99  per  cent,  of  solid  kino 
would  be  better.  I  would  also  point  out  that  the  kino  collected 
from  the  outside  is  usually  the  best,  as  that  which  settles  in  the 
cavities  is  frequently  contaminated  with  ligneous  matter  in  a  fine 
state  of  division  (the  exuviae  of  various  larvae),  which  reduces  its 
solubility. 


BY   J.  H.  MAIDEN.  413 

Staiger  (Queensland  Cat.  Col.  and  Ind.  Exh.,  1886)  says  of  a 
sample  of  this  kino,  "  59-03  insoluble  in  water,  10-82  soluble  in 
alcohol,  leaving  48-21  per  cent.,  which  "was  mostly  soluble  in 
caustic  soda.  This  insoluble  substance  was  intensely  black,  and 
was  partly  derived  from  altered  kino-tannin,  and  partly  from 
other  substances  not  yet  thoroughly  investigated." 

Dr.  Bancroft  observes  that,  owing  to  the  ready  friability  of  this 
kino,  it  is  very  suitable  for  powders  and  pills.  It  is  given  in 
doses  from  2  to  10  grains. 

Dr.  Wiesner  (loc.  cit.)  says,  "Of  all  samples  received  most 
readily  soluble  in  water.  Solution  deep  blood -red ;  smells  dis- 
tinctly like  Bordeaux  wine,  slightly  acid,  turbid  on  cooling,  free 
from  gum-resin.  Bright  shining  surface  of  fresh  fracture  of 
lumps.     Colour  deep  red." 

No.  60.  Cambewarra,  August,  1886.  Diam.,  3-4  feet.  Height, 
80-100  feet. 

This  sample  is  in  irregular  pieces  as  large  as  the  fist.  Before 
they  have  been  bruised  they  have  the  appearance  of  a  very 
pulverulent,  purplish-red  hsematite  (such,  for  instance,  as  is  com- 
mon in  the  Elba  mines).  To  say  that  it  resembles  a  low-grade 
dragon's  blood  also  gives  a  very  good  idea  of  its  appearance.  It 
readily  makes  an  impalpable  powder  of  a  Venetian  red  colour, 
soiling  everything  with  which  it  comes  into  contact. 

Bloodwood  kino  can  be  delivered  in  Sydney  for  about  3d.  per 
lb.,  and  there  is  no  doubt  that  it  is  a  cheap  and  efficient  substitute 
for  the  lower  grades  of  dragon's  blood.  Both  the  aqueous  and 
alcoholic  solutions  (especially  the  latter)  form  good  wood-stains. 
Experts  will  probably  pronounce  the  colour  to  be  too  fiery,  but  it 
can  be  brought  to  the  required  tint  by  admixture  with  burnt 
sienna  or  vandyke  brown. 

This  specimen  was  from  a  very  old  tree,  and  one  nearly  dead. 
It  was  not  obtained  by  wounding  the  stem,  but  was  found  caked 
in  large  masses  between  the  trunk  and  the  bark. 

With  cold  water  it  forms  a  rich  garnet-col ou reel  liquid  at  the 
bottom  of  the  vessel  if  undisturbed.       As  diffusion  proceeds,  the 


414        THE  EXAMINATION  OF  EUCALYPTUS  KINOS, 

remainder  of  the  liquid  is  of  an  amber  colour *  sediment  of  a  very 
dark  red,  and  powdery.     Alcohol  yields  a  very  bright  red  liquid. 

It  was  analysed  October,  1888,  with  the  following  result : — 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ...     68*42 

Ligneous  matter,  &c.       ...  ...     16*38 

Moisture  ...  ...  ...  ...     14*7 

Ash  *5 


100-00 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal)  45-714  per  cent. 

No.  61.  The  Valley,  Springwood,  Blue  Mountains,  N.S.W. 
2nd  April,  1888.     Diam.,  1  foot.     Height,  50  feet. 

This  sample  was  also  obtained  from  the  concentric  layers  of  a 
tree.  When  removed  it  was  slightly  plastic,  and  of  a  dark  crimson 
colour,  reminding  one  strikingly  of  a  candied  fruit  jam.  When 
fresh  (and  for  some  weeks  afterwards)  it  had  a  vinous  odour. 

It  behaves  to  cold  water  in  the  same  manner  as  the  preceding 
specimen,  except  that  the  colour  is  much  brighter  looking.     Alcohol 
yields  a  very  bright  red  liquid. 

It  was  analysed  October,  1888,  with  the  following  result : — 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ...     63-18 

Ligneous  matter,  &c.       ...  ...     20*12 

Moisture  ...  ...  ...  ...      16*3 

Ash  *4 


100*00 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal)  36*053  per  cent. 
No.  62.  The  Valley,  Blue  Mountains,  3rd  April,  1888. 

This  kino  was  an  outward  exudation.  It  is  rich  coloured,  and 
so  excessively  brittle  that  the  vessel  containing  it  readily  becomes 
coated  with  a  fine  powder.  In  large  masses  it  is  of  a  purplish-red 
colour,  while  the  powder  inclines  strongly  to  Indian-red.  The 
colour  of  this  kino  when  freshly  exuded  had  all  the  brilliancy 
already  described,  but  it  tones  down  somewhat  on  keeping. 


BY   J.  H.  MAIDEN.  415 

With  cold  water  the  solution  is  the  same  as  that  of  No.  60  as 
far  as  colour  is  concerned,  but  the  sediment  instead  of  being 
powdery,  is  of  a  gelatinous  consistence,  and  may  be  drawn  out 
into  threads.     Alcohol  yields  a  bright  red  liquid. 

It  was  analysed  October,  1888,  with  the  following  result: — 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ...     82*4 

Ligneous  matter ...  ...  ...        1*1 

Moisture ...     16-1 

Ash  -4 


100-00 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal)  56*888  per  cent. 

Eucalyptus  terminalis,  F.v.M.,  B.F1.  Hi.  257. 

No.  63.  "Bloodwood"  of  the  interior  of  N.S.W.  Whitta- 
branah,  Tibooburra,  N.S.W.  29th  October,  1887.  Height,  30-40 
feet.     Diam.,  1-2  feet. 

This  tree  is  for  the  most  part  sparsely  distributed,  and  then 
only  on  rivers  and  creeks ;  also  very  few  trees  exude  kino,  and 
then  only  in  small  quantity.  This  sample  has  quite  freshly 
exuded.  It  is  in  very  small  fragments  with  attached  bark.  It  is 
of  a  pale  ruby  colour,  and  very  bright  looking.  It  is  readily 
reducible  to  a  powder  between  the  fingers.  Colour  of  powder 
dark  salmon.     It  has  a  slight  vinous  smell. 

In  cold  water  it  yields  a  pale  orange-brown  liquid  with  a  light 
brown  sediment,  in  appearance  much  like  (though  lighter  than) 
some  specimens  of  E.  corymbosa  kino. 

It  was  analysed  August,  1891,  with  the  following  result : — 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid   ..  ...     85*3 

Ligneous  matter,  &c.         ...  ...       1*3 

Moisture 13-2 

Ash  -2 


100-0 
Tannic    acid   determination   (Lowenthal),   63*5  per  cent.,  the 
highest  percentage  obtained  during  these  investigations. 


416  THE    EXAMINATION    OF    EUCALYPTUS    KINOS, 

Eucalyptus  eximia,  Schauer,  B.F1.  iii.  258. 

No.  64.  "  Mountain  or  Yellow  Blood  wood."  The  Valley,  near 
Spring  wood,  N.S.W. ;  collected  April,  1888.  Height  of  tree, 
70-80  feet ;  diam.,  1-2  feet. 

This  kino  is  bright  looking,  much  resembling  the  better  samples 
of  E.  corymbosa  kino,  but  the  colour  of  the  powder  at  once  dis- 
tinguishes it  from  that  kino,  the  powder  of  E.  eximia  being  of  a 
dark  buff  colour,  slightly  darker  than  the  majority  of  kinos  of 
this  group.  The  soft  friable  nature  of  the  bark  of  this  tree  makes 
the  collection  of  the  kino  a  matter  of  difficulty,  and  it  appears 
never  to  exude  abundantly.  In  water  it  does  not  wholly  dissolve ; 
the  liquid  on  standing  becomes  quite  clear  and  transparent  and  of 
an  amber  colour. 

It  was  analysed  August,  1891,  with  the  following  result : — 

Catechin  and  tannic  acid             ...  8441 

Ligneous  matter,  <fcc.       ...          ...  3'2 

Moisture 11-99 

Ash           -4 


100-00 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal),  47-5  per  cent. 

Eucalyptus  clavigera,  A.  Cunn.,  B.F1.  iii.  250. 

No.  65.  Kino  received  November,  1889,  from  Baron  von 
Mueller,  who  obtained  it  from  Arnhem's  Land,  North  Australia. 

Bright  looking,  deep  reddish- brown  in  colour.  Friability  and 
colour  of  powder  normal. 

In  water  it  does  not  wholly  dissolve,  the  catechin  remaining  as 
a  yellow  powder.  On  standing,  the  water  becomes  clear  and 
transparent  and  of  a  bright  amber  colour. 

Following  is  the  analysis  (made  August,  1891)  of  this  kino  : — 


BY    J.  H.  MAIDEN. 

Catechin  and  tannic  acid 

..     85-98 

Ligneous  matter,  &c. 

1-1 

Moisture  ... 

...     12-63 

Ash           

•29 

417 


100-00 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal),  44  per  cent. 

Eucalyptus  tessellaris,  Hook.,  B.F1.  iii.  251. 

"Moreton  Bay  Ash."  This  kino  has  the  property  of  exuding 
of  a  dark  brown  treacle  colour,  and  soon  becoming  black  without 
any  tint  of  red.  According  to  Mr.  Staiger,  quoted  by  Dr. 
Bancroft,  it  has  a  specific  gravity  of  1*35  and  contains  71*7  per 
cent  of  matter  soluble  in  boiling  water,  and  on  cooling  the  solution 
becomes  turbid  and  deposits  catechin.  The  portion  insoluble  in 
water  is  soluble  in  alcohol,  and  the  residue,  when  treated  with 
ether,  leaves  a  dark  coloured  brittle  mass  identical  with  shellac, 
possessing  the  same  qualities  both  technically  and  chemically,* 
and  giving  a  good  French  polish  of  a  rather  darker  colour  than 
the  usual  commercial  article.  This  shellac  constitutes  about  one- 
fifth  of  the  entire  gum  ;  it  is  insoluble  in  benzine,  kerosene  and 
the  essential  oils.  The  portion  dissolved  by  ether  forms  a  pliable, 
reddish,  transparent  mass,  which  does  not  become  dry,  even  after 
four  or  five  days. 

No.  66.  "  Moreton  Bay  Ash."  "  Wonkara  "  of  Pt.  Curtis. 
Received  from  Mr.  F.  M.  Bailey,  Colonial  Botanist,  Queensland, 
24th  July,  1891. 

This  kino  is  of  a  reddish-brown  colour,  is  easily  powdered 
between  the  fingers,  and  the  powder  is  of  a  light  yellow  colour. 
Its  general  appearance  at  once  indicates  the  group  to  which  it 
belongs.  Its  behaviour  in  water  is  much  the  same  as  that  of  E. 
maculata.  It  was  analysed  August,  1891,  with  the  following 
result : — 

*  This  is  erroneous.  The  resin  is  not  more  than  a  trace  (I  can  find  none 
in  my  sample),  but  the  catechin  under  some  circumstances  has  a  resinous 
appearance. 


418  THE   EXAMINATION   OF    EUCALYPTUS    KINOS, 


Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ... 

...     82-1 

Ligneous  matter,  <fec. 

...       2-1 

Moisture    ... 

...     H-9 

Ash             

•9 

100-0 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal),  55-5  per  cent. 

Eucalyptus  maculata,  Hook.,  B.F1.  iii.  258. 

The  "  Spotted  Gum  "  of  New  South  Wales  and  Queensland. 

I  am  only  aware  of  the  existence  of  two  previous  analyses  of 
this  kino,  but  they  differ  exceedingly,  and  in  the  absence  of  the 
fullest  details  of  the  kinos,  one  cannot  institute  comparisons 
between  them. 

According  to  Mr.  Staiger  (quoted  in  Dr.  J.  Bancroft's  "  Contri- 
butions to  Pharmacy  from  Queensland  "),  "  this  kino  is  entirely 
soluble  in  boiling  water  to  the  extent  of  60  per  cent.  It  contains 
benzoic  acid  in  an  impure  state,  and  catechin.  The  gum  insoluble 
in  water  is  of  a  sticky  nature.  When  dissolved  in  alcohol,  and 
the  solution  evaporated  in  the  air  without  artificial  aid,  a  sticky, 
clear,  reddish-brown,  tasteless  gum  remained.  If  this  is  treated 
with  ether,  the  sticky  part  of  the  gum  goes  into  solution,  and  a 
dry,  clear,  reddish,  tasteless  gum  remains  possessing  the  qualities  of 
shellac." 

Mr.  F.  N.  Grimwade  (JPharm.  Journ.  [3],  xvi.,  1102)says  of  a 
sample,  "Soluble  in  rectified  spirit  to  the  extent  of  80*85  per 
eent. ;  cold  water  dissolved  18*9  per  cent.  Warm  water  extracted 
'  a  slightly  higher  percentage.'  The  amount  of  volatile  constituents 
was  determined  to  be  about  7*07  per  cent.,  and  consisted  almost 
entirely  of  water,  with  the  merest  trace  of  a  volatile  oil,  to  which 
the  peculiar  aromatic  odour,  strongly  resembling  styrol,  possessed 
by  the  gum,  is  due.  By  steam  distilling  2  or  3  drops  of  this  oil 
were  obtained  from  about  three-quarters  of  a  pound  of  gum.  '  I 
found  no  trace  of  either  benzoic  or  cinnamic  acids  in  the  gum.' 

"  The  tannic  acid  was  found  to  be  nearly  allied  to  if  not 
identical  with  querco-tannic  acid,  giving  the  blue-black  precipitate 


BY    J.  H.  MAIDEN.  419 

with  ferric  chloride,  which  is  readily  distinguished  from  the  dirty 
green  precipitate  produced  by  kino-tannic  acid,  the  variety  exist- 
ing in  the  B.P.  kino.     Percentage  of  tannic  acid,  10  per  cent." 

Dr.  Wiesner  says,  "  E.  citriodora*  Hook.,  easily  soluble  in 
water ;  solution  faintly  acid,  smells  like  Bordeaux  wine,  yellow 
colour,  turbid  on  cooling.  Porous  lumps  with  greenish  lustre  like 
Socrotine  aloes;  mixed  with  bark." 

"  E.  maculata,  Hook.     Exactly  like  the  last." 

This  is  one  of  the  kinos  mentioned  as  quite  suitable  for  replacing 
the  official  kino  in  Spon's  Encyc.  of  Industrial  Arts.  It  is,  how- 
ever, an  unfortunate  statement  as  regards  this  species,  chiefly  on 
account  of  its  colour. 

The  kino  from  Cambewarra  has  quite  a  strong  odour,  something 
like  decomposing  apples  or  pears,  or  perhaps  like  a  not  perfectly 
sweet  wine  cask.  But  while  the  smell  is  hard  to  describe,  it  is 
easily  recognised,  and  it  appears  to  be  characteristic. 

That  from  New  England  has  a  smell  similar  to  that  which 
common  resin  gives  out  when  held  in  the  warm  hand,  while  the 
other  two  samples  have  very  faint  aromatic  odours.  They  all 
can  be  crushed  between  the  fingers  into  a  fine  powder. 

No.  67.  Kino  from  Cambewarra,  collected  August,  1886. 
Height,  100-120  feet.  Diarn.,  3-4  feet.  Distinctly  the  darkest 
and  most  opaque  looking  of  all  the  samples  of  this  kino  examined, 
with  the  exception  of  some  fragments  of  No.  70.  It  is  exceed- 
ingly brittle,  even  when  in  compact  masses.  The  fracture  is 
fairly  bright,  and  shows  a  greasy  lustre.  Colour,  olive-brown  to 
reddish-brown.  Forms  a  dull-looking  powder  of  an  olive-brown 
colour. 

In  cold  water  it  forms  a  yellow  solution  of  the  tint  of  fresh  and 
pure  olive  oil,  leaving  a  resinoid  catechin  residue  of  a  dirty 
brownish  colour,  very  like  soft  toffee  in  appearance  and  with  the 
odour  already  referred  to.  On  long  continued  digestion  with 
water  it  loses  its  resinoid  texture  and  almost  entirely  dissolves. 

*  Now  considered  to  be  a  variety  of  E.  maculata. 
28 


420  THE    EXAMINATION    OF    EUCALYPTUS    KINOS, 

Water  at  100°  C  (1  grm.  to  1  litre)  yields  a  browner  solution  than 
No.  68  and  very  turbid.  Alcohol  (to  form  tincture  B.P.  strength) 
yields  an  olive-brown  solution,  with  a  dark  olive-brown  muddy 
residue,  consisting  largely  of  ligneous  matter,  and  accompanied 
by  a  sticky  substance.  In  ether  a  small  percentage  dissolves, 
and  a  lemon-yellow  liquid  is  formed.  The  substance  which  gives 
the  kino  its  odour  is  entirely  taken  up  by  the  ether. 

Following  is  an  analysis,  made  October,  1888,  of  this  kino: — 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ...      84-25 

Ligneous  matter,  ike.        ...  ...        1*95 

Moisture 12*9 

Ash  -9 


100-00 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal)  46*222  per  cent. 

No.  68.  A  specimen  from  New  England,  N.S.W.,  received 
1886.  A  bright  looking  sample.  It  is  third  in  depth  of  tint. 
Is  excessively  brittle,  and  of  a  light  olive-brown  colour.  Colour 
of  powder  light  dirty  yellowish-brown,  inclining  to  raw  sienna. 

The  description  of  the  action  of  cold  wTater  on  No.  69  applies 
to  this  one,  with  the  exception  that  the  difficultly  soluble  particles 
of  this  kino  display  less  tendency  to  aggregate.  The  liquid  is 
darker  in  colour,  being  about  intermediate  between  Nos.  67  and 
69.  Continued  treatment  with  water  deprives  it  of  its  viscid 
nature,  and  almost  entirely  dissolves  it.  Water  at  100°  C  (1 
grm.  to  1  litre)  yields  an  amber-coloured  liquid,  slightly  brown  and 
slightly  turbid. 

It  was  analysed  October,  1888,  with  the  following  result : — 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ...     86 75 

Ligneous  matter,  &c.       ...  ...  *4 

Moisture 12*7 

Ash  -15 


100-00 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal)  51 -809  per  cent. 


BY    J.   H.  MAIDEN.  421 

No.  69.  Sample  received    from    Mr.    Charles   Moore,   Botanic 
Gardens,  Sydney,  29th  December,  1887. 

This  sample    is    the   lightest    in    colour    and    most    vesicular. 
Colour  sienna-brown  with  a  tinge  of  olive.      Colour  of   powder 
raw  sienna. 

Cold  water  yields  a  solution  of  the  tint  of  fresh  and  pure  olive 
oil ;  the  residue,  of  the  colour  and  consistence  of  plastic  sulphur, 
and  adheres  only  very  slightly  to  the  vessel. 

Treatment    with    hot    water   dissolves    this    substance    rather 
readily,  leaving  a  very  small  quantity  of    dirty  yellowish-white 
powder.     Water  at   100°   C  (1    grm.   to    I   litre)   yields   a  very 
turbid  liquid  of  a  very  light  yellowish  tint. 

It  was  analysed  October,  1888,  with  the  following  result: — 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid  .. .  ..      84 '9 

Ligneous  matter,  &c.         ...  ...  -9 

Moisture     ...  ...  ...  ...      14-0 

Ash  "2 


100-00 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal)  30*984  per  cent. 
No*.   70.  Sample    received    from    Mr.    F.   M.    Bailey,   Colonial 
Botanist,  Queensland,  February,  1888. 

Second  in  depth  of  tint,  very  like  No.  67,  but  slightly  lighter. 
To  cold  water  it  yields  a  lemon-coloured  solution  rather  paler 
than  any  of  the  others.  To  water  at  100°  C  it  yields  a  light 
brownish  liquid,  very  turbid  and  very  difficult  to  completely 
dissolve.  Alcohol  (B.P.  tincture  strength)  yields  a  very  dark 
olive-brown  liquid. 

It  was  analysed,  October,  1888,  with  the  following  result : — 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ^..  ...      81*3 

Ligneous  matter,  &c.  ..  ...        2-0 

Moisture 10-3 

Ash  6-4 


100-00 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal)  27-926  per  cent. 


422  THE    EXAMINATION    OF    EUCALYPTUS    KINOS, 

No.  71.  Kino  from  Nowra,  gathered   March,   1888.     Height, 
60-80  feet.     Diam.,  1-2  feet. 

The  trees  yielding  this  sample  had  been  recently  ringbarked, 
and   bush  fires  had  recently  passed   through  the  locality.     The 
flow  of  kino  was  copious.     This  sample  is  exceedingly  like  No. 
69   as  far  as  outward   appearance  goes,  though  its  odour  is  as 
powerful  as  No.  67. 

It  is  the  most  readily  soluble  in  cold  water  of  all  the  samples 
of    this  species  examined,  nevertheless  it  behaves  much  in  the 
same  way  as  No.  67.     Water  at  100°  C  (1  grm.  to  1  litre)  yields  a 
perfectly  clear  bright  amber-coloured  liquid.     Alcohol  yields  an 
olive-brown  liquid. 

It  was  analysed  August,  1891,  with  the  following  result : — 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ...  <..     83-0 

Ligneous  matter,  &c.         ...  ...         "2 

Moisture    ...  ...  ...  ...     16 '6 

Ash  -2 


100-00 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lo  wen  thai)  53 -5  per  cent. 

Eucalyptus  microcorys,  F.v.M.,  B.F1.  iii.  212. 

No.  72.  "The  Tallow-wood"  of  New  South  Wales,  called 
"  Turpentine  "  in  Queensland,  but  not  to  be  confused  with  the 
New  South  Wales  Turpentine  ( Syncarjria).  Sample  of  kino  from 
New  England,  N.S.W.,  received  1886. 

Kino  of  this  species  is  less  vesicular  than  that  of  E.  maculata, 
but  almost  as  readily  reducible  to  a  powder.  This  particular 
specimen  is  in  small  pieces,  for  the  most  part  of  the  size  of  currants. 
In  bulk  it  looks  remarkably  like  a  parcel  of  uncut  garnets.  Owing 
to  its  friability,  the  bright  fractures  become  dulled  with  very  little 
friction.     Colour  of  powder  orange-brown. 

To  cold  water  a  yellow  solution  is  yielded,  with  a  slight  tinge 
of  brown,  having  a  turbid  residue  of  a  dirty  yellow  colour  with  a 


BY    J.  H.  MAIDEN. 


423 


few   black    or   dirty    particles.       Eventually   almost    everything 
dissolves,  with  the  exception  of  a  little  accidental  impurity. 


It  was  analysed  October,  1888,  with  the 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ... 

following  result 
...     81-2 

Resin 

Ligneous  matter,  &c. 

Moisture     ... 

Ash             

. . .    trace 
•4 

...     18-1 
•3 

llowing  result 

.     76-39 

•8 

•87 

.     20-4 

.       1-54 

100-0 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal),  54*349  per  cent. 

No.   73.    A  sample  from   Uralba,  Wardell,  N.S.W.,   collected 
May,  1891,  has  also  been  examined.     It  is  a  new  sample  with  no 
important  differences  from  the  foregoing. 
It  was  analysed  August,  1891,  with  the  fol 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid 
Resin 

Ligneous  matter,  &c. 
Moisture  ... 
Ash  

100-00 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal J,  50*45  per  cent. 
The  presence  of  resin  in  a  weighable  quantity  in  this  kino  is 
worthy  of  notice. 

No.  74.  Two  samples  from  Queensland,  received  from  Mr.  F. 
M.  Bailey,  F.L.S.,  Colonial  Botanist. 

The  physical  description  of  the  preceding  sample  will  apply  here. 

In  cold  water  the  layer  at  the  bottom  of  the  vessel  becomes,  if 
undisturbed,  of  the  colour  of  treacle.  The  tint  is  precisely  the  same 
as  that  of  a  guaranteed  sample  of  Pterocarpus  marsupium  kino 
received  from  India.  It  leaves  a  small  quantity  of  a  brown 
residue  which  produces  turbidity  if  disturbed. 

Water  at  100°  C.  (1  grm.  to  1  litre),  yields  a  beautifully  clear 
solution  of  the  colour  of  colza  oil.  This  remark  applies  also  to 
the  preceding  sample. 


424  THE    EXAMINATION    OF    EUCALYPTUS    KINOS, 

It  was  analysed  October,  18S8,  with  the  following  result 
Catechin  and  tannic  acid  ..  ...     82  1 


Resin 

Ligneous  matter,  ttc. 

Moisture     ... 

Ash  


trace 

•5 

17*2 

•9 


100-0 
Tannic  acid  determination  (Lowenthal),  56*888  per  cent. 

Mr.  Staiger  says  of  a  Queensland  sample  of  this  kino  : — "  The 
specific  gravity  is  about  1*395,  and  the  percentage  of  tannin  53*33. 
The  solution  in  water  when  evaporated  yields  brownish  scales." 


Kinos  not  examined  by  me,  yet,  from  the  experiments  of  others, 
evidently  falling  in  the  Turbid  Group. 

Eucalyptus  calophylla,  R.  Br.,  B.F1.  iii.  255. 
"  Red  Gum  "  of  Western  Australia. 

Dr.  Wiesner  says  of  this  kino  : — "  Readily  soluble  in  water  ; 
solution  yellow,  slightly  acid,  becomes  turbid  on  cooling,  free  from 
gum-resin.     Irregular  grains,  light  brown  or  red." 

Baron  von  Mueller  says  : — "  Kino-liquid  of  treacle  consistence 
is  obtained  in  considerable  quantity  by  tapping  the  tree ;  it  is 
caught  in  casks  as  material  for  tanning  and  dyeing  purposes,  and 
fetches  from  £20  to  .£25  per  ton  in  the  London  market.  This 
liquid  indurates,  and  can,  like  the  dry  kino  of  this  and  other 
Eucalypts,  be  used  also  medicinally"  ( Eucalyptographia ).  Soluble 
to  the  extent  of  70*80  per  cent,  in  cold  water  (Mueller). 

This  species  is  mainly  alluded  to  in  the  following  passages,  but 
the  remarks  apply  equally  well  to  many  other  species. 


BY    J.  H.  MAIDEN.  425 

11  Botany  Bay  (sic)  kino,  the  'Reel  Gum'  of  Western  Australia* 
(Gummi  rubrum),  is  the  produce  of  several  species  of  Eucalyptus 
(especially  of  E.  resinifera^  Smith),  which  are  widely  distributed 
throughout  the  Australian  coutinent. 

"  In  physical  characters  and  medical  properties  it  is  nearly  allied 
to  kino.  It  has  been  introduced  into  British  practice  by  Sir 
Ronald  Martin,  who  has  found  it  very  effectual  in  the  treatment 
of  chronic  bowel  complaints  of  invalids  from  India,  but  more 
especially  in  the  chronic  dysentery  of  Europeans.  He  regards  it 
as  less  directly  astringent,  and  more  demulcent  than  catechin  or 
kino.  It  has  been  highly  reported  of  by  several  officers  who  have 
served  in  Western  Australia,  where  the  tree  yielding  it  is  abun- 
dant. .  .  .  The  drug  possesses  additional  interest  to  the 
practitioner  in  India,  from  the  fact  that  several  species  of  Eucalyptus 
have  become  naturalised  on  the  Neilgherries,  and  other  high  lands 
of  India  "  (Waring,  Pharm.  of  India). 

This  kino  is  probably  alluded  to  in  the  following  passage  : — 

"  Red  Gum. — A  gum  has  been  imported  under  this  name  from 
Western  Australia,  a  specimen  of  which  was  laid  on  the  table  of 
the  Pharmaceutical  Society,  5th  March,  1862.  We  call  attention 
to  this  astringent  gum  as  it  is  again  being  tried  medicinally." 
Pharm.  Journ.  [2]  iv.  40. 

Eucalyptus  globulus,  Labill.,  B.F1.  iii.  225. 

The  "  Blue  Gum  "  of  Victoria  and  Tasmania.  This  well  known 
tree  appears  to  be  by  no  means  an  abundant  yielder  of  kino.  A 
sample  sent  to  Dr.  Wiesner,  of  Vienna,  some  time  ago,  is  thus 
described  by  him : — "Readily  soluble  in  water,  solution  pale  reddish- 
yellow,  slightly  acid,  very  turbid  on  cooling ;  on  heating  becomes 
clear  again.  No  gum-resin  ;  crumbling  masses  of  light  brownish 
colour."  I  have  been  unable  to  procure  properly  authenticated 
specimens  of  this  kino. 

*  The  "Red  Gum  "  of  Western  Australia  is  peculiar  to  that  colony  and 
is  E.  calophylla. 

f  Incorrect ;  see  these  Proc.  ([2],  iv.  1280),  and  also  Pharm.  Journ.  ([3], 
xx.  221,  321). 


426        THE  EXAMINATION  OF  EUCALYPTUS  KINOS. 

Eucalyptus  trachyphloia,  F.v.M.,  B.F1.  iii.  221. 

Found  in  Queensland. 

"  The  analysis  of  one  sample  of  kino  gave  us  as  much  as  73 
per  cent,  of  kino-tannic  acid  (soluble  in  water  and  alcohol  and 
precipitable  by  acetate  of  lead  out  of  an  acidified  solution),  18J 
per  cent,  of  kino  red  or  allied  substance  (insoluble  in  water  but 
soluble  in  alcohol),  8J  per  cent,  gum  and  pigment  (soluble  in 
water,  and  partly  in  alcohol,  but  not  precipitable  by  acetate  of 
lead)."     (Mueller,  Eucalyptographia.) 


427 


DESCRIPTIONS  OF  TWO  NEW  SPECIES  OF  CARENUM 
FROM  WEST  AUSTRALIA,  WITH  NOTES  ON  THE 
SYNONYMY  AND  DISTRIBUTION  OF  SOME  PRE- 
VIOUSLY DESCRIBED  SPECIES. 

By  Thomas  G.  Sloane. 

In  the  following  paper  I  describe  two  new  species  of  Carennm 
from  West  Australia,  which  I  have  received  from  Mr.  C.  French 
of  Melbourne  as  coming  from  between  York  and  Yilgarn  Gold- 
field.  I  also  take  the  present  opportunity  to  publish  some 
information  I  have  collected  with  regard  to  the  synonymy  and 
distribution  of  a  few  previously  described  species.  I  had  hoped 
to  have  treated  of  the  synonymy  of  the  whole  group  of  Carenides 
before  long,  but  pressure  of  business  and  absence  from  Sydney 
have  compelled  me  to  relinquish  the  idea ;  and  I  now  offer  these 
notes  merely  as  a  contribution  towards  the  elucidation  of  the 
synonymy  of  the  group,  which  can  only  be  undertaken  in  Sydney 
by  a  careful  study  of  the  Macleay  Collection. 

Carenum  ignotus,  n.sp. 

Form  elongate.  Black,  shining,  (upper  surface  of  head  and  pro- 
thorax  dull  in  my  specimen),  elytra  with  a  very  narrow  and  faint 
edge  of  cerulean  hue.  Head  subquadrate  (4  x  4  J  mm.),  depressed ; 
frontal  sulci  short,  curved,  not  connected  behind,  almost  parallel 
backwards,  and  extending  forwards  in  full  depth  towards  base  of 
mandibles  ;  preocular  process  prominent ;  eyes  not  prominent ; 
two  supra-orbital  punctures  on  each  side  ;  antennae  moniliform, 
not  tapering,  last  joint  short  and  obtuse.  Prothorax  broader  than 
long  (5  x  6 \  mm.),  smooth,  subconvex,  declivous  behind  ;  anterior 
angles  rounded,   not  advanced ;    sides    parallel    in   front  of   the 


428  DESCRIPTIONS    OF    TWO    NEW    SPECIES    OF    CARENUM, 

posterior  angles,  rounded  at  the  posterior  angles,  obliquely 
narrowed  behind  them,  and  lightly  sinuate  before  the  base ;  base 
widely  sublobate,  truncate  ;  marginal  border  narrow,  not  more 
prominent  at  posterior  angles,  thicker  and  more  reflexed  on  the 
base ;  median  line  finely  and  distinctly  marked  ;  three  marginal 
punctures  on  each  side.  Elytra  oval  (11  x  6J  mm.),  lsevigate, 
subconvex  j  the  disc  depressed  towards  the  base,  slightly  emar- 
ginate  between  the  shoulders  ;  sides  lightly  and  evenly  rounded  ; 
marginal  border  narrow  ;  a  row  of  equally  placed  punctures  along 
the  margin,  and  four  punctures  in  a  cluster  on  the  base  of  each 
elytron  near  the  humeral  angle  ;  two  discoidal  punctures  on  each 
elytron,  one  near  the  humeral  angle,  the  other  towards  the  apex. 
Prosternum  smooth  and  strongly  excavate  between  the  coxae. 
Anterior  tibice  bidentate  ;  legs  as  in  C.  scaritioides  and  allied 
species. 

Length  21,  breadth  6f  mm. 

Hob. — "VV.A.  (between  York  and  Yilgarn). 

This  species  belongs  to  the  same  group  as  C.  scaritioides, 
Westw.;  but  it  is  a  much  flatter  insect  and  differs  in  the  shape  of 
the  prothorax,  which  is  less  shortly  rounded  behind  the  posterior 
angles  and  has  the  base  truncate,  sublobate,  and  more  strongly 
margined  than  the  sides.  It  seems  nearly  allied  to  C.  irtcon- 
spicuum,  Blackb.,  which,  however,  from  the  description,  has  the 
prothorax  with  the  anterior  angles  advanced,  and  the  hinder  part 
differently  shaped  from  C.  ignotus. 

Carenum  habilis,  n.sp. 

Form  short,  broad.  Shining,  head  black  (a  greenish  tinge  on 
sides  of  throat);  prothorax  deep  purple-black  with  broad  metallic 
green  margin,  undersurface  greenish  towards  the  sides ;  elytra 
purple-black  (the  purple  tinge  more  conspicuous  towards  the 
sides)  margined  with  green,  inflexed  margins  green;  abdomen  and 
legs  black.  Head  subquadrate,  transverse  (3 J  x  5 J  mm.),  smooth ; 
frontal  sulci  curved,  not  connected  behind,  deep  and  almost 
parallel  backwards,  extending  lightly  forwards  towards  base  of 


BY    THOMAS    G.  SLOANE.  429 

mandibles  ;  eyes  not  prominent ;  one  supra-orbital  puncture  on 
each  side ;  antennae  light,  tapering.  Prothorax  short,  transverse 
(4  x  ~\  mm.),  smooth,  subconvex;  anterior  angles  broadly  advanced  ; 
sides  subparallel,  a  little  rounded  towards  front,  shortly  rounded 
at  posterior  angles  ;  base  shortly  lobate ;  marginal  border  broad 
on  sides,  reflexed,  very  strongly  reflexed  at  posterior  angles, 
thicker  and  less  reflexed  on  basal  lobe ;  median  line  lightly 
marked ;  two  marginal  punctures  on  each  side.  Elytra  ovate 
(10  x  7  mm.),  lsevigate,  convex  ;  the  suture  deeply  impressed  ; 
sides  lightly  and  evenly  rounded  ;  base  truncate  ;  marginal  border 
broad,  reflexed  ;  the  marginal  row  of  umbilical  punctures  evenly 
placed  and  strongly  marked  ;  each  elytron  with  three  punctures 
in  a  single  row  on  base,  and  a  discoiclal  puncture  on  apical  third. 
Anterior  tibise  tridentate;  inferior  ridge  strong;  apical  plate  with 
a  tooth  projecting  below  the  tarsi. 

Length  20,  breadth  7  J  mm. 

Hab. — W.A.  (between  York  and  Yilgarn). 

Of  the  species  known  to  me  this  most  resembles  C.  dispar, 
Macl. ;  but  it  differs  conspicuously  from  that  species  in  having  the 
prothorax  broader  and  less  convex,  and  more  strongly  lobate,  the 
elytra  much  less  convex — especially  towards  the  base — with  the 
suture  much  more  deeply  impressed  ;  the  marginal  border  of  both 
prothorax  and  elytra  is  broader. 

The  following  notes  contain  information  as  to  the  synonymy 
and  distribution  of  some  species  of  the  Carenides  which  I  have 
accumulated  during  several  years.  I  feel  thoroughly  satisfied  of 
the  correctness  of  all  the  synonyms  given,  but  in  any  case  where 
there  may  seem  the  least  possibility  of  doubt  I  have  stated  such 
to  be  the  case.  To  make  the  list  of  localities  as  useful  as  possible, 
while  preserving  conciseness  and  accuracy,  I  have  added  a  key  to 
their  positions  on  the  map.  In  all  localities  given  without  any 
authority  being  quoted  I  have  myself  collected  specimens  of  the 
species  referred  to  in  such  localities,  and  I  have  stated  my  autho- 
rity in  every  case  except  where  I  am  personally  responsible  for 
the  locality. 


430  DESCRIPTIONS    OF    TWO    NEW    SPECIES    OF    CARENUM, 

Philoscaphus  tuberculatus,  Macl. 

N.S.W. — Deniliquin,  Mulwala,  Narrandera,  Condobolin,  Coona- 
barabran,  Nebea,  Narrabri,  Gragin  :  Q. — Finche's  Creek. 

Laccopterum  loculosum,  Newm.  =  L.  variolosum,  Macl. 

A  widespread  species  ;  very  variable  in  size  and  appearance. 
I  do  not  think  L.  variolosum  can  be  maintained  as  a  separate 
species. 

N.S.W. — Murrumbidgee  (Macleay),  Forest  Reefs  (Lea),  Mul- 
wala :  Victoria — Melbourne  (Masters). 

Carenum  (Calliscapterus)  campestre,  Macl. 

N.S.W. — Murrumbidgee  (Macleay),  Wilcannia  District  (Ellis), 
Liverpool  Plains  District  (Peel),  Mulwala,  Nebea. 

C.  (Calliscapterus)  odewahni,  Casteln.  =  C.  ordinatum,  Macl. 
S.A.  (Castelnau,  Macleay,  &c). 

C.  distinctum,  Macl. 
N.S.W. — Murrumbidgee  (Macleay),  Condobolin. 

Carenum    Bonellii,   Brulle,  =  C.    viridipenne,   Westw.  =  C.    west- 
ivoodi,  Casteln.  =  C.  scitulum,  Macl. 

I  believe  de  Castelnau  was  right  in  regarding  C.  viridipenne 
as  a  synonym  of  C.  Bonellii,  and  I  consider  his  C.  westwoodi  in 
the  same  light.  As  regards  C.  scitulum,  from  examination  of  a 
type  specimen  in  the  Australian  Museum  I  am  convinced  it  is 
founded  on  what  may  be  regarded  as  a  mere  "  sport "  of  C. 
Bonellii, — specimens  being  occasionally  found  without  the  anterior 
discoidal  punctures  of  the  elytra.  Of  two  specimens  found  by 
me  at  Springwood,  Blue  Mountains,  one  had  the  four  punctures 
as  usual,  the  other  had  the  posterior  punctures  marked  as  decidedly 
as  usual,  but  no  trace  of  either  of  the  anterior  punctures,  yet 
there  could  be  no  doubt  both  were  the  same  species — C.  Bonellii. 

Victoria. — Lakes  Entrance  (Du  Boulay)  ;  N.S.W. — Sydney 
(Lea),  Mt.  Kosciusko  (Castelnau),  Goulburn,  Appin,  Springwood. 


BY    THOMAS    G.  SLOANE.  431 

C.  brisbanense,  Casteln.  =  C.  submetallicum,  Macl. 

There  is  a  specimen  labelled  C.  brisbanense  in  the  Australian 
Museum,  and  it  is  identical  with  C.  submetallicum. 
Q. — Brisbane  (Howitt),  Gayndah  (Masters). 

C.  castelnaui,  Chaud.  =  C.  occultum,  Macl. 

A  comparison  of  the  type  of  C.  occultum  in  the  Australian 
Museum  with  de  Chaudoir's  description  of  C.  castelnaui  leaves  no 
doubt  in  my  mind  they  are  the  same  species. 

Q. — Gayndah  (Masters),  Wallangarra  (Kershaw). 

Carenum  sexpunctatum,  Macl. 

I  now  regard  this  species  (after  examination  of  the  type)  as 
identical  with  C.  arenarium,  SI.  It  is,  however,  founded  on  a  mere 
"  sport,"  and  the  name  sexpunctatum  is  quite  misleading,  as  the 
species  has  normally  only  four  punctures  on  the  elytra. 

N.S.W. — Murrumbidgee  (Macleay),  Mulwala. 

C.  murrumbigense,  Macl. 

N.S.W. — Mt.  Kosciusko  (Helms),  Mulwala,  Narhadhan, 
Condobolin. 

C.  kingi,  Macl. 

N.S.W. — Goonoo  Goonoo  (King),  Bathurst  (Lea). 

C.  decorum,  SI. 

N.S.W. — Tamworth  (Musson),  Coonabarabran,  Nebea  :  Q. — 
Finche's  Creek. 

C.  subcostatum,  Macl. 

N.S.W. — Clarence  River  (Macleay)  :  Q. —  Wallangarra  (Ker- 
shaw). 

Eutoma  newmani,  Casteln.  =  E.  punctulatvm,  Macl. 

These  are  evidently  the  same  species. 

Q. — Port  Denison  (Castelnau),  Coomooboolaroo  (Barnard). 


432  DESCRIPTIONS    OF    TWO    NEW    SPECIES    OF    CARENUM. 

Carenidium  kreuslerce,  Macl.  =  G.  lacustre,  Macl. 

After  comparison  of  the  type  specimens  of  these  species  in  Sir 
William  Macleay's  collection  with  several  specimens  in  my 
collection  from  Mulwala,  I  regard  them  as  identical. 

S.A.— (Kreusler):  N.S.W.—  Wagga  Wagga  (Macleay),  Mul- 
wala. 


Key  to  position  of  localities  quoted. 

New  South  Wales  (N.S.W.) ;  Appin  (township),  about  50 
miles  S.  from  Sydney  ;  Condobolin  (town),  Lachlan  River,  about 
147  E.  long.  ;  Coonabarabran  (town),  Castlereagh  River,  about 
149  E.  long.;  Coonamble  (town),  Castlereagh  River,  about  148 
E.  long.  ;  Beniliquin  (town),  Edwards  River,  145  E.  long.  ; 
Forest  Reefs,  western  railway,  a  little  E.  from  Orange ;  Gragin 
(station),  30  miles  N.W.  from  Inverell,  about  151  E.  long.  ; 
Goonoo  Goonoo  (station),  Peel  River,  near  Tarn  worth,  151  E. 
long.  ;  Mulwala  (township),  Murray  River,  146  E.  long.  ; 
Na r  andera  (town),  Murrumbidgee  River,  about  147  E.  long.  ; 
Narhadhan  (station),  half  way  between  Murrumbidgee  and 
Lachlan  Rivers,  146  E.  long.  ;  Nebea  (station),  18  miles  N.E. 
from  Coonamble  ;  Springwood  (town),  western  railwa}r,  50  miles 
from  Sydney  ;  Wingelo  (railway  station),  between  Sydney  and 
Goulburn. 

Queensland  (Q);  Goomooboolaroo  (station),  west  from  Rock- 
hampton,  about  149  E.  long.  ;  Finche's  Creek,  a  headwater  of  the 
Mooni  River,  about  40  miles  S.W.  from  Dalby,  Darling  Downs 
District. 

Victoria  (  V.). 

South  Australia  (S.A.). 


433 


JOTTINGS  FROM  THE  BIOLOGICAL  LABORATORY  OF 
SYDNEY  UNIVERSITY. 

By  Professor  William  A.  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc. 

No.  15.  On  a  Simple  Method  of  substituting  Strong  Alco- 
hol for  a  Watery  Solution  in  the  Preparation  of 
Specimens. 

Lo  Bianco  has  in  the  last  part  of  the  "  Mittheilungen  aus  der 
Zoologischen  Station  zu  Neapel,"  published  an  account  of  the 
methods  which  he  follows  in  preparing  those  marvellous  specimens 
of  marine  invertebrates  for  which  the  Station  has  long  been  famous 
all  over  the  world.  Many  of  the  methods  described  have  now 
been  known  to  zoologists  for  some  time,  i.e.,  many  of  the  methods 
of  killing  and  fixing  :  it  is  more,  perhaps,  on  account  of  the 
information  which  it  gives  us,  as  the  result  of  a  long  series  of 
trials,  as  to  what  re-agents  are  best  adapted  to  each  special 
group,  with  the  best  modes  of  application  in  each  case,  than  as 
giving  any  entirely  new  formulae,  that  the  paper  is  of  value. 

As  is  well  known,  marine  animals  of  different  groups  require  to 
be  dealt  with  in  very  different  ways  in  order  that  we  may  preserve 
them  in  anything  approaching  to  their  natural  form.  Some  may 
be  taken  by  surprise,  if  we  may  use  the  expression,  and  killed  so 
suddenly  by  some  powerful  poison  that  they  remain  fixed  in  a 
life-like  shape.  Others  must  be  narcotised  or  paralysed  by  some 
such  re-agent  as  chloroform,  weak  alcohol,  or  chloral  hydrate, 
before  the  killing  and  fixing  agent  is  used. 

Whatever  be  the  method  of  killing  and  fixing  employed,  there 
is  in  all  delicate  organisms  a  difficulty  experienced  in  preventing 


434      JOTTINGS  FROM  SYDNEY  UNIVERSITY  BIOLOGICAL  LABORATORY, 

shrinkage  during  the  later  processes  which  the  specimens  have  to 
undergo  before  reaching  the  strong  alcohol  stage.  In  the  most 
admirably  fixed  specimens  shrivelling  will  often  appear  when 
alcohol  is  applied.  This  difficulty  is  partly  overcome,  with  great 
pains,  by  using  a  series  of  alcohols  of  ascending  degrees  of  strength. 
But  the  result  of  this  mode  of  procedure  is  not  by  any  means 
always  satisfactory. 

Dr,  Cobb,  in  a  paper  read  before  this  Society,*  has  described  a 
method  by  which,  in  the  case  of  small  organisms,  the  shrinkage 
due  to  change  from  one  fluid  to  another  of  a  different  density  may 
be  reduced  to  a  minimum.  In  his  differentiator  we  have  an 
instrument  of  admirable  simplicity  for  ensuring  this  result.  But 
T  have  found  that  in  practice  the  use  of  the  differentiator  involves 
a  considerable  expenditure  of  time.  To  get  a  specimen  from 
distilled  water  to  90%  alcohol  for  example,  no  fewer  than  eleven 
different  mixtures  of  water  and  alcohol  have  to  be  made  up  and 
poured  into  the  reservoir-tube. 

A  simple  piece  of  apparatus  which  I  have  devised  does  away 
entirely  with  this — the  gradual  substitution  for  one  another  of 
the  two  fluids  of  different  densities  being  effected  automatically. 
An  obvious  mode  of  meeting  the  difficulty  suggests  itself  at  once. 
Why  not  have  the  second  fluid  falling  into  the  first  drop  by  drop, 
mixing  thus  very  gradually  with  it  and  eventually  replacing  it  ? 
The  difficulty  in  the  way  of  this  is  that  as  each  drop  of  the  much 
lighter  liquid  enters  the  denser,  violent  though  circumscribed 
currents  are  produced  which  are  damaging  to  the  delicate 
organisms  we  are  dealing  with. 

The  requisites  for  the  method  about  to  be  described  are — several 
reservoirs  of  glass  or  earthenware  fitted  with  glass  taps  and  having 
each  a  capacity  of  a  gallon  or  more ;  some  wide-mouthed  bottles  of 
a  variety  of  sizes,  fitted  with  perforated  india-rubber  stoppers,  and 
some  lengths  of  glass  and  india-rubber  tubing. 


Proceedings,'  Vol.  v.,  p.  157. 


BY    WILLIAM    A.  HASWELL. 


435 


Two  bottles  of  similar  size  are  connected  together  by  tubing  in 
the   way  represented  in    the    woodcut.      One   of    these,    a,   we 

call  the  mixing  bottle  ;  the 
other,  b,  contains  the  objects, 
and  must  have  a  capacity 
equal  to  at  least  a  hundred 
times  the  bulk  of  the  latter. 
The  objects  are  in  fluid  1, 
and  it  is  desired  to  substitute 
fluid  2.  Both  bottles  are 
filled,  or  partially  filled, 
according  to  circumstances, 
with  fluid  1,  and  bottle  A  is 
connected  with  a  reservoir 
of  fluid  2.  It  is  somewhat 
difficult  by  means  of  a  tap 
to  regulate  the  flow  so  that, 
let  us  say,  one  drop  in  five 
seconds  will  pass  out  of  the 
reservoir ;  and  it  is  much 
more  convenient  to  effect 
this  by  intercalating  in  the 
supply  pipe  a  section  of  glass 
tubing  drawn  out  to  the 
required  degree  of  fineness 
(represented  in  the  figure  as 
disconnected  from  the  proxi- 
mal portion  of  the  supply 
tube).  The  rate  of  flow  through  this  narrow  section  of  the  tube 
can  be  further  regulated  by  raising  or  lowering  the  reservoir  or 
the  mixing  bottle,  thus  altering  the  pressure.  With  bottle  B  is 
connected  an  over-flow  tube.  Above  the  narrow  section  of  glass 
tubing  in  the  supply  pipe  it  is  well  to  have  a  piece  of  filter  paper 
stretched  across  the  mouth  of  the  piece  of  tubing  in  the  form  of  a 
diaphragm,  and  held  in  place  by  the  overlapping  india-rubber 
tubing.  This  prevents  the  possibility  of  the  narrow  part  of  the 
tube  being  choked  up  by  any  minute  particles 
29 


436      JOTTINGS  FROM  SYDNEY  UNIVERSITY  BIOLOGICAL  LABORATORY. 

Fluid  2  thus  enters  into  the  mixing  bottle  at  an  extremely  slow 
rate  of  flow,  and  becomes  completely  diffused,  at  first  in  extremely 
minute  quantity,  through  fluid  1.  The  fluid  from  the  mixing 
bottle  is  meanwhile  entering  bottle  b  at  the  same  extremely  slow 
rate,  and  it  is  obvious  that  with  two  fluids  that  readily  mix,  fluid 
1  may  be  made  to  replace  fluid  2  in  bottle  b  with  the  required 
excessive  slowness  and  regularity. 

In  the  case  of  some  of  the  liquids  used  in  fixing  and  preserving, 
it  is  not  necessary  to  use  such  a  precaution  as  this.  We  may 
substitute  saturated  solution  of  corrosive  sublimate  for  sea-water 
without  the  least  risk  of  damage  to  the  most  delicate  structures  — 
the  specific  gravity  of  the  two  being  very  nearly  the  same. 

Similarly  distilled  water  may  be  at  once  substituted  for  osmic 
acid  solution,  or  1%  chromic  acid,  or  other  fluid  that  does  not  differ 
at  all  widely  from  water  in  specific  gravity.  But  with  certain 
fluids  the  gradual  substitution  is  necessary,  and  it  is  above  all 
necessary  in  replacing  water  or  a  watery  solution  by  alcohol,  and 
this  in  the  case  of  large  specimens  intended  for  museum  purposes 
as  well  as  smaller  objects,  can  very  conveniently  be  carried  out  by 
the  simple  apparatus  I  have  described  above. 

Another  method  of  effecting  this  substitution  is  the  one  devised 
by  Schultze  ;  and  this  seems  to  possess  some  decided  advantages, 
at  least  for  small  objects.  Schultze  places  the  objects  which  he 
wishes  to  transfer  from  water  to  alcohol  in  a  tube  full  of  water, 
plugged  at  one  end,  and  closed  at  the  other  by  a  diaphragm  of 
chamois  skin.  The  tube  is  placed  in  a  vessel  of  alcohol  and  left 
there  until  by  a  process  of  diffusion  through  the  diaphragm  the 
water  in  the  tube  becomes  completely  replaced  by  alcohol.  The 
same  material  being  used  for  the  diaphragm,  the  time  which  will 
be  occupied  before  complete  substitution  takes  place  will  vary 
with  the  capacity  of  the  tube  and  the  diameter  of  its  orifice  ;  and 
a  series  of  experiments  and  calculations  would  have  to  be  made 
before  this  method  could  be  used  with  the  assurance  of  good 
results.  Should  it  be  desired  to  have  the  specimens  in  absolute 
alcohol  at  the  end  of  the  process,  some  calcined  sulphate  of  copper 
may  be  placed  in  the  outer  vessel. 


437 


RESIDUE  OF  THE  EXTINCT  BIRDS  OF  QUEENSLAND 
AS  YET  DETECTED. 

By  C.  W.  De  Vis,  M.A.,  Core.  Mem. 

(Plates  xxiii.  and  xxiv.) 

Necrastur,  n.g.,  Falconid^e. 

Proximal  end  of  a  right  humerus,  wanting  part  of  the  radial 
tuberosity  and  distal  portion  of  the  pectoral  crest  (PI.  xxiv.,  fig. 
la  and  16). 

The  guide  to  the  systematic  neighbourhood  of  this  fossil  is 
discoverable  in  the  seat  of  the  insertion  of  the  anterior  coracoid 
ligament  on  the  dorsal  aspect  of  the  radial  tuberosity  (fig.  la  .4). 
In  the  great  majority  of  birds  the  ligament  occupies,  and  is  inserted 
into,  some  part  of  a  horizontal  groove,  which  is  variously  modified 
in  length,  depth,  width,  straightness,  and  parallelism  of  its  sides. 
In  all  these  respects,  singly  or  together,  it  may  be  studied  in  the 
Psittaci,  Strigidce  (mostly),  Passeres  (mostly),  Coracidce,  Columbce, 
Otididce,  Grallce,  Herodiones,  and  Anseres.  Occasionally  it  is 
reduced,  as  in  the  Rails,  to  two  short  converging  walls  enclosing 
a  small  pit  close  to  the  anterior  edge  of  the  bone,  or  to  some  such 
remnant  of  its  full  development  in  the  Psittaci.  In  the  minority 
it  is  merely  a  more  or  less  irregular  depression  of  variable  depth 
and  definition,  affording  on  the  whole, so  little  aid  to  the  investigator 
that  by  it  alone  he  could  hardly  distinguish  safely  between  the 
eagle  and  pelican.  But  happily  it  assumes  in  many  of  the 
Falconidca  a  peculiarly  distinctive  form,  one  on  which  fancy 
bestows  a  certain  crude  resemblance  to  the  footstep  of  a  horse 
trotting  on  soft  clay.  This  is  best  exemplified  in  Haliaettts 
leucog aster,  wherein  it  may  be  observed  as  a  subtriangular  pit 


438     RESIDUE  OF  EXTINCT  BIRDS  OF  QUEENSLAND  AS  YET  DETECTED, 

of  which  the  basal  side  slopes  downwards  with  a  transversely 
convex  surface  to  a  flat  crescentic  area  embracing  the  rounded 
contour  of  its  foot.  In  this  form  it  occurs  more  or  less  obviously 
and  symmetrically  in  Haliastur,  Nisaetus,  Astur,  Baza,  Circus, 
and  Lophoictinia,  and  even  in  Ninox  among  the  Strigidce.,  but  in 
no  other  birds  has  it  been  recognised  by  the  writer.  The  apparent 
triviality  of  such  a  feature  as  this,  though  certainly  diminished  by 
its  restriction  to  and  frequency  in  one  family,  would  hardly  lead 
us  to  expect  for  it  any  great  persistence  in  time,  yet  it  is  exhibited 
in  the  fossil  in  even  greater  precision  than  in  Haliaetus.  Whether 
then  it  be  supported  or  otherwise  by  accompanying  characters,  it 
must  hold  its  own  and  stamp  the  fossil  with  the  seal  of  the 
Falconidce.  It  does,  however,  derive  sufficient  countenance  from 
the  presence  and  position  of  a  linear  deltoid  ridge  on  the  ventral 
aspect  of  the  bone ;  this,  as  usual  in  birds  of  prey,  runs  downwards 
parallel  with  and  near  to  the  midline  of  the  shaft. 

With  guidance  up  to  this  point  we  have  to  be  satisfied,  for  to 
no  extant  genus  can  we  find  direction  in  the  rest  of  the  fossil's 
structure.  The  head  is  narrow  and  remarkably  prolonged  upon 
the  pectoral  ridge,  towards  which  it  descends  uninterruptedly 
without  permitting  the  formation  of  an  ulnar  tuberosity  (PI.  xxiv., 
fig.  lb  A).  If  we  take  the  humeral  head  of  a  Menura,  lessen 
its  curve  and  reduce  the  gibbosity  of  its  ventral  side,  we  shall 
reproduce  that  of  the  fossil  on  a  smaller  scale ;  and  Menura  alone 
appears  to  represent  the  extinct  hawk  in  this  particular.  The 
form  of  the  shaft  is  no  less  remarkable,  and  for  its  parallel  we 
must  resort  to  Phalacrocorax.  It  is  eminently  trihedral,  presenting 
on  its  ventral  aspect  two  faces,  a  flat  anterior  and  a  slightly  convex 
posterior  surface.  These  meet  in  a  median  culmen,  and  this  again 
divaricates  opposite  the  pneumatic  foramen  into  two  branches,  the 
one  merging  into  the  strong  ridge  supporting,  in  the  Falconidai, 
the  radial  tuberosity ;  the  other  more  subdued,  but  still  distinct,  as 
it  is  in  no  other  bird,  goes  to  the  ventral  edge  of  the  head  (PI.  xxiv., 
fig.  16  B).  The  sub-tuberous  pneumatic  foramen  is  small,  round, 
and  thick-walled  ;  the  tunnel  into  which  it  opens  proceeds  unin- 
terruptedly into  the  substance  of  the  bone.     Such  are  the  generic 


BY    C.   W.  DE   VIS.  439 


traits  of  our  fossil.  As  before  intimated,  it  shows  a  deltoid  ridge 
running  parallel  with  the  culmen  at  a  distance  of  two  milliins.  on 
its  posterior  face  (PL  xxiv.,  fig.  lb  C). 

The  strong  differential  characters  of  this  humerus  render  it 
impossible  to  form  any  decided  opinion  as  to  the  bird's  relations 
with  recent  genera,  but  after  much  consideration  the  writer  is  in- 
clined to  think  that  on  the  whole  it  favoursiVi'saeJMSjthe  little  crested 
eagle,  more  than  any  other.  Necrastur  was  evidently  a  highly 
specialised  member  of  its  family,  and  if,  from  the  extended  surface 
of  articulation,  allowing  a  wider  sweep  of  wing  in  the  same  plane, 
and  from  increased  muscular  room  and  superior  leverage  obtained 
on  and  from  the  prismatic  form  of  the  shaft,  we  may  infer  unusual 
faculties  in  flight,  a  word  significant  of  these  to  some  extent — 
alacer — may  be  allowed  to  stand  as  the  second  term  of  its  name. 

Distal  end  of  an  ulna — a  bone  having  the  characters  of  a  falco- 
nine  ulna  and  corresponding  fairly  in  size  with  the  preceding 
humerus  may  be  placed  with  it  until  it  can  be  shown  to  have 
belonged  to  a  different  hawk. 

LOBIVANELLUS    Sp. 

The  remains  of  a  very  fragile  distal  end  of  a  tarsometatarse 
attest  the  early  existence  of  this  genus.  While  still  perfect  the 
fossil  was  clearly  identified  generically,  but  before  its  specific 
characters  could  be  ascertained,  the  cover  of  a  book,  inadvertently 
allowed  to  rest  upon  it,  crushed  it  beyond  the  possibility  of  resto- 
ration for  descriptive  purposes. 

Tribonyx  effluxus,  n.s. 

The  bone  figured  [P.L.S.N.S.W.  Vol.  iii.  (2),  Pt.  3,  pi.  35,  fig.  9b] 
as  the  distal  end  of  the  humerus  of  a  Jfulica  (F.  prior)  proves  not 
to  belong  to  that  genus,  but  to  Tribonyx.  The  error  arose  from 
an  inadvertence  for  which  no  excuse  can  be  offered — due  attention 
was  not  given  to  the  shape  of  the  radial  trochlea  as  it  exists  in 
the  fossil  and  in  Tribonyx,  and  undergoes  change  in  Fulica.  In 
Fulica,  Gallinula,  and  Porphyrio,  the  antero-interior  side  of  the 
trochlea  is  emarginated,  and  the  emargination,  aided  by  a  slight 


440     RESIDUE  OF  EXTINCT  BIRDS  OF  QUEENSLAND  AS  YET  DETECTED, 

flexure  outwards  of  the  distal  end,  gives  a  perceptibly  sigmoid 
shape  to  the  whole.  In  Tribonyx  the  antero-interior  side  of  the 
trochlea  is  entire,  and  its  shape  as' a  whole  is  a  pretty  regularly 
convex  oval.  From  T.  mortieri  the  fossil  differs  in  the  following 
points  :  the  radial  trochlea  is  shorter  and  makes  with  the  long 
axis  of  the  shaft  a  more  oblique  angle;  the  ectepicondylar  tubercle 
is  less  tumid  and  there  is  consequently  more  space  between  it  and 
the  trochlea  ;  the  ulnar  trochlea  is  broader  at  its  junction  with 
the  inner  condyle.     In  size  the  bird  was  about  equal  to  T.  mortieri. 

PORPHYRIO    MACKINTOSHI,  n.S. 

Distal  extremity  of  a  right  tarsometatarse  (PI.  xxiv.,  fig.  2a  and 
26).  It  is  probable  that  this  and  P.  reperta,  m.,  will  eventually  be 
placed  in  a  new  genus,  as  in  both  the  hind  toe  is  less  elevated 
than  in  the  recent  genus,  and  the  inner  trochlea  (imperfect  in  the 
cotype  of  P.  reperta)  is  found  in  the  present  fossil  to  be  distinctly 
shorter,  or  rather  not  to  extend  so  far  clistad  as  in  G.  tenebrosa — 
in  fact,  it  fails  distinctly  to  reach  as  far  as  the  mesial  trochlea 
instead  of  overlapping  it.  The  present  species  differs  from  P. 
reperta  in  its  greater  size,  showing,  indeed,  in  this  respect  a 
superiority  over  the  existing  species,  in  a  prolongation  of  the 
mesial  trochlear  surface  nearly  to  the  base  of  the  process  on  its 
plantar  aspect,  and  in  the  much  larger  size  of  the  depression  for 
the  hind  toe.  It  is  dedicated  to  a  gentleman  who  rendered  most 
kindly  aid  to  the  collector,  Mr.  Hurst,  during  his  search  for 
fossils  of  this  kind  near  Warwick. 

Gallinula  peralata,  n.s. 

The  humeral  index  of  the  recent  G.  tenebrosa  is  7*81,  its  tarso- 
metatarsal index  7*94.  The  fossil  metatarse,  on  which  the  species 
G.  strenuipes  was  founded,  has  an  index  of  8*18,  and,  assuming 
approximately  identical  proportions  in  extinct  and  living  species, 
the  humeral  index  of  G.  strenuipes  should  be  8*03  or  thereabouts. 
A  humerus  of  a  gallinule  with  an  index  so  far  raised  as  9-18,  as 
in  the  present  fossil,  cannot  therefore  be  referred  to  strenuipes 
without  forsaking  a  base  of  determination  too  useful  to  be  quitted 


BY   C.  W.  DE   VIS.  441 

needlessly.  Little  short  of  the  discovery  of  a  complete  skeleton, 
a  most  unlikely  event,  would  convince  us  that  a  wing  so  strong 
and  a  foot  so  comparatively  weak  as  are  indicated  by  the  present 
humerus  and  the  described  metatarse  co-existed  in  the  same  species 
of  gallinule. 

To  difference  of  transverse  proportions  we  must  add  no  less 
decided  difference  in  proportionate  lengths.  The  humerus  and 
metatarse  of  G.  tenebrosa  are  equal  in  length,  whereas  the  present 
humerus  is  shorter  than  the  metatarse  of  G.  strenuipes  in  the  ratio 
62-5  :  74*0.  In  brief,  it  is  a  fifth  shorter  and  an  eighth  broader  in 
the  shaft  than  it  should  be  were  it  derived  from  G.  strenuipes. 

Compared  with  the  humerus  of  G.  tenebrosa,  the  present  bone 
has,  apart  from  its  still  superior  strength,  two  good  specific 
characters — one  of  which  consists  in  a  more  pronounced  curvature 
of  the  shaft,  the  other  in  a  more  decided  excavation  of  the  antero- 
interior  side  of  the  palmar  end  of  the  radial  trochlea  (PI.  xxiv., 
fig.  3b  A).  In  length  the  bone  does  not  differ  from  the  humerus 
of  G.  tenebrosa. 

PAL^EOPELARGUS,  n.g.,  HERODIONES. 

Distal  end  of  a  right  "  medius  "  metacarpal  in  conjunction  with 
that  of  the  "  annularis  "  (PI.  xxiv.,  fig.  ia  and  46). 

After  tabulating  the  details  of  form  and  structure  in  the 
articulating  surface  of  this  bone  in  all  available  genera  of  birds, 
comparing  the  fossil  therewith,  repeating  the  process  after  a 
considerable  interval  of  time  and  obtaining  at  the  second  trial 
the  same  result  as  before,  the  writer  is  led  to  regard  his  view  of  it 
as  an  approximation  to  the  truth. 

The  following  are  the  characters  from  which  the  status  of  the 
extinct  bird  is  to  be  ascertained  : —  " 

Contour  of  the  articulating  surface  oblong,  elongate,  narrow. 
Facette  for  the  anterior  and  chief  part  of  the  proximal  surface  of 
the  basal  "  medius  "  phalanx  narrow  and  rounded  (a  form  partly 
due  to  the  abrasion  of  the  edges) ;  eminence  for  posterior  concave 
part  of  the  surface  long,  oblique,  subcrescentic.     End  of  fourth 


442    RESIDUE  OF  EXTINCT  BIRDS  OF  QUEENSLAND  AS  YET  DETECTED, 

metacarpal  moderately  produced  beyond  the  level  of  the  rest  of 
the  articulating  surface,  its  facette  for  the  fourth  phalanx  nearly 
flat,  elevated,  its  base  denned  posteriorly  by  a  pronounced  depres- 
sion of  the  metatarsal  surface.  Anterodorsal  surface  of  shaft  with 
the  usual  tendinal  groove,  which  is  well  denned  by  ridges,  posterior 
to  it  and  near  the  edge  of  the  articular  surface  a  short  ridge 
denning  a  second  tendinal  groove.  Shaft  compressed  infero- 
superiorly. 

The  long  quadrangular  form  of  the  articulation  enables  us  to 
eliminate  the  families  which  do  not  agree  with  the  fossil  in  those 
particulars — namely,  the  Psittaci,  Grallce,  Anseres,  Ardeidce,  and 
among  the  Ciconidce,  Ciconia,  all  of  which,  with  some  exceptions 
*n  a  minor  degree  among  the  Grallce,  have  also  the  fourth  meta- 
carpal not  produced  beyond  the  third,  and  the  shaft  subcylindrical 
or  subtrihedral,  except  in  Esacus  and  Lobivanellus,  in  which  it  is 
compressed.  Of  birds  with  an  elongated  articulation  the  Passeres 
have  the  third  metacarpal  excessively  prolonged  and  the  small 
articular  eminence  lenticular  or  more  or  less  obsolete ;  it  is  much 
the  same  with  the  Halcyonidce  and  Pittidce.  The  Fcdconidce  have 
the  third  metacarpal  somewhat  prolonged,  but  the  eminence  is 
lenticular.  The  Strigidce,  with  an  oblique  oval  eminence,  have 
the  third  metacarpal  not  at  all  prolonged,  and  almost  the  same 
may  be  said  of  the  Caprimulgidce  and  Columbce. 

The  metacarpals  most  like  the  fossil  bone  are  afforded  by 
Carphibis  and  Xenorhynchus,  and  of  these  the  latter  approaches 
it  most  nearly  in  general  form  and  size  combined — Carphibis  in 
the  form  of  the  articular  eminence  and  presence  of  the  short 
tendinal  groove.  But  the  difference  in  the  extent  to  which  the 
third  metacarpal  of  the  fossil  is  produced  removes  it  widely  from 
both  these  genera  and  compels  one  to  propose  for  it  the  provisional 
genus  named  in  the  title.  As  the  size  of  this  part  of  the  skeleton 
is  somewhat  considerably  greater  than  it  is  in  the  Jabiru,  the  bird 
to  which  it  belonged  may  be  supposed  to  have  been  on  the  whole 
correspondingly  larger,  and  if  so,  we  may  picture  to  ourselves  a 
bird  which  may  fairly  be  called  nobilis. 


BY    C.  W.  DE    VIS.  443 

Distal  end  of  an  ulna.  This  bone  can  only  belong  to  the 
Anseres  or  to  the  Herodiones,  and  as  it  corresponds  in  size  with 
the  metacarpal  preceding  and  does  not  protest  against  entering 
the  same  genus  and  species  with  it,  such  may  be  its  domicile  for 
the  present. 

Platalea  subtenuis,  n.s.  (PI.  xxiv.,  fig.  5a  and  5b). 

Proximal  two-thirds  of  a  right  femur  with  the  trochanter  edges 
abraded.  No  subtrochanterian  pneumatic  foramen  ;  two  minute 
posterior  foramina ;  trochanter  narrow,  continuous  with  extensor 
cruris  ridge  ;  space  between  trochanter  and  neck  narrow  ;  neck 
but  slightly  contracted ;  head  but  little  expanded  ;  shaft  feebly 
curved,  subcylindrical.  After  rejecting  in  our  search  for  the 
living  kindred  of  the  bird  now  under  scrutiny  those  femurs 
wherein  the  subtrochanterian  foramen  is  present,  the  Falconidce, 
Gouridce,  Olididce,  Xenorhynchus,  &c,  also  those  of  the  Passeres 
which  possess  a  large  posterior  foramen,  we  find  our  means  of 
discrimination  almost  restricted  to  the  contour  of  the  proximal 
surface  of  the  bone  and  the  relative  position  of  the  extensor  cruris 
ridge.  Those  bird  femurs,  which  on  a  fore  end  view  are  separable 
from  the  rest  on  account  of  the  surface  being  in  the  first  place 
subelongate,  and  in  the  next  neither  approximately  hour-glass 
shaped  nor  considerably  narrower  immediately  behind  the  head, 
in  other  words,  devoid  of  a  sudden  contraction  at  any  point  in  the 
trochanterian  region,  which  are  at  the  same  time  nearly  straight 
in  the  proximal  half  of  the  shaft,  and  are  comparable  with  the 
fossil  in  size,  are  to  be  found  among  the  ibises  and  spoonbills, 
and  not  elsewhere.  We  may  therefore  conclude  with  some  confi- 
dence that  our  fossil  is  derived  from  the  Plataleidce.  But  beyond 
this  progress  becomes  hazardous,  the  fact  being  that  the  femurs  of 
Platalea  and  Carphibis,  indistinguishable  generically  from  the 
fossil,  are  equally  so  one  from  another.  Were  they  not  from 
living  birds,  they  would  indeed  be  attributed  to  the  same  species 
of  the  same  genus,  a  state  of  things,  by  the  way,  issuing  a  caution 
against  hasty  identification  of  fossil  with  recent  bones  of  this  class ; 
yet,  as  the  chances  are  very  great  against  so  close  an  approximation 


444  RESIDUE  OF  EXTINCT  BIRDS  OF  QUEENSLAND  AS  YET  DETECTED, 

of  structural  form  occurring  in  a  third  genus,  the  fossil  must  be 
assumed  to  belong  to  one  or  other  of  the  genera  named,  and  as 
the  spoonbills  show  greater  fixity  of  type  than  the  plurigeneric 
ibises,  the  judgment  is  fain  to  follow  even  so  dubious  a  clue  to 
freedom  from  perplexity.  The  specific  differences  from  P.  regia 
and  P.  flavipes  observable  in  the  fossil  are  a  greater  flattening  of 
the  proximal  end  of  the  shaft  on  its  posterior  surface  and  a 
diminution  of  the  transverse  axis  of  its  distal  moiety,  resulting  in 
a  more  cylindrical  but  more  slender  form. 

Two  distal  moieties  of  the  tibia,  with  all  the  characteristics  of 
that  bone  in  Platalea,  but  with  size  and  proportions  in  accord 
with  the  femur  above  described,  may  be  referred  to  it  with  some 
confidence  that  they  belong  to  the  same  species.  They  at  least 
prove  the  existence  of  a  spoonbill  among  the  other  birds  of  the 
period,  and  thereby  tend  to  confirm  the  accuracy  of  the  preceding 
determination. 

Pelicanus  proavus,  n.s.  (PI.  xxiv.,  fig.  6a  and  6b). 

The  small  pelican  for  which  a  name  is  proposed  reveals  itself 
in  a  left  tarsometatarsal,  of  which  the  inner  trochlea  is  mutilated, 
but  sufficiently  perfect  to  show  that  it  was  distinctly  longer  than 
the  outer.  By  this  character  it  is  separated  from  all  those  birds 
which  have  the  lateral  trochlea  approximately  equal  in  length,  as 
well  as  from  those  in  which  the  outer  is  very  evidently  the  longer, 
and  is  associated  with  the  birds  of  prey,  diurnal  and  nocturnal, 
kingfishers  (Dacelo),  Menura,  Pitta,  Podargus,  Herodiones,  Peli- 
canus, darters,  and  grebes,  and  doubtless  others.  Its  trochlea? 
are  not  disposed  nearly  on  the  same  plane,  nor  would  a  section  of 
its  shaft  be  either  crescentic  or  planoconvex  in  shape  ;  it  is  there- 
fore foreign  to  the  Falconidce,  Strigidce,  Menura,  and  the  Megapodes. 
Its  distal  expansion  is  gradual  and  subelongate,  very  different  to 
that  of  the  Herodiones,  which  also  have  nearly  co-equal  trochlea?. 
With  the  bone  in  the  kingfishers,  nightjars,  pittas,  and  grebes 
it  cannot  be  compared.  In  Pelicanus,  however,  we  find  a  complete 
reproduction  of  the  structural  features  of  the  fossil,  displayed  in 
the  same   elongated   pulley  of   the  mid-trochlea,  reaching  with 


BY   C.  W.  DE  VIS.  445 

rapidly  converging  edges  to  the  plantar  surface,  in  the  large 
elongately  oval  foramen  opening  on  the  plantar  surface  in  a 
hollow  formed  by  the  convergent  roots  of  the  lateral  trochleas, 
and  on  the  dorsal  surface  at  the  end  of  a  long  deep  sulcus  in  the 
body  of  the  shaft,  in  the  large  depression  for  the  first  metatarse 
at  the  root  of  the  inner  trochlea,  in  the  shape  of  the  shaft  in 
section,  in  the  sharp  narrow  ridge  descending  upon  the  middle  of 
the  plantar  aspect  of  the  shaft  and  diverging  outwards  to  the 
proximal  end  of  the  outer  trochlea,  and  finally,  in  the  faint  groove 
impressed  by  the  internal  digital  branch  of  the  tibial  artery, 
commencing  at  the  dorsal  end  of  the  foramen  and  winding 
inwards  and  downwards  to  the  interval  between  the  middle  and 
inner  trochlese.  In  recent  Australian  pelicans  the  groove  is  some- 
times faint,  and  its  presence  seems  to  be  a  rare  peculiarity  among 
birds  in  general. 

The  width  of  the  trochlear  expansion  in  the  fossil  is  16 '5  mm. ; 
in  P.  conspicillatus  it  is,  between  the  same  points,  20  mm. ;  the 
length  distad  from  the  proximal  end  of  the  hallucal  depression  is 
26*5  mm.,  against  32-3  in  the  recent  bird.  In  proportions  the 
two  are  therefore  nearly  identical,  but  in  size  the  living  species 
exceeds  the  extinct  by  one-fourth  of  the  latter. 

Though  it  may  fairly  be  doubted  whether  difference  of  size, 
even  though  accompanied  by  somewhat  brighter  or  duller  tints,  as 
in  our  pittas  and  megaloprepias,  is  a  sufficient  mark  of  specific 
distinction  between  existing  birds,  it  can  hardly  be  refused  dis- 
tinctive value  in  the  present  case. 

Proximal  end  of  a  metacarpal,  with  a  large  pneumatic  foramen 
placed  as  in  Pelicanus;  the  bone  is  too  much  crushed  and  distorted 
to  allow  of  a  description  of  any  value. 

Dromaius  gracilipes,  n.s.  (PI.  xxiii.,  fig.  la  and  7b). 

Though  desire  for  more  ample  knowledge  of  the  bird-life  of  the 
past  naturally  seeks  indulgence  in  the  cognition  of  new  kinds,  it 
may  be  content  if  the  rare  objects  it  delights  in  serve  only  to 
confirm  previous  interpretations  and  yield  further  elucidation  of 


446     RESIDUE  OF  EXTINCT  BIRDS  OF  QUEENSLAND  AS  YET  DETECTED, 

structure.  This  ground  of  satisfaction  the  rocks  vouchsafe  in  the 
case  of  the  extinct  emu  Dromaius  patricius.  Since  certain  of  its 
remains  were  brought  under  notice*  the  following  additional  parts 
of  its  skeleton  have  been  discovered : — A  part  of  the  distal  end  of 
a  femur,  the  proximal  third  of  a  tarsometatarse,  the  calcaneal 
region  of  another  metatarse,  and  the  distal  end  of  a  third  example 
of  that  bone.  It  was  inferred  from  the  remains  then  described 
that  D.  patrichis  possessed  a  proportionately  shorter  and  stronger 
leg  than  the  living  species  D.  novw-hollandice,  and  under  the 
guidance  of  this  conception,  the  distal  extremity  of  a  metatarse, 
which  was  observed  to  be  even  smaller  and  slimmer  than  that  of 
the  recent  bird,  was  necessarily  excluded  from  the  bones  referred 
to  D.  patricius,  and  the  hope  was  entertained  that  sooner  or  later 
a  fossil  would  be  forthcoming  to  declare  the  exclusion  justifiable. 
By  good  hap  the  expectation  has  been  promptly  realised.  The 
true  distal  end  of  the  metatarse  of  D.  patricius  proves  to  be  con- 
formable with  the  rest  of  the  limb,  and  consequently  the  discarded 
fossil  must  be  taken  as  presumptive  evidence  of  the  existence  of  a 
distinct  species.  Apart  from  size  and  proportions  it  is  distinguished 
by  a  negative  character  peculiar  to  itself.  It  is  well  known  that 
in  the  common  emu,  as  in  most  birds,  the  main  tibiometatarsal 
artery  before  reaching  the  trochlear  expansion  gives  off  a  large 
branch — the  plantar  artery, — which,  in  order  to  reach  the  sole  of 
the  foot,  passes  through  the  bone  between  the  bases  of  the  middle 
and  external  trochlear  processes  by  a  perforation,  which  is  the  sole 
remnant  of  the  original  tripartite  separation  of  the  metatarsals. 
In  the  emu  this  perforation  opens,  not  on  the  surface  of  the  bone, 
but  on  the  bottom  of  an  oblong  depression  or  pit,  of  which  its 
oval  aperture  occupies  more  than  the  proximal  half.  Through  the 
substance  of  the  bone  which  forms  the  distal  limit  of  the  depression 
a  second  tunnel  is  driven  longitudinally  and  opens  upon  the  surface 
between  the  two  trochleas.  The  foramen  of  the  anteroposterior  or 
plantar  canal  is  large — 4*5  x  1*5  mm. — and  its  proximal  end  is 
13.5  mm.  from  the  intertrochlear  surface. 

*  P.L.S.N.S.W.  Vol.  iii.  (2),  pt.  3,  p.  1290. 


BY    C.  W.  DE    VIS.  447 

In  D.  patricius  the  plantar  perforation  is  exceedingly  small,  not 
greater  than  the  diameter  of  an  ordinary  pin,  and  this  is  situated 
close  to  the  edge  of  the  intertrochlear  surface  ;  the  descending 
digital  division  of  the  artery  passes  along  a  deep  canaliculate 
groove  not  roofed  in  by  bone.  D.  patricius  presents  a  middle 
term  as  to  this  point  of  structure  between  the  living  emu  and 
the  bird  represented  by  the  fossil  under  notice,  for  in  the  last 
there  exists  no  trace  whatever  either  of  the  plantar  canal  or 
of  tunnel  or  groove  for  the  descending  branch  of  the  artery. 
Possibly  the  bird  should  on  this  account  be  generically  dis- 
tinguished from  Dromaius,  but  its  separation,  before  we  are 
better  acquainted  with  it,  would  hardly  be  prudent.  Unfortu- 
nately, the  fossil  is  in  a  very  imperfect  condition ;  the  outer 
trochlea  is  broken  off  close  to  the  shaft,  of  the  inner  trochlea 
there  only  remains  a  portion,  and  the  lateral  ridges  of  the  mesial 
trochlea  are  abraded.  In  addition  to  the  absence  of  the  arterial 
canal,  inferior  size,  a  sensible  anteroposterior  compression  of  the 
shaft,  and  a  disproportionate  length  and  tenuity  of  the  mesial 
trochlea  are  the  features  which  chiefly  differentiate  the  fossil  from 
the  bone  of  the  recent  bird.  The  last  two  characters  suggest  the 
name  gracilipes  for  the  species.  From  the  table  of  measurements 
appended  it  will  be  seen  that  in  D.  patricius  this  part  of  the  leg 
was  larger  in  almost  all  its  dimensions  than  it  is  in  the  living- 
species.  The  exceptional  agreement  which  obtains  in  the  width 
of  the  mesial  trochlea,  showing  relative  narrowness  of  that  part, 
is  a  specific  character  ;  so  also  is  the  comparatively  parallel  direc- 
tion of  the  lateral  ridges  of  this  trochlea,  as  they  run  proximad  on 
the  anterior  aspect  of  the  bone,  maintaining  the  breadth  of  the 
pulley  nearly  to  the  junction  of  the  process  with  the  shaft.  On 
the  other  hand,  the  measurements  of  D.  gracilipes  are  all  less  than 
those  of  D.  novce-hollandice,  with  the  exception  of  that  of  the  body 
of  the  mesial  trochlea ;  taken  from  centre  to  centre  of  the  lateral 
depressions,  this  width  is  as  much  greater  as  the  thickness  of  the 
shaft  is  less.  As  far  as  we  can  judge  from  this  fragment,  D. 
gracilipes  was  not  only  inferior  in  size  to  the  living  bird,  but,  on 
the  whole,  was  more  attenuated  in  the  proportions  of  its  limb. 


448     RESIDUE  OF  EXTINCT  BIRDS  OF  QUEENSLAND  AS  YET  DETECTED, 

The  most  interesting  feature  in  its  foot  is  the  disproportionate 
size  of  the  middle  toe :  this,  together  with  the  absence  of  the 
arterial  perforation,  seems  to  prepare  the  way  for  the  following 
bird. 

Measurements. 

D.  patricius.    £tolS&    D'  OracMp&t. 

Trochlear   expansion,   palmar 

aspect  over  all 54*5     ...     50 

Width  of  shaft  in  a  line  corre- 
sponding to  proximal  end  of 
plantar  foramen  in  living 
species 40        ...     36-5     ...     34 

Length  of  mesial  trochlea,  ante- 
rior aspect 36        ...     31        ...     28-5 

Length  from  transverse  line  of 
measurement  to  end  of  mesial 
trochlea 37        ...     36        ...     33*5 

Thickness  of  shaft  at  middle  of 

transverse  line 16*5     ...     13        ..       115 

Width  of  mesial  trochlea,  over 

all 26-5     ...     26 

Width  of  same  between  centres 

of  lateral  depressions  15        ...      11         ...     12*5 

Fam.  APTERYGID.E,  gen.  et  sp.  nov. 

From  among  several  hundred  specimens  forming  an  amateur's 
hoard  of  Nototherian  fossils,  lately  added  to  those  in  the  writer's 
charge,  three  only  appertained  to  the  birds  of  that  age.  One  of 
these  at  once  admitted  itself  to  be  a  fragment  from  the  foot  of  the 
emu  D.  patricius,  in  another  was  detected  a  duplicate  of  the  type 
example  of  the  mound-builder  Chosornis,  the  third  came  with  so 
peculiar  a  facies  as  to  baffle  recollection  and  inflame  curiosity.  A 
distal  half  or  somewhat  less  of  a  tarso-metatarsus,  it  was  imme- 
diately confronted  with  each  one  of  a  hundred  metatarsals  supplied 
by  the  chief  types  of  the  Australian  birds  now  existing,  and,  failing 


BY   C.  W.  DE   VIS.  449 

to  fraternize  with  any  of  them,  was  reluctantly  laid  aside  in  favour 
of  less  reserved  candidates  for  examination.  In  an  idle  moment 
some  weeks  later  it  chanced  that  the  corresponding  bone  of  a 
young  Apteryx,  A.  mantelli,  was  taken  in  hand,  and  to  his  surprise 
the  observer  found  himself  at  last  in  the  presence  of  the  more 
salient  features  of  the  fossil.  As  may  be  imagined,  the  two  bones 
were  quickly  laid  side  by  side  and  discussed.  Whether  the  result 
of  the  comparison  be  a  legitimate  conclusion  from  the  premisses  or 
not  it  is  for  others  to  consider,  for  the  future  to  decide.  It  can 
only  be  pleaded  by  the  way  that  while  "expectant  attention"  had 
no  part  in  the  recognition  of  the  bone,  the  just  demands  upon 
observant  attention  made  by  so  significant  a  fossil  have  been 
admitted  and  honoured. 

From  the  accompanying  figures  of  this  bone  (PI.  xxiii.,  fig.  Sa  and 
Sb)  it  will  be  seen  that  its  most  striking  feature  is  the  extension 
distad  of  what  may  be  called  the  pedicels  of  its  trochlea?,  that  is  of  the 
metatarsal  elements  after  their  release  from  confluence  in  the  shaft, 
the  trochlear  surfaces  not  included.  In  contrast  with  those  of  all 
other  birds  examined,  the  trochlea?  almost  appear  to  be  borne  on 
the  ends  of  moderately  long  stalks.  In  carinate  birds  the  exist- 
ence of  a  pedicel  so  defined  is  hardly  recognizable  on  the  dorsal 
side  of  even  the  mesial  trochlea,  and  on  the  plantar  surface,  which 
is  usually  less  invaded  by  an  extension  of  the  groove  of  the  pulley, 
the  length  of  the  pedicel  is  seldom  if  ever  greater  than  its  breadth 
at  the  base.  The  statement  is  warranted  by  certain  Anseres 
(Chenopis,  Biziura)  which  have  the  longest  pedicels  observed. 
Still  shorter  of  course  are  the  bases  of  the  lateral  trochlea?  in  the 
CaHnatce.  Among  the  Ratitce  the  only  genus  possessing  pedicels 
which  are  conspicuously  elongated  and  of  equal  length  on  both 
surfaces  is,  so  far  as  the  writer's  experience  extends,  Apteryx. 
But  the  characterization  imparted  by  their  unusual  length  is 
exactly  that  which  was  antedated  in  greater  force  in  the  fossil, 
while  there  is  also  exhibited  by  the  extinct  bone  a  like  equality  in 
the  length  of  the  opposed  surfaces  of  the  lateral  pedicels.  It  may 
be  thought  that  this  greater  freedom  of  the  distal  ends  of  the 
bone  is  probably  the  ordinary  condition  of  immaturity.     To  meet 


450     RESIDUE  OF  EXTINCT  BIRDS  OF  QUEENSLAND  AS  YET  DETECTED, 

this  very  obvious  objection,  young  metatarsals  have  been  procured 
from  a  considerable  number  of  birds  of  different  families,  all  of 
which  show  confluence  of  the  metatarsal  elements  to  the  same 
extent  distad  as  in  adults. 

Associated  with  lengthened  pedicels  we  see  both  in  the  Apteryx 
and  in  the  fossil  bird  approximate  equality  in  length  attained  by 
the  lateral  trochlear  processes  in  their  entirety,  and,  furthermore, 
an  extension  of  the  mesial  trochlea  almost  entirely  beyond  the 
extremities  of  the  other  two.  Greater  weight  will  attach  to  a 
deduction  from  this  composite  character  if  one  of  the  antecedents 
be  expressed  in  the  words  of  Owen,  who,  pointing  out  (Comp. 
Anat.  of  Yert.  Vol.  ii.,  p.  81)  the  leading  differentiations  of  the 
metatarse  in  birds,  says,  "  In  the  Apteryx  and  tridactyle  cursores 
the  mid-troehlea  is  the  largest  and  extends  by  almost  its  whole 
length  beyond  the  other  two,  which  are  nearly  on  a  level."  It  is 
only  necessary  to  add  that  the  degree  of  extension  of  one  lateral 
trochlea  beyond  the  other  is,  allowing  for  difference  of  total 
dimensions,  appreciably  the  same  in  the  Apteryx  and  in  the  fossil. 

In  the  absence  of  any  feature  proper  to  the  Carinatce,  it  would 
seem  justifiable  on  the  grounds  already  advanced  to  admit  the 
extinct  bird  to  a  place  in  the  apterygine  division  of  the  Ratitce. 
But  by  way  of  fortifying  the  position  taken  up,  it  may  be 
observed  that  there  are  other  characters  which,  though  less 
weighty,  tend  to  confirm  it.  The  distal  end  of  the  shaft  in  Apteryx 
is  anteroposteriorly  compressed  and,  in  consequence  of  the 
divergence  of  the  lateral  pedicels  commencing  higher  up  the  shaft 
than  in  other  birds,  laterally  expanded.  A  glance  at  the  figure 
(PI.  xxiii.,  figs.  8a  and  Sb),  will  show  that  the  form  of  the  shaft  and 
the  cause  of  its  lateral  expansion  alike  pre-existed  in  the  fossil  even 
more  pronouncedly  than  in  the  living  bird. 

Again,  in  the  whole  number  of  recent  metatarsals  examined  for 
the  purpose,  there  is  but  one  which  shows  on  the  surfaces  of  the 
shaft  traces  of  embryonal  conditions  in  the  presence  of  lines  of 
junction  between  its  coalesced  segments.  As  it  is  within  the 
limits  of  possibility  that  none  of  these  bones  were  derived  from 
young  birds,  the  immature  metatarsals  previously  mentioned  were 


BY    C.   W.   DE    VIS.  451 

examined  for  the  lines  of  coalescence  ;  uncertain  indications  of 
them  appeared  in  a  few,  but  in  none  were  they  continuous  and 
well  marked.  In  the  bone  from  the  foot  of  an  example  of  A. 
mantelli  which  seemed  to  be  nearly  half  grown,  these  lines  are  still 
apparent  in  the  form  of  fine  continuous  grooves.  At  maturity 
they  disappear  altogether,  as  I  learn  from  Professor  Parker,  who 
kindly  examined  for  me  his  adult  specimens  and  found  complete 
anchylosis  to  have  taken  place  in  all.  In  the  fossil  metatarsal 
these  lines  are  on  the  posterior  side  quite  conspicuous,  but,  as  in 
the  kiwi,  they  are  less  distinct  on  the  anterior,  and,  again  as  in 
the  kiwi,  they  are  interrupted  in  the  middle  of  that  side  by 
complete  confluence  of  the  superficies.  The  fossil  obviously  came 
from  a  bird  of  nearly  the  same  age  as  the  Apteryx  compared  with  it. 

In  the  figure  of  the  metatarsal  of  the  Apteryx  (PI.  xxiii.,  fig.  9a) 
there  is  shown  on  the  dorsal  side  adjoining  the  trochleae  of  the 
inner  and  mesial  pedicels  a  large  rough  depression  for  the  inser- 
tion of  their  extensor  tendons.  Among  other  living  birds  areas 
of  insertion  as  great  and  definite  as  these  have  hitherto  eluded  the 
search  of  the  observer.  On  the  exterior  pedicel  of  the  fossil  the 
same  feature  is  seen  to  occur  (PI.  xxiii.,  fig.  8a). 

Finally,  as  in  the  example  of  A.  mantelli  before  us,  the  shaft  is 
not  pierced  by  the  tibial  artery.  But  this  character  is  of  com- 
paratively little  value  since  the  perforation  is,  as  we  have  seen, 
absent  in  a  bird  which  either  belongs  or  is  nearly  related  to 
Dromaius,  and  is  present  in  Ey  ton's  figure  of  the  me  tat  arse  of 
Apteryx  australis. 

The  features  which  have  been  noticed  so  far  are  those  in  which 
the  fossil  appears  to  be  in  close  agreement  with  Apteryx.  United 
they  seem  to  justify  the  conclusion  that  in  spite  of  all  our  precon- 
ceptions this  Australian  relic  represents  a  bird  having  a  decided 
family  relationship  with  the  Apterygidce  of  New  Zealand. 

But  even  so  it  was  not  an  Apteryx — this  it  asserts  emphatically. 

In  the  first  place  it  had  no  traceable  hind  toe.     The  portion  of 

the  shaft  preserved  extends  proximad  far  beyond  the  level  of  this 

toe  in  Apteryx  and  bears  on  its  surface  no  sign  of,  not  the  slightest 

depression  on  its  rotundity  indicating,  the  existence  of  a  hallucal 

30 


452     RESIDUE  OF  EXTINCT  BIRDS  OF  QUEENSLAND  AS  YET  DETECTED, 

metatarsal.  In  the  immature  A.  mantelli  the  impression  of  the 
first  metatarsal  on  the  shaft  is  distinct,  but  considering  that 
possibly  it  might  be  absent  occasionally  in  this  or  other  species 
the  writer  sought  instruction  from  Professor  Parker  on  this  point 
also,  and  was  very  kindly  informed  by  him  that  the  impression  is 
sometimes  "  nearly  obsolete  "  in  the  living  birds.  As  it  appears 
from  this  that  it  is  never  entirely  absent,  we  are  at  liberty  to 
assume  that  the  extinct  bird  was  tridactyle,  or,  if  we  prefer  it,  had 
a  hind  toe  in  a  still  more  rudimentary  condition  than  Apteryx. 

The  elongation  of  the  lateral  pedicels,  and  especially  that  of  the 
inner  one,  is  carried  to  a  considerably  greater  extent  than  in 
Apteryx,  while  their  angles  of  divergence  from  the  mesial  pedicel 
are  less. 

More  notable  still  as  an  index  to  the  aptitudes  of  the  bird,  and 
tending  moreover  to  explain  the  probable  absence  of  the  hind  toe, 
is  the  size  of  the  mesial  pedicel,  which  is  enlarged  out  of  all 
proportion  to  the  laterals.  It  is  twice  as  broad  as  the  inner,  and 
two  and  a  half  times  the  breadth  of  the  outer.  Its  trochlea 
evidently  supported  a  toe  which  took  a  principal  part  in  sustaining 
the  weight  of  the  body  and  was  the  main  instrument  of  progres- 
sion. It  is  therefore  a  fair  inference  that  the  cursorial  power  of 
the  bird  was  much  superior  to  that  of  the  kiwis,  and  indeed  it  is 
scarcely  too  much  to  infer  that  in  this  important  part  of  its 
organization  the  extinct  bird  was  nearly  as  much  an  emu  as  an 
Apteryx. 

Unconformably  to  the  emu  and  kiwi  alike  is  the  inner  trochlea 
with  its  pedicel,  which  in  the  fossil  bird  is  or  appears  to  be  the 
longer  of  the  two  laterals — it  is  at  least  that  trochlea  which  is  on 
the  thinner  side  of  the  shaft,  the  inner  in  Apteryx,  which  has  the 
broader  and  more  rhomboidal  articulating  surface,  and  which 
has  the  insertion  of  an  extensor  tendon  stamped  upon  its  pedicel. 
The  shaft,  as  before  stated,  is  not  perforated  by  the  tibial  artery, 
and  herein  agrees  with  the  metatarsal  of  A.  mantelli  collated  with 
it  ;  but  in  the  latter  the  artery  in  its  passage  between  the  outer 
and  mesial  pedicels  is  protected  by  a  bony  canal,  almost  amounting 
to  a  tunnel,  developed  in  the  angle  formed  by  the  pedicels ;  of  this 
there  is  no  trace  in  the  fossil. 


BY   C.  W.  DE   VIS.  453 

The  magnitude  of  the  middle  toe,  the  superior  length  of  the 
inner  one  of  the  laterals,  the  rudimentary  state  or  complete 
absence  of  the  hind  toe  are  generic  characters  irreconcilable  with 
Apteryx. 

In  stature  the  bird  seems  not  to  have  exceeded  the  modern  kiwis. 

Dimensions. 

Fossil.       A.  mantelli. 
Length  distad  from  termination  of  cal- 
caneal groove 51  3     ...     35*5 

Trochlear  expansion,  over  all    33-0      ...      21*7 

Breadth  of  shaft  at  point  of  fracture 

in  fossil    12-0       ...     7-0 

Thickness  at  same  point 8*3      ...        5*0 

If  after  forming  its  estimate  of  the  intrinsic  probabilities  of  the 
case  the  judgment  can  pronounce  in  favour  of  the  view  that  the 
extinct  bird  stood  well  within  the  pale  of  the  Apterygidce  while 
yet  maintaining  relations  with  the  three-toed  Ratitce  the  name 
Jfetapteryx  bifrons  may  seem  somewhat  appropriate,  and  pro- 
visionally this  name  is  suggested. 

Arrived  at  this  goal  without  bias  we  may  now  permit  ourselves 
to  remember  that  the  present  is  not  the  first  intimation  we  have 
received  of  generic  relations  existing  between  the  Australian  and 
New  Zealand  struthiones.  Dromornis  is  in  great  part  a  Dinornis, 
Dinornis  itself  has  occurred  in  Queensland.  These  fossils 
and  the  present  mutually  support  and  illustrate  each  other. 
Dinornithidce  and  Apterygidce  now  conspire  to  establish  the  fact 
that  Australia  was  the  cradle  of  the  birds  whose  latest  phase  of 
existence  in  a  distant  island  will  soon  be  but  a  tale  told  over  a 
few  bones. 

The  collection  of  fossils  which  has  "from  time  to  time  afforded 
tantalizing  glimpses  of  the  bird  realm  of  an  earlier  Australia,  a 
realm  doubtless  no  less  populous  than  in  the  present,  much  more 
so  if  the  ratio  of  bird  to  beast  obtained  then  as  now,  after  dis- 
closing less  than  the  twentieth  part  of  the  number  of  existing 
land     and    fresh     water    birds,    ceases    to    supply    information. 


454     RESIDUE  OF  EXTINCT  BIRDS  OF  QUEENSLAND  AS  YET  DETECTED, 

Numerous  bones,  indeed,  remain  unnoticed,  but  they  are  heads  of 
fibulas,  phalanges  of  toes,  fragments  of  ribs,  water  worn  relics  of 
sterna,  all  barren  of  instruction.  An  opportunity,  therefore, 
fairly  offers  of  summing  up  the  knowledge  we  seem  to  have 
acquired  from  the  collection  in  this  its  initial  stage  ;  and  if  the 
great  slowness  with  which  bird  fossils  are  brought  together  be 
considered  we  shall  have  less  difficulty  in  accepting  the  offer  ; 
judging  from  past  experience,  it  is  not  probable  that  a  supplement 
to  the  following  list  will  be  necessary  for  some  years,  however 
soon  a  revision  of  its  contents  may  be  so  judged  by  a  succeeding 
observer. 

List  of  Birds 
(From  the  so-called  Post-Pliocene  Drifts  of  Queensland). 

N.B. — For  all  names  without  authority  stated  the  writer  is 
responsible  ;  extinct  genera  in  italics. 

CARINAS. 

FALCONIDiE. 

Taphaetits  brachialis,  syn.  Uroaetus  brachialis. 
Necrastur  alacer. 

COLUMBJE. 

Lithophaps  ulnaris. 
Progura  gallinacea. 

Megapodid^e. 

Chosomis  prseteritus 

Grall^e. 

Tribonyx  effluxus,  syn.  Fulica  prior  (part). 

Porphyrio  (?)  reperta. 

Porphyrio  (?)  mackintoshi. 

Fulica  prior. 

Gallinula  strenuipes. 

Gallinula  peralata. 

Lobivanellus  sp. 


BY    C.  W.  DE    VIS.  455 

CARINAT.-E  (continued)— 

Otidid^e,  gen.  et  sp.  ind. 

Anseres. 

Anas  elapsa. 

Dendrocygna  validipennis. 
Biziura  exhumata. 
Nyroca  robusta. 
Nyroca  sp. 

Herodiones. 

Xenorhynchus  nanus. 
Palceojyelaryus  nobilis. 
Platalea  (?)  subtenuis. 

Steganopodes. 

Felicanus  proavus. 
Plotus  parvus. 

RATIT.E. 

CASUARIDiE. 

Dromaius  patricius. 
Dromaius  gracilipes. 

DlNORNITHIDiE. 

Dromornis  australis,  Owen. 
Dinornis  queenslandiaB. 

APTERYGIDiE. 

Metapteryx  bifrons. 

The  wholeof  the  twenty-eight  species  indicated  and  seven,  or  more 
probably  eight,  out  of  the  twenty-four  genera  to  which  they  are 
referred,  are  extinct.  The  extent  of  the  change  which  the 
Nototherian  avifauna  of  Queensland  is  thus  shown  to  have  under- 
gone is  very  much  the  same  as  that  observed  in  the  case  of  the 
marsupials.  With  two  or  three  very  doubtful  exceptions  all  these 
have  submitted  to  specific  metamorphosis,  and  of  twenty-six  of  the 
old  genera  but  fourteen  survive.     Has  the  change  been  rapid  9 


456     RESIDUE  OF  EXTINCT  BIRDS  OF  QUEENSLAND  AS  YET  DETECTED. 

then  from  what  cause?  Not  from  the  advent  of  man;  savages  do 
not  exterminate.  Have  we  hitherto  considered  this  fauna  younger 
than  it  really  was  ?  possibly,  but  for  the  solution  of  these  questions 
we  must  look  to  further  accumulation  and  study  of  palseontogical 
evidence.  So  far  as  the  writer  can  see  at  present  the  Age  of  the 
fauna  preserved  in  the  Darling  Downs  deposits  cannot  well  be 
later  than  Early  Pliocene. 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES. 
Plate  xxiv. 

Fig.  la. — Necrastur  alaeer  :  proximal  end  of  right  humerus  ;  outer  aspect- 
Fig.  16.  — Necraster  alaeer :  proximal  end  of  right  humerus  ;  inner  aspect. 

Fig.  2a. — Porphyrio  mackiutoshi:   distal  extremity  of  a  right  tarsometa- 
tarse  ;  posterior  side. 

Fig.  26. — Porphyrio  mackintoshi :  distal   extremity  of  a  right  tarsometa- 
tarse  ;  anterior  side. 

Fig.  3a. — Gallinula  peralata :  humerus;  outer  aspect. 

Fig.  36.  — Gallinula  peralata :  humerus  ;  inner  aspect. 

Fig.  4a. — PcUceopelargus  nobilis:  distal  end  of  a  right  "medius"  metacarpal. 

Fig.  46. — PcUceopelargvs  nobilis:  distal  end  of  aright  "medius"  metacarpal. 

Fig.  5a. — Platalea  subtenuis  :  proximal  end  of  right  femur  ;  inner  aspect. 

Fig.  56.  — Platalea  subtenuis :  proximal  end  of  right  femur  ;  outer  aspect. 

Fig.  6a. — Pelicanus  proavus  :  left  tarsometatarsal ;  posterior  side. 

Fig.  66. — Pelicanus  2yroavits:  left  tarsometatarsal  ;  anterior  side. 

Plate  xxiii. 

Fig.  la. — Dromaius  gracilipes :   distal    end   of   tarsometatarse  ;   posterior 
side. 

Fig.  lb. — Dromaius  gracilipes:  distal  end  of  tarsometatarse  ;  anterior  side. 

Fig.  8a. — Metapttryx  bifrons ;  distal  half  of  tarsometatarse  ;  anterior  side. 

Fig.  86.  — Metapteryx  bifrons :  distal  half  of  tarsometatarse  ;  posterior  side. 

Fig.  9a. — Apttryx  mantelli  :  tarsometatarse  ;  anterior  side. 

Fig.  96. — Apteryx  mantelli:  tarsometatarse  ;  posterior  side. 


457 


OBSERVATIONS  ON  PLANTS,  COLLECTED  DURING 

MR.  JOSEPH  BRADSHAW'S  EXPEDITION  TO 

THE  PRINCE  REGENT'S   RIVER. 

By  Baron  von  Mueller,  K.C.M.G.,  M.D.,  Ph.D.,  F.R.S. 

During  the  months  of  March,  April,  and  part  of  May  of  this 
yea^,  Mr.  Joseph  Bradshaw,  an  enterprising  Melbourne  citizen, 
conducted  a  private  exploring  expedition  from  Cambridge  Gulf  to 
Prince  Regent's  River,  whereby,  for  the  first  time,  some  of  the 
waters  of  that  gulf  became  geographically  connected  with  rivers 
flowing  into  Brunswick  Bay.  Thus  now  only  the  upper  portion 
of  Prince  Regent's  River  became  explored,  although  already  71 
years  ago  Admiral  Ph.  P.  King  had  discovered  the  estuary  and 
lower  portion  of  that  stream.  With  praiseworthy  circumspect- 
ness,  in  this  expedition,  unlike  in  many  others,  the  leader  of  the 
party  made  arrangements  for  securing  botanic .  material  during 
this  enterprise,  that  particular  task  being  specially  entrusted  to 
Mr.  William  Tucker  Allen.  The  results,  which  also  in  this 
respect  have  rendered  Mr.  Bradshaw's  expedition  a  very  success- 
ful one,  have  been  recorded  in  the  following  pages,  with  the 
prospect  that  during  the  soon  commencing  pastoral  occupation 
of  the  Prince  Regent's  River  country  also  botanic  along  with 
geographic  exploits  will  be  continued. 

Nymphaea  coerulea,  Savigny. 

Woodhouse  River. 

From  this  locality  is  brought  what  appears  to  be  a  small-flowered 
variety  of  the  above-named  species,  which  is  generally  regarded 
as  identical  with  N.  stellata,  but  was  published  one  year  earlier. 
The  only  flower  obtained  has  the  sepals  and  petals  barely  one  inch 


458  OBSERVATIONS    ON    PLANTS, 

long ;  it  shows  the  stamens  of  N.  stellata,  not  of  ffi.  gigantea, 
although  Prof.  Caspary  recorded  already,  1866  (Miq.  Annal.  Mus. 
Lugd.  Batav.  n.  247),  also  a  small-flowered  variety  of  that  species 
from  Queensland,  which  might  readily  be  taken  for  N.  tetragona, 
but  has  different  stamens,  and  differs  also  in  some  other  respects. 
The  whole  subject  will  soon  be  fully  discussed  in  an  essay  on  Sir 
Will.  Macgregor's  latest  Papuan  plants,  among  which  occurs  also 
a  small-flowered  Nymphaea. 

HlBBERTIA    LEPIDOTA,   R.   BrOWll. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

ROEPERIA    CLEOMOIDES,  F.V.M. 

Durack  River,  and  between  the  Forrest  and  Drysdale  Rivers. 
Found  also  at  Cambridge  Gulf  by  Johnston  and  on  the  Leichhardt 
River  by  Armit. 

Sprengel  with  remarkable  definiteness  makes  his  Roeperia  super- 
sede Ricinocarpus.  Should,  therefore,  in  publications  from  before 
1817,  his  naming  have  become  established,  then  the  homonymous 
capparideous  genus  might  receive  the  name  of  Prof.  Paul  Falken- 
berg,  the  present  successor  of  Roeper  in  Rostock.  Eichler  in  his 
highly  important  Pflanzen-Diagramme,  II.  208  and  211,  fully  also 
sustains  the  generic  validity  of  our  Roeperia. 

Drosera  Indica,  Linne. 
Durack  River  and  Paradise  Creek. 

Stem  to  1J  feet  high.  The  petals  of  some  of  the  specimens 
rose-coloured  and  nearly  half  an  inch  long. 

Drosera  petiolaris,  R.  Brown. 
Paradise  Creek. 

Byblis  liniflora,  Salisbury. 
Durack  River. 

Habitually  resembling  small  forms  of  Drosera  Indica.  Traced 
southward  to  near  the  Gascoyne  River  by  Mr.  H.  S.  King. 
Petals  not  rarely  denticulated. 


BY  BARON  VON  MUELLER.  459 

COCHLOSPERMUM  HETERONEMUM,  F.V.M. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

Polygala  Chinensis,  Linne. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Polygala  leptalea,  De  Candolle. 
Carson's  River. 

Owenia  vernicosa,  F.v.M. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 
Some  of  the  leaflets  may  become  reduced  to  eight. 

Hibiscus  panduripormis,  Burmann. 
Woodhouse  River. 

Hibiscus  zonatus,  F.v.M. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

A  variety  with  velvety  vestiture,  proportionately  broader  leaves, 
twenty-cleft  involucel  not  fissured  to  the  base.  This  species  differs 
from  all  other  Australian  congeners  already  in  the  larger  number 
of  involucellar  segments ;  from  the  allied  H.  Goldsworthii  besides 
injthe  thinner  and  closer  indument,  less  acutely  denticulated  leaves 
and  [nearly  glabrous  petals.  This  plant  was  traced  southward  by 
the  Hon.  Sir  John  Forrest  to  the  Sherlock  River,  and  by  Mr.  H. 
S. ^ King  to  near  the  Gascoyne  River. 

GOSSYPIUM    THESPESIOIDES,  F.V.M. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

A  variety  with  cordate  leaves,  glabrous  on  the  surface;  the 
involucel  is  three  times  shorter  than  the  calyx,  and  has  several 
very  short  and  narrow  lobes ;  the  petals  are  shiningly  tomentellous 
outside  except  towards  the  summit ;  the  glandular  dots,  charac- 
teristic for  Gossypiitm,  are  much  concealed. 


460  OBSERVATIONS   ON    PLANTS, 

Gossypium  costulatum,  Todaro. 

Welcome  Creek  ;  sources  of  the  Prince  Regent's  and  Row's 
Rivers.     Leaning  up  to  5  feet  on  rocks. 

Branches  slender  and  lax.  Involucellar  bracts  lanceolar, 
hardly  half  as  long  as  the  calyx.  Petals  rose-coloured,  fully  2 
inches  long,  outside  partly  beset  with  minute  hairlets.  Upper 
portion  of  the  style  tomentellous. 

Abutilon  leucopetalum,  F.v.M. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Brachychiton  paradoxus,  Schott. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Brachychiton  diversifolius,  R.  Brown. 
Carson's  River. 

The  gum  brought  by  Mr.  Bradshaw  is  almost  colourless,  and 
occurs  in  lumps  of  considerable  size. 

Waltheria  Indica,  Linne. 
Durack  River. 

It  ranges  on  the  west  coast  southward  to  Nickol  Bay,  according 
to  collections  from  the  Hon.  Sir  John  Forrest. 

Triumpetta  Bradshawii. 

Branchlets  rather  densely  beset  with  long  fasciculate  spreading 
hairlets  ;  leaves  comparatively  large,  ovate-lanceolar  or  somewhat 
cordate,  acuminate,  occasionally  short-trilobed,  crenulate-serrate, 
above  closely  provided  with  a  subtle  stellular  inclument,  beneath 
thinly  grey-velvety,  and  there  the  reticular  venules  prominent,  on 
both  sides  bearing  some  scattered  fascicular  long  hairlets;  stipules 
long,  filiform-linear,  as  well  as  the  petioles,  peduncles  and  sepals, 
beset  with  fascicular  elongated  hairlets  ;  flowers  quite  large,  often 
solitary ;  sepals  broad-linear,  with  a  generally  conspicuous  appen- 
dage behind  their  summit ;  stamens  extremely  numerous ;  anthers 


BY    BARON    VON    MUELLER.  461 

considerably  longer  than  broad  ;  style  elongated,  capillary-thin, 
near  the  base  pubescent ;  stigmas  minute ;  torus  densely  long- 
villous  ;  fruit  unusually  large,  almost  globular,  very  hard,  doubly 
five-celled,  ten-seeded,  densely  beset  with  rather  short  flexuous 
fascicular-hispid  bristlets  ;  seeds  considerably  compressed. 

In  the  vicinity  of  Prince  Regent's  River ;  Bradshaw  and  Allen. 
Near  Cambridge  Gulf  ;  Keiller. 

Leaves  to  5  inches  long  and  to  2  inches  broad,  often  lobeless. 
Length  of  petiole  at  an  average  one  inch.  Pedicels  conspicuous. 
Sepals  about  J  inch  long  or  still  longer,  especially  when  the  appen- 
dage becomes  enlarged  and  divided.  Petals  already  dropped  from 
only  flower  obtained.  Stamens  fully  half  an  inch  long,  if  not 
longer.  Style  measuring  about  §  inch  in  length.  Size  of  fruit 
quite  one  inch  ;  the  vestiture  comparatively  short,  but  intricate ; 
pericarp  very  thick  and  tough  ;  secondary  dissepiments  nearly  as 
thick  as  the  others.     Seeds  J-J  inch  long,  outside  brownish. 

In  some  respects  allied  to  T.  Fabreana,  from  the  Marianes,  but 
with  a  different  indument,  longer  more  pointed  leaves,  elongated 
stipules,  much  larger  flowers,  almost  innumerable  stamens,  also 
fruits  of  greater  size  and  of  interwoven  vestiture.  From  T. 
Johnston^  to  which  it  comes  nearest  in  fruit-indument,  easily 
separable  by  the  conspicuously  longer  but  less  close  vestiture  of 
the  branches,  pedicels  and  sepals,  by  the  larger  and  particularly 
broader  leaves,  by  the  much  greater  size  of  the  flowers  and  fruits, 
by  the  much  longer  but  less  straight  and  more  hispid  fruit-setules, 
and  by  the  number  of  the  dissepiments  and  seeds. 

T.  Winneckeana  stands  still  further  apart ;  its  vestiture  is  quite 
short,  its  leaves  are  comparatively  small,  its  fruit-setules  rigidly 
straight  and  only  short-hispidulous  or  getting  glabrous.  That 
plant  was  found  also  on  the  Ashburton  River  by  Mr.  H.  St.  Carey. 
T.  appendicidata  is  devoid  of  the  long  hairlets  of  our  new  plant, 
and  has  the  fruits  considerably  smaller,  rigidly  setulous  and 
doubly  three-celled. 

Triumfetta  plumigera,  F.v.M. 
Carson  Valley. 


462  OBSERVATIONS    ON    PLANTS, 

CORCHORUS    ALLENII. 

Branchlets  thinly  beset  with  stellular  hairlets  ;  leaves  on  very 
short  petioles,  narrow-  or  elongate-lanceolate,  without  any  con- 
spicuous denticulation,  on  both  sides  provided  with  a  subtle 
stellular  greyish  indument ;  stipules  very  short,  fugacious  ;  pedi- 
cels comparatively  short ;  flowers  very  small,  solitary ;  calyx 
tubular  and  undivided  towards  the  base ;  fruit  ovate-ellipsoid, 
five-celled,  densely  beset  with  short  soft  flexuous  stellular-hispi- 
dulous  bristlets ;  seeds  about  four  in  each  cell. 

Near  Prince  Regent's  River ;  Bradshaw  and  Allen. 

Leaves  2-3  inches  long,  J-J  inch  broad.  Good  flowers  not 
obtained.  Petals  seen  in  a  shrivelled  state,  and  seemingly  only 
J  inch  long.  Fruit  about  §  inch  long,  its  setules  somewhat 
flattened,  forming  a  dense  grey  vestiture,  the  uppermost  of  them 
often  slightly  dilated  and  then  constituting  a  rather  distinct 
termination  to  the  fruit.     Seeds  brown  outside,  glabrous. 

Although  the  fruit-setules  are  somewhat  similar  to  those  of 
Triumfetta  Bradshawii,  yet  the  plant  falls  systematically  into 
Corchorus,  no  absolute  differences  existing  between  the  two 
genera.  It  approaches  in  some  respects  C.  echinatus,  in  others 
C.  hirsutus,  but  as  regards  the  characteristics  of  the  fruit-indu- 
ment,  this  species  stands  quite  apart  among  its  known  congeners, 
except  C.  Elderi ;  but  that  has  the  leaves  much  smaller  and 
distinctly  denticulated,  the  fruits  also  of  much  lesser  size,  with 
shorter  setules,  the  seeds  fewer  and  of  course  smaller. 

Grewia  polygama,  Roxburgh. 
Carson  River. 

Petalostigma  quadriloculare,  F.v.M. 

Prince  Regent's  River.  KnoM'n  now  also  from  Wickliffe's  Creek 
in  Central  Australia  (Flint). 

Sebastiania  chamaelea,  J.  Mueller. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 


by  baron  von  mueller.  463 

Euphorbia  schizolepis,  F.v.M. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

The  glabrous  variety.  Some  of  the  involucral  appendages  only 
bilobed. 

Bridelia  tomentosa,  Blume. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

Ficus  platypoda,  Cunningham. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Atalaya  hemiglauca,  F.v.M. 
Carson  Valley. 

DlSTICHOSTEMON    PHYLLOPTERUS,  F.V.M. 

Paradise  Creek. 

The  only  plant  in  the  vast  order  of  Sapindacese  with  an  indefinite 
number  of  stamens,  just  as  among  the  many  hundreds  of  cruci- 
ferous plants  Megacarpaea  polyandra  is  the  only  one  with  more 
than  6  stamens. 

Canarium  Australasicum,  F.v.M. 

Prince  Regent's  River.  Found  also  on  the  Catherine  River  by 
A.  Giles  and  at  Port  Douglas  by  Barnard. 

POLYCARPAEA    LONGIFLORA,  F.V.M. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

Particularly  well  worthy  of  culture  as  a  kind  of  everlasting  on 
account  of  its  copious  dark  red  flowers. 

Gomphrena  leptoclada,  Bentham. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Gomphrena  flaccida,  R.  Brown. 

Prince  Regent's  and  Durack  Rivers.  Found  also  at  King's  Sound 
(Poulton),  Fitzroy  River  (G.  Paterson),  Norman  River  (Gulliver), 
Goode  Island  (Poulton),  Ennesleigh  River  (Armit),  Creen's  Creek 
(Stockfeldt). 


464  OBSERVATIONS    ON    PLANTS, 

Not  rarely  of  firm  strictness  and  perhaps  perennial.  The  leaves 
not  seldom  widened  to  a  narrow-lanceolar  form,  and  often  bearing 
conspicuous  vestiture.  Sepals  from  white  to  rosy-red ;  in  the 
latter  case  the  plant  becomes  highly  ornamental. 

GOMPHRENA    CANESCENS,  R.  Brown. 

Prince  Regent's  River.  Occurs  also  in  Dampier's  Archipelagus 
(Walcott),  Fitzroy  River  (Paterson),  Lagrange  Bay  (Panton), 
Yule  River  (Hon.  Sir  John  Forrest),  Georgina  River  (St.  Dittrich). 

Mr.  Bradshaw  singles  this  out  for  record  as  a  pasture-herb, 
consumed  with  predilection  by  his  horses.  G.  globosa  has  been 
gathered  in  N.  E.  Queensland,  but  perhaps  only  as  a  garden-fugitive. 

Ptilotus  corymbosus,  R.  Brown. 

Carson  Valley. 

Ptilotus  spicatus,  F.v.M. 

Woodhouse  River. 

Summit  of  spike  yellowish.      A  particularly  neat  plant  for  pot 

culture. 

Ptilotus  gracilis,  Poiret. 

Woodhouse  River. 

Ptilotus  alopecuroides,  F.v.M. 

Durack  River. 

Trianthema  pilosa,  F.v.M. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

PORTULACA    DIGYNA,  F.V.M. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

Portulaca  australis,  Encllicher. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 
Clearly  Bauer's  plant. 

Claytonia  uniflora,  F.v.M. 
Sandy  country  at  the  Pentacost  River. 


BY    BARON    VON    MUELLER.  465 

Salsola  Kali,  Linne. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

Incidentally  it  may  here  be  stated  that  the  restitution  of 
Osteocarjncm  (in  the  Iconography  of  Australian  Salsolaceous 
Plants)  requires  Babbagia  to  merge  into  that  genus. 

Gastrolobium  grandiflorum,  F.v.M. 

In  the  Callitris-tracts  of  the  Forrest  and  Drysdale  Rivers. 
Known  now  also  from  the  Upper  Belyando  (Sutherland),  Aramac 
Creek  (O'Shanesy),  Alice  Springs  (Flint),  Suttor  River,  Paroo 
(Sir  S.  Wilson). 

Specimens  sent  by  Mr.  McRae  from  the  Nickol  Bay  country 
have  the  upper  petal  darker  and  the  fruit  appressedly  beset  with 
hairlets. 

Burtonia  subulata,  Bentham. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

Bossiaea  phylloclada,  F.v.M. 
Forrest,  Carson's,  Roe's  and  Drysdale  Rivers. 

Crotalaria  verrucosa,  Linne. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Crotalaria  linifolia,  Linne,  fil. 
Durack  River. 

Crotalaria  calycina,  Schranck. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

Crotalaria  retusa,  Linne. 

Carson  Valley.  Obtained  latterly  also  at  Cambridge  Gulf 
(Johnston),  Fitzroy  River  (Forrest)",  Ord  River  (O'Donnell), 
Strangeway  River  (Waterhouse). 

Crotalaria  crassipes,  Hooker. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

The  leaflet  may  attain  a  breadth  of  2  inches. 


466  OBSERVATIONS    ON    PLANTS, 

Crotalaria  medicaginea,  Lamarck. 

Prince  Regent's  River.      Gathered   also   near  the  Macdonell 
Ranges  with  C.  incana. 

Crotalaria  laburnifolia,  Linne. 
Carson  River. 

Crotalaria  alata,  Hamilton. 
Paradise  Creek. 

PSORALEA    BODACANA,  BlanCO. 

Carson  Valley. 

PSORALEA    TESTARIAE,  F.V.M. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

Indigofera  linifolia,  Retzius. 
Durack  River. 

Indigofera  trifoliata,  Linne. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Indigofera  viscosa,  Lamarck. 

Prince  Regent's  River.    Observed  also  recently  at  King's  Sound 
(Poulton),  and  on  the  Finke  River  (Kempe). 

Indigofera  hirsuta,  Linne. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Sesbania  grandiflora,  Persoon. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

Mr.  L.  Gould  saw  trees  to  40ft.  high  at  Nickol  Bay. 

Desmodium  parvifolium,  De  Candolle. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

A  variety  with  partly  unifoliolate  leaves  of  obcordate-orbicular 
form. 


BY    BARON    VON    MUELLER.  4G7 

Desmodium   BIARTICULATUM,  F.V.M. 
Carson  River.     Also  on  the  Adelaide  River  (Prof.  Tate). 

Pycnospora  hedysaroides,  R.  Brown. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Uraria  cylindracea,  Bentham. 
Prince  Regent's  River.     Also  at  Port  Darwin  (Foelsche). 

Canavalia  obtusifolia,  De  Candolle. 
Littoral  region  of  the  Prince  Regent's  River  country. 

Erythrina  vespertilio,  Bentham. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Flemingia  lineata,  Roxburgh. 
Durack  River. 

Flemingia  pauciflora,  Bentham. 

Carson  River.     The  same  or  a  closely  allied  species  has  been 
found  by  Bowman  near  the  Suttor  River. 

Cassia  mimosoides,  Linne. 
Woodhouse  River. 

Cassia  concinna,  Bentham. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Acacia  translucens,  Cunningham. 
Roe's  River. 

Acacia  lycopodifolia,  Cunningham. 

Woodhouse  and  Pentacost  Rivers. 
31 


468  OBSERVATIONS    ON    PLANTS, 

The  first  leaves  of  the  seedlings  consist  of  two  pubescent  pinua?, 
with  the  leaflets  in  few  or  several  pairs  and  of  obliquely  lanceolar- 
ovate  somewhat  dimidiate  form. 


Acacia  hemignosta,  F.v.M. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 


Acacia  flavescens,  Cunningham. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 
The  form  formerly  distinguished  as  A.  sericata. 

Acacia  Kelleri. 

Pubescent,  unarmed  ;  phyllodes  small,  much  crowded,  linear  or 
slightly  lanceolar,  mucronulate,  hardly  or  somewhat  spreading, 
many-streaked  by  subtle  equal  venules ;  stipules  conspicuous, 
semi  lanceolate-linear,  scarious,  closely  overtopping  the  young 
foliage ;  spikes  short-stalked,  cylindric,  close-flowered ;  bracts 
lanceolar,  acuminate,  sessile  or  short-stipitate,  as  well  as  the 
sepals  and  petals  outside  puberulous  ;  sepals  almost  disconnected, 
broadened  towards  their  upper  end ;  petals  exceeding  by  half  the 
length  of  the  calyx,  flaccid,  blunt,  connate  towards  the  base  ; 
fruit  rather  long,  but  narrow,  straight,  irregularly  cylindric ; 
seeds  placed  longitudinally,  not  much  narrower  than  the  valves, 
ellipsoid,  shining-black,  clasped  only  at  their  base  by  the  pale 
brownish  somewhat  bilobed  strophiole. 

Durack  River. 

Phyllodes  ^-j  inch  long.  Spike  attaining  about  1£  inches  in 
length.  Peduncle  and  rhachis  velvety  pubescent.  Fruit  3-4 
inches  long,  but  only  J-J  inch  broad.     Seeds  about  J  inch  long. 

In  the  system  this  species  must  find  its  place  near  A.  linaroides, 
A.  stipuligera  and  A.  conspersa ;  from  the  first-mentioned  it 
differs  already  in  copious  vestiture,  in  the  venulation  of  the 
phyllodes  and  conspicuity  of  stipules  ;  from  A.  stipuligera  chiefly 
in   very  much   smaller  and   very  numerous  phyllodes;   from  A. 


BY    BARON    VON    MUELLER.  469 

conspersa  again  in  the  small  and  also  acute  phyllodes  without  any- 
prominent  median  venule;  from  all  in  the  less  elongated  strophiole. 
This  species  is  dedicated  to  the  memory  of  Heinrich  Keller  of 
Darmstadt,  one  of  the  leading  promoters  of  rural  culture  during 
the  latter  half  of  this  century  through  many  parts  of  the  world. 

Acacia  suberosa,  Cunningham. 
Carson  River. 

Acacia  pallida,  F.v.M. 
Carson  River. 

Neptunia  monosperma,  F.v.M. 

Woodhouse  River. 

Albizzia  canescens,  Bentham. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Verticordia  Cunninghami,  Schauer. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Calycothrix  microphylla,  Cunningham. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Eucalyptus  ptychocarpa,  F.v.M. 

Welcome    Creek,   Roe's  and   Drysdale   Rivers,   chiefly  on   the 
banks  of  tributaries. 

Eucalyptus  terminalis,  F.v.M. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 


Eucalyptus  tetrodonta,  F.v.M. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Metrosideros  paradoxa,  F.v.M. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 


470  OBSERVATIONS    ON    PLANTS, 

Tristania  psidioides,  Cunningham. 
Lower  Prince  Regent's  River. 

Barringtonia  acutangula,  Gaertner. 
On  watercourses  in  the  coast-region. 

Carya  australis,  F.v.M. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

OSBECKIA    AUSTRALIANA,  Naudill. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 
The  narrow-leaved  variety. 

Terminalia  microcarpa,  Decaisne. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

The  diagnostic  limits  of  this  species  are  not  yet  well  fixed. 

PlMELEA    PUNICEA,  R.  BrOWll. 

Durack  River. 

PlMELEA    SANGUINEA,  F.V.M. 

Paradise  Creek. 

Stackhousia  viminea,  Smith. 
Carson  River. 

Ludwigia  parviflora,  Roxburgh. 
Pentacost  River. 

Rotala  verticillaris,  Linne. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Didiscus  hemicarpus,  F.v.M. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 


BY    BARON    VON    MUELLER.  471 

Vitis  trifolia,  Linne. 
Durack  River. 

Vitis  acetosa,  F.v.M. 

Away  from  the  saline  coastal  tracts  widely  distributed  through 
the  whole  region,  this  being  indicative  of  the  ease  with  which  the 
culture  of  this  grape-vine  of  tropical  Australia  could  be  effected  in 
adequate  climes. 

Persoonia  falcata,  R.  Brown 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

Stenocarpus  Cunninghami,  R.  Brown. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Grevillea  Dryandri,  R.  Brown. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 
Petals  always  red. 

Grevillea  heliosperma,  R.  Brown. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Grevillea  agrifolia,  Cunningham. 

Paradise  Creek. 

Fruit  of  nearly  one  inch  measurement.  Seeds  broadly  sur- 
rounded by  a  membranous  expansion. 

Hakea  arborescens,  R.  Brown. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Banksia  dent  at  a,  Linne,  fit. 
Prince  Regent's  River,  near  salt  water. 

Exocarpos  latifolia,  R.  Brown. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 


472  OBSERVATIONS    ON    PLANTS, 

Loranthus  acacioides,  Cunningham. 
Durack  River. 

Luffa  graveolens,  Roxburgh. 
Pentacost  River. 

Knoxia  corymbosa,  Willdenow. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Helichrysum  lucidum,  Henckel. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Pluchea  tetrodonta,  F.v.M. 
Durack  River. 

Leschenaultia  agrostophylla,  F.v.M. 
Paradise  Creek. 

Jasminum  simplicifolium,  G.  Forster. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

MlTRASACME    LONGIFLORA,  F.V.M. 

Carson  River. 

Flower-stalklets  to  2  inches  long. 

Strychnos  lucida,  R.  Brown. 
Roe  and  Drysdale  Rivers. 

The  pulp  of  the  fruit  is  liked  by  some  birds  and  seems  harmless 
to  them. 

Sideroxylon  Arnhemicum,  J.  Hooker. 

Between  Roe  and  Drysdale  Rivers. 
A  variety  with  glabrescent  leaves. 

Sarcostemma  australe,  R.  Brown. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 


BY    BARON    VON    MUELLER.  473 

Cynanchum  pedunculatum,  R.  Brown. 
Pentacost  River. 

Fruitlets  2-3  inches  long,  about  J  inch  broad,  much  gradually 
attenuated  upwards,  glabrous.     Seeds  about  J  inch  long. 

Cynanchum  floribundum,  R.  Brown. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Ramphicarpa  macrosiphonia. 

Annual,  imperfectly  glandular-puberulous;  basal  leaves  crowded, 
somewhat  ovate,  those  of  the  stem  opposite,  gradually  narrower, 
grossly  and  distantly  indented  or  short-lobed,  the  floral  leaves 
almost  linear;  pedicels  several  times  longer  than  the  calyx, 
angular,  finally  refracted ;  calyx  deeply  cleft  into  five  rather 
narrow  segments ;  tube  of  the  corolla  extremely  long,  filiform 
to  near  the  summit,  the  lobes  twice  or  thrice  shorter  ;  two  of 
the  stamens  rudimentary ;  style  capillary ;  stigma  conspicuously 
dilated,  its  lobes  membranous,  somewhat  unequal,  minutely  fim- 
briolated ;  capsule  ovate,  acute,  much  shorter  than  the  calyx. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

A  showy  flaccid  herb,  up  to  1|  feet  high.  Lower  leaves  to  1^ 
inches  long,  uppermost  leaves  reduced  to  bracts.  Pedicel  to  1J 
inches  long.  Calyx  measuring  about  J  inch  in  length.  Corolla 
said  to  be  buff-coloured,  perhaps  at  first  whitish,  of  tender  texture, 
outside  glabrous  ;  its  tube  fully  three  inches  long  or  even  longer. 
Fertile  stamens  short,  inserted  in  the  upper  widened  part  of  the 
corolla-tube.  Capsule  bivalved,  only  about  J  inch  long,  though 
split  yet  not  seen  in  perfect  development. 

The  plant  is  here  left  in  Ramphicarpa,  from  which  however 
the  presence  of  only  two  fertile  stamens  removes  it,  so  that  it 
would  best  be  considered  a  distinct  genus,  and  should  receive  then 
the  name  Bradshawia  in  honour  of  the  discoverer.  From  well- 
matured  fruit  perhaps  other  generic  differences  could  be  pointed 
out  hereafter. 


474  OBSERVATIONS    ON    PLANTS, 

Buechnera  Browniana,  Scbinz  in  Verhandl.  des  bot.  Vereins  von 
Brandenburg,  xxxi.  194. 

Woodhouse  River. 

Centranthera  hispida,  R.  Brown. 
Durack  River. 

Hemodia  lythrifolia,  F.v.M. 
Carson  River. 

Dolichandrone  heterophylla,  F.v.M. 
Carson  River. 

Steliotropium  tenuifolium,  R.  Brown. 
Woodhouse  and  Pentacost  Rivers. 

Pollichia  Zeylanica,  F.v.M. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

Anisomeles  salvifolia,  R.  Brown. 
Carson  River. 

Dicliptera  glabra,  Decaisne. 
Carson  River. 

Hypoestes  floribunda,  R.  Brown. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

Messrs.  M.  and  N.  Holtze,  as  also  Mr.  W.  Carr-Boyd,  found 
inland  some  distance  from  Port  Darwin  a  Hypoestes,  which  in  the 
eighth  edition  of  the  "Select  Plants  for  Industrial  Culture  and 
Naturalisation  "  received  the  name  H.  moschata,  on  account  of  the 
powerful  musk-odour,  which  pervades  the  whole  plant.  Whether 
it  can  systematically  or  only  industrially  be  distinguished  from 
//.  floribunda  may  best  be  ascertained  by  observations  and  compari- 
sons in  free  nature. 


BY    BARON    VON    MUELLER.  475 

Cycas  media,  R.  Brown. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Dioscorea  sativa,  Linne. 

Woodhouse  River,  on  alluvial  banks.  The  plant  is  now  also 
known  from  the  vicinity  of  Endeavour  River. 

Thysanotus  chrysantherus,  F.v.M. 
Durack  River. 
Seed-testule  shining-black,  punctular-rough. 

Cartonema  spicatum,  R.  Brown. 
Woodhouse  and  Carson  Rivers. 

Commelina  ensifolia,  R.  Brown. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

The  variety  with  linear  leaves.  Root  consisting  of  a  fascicle  of 
strong  and  rather  long  fibrilles. 

Livistona  sp. 
Sandstone  Tableland. 

The  collection  contains  only  leaves,  the  stalks  of  which  are 
smooth.  This  fan-palm  was  nowhere  high,  10  feet  being  the 
maximum  height,  so  far  as  observed. 

Xeroxes  Brownii,  F.v.M. 

Welcome  Creek. 

The  form  distinguished  by  R.  Brown  as  X.  media  among  the 
six  designated  by  him  with  separate  specific  names.  To  select 
any  one  of  these  for  the  total  forms  of  the  species  would  not  be 
an  exact  record.  * 


476  OBSERVATIONS    ON    PLANTS, 

Flagellaria  Indica,  Linne. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

Endures  the  clime  of  Port  Phillip  without  protection. 

Eriocaulon  setaceum,  Linne. 
Woodhouse  River. 

FUIRENA    UMBELLATA,  Rottboell. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

Paspalum  scrobiculatum,  Linne. 

Prince  Regent's  River.      Mr.  Baeuerlen  has  traced  this  as  a 
native  plant  as  far  south  as  Shoalhaven. 

Panicum  Indicum,  Linne. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Panicum  brevipolium,  Linne. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

The  extremely  delicate  small  form,  distinguished  by  R.  Brown 
as  P.  minutum. 

Panicum  majusculum,  F.v.M. 

Durack  River. 

Outer  floral  bract  five-streaked.     Grain  whitish,  shining,  quite 
smooth. 

Setaria  glauca,  Beauvois. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

Manisuris  granularis,  Swartz. 

Carson  River. 

Eriachne  obtusa,  R.  Brown. 

Woodhouse  River. 

Eriachne  squarrosa,  R.  Brown. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 


BY    BARON    VON    MUELLER.  477 

Arundinella  Nepalensis,  Trinius. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Andropogon  procerus,  R.  Brown. 
Carson  River. 

Called  during  this  journey  the  Giant-Lemongrass.  Found  to 
grow  to  9  feet  in  height. 

Andropogon  sericeus.  R.  Brown. 
The  variety  polystacha. 

Pentacost  River.  "» 

Called  during  this  expedition  the  Tazel-Grass. 

Andropogon  triticeus,  R.  Brown. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Andropogon  montanus,  Roxburgh. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Erianthus  irritans,  Kunth. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

Themeda  arguens,  Hack  el. 

Roe  and  Carson  Rivers. 

The  leaf  stalks  of  these  specimens  are  glabrous.  Prof.  Hackel 
has  placed  the  Anthistiria  membranacea  generically  apart  as  an 
Iseilema,  but  I  prefer  to  put  it  under  Lindley's  specific  name  into 
Themeda.     The  ordinary  kangaroo-grass  is  common  also  there. 

ROTTBOELLIA    FORMOSA,  R.   Brown. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 

ECTROSIA    LEPORINA,  R.  BlOWn. 

Prince  Regent's  River. 


478  OBSERVATIONS    ON    PLANTS. 

Triodia  procera,  R.  Brown. 

Desert  on  the  tablelands  at  Prince  Regent's  River.  Mentioned 
by  the  travellers  as  the  resinous  Spinifex  and  as  a  fibre-plant. 

Gleichenia  platyzoma,  Rv.M. 
Upper  Drysdale  and  Forrest  Rivers. 

Cheilanthes  tenuifolia,  Swartz. 
Prince  Regent's  River. 

This  is  the  widest  distributed  fern  in  Australia;  to  judge  from 
its  frequency  it  could  be  naturalised  with  ease  in  mild  regions 
elsewhere. 

Cheilanthes  vellea,  F.v.M. 

Carson  River. 

Mr.  Bradshaw  saw  also  a  Lygodium  entwining  to  a  considerable 
height  some  trees. 


479 


NOTES    ON   AUSTRALIAN    COLEOPTERA,    WITH 
DESCRIPTIONS   OF   NEW   SPECIES. 

By   the    Rev.   T.    Blackburn,    B.A.,    Corr.    Mem. 

Part   X. 

CAEABID/E. 

Lecanomerus  major,  sp.no v. 

Nitidus  ;  piceo-niger  vix  cseruleo-micans,  labro  mandibulis  (apice 
excepto)  palpis  antennis  pedibus  (his  plus  minusve  inf  uscatis) 
et  prothoracis  lateribus  testaceis  ;  prothorace  parum 
transverso,  vix  perspicue  punctulato,  lateribus  postice  vix 
sinuatis  basin  versus  fortiter  explanatis,  angulis  posticis  bene 
determinatis  obtusis  fere  erectis ;  elytris  leviter  striatis, 
interstitiis  planis. 

£  segmento  ventrali  apicali  postice  triangulariter  emarginato, 
utrinque  puncto  setifero  instructo,  ad  latera  prof unde  sinuato. 

9  latet.  [Long.  4,  lat.  1 J  lines. 

The  striation  of  the  elytra  is  a  little  stronger  than  in  L. 
Jlavocinctus,  Blackb.,  and  the  prothorax  is  of  quite  different 
outline,  having  the  sides  subsinuate  behind  the  middle  and  the 
posterior  angles  not  at  all  rounded  off. 

N.S.  W. ;  near  Burrawang ;  taken  by  Mr.  T.  G.  Sloane. 

Lecanomerus  striatus,  sp.nov. 

Nitidus  ;  ut  L.  major  coloratus  ;  prothorace  leviter  transverso, 
basin  versus  leviter  perspicue  punctulato,  lateribus  postice 
leviter  sinuatis  basin  versus  minus  explanatis,  angulis  posticis 
rectis.;  elytris  fortius  striatis,  interstitiis  leviter  convexis. 


480  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

3  segniento  ventrali  apicali  postice  haud  emarginato,  utrinque 

puncto  setifero  instructo,  ad  latera  profunde  sinuato. 
9  segmento    ventrali    apicali    postice    magis    late    rotundato, 
utrinque  punctis   setiferis   2    instructo,  ad  latera  profunde 
sinuato  ;  elytris  minus  nitidis  paullo  minus  fortiter  striatis. 

[Long.  3?,  lat.  If  lines. 
The  elytra  are  considerably  more  strongly  striate  than  in  L. 
major  and  the  hind  angles  of  the  prothorax  less  explanate  and 
more  rectangular.  The  hind  angles  of  the  prothorax  not  rounded 
off  will  separate  this  species  from  all  the  others  of  the  genus  yet 
described.  The  male  sexual  characters  are  much  like  those  of  L. 
flavocinctus. 

N.S.W.  ;  near  Burrawang  j  taken  by  Mr.  T.  G.  Sloane. 

CYCLOTHORAX    EYRENS1S,  Sp.nOV. 

Modice  convexus ;  nitidus;  an  tennis  palpis  pedibusque  testaceis; 
prothorace  leviter  transverso,  trans  basin  punctulato  haud 
depresso,  utrinque  ante  basin  fovea  sat  perspicua  instructo, 
lateribus  valde  rotundatis  ante  basin  fortiter  sinuatis,  angulis 
posticis  acute  dentiformibus ;  elytris  manifeste  6-striatis, 
striis  sat  fortiter  nee  crebre  punctulatis  postice  obsoletis. 

[Long.  2^,  lat.  1  line  (vix). 
Differing  from  all  the  other  Australian  species  of  Gyclothorax 
known  to  me  by  the  sharply  dentiform  hind  angles  of  its 
prothorax,  this  species  is  nearest  I  think  to  C.  peryphoideS) 
Blackb. ;  it  is  however  more  convex  than  that  insect  with  much 
more  distinctly  striate  elytra,  the  stria?  being  more  strongly 
punctulate.  All  the  stria?  are  abbreviated  behind,  and  are 
successively  shorter  from  the  sutural  one.  Besides  the  6  stria?  on 
the  disc  of  the  elytra  there  is  as  usual  in  the  genus  a  stria  near 
the  external  margin. 

S.  Australia  ;  basin  of  Lake  Eyre. 

Cyclothorax  pdnctipennis,  Macl. 

In  P.L.S.KS.W,  1888,  p.  1388,  I  made  some  remarks  on  this 
species  founded  on  a  specimen  named  for  me  by  Sir  W.  Macleay. 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  481 

I  Have  lately  received  through  the  kindness  of  Air.  Sloane  an 
example  from  Queensland  (stated  by  Mr.  Masters  to  appertain  to 
that  species)  which  is  clearly  distinct  from  that  named  by  Sir  W. 
Macleay, — and  also  various  specimens  taken  in  N.  S.  Wales  and 
elsewhere,  a  study  of  which  points  to  the  probability  that  the 
name  received  from  Sir  W.  Macleay  was  wrong,  as  all  the 
examples  before  me  from  localities  North  of  about  the  latitude  of 
Sydney  are  like  the  Queensland  specimen  referred  to  above.  It 
differs  from  the  form  common  in  Southern  Australia  chiefly  by 
its  much  more  strongly  sculptured  elytra,  the  punctures  in  the 
striae  especially  being  stronger  and  much  less  closely  placed.  I 
am  afraid  therefore  that  the  species  I  have  hitherto  called  C. 
punctipennis,  Macl.,  is  not  that  species  (it  is  probably  C.  lophoides, 
Chaud.).  This  is  particularly  unfortunate  because  in  the  descrip- 
tions of  two  new  species  I  have  pointed  out  their  differences'  from 
the  common  Southern  Australian  form  under  Sir  W.  Macleay 's 
name  for  it.  If  this  correction  be  right  it  will  be  necessary  to 
note  that  where  the  name  C.  panctipennis,  Macl.,  occurs  in  the 
descriptions  of  0.  fortis,  Blackb.,  and  C.  obsoletus,  Blackb.,  it  is 
not  the  true  punctipennis  that  is  referred  to,  but  the  species  of 
Cyclothorax  (plentiful  throughout  Southern  Australia)  which  is 
distinguished  from  all  its  congeners  (at  any  rate  from  all  known 
to  me)  except  C.  obsoletus,  by  the  very  fine  close  puncturation  of 
the  scarcely  impressed  striae  on  its  elytra. 

LAMELLICORNES. 

DlPHUCEPHALA    ELEGANS,  Sp.llOV. 

Robusta;splendide  viridis,  tibiis  cupreo-micantibus;  nitidissima; 
subtus  pilisalbis  decumbentibus  vestita;  capite  crebre  fortius, 
prothorace  fortiter  vix  crebre,  punctulatis  ;  hoc  et  longitudi- 
naliter  et  transversim  late  sulcato,  marginibus  lateralibus 
dente  magno  acuto  ad  medium  instructis  et  pone  apicem 
fortiter  crenulatis,  angulis  anticis  fortiter  productis  acutis  ; 
scutello  lsevi ;  elytris  crasse  punctatis  ;  pygidio  creberrime 
vix  aspere  punctulato  albido-pubescenti. 

[Long.  4i,  lat.  2g  lines. 


482  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

This  remarkably  fine  species  resembles  D.  aurulenta,  Kirby, 
from  which  it  differs  apart  from  colour  in  its  considerably  larger 
size,  in  the  extremely  strong  apical  angles  of  its  prothorax,  the 
larger  lateral  tooth  of  the  same,  the  sides  strongly  crenulate  in 
their  front  half,  the  longitudinal  channel  not  divided  and  the 
transverse  sulcus  entire  ;  also  in  the  differently  punctured 
pygidium. 

Victoria  ;  a  single  specimen  flying  on  the  summit  of  the  Buffalo 
Mountain. 

Cheiragra  macleayi,  sp.nov. 

(J.  Nigra,  vix  cupreo-micans,  elytrorum  singulorum  disco  toto 
testaceo ;  capite  pygidioque  crebre  fortius,  prothorace  fortiter 
sat  sparsim,  punctulatis ;  hoc  vix  transverso,  antice  in  medio 
leviter  canaliculato,  lateribus  sat  fortiter  rotundatis  ante 
basin  fortiter  sinuatis,  angulis  posticis  acutis  ;  scutello 
fortiter  sparsim  punctulato ;  elytris  vix  striatis,  sparsim 
crasse  nee  profuucle  punctulatis  ;  unguiculis  anterioribus  4 
brevibus  dilatatis  basi  processubus  2  (fere  ut  quarundam 
MaBchidii  specierum)  instructis,  posticis  elongatis  gracilibus ; 
antennarum  clava  quam  stipes  parum  breviori;  tarsorum 
posticorum  articulo  2°  quam  lus  multo  longiori;  corpore  subtus 
albo-piloso. 

Q.  Paullo  latior ;  rufo-testacea,  vix  cupreo-micans,  elytris 
pallidioribus  ;  unguiculis  simplicibus  ;  antennarum  clava 
(hac  infuscata)  quam  stipes  sat  breviori. 

[Long.  2,  lat.  1  line  (vix). 

Victoria ;  on  flowers  in  the  Alpine  district. 

Liparetrus  spretus,  sp.nov. 

Ovatus ;  sat  nitidus;  niger,  antennis  (clava  excepta)  palpis 
tarsisque  ferrugineis,  elytris  lsete  cseruleo-micantibus  ;  clypeo 
antice  sat  fortiter  3-dentato ;  capite  prothoraceque  (his  pilis 
nigricantibus  erectis  elongatis  sat  crebre  vestitis)  dupliciter 
sat  crasse  punctulatis  (hoc  quam  illud  minus  crebre),  elytris 
(his  geminato-striatis  et  postice  setis  validis  subspiniformibus 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  483 

marginatis)  fortiter  sat  crebre,  pygidio  propygidioque  (hoc 
pi] is  nigris,  illo  pilis  cinereis,  erectis  sat  brevibus  vestitis)  sat 
crasse  sat  crebre,  punctulatis ;  tibiis  anticis  externe  sat 
fortiter  3-dentatis  ;  tarsorum  posticorum  articulo  2°  quam 
1 us  paullo  breviori ;  antennis  9-articulatis. 

[Long.  3^,  lat.  2  lines. 
This  species  belongs  to  Sir  W.  Macleay's  "  sub-section  II "  of 
the  genus  distinguished  by  the  clypeus  (in  the  male  at  least) 
having  its  apex  "  more  or  less  tridentate."  I  believe  I  know  all 
'the  species  except  asper,  Macl.,  and  iridipennis,  Germ.,  of  the 
sub-section  at  all  resembling  this  one  in  size  and  colouring,  and 
find  that  they  all  differ  from  it  inter  alia  in  not  having  the  elytra 
margined  behind  by  a  row  of  stiff  stout  bristles.  L.  iridipennis 
is  described  as  having  its  pygidium  glabrous,  its  prothorax 
"  finely  "  punctured,  &c,  while  inter  alia  the  prothorax  of  L.  asper 
is  described  as  having  "  a  frill  of  long  erect  black  hairs  on  the 
base,  apex  and  sides"  (the  whole  surface  in  the  present  insect 
being  evenly  clothed  with  long  erect  hairs). 

This  insect  is  near  L.  sylvicola,  Fabr.,  from  which  (apart  from 
the  character  mentioned  above)  it  differs  in  the  considerably 
stronger  dentation  of  the  front  of  its  clypeus,  in  the  somewhat 
coarser  puncturation  of  its  prothorax,  and  in  the  same  being 
distinctly  two-fold  consisting  of  large  and  small  punctures 
confusedly  mingled  together. 

N.S.  Wales ;  taken  by  Mr.  Froggatt,  near  Sydney. 

LlPARETRUS    ALPICOLA,  Sp.nov. 

Elongato-ovatus ;  sat  nitidus ;  depressus ;  piceo-niger,  anten- 
narum  basi  tarsisque  plus  minus  rufescentibus,  elytris 
testaceo-rufis  ;  capite  prothorace  pygidio  propygidioque  sat 
fortiter  vix  crebre  squamose  vel  subgranulatim  (his  sat  dense 
pilis  erectis  fuscis  vestitis),  elytris  (his  obsolete  bicostatis  et 
pilis  brevibus  erectis  vestitis)  fortiter  confuse, — maris  quam 
feminaa  magis  crebre, — punctulatis  ;  tibiis  anticis  ad  apicem 
2-dentatis  et  ante  basin  (g  vix,  Q  magis,  distincte)  1-dentatis; 
32 


484  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

tarsorum  posticorum  articulo  2°  quam  lus  duplo  longiori; 
an  tennis  8-articulatis;  prothoracis  lateribus  subrectis,  angulis 
posticis  prater  modum  distinctis  et  retrorsum  productis. 

$  antennarum  clava  quam  stipes  haud  breviori,  clypeo 
antrorsum  fortiter  quadratim  producto,  tarsis  crassis. 

$  antennarum  clava  quam  stipes  paullo  breviori,  clypeo 
antrorsum  subquadratim  minus  fortiter  producto,  tarsis  minus 
crassis.  [Long.  3f ,  lat.  If  lines. 

This  is  a  very  abnormal  Liparetrus,  but  allied  I  think  to  L. 
ferrugineus,  Blanch.,  which  it  resembles  in  having  antennae  con- 
sisting of  only  8  joints,  and  in  its  sexual  characters  (the  male 
having  the  clypeus  more  produced  and  reflexed  and  the  antennal 
club  much  longer  and  the  tarsi  much  stouter,  than  the  female). 
It  presents  however  the  structural  difference  from  L.  ferrugineus 
of  having  antennce  almost  of  the  Scitala  type,  the  joints  of  the 
club  being  of  almost  equal  length  and  in  the  male  not  at  all 
shorter  than  all  the  preceding  joints  together.  The  teeth  of  the 
anterior  tibiae  too  are  very  different  from  those  of  L.  ferrugineus 
being  distinctly  of  the  L.  deyressus,  Blanch.,  type.  This  species  is 
not  capable  of  confusion  I  think  with  any  previously  described 
species.  The  sides  of  the  prothorax  almost  straight  and  narrowed 
from  base  to  apex  and  the  strongly  developed  hind  angles  of  that 
segment  are  very  distinctive. 

Victoria ;  Alpine  district. 

LlPARETRUS    BRUNNEIPENNIS,  Sp.llOV. 

Ovatus  ;  sat  nitidus ;  minus  depressus  ;  supra  (elytris  exceptis) 
longe  griseo-pilosus ;  niger,  antennis  (clava  excepta)  et 
nonnullis  exemplis  palpis  tarsis  abdomineque  plus  minusve 
rufescentibus,  elytris  testaceo-brunneis  margines  versus 
anguste  infuscatis ;  clypeo  prothorace  pygidio  et  propygiclii 
parte  postica  fortiter  rugulose,  capite  postice  et  propygidio 
antice  magis  subtiliter  magis  crebrt>,  elytris  (his  obscure 
geminato-striatis)  fortiter  minus  crebre,  punctulatis ;  tibiis 
anticis  externe  fortiter  (maris  quam  feminse  minus  fortiter) 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  -185 

3-dentatis  \  tarsorum  posticorum  articulo  2°  quaru  lus  paullo 

longiori ;  antennis  8-articulatis  j  clypei  marginibus  lateralibus 

et  anticis  truncatis,  illis  obliquis. 

<£  clypeo  antice  inagis  fortiter  reflexo  inagis  abrupte  truncato, 

tarsis  multo  crassioribus.  [Long.  3,1,  lat.  It  lines. 

The  following  characters  in  combination  will  distinguish  this 

species  I  think   from   all   its  previously  described  congeners  : — 

antenme  having  only  8  joints,  clypeus  having  three  truncate  faces, 

front  tibia3  normally  tridentate  externally,  2nd  joint  of  hind  tarsi 

much  less  than  twice  as  long  as  basal  joint. 

Probably  this  insect  is  nearest  to  L.  ferrugineus,  Blanch.,  but  it 
has  a  facies  very  different  from  that  species  and  very  distinct 
characters, — inter  alia  the  sides  of  the  clypeus  are  strongly  oblique 
in  both  sexes,  and  the  femora  and  tibiae  are  uniformly  of  dark 
colour. 

N.S.  Wales ;  taken  by  Mr.  Froggatt  near  Mudgee. 

Heteronyx  baldiensis,  sp.no v. 

Brevis ;  validus ;  fortiter  convexus ;  postice  dilatatus ;  vix 
nitidus ;  supra  setulis  brevissimis  vix  perspicuis  sparsim 
vestitus ;  niger,  antennis  palpis  tarsis  et  pilis  erectis  in 
marginibus  in  pedibus  et  in  corpore  subtus  positis 
rufescentibus  ;  capite  prothorace  scutello  pygidioque  (hoc 
pilis  erectis  vestito)  fortiter  rugulose  sat  crebre, — clypeo 
pygidioque  magis  crebre, —  punctulatis  ;  prothorace  quam 
longiori  duabus  partibus  latiori,  antice  paullo  angustato, 
basi  fere  recto,  angulis  posticis  rotundato  —  rectis, 
lateribus  vix  arcuatis  ;  elytiis  (his  basi  quam  prothoracis 
basis  angustioribus)  sparsim  leviter  nee  subtiliter  punctulatis, 
ovatis,  nullo  modo  striatis  ;  corpore  subtus  (abdomine  sat 
leviter  sat  crebre  subtilius  punctulato  excepto)  fortiter  vix 
crebre  punctulato ;  coxis  posticis  quam  metastemum  vix 
brevioribus ;  antennis  8-articulatis ;  labro  a  clypeo  obtecto  ; 
tibiis  anticis  externe  fortiter  3-dentatis  ;  unguiculis  appendi- 
culatis,  unguiculorum  posticorum  parte  basali  quam  apicalis 
paullo  longiori.  [-Long.  65,  lat.  3|  lines. 


486  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

An  extremely  distinct  species  which  it  is  possible  ought  not  to 
be  placed  in  Heteronyx,  as  T  have  not  been  able  to  examine  the 
inner  organs  of  the  mouth.  Its  elytra  much  narrower  at  the  base 
than  the  base  of  the  prothorax  and  then  arcuately  dilated  to 
considerably  beyond  the  middle  (where  they  are  much  wider  than 
the  prothorax)  give  it  a  facies  out  of  harmony  with  its  congeners; 
the  shortness  of  the  elytra  (their  length  not  exceeding  the  width 
by  much  more  than  a  quarter  of  the  latter)  is  also  unusual. 

This  insect,  in  my  tabulation  of  Heteronyx,  would  fall  in  the 
1st  section  (P.L.S.N.S.W.,  1888,  pp.  1328,  &c.)  under  "FF"  on 
page  1329  beside//,  spretus,  from  which,  inter  alia  multa,  its  very 
much  larger  size  will  distinguish  it.  H.  lilliputanus,  Blackb., 
(described  since  the  tabulation  was  published),  also  falls  under 
"FF"  on  p.  1329,  but  is  still  smaller  than  spretus.  The  three 
species  probably  attributable  to  "Section  I,"  which  I  have  not 
succeeded  in  identifying,  are  all  very  different, 

Victoria;  under  a  stone  on  the  summit  of  Baldi  in  the  Victorian 
Alps,  at  an  elevation  of  more  than  6000  feet. 

Heteronyx  terrena,  sp.no v. 

Sat  elongatus,   postice  vix   dilatatus  ;    minus   nitidus,   pallide 

ferrugineus,  antennarum  clava  testacea;  pilis  brevibus  pallidis 

sat  crebre  vestitus;  crebre  subtilius  sat  sequaliter  punctulatus  ; 

labro  clypeum  baud  superanti ;    antennis  9-articulatis  ;  coxis 

posticis  metasterno  plus  quam  paullo  brevioribus  ;  unguiculis 

appendiculatis  ;   unguiculorum  posticorum  parte  basali  quam 

pars  apicalis  multo  longiori.  [Long.  4,  lat.  2  lines. 

A  clay-coloured  species  closely  resembling  in  miniature  //.  piceus, 

Blanch.,  but  a  little  narrower  and  more  parallel  in  outline,  with 

the  hind  coxa  a  little  shorter  in  proportion  to  the  metasternum, 

and  the  appendiculation  of  the  hind  claws  nearer  to  the  apex;  the 

prothorax,  moreover,  is  evidently  less  transverse,  being  not  more 

than  |  again  as  wide  as  long.      I  do  not  observe  any  other  respects 

in  which  the  characters  differ  from  those  of  //.  piceus. 

The  specimen   mentioned  in    P.L.S.N.S.W.,  1889,  p.    1228,  as 
'My  a  small  var.  of  //.  piceus  is  this  species. 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  487 

Victoria;  Ballarat  (W.  W.  Froggatt).;  also  N.S.  Wales  (T.  G. 
SI  oar  e). 

Heteronyx  incognitus,  sp.nov. 

Elongatus  ;    postice  dilatatus  ;  subnitidus  ;  ferrugineus,  anten- 

narum    clava    testacea,    pilis    brevibus    fulvis    sat    sparsim 

vestitus;    capite  sequaliter  crasse  minus    crebre,  prothorace 

subtilius  sparsius,  elytris  sparsius  sat  crebre,  pygidio  sparsim 

vix  perspicue,  squamose   punctulatis  ;    labro   clypeum  haud 

superanti  (hoc  antice  sat  fortiter  reflexo) ;  antennis  9-articu- 

latis,    unguiculis    appendiculatis,    unguiculorum    posticorum 

parte  basali  quam  pars  apicalis  sat  longiori ;    coxis  posticis 

metasterno  parum  brevioribus.  [Long.  5f,  lat.  2 §  lines. 

This  species  is  another  ally  of  H.  piceus,  Blanch.     It  is  a  much 

more  elongate  species,  however,  with  the  ventral  series  of  erect 

setse  continued  strongly  all  across  the  hind  body  and  the  punctu- 

ration— especially  on  the  head  and  prothorax — considerably  less 

close.     The  prothorax  is  not  much  less  than  twice  as  wide  as  long 

and  its  base  is  little  more  than  a  quarter  again  as  wide  as  across 

the  front ;  its  hind  angles  are  fairly  well  defined. 

I  refer  to  this  species  with  some  doubt  two  smaller  specimens 
from  the  Blue  Mountains,  sent  by  Mr.  Froggatt ;  they  have  the 
pygidium  much  more  distinctly  punctured  and  the  general  punc- 
turation  a  trifle  closer.     The  differences  may  possibly  be  sexual. 
N.S.  Wales. 

Heteronyx  alpicola,  sp.nov, 

Sat  elongatus;  postice  leviter  dilatatus;  subnitidus;  ferrugineus 
antennarum  clava  dilution  ;  pilis  brevibus  fulvis  sat  sparsim 
vestitus  ;  capite  rugulose  sat  crasse,  prothorace  pygidioque 
sat  crebre  vix  fortiter,  elytris,  subfortiter  subrugulose, 
punctulatis ;  labro  clypeum  (hoc  antice  rotundato  reflexo) 
haud  superanti ;  antennis  9-articulatis  ;  unguiculis  appendicu- 
latis, unguiculorum  posticorum  parte  basali  quam  pars  apicalis 
multo  longiori ;  coxis  posticis  metasterno  paullo  brevioribus. 

[Long.  3-3i,  lat.  lj-l^  lines 


488  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

Also  belongs  to  the  group  of  piceus,  owing  to  the  combination 
of  9-jointed  antenna?,  clypeus  free  from  labrum  and  not  emarginate, 
hind  claws  normally  appendiculate.  The  prothorax  is  about  \ 
again  as  wide  as  long,  and  at  the  base  is  not  much  more  than  J 
again  as  wide  as  across  the  front,  which  is  not  strongly  bilobed  ; 
the  base  is  feebly  lobed  in  the  middle  ;  the  front  angles  are  not 
very  prominent ;  the  hind  angles,  viewed  from  above,  are  very 
well  defined  and  nearly  rectangular. 

Victoria  ;  on  the  higher  mountains. 

As  the  described  species  allied  to  H.  piceus  are  now  becoming 
rather  numerous,  it  will  perhaps  be  well  to  substitute  the  following 
tabulation  for  that  falling  under  E  (on  1st  line  of  p.  1330, 
P.L.S.N.S.W.,  1888)  :— 

E.  Clypeus  not  emarginate. 

F.   Basal  piece  of  hind  claws  evidently 
longer  than  the  apical  piece. 
G.   Upper  surface    not    clothed    with 
long  erect  hairs. 
H.   Sculpture  of  upper  surface  uni- 
form (or  nearly  so)  and  more 
or  less  close  and  fine. 
I.   Front  tibiae  strongly  tridentate 
externally. 
J.  Sculpture  (though  uniform) 
considerably  stronger  than 
in  thefollowing  two  species  *gracilipes,  Blackb. 
JJ.  Sculpture  fine  and  close. 
K.  Size      large,     prothorax 
nearly  twice  as  long  as 
wide picPAhS,  Blanch. 

*  These  species  were  stated  by  me  (in  P.L.S.N.S.W.,  1889,  p.  1225)  to  be 
better  placed  near  //.  piceus,  Blanch.,  than  in  the  allied  group  (where  I 
originally  placed  them),  having  the  apical  piece  of  the  hind  claws  extremely 
short. 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  489 

KK.  Size  medium,  prothorax 

moderately  transverse  terrena,  Blackb. 

II.  Uppermost    tooth    of     front 

tibia?  scarcely  defined  pubescens,  Er. 

HH.  Sculpture  of  prothorax  much 
more  sparse  than  of  head 

and  elytra *Victoris,  Blackb. 

HHH.  Sculpture  of  prothorax  and 
elytra  subequal;  that  of 
head  much  more  coarse 
and  rugulose. 

I.  Prothorax  only   very   slightly 

narrowed  anteriorly incognitus,  Blackb. 

II.  Prothorax    considerably   nar- 

rowed anteriorly alpicola,  Blackb. 

GG.  Upper  surface  clothed  with  long 

erect  hairs deceptor,  Blackb. 

FF.  Basal  piece  of  hind  claws  not  longer 

than  the  apical  piece Froggatti,  Mel. 

Heteronyx  tridens,  sp.nov. 

Minus   elongatus;    sat    convexus ;    postice   sat  dilatatus ;    sat 

nitidus  ;    ferrugineus,  antennis  dilutioribus  ;    pilis  brevibus 

sparsim  vestitus  ;  capite   crebre   crasse   rugulose,  prothorace 

fortiter  nee  crebre,  elytris  crasse  fortiter  subcrebre,  pygidio 

(hoc  longe  hirsuto)  fortiter  sat  crebre,  punctulatis ;  tibiarum 

anticarum  dentibus  externis  validis  ;  labro  clypeum  anguste 

minus  fortiter  superanti ;  antennis  8-articulatis ;  unguiculis 

appendiculatis;  unguiculorum  posticorum  parte  basali  quam 

pars  apicalis  parum  longiori.     %     [Long.  4J,  lat.  2°g  lines  (vix). 

In   many  respects  this  species  resembles  H.  nasutics,  Blackb., 

(P.L.S.N.S.W.,  1889,  p.  147),  the  puncturation  (except  of  the 

pygidium)    and    the    remarkable    structure  and    relation  of   the 

*  See  note,  ante  p.  488. 


490  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

clypeus  and  labrum  being  very  similar.  The  following  seem  to  be 
the  points  of  difference  from  H.  nasutus ;  clypeal  suture  not 
angulated,  prothorax  a  little  less  transverse  (about  once  and  §  as 
wide  as  long)  and  more  narrowed  anteriorly,  hind  coxae  very  much 
shorter  (nearly  as  short  as  the  2nd  ventral  segment),  hind  body 
(not  "  finely  coriaceous  "  but)  very  nitid,  basal  piece  of  hind  tarsi 
(not  "  exceptionally  strongly  "  but)  not  in  the  least  prominent  at 
the  apex. 

In  the  tabulation  of  the  sub-group  of  Heteronyx  to  which  this 
species  belongs  (P.L.S.N.S.W.,  1889)  it  falls  under  «GG"  (near 
the  end  of  p.  143)  along  with  H.  auricomus,  Blackb.,  from  which 
its  clypeal  suture  not  angular  in  the  middle  and  the  more  sparse 
puncturation  of  its  prothorax  will,  inter  alia,  distinguish  it.  The 
rather  strong  anterior  narrowing  of  the  prothorax  approximates 
it  to  the  species  under  "  FF  "  (anceps,  tfcc.) ;  all  those,  however, 
have  the  labrum  and  clypeus  quite  differently  related  to  each 
other  except  Sloanei,  Blackb.,  in  which  these  parts  are  a  little 
(but  not  very  much)  similar,  but  in  that  species  the  prothorax  is 
much  more  closely  punctured. 

W.  Australia ;  Yilgarn  ;  sent  by  C.  French,  Esq. 

Heteronyx  consanguineus,  sp.nov. 

Sat  elongatus  ;  sat  convexus  ;  postice  leviter  dilatatus  ;  ferru- 
gineus,  antennis  palpisque  testaceis ;  pilis  brevibus  fulvis 
minus  crebre  vestitus ;  clypeo  crebre  parum  rugulose,  capite 
postice  prothorace  pygidioque  subfortiter  sat  crebre  vix 
rugulose,  elytris  crebre  sat  fortiter  transversim  rugulose, 
punctulatis ;  tibiis  anticis  externe  sat  fortiter  3-dentatis ; 
labro  clypeum  parum  late  sat  fortiter  superanti ;  antennis 
8-articulatis ;  coxis  posticis  metasterno  multo  brevioribus, 
unguiculis  appendiculatis ;  unguiculorum  posticorum  parte 
basali  quam  pars  apicalis  paullo  longiori ;  labro  minus  forti- 
ter sat  crebre  ruguloso-punctulato. 

[Long.  4%  lat.  2?  lines  (vix). 

The  prothorax  is  about  §  again  as  wide  as  long  and  the  base  is 
about  |  again  as  wide  as  the  front  which  is  somewhat  evenly  and 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  491 

moderately  strongly  emarginate,  the  base  being  but  little  lobed, 
the  sides  gently  arched  (their  greatest  divergence  close  to  the 
base),  the  front  angles  sharp  and  moderately  produced,  the  hind 
angles  obtuse  but  fairly  well  defined.  The  underside  is  much  like 
that  of  II.  punctipennis,  Blackb.,  except  in  being  throughout  more 
strongly  and  less  closely  punctured.  This  species  belongs  to 
Section  III.  of  Heteronyx,  and  in  the  tabulation  (P.L.S.N.S.W., 
1889)  would  stand  with  raucinasus  under  "  EE  "  near  the  end  of 
p.  142.  From  that  insect  it  differs  by  its  much  less  strongly 
rugulose  labrum,  head  and  prothorax  (the  sculpture  especially  of 
the  head  behind  the  labrum  being  extremely  different, — in  rauci- 
nasus very  coarse  and  close,  and  very  strongly  rugulose, — in 
consanguineus  almost  smooth,  and  consisting  of  isolated  and  but 
little  crowded  punctures  scarcely  differing  from  those  of  the 
prothorax),  and  by  the  very  much  more  strongly  marked  clypeal 
suture. 

Victoria ;  Alpine  district. 

Heteronyx  nitidus,  Blackb. 

I  have  received  from  Mr.  French  another  specimen  (from 
Yilgarn)  of  this  insect,  the  elytra  of  which  are  a  little  more 
strongly  punctured  than  in  the  type, — so  that  the  expression 
"  leviter  punctulata "  could  hardly  be  applied  to  those  organs. 
As  in  the  type  the  puncturation  has  the  blurred  appearance  con- 
fused with  transverse  rngulosities  which  I  mentioned  as  distin- 
guishing it  from  the  puncturation  of  H.  frontalis.  I  think  the 
type  was  an  old  specimen  which  had  probably  been  dead  some 
time  when  captured  and  that  its  puncturation  was  somewhat 
obliterated. 

Heteronyx  setifer,  Blackb. 

Among  some  specimens  of  Heteronyx  from  Yilgarn  (sent  by 
Mr.  French)  I  find  a  single  example  which  I  should  not  like  to 
separate  from  the  S.  Australian,  and  in  my  experience  very  rare, 
EL.  setifer.  It  is  a  little  more  sparsely  punctured  than  the  type 
(especially  on  the  elytra),  but  I  do  not  think  it  can  be  regarded  as 
distinct. 


492  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

Heteronyx  pygidialis,  Blackb. 

Among  the  specimens  of  Heteronyx  mentioned  above  is  a  much 
damaged  specimen  which  belongs,  I  think,  to  this  species. 

Heteronyx  proditor,  sp.nov. 

Sat  elongatus ;  postice   leviter  dilatatus ;  sat  nitidus;  obscure 

ferrugineus,  antennis  dilutioribus  ;  pilis  f ulvis  minus  brevibus 

suberectis  sat  dense  vestitus ;    capite  elytris  pygidioque  sat 

sparsim,  prothorace  paullo  magis  sparsim,  sat  for  titer  punc- 

tulatis ;    labro    antice    emarginato    clypei    supernciem    vix 

attingenti  nihilominus  superne  conspicuo ;    antennis  9-articu- 

latis;  coxis  posticis  metasterno  multo  brevioribus ;  unguiculis 

prope  apicem  obscure  appendiculatis.      [Long.  3^,  lat  \\  lines. 

This  is  one  of  the  difficult  species  that  seem  to  hover  between 

the  2nd  and  3rd  sections  of  the  genus,  the  labrum  being  prominent 

and  turned  upward  just  about  to  the  level  of  the  clypeus,  but  so 

shaped  (emarginate  in  front)  that  from  no  point  of  view  does  the 

outline  of  the  head  present  a  trilobed  appearance.     It  is  not  very 

close  to  any  species  known  to  me,  but  I  think  should  be  placed  in 

the  2nd  section  in  the  neighbourhood  of  H.  diversicej)s,  Blackb. 

In  the  tabulation  of  this  section  (P.L.S.N.S.W.,  1889,  pp.  1230, 

&c,  and  there  called  "  Group  III.")  it  would  fall  under  "  F  "  (on 

page  1231)  in  company  with  H.  granum,  Burm.,  from  which  it 

differs  inter  alia  by  the  very  sparse  puncturation  of  its  prothorax. 

The  prothorax  is  moderately  transverse,  about  half  again  as  wide 

as  long,  and  is  nearly  twice  as  wide  across  the  base  as  across  the 

front   margin  ;    the  sides  are  rather  strongly  rounded,  being  at 

their  widest  a  little  behind  the  middle  ;  the  base  is  strongly  lobed, 

and  the  hind  angles  viewed  from  above  appear  as  nearly  right 

angles. 

W.  Australia ;  Yilgarn ;  sent  to  me  by  Mr.  French. 

Heteronyx  brevicornis,  Blackb. 

This  species  is  also  represented  among  the  Yilgarn  specimens 
mentioned  above. 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  493 


RlIOPiEA. 


I  have  never  seen  a  specimen  that  I  can  confidently  affirm  to 
be  a  female  of  this  genus,  although  male  examples  are  by  no 
means  rare.  Germar  states  that  the  female  of  R.  heterodactyla  is 
distinguished  by  its  short  hind  tarsi,  and  Burmeister  adds  that 
the  club  of  its  antennse  has  only  6  joints  (that  of  the  male 
having  7),  while  Erichson  states  that  the  club  of  the  male  has  6 
joints.  There  is  no  doubt  that  the  antennal  club  has  a  different 
number  of  joints  in  the  males  of  different  species,  so  that  it  is 
.possible  that  the  male  of  one  species  may  have  been  taken  for  the 
female  of  another.  I  have  in  my  collection  three  examples  which 
appear  to  belong  to  this  genus  and  which  I  suspect  may  be 
females.  They  are  from  widely  separated  localities  and  pertain 
to  three  species.  They  differ  from  the  males  in  being  markedly 
smaller,  and  in  having  fewer  joints  in  the  antennal  club  and 
shorter  tarsi,  and  also  in  being  very  much  more  coarsely  and 
sparingly  sculptured  than  any  Ehopcea  that  I  have  seen  and 
known  to  be  a  male.  I  should  feel  greatly  indebted  to  any  of 
my  correspondents  who  could  let  me  inspect  a  R1io}xea  that  can 
be  positively  affirmed  to  be  a  female. 

Anoplognathus  brevicollis,  sp.nov. 

Sordide  brunneo-testaceus,  capite  prothoraceque  certo  adspectu 
cupreo  purpureo  tincto,  hoc  oculos  versus  viridimicanti,  illo 
antice  posticeque  segmentis  ventralibus  postice  scutello  et 
elytrorum  sutura  anguste  viridi-marginatis,  tarsis  posteri- 
oribus  basin  versus  infuscatis  ;  capite  prothoraceque  leviter 
subtilius  sat  crebre,  elytris  sat  fortiter  crebre  vix  lineatim, 
pygidio  (hoc  albiclo-piloso)  crebre  subtilius  subsquamose, 
punctulatis  ;  capite  magno,  antice  inter  oculos  leviter 
biimpresso,  sutura  clypeali  bene  determinata  ;  prothorace  vix 
canaliculato,  trans  basin  quam  longiori  multo  plus  duplo 
latiori,  margine  basali  quam  apical  is  dimidio  latiori,  hoc 
leviter  emarginato  trisinuato,  illo  medio  vix  lobato,  lobo 
postice  leviter  emarginato,  lateribus  a  basi  ad  apicem  arcuatim 


49-i  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

convergentibus,  angulis  anticis  sat  acutis  posticis  sat  acute 
rectis  ;  elytris  apicern  versus  externe  denticulatis,  hie  illic 
obsolete  costatis,  disco  ante  apicem  transversirn  tumido  et 
denticulato,  sutura  in  spina  gracili  producta  ;  corpore  subtus 
albido-piloso,  mesosterno  fortiter  sat  acute  producto. 

[Long.  11-12,  lat.  6£-6£  lines. 

Maris   clypeo   antice  sat  fortiter  sat  anguste  producto,  tibiis 

anticis  externe  apicem  versus  bidentatis,  dente  altero  minuto 

in  medio  instructis. 

Feminse     clypeo     antice     rotundato,    tibiis     anticis     externe 

tridentatis. 
N.B. — Cujusdam    ex    exemplis    femineis    meis    tibiae    anticse 

externe  subsimplices  sunt. 
The  clypeus  of  the  male  narrows  forward  evenly  for  much  more 
than  half  its  length,  and  thence  is  almost  parallel-sided,  so  that  it 
is  very  much  narrower  across  the  apex  than  across  the  base ;  it 
scarcely  differs  from  that  of  A.  Boisduvali,  Dup.,  except  in  having 
its  front  margin  more  arched  ;  it  also  resembles  the  clypeus  of 
rugosus,  Kirby  (male),  but  in  that  species  the  produced  apex  (i.e., 
the  piece  beyond  the  level  of  where  the  sides  cease  converging 
forward)  is  evidently  wider,  shorter,  and  more  truncate.  The 
puncturation,  sculpture,  and  pubescence  are  almost  as  in  A. 
Odeivahni,  except  that  the  pubescence  is  less  dense  in  the  specimens 
before  me  (possibly  the  result  of  abrasion),  that  the  sutural  apex 
of  each  elytron  is  produced  into  a  slender  and  well-defined  spine 
about  or  nearly  as  long  as  the  width  of  the  levigate  space  that 
runs  down  the  elytron  close  to  the  suture,  and  that  the  external 
margin  of  each  elytron  for  a  short  distance  a  little  behind  the 
middle  has  a  fringe  of  well-defined  sharp  denticulations.  The 
prothorax  is  unusually  short  in  appearance  owing  to  its  base 
being  scarcely  lobed  in  the  middle,  but  might  rather  be  called 
"  gently  tri-sinuate  "  ;  in  all,  or  nearly  all,  the  other  species  of  the 
genus  the  middle  part  of  the  base  of  the  prothorax  reaches  a  good 
deal  further  backward  than  the  hind  angles,  but  in  this  species 
the  middle  part  is  very  nearly  on  a  level  with  the  hind  angles;  the 
prothorax  thus  being  very  small,  the  head  appears  proportionately 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  495 

exceptionally  large.  All  the  claws  are  simple  in  both  sexes. 
The  transverse  denticulate  tumidity  a  little  before  the  apex  of 
the  elytra  renders  this  a  very  distinct  insect. 

N.  Territory  of  S.  Australia  ;  taken  at  Burrundie  by  Dr.  Bovill. 

Anoplognathus  macleayi,  sp.nov. 

Latus  ;  robustus  ;  minus  convexus  ;  pallide  brunneus  ;  capite 
prothoracis  (hoc  fusco-umbrato)  elytrorumque  marginibus 
scutello  pygidio  (hoc  viridi-marginato)  corpore  subtus  femori- 
bus  tibiis  anticis  tarsisque  (abdominis  segmentis  postice  plus 
minusve  viridibus)  subaureis ;  capite  creberrime  subtiliter 
(postice  minus  crebre),  prothorace  sparsim  subtiliter,  elytris 
minus  sparsim  minus  subtiliter  sublineatim  (puncturis  hie 
illic  in  striis  subobsoletis  positis),  pygidio  crebre  rugulose 
parum  subtiliter,  punctulatis  ;  prothorace  quam  longiori  fere 
cluplo  (postice  quam  antice  plus  quam  dimidio)  latiori,  mar- 
gine  antico  vix  bisinuato  postico  utrinque  leviter  late  (in 
medio  sat  fortiter)  emarginato,  lateribus  leviter  arcuatis, 
angulis  posticis  subrectis;  elytris  singulis  apice  subacuminatis, 
lateribus  apicem  versus  sinuatis ;  pygidio  sat  sequaliter 
albido-piloso ;  corpore  subtus  (sterni  abdominisque  parte 
media  excepta)  albido-piloso,  mesosterni  processu  elongato 
acuto ;  tibiis  anticis  externe  obtuse  3-dentatis. 
Maris  (?)  clypeo  antice  rotundato-truncato  leviter  reflexo. 

[Long.  13,  lat.  7  lines. 
I  am  doubtful  of  the  sex  of  my  type  of  this  species ;  the 
extremely  wide  membranous  interval  between  the  apical  and 
penultimate  ventral  segments  points  to  its  being  a  male,  but  the 
clypeus  is  more  like  that  of  a  female.  The  species  bears  a  good 
deal  of  resemblance  to  A.  Odewahni,  Macl. ;  compared  with  that 
species  the  prothorax  is  much  less  strongly  bisinuate  in  front,  has 
much  more  sharply  defined  hind  angles  and  is  much  more  strongly 
emarginate  in  the  middle  of  the  base,  the  elytra  are  much  more 
dehiscent  at  the  apex,  the  pygidium  is  less  finely  sculptured,  the 
mesosternal  process  is  much  longer,  &c;  also  the  colouring  is  quite 
different. 


496  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

It  is  not  improbable  that  this  is  the  insect  which  Sir  W. 
Macleay  regarded  as  possibly  the  female  of  A.  Odewahni.  Both 
sexes  of  that  species  are  known  to  me ;  the  female  differs  from 
the  male  only  by  the  characters  that  are  usual  in  the  genus. 

S.  Australia;  basin  of  Lake  Eyre. 

BUPRESTID^E. 

ASTRjEUS. 

In  P.L.S.N.S.W.,  1889,  there  are  descriptions  of  three  new 
species  of  this  genus  from  my  pen.  In  the  same  year  a  monograph 
of  Astrceus  by  J.  R.  H.  Neervoort  van  de  Poll  appeared  in  the 
"Tijdschrift  Ent.,"  containing  descriptions  of  new  species.  As 
might  be  expected  the  two  clash,  and  it  is  clear  to  me  that  the 
species  which  I  described  as  A.  Meyricki  and  A.  Tepperi  were 
named  by  my  colleague  A.  Badeni  and  A.  Jansoni  respectively. 
My  A.  major  does  not  appear  in  the  monograph,  which  also 
mentions  (as  did  my  paper)  the  identity  of  A.  Master  si,  Mac!., 
with  A.  Samonelli,  Saund.,  and  seems  to  indicate  that  A.  pygmmus^ 
Poll,  is  a  good  species  and  not  (as  I.  suggested  to  be  possible)  a 
var.  of  Samouelli. 

Melobasis  monticola,  sp.nov. 
Subtus  senea  vix  cuprascens,  prosterno  medio  et  abdomine 
antice  viridescentibus,  epipleuris  antice  aureo-cupreis;  capite 
prothoraceque  obscure  cupreis ;  elytris  nigro-seneis,  sutuia 
antice  et  maculis  binis  discoidalibus  (altera  fere  ad  medium 
altera  sat  longe  ante  apicem  positis)  laete  aureo-cupreis ; 
pedibus  antennisque  cyanescentibus  ;  capite  (hoc  fere  piano) 
creberrime  rugulose,  prothorace  (hoc  quam  longiori  fere 
duabus  partibus,  postice  quam  antice  tertia  parte,  latiori)  sat 
fortiter  punctulatis ;  scutello  lsevigato,  elytris  sat  fortiter 
striatis,  striis  subtilius  punctulatis,  interstitiis  (prresertim 
alternis  postice)  nisi  prope  basin  sat  convexis,  superticie 
magna  pone  humeros  sat  fortiter  transversim  rugata;  corpore 
subtus  fere  glabro  sat  sparsim  punctulato ;  prosterno  antice 
declivi.  [Long.  b\-5\,  lat.  1J-2J  lines. 


BY    THE    REV.  T.   BLACKBURN.  497 

A  rather  wide  depressed  species,  at  its  widest  slightly  behind 
the  middle  of  the  elytra.  The  puncturation  of  the  head  is  closer 
than  in  any  of  the  commoner  species  known  to  me  of  the  genus 
(e.g.,  nervosa,  Boisd.,  verna,  Hope) ;  that  of  the  prothorax  is,  in 
the  male  a  little  in  the  female  much,  less  close  and  strong  than 
in  the  corresponding  sex  of  M.  verna  ;  the  elytra  are  punctulate- 
striate  almost  as  in  M.  azureipennis,  Macl.,  (more  distinctly  than 
is  usual  in  the  genus),  but  the  alternate  interstices  are  markedly 
more  convex  in  their  hinder  half  than  in  that  species ;  the  sides 
of  the  prothorax  are  only  very  slightly  arched  (evidently  less 
than  in  M.  verna,  Hope).  On  the  underside  the  anteriorly 
declivous  prosternum  furnishes  a  distinction  from  many  species 
of  the  genus,  and  the  puncturation  is  unusually  feeble  throughout 
(much  more  so,  e.g.,  than  in  M.  nervosa,  Boisd.).  Compared  with 
the  puncturation  of  the  undersurface  of  M.  verna,  Hope  (in  the 
less  closely-punctured  sex, — male  I  think),  that  of  the  present 
species  differs  (besides  being  in  all  parts  evidently  less  strong)  on 
the  prosternum  in  being  very  evenly  distributed  in  the  middle 
portion  (not  becoming  coarser  and  rougher  towards  the  front 
margin)  and  on  the  ventral  segments  in  being  almost  evenly 
distributed,  whereas  in  verna  it  becomes  extremely  sparse  towards 
the  middle  line,  especially  on  the  intermediate  segments. 

In  my  example  (which  I  take  to  be  a  male)  the  apical  ventral 
segment  has  the  subapical  spine  on  either  side  very  sharp  and 
well  developed,  though  much  smaller  than  the  apical  spines  ;  the 
apex  of  the  segment  is  a  kind  of  flat  coriaceous  plate,  this  plate 
being  deeply  and  semicircularly  emarginate  quite  through  its 
substance  {I.e.,  the  inner  surface  of  the  substance  does  not, — or 
scarcely, — project  beyond  the  outer  surface  of  the  same),  so  that 
the  margins  of  the  emargination  run  out  on  either  side  in  a  strong 
free  spine  and  the  internal  organs  or  the  under  surface  of  the 
substance  of  the  dorsal  segment  is  visible  through  the  cavity  of 
the  emargination.  In  the  corresponding  sex  of  M.  verna  the 
inner  surface  of  the  substance  of  the  ventral  segment  projects  far 
beyond  the  outer  surface,  so  that  the  emargination  does  not  go 
through  the   substance,   and  the  lateral  spines  (which   also  are 


498  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

really  shorter)  have  very  little  free  projection  ;  the  emarginate 
part  of  the  segment,  moreover,  is  not  flattened  or  otherwise 
distinguished  from  the  general  surface. 

I  have  seen  an  example  belonging  to  Mr.  French,  of  Melbourne, 
which  I  have  no  doubt  is  the  female  of  this  insect  (though  the 
golden  coppery  spots  on  the  elytra  are  reduced  to  a  single 
transverse  blotch  on  the  disc  about  at  its  middle  longitudinally)  ; 
it  differs  on  the  undersurface  in  the  punctures  being  throughout 
evidently  larger,  though  scarcely  more  numerous  or  more  strongly 
impressed,  in  the  subapical  spines  being  scarcely  marked  and  in 
the  apical  emargination  being  much  wider  and  feebler  with  the 
inner  surface  of  the  substance  much  more  produced,  so  that  the 
emargination  goes  through  the  substance  only  in  its  hinder  portion, 
and  the  free  projection  of  its  lateral  spines  is  less.  On  the  upper 
surface  the  colour  (of  this  example)  is  greenish-black,  very  nitid 
(as  in  the  male),  and  the  punctures  in  general  differ  a  little,  in  the 
same  way  as  on  the  undersurface. 

I  do  not  feel  quite  satisfied  that  this  may  not  be  a  very  small 
Alpine  race  of  M.  superba,  Hope,  with  the  golden  colouring  much 
reduced, — but  even  in  that  case  it  seems  to  call  for  a  distinctive 
name. 

Victoria  ;  my  example  was  taken  near  the  summit  of  one  of 
the  higher  mountains. 

Melobasis  rotundicollis,  Blackb. 

A  recent  revision  of  the  species  of  Melobasis  in  my  collection 
has  suggested  a  doubt  whether  this  species  may  possibly  be 
identical  with  M.  viridi-obscura,  Thorns.,  obscurella,  Thorns.,  or 
simplex,  Germ.  The  descriptions  of  those  species  are  too  brief  to 
be  applied  confidently  to  any  insect  without  a  comparison  of 
types, — but  they  are  all  about  the  same  size  as  rotundicollis,  and 
coloured  more  or  less  like  some  of  its  vars. ;  the  description  of  the 
puncturation,  however,  does  not  agree  very  well.  As  regards 
simplex,  however,  I  have  another  Melobasis  which  I  think  still 
more  likely  to  be  it.  M.  rotundicollis  differs  from  all  its  near 
allies  (apart  from  the  characters  I  mentioned  when   describing, 


BY    THE    REV.   T.  BLACKBURN.  499 

Trans.  Roy.  Soc,  1887,  p.  241)  by  the  presence  on  the  elytra  of 
a  large  space  round  the  scutellum  on  which  the  longitudinal 
direction  of  the  elytral  sculpture  absolutely  ceases.  Its  sexual 
distinctions  are  not  very  strongly  marked  ;  in  the  male  the  apical 
emargination  of  the  last  ventral  segment  is  a  little  narrower  and 
deeper  than  in  the  female,  and  its  lateral  spines  are  a  little 
stronger ;  also  the  intermediate  tibiae  are  slightly  arcuate  and  a 
little  shorter  and  stouter  than  in  the  female. 

Melobasis  beltanensis,  sp.nov. 

<J.  Yiridis,  elytris  cupreo-purpureis  exceptis  (colore  sine  dubio 
variabili)  ;  capite  (sat  piano  aequali)  confertim  aspere,  pro- 
thorace  sat  crebre  sat  fortiter  (latera  versus  vix  magis  crasse), 
elytris  subfortiter  sat  sequaliter,  corpore  subtus  fortiter  fere 
sequaliter,  punctulatis  ;  prothorace  quam  longiori  fere  tribus 
partibus  latiori,  antice  leviter  angustato,  lateribus  leviter 
rotundatis ;  elytris  leviter  striatis,  striis  antice  et  latera 
versus  obsoletis,  interstitiis  nonnullis  (prEesertim  2a  4aque) 
nonnihil  convexis;  prosterno  antice  declivi;  tibiis  intermediis 
sat  brevibus,  sat  robustis,  leviter  arcuatis;  segmento  ventrali 
apical  i  4-spinoso  et  in  medio  semicirculariter  inciso. 

[Long.  3?,  lat.  lg  lines  (vix). 
A  very  distinct  little  species  remarkable  for  the  evenness  of  its 
puncturation,  especially  on  the  underside  where  the  basal  ventral 
segment  is  (even  in  front)  not  punctured  noticeably  less  closely 
and  strongly  than  the  other  segments ;  the  even  and  well-marked 
puncturation  of  the  elytra,  too,  is  very  characteristic.  The  apical 
emargination  of  the  last  ventral  segment  and  the  apical  spines 
are  fairly  strong ;  on  either  side  there  is  a  strong  tooth  (doubtless 
absent  in  the  female)  a  little  behind  the  apex. 

S.   Australia ;    near  Beltana,   on    the    border  of   the    interior 
desert  region. 

Strigoptera. 

Mr.  C.  French,  of   Melbourne,  has  lately  forwarded    for  my 
inspection  an  insect  which  he  tells  me  was  named  for  him  some 
time  ago  by  M.  Deyrolle  as  Strigoptera  Frenchi.     I  have  in  my 
33 


500  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

collection  several  species  evidently  congeneric  with  it,  which,  how- 
ever, I  had  not  ventured  to  attribute  to  this  genus  on  account 
of  their  scutellum  being  of  a  form  different  from  that  which 
M.  Lacordaire  attributes  to  Strigoptera  (stated  by  him  to  be 
identical  with  Castalia).  In  these  species  it  is  very  small  and 
more  or  less  transverse  instead  of  in  the  form  of  a  very  elongate 
triangle.  On  M.  Deyrolle's  authority,  I  think  I  may  treat  them 
as  Strigoptera  without  danger  of  serious  error.  As  I  cannot  find 
that  S.  Frenchi  has  been  described,  I  give  a  short  description  of 
it  below. 

Strigoptera  frenchi,  sp.nov.  (?). 

Elongata  ;  minus  convexa,  elytris  pone  medium  sat  dilatatis  ; 
nitida  ;  supra  cupreo-aenea,  latera  versus  aureo-cupreo  micans; 
corpore  subtus  pedibusque  violaceis,  illo  hie  illic  viridi-mi- 
canti ;  capite  sat  fortiter  crebre  punctulato,  longitudinaliter 
postice  subtiliter  impresso,  inter  oculos  transversim  late 
arcuatim  subimpresso  et  mox  ante  partem  impressam  tumido 
vel  subtuberculato ;  prothorace  fortiter  rugulose  punctulato, 
medio  in  parte  postica  canaliculato  quam  longiori  vix  plus 
quam  dimidio  latiori,  postice  quam  antice  circiter  quarta 
parte  latiori,  margine  antico  basique  leviter  bisinuatis,  lateri- 
bus  leviter  arcuatis,  latitudine  majori  paullo  pone  medium 
posita,  angulis  posticis  acute  rectis  ;  scutello  lsevi  (exempli 
visi  viridi) ;  elytris  singulis  costis  4  obscuris  irregularibus 
instructis  interspatiis  sat  crasse  sat  rugulose  confuse  punctu- 
latis,  lateribus  (his  retrorsum  gradatim  magis  late  marginatis) 
pone  humeros  sinuatis,  postice  subtiliter  crenulatis,  apice 
anguste  oblique  truncato,  sutura  ad  apicem  breviter  spinosa; 
corpore  subtus  sat  sparsim  (prosterno  magis  crebre)  minus 
fortiter  punctulato  ;  segmento  ventrali  apicali  postice  pro- 
ducto,  ad  apicem  truncato,  truncatura  utrinque  leviter 
angulato-producta  ;  segmentis  ventralibus  4  ad  latera  fossa 
profunda  rotunda  utrinque  impressis.     [Long.  8,  lat.  3  lines. 

Very  distinct  from  all  other  Australian  Buprestidce  known  to  me. 

Victoria ;  mountains  of  Gippsland. 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  501 

Strigoptera  australis,  sp.nov. 

Valde  elongata ;  minus  convexa ;  elytris  pone  medium  leviter 

dilatatis  ;  sat  nit  id  a  ;  tota  \vete  violacea  plus  minusve  cupreo- 

micans;  capite  sat  requaliter  convexo,  inter  oculos  vix  planato 

crebre  rugulose  punctulato;  prothorace  longitudinaliter  cana- 

liculato  (canali  postice  profundo  antrorsum  gradatim  magis 

obsoleto,  marginem    anticum    haud   attingenti),  sat   fortiter 

minus  crebre   haud    rugulose    (latera    versus    magis    crebre 

magis  rugulose)  punctulato,  quam  longiori  fere  duabus  partibus 

latiori,  postice   quam    antice   circiter    quarta   parte   latiori, 

antice  posticeque  leviter  bisinuato,  lateribus  modice  arcuatis, 

latitudine  majori  circiter   in  medio  posita,  angulis  posticis 

obtusis,  scutello   longitudinaliter  impresso ;    elytris  singulis 

costis  6  (sutura  margineque  laterali  inclusis)  bene  determinatis 

insignibus,  costa  suturali  antice  extrorsum  oblique  directa, 

costa  submarginali  antice  obsoleta,  interstitiis  fortiter  sub 

reticulatim  rugulosis,  lateribus  pone  humeros  sinuatis  postice 

haud   (vel   vix  perspicue)  crenulatis,  apice  sat    rotundatis ; 

corpore  subtus  fere  ut  prsecedentis  punctulato  et  segmentis 

ventralibus  vix  diversis  nisi  foveis  lateralibus  haud  vel  vix 

perspicuis.  [Long.  7J-8J,  lat.  2|-3  lines. 

Also  a  very  distinct   species.       I  possess    an    example   which 

seems  to  differ  from  the  above  only  in  being  much  larger  (Long. 

10£  lines)  and  having  the  ventral  segments  coriaceous  and  more 

finely  and  deeply  punctured  ;  it  is  probably  a  female. 

S.  Australia  ;  Yorke's  Peninsula. 

Strigoptera  marmorata,  sp.nov. 

Valde  elongata  ;  depressa  •  elytris  pone  medium  sat  fortiter 
dilatatis;  supra  subopaca  nigra,  elytris  flavo-maculatim 
5-fasciatis;  corpore  subtus  pedibusque  seneis  subnitidis  ;  capite 
planato,  crebre  rugulose  punctulato,  breviter  pallide  hirto ; 
prothorace  insequali  (in  medio  longitudinaliter  late  profunde 
et  utrinque  minus  distincte,  sulcato),  insequaliter  rugulose 
punctulato,  partibus   depressis   opacis   creberrime — partibus 


502  NOTES  OK  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

elevatis  magis  nitidis  sat  sparsim — sat  transverso,  antice  sat 
fortiter  angustato,  lateribus  modice  arcuatis,  angulis  posticis 
rectis ;  scutello  in  medio  impresso ;  elytris  singulis  costis  6 
(sutura  margineque  laterali  inclusis)  et  altera  abbreviata 
scutellari  nitidis  subnexuosis  instructis,  interstitiis  in  partibus 
nigris  reticulatim  sat  fortiter  (in  partibus  flavis  vix  perspicue) 
rugulosis,  lateribus  pone  huineros  parum  sinuatis,  apice 
truncato  et  breviter  niultidentato  ;  corpore  subtus  fortiter 
punctulato  ;  segmento  ventrali  basali  autice  longitudinaliter 
concavo,  segmento  apicali  fere  ut  S.frenchi  sed  minus  fortiter 
producto  et  utrinque  in  margine  laterali  dente  parvo  acuto 
armato.  [Long.  10,  lat.  3 -J  lines. 

A  very  remarkable  Buprestid  and  quite  unlike  any  other  known 
to  me.  The  structure  of  its  under  surface, — especially  the  relation 
of  the  sterna  inter  se  and  the  form  of  the  apical  segment,  — together 
with  the  general  form,  however,  is  so  much  in  agreement  with  S. 
australis  that  I  think  the  two  species  ought  not  to  be  far  separated. 
The  yellow  blotches  on  the  elytra  are  arranged  in  five  fascia?  which 
occupy  altogether  a  larger  space  than  the  black  portions ;  of  these 
fascia?  the  anterior  two  are  not  very  distinct  inter  se  ;  the  two 
costse  preceding  the  margin  are  abbreviated  in  front  and  are  con- 
nected with  each  other  a  little  behind  the  shoulder ;  they  are  also 
connected  (as  is  the  2nd  with  the  1st)  a  little  before  the  apex. 

S.  Australia ;  I  do  not  know  the  exact  habitat. 

EUCNEMID.E. 

Dromgeolus  interioris,  sp.nov. 

Sat  elongatus ;  sat  cylindricus  ;  obscure  brunneus  ;  pube  subtili 
fulva  vestitus  ;  capite  prothoraceque  crebre  fortiter  rugulose 
nee  grosse  punctulatis  ;  illius  clypeo  in  medio  haud  marginato, 
fronte  longitudinaliter  carinata;  prothorace  quam  latiori  haud 
longiori,  canaliculato,  canali  antice  abbreviato,  lateribus 
parallelis,  angulis  posticis  acutis  retrorsum  modice  productis  ; 
elytris  striatis,  interstitiis  sat  plauis  rugulosis  ;  antennis  apice 
sat  acuminatis,  articulo  ultimo  praecedenti  sequali ;  corpore 


BY    THE    REV.  T.   BLACKBURN.  503 

subtns  crebre  rugulose  (prosterno  minus  crebre  magis  crasse) 

punctulato.  [Long.  4|,  lat.  11  lines. 

Near  D.  lugubris,  Bonv.,  but  inter  alia  differently  coloured,  the 

underside,  e.g.,  being  (not  "black  "  but)  dark  reddish-brown,  and 

having  the  prothorax  not  at  all  dilated  near  the  front. 

S.  Australia ;  basin  of  Lake  Eyre. 

Lycaon  expulsus,  Bonv. 

I  have  before  me  an  example  which  I  took  under  bark  of 
Eucalyptus  on  one  of  the  Australian  Alps  in  Victoria,  and  which 
appears  to  be  this  species  although  differing  (sexually  I  think)  in 
antennal  structure  from  the  type  ;  joints  4-8  being  almost  equal 
inter  se  (4  and  7  slightly  the  longest  of  them),  joint  9  equal  to  6-8 
together,  10  narrower  than  9,  scarcely  so  long,  11  as  narrow  as 
10  and  longer  than  9. 

ELATERID^. 

Lacon  brightensis,  sp.nov, 

Opacus;  nigro-fuscus,  antennis  pedibusque  obscure  rufescenti- 
bus ;  obscure  squamosus ;  capite  prothoraceque  crebre  sat 
fortiter  punctulatis  ;  illo  subplano  vix  sequali ;  hoc  vix  trans- 
verso,  minus  convexo,  late  obsolete  canaliculate,  foveis  4  in 
disco  impresso,  basi  quam  margo  anticus  duplo  latiori,  lateri 
bus  obsolete  crenulatis  antice  rotundatis  postice  vix  sinuatis, 
angulis  posticis  rectis  intra  marginem  carinatis ;  elytris  quam 
prothorax  vix  latioribus  vix  duplo  longioribus,  sat  depressis, 
vix  striatis,  striis  distincte  sat  fortiter  nee  crebre  punctulatis, 
sutura  et  interstitio  6°  totis  (interstitiis  2°  4°  que  postice) 
convexis,  angulis  humeralibus  subrectis ;  sulcis  tarsorum 
in  prosterno  sat  angustis  bene  determiuatis,  in  metasterno  sat 
distinctis.  [Long.  3r4'  lat'  l]"1  f  lines- 

To  the  eye  the  elytra  appear  decidedly,  but  when  measured  they 

are  found  to  be  scarcely,  less  than  twice  as  long  as  the  prothorax. 

The  four  rather  deep  and  conspicuous  foveas  placed  as  the  corners 

of    a    square  on   the  disc  of    the    prothorax    are   a   well-marked 

character. 


504  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

In  Dr.  Candeze's  tabulation  of  Lacon  [Mem.  Liege  (2)  IV.]  this 
species  would  fall  I  think  beside  L.  sculptus,  a  much  larger  and 
very  different  species.  If  it  were  placed  among  the  species 
having  the  elytra  at  least  twice  as  long  as  the  prothorax,  it  would 
fall  beside  L.  variabilis,  Cand.,  also  much  larger  and  in  other 
respects  very  different. 

Victoria ;  near  Bright,  under  bark  of  Eucalyptus. 

Lacon  murrayensis,  sp.nov. 

Modice  elongatus ;  parum  nitidus  :  setis  brevibus  fulvis  sparsim 
vestitus  ;  rufo-brunneus,  nigro-marmoratus  j  capite  prothor- 
aceque  sat  crasse  sat  crebre  punctulatis ;  illo  antice  planato- 
convexo ;  hoc  quam  longiori  paullo  latiori  subdepresso, 
obscure  canaliculato,  postice  quam  antice  fere  duplo  latiori, 
lateribus  subcrenulatis,  a  basi  ultra  medium  fere  rectis,  angulis 
posticis  rectis  (exemplis  nonnullis  apice  summo  minute 
truncato)  intra  marginem  subtuberculatis ;  elytris  quam 
prothorax  vix  latioribus  vix  duplo  longioribus,  subdepressis 
minus  distincte  punctulato  striatis,  puncturis  quadratis, 
interstitiis  sat  sequalibus  sat  angustis  (exemplis  nonnullis 
leviter  subcarinatis),  angulis  anticis  rectis;  tarsorum  anticorum 
sulcis  bene  determinatis  intermediorum  fere  obsoletis. 

[Long.  4-4-i,  lat.  li-lf  lines. 
In  colour  and  markings  resembling  L.  variolas,  Cand.,  beside 
which  it  would  fall  in  the  tabulation  (referred  to  above)  but  differ- 
ing inter  alia  in  its  sharply  denned  anterior  tarsal  sulci.  In 
general  form  and  sculpture  much  resembling  L.  variabilis,  Cand., 
but  with  shorter  elytra,  equal  elytral  interstices,  different  tarsal 
sulci,  &c.  The  distinct  though  ill-detined  sulci  for  the  interme- 
diate tarsi  will  distinguish  it  from  most  of  its  congeners. 
S.  Australia ;  near  Murray  Bridge. 

Lacon  lindensis,  sp.nov. 

Minus  latus  ;  subparallelus  ;  sat  nitidus  ;  setis  brevibus  pallidis 
minus  crebre  vestitus;  niger,  prothoracis  lateribus  (pra3sertim 
ad  angulos)  antennis  pedibusque  rufescentibus  ;  corpore  sub- 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  505 

tus  sat  opaco  piceo,  prosterno  antice  rufescenti,  elytrorum 
epipleuris  antice  et  prosterni  angulis  posticis  plus  minusve 
laete  testaceis  ;  capite  sat  piano  crasse  punctulato  ;  prothorace 
quam  latiori  vix  longiori,  postice  quam  antice  duabus  partibus 
latiori,  minus  convexo,  sat  fortiter  canaliculate-,  fortiter 
minus  crebre  punctulato,  disco  4-foveolato,  lateribus  subtiliter 
crenulatis  a  basi  ultra  medium  fere  parallelis,  angulis  posticis 
acute  rectis,  intra  marginem  carinatis;  elytris  quam  prothorax 
vix  latioribus  vix  duplo  longioribus,  minus  convexis,  seriatim 
grosse  punctulatis,  interstitiis  nonnullis  (retrorsum  gradatim 
magis  fortiter)  carinatis  et  hie  illic  carinis  transversis  con- 
junctis,  angulis  humeralibus  subrectis  ;  tarsorum  anticorum 
sulcis  bene  determinatis,  intermediorum  subobsoletis. 

[Long.  2J,  lat.  1  line. 

Much  like  L.  lacrymosus,  Cand.,  but  much  more  nitid  ;  that 
species  is  stated  to  be  "opacus."  I  think  I  have  identified  L. 
lacrymosus  with  tolerable  certainty,  although  the  description  is 
very  defective,  giving  no  information,  e.g.,  as  to  the  tarsal  sulci. 
Compared  with  that  insect,  the  present  one,  besides  being  much 
more  nitid,  is  considerably  smaller  and  narrower,  witli  more 
elongate  elytra,  the  carinate  interstices  of  which  (though  growing 
more  carinate  near  the  apex)  are  not  tuberculate ;  also  the  colour 
is  different, — the  testaceous  colour  of  the  epipleurse  and  underside 
of  the  prothoracic  hind  angles  being  conspicuous  and  apparently 
constant ;  the  prothorax  is  less  closely  punctured  and  the  tarsal 
sulci  of  the  prosternum  are  very  much  more  sharply  defined 
(being  not  much  less  so  than  in  L.  caliginosus,  GUier.) ;  in  both 
species  the  tarsal  sulci  of  the  metasternum  are  distinctly  indicated. 

South  Australia ;  not  rare  near  Port  Lincoln,  under  bark  of 
Eucalyptus. 

LACON    ADELAIDiE,  Sp.nOV. 

Minus  latus  ;  sat  nitidus  ;  sat  convexus  ;  setis  minutis  testaceis 
sat  sparsim  vestitus  ;  niger,  antennis  (articulo  basali  excepto) 
prosterno  antice  pedibusque  (femoribus  tibiisque  plus  minusve 
infuscatis)  rufo-testaceis ;    capite  prothoraceque  fortiter  sat 


506  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

crebre  nee  rugulose  punctulatis;  illo  subplanato  medio  triangu- 

lariter  vix  impresso ;  hoc  quam  latiori  vix  longiori,  postice 

quam  antice  plus  quam  dimidio  latiori,  obsolete  canaliculate-, 

ad  angulos  anticos  late  impresso,  lateribus  integris  antice  sat 

rotundatis    pone    medium    sinuatis,    angulis    posticis    acutis 

retrorsum  productis  intra  marginem  carinatis ;  elytris  quam 

prothorax  nullo  modo  latioribus  vix  duplo  longioribus,  sat 

grosse  seriatim  punctulatis,  interstitiis  alternis  angustis  sat 

distincte  elevatis,  angulis  humeralibus  minute  dentif  ormibus ; 

tarsorum  anticorum  sulcis  sat  magnis  male  definitis,  interme- 

diorum  vix  distinctis.  [Long.  2  J,  lat.  1  line. 

The  general  nonparallel  outline  of  this  small  species  is  much 

like  that  of  L.  divaricatus,  Cand.,  the  prothorax  being  rounded 

and  markedly  wider  at  or  in  front  of  the  middle  than  at  the  base, 

and  the  elytra  being  narrow  at  the  base  and  dilating  hindward. 

In  the  tabulation  of  Lacon  (referred  to  above),  this  insect  would 

fall  among  the  last  six  species ;  if  the  dentiform  humeral  angles 

can  be  relied  on  as  constant,  this  character  distinguishes  it  from 

them  all ;  if  not  it  would  fall  beside  L.  carinulatus,  from  which 

it  differs  by  its  pale  antennae  and  legs,  the  alternate  interstices  of 

its  elytra  by  no  means  strongly  carinate,  the  larger  tarsal  sulci  of 

the  prosternum,  as  well  as  smaller  size.     In  this  species  one  of 

the  elevated  interstices   (the  5th  interstice,  including  that  next 

the  suture)  is  decidedly  more  elevated  than  any  of  those  nearer 

the  suture. 

S.  Australia  ;  near  Adelaide. 

Lacon  duplex,  sp.nov. 

Minus  latus  ;  sat  nitidus  ;  sat  convexus  ;  setis  minutis  testaceis 
sat  sparsim  (in  elytris  seriebus  obscure  geminatis)  vestitus  ; 
piceo-niger,  prosterno  antice  tibiis  tarsisque  dilutioribus, 
exempli  cujusdam  elytris  antice  testaceis  ;  capite  prothora- 
ceque  fere  ut  L.  Adelaide  sed  hoc  ad  angulos  anticos  minus 
distincte  impresso,  angulis  posticis  subrectis  vix  retrorsum 
productis  intra  marginem  vix  carinatis  ;  elytris  quam  pro- 
thorax vix  latioribus  duplo  longioribus,  sat  fortiter  sat  crebre 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  507 

seriatim  punctulatis,  striatis,  interstitiis  inter  se  sequalibus 

vix  convexis,  angulis  humeralibus  vix  acutis  ;  tarsorum  anti- 

corum  sulcis  sat  angustis  sat  bene  determinatis,  posticorum 

subobsoletis.  [Long.  2  (vix),  lat.  ?  line. 

The  smallest  Australian  Lacon  yet  described.     Perhaps  nearest 

to  L.   Victoria},  Cand.,  but  smaller  and  narrower  and   with   no 

difference  between  the  punctures  in  the  striae  and  interstices  of 

the  elytra,  also  the  prothorax  less  closely  and  not  at  all  rugulosely 

punctured.     The  dark  antennae  will  distinguish  this  species  from 

many  of  its  allies. 

Victoria  ;  in  the  western  districts. 

Lacon  eucalypti,  sp.nov. 

Minus  latus ;  minus  nitidus ;  sat  convexus ;  setis  brevibus 
cinereis  sequaliter  sat  crebre  vestitus;  piceo-niger,  prothoracis 
angulis  prosterno  antice  antennis  pedibusque  runs ;  capite 
prothoraceque  crebre  minus  grosse  punctulatis ;  illo  sub- 
planato  in  medio  impresso ;  hoc  quam  longiori  vix  (postice 
quam  antice  minus  quam  duplo)  latiori,  leviter  canaliculato, 
ad  angulos  anticos  haud  impresso,  lateribus  crenulatis  autice 
arcuatis  a  basi  ultra  medium  fere  parallelis,  angulis  posticis 
sat  acute  rectis  retrorsum  vix  productis  intra  marginem 
lateralem  vix  perspicue  carinatis  ;  elytris  pone  medium  leviter 
diktatis,  quam  prothorax  paullo  latioribus  plus  quam  duplo 
longioribus,  punctulato-striatis,  interstitiis  planatis  aequalibus 
quam  striae  paullo  minus  crebre  magis  subtiliter  punctulatis, 
angulis  humeralibus  subobtusis  nullo  modo  rotundatis ; 
tarsorum  anticorum  sulcis  angustis  bene  determinatis,  inter- 
mediorum  sat  distinctis.  [-Long-  2J-2i,  lat.  -t-1  line. 

A  small  species  nearly  allied  to  several  preceding,  but  distin- 
guished by  elongate  elytra  (which  are  evenly  punctnlate-striate), 
close  puncturation  of  prothorax  (which  is  not  at  all  foveate  within 
the  anterior  angles),  and  strongly  denned  tarsal  sulci,  those  of  the 
metasternum  particularly  being  very  well  (though  much  less  so 
than  in  L.  caliginosus  and  its  allies)  defined. 

S.  Australia  ;  under  bark  of  Eucalyptus  near  Port  Lincoln. 


508  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

Lacon  andersoni,  sp.nov. 

Minus  latus  ;  sat  nitidus  ;  sat  convexus ;  setis  ininutis  fulvis  sat 
sparsira  vestitus  ;  piceo-niger,  prosterno  antice  pedibusque 
dilutioribus  ;  capite  prothoraceque  sat  grosse  minus  crebre 
(pr?esertim  in  hujus  disco)  punctulatis  ;  his  in  ceteris  rebus 
fere  ut  L.  Adelaide,  prothorace  nihiloininus  intra  angulos 
posticos  minus  perspicue  carinatis  ;  elytris  fere  ut  L.  Euca- 
lypti sed  minus  elongatis,  angulis  humeralibus  fere  subspini- 
formibus  ;  tarsorum  anticorum  sulcis  sat  bene  determinatis, 
posticorum  subobsoletis.  [Long.  2-^,  lat.  1  line  (vix). 

Very  like  L.  duplex,  but  inter  alia  larger,  with  the  prothorax 
much  less  closely  punctured,  and  the  punctures  of  the  stria3  on  the 
elytra  quite  distinct  from  those  of  the  interstices ;  differing  from 
Eucalypti  by  the  sparser  prothoracic  sculpture,  subdentiform 
humeral  angles,  dark  antennae,  dec.,  etc. 

S.  Australia ;  near  Port  Lincoln. 

Lacon  victoria,  Cand. 

I  am  not  quite  sure  that  I  am  right  in  referring  to  this  species 
a  small  Lacon  occurring  near  Melbourne  and  agreeing  very  fairly 
with  the  description  in  every  respect  except  the  colour  of  its 
antennae,  which  is  red,  whereas  the  description  implies  (without 
very  distinctly  asserting  it)  that  L.  Victoria1  has  black  antennae. 
I,  however,  think  the  identification  sufficiently  probable  to  justify 
me  in  referring  to  the  insect  in  question  (in  the  following  tabula- 
tion) as  L.  Victoria?.  This  tabulation  includes  the  new  species 
described  above  together  with  two  or  three  old  species  which  from 
their  size,  general  appearance,  and  habitat  it  seems  well  to  dis- 
tinguish from  them. 

A.  Upper  surface  not  reddish  marbled 
with  black. 
B.  Tarsal  sulci  distinct  on  the  metas- 
ternum. 
C.   Elytral  interstices  equal. 


BY   THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  509 

D.  Antenna?  testaceous. 

E.  Form  narrow  and  elongate  L.  Eucalypti. 
EE.  Form  wider  and  shorter...   L.  Victoria},  Cand. 
DD.  Antennae  piceous  or  black. 
E.  Prothoracic       puncturation 
sparse,    humeral     angles 
subdentif orm L.  Andersoni. 

EE.  Prothoracic  puncturation 
rather  close,  humeral 
angles  normal. 

F.  Size  extremely  small L.  duplex. 

FF.  Size  much  larger L.  humilis,  Er. 

CC.  Elytral  interstices  unequal. 
D.  Opaque  species. 

E.  The  3rd  and  5th  interstices 
scarcely  elevated  in  their 

front  half L.  brightensis. 

EE.  These  interstices  elevated 

throughout  their  length  L.  lacrymosus,  Cand. 
DD.  Nitid  species. 

E.  Discofprothorax4-foveolate  L.  lindensis. 
EE.  Disc  of  prothorax  not  4- 

f oveolate L.  Adelaidce. 

BB.  Tarsal  sulci  not  marked  on  the 

metasternum L.  divaricatus,  Cand. 

A  A.  Upper  surface  reddish,  marbled  with 

black  L.  Murrayensis. 

MONOCREPIDIUS    RUFICOLLIS,  Sp.nov. 

(J.  Angustus ;  elongatus  \  obscure  fulvo-pubescens ;  ater,  pro- 
thoracis  disco  toto  sanguineo,  prosterno  metasternoque  mediis 
et  tarsis  obscure  rufescentibus  ;  prothorace  quam  longiori  vix 
(trans    angulos    posticos)  angustiori,    a   basi  ad  apicem   sat 


510  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

fortiter  angustato,  in  medio  longitudinaliter  satfortiter  cana- 
licular, subtilius  minus  crebre  punctulato,  angulis  posticis 
parum  divergentibus  sat  elongatis  bicarinatis  (carina  interna 
brevi  subtilissima);  elytris  apice  obscure  emarginatis,  striatis, 
striis  subtiliter  punctulatis,  interstitiis  leviter  convexis  subti- 
lius subcrebre  subaspere  punctulatis,  corpore  subtus  (prosterno 
in  medio  minus  crebre  subfortiter  punctulato  excepto,  hoc  ad 
latera  haud  sulcato)  creberrime  subtiliter  punctulato;  antennis 
metasterni  medium  fere  attingentibus,  articulo  _3°  quam  2US 
duplo  longiori  j  tarsorum  lamella  sat  lata. 

[Long.  5?,  lat.  1J  lines. 
A  very  elongate  species,  distinguished  from  nearly  all  its 
congeners  by  its  bright  well-defined  colouring.  In  Dr.  Candeze's 
tabulation  of  the  species  of  Monocrejridiits  (Mon.  des  Elat.,  vol.  ii.) 
I  am  doubtful  whether  it  would  be  placed  among  the  species  with 
the  posterior  angles  of  the  prothorax  bicarinate  (page  195)  or 
among  those  (page  196)  in  which  the  angles  have  only  a  single 
carina  (the  inner  carina  being  in  this  insect  nearly  but  not  quite 
non-existent).  If  referred  to  the  former  group  it  would  fall  near 
M.  cerdo  (p.  196),  which  is  a  much  larger  and  very  differently 
coloured  species ;  in  the  latter  group  the  simple  flanks  of  the 
prosternum  would  place  it  in  a  section  to  which  M.  Candeze  did  not 
refer  any  Australian  species.  All  the  Australian  Monocrepidii 
described  since  the  publication  of  M.  Candeze's  monograph  seem 
very  unlike  this  species.  At  a  glance  the  prothorax  appears  much 
longer  than  wide,  but  by  measurement  the  length  down  the 
middle  scarcely  exceeds  the  width  across  the  apices  of  the  hind 
angles.  The  non-sanguineous  margins  of  the  prothorax  are  widest 
at  the  base,  less  so  in  front  and  very  narrow  at  the  sides. 
Victoria  ;  Alpine  district. 

MONOCREPIDIUS   FRONTALIS,  sp.llOV. 

Minus  elongatus  ;  parum  nitidus ;  obscure  griseo-pubescens  ; 
nigro-  vel  brunneo-piceus,  pedibus  abdominisque  apice  testa- 
ceis,  antennis  palpisque  testaceis  vel  piceo-testaceis ;  pro- 
thorace  quam  longiori  vix  (trans  angulos  posticos)  angustiori, 


BY    THE    REV.  T.   BLACKBURN.  511 

postice  subparallelo  antice  moclice  angustato,  postice  in  medio 
leviter  canaliculato,  creberrime  subrugulose  (in  femina  quam 
in  mare  paullo  minus  crebre)  punctulato,  angulis  posticis  vix 
perspicue  divergentibus  sat  elongatis  sat  fortiter  bicarinatis  ; 
elytris  apice  vix  emarginatis,  leviter  striatis,  striis  distincte 
nee  crebre  punctulatis,  interstitiis  subplanis  subtiliter  crebre 
subaspere  punctulatis  ;  corpore  subtus  subtiliter  creberrime 
(prosterno  in  medio  magis  fortiter  magis  sparsim  punctulato 
excepto,  hoc  ad  latera  hand  sulcato)  punctulato ;  antennis 
prothoracis  basin  (maris  sat  fortiter  feminae  vix)  superantibus, 
articulo  3°  quam  2U8  duplo  longiori ;  tarsorum  lamella  sat 
lata  ;  capite  postice  in  medio  longitudinaliter  sat  fortiter 
carinato.  [Long.  3?-61,  lat.  1-2  lines. 

An  obscure  and  inconspicuous  looking  species  varying  greatly 
in  size  and  more  or  less  in  colour  (these  variations  are,  I  think, 
almost  universal  in  the  Australian  Monocr&pidii).  Its  chief 
reliable  characters  seem  to  be  the  comparatively  strong  carina  on 
the  head,  the  very  close  asperate  puncturation  of  the  prothorax 
(especially  in  the  male),  the  slightness  of  the  narrowing  of  the 
prothorax,  except  quite  near  the  front  (making  the  segment 
appear  less  elongate  than  it  really  is),  and  the  uniformly  pitchy- 
black  colour  of  the  upper  surface  combined  with  entirely  testaceous 
legs.  The  distinctly  testaceous  colour  of  the  apex  of  the  abdomen 
also  seems  constant,  though  more  conspicuous  in  some  examples 
than  in  others.  The  elytral  interstices  are  distinctly  transversely 
strigose.  In  Dr.  Candeze's  tabulation  of  Monocrepidius  (referred 
to  above  under  M.  ruficollis)  this  species  would  fall  beside  M. 
rectangulus,  from  which  inter  alia  its  much  smaller  size,  posterior 
prothoracic  angles  not  quite  so  absolutely  non-divergent,  and  more 
elongate  prothorax,  will  at  once  distinguish  it. 
Victoria ;  Alpine  district. 

Monocrepidius  alpicola,  sp.no v. 

Moclice  elongatus  ;  nitidus ;  obscure  f ulvo-pubescens  ;  supra 
niger,  scutello  et  corpore  subtus  rufo-ferrugineis  (sternis  et 
abdominis  basi  nonnullis  exemplis  obscurioribus),  antennis 


512  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

palpis  pedibusque  testaceis ;  prothorace  quain  longiori  vix 
(trans  angulos  posticos)  latiori  antrorsum  a  basi  modice 
arcuatim  angustato,  postice  in  medio  sat  fortiter  canaliculato, 
subtilius  minus  crebre  (in  femina  quam  in  mare  paullo  magis 
crebre)  punctulato,  angulis  posticis  parum  divergentibus  sat 
elongatis  bicarinatis  (carina  interna  subtili) ;  elytris  apice 
vix  perspicue  emarginatis,  striatis,  striis  sat  fortiter  sat 
crebre  punctulatis,  interstitiis  vix  planis  crebre  subrugulose 
punctulatis  basin  versus  fere  granulatis ;  corpore  subtus  ut 
M.  frontalis  punctulato,  prosterno  ad  latera  sulcato ; 
antennis  prothoracis  basin  (maris  vix,  feininae  haud)  attingen- 
tibus,  articulo  3°  quam  2US  parum  longiori ;  tarsorum  lamella 
minus  lata;  capite  postice  in  medio  longitudinaliter  sat 
fortiter  carinato.  [Long.  4-4-J,  lat.  1A-1§  lines. 

A  rather  inconspicuous  species  distinguishable  by  its  short 
antennae,  bright  ferruginous  scutellum  in  contrast  with  the  nearly- 
black  general  surface,  prothoracic  puncturation  less  close 
(especially  in  the  male)  than  in  many  Monocrepidii,  prothorax 
scarcely  so  long  down  the  middle  as  it  is  wide  across  the  apices 
of  the  hind  angles,  strongly  carinated  head,  strong  fold  on  either 
side  of  the  prosternum  (where  the  margin  of  the  prothorax  laps 
over  as  in  M.  Jekeli,  Candeze,  &c),  and  comparatively  narrow 
tarsal  lamella.  In  Dr.  Candeze's  tabulation,  referred  to  above,  this 
species  would  (on  account  of  its  prosternal  structure)  fall  beside 
M.  Brucki  and  Jekeli  ;  of  these  the  former  is  one  of  the  largest 
species  in  the  genus, — the  latter  is  at  once  distinguished  from  the 
present  insect  by  its  antennae  being  "  very  long."  Among  the 
species  described  since  the  publication  of  Dr.  Candeze's  monograph, 
M.  nitidulus,  Cand.  (from  N.S.  Wales),  alone  seems  to  come  very 
near  this  insect, — but  inter  alia  as  the  learned  author  does  not 
refer  to  its  prosternum  being  sulcate  laterally  it  may  be  presumed 
that  it  is  normal  in  structure. 
Victoria  ;  Alpine  district. 

MONOCREPIDIUS    MACLEAYI,  Sp.llOV. 

Robustus,  minus  elongatus,  postice  sat  fortiter  angustatus  ;  sat 
crebre   fulvo-pubescens ;     ferrugineus,    elytris    basi    summa 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  513 

scutello  abdominisque  apice  rufis,  capite  prothoraceque 
obscurioribus,  pedibus  testaceis ;  prothorace  quam  longiori 
trans  angulos  posticos  sat  latiori,  a  basi  antrorsum  gradatim 
nee  fortiter  angustato,  longitudinaliter  canaliculato,  confertim 
rugulose  punctulato,  angulis  posticis  haud  divergentibus  sat 
elongatis  fortiter  bicarinatis ;  elytris  apice  rotundatis,  sat 
fortiter  punctulato-striatis,  interstitiis  planis  leviter  minus 
distincte  punctulatis ;  corpore  subtus  subtiliter  sat  crebre 
(prosterno  in  medio  fortius  subrugulose  punctulato  excepto, 
— hoc  ad  latera  sulcato)  punctulato  ;  antennis  (ferninse  ?) 
prothoracis  basin  haud  plane  attingentibus,  articulo  3°  quam 
2US  fere  duplo  longiori ;  tarsorum  lamella  sat  angusta  ;  capite 
postice  in  medio  longitudinaliter  sat  fortiter  carinato. 

[Long.  6^,  lat.  2  lines  (vix). 

I  have  only  a  single  example  of  this  species  and  am  not  quite 
sure  of  its  sex,  but  suspect  it  is  a  female.  On  a  casual  inspection 
it  looks  much  like  a  female  of  M.  Australasice,  Boisd.,  from  which 
however  it  differs  totally  by  the  narrowness  of  its  tarsal  lamellae 
and  the  sides  of  the  prosternum  being  sulcate  as  in  M.  Jekeli  and 
other  species.  It  also  differs  from  Australasice,  (female)  in  being 
of  shorter  build  and  comparatively  wider  in  the  middle,  with  the 
elytra  gently  narrowing  hindward  almost  from  the  base ;  also  the 
pro  thorax  is  more  transverse  (being  by  measurement  decidedly 
wider  across  the  hind  angles  than  it  is  long  down  the  middle),  its 
hind  angles  are  not  divergent  otherwise  than  as  involved  in  their 
evenly  continuing  the  sides  which  diverge  slightly  hindward,  and 
its  median  channel  is  traceable  quite  to  the  front ;  also  the 
prosternum  is  more  closely  and  rugulosely  punctured  in  the 
middle, — otherwise  the  sculpture  is  not  very  different. 

In  Dr.  Candeze's  tabulation  (referred  to  above)  this  species 
would  fall  beside  M.  fictus,  on  page  241  ;  passing  over  differences 
that  might  possibly  be  sexual,  it  seems  to  differ  from  M.  fictus  in 
the  apex  of  the  elytra  being  quite  devoid  of  emargination  and  in 
their  extreme  base  being  marked  with  red. 

Victoria ;  Alpine  district. 


514  NOTES    ON    AUSTRALIAN    COLEOPTERA, 

MONOCREPIDIUS    OVENS ENSIS,  Sp.nov. 

Angustus  subparallelus  ;  minus  nitidus  ;  supra  lsete  niaculatim 
albido-pubescens;  piceus;  capite,  prothoracis  elytrorumque 
lateribus,  illius  media  parte,  horum  basi,  scutello  et  tarsis 
apicem  versus  rufescentibus  ;  prothorace  quam  longiori  vix 
(trans  angulos  posticos)  angustiori,  antrorsum  a  basi  angus- 
tato,  leviter  (antice  vix  perspicue)  canaliculato,  sat  crebre 
minus  fortiter  punctulato,  angulis  posticis  haud  divergentibus, 
sat  elongatis,  sat  fortiter  bicariuatis  ;  elytris  apice  subacu- 
minatis,  punctulato-striatis,  interstitiis  sat  planatis  sat  crebre 
subrugulosis ;  corpore  subtus  eonfertim  subtiliter  (prosterno 
sparsius  fortius,— hoc  ad  latera  haud  sulcato)  punctulato; 
antennis  prothoracis  basin  haud  plane  attingentibus,  articulo 
3°  quam  2US  sat  longiori ;  tarsorum  lamella  sat  angusta ; 
capite  postice  haud  distincte  carinato. 

[Long.  4  J,  lat.  1^  lines. 
Very  distinct  from  all  previously  described  species  through  the 
whitish  pubescence  of  the  upper  surface  arranged  amoug  some 
dark  brown  pubescence  in  such  fashion  as  to  form  a  number  of 
whitish  spots  which  on  the  prothorax  are  very  ill-defined  but  on 
the  elytra  very  clearly  defined  and  there  arranged  so  as  to  fall 
into  about  10  transverse  fascia?.  It  appears  to  be  a  typical 
Monocrepidius  in  all  its  structural  characters.  It  may  be  noted 
that  owing  to  the  gradual  narrowing  forward  of  the  prothorax 
that  segment  has  the  appearance  of  being  more  elongate  than  it 
really  is. 

Victoria ;  Alpine  district. 

Monocrepidius  baldiensis,  sp.nov. 

Angustus,  sat  parallelus ;  miuus  nitidus  ;  supra  dense  cinereo 
pubescens ;  piceus,  prothoracis  angulis  posticis,  scutello, 
sutura,  genubus,  tarsis,  abdominisque  apice,  rufescentibus ; 
prothorace  quam  trans  angulos  posticos  latiori  paullo  longiori, 
a  basi  antrorsum  leviter  angustato,  haud  canaliculato,  crebre 
subrugulose  punctulato,  angulis  posticis  haud  divergentibus 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  515 

sat  elongatis  sat  fortiter  bicarinatis ;  elytris  apice  singulatim 
acuminatis,  punctulato-striatis,  interstitiis  sat  planis  subtiliter 
pugulosia ;  corpore  subtus  subtiliter  crebre  (prosterno  fortius 
subrugulose, — hoc  ad  latera  baud  sulcato)  punctulato  ;  seg- 
ments ventralibus  ad  latera  transversim  profunde  foveatis ; 
antennis  prothoracis  basin  superantibus,  articulo  3°  quam  2US 
paullo  longiori ;  tarsorum  lamella  minus  lata  ;  capite  postice 
in  medio  vix  distincte  carinato.  [Long.  5,  lat.  1*  lines. 

The  whitish-ashy  pubescence  is  so  close  on  the  upper  surface  as 
to  much  conceal  the  sculpture.  The  fovea?  on  the  sides  of  the 
ventral  segments  are  larger  and  deeper  than  is  usual  in  this  genus. 
The  very  elongate  appearance  of  the  prothorax,  in  combination 
with  the  close  pubescence,  the  red  scutellum  and  suture,  the 
elongate  parallel  general  form,  and  the  dark  colour  of  the  antenna? 
and  legs  will  render  this  species  easily  recognisable. 

I  hardly  know  where  it  should  be  placed  in  Dr.  Candeze's 
tabulation  of  Monocrepidius,  as  the  width  of  the  tarsal  lamella?  is 
such  as  to  render  it  of  doubtful  reference  to  either  the  group  with 
wide  or  with  narrow  lamella?.  The  hind  angles  of  the  prothorax 
diverge  only  to  the  extent  of  being  in  even  line  with  the  sides  of 
the  same. 

Victoria  ;  Alpine  district. 

The  above  species  of  Monocrepidius  may  be  thus  tabulated  : — 
A.  Sides  of  prosternum  normal. 

B.   Elytra  unicolorous  and  without  pubescent  mark- 
ings. 

C.   Elytra  black,  disc  of  prothorax  bright  red riificollis. 

CC.  Elytra  and  prothorax  concolorous  or  nearly 

so frontalis. 

BB.  Elytra  piceous,  with  the  suture  red Baldiensis. 

BBB.   Elytra  with   whitish  pubescence  forming  a 

well  defined  pattern  Ovensensis. 

A  A.  Sides  of  prosternum  sulcate. 

B.  Prothorax  extremely  closely  punctulate Machayi. 

BB.   Prothorax  much  less  closely  punctulate aljricola. 

34 


516  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

Cardiophorus  VICTORIENSIS. 

Niger,  prothorace  (fascia  basali  antrorsum  arcuata  sat  angusta 
nigra  excepta)  tarsisque  rufo-testaceis  ;  pube  brevi  suberecta 
sat  dense  vestitus ;  prothorace  quam  longiori  vix  latiori, 
crebre  subtiliter  sat  aequaliter  punctulato,  antice  minus 
angustato,  lateribus  fere  ad  apicem  marginatis  parum 
rotundatis  ;  elytris  quam  prothorax  vix  latioribus  sat  fortiter 
punctulato-striatis,  interstitiis  sat  planis  crebre  obscure 
subrugulosis ;  unguiculis  intus  late  subobsolete  dentatis ; 
antennis  robustis  prothoracis  basin  longe  superantibus. 

[Long.  2f ,  lat.  £  line. 
Probably  near  to  C.  bicolor,  Cand.,  which  however  inter  alia 
is  a  smaller  species,  with  testaceous  legs.     The  example  described 
is  probably  a  male. 

Victoria ;  Alpine  district. 

Cardiophorus  eucalypti,  sp.nov. 

Niger,  antennarum  basi  tarsisque  testaceis,  tibiis  brunneis  vel 

obsure    testaceis,   elytrorum    parte    basali    tertia    brunneo- 

testacea,  colore  hoc  latera  versus  nonnullis  exemplis  retrorsum 

producto  ;  pube  brevi  suberecta  sat  dense  vestitus  ;  prothorace 

subtilissime    vix    perspicue    punctulato,   antice   sat    fortiter 

angustato,   latitudine   longitudini   sequali,   lateribus  fortiter 

rotundatis  pone  medium   subsinuatis  a  basi  ultra   medium 

subtiliter  marginatis  ;    elytris  quam  prothorax  baud  vel  vix 

latioribus,  minus  fortiter  punctulato-striatis,  interstitiis  vix 

convexis  obscure  punctulatis  ;    unguiculis  intus  late  obtuse 

dentatis ;  antennis  (<J)  prothoracis  basin  longe  superantibus 

vel  (9)  nmlto  brevioribus.  [Long.  2^,  lat.  t  line  (vix). 

It  may  be  observed  that  it  is  just  possible  this  may  be  a  form 

of  C.  elisus,  Cand.,  witli  an  extreme  development  of  the  humeral 

red  colour.     But  if  so  it  is  desirable  that  it  should  be  described, 

and  it  certainly  seems  to  deserve  a  distinctive  name  even  as  a  var. 

I  have  seen  nothing  at  all  intermediate  between  the  two  forms. 

Victoria;    under  bark  of  Eucalyptus  in  the  Alpine  district; 
also  in  S.  Australia. 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  517 

MAL.\CODERMID^: 

Helodes. 

The  following  species  have  quite  the  facies  of  the  European 
species  of  this  genus,  but  they  present  certain  structural  peculi- 
arities, some  in  the  prominence  of  the  mandibles  and  all  in  the 
development  of  the  apical  spines  of  the  tibise.  In  the  first  of  the 
species  described  below  these  characters  are  notable  enough  to 
suggest  the  idea  of  generic  distinctness,  but  in  the  succeeding 
species  they  so  gradually  become  less  marked  successively  that  I 
think  I  may  venture  to  include  them  all  in  Helodes  without  much 
fear  of  misleading.  It  is  possible  that  some  of  the  small  species 
have  the  labial  palpi  of  Cyphon.  Unfortunately  most  of  the 
examples  before  me  have  their  heads  tucked  in  so  that  the  labial 
palpi  cannot  be  seen,  and  there  are  only  one  or  two  of  which  I 
can  spare  a  specimen  to  be  broken.  H.  Olliffi  has  certainly  the 
labial  palpi  of  a  true  Helodes.  In  //.  cinctus,  though  I  cannot  be 
quite  certain,  the  apical  joint  appears  to  be  at  right  angles  with 
the  penultimate  and  to  be  inserted  close  to  the  apex  of  the  latter. 
In  the  species  which  I  have  called  "  Cyphon  ? "  there  is  a  distinct 
apical  spine  to  the  tibiae,  though  in  some  it  is  very  small  and 
needs  to  be  looked  for. 

Helodes  princeps,  sp.nov. 

Sat  late  oblongus  ;  sat  convexus  ;  nitidus  ;  supra  glaber,  subtus 
dense  breviter  pubescens ;  supra  niger,  corpore  subtus  ore 
antennis  pedibus  capite  postice  prothoracisque  marginibus 
rufescentibus ;  capite  prothoraceque  subtilius  vix  crebre 
punctulatis  ;  hoc  quam  longiori  plus  quam  duplo  latiori, 
angulis  posticis  rectis ;  elytris  nullo  modo  carinatis,  sparsuu 
insequaliter  punctulatis,  puncfeuris  magnitudine  diversis  ; 
antennis  quam  corporis  diinidium  vix  brevioribus,  articulis 
2°  3°  que  conjunctis  quam  4US.  brevioribus. 

[Long.  4,  lat.  21  lines. 

This  remarkable  insect  has  entirely  the  general  appearance  of 
a  very  large  robust  Helodes.     Its  mandibles,  however,  are  scarcely 


518  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

less  developed  than  those  of  Dascillus  and  the  apical  spines  of  its 
tibice  (though  not  large)  are  quite  well-defined.  The  apical  joint 
of  its  maxillary  palpi  is  shorter  and  considerably  less  stout  than 
the  preceding  joint.  It  departs  from  Helodes  also  in  its  glabrous 
upper  surface ;  I  do  not  think  the  example  before  me  is  abraded. 
The  small  diamond-shaped  piece  behind  the  middle  of  the 
metasternum  and  between  the  bases  of  the  hind  coxae  (which  is 
noticeable  in  most  if  not  all  of  the  Dascillidcv,  and  which  I  take 
to  be  the  scutum  of  the  metathorax)  is  extremely  conspicuous  in 
this  species. 

Victoria  ;  Alpine  district. 

Helodes  cinctus,  sp.nov. 

Sat  late  oblongus  ;  sat  convexus  ;  sat  nitidus ;  crebre  breviter 

fulvo-sericeo-pubescens;  rufus,  prothorace  posticeet  elytrorum 

singulorum  disco  toto  infuscatis  ;  capite  prothoraceque  crebre 

subtiliter  punctulatis ;   hoc  quam  longiori  plus  quam  duplo 

latiori,   angulis  posticis   subrectis ;    elytris   leviter   distincte 

3-costatis,  sat  fortiter  sat  crebre  punctulatis  ;   antennis  quam 

corporis  dimidium  manifeste  brevioribus,  articulis  2°  3°  que 

conjunctis  quam  4US  brevioribus.  [Long.  3,  lat.  1±  lines. 

Structurally  very  similar  to  the  preceding  but  with  the  apical 

spines  of  the  tibise  less  developed  though  quite  distinct.     In  the 

example  before  me  the  infuscation  of  each  elytron  leaves  only  all 

the  margins  narrowly  red.      The  puncturation  of  the  elytra  is 

about  as  strong  but  not  nearly  so  close  as  in  the  European  H. 

minutus,  Linn.  ;    it  becomes  finer  and  feebler  towards  the  apex  ; 

there  are  no  transverse  wrinkles. 

Victoria  ;  Alpine  district. 

Helodes  olliffi,  sp.nov. 

Oblongus  ;  sat  parallelus  ;  depressus  ;  pubescens  ;  obscure 
fuscus,  antennarum  basi  tibiis  tarsisque  paullo  dilutioribus  ; 
capite  subtiliter,  prothorace  subtilissime,  crebre  punctulatis ; 
hoc  fere  semicirculari  basi  bisinuato ;  elytris  crebre  minus 
subtiliter  punctulatis,  lineis  3  elevatis  obsoletis  instructis  ; 


BY    THE    REV.  T.   BLACKBURN.  519 

antennis  maris  corporis  dimidio  longitudine  sequali,  feminae 
paullo  brevioribus,  articulo  2°  parvo,  3°  quam  4US  baud 
breviori. 
Maris  segmento  ventrali  penultimo  profunde  rotundatim  emar- 
ginato,  incisura  dense  hirta  ;  segmento  apicali  late  longi- 
tudinaliter  concavo.  [Long.  3,  lat.  l'i  lines  (vix). 

Not  unlike  the  European  //.  miniUus,  L.,  in  build,  but  of  much 
darker  colour,  evidently  more  depressed,  and  of  more  fragile 
appearance  ;  the  prothorax  is  of  similar  shape  but  very  much 
more  finely  punctured  ;  the  puncturation  of  the  elytra  also  is 
finer.  The  structural  characters  seem  to  be  quite  as  in  H.  cinctus 
(apart  from  the  slight  difference  in  the  labial  palpi  alluded  to 
above);  than  which  the  present  species  is  narrower  and  more 
finely  punctured. 

S.  Australia  and  Victoria. 

Helodes  montivagans,  sp.nov. 

Oblongus ;  sat  parallelus  ;  depressus ;  pubescens ;  niger,  capite 
(hoc  postice  infuscato)  prothorace  (hoc  antice  transversim 
inf  uscato)  scutello  antennarum  basi  pedibusque  testaceis ; 
capite  crebre  subtiliter  punctulato ;  prothorace  fere  semi- 
circulari  basi  bisinuato,  fere  leevi  ;  elytris  sat  fortiter  minus 
crebre  punctulatis,  lineis  3  elevatis  vix  notatis ;  antennarum 
articulis  2°  3°que  conjunctis  4°  subaBqualibus. 

[Long.  1£,  lat.  i  line. 

This  species  is  (apart  from  its  distinct  colouring)  notable  for  its 
almost  levigate  prothorax  in  combination  with  strongly  punctured 
elytra.  I  have  not  been  able  to  examine  the  labial  palpi,  but  I 
have  little  doubt  they  are  like  those- of  H.  Olliffi,  with  which  the 
present  insect  agrees  in  other  structural  characters.  The  elytra 
are  much  less  closely  punctured  than  those  of  the  European  H. 
■niinutus  ;  their  puncturation  is  not  at  all  rugulose  and  is  without 
transverse  wrinkles. 

Victoria ;  Alpine  district. 


520  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

Helodes  (Cyphon?)  pictus,  sp.nov. 
Ovalis  ;  sat  convexus;  pubescens;  obscure  rufus,  capite  postice 
prothoracis  disco  et  elytrorum  fasciis  2  apiceque  nigris, 
antenuis  apicem  versus  corpore  subtus  femoribusque  infus- 
catis  j  capite  prothoraceque  obscure  minus  crebre  punctulatis ; 
hoc  perbrevi,  valde  trans  verso,  angulis  posticis  obtusis ; 
elytris  minus  subtiliter  sat  crebre  punctulatis,  puncturis 
apicem  versus  gradatim  subtilioribus ;  antennarum  articulis 
2°  3°que  conjunctis  (hoc  quam  ille  multo  minore)  4°  paullo 
brevioribus.  |_Long'  !»  lat-  5 line- 

The  colour  of  the  elytra  is  quite  a  bright  red ;  the  black  fasciae 
are  quite  conspicuous  though  not  very  sharply  denned ;  the 
anterior  fascia  is  a  little  behind  the  base,  which  it  reaches  on  the 
suture,  the  posterior  is  slightly  behind  the  middle.  The  punc- 
turation  of  the  elytra  is  almost  exactly  as  in  //.  Olliffi  ;  there  is 
no  trace  of  costee  or  elevated  lines. 
Victoria ;  Alpine  district. 

Helodes  (Cyphon?)  ovensensis,  sp.nov. 
Oblongus  ;  minus  convexus  ;  pubescens  ;  niger,  antennarum  basi 
prothorace  elytris  pedibusque  brunneo-testaceis  ;  capite  pro- 
thoraceque crebre  subtilius  punctulatis ;  hoc  brevi  fortiter 
transverso  angulis  posticis  obtusis  ;  elytris  minus  subtiliter 
sat  crebre  punctulatis,  puncturis  apicem  versus  paullo  subti- 
lioribus ;  antennarum  articulis  2°  3°  que  inter  se  longitudine 
sequalibus  (hoc  quam  ille  graciliori)  conjunctis  quam  4US  paullo 
longioribus.  [Long.  1§,  lat.  g  line  (vix). 

This  species   resembles  //.  pieties  in   puncturation,  but  differs 
(apart  from  colour)  in  its  much  narrower  and  more  parallel  form 
and  in  the  relative  length  of  the  2nd,  3rd,  and  4th  antennal  joints. 
Victoria  ;  obtained  by  sweeping  on  the  banks  of  the  Ovens. 

Helodes  (Cyphon'?)  frater,  sp.nov. 

Ovalis  ;  sat  convexus  ;  pubescens  ;  niger,  antennarum  basi 
prothorace  (hoc  maculatim  infuscato)  elytris  (his  piceo- 
umbratis)  pedibusque  testaceis  vel  brunneo-testaceis  ;  capite 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  521 

prothoraceque  confertira  subtiliter  punctulatis ;  hoc  brevi 
transverso,  angulis  posticis  subrotundatis  ;  elytris  sat  crebre 
sat  subtiliter  punctulatis  ;  antennarum  articulo  3°  quam  4US 
baud  niulto  breviori,  2°  quaui  ille  parum  breviori. 

[Long.  1-J  (vix),  lat.  ^  line. 
In  the  example  before  me  the  suture,  the  region  of  the  scutellum, 
and  the  apex  are  the  infuscate  parts  of  the  elytra.  This  species 
resembles  H.  pictus  in  build,  but  is  even  more  rounded  at  the 
sides  and  is  much  more  finely  punctulate  than  either  of  the  last 
preceding  two  species.  The  elytra  are  punctured  much  like  those 
of  the  European  Cyphon  variabilis,  Thorns. 

Victoria ;  also  by  sweeping  on  the  banks  of  the  Ovens. 

Helodes  (Cyphon  1)  Adelaide,  sp.nov. 
Oblongus  ;  modice  convexus  ;  pubescens  ;  piceo-brunneus  vel 
sordide  testaceus,  antennarum  basi  pedibusque  dilutioribus  ; 
capite  crebre,  prothorace  minus  crebre,  subtiliter  punctulatis; 
hoc  perbrevi  valde  transverso,  angulis  posticis  obtusis  ;  elytris 
crebre  subtilius  punctulatis ;  antennarum  articulis  2°  3°  que 
conjunctis  (hoc  quam  ille  multo  minore)  4°  vix  brevioribus. 

[Long.  1§,  lat.  t7q  line. 
The  antennae  resemble  those  of  H.  pictus,  from  which  species 
its  more  elongate  build,  uniform  drab  or  piceous  colouring,  and 
finer  puncturation  will  at  once  distinguish  the  present  insect. 
The  elytra  are  punctured  about  as  strongly  as,  but  a  trifle  less 
closely  than,  those  of  the  European  Cyphon  pallidulus,  Boh. 
S.  Australia  ;  near  Adelaide. 

Helodes  (Cyphon?)  spilotus,  sp.nov. 
Subparallelus  ;  sat  convexus  ;  pubescens  ;  brunneo-testaceus, 
palpis  antennisque  (basi  excepta)  nigricantibus,  elytris  postice 
nigro-maculatis  ;  capite  prothoraceque  crebre  subtiliter  punc- 
tulatis ;  hoc  sat  transverso  minus  brevi,  angulis  posticis 
rotundato-obtusis ;  elytris  crebre  sat  fortiter  subrugulose 
punctulatis  ;  antennarum  articulis  2°  3°  que  conjunctis  (hoc 
quam  illo  minore)  4°  longitudine  asqualibus. 

[Long.  1?,  lat.  |  line. 


522  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

A  more  cylindric  species  than  any  of  the  preceding,  distin- 
guished also  by  the  rough  puncturation  of  its  elytra,  which  also 
are  transversely  wrinkled.  In  the  example  before  me  there  are 
four  very  conspicuous  black  splashes  on  the  hinder  half  of  each 
elytron.  Compared  with  the  elytra  of  the  European  Cyphon 
pallididus,  Boh.,  those  of  the  present  species  are  distinctly  more 
closely  and  roughly  punctured. 

S.  Australia ;  near  Port  Lincoln. 

Helodes  (Cyphon?)  lindensis,  sp.nov. 
Ovalis  ;  minus  convexus ;  pubescens  ;  nigro-piceus,  supra  ferru- 
gineus  vel  brunneo-testaceus  (elytrorum  fascia  mediana 
infuscata  excepta),  antennis  (his  apicem  versus  infuscatis) 
pedibusque  testaceis ;  capite  prothoraceque  snbtiliter  sat 
crebre  punctulatis  ;  hoc  brevi  fortiter  transverso  angulis 
posticis  subrectis ;  elytris  subtiliter  minus  crebre  punctulatis ; 
antetmarum  articulis  2°  3°  que  (hoc  quam  ille  graciliori  vix 
breviori)  conjunctis  4°  longitudine  sat  aequalibus. 

[Long,  li,  lat.  1  line. 

This  species  is  certainly  near  to  H.  Adelaide,  but  is  larger,  less 

elongate  and   slender,  and  differently  coloured ;  its  elytra  are  a 

little  less  closely  punctured,  and  the  3rd  antennal  joint  is  larger 

in  proportion  to  the  2nd  and  4th  joints. 

S.  Australia ;  near  Port  Lincoln. 

Sclerocyphon,  gen.  no  v. 

Caput  breve,  labro  parvo ;  oculi  sat  rotundati,  prothorace  late 
obtecti ;  antennae  quam  caput  prothoraxque  conjuncta  haud 
multo  longiores,  articulo  1°  modice  elongato,  2°  parvo,  3°-7° 
compressis  triangularibus,  8°-ll°nliformibus;  scutellum  mag- 
num ;  prosternum  retrorsum  fortiter  anguste  productum ; 
mesosternum  sat  planum,  antice  ad  processus  prosternalis 
receptionem  profunde  triangulariter  excisum ;  tibiae  apice 
leviter  spinosae ;  tarsi  quam  tibiae  fere  longiores,  articulis  1-4 
ex  ordine  minus  elongatis  minus  validis,  apicali  praecedenti- 
bus  3  conjunctis  longitudine  subaoquali ;  unguiculis  intus 
leviter  dentatis  ;  corpus  breviter  ovale,  robustum. 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN. 


523 


The  little  insect  for  which  I  propose  this  name  cannot  I  think 
be  referred  to  any  previously  described  genus.  It  has  very  much 
the  facies  of  Cyphon,  but  differs  by  its  much  harder  teguments 
and  the  structure  of  its  sterna.  In  both  these  characters  it  seems 
to  agree  with  the  South  American  genus  Artematopus,  but  in  that 
the  antennae  are  said  to  be  very  long  and  the  tarsi  lamellated,  the 
basal  joint  of  the  latter  being  "  as  long  as  the  three  following." 

I  have  little  doubt  but  that  the  example  before  me  is  a  male. 
The  dilatation  of  the  intermediate  joints  of  the  antennae  is 
certainly  suggestive  of  that  sex  as  also  is  the  structure  of  the 
hind  body,  the  antepenultimate  ventral  segment  bearing  a 
strong  carina  down  its  middle.  The  apical  ventral  segment  is 
somewhat  evenly  rounded  behind.  From  the  apical  orifice  of  the 
hind  body  two  longish  filaments  protrude.  The  piece  of  the 
undersurface  which  I  have  referred  to  above  (vide  Eelodes 
princeps)  as  being  probably  the  scutum  of  the  metathorax  is 
extremely  wide  in  the  present  species,  being  fully  as  wide  as  a 
quarter  of  the  whole  distance  across  the  undersurface. 

I  am  sorry  that,  having  only  a  single  example,  I  have  been 
unable  to  examine  any  but  the  external  characters  of  this  insect. 


SCLEROCYPHON    MACULATUS,  Sp.nOV. 

Brunneo-testaceus,  nigro-maculatus  ;  pubescens  ;  creberrime 
subtilissime  punctulatus;  elytris  obsolete  striatis,  obscure 
trans versim  rugatis.  [Long.  1|,  lat.  1J  lines. 

On  the  head  the  dark  markings  consist  of  some  vague  shading 
and  also  two  spots  on  the  vertex ;  on  the  prothorax  of  some  ill- 
defined  spots  on  the  disc  not  extending  to  the  middle  or  the 
vicinity  of  the  lateral  margin,  on  the  elytra  of  a  number  of 
blotches  ;  on  the  underside  these  occupy  nearly  the  whole  surface 
except  the  hind  body,  on  which,  however,  there  are  some  dark 
spots,  the  femora  are  nearly  black,  the  base  of  the  tibiae  being 
also  marked  with  dark  colouring.  The  apical  spine  of  the  tibiae  is 
extremely  feeble,  on  the  anterior  four  legs  nearly  wanting.  The 
dilated  joints  of  the  antennae  are  darker  in  colour  than  the  rest. 

Victoria;  Alpine  district. 


524  NOTES    ON    AUSTRALIAN    COLEOPTERA, 

SCIRTES    HELMSI,  Sp.llOV. 

Oblongo-ovalis  ;  sat  depressus  ;  sat  nitidus  ;  fuscus,  antennarum 
basi,  pectore,  tibiis  tarsisquedilutioribus;  pubescens,  subtiliter 
crebre  punctulatus.  [Long.  2,  lat.  l\  lines. 

Compared  with  the  European  S.  hemisphcericus  this  species  is 
larger  and  much  narrower  and  more  elongate,  with  very  similar 
colouring,  pubescence  and  puncturation. 

Victoria  ;  taken  near  Benalla  by  Mr.  Helms. 

Metriorhynchus  gigas,  sp.nov. 

Ater,  elytris  runs  ;  prothorace  transverso,  7-areolato  ;  elytrorum 
sutura  margine  laterali  lineisque  4  discoidalibus  costatis, 
intervallis  biseriatim  cancellato-punctulatis ;  rostro  quam 
prothorax  vix  breviori. 

Maris  antennis  valde  flabellatis,  flabellis  basalibus  externe 
serratis,  articulo  ultimo  perlongo. 

Feminse  antennis  sat  fortiter  serratis,  articulo  ultimo  quam 
maris  paullo  breviori.  [Long.  7-9,  lat.  2-3  lines. 

This  magnificent  species  is  nearly  allied  to  M.  rujipennis,  Fab., 
and  M.  erythropterus,  Er.,  but  is  at  once  distinguished  by  its 
great  size.  As  I  am  not  certain  about  the  correctness  of  my 
identification  of  M.  rujipennis  I  will  say  no  more  of  it  than  that 
it  is  a  very  much  smaller  insect.  Compared  with  M.  erythropterus, 
Er.,  the  present  species  differs  chiefly  (apart  from  size)  by  its 
more  slender  and  elongate  rostrum  and  the  remarkable  antennae 
of  the  male,  the  length  of  the  joints  of  which  (measured  from  the 
base  of  the  external  margin  to  the  apex  of  the  flabellum)  is 
scarcely  less  than  the  length  of  the  prothorax  and  is  more  than 
^  of  an  inch ;  the  apical  joint  is  twice  as  long  as  the  external 
margin  of  the  penultimate  joint ;  the  internal  margin  (supposing 
the  antennae  directed  forward)  of  the  flabella  is  cut  into  about 
four  well  marked  teeth.  Mr.  Waterhouse's  figure  of  the  antennae 
of  M.  rujipennis  in  his  monograph  of  Metriorhynchus  (Tr.  Ent. 
Soc.  Lond.,  1877,  PI.  I.  fig.  7)  represents  it  as  much  less  strongly 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  525 

flabellate,  the  flabella  having   simple   margins  as   usual  in  the 
species  of  this  genus. 

W.  Australia  ;  taken  by  Mr.  Meyrick. 

Metriorhynchus  semicostatus,  sp.nov. 

Ater,  elytris  rufis ;  rostro  brevi ;  prothorace  parum  trans  verso 
inaequali,  disco  areola  lanceolata  instructo ;  elytrorum  sutura 
margine  laterali  lineis  3  discoidalibus  lineaque  abbreviata 
prope  scutellum  fortiter  costatis,  intervallis  biseriatim  can- 
cellato-punctulatis ;  rostro  brevi. 

Maris  antennis  valde  compressis,  articulis  intus  apice  minus 
productis.  [JLong.  5^,  lat.  1-J  lines. 

In  most  species  of  this  genus  there  are  four  costae  (besides  the 
margins)  on  each  elytron ;  in  the  present  species  the  costa  next 
after  the  suture  becomes  obsolete  a  little  behind  the  level  of  the 
apex  of  the  scutellum  continuing  hindward  as  merely  one  of  the 
fine  lines  that  intersect  the  pairs  of  rows  of  punctures.  Between 
the  abbreviated  costa  and  the  suture  on  one  side  and  between  it 
and  the  next  discal  costa  on  the  other  side  are  two  rows  of  punc- 
tures, but  when  the  abbreviated  costa  ends  each  of  these  pairs  of 
rows  of  punctures  changes  into  a  single  row,  and  in  consequence 
of  this  sculpture  the  first  (i.e.,  nearest  to  the  suture)  of  the  entire 
cost?e  is  considerably  deflected  outward  in  its  front  part. 

Only  one  species  of  Metriorhynchus  having  only  the  central 
areolet  of  the  prothorax  well  defined  has  been  previously  described  ; 
it  (M.  inquimdum,  Waterh.)  has  quadri-costate  elytra,  which 
moreover  are  black  with  ferruginous  margins.  The  present  species 
is  coloured  as  M.  erythrojpterus,  Er.  Its  antennae  are  like  those  of 
M.  clientulus,  Waterh.,  (Tr.  Ent.  Soc.  Lond.,  1877,  PI.  il,  fig.  79). 
The  penultimate  ventral  segment  in  the  male  is  semicircularly 
excised.  All  my  examples  are  males ;  they  do  not  vary.  The 
rostrum  is  scarcely  longer  than  the  first  joint  of  the  antennae. 

Victoria ;  Alpine  district. 


526  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

Metriorhynchus  monticola,  sp.nov. 

Ater,  prothoracis  lateribus  elytrisque  rufis,  his  antice  prope 
suturam  longitudinaliter  late  nigro-vittatis ;  prothorace  leviter 
transverso,  7-areolato ;  elytrorum  sutura  margine  laterali 
lineisque  4  discoidalibus  costatis,  intervallis  biseriatim  sat 
crasse  cancellato-punctulatis,  rostro  brevi. 

[Long.  44,  lat.  1?  lines. 

I  have  seen  only  a  female  example  of  this  species ;  its  antennae 
are  like  those  of  M.  lugubris,  Waterh.,  as  figured  Tr.  Ent.  Soc, 
Lond.,  1877,  PI.  11.,  fig.  70.  The  rostrum  is  of  the  length  of  the 
basal  joint  of  the  antennae.  The  intervals  of  the  costae  on  the 
elytra  are  punctured  exceptionally  coarsely  (decidedly  more 
coarsely  than  in  M.  erythropterus,  Er.)  and  here  and  there  the 
series  are  confused  by  two  of  the  punctures  coalescing ;  there 
are  no  distinct  lines  separating  one  row  of  punctures  from  another 
in  the  several  pairs  except  close  to  the  base.  The  black  vitta  in 
the  example  before  me  commences  on  the  base  of  each  elytron 
very  near  the  scutellum  ;  it  is  of  a  width  to  include  two  costse,  is 
of  even  width  (but  its  limits  are  not  very  sharply  defined)  and 
reaches  hind  ward  to  considerably  beyond  the  middle  of  the 
elytron. 

No  species  very  closely  resembling  this  has  been  described 
hitherto,  unless  it  be  Lycus  ochraceus,  Dalm.,  which  seems  to  be 
somewhat  similarly  coloured, — but  the  description  is  much  too 
brief  for  identification,  even  generically. 

Victoria  ;  Alpine  district. 

Metriorhynchus  occidentalis,  sp.nov. 

Ater,  elytris  (macula  magna  elongata  communi  ante  apicem  posita 
excepta)  aurantiacis;  prothorace  modice  transverso,  7- areolato ; 
elytrorum  sutura  margine  laterali  lineisque  4  discoidalibus 
costatis,  intervallis  biseriatim  cancellato-punctulatis  ;  rostro 
minus  brevi. 
Maris  antennis  fortiter  (quam  M.  erythropteri^  Er.,  magis 
fortiter)  pectinatis.  [Long.  5^,  lat.  \\  lines. 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  527 

The  black  elytral  spot  commences  on  the  suture  slightly  in  front 
of  the  middle  and  reaches  back  nearly  to  the  apex;  it  is  of  oblong- 
oval  shape  and  at  its  widest  touches  the  2nd  elytral  costa  on 
either  side.  The  rostrum  equals  in  length  about  three-quarters 
the  length  of  the  prothorax.  The  antenna?  are  like  those  figured 
(Trans.  Ent.  Soc,  1887,  PL  I.,  fig.  2)  by  Mr.  Waterhouse  as  per- 
taining to  M.  mjipennis,  Fab.,  their  branches  being  very  evidently 
longer  than  in  M.  erythropterus,  Er.  The  punctures  in  the  inter- 
costal series  on  the  elytra  are  about  as  strong  as  in  M.  erythropterus, 
but  are  less  transverse,  and  the  two  rows  of  each  pair  are  separated 
from  each  other  much  as  in  that  species.  Probably  this  insect 
resembles  M.  rujipennis,  Fab.,  but  differs  from  it  at  any  rate  in 
its  elytra  being  bi-colorous  ;  also  (if  Dr.  Erichson  identified  M. 
rujipennis  correctly)  in  its  prothorax  being  much  less  elongate. 

W.  Australia  ;  Eyre's  Sandy  Patch  ;  taken  by  Mr.  Graham. 

Metriorhynchus  l^tus,  sp.nov. 

Ater,  prothoracis  lateribus  et  elytrorum  singulorum  marginibus 
omnibus  (basali  prope  scutellum  excepto)  aurantiacis,  horum 
costis  hie  illic  aurantiaco-tinctis  ;  prothorace  vix  transverso, 
7-areolato ;  elytrorum  sutura  margine  laterali  lineisque  4 
discoidalibus  costatis,  intervallis  antice  obscure  biseriatim 
postice  confuse  cancellato-punctulatis. 
Maris  (exempli  typici)  rostro  brevi,  antennis  sa't  fortiter  (fere 

ut  M.  erythropteri  maris,  Er.)  pectinatis. 
Feminse  (exempli  typici)  rostro  multo  minus  brevi,  antennis 

fere  ut  M.  erythropteri  feniinse. 
The  orange  border  of  the  elytra  is  at  its  widest  at  the  apex 
(where  it  is  wirier  in  the  female  example  before  me  than  in  the 
male)  and  is  markedly  wider  at  the  lateral  margins  than  at  the 
suture  ;  in  the  male  before  me  the  elytral  costa?  are  scarcely 
splashed  with  orange  colour,  in  the  female  very  distinctly ; 
probably  these  colour  characters  are  variable.  The  rostrum  in  the 
male  is  scarcely  longer  than  the  3rd  joint  of  the  antenna?,  in  the 
female  it  is  nearly  as  long  as  the  3rd  and  4th  joints  together. 


528  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

The  punctures  in  the  intercostal  series  on  the  elytra  are  fairly 
well  denned  and  are  of  the  usual  form  (i.e.,  somewhat  quadrate 
enclosures  bounded  by  fine  carina?)  but  they  are  distinctly  biseriate 
in  arrangement  only  at  the  extreme  base  where  the  two  rows  of 
each  pair  are  separated  from  each  other  by  a  distinct  elevated 
line.  The  costa  next  the  suture  is  feebler  than  the  others  except 
near  the  base.  Near  M.  marginatus,  Er.,  but  differing  in 
prothorax  being  red  at  the  sides,  and  (if  I  have  correctly  identified 
M.  marginatus)  by  the  much  longer  branches  of  the  antennae  in 
the  male,  the  intercostal  sculpture  of  elytra  not  distinctly  biseriate, 
elytral  suture  orange-coloured,  &c. 

N.  S.  Wales  j  taken  by  Mr.  Sloane  near  Bulli. 

Calochromus. 

In  a  monograph  of  this  genus  by  Mr.  C.  0.  Waterhouse  (Cist. 
Ent.  ii.,  pp.  195,  &c.)  the  main  division  of  the  genus  is  founded  on 
the  structure  of  the  maxillary  palpi,  but  I  find  this  to  be  sexual, 
the  females  having  palpi  of  the  form  attributed  to  Mr.  Water- 
house's  first  section,  the  males  of  the  form  attributed  to  the  second 

section. 

Telephorus  victoriensis,  sp.nov. 

Niger,  mandibulis  prothoraceque  testaceis,  antennarum  basi 
pedibus  anticis  et  geniculis  omnibus  plus  minusve  rufescen- 
tibus  ;  capite  prothoraceque  sparsim  obscure  punctulatis  ;  hoc 
quam  longiori  dimidio  (antice  quam  postice  vix  perspicue) 
latiori,  lateribus  leviter  arcuatis  ;  elytris  fortiter  sat  crebre 
punctulatis ;  antennis  robustis. 
Maris    antennis   quam    corpus    paullo    brevioribus;    segmento 

ventrali  sexto  apice  profunde  arcuatim  emarginato. 

Femina  latet.  [Long.  2§,  lat.  %  line. 

Resembles  T.  pusio,  Geinm.,  and  T.  pauxillus,  Blackb.,  in  facies 

and  colouring,  but  at  once  distinguishable  from  both  inter  alia  by 

its  extremely  stout  antennae,  and  the  very  coarse  puncturation  of 

its  elytra. 

Victoria ;  on  flowers  in  the  Alpine  district. 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  529 

Telephorus  galeatus,  sp.nov. 

Niger,  mandibulis  antennarum  basi  prothorace  femoribus 
tibiisque  (anticis  totis,  ceteris  ex  parte)  testaceis ;  capite 
prothoraceque  sparsim  obscure  punctulatis ;  hoc  quarn  longiori 
fere  cluplo  latiori,  antice  posticeque  latitudine  sequali,  lateribus 
leviter  arcuatis  ;  elytris  crebre  minus  fortiter  punctulatis ; 
antennis  robustis. 

Maris  antennis  quam  corporis  dimidium  sat  longioiibus,  articuli 
101  apice  externa  antrorsum  producto,  articulo  apicali  difformi 
intus  retrorsuni  dentiformi ;  segmento  ventrali  sexto  apice 
profunde  arcuatim  eniarginato. 

Feminse  antennis  quam  corporis  dimidium  brevioribus,  articulis 
simplicibus ;  segmento  ventrali  sexto  haud  eniarginato. 

[Long.  2 1,  lat.  1  line  (vix). 

Very  much  like  the  preceding  in  general  appearance,  but  differ- 
ing inter  alia  by  its  shorter  antennae  (with  remarkable  sexual 
characters  in  the  apical  joints  of  the  male),  much  more  transverse 
prothorax  and  less  strongly  punctured  elytra.  The  apical  joint  of 
the  antennas  in  the  male  is  produced  backward  in  a  kind  of  tooth 
or  lobe  at  its  inner  hind  corner  (corresponding  to  a  somewhat 
similar  forward  projection  at  the  outer  front  corner  of  the  10th 
joint)  and  is  constricted  a  little  before  the  apex,  the  part  beyond 
the  constriction  being  somewhat  globular.  The  shape  of  the 
apical  joint  from  a  certain  point  of  view  bears  a  rough  resemblance 
to  that  of  a  helmet. 

Victoria ;  on  flowers  in  the  Alpine  district. 

Telephorus  fusicornis,  sp.nov. 

Niger,  capite  antennarum  basi  prothorace  femoribus  anticis  et 
tibiarum  anticarum  (late)  intermediarumque  (anguste)  basi 
rufotestaceis;  capite  prothoraceque  laevibus;  hoc  quam  longiori 
minus  quam  duplo  (antice  quam  postice  manifeste)  latiori, 
lateribus  leviter  arcuatis ;  elytris  fortiter  sat  crebre  punc- 
tulatis ;  antennis  robustis. 


530  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

Maris  antennis  quam  corporis  dimidium  vix  longioribus,  articulo 

9°  valde  dilatato  et  elongato,  segraento  6°  apice  profunde 

arcuatim  einarginato. 

Femina  latet.  [Long.  2,  lat.  J  line. 

Very   like    T.    Victoriensis,  but   with    the   head    and    base   of 

antenna?  testaceous-red,  and  the  sexual  characters  of  the  antennae 

quite  different. 

Victoria  ;  Upper  Yarra  River ;  sent  by  C.  French,  Esq. 

Telephorus  nobilitatus,  Er. 

The  acquisition  (through  the  courtesy  of  Mr.  J.  J.  Walker, 
R.N.)  of  a  specimen  taken  in  Tasmania  evidently  pertaining  to 
this  insect  enables  me  to  say  that  T.  vibex,  Black b.,  is  very  near 
to  it,  but  differs  from  it  considerably  in  colouring,  the  elytra  being 
violet  (not  blue-green)  ;  the  mesosternum  entirely,  and  the  meta- 
sternum  for  the  most  part,  being  yellow  (not  black)  ;  and  the 
stigmata  of  the  hind  body  not  being  black.  In  T.  vibex,  more- 
over, the  elytra  are  much  less  punctured  anteriorly  than  in  T, 
nobilitatus,  and  the  part  next  the  suture  on  either  side  in  its  front 
portion  is  strongly  convex  longitudinally,  this  convex  portion 
being  limited  externally  by  a  deep  longitudiual  sulcus.  I  have 
seen  specimens  of  T.  nobilitatus  also  from  S.  Australia  and  Vic- 
toria, and  a  specimen  in  my  collection,  said  to  be  from  Queensland, 
scarcely  differs  except  in  the  testaceous  colour  of  the  base  of  the 
femora.  The  males  of  T.  nobilitatus  have  the  hind  tibia3  arched 
somewhat  strongly. 

SlLIS    AUSTRALIS,  sp.nOV. 

Angusta,  sat  parallela ;  breviter  pubescens ;  minus  nitida ; 
obscure  cyanea,  capite  antice  prothoraceque  testaceis,  tibiarum 
anticarum  et  antennarum  articulorum  basalium  basi  rufes- 
centi ;  capite  antice  sat  producto,  crebre  fortius  punctulato  ; 
prothorace  cordato,  quam  latiori  vix  longiori,  ut  caput  punctu- 
lato, lateribus  subtus  appendiculatis;  elytris  fere  ut  prothorax, 
sed  paullo  magis  crebre,  punctulatis ;  antennis  quam  corporis 
partes  duae  vix  longioribus.  [Long  3,  lat.  t  line. 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  531 

The  downward-directed  appendage  of  the  sides  of  the  prothorax 
is  no  doubt  characteristic  of  the  male.  This  insect  seems  to  be  a 
genuine  Silis,  the  only  abnormal  character  I  notice  consisting  in 
the  head  being  somewhat  strongly  and  narrowly  produced  in  front 
of  the  antennae. 

S.  Australia. 

Laius  femoralis,  sp.nov. 

Niger,  prothorace  elytrorum  fascia  lata  mediana  (hac  ad  suturam 
et  ad  margines  late  rales  dilatata)  abdomineque  (hujus  seg- 
mento  apicali  et  segmentorum  ceterum  maculis  lateralibus 
exceptis)  rufo-testaceis;  pilis  erectis  elongatis  vestitus;  capite 
prothoraceque  vix  perspicue  punctulatis  ;  hoc  quam  longiori 
dimidio  latiori,  latitucline  majori  ante  medium  posita,  lateri- 
bus  valde  rotunclatis;  elytris  in  parte  rufotestacea  crebre 
fortiter  rugulose,  in  parte  nigra  antica  sat  fortiter  sat  rugo- 
lose,  in  parte  nigra  postica  parum  perspicue,  punctulatis. 
Maris  antennarum  articulo  1°  brunneo-testaceo  apice  extus 
fortiter  dilatato,  2°  supra  brunneo-testaceo  quadratim  valde 
dilatato  supra  concavo  subtus  convexo,  femoribus  anticis 
supra  in  medio  valde  triangulariter  excisis. 

[Long.  2,  lat.  f  line. 

The  width  of  the  elytral  fascia  on  the  suture  arid  on  the  lateral 

margins  is  not  much  less  than  half  the  length  of  the  elytra ; 

between  the  suture  and  lateral  margin  on  either  side  the  fascia 

is  strongly  and  arcuately  emarginate  both  in  front  and  behind. 

This  species  is  near  L.  (Apalochrus)  cinctus,  Redtb.,  but  with 
the  dark  part  of  the  elytra  scarcely  cyaneous.  It  differs  from  L. 
cinctus  (if  I  have  identified  it  correctly)  also  by  the  shape  of  the 
prothorax,  which  is  at  its  widest  very  near  the  front  and  from 
that  point  is  narrowed  arcuately  but  very  strongly  hindward.  I 
have  not  seen  a  male  of  the  species  that  I  take  to  be  L.  cinctus. 

S.  Australia. 

Laius  eyrensis,  sp.nov. 

Setis  erectis  vestitus ;    subtus  piceus,  capite  nigro,  prothorace 

elytrisque    testaceo-rufis,   his   fascia   lata   basali   et   macula 
35 


532  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

magna  subapicali  cyaneis,  antennis  piceis  basi  runs,  pedibus 
testaceo-brunneis  ;  capite  prothoraceque  obscure  punctulatis  ; 
hoc  minus  transverso,  ante  basin  prof  unde  transversim  sulcato, 
lateribus  in  medio  subangulatis  post  medium  sinuatis  prope 
basin  parallelis,  angulis  posticis  rectis ;  elytris  antice  crebre 
fortiter  rugulose  postice  sparsius  minus  fortiter,  punctulatis. 

Maris  antennarum  articulo  2°  ad  apicem  externum  in  processu 
elongato  recur vo  producto  ;  abdouiinis  apice  dorsali  valde 
bifido. 

Feminpe  antennis  segmentoque  dorsali  apicali  simplicibus. 

[Long.  \\,  lat.  |  line. 

Probably  near  L.  7'ufovirens,  Fairm.,  but  differing  in  the  shape 
of  the  prothorax,  the  ventral  segments  not  red,  &c,  &c. ;  also 
probably  in  sexual  characters  (which  M.  Fairmaire  does  not  refer 
to). 

S.  Australia ;  basin  of  Lake  Eyre. 

Laius  pretiosus,  sp.nov. 

Subopacus ;  haud  setosus ;  subtus  obscurus,  capite  nigro,  pro- 
thorace  elytrisque  runs,  illo  medio  infuscato  his  singulis  vitta 
lata  irregulari  cyanea  ornatis,  antennis  pedibusque  testaceis, 
femoribus  posticis  infuscatis ;  capite  crebre,  prothorace  spar- 
sius, distincte  punctulatis ;  hoc  fortiter  transverso,  lateribus 
rotundatis  postice  subexplanatis  ;  elytris  subcoriaceis  minus 
distincte  punctulatis. 

Mas  latet.  [Long.  1^,  lat.  I  line. 

The  cyaneous  vittae  occupy  the  greater  part  of  the  surface  of 
the  elytra  and  meet  at  the  extreme  base  and  also  near  the  apex. 
If  they  be  regarded  as  forming  the  ground  colour,  there  then 
appears  a  large  common  diamond-shaped  red  spot  on  and  around 
the  suture,  extending  from  a  little  behind  the  suture  to  the 
middle,  a  triangular  red  spot  on  each  side  with  its  base  on  the 
lateral  margin  and  an  apical  red  spot. 


BY    THE    REV.  T.   BLACKBURN.  533 

I  have  not  seen  a  male  of  this  species,  but  it  is  so  perfectly 
distinct  from  all  previously  described  of  the  genus  that  I  have  no 
hesitation  in  describing  it. 

S.  Australia  ;  basin  of  Lake  Eyre. 

TENEBRIONID^E. 

Blepegenes  nitidus,  sp.nov. 

Obscure  seneus,  sat  nitidus,  pedibus  nigro-piceis   (tibiis  apice 

tarsisque  rufescentibus  exceptis),  antennis  basi  piceis  apicem 

versus    rufescentibus ;    vix    manifeste   punctulatus  ;    capite 

haud   spinoso,   fronte   retrorsum   in   spatio  depresso  postice 

bifido  leviter  elevata  ;  collo  et  mesothoracis  scuto  granulatis  ; 

prothorace  antice  in  medio  sat  anguste  emarginato,  lateribus 

in  medio  sat  fortiter  (et  postice  minus  fortiter)  rotundato- 

dilatato ;      elytris     fortiter     striatis,     interstitiis     omnibus 

manifeste  (alternis  magis  fortiter)  costatis,  costis  ante  apicem 

obsoletis.  [Long.  9£,  lat.  3?  lines. 

Differs  from  B.  aruspex,  Pasc,  in  the  head  not  spinose,  in  the 

forehead   being  gradually  and  widely  elevated  hindward  into  a 

kind  of  flattened  tubercle,  in  the  prothorax  being  emarginate  in 

the   middle    of    its   front   margin    and   having .  merely    rounded 

dilatations  in  the  places  where  that  of  aruspex  is  spined,  and  in 

the   elytra   having   all    the   interstices   of    the   strise   nitid  and 

costiform, — the  alternate  interstices  being  not  much  more  costate 

than  the  rest.     B.  equestris,  Pasc,  is  a  larger  insect  with  the 

elytral  interstices  costate  only  at  the  sides. 

Queensland ;  in  the  collection  of  C.  French,  Esq. 

D^edrosis  victoria,  sp.nov. 

Angusta  ;  convexa  ;  nitida ;  atra,  vix  aeneo-micans,  antennis 
palpis  pedibusque  rufis  ;  capite  in  figura  pentagonali  depresso, 
crasse  subcrebre  vix  rugulose  punctulato  ;  prothorace  quani 
longiori  vix  (antice  quam  postice  paullo)  latiori,  antice 
truncato  haud  canaliculato,  fortiter  sat  crebre  punctulato,  in 
medio  anguste  longitudinaliter  lsevi,  lateribus  modice  arcuatis 


53 1  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

vix  crenulatis  latitudine  majori  ante  medium  posita,  basi 
late  leviter  triangulariter  concavo,  angulis  posticis  obtusis  ; 
mesothoracis  scuto  crebre  sat  fortiter  punctulato,  scutello 
laevi ;  elytris  antrorsum  in  medio  fortiter  productis,  modice 
punctulato-striatis,  interstitiis  fere  planatis  fere  ut  striae 
punctulatis  ;  autennis  probhoracis  basin  attingentibus,  apicem 
versus  sat  fortiter  incrassatis. 

£.  Abdomine   antice   longitudinaliter  concavo,  parte  concava 
leviter  strigosa.  [Long.  4,  lat.  l\  lines. 

Distinguished    from    its    described    allies   inter    alia    by    its 
testaceous-red  antennae  and  legs. 

Victoria  ;  in  the  Alpine  district. 

Adelium  pustulosum,  sp.nov. 

Minus  nitidum  ;  supra  fusco-cupreum  vel  obscure  viride,  corpore 

subtus   pedibus   antennisque  nigro-viridibus,   his  extrorsum 

tarsisque    vix   picescentibus ;     capite    insequali    sat   fortiter 

punctulato ;    prothorace   quam  longiori  fere   duplo   (postice 

quam   antice  haud  multo)   latiori,  ruguloso,  sat  fortiter   vix 

crebre     punctulato,     antice     emarginato,    postice    truncato, 

lateribus  fortiter  rotundatis  sat  explanatis  mox  ante  basin 

rectis,  angulis  posticis  acute  rectis  ;  elytris  postice  acuminatis 

vix   striatis  seriatim    subtilius   punctulatis,   interstitiis  fere 

planis   pustulis   numerosis    nitidis    seriatim    instructis,   basi 

humerisque  sat  soqualiter  rotundatis,  lateribus  leviter  arcuatis ; 

antennis  sat  elongatis,  articulo  3°  sequentibus  2   conjunctis 

longitudine  a3quali.  [L°ng-  ^J-6,  ^a*-  %5~%l  lines. 

Owing  to  the  presence  of  a  depression  on  either  side  of  the 

middle  of    the   prothorax    close   to    the   base,  the   base   viewed 

obliquely  from  in  front  appears  bisinuate,  though  in  reality  it  is 

exactly  truncated.     The  row  of  conspicuous  shining  pustules  or 

small  round  tubercles  running  down  each  elytral  interstice  forms 

a  very  distinctive  character ;  these  pustules  in  some  examples  are 

almost  obsolete  in  the  front  part  of  the  interstices  near  the  suture. 


BY   THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  535 

The  lateral  outline  of  the  prothorax  in  this  species  is  almost 
exactly  as  in  A.  similatum,  Germ.,  but  is  a  little  more  dilate- 
rotundate  in  the  middle  ;  the  sculpture  of  the  same  segment  is  of 
the  same  kind  as  in  A.  similatum  but  less  coarse  ;  the  front  is 
considerably  more  strongly  and  evenly  emarginate.  The  antennae 
are  long  and  slender  as  in  A.  similatum,  but  with  the  3rd  joint  a 
little  less  elongate. 

Victoria  ;  on  the  higher  mountains. 

N.B. — I  have  seen  a  few  specimens  from  Victoria  of  an  insect 
which  I  take  to  be  that  M.  Blessig  (Hor.  Soc.  Ent.  Ross.  I.  p. 
100)  called  A.  similatum,  Germ.  This  Victorian  species  is 
extremely  close  to  similatum  (of  which  I  have  never  seen  a 
Victorian  example  really  agreeing  with  the  S.  Australian  type), 
but  differs  in  several  respects,  e.g.,  the  prothorax  wider  behind, 
considerably  more  strongly  explanate  laterally  and  altogether 
larger  in  proportion  to  the  elytra ;  it  is  possibly  only  a  local  form 
of  A.  similatum. 

Adelium  victoria,  sp.nov. 

Ut  A.   pustulosum  coloratura  ;    capite  ajquali   sparsius  minus 

fortiter   punctulato ;    prothorace  quam    longiori  plus   quam 

dimidio  (postice  quam  antice  haud  multo)  latiori,  vix  ruguloso, 

subtilius  parum  crebre  punctulato,  antice  emarginato,  postice 

truncato,  lateribus   sat  fortiter  rotundatis  haud  explanatis, 

ante  basin  vix  sinuatis,  angulis  posticis  late  obtusis ;  elytris 

fere  ut  A.  pustulosi  sed  basi  in  medio  antrorsum  rotundato- 

producta  ;  cetera  ut  A.  pustulosi.         [Long.  5^,  lat.  2g  lines. 

Extremely   like   A.    2mst,ul°sui}h    Du^    I    cannot    regard    the 

differences   as   non-specific.      The    hind  angles   of  the   prothorax 

extremely  obtuse  (though  not  rounded),  the  sides  of  the  prothorax 

scarcely  sinuate  before  the  hind  angles  and  the  front  of  the  elytra 

strongly  pushed  forward  in  the  middle  form  a  strong  combination 

of  characters.     There  is  a  similar  elytral  formation  in  the  very 

plentiful  species  which  I  take  to  be  A.  neophyta,  Pasc,  but  in  the 

preseut  insect  it  is  still  more  marked. 

Victoria  ;  in  the  collection  of  C.  French,  Esq. 


536  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

Adelium  inconspicuum,  sp.nov. 

Nitidum ;  seneuru,  antennis  (basi  excepta)  tarsisque  piceo- 
ferrugineis  ;  capite  subplanato  sat  fortiter  vix  crebre 
punctulato  ;  prothorace  quam  longiori  partibus  3  (postice 
quam  antice  vix)  latiori,  leviter  minus  subtiliter  minus  crebre 
punctulato,  antice  emarginato,  postice  truncato,  haud 
canaliculato,  lateribus  sat  sequaliter  rotundatis  haud  ex- 
planatis,  angulis  posticis  obtusis  ;  elytris  ovalibus  punctulato- 
striatis,  interstitiis  leviter  sat  crebre  parum  subtiliter 
punctulatis,  epipleuris  subfortiter  punctulatis,  basi  in  medio 
antrorsum  manifeste  rotundato-producta  ;  antennis  sat 
brevibus,  apicem  versus  leviter  incrassatis,  articulo  3° 
sequentibus  2  conjunctis  vix  aequali. 

[Long.  3J-4J,  lat.  lf-l|  lines. 
Very  near  the  common  species  which  I  believe  to  be  A.  neophyta, 
Pasc,  (and  which  must  be  a  close  ally  of  A.  brevicorne,  Blessig), 
but  smaller,  with  puncturation  much  less  fine  throughout  (though 
not  deep),  sides  of  prothorax  more  rounded,  epipleurse  of  elytra 
very  conspicuously  punctulate.  A.  brevicorne  is  inter  alia  des- 
cribed as  very  much  more  finely  punctulate  than  the  present 
insect  and  is  larger. 

Kangaroo  Island  ;  taken  by  Mr.  J.  G.  0.  Tepper. 

Adelium  alpicola  (?A.  calosomoides,  Kirby,  var.) 

Robustum  ;  nitidum;  minus  (^)  vel  valde  (Q)  convexum;  supra 
seneum  vel  viride  vel  viridi-nigrum  vel  aureo-viride,  antennis 
(basi  excepta)  tarsisque  rufis ;  capite  inaaquali  sat  fortiter 
minus  crebre  punctulato  ;  prothorace  quam  longiori  fere  duplo 
(postice  quam  antice  quarta  parte)  latiori,  leviter  canaliculato, 
paullo  ingequali  ut  caput  punctulato,  antice  arcuatim  emar- 
ginato, postice  truncato,  lateribus  fortiter  sequaliter  rotundatis 
late  explanatis,  angulis  posticis  obtusis ;  elytris  postice 
acuminatis,  sat  fortiter  punctulato-striatis,  interstitiis  plus 
minus  convexis  sparsim  subtiliter  punctulatis  alternis 
(praasertim  5°)  apicem  versus  subcarinatis,  humeris  rotundatim 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  537 

fere  subprominulis,  basi  media  vix  antrorsum  producto, 
lateribus  (prgesertim  feminse)  arcuatis  ;  an  tennis  filiformibus 
modice  elongatis,  articulo  3°  sequentibus  2  conjunctis  longi- 
tudine  sequali.  [Long.  7-J-— 8,  lat.  3-3 1  lines. 

I  do  not  feel  sure  that  this  large  and  handsome  insect  may  not 
be  an  extreme  Alpine  var.  of  A.  calosomoides,  Kirby.  According 
to  the  description  that  species  is  much  smaller  (long.  6  lines)  and 
the  antennae  and  tarsi  are  not  rufous  ;  in  other  respects  it  agrees 
fairly  with  the  somewhat  meagre  description.  I  do  not  think  it 
is  a  var.  of  the  species  which  I  have  previously  considered  to  be 
A.  calosomoides,  but  it  is  possible  I  may  have  been  mistaken  in 
my  identification,  and  I  do  not  think  any  insect  could  be  con- 
fidently identified  with  Kirby's  description  unless  the  original  type 
could  be  referred  to.  The  remarkable  variability  in  colour  and 
in  the  degree  of  convexity  of  the  elytral  interstices  is  in  keeping 
with  what  is  frequently  observed  in  species  occurring  on  high 
mountains. 
-Victoria;  under  Eucalyptus  bark  at  high  elevations  on  the  Alps. 

Adelium  tropicum,  sp.nov. 

Robustum  ;  sat  nitidum ;  sat  convexum ;  cseruleo-nigrum  ;  capite 
prothoraceque  (fere  ut  A.  auguralis,  Pasc),  crebre  fortiter 
vermiculato-rugulosis ;  hoc  quam  longiori  plus  quam  dimidio 
(postice  quam  antice  circiter  5a  parte)  latiori,  canaliculate, 
antice  emarginato  postice  truncato,  lateribus  sat  rotundatis 
crenulatis  modice  explanatis  mox  ante  basin  parallelis,  angulis 
posticis  rectis  nullo  modo  extrorsum  prominentibus,  elytris 
ovalibus  fortiter  costatis,  costis  prope  apicem  in  tuberculis 
fractis,  costarum  interstitiis  transversim  subtuberculatim 
seriatim  interrupts;  antennis  sat  crassis  minus  elongatis, 
articulo  3°  quam  4US  5US  que  conjuncti  multo  longioribus. 

[Long.  8,  lat.  3;i  lines. 
Allied  to  A.  porcatum,  Fab.,  and  A.  augurale,  Pasc,  but  differ- 
ing from  both  inter  alia  by  the  elytra  being  entirely  impunctate, 
the  only  approach  to  puncturation  consisting  of  the  quasi  impres- 
sions on  the  elytra  which  are  formed  in  the  intervals  between  the 


538  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

costse  by  those  intervals  being  blocked  here  and  there  at  irregular 
intervals  by  lateral  extensions  of  the  costie,  the  lateral  extensions 
in  some  aspects  having  a  more  or  less  tuberculiform  appearance ; 
near  the  apex  the  costae  themselves  become  broken  into  tubercles. 
N.  Territory  of  S.  Australia. 

Adelium  lindense,  sp.nov. 

Sat  nitidum  ;  leviter  (g)  fortiter  (Q)  convexum ;  aureo-seneum 
vel  nigro-cyaneum ;  subtus  obscurius,  pedibus  antennisque 
concoloribus;  capite  minus  crebre  punctulato  foveis  nonnullis 
profundis  impresso  ;  prothorace  quam  longiori  partibus  tribus 
(postice  quam  antice  haud  multo)  latiori,  leviter  minus  crebre 
punctulato  et  foveis  nonnullis  profundis  sat  magnis  impresso, 
antice  emarginato  postice  leviter  bisinuato,  lateribus  valde 
rotundatis  fortiter  explanatis,  marginibus  validis  crassis, 
angulis  posticis  obtusis  retrorsum  manifeste  productis  ;  elytris 
sat  parallelis  (g)  late  ovalibus  (9),  hand  striatis,  foveis  sat 
magnis  sat  rotundis  seriatim  irregulariter  instructis,  his 
pnncturis  multo  minoribus  longitudinaliter  conjunctis,  inter- 
stitiis  alternis  postice  subcarinatis,  epipleuris  obsolete  vix 
perspicue  punctulatis ;  antennis  filiformibus  modice  elongatis 
articulo  3°  quam  4US  5US  que  conjuncti  vix  longiori. 

[Long.  7^-8^,  lat.  3-3*  lines. 
A  large  handsome  species  resembling  A.  auratum,  Pasc,  but 
differing  from  it  inter  alia  in  the  less  emarginate  base  of  the 
prothorax,  and  in  the  elytral  sculpture, — consisting  of  rows  of 
unevenly  placed  round  foveee  which  are  connected  one  with 
another  longitudinally  by  series  of  much  finer  punctures.  The 
strongly  thickened  lateral  edges  of  the  prothorax  distinguish  the 
present  insect  from  most  of  its  congeners. 
S.A.;  Port  Lincoln  district. 

Adelium  angulatum,  sp.nov. 

Sat  nitidum  ;  modice  (g  1)  convexum  ;  nigro-seneum  ;  subtus 
nigrum,  antennis  pedibusque  concoloribus  ;  capite  sat  aequali 
leviter  sparsius  punctulato  ;   prothorace  quam  longiori  paullo 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  539 

plus  quam  dimidio  (postice  quam  antice  tertia  parte)  latiori 
sparsim  obsolete  punctulato  et  foveis  paucis  impresso,  antice 
sat  fortiter  (postice  leviter)  emarginato,  hexagonali,  lateribus 
minus  late  explanatis  mox  ante  basin  sinuatis,  marginibus 
validis  crassis,  angulis  posticis  subrectis  ;  elytris  fere  ut  A. 
Lindensis  sed  interstitiis  alternis  postice  vix  subcarinatis  ; 
antennis  ut  A.  Lindensis.  [Long.  6^-,  lat.  2~  lines. 

Remarkably  like  the  preceding  in  respect  of  its  elytral  sculpture, 
but  inter  alia  differing  from  it  (and  from  all  other  Adelia  known 
to  me)  by  the  singular  shape  of  its  prothorax,  each  side  of  which 
is  formed  by  two  nearly  straight  lines  meeting  in  a  scarcely 
rounded  angle  at  a  point  scarcely  behind  the  middle.  The  pro- 
thorax  is  much  less  transverse  than  in  A.  Lindense,  much  less 
explanate  laterally,  and  more  narrowed  in  front.  This  species  also 
bears  a  certain  resemblance  to  A.  cisteloides,  Er.,  from  which  it  is  at 
once  separated  inter  alia  by  the  strongly  thickened  lateral  margins 
of  its  prothorax.  As  in  A.  Lindense  the  seriate  fovea?  on  the 
elytra  are  much  larger  in  some  examples  than  in  others. 
S.A.;  Port  Lincoln  district. 

Adelium  ^equale,  sp.nov. 

Sat  nitidum  ;  sat  convexum  ;  totum  nigrum  ;  capite  subruguloso 
antice  sparsim  subtiliter  (postice  magis  fortiter)  punctulato  ; 
prothorace  quam  longiori  fere  partibus  tribus  (postice  quam 
antice  minime)  latiori,  leviter  sat  6rebre  punctulato  et 
puncturis  magnis  paucis  (circiter  6)  instructo,  antice  bisinu- 
ato,  postice  leviter  late  emarginato,  lateribus  sat  rotundatis 
modice  explanatis,  marginibus  sat  subtilibus,  angulis  posticis 
obtusis  ;  elytris  ovalibus  haud  striatis,  seriatim  punctulatis, 
puncturis  in  seriebus  magnitudine  variis  latera  apicemque 
versus  fere  obsoletis,  interstitiis  perspicue  sat  crebre  punctu- 
latis ;  antennis  sat  tiliformibus,  articulo  3°  quam  4US  5US  que 
conjuncti  vix  longiori.  [Long.  65,  lat.  2\  lines. 

Resembles  the  preceding  two  species,  A.  cisteloides,  Er.,  and 
some  others,  in  having  the  longitudinal  puncturation  of  the  elytra 
unequal.     In  the  unique  example  before  me  the  rows  consist  of  deep 


540  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

but  fine, — almost  "  needle  point," — punctures  among  which  are 
interspersed  a  few  much  larger, — but  even  these  are  (not  foveas  but) 
merely  strong  punctures  ;  from  analogy,  however,  it  is  likely  that 
in  other  examples  the  whole  system  of  puncturation  might  be 
somewhat  coarser.  In  all  examples  examined  of  the  two  preceding 
and  of  cisteloides,  however,  the  sculpture  of  the  elytra  is  infinitely 
coarser  ;  moreover  in  the  present  insect  the  elytral  sculpture 
becomes  very  much  enfeebled  towards  the  sides  and  apex  ;  the 
interstices  also  are  very  conspicuously  punctured  here,  while  in 
the  preceding  two  (and  also  in  cisteloides)  they  are  lsevigate  or 
nearly  so.  The  lateral  edge  of  the  prothorax  is  very  much  less 
thickened  than  in  angulatum  and  Lindense,  that  segment  is  much 
more  transverse  than  in  angulatum  and  cisteloides  and  much  less 
explanate  and  strongly  rounded  at  the  sides  than  in  Lindense. 
The  strongly  produced  middle  part  of  the  front  margin  of  the 
prothorax  (making  the  margin  strongly  bisinuate)  is  also  a  very 
distinctive  character,  and  the  absolutely  flat  elytral  interstices 
another.  The  closeness  here  and  there  of  the  small  punctures  of 
the  elytral  series  gives  a  slight  appearance  of  striation,  but  on 
examination  it  is  seen  that  the  elytra  are  absolutely  non-stria te. 
S.  A..;  near  Port  Lincoln. 

Seirotrana. 

Adelium  parallelum,  Germ.,  is  a  member  of  this  genus.  S. 
integricolle,  Haag  Rut.,  must  be  extremely  close  to  parallel um, 
from  which  its  author  does  not  distinguish  it,  probably  not  know- 
ing that  parallelum  is  a  Seirotrana.  It  may  be  inferred  from  the 
great  distance  between  the  localities  where  they  are  reported  to 
occur  that  the  two  are  likely  to  be  distinct.  The  following  seem 
to  be  new  : — 

Seirotrana  simplex,  sp.nov. 

Angusta ;  parallela ;  sat  convexa ;  sat  niticla ;  nigra,  tarsis  et 
antennarum  articulis  basi  rufescentibus ;  capite  minus 
ina3quali,  haud  ruguloso,  subtilius  sat  crebre  punctulato ; 
prothorace  quam  longiori  tertia  parte  (postice  quam  antice 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  541 

vix  sexta  parte)  latiori,  leviter  subtiliter  sat  crebre  punctulato 
et  puncturis  nonnullis  magnis  instructo,  antice  et  postice 
parum  emarginato,  lateribus  minus  arcuatis  angustissime 
explanatis  haud  crenulatis,  angulis  posticis  sat  rectis ;  elytris 
vix  striatis,  seriatim  sat  fortiter  punctulatis,  puncturis  sat 
rotundis,  interstitiis  lsevibus  antice  planis,  alternis  postice 
costas  interruptas  formantibus. 
£  abdominis  segmentis  basalibus  in  medio  planatis,  longitudina- 
liter  confertim  strigosis.  [Long.  6,  lat.  2  J  lines. 

A  very  distinct  species  on  account  of  its  black  colour  and  the 
elongate  elevations  on  the  alternate  elytral  interstices  being  con- 
fined to  the  apical  portion.  It  has  much  the  appearance  of  a  large 
Chalcolampra.  Compared  with  S.  parallela,  Germ.,  the  prothorax 
is  considerably  narrower  in  proportion  to  the  elytra.  Owing  to 
the  fineness  of  the  general  puncturation  of  the  prothorax  the 
larger  punctures  scattered  over  it  are  extremely  conspicuous. 
S.A.  ;  Murray  Bridge. 

Seirotrana  monticola,  sp.nov. 
Minus  angusta;  minus  parallela;  modice  convexa ;  minus  nitida; 
cupreo-aenea ;  capite  prothoraceque  crebre  sat  fortiter  sat 
rugulose  punctulatis  puncturis  majoribus  nonnullis  inter- 
mixtis ;  hoc  quam  longiori  fere  dimidio  (postice  quam  antice 
quinta  parte)  latiori,  antice  leviter  (postice  late  triangulariter) 
emarginato,  lateribus  modice  rotundatis  ante  basin  sinuatis 
leviter  crenulatis  nullo  modo  explanatis,  angulis  posticis  sat 
acute  rectis  ;  elytris  punctulato-striatis,  puncturis  in  striis 
quadratis,  interstitiis  alternis  convexis  hie  illic  subinterruptis. 
$  abdominis  segmentis  basalibus  in  medio  planatis,  longitudina- 
liter  fortiter  minus  crebre  strigosis  ;  segmento  ultimo  longi- 
tudinaliter  valde  carinato.  [Long.  5f,  lat.  2±  lines. 

A  very  distinct  species  with  extremely  strong  sexual  characters, 
Much  wider  and  less  parallel  than  the  preceding,  and  at  once  dis- 
tinguished by  the  alternate  elytral  interstices  being  moderately 
convex  throughout  and  scarcely  interrupted,  the  quasi-interrup- 
tions  being  little  more  than  feeble  depressions  in  the  costse. 
Victoria ;  a  single  example  near  the  summit  of  Baldi. 


542  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

Seirotrana  dispar,  sp.nov. 

Minus  elongata  ;  minus  parallela ;  sat  convexa  ;  sat  nitida  ; 
cupreo-cenea ;  capite  inaequali  triangulariter  planato  crebre 
subfortiter  punctulato ;  prothorace  quam  longiori  dimidio 
latiori  (postice  quam  antice  fere  quarta  parte)  latiori,  crebre 
subtilius  punctulato  et  puncturis  sat  magnis  nonnullis  inter- 
mixes, antice  leviter  (postice  late  triangulariter)  emarginato, 
lateribus  modice  rotundatis  ante  basin  parallelis  obsolete 
creriulatis  haud  explanatis,  angulis  posticis  rectis  ;  elytris 
nullo  modo  striatis,  subtiliter  seriatim  punctulatis,  interstitiis 
alternis  obsolete  interrupto-costatis. 
<J  latet.  [Long-  5,  lat.  2?  lines. 

The  fine  prothoracic  puncturation  has  a  slight  appearance  of 
running  into  longitudinal  strigosity  ;  as  in  S.  simplex  it  is  so  fine 
that  the  larger  punctures  are  extremely  conspicuous.  The  alter- 
nate interstices  of  the  elytra  are  of  the  same  nature  as  in  <S'. 
parallela,  Germ.,  but  very  much  feebler,  in  fact  almost  obsolete. 
A  very  much  wider  and  shorter  species  than  S.  simplex,  with, 
inter  alia,  the  seriate  puncturation  of  the  elytra  infinitely  finer. 
Victoria  ;  in  the  collection  of  C.  French,  Esq. 

Licinoma  pallipes,  sp.nov. 

Sat  convexa ;  minus  angusta  ;  sat  nitida  ;  nigra  vel  aeneo-nigra, 
antennis  pedibusque  testaceis  nonnullis  exemplis  apicem 
versus  infuscatis,  femorum  basi  et  tibiis  nonnullis  exemplis 
piceis  ;  capite  subplanato,  sparsim  subtiliter  punctulato, 
sutura  clypeali  utrinque  subtiliter  distincte  retrorsum  pro- 
ducta  ;  prothorace  quam  longiori  dimidio  (postice  quam 
antice  quarta  parte)  latiori,  leviter  subtiliter  sat  crebre 
punctulato  et  foveis  nonnullis  instructis,  antice  posticeque 
vix  emarginato,  lateribus  leviter  arcuatis,  angulis  posticis 
fere  rectis  ;  scutello  distincto  ;  elytris  sat  foi  titer  punctulato- 
striis,  striis  minus  angustis  (puncturis  in  his  crebre  positis), 
interstitiis  sat  latis  sat  planis  sparsim  distincte  punctulatis  ; 
antennis  prothoracis  basin  superantibus,  apicem  versus  sat 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  543 

incrassatis,  articulo  apicali  quam  9U3  10us  que  conjuncti 
multo  breviori ;  epipleuris  fortiter  punctulatis  ;  tarsis  subtus 
breviter  (quam  Dinoriw  pictce,  Pasc,  multo  magis  breviter) 
pilosis  ;  oculis  transversis  (fere  ut  Adeliorum). 

[Long.  2J-33,  lat.  1-1  §  lines. 
The  genera  described  by  Mr.  Pascoe  (Ann.  N.H.,  1869,  p.  140) 
as  allies  of  Adelium  are  very  briefly  characterised,  and  widely 
diverse  forms  might  happen  to  present  in  combination  the  two  or 
three  characters  mentioned.  Among  these,  Licinoma  is  charac- 
terised as  having  slight  differences  from  Adelium  in  the  shape  of 
the  mentum,  the  width  of  the  eye,  the  concavity  of  the  front 
margin  of  the  prothorax,  and  the  clothing  of  the  tarsi  beneath. 
The  present  species  presents  these  differences,  and  therefore  I 
refer  it  to  Licinoma. 

In  all  the  specimens  that  I  have  seen  of  this  insect,  two  of  the 
fovese  or  large  punctures  on  the  prothorax  are  placed  a  little  in 
front  of  the  middle,  one  on  either  side  of  the  middle  line  ;  the 
apical  joint  of  the  hind  tarsi  is  about  the  same  length  as  the  basal 
joint.  The  general  appearance  is  that  of  a  small  Harpalus.  I 
do  not  find  any  sexual  characters  other  than  in  the  males  being 
smaller,  narrower,  and  more  parallel  than  the  females,  with  the 
anterior  tarsi  moderately  dilated.  The  elytra  are  strongly  drawn 
forward  in  the  middle  of  the  base,  so  that  the  front  margin  of 
each  elytron  is  very  oblique. 

LONGICORNES. 

MONOHAMMUS    FRENCHI,  sp.nov. 

Fusco-picea,  pube  fusca  et  albida  maculatim  ornato ;  superficie 
tota  creberrime  subti liter  subaspere  punctulata,  et  in  protho- 
race  elytrisque  puncturis  sat  "crassis  (in  his  sat  gequaliter 
minus  sparsim  nihilominus  postice  gradatim  subtilius,  in 
illo  sparsissime  acervatim  positis)  instructa ;  elytrorum 
apice  singulatim  subangulato.  [Long.  11,  lat.  4  J  lines. 

The  head  is  densely  clothed  with  pubescence  of  whitish  and  buff 
colour,  presenting  a  marbled  appearance,  and  has  a  well  marked 


544  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

longitudinal  impressed  line.  The  prothorax  is  densely  pubescent 
and  rather  strongly  transverse,  and  has  an  obscure  transverse 
furrow  in  front  and  two  parallel  and  more  strongly  denned  ones 
in  front  of  the  base ;  its  lateral  spines  are  large  and  strong  ;  its 
surface  is  of  a  dark  buff-colour  and  bears  in  two  rows  (transversely 
placed,  one  immediately  in  front  of,  the  other  immediately  behind, 
the  middle)  6  very  conspicuous  whitish  spots ;  there  is  also  a  good 
deal  of  whitish  pubescence  around  the  spines.  The  whitish 
pubescence  on  the  elytra  forms  small  well  denned  blotches  pre- 
senting in  parts  a  reticulate  appearance  and  recalling  a  little  the 
elytral  pubescence  of  Penthea  vermicularia,  Don.  The  prevailing 
colour  of  the  pubescence  on  the  under-side  and  the  legs  is  whitish, 
among  which  large  well  denned  patches  of  dark  buff-coloured 
pubescence  are  everywhere  distributed.  The  antennae  of  the 
example  before  me  are  slightly  longer  than  the  body  ;  the  basal 
two  joints  are  brown,  more  or  less  marked  with  whitish  ;  the  other 
joints  are  whitish,  but  become  nearly  black  near  the  apex ;  there 
is  a  very  distinct  12th  joint;  the  3rd  joint  is  evidently  longer 
than  either  the  1st  or  4th. 

S.  Australia ;   McDonnell    Ranges ;    in   the   collection    of    C. 
French,  Esq. 

PHYTOPHAGA. 

Spilopyra  Olliffi,  sp.nov. 

Nitida  ;     glabra  ;     supra     obscure     fenea,     subtus     testaceo, 

antennis  tibiis  tarsisque  cyaneis,  palporum  basi  femoribusque 

runs  ;   supra  crasse  rugulose  (capite  magis  subtiliter  minus 

rugulose)  punctulata ;  prothorace  sat  transverso,  antice  haud 

angustato,  ante  scutellum  impresso,  lateribus  leviter  arcuatis 

angulis  anticis  vix  prominulis,  posticis  dentiformibus,  basi 

lobato-bisinuata ;     elytris    ad    humeros    fortiter    extrorsum 

prominentibus,  striatis,  disco  utrinque  pone  basin  tuberculo 

compresso  permagno  munito.        [Long.  4 J- 5,  lat.  2-|— 3  lines. 

This  species  is  not  very  much  like  S.  sumptuosa,  Baly,  in  general 

appearance,  but  its  simple  claws  and  other  structural  characters 

will  place  it  very  near  that  species  even  if  it  have  to  be  made  the 


BY   THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  545 

type  of  a  new  genus  eventually.  The  two  very  large  tubercles  on 
the  front  part  of  the  disc  of  its  elytra  and  the  curiously  produced 
shoulders  render  it  extremely  distinct  from  the  previously  described 
Australian  Eumolpidce.  The  produced  shoulders  and  general  form 
give  it  a  certain  resemblance  to  some  Hemiptera  (e.g.  jEchalia). 

N.S.  Wales  ;  Richmond  R.  and  Tweed  R.  districts  ;  sent  to  me 
by  A.  S.  Olliff,  Esq. 

Paropsis  yilgarnensis,  sp.nov. 

Subquadrato-ovata ;    convexa ;    supra    rubra ;    capite,    palpis, 

antennis,  corpore  subtus,  pedibusque,  brunneo-testaceis  ;  pro- 

thoracis  lateribas  profunde  bis  emarginatis,  disco  subtilius 

crebre  punctulato  puncturis  minutis  intermixtis,  parte  laterali 

variolosa;    elytris    fortiter   sat   crebre   confuse   punctulatis, 

postice    crebre   subverrucosis,   puncturis   suturam  versus  et 

latera  versus  fuscis  vittas  2  latas  vix  perspicuas  formantibus. 

^  tarsorum  anteriorum  4  articulo  basali  sat  dilatato,  quam  3U8 

angustiori.  [Long.  4,  lat.  3?  lines. 

This  species  belongs  to  the  first  group  of  Paropsis.     It  is  not 

unlike  P.  metadata,  Marsh.,  in  size  and  build.     The  puncturation 

of  the  head  and  prothorax  is  almost  as  in  P.  Waterhousei,  Baly. 

The  prothorax  is  not  very  much  more  than  twice  as  wide  as  long, 

its  shape  being  almost  exactly  as  in  P.  maculata.     The  elytra  are 

shaped  as  in  P.  maculata  and  are  punctured  almost  like  those  of 

P.  lutea,  Marsh.,  except  that  the  punctures  are  considerably  less 

crowded  near  the  scutellum.     There  are  no  distinct  raised  spots 

on  the  elytra,  and  the  elytral  punctures  are  concolorous  with  the 

derm  except  in  two  broad  stripes,  one  near  the  suture,  the  other 

near  the  lateral  margin,  in  which  the  punctures  are  darker.     The 

prosternum  is  of  moderate  width   and  simply  sulcate  down  the 

middle  ;  it  is  very  similar  to  that  of  P.  marmorea,  Baly. 

The  close  evenly  distributed  puncturation  of  the  prothorax  in 
combination  with  the  strongly  bisinuate  sides  of  that  segment  will 
distinguish  this  species,  I  think,  from  all  its  allies. 
W.  Australia  ;  Yilgarn. 


546  NOTES    ON    AUSTRALIAN    COLEOPTERA, 

Paropsis  latipes,  sp.nov. 

Subrotunda  (femina  paullo  minus  lata) ;  valde  convexa ;  supra 
minus  nitida,  flavo-brunnea,  capite  postice  (nonnullis 
exemplis)  prothoracis  macula  parva  utrinque  sublaterali 
elytrorum  sutura  plus  minus ve  manifeste  vittis  2  utrinque 
submarginalibus  (plurimis  exemplis  fere  obsoletis)  et  tuber- 
cnlis  nonnullis  (plurimis  exemplis  his  vix  infuscatis)  nigris ; 
capite  prothoraceque  crebre  minus  fortiter  subrugulose 
punctulatis  ;  hoc  (latera  versus  multo  magis  crasse  punctulato) 
quam  longiori  multo  magis  quart)  duplo  latiori,  margine  antico 
profunde  emarginato  in  medio  leviter  convexo,  lateribus 
fortiter  rotunclatis  (latitudine  majori  fere  in  medio  posita), 
angulis  anticis  sat  productis  minus  acutis,  posticis  nullis ; 
scutello  piceo  subcarinato  obscure  punctulato  ;  elytris 
creberrime  sat  fortiter  subseriatim  punctulatis,  tuberculis 
nonnullis  (his  nonnullis  exemplis  piceis  vel  nigris)  seriatim 
ornatis,  angulo  humerali  sat  rotundato  ;  corpore  subtus  nigro 
nitido  (prosterni  lateribus  anguste  testaceis),  sat  crebre  sat 
fortiter  (metasterno  medio  sublrevi  excepto)  punctulato ; 
prosterno  in  medio  bicarinato  minus  lato,  carinis  antice 
conniventibus  ;  pal  pis  peclibusque  rufo- testaceis  (femoribus 
plus  minus  obscurioribus) ;  antennis  piceis  basi  testaceis. 
(J  tarsorum  anteriorum  4  articulo  basali  valde  dilatato  quam 
3US  nullo  modo  angustiori ;  segmento  ventrali  apicali  leviter 
bigibbo,  apice  truncato  cariniformi. 
9  segmento  ventrali  apicali  pone  basim  transversim  carinato, 
apice  anguste  emarginato.  [Long.  5  (vix),  lat.  4  lines. 

The  prothorax  across  its  front  angles  is  just  about  §  as  wide  as 
at  its  widest  part.  Viewed  from  the  side  the  curve  of  the  outline 
is  an  even  one,  its  highest  point  being  at  about  the  middle  of  its 
length,  and  the  height  of  the  insect  is  about  g  of  its  length. 

Ordinary  specimens  are  almost  entirely  of  a  pale  brownish  colour 
above,  with  a  small  blackish  spot  near  the  margin  of  the  prothorax 
on  either  side,  and  the  elytra  obscurely  infuscate  along  the  suture 
and  bearing  two  indistinct  blackish   vittas  near  the   margin  on 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  547 

either  side  ;  in  these  examples  the  tubercles  on  the  elytra  are 
scarcely  noticeable  being  concolorous  with  the  derm  ;  in  other 
examples  there  is  a  blackish  shading  a  little  within  the  lateral 
and  front  margins  of  the  prothorax  and  in  some  the  tubercles  on 
the  elytra  are  more  or  less  infuscate  appearing  then  as  forming 
more  or  less  fragmentary  parts  of  fairly  distinct  longitudinal  rows. 

This  species  is  a  good  deal  like  what  I  regard  as  P.  siiblimbata, 
Chp.,  but  is  markedly  less  convex  than  that  insect  (which  is 
among  the  most  strongly  convex  of  the  genus)  and  has  its 
prothorax  evidently  more  closely  and  rugulosely  punctured,  its 
underside  black  instead  of  pale  brown,  the  basal  joint  of  the 
dilated  male  tarsi  much  wider,  and  the  sexual  characters  of  the 
apical  ventral  segment  quite  different. 

Victoria  ;  Alpine  district ;  found  at  high  elevations. 


Paropsis  regularis,  sp.nov. 

Ovalis ;  fortiter  convexa ;  supra  minus  nitida  ;  capite  testaceo 
postice  nigro,  rugulose  minus  crasse  punctulato ;  prothorace 
testaceo  maculis  2  permagnis  (nonnullis  exemplis  conjunctis 
et  fere  superficiem  totam  tegentibus)  ornato,  quam  longiori 
fere  triplo  latiori,  margine  antico  profunde  emarginato  in 
medio  leviter  convexo,  lateribus  fortiter  rotundatis  antice  vix 
sinuatis,  latitudine  majori  pone  medium  posita,  angulis 
anticis  acutis  sat  productis,  posticis  nullis,  disco  sat  fortiter 
ruguloso  et  crebre  fortius  punctulato,  lateribus  variolosis  ; 
scutello  fusco,  carinato,  vix  punctulato;  elytris  fusco-brunneis, 
late  testaceo-marginatis,  fortiter  sat  regulariter  seriatim- 
punctulatis,  tuberculorum  nigrorum  seriebus  integris  9  ornatis, 
callo  humerali  modico  nigro  nitido,  angulo  humerali  fere 
rotundato ;  corpore  subtus  nigro  nitido  testaceo-notato  sat 
crebre  sat  fortiter  (metasterno  medio  la?vi  excepto)  punctu- 
lato ;  prosterno  in  medio  bicarinato  sat  lato,  carinis  antice 
conniventibus  ;  pedibus  palpisque'  rufo-testaceis  ;  an  tennis 
piceis  basi  testaceis. 
36 


548  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA, 

<J.  Tarsorum  anteriorum  4  articulo  basali  sat  dilatato  quam 
3ius  manifeste  angustiori ;  segmento  ventrali  apicali  leviter 
bigibbo,  apice  minute  emarginato.        [Long.  4?,  lat.  3^  lines. 

The  prothorax  across  the  apex  of  its  front  angles  is  nearly  §  as 
wide  as  at  its  widest  part.  Viewed  from  the  side  the  curve  of  the 
outline  is  an  even  one,  its  highest  point  being  at  about  the  middle 
of  its  length,  and  the  height  of  the  insect  is  about  ^  of  its  length. 
The  male  and  female  do  not  differ  much  in  shape,  the  female 
being,  however,  a  trifle  narrower.  The  apical  ventral  segment  of 
the  female  is  simply  rounded  at  the  apex  and  its  surface  is  even. 
In  some  specimens  the  extreme  apex  and  base  of  the  hind  body 
and  the  middle  of  the  prosternum  are  testaceous ;  the  sides  of  the 
presternum  are  always  widely  testaceous. 

This  does  not  seem  to  be  a  variable  species. 

Victorian  Alps  ;  found  at  high  elevations. 

Plectroscelis  olliffi,  sp.no v. 

Ovalis,  sat  convexa  ;  la?te  senea,  pedibus  (femoribus  posticis 
exceptis)  antennisque  fusco-testaceis,  his  apicem  versus 
obscurioribus  ;  capite  prothoraceque  fortiter  sat  crebre  punc- 
tulatis ;  hoc  quam  longiori  plus  quam  dimidio  latiori,  antror- 
sum  angustato,  margine  antico  in  medio  sat  producto,  lateribus 
leviter  arcuatis,  angulis  anticis  sat  acutis  nullo  modo 
extrorsum  directis,  angulis  posticis  rectis  retrorsum  subpro- 
ductis  ;  scutello  la?vi ;  elytris  sat  fortiter  punctulato-striatis, 
interstitiis  latis  sublaavibus  latera  versus  angustioribus 
subcostiformibus  ;  antennis  quam  corporis  dimidium  paullo 
longioribus.  [Long.  1^-lg,  lat.  I  line. 

Much  like  the  European  P.  concimia,  Marsh.,  in  build  and 
colour,  but  of  a  more  brightly  metallic  tone  and  differing  from  that 
species  inter  alia  by  its  less  transverse  prothorax  which  is  less 
closely  punctured,  the  more  closely  punctured  striae  of  the  elytra 
and  the  more  convex  lateral  interstices  of  the  same. 

N.  S.  Wales;  sent  to  me  by  Mr.  Olliff,  the  Colonial  Entomologist. 


BY    THE    REV.  T.  BLACKBURN.  549 

MONOLEPTA    BENALLiE,  Sp.nOV. 

Oblonga ;  nigra,  capite  postice  prothoraceque  testaceis,  elytris 

lsete  cyaneis  ;  antennarum  'articulo  basali  elongato,  3°  quam 

2US  vix  longiori;  elytris  capite  vix  manifeste,  prothorace  (hoc 

sequali)  leviter    subcrebre,  elytris  crebre    minus  crasse  vix 

squamose,  punctulatis  ;  subtus  parce  pubescens  ;  epipleuris  in 

parte  postica  obsoletis.  [Long.  If,  lat.  I  line  (vix). 

Very  like  M.  modesta,  Blackb.,  but  differing  (apart  from  colour) 

in  the  tiner  and  less  squamose  puncturation  of  the  elytra  (which 

are  very  similar  to  those  of  the  European  Luperus  flavipes,  Linn.) 

and  in  the  very  evidently  longer  basal  joint  of   the  antennae. 

Also  very  near  M.  croceicollis,  Germ.,  but  differing  by  the  3rd 

joint  of  the  antennae  less  than  half   as  long  as  the  4th.     The 

posterior  coxal  cavities  are  closed  behind,  the  "  subbasal  lobe  "  of 

Dr.  Baly  (vide  Journ.  Linn.  Soc.  xx.)  being  present, — and  in 

non-distorted  specimens  joining  the  apices  of  the  epimera.     All 

the   tibiae   are   mucronated.       This   species  is   extremely  like  a 

Luperus ;  I  suspect  that  if  the  Galerucidce  were  re-classified  in 

accordance  with  Dr.  Baly's  scheme  it  would  scarcely  be  separated 

from  Luperus  as  the  prosternum  of  that  genus  certainly  seems  to 

have  a  small  "  subbasal  lobe." 

Victoria ;    taken    by  Mr.  Helms   near    Benalla ;    also   by  me 
near  Euroa. 

MONOLEPTA    FROGGATTI,    Sp.nOV. 

Oblonga ;  nigra,  capite  (vertice  excepto)  prothorace  (disco 
obscure  piceo  excepto)  pedibus  (his,  praesertim  tarsis,  plus 
minusve  infuscatis)  et  elytrorum  vitta  lata  (hac  basin 
apicemque  attingente)  brunneo-testaceis,  antennis  basi  obscure 
dilutioribus ;  harum  articulo  basali  minus  elongato,.  3°  quam 
2US  manifeste  longiori ;  elytris  sat  crebre  leviter  vix  rugulose 
capite  sparsissime  subtilissime,  prothorace  (hoc  transversim 
sulcato)  leviter  ineequaliter,  punctulatis  ;  corpore  subtus  parce 
pubescenti ;  epipleuris  in  parte  postica  obsoletis. 

[Long,  lg,  lat.  ?  line. 


550  NOTES  ON  AUSTRALIAN  COLEOPTERA. 

A  very  distinct  species,  with  puncturation  very  like  that  of  the 
preceding.  The  anterior  coxal  cavities  are  closed ;  the  3rd  joint 
of  the  antennae  is  about  half  as  long  as  the  4th ;  the  apical  spine 
of  the  tibiae  is  very  small ;  the  basal  joint  of  the  hind  tarsi  is  not 
much  shorter  than  the  apical  three  joints  together. 

Victoria ;  taken  by  Mr.  Froggatt  near  Ballarat. 


551 


ON    A   COLLECTION  OF  LAND  AND  FRESH  WATER 
SHELLS,  FROM   QUEENSLAND 

By   C.    Hedley,  F.L.S.,  and   C.   T.    Musson,  F.L.S. 

Through  the  kindness  and  liberality  of  Dr.  J.  C.  Cox,  F.L.S., 
one  of  the  writers,  Mr.  Musson,  was  enabled  to  spend  a  few 
months  during  the  year  1887  searching  for  mollusca  in  South 
Queensland.  The  visit  chanced  to  be  when  a  prolonged  drought, 
followed  by  disastrous  floods,  had  greatly  reduced  the  invertebrate 
population.  Many  species  are  thus  only  represented  in  Mr. 
Musson's  collection  by  dead  shells.  Others  in  the  lapse  of  time 
have  been  lost  or  mislaid,  among  them  a  slug  discovered  twice  at 
Miriam  Vale,  first  under  a  log  near  the  head  station  and  then  on 
a  ridge  near  Colosseum  Creek,  and  again  under  Mt.  Mee,  North 
Pine  River.  It  is  described  in  the  collector's  note-book  as,  "  one 
inch  long,  dark  in  colour,  with  sole  of  foot  light  except  the  rim 
which  was  dark,  sharply  keeled,  hard  and  leathery."  We  are 
disposed  to  conjecture  that  this  animal  was  Atopos  australis, 
Heyneman. 

The  route  pursued  was  as  follows : — From  Gladstone,  reached 
August  8th,  as  a  centre  various  points  in  the  Port  Curtis  district 
were  investigated,  and  Miriam  Vale,  Warro,  Rodds  Bay,  Boyne, 
Facing  and  Curtis  Islands  were  visited  in  succession.  Rockhamp- 
ton  was  then  made  the  base  of  operations,  and  part  of  September 
and  October  was  spent  in  collecting  over  the  Berseker  Range 
(one  of  whose  highest  summits  is  Mt.  Archer),  Gracemere,  Mt. 
Morgan,  and  Olsen's  Caves  ;  shells  from  a  subfossil  deposit  in  the 
latter  will  be  quoted  as  (c)  in  the  following  list.  A  trip  west  was 
also  made  to  Jericho,  Alpha,  and  Bogantungan  via  Coomooboolaroo. 
Leaving  Rockhampton  on  October  12th,  an  overland  journey  to 
Brisbane  was  commenced  by  way  of  West  wood,  Calliungal  on  the 


552      ON    A    COLLECTION    OF    LAND   AND    FRESH    WATER    SHELLS, 

River  Dee,  Torsdale  on  Prospect  Creek,  and  Prairie  Station  on 
Kroombit  Creek.  Crossing  to  the  Burnett  watershed  Cania  was 
reached,  the  Three  Moon  Creek,  Cania  Station  and  Dalgangal 
passed  in  succession,  and  the  traveller  arrived  at  Gayndah  on 
November  10th.  Thence  a  course  was  shaped  via  Banban  on  the 
Barambah  River,  Boobeyjan  and  Kilkivan  to  Gympie.  Two 
localities  in  this  neighbourhood  were  searched  and  will  be  quoted 
in  the  following  list  as  (a)  a  scrub  nine  miles  north,  and  (b) 
another  scrub  at  Blackfellow's  Creek,  twenty-seven  miles  south 
of  the  town.  In  continuation  of  the  journey  the  Mary  River  was 
followed  from  Kenilworth  to  its  source,  and  the  summit  of  the 
Blackall  Range  attained  by  way  of  Canondale.  After  passing 
Durundu  and  Caboolture  a  trip  was  made  up  the  North  Pine 
River,  and  the  rich  scrubs  around  Mt.  Mee  were  examined. 
This  tour  was  then  concluded,  and  Brisbane  reached  on  Decem- 
ber 6th. 

The  conchological  booty  was  as  follows  : — 

Helicarion  robustus,  Gould. 

Everywhere  common  under  stones  and  logs ;  varies  in  size  and 
colour. 

Miriam  Vale,  Warro,  Curtis  Island,  Olsen's  Caves,  Mt.  Archer, 
Rockhampton,  Calliungal,  Cania,  Banban,  Kilkivan,  Durundu, 
Gympie  (a)  and  (b),  and  North  Pine  River. 

Thalassia  pudibunda,  Cox. 
Scarce. 
North  Pine  River. 

T.  moretonensis,  Pfeiffer. 
One  specimen  collected. 

Mt.  Archer. 

T.  rustica,  Pfeiffer. 

Under  logs  and  stones  usually  in  open  country,  sometimes  in 
scrubs,  plentiful  in  places  ;  widely  distributed. 


BY    C.  HEDLEY    AND    C.  T.  MUSSON.  553 

Warro,  Mt.  Archer,  Gracemere,  Cania,  Banban,  Kilkivan, 
Gym  pie  (a),  and  Kenil  worth. 

A  variety  darker  in  colour,  and  having  spiral  lines  more 
distinctly  marked  than  the  type,  was  found  at  Miriam  Vale, 
Bogantungan,  Torsdale  and  Cania. 

T.  delta,  Pfeiffer. 

In  scrubs,  arboreal ;  scarce. 
North  Pine  River. 

CONULUS   TURRICULATUS,  Cox. 

Fairly  plentiful. 
Miriam  Vale  and  Cania. 

Charopa  omicron,  Pfeiffer. 
Under  logs  in  damp  places  ;  not  plentiful. 
Miriam  Vale,  Warro,  Cania,  Gympie  and  North  Pine  River. 

C.  iuloidea,  Forbes. 
Scarce. 

Warro,  Gracemere  and  Olsen's  Caves  (c). 

C.   FUNEREA,  COX. 

Cania,  Kilkivan. 

Limax  l^vis,  Miiller. 
Miriam  Vale,  Brisbane  and  Kilkivan. 

Rhytida  walkeri,  Gray. 

Under  logs  and  stones  in  scrubs ;  widely  distributed  but 
nowhere  very  abundant. 

Miriam  Vale,  Warro,  Curtis  Island,  Mt.  Archer,  Gracemere, 
Olsen's  Caves,  Calliungal,  Torsdale,  Cania,  Banban,  Gympie  (a) 
and  (b),  Kenilworth,  and  North  Pine  River. 


554      ON    A    COLLECTION    OF    LAND    AND    FRESH    WATER    SHELLS, 

R.  splendidula,  Pfeiffer. 

Under  logs  and  stones  in  scrubs  ;  widely  distributed  and  fairly 
plentiful. 

Miriam  Vale,  M.t.  Archer,  Olsen's  Caves  and  (c),  Cania,  Banban, 
Gynipie  (a)  and  (b),  Kenilworth  and  North  Pine  River. 

var.  strangeoides,  Cox. 
Olsen's  Caves  (c),  Gympie  (a),  and  Kenilworth. 

Planispira  marine,  Cox. 
Under  logs ;  scarce. 
Kenilworth,  North  Pine  River. 

P.  cyclostoma-ta,  Leguillou. 

Under  stones  and  logs,  usually  in  open  country  ;  widely 
distributed. 

Miriam  Vale,  Rodds  Bay,  Gracemere,  Calliungal?  Dalgangal, 
Kilkivan,  Gympie  (a),  and  Kenilworth. 

Panda  falconari,  Reeve,  var.  maconelli,  Reeve. 

Observed  crawling  on  stones  in  damp  shady  places  in  scrubs ; 
uncommon. 

Gympie  (a)  and  (b),  Kenilworth,  Blackall  Range  and  North 
Pine  River. 

Pedinogyra  cunninghami,  Gray. 

The  sharp  edges  of  the  broken  shells  of  this  species  are  used  by 
the  aboriginals  of  Port  Curtis  to  polish  their  spears,  boomerangs 
and  waddies.  The  shells  occurring  on  the  mountain  sides  are 
said  by  Mr  Blom field  to  be  smaller  than  those  from  the  level 
ground.  Dead  shells  are  scattered  through  the  scrubs  in  great 
profusion ;  living  animals  were  found  under  heaps  of  stones  and 
drifts  of  dead  leaves,  or  buried  in  clusters  of  from  3  to  6  in  the 
soil.  The  species  varies  much  in  size,  colour  and  thickness, 
and  is  widely  distributed. 


BY   C.  HEDLEY   AND    C.  T.  MUSSON.  555 

Miriam  Vale,  Warro,  Cania  (large),  Kilkivan,  Durundu 
(dark  straw  colour),  Gympie  (a)  (very  large),  and  North  Pine 
River  (greenish-purple  colour). 

var.  minor,  Mousson. 
Mt.  Archer. 

Chloritis  porteri,  Cox. 
Under  logs  ;  plentiful  in  places. 
Gympie  (a)  and  (b),  Kenilworth,  Durundu  and  Caboolture. 

C.  mansueta,  Pfeiffer. 
Not  plentiful. 
Gympie  (a)  and  (b),  and  North  Pine  River. 

C.  aridorum,  Cox. 

Under  logs  and  stones ;  found  in  the  dry  country  at  Alpha 
buried  in  the  sand  under  logs  and  hybernating  behind  a  series  of 
strong  epiphragms.  In  this  state  many  had  been  gnawed  through 
and  eaten  by  lizards  and  insects.  Everywhere  abundant ;  very 
variable  in  size. 

Facing  Island,  Gracemere,  Olsen's  Caves,  Coomooboolaroo, 
Alpha,  Bogantungan,  Calliungal,  Dalgangal,  Banban,  Kilkivan, 
and  North  Pine  River. 

C.  brevipila,  Pfeiffer. 
Warro,  Curtis  Island,  Mt.  Archer  and  Cania. 

C.  BLACKMANI,  Cox. 

Scarce. 

Miriam  Vale,  Warro. 

Hadra  rockhamptonensis,  Cox. 
Under  loose  bark. 
Rockhampton. 


556      ON   A    COLLECTION    OF    LAND    AND    FRESH    WATER   SHELLS, 

var.  pallida,  var.nov. 

Bandless,  of  a  tawny  yellow  colour. 

Rockhampton. 

Type  in  Australian  Museum. 

H.  BLOMFIELDI,  Cox. 

Under  loose  bark  ;  gregarious. 

Miriam  Vale,  Rockhampton,  Boobeyjan,  Cania,  Gympie,  Kenil- 
worth  and  Kilkivan. 

var.  warroensis,  var.nov. 

We  would  thus  distinguish  the  chestnut-coloured  form  from 
Warro,  figured  by  Tapparone  Canefri  in  the  Malacologia  of  the 
Viaggio  Magenta,  pi.  ii.,  fig.  5. 

H.  incei,  PfeifFer. 

Under  loose  bark ;  gregarious.  Varies  much  in  size  and 
elevation  of  the  spire. 

Miriam  Vale,  Rodds  Bay,  Gladstone,  Olsen's  Caves,  Coomoo- 
boolaroo,  Rockhampton,  Boobeyjan,  Torsdale  and  Gympie. 

var.  bayensis,  Brazier. 
Under  large  stones  in  a  damp  shady  gully  at  Banban. 

var.  lessoni,  PfeifFer. 

Under  loose  bark  ;  gregarious. 

Facing  and  Boyne  Islands  and  Rockhampton. 

var.  aureedensis,  Brazier. 
Specimens  from  Rockhampton  were  received  from  Mr.  Barnard. 

H.  fraseri,  Gray. 

In  hollow  trees,  under  stones  and  loose  sheets  of  bark  lying  on 
the  ground. 

Durundu  and  North  Pine  River. 


BY    C.  HEDLEY    AND    C.  T.  MUSSON.  557 

H.  pachystyla,  Pfeiffer 

Found  on  sandy  ridges  buried  a  few  inches  below  the  surface 

amongst  the  roots  of  bushes  ;  scarce. 

Miriam  Vale,  Warro,  Facing  Island,  Coomooboolaroo,  Torsdale 

and  Kilkivan. 

var.  daemeli,  von  Martens. 

Examples  from  Boyne  Island  are  even  smaller  than  those 
described  by  von  Martens  from  Cape  York,  measuring  maj.  diam. 
28  mm.,  min.  23  mm.,  alt.  27  mm. 

Papuina  fucata,  Pfeiffer. 
Crawling  on  shrubs  in  a  scrub. 

Miriam  Yale. 

P.  bidwilli,  Pfeiffer. 

None  found  alive,  dead  shells  occurred  plentifully  in  scrubs. 
Gympie  (a)  and  (b),  Kenilworth  and  North  Pine  River. 

*BUL1MUS  (?)    BIDWILLI,  Cox. 

Taken  alive  from  leaves  of  trees  in  the  scrubs  ;  scarce. 
Miriam  Vale,  Warro. 

Stenogyra  gracilis,  Hutton.f 

Under  logs,  gregarious,  often  buried  in  the  ground,  found 
hybernating  beneath  an  epiphragm  ;  abundant  and  widely  dis- 
tributed. 

Miriam  Vale,  Warro,  Rodds  Bay,  Boyne  Island,  Facing  Island, 
Curtis  Island,  Mt.  Archer,  Gracemere,  Olsen's  Caves,  Bogantun- 
gan,  Coomooboolaroo,  Calliungal,  Cania,  Dalgangal,  Banban, 
Kilkivan,  and  North  Pine  River. 

*  We  submit  that  this  is  a  Papuina  allied  to  fucata  and  conscendens. 

+  This  name  of  Hutton's  published  in]1834  (Journ.  Asiat.  Soc.  Bengal,  iii., 
p.  93)  preceded  by  several  years  Pfeiffer's  names  of  subula,  tuckeri,  etc., 
etc.  No  snail  could  more  truthfully  apply  to  its  species  Macaulay's 
lines, — "  By  many  names  men  call  us  ;  In  many  lands  we  dwell." 


558      ON   A   COLLECTION   OF   LAND   AND   FRESH    WATER   SHELLS, 

Tornatellina  eucharis,  Brazier. 

One  example  from  Warro  and  two  from  Boyne  Island  were 
kindly  determined  for  us  by  the  conchologist  who  described  the 
species. 

P.  pedicula,  Shuttleworth. 

Under  stones  and  logs,  and  dead  in  river  rubbish. 

Miriam  Vale,  Warro,  Boyne  Island,  Facing  Island,  Curtis 
Island,  Gracemere,  Bogantungan,  Calliungal,  Torsdale,  Cania, 
Dalgangal,  Banban  and  Kilkivan. 

P.  pacifica,  Pfeiffer. 

Under  stones  and  logs  in  the  open  country  ;  abundant. 

Rodds  Bay,  Facing  Island,  Gracemere,  Bogantungan,  Calliun- 
gal, Torsdale,  Cania,  Kroombit,  Banban,  Gympie  and  North  Pine 
River. 

P.  KINGI,  COX. 

Under  loose  bark  at  the  foot  of  a  tree. 
Boyne  Island,  Calliungal  and  Dalgangal. 

P.  anodonta,  n.sp. 

Shell  dextral,  oblong  ovate,  imperforate,  thin  ;  colour  ? ; 
whorls  4,  rounded,  the  last  constituting  two-thirds 
of  the  total  length  of  the  shell  and  showing  a  ten- 
dency to  become  uncoiled  ;  apex  obtuse  ;  sculpture 
delicate  longitudinal  striae ;  suture  impressed,  sub- 
channelled  ;  aperture  vertical,  elliptical,  having  its 
major  axis  oblique  to  that  of  the  shell,  peristome 
entire,  expanded  and  reflected  throughout.  Length 
2,  breadth  1  mm. 

North  Pine  River  (Musson) ;  dead  shells  only. 

Type  in  the  Australian  Museum. 

We  trust  that  the  accompanying  illustration  will  enable  future 
observers  to  identify  this  species.     The  paucity  of  the  material  to 


BY   C.  HEDLEY   AND    C.  T.  MUSSON.  559 

hand  denies  us  the  opportunity  of  dwelling  upon  its  characteristics 
and  affinities,  but  it  cannot  at  any  rate  be  confused  with  any 
other  Australian  mollusc. 

Cgeliaxis  australis.  Forbes. 

Under  logs  and  stones,  &c,  in  scrubs ;  from  a  square  yard  of 
ground  150  specimens  were  obtained.     Very  local. 

Warro,  Cania  and  the  North  Pine  River. 

Succinea  arborea,  Adams  and  Angas. 

Under  bark  on  trees  ;  common. 

Rodds  Bay,  Curtis  Island,  Gracemere,  Boobeyjan,  Dalgangal 
and  Kilkivan. 

S.  strigata,  Pfeiffer. 
Not  common. 

Jericho,  Bogantungan,  Coomooboolaroo,  Dalgangal,  Torsdale, 
Banban  and  Kenilworth. 

Aneitea  graeppei,  Humbert, 
Miriam  Vale,  Kilkivan  and  North  Pine  River. 

Georissa  multiliriata,  Brazier. 

Olsen's  Caves,  plentiful  on  the  rocks  ;  Cania,  in  a  Birds-nest- 
fern  (Asplenium  nidus). 

Pupina  coxi,  Morelet. 

Under  stones  in  scrubs. 

Olsen's  Caves  (c),  Cania  Station  and  Coomooboolaroo. 

P.  cost ata,  n.sp. 

Shell  costate,  umbilicate,  narrowly  ovate,  solid ;  colour  ? ;  whorls 
5  J,  rounded,  the  last  slightly  descending  at  the  aperture,  com- 
prising half  of  the  total  length  of  the  shell  and  equalling  its 


560      ON   A   COLLECTION   OF   LAND   AND    FRESH   WATER   SHELLS, 

predecessor  in  width ;  spire  regularly  tapering ;  apex  obtuse  ; 
sculpture  close,  oblique,  sharp,  threadlike  longitu- 
dinal riblets,  the  first  2  whorls  smooth,  the  third 
lightly  ribbed;  suture  deeply  impressed;  umbilicus 
spiral,  wide  and  shallow  externally,  deep  and 
narrow  within,  ridged  around  the  margin  ;  aper- 
ture almost  detached  from  the  body  whorl,  vertical, 
circular,  furnished  with  but  one  canal,  which  is 
small,  shallow,  and  cut  half  across  the  left  side 
of  the  peristome,  its  position  coinciding  with  the  termination 
of  the  circum-umbilical  ridge,  peristome  reflected  and  expanded, 
broad  anteriorly,  narrow  near  the  body  whorl.  Operculum  not 
collected.     Length  6,  breadth  3  mm. 

Hob. — Rejectamenta  of  a  stream  nine  miles  north  of  Gympie 
and  at  Calliungal ;  dead  shells  only  (Musson). 

Type  in  Australian  Museum. 

This  remarkable  shell  differs  widely  from  any  known  form.  P. 
coxi,  planilab?'is,  and  jietterdi  share  its  peculiar  sculpture,  but  the 
lack  of  the  anterior  canal  as  well  as  its  smaller  size  distinguish  it 
from  those  species.  Having  the  general  appearance  of  Bellar- 
diella,  it  wants  the  distinctive  feature  of  bearing  the  inferior 
canal,  "  externe  et  pone  peristome  haud  in  peristomate." 


Scarce. 
Mt.  Archer. 


P.  ventrorsa,  Dohrn. 


P.  meridionalis,  Pfeiffer, 
Amongst  stones  in  damp  gullies. 
Mt.  Archer,  Olsen's  Caves  and  (c). 

P.  wilcoxi,  Cox. 

In  rotten  wood  and  under  the  bark  stripped  from  the  Araucaria 
pines  by  the  timber-getters. 

Miriam  Vale,  Warro,  Mt.  Archer,  Cania,  Kenilvvorth,  Gympie 
(a),  Caboolture  and  the  North  Pine  River. 


BY    C.  HEDLEY    AND    C.  T.  MUSSON.  561 

P.  strangei,  Pfeiffer. 

Under  logs  and  leaves  in  scrubs  ;  common. 
Miriam  Vale,  Three  Moon  Creek,  Cania,   Dalgangal,  Banban, 
Kilkivan,  Gympie  and  the  North  Pine  River. 

DlPLOMMATINA    EGREGIA,  n.Sp. 

Shall  dextral,  umbilicate,  elliptically  ovate,  thin,  translucent ; 
colour,  shell  white  beneath  an  amber  epidermis ;  whorls  5J- 
regularly  increasing,  slightly  convex,  flattened  beneath  the  suture, 
the  last  exceeding  in  length  the  remainder,  slightly  ascending  at 
the  aperture  ;  sculpture,  numerous,  small,  slightly  raised,  oblique 
ribs,  of  which  there  are  about  forty  on  the  body 
whorl,  becoming  closer  as  the  whorl  proceeds,  on 
the  antepenultimate  there  are  few,  and  on  the 
earlier  none,  between  the  ribs  microscopically,  regu- 
larly, spirally  striated  ;  suture  impressed  ;  apex 
obtuse  ;  umbilicus  narrow  and  deep  ;  aperture 
scarcely  oblique,  oval,  rounded  below,  right  margin 
of  peristome  narrow  at  the  point  of  insertion, 
becoming  wider  and  more  reflected  as  it  approaches  the  columella, 
the  latter  widely  reflected  over  the  perforation  and  terminating 
abruptly  above,  body  whorl  overlaid  within  the  aperture  by  a 
slight  callus.     Operculum  not  collected.     Alt.  3 J,  breadth  l|mm. 

Hob. — Calliungal  (Musson)  ;  dead  shells  only. 

Type  specimens  are  deposited  in  the  Australian  Museum. 

This  species  belongs  to  the  subgenus  Arinia,  of  H.  and  A. 
Adams  ;  it  has  no  ally  in  the  Australian  fauna,  but  approaches 
D.  minus,  Sow.,  and  D.  scalatella,  -Dohrn,  from  Luzon  in  the 
Philippines. 

Helicina  diversicolor,  Cox. 

Under  stones  ;  fairly  plentiful. 

Miriam  Yale,  Warro,  Kilkivan,  Gympie,  Kenil worth  and 
North  Pine  River. 


562      ON   A   COLLECTION   OF    LAND   AND   FRESH    WATER   SHELLS, 
H.  GLADSTONENSIS,  Cox. 

Under  stones  in  damp  and  shady  places ;  widely  distributed 
and  fairly  plentiful. 

Miriam  Vale,  Mt.  Archer,  Olsen's  Caves,  Calliungal,  Cania, 
Dalgangal,  Banban,  Kilkivan,  and  Gympie  (a). 

Limnea  lessoni,  Deshayes. 
Variable,  plentiful,  and  widely  distributed. 
Miriam    Vale,    Warro,    Gracemere,     Rockhampton,    Jericho, 
Torsdale,  Cania,  Dalgangal  and  Banban. 

var.  angasi,  Sowerby. 
Durundu. 

Bulinus  beddomei,  Nelson  and  Taylor. 
Plentiful  and  variable. 
Rockhampton. 

B.  reevei,  Ad.  and  Ang.,  var.  truncatus,  H.  Adams. 
Boyne  Island  and  Lake  Victoria,  Calliungal. 

var.  obesus,  H.  Adams. 
Coomooboolaroo. 

B.  proteus,  Sowerby. 

Miriam  Vale,  Facing  and  Curtis  Islands,  Gracemere,  Coomoo- 
boolaroo, Rockhampton,  Torsdale,  Dalgangal,  Gympie,  Kroombit, 
Calliungal,  Durundu  and  North  Pine  River. 

B.  pectorosus,  Conrad. 
Jericho. 

B.  mamillatus,  Sowerby. 
Rockhampton. 

B.  kreffti,  Clessin. 
Rockhampton. 

B.  gracilentus,  E.  A.  Smith. 
Jewel  Creek,  Rockhampton. 

B,  productus,  E.  A.  Smith. 
Durundu. 


BY   C.  HEDLEY   AND   C.  T.  MUSSON.  563 

B.  pryamidatus,  Sowerby. 
Gracemere. 

B.  fusiformis,  Nelson  and  Taylor. 

Facing  Island. 

The  above  forms  of  Bulinus  are  recorded,  but  the  writers  do 
not  endorse  their  claims  to  specific  rank,  which  in  some  instances 
are  extremely  shadowy.  Upon  few  genera  has  synonymy,  that 
curse  of  Babel  upon  science,  fallen  heavier  than  upon  the 
Australian  Bulinus.  The  bewildering  multiplicity  of  names 
applied  to  a  few  protean  forms  needs  most  careful  sifting  by  a 
local  student ;  any  foreign  author  who  should  attempt  the  task 
with  but  a  handful  of  material  would  make  confusion  worse 
confounded. 

Ancylus  australicus,  Tate. 

Torsdale. 

Planorbis  gilberti,  Dunker. 

Plentiful. 

Miriam  Vale,  Gracemere,  Coomooboolaroo,  Bogantungan,  Calli- 
ungal,  Cania  and  Banban. 

Segmentina  victoria,  E.  A.  Smith. 
Coomooboolaroo,  Calliungal  and  Banban. 

Melania  tatei,  Brazier. 

Miriam  Yale,  Warro,  Gracemere,  Jewel  Creek,  Rockhampton, 
Coomooboolaroo,  River  Medway,  Bogantungan,  Lake  Victoria, 
River  Dee,  Calliungal  and  Banban. 

M.  denisoniensis,  Brot. 
Jewel  Creek,  Rockhampton. 

M.  queenslandica,  E.  A.  Smith. 
Colosseum  Creek,  Miriam  Vale. 

Hydrobia  brazieri,  E.  A.  Smith. 

River  Barambah  at  Banban,  Calliungal. 
37 


564      ON   A    COLLECTION    OF   LAND    AND    FRESH    WATER    SHELLS. 

Bythinia  tryoni,  E.  A.  Smith. 
Three  Moon  Creek  and  Dalgangal. 

Larina  strangei,  A.  Adams. 
Banban. 

VlVIPARA    SUBLINEATA,  Comad. 

Jordan  Creek,  Jericho.     Two  specimens. 

V.  essingtonensis,  Shuttleworth. 

Scrubby  Creek,  Gracemere,  Rockhampton,  Coomooboolaroo  and 
Kroombit  Creek. 

SPHiERIUM    QUEENSLANDICUM,  E.  A.   Smith. 

Colosseum  Creek,  Miriam  Vale,  Curtis  Island,  Coomooboolaroo 
and  Calliungal. 

Corbicula  ovalina,  Deshayes. 

Rockhampton,  Scrubby  Creek,  Gracemere,  Lake  Victoria,  River 
Dee,  Calliungal,  River  Mary,  Gym  pie  (a),  Dalgangal  and  Banban 

C.   minor,  Prime. 

Scrubby  Creek  ,and   Lagoon,   Gracemere,   Lake   Victoria  and 
River  Dee,  Calliungal. 

Unio  australis,  Lamarck. 

Gracemere,  Jordan  Creek,  Jericho,  Alpha,  Dalgangal,  Banban 
and  Durundu. 

U.  depressus,  Lamarck,  var.  angasi,  Lea. 

Miriam  Vale,  Granite  Creek,  Warro,  Mary  River,  Gympie  (a). 

var.  mutabilis,  Lea. 
Mary  River  at  Kenilworth. 

U.  nov^:-hollandi/E,  Gray. 

Granite    Creek,    Warro,   Dee    River,    Calliungal,    and    Mary 
River,  Gympie  (a). 


565 


DESCRIPTIONS  OF  SOME  NEW  SPECIES  OF  PULMO- 

NATE   MOLLUSCA   FROM   AUSTRALIA  AND 

THE   SOLOMON   ISLANDS. 

By  J.  C.  Cox,  M.D.,  F.L.S. 

(Plates  xx.  and  xxi.) 

Helix  (Hadra)  oscarensis,  n.sp. 

(PL  xx.,  figs.  6  and  7,  enlarged  twice). 

Shell  lenticular;  of  a  dull  lustrous  opaque  cretaceous  pale  cream 
colour,  except  the  three  apical  whorls,  which  are  of  a  dark  yellowish- 
brown  hue,  and  this  deepening  of  colour  in  a  less  degree  is  mani- 
fested in  a  few  irregular-sized  spaces  across  the  whorls  (not 
sufficiently  shown  in  fig.  6).  Whorls  six  ;  very  gradually  increas- 
ing in  size  ;  irregularly,  but  closely,  rather  coarsely,  transversely, 
arcuately  striate,  with  lines  of  growth  becoming  less  distinct  on 
the  three  apical  whorls  as  they  approach  the  apex  ;  the  whorls 
are  flatly  slanting,  not  so  rounded  as  fig.  6  would  lead  to  suppose, 
smoother  below  the  periphery  of  the  last  whorl  than  above ;  last 
whorl  sub-acutely  keeled  at  the  periphery,  the  keel  is  white  and 
opaque,  margining  the  periphery  of  the  last  whorl  before  reaching 
the  peristome,  causing  it  to  be  rather  acutely  angled ;  immediately 
below  the  peripheral  carinal  edge  of  the  last  whorl,  the  colour  of 
the  shell  is  darker  than  the  rest  of  the  lower  half  of  the  whorl. 
With  the  mouth  away  from  one,  as  shown  in  fig.  7,  the  shell  is  seen 
to  have  a  deep  open  umbilicus,  more  so  than  is  represented  in 
fig.  7,  about  one-third  of  it  being  overlapped  by  an  expanded 
columella  ;  the  peristome  is  simple,  everted  and  slightly  expanded; 
aperture  roundly  lunate,  darker  within  than  at  the  internal  edge; 


566     DESCRIPTIONS  OF  SOME  NEW  SPECIES  OF  PULMONATE  MOLLUSCA, 

upper  margin  of  the  peristome  inserted  into  the  carinal  margin  of 
the  periphery  of  the  last  whorl ;  columella  triangularly  expanded, 
white  and  smooth,  no  trace  of  a  callous  expansion  between  the 
ends  of  the  peristome  on  the  body  whorl.  The  suture  of  the 
whorls  is  well  impressed,  margined  above  with  a  faint  opaque 
white  line,  a  continuation  of  the  carinal  margin  of  the  periphery. 
The  apex  shows  no  signs  of  a  granular  sculpture.  Diam.  maj.  20, 
min.  17,  alt.  14  mm. 

Hah. — The  Oscar  Ranges,  20  miles  from  the  Barrier  Ranges, 
West  Australia  (Froggatt). 

Type  in  the  Macleay  Museum. 

Helix  (Hadra)  derbyi,  n.sp. 

(PI.  xx.,  figs.  4  and  5.) 

Shell  depressedly  globose ;  whorls  5^-  to  6,  very  gradually 
increasing,  with  a  moderately  large  open  deep  umbilicus,  more  so 
than  is  represented  in  fig.  5  ;  the  periphery  of  the  last  whorl  is 
smoothly  rounded  to  the  aperture ;  colour  light  brown,  marbled 
with  lighter  patches,  but  not  regularly  across  the  whorls  ;  surface 
strongly  but  irregularly  transversely  striated  with  curved  lines 
of  growth,  the  convexity  of  the  curves  being  upwards.  Apex 
very  slightly  raised  ;  last  whorl  deflected  at  its  termination  ;  the 
periphery  is  margined  by  a  narrow  pale  band,  but  in  no  way 
carinated ;  aperture  elongately  lunate,  the  right  margin  inserted 
below  the  centre  of  the  periphery  of  the  preceding  whorl,  the 
columellar  margin  with  a  slight  expansion  at  its  insertion,  the 
edge  of  the  peristome  very  slightly  everted  and  thickened.  Apical 
whorl  quite  smooth.  The  base  of  the  shell  is  convex,  more  faintly 
striated  than  the  upper  surface,  of  a  lighter  colour  and  not  marbled. 
Whorls  rounded,  suture  deep  and  well  defined,  but  not  margined. 
Diam.  maj.  11,  min.  9,  alt.  6  mm. 

Hob. — The  Derby  District,  Barrier  Ranges,  Western  Australia 
(Froggatt). 

Type  in  the  Macleay  Museum. 


BY    DR.  J.  c.  COX.  567 

Bulimus  (Placostylus)  hobsoni,  n.sp. 

(PI.  xx.?  figs.  2  and  3.) 

Shell  deeply  and  openly  rim  ate,  comparatively  thin  and  light 
for  its  size,  translucent,  the  sculpture  and  markings  are  very 
visible  on  the  body  whorl  through  the  wall  of  the  shell  by  trans- 
mitted light ;  shining  and  lustrous,  of  a  light  reddish-brown 
colour,  the  whorls  of  the  spire  becoming  lighter  in  shade  and 
more  of  a  pinkish-brown  ;  ornamented  with  many  irregularly 
sized  and  irregularly  distributed  chestnut-coloured  tentoriform 
markings ;  whorls  slightly  inflated,  causing  the  suture  to  assume 
an  impressed  character.  Suture  margined  by  a  narrow  opaque 
slightly  raised  knotted  selvaged  margin  (not  smooth  and  straight 
as  represented  in  the  figures) ;  whorls  longitudinally  irregularly 
marked  with  lines  of  growth  and  transversely  subcostately  ridged 
with  rather  coarse  raised  undulating  lines,  which  frequently  anas- 
tomose (a  character  quite  omitted  in  the  figures,  but  which  is  very 
characteristic),  becoming  much  less  distinct  on  the  whorls  beyond 
the  body  whorl,  till,  on  the  third  whorl  from  it,  they  are  almost 
invisible,  and  are  gradually  replaced  by  a  granular  punctation, 
which  increases  in  distinctness  quite  to  the  apex  •  these  granular 
punctures  are  disposed  in  two  distinct  transverse  slanting  rows, 
one  running  from  right  to  left,  the  other  from  left  to  right. 
Aperture  oblong-ovate,  of  a  pinkish-brown  colour;  peristome  only 
slightly  thickened  and  everted,  pinkish-brown  throughout,  except 
at  the  columella  which  is  of  an  opaque  white  only  very  faintly 
tinged  with  pink-brown  ;  columella  broadly  expanded  and  dividing 
at  its  insertion,  as  in  all  the  shells  of  this  group,  into  two  processes, 
the  outer  and  smallest  gradually  blending  with  a  thin  transparent 
glassy  callus,  which  runs  towards  the  insertion  of  the  upper  end  of 
the  peristome,  which  is  rather  arched  out  from  the  side  of  the 
shell  as  it  leaves  its  insertion  (more  so  than  is  represented  in  the 
figure),  the  larger  process  of  the  divided  columella  enters  spirally 
the  interior  of  the  shell.  In  the  several  specimens  of  this  species 
which  I  have  seen,  there  is  no  disposition  to  the  formation  of  a 


568     DESCRIPTIONS  OF  SOME  NEW  SPECIES  OF  PULMONATE  MOLLUSCA, 

callosity  or  tooth  on  the  body  whorl  in  the  aperture  between  the 
inserted  ends  of  the  peristome.     Length  58,  breadth  27  mm. 

Hab. —  Malanta  Island,  Solomon  Islands  (HobsoriJ. 

Type  in  my  collection. 

When  first  presented  with  specimens  of  this  shell,  I  was  inclined 
to  look  upon  it  only  as  a  variety  of  my  Bulimus  scotti,  described 
in  the  Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  of  London  of  1873,  page  152  ;  but  the 
examination  of  more  recent  additions  to  my  collection,  and  of  the 
specimens  in  Mr.  Hodgson's  cabinet  indicates  that  they  are  worthy 
of  separation.  It  is  difficult  to  light  on  characters  of  this  fine 
group  of  shells  which  are  specially  occupants  of  the  South  Pacific 
Islands,  not  including  New  Guinea.  Their  great  holdfast  appears 
to  be  the  Fiji  and  Solomon  groups  proper,  a  few  coming  from  the 
New  Hebrides  and  other  groups.  This  is  a  question  which  is 
well  worthy  of  being  worked  out.  The  group  is  in  all  instances 
characterised  by  granular  punctation  of  the  apex,  but  the  punc- 
tation  is  not  alike  distributed  in  all  cases;  as  a  rule,  it  is  in 
transverse  rows.  Another  character  quite  separates  the  group 
into  two  divisions  ;  one  is  smooth,  only  showing  longitudinal  lines 
of  growth  on  the  body  whorl,  the  other  division  is  invariably 
transversely  sculptured,  with  more  or  less  straight  rugae,  in  some 
instances  taking  on  more  the  character  of  lineations  than  of 
ridges. 

Hedleya  macleayi,  gen.  et  sp.nov. 

(PL  xxi.,  figs.  2,  5,  8,  and  10.) 

Shell  dextral,  imperforate,  thin,  translucent,  elongate,  subcylin- 
drical,  slightly  tapering  and  blunt  at  the  apex.  Colour  amber. 
Whorls  8J,  tumidly  inflated,  gradually  increasing,  the  last  com- 
prising nearly  one-third  of  the  total  length.  Sculpture,  numerous, 
tolerably  regular,  close,  slightly  curved,  scarcely  oblique,  sharp, 
erect  ribs,  of  which  about  45  ornament  the  final  whorl ;  they  are 
not  continuous  from  whorl  to  whorl,  do  not  anastomose,  and  are 
separated  by  smooth  interstices  of  two  or  three  times  their  breadth ; 
on  the  upper  whorls  these  ribs  grow  weaker  and  closer,  until  they 
fade  away  on  the  second  and   third  whorls  ;    across  the  ventral 


BY    DR.  J.  c.  COX.  569 

surface  of  the  body  whorl  a  deep  dint  (as  of  a  groove  worn  by  a 
rope  in  wood)  extends  obliquely  for  a  quarter  of  the  circumference 
of  the  shell  and  occupies  the  central  third  of  the  space  between 
the  suture  and  the  insertion  of  the  columella.  Suture  deeply 
impressed.  Apex  smooth,  depressed,  first  whorl  discoidal,  first 
two  and  a-half  hemispherical.  Aperture  oblique,  effuse  anteriorly, 
in  outline  distorted  rhomboid,  square  anteriorly  (not  rounded  as 
in  the  figure),  angled  posteriorly ;  peristome  strongly  thickened 
and  reflected  throughout,  callus  on  body  whorl  thin,  transparent, 
not  defined  at  its  limit  and  would  scarcely  be  perceptible  but  for 
the  microscopically  granulated  surface  which  it  shares  with  the 
columella  ;  columella  straight,  continued  from  the  base  in  the 
direction  of  the  axis  of  the  shell,  then  sharply  doubling  by  a 
sigmoid  flexure  around  the  orifice  of  the  anterior  canal;  this  canal 
presents  exteriorly  an  arched  ridge  parallel  to  the  columellar 
margin  and  divided  therefrom  by  a  deep  and  narrow  groove 
resembling  an  umbilical  crevice ;  the  position  of  the  obsolete 
posterior  canal  is  marked  by  a  small  entering  callous  ridge  (not 
shown  in  my  illustration)  near  the  posterior  angle  of  the  aperture. 
Length  8£,  breadth  2  mm. 

Hah. — Cairns,  North  Queensland  (Froggatt). 

Type  in  the  Macleay  Museum  and  in  my  collection. 

Generic  characters  should  be  derived  from  more  than  one  species 
and  from  more  knowledge  of  the  mollusc  than  the  naked  shell 
affords.  Awaiting  anatomical  details  of  the  animal  and  the 
discovery  of  fresh  species  in  the  unexplored  wilds  of  Northern 
Queensland,  Papua,  and  Malaysia,  I  will  leave  conchological 
students  to  construct  a  generic  diagnosis,  if  they  require  one, 
from  the  foregoing  description  of  the  type.  Merely  will  I  premise 
that  Hedleya,  so-called  in  compliment" to  my  friend  Mr.  C.  Hedley, 
F.L.S.,  is  undoubtedly  an  aberrant  member  of  the  Pupinidse,  as 
indicated  by  its  anterior  and  posterior  canals;  whilst  their  unusual 
position  and  development,  and  especially  the  peripheral  scrobicu- 
lation  on  the  body  whorl,  effectually  sunder  it  from  all  known 
forms. 


570     DESCRIPTIONS  OF  SOME  NEW  SPECIES  OF  PULMONATE  MOLLUSCA. 

I  have  to  apologise  for  the  illustrations  I  offer  of  this  shell, 
which  are  far  from  good,  and  should  be  interpreted  with  the 
corrections  conveyed  in  the  description.  The  outline,  fig.  10, 
represents  the  shell  of  the  natural  size ;  fig.  5  is  magnified  three, 
and  figs.  2  and  8  six  diameters,  respectively. 

The  large  central  figure  on  PI.  xx.,  fig.  1,  is  the  animal  of 
Bulimus  MacConnelli,  Reeve. 

Fig.  9  on  PI.  xxi.  is  a  very  faithful  representation  of  the  animal 
of  Coeliaxis  australis,  Forbes,  =  Balea  australis,  Forbes. 

Figs.  4  and  7  are  enlarged  figures  of  the  young  state  of  Coeliaxis 
before  decollation  has  occurred.  I  wish  to  draw  special  attention 
to  the  enlargement  of  the  second  whorl  in  this  stage  of  develop- 
ment. I  find  from  observation  that  it  is  this  enlargement  which 
first  shows  signs  of  dissolution  and  which  ends  in  decollation. 

The  carbonate  of  lime,  of  which  this  thickened  whorl  is  com- 
posed, is  more  exposed  to  the  carbonic  acid  held  in  solution  in 
the  clamp  localities  which  this  species  inhabits,  than  the  other 
whorls  are  ;  its  prominence  causes  the  epidermis  to  be  early  worn 
off  it ;  being  exposed,  the  carbonic  acid  in  solution  more  readily 
acts  on  the  insoluble  carbonate  of  lime  composing  it,  and  converts 
the  insoluble  carbonate  into  a  soluble  bicarbonate.  The  erosion, 
as  far  as  I  have  been  able  to  observe  from  specimens  kept  in  a 
box  of  damp  sand,  never  begins  in  the  apex;  the  apex  really  drops 
off  when  this  nodose  second  whorl  becomes  dissolved.  What 
purpose  this  enlargement  of  the  second  whorl  serves  in  the 
economy  of  the  young  is  difficult  to  conjecture ;  it  may  be  that 
its  increased  weight  in  the  early  developmental  stage  would  cause 
it  to  lie  flat  beside  the  animal,  and  in  this  way  would  be  less 
exposed  to  injury  as  the  animal  glides  about ;  or  it  may  be  for 
increased  strength  for  protection. 


571 


DESCRIPTION   OF   A   NEW   DIPLOMORPHA. 

By  W.  D.  Hartman,  M.D. 

(Communicated  by  J.  C.  Cox,  M.D.,  F.L.S.) 

(Plate   xxi.,  figs.   1,  3,  and  6.) 

Diplomorpha  Coxi,  Hartm. 

Shell  ovate,  thick  and  stout,  body  whorl  inflated,  apex  acute ; 
whorls  4£,  rounded,  suture  impressed,  body  whorl  nearly  two- 
thirds  the  length ;  transverse  striae  coarse ;  epidermis  absent. 
Colour  a  soiled  white,  with  the  apical  whorls  a  pale  reddish-saffron 
colour,  labium  white.,  widely  reflected,  thick,  and  slightly  revolute, 
with  a  heavy  deposit  on  the  pillar  lip.  Umbilicus  open,  exhibiting 
one  revolution,  aperture  a  soiled  white,  with  a  reddish  colour  within 
the  inner  margin  of  the  labium.  L.  27,  D.  15,  L.  apt.  10,  D.  apt. 
6  mm. 

Hab. — Aneiteum,  New  Hebrides  (Dr.  Cox,  per  S.  Raymond 
Roberts). 

Obs. — Some  ten  years  ago  Dr.  Cox  sent  me  this  shell,  which  I 
returned  to  him  as  unknown.  At  that  time  I  was  unacquainted 
with  the  genus.  Since  then  I  have  possessed  all  the  species,  and 
I  take  great  pleasure  in  associating  this  fine  shell  with  the  name 
of  one  who  has  done  so  much  for  the.  science  of  conchology. 


572  SOME   NEW   SOUTH    WALES    PLANTS    ILLUSTRATED, 


SOME  NEW  SOUTH  WALES  PLANTS   ILLUSTRATED. 

(No.  I.) 

By  R.  T.  Baker,  Assistant  Curator,  Technological 
Museum,  Sydney. 

(Plate  xxxvn.) 

Acacia  prominens,  A.  Cunn.  in  G.  Don,  Gen.  Syst.  ii.  406,  B.F1. 

ii.  371. 

One  of  the  first  signs  of  the  wattle-flowering  season  around 
Sydney  is  the  presence  of  beautiful  sprays  of  this  Acacia  in 
florists'  windows. 

It  begins  to  flower  in  July  and  continues  to  about  the  middle 
of  September. 

The  best  time  to  collect  the  seed  is  November  and  December 
for  Sydney,  and  February  for  the  southern  districts. 

The  principal  Sydney  localities  where  it  is  to  be  found  appear 
to  be  Oatley,  Hurstville,  Penshurst,  and  Canterbury ;  thence  to 
the  Illawarra.  It  is  also  plentiful  between  Gosford  and  Newcastle, 
and  outside  this  area  it  extends  to  the  Blue  Mountains  on  the 
west  and  as  far  south  as  the  Snowy  Range,  near  the  Victorian 
border. 

My  observations  and  researches  in  connection  with  this  plant 
in  the  living  state  have  supplemented  a  few  botanical  points  to 
Bentham's  description,  which,  as  we  know,  was  made  from  dried 
specimens  ;  and  from  numerous  examinations  of  fresh  material  I 
have,  at  the  same  time,  been  compelled  to  differ  in  a  slight  degree 
from  his  diagnosis. 


BY    R    T.  BAKER.  573 

As  there  is  no  necessity  to  re-publish  what  in  Bentham's  descrip- 
tion the  plate  fully  bears  out,  I  will  only  state  in  what  respects 
it  differs  somewhat,  owing  to  the  variability  of  the  species. 

It  is  described  as  "a  tall  shrub,"  but  it  is  very  often  to  be  seen 
over  20  feet,  and  not  uncommonly  exceeding  30  feet  in  height, 
with  a  diameter  in  proportion. 

The  phyllodes  often  extend  to  2  inches,  particularly  in  plants 
found  in  the  northern  districts;  about  1£  inches  in  those  in  the 
neighbourhood  of  Sydney,  and  1  inch  in  southern  examples. 

The  racemes  are  given  by  Bentham  as  "about  as  long  as"  the 
phyllodes,  but  I  find  them  almost  always  longer  in  the  living 
state.     They  shrink  very  much  in  drying. 

The  pod  ("  neglected  by  collectors  in  the  majority  of  specimens 
gathered")  can  scarcely  be  said  to  be  "very  flat";  it  is  light  warm- 
brown  in  colour,  glabrous  and  rugose ;  measuring  1  to  3  inches 
long  and  \  to  1  inch  broad. 

The  seeds  are  at  first  transverse,  but  in  some  cases  oblique  and 
longitudinal,  along  the  centre;  they  appear  to  change  their  position 
prior  to  falling. 

The  coloured  plate  (Bot.  Mag.,  Vol.  lxiil,  No.  3502)  in  no  way 
assists  to  identify  the  species. 


EXPLANATION  OF   PLATE. 
Plate  xxxvii. 
Branchlet  collected  at  Canterbury,  near  Sydney,  Aug.  1891  (nat.  size). 
Fig.    1. — Unexpanded  flower  (enlarged). 
Fig.    2. — Expanded  flower  (enlarged). 
Fig.    3.— Pistil  (enlarged). 
Fig.    4. — Various  views  of  a  stamen  (enlarged). 
Fig.    5. — Pollen  grain  (enlarged). 
Fig.    6. — Twig  with  pod  (Hurstville)  (nat.  size). 
Fig.    7. — Pod  from  Snowy  Mountains  (nat.  size). 
Fig.    S. — Seed  (enlarged). 
Figs.  9  and  10.— Extreme  forms  of  phyllodes  (nat.  size) 


574  NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 

Mr.  W.  S.  Duncan  sent  for  exhibition  an  interesting  collection 
of  land  and  freshwater  Mollusca,  comprising  twenty-two  species, 
obtained  in  the  neighbourhood  of  Inverell,  N.S.W.  A  list  of 
them,  numbered  as  sent,  determined  by  Mr.  C.  Hedley,  with 
localities  and  remarks,  is  as  follows  : — 

1.  Rhytida  capillacea,  Ferussac. 

Hab. — Five  miles  from  Inverell,  in  basalt  country. 

2.  Hadra  liveiyoolensis,  Brazier. 

Hab. — Generally  distributed. 

The  black  and  red  soils  have  corresponding  effects  on  the 

living  shell  of  this  species ;  the  colour  soon  fades  after 

the  animal  has  been  extracted. 

3.  Nanina  dora,  Cox,  MSS. 

Hab. — Generally  distributed. 

4.  Charopa  funerea,  Cox. 

Hab.  — Generally  distributed. 

5.  Charopa  funerea,  var. 

Hab. — Generally  distributed. 

6.  Charopa  mussoni,  Cox,  MSS. 

Hab. — Dog  Trap;  black  soil. 

Rare  ;  have  only  obained  four  or  five  specimens. 

7.  Charopa  nautiloides,  Cox. 

Hab. — Goonoowigall ;  granite. 

8.  Charopa  paradoxa,  Cox. 

Hab. — Generally  distributed. 

9.  Charopa  paradoxa,  var. 

Hab. — Generally  distributed. 
Only  a  smooth  variety  of  C.  paradoxa,  I  believe. 
10.  Charopa  duncani,  Musson,  MSS. 
Hab. — Gum  Flat ;  black  soil. 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS.  575 

11.  Pupa  pacifica,  Pfeiffer. 

Hab. — Generally  distributed. 

12.  Pupa  pedicula,  Shuttle  worth. 

Hab. — Generally  distributed. 

13.  Pupa  pedicula,  Shuttleworth. 

Hab. — Generally  distributed. 

14.  Succinea  arborea,  Adams  and  Angas. 

Hab. — Little  Plain,  fifteen  miles  from  Inverell. 
This  genus  is  very  poorly  represented  up  here ;  this  is  the 
only  species  I  can  find  a  trace  of,  and  that  rarely. 

15.  Corbicula  prolongata,  Prime. 

Hab. — Mclntyre  River. 

16.  Corbicula  nepzanensis,  Lesson. 

Hab. — Mclntyre  River. 

17.  Limnea  lessoni,  Deshayes. 

Hab. — Big  River,  The  Gwydir. 

18.  Bulinus  proteus,  Sowerby. 

Hab.—  Mclntyre  River. 

19.  Bulinus  brazieri,  Smith. 

Hab. — Mclntyre  River. 

20.  Bulinus  brazieri,  Smith. 

Hab. — Mclntyre  River. 

21.  Bulinus  gibbosus,  Gould. 

Hab. — Mclntyre  River. 

22.  Bulinus  sp. 

Hab. — Waterhole  near  Big  River. 

23.  Melania  balonnensis,  Conrad. 

Hab. — Mclntyre  River. 

24.  Planorbis  brazieri,  Clessin. 

Hab. — Big  River,  Beverley. 
Uncommon. 

25.  Ancylus  australicus,  Tate. 

Hab. — Mclntyre  River. 
Uncommon. 

26.  Unio  australis,  Lamarck. 

Hab. — Mclntyre  River. 


576  NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 

Mr.  Hedley  exhibited,  on  behalf  of  Mr.  Whitelegge,  and  read 
the  following  note  on  specimens  of  a  species  of  Glaucus  frequently 
washed  ashore  on  the  coast : — "A  species  of  GlaiLcus  is  frequently 
washed  ashore  on  the  coast  of  N.S.W.,  the  determination  of  which 
puzzled  myself  and  my  scientific  friends.  The  Monograph  of  this 
genus  in  the  Challenger  Reports  quotes  several  species  whose 
illustrations  and  descriptions  occur  in  works  of  which  no  copies 
exist,  so  far  as  I  am  aware,  in  Australia.  On  being  favoured  by 
Mr.  Whitelegge  with  some  fine  specimens  collected  by  him  at 
Maroubra  Bay,  near  Sydney,  I  referred  them  to  Prof.  Dr.  R, 
Bergh,  of  Copenhagen,  the  highest  authority  on  this  and  other 
orders  of  nudibranchiate  mollusca.  Dr.  Bergh  replied  to  my 
enquiries  with  his  usual  kindness  and  courtesy,  and  as  such 
information  may  be  of  equal  service  to  my  fellow  students,  the 
following  extract  from  his  letter  is  here  given: — 'I  have  examined 
the  Glauci  you  sent.  According  to  the  anatomy  the  animal  is 
absolutely  the  circum-equatorial  Gl.  atlanticus,  Forster.  The 
drawing  you  sent  seems  to  represent  the  varieties  of  the  species 
which  I  formerly  described  as  Gl.  lineatus,  gracilis,  and  longi- 
cirrhus  (Anatom.  Bidr.  til.  Kundsk.  om  iEolidierne,  Danske 
Vidensk.  Selsk.  Skrif.  R.  5.  Naturvidensk.  og  Mathemat.  Afdel. 
vii.  1864,  pp.  285-295,  Tab.  vm.  a,  viii.  b)  ;  they  represent 
certainly  merely  varieties.  The  Gl.  lineatus  seems  moreover  to 
be  the  Gl.  Peronii,  Less.,  and  the  Gl.  Jlagellum,  Blumenbach  ; 
whilst  the  Gl.  longicirrhus  very  likely  is  identical  with  the  Gl. 
pacificus  of  Eschscholtz.' " 

Mr.  Deane  exhibited  a  few  specimens  of  Eucalypt  timbers  with 
a  view  of  showing  that  their  characters  are  not  without  value  as 
an  aid  in  the  determination  of  species.  After  referring  to  Dr. 
Woolls'  recent  paper  in  the  last  number  of  the  Proceedings,  Mr. 
Deane  pointed  out  that  in  his  opinion  more  than  one  recognised 
species  would  yet  have  to  be  subdivided  as  had  already  been  found 
desirable  in  the  cases  of  E.  leucoxylon,  E.  paniculata,  and  others  ; 
a  belief  which  he  thought  was  certainly  well  grounded  in  the  case 
of  one  of  the  species  illustrated  by  the  specimens  on  the  table. 


NOTES   AND   EXHIBITS.  577 

Dr.  Cox  exhibited  specimens  of  the  British  snail,  Helix 
(Xerophila)  ericetorum,  Miiller,  naturalised  in  Australia ;  the 
shells  were  found  in  grass  tussocks  at  "Levens,"  about  12  miles 
west  of  Warooka,  York's  Peninsula,  S.  Australia ;  the  species 
was  probably  imported  with  some  English  grass  seed  which  a  few 
years  ago  was  there  cultivated;  but  this  appears  to  be  the  first 
recorded  instance  of  its  occurrence  in  Australia.  Also  drawings 
and  specimens  of  mollusca  in  illustration  of  his  paper. 

Mr.  Froggatt  sent  for  exhibition  a  collection  of  Hymenoptera — 
about  100  species — recently  obtained  by  him  at  Ballarat,  Victoria; 
a  large  Tipula  from  Rose  Bay;  and  some  Homopterous  galls  of  both 
sexes,  probably  of  a  small  variety  of  Brachyscelis  ovicola,  Schr., 
from  Wollongong,  together  with  two  species  of  parasitic  Hymen- 
optera— one  of  them  with  a  curiously  developed  last  abdominal 
segment — bred  from  the  female  galls. 

Mr.  Baker  exhibited  specimens  of  Acacia  prominens  from 
various  localities  in  illustration  of  his  paper. 

Mr.  Fletcher  read  a  note,  in  reply  to  Dr.  Dendy's  recent  article 
on  the  supposed  oviparity  of  Peripatus  leuckartii  (Victorian 
Naturalist  for  September,  Vol.  viii.,  No.  5,  p.  67),  in  which  he 
pointed  out  that  whatever  the  Victorian  Peripatus  might  be 
(whether  oviparous  as  Dr.  Dendy  supposes  ;  or  like  P.  novce- 
Zealandice,  though  viviparous  occasionally  laying  eggs  which, 
however,  do  not  hatch,  as  observed  by  Prof.  Hutton  and  corro- 
borated by  Mr.  Sedgwick),  Peripatus,  as  it  occurs  in  N.S.W.,  is 
certainly  viviparous  ;  and  in  support  of  his  statement  he  exhibited 
a  series  of  twenty-eight  embryos,  just  those  which  had  come  under 
his  notice  in  the  dissection  of  two  or  three  females,  or  had  been 
extruded  during  the  drowning  of  several  others,  and  comprising 
specimens  old  enough  to  show  the  full  number  of  developing  post- 
oral  appendages  up  to  individuals  whose  development  is  so  nearly 
complete  that  they  must  have  been  within  a  very  brief  period 
indeed  of  birth  ;  even  without  actual  witness  of  parturition  he 
thought  the  evidence  adduced  was  conclusive. 


578  NOTES   AND    EXHIBITS. 

Mr.  Trebeck  showed  some  caterpillars  destructive  to  vegetation 
from  a  garden  at  North  Shore. 

Mr.  F.  Turner  exhibited  fruits  and  seeds  of  the  Sweet  Cassava 
of  Brazil  (31anihot  Aipi,  Pohl),  grown  on  the  Clarence  River  by 
Mr.  J.  Marchant;  fruits  and  seeds  of  Sterculia  acuminata,  Beau  v., 
the  famous  Cola  Nut,  from  Sierra  Leone ;  and  the  fruits  of  Emex 
australis,  Stienh.,  a  really  dangerous  weed,  probably  introduced 
from  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope,  which  has  become  established  in 
several  places  in  N.S.W. 

Baron  von  Mueller  sent  for  exhibition  a  large  selection  from 
the  plants  from  Prince  Regent  River,  described  or  recorded  in  his 
paper,  the  same  to  be  afterwards  added  to  the  Society's  herbarium 
Also  a  specimen  of  Hyjioestes  moschata,  F.v.M.  and  Holze. 
remarkable  for  its  musky  odour  j  habitat,  some  distance  inland 
from  Port  Darwin. 


RLS.N.S.W.(2n^-Ser)Vol.VI.        Rlat 


eXXIII. 


/A     RLS.N.S.W.(2n^Ser)Vol.VI. 


Plate  XXIV 


ffl<? 


m& 


m 


|f 'I 


' 


NP 


P.L.S.N.SW(2ndSer.)VoLVI. 


Pl.XKV 


3d 


3E 


3* 


J.M.dei. 


S-,  Lei$h&C.lk 


(2niSer)  Vol  VI 


PI  XXVI 


Proc.Linn  Soc.NS.W.  (2ndSerJ  Vol.VI. 


PL  XXVIII. 


27. 


26. 


■  tv. 


W.A.H.del 


Troedel  Cooper  &CoLifh  5y< 


P.L.Stf.S  IV.  fzfid  Ser.)  Vol.   VI. 


PL.  AA7X. 


Si*  -       ^v 

■^^>                ^ 

..*s»y. 

**v-'-.*  ^fe  -■*      -.'"^ 

HMl?v     '  * 

■**>  .. 

^*>  .     .  *%e^ 

f'' 

HBK&  *'        ■-.*£*T$ 

.JB^, 

^jrab>                 ..••ri'- 

"SM-*               I         ^ 

■^S&  ■ 

,-.^    > 

gHk. 

r 

J8f 

AUSTRALIAN      ABORIGINAL     IMPLEMENTS. 


P.L.S.N-.S.W.  (i?id  Ser.)   VdL    \'i. 


PL.  XXX. 


AUSTRALIAN     ABORIGINAL     IMPLEMENTS. 


P.L.S  tf.S.W.  (4,t,/  .SVrJ    Vol.    PL 


/■/..  XXXI. 


AUSTRALIAN     ABORIGINAL     IMPLEMENTS. 


P.L.S.N.S.W.  (ind  Ser.J   Vol.    /  7. 


PL.  kXXU. 


AUSTRALIAN     ABORIGINAL     IMPLEMENT. 


P.L.S.N.S.IV.  (ind  Ser.)  Vol.   VI. 


PL.  WXX1I1. 


AUSTRALIAN    ABORIGINAL    IMPLEMENT. 


P.L.S.N.S.IV.  (ind  SerJ   Vol.    VI. 


PL.  XXXIV. 


AUSTRALIAN     ABORIGINAL     IMPLEMENT. 


P.L.S.N.S.  IV.  (2nd  SerJ  Vol.   VI. 


PL.  XXXV. 


AUSTRALIAN     ABORIGINAL     IMPLEMENT. 


P.L.S.XS.IV.  (ind  Scr.)   Vol.    VI. 


PL.  XXXVI. 


AUSTRALIAN     ABORIGINAL     IMPLEMENT. 


ACACIA     PROM1NENS. 


579 


WEDNESDAY,  OCTOBER  28th,  1891. 


The  President,  Professor  W.  A.  Haswell,  M.  A.,  D.Sc,  in  the  Chair. 


DONATIONS. 

"Agricultural  Gazette  of  N.S.W."  Vol.  ii.,  Part  8  (August, 
1891).      From  the  Director  of  Agriculture. 

"  Reichenbachia — Orchids  illustrated  and  described."  By  F. 
Sander.  Second  Series.  Vol.  i.,  Part  6  ;  "  Stettiner  Entomolo- 
gische  Zeitung."  52  Jahrg.,  Nos.  1-3  (1891).  From  the  Hon.  bir 
William  Macleay,  M.L.C.,  F.L.S. 

"  Zoologischer  Anzeiger."  xiv.  Jahrg.,  Nos.  371  and  372 
(August-September,  1891).     From  the  Editor. 

"  Nova  Acta  Regise  Societatis  Scientiarum  Upsaliensis."  Third 
Series.     Vol.  xiv.,  Fasc.  ii.  (1891).      From  the  Society. 

"  Proceedings  and  Transactions  of  the  Royal  Society  of  Canada 
for  the  year  1890."     Vol.  viii.     From  the  Society. 

U.S.  Department  of  Agriculture — Division  of  Entomology — 
"  Insect  Life."  Vol.  iii.,  Nos.  11  and  12  (August,  1891).  From 
the  Secretary  of  Agriculture. 

"Smithsonian  Institution — U.S.  National  Museum— Proceed- 
ings." Vol.  xiv.,  Nos.  852-855,  857,  and  862-863  (1891); 
"Bulletin."     No.  39,  Parts  B-E  (1891).     From  the  Museum. 

"  Bulletin  of  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History."  Vol. 
iii.,  No,  2,  one  sheet  (pp.  307-322)  (August,  1891).  From  the 
Museum. 

38 


580  DONATIONS. 

"  Reprints  of  Three  Editorials  regarding  the  priority  in  demon- 
strating the  Toxic  Effect  of  Matter  accompanying  the  Tubercle 
Bacillus  and  its  Nidus."  (1891).  From  the  Bacteriological 
Laboratory,  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia,  U.S.A. 

"  Bulletin  of  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  at  Harvard 
College."     Vol.  xxi.,  No.  5  (June,  1891).     From  the  Curator. 

"Records  of  the  Geological  Survey  of  India."  Vol.  xxiv.,  Part 
3  (1891).     From  the  Director. 

" Gesellschaf t  fiir  Erdkundezu  Berlin — Verhandlungen."  Band 
xviii.  (1891),  No.  6;  "  Zeitschrift."  Band  xxvi.  (1891),  No.  3. 
From  the  Society. 

"The  Victorian  Naturalist."  Vol.  viii.,  No.  6  (Oct.,  1891). 
From  the  Field  Naturalists'  Club  of  Victoria. 

"  Records  of  the  Australian  Museum."  Vol.  i.,  No.  9  (Oct., 
1891).     From  the  Trustees. 

"  Journal  of  the  Bombay  Natural  History  Society."  Vol  vi., 
No.  2  (1891).     From  the  Society. 

"  Revista  cle  Sciencias  Naturaes  e  Sociaes  orgao  da  Sociedade 
Carlos  Ribeiro."     Vol.  ii.,  No.  6  (1891).     From  the  Society. 

"Department  of  Agriculture,  Brisbane — Bulletin."  No.  11 
(Sept.,  1891).     From  the  Secretary  for  Agriculture. 

Six  Conchological  Pamphlets.  By  E.  A.  Smith,  F.Z.S.  From 
the  Author. 

"Perak  Government  Gazette."  Vol.  iv.,  Nos.  29  and  30 
(August  and  September,  1891).     From  the  Government  Secretary. 

"The  Australasian  Journal  of  Pharmacy."  Vol.  vi.,  No.  70 
Oct.,  1891).     From  the  Editor. 

"  The  Pharmaceutical  Journal  of  Australasia."  n.s.  Vol.  iv., 
No.  10  (October,  1891).     From  the  Editor. 


581 


PAPERS    READ. 

REVISION  OF  AUSTRALIAN   LEPIDOPTERA. 

By  E.  Meyrick,  B.A.,  F.Z.S. 

V. 

The  present  paper  practically  concludes  the  Australian  Geome- 
trina,  except  in  so  far  as  future  discoveries  may  produce  fresh 
material.  The  alterations  of  generic  nomenclature  which  will  be 
found  in  it,  and  the  substitution  of  the  family  name  Selidosemidae 
for  Boarmiadae,  are  necessary,  and  will  be  understood  by  reference 
to  my  paper  on  the  classification  of  the  European  Geometrina, 
which  will,  I  hope,  appear  in  the  Transactions  of  the  Entomo- 
logical Society  of  London  for  the  current  year.  Hence  I  shall 
not  in  general  discuss  them  here. 

The  classification  of  the  Selidosemidae  is  difficult,  owing  to  the 
fact  that  in  this  family  many  structural  characters  are  often 
different  in  closely  allied  species,  and  others  vary  greatly  within 
the  limits  of  the  same  species.  Much  judgment  is  therefore 
required  in  selecting  suitable  points  on  which  to  lay  stress  for 
distinction,  so  that  the  genera  may  be  at  once  definable  and 
natural.  The  results  given  are  the  outcome  of  considerable 
labour,  and  I  think  will  be  found  satisfactory  on  the  whole ;  but 
in  some  instances  too  little  material  has  been  available  to  make 
sure  of  accuracy.  The  neu  ration  is  in  some  genera  very  variable, 
in  others  constant,  but  I  have  in  all  cases  examined  every  speci- 
men that  could  be  obtained ;  where  variation  has  been  found,  it 
is  always  mentioned. 


582  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

SELIDOSEMIDAE. 

Ocelli  and  maxillary  palpi  usually  obsolete.  Forewings  with 
vein  5  rising  midway  between  4  and  6,  parallel,  7  and  8  rising  out 
of  9.  Hindwings  with  frenulum  developed  ;  vein  lc  absent,  5 
obsolete  or  reduced  to  a  thickened  fold,  not  tubular,  8  free  or 
coDnected  to  cell  at  a  point  only. 

A  very  large  and  cosmopolitan  family.  The  group  of  which 
Chlenias  may  be  considered  the  type  is  more  developed  in  Aus- 
tralia than  in  any  other  region,  and  may  be  regarded  as  endemic 
and  characteristic  ;  yet  even  here  it  has  evidently  suffered  much 
loss,  and  is  now  comparatively  fragmentary ;  whilst  the  group  of 
Selidosema,  dominant  in  all  regions  but  probably  much  later  in 
reaching  Australia,  has  already  developed  numerous  endemic  and 
connected  forms,  and  has  largely  taken  the  place  of  earlier  types. 

In  the  following  tabulation  of  genera  38,  Neoteristis  and  39, 
Moclilotona  are  not  included,  as  the  characters  of  the  £,  which 
are  necessarily  made  use  of,  are  unknown  for  those  genera  ;  they 
must  be  borne  in  mind  and  consulted  separately.  It  should  be 
noted  also  that  the  anterior  triangular  thoracic  crest,  when  not 
largely  developed,  is  easily  rubbed  off,  and  may  then  be  erroneously 
regarded  as  absent  (this  often  the  case  in  Amelora),  nor  can  I  be 
sure,  where  the  material  has  been  scanty,  that  I  have  not  myself 
passed  it  over  in  some  instances.  The  posterior  thoracic  crest 
is  less  exposed. 

The  structure  here  called  the  fovea  (characteristic  of  the  Selido- 
sema  group,  but  not  present  in  all  genera  of  it)  is  a  circular 
depression  on  the  lower  surface  of  the  forewing,  placed  at  the 
base  of  vein  lb,  and  found  in  the  <J  only.  It  has  sometimes  a 
striated  appearance,  and  the  edges  are  often  thickened,  but  I 
know  no  evidence  as  to  its  functions,  which  are  perhaps  secretory! 
1.  Antenna?  in  <J  bipectinated  or  rarely  only 

acutely  bidentate 2. 

Antenna?  in  <J  not  bipectinated  or  acutely 

bidentate 28. 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  583 

2.  Forevvings  in  g  with  well-marked  fovea  3. 
Forewings  in  $  without  defined  fovea...  10. 

3.  Antennal  joints  with  two   pectinations 

or  teeth  on  each  side 4. 

Antennal  joints  with  one  pectination  on 

each  side 5. 

4.  Face  with  long  projecting  tuft  of  scales  4.   Osteodes. 
Face  without  defined  tuft 14.  Ectropis. 

5.  Fovea  surmounted  by  a  small  distinct 

gland 6.  Gosymhia. 

Fovea  without  accessory  gland 6. 

6.  Face  with  strong  horny  prominence 7.  Scioglyptis. 

Face  without  horny  prominence 7 . 

7.  Femora  hairy  beneath 9.  Lophodes. 

Femora  glabrous 8. 

8 .  Thorax  hairy  beneath 8.  Selidosema. 

Thorax  only  slightly  hairy 9 . 

9.  Forewings  with  vein  1 0  absent 2.  Diastictis. 

Forewings  with  vein  1 0  present. 3.  Hyposidra. 

10.  Antennal  pectinations  continued  to  apex  11. 
Antennal  pectinations  not  continued  to 

apex 23. 

11.  Thorax  with  triangular  anterior  or  cen- 

tral crest 12. 

Thorax  without  such  crest   (but  some- 
times a  bifid  posterior  crest) 16. 

12.  Thorax  thinly  or  hardly  hairy  beneath  24.  Amelora. 
Thorax  densely  hairy  beneath 13. 

13.  Forewings  with  vein  10  rising  out  of  9  14. 
Forewings  with  vein  10  rising  separate  15. 

14.  Anterior  tibiae  with  strong  apical  hook  28.  Criomacha. 
Anterior  tibiae  without  apical  hook  .....  29.  Stathmorrhopa. 

15.  Forewings  with  vein  11  rising  out  of  10  33.  Smyriodes. 
Forewings  with  vein  11  rising  separate  32.  Ghlenias. 


584  REVISION    OF   AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

16.  Abdomen  crested  near  base 18.  Scardamia. 

Abdomen  not  crested 17. 

17.  Femora  hairy  beneath 18. 

Femora  glabrous 21. 

1  8.  Thorax  with  well-marked  posterior  crest  30.  Conosara. 
Thorax  without  posterior  crest 19. 

19.  Fore  wings  with  vein  10  connected  with 

11 .,  ..  20. 

Forewings  with  vein  10  free  from  11... 27.  Mnesampela  (part). 

20.  Forewings  with  vein  11  connected  with 

12 20.  Proboloptera. 

Forewings  with  vein  11  free  from  12..,.  31.  Mictodoca. 

21.  Female  semiapterous. 12.  Hybernia. 

Female  winged 22. 

22.  Forewings  with  vein  10  rising  out  of  9  19.  Rhinodia. 
Forewings  with  vein  10  rising  out  of  11  22.  Metrocampa. 

23.  Abdomen  with  strong  dorsal  crests 34.   Gastrina. 

Abdomen  without  crests 24. 

24.  Thorax  with  triangular  central  or  ante- 

rior crest 25. 

Thorax  without  triangular  crest 26. 

25.  Forewings   with   vein   11   anastomosing 

with  12  and  10 37.  Paralaea. 

Forewings  with  vein  11  separate 35.  Stibaroma. 

26.  Forewings  with  vein  10  absent 16.  Lomographa. 

Forewings  with  vein  10  present 27. 

27.  Forewings  with  vein  10  rising  out  of  9  17.  Deilinia. 
Forewings  with  vein  10  separate 1.  Epicompsa. 

28.  Forewings  in  <J  with  large  swollen  sub- 

basal  gland 25.  Neritodes. 

Forewings  without  such  gland 29. 

29.  Abdomen  in  <J  with  dense  basal  tufts 

beneath 23.  Planolocha. 

Abdomen  in  £  without  tufts  beneath...  30. 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  585 

30.  Femora  hairy  beneath 31. 

Femora  glabrous 32. 

31.  Fore  wings   with  vein  10   anastomosing 

with  9 21.  Idiodes. 

Forewings  with  vein  10  not  anastomos- 
ing with  9 27.  Mnesampela  (part). 

32.  Thorax  densely  hairy  beneath 33. 

Thorax  slightly  or  not  hairy 35. 

33.  Forewings  with   vein  11   anastomosing 

with  12 26.   Thalaina. 

Forewings  with  vein  11  not  anastomos- 
ing with  12., 34. 

34.  Forewings  with  vein  10  rising  out  of  11   11.  Aporoctena. 
Forewings  with  vein  10  rising  out  of  9   10.  Melanodes. 

35.  Thorax  with  strong  posterior  crest 36.  Drymoptila. 

Thorax  without  crest 36. 

36.  Forewings  with  vein  11  running  into  12  13.  Psilosticha. 
Forewings  with  vein  1 1  not  running  into 

12 37. 

37.  Forewings  with  vein  10  running  into  9   15.  Tigridoptera. 
Forewings  with  vein  10  not  running  into 

9 5.  Discalma. 

1.  Epicompsa,  n.g. 

Face  smooth.  Tongue  developed.  Palpi  moderate,  porrected, 
slender,  shortly  rough-scaled,  terminal  joint  short.  Antennae  in 
^  bipectinated,  towards  apex  simple.  Thorax  smooth,  beneath 
nearly  glabrous.  Femora  glabrous;  posterior  tibise  in  <J  not 
dilated.  Forewings  in  £  without  fovea;  veins  10  and  11  separate. 
Hindwings  normal. 

The  single  species  is  at  present  of  somewhat  uncertain  affinity. 

1.  Epic,  xanthocrossa,  n.sp. 

<J.  20  mm.  Head  and  thorax  rosy-whitish,  face  brownish. 
Palpi   yellowish.       Forewings   with   hindmargin    oblique,    thrice 


586  REVISION    OP    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

shallowly  emarginate  so  as  to  form  a  short  obtuse  triangular 
projection  on  vein  6  and  a  broader  one  on  vein  3 ;  pale  greyish- 
ochreous,  becoming  rosy-whitish  towards  costa,  with  a  few  scat- 
tered dark  grey  strigulee  ',  costa  narrowly  deep  ochreous-yellow, 
with  a  few  black  dots ;  lines  cloudy,  dark  grey,  starting  from 
strong  oblique  black  costal  strigulse ;  first  angulated  on  apex  of 
strigula ;  second  dentate,  between  costal  strigula  and  middle 
curved  outwards  but  nearly  obsolete,  on  lower  §  followed  by  a 
reddish-fuscous  blotch  nearly  reaching  hindmargin ;  an  interrup- 
ted blackish  hindmarginal  line  :  cilia  white,  with  a  sharp  fuscous 
line  internally  edged  with  ferruginous,  externally  forming  spots 
on  projections.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  waved,  angulated 
on  vein  3 ;  light  reddish-fuscous,  more  greyish  towards  middle  of 
hindmargin,  and  becoming  pale  greyish-ochreous  towards  base, 
with  some  scattered  dark  grey  strigulee  ;  second  line  straight, 
somewhat  irregular,  cloudy,  dark  grey  ;  hindmarginal  line  and 
cilia  as  in  forewings. 

Mount  Lofty,  South  Australia,  in  March ;  one  specimen  (Coll. 
Guest).     A  neatly  marked  and  singular  species. 

2.  Diastictis,  Hb. 

Face  with  projecting  tuft  of  scales  (sometimes  slight).  Tongue 
developed.  Palpi  moderate,  porrected,  rough-scaled,  terminal 
joint  moderate,  loosely  scaled.  Antennae  in  <J  bipectinated  with 
short  stout  pectinations,  apex  simple.  Thorax  not  crested,  slightly 
hairy  beneath.  Femora  glabrous ;  posterior  tibiae  in  <J  somewhat 
dilated,  often  bent.  Forewings  in  <J  with  well-marked  fovea 
(rarely  slight);  vein  10  absent,  11  anastomosing  or  connected 
with  12  and  9,  or  free.     Hindwings  normal. 

A  nearly  cosmopolitan  genus  of  some  considerable  extent, 
forming  a  development  of  Selidosema,  and  closely  connected  with 
it,  though  the  extreme  forms  differ  much.  In  many  exotic  species, 
which  cannot  be  generically  separated,  the  antennae  are  simple, 
and  transitional  forms  occur.  The  absence  of  vein  10  of  the 
forewings,  which  occurs  only  in  some  species  of  Selidosema,  is 
here  invariable.     The  Australian  species  are  only  stragglers. 


BY    E.   MEYRICK.  587 

Discal  spot  of  fore  wings  ochreous,  edged  with 

blackish 2.  australiaria. 

Discal  spot  of  forewings  wholly  dark  fuscous     3.  margarilis. 

2.  Diast.  australiaria,  Gn. 

(Halia  australiaria,  Gn.  X,  91;  Selenia  apamaria,  Walk.  255; 
Macaria  remotaria,  ib.  938;  M.  gratularia,  ib.  939;  M.  infixaria, 
ib.  939  ;  M.  frontaria,  ib.  1652  ;  M.  panagraria,  ib.  1653  ;  M. 
porrectaria,  ib.  Suppl.  1659.) 

ftQ.  '27-32  mm.  Antenna!  pectinations  in  ft  1J,  very  strongly 
ciliated.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  angularly  projecting  on  vein 
4,  slightly  in  ft,  more  strongly  in  <J>,  upper  half  somewhat  concave; 
vein  1 1  connected  with  12  and  9 ;  pale  brownish-ochreous,  sprinkled 
with  dark  fuscous  dots  or  short  strigulae,  and  sometimes  suffusedly 
irrorated  with  whitish  towards  disc  and  costa  ;  first  line  slender, 
fuscous  or  dark  fuscous,  indented  in  middle,  sometimes  obsolete ; 
a  faint  or  indistinct  fuscous  median  shade  ;  a  narrow  transverse 
somewat  irregular  ochreous  discal  spot,  strongly  edged  with 
blackish  in  ft,  less  strongly  in  Q  ;  second  line  formed  by  a  series 
of  dark  fuscous  dots,  nearly  straight,  bent  near  costa,  sometimes 
obsolete ;  terminal  area  beyond  this  line  in  £  suffused  with 
ferruginous-ochreous,  except  a  triangular  apical  patch,  which  is 
edged  anteriorly  by  a  darker  streak,  which  exists  in  ft  also  as  a 
conspicuous  short  dark  ferruginous-fuscous  streak  from  costa. 
Hind  wings  rather  strongly  angulated  on  vein  4,  more  prominently 
in  £  ;  colour,  median  shade,  and  second  line  as  in  forewings ;  a 
cloudy  dark  fuscous  discal  dot,  sometimes  indistinct ;  terminal 
area  beyond  second  line  more  brownish-tinged,  with  anterior 
margin  of  a  faint  subterminal  line  usually  more  or  less  indicated 
with  ferrugiuous-ochreous. 

Sydney,  Bathurst  (2300  feet),  and  Orange  (3000  feet),  New 
South  Wales ;  Melbourne,  Victoria  ;  Launceston,  Deloraine,  and 
Hobart,  Tasmania  ;  from  August  to  January,  common  amongst 
Acacia  decurrens,  on  which  the  larva  feeds.  The  species  is 
variable,  but  not  excessively  so,  though  the  difference  in  the  sexes 
is  rather  marked. 


588  REVISION    OF   AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

3.  Diast.  margaritis,  n.sp. 

<JQ.  26  mm.  Head,  palpi,  and  thorax  white,  sprinkled  with 
pale  ochreous.  Antennae  whitish,  pectinations  in  £  2^,  stout. 
Forewings  with  hindmargin  in  £  hardly  perceptibly,  in  £  more 
distinctly  angulated  on  vein  4  ;  vein  11  anastomosing  with  12  and 
9,  or  free ;  prismatic  whitish,  with  short  scattered  cloudy  dark 
fuscous  strigulse  ;  costa  and  veins  tinged  with  ochreous ;  first  line 
and  median  shade  straight,  thick,  dark  fuscous,  not  reaching  costa; 
a  transverse  dark  fuscous  discal  spot  before  median  shade;  second 
line  slender,  blackish-fuscous,  nearly  straight,  bent  near  costa  ; 
a  series  of  white  spots  representing  subterminal  line,  preceded  by 
a  ferruginous-ochreous  suffusion  nearly  reaching  second  line,  hind- 
marginal  area  beyond  this  pale  brownish-ochreous :  cilia  pale 
brownish-ochreous,  base  white.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin 
slightly  angulated  in  (J,  rather  prominently  in  Q  >  colour  and 
markings  as  in  forewings,  but  first  line  and  discal  spot  absent, 
subterminal  white  spots  reduced  or  nearly  obsolete. 

North  Queensland  ;  two  specimens. 

3.  Hyposidra,  Gn. 

Face  with  appressed  scales.  Tongue  short,  imperfect.  Palpi 
rather  short,  porrectecl,  rough-scaled,  terminal  joint  very  short. 
Antennae  in  g  strongly  bipectinated,  apex  simple.  Thorax  not 
crested,  slightly  hairy  beneath.  Femora  glabrous ;  posterior 
tibiae  in  $  not  dilated.  Forewings  in  <£  with  well-marked  fovea ; 
veins  10  and  11  separate.     Hindwings  normal. 

Further  material  is  required  to  prove  the  validity  of  this  genus, 
which  includes  only  the  following  species,  a  Malayan  insect  which 
ranges  into  Australia. 

4.  Hyp.  janiaria,  Gn. 

( Hyposidra  janiaria,  Gn.  X,  150;  Lagyra  agrealesaria,  Walk. 
59;  L.  dijfusata,  ib.  Suppl.  1537;  L.  in/usata,  ib.  1538;  Hypo- 
sidra australis,  Felcl.  pi.  cxxix,  23,  24.) 

^ 9-  38-48  mm.  Head  and  thorax  pale  yellow-ochreous,  densely 
irrorated    with    reddish-brown.       Forewings    with     hindmargin 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  589 

obliquely  sinuate,  waved ;  whitish-ochreous  or  pale  yellowish- 
ochreous,  irrorated  with  reddish-brown,  in  Q  wholly  suffused 
with  reddish-brown ;  lines  cloudy,  dark  reddish-fuscous,  sub- 
dentate,  first  curved,  second  rather  curved,  sinuate  towards 
extremities ;  median  shade  thick,  cloudy,  dark  reddish-fuscous, 
somewhat  curved  and  sinuate,  space  between  this  and  second  line 
in  $  suffused  with  reddish-fuscous  ;  second  line  followed  towards 
costa  by  three  cloudy  somewhat  confluent  whitish  spots,  beyond 
which  is  a  fuscous  suffusion.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  in  <J 
waved,  in  £  crenate;  in  <J  yellower,  in  9  as  in  forewings;  median 
shade  thick,  reddish-fuscous,  somewhat  curved;  second  line  cloudy 
reddish -fuscous,  subdentate,  somewhat  curved,  followed  by  a  very 
obscure  whitish  line. 

Cooktown,  Queensland  ;  two  specimens  (Coll.  Lucas).  Also 
from  Java. 

4.  Osteodes,  Gn. 

Face  with  strong  well-defined  tuft  of  scales.  Tongue  developed. 
Palpi  moderately  long,  porrected,  rough-scaled,  tolerably  pointed, 
terminal  joint  concealed.  Antenna3  in  $  bipectinated  throughout 
with  very  short  pectinations,  a  pair  on  each  side  of  each  joint, 
ending  in  long  tufts  of  cilia.  Thorax  not  crested,  glabrous  beneath. 
Femora  glabrous;  posterior  tibiae  in  $  slightly  dilated.  Forewings 
in  (J  with  well-marked  fovea  ;  10  rising  out  of  11,  connected  with 
9  (or  in  exotic  species  absent),  11  anastomosing  with  12.  Hind- 
wings  normal. 

Includes  one  Australian  and  one  African  species,  which  agree 
in  all  structural  characters  except  the  neural  difference  noted 
above,  which  does  not  seem  to  call  for  generic  separation. 

5.   Ost.  procurata,  Walk. 

(Tephrina  procurata,  Walk.  965  ;  Panagra  ferritinctaria,  ib. 
1002.) 

(J(|>.  25-27  mm.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  bowed ;  brown, 
sprinkled  with  short  blackish  strigulse,  and  usually  partially  very 
finely  irrorated  with  pale  whitish-ochreous;  costal  edge  sometimes 


590  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

whitish-ochreous ;  first  line  somewhat  irregular,  usually  nearly 
obsolete,  sometimes  preceded  by  a  whitish-ochreous  line  or  marked 
with  blackish  at  lower  extremity;  median  shade  sometimes  faintly 
darker  ;  a  blackish  discal  dot,  sometimes  obsolete ;  second  line 
whitish-ochreous,  often  distinct  in  middle  only,  rarely  throughout, 
slightly  sinuate  in  middle,  where  it  is  preceded  by  a  well-marked 
black  dot,  and  followed  by  a  more  or  less  prolonged  ferruginous 
suffusion,  and  sometimes  also  by  a  small  blackish  spot ;  generally 
two  or  three  small  blackish  spots  towards  costa,  indicating  anterior 
margin  of  subterminal  line.  Hind  wings  with  hindmargin  bent  on 
vein  4;  pale  brownish-ochreous  or  sometimes  ferruginous-ochreous, 
more  or  less  densely  irrorated  with  fuscous ;  a  dark  fuscous  discal 
dot ;  second  line  fuscous,  bent  in  middle,  usually  indistinct ;  an 
irregular  fuscous  hindmarginal  suffusion,  with  faint  traces  of  a 
paler  subterminal  line. 

Duaringa,  Queensland  ;  Sydney,  New  South  Wales  ;  Adelaide, 
South  Australia  ;  in  October,  November,  April,  and  June,  not 
uncommon,  but  somewhat  local.     It  varies  rather  considerably. 

5.   Discalma,  n.g. 

Face  with  short  tuft  of  scales.  (?).  Tongue  developed.  Palpi 
moderate,  subascending,  rough-scaled,  terminal  joint  short.  An- 
tennae in  <J  filiform,  rather  strongly  ciliated.  Thorax  not  crested, 
slightly  hairy  beneath.  Femora  glabrous.  Forewings  in  g  with- 
out fovea;  10  connected  with  12  and  9,  11  out  of  10  between 
connections.     Hind  wings  normal. 

The  single  species  does  not  admit  of  inclusion  in  any  described 
genus  known  to  me,  and  I  have  therefore  been  obliged  to  constitute 
a  new  one,  but  more  material  would  have  been  acceptable. 

6.  Disc,  normata,  Walk. 

(Tephrina  normata,  Walk.  966;  Aspilates  exfusaria,  ib.  1683.) 
(J.   '26  mm.      Antennal  ciliations   1  J.      Forewings  with  hind- 
margin    slightly    bowed ;    pale   brownish-ochreous,    strewn    with 
dark    fuscous    strigulse ;    costa    more  distinctly  strigulated   with 
blackish  ;    first  line  and  median  shade  straight,  slender,  fuscous, 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  591 

not  reaching  costa ;  a  fuscous  transverse  discal  mark  before 
median  shade  ;  second  line  strongly  marked,  nearly  straight, 
dark  fuscous,  not  reaching  costa,  preceded  by  a  pale  line,  and 
followed  by  a  light  fuscous  suffusion  extending  to  costa  •  hind- 
marginal  area  fuscous-tinged.  Hindwings  with  hinclmargin 
rounded  ;  colour  and  markings  as  in  forewings,  but  first  line  and 
discal  spot  absent. 

Queensland  ;  two  specimens  in  the  British  Museum.  I  possess 
one  from  New  Guinea. 

6.  Cosymbia,  Hb. 

Face  with  short  riclge  or  tuft  of  projecting  scales.  Tongue 
developed.  Palpi  moderate  or  rather  long,  porrected,  rough-scaled, 
terminal  joint  moderate  or  short,  loosely  rough-scaled.  Antenna? 
in  ^  bipectinated,  extreme  apex  simple.  Thorax  not  crested, 
slightly  hairy  beneath.  Femora  glabrous ;  posterior  tibia?  in  $ 
more  or  less  dilated.  Forewings  in  $  with  well-marked  fovea, 
surmounted  by  a  small  gland  ;  10  usually  connected  with  9,  11 
out  of  10  or  absent  (coincident),  sometimes  anastomosing  with  12 
and  10,  or  (if  11  absent)  10  sometimes  connected  with  12.  Hind- 
wings  normal. 

A  rather  small  genus  of  wide  distribution,  occurring  also  in 
Europe,  Asia,  and  Africa.  It  is  a  development  of  Selidosema, 
and  is  with  difficulty  separated  from  it  in  some  instances,  though 
in  the  Australian  species  the  characteristic  gland  is  sufficiently 
marked  to  leave  no  doubt. 

1 .  Hindwings  with  discal  dot 2. 

Hindwings  without  discal  dot 9.  clarissa. 

2.  Forewings  with   second   line    marked   by  a 

blackish  streak 7.  rupicolor. 

Forewings  with  second  line  not  marked  by 

a  blackish  streak 8.  penthearia. 

7.  Cos.  rupicolor,  Butl. 

(Panagra  rupicolor,  Butl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  Lond.  1886,  437.) 
<JQ.   32-34  mm.      Antennal  pectinations  in  <J  5,  apical  J  simple. 
Forewings   with    hindmargin   gently  bowed ;    pale  brownish    or 


592  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

brownish-ochreous,  strewn  with  small  blackish  strigulae,  and 
sometimes  sprinkled  with  whitish-ochreous  ;  first  line  represented 
by  a  short  blackish  mark  on  inner  margin ;  a  large  blackish 
discal  dot ;  second  line  represented  by  a  straight  blackish  streak 
extending  from  inner  margin  §  across  wing,  margined  with  pale 
whitish-ochreous  anteriorly,  and  sometimes  suffused  with  fuscous 
posteriorly.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  slightly  bent 
on  vein  4  ;  colour,  discal  dot,  and  second  line  as  in  forewings, 
but  second  line  less  marked,  and  hardly  reaching  half  across  wing. 
Duaringa,  Queensland;  Geraldton  and  York,  West  Australia; 
in  November,  six  specimens.  Probably  this  species  (and  very 
likely  the  other  two  also)  extends  right  across  the  interior  of 
Australia  from  east  to  west,  without  reaching  either  the  north 

or  south  coasts. 

8.   Cos.  penthearia,  Gn. 

( Selidosema  penthearia,  Gn.  X;  146;  Tephrina  adustaria,  Walk. 
Suppl.  1661.) 

(j£.  30-35  mm.  Antennal  pectinations  of  <J  5,  apical  i  simple. 
Forewings  with  .hindmargin  gently  bowed ;  pale  brownish  or 
brownish-ochreous,  strewn  with  numerous  short  dark  fuscous 
strigul?e,  and  a  few  scattered  black  scales ;  costal  edge  more 
ochreous-tinged  ;  a  large  blackish-fuscous  discal  dot ;  a  very  faint 
darker  or  more  ochreous  shade  indicating  posterior  margin  of 
second  line,  in  Q  marked -with  some  black  scales  on  inner  margin. 
Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  distinctly  bent  on  vein  4 ; 
colour  and  markings  as  in  forewings. 

Duaringa,  Queensland  ;  York,  West  Australia ;  in  November, 
six  specimens. 

9.   Cos.  clarissa,  Butl. 

(Aspilates  clarissa,  Butl.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  Lond.  1886,  438.) 
$Q.  27-30  mm.  Antennal  pectinations  of  <J  7,  apical  i 
simple.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  gently  bowed  ;  very  pale 
whitish-ochreous,  strewn  with  short  fuscous  strigulaB  only  distinct 
on  costa  and  towards  hindmargin ;  a  moderate  dark  grey  discal 
dot.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded  ;  colour  as  in 
forewings,  but  discal  dot  wholly  absent. 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  593 

Duaringa,  Queensland ;  three  specimens  received  from  Mr. 
G.  Barnard. 

7.  Scioglyptis,  n.g. 

Face  with  strong  conical  or  rounded-conical  horny  scaled  pro- 
minence. Tongue  developed.  Palpi  moderate,  porrected,  rough- 
scaled,  terminal  joint  very  short.  Antenna)  in  £  bipectinated, 
apex  simple.  Thorax  not  crested,  hairy  beneath.  Femora 
glabrous  ;  posterior  tibia3  in  £  dilated,  enclosing  tuft.  Forewings 
in  £  with  well-marked  fovea;  10  sometimes  connected  with  9, 
11  sometimes  out  of  10,  sometimes  anastomosing  with  12.  Hind- 
wings  normal. 

An  extreme  form  of  Selidosema,  only  differing  essentially  by 
the  peculiar  frontal  prominence  ;  perhaps  it  need  not  be  separated. 

Frontal  prominence  acute 10.   liihinopa. 

Frontal  prominence  obtuse 11.  hemeropa. 

10.  Sciogl.  Uthinojm,  n.sp. 

<J.  27  mm.  Frontal  projection  pointed,  acute.  Antennal  pecti- 
nations 6,  apical  J  simple.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  obliquely 
rounded,  somewhat  waved  ;  whitish-ochreous,  with  a  few  fine 
scattered  blackish  scales  ;  first,  median,  and  second  lines  slender, 
cloudy,  fuscous,  darker  on  veins,  but  very  ill-defined,  first  curved 
and  angulated  near  costa,  median  nearly  straight,  second  curved 
inwards  on  lower  §  ;  an  indistinct  transverse  discal  mark  beyond 
median  line,  appearing  to  connect  median  and  second  lines ; 
subterminal  faintly  whitish,  cloudy,  hardly  perceptibly  darker- 
margined,  preceded  above  middle  by  a  small  double  dark  fuscous 
spot.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  waved  ;  colour  and 
markings  as  in  forewings,  but  first  line  absent,  no  discal  mark, 
median  line  darker,  second  line  less  curved  inwards,  nearly  followed 
by  a  faint  fuscous  shade,  subterminal  line  somewhat  darker- 
margined  anteriorly,  preceded  by  a  single  very  small  fuscous  spot 
above  middle. 

Brisbane,  Queensland  ;  one  specimen  received  from  Dr.  T.  P. 
Lucas.      This  specimen  lias  vein  10  of  the  forewings  connected 


594  REVISION    OF   AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

with  9,  11  rising  out  of  10,  connected  with  12;  but  the  neuration 
may  very  possibly  be  as  variable  as  in  the  next  species. 

11.  Sciogl.  hemeropa,  n.sp. 

(JQ-  28-32  mm.  Frontal  projection  broadly  rounded,  obtuse. 
Antennal  pectinations  3-J,  apical  f  simple.  Fore  wings  with 
hindmargin  bowed  ;  very  pale  whitish-ochreous  or  whitish-fuscous, 
with  a  few  scattered  black  scales,  and  traces  of  darker  strigulae  ; 
basal  area  mixed  with  ochreous  or  fuscous ;  first  line  indicated  by 
obscure  ochreous  or  fuscous  margins,  angulated  near  costa  ;  median 
shade  ill-defined,  ochreous  or  fuscous,  sinuate  ;  a  black  discal  dot 
beyond  it ;  second  line  faintly  paler,  dilated  and  more  distinctly 
whitish  on  costal  third,  where  it  is  margined  anteriorly  narrowly, 
and  posteriorly  broadly  with  ochreous,  obtusely  angulated  on  vein 
5  and  submedian  fold,  upper  angle  sometimes  followed  by  a 
blackish  spot,  median  third  margined  anteriorly  with  three 
ochreous  or  dark  fuscous  dots  ;  a  faint  cloudy  white  waved  sub- 
terminal  line,  sometimes  followed  by  one  or  two  cloudy  blackish 
dots  near  below  apex ;  a  hindmarginal  row  of  black  dots  :  cilia 
pale  whitish-ochreous,  terminal  half  white.  Hindwings  with 
hindmargin  rounded,  waved  ;  colour  and  markings  as  in  forewings, 
but  becoming  whitish  towards  base,  first  line  absent,  median  shade 
faint,  second  line  darker-margined  anteriorly  on  lower  half,  but 
becoming  wholly  obsolete  towards  costa. 

Newcastle  and  Sydney,  New  South  Wales  ;  Melbourne, Victoria  ; 
in  September  and  October,  four  specimens.  All  the  variations  of 
neuration  included  in  the  generic  description  occur  in  this  species. 

8.  Selidosema,  Hb. 

Face  with  short  dense  somewhat  projecting  scales  or  almost 
smooth.  Tongue  developed.  Palpi  moderate,  porrected  or  sub- 
ascending,  rough-scaled,  terminal  joint  very  short  or  rarely 
moderate.  Antennae  in  £  bipectinated,  pectinations  slender, 
moderate  or  rather  long,  apex  simple.  Thorax  sometimes  shortly 
crested  posteriorly,  beneath  hairy.  Femora  glabrous  ;  posterior 
tibiae  in  £  dilated,  enclosing  tuft.     Forewings  in  <J  with  well- 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  595 

marked  fovea  ;  10  sometimes  connected  with  9,  11  sometimes  out 
of  10,  sometimes  anastomosing  with  12,  sometimes  absent  (coin- 
cident with  10).     Hind  wings  normal. 

A  large  and  cosmopolitan  genus,  of  which  the  species  are 
sometimes  difficult  to  determine,  owing  to  their  obscure  and 
similar  colouring.  The  structural  differences  and  the  colour  of 
the  face  should  be  carefully  observed,  and  often  give  easy 
distinguishing  characters.  The  neuration  varies  considerably  ;  in 
Australia  the  species  fall  naturally  into  two  groups,  in  one  of 
which  veins  10  and  11  are  stalked  or  coincident,  whilst  in  the 
other  they  are  separate,  and  I  formerly  supposed  that  these  groups 
could  be  maintained  as  distinct  genera,  but  a  wide  study  of  exotic 
species  of  the  genus  has  shown  me  that  in  them  the  two  types  of 
structure  not  unfrequently  occur  in  different  individuals  of  the 
same  species ;  hence  their  discrimination  is  impossible. 

In  the  following  tabulation  S.  despicata  is  not  included,  as  its 
characters  are  insufficiently  known ;  it  is  an  inconspicuous 
brownish  species,  without  any  striking  points.  Owing  to  insuffi- 
ciency of  material,  I  cannot  be  positive  that  the  characters  on 
which  stress  is  laid  in  the  tabulation  are  constantly  reliable,  and 
care  should  always  be  taken  to  note  the  several  points  of  difference 
which  usually  occur  between  any  two  species,  and-  not  to  depend 
on  one  exclusively  ;  the  specific  separation  of  these  insects  will 
then  be  found  easier  than  is  supposed. 

1.  Fore  wings  with  veins  10  and  11  separate  2. 
Forewings  with  veins  10  and  11  stalked 

or  coincident 7. 

2.  Face  wholly  blackish 38.  argoplaca. 

Face  not  wholly  blackish 3. 

3.  Antennae  in  <J  with  apical  J  simple 37.   euboliaria. 

Antennae   in   $   with    apical  f  or  more 

simple 4. 

4.  Face  with  broad  blackish  median  bar 5. 

Face  with  blackish  median  bar  incomplete 

or  obsolete .....  6. 

39 


596  REVISION   OF   AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA 


5.  Forewings  with  black  discal  dot 39.  bitaeniaria. 

Forewings  with  raised  white  grey-edged 

discal  mark 40.  acaciaria. 

6.  Forewings    clouded    with    pale    reddish- 

ochreous 41.  illustraria. 

Forewings    not    clouded    with    reddish- 

ochreous 42.  epistictis. 

7.  Hindwings  whitish,  much  paler  than  fore- 

wings   8. 

Hindwings  not  much  paler  than  forewings  9, 

8.  Forewings    with    clear    whitish    blotch 

beyond  second  line 23.  capnota. 

Forewings  without  whitish  blotch 22.  exprimataria. 

9.  Face  without  dark  markings,  except  scat- 

tered scales , 10. 

Face  more  or  less  marked  with  blackish 

or  dark  fuscous 15. 

10.  Forewings  with  groundcolour  white 26.  leucoplecta. 

Forewings  with  groundcolour  not  white..  11. 

1 1 .  Wings  distinctly  yellowish-tinged 12. 

Wings  not  yellowish 13. 

12.  Forewings  with  median  shade  obsolete. .. .   14.  amphiclina. 
Forewings  with  median  shade  tolerably 

distinct. 34.  destinataria. 

13.  Forewings  with  second  line  whitish 13.  cheleuta. 

Forewings  with  second  line  not  whitish..  14. 

14.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  dentate 31.  adelphodes. 

Hindwings  with  hindmargin  waved 15.  eremias. 

15.  Head  wholly  blackish 35.  zascia. 

Head  not  wholly  blackish .  16. 

16.  Face  wholly  dark  fuscous  except  upper 

and  lower  margins 17. 

Face  not  wholly  dark  fuscous 26. 

17.  Forehead  white  or  whitish 18. 

Forehead  not  whitish 23. 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  597 

18.  Forewings  with  second  line  followed  by 

ochreous-brown  shade ...  19. 

Forewings  with  second  line  not  followed 

by  ochreous-brown  shade  20. 

19.  Undersurf ace  pale  yellowish 21.  lyciaria. 

Undersurface  not  yellowish 12.  silicaria. 

20.  Forewings    with    first    line    obsolete    on 

upper  half 25.  leptodesma. 

Forewings  with  first  line  marked  through- 
out   21. 

21.  Forewings  with  second  line  strongly  den- 

tate beneath  costa 20.  canescaria. 

Forewings  with  second  line  not  strongly 

dentate  beneath  costa 22. 

22.  Hind  wings  with  hinclmargin  dentate 18.  curtaria. 

Hind  wings  with  hindmargin  not  dentate  24.  cognata. 

23.  Forehead  ferruginous-ochreous ,,  24. 

Forehead  fuscous  or  pale  fuscous 25. 

24.  Antennae  of  <J  with  apical  sixth  simple..   29.  excursaria. 
AntennEe  of  $  with  apical  tenth  simple..   30.  aganopa. 

25.  Forewings  with    median    shade  strongly 

marked 17.  suasaria. 

Forewings    with    median    shade    almost 

obsolete 32.  pallidiscaria. 

26.  Lower  half  of  face  white 19.  externaria. 

Lower  half  of  face  not  white 27. 

27.  Forewings  with  dark  shade  beyond  second 

line    running  to  hindmargin  "beneath 

apex ,..   28.  luxaria. 

Forewings  with  dark  shade  not  running 

to  hindmargin 28. 

28.  Forewings  grey- whitish 36.  perfectaria. 

Forewings  ochreous 29. 


598  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

29.  Hindwings     with     second     line     almost 

straight 27.  agoraea. 

Hindwings  with    second    line   distinctly 

curved 16.  thermaea. 

12.  Sel.  silicaria,  Gn. 

(  Remercpliila  silicaria,  Gn.  IX,  220  ;  H.  mundifera,  Walk. 
322;  Boarmia  disrupta,  ib.  391;  Hemerojihila  excursaria,  ib. 
1532.) 

^£.  30-35  mm.  Face  dark  fuscous,  forehead  and  lower  margin 
whitish.  Antenna!  pectinations  of  £  7,  apical  -l  simple.  Fore- 
wings  with  hindmargin  obliquely  bowed  ;  vein  11  out  of  10, 
anastomosing  with  12  ;  pale  brownish-ochreous,  finely  irrorated 
with  whitish,  and  with  a  few  dark  fuscous  scales  ;  lines  slender, 
blackish-fuscous,  sinuate,  becoming  obsolete  towards  costa,  first 
nearly  preceded  and  second  nearly  followed  by  rather  dark 
ochreous-brown  parallel  shades  ;  a  black  discal  dot  before  median 
shade,  which  is  slender,  ochreous-brown,  ill-marked,  nearly 
straight ;  subterminal  obscurely  whitish,  irregularly  waved, 
edged  with  brownish,  connected  with  hindmargin  beneath  apex 
by  an  oblique  suffused  dark  brown  streak,  opposite  which  it  is 
edged  anteriorly  with  blackish  ;  a  hindmarginal  row  of  black 
dots.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  hardly  rounded,  unevenly 
waved-dentate ;  in  £  beneath  with'  a  very  deep  longitudinal 
furrow  below  middle  from  base  to  J ;  colour,  median  shade, 
subterminal  line,  and  hindmarginal  dots  as  in  forewings  ;  discal 
dot  dark  grey,  obscure  ;  second  line  slender,  blackish-fuscous, 
somewhat  irregular,  nearly  straight,  indistinct  towards  costa, 
nearly  followed  by  a  parallel  brown  shade. 

Sydney,  New  South  Wales ;  Melbourne,  -Victoria ;  Mount 
Lofty,  South  Australia  ;  Albany,  West  Australia ;  in  September, 
October,  and  March,  six  specimens.  It  is  distinguished  from  all 
by  the  peculiar  longitudinal  furrow  in  the  hindwings  of  the  <J. 

13.  Sel.  cheleuta,  n.sp. 

(j£.  27-30  mm.  Head  pale  greyish-brown,  mixed  with  whitish, 
with  a  few  black  scales.     Forewings  with  hindmargin  rounded  ; 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  599 

vein  11  out  of  10,  anastomosing  with  12  ;  whitish-ochreous, 
greyish-tinged,  towards  base  and  costa  more  brownish,  thinly 
sprinkled  with  blackish  ;  first  line  blackish,  irregular,  interrupted, 
subdentate  ;  median  shade  nearly  straight,  black,  posteriorly 
suffused  with  brownish  ;  a  black  discal  dot ;  second  line  ochreous- 
whitish,  unevenly  and  interruptedly  margined  with  dark  fuscous, 
especially  towards  disc  posteriorly,  subdentate,  irregular,  twice 
sinuate,  lower  sinuation  stronger  and  subangulated  ;  space  between 
second  and  subterminal  lines  brownish  on  upper  half  ;  subterminal 
hardly  pale,  partially  blackish-margined,  triangularly  dilated  at 
apex,  dentate ;  a  hindmarginal  row  of  black  dots.  Hindwings 
with  hindmargin  rounded,  waved ;  colour  and  hindmarginal  dots 
as  in  forewings  ;  median  shade  and  margins'  of  second  and  subter- 
minal lines  straight,  waved,  dark  fuscous,  becoming  obsolete 
above  ;  a  black  discal  dot  touching  anterior  margin  of  second  line. 
Melbourne,  Victoria ;  three  specimens  (Coll.  Lucas).  Recog- 
nisable amongst  similar  species  by  the  peculiar  form  of  the  second 
line  of  the  forewings.  Tejyhrosia  bispinaria,  Gn.  IX,  266,  which 
I  have  not  succeeded  in  identifying,  should  apparently  have  this 
line  nearly  similarly  formed,  and  it  is  just  possible  that  it  may 
be  synonymous,  but  the  description  agrees  very  ill  in  other 
particulars  ;  it  may  be  a  species  unknown  to  me. 

14.   Sel.  amphiclina,  n.sp. 

(J.  32  mm.  Head  and  thorax  unicolorous  ochreous.  Antennal 
pectinations  7,  apical  i  simple.  Forewings  with  hindmargin 
obliquely  bowed  ;  vein  1 1  absent ;  pale  yellowish-ochreous,  with 
scattered  grey  strigulse  and  a  few  black  scales ;  first  line  indicated 
by  blackish  strigulae  but  very  indistinct,  slightly  curved,  margined 
posteriorly  by  a  deeper  yellow-ochreous  sha-le  ;  a  black  discal 
dot ;  median  shade  obsolete  ;  second  line  faintly  paler,  hardly 
traceable,  except  where  margined  posteriorly  with  blackish  from 
vein  3  to  6,  where  it  is  slightly  sinuate,  but  apparently  with  a 
biangulated  projection  below  this ;  subterminal  very  faintly 
whitish,  connected  with  hindmargin  beneath  apex  by  an  ill-marked 
dark  fuscous  oblique  streak  j    three  blackish  dots  on  upper  half 


600  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

of  hindmargm :  cilia  whitish-ochreous.  Hindwings  with  hind- 
margin  rounded,  unevenly  waved ;  colour  and  strigula?  as  in 
forewings,  but  basal  half  more  whitish-ochreous ;  a  dark  grey 
discal  dot ;  median  shade  forming  a  short  grey  line  from  inner 
margin ;  second  line  faintly  traceable  as  a  pale  sinuate  shade. 

Sydney,  New  South  Wales  ;  in  October,  two  specimens.  Easily 
known  by  the  yellowish-ochreous  colouring,  obsolescence  of  lines, 
and  unicolorous  head  and  thorax. 

15.  Sel,  eremias,  n.sp. 

g.  28  mm.  Head  and  thorax  pale  brownish-ochreous,  face 
moderately  tufted,  thorax  with  two  posterior  black  dots.  Anten- 
nal  pectinations  8,  apical  J  simple.  Forewings  with  hindmargm 
obliquely  bowed;  vein  10  connected  with  12  and  9,  11  rising  out 
of  10  between  the  bars;  pale  brownish-ochreous,  with  a  few 
scattered  black  scales ;  first  and  second  lines  and  median  shade 
indistinctly  traceable  as  sinuate  series  of  blackish  dots ;  two 
cloudy  blackish  spots  towards  hindmargm  above  and  below  middle, 
on  which  alone  is  the  slender  dentate  paler  subterminal  line 
visible ;  a  hindmarginal  row  of  black  dots  :  cilia  pale  brownish- 
ochreous.  Hindwings  with  handmargin  somewhat  rounded, 
unevenly  waved ;  colour  and  hindmarginal  dots  as  in  forewings, 
but  surface  more  thickly  sprinkled  with  black  scales ;  a  blackish 
mark  on  middle  of  inner  margin  ;  a  small  black  discal  dot. 

Sydney,  New  South  Wales  ;  in  March,  one  specimen.  A  small 
species  of  obscure  appearance,  characterised  by  the  usual  lines 
reduced  to  series  of  dots,  and  the  blackish  submarginal  spots  ;  it 
recalls  some  species  of  Deilinia,  but  is  longer-winged. 

16.  Sel.  thermea,  n.sp. 

g.  38  mm.  Head  and  thorax  pale  ochreous,  suffused  with 
ochreous-brown.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  obliquely  rounded, 
strongly  waved ;  vein  11  absent;  ochreous-brown,  thinly  strewn 
with  dark  fuscous  strigulse  ;  first  and  second  lines  slender,  black, 
somewhat  interrupted,  first  curved,  angulated  near  inner  margin, 
nearly  preceded  by  a  dark  ochreous-brown  shade,  second  angulated 
outwards  above  middle  and  inwards  near  inner  margin,  nearly 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  601 

followed  by  an  indistinct  dark  ochreous-brown  shade ;  space 
between  first  and  second  lines  brownish-grey;  median  shade  thick, 
cloudy,  irregular,  dark  brown,  tolerably  parallel  to  second  line ; 
subterminal  ochreous-whitish,  very  indistinct,  dentate,  preceded 
on  costa  by  a  dark  fuscous  spot ;  a  dark  fuscous  blotch  on  hind- 
margin  beneath  apex  ■  an  interrupted  dark  fuscous  hindmarginal 
line.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  dentate ;  colour  and 
markings  as  in  forewings,  but  first  line  almost  basal,  median  shade 
almost  obsolete,  angulation  of  second  line  more  rounded. 

Newcastle,  New  South  Wales ;  one  specimen  (Australian 
Museum).  Differs  markedly  from  its  allies  by  its  deep  ochreous 
brown  colouring,  and  the  contrasted  median  band. 

17.  Sel.  suasaria,  Gn. 

(Boarmia  suasaria,  Gn.  IX,  243  (teste  Moore) ;  B.  proposita, 
Walk.  390;  Tephrosia  gratularia,  ib.  415;  T.  proptinquaria,  ib. 
415.) 

(JQ.  29-34  mm.  Face  blackish,  forehead  and  lower  margin 
pale  fuscous.  Palpi  with  long  rough  hairs.  Antennal  pectina- 
tions in  £  8,  apical  ^  simple.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  bowed  ; 
vein  10  anastomosing  with  12,  11  absent;  light  fuscous,  closely 
irrorated  with  dark  fuscous  and  whitish  ;  lines  evenly  curved, 
blackish-fuscous,  interrupted  to  form  dots  in  disc,  second  edged 
with  paler  posteriorly,  sinuate  inwards  on  submedian  fold;  median 
shade  curved,  thick,  blackish-fuscous,  strongest  on  lower  half, 
sinuate  outwards  above  and  below  middle  ;  a  light  ochreous  suffu- 
sion on  submedian  fold  before  first  and  beyond  second  line ; 
subterminal  line  very  indistinct,  slender,  dentate  ;  an  interrupted 
dark  fuscous  hindmarginal  line.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin 
rounded,  slightly  waved ;  colour  and  markings  as  in  forewings, 
but  first  line  absent,  median  shade  straight,  second  line  followed 
by  a  paler  suffusion. 

Brisbane,  Queensland ;  Newcastle,  New  South  Wales ;  said 
also  to  be  from  Albany,  West  Australia  ;  four  specimens.  Char- 
acterised by  the  fuscous  colouring,  absence  of  white  markings, 
strongly  marked  median  shade,  and  wholly  blackish  face. 


602  REVISION    OP   AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

18.  Set.  curtaria.  Walk. 

(Tephrosia  curtaria,  Walk.  Suppl.  1592.) 

(J.  22  mm.  Face  blackish  (1).  Antennal  pectinations  about 
7,  apical  y1^  filiform.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  obliquely 
rounded,  waved;  whitish-fuscous,  sprinkled  with  blackish;  first 
and  second  lines  curved,  blackish,  somewhat  interrupted  ;  median 
shade  cloudy,  hardly  curved,  blackish,  connected  by  a  slender 
bar  with  a  cloudy  blackish  spot  before  second  line  in  middle  ; 
subterminal  cloudy,  subdentate,  whitish,  anteriorly  margined 
obscurely  with  blackish.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded, 
dentate ;  colour  and  markings  as  in  forewings,  but  first  line 
absent,  a  blackish  discal  dot  beyond  median  shade,  no  spot  or 
connecting  bar.  before  second  line. 

Queensland  (Walker's  citation  of  the  locality  as  "  Swan  River" 
is  erroneous,  as  I  have  shown  elsewhere)  ;  one  specimen  in  the 
British  Museum,  from  which  the  above  description  is  taken. 
The  characters  are  incomplete,  but  the  species  appears  to  be  a 
good  one,  recognisable  by  its  small  size  and  the  bar  connecting 
median  shade  and  second  line. 

19.  Sel.  externaria,  Walk. 

(Tephrosia  externaria,  Walk.  Suppl.  1591.) 

gQ.  31-34  mm.  Face  with  upper  half  blackish,  lower  half 
white,  forehead  white.  Antennal  pectinations  of  $  9,  apical  i 
simple.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  waved,  rounded  ;  vein  10 
connected  with  12,  11  out  of  10  ;  light  fuscous,  closely  strewn 
with  white  partially  confluent  strigulre,  and  with  some  dark 
fuscous  or  blackish  scales  or  strigulse  ;  first  line  curved,  dark 
fuscous,  little  marked  ;  median  shade  thick,  blackish-fuscous, 
almost  rectangularly  angulated  in  or  above  middle,  upper  half 
sometimes  rather  curved  inwards ;  a  blackish-fuscous  transverse 
discal  mark  on  or  sometimes  beyond  this  ;  second  line  blackish- 
fuscous,  tending  to  form  dots  on  upper  half,  rather  irregularly 
sinuate,  somewhat  angulated  above  middle  ;  subterminal  whitish, 
ill-defined,    partially  margined    anteriorly   with    blackish-fuscous 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  603 

on  upper  half  and  towards  inner  margin  ;  a  thick  oblique  blackish- 
fuscous  suffused  streak  from  hindmargin  below  apex  to  middle 
of  second  line ;  an  interrupted  blackish  hindmarginal  line. 
Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  dentate ;  colour  and 
markings  as  in  forewings,  but  first  line  absent,  median  shade 
straight,  second  line  not  angulated. 

Duaringa,  Queensland  ;  three  specimens  received  from  Mr.  G. 
Barnard.  A  strongly  marked  insect,  very  distinct  by  the  face 
half  black  and  half  white,  and  the  peculiar  angulated  median 
shade,  but  otherwise  closely  resembling  some  forms  of  S.  canes- 
caria. 

20.  JSel.  canescaria,  Gn. 

(Boarmia  canescaria,  Gn.  IX,  249.) 

(J.  31-32  mm.  Face  blackish,  forehead  white.  Antennal 
pectinations  9,  apical  ^  simple.  Forewings  with  hindmargin 
waved,  rounded;  vein  10  connected  or  anastomosing  with  12, 
11  out  of  10;  light  fuscous,  sprinkled  with  dark  fuscous,  and 
more  or  less  suffusedly  irrorated  with  white ;  first  line  slender, 
dark  fuscous,  very  acutely  angulated  near  costa ;  a  small  black 
transverse  discal  mark,  sometimes  obsolete,  before  median  shade ; 
median  shade  slender,  blackish-fuscous,  angulated  first  inwards 
and  then  outwards  beneath  costa,  on  lower  half  often  wholly 
suffused  with  second  line ;  second  line  slender,  slightly  irregular, 
blackish-fuscous,  sending  a  long  very  acute  dentation  inwards 
below  costa,  angulated  outwards  beneath  this ;  subterminal 
whitish  or  white,  often  conspicuous  and  rather  thick,  margined 
anteriorly  throughout  with  blackish-fuscous,  connected  with  hind- 
margin beneath  apex  by  a  short  blackish-fuscous  suffused  streak  ; 
a  blackish  hindmarginal  line.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin 
rounded,  dentate  ;  colour  and  markings  as  in  forewings,  but  first 
line  absent,  median  shade  thicker,  straight,  second  line  nearly 
straight  or  slightly  sinuate. 

Duaringa,  Queensland;  Mount  Lofty,  South  Australia;  received 
commonly  from  Mr.  G.  Barnard  and  Mr.  E.  Guest.  Readily 
known   from  the  other  species  with  black  face  by  the  strongly 


604  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

marked  lines,  sharply  angulated  beneath  costa,  and  in  particular 
by  the  long  acute  subcostal  dentation  of  the  second  line. 

21.  Sel.  lyciaria,  Gn. 

(Boarmia  lyciaria,  Gn.  IX,  250 ;  B.  poecilai'ia,  ib.  250,  pi.  vi, 
1  ;  B.  semitata,  Walk.  389.) 

(JQ-  52-55  mm.  Face  blackish,  forehead  whitish.  Antennal 
pectinations  9,  apical  ^  simple.  Forewings  with  hindmargin 
strongly  waved,  rounded;  vein  10  connected  with  12,  11  out  of 
10;  Avhitish-ochreous,  densely  strewn  with  fuscous  strigulse,  and 
with  scattered  black  scales  ;  first  line  curved,  rather  dark  fuscous  ; 
median  shade  slender,  blackish-fuscous,  curved,  irregularly  dentate 
and  sinuate,  angulated  outwards  above  middle ;  second  line 
blackish-fuscous,  slightly  irregular,  twice  dentate  inwards  beneath 
costa,  angulated  outwards  beneath  this,  nearly  followed  except 
towards  costa  by  a  rather  dark  brown  shade  ;  subterminal  slender, 
dentate,  whitish,  anteriorly  margined  with  blackish-fuscous, 
forming  a  well-marked  subtriangular  unmargined  white  spot  in 
middle ;  a  blackish  hindmarginal  line.  Hind  wings  with  hind- 
margin  rounded,  strongly  dentate  ;  colour  and  hindmarginal  line 
as  in  forewings,  but  basal  third  suffusedly  darker  ;  a  white  subbasal 
bar ;  median  shade  rather  strong,  blackish-fuscous,  straight ;  a 
conspicuous  transverse  or  subcrescentic  blackish  discal  mark ; 
second  line  somewhat  irregular,  blackish-fuscous,  nearly  followed 
by  an  ochreous-brown  shade  ;  subterminal  narrow,  white,  margined 
anteriorly  with  blackish-fuscous,  with  a  projecting  angulation 
above  middle.  "Undersurface  pale  yellowish-ochreous,  with  blackish 
discal  spot  and  variable  dark  fuscous  hindmarginal  suffusion. 

Tasmania ;  four  specimens  received  from  Messrs.  G.  Barnard 
and  G.  H.  Raynor.  Conspicuous  by  its  large  size,  yellowish 
undersurface,  white  median  spot  on  the  subterminal  line,  and 
other  striking  characters. 

.    22.  Sel.  exprimataria,  Walk. 
(Larentia  exprimataria,  Walk.  1704.) 

<£$.  22-26  mm.  Head  wholly  blackish.  Antennal  pectinations 
in  ^  a  5,  b  6,  apical  \  simple.     Thorax  with  small  posterior  crest. 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  605 

Forewings  with  hindmargin  rounded  ;  vein  10  connected  or  anas- 
tomosing with  12  and  9,  11  absent;  light  grey,  irroratecl  with 
black  and  sometimes  partially  mixed  with  whitish,  sometimes 
ochreous- tinged,  especially  on  veins ;  first  line  black,  curved, 
indented  below  middle ;  median  shade  cloudy,  blackish,  nearly 
straight,  slightly  angulated  in  middle  ;  a  black  transverse-linear 
discal  mark  much  beyond  this  ;  second  line  somewhat  irregular, 
black,  angulated  above  middle ;  subterminal  hardly  paler  but 
sharply  margined  with  black  anteriorly,  irregular,  subdentate, 
approximated  to  second  line  beneath  angle,  where  it  is  followed 
by  an  indistinct  somewhat  paler  suffused  patch  ;  a  black  hind- 
marginal  line.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded ;  grey- 
whitish  ;  median  shade  and  second  line  grey,  very  faint,  nearly 
straight ;  a  faint  grey  discal  dot  between  these ;  a  cloudy  grey 
hindmarginal  band,  its  anterior  edge  more  strongly  marked 
towards  lower  extremity. 

Melbourne,  Victoria  ;  three  specimens  taken  by  Dr.  Lucas,  to 
whom  I  am  indebted  for  a  type.  I  have  a  specimen  from  Duaringa, 
Queensland,  received  from  Mr.  Barnard,  which  appears  to  be  very 
closely  allied  but  probably  distinct  ;  I  do  not  venture  to  describe 
it  at  present.  This  species  and  the  following  are  distinguished 
from  the  rest  by  their  small  size,  blackish  heads,'  thoracic  crest, 
and  whitish  hindwings  contrasting  with  dark  forewings;  the 
present  species  differs  from  the  next  in  having  all  the  lines  well- 
marked,  the  second  angulated,  and  the  simple  apical  portion 
of  the  antennaB  longer. 

23.  Sel.  cajmota,  n.sp. 

<J.  26  mm.  Head  and  thorax  blackish,  thorax  with  well- 
developed  posterior  crest.  Antennah  pectinations  6,  apical  i 
simple.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  somewhat  bowed;  vein  10 
connected  with  9,  11  out  of  10;  ochreous-whitish,  densely  and 
suffusedly  irrorated  with  black  throughout,  so  as  to  appear 
wholly  blackish, ^except  a  large  round  clear  spot  adjoining  second 
line  above  middle,  and  second  line  itself,  which  is  slender,  hardly 
curved,  with  three  or  four  slight  dentations.     Hindwings  with 


606  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

hindmargin  rounded,  somewhat  uneven  ;  whitish  ;  inner  margin 
narrowly  suffused  with  blackish ;  median  shade  very  faint, 
cloudy,  grey  ;  a  grey  discal  dot ;  second  line  slender,  grey,  very 
indistinct ;  a  cloudy  fuscous-grey  irregular  subterminal  shade  ; 
an  interrupted  fuscous  hindmarginal  line. 

Albany,  West  Australia  ;  in  October,  one  specimen  amongst 
Leytospermum  in  a  swamp.  Easily  separated  from  the  preceding 
by  the  general  black  suffusion  obliterating  most  of  the  markings 
of  the  forewings,  and  the  clear  white  posterior  patch ;  the 
neuration  is  also  different,  but  would  perhaps  not  be  constant. 

24.  Set.  cognata,  Walk. 

(Boarmia  cognata,  Walk.  392.) 

(J^.  24-27  mm.  Face  blackish,  forehead  grey-whitish.  Antennal 
pectinations  of  <J  8,  of  9  6,  apical  -I-  simple.  Forewings  with 
hindmargin  obliquely  bowed  ;  10  sometimes  connected  with  12 
and  9,  1 1  absent ;  pale  ochreous-grey,  densely  irrorated  with 
whitish  ;  first  and  second  lines  and  median  shade  fine,  fuscous- 
grey,  more  or  less  marked  with  black  dots  on  veins,  somewhat 
irregular,  oblique,  angulated  near  costa,  second  line  nearly 
followed  by  a  fuscous-grey  parallel  more  cloudy  line  ;  a  dark  grey 
discal  dot  before  median  shade  ;  subterminal  obscurely  whitish, 
slender,  dentate,  margined  with  fuscous-grey ;  a  hindmarginal 
series  of  black  dots.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  somewhat 
unevenly  rounded  ;  colour  and  markings  as  in  forewings,  but 
first  line  obsolete,  median  nearly  straight. 

Sydney,  New  South  Wales ;  Melbourne,  Victoria  ;  Deloraine 
and  Hobart,  Tasmania ;  Mount  Lofty,  South  Australia  \  from 
September  to  January,  common.  Characterised  by  its  small 
size,  light  colour  and  general  whitish  irroration,  dotted  lines,  and 
especially  by  the  unusually  strongly  pectinated  antennae  of  the 
Q,  which  are  little  inferior  to  those  of  the  <J  in  development. 

25.  Sel.  leptodesma,  n.sp. 

(JQ.  28-33  mm.  Face  blackish,  lower  edge  and  sometimes 
upper  whitish,  crown  pale  grey  or  white.     Antennal  pectinations 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  607 

in  (J  8,  in  9  3,  apical  ^  simple.  Abdomen  with  a  black 
subapical  ring  on  each  segment.  Forewings  with  hind  margin 
obliquely  rounded;  10  sometimes  connected  with  9,  11  absent; 
fuscous,  densely  irrorated  with  grey-whitish  and  with  scattered 
black  scales  ;  first  line  only  visible  on  lower  half,  fine,  black, 
straight,  very  oblique  ;  a  dark  grey  discal  dot,  sometimes  obsolete  ; 
median  shade  fine,  indistinct,  dark  fuscous  with  a  few  black 
scales,  indistinctly  acutely  dentate  and  angulated  near  costa, 
touching  extremity  of  first  line  in  middle  ;  second  line  represented 
by  two  black  dots  near  costa,  and  a  somewhat  sinuate  black 
line  running  from  hindmargin  below  apex  to  ?-  of  inner  margin, 
nearly  followed  by  a  parallel  obscure  fuscous  shade ;  subterminal 
obscurely  paler,  darker-margined,  cloudy,  dentate  ;  a  fine  black 
hindmarginal  line.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  slightly  rounded, 
rather  strongly  waved  ;  colour,  subterminal,  and  hindmarginal 
lines  as  in  forewings ;  median  shade  slender,  dark  fuscous, 
slightly  curved  ;  a  dark  grey  discal  dot  beyond  this  ;  second  line 
slender,  black,  nearly  straight,  slightly  bent  near  costa,  nearly 
followed  by  a  parallel  fuscous  shade. 

Port  Lincoln,  South  Australia  ;  Fremantle,  West  Australia  ; 
in  October,  four  specimens.  Distinguished  from  the  other  species 
with  grey  colouring  and  blackish  face  by  the  peculiar  disposition 
of  the  slender  black  first  and  second  lines ;  the  antennae  of  the  9 
are  pectinated  as  in  S.  cognata,  but  less  strongly. 

26.   Sel.  leucoplecta,  n.sp. 

<J.  25-27  mm.  Face  grey  mixed  with  white.  Forewings  with 
hindmargin  obliquely  rounded;  10  anastomosing  with  9,  11  absent; 
white,  towards  base  and  costa  sprinkled  with  dark  fuscous  ;  first 
line  cloudy,  blackish,  angulated  above  middle  ;  median  shade 
cloudy,  fuscous,  twice  indented  outwards  ;  second  line  slender, 
black,  forming  an  abrupt  rounded  projection  posteriorly  at  1-,  and 
an  obtuse  angulation  at  J ;  posterior  area  beyond  second  line 
wholly  fuscous,  except  subterminal  line,  which  forms  a  narrow 
white  fascia  from   apex  to  anal  angle,  suffusedly  bordered  with 


608  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

darker ;  a  dark  fuscous  hindmarginal  line.  Hindwings  with 
hindmargin  rounded,  slightly  waved  ;  white,  sprinkled  with  grey 
towards  base;  a  small  dark  fuscous  spot  on  middle  of  inner  margin; 
a  grey  discal  dot ;  second  line  dark  fuscous,  slightly  waved,  some- 
what angulated  above  middle ;  posterior  area  beyond  this  wholly 
light  fuscous-grey,  except  subterminal  line,  which  forms  a  narrow 
white  somewhat  angulated  anteriorly  dark-margined  fascia  from 
apex  to  anal  angle. 

Melbourne,  Victoria ;  two  specimens  (Coll.  Lucas).  Distinct 
by  the  white  groundcolour  and  form  of  second  line. 

27.  Sel.  agoraea,  n.sp. 

(J 9*  31-33  mm.  Fac^  brownish,  mixed  with  dark  fuscous  and 
whitish-ochreous.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  obliquely  rounded, 
strongly  waved;  11  rising  out  of  10;  pale  whitish-ochreous, 
irrorated  with  ochreous  and  dark  fuscous,  sometimes  suffused 
almost  wholly  with  brownish,  especially  posteriorly  ;  first  line 
fuscous,  very  indistinct,  curved,  nearly  preceded  by  a  fainter 
brownish  shade ;  a  black  discal  dot,  sometimes  obsolete  ;  median 
shade  indistinct,  fuscous,  curved,  sometimes  obsolete  ;  second  line 
blackish,  curved  and  becoming  nearly  obsolete  towards  costa,  more 
or  less  sinuate  on  lower  half,  on  lower  J  nearly  followed  by  a 
parallel  reddish-brown  or  sometimes  deep  black  streak ;  a  cloudy 
fuscous  blotch  on  hindmargin  below  apex  ;  subterminal  very 
indistinct,  whitish,  dentate ;  a  fuscous  hindmarginal  line.  Hind- 
wings  with  hindmargin  scarcely  rounded,  dentate  ;  colour,  discal 
dot,  subterminal  and  hindmarginal  lines  as  in  forewings ;  wing  up 
to  second  line  generally  closely  strigulated  with  dark  fuscous ; 
median  shade  cloudy,  ochreous-brown  or  dark  fuscous,  rather 
curved  ;  second  line  dark  fuscous  or  black,  straight,  nearly 
followed  by  a  parallel  reddish-brown  or  deep  black  streak. 

Melbourne,  Victoria ;  four  specimens  (Coll.  Lucas).  Appears 
to  vary  considerably,  but  recognisable  by  the  nearly  straight 
dentate  hindmargin  of  hindwings,  and  their  strongly-marked 
straight  second  line  and  following  streak. 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  609 

28.  Sel.  luxaria,  Gn. 

( Hemerophila  luxaria,  Gn.  IX,  220;  Tephrosia  disperdita,  Walk. 
416.) 

(J.  34-35  mm.  Face  blackish-fuscous,  lower  margin  and  a  bar 
above  middle  whitish-ochreous.  Antennal  pectinations  6,  apical 
£  simple.  Thorax  pale  brownish-ochreous,  with  a  strong  black 
anterior  bar.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  obliquely  rounded, 
waved  ;  10  connected  with  9,  11  rising  out  of  10  ;  pale  brownish- 
ochreous,  with  scattered  black  scales ;  a  blackish  line  beneath 
costa  from  base  to  about  \ ;  first  line  and  median  shade  fine, 
blackish-fuscous,  very  oblique,  becoming  obsolete  towards  costa  ; 
a  black  discal  dot  between  these ;  second  line  represented  by  a 
black  twice  sinuate  line  running  from  hindmargin  beneath  apex 
to  \  of  inner  margin,  preceded  by  a  broad  suffused  whitish 
irroration,  and  nearly  followed  by  a  dark  fuscous  shade  ;  a  short 
irregular  blackish-fuscous  very  oblique  line  from  costa  before  apex; 
subterminal  whitish,  partially  dark-margined,  dentate,  obsolete 
towards  costa ;  a  hindmarginal  row  of  black  dots  or  interrupted 
line.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  gently  rounded,  unevenly 
dentate ;  colour  and  hindmarginal  line  as  in  forewings  ;  median 
shade  straight,  slender,  dark  fuscous ;  a  black  discal  dot ;  second 
line  somewhat  irregularly  sinuate,  black,  nearly,  followed  by  a 
parallel  dark  fuscous  shade;  subterminal  whitish,  rather  irregular, 
margined  with  blackish-fuscous. 

Sydney,  New  South  Wales ;  from  September  to  November, 
rather  common.  Easily  known  from  the  other  ochreous  species 
by  the  characteristic  form  of  the  second  line,  and  the  blackish 
basal  subcostal  line.  T  may  mention  that  Guenee's  hemipteraria, 
which  some  have  referred  to  this  species,  is  in  my  opinion  a 
New  Zealand  species  of  a  different  group  (vid.  Trans.  N.  Zeal. 
Inst.  1887,  60). 

29.  Sel.  excursaria,  Gn. 

(Tephrosia  excursaria',  Gn.  IX,  267  ;  T.  exportaria,  ib.  268  ; 
T.  phibalapteraria,  ib.  268 ;  Hemerophila  vestita,  Walk.  322 ; 
Boarmia  attributa,  ib.  390;  B.  decertaria,  ib.  391.) 


610  REVISION    OP   AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

(J9-  34-40  mm.  Face  blackish-fuscous,  lower  margin  and  fore- 
head ferruginous-ochreous.  Antenna!  pectinations  of  <J  4,  apical 
J  simple.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  obliquely  rounded,  waved  ; 
11  rising  out  of  10;  varying  from  ochreous  to  fuscous,  more  or 
less  irrorated  with  dark  fuscous  and  sometimes  with  whitish  ; 
first  line  slender,  curved,  dark  fuscous,  marked  with  black 
on  veins,  sometimes  thick  and  blackish-fuscous  on  lower  half, 
preceded  by  a  deeper  ochreous  shade  ;  median  shade  slender, 
irregular,  dark  fuscous,  ill-marked,  angulated  above  middle, 
sometimes  preceded  by  a  blackish  discal  dot ;  second  line  black, 
usually  slender,  but  sometimes  thickened  on  lower  J,  costal  third 
usually  reduced  to  three  black  dots,  acutely  angulated  above 
middle  and  with  a  rounded-triangular  prominence  below  middle, 
nearly  followed  by  an  ochreous-brown  parallel  shade,  tending  to 
be  continued  to  hindmargin  beneath  apex  ;  subterminal  obscurely 
paler,  partially  darker-margined,  slender,  dentate;  a  hind  marginal 
black  line  or  series  of  dots.  Hind  wings  with  hindmargin  rounded, 
dentate ;  colour,  subterminal,  and  hindmarginal  lines  as  in  fore- 
wings;  median  shade  slender,  cloudy,  dark  fuscous,  nearly  straight; 
a  blackish  discal  dot;  second  line  somewhat  irregular,  slightly 
sinuate,  black,  sometimes  rather  thickened,  nearly  followed  by  an 
ochreous-brown  parallel  shade. 

Sydney,  New  South  Wales;  Melbourne  and  Warragul,  Victoria ; 
Mount  Lofty,  South  Australia ;  from  April  to  December,  common 
and  widely  distributed.  The  larva  feeds  on  Acacia  decurrens,  but 
perhaps  not  exclusively.  I  have  bred  dwarfed  specimens  very 
much  smaller  than  the  size  given,  but  do  not  regard  them  as 
natural.  The  species  is  very  variable  in  intensity  of  marking, 
but  recognisable  by  the  blackish-fuscous  face  and  ferruginous- 
ochreous  forehead  from  all  but  the  following. 

30.  Sel.  aganopa,  n.sp. 

^£.  27-30  mm.  Face  dark  ferruginous-fuscous,  lower  margin 
and  forehead  lighter  ferruginous.  Antennal  pectinations  of  fi  6, 
apical  y1^  simple.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  waved ; 
11  rising  out  of  10;  in  flight  ochreous,  in  £  pale  reddish-fuscous, 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  611 

with  some  scattered  black  scales,  in  $  with  some  white  irroration 
in  disc ;  first  and  second  lines  represented  by  series  of  black  dots, 
partially  connected  by  extremely  fine  dark  fuscous  lines,  first 
curved,  nearly  preceded  by  a  deep  ochreous  parallel  shade,  second 
sinuate,  forming  a  rounded-angular  projection  above  middle  and 
another  below  middle,  nearly  followed  by  a  deeper  ochreous  or 
ochreous-brown  shade  on  lower  §,  which  forms  a  small  suffused 
darker  spot  in  middle,  preceded  by  a  stronger  black  mark  on 
second  line,  and  tends  to  be  continued  to  hindmargin  beneath 
apex  ;  median  shade  slender,  deeper  ochreous  or  ochreous-brown, 
rather  irregular,  somewhat  angulated  above  middle ;  subterminal 
obscurely  paler,  somewhat  darker-margined,  dentate  ;  a  hindmar- 
ginal  row  of  black  dots.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  gently 
rounded,  dentate ;  colour  and  subterminal  line  as  in  fore  wings ; 
median  shade  ochreous,  nearly  straight ;  a  blackish  discal  dot ; 
second  line  slender,  dark  fuscous  marked  with  black  dots,  slightly 
sinuate,  nearly  followed  by  an  ochreous  or  ochreous-brown  shade ; 
a  very  fine  blackish  hindmarginal  line. 

Albany,  West  Australia  ;  in  December,  five  specimens.  Allied 
to  the  preceding,  but  structurally  distinct  by  the  much  shorter 
simple  portion  of  the  antennae  in  <J,  and  also  distinguishable  by 
the  dotted  lines  and  dark  median  spot  beyond  second  line  of 
forewings,  and  more  ferruginous  face. 

31.  Sel.  adetyihodes,  n.sp. 

gQ.  29-30  mm.  Face  ochreous-white,  with  a  few  blackish 
scales.  Antennal  pectinations  of  $  6,  apical  T\j-  simple.  Fore- 
wings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  strongly  waved  ;  10  connected 
with  9,  11  rising  out  of  10;  light  fuscous,  partially  tinged  with 
ochreous  on  veins,  and  irrorated  with  black,  disc  greyer  and 
sprinkled  with  whitish  ;  first  and  second  lines  and  median  shade 
very  indistinctly  marked,  slender,  darker  fuscous,  rather  sinuate 
and  obtusely  angulated  near  costa,  second  line  forming  a  more 
conspicuous  dark  fuscous  mark  in  middle,  and  nearly  followed 
on  lower  |  by  an  obscure  darker  shade  irregularly  continued  to 
hindmargin  beneath  apex;  a  dark  fuscous  discal  dot;  subterminal 
40 


612  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

obscurely  paler,  dentate,  partially  darker-margined ;  a  hindmarginal 
row  of  dark  fuscous  dots.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded, 
dentate ;  colour,  subterminal  line,  and  hindmarginal  dots  as  in 
forewings ;  median  shade  cloudy,  fuscous,  nearly  straight ;  a  dark 
fuscous  discal  dot;  second  line  hardly  sinuate,  fuscous,  dotted  with 
darker,  nearly  followed  by  an  obscure  fuscous  parallel  shade. 

Albany,  West  Australia ;  in  September,  two  specimens. 
Nearly  allied  to  S.  aganop>a,  but  immediately  separable  by  the 
ochreous-white  face ;  it  is  also  duller  and  more  indistinctly 
marked,  with  the  lines  not  dotted. 

32.  Sel.  pallidiscaria,  Walk. 

( Aspilates  p)cdlidiscaria,  Walk.  1683.) 

£.  28  mm.  Head  fuscous,  face  rather  dark  fuscous,  lower 
margin  white.  Antennal  pectinations  8,  apical  ^  simple.  Fore- 
wings  with  hindmargin  obliquely  rounded,  waved  ;  10  connected 
with  9,  11  rising  out  of  10  ;  rather  light  purplish-fuscous,  basal 
and  hindmarginal  areas  darker,  inner  margin  tinged  with  reddish  ; 
costa  strigulated  with  whitish ;  first  and  second  lines  and  median 
shade  slender,  hardly  darker  except  on  inner  margin,  slightly 
curved,  second  line  nearly  followed  by  a  parallel  shade  merged 
in  darker  posterior  area  ;  subterminal  subdentate,  hardly  per- 
ceptibly paler  except  towards  inner  margin,  where  it  is  distinct 
and  whitish.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  unevenly  rounded 
and  waved  ;  colour  and  subterminal  line  as  in  forewings ;  median 
shade  well-marked,  rather  dark  fuscous,  nearly  straight ;  a  dark 
fuscous  discal  dot ;  second  line  very  faint. 

Sydney,  New  South  Wales  ;  in  October,  two  specimens. 
Distinguished  from  the  other  species  with  dark  fuscous  face  by 
the  fuscous  forehead,  purplish  tinge  of  wings,  and  very  indistinct 
lines  and  median  shade  of  forewings. 

33.  Sel.  despicata,  Walk. 

(Teplirosia  despicata,  Walk.  418.) 

29  mm.  (Head  broken.)  Form  of  wings  and  markings  much 
as   in  Ectropis  fractaria,    but   colouring   distinctly    brown ;    all 


BY    E.   MEYRICK.  613 

markings    indistinct  ;     cliscal     mark    of     hinclvvings    (apparently 
lunular)  touching  median  line. 

Said  to  be  from  South  Australia  ;  one  specimen  in  the  British 
Museum,  from  which  the  above  notes  are  taken  ;  it  is  a  very 
obscure  insect,  and  not  in  fit  condition  to  be  worth  describing, 
yet  it  does  not  seem  identifiable  with  any  other  species,  and 
claims  some  notice. 

34.  Sel.  destinataria,  Gn. 

(Gnophos  destinataria,  Gn.  IX,  297  ;  Boarmia  attenta,  Walk. 
393  ;  Tephrosia  indirecta,  ib.  418  ;  T.  vagaria,  ib.  1542.) 

<£.-  29-33  mm.  Head  pale  ochreous,  face  irrorated  with  fuscous. 
Antennal  pectinations  7,  apical  ^  simple.  Forewings  with  hind- 
margin  rounded,  strongly  waved  ;  10  connected  with  9,  11  out 
of  10;  light  yellowish-ochreous,  irrorated  with  grey  and  a  few 
blackish-grey  and  whitish  scales ;  veins  partially  suffused  with 
bright  ferruginous-ochreous;  first  and  second  lines  and  median 
shade  indistinct,  ferruginous-ochreous,  dotted  with  black  on  veins, 
rather  irregular,  forming  small  rather  dark  grey  spots  on  costa  ; 
a  blackish  discal  dot ;  subterminal  forming  a  series  of  disconnected 
whitish  marks ;  a  hindmarginal  series  of  black  dots.  Hindwings 
with  hindmargin  rounded,  dentate  ;  colour  and  markings  as  in 
forewings,  but  first  line  absent. 

Blackheath  (3500  feet),  New  South  Wales  ;  occurs  also  in 
Tasmania  ;  in  September,  three  specimens.  A  distinct  species, 
easily  known  by  the  mottled  yellowTish-grey  appearance,  ferru- 
ginous veins,  and  dotted  lines. 

35.  Sel.  zascia,  n.sp. 

(j£.  31-32  mm.  Head  blackish,  -with  a  few  whitish  scales. 
Antennal  pectinations  of  g  6,  apical  i  simple.  Thorax  blackish, 
irrorated  with  whitish,  with  three  black  bars.  Abdomen  white, 
sprinkled  with  black,  two  basal  segments  barred  with  black. 
Forewings  with  hindmargin  bowed,  w^aved  ;  10  connected  with 
9,  11  rising  out  of  10  ;  grey,  densely  irrorated  with  black  and 
white ;    first    line   and    median    shade    blackish-grey,    bent    near 


614  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

costa,  somewhat  curved  ;  a  large  black  discal  dot  immediately 
preceding  median  shade ;  second  line  blackish-grey,  marked  with 
black  on  veins,  bent  above  middle,  slightly  sinuate  below  middle, 
nearly  followed  by  a  strong  blackish-grey  parallel  shade,  connected 
with  hindmargin  below  apex  by  an  ill-defined  blackish-grey 
oblique  streak  ;  subterminal  white,  margined  with  blackish-grey, 
dentate,  interrupted  above  and  sometimes  below  middle  ;  a  hind- 
marginal  row  of  large  black  dots,  connected  by  a  fine  line. 
Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  dentate  ;  colour  and 
markings  as  in  forewings,  but  first  line  absent,  median  shade 
straight  and  indistinctly  marked,  discal  black  dot  considerably 
beyond  it. 

Melbourne,  Victoria ;  a  pair  taken  by  Dr.  Lucas  and  Mr. 
G.  H.  Raynor.  Very  distinct  by  the  dense  black  and  white 
irroration,  and  the  almost  wholly  black  head. 

37.  Sel.  perfectaria,  Walk. 

( Tephrosia  yierfectaria,  Walk.  418.) 

(J(J).  28  mm.  Face  grey-whitish,  with  black  median  band. 
Antennal  pectinations  of  $  4,  apical  },  simple.  Forewings  with 
hindmargin  bowed ;  grey-whitish,  sprinkled  with  black  ;  first  and 
second  lines  and  median  shade  fuscous,  strongly  dotted  with 
black  on  veins ;  first  somewhat  curved  ;  median  slightly  sinuate  ; 
second  sinuate  outwards  in  middle,  inwards  below  middle,  nearly 
followed  by  a  dentate  fuscous  shade  ;  subterminal  dentate,  whitish, 
preceded  by  cloudy  blackish  dots,  two  above  middle  larger  and 
more  conspicuous;  a  hindmarginal  series  of  large  black  dots. 
Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  waved;  colour  and  markings 
as  in  forewings,  but  first  line  absent,  median  nearly  straight, 
a  large  black  discal  dot  beyond  it,  second  line  hardly  sinuate,  a 
single  larger  dot  (not  two)  before  subterminal. 

Said  to  be  from  Sydney,  New  South  Wales  ;  three  specimens 
in  the  British  Museum,  from  which  the  above  description  is 
taken.  It  is  a  very  distinct  species,  characterised  by  the  pale 
colouring  and  rows  of  strong  black  dots  on  all  lines. 


BY    E.    MEYRICK.  615 

37.  Sel.  euboliaria,  Walk. 
(Tephrosia  euboliaria,  Walk.  419  ;  Scotosia  fr aetata,  ib.  1359.) 
<J$.  26-28 mm.  Head  pale  ochreous,  with  a  ferruginous-blackish 
bar  across  forehead,  and  lower  part  of  face  sprinkled  with  blackish. 
Antennal  pectinations  of  <J  5,  apical  J  simple.  Thorax  with  a 
small  double  posterior  crest.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  rounded, 
waved;  10  sometimes  connected  with  9,  11  separate;  whitish- 
ochreous,  tinged  with  brownish  along  costa,  with  a  few  scattered 
black  scales,  in  Q  tinged  with  fuscous-grey  throughout ;  basal  area 
more  or  less  wholly  brownish-ochreous  ;  first  line  slender,  slightly 
curved,  ochreous-brown  or  blackish,  sometimes  nearly  preceded  by 
a  parallel  blackish  shade ;  median  shade  rather  strong,  slightly 
curved,  ochreous-brown  or  usually  blackish,  anteriorly  sharply 
marked,  posteriorly  suffused  with  ochreous-brown;  a  black  discal 
dot  beyond  this ;  second  line  fine,  black  or  ochreous-brown,  mode- 
rately curved,  slightly  sinuate  inwards  in  middle,  nearly  followed 
by  a  more  or  less  marked  parallel  dark  ochreous-brown  shade ; 
subterminal  obscure,  ochreous-whitish,  subdentate,  closely  approxi- 
mated to  preceding  shade  in  middle,  more  or  less  margined  with 
dark  fuscous,  and  connected  with  an  oblique  angularly  bent 
blackish-fuscous  or  ochreous-brown  streak  from  hindmargin 
beneath  apex  ;  a  hindmarginai  row  of  black  dots.  Hindwings 
with  hindmargin  rounded,  waved ;  colour  and  markings  as  in 
forewings,  but  paler  whitish-ochreous  towards  base,  first  line  and 
preceding  shade  absent,  median  shade  straight,  obsolete  towards 
costa,  second  line  nearly  straight,  slightly  sinuate,  subterminal 
not  approximated  to  preceding  shade. 

Geraldton,  West  Australia;  in  November,  common.  A  peculiar 
species,  combining  the  antennal  characters  of  the  first  group  with 
the  neuration  of  the  second. 

38.  Sel.  argoplaea,  n.sp. 

fi.  34-36  mm.  Head  whitish  mixed  with  fuscous  and  dark 
fuscous,  face  blackish-fuscous.  Antennal  pectinations  5,  apical  | 
simple.     Thorax  with  short  broad  posterior   crest.      Forewings 


616  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

with  hindmargin  slightly  rounded,  somewhat  waved  ;  10  some- 
times connected  with  9,  1 1  separate ;  grey,  partially  tinged  with 
ochreous,  irrorated  with  white,  and  with  numerous  rather  long 
dark  fuscous  strigulae  marked  with  black  scales ;  a  white  spot  at 
base  of  inner  margin;  first  line  blackish-fuscous,  somewhat  curved, 
indented  below  middle ;  median  shade  broad,  suffused,  blackish- 
fuscous,  straight ;  a  black  transverse  discal  spot  much  beyond 
this,  sometimes  little  marked,  sometimes  conspicuous ;  second  line 
blackish-fuscous,  partially  interrupted,  evenly  and  rather  strongly 
edged  with  whitish  posteriorly,  curved  outwards  on  upper  half, 
sinuate  inwards  on  lower  half,  followed  by  an  ochreous  shade  ; 
subtertninal  obscurely  paler  or  sometimes  white,  irregular,  sub- 
dentate,  margined  anteriorly  with  blackish  and  posteriorly  with  an 
ochreous-brown  suffusion ;  a  blackish  suffusion  before  hindmargin 
above  middle  ;  a  hindmarginal  row  of  large  black  dots,  connected 
by  a  fine  line.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  waved  ; 
white,  bluish-tinged  in  disc ;  a  blackish  discal  dot ;  a  broad  dark 
grey  band  along  upper  J  of  hindmargin,  including  a  suffused  white 
apical  spot ;  lower  third  of  hindmargin  and  a  broad  longitudinal 
streak  near  inner  margin  not  reaching  base  coloured  and  marked 
as  in  forewings  ;  cilia  round  apex  white. 

Sydney,  New  South  Wales  ;  Quorn,  South  Australia  ;  in  Octo- 
ber, four  specimens.  A  handsome  and  strongly  marked  insect, 
differing  from  all  others  in  the  white  upper  §  of  the  hindwings. 

39.  Sel.  bitaeniaria,  Le  Guill. 

(Boarmia  bitaeniaria,  Le  Guill.,  Rev.  Zool.  1841,  257,  Gn.  IX, 
249,  pi.  in,  1  ;  Gastrina  erebina,  Walk.  326.) 

(J9-  43-45  mm.  Head  fuscous-whitish,  lower  part  of  face 
blackish-fuscous  with  some  pale  scales  on  lower  margin,  and  a 
blackish  bar  on  forehead,  sometimes  nearly  obsolete.  Antennae 
in  ^  with  apical  §  simple.  Thorax  with  slight  posterior  crest. 
Forewings  with  hindmargin  gently  rounded,  waved;  10  and  11 
separate ;  light  fuscous,  irrorated  with  whitish  and  with  scattered 
black  scales,  with  darker  strigulse  posteriorly;  a  small  ferruginous 
basal   patch ;    first   line   slender,   dark   fuscous,   slightly  curved, 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  617 

indented  below  middle  ;  median  shade  rather  thick,  blackish, 
posteriorly  rather  broadly  suffused  with  ochreous-brown,  nearly 
straight,  slightly  indented  in  middle  ;  a  small  black  discal  dot 
close  beyond  this ;  second  line  fuscous,  indistinct  except  near 
inner  margin  where  it  becomes  black,  obtusely  prominent  above 
and  below  middle,  tolerably  nearly  followed  by  an  indistinct 
ochreous-fuscous  parallel  shade ;  subterminal  slender,  whitish, 
partially  obscure,  irregular  and  subdentate,  anteriorly  strongly 
margined  with  black  except  towards  inner  margin,  somewhat 
dilated  with  whitish-ochreous  in  middle,  posteriorly  margined 
with  an  ochreous  or  pale  ferruginous  suffusion  ;  a  black  hind- 
marginal  line.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  slightly  rounded, 
dentate ;  colour  and  markings  as  in  forewings,  but  base  and 
anterior  half  of  costa  suffused  with  ochreous-whitish,  first  line 
absent,  second  line  sinuate,  subterminal  without  pale  dilation  in 
middle. 

Melbourne,  Victoria ;  Campbell  town,  Tasmania  ;  in  January, 
four  specimens.  From  the  three  following  species,  which  resemble 
it  structurally,  it  is  immediately  known  by  the  black  discal  dot  of 
forewings. 

40.  Sel.  acaciaria,  Boisd. 

(Boarmia  acaciaria,  Boisd.,  Faun.  Mad.  116,  pi.  xvi,  4,  Gn. 
IX,  255 ;  B.  alienavia,  Walk.  370 ;  B.  displicata,  ib.  389  ;  B. 
gelidaria,  ib.  1537.) 

(JQ.  35-38  mm.  Face  with  rather  prominent  tuft,  whitish-grey, 
with  broad  blackish  bar  across  lower  part  of  face,  and  narrow 
more  obscure  bar  on  forehead.  Antennae  in  £  with  apical  § 
simple.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  obliquely  rounded,  waved ; 
10  sometimes  connected  with  9, 11  separate  or  sometimes  connected 
with  10  ;  grey,  sometimes  ochreous-tinged,  densely  irrorated  with 
white,  and  with  scattered  black  scales  ;  first  line  slender,  black, 
dentate,  roundly  angulated  near  costa  ;  a  transverse  discal  mark 
of  raised  whitish  scales,  suffused! y  margined  with  grey,  placed  on 
and  interrupting  median  shade,  which  is  slender,  blackish,  curved, 
rather   irregular  ;    second    line   well-marked,   black,    subdentate, 


618  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

gently  curved,  nearly  followed  by  a  very  indistinct  grey  parallel 
shade,  and  usually  marked  in  middle  with  a  small  blackish  spot 
or  a  short  longitudinal  line  extending  to  hind  margin;  subterminal 
whitish,  very  obscure,  subdentate,  grey-margined,  forming  a  small 
dark  spot  on  anterior  edge  above  middle ;  a  hindmarginal  series 
of  black  dots,  connected  by  a  fine  line.  Hind  wings  with  hind- 
margin  gently  rounded,  dentate  ;  colour  and  markings  as  in 
forewings,  but  first  line  absent,  median  shade  stronger,  nearly 
straight,  second  line  more  strongly  marked  on  lower  half,  nearly 
followed  by  a  more  or  less  distinct  brownish-ochreous  parallel 
shade,  without  blackish  spot  in  middle. 

Newcastle,  New  South  Wales ;  Geraldton,  West  Australia ;  in 
November,  eight  specimens.  This  and  the  two  following  species 
differ  from  the  rest  in  the  discal  transverse  spot  of  raised  scales  ; 
S.  acaciaria  is  smaller  than  the  other  two,  and  distinguishable 
from  both  by  the  well-marked  black  bar  of  face.  This  species 
occurs  also  in  India,  Ceylon,  South  Africa,  and  probably  the 
adjoining  islands ;  there  is  a  tendency  to  the  origination  of  slight 
local  forms,  and  the  Australian  form  thus  inclines  to  show  the 
ochreous  or  brownish  tinge  of  some  markings  more  distinctly,  but 
I  can  see  no  more  reliable  point  of  distinction. 

41.  Set.  illustraria,  Walk. 

(Boarmia  illustraria,  Walk.  1539.) 

(JQ.  40-41  mm.  Face  densely  rough-scaled,  fuscous-whitish, 
with  indications  of  a  blackish  median  bar.  Antennae  in  g  with 
apical  f  simple.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  obliquely  rounded, 
waved;  10  and  11  separate;  whitish-ochreous,  clouded  with  pale 
reddish-ochreous ;  first  line  black,  rather  irregular,  curved,  nearly 
preceded  by  a  fuscous-reddish  parallel  shade  sometimes  wholly 
suffused  with  black;  a  moderately  large  white  discal  spot,  including 
a  transverse  ridge  of  raised  scales,  in  9  suffused  with  fuscous, 
placed  on  median  shade,  which  is  slender,  fuscous,  rather  irregular, 
tending  to  form  a  blackish  spot  on  costa ;  second  line  black,  sub- 
dentate,  upper  half  unevenly  curved,  nearly  followed  by  a  fuscous- 
reddish  or  blackish  parallel  shade,  becoming  broadly  suffused  with 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  619 

fuscous  or  black  on  upper  half,  and  sometimes  emitting  a  streak 
anteriorly  to  touch  discal  spot ;  subterminal  white,  subdentate, 
margined  with  fuscous  and  partially  with  black,  sometimes  double 
for  a  short  distance  above  middle,  where  it  is  surrounded  by  a 
blackish  suffusion,  beneath  this  forming  a  moderately  large  pale 
or  white  spot  on  hindmargin  ;  a  hindmarginal  series  of  black 
marks.  Hind  wings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  dentate ;  colour 
and  markings  as  in  forewings,  but  median  shade  blacker,  discal 
spot  margined  with  black,  second  line  sometimes  obscured  on 
lower  |  by  a  very  broad  band  of  blackish  suffusion,  sometimes 
followed  by  a  whitish  suffusion,  pale  spot  on  middle  of  hind- 
margin little  marked. 

Brisbane,  Queensland;  three  specimens  (Dr.  Lucas  and  Aus- 
tralian Museum).  This  species  appears  to  be  very  variable  in  the 
extent  and  intensity  of  the  blackish  markings,  and  at  present  I 
cannot  decide  what  points  are  most  reliable  for  its  characterisation, 
but  the  reddish-ochreous  suffusion  seems  constant. 

42.  Sel.  eiristictis,  Meyr. 

(Boarmia  ejnstictis,  Meyr.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  Lond.  1889,  499.) 
<JQ.  48-50  mm.  Face  ochreous-whitish,  sometimes  with  a 
blackish  lateral  mark  in  middle.  Antennal  pectinations  a  8, 
6  10,  apical  half  filiform.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  gently 
rounded,  in  £  faintly  waved  ;  10  and  11  separate;  pale  brownish- 
ochreous,  with  scattered  blackish  scales,  more  or  less  irrorated 
with  white,  in  Q  sometimes  very  densely ;  first  line  black,  rather 
irregular,  gently  curved,  nearly  preceded  by  an  ochreous-brown 
parallel  shade,  sometimes  nearly  obsolete ;  median  shade  ochreous- 
brown,  obscure,  somewhat  irregular,  nearly  straight;  an  ill-defined 
transverse-oval  dark  grey  discal  spot,  including  a  more  or  less 
marked  ridge  of  somewhat  raised  whitish  scales,  sometimes  hardly 
perceptible,  adjointing  posterior  edge  of  median  shade ;  second 
line  black,  subdentate,  nearly  straight,  with  a  small  sinuation 
outwards  above  middle,  nearly  followed  by  a  very  obscure  ochreous- 
brownish  shade ;  subterminal  white,  dentate,  anteriorly  margined 
by  a  small  double  blackish  spot  above  middle,  and  posteriorly  in 


620  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

9  by  a  darker  suffusion  between  middle  and  apex ;  a  hindmarginal 
row  of  round  black  dots,  sometimes  connected  with  two  or  three 
short  black  longitudinal  streaks  on  veins.  Hind  wings  with  hind- 
margin  rounded,  waved;  colour  and  markings  as  in  forewings, 
but  first  line  absent,  median  shade  well-marked,  more  or  less 
thick,  blackish,  discal  spot  more  distinctly  white,  black-margined, 
second  line  curved  outwards  on  upper  §,  often  more  strongly 
marked,  subterminal  without  dark  marginal  suffusions  above 
middle,  but  sometimes  margined  anteriorly  with  a  blackish  suffu- 
sion towards  lower  extremity. 

Brisbane,  Queensland ;  one  specimen  received  from  Dr.  Lucas  ; 
also  sent  commonly  from  New  Guinea.  Differs  from  the  two 
preceding  by  its  large  size,  hindmargin  of  hind  wings  waved  but 
not  dentate,  and  longer  simple  portion  of  antennae  in  $,  as  well 
as  by  its  dull  colouring,  and  reduction  of  frontal  bar  to  a  lateral 
mark. 

9.  Lophodes,  Gn. 

Face  with  tolerably  appressed  scales.  Tongue  developed.  Palpi 
rather  short,  porrected,  with  projecting  scales,  terminal  joint  very 
short.  Antennae  in  £  very  strongly  bipectinated,  apex  simple. 
Thorax  without  crest,  densely  hairy  beneath.  Femora  hairy 
beneath ;  posterior  tibiae  in  $  not  dilated.  Forewings  in  $  with 
small  fovea;  11  separate  or  from  a  point  with  10  (or  probably 
sometimes  stalked)  or  absent.     Hindwings  normal. 

Includes  only  the  following  species,  which  is  nearly  related  to 
the  preceding  genus. 

43.  Loph.  sinistraria^  Gn. 

(Lophodes  sinistraria,  Gn.  IX,  "212,  pi.  x,  5.) 

<J.  38-45  mm.,  Q  54-62  mm.  Head  and  thorax  blackish  or 
partly  deep  ferruginous,  anterior  margin  of  thorax  ochreous- whitish. 
Antennal  pectinations  of  $  18,  apical  -^  simple.  Forewings  in  9 
elongate,  hindmargin  in  £  somewhat  rounded,  waved,  in  £  more 
oblique,  rounded-dentate,  tooth  on  vein  5  nearly  obsolete,  so  that 
there  is  a  deep  emargination  between  4  and  6  ;  rather  deep  ferru- 
ginous-ochreous,  in  £  sometimes  towards  costa  and  lower  part  of 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  621 

hindmargin,  in  <£  almost  wholly  suffused  with  dark  fuscous,  with 
scattered  blackish  scales ;  basal  fourth  of  costa  rather  broadly  in 
^  pale  ochreous,  in  Q  whitish,  with  scattered  dark  scales  ;  first 
line  black,  curved,  in  £  twice,  in  Q  once  obtusely  angulated,  on 
lower  half  nearly  preceded  by  a  blackish  shade  ;  usually  a  pale 
patch  on  inner  margin  beyond  this  ;  median  shade  slender,  usually 
very  indistinct,  dark  fuscous  or  blackish,  angulated  near  costa  ; 
second  line  slender,  black,  slightly  irregular,  curved  and  somewhat 
sinuate,  followed  on  costa  by  a  small  ochreous-whitish  or  white 
spot ;  in  Q  sometimes  a  whitish  shade  beyond  this  ;  subterminal 
obscurely  paler  or  nearly  obsolete,  in  Q  more  whitish  and  dentate 
near  costa,  traversing  a  round  pale  spot  of  ground  colour  between 
veins  6  and  7,  which  in  Q  extends  to  hindmargin ;  a  black  inter- 
rupted hindmarginal  line.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded, 
dentate  ;  colour  as  in  forewings,  but  lighter  towards  base;  median 
shade,  second,  and  subterminal  lines  as  in  forewings,  but  second 
line  irregularly  dentate,  no  pale  subapical  spot  before  hindmargin; 
a  transverse  black  discal  mark  beyond  median  shade. 

Newcastle  and  Sydney,  New  South  Wales;  Fernshaw,  Victoria; 
in  October,  November,  February,  March,  and  May,  locally  common. 
It  is  a  variable  insect,  and  the  sexes  differ  markedly.  The  larva 
feeds  on  Acacia  decurrens. 

10.  Melanodes,  Gn. 

Face  rough-scaled.  Tongue  developed.  Palpi  rather  short, 
porrected,  second  joint  with  dense  loose  scales,  terminal  joint  very 
short.  Antennse  in  £  subdentate,  shortly  ciliated.  Thorax  not 
crested,  densely  hairy  beneath.  Femora  glabrous  (?) ;  posterior 
tibiae  in  <J  not  dilated.  Forewings  in  <J  without  fovea  (?) ;  10 
rising  out  of  9  below  7.     Hindwings^ normal. 

Contains  the  following  species  only ;  certainly  a  good  genus,  but 
although  apparently  sometimes  common,  I  have  not  yet  succeeded 
in  obtaining  good  specimens  for  detailed  examination,  and  the 
characters  given  above  are  in  part  uncertain.  Hence  the  affinity 
of  the  species  is  also  doubtful,  but  it  seems  allied  to  Lophodes. 


622  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

44.  Mel.  anthracitaria,  Gn. 

(Mdanodes  antkracitaria,  Gn.  IX,  222,  pi.  ix,  7 ;  Praxis  corvus, 
Walk.  Noct.  1087.) 

(JQ.  45-55  mm.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  waved  ; 
blackish,  the  veins  somewhat  dotted  with  whitish;  first  and  second 
lines  black,  first  twice  angulated  outwards,  second  sinuate  out- 
wards in  middle,  followed  on  costa  by  a  yellowish  dot ;  median 
shade  obscure,  sinuate.  Hindwings  with  colour  and  markings  as 
in  forewings,  but  first  line  absent,  median  and  second  straighter ; 
a  transverse  black  discal  spot.  Sometimes  an  ochreous-white 
suffusion  forms  a  band  beyond  second  line  in  both  wings,  and  before 
first  line  in  forewings. 

Sydney,  New  South  Wales  ;  Fernshaw,  Victoria  ;  also  in  Tas- 
mania (Austr.  and  Brit.  Mus.).  The  above  incomplete  description 
is  sufficient  for  identification. 

11.  Aporoctena,  n.g. 

Face  with  appressed  scales.  Tongue  developed.  Palpi  short, 
porrected,  rough-scaled,  terminal  joint  very  short.  Antenna?  in 
(J  filiform,  shortly  ciliated.  Thorax  without  crest,  densely  hairy 
beneath.  Femora  glabrous  ;  posterior  tibiae  in  (J  dilated,  contain- 
ing tuft,  tarsi  extremely  short.  Forewings  in  $  with  well-marked 
fovea;  10  rising  out  of  11,  connected  with  9.     Hindwings  normal. 

Endemic  ;  nearly  related  to  Selidosema,  differing  only  by  the 
simple  antennas. 

45.  Apor.  scierodes,  n.sp. 

(J.  26  mm.  Head  fuscous,  crown  whitish-ochreous  behind,  face 
with  blackish  median  band,  and  mixed  with  whitish  below  this. 
Antennal  ciliations  ^.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  rounded, 
slightly  waved  ;  ochreous-brown,  strewn  with  numerous  dark 
fuscous  transverse  strigulae,  space  between  first  and  second  lines 
suffused  with  dark  fuscous ;  lines  blackish,  somewhat  irregular, 
placed  near  together,  first  curved,  preceded  by  some  whitish  scales, 
median  sinuate,  second  obtusely  somewhat  angulated  above  middle, 
sinuate  inwards  on  lower  half,   edged  with  whitish  posteriorly, 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  623 

ground  colour  immediately  beyond  this  somewhat  mixed  with 
whitish  ;  subterminal  very  obscure,  whitish,  subdentate,  suffused 
towards  middle  with  dark  grey,  which  forms  a  short  oblique  sub- 
apical  streak  ;  an  interrupted  black  hindmarginal  line.  Hind- 
wings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  somewhat  waved ;  yellowish- 
ochreous,  more  whitish  towards  base  and  inner  margin,  strewn 
with  dark  fuscous  scales  or  short  strigula?,  apex  suffused  with  dark 
grey ;  median  shade  blackish,  somewhat  bent  in  middle ;  second 
line  rather  thick,  blackish,  slightly  sinuate,  edged  with  whitish 
posteriorly  ;  subterminal  suffusedly  edged  with  blackish  anteriorly; 
an  interrupted  black  hindmarginal  line. 

Brisbane,  Queensland ;  one  specimen  received  from  Dr.  Lucas. 
The  yellowish  tinge  of  the  hindwings,  though  obscure,  is  a  notice- 
able characteristic. 

12.  Hybernia,  Latr. 

Face  tolerably  smooth.  Tongue  short.  Palpi  moderate,  por- 
rected,  rough-scaled,  terminal  joint  short.  Antennas  in  £  moder- 
ately bipectinated  throughout.  Thorax  not  crested,  slightly  hairy 
beneath.  Femora  glabrous  ;  posterior  tibia?  in  £  not  dilated.  Q 
semiapterous.  Forewings  in  <J  without  fovea  ;  1 1  absent.  Hind- 
wings  normal. 

A  small  genus,  occurring  in  the  temperate  regions  of  both 
hemispheres.  The  neuration  quoted  above  is  simply  that  of  the 
Australian  species  ;  those  of  other  regions  display  great  variability 
in  this  character,  but  it  is  unnecessary  to  complicate  the  descrip- 
tion of  the  genus  by  recording  these  variations  here. 

46.   Hyb.  indocilis,  Walk. 

(Zermizinga  indocilisaria  (!),  Walk.  1530;  Hybernia  boreophi- 
laria,  Gn.,  Ent.  Mo.  Mag.  V,  61  ;  H.  indocilis,  Meyr.,  Trans. 
N.Z.  Inst.  1883,  97.) 

(J.  24-29  mm.  Antennal  pectinations  a  6,  b  7.  Forewings 
with  hindmargin  gently  rounded,  waved ;  pale  fuscous-grey, 
irrorated  with  dark  fuscous ;  first  line  dark  fuscous,  curved,  some- 
what irregular;  median  shade  cloudy,  dark  fuscous,  slightly  curved; 
second  line  dark  fuscous  or  blackish,  slightly  curved,  twice  slightly 


624  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

sinuate,  sometimes  nearly  followed  by  an  obscure  ochreous  shade ; 
subterminal  obscurely  paler,  subdentate,  anteriorly  margined  by  a 
darker  fuscous  shade  ;  a  hindmarginal  series  of  blackish  dots,  con 
nected  by  a  fine  line.  Hind  wings  with  hind  margin  rounded, 
crenulate  ;  colour  and  markings  as  in  forewings,  but  first  line 
absent,  second  line  hardly  sinuate;  a  transverse  dark  fuscous  discal 
mark  beyond  median  shade. 

Q.  12-14  mm.  Wings  exceedingly  narrow,  apex  suddenly 
dilated,  angles  acute,  hindmargin  dentate  ;  colour  and  markings  as 
in  £,  but  lines  blacker  and  more  sharply  marked. 

Brisbane,  Queensland  ;  Sydney,  New  South  Wales ;  Mount 
Lofty,  South  Australia  ;  also  occurs  in  New  Zealand  ;  from  July 
to  January,  rather  common,  attached  to  Leptospermum. 

13.   Psilosticha,  n.g. 

Face  with  tolerably  appressed  scales.  Tongue  developed.  Palpi 
short,  porrected,  rough-scaled,  terminal  joint  very  short.  Antennae 
in  (J  simple,  shortly  ciliated.  Thorax  not  crested,  somewhat  hairy 
beneath.  Femora  glabrous;  posterior  tibise  in  <J  dilated  (?). 
Forewings  in  <J  with  fovea  ;  11  rising  out  of  10,  running  into  12. 
Hindwings  normal. 

At  present  confined  to  the  following  species.  It  is  allied  to 
Ectropis,  but  further  material  is  required  to  fix  its  relationship. 

47.   Psil.  mactaria,  Gn. 

( Tephrosia  mactaria,  Gn.  IX,  270  ;  Boarmia  attacta,  Walk.  392  ; 
Tephrosia  integraria,  ib.  420  ;  T.  absorpta,  ib.  420.) 

(J$.  30-31  mm.  Face  white,  with  a  black  median  bar.  Fore- 
wings with  hindmargin  bowed,  slightly  waved  ;  white,  irregularly 
irr orated  with  fuscous  and  black  ;  first,  median,  and  second  lines 
slender,  irregularly  subdentate,  dark  fuscous  or  black,  tending  to 
form  dots  on  veins  and  larger  ones  on  costa  ;  first  curved,  nearly 
preceded  by  a  grey  line ;  median  curved  above  middle,  preceded 
by  a  black  discal  dot ;  second  curved  outwards  on  upper  half, 
sinuate  inwards  below  middle,  nearly  followed  in  <J  by  a  dark 
grey,  in  5  by  a  fuscous  thicker  shade,  strongest  on  lower  half; 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  625 

subterminal  pale,  dentate,  margined  suffusedly  with  dark  grey  ;  a 
fine  black  interrupted  hindniarginal  line,  forming  dots  between 
veins.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  waved  ;  colour  and 
markings  as  in  forewings,  but  first  line  absent,  median  and  second 
not  or  hardly  curved,  disca)  dot  placed  beyond  median  line. 

Melbourne,  Victoria;  Georges  Bay,  Tasmania;  in  December 
and  January,  two  specimens. 

14.  Ectropis,  Hb. 

'  Face  tolerably  smooth  or  with  hardly  projecting  scales.  Tongue 
developed.  Palpi  moderate,  porrected,  rough-scaled,  terminal 
joint  short.  Antennae  in  J  biserrate-dentate,  or  bipectinated 
partially  or  throughout  with  two  short  slender  (or  rarely  long) 
pectinations  on  each  side  of  each  joint,  terminating  in  tufts  of 
cilia.  Thorax  smooth  or  with  slight  crest,  moderately  or  slightly 
hairy  beneath.  Femora  glabrous;  posterior  tibiae  in  £  moderately 
or  slightly  dilated,  sometimes  containing  tuft.  Forewings  in  £ 
with  well-marked  fovea;  10  sometimes  anastomosing  or  connected 
with  12  and  9,  11  out  of  10  between  connections,  sometimes 
running  into  12  or  absent.     Hindwings  normal. 

The  genus  is  comparatively  small,  but  widely  distributed,  at 
least  in  temperate  regions.  The  species  included  in  it  show  con- 
siderable diversity  of  structure,  but  it  seems  unnecessary  to 
subdivide  the  genus  further,  the  differences  being  properly  regarded 
as  specific  only;  they  agree  in  all  essential  points,  and  particularly 
in  the  possession  of  two  teeth  or  pectinations  on  each  side  of  each 
joint  of  the  antennae  in  the  g,  instead  of  one.  In  observing  this 
point  it  must  be  remembered  that  there  is  a  slight  ridge  of  scales 
in  the  middle  of  each  joint  which  might  cause  the  impression  that 
the  joints  are  twice  as  numerous  as^they  really  are;  this  must  be 
guarded  against. 

1.  Antennae  in  g  with  moderate  or  long  pectina- 
tions    2. 

Antennae  in  <J  with  very  short  pectinations 

or  teeth 3. 


626  REVISION    OF   AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

2.  Fore  wings  with  a  transverse  discal  mark  ...  54.  camelaria. 
Forewings  with  a  discal  dot  only    51.  exsuperata. 

3.  Head  fuscous 4. 

Head  whitish  or  ochreous    5. 

4.  Hind  wings  with  hindmargin  dentate 48.  pristis. 

Hind  wings  with  hindmargin  waved   50.  isombra. 

5.  Face  with  a  blackish  median  bar 6. 

Face  unicolorous  whitish-ochreous 49.  argalea. 

6.  Wings  light  grey ;  discal  mark  ringed    53.  fractaria. 

Wings   pale    yellowish-ochreous ;   no   discal 


ring   52.  subtinctaria. 

The  antennal  structure  affords  good  distinguishing  characters 
for  each  species. 

48.  Ectr.  pristis,  n.sp. 

(Jcj).  20-25  mm.  Head  and  thorax  fuscous-grey  or  dark  fuscous, 
lower  margin  of  face  sometimes  whitish.  Antennae  in  £  flatly 
dentate,  with  a  moderate  acute  anterior  tooth  and  a  very  minute 
posterior  one  on  each  side  of  each  joint,  emitting  fascicles  of  cilia. 
Forewings  with  hindmargin  obliquely  rounded,  waved ;  10  anas- 
tomosing or  connected  with  12  and  9,  11  out  of  10  between  con- 
nections; light  fuscous,  sprinkled  with  whitish  and  blackish  scales  ; 
first  and  second  lines  and  median  shade  obscurely  darker,  more  or 
less  marked  with  blackish  on  veins,  rather  curved,  somewhat 
irregular,  second  line  sinuate  inwards  on  submedian  fold ;  a  con- 
spicuous black  discal  dot  on  median  shade  ;  subterminal  obscurely 
whitish,  subdentate,  anteriorly  edged  by  a  darker  suffusion ;  a  fine 
interrupted  blackish  hindmarginal  line.  Hindwings  with  hind- 
margin rounded,  dentate  ;  colour  and  markings  as  in  forewings, 
but  first  line  absent,  second  line  not  sinuate,  discal  dot  smaller, 
placed  beyond  median  shade. 

Duaringa  and  Maryborough,  Queensland ;  Newcastle  and  Syd- 
ney, New  South  Wales  ;  Melbourne,  Victoria;  from  November  to 
April,  not  uncommon.  Specially  characterised  in  the  genus  by 
the  unequal  size  of  the  antenna]  teeth,  and  also  through  the  small 
size,  dark  colour  of  the  head  and  thorax,  and  dentate  hindwings. 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  627 

49.  Ectr.  argalea}  n.sp. 

(J.  19  mm.  Head  and  thorax  whitish-ochreous.  Antennae 
with  two  short  slender  pectinations  (1)  on  each  side  of  each  joint, 
terminating  in  fascicles  of  cilia.  Forewings  with  hindmargin 
gently  rounded  ;  10  separate,  11  absent;  pale  ochreous,  slightly 
brownish-tinged,  with  a  few  scattered  black  scales  ;  usual  lines 
faintly  indicated  by  groups  of  black  scales,  but  not  distinctly 
traceable  ;  a  conspicuous  black  discal  dot ;  a  series  of  indistinct 
blackish  marks  on  hindmargin.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin 
rounded,  unevenly  waved  ;  colour  and  markings  as  in  forewings. 

Sydney,  New  South  Wales  ;  in  October  and  April,  two  speci- 
mens. The  smallest  species  in  the  genus,  differing  from  all  the 
rest  in  the  wholly  whitish-ochreous  head  and  thorax. 

50.  Ectr.  isombra,  n.  sp. 

(J^.  23  mm.  Head  fuscous  or  whitish-fuscous,  face  sometimes 
with  an  indistinct  darker  bar.  Antenna?  in  £  with  two  short 
acute  teeth  on  each  side  of  each  joint,  terminating  in  extremely 
long  fascicles  of  cilia.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  gently  rounded; 
11  out,  of  10,  running  into  12  ;  pale  whitish-fuscous,  irrorated 
with  white  and  black ;  first  line  dark  fuscous,  very  ill-defined, 
preceded  by  a  cloudy  brown  shade ;  median  shade  slender,  ill- 
defined,  dark  fuscous,  irregular,  rather  strongly  curved,  preceded 
by  a  dark  fuscous  discal  dot ;  second  line  blackish,  tending  to  be 
interrupted  or  dotted,  slightly  curved,  sinuate  inwards  near  inner 
margin,  nearly  followed  by  an  indistinct  brownish  shade  ;  subter- 
minal  obscurely  whitish,  waved,  more  or  less  suffusedly  margined 
with  dark  fuscous  ;  a -hind marginal  series  of  blackish  dots.  Hind- 
wings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  waved  ;  colour  and  markings  as 
in  forewings,  but  first  line  absent,  median  shade  straight,  followed 
by  discal  dot. 

Duaringa  and  Brisbane,  Queensland,  in  April;  two  specimens 
received  from  Mr.  Barnard  and  Dr.  Lucas.  Differs  in  neuration 
from  all  the  rest  of  the  genus  ;  an  obscure-looking  species,  resem- 
bling E.  exsuperata  but  smaller  and  duller,  and  the  antennae  of 
the  £  bear  small  teeth  instead  of  well-developed  pectinations  as  in 
that  species. 
41 


628  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

51.  Ectr.  exsuperata,  Walk. 

(Boarmia  exsuperata,  Walk.  393;  Tephrosla  disposita,  ib.  421.) 
^Q.  23-27  mm.  Head  whitish-ochreous  or  whitish,  lower  mar- 
gin of  face  white  surmounted  by  a  narrow  dark  fuscous  bar. 
Antennae  in  £  with  a  closely  approximated  pair  of  moderate 
pectinations  (3-^)  on  each  side  of  each  joint,  almost  touching  at 
base  but  diverging  towards  apex,  apical  J  simple.  Forewings  with 
hindmargin  rounded;  10  separate,  11  absent;  pale  brownish- 
ochreous,  irrorated  with  whitish,  and  with  scattered  blackish 
scales;  first  line  and  median  shade  ill-marked,  slender,  dull  reddish- 
ochreous,  angulated  near  costa,  first  line  partially  marked  with 
blackish ;  a  blackish  discal  dot  preceding  median  shade  ;  second 
line  slender,  blackish,  more  or  less  interrupted  or  dotted,  somewhat 
curved,  rather  sinuate  inwards  on  lower  third,  nearly  followed  by 
a  dull  reddish-ochreous  parallel  shade;  subterminal  whitish,  waved, 
suffusedly  margined  with  dull  reddish-ochreous,  anterior  margin 
partially  dotted  with  blackish ;  a  hindmarginal  row  of  black  dots. 
Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  waved ;  colour,  second,  and 
subterminal  lines  as  in  forewings;  a  rather  strongly  marked 
slightly  sinuate  blackish  median  shade,  nearly  followed  by  a  dull 
reddish-ochreous  sometimes  broad  parallel  shade. 

Newcastle  and  Sydney,  New  South  Wales;  Melbourne,  Vic- 
toria ;  Mount  Lofty,  South  Australia  ;  in  October  and  March, 
rather  common.  Distinguished  by  the  approximated  pairs  of 
moderate  antennal  pectinations,  and  the  dull  reddish-ochreous 
transverse  shades. 

52.  Ectr.  subtinctaria,  Walk. 

(Tephrosia  subtinctaria,  Walk.  415.) 

$Q.  29-44  mm.  Head  pale  yellowish-ochreous  or  ochreous- 
whitish,  face  with  a  median  blackish  bar.  Antennse  in  £  with 
joints  flatly  dentate,  each  dentation  emitting  two  short  teeth  on 
each  side,  terminating  in  long  fascicles  of  cilia.  Abdomen  with  a 
dark  fuscous  subbasal  band.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  rounded, 
waved;  11  rising  out  of  10;  pale  yellowish-ochreous,  in  £  partially 
suffused  with  whitish,  strewn  with  short  fuscous  strigulse  and  a 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  629 

few  dark  fuscous  scales  ;  first  Hue  slender,  blackish,  somewhat 
irregular,  sharply  angulated  near  costa ;  median  shade  slender, 
cloudy,  dark  fuscous,  irregular,  angulated  above  middle,  dilated  on 
costa,  approximated  to  second  line  towards  inner  margin  ;  second 
line  blackish,  indented  beneath  costa,  forming  a  strong  bidentate 
projection  above  middle,  and  a  broader  short  obtusely  bidentate 
projection  below  middle,  concavity  between  these  followed  by  a 
suffused  fuscous  or  ochreous-brown  spot  ;  subterminal  pale  or 
whitish,  slender,  dentate,  partially  margined  anteriorly  and  some- 
times posteriorly  by  a  dark  fuscous  suffusion  ;  a  hindmarginal  row 
of  black  dots.  Hind  wings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  dentate ; 
colour  and  markings  as  in  forewings,  but  first  line  absent,  median 
shade  nearly  straight  or  slightly  bent  in  middle,  somewhat 
irregular,  second  line  tolerably  evenly  curved,  without  projection, 
sinuate  near  inner  margin,  followed  by  a  parallel  deeper  ochreous 
shade  throughout ;  a  cloudy  dark  fuscous  discal  dot  beyond  median 
shade. 

Newcastle  and  Sydney,  New  South  Wales  ;  in  July  and  Octo- 
ber, four  specimens.  From  the  other  species  with  toothed  antenna? 
it  is  at  once  separated  by  the  large  size  and  ochreous  colouring  ; 
there  is  considerable  superficial  likeness  to  Selidosema  excursaria, 
but  apart  from  structural  differences  the  colour  and  marking  of 
the  face  appear  to  give  a  good  distinction. 

53.   Ectr.  fractaria,  Gn. 

(Tephrosia  fractaria,  Gn.  IX,  270 ;  llypocliroma  dissonata, 
Walk.  443;  H.  nigraria,  Feld.  pi.  cxxvi,  1.) 

(JQ.  28-34  mm.  Head  grey- whitish,  face  with  more  or  less 
broad  blackish-grey  median  bar.  Antennae  in  <J  with  two  short 
acute  projections  on  each  side  of  eacli  joint,  terminating  in 
moderate  fascicles  of  cilia.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  rounded, 
strongly  waved;  10  sometimes  connected  with  9,  11  absent;  light 
grey,  irrorated  and  sometimes  mixed  with  whitish,  and  densely 
irrorated  with  dark  grey,  often  forming  short  strigulse ;  lines  dark 
fuscous,  obscure,  rather  curved,  first  and  second  marked  with 
blackish  dots  or  wedges  on  veins,  first  line  nearly  preceded  and 


630  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

second  followed  by  cloudy  parallel  dark  fuscous  shades  ;  a  short 
pale  transverse  discal  mark  before  median  shade,  enclosed  by  a 
dark  grey  ring;  subterminal  whitish,  dentate,  partially  margined 
anteriorly  with  dark  fuscous  spots;  a  hindmarginal  row  of  blackish 
dots.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  dentate  ;  colour  and 
markings  as  in  fore  wings,  but  first  line  absent,  median  shade- 
straight,  more  distinctly  marked,  preceding  discal  mark,  second 
line  followed  by  a  more  distinctly  marked  waved  darker  shade. 

Sydney,  New  South  Wales ;  Melbourne;  Victoria ;  Launceston 
and  Hobart,  Tasmania ;  from  September  to  March,  rather  common. 
From  the  other  species  with  toothed  antenna?  in  £  it  is  separable 
by  the  pale  discal  mark  enclosed  in  a  dark  ring,  as  well  as  the 
grey  colouring  and  moderate  size. 

54.   Ectr.  camelaria,  Gn. 

(Boarmia  camelaria,  Gn.  IX,  256  ;  Cleora  velutinaria,  Walk. 
Suppl.  1580.) 

<JQ.  37-46  mm.  Head  whitish,  face  with  a  more  or  less  distinct 
fuscous  median  bar.  Antennae  in  £  with  a  pair  of  slender  pecti- 
nations (7),  rising  from  same  point,  on  each  side  of  each  joint, 
apical  -|  filiform,  simple.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  obliquely 
rounded,  waved;  10  connected  with  12  and  9,  11  rising  out  of  10 
between  connections ;  white,  strewn  with  pale  brownish-ochreous 
strigulre  marked  with  darker  ochreous-brown  scales;  lines  ochreous- 
brown,  irregular,  starting  from  small  dark  fuscous  spots  on  costa, 
first  ill-defined,  angulated  near  costa,  nearly  preceded  by  a 
subdentate  similar  line,  median  forming  an  angulated  projection 
outwards,  within  which  is  a  transverse  dark  fuscous  discal  mark, 
second  reduced  to  a  series  of  dark  fuscous  dots,  curved,  nearly 
followed  by  a  parallel  dentate  ochreous-brown  line  ;  subterminal 
obsoletely  dentate,  whitish,  margined  anteriorly  by  a  series 
of  small  dark  fuscous  spots,  and  posteriorly  by  an  interrupted 
ochreous-fuscous  line  ;  a  hindmarginal  series  of  round  black  dots. 
Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded*,  dentate;  colour,  second  and 
subterminal  lines,  and  hindmarginal  dots  as  in  forewings  ;  first 
line  only  indicated  near  inner  margin  ;  median  shade  irregular, 


BY    E.   MEYRICK.  631 

ill-defined,    followed    by   a    roundish    dark    fuscous    discal    spot, 
including  a  whitish  transverse  mark  or  cross. 

Duaringa  and  Brisbane,  Queensland ;  Newcastle,  New  South 
Wales  ;  four  specimens.  Differs  from  all  in  the  long  pectinations 
and  filiform  apical  §  of  antennae  in  ,J,  and  characterised  also  by 
the  white  groundcolour,  ochreous  irroration,.  and  dotted  lines. 

15.    TlGRIDOPTERA,  HS. 

Face  with  tolerably  appressed  scales.  Tongue  developed.  Palpi 
moderate,  ascending,  shortly  rough-scaled,  terminal  joint  short. 
(Antennas  in  £  probably  ciliated.)  Thorax  not  crested,  glabrous 
beneath.  Femora  glabrous.  Forewings  (in  £  probably  with 
fovea)  ;  10  rising  out  of  11,  running  into  9.     Hindwings  normal. 

The  characters  of  the  £  are  still  unknown,  and  possibly  they 
may  present  additional  peculiarities.  The  genus  is  however 
distinct  enough  as  it  stands,  and  is  most  allied  to  the  Palasarctic 
genus  Abraxas. 

1.  Forewings  with  white  markings  55.  mariana. 

Forewings  without  white  markings 2. 

2.  Wings   with    hindmarginal    series    of    black 

marks 56.   matutinata. 

Wings  without  hindmarginal  black  marks...   57.  rotundata. 

55.   Tigr.  mariana,  White. 

£.  90-94  mm.  Forewings  black  ;  a  rather  broad  white  fascia 
from  §•  of  costa  to  £  of  inner  margin,  lower  extremity  suddenly 
attenuated  ;  a  moderate  white  spot  beneath  costa  at  J,  two  smaller 
ones  before  hindmargin  towards  middle,  and  two  very  small  ones 
towards  apex.  Hindwings  black ;  a  broad  yellow  fascia  before 
middle,  containing  an  irregular  black  spot  above  middle,  suddenly 
attenuated  above  this  and  not  reaching  costa ;  two  posterior 
curved  series  of  moderate  irregular  yellow  spots,  second  hind- 
marginal, middle  spot  of  each  confluent  together  into  a  single 
elongate  spot. 


632  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

Cape  York,  Queensland  ;  two  specimens  (Coll.  Macleay).  I 
omitted  to  make  a  sufficient  investigation  of  the  characters  of  this 
species,  but  believe  it  is  correctly  referred  to  this  genus. 

56.   Tigr.  matutinata,  Walk. 

(Panaethia  matutinala,  Walk.  1109.) 

Q.  58-62  mm.  Head  yellow-ochreous,  face  dark  fuscous.  Thorax 
light  grey-blue,  anterior  margin  blackish,  shoulders  with  a  yellow- 
ochreous  spot.  Abdomen  ochreous-yellow.  Forewings  with  hind- 
margin  obliquely  rounded  ;  rather  deep  yellow-ochreous  ;  entire 
disc  light  grey-blue,  except  a  rather  broad  longitudinal  streak  from 
centre  of  disc  outwards,  and  another  along  submedian  fold;  a  small 
blackish  spot  near  base  below  middle ;  six  irregularly  curved 
rather  thick  cloudy  black  lines,  margined  with  light  grey- blue  on 
the  yellow  areas,  first  not  reaching  inner  margin,  second  and  third 
confluent  on  submedian  fold,  fourth  and  fifth  interrupted  to  form 
small  spots,  fifth  interrupted  by  the  yellow  longitudinal  streaks, 
sixth  forming  a  series  of  larger  roundish  spots  ;  a  round  black 
discal  spot  before  third  line  ;  a  black  spot,  surrounded  with  grey- 
blue,  connecting  sixth  line  with  hindmargin  below  apex,  and  two 
much  smaller  similar  spots  beyond  sixth  line  above  anal  angle  ;  a 
hindmarginal  series  of  black  marks,  edged  and  partially  connected 
with  light  grey-blue.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded, 
waved ;  colour  and  markings  as  in  forewings,  but  blue  of  disc 
extended  to  base,  first  two  lines  absent,  third  twice  angulated, 
not  curved,  discal  spot  placed  before  fourth  line,  subapical  spot 
much  smaller. 

Brisbane,  Queensland  ;  two  specimens  received  from  Mr. 
Ray  nor. 

57.   Tigr.  rotundata,  Butl. 

(Tigridoptera  rotundata,  Butl.,  Ent.  Mo.  Mag.  XIV,  108.) 
9.  51  mm.  Head  and  thorax  pale  grey,  slightly  bluish  and 
yellowish-tinged,  patagia  with  a  cloudy  blackish  spot.  Abdomen 
ochreous-yellow.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  obliquely  rounded  ; 
pale  whitish-blue-grey,  with  a  rather  broad  streak  from  centre  of 
disc  outwards,  another  along  submedian  fold,  and  a  hindmarginal 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  633 

band  light  dull  yellow-ochreous  ;  five  rather  thick  cloudy  curved 
black  lines,  second  and  third  confluent  on  submedian  fold,  fifth 
interrupted  by  the  ochreous  longitudinal  streaks;  a  series  of  cloudy 
oval  black  spots  representing  the  sixth  line,  rather  broadly 
interrupted  in  middle  ;  a  faint  grey  subapical  spot  before  hind- 
margin,  and  another  above  anal  angle.  Hindwings  with  hind- 
margin  rounded  ;  colour  and  markings  as  in  forewings,  but  first 
two  lines  absent,  grey  subapical  and  supra-anal  spots  absent. 
Cardwell,  Queensland;  one  specimen  received  from  Mr.  Raynor. 

16.    LOMOGRAPHA,    Hb. 

Face  nearly  smooth.  Tongue  developed.  Palpi  short,  por- 
rected,  rough-scaled,  terminal  joint  very  short.  Antennae  in  £ 
bipectinated,  apex  simple.  Thorax  not  crested,  slightly  hairy 
beneath.  Femora  glabrous ;  posterior  tibiae  in  <J  not  dilated. 
Forewings  in  <J  without  fovea;  10  absent,  11  anastomosing  or 
connected  with  12  and  9.     Hindwings  normal. 

There  are  several  European  species  of  this  genus ;  probably  it 
occurs  in  other  regions,  but  is  as  yet  insufficiently  recognised.  It 
is  nearly  allied  to  Deilinia,  but  differs  in  the  absence  of  vein  10. 
In  some  European  species  vein  11  is  not  connected  with  12,  the 
same  variation  which  occurs  in  Deilinia,  and  therefore  not 
involving  separation  ;  I  mention  it,  as  this  may  occur  in  the  Aus- 
tralian species  also,  though  no  instance  has  met  my  observation. 

Head  and  thorax  grey  58.  spodina. 

Head  and  thorax  ochreous    59.  isocyma. 

58.  Lorn,  spodina,  n.sp. 

(J.  20-24  mm.  Head  and  thorax  grey.  Antennal  pectinations 
5,  apical  T^  simple.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  somewhat 
bowed,  waved  ;  grey,  sprinkled  with  blackish  ;  first  and  second 
lines  somewhat  curved,  waved,  slightly  darker,  marked  with 
blackish  dots  on  veins ;  median  shade  very  faintly  darker ;  a 
blackish  discal  dot;  subterrainal  slightly  paler,  obscurely  edged 
with  darker,  anterior  edge  sometimes  dotted  with  darker ;  a  hind- 
marginal    row  of   blackish   dots.       Hindwings  with   hindmargin 


634  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

rounded,  waved ;  colour  and  markings  as  in  forewings,  but  first 
line  absent,  median  shade  more  perceptible,  second  line  distinctly 
darker. 

Sydney,  New  South  Wales  ;  Mount  Lofty,  South  Australia;  in 
September,  October,  March,  .  and  April,  rather  common ;  an 
obscure  species,  and  probably  overlooked. 

59.  Lorn,  isocyma,  n.sp. 

fiQ.  22-23  mm.  Head  and  thorax  pale  ochreous  or  brownish- 
ochreous.  Antennal  pectinations  in  ^  6,  apical  \  simple.  Fore- 
wings  with  hindtnargin  rounded,  hardly  waved  ;  pale  ochreous, 
sprinkled  with  ochreous- whitish,  and  more  or  less  suffusedly 
irrorated  with  deeper  ochreous  or  fuscous  ;  first  line  and  median 
shade  hardly  traceable ;  a  rather  dark  fuscous  discal  dot ;  second 
line  fuscous,  waved,  slightly  curved,  margined  posteriorly  by  a 
pale  shade  ;  subterminal  pale,  subdentate,  margined  with  darker 
suffusions;  no  hinclmarginal  dots.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin 
rounded,  waved  ;  colour  and  markings  as  in  forewings,  but  discal 
dot  obsolete,  median  shade  more  perceptible,  nearly  straight. 

Duaringa,     Queensland ;    received     commonly    from     Mr.     G. 

Barnard. 

17.  Deilinia,  Hb. 

Face  with  short  tuft  or  projecting  scales  or  smooth.  Tongue 
developed.  Palpi  moderate,  porrected,  rough-scaled,  terminal 
joint  short.  Antenneo  in  <J  bipectinated,  apex  simple.  Thorax 
not  crested,  somewhat  hairy  beneath.  Femora  glabrous  or  thinly 
hairy ;  posterior  tibia;  in  $  not  dilated.  Forewings  in  <J  without 
fovea;  10  out  of  9,  11  sometimes  also  out  of  9,  usually  anastomos- 
ing or  connected  with  12.  Hindwings  normal,  in  g  sometimes 
densely  hairy  beneath  towards  base. 

There  are  several  European  and  North  American  species,  in 
which  however  vein  10  of  the  forewings  rises  separate,  but  they 
are  closely  allied  in  all  other  respects,  and  certainly  congeneric. 

1.   Face  wholly  whitish 64.  lithodora. 

Face  not  whitish  2. 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  635 

2.  Head  with  a  clear  white  band  behind  antennae  3. 
Head  without  white  band  behind  antennae...  4. 

3.  Wings  reddish-tinged   63.  oenias. 

Wings  not  reddish-tinged 66.  ochthadia, 

4.  Head  irrorated  with  white  65.  cremnias. 

Head  not  irrorated  with  white    5. 

5.  Hindwings    in    <J    densely    hairy    beneath 

towards  base 62.  im/pressaria. 

Hindwings  in  <J  not  hairy  6. 

6.  Antennae  in  $  with  apical  T1^  simple 60.  eccentritis. 

Antennae  in  $  with  apical  l  simple   61.  rectaria. 

60.  Deil.  eccentritis,  n.sp. 

(JQ-  28-30  mm.  Head  in  g  ferruginous-fuscous,  crown  ochreous, 
in  Q,  light  fuscous,  crown  ochreous- whitish  ;  face  smooth,  with 
very  short  slight  tuft  on  lower  edge.  Antennal  pectinations  in  £ 
16,  apical  T1^  simple.  Femora  thinly  hairy  beneath.  Fore  wings 
with  hindmargin  rounded,  waved  ;  1 1  anastomosing  with  1 2  ;  light 
ochreous-brownish,  more  or  less  reddish-tinged,  strewn  with  short 
dark  grey  transverse  strigalae  ;  first  and  second  lines  and  median 
shade  dark  grey,  waved,  somewhat  curved,  all  very  obscure  and 
little  traceable,  in  <J  sometimes  first  line  preceded  and  second 
followed  by  a  broad  clear  reddish-ochreous  suffusion;  a  moderately 
large  blackish-grey  discal  dot,  in  $  ringed  with  grey-whitish  scales 
or  sometimes  transformed  into  a  small  round  white  spot  ;  subter- 
minal  represented  by  a  series  of  obscure  blackish  dots,  in  £ 
followed  by  whitish  scales  or  dots  and  preceded  by  a  ferruginous 
suffusion,  in  £  followed  by  a  moderately  large  double  dark  grey 
spot  below  middle  ;  a  hindmarginal  row  of  black  dots.  Hind- 
wings with  hindmargin  rounded,  waved  ;  colour  and  markings  as 
in  forewings,  but  first  line  obsolete  and  not  preceded  by  reddish- 
ochreous  suffusion. 

Warragul,  Victoria ;  taken  commonly  in  December  by  Mr.  G. 
H.  Bay  nor,  who  gave  me  specimens.  It  is  a  remarkably  variable 
species,  but  differs  from  all  the  rest  by  the   hairy  femora;   the 


636  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

pectinations  of  the  antennse  in  the  $  are  much  longer,  and  the 
apical  simple  portion  much  shorter  than  in  any  other. 

61.  Deil.  rectaria,  Walk. 

(Casbia  rectaria,  Walk.  Suppl.  1667  ;  C.  irrorata,  Butl.,  Trans. 
Ent.  Soc.  Lond.  1886,  438.) 

gQ-  23-27  mm.  Head  fuscous,  crown  paler ;  face  shortly 
rough-scaled.  Antennal  pectinations  in  g  10,  apical  £  simple. 
Femora  glabrous.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  bowed ;  in  £  with 
a  small  gland  surrounded  by  an  irregular  depression  on  lower 
surface  immediately  beneath  cell  near  base;  11  free ;  light  ochreous- 
brownish,  with  fine  scattered  dark  fuscous  or  blackish  scales 
tending  to  form  obscure  strigulae;  costal  edge  more  ochreous;  first 
and  second  lines  and  median  shade  obsoletely  darker,  hardly  trace- 
able, median  shade  straight  and  more  distinct  on  lower  half  ;  a 
black  discal  dot,  two  small  variable  spots  or  dots  near  beyond 
second  line  in  middle  and  one  midway  between  these  and  apex, 
ferruginous  or  white,  usually  edged  with  dark  fuscous,  or  some- 
times wholly  dark  fuscous  ;  a  hindmarginal  row  of  black  dots. 
Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded  ;  colour  and  markings  as  in 
forewings,  but  first  line  absent,  median  shade  usually  distinct 
throughout,  posterior  spots  smaller  or  partially  or  entirely  obsolete. 

Duaringa,  Queensland;  received  commonly  from  Mr.  G.  Barnard. 
Distinguished  from  all  by  the  peculiar  gland  of  the  £  ;  and  vein 
11  seems  to  be  constantly  separate,  whilst  in  the  other  species 
this  structure  only  occurs  exceptionally. 

62.  Deil.  ini2)ressaria,  Walk. 

(Tephrina    imj)ressaria,  Walk.  966.) 

(JQ.  23-27  mm.  Head  ferruginous,  face  shortly  rough-scaled. 
Antennal  pectinations  in  <J  8,  apical  \  simple.  Femora  glabrous 
Forewings  with  hindmargin  bowed  ;  11  anastomosing  with  12  or 
rarely  separate ;  pale  greyish-ochreous,  often  rather  strongly 
reddish-tinged,  sometimes  more  grey,  with  a  few  scattered  grey 
scales,  tending  to  indicate  strigulae  ;  costa  ferruginous-yellow,  more 
or  less  strigulated  with  dark   grey  ;    first  and   second   lines  and 


BY    E.   MEYRfCK.  637 

median  shade  rather  darker,  nearly  straight,  but  very  faint  and 
often  hardly  traceable  ;  a  blackish  discal  dot ;  sometimes  two  or 
three  small  adjacent  ferruginous  spots  near  beyond  second  line  in 
middle,  partially  blackish-edged  ;  a  hindmarginal  row  of  black 
dots.  Hindwings  in  <J  clothed  with  dense  hairs  towards  base 
beneath,  hindmargin  rounded  ;  colour  and  markings  as  in  fore- 
wings,  but  first  line  absent. 

Duaringa,  Queensland;  received  commonly  from  Mr.  G.  Barnard. 
Differs  from  all  the  rest  by  the  dense  hairs  on  the  undersurface  of 
the  hindwings  in  the  £. 

63.  Deil.  oenias,  n.sp. 

(J.  27  mm.  Head  reddish-ochreous,  a  band  on  vertex  behind 
antennae  white ;  face  smooth.  Antennal  pectinations  in  g  10, 
apical  ^  simple.  Femora  glabrous.  Forewings  with  hindmargin 
straight  on  upper  half,  rounded  beneath  ;  1 1  anastomosing  with 
1 2  ;  pale  reddish-ochreous,  with  fine  scattered  grey  strigulae  and  a 
few  blackish  scales ;  costal  edge  more  yellowish ;  first  line  and 
median  shade  grey,  straight ;  a  black  discal  dot  on  median  shade; 
second  line  grey,  sinuate,  very  indistinct,  hardly  traceable ;  sub- 
terminal  appearing  as  a  grey- whitish  dentate  line  on  a  patch  below 
middle,  edged  anteriorly  by  a  blackish  suffusion  preceded  by  a 
deep  reddish  suffusion,  and  posteriorly  by  a  grey  suffusion,  else- 
where represented  by  a  series  of  cloudy  blackish-grey  dots  ;  a 
hindmarginal  series  of  black  dots.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin 
rounded,  slightly  waved  ;  colour  and  markings  as  in  forewings, 
but  first  line  absent,  discal  dot  following  median  shade,  second 
line  straighter,  markings  representing  subterminal  line  much 
reduced  or  partially  obsolete. 

Georges  Bay,  Tasmania  ;  in  January,  two  specimens.  The 
white  band  on  the  vertex  of  the  reddish-ochreous  head  distinguishes 
it  easily  from  the  three  preceding,  to  which  it  is  otherwise  nearly 
related. 

64.  Deil.  lithodora,  n.sp. 

(J(J>.  18-22  mm.  Head  ochreous-whitish,  back  of  crown  more 
ochreous,  face  shortly  rough-haired,  forming  short  tuft  beneath. 


638  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

Antennal  pectinations  in  g  8,  apical  \  simple.  Femora  glabrous. 
Forewings  with  hindmargin  straight  on  upper  half,  rounded 
beneath  ;  11  anastomosing  or  connected  with  12,  rarely  rising  out 
of  9  ;  pale  greyish-ochreous,  irrorated  with  whitish,  with  a  few 
blackish  scales  ;  costal  edge  pale  rosy-ochreous,  strigulated  with 
blackish ;  first  line  and  median  shade  fuscous,  bent  near  costa, 
sometimes  very  indistinct;  a  black  discal  dot  before  median  shade; 
second  line  fuscous,  upper  half  rather  curved  outwards,  usually 
darker  below  middle  ;  subterminal  obscurely  whitish  or  hardly 
paler,  irregular,  preceded  by  a  series  of  light  red  spots,  sometimes 
incomplete,  partially  blackish-margined,  especially  below  middle, 
where  the  red  is  sometimes  obscured  with  black  and  sometimes 
confluent  with  second  line  ;  a  hindmarginal  series  of  black  dots. 
Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded  ;  colour  and  markings  as  in 
forewings,  but  first  line  absent,  discal  dot  beyond  median  shade, 
median  shade  and  second  line  straight,  markings  preceding  sub- 
terminal  line  fainter  or  usually  obsolete. 

Adelaide,  South  Australia  ;  Geraldton  and  Perth,  West  Aus- 
tralia ;  in  November,  common.  Distinguished  by  the  wholly 
whitish  face  ;  this  and  the  two  following  are  nearly  allied,  aud 
have  the  face  more  distinctly  tufted  than  in  the  other  species. 

65.  Deil.  cremnias,  n.sp. 

£.  22-24  mm.  Head  white  irrorated  with  fuscous,  face  shortly 
tufted.  Antennal  pectinations  7,  apical  t  simple.  Femora  glab- 
rous. Forewings  with  hindmargin  gently  rounded  ;  11  anasto- 
mosing with  1 2  ;  fuscous,  closely  irrorated  with  white ;  lines 
somewhat  darker,  very  ill-defined,  first  angulated  near  costa, 
almost  obsolete,  median  shade  thicker  on  lower  half,  sinuate  near 
costa,  marked  with  a  dark  fuscous  discal  dot,  second  sinuate 
inwards,  somewhat  irregular  ;  subterminal  obscurely  whitish, 
preceded  by  a  darker  fuscous  suffusion  ;  a  hindmarginal  row  of 
black  dots.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  strongly  rounded ; 
rather  light  grey ;  median  and  second  lines,  and  anterior  margin 
of  subterminal  line  faintly  darker,  hardly  defined ;  a  dark  fuscous 
discal  dot;  an  interrupted  dark  fuscous  hindmarginal  line 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  639 

Geraldton,  West  Australia;  in  October  and  November,  common. 
Larger  and  more  obscure  than  the  preceding,  without  red  spots, 
and  with  the  hindwings  greyer  and  more  obsoletely  marked. 

66.  Deil,  ochthadia,  n.sp. 

(JQ.  22-24  mm.  Head  ochreous-brown  ;  with  a  white  band 
behind  antennae,  face  shortly  tufted.  Antennal  pectinations  in 
(J  10,  apical  J  simple.  Thorax  pale  whitish-ochreous,  more 
whitish  anteriorly.  Femora  glabrous.  Forewings  with  hind- 
margin  straight  on  upper  half,  rounded  beneath,  slightly  waved  ; 
11  rising  out  of  9,  anastomosing  with  12;  pale  brownish-ochreous, 
with  scattered  grey  or  dark  grey  strigulse ;  first  line  represented 
by  two  fuscous  marks  in  disc  ;  a  blackish  discal  dot ;  second  line 
dark  fuscous,  sinuate,  obsolete  towards  costa  or  more  or  less 
throughout ;  subterminal  cloudy,  obscurely  whitish,  anteriorly 
margined  rather  thickly  with  fuscous  or  dark  fuscous,  not 
reaching  costa ;  a  more  or  less  interrupted  blackish  hindmarginal 
line.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  unevenly  waved ; 
colour  and  markings  as  in  forewings,  but  lines  almost  wholly 
obsolete. 

Mount  Kosciusko  (2700  feet),  New  South  Wales  ;  in  January, 
locally  common.  Differs  from  the  two  preceding  by  the  distinctly 
contrasted  white  band  of  the  vertex ;  it  is  also  the  only  species  in 
which  vein  11  appears  to  rise  constantly  out  of  9,  but  this 
character  would  perhaps  hardly  be  absolute. 

18.  Scardamia,  Gn. 

Face  with  short  conical  scaled  projection.  Tongue  developed. 
Palpi  moderate,  ascending,  with  tolerably  appressed  scales, 
terminal  joint  minute.  Antennae  in  (J  bipectinated,  apex  simple. 
Thorax  not  crested,  glabrous  beneath.  Abdomen  shortly  crested 
towards  base.  Femora  glabrous  ;  posterior  tibia?  in  $  not  dilated. 
Forewings  in  g  without  fovea;  11  rising  out  of  10,  anastomosing 
with  12.      Hindwings  normal. 

An  Indo-Malayan  and  African  genus  of  very  few  species. 


640  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

67.  Scard.  chrysolina,  n.sp. 

(J).  26  mm.  Head,  thorax,  and  abdomen  ochreous-orange ; 
abdomen  with  a  small  golden-metallic  fuscous  crest  near  base. 
Forewings  with  hindmargin  obliquely  rounded  ;  ochreous-orange ; 
costal  edge  brownish;  lines  slender,  pale  golden-metallic,  appearing 
purplish-fuscous  from  above:  first  line  proceeding  from  base  along 
costa,  then  beneath  costa  to  J,  thence  abruptly  bent  and  running 
in  a  gentle  curve  to  inner  margin  before  middle  ;  a  dark  fuscous 
discal  dot ;  second  line  gently  curved,  sinuate  inwards  towards 
inner  margin ;  an  interrupted  hindmarginal  line.  Hindwings 
with  hindmargin  rounded  ;  colour  and  markings  as  in  forewings, 
but  first  line  obsolete  towards  costa. 

Newcastle,    New    South    Wales  j    one   specimen    (Australian 

Museum). 

19.  Rhinodia,  Gn. 

Face  with  projecting  tuft  of  scales.  Tongue  developed.  Palpi 
long,  porrected,  rough-scaled,  terminal  joint  moderate.  Antennae 
in  ^  strongly  bipectinated  throughout.  Thorax  not  crested, 
slightly  hairy  beneath.  Femora  glabrous ;  posterior  tibiae  in  g 
hardly  dilated.  Forewings  in  $  without  fovea;  10  out  of  9,  11 
anastomosing  or  connected  with  12  and  10.      Hindwings  normal. 

Founded  on  the  following  endemic  species  only. 

68.  llhin.  rostraria,  Gn. 

(Rhinodia  rostraria,  Gn.  X,  125;  Panagraundiferaria,  Walk. 
Suppl.  1663;  P.  jucundaria,  ib.  1663;  Stegania  allogata,  Feld. 
pi.  cxxxi,  15.) 

(££.  29-33  mm.  Antennal  pectinations  in  $  10.  Forewings 
with  hindmargin  bowed,  slightly  prominent  in  middle,  upper  half 
somewhat  sinuate  inwards ;  in  £  pale  whitish-fuscous,  somewhat 
ochreous-tinged,  more  or  less  strewn  with  blackish  or  fuscous 
strigulse,  in  $  light  ochreous,  strigulee  almost  obsolete ;  first  line 
faint,  fuscous,  angulated  and  darker  towards  costa  ;  median 
shade  in  £  fuscous  or  dark  fuscous,  in  Q  ferruginous,  rather 
slender,   somewhat  curved ;    second  line  partially    marked    with 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  641 

fuscous  or  dark  fuscous,  in  £  with  ferruginous,  only  distinct  near 
costa,  usually  followed  by  a  blackish  dot  in  middle  and  another 
towards  costa.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  obtusely  angulated 
in  middle  ;  colour  and  markings  as  in  forewings,  but  first  line 
absent,  a  blackish  discal  dot  beyond  median  shade,  second  line 
sometimes  well-marked  throughout,  somewhat  waved,  sometimes 
followed  by  a  series  of  dark  fuscous  dots. 

Duaringa,  Queensland  ;  Sydney,  New  South  Wales  ;  Melbourne 
and  Fernshaw,  Victoria ;  York,  West  Australia  ;  in  October  and 
November,  rather  common. 

20.  Proboloptera,  n.g. 

Face  smooth.  Tongue  developed.  Palpi  moderate,  porrected, 
shortly  rough-scaled,  terminal  joint  moderate.  Antennae  in  g 
bipectinated  throughout.  Thorax  not  crested,  hairy  beneath. 
Femora  hairy  beneath  ;  posterior  tibiae  in  £  not  dilated.  Fore- 
wings  in  <J  without  fovea  ;  10  sometimes  out  of  9,  connected  or 
anastomosing  with  9,  11  anastomosing  with  12  and  10.  Hind- 
wings  normal. 

69.  Prob.  embolias,  n.sp. 

(JQ.  32-34  mm.  Head  white,  face  with  a  crimson  median  band, 
back  of  crown  ochreous-fuscous  tinged  with  crimson.  Palpi 
ochreous  mixed  with  crimson.  Antennal  pectinations  in  g  8, 
in  Q  2.  Forewings  elongate-triangular,  hindmargin  obliquely 
rounded,  rather  strongly  waved,  inner  margin  sinuate  inwards 
posteriorly  ;  light  purplish-grey,  mixed  and  partially  suffused  with 
ochreous-whitish,  with  scattered  short  dark  grey  strigulae,  and  a 
few  black  scales,  in  £  wholly  suffused  with  light  purplish-ferru- 
ginous, becoming  deeper  along  hindmargin  ;  first  line  slender, 
dark  fuscous,  less  distinct  in  disc,  angulated  and  sometimes 
dentate  above  middle  ;  a  dark  fuscous  discal  dot ;  median  shade 
slender,  dark  fuscous  mixed  with  red,  only  distinct  towards 
extremities,  slightly  curved  ;  an  irregular  pale  cloudy  transverse 
shade  (representing  second  line)  near  beyond  this,  becoming 
whitish  towards  inner  margin,  where  it  is  followed  by  a  cloudy 
dark  fuscous  spot  mixed  with  red.     Hindwings  with  costa  sinuate 


642  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

anteriorly,  strongly  excised  before  apex,  so  that  the  apex  forms  a 
strong  acute  projecting  tooth,  hindmargin  unevenly  dentate, 
rather  deeply  excised  between  veins  4  and  6  ;  colour  and  discal 
dot  as  in  forewings  ;  median  shade  straight,  blackish  mixed  with 
red,  well-marked,  preceding  discal  dot ;  second  line  in  £  indicated 
by  two  very  faint  slender  waved  whitish  lines. 

Blackheath  (3500  feet),  New  South  "Wales  ;  in  November,  four 
specimens.  This  striking  species  appears  to  be  nearly  allied  to 
the  Indian  clelia,  Cr.,  which  is  presumably  congeneric,  though  I 
have  not  been  able  to  examine  its  structure  ;  the  locality  seems  an 
unlikely  one  for  an  insect  of  such  affinities. 

21.  Idiodes,  Gn. 

Face  with  projecting  tuft  of  scales.  Tongue  developed.  Palpi 
moderate,  subascending,  rough-scaled,  terminal  joint  short. 
Antenna?  in  £  rather  stout,  filiform,  minutely  ciliated.  Thorax 
not  crested,  densely  hairy  beneath.  Femora  hairy  beneath ; 
posterior  tibia?  in  <J  strongly  dilated,  enclosing  large  tuft.  Fore- 
wings  in  (J  without  fovea  ;  10  rarely  out  of  9,  always  connected 
or  anastomosing  with  9,  and  usually  with  11  also.  Hindwings 
normal. 

A  genus  characteristic  of  South  America,  and  largely  developed 
there,  but  not  known  to  me  elsewhere,  except  by  the  two  following 
species. 

Thorax  stout 71.  apicata. 

Thorax  slender 70.  primaria. 

70.  Id.  primaria,  Walk. 

( Acid  alia  primaria,  Walk.  1610.) 

(J.  37-38  mm.  Head  and  thorax  pale  reddish-ochreous  ;  thorax 
slender.  Antennal  ciliations  \.  Posterior  tibia?  moderately 
dilated.  Forewings  with  apex  slightly  prominent,  hindmargin 
strongly  bowed,  somewhat  bent  on  vein  5  ;  light  brownish-ochreous, 
sometimes  reddish-tinged  ;  first  and  second  lines  fuscous,  marked 
with  blackish  dots  on  veins,  first  rather  strongly  curved,  some- 
what bent  above  and  below  middle,  second  straight,  somewhat 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  643 

curved  at  costal  extremity ;  a  blackish  discal  dot ;  subterminal 
hardly  perceptibly  paler,  dentate,  sometimes  margined  anteriorly 
by  a  series  of  irregular  blackish  spots  ;  a  hindmargiual  series  of 
black  dots.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  waved  ;  colour, 
second  line,  and  hindmarginal  dots  as  in  forewings,  but  colour 
rather  paler,  second  line  almost  or  quite  straight  throughout. 

Melbourne,  Victoria;  two  specimens  taken  by  Mr.  Ray  nor. 
Perhaps  this  species  may  vary  as  much  as  the  next,  but  it  is  easily 
distinguished  from  it  by  the  slender  thorax,  somewhat  longer 
antennal  ciliations,  slightly  bent  hindmargin  of  forewings,  more 
strongly  rounded  hindmargin  of  hindwings,  and  less  dilated  tibiae. 

71.  Id.  apicata,  Gn. 

( Idiocies  apicata,  Gn.  IX,  40;  /.  mitigata,  ib.  40,  pi.  xiii,  1;  /. 
inspirata,  ib.  40,  Feld.  pi.  cxxiv,  3 ;  I.  rinata,  ib.  40  ;  /.  intro- 
ducta,  Walk.  30  ;  Tacparia  zalissaria,  ib.  234  ;  Choara  siculoides, 
ib.  291  ;  PhaUaria  conductaria,  ib.  1525 ;  P.  inductaria,  ib.  1526  ; 
Idiodes  punctiger,  Feld.  pi.  cxxiv,  4. ) 

(j£.  37-44  mm.  Antennal  ciliations  of  $  J.  Thorax  stout. 
Posterior  tibiae  in  £  very  strongly  dilated.  Forewings  with  apex 
acute,  prominent,  hindmargin  strongly  bowed ;  pale  greyish- 
ochreous,  brownish-ochreous,  or  light  fuscous,  strewn  with  more  or 
less  faint  dark  strigulae,  and  a  few  blackish  scales  ;  costal  edge 
sometimes  white  on  anterior  § ;  first  line  thick,  cloudy,  dark  grey 
mixed  with  brown,  curved  and  twice  angulated,  but  almost  always 
wholly  absent  or  represented  by  two  or  three  blackish  dots  only  ; 
a  black  discal  clot  ;  median  shade  usually  absent,  sometimes 
partially  marked  with  dark  fuscous  or  reddish-fuscous  on  lower 
half  ;  second  line  rather  dark  fuscous  or  hardly  perceptibly  darker 
than  groundcolour,  sometimes  marked  with  black  dots  on  veins, 
almost  straight,  costal  extremity  usually  obsolete,  sometimes 
margined  posteriorly  by  a  whitish-ochreous  or  light  reddish  line, 
sometimes  nearly  followed  by  a  parallel  fuscous  or  dark  fuscous 
shade  continued  to  apex  of  wing  ;  subterminal  obsolete  or  indicated 
by  cloudy  blackish  margins  on  a  patch  above  middle  and  a  spot  at 
anal  angle  onlv,  rarely  on  whole  of  lower  half;  a  hindmarginal 
42 


644  REVISION    OF   AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

series  of  small  blackish  dots.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  slightly 
rounded  ;  colour  and  markings  as  in  forewings,  but  tirst  line  and 
discal  dot  wholly  absent,  second  line  not  followed  by  dark  parallel 
line,  subterminal  almost  always  obsolete. 

Sydney  and  Bathurst  (2300  feet),  New  South  Wales;  Melbourne, 
Victoria;  Georges  Bay,  Tasmania;  Mount  Lofty,  South  Australia; 
from  August  to  February,  rather  common  generally.  Certainly 
very  variable,  but  it  is  equally  certain  that  the  varieties  all  belong 
to  the  same  species,  every  intermediate  form  being  found. 

22.  Metrocampa,  Latr. 

Face  with  slight  projection  of  scales.  Tongue  developed.  Palpi 
moderate,  porrected,  rough-scaled,  terminal  joint  very  short. 
Antennae  in  £  bipectinated  to  apex,  pectinations  rather  stout. 
Thorax  not  crested,  somewhat  hairy  beneath.  Femora  glabrous ; 
posterior  tibiae  in  £  dilated,  containing  tuft.  Forewings  in  £ 
without  fovea  ;  10  out  of  11,  anastomosing  or  connected  with  9. 
Hindwings  normal. 

A  small  genus,  but  apparently  of  very  wide  range.  The 
characters  given  above  refer  to  the  Australian  species  only  ;  some 
of  the  others  vary  greatly  in  neuration  within  the  limits  of  the 
same  species,  and  also  vary  in  having  the  face  quite  smooth,  and 
in  the  density  of  the  hairiness  of  the  thorax  and  femora. 

Forewings  with  large  discal  spot 72.  glaucias. 

Forewings  with  ringed  discal  dot 73.  ada. 

72.  Metr.  glaucias,  n  sp. 

,JQ.  40-44  mm.  Antennal  pectinations  of  £  short,  broad, 
obtuse  (1).  Forewings  with  hindmargin  angularly  projecting  in 
middle,  upper  half  subconcave,  waved,  lower  half  straight,  oblique  ; 
light  reddish-ochreous  or  brownish-ochreous,  irrorated  with  black 
and  fuscous  or  grey  ;  first  line  sometimes  indicated  by  three  dark 
fuscous  dots  on  veins ;  a  rather  large  round  dark  fuscous  or 
blackish-fuscous  discal  sometimes  ocellated  spot  ;  second  line 
straight,  ill-defined,  fuscous,  from  costa  before  apex  to  §  of  inner 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  645 

margin,  sometimes  indicated  only  by  dark  fuscous  dots  on  veins, 
posteriorly  margined  by  a  pale  line.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin 
rounded,  waved ;  pale  reddish-ochreous,  suffusedly  finely  irrorated 
with  grey  or  blackish-grey,  less  strongly  towards  base,  the 
irroration  forming  an  obscure  darker  sometimes  dotted  line, 
followed  by  a  pale  line  from  costa  before  apex  to  inner  margin 
at  #,  almost  straight. 

Melbourne,  Victoria;  four  specimens  {Coll.  Lucas). 

73.  Metr.  ada,  Butl. 

(Gynopteryx  ada,  Butl.,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  1882,  91.) 
^  30-31  mm.  Antennal  pectinations  3.  Forewings  with  hind- 
margin  obtusely  angulated  in  middle  on  vein  4,  upper  half  slightly 
concave,  lower  half  straight ;  light  ochreous,  with  a  few  scattered 
black  scales,  and  traces  of  fuscous  strigulse ;  first  line  fuscous, 
curved,  somewhat  angulated  above  and  below  middle ;  a  grey 
discal  dot  ringed  with  blackish,  sometimes  with  one  or  two 
central  whitish  scales ;  second  line  rather  dark  fuscous,  posteriorly 
sometimes  edged  with  an  ochreous-whitish  line,  nearly  straight  or 
somewhat  sinuate,  reaching  costa  close  before  apex.  Hindwings 
with  hindmargin  rounded,  unevenly  waved,  somewhat  projecting 
angularly  in  middle  on  vein  4 ;  pale  ochreous,  slightly  fuscous- 
tinged,  more  whitish  towards  costa ;  second  line  faintly  paler, 
obscurely  margined  on  both  sides  with  grey,  running  from  costa 
before  apex  to  middle  of  inner  margin,  slightly  sinuate. 

Sydney  and  Bathurst  (2300  feet),  New  South  Wales ;  in  April, 
three  specimens. 

23.  Planolocha,  n.g. 

Face  with  projecting  tuft  of  scales.  Tongue  developed.  Palpi 
moderate,  subascending,  rough-scaled,  terminal  joint  short. 
Antenna?  in  $  subdentate,  shortly  ciliated.  Thorax  not  crested, 
somewhat  hairy  beneath.  Abdomen  in  £  with  dense  tuft  of 
hairs  on  each  side  beneath  at  base.  Femora  glabrous  ;  posterior 
tibia?  in  <J  dilated,  containing  tuft.  Forewings  in  <J  without 
fovea;  10  connected  with  9.     Hindwings  normal. 

Contains  only  the  following  endemic  species. 


646  REVISION  OF   AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

74.  Plan,  autoptis,  n.sp. 

(J.  31  mm.  Antenna]  ciliations  J.  Abdomen  with  pairs  of 
dark  fuscous  dots  on  back  of  four  basal  segments,  basal  tufts 
mixed  with  blackish.  Tuft  of  posterior  legs  black.  Forewings 
with  costa  somewhat  sinuate,  hindmargin  very  obtusely  angulated 
in  middle,  upper  half  somewhat  concave,  lower  faintly  sinuate  ; 
whitish -fuscous,  mixed  with  whitish-ochreous,  with  a  few  scattered 
dark  fuscous  scales  ;  costa  dotted  with  dark  fuscous ;  first  line 
faintly  darker,  with  darker  fuscous  dots  on  veins,  angulated  above 
and  below  middle,  indented  in  middle ;  a  rather  large  roundish 
dark  reddish-brown  discal  spot,  sometimes  split  up  by  a  cruciform 
mark  of  groundcolour  ;  second  line  represented  by  a  nearly 
straight  series  of  small  blackish  dots  on  veins  from  costa  before 
apex  to  inner  margin  at  §,  partially  preceded  by  reddish-brown 
dots  or  a  faint  suffusion,  on  inner  margin  terminating  in  a  short 
streak.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  unevenly  waved  ; 
colour  as  in  forewings ;  a  blackish  discal  dot ;  a  faint  cloudy 
brown  line  beyond  middle,  and  a  row  of  black  dots  at  J,  con- 
verging and  sometimes  forming  a  reddish-brown  spot  on  inner 
margin. 

Melbourne,  Victoria  ;  two  specimens  taken  by  Dr.  T.  P.  Lucas. 

24.  Amelora,  n.g. 

Face  more  or  less  prominent,  with  tolerably  appressed  scales, 
sometimes  forming  a  slight  projection  or  strong  conical  tuft. 
Tongue  developed.  Palpi  moderate,  porrected,  rough-scaled, 
terminal  joint  very  short  or  moderate.  Antennae  in  £  bipecti- 
nated  to  apex.  Thorax  with  moderate  anterior  subtriangular 
crest,  rather  hairy  beneath  or  almost  glabrous.  Femora  somewhat 
hairy  beneath  or  glabrous;  anterior  tibiae  sometimes  with  apical 
hook,  posterior  tibiae  in  $  dilated.  Forewings  in  $  without 
fovea;  10  connected  or  anastomosing  with  12  and  9,  11  rising 
out  of  10  between  connections.      Hindwings  normal. 

An  endemic  genus,  to  which  additions  may  be  expected.  There 
is  some  variation  in  structure,  but  the  neuration  is  quite  constant 
throughout.     The  thoracic  crest  is  not  strong,  and  is  very  liable 


BY    E.   MEYRICK.  647 

to  denudation,  so  that  it  is  a  difficult  character  to  observe  ;  but  it 
is  important,  and  undoubtedly  proves  the  close  relationship  of  this 
genus  to  the  Chlenias  group. 

1.  Forewings  with  veins  marked  with  black 

lines 83.  leucaniata. 

Forewings    with    veins   not   marked    with 

black  lines 2. 

2.  Forewings  more  or  less  reddish  or  ferru- 

ginous    3. 

Forewings  not  reddish 5. 

3.  Hindwings  dark  grey 80.  milvaria. 

Hindwings  light  grey 4. 

4.  Forewings  with  distinct  lines;  face  strongly 

tufted 81.  catacris. 

Forewings  with  lines  obsolete ;  face  hardly 

tufted 82.  arotraea. 

5.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  more  or  less 

bent  in  middle 6. 

Forewings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  not 

bent 8. 

6.  Forewings  with  large  discal  spot 7.7.  demistis. 

Forewings  with  discal  dot  or  none ...  7. 

7.  Forewings  with  first  line  twice  angulated..  79.  australis. 
Forewings  with  first  line  once  angulated...   75.  goniota. 

8.  Forewings  with  large  discal  spot 76.  sparsularia. 

Forewings  with  obsolete  dot 78.  amblopa. 

75.  Am.  goniota,  n.sp. 

<J.  24  mm.  Face  loosely  scaled.  Antennal  pectinations  7. 
Forewings  with  hindmargin  bowed,  very  obtusely  angulated  in 
middle  on  vein  4,  upper  half  slightly  concave  j  whitish-ochreous, 
with  scattered  fuscous  and  dark  reddish-fuscous  scales  j  lines 
slender,  somewhat  interrupted,  dark  reddish-brown  ;  first  rect- 
angularly   angulated     slightly    below    middle;     second    waved, 


648  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LKPIDOPTERA, 

somewhat  irregular,  slightly  sinuate  inwards  above  middle  and 

more  strongly  outwards  below  middle  ;    a  faintly  darker  discal 

spot,  almost  obsolete ;  an  incomplete  hindmarginal  series  of  dark 

fuscous    dots.       Hindwings    with    hindmargin    rounded,    slightly 

waved,  almost  bent  in  middle  ;    very  pale  whitish-grey ;  a  faint 

darker  grey  discal  dot ;  second  line  grey,  formed  as  in  forewings, 

but  very  faint. 

Mount  Lotty,  South  Australia ;   one  specimen  received  from 

Mr.  E.  Guest, 

76.  Am.  sparsularia,  Gn. 

(Panagra  sparsularia,  Gn.  X,  131,  pi.  XII,  4.) 

£.  28  mm.  Face  prominent,  almost  smooth.  Antennal  pecti- 
nations 6.  Anterior  tibiae  with  strong  apical  hook.  Forewings 
with  hindmargin  gently  rounded,  slightly  waved  ;  pale  fuscous, 
with  faint  darker  strigulse,  and  some  scattered  black  scales  ;  a 
blackish  dot  towards  base  in  middle  ;  first  line  represented  by 
three  blackish  dots  on  veins  ;  a  large  blackish  trapezoidal  discal 
spot ;  second  line  formed  by  a  series  of  blackish  dots  on  veins, 
shortly  sinuate  inwards  above  middle  and  markedly  outwards 
below  middle;  a  hindmarginal  series  of  blackish  dots.  Hindwings 
with  hindmargin  rounded,  strongly  waved  ;  light  grey ;  a  small 
cloudy  darker  discal  spot. 

Bathurst,  New  South  Wales  ;  Mount  Lofty,  South  Australia  ; 
two  specimens  received  from  Mrs.  Stephenson  and  Mr.  E.  Guest. 
This  is  the  only  species  possessing  the  apical  hook  on  the  anterior 

tibise. 

77.  Am.  demisfAs,  n.sp. 

(J.  27-30  mm.  Face  prominent,  loosely  scaled  beneath.  Anten- 
nal pectinations  6.  Forewings  with  apex  rather  prominent,  hind- 
margin bowed,  slightly  bent  in  middle  on  vein  4 ;  pale  greyish- 
ochreous,  strewn  with  light  fuscous  strigulaa  and  some  scattered 
black  scales  ;  lines  very  obscurely  indicated  with  dark  fuscous 
scales,  tending  to  form  dots  on  veins,  first  somewhat  curved, 
second  sinuate  outwards  below  middle  ;  a  large  roundish  rather 
dark    fuscous   discal   spot ;    a    hindmarginal    row   of    triangular 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  649 

blackish  dots.  Hind  wings  rounded,  unevenly  waved  ;  whitish- 
grey,  more  or  less  tinged  with  whitish-ochreous  towards  base, 
indistinctly  strigulated  with  darker  grey  ;  a  small  cloudy  darker 
grey  discal  spot,  sometimes  almost  obsolete. 

Mount  Lofty,  South  Australia  ;  two  specimens  received  from 
Mr.  E.  Guest. 

78.  Am.  amblopa,  n.sp. 

(J.  31-33  mm.  Face  prominent,  with  projecting  scales.  An- 
tennal  pectinations  5.  Forewings  with  apex  slightly  prominent, 
hindmargin  bowed,  waved  ;  light  greyish-ochreous,  closely  strigu- 
lated or  irrorated  with  light  fuscous ;  costal  edge  clear  pale 
ochreous ;  lines  cloudy,  somewhat  darker,  marked  with  blackish 
dots  on  veins,  first  somewhat  curved,  second  slightly  curved ;  a 
fuscous  discal  dot,  almost  obsolete.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin 
somewhat  rounded,  strongly  waved ;  whitish-grey,  closely  strigu- 
lated with  darker  grey  ;  a  large  cloudy  grey  discal  spot,  darkest 
in  centre  ;  second  line  indistinct,  somewhat  curved,  grey,  marked 
with  more  or  less  defined  blackish  dots  on  veins. 

Bathurst,  New  South  Wales  ;  Mount  Lofty,  South  Australia ; 
three  specimens  received  from  Mrs.  Stephenson  and  Mr.  E.  Guest. 

79.  Am.  australis,  Ros. 

(Odontopera  australis,  Ros.,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  1885,  428, 
pi.  xi,  9.) 

$.  31  mm,  Forewings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  little  oblique, 
excavated  between  apex  and  vein  6,  and  less  deeply  between  6 
and  4,  beneath  4  waved  ;  rather  light  fuscous,  with  a  few  scattered 
dark  fuscous  scales ;  first  line  slender,  dark  grey,  ill-defined, 
broadly  angulated  outwards  above  and  again  below  middle  ;  a 
dark  grey  discal  dot;  second  line  slender,  blackish,  anteriorly 
shaded  with  grey,  rather  near  and  parallel  to  hindmargin 
throughout,  but  dentate  on  all  veins.  Hindwings  with  hind- 
margin rounded,  waved  ;  light  fuscous-greyish ;  a  faint  slender 
darker  waved  line  at  f  parallel  to  hindmargin. 

Melbourne,  Victoria  ;  one  specimen  (Coll.  Lucas). 


650  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

80.  Am.  milvaria,  Gn. 

(Scodiona  milvaria,  Gn.  X,  140,  pi.  viii,  8.) 

<£.  28.  Face  rather  protuberant.  Antenual  pectinations  4. 
Forewings  with  apex  slightly  produced,  hindmargin  rounded, 
slightly  oblique ;  dull  flesh-colour,  near  costa  and  hindmargin 
sprinkled  with  dark  grey ;  costal  edge  bright  ferruginous  ;  lines 
marked  by  dark  reddish-fuscous  dots  on  veins,  first  slightly  curved, 
second  rather  near  hindmargin,  sinuate  outwards  near  costa ;  a 
roundish  cloudy  dark  grey  discal  spot.  Hind  wings  with  hind- 
margin waved,  rounded ;  rather  dark  grey,  lighter  on  anterior 
half ;  a  cloudy  dark  grey  roundish  discal  spot ;  an  obscure  curved 
postmedian  series  of  darker  dots  ;  cilia  dull  flesh-colour. 

Mount  Lofty,  South  Australia ;  one  specimen  bred  in  March 
(Coll.  Guest).  Larva  10-legged ;  dark  brownish-green,  with 
numerous  fine  wavy  black  lines ;  a  dorsal  series  of  broad  orange 
spots ;  a  broad  orange  spiracular  stripe  ;  spiracles  deeper  orange  ; 
feeds  on  Pultenaea  sp.,  in  September.  This  account  is  communi- 
cated by  Mr.  Guest. 

81.  Am.  catacris,  n.sp. 

,J.  26-28  mm.  Face  with  strong  projecting  tuft  of  scales. 
Antennal  pectinations  7.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  rounded  ; 
whitish-fuscous,  suffusedly  mixed  with  ferruginous,  and  strewn 
with  darker  fuscous  strigulse ;  lines  cloudy,  fuscous,  marked  with 
dark  fuscous  dots  on  veins ;  first  curved  or  obtusely  angulated  in 
middle,  second  somewhat  sinuate  inwards  above  middle  and  on 
lower  half ;  a  small  cloudy  fuscous  discal  spot,  darker  in  centre  ; 
cilia  fuscous.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  slightly 
waved  on  upper  half;  whitish-grey,  with  faint  indications  of 
darker  strigulse;  a  grey  discal  spot  or  dot;  second  line  represented 
by  a  somewhat  curved  series  of  grey  dots,  sometimes  almost  obso- 
lete ;  cilia  ferruginous-tinged. 

Mount  Kosciusko  (5800  feet),  New  South  Wales  ;  in  January, 
locally  common. 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  651 

82.  Am.  arotraea,  n.sp. 

(J.  29  mm.  Face  loosely  scaled.  Antennal  pectinations  7. 
Forewings  with  apex  slightly  prominent,  hindmargin  rounded  ; 
reddish-fuscous,  appearing  indistinctly  strigulated,  veins  suffused 
with  yellow-ochreous;  costa  strigulated  with  darker  reddish-fuscous 
and  white  ;  lines  obsolete.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded, 
slightly  waved  ;  whitish-grey,  towards  hindmargin  indistinctly 
strigulated  with  darker  and  somewhat  purplish-tinged  ;  cilia  light 
reddish-fuscous. 

Melbourne,  Victoria ;  one  specimen  received  from  Mr.  G.  H. 
Ray  ii  or. 

83.  Am.  leucaniata,  Gn. 

(Liodes  leucaniata,  Gn.  X,  120,  pi.  xvm,  3;  Chlenias  vittuligera, 
Walk.  1153.) 

(JQ.  31-34  mm.  Head  whitish-yellow  on  crown,  face  light 
brownish-ochreous,  with  short  projecting  scales  beneath.  Anten- 
nal pectinations  7.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  rounded  ;  light 
brown  ;  veins  marked  with  black  lines,  except  those  running  to 
costa ;  interneural  spaces  between  these  lines  marked  each  with  a 
narrow  white  streak,  terminating  on  hindmargin  in  a  black  dot. 
Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  slightly  waved;  pale  brown- 
ish, somewhat  darker  posteriorly  ;  posterior  half  marked  with 
whitish-ochreous  or  whitish  longitudinal  streaks  between  veins. 

Sydney,  New  South  Wales ;  Mount  Lofty,  South  Australia ; 
three  specimens  received  from  Messrs.  Guest  and  Raynor. 

25.  Neritodes,  Gn. 

Face  smooth.  Tongue  developed.  Palpi  short,  porrected,  rough- 
scaled,  terminal  joint  very  short.  Antennae  in  £  subdentate, 
ciliated.  Thorax  not  crested,  glabrous  beneath.  Femora  glabrous; 
posterior  tibiae  in  <J  somewhat  dilated.  Forewings  in  <J  with  a 
large  swollen  scaled  gland  between  cell  and  vein  lb  towards  base; 
10  absent,  11  anastomosing  with  12  and  9.     Hindwings  normal. 

The  single  species  is  endemic. 


652  REVISION    OF   AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

84.  Ner.  verrucata,  Gn. 

(Neritodes  verrucata,  Gn.  X,  119,  pi.  xxn,  8.) 

(J9-  29-32  mm.  Antennal  ciliations  %.  Forewings  with  hind- 
margin  gently  rounded;  pale  greyish-ochreous,  more  or  less  fuscous- 
tinged  towards  costa  or  generally,  sometimes  faintly  reddish-tinged 
in  disc,  sometimes  with  scattered  dark  fuscous  scales ;  second  line 
nearly  straight,  hardly  denned,  fuscous,  usually  marked  with  dark 
fuscous  dots  on  veins ;  a  hindmarginal  series  of  small  blackish 
dots.  Hind  wings  with  hindmargin  rounded ;  pale  whitish-ochreous, 
more  whitish  towards  costa,  somewhat  sprinkled  with  fuscous 
posteriorly  ;  second  line  indicated  on  lower  half  by  a  curved  series 
of  faint  grey  dots. 

Glen  Innes  (3500  feet),  Sydney  and  Bathurst,  (2300  feet),  New 
South  Wales ;  Melbourne,  Victoria ;  Hobart,  Tasmania ;  Mount 
Lofty  and  Port  Lincoln,  South  Australia ;  from  August  to  Decem- 
ber, and  in  March  and  April,  common,  frequenting  swampy  ground. 

26.  Thalaina,  Walk. 

Face  slightly  prominent,  with  appressed  scales.  Tongue 
developed.  Palpi  short,  porrected,  rough-scaled,  terminal  joint 
very  short.  Antennae  in  <J  subclentate,  shortly  ciliated.  Thorax 
not  crested,  densely  hairy  above  and  beneath.  Femora  glabrous  ; 
posterior  tibiae  in  g  rather  dilated.  Forewings  in  $  without 
fovea;  10  out  of  9,  11  anastomosing  or  connected  with  12  and 
sometimes  with  10  also.     Hindwings  normal. 

An  endemic  genus,  of  which  all  the  species  are  strikingly  hand- 
some and  conspicuous.  Its  affinities  seem  to  have  been  very 
puzzling  to  some  writers,  but  it  belongs  unquestionably  to  the 
Chlenias  group  of  this  family,  perhaps  approaching  Mnesampela 
more  nearly  than  any  other  Australian  genus. 

1.  Hindwings  with  a  dark  fuscous  fascia 88.  angulosa. 

Hindwings  with  a  spot  only  or  unmarked..  2. 

2.  Markings  of  forewings  yellowish-brown 89.  inscripta. 

Markings  of  forewings  orange 3. 


BY    E.  MEYBICK.  653 

3.  Forewings  without  transverse  fascia 85.  punctilinea. 

Forewings  with  transverse  fascia 4. 

4.  Forewings  with  one  fascia  only 86.  selenaea. 

Forewings  with  second  fascia  and  connecting 

streak 87.  clara. 

85.   Thai,  punctilinea,  Walk. 

( Thalaina  punctilinea,  Walk.  Suppl.  288.) 

9-  51  mm.  Head  deep  ferruginous-orange,  face  blackish, 
becoming  whitish  beneath.  Thorax  white,  anterior  margin 
broadly  pale  brownish,  with  a  small  orange  spot  on  each  shoulder. 
Forewings  with  apex  very  slightly  prominent,  hindmargin  rounded, 
slightly  waved  ;  11  anastomosing  with  12  only  ;  silvery-white;  a 
deep  ferruginous-orange  streak  along  basal  fifth  of  costa,  margined 
beneath  by  a  black  dot  at  base ;  a  few  black  and  orange  scales 
on  inner  margin  towards  middle  :  cilia  deep  ferruginous-orange, 
becoming  white  towards  anal  angle.  Hind  wings  with  hindmargin 
rounded,  waved;  white;  a  small  irregular  grey  spot  towards  apex. 
Undersurface  of  hindwings  white,  with  a  large  round  apical  blotch, 
of  which  upper  half  is  deep  orange  except  towards  hindmargin, 
where  it  is  light  purplish-grey,  lower  half  black. 

Melbourne,  Victoria  ;  also  in  Tasmania  ;  two  specimens.  This 
may  possibly  be  a  variety  of  the  following  species,  but  as  no 
connecting  forms  have  occurred,  it  is  desirable  to  keep  them 
separate  at  present. 

86.   Thai,  selenaea,  Dbld. 

(Callimorpha  selenaea,  Dbld.,  Eyre's  Disc.  Austr.  I,  437,  pi.  v, 
3 ;  Absyrtes  magnificaria,  Chen.,  Hist.  Nat.  Pap.  5,  Gn.  X,  226  ; 
Thalaina  klenaea,  Walk.  Bomb.  660 ;  T.  australiaria,  HS.,  Exot. 
333.) 

§.  45-52  mm.  Head  deep  ferruginous-orange,  face  blackish. 
Forewings  with  apex  slightly  prominent,  hindmargin  rounded, 
slightly  waved ;  11  anastomosing  with  12  only;  silvery -white  ;  a 
deep  ferruginous-orange  streak  along  basal  fifth  of  costa,  sometimes 


654  REVISION    OP    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

continued  to  reach  fascia;  a  straight  narrow  deep  ferruginous- 
orange  fascia,  edged  with  black  except  near  costa,  running  from 
costa  before  f  to  anal  angle,  which  it  hardly  reaches,  posterior 
margin  forming  a  projection  outwards  in  middle;  some  orange  and 
black  scales  on  inner  margin  towards  middle,  or  sometimes  an 
orange  black-margined  streak  along  inner  margin  from  near  base 
to  anal  angle :  cilia  orange,  becoming  white  towards  anal  angle. 
Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  waved ;  sometimes  a  small 
grey  spot  towards  apex.  Undersurface  of  hindwings  white,  with 
a  large  round  subapical  blotch,  of  which  upper  half  is  deep  orange, 
lower  half  black. 

Sydney,  New  South  Wales ;  Melbourne,  Victoria  ;  three  speci- 
mens. 

87.  Thai  clara,  Walk. 

(Thalaina  clara,  Walk.  Bomb.  660.) 

<Jg.  34-36  mm.  Head  deep  ferruginous-orange,  forehead  dark 
fuscous,  face  white.  Antennal  ciliations  of  $  \.  Thorax  white, 
anterior  margin  sometimes  fuscous,  shoulders  with  a  small  orange 
spot.  Forewings  with  apex  slightly  prominent,  hindmargin 
strongly  bowed,  slightly  waved;  11  anastomosing  with  12  and 
10  ;  silvery- white  ;  markings  deep  ferruginous-orange,  strongly 
edged  with  black  ;  a  narrow  streak  along  costa  from  base  to  first 
fascia;  a  streak  along  inner  margin  from  near  base  to  anal  angle; 
a  straight  narrow  fascia  running  from  costa  before  §  to  anal  angle, 
meeting  dorsal  streak  ;  a  second  similar  fascia  from  J  of  costa  to 
middle  of  hindmargin  ;  a  longitudinal  nearly  straight  streak 
connecting  first  fascia  above  middle  with  lower  extremity  of 
second  fascia  ;  a  blackish  hindmarginal  line  :  cilia  orange,  termi- 
nal half  grey-whitish.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded, 
upper  half  waved  ;  white ;  a  moderate  or  rather  large  irregular 
blackish-grey  subapical  blotch.  Undersurface  white,  with  a  large 
subapical  blotch,  of  which  upper  half  is  deep  orange  suffusedly 
margined  with  dark  fuscous,  lower  half  black. 

Bathurst  (2300  feet)  and  Sydney,  New  South  Wales;  Mel- 
bourne, Victoria  ;  from  April  to  June,  six  specimens.  The  larva 
feeds  on  Acacia  decnrrens.     The  imago  flies  in  winter,  is  retired 


BY    E.  MEYUICK.  655 

in  habits,   and  usually  taken  at  lamps ;  characteristics  probably 
shared  by  all  the  species  of  the  genus. 

88.  Thai,  angulosa,  Walk. 

(Thalaina  angulosa,  Walk.  Suppl.  289.) 

2-  48  mm.  Head  orange,  face  whitish.  Thorax  white, 
anteriorly  ochreous-tinged,  with  an  orange  spot  on  shoulders. 
Forewings  silvery-white ;  markings  orange,  black-margined ;  a 
moderate  streak  from  base  along  costa,  thence  straight  to  middle 
of  inner  margin;  a  streak  from  middle  of  this  to  anal  angle, 
meeting  apex  of  a  dorsal  streak  from  near  base,  and  another  from 
costa  at  £  (its  anterior  angle  produced)  to  apex  of  median  streak  : 
cilia  orange.  Hindwings  white  ;  a  moderate  dark  fuscous  fascia 
from  costa  near  apex  to  anal  angle,  much  dilated  above  middle, 
where  it  touches  hindmargin  with  three  projections.  Under- 
surface  of  hindwings  with  same  markings,  but  upper  half  of 
dilation  orange. 

Adelaide,  South  Australia ;  one  specimen  (Coll.  Lucas). 

89.  Thai,  imcripta,  Walk. 

(Thalaina  inscripta,  Walk.  Bomb.  661 ;  T.  principaria,  HS. 
Exot.  446,  Gn.  X,  227.) 

(JQ-  36-38  mm.  Head  white,  crown  mixed  with  greyish- 
ochreous.  Antennal  ciliations  of  £  -J-.  Forewings  with  apex 
slightly  prominent,  hindmargin  bowed,  slightly  waved  ;  1 1 
anastomosing  with  12  and  10;  sil very-white ;  markings  light 
yellowish-brown,  edged  with  dark  fuscous ;  a  streak  along  basal 
fourth  of  costa  ;  a  streak  along  inner  margin  from  near  base  to 
anal  angle,  and  sometimes  a  broader  streak  along  submedian  fold 
from  before  middle,  confluent  posteriorly  with  this  and  with  lirst 
fascia;  a  narrow  nearly  straight  or  somewhat  irregular  fascia 
from  or  near  costa  about  §  to  anal  angle  ;  an  irregular  variable 
screak  running  from  this  fascia  above  middle  to  middle  of  hind- 
margin, sometimes  interrupted  before  junction  with  second  fascia; 
second  fascia  obtusely  angulated  inwards  near  costa,  running  from 
costa  at  §  to  meet  longitudinal  median  streak  before  hindmargin  ; 


656  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

an  oblique  apical  mark,  two  oval  spots  on  hindmargin  above 
middle,  upper  often  confluent  with  apical  mark,  and  two  others 
below  middle :  cilia  white,  partially  spotted  with  brown.  Hind- 
wings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  somewhat  waved  ;  white ;  a 
moderate  suboval  or  irregular  blackish-grey  subapical  spot. 
Undersurface  of  hindwings  white  with  a  black  subapical  blotch. 

Bathurst  (2300  feet),  New  South  Wales;  also  in  Tasmania;  in 
April,  three  specimens. 

27.  Mnesaajpela,  n.g. 

Face  obtusely  prominent,  with  short  projecting  scales.  Tongue 
developed.  Palpi  moderate,  subascending,  rough-scaled,  terminal 
joint  very  short.  Antennae  in  £  filiform,  minutely  ciliated,  or 
subpectinated,  pectinations  broad  or  lamelliform,  clavate. 
Thorax  not  crested,  densely  hairy  above  and  beneath.  Femora 
hairy  beneath ;  posterior  tibiae  in  <J  dilated,  containing  tuft. 
Forewings  in  $  without  fovea;  10  out  of  9.     Hindwings  normal. 

Includes  only  the  Australian  species.  In  this  instance  the 
differences  in  antennal  structure  are  certainly  specific  only ;  in  all 
other  respects  the  species,  especially  the  first  three,  are  very 
closely  allied,  and  cannot  be  generically  separated ;  M.  lenaea 
forms  an  intermediate  gradation  between  the  simple  and  pecti- 
nated forms  of  antenna. 

1.  Hindmargin   of    forewings    strongly   bowed, 

almost  bent 2. 

Hindmargin    of    forewings    moderately    and 

evenly  bowed 93.  fucata. 

2.  Hindwings  clear  ochreous-yellow  92.  privata. 

Hindwings  not  yellow 3. 

3.  Forewings  with  median  dorsal  spot  of  black 

and  white  scales 90.  comarcha. 

Forewings  without  spot  of  black  and  white 

scales 91.  lenaea. 

90.  Mnes.  comarcha,  n.sp. 
£.  39  mm.     Frontal  prominence  broad-conical.     Antennae  with 
short   broad   clavate   pectinations    (2).      Forewings    with    apex 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  657 

prominent,  hindmargin  strongly  bowed  so  as  to  be  almost  bent  on 
vein  5  ;  light  brown-reddish,  scantily  irregularly  irrorated  with 
short  blackish-grey  strigulse,  median  and  subterminal  bands 
somewhat  paler  and  whitish-tinged,  latter  terminating  in  a 
whitish  costal  blotch  ;  lines  obscurely  indicated  by  confluence  of 
irroration ;  median  slightly  curved,  on  lower  half  mixed  with 
white  and  black  scales,  terminating  in  a  dilated  spot  on  inner 
margin ;  second  tolerably  parallel  to  hindmargin ;  a  moderate 
discal  dot :  cilia  dark  reddish-brown,  obscurely  spotted  with 
blackish,  tips  white.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded, 
waved ;  ochreous-whitish,  thinly  sprinkled  with  short  grey 
strigulse ;  a  grey  discal  dot ;  a  rather  broad  light  reddish  hind- 
marginal  band,  more  closely  irrorated  with  grey  strigulee  ;  cilia 
dark  grey,  spotted  with  blackish,  tips  white. 

Melbourne  and  Warragul,  Victoria ;  two  specimens  ( Coll. 
Lucas). 

91.  Mnes.  lenaea,  n.sp. 

<JQ.  38-40  mm.  Antennse  in  g  with  short  lamelliform  broadly 
clavate  pectinations  (1).  Forewings  with  apex  prominent,  hind- 
margin strongly  bowed  so  as  to  be  almost  bent  on  vein  5  ;  pale 
ashy-grey,  slightly  purplish- tinged,  with  scattered  blackish  scales, 
apex  more  whitish-tinged,  in  £  suffused  with  ochreous  on  basal 
half  and  towards  inner  margin,  scales  on  this  area  more  or  less 
raised  so  as  to  appear  strigulated  with  lighter  and  darker  ;  median 
shade  and  second  line  parallel,  thick,  cloudy,  ill-defined,  in  £ 
fuscous,  in  £  ochreous,  somewhat  curved,  bent  above  middle, 
slightly  sinuate  below  middle ;  a  large  obscure  darker  fuscous 
discal  dot,  placed  on  median  shade  :  cilia  dark  ochreous-brown, 
tips  whitish.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  unevenly  rounded, 
strongly  waved ;  dull  whitish  or  whitish-ochreous,  strewn  with 
grey  strigulee  or  dots,  posterior  half  distinctly  purplish-tinged ;  a 
large  cloudy  dark  grey  discal  dot. 

Bathurst  (2300  feet),  New  South  Wales  ;  Melbourne,  Victoria ; 
Mount  Lofty,  South  Australia ;  in  March,  three  specimens. 


658  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

92.  Mnes.  jirivata,  Gn. 

(Idiodes  privata,  Gn.  IX,  41,  pi.  xiv,  4.) 

(JQ.  40-43  mm.  Antennae  in  g  filiform,  ciliations  ^.  Fore- 
wings  with  apex  prominent,  hindmargin  waved,  strongly  bowed 
so  as  to  be  almost  bent  on  vein  5  ;  light  ochreous,  with  short 
scattered  grey  strigulae  and  a  few  blackish  scales  ;  basal  half  more 
brownish  or  reddish-tinged,  with  somewhat  raised  scales  ;  median 
shade  rather  broad,  cloudy,  light  reddish-fuscous,  forming  obtuse 
angles  outwards  above  and  below  middle,  inwards  in  middle  and 
above  inner  margin  ;  a  cloudy  dark  grey  discal  dot  beyond  this  ; 
second  line  formed  by  a  cloudy  hardly  darker  ochreous  shade, 
slightly  curved  above  middle.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin 
unevenly  rounded,  strongly  waved ;  deep  ochreous-yellow,  some- 
what deeper  and  more  ochreous  towards  hindmargin ;  a  few  dark 
grey  scales  towards  hindmargin  ;  a  dark  grey  discal  dot,  some- 
times indistinct ;  cilia  dark  ochreous-fuscous,  tips  whitish. 

Sydney,  New  South  Wales ;  Melbourne,  Victoria ;  Mount 
Lofty,  South  Australia ;  in  March,  four  specimens. 

93.  Mnes.  fncata,  Feld. 

(Chlenias  fucata,  Feld.  pi.  cxxiv,  11.) 

(j£.  57-74  mm.  Head  and  thorax  light  ochreous-orange, 
rosy-tinged,  thorax  with  a  small  fuscous  central  spot.  Antennae 
in  ^  with  lamellate  pectinations  (3).  Forewings  with  apex 
somewhat  prominent,  hindmargin  moderately  bowed  ;  in  $  pale 
yellowish-ochreous,  in  Q  reddish-ochreous ;  numerous  scattered 
rather  dark  purplish-fuscuous  dots  or  small  strigulae,  more  purplish 
in  (J  ;  a  larger  dark  fuscous  dot  at  base  near  inner  margin,  and 
another  in  disc  towards  base;  a  small  roundish  dark  fuscous 
discal  spot,  its  centre  deep  ferruginous.  Hindwings  with  hind- 
margin rounded,  waved ;  in  £  ochreous-whitish,  in  Q  pale  yellow- 
ochreous,  becoming  whitish-yellowish  towards  base ;  rarely  apex 
broadly  suffused  with  fulvous  and  irrorated  with  dark  grey  ;  cilia 
pale  ochreous-yellowish. 

Sydney,  New  South  Wales ;  Melbourne,  Victoria ;  Mount 
Lofty,  South  Australia;  in  May,  three  specimens. 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  659 

28.  Criomacha,  n.g. 

Face  with  strong  truncate-conical  projection.  Tongue 
developed.  Palpi  moderate,  subascending,  rough-scaled,  terminal 
joint  moderate.  Antennae  in  g  bipectinated  throughout.  Thorax 
with  central  triangular  crest  on  back,  densely  hairy  beneath. 
Femora  hairy  beneath  ;  anterior  tibiae  in  both  sexes  with  horny 
apical  hook  above,  posterior  tibiae  in  <J  not  dilated.  Forewings 
in  g  without  fovea  ;  10  out  of  9,  11  sometimes  connected  with  12. 

Restricted  to  the  single  Australian  species. 

94.   Criom.  belidearia,  Feld. 

(Chlenias  belidearia,  Feld.  pi.  cxxiv,  9.) 

^Q.  47-57  mm.  Antennal  pectinations  in  <J  6.  Forewings 
with  apex  slightly  prominent,  hindmargin  rather  strongly  bowed, 
waved  ;  in  £  deep  brown-red,  with  scattered  dark  purple-fuscous 
scales,  in  Q  light  brownish-ochreous  mixed  or  suffused  with  light 
brown-reddish,  with  scattered  short  dark  grey  strigulae ;  a 
somewhat  darker  suffusion  towards  inner  margin  ;  first  line  cloudy, 
blackish,  dentate,  slightly  bent  in  middle,  or  more  usually  reduced 
to  a  dark  fuscous  dot  in  disc  and  an  oblique  mark  on  inner 
margin  ;  a  dark  purple-fuscous  transverse  discal  dot ;  second  line 
cloudy,  blackish,  dentate,  nearly  straight,  dilated  on  costa,  or  more 
usually  reduced  to  a  series  of  dark  fuscous  dots  on  veins.  Hind- 
wings  with  hindmargin  unevenly  rounded,  waved;  light  fuscous  or 
pale  whitish-ochreous,  towards  costa  more  whitish,  with  a  broad 
suffused  purple-fuscous  or  reddish-grey  hindmarginal  band  ;  veins 
sometimes  suffused  with  pale  reddish. 

Melbourne,  Victoria  ;  Mount  Lofty,  South  Australia  ;  in  May  ; 
four  specimens  received  from  Mr.  E.  Guest. 

29.  Stathmorrhopa,  n.g. 

Face  somewhat  prominent,  with  short  projecting  scales.  Tongue 
developed.  Palpi  moderate,  subascending,  rough-scaled,  terminal 
joint  short.  Antennae  in  <£  bipectinated  throughout.  Thorax 
with  triangular  central  crest,  beneath  densely  hairy.  Femora 
densely  hairy  beneath,  posterior  tibiae  in  g  not  dilated.  Fore- 
43 


66G  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

wings  in  <J  without  fovea;  10  out  of  9,  11  anastomosing  or 
connected  with  12  and  10.  Hindwings  with  veins  3  and  4  often 
from  a  point. 

Contains  only  the  following  ;  a  stout  and  heavily  built  insect. 

95.   Stath.  beggaria,  Gn. 

(Chlenias  beggaria,  Gn.  X,  238,  pi.  xiv,  2  ;  ?  C.  porphyrinaria, 
ib.  237.) 

<££.  50-57  mm.  Antennal  pectinations  of  $  4.  Forewings 
suboblong,  apex  slightly  prominent,  hiudmargin  rather  strongly 
bowed,  waved,  surface  in  £  slightly  wrinkled  transversely ; 
fuscous,  irrorated  with  darker  fuscous  between  veins ;  veins 
sometimes  slightly  reddish-tinged  ;  a  small  ill-defined  cloudy  dark 
fuscous  discal  spot.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  unevenly 
rounded,  waved ;  whitish-fuscous,  in  $  more  whitish,  especially 
towards  costa  and  base  ;  sometimes  a  dark  grey  transverse  discal 
mark  ;  a  broad  suffused  rather  dark  fuscous  hindmarginal  band, 
narrowed  towards  anal  angle. 

Sydney,  New  South  Wales  ;  Warragul,  Victoria  ;  Mount  Lofty, 
South  Australia ;  in  May,  six  specimens,  usually  taken  at  rest  on 
tree-trunks  or  fences.  I  have  not  seen  a  specimen  which  would 
agree  with  the  description  of  porphyrinaria,  and  am  still  uncertain 
whether  this  name  represents  a  local  form  or  distinct  species. 

30.  Conosara,  n.g. 

Face  with  conical  projection  of  scales.  Tongue  developed. 
Palpi  long,  porrected,  rough-scaled,  terminal  joint  moderate. 
Antennae  in  $  bipectinated  to  apex.  Thorax  with  double  crest 
at  posterior  extremity,  beneath  hairy.  Femora  hairy  beneath ; 
posterior  tibiae  in  <J  rather  dilated.  Forewings  in  £  without 
fovea;  10  out  of  9  near  base.     Hindwings  normal. 

Endemic  ;  a  development  of  Chlenias. 

96.   Con.  castanea,  n.sp. 

£.  36  mm.  Antennal  pectinations  5.  Forewings  elongate- 
triangular,    hindmargin    bowed ;    rather    light    reddish-ochreous- 


BY    E.   MEYRICK.  661 

brown,  with  scattered  dark  fuscous  scales,  especially  along  costa ; 
a  streak  along  submedian  fold  irrorated  with  whitish  ;  first  and 
second  lines  obscurely  pale,  with  a  few  whitish  scales,  becoming 
whitish  on  submedian  fold,  dentate,  rather  nearly  approximated  on 
submedian  fold,  where  they  are  connected  by  a  dark  fuscous 
suffusion ;  a  blackish  discal  dot ;  subterminal  slender,  whitish, 
dentate,  interrupted,  forming  a  white  spot  on  submedian  fold  : 
cilia  fuscous.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  sinuate  on 
upper  half  ;  fuscous-whitish,  tinged  with  reddish-ochreous,  more 
strongly  posteriorly ;  a  pale  cloudy  waved  subterminal  line, 
preceded  by  a  cloudy  light  fuscous  shade. 

Tasmania  (1)  ;  one  specimen,  received  from  Mr.  A.  Simson. 

31.  Mictodoca,  n.g. 

Face  with  appressed  scales.  Tongue  developed.  Palpi  mode- 
rately long,  porrected,  with  long  rough  scales,  terminal  joint 
rather  short,  filiform.  Antennse  in  £  bipectinated  to  apex. 
Thorax  not  crested  (1),  hairy  beneath.  Femora  hairy  beneath  ; 
posterior  tibiae  in  £  not  dilated.  Forewiogs  in  <J  without  fovea  ; 
10  connected  or  anastomosing  with  11  and  9.     Hindwings  normal. 

Only  the  one  species  is  known. 

97.   Mict.  toxeuta,  n.sp. 

(J.  34  mm.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  bowed;  oblique;  light 
fuscous,  in  disc  and  towards  base  somewhat  suffused  with  ochreous- 
brown ;  a  short  oblique  black  streak  from  base  of  costa,  and  a 
second  less  marked  near  beyond  it ;  first  line  ill-defined,  blackish, 
thrice  very  sharply  dentate,  nearly  preceded  by  a  similar  roughly 
parallel  line ;  veins  here  and  there  faintly  marked  with  blackish  ; 
second  line  somewhat  curved,  shortly  dentate,  blackish,  followed 
by  a  faint  whitish  line  expanding  into  an  irregular  spot  above 
middle,  crossing  and  partially  obscuring  second  line ;  subterminal 
thick,  obscurely  paler,  partially  whitish,  running  from  apex  to  f 
of  inner  margin,  twice  sinuate  inwards,  preceded  by  an  irregular 
ochreous-brown  shade,  cut  by  four  black  streaks  on  veins  above 


662  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

middle ;  an  interrupted  black  hindmarginal  line :  cilia  grey- 
whitish,  barred  with  fuscous,  with  a  cloudy  fuscous  line.  Hind- 
wings  with  hindmargin  rounded ;  pale  greyish-fuscous,  becoming 
darker  posteriorly. 

Newcastle,  New  South  Wales ;  one  specimen  (Australian 
Museum). 

32.  Chlenias,  Gn. 

Face  shortly  rough-scaled  or  with  projection  of  scales,  or  forming 
a  rounded  flattened  prominence,  or  with  long  horny  projecting 
plate.  Tongue  developed.  Palpi  moderate,  porrected,  rough- 
scaled,  terminal  joint  moderate.  Antennae  in  £  bipectinated 
throughout.  Thorax  with  anterior  triangular  crest,  beneath 
densely  hairy.  Femora  hairy  beneath ;  posterior  tibiae  in  £  not 
dilated.  Fore  wings  in  g  without  fovea  ;  10  connected  or  anasto- 
mosing with  9.     Hind  wings  normal. 

As  restricted,  the  genus  is  at  present  confined  to  Australia. 
The  variations  in  structure  of  the  forehead  are  certainly  specific 
only,  the  species  being  very  closely  allied  in  all  other  respects ; 
they  are  in  fact  very  easily  confused  together.  They  are  retired 
in  habit,  and  rarely  met  with  except  at  lamps. 

1.  Face  with  long  horny  projecting  plate 98.  arietaria. 

Face  without  horny  plate 2. 

2.  Forewings  with  strong  black  dorsal  streak     99.  melanoxysta. 
Forewings  without  black  dorsal  streak....  3. 

3.  Face  with  broad  rounded  prominence 100.  umbraticaria. 

Face  without  prominence 4. 

4.  Head  and  thorax  wholly  black ...   103.  seminigra. 

Head  and  thorax  not  wholly  black 5. 

5.  Wings  with  hindmargin  dentate .   104.  carburaria. 

Wings  with  hindmargin  not  dentate 6. 

6.  Thorax  ochreous  or  brownish-tinged  101.  banksiaria. 

Thorax  not  ochreous  or  brownish-tinged..   102.  zonaea. 


BY    E.  MEYIUCK.  663 

98.    Chlen.  arietaria,  Gn. 

(Chlenias  arietaria,  Gn.  X,  239  ;  Chemerina  cuneifera,  Walk. 
1155;  Ciampa  defixella,  ib.  Cr.  180;  Chlenias  crambaria,  Felcl. 
pi.  cxxxiii,  12.) 

(JQ.  33-38  mm.  Face  with  long  horny  projecting  median 
plate,  angularly  emarginate  at  extremity,  and  a  horny  ridge  on 
lower  margin.  Antennal  pectinations  in  $  8.  Abdomen  clothed 
with  shining  brownish-ochreous  scales  towards  base.  Forewir.^s 
very  elongate-triangular,  narrower  in  £,  hindmargin  obliquely 
rounded;  light  fuscous,  mixed  with  dark  fuscous  and  whitish, 
posteriorly  and  on  subcostal  and  dorsal  streaks  often  suffused 
with  pale  ochreous ;  veins  more  or  less  marked  with  white  in 
disc ;  spaces  between  veins  and  within  cell  marked  with  blackish 
streaks  except  towards  costa,  these  streaks  sometimes  more  or 
less  wholly  obsolete;  lines  dentate,  dark  fuscous,  confused  and 
incomplete,  first  angulated  in  middle,  second  nearly  straight ; 
subterminal  slender,  white,  dentate.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin 
sinuate-rounded ;  grey-whitish,  towards  hindmargin  more  greyish- 
tinged. 

Newcastle,  Sydney,  and  Bathurst  (2300  feet),  New  South 
Wales ;  Melbourne,  Victoria  ;  Adelaide,  South  Australia ;  in 
April  and  May,  rather  common.  The  variety  with  the  black 
streaks  suppressed  has  at  first  sight  a  distinct  appearance,  but 
all  the  intermediate  forms  occur. 

99.   Chlen.  melanoxysta,  n.sp. 

9.  35  mm.  Head  and  thorax  light  reddish ;  face  rather 
protuberant,  pale  ochreous ;  thorax  with  some  blackish-grey 
scales.  Forewings  elongate-triangular,  hindmargin  bowed,  oblique, 
slightly  waved  ;  pale  ochreous-browhish,  irrorated  with  fuscous  ; 
a  costal  streak,  and  parts  of  veins,  irrorated  with  dark  red ; 
numerous  scattered  cloudy  blackish-grey  dots  ;  first  line  obsolete  ; 
second  line  cloudy,  fuscous,  very  indistinct,  hardly  curved  ; 
subterminal  indicated  by  cloudy  fuscous  indistinct  anterior 
margin,  marked  with  blackish-grey  above  middle  and  on  a  dot 
at  I  from  costa ;    a  strong  black  dorsal  streak  from  J  to  anal 


664  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

angle.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  unevenly  waved  ; 
whitish-grey,  on  posterior  half  rather  thickly  irrorated  with  dark 
grey. 

Balaclava,  South  Australia ;  one  specimen  (Coll.  Guest),  taken 
in  April. 

100.  Chlen.  umbraticaria,  Gn. 

(Chlenias  umbraticaria,  Gn.  X,  240.) 

<JQ.  41-43  mm.  Face  broadly  rounded-prominent.  Antennal 
pectinations  in  £  6.  Forewings  elongate-triangular,  more  elongate 
in  (j),  hindmargin  bowed,  rather  strongly  oblique,  waved  ;  light 
fuscous,  densely  irrorated  with  white  ;  median  and  submedian 
folds  and  posterior  interneural  spaces  marked  with  fine  black 
longitudinal  lines ;  first  and'  second  lines  and  median  shade 
cloudy,  darker  fuscous,  sometimes  nearly  obsolete,  closely  approxi- 
mated on  lower  half,  first  strongly  curved,  median  angulated  but 
hardly  traceable,  second  somewhat  curved  on  upper  half,  waved. 
Hindwings  with  hindmargin  unevenly  rounded,  sinuate  above 
middle ;  fuscous-whitish,  with  a  broad  grey  hindmarginal  band. 

Melbourne,  Victoria  ;  Mount  Lofty,  South  Australia  ;  in  March 
two  specimens.  From  the  following  species,  to  which  it  is  very 
similar,  it  may  be  distinguished  both  by  the  frontal  prominence, 
and  by  the  distinctly  whitish  hindwings. 

101.  Chlen.  banksiaria,  Le  G. 

(Chlenias  banksiaria,  Le  G.,  Rev.  Zool.  1841,  257,  Gn.  X,  239  ; 
'C.  auctaria,  Gn.  X,  239,  pi.  xiv,  1  ;  C.  indecisata,  Walk.  1153.) 

(JQ.  38-42  mm.  Face  flat.  Antennal  pectinations  in  g  6. 
Thorax  ochreous-brownish  mixed  with  grey-whitish,  with  an 
anterior  suffused  dark  fuscous  band.  Forewings  elongate-tri- 
angular, more  elongate  in  Q,  hindmargin  obliquely  bowed,  waved  ; 
light  fuscous,  more  or  less  partially  suffused  with  ochreous,  and 
irregularly  irrorated  with  dark  fuscous  and  whitish  ;  sometimes 
scattered  black  scales  and  partial  black  streaks  between  veins ; 
first  line  obscure,  whitish,  posteriorly  partially  edged  with  blackish 
and   dark  ochreous-fuscous,  somewhat  irregular,  strongly  curved, 


BY    E.   MEYRICK.  G65 

sometimes  almost  obsolete ;  median  shade  slender,  cloudy,  dark 
fuscous,  angulated  outwards  beneath  costa  and  in  middle,  inwards 
above  and  below  middle,  in  £  sometimes  obsolete ;  second  line 
whitish,  cloudy,  shortly  dentate,  anteriorly  edged  with  dark  fuscous, 
upper  half  somewhat  curved  outwards,  lower  somewhat  sinuate 
inwards  ;  a  more  marked  ochreous  suffusion  beyond  this  above 
middle  and  above  inner  margin.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin 
unevenly  rounded,  sinuate  above  middle  ;  pale  fuscous,  becoming 
darker  posteriorly. 

Sydney,  New  South  Wales;  Melbourne,  Victoria;  Mount 
Lofty,  South  Australia ;  from  March  to  July,  rather  common. 

102.   Ghlen.  zonaea,  n.sp. 

(JQ.  37-39  mm.  Face  flat.  Antennal  pectinations  in  g  6. 
Thorax  blackish-fuscous  mixed  with  whitish.  Forewings  very 
elongate-triangular,  handmargin  obliquely  bowed,  waved  ;  fuscous, 
densely  irrorated  with  white  and  in  £  with  black  ;  veins  partially 
marked  with  black  except  posteriorly,  where  there  are  more  or 
less  marked  black  interneural  streaks  instead  ;  a  small  white  mark 
at  base  ;  first  and  second  lines  and  median  shade  cloudy,  dark 
fuscous,  evenly  curved,  first  in  <J  partially  preceded  by  a  white 
suffusion,  second  in  g  followed  by  a  cloudy  white  subdentate  line  ; 
a  dark  fuscous  spot  in  g  beyond  this  above  middle,  surmounted 
by  a  slight  pale  ochreous  suffusion,  and  another  above  inner 
margin  ;  subterminal  indicated  by  whitish  dots  on  veins,  in  £ 
obsolete.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  unevenly  rounded,  sinuate 
above  middle  ;  fuscous,  becoming  whitish-fuscous  towards  base  ; 
sometimes  an  obscure  darker  transverse  discal  mark. 

Melbourne,  Victoria ;  Mount  Lofty,  South  Australia ;  from 
March  to  June,  five  specimens.  Larva  10-1  egged,  longitudinally 
banded  as  follows  ;  a  dorsal  orange  stripe,  then  four  wavy  black 
lines  with  bluish-white  interspaces,  then  abroad  pale  yellow  stripe, 
then  four  more  black  lines,  the  three  last  interrupted  and  space 
between  them  yellowish-white,  then  a  broad  black  line,  below  this 
yellowish  with  four  purple  wavy  lines  ;  spiracles  orange ;  head 
yellowish  :  feeds  on  Aster  axillaris,  in  August  and  September. 


666  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

103.  Chlen.  seminigra,  Ros. 

(Chlenias  seminigra,  Ros.,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  1885,  430.) 
<JQ.  44-46  mm.  Head  and  thorax  black  ;  face  flat.  Antennal 
pectinations  in  £  very  long.  Forewings  very  elongate-triangular, 
hindmargin  bowed,  oblique,  not  waved  ;  rather  dark  brown ; 
wholly  suffused  with  dark  fuscous  except  a  rather  broad  hind- 
marginal  band  which  is  partially  suffused  with  dark  fuscous 
towards  anal  angle ;  costa  sometimes  rather  broadly  ochreous- 
brown ;  second  line  sometimes  perceptible,  dentate,  parallel  to 
hindmargin.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  unevenly  rounded, 
sinuate  above  middle ;  very  pale  whitish-fuscous,  hindmargin 
slightly  brownish-tinged ;  a  dark  fuscous  transverse  discal  mark. 

Warragnl,  Victoria;  two  specimens. 

104.  Chlen.  carburaria,  Gn. 
(Chlenias  carburaria,  Gn.  X,  238.) 

<J(J>.  38  mm.  Thorax  dark  brown,  collar  cinnamon-brown, 
edged  with  black.  Forewings  with  hindmargin  dentate ;  dark 
brown  suffused  with  black  ;  first  line  black,  angulated  acutely 
inwards  in  middle  and  outwards  on  submedian  fold ;  second  line 
black,  angulated.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin  dentate  ;  fuscous, 
becoming  whitish  towards  base. 

I  have  not  seen  any  specimens  identifiable  with  this  description, 
which  is  a  modified  interpretation  of  that  given  by  Guenee  ;  but 
it  appears  likely  to  be  truly  referable  to  this  genus,  and  is 
certainly  distinct  from  those  given  above.  Stress  must  be  laid  on 
the  dentate  hindmargin. 

33.  Smyriodes,  Gn. 

Face  with  short  projecting  scales.  Tongue  developed.  Palpi 
rather  short,  porrected,  rough-scaled,  terminal  joint  moderate. 
Antennae  in  £  bipectinated  to  apex.  Thorax  with  small  anterior 
triangular  and  posterior  transverse  crests,  beneath  very  densely 
hairy.       Femora   densely  hairy    beneath;    posterior    tibiae  in   (J 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  667 

slightly  dilated.  Fore  wings  in  g  without  fovea;  10  connected 
with  12  and  9,  11  out  of  10  between  connections.  Hindwings 
normal. 

Contains  the  following  species  only. 

105.  Smyr.  aplectaria,  Gn. 

(Smyriodes  aplectaria,  Gn.  IX,  223,  pi.  xx,  1  ;  Nisista  notodon- 
taria,  Walk.  294 ;   Vunga  delineata,  ib.  Suppl.  453.) 

$.  33-40  mm.  Antennal  pectinations  6.  Forewings  elongate- 
triangular,  hindmargin  bowed,  dentate ;  light  fuscous,  partially 
ochreous -tinged,  indistinctly  strigulated  with  darker;  a  fine 
blackish  transverse  line  near  base,  angulated  beneath  costa  ;  a 
round  blackish  suffusion  on  lower  half  between  this  and  first  line; 
first  line  slender,  blackish,  somewhat  irregular,  curved  ;  median 
shade  cloudy,  blackish,  ill-marked,  rectangularly  angulated  out- 
wards above  middle  and  sinuate  inwards  below  middle  ;  second  line 
slender,  blackish,  running  from  costa  beyond  middle  to  §  of  inner 
margin,  angulated  outwards  beneath  costa  and  above  middle, 
sinuate  inwards  between  angulations  and  on  lower  half  ;  sub- 
terminal  irregular,  cloudy,  pale,  more  whitish  at  extremities, 
anteriorly  more  or  less  distinctly  margined  with  dark  fuscous 
suffusion,  marked  with  two  or  three  short  black  streaks  between 
veins  above  middle ;  a  short  oblique  blackish-fuscous  streak  from 
apex;  a  fine  black  hindmarginal  line.  Hindwings  with  hind- 
margin  rounded,  subdentate ;  fuscous-grey,  becoming  whitish-grey 
towards  base  ;  an  indistinct  slender  irregular  darker  line  beyond 
middle  ;  subterminal  faintly  paler. 

Mount  Lofty,  South  Australia ;  also  from  Tasmania ;  in  May, 
three  specimens.  Larva  10-legged ;  apple-green;  dorsal  light 
crimson  ;  spiracular  pale  yellow  ;  spiracles  orange-yellow,  black- 
centred  :  feeds  on  a  prickly  species  of  Pultenaea.  It  has  been 
bred  by  Mr.  E.  Guest,  to  whom  I  am  indebted  for  this  information. 

34.  Gastrina,  Gn. 

Face  with  slightly  projecting  scales.  Tongue  developed.  Palpi 
moderate,  subascending,  rough-scaled,  terminal  joint  short.     An- 


668  ■  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

tennse  in  g  bipectinated,  apex  simple.  Thorax  with  posterior 
crest,  densely  hairy  beneath.  Abdomen  with  strong  dorsal  crests. 
Femora  glabrous  ;  posterior  tibiae  in  <J  strongly  dilated,  containing 
tuft,  outer  apical  spur  very  short,  thick.  Forewings  in  £  without 
fovea;  10  out  of  9,  connected  again  with  9.     Hindwings  normal. 

Only  the  one  species  is  known. 

106.   Gastr.  cristaria,  Gn. 

(Gastrina  cristaria,  Gn.  IX,  224,  pi.  v,  4 ;  Praxis  illapsa, 
Walk.  Noct.  1088  ;  Hypochroma  velutinata,  ib.  Geom.  442  ; 
Passa  latifasciata,  ib.  Suppl.  1563.) 

(J.  33  mm.  Antennal  pectinations  3.  Forewings  elongate- 
triangular,  hindmargin  bowed,  subdentate  ;  light  brownish- 
oehreous,  with  scattered  dark  brown  strigulse  and  blackish  scales  ; 
basal  area  ochreous-brown,  becoming  black  on  inner  margin, 
except  at  base,  which  is  whitish  ;  first  line  blackish,  gently  curved, 
anteriorly  edged  with  whitish-ochreous  ;  median  shade  cloudy, 
rather  dark  fuscous,  nearly  straight  ;  space  between  first  line 
and  median  shade  ochreous-brown,  becoming  darker  towards 
inner  margin ;  second  line  black,  running  from  beyond  §  of  costa 
to  §  of  inner  margin,  forming  a  strong  rounded  projection 
outwards  above  middle,  somewhat  sinuate  inwards  above  this, 
and  more  strongly  on  lower  half,  where  it  is  confluent  with 
median  shade ;  subterminal  faintly  paler,  more  distinct  towards 
costa,  anteriorly  margined  by  a  broad  yellow-ochreous  suffusion, 
marked  with  a  blackish  suffusion  above  middle ;  a  short  oblique 
dark  fuscous  subapical  streak.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin 
rounded,  dentate  ;  whitish-ochreous,  slightly  brownish-tinged, 
towards  costa  whitish  j  median  line  slender,  grey,  somewhat 
sinuate ;  second  dark  fuscous,  obtusely  angulated  in  middle, 
followed  by  a  whitish  line,  beyond  which  is  a  moderate  fuscous 
band ;  terminal  space  irrorated  with  fuscous,  with  coppery-golden 
reflections. 

Sydney,  New  South  Wales  j  in  June  and  October,  two 
specimens. 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  669 

35.  Stjbaroma,  n.g. 

Face  slightly  prominent,  with  short  projecting  scales.  Tongue 
developed.  Palpi  moderate,  ascending,  rough-scaled,  terminal 
joint  very  short.  Antennae  in  £  bipectinated,  apex  simple. 
Thorax  with  slight  central  crest,  densely  hairy  beneath.  Femora 
hairy  beneath,  posterior  tibise  in  g  not  dilated.  Forewings  in 
£  without  fovea;  10  connected  with  9.  Hindwings  with  veins 
3  and  4  from  a  point. 

Formed  to  include  the  following  species. 

107.  Stib.  melanotoxa,  n.sp. 

(JQ.  38-43  mm.  Head  and  thorax  dark  grey  irrorated  with 
whitish.  Antennal  pectinations  of  $  4.  Forewings  elongate- 
triangular,  hindmai-gin  somewhat  waved,  hardly  oblique,  nearly 
straight,  rounded  beneath ;  fuscous-grey,  irrorated  with  white, 
with  scattered  black  scales  ;  veins  marked  by  fine  black  lines  ; 
sometimes  a  short  black  transverse  line  from  costa  near  base  ; 
first  line  black,  curved,  or  twice  angularly  dentate  outwards, 
variable  ;  median  shade  dark  fuscous  or  black,  angulated  in  middle, 
sinuate  inwards  on  lower  half  ;  second  line  black,  from  beyond  § 
of  costa  to  |  of  inner  margin,  angulated  in  middle,  sinuate  in- 
wards on  lower  half ;  subterminal  cloudy,  whitish,  dentate  on 
upper  half,  suffusedly  margined  with  darker  fuscous,  more  broadly 
anteriorly ;  a  sharp  black  hindmarginal  line  :  cilia  grey-whitish, 
with  two  grey  lines,  and  barred  with  grey.  Hindwings  with 
hind  margin  rounded,  unevenly  waved ;  in  £  whitish,  in  Q  grey  ; 
a  broad  dark  grey  hindmarginal  band,  its  anterior  edge  straight, 
so  that  it  is  narrowed  to  a  point  at  anal  angle  ;  in  £  a  dark 
grey  discal  dot  and  slender  postmedian  line  ;  a  black  hindmarginal 
line ;  cilia  whitish,  spotted  with  dark  grey  on  veins. 

Wiramera  district,  Victoria  ;  Mount  Lofty,  South  Australia ; 
received  from  Mr.  E.  Guest  and  Dr.  Lucas  ;  four  specimens.  The 
species  varies  in  the  intensity  of  marking  and  in  the  form  of  the 
lines  ;  the  variability  of  the  first  line  in  particular  is  singularly 
great.  Larva  10-legged  ;  yellowish-green  ;  dorsal  purplish- 
brown  ;    lateral    pale  yellow  ;    head    greenish-orange ;    feeds   on 


670  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

Eucalyptus  sp.  (white  gum).     It  has  been  bred  by  Mr.  Guest,  who 
sent  me  the  foregoing  information. 

36.  Drymoptila,  n.g. 

Face  with  appressed  scales.  Tongue  developed.  Palpi 
moderate,  porrected,  shortly  rough-scaled,  terminal  joint  short. 
Antennae  in  <J  filiform,  shortly  ciliated.  Thorax  with  dense 
posterior  crest,  somewhat  hairy  beneath.  Femora  glabrous. 
Forewings  in  g  without  fovea  ;  10  and  11  separate.  Hindwings 
normal. 

Founded  on  the  following  species  ;  allied  to  Stibaroma. 

108.  Drym.  temenitis,  n.sp. 

(J.  26  mm.  Forewings  elongate-triangular,  costa  strongly 
arched  near  base,  slightly  sinuate  in  middle,  hindmargin  rather 
obliquely  rounded,  waved  ;  grey,  slightly  brownish-tinged,  with 
faint  darker  strigulations ;  first  line  black,  well-marked, 
running  from  I  of  costa  to  J  of  inner  margin,  hardly 
curved,  preceding  space  more  brownish ;  a  darker  discal  dot ; 
second  line  black,  well-defined,  running  from  f  of  costa  to 
before  anal  angle,  somewhat  curved  inwards,1  sinuate  outwards 
above  middle,  followed  by  a  pale  line,  beyond  which  the  terminal 
area  is  wholly  suffused  with  brownish-ochreous,  except  a  pale 
irregular  dentate  subterminal  line ;  an  oblique  blackish  apical 
dash,  and  a  shorter  one  beneath  its  anterior  extremity  ;  a  black 
hindmarginal  line  :  cilia  light  grey.  Hindwings  with  hindmargin 
rounded,  unevenly  waved ;  grey,  paler  towards  base  ;  a  somewhat 
darker  interrupted  postmedian  line  ;  a  dark  grey  hindmarginal 
line  ;  cilia  grey-whitish. 

Mount  Lofty,  South  Australia ;  in  April,  one  specimen  (Coll. 
Guest). 

37.  Paralaea,  n.g. 

Face  with  projection  of  scales.  Tongue  developed.  Palpi 
moderate,  porrected,  with  long  dense  projecting  scales,  terminal 
joint  short.  Antennae  in  £  bipectinated,  apex  simple.  Thorax 
with  triangular  anterior  and  bifid  posterior  crests,  beneath  densely 


BY    E.   MEYRICK.  671 

hairy.  Femora  hairy  beneath  ;  posterior  tibia?  in  g  not  dilated. 
Forewings  in  g  without  fovea;  10  out  of  9,  sometimes  anasto- 
mosing again  with  9,  11  anastomosing  with  12  and  10.  Hind- 
wings  with  veins  3  and  4  from  a  point  or  stalked. 

The  single  species  is  West  Australian. 

109.  Par.  promacha,  n.sp. 

r^9,  26-29  mm.  Antennal  pectinations  of  <J  3.  Forewings 
very  elongate-triangular,  costa  abruptly  arched  near  base,  thence 
straight,  hindmargin  somewhat  oblique,  crenulate,  obtusely 
angulated  in  middle  ;  pale  fuscous-grey,  partially  ochreous-tinged, 
with  scattered  dark  fuscous  scales;  costa  strigulated  with  dark 
fuscous  ;  a  straight  blackish  line  near  base,  externally  suffused 
with  ochreous  ;  first  line  fuscous,  sometimes  marked  with  blackish, 
from  I  of  costa  to  §  of  inner  margin,  angulated  in  middle  and 
near  inner  margin  ;  median  shade  fuscous,  angulated  in  middle  ;  a 
blackish  discal  dot  beyond  this  ;  second  line  from  f  of  costa  to  f 
of  inner  margin,  angulated  parallel  to  hindmargin,  grey-whitish, 
margined  by  two  much  interrupted  fine  dark  fuscous  lines,  posterior 
mixed  with  reddish-fuscous  ;  a  more  or  less  distinct  darker  grey 
suffused  streak  along  submedian  fold  from  first  line  to  subterminal, 
and  another  above  middle  from  median  shade  to  subterminal  line ; 
subterminal  faint,  whitish,  running  from  apex  to  anal  angle, 
subdentate  ;  a  fine  black  interrupted  hinclmarginal  line.  Hind- 
wings  with  hindmargin  forming  an  acute  triangular  projection  in 
middle,  upper  half  irregularly  crenate,  lower  half  straight ; 
grey-whitish  ;  a  dark  grey  discal  dot ;  second  line  slender,  grey, 
rather  irregular  ;  a  grey  hinclmarginal  band,  including  an  obscure 
whitish  subterminal  line  ;  a  tine  black  hindmarginal  line.  Under- 
surface  of  hind  wings  with  markings  more  blackish  and  defined, 
anterior  margin  of  subterminal  line  forming  an  elongate-oval 
transverse  blackish-fuscous  blotch  on  upper  half  and  a  small  spot 
at  anal  angle. 

Albany,  West  Australia;  in  September  and  October,  five 
specimens. 


672  REVISION    OP    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

38.  Neoteristis,  n.g. 

Face  with  projection  of  scales.  Tongue  developed.  Palpi  very 
long,  straight,  porrected,  rough-scaled,  terminal  joint  moderate. 
Antennae  in  $ — (1)  Thorax  not  crested  (?),  densely  hairy  beneath. 
Femora  smooth.  Forewings  with  veins  10  and  11  separate. 
Hindwings  normal. 

Although  the  £  is  unknown,  I  am  unable  to  include  this  species 
in  any  other  genus,  but  in  superficial  appearance  it  most  nearly 
approaches  the  preceding  ;  the  unusually  long  palpi  made  it  easy 
of  recognition,  otherwise  I  should  not  have  ventured  to  describe  it. 

110.  Neot.  paraphanes,  n.sp. 

Q.  34  mm.  Palpi  four  times  width  of  eye.  Forewings  very 
elongate-triangular,  almost  oblong,  costa  abruptly  arched  near 
base,  where  it  is  roughened  with  projecting  scales,  hindmargin 
oblique,  strongly  bowed  so  as  to  be  almost  bent  on  vein  4  ;  light 
fuscous-grey,  much  suffused  with  white,  with  scattered  dark 
fuscous  scales ;  first  line  fuscous,  from  \  of  costa  to  \  of  inner 
margin,  curved  and  almost  bent  in  middle  ;  median  shade  cloudy, 
dark  fuscous,  irregularly  dentate  ;  second  line  hardly  traceable ; 
subterminal  indicated  by  suffused  subdentate  cloudy  rather  dark 
fuscous  anterior  margin;  an  interrupted  dark  fuscous  hindmarginal 
line  :  cilia  white,  with  a  few  dark  fuscous  scales.  Hindwings 
with  hindmargin  unevenly  rounded,  rather  deeply  sinuate  above 
middle ;  pale  whitish-fuscous,  somewhat  darker  posteriorly  j  a 
faintly  indicated  paler  subterminal  line,  distinctly  whitish  on 
costa,  preceded  by  a  somewhat  darker  suffusion. 

Deloraine,  Tasmania ;  in  November,  one  specimen. 

39.  Mochlotona,  n.g. 

Faced  with  appressed  scales.  Tongue  developed.  Palpi 
moderate,  subascending,  rough-scaled,  terminal  joint  rather  short, 
cylindrical.  Antennae  in  <J — (*?).  Thorax  not  crested  (?),  densely 
hairy  beneath.  Femora  hairy  beneath.  Forewings  with  vein  10 
connected  with  9,  11  connected  with  12  and  10.  Hindwings 
normal. 


BY    E.  MEYRICK.  673 

Of  this  genus  also  the  £  is  unknown  ;  but  it  appears  to  differ 
from  its  nearest  allies  in  neuration  too  markedly  to  be  united  with 
them. 

111.  Mochl.  phasmatias,  n.sp. 

Q.  64  mm.  Head  and  thorax  white,  with  a  few  black  scales. 
Forewings  very  elongate-triangular,  hindmargin  somewhat 
obliquely  rounded,  waved ;  white,  with  a  few  scattered  black  and 
fuscous  scales,  especially  towards  costa  anteriorly  ;  a  small  reddish- 
ochreous  discal  spot ;  some  reddish-ochreous  scales  indicating  three 
obscure  very  imperfect  lines,  hardly  traceable,  first  from  J  of  costa 
to  I  of  inner  margin,  second  from  §  of  costa  to  §  of  inner  margin, 
curved  outwards  on  upper  half,  third  subterminal :  cilia  white, 
with  a  series  of  blackish  semilunate  marks  between  veins. 
Hindwings  whitish,  with  a  very  broad  blackish-grey  hindmarginal 
band  ;  cilia  white. 

Warragul,  Victoria  ;  one  specimen  (Coll.  Lucas). 

Appendix. 

The  following  names,  nominally  or  actually  referable  to  species 
of  the  family,  have  not  been  included  above,  for  various  reasons  as 
explained. 

112.  Epione  incaria,  Gn.  IX,  97.     I  cannot  identify  this  at  all. 

113.  Ellopia  cumularia,  Gn.  IX,  133,  pi.  v,  5  I  have  seen 
nothing  like  this,  and  doubt  if  it  is  really  Australian. 

111.  Tetrads  cachexiata,  Gn.  IX,  142.  Unidentified;  perhaps 
not  Australian. 

115.  Crocallis  newmannaria,  Gn.  IX,  169.  Unidentified; 
probably  allied  to  the  Chlenias  group. 

116.  Tephrosia  bispinaria,  Gn.  IX,  266.  Probably  a  Selido- 
sema  ;  unidentified. 

117.  Fldonia  amitaria,  Gn.  X,  155.  Very  likely  only  a  form 
of  the  European  atomaria,  judging  from  the  description;  the 
Australian  locality  is  doubtless  an  error. 


674  REVISION    OP   AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 

118.  Zerene  devinctaria,  Gn.  X,  222,  pi.  vm,  3.  I  have  no 
doubt  that  this  is  another  error  of  locality ;  the  species  appears  to 
be  identical  with  the  American  catenaria. 

119.  Ghlenias  galearia,  Gn.  X,  238.  Unidentified;  but  the 
description  is  very  vague. 

120.  Tephrosia  exesaria,  Gn.  IX,  270.     Unidentified. 

In  order  to  conclude  the  Geometrina^  I  add  here  the  single 
Australian  species  of  the  Desmobathridae.  I  may  mention  that 
the  Strophidiadae,  which  I  once  included  in  the  Geomeirina,  are 
truly  referable,  as  I  am  now  satisfied,  to  the  Bombycina.  The  order 
of  the  five  families  of  Geometrina,  to  show  their  mutual  relations, 
should  be  as  follows:  1,  Hydriomenidae ;  2,  Monocteniadae ;  3, 
Desmobathridae  ;  4,  Geometridae  ;  5,  Selidosemidae. 

DESMOB  ATHRID  A  E. 

Ocelli  and  maxillary  palpi  usually  obsolete.  Forewings  with 
vein  5  rising  midway  between  4  and  6,  parallel,  7  and  8  rising 
out  of  9.  Hindwings  with  frenulum  developed  ;  vein  lc  absent, 
5  well-developed,  parallel  to  4,  8  connected  to  cell  by  a  bar 
towards  base. 

A  small  but  widely  distributed  family. 

40.  Zanclopteryx,  HS. 

Face  smooth.  Tongue  developed.  Palpi  moderate,  porrected, 
shortly  rough-scaled,  terminal  joint  short.  Antennae  f,  in  £ 
serrate,  ciliated  with  fascicles  of  long  cilia.  Thorax  glabrous 
beneath.  Femora  glabrous  ;  posterior  tibiae  in  <J  dilated,  without 
median  spurs.  Forewings  with  vein  10  absent,  11  running  into 
12.     Hindwings  with  veins  6  and  7  stalked. 

A  small  genus,  perhaps  Indo-Malayan  by  origin,  but  straggling 
into  other  regions. 

121.  Zand,  permensata.  Walk. 

(Zanclopteryx  permensata,  Walk.  1619.) 

(J.  19  mm.  Head  and  thorax  white.  Antennal  ciliations  4. 
Forewings  with  apex    acute ;    somewhat    produced,    hindmargin 


BY   E.  MEYRICK. 


675 


gently  bowed,  slightly  waved ;  prismatic  white,  thinly  scaled ; 
costa  finely  dotted  with  dark  fuscous ;  lines  indicated  by  series 
of  dark  fuscous  dots  on  veins,  first  somewhat  curved,  second 
from  -f  of  costa  to  §  of  inner  margin,  sinuate  outwards  in  middle ; 
a  round  black  discal  dot  ;  some  fuscous  scales  indicating  sub- 
terminal  line  ;  a  hindmarginal  series  of  black  dots :  cilia  white. 
Hindwings  with  hindmargin  rounded,  hardly  waved ;  colour  and 
markings  as  in  fore  wings  (except  costal  dots),  but  first  line 
absent,  second  line  strongly  angulated  in  middle. 

Queensland  ;  one  specimen  received  from  Dr.  T.  P.  Lucas. 


Index  of  Genera. 


Amelora,  n.g 24. 

Aporoctena,  n.g 11. 

Chlenias,  Gn 32. 


Conosara,  n.g. 


30. 

Oosymbia,  Hb 6. 

Criomacha,  n.g 28. 

Deilinia,  Hb 17. 

Diastictis,  Hb 2. 

Discalma,  n.g 5. 

Drymoptila,  n.g 36. 

Ectropis,  Hb 14. 

Epicompsa,  rug 1. 

Gastrina,  Gn 34. 

Hybernia,  Latr 12. 

Hyposidra,  Gn 3. 

Idiodes,  Gn 21. 

Lomographa,  Hb. 16. 

Lophodes,  Gn 9. 

Melanodes,  Gn 10. 

Metrocampa,  Latr 22. 

44 


Mictodoca,  n.g 31. 

Mnesampela,  n.g 27. 

Mochlotona,  n.g 39. 

Neoteristis,  n.g 38. 

Neritodes,  Gn 25. 

Osteodes,  Gn 4. 


Paralaea,  n.g...... 


37. 


Planolocha,  n.g 23. 

Proboloptera,  n.g 20. 

Psilosticha,  n.g 13. 

Rhinodia,  Gn 19. 

Scardamia,  Gn 18. 

Scioglyptis,  n.g 7. 

Selidosema,  Hb 8. 

Smyriodes,  Gri 33. 

Stathmorrhopa,  n.g 29. 

Stibaroma,  n.g 35. 

Thalaina,  Walk -  26. 

Tigridoptera,  HS 15. 

Zancloptery x,  HS 40. 


676 


REVISION   OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA, 


Index  op  Species. 

The  numbers  refer  to  those  prefixed  to  each  species  in  order. 
Names  printed  in  italics  are  synonyms. 


absorpta,  Walk 47. 

acaciaria,  Boisd 40. 

ada,  Butl 73. 

adelphodes,  n.sp 31. 

adustaria,  Walk 8. 

aganopa,  n.sp 30. 

agoraea,  n.sp 27. 

agrealesaria,  Walk 4. 

alienaria,  Walk 40. 

allogata,  Feld. 68. 

amblopa,  n.sp 78. 

amitaria,  Gn 117. 

ainphiclina,  n.sp 14. 

angulosa,  Walk 88. 

anthracitaria,  Gn 44. 

apamaria,  Walk 2. 

apicata,  Gn 71. 

aplectaria,  Gn 105. 

argalea,  n.sp 49. 

argoplaca,  n.sp 38. 

arietaria,  Gn 98. 

arotraea,  n.sp 82. 

attacta,  Walk 47. 

attenta,  Walk 34. 

attributa,  Walk 29. 

auctaria,  Gn 101. 

australiaria,  Gn 2. 

australiaria,  US 86. 

australis,  Feld 4. 

australis,  Ros 79. 

autoptis,  n.sp 74. 

banksiaria,  Le  G 101. 


beggaria,  Gn 95. 

beliclearia,  Feld 94. 

bispinaria,  Gn. 116. 

bitaeniaria,  Le  G 39. 

boreophilaria,  Gn 46. 

cachexiata,  Gn 114. 

camelaria,  Gn 54. 

canescaria,  Gn 20. 

capnota,  n.sp 23. 

carburaria,  Gn 1 04. 

castanea,  n.sp 96. 

catacris,  n.sp 81. 

cheleuta,  n.sp 13. 

chrysolina,  n.sp 67. 

clara,  Walk 87. 

clarissa,  Butl 9. 

cognata,  Walk 24. 


90. 
71. 
44. 
98. 
65. 


cornarcha,  n.sp 

conductaria,   Walk 

corvus,   Walk. 

crambaria,  Feld 

cremnias,  n.sp 

cristaria,  Gn 106. 

cumularia,  Gn 113. 

c uneifera,   Walk 98. 

curtaria,  Walk 18. 

decertaria,  Walk 29. 

dejixella,  Walk 98. 

delineata,  Walk 1 05. 

demistis,  n.sp 77. 

despicata,  Walk 33. 

destinataria,  Gn 34. 


BY    E.  METRICK. 


677 


clevinctaria,  Gn 

diffusata,  Walk 

disperditq,  Wa  Ik 

disjylicata,  Walk 

disposita,   Walk 

disrupta,  Walk 

dissonata,   Walk 

eccentritis,  n.sp 

embolias,  n.sp 

epistictis,  Mey  r , 

erebina,  Walk 

eremias,  n.sp.... 

euboliaria,  Walk 

excursaria,  Gn 

excursaria,  Walk. . . . 

exesaria,  Gn 

exfusaria,  Walk , 

exportaria,  Gn 

exprimataria,  Walk, 
exsuperata,  Walk..., 

externaria,  Walk 

ferritinctaria,  Walk. 

f ractaria,  Gn 

fractata,  Walk 

frontaria,  Walk 

fucata,  Feld 

galearia,  Gn 

gelidaria,  Walk 

glaucias,  n.sp 

goniota,  n.sp 

gratidaria,   Walk. . . . 

hemeropa,  n.sp 

illapsa,  Walk 

illustraria,  Walk 

impressaria,  Walk.., 
incaria,  Gn 


118.         indecisata,  Walk 101. 

4.  indirecla,  Walk 34. 

,   28.  indocilisaria,  Walk 46. 

40.         inductaria,  Walk 71. 

51.         infixaria,  Walk 2. 

12.  infusata,  Walk 4. 

53.  inscripta,  Walk 89. 

.   60.  inspirata,  Gn 71. 

,   69.  integraria,  Walk 47. 

.   42.  introducta,  Walk 71. 

.   39.  irrorata,  Butl...  61. 

.   15.  isocyma,  n.sp 59. 

.    37.  isombra,  n.sp 50. 

.   29.         janiaria,  Gn 4. 

,    12.         jucundaria,  Walk 68. 

.120.         klenaea,  Walk 86. 

6.  latifasciata,   Walk 106. 

.   29.  lenaea,  n.sp 91. 

.  22.  leptodesma,  n.sp 25. 

51.         leucaniata,  Gn 83. 

.   19.         leucoplecta,  n.sp 26. 

5.  lithinopa,  n.sp 10. 

.   53.         lithodora,  n.sp 64. 

.   37.  luxaria,  Gn 28. 

2.  lyciaria,  Gn 21. 

.   93.  mactaria,  Gn '.   47. 

.119.  magnificaria,  Chen 86. 

.   40.  margaritis,  n.sp 3. 

.   72.  mariana,  White 55. 

.   75.  matutinata,  Walk 56. 

5,  17.  melanotoxa,  n.sp 107. 

.    11.  melanoxysta,  n.sp 99. 

.106.  milvaria,  Gn 80. 

.   41.  mitigata,  Gn 71. 

.   62.  mundifera,  Walk 12. 

.112.  newmannaria,  Gn 115. 


678 


REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN    LEPIDOPTERA. 


nigraria,  Feld 53. 

normata,  Walk 6. 

notodontaria,  Walk 105. 

ochthadia,  n.sp 66. 

oenias,  n.sp 63. 

pallidiscaria,  Walk 32. 

panagraria,  Walk 2. 

paraphanes,  n.sp 110. 

penthearia,  Gn 8. 

perfectaria,  Walk 36. 

permensata,  Walk 121. 

phasmatias,  n.sp 111. 

phibalopteraria,  Gn 29. 

poecilaria,  Gn 21. 

porphyrinuria,  Gn 95. 

porrectaria,   Walk 2. 

primaria,  Walk 70. 

principaria,  US 89. 

pristis,  n.sp 48. 

privata,  Gn 92. 

procurata,  Walk 5. 

promacha,  n. sp 109. 

propinquaria,  Walk 17. 

proposita,  Walk 17. 

punctiger,  Feld 71. 

punctilinea,  Walk 85. 

rectaria,  Walk 61. 

remotaria,  Walk 2. 


rostraria,  Gn 68. 

rotundata,  Butl 57. 

rupicolor,  Butl 7. 

scierodes,  n.sp 45. 

selenaea,  Dbld 86. 

seminigra,  Ros 103. 

semitata,  Walk 21. 

siculoides,  Walk 71. 

silicaria,  Gn 12. 

sinistraria,  Gn 43. 

sparsularia,  Gn 76. 

spodina,  n.sp 58. 

suasaria,  Gn 17. 

subtinctaria,  Walk 52. 

temenitis,  n.sp 108. 

thermaea,  n.sp 16. 

toxeuta,  n.sp 97. 

umbraticaria,  Gn 1 00. 

undiferaria,   Walk 68. 

vagaria,  Walk 34. 

velutinaria,   Walk 54. 

velutinata,  Walk 106. 

verrucata,  Gn 84. 

vestita,  Walk 29. 

xanthocrossa,  n.sp 1. 

zalissaria,  Walk 71. 

zascia,  n.sp 35. 

zonaea,  n.sp 102. 


ri?iata,  Gn 71. 

Fote. —  It  may  be  interesting  and  instructive  to  show  the 
characters  of  Walker's  work  by  the  analysis  of  his  descriptions 
of  those  species  included  in  this  family ;  he  named  76  species  as 
distinct,  of  which  only  23  are  tenable,  the  remaining  53,  or  over 
70  per  cent.,  being  synonyms  :  and  he  founded  on  them  nine  new 
genera,  of  which  only  one  (which  he  referred  to  the  Bombycina) 
is  tenable. 


679 


ON    TWO  UNDESCRIBED    EXUDATIONS    FROM    TKE 
LEGUMINOS^E. 

By  J.  H.  Maiden,  F.L.S.,  &c. 

1.  A  kino  from  the  "  Native  Wistaria,"  Milletia  (Wistaria) 
megasperma,  F.v.M. 

This  "  vine "  runs  to  an  enormous  length  up  and  clown  trees 
and  along  the  ground.  Bushmen  appear  to  know  in  a  general 
way  of  the  existence  of  an  exudation  from  it,  but  I  can  find  no 
reference  to  any  exudation  whatever  from  this  or  any  other 
Milletia  or  Wistaria  in  any  part  of  the  world.  Not  only  are  the 
stems  of  the  "  Native  Wistaria  "  of  great  length,  but  they  are 
also  of  great  thickness,  so  that  a  large  quantity  of  the  exudation 
could  be  obtained,  if  required,  as  it  flows  freely.  The  pods  also 
occasionally  show  small  globules  of  kino. 

This  exudation  is  a  beautiful  ruby-coloured  transparent  sub- 
stance ;  it  breaks  readily  with  a  clear  conchoidal  fracture,  and  is 
powerfully  astringent.  It  forms  a  rose-tinted  solution  in  water, 
and  is  soluble  in  cold  alcohol. 

It  consists  of  a  tannin  and  water ;  no  other  substance  can  be 
found  in  it.  I  cannot  detect  any  difference  in  behaviour  between 
this  tannin  and  that  of  kinos  belonging  to  the  Ruby  group.  I 
have  in  this  instance  taken  the  opportunity  of  noting  the  tannin 
in  its  value  as  given  by  Lowenthal's  method  (as  an  equivalent 
of  gallotannic  acid),  but  have,  in  addition,  stated  the  quantity 
as  an  absolute  gravimetric  percentage. 

Its  composition  may  thus  be  stated": — 

Tannic  acid  ...     78"2 

Ash  ,  -8 

Moisture 20-1 

Insoluble  impurities  ...  ...  "9 

100-0 


680      ON  TWO  UNDESCRIBED  EXUDATIONS  FROM  THE  LEGUMINOSjE, 

By  Lowenthal's  process  it  gives  56*0  per  cent,  of  tannic  acid 
(as  gallo-tannic  acid  equivalent).  It  is,  in  fact,  a  Ruby  kino,  the 
only  apparent  difference  being  that  the  kino  of  Milletia  mega- 
sperma  is  not  so  readily  soluble  in  hot  water  as  the  Ruby  kinos  of 
Eucalypts. 

The  occurrence  of  a  kino  in  the  Leguminosse  has  not  before 
been  recorded  from  Australia ;  it  is,  however,  not  new  in  other 
parts  of  the  world.  Thus,  the  official  kino  is  yielded  by  Pterocarpus 
marsupium  of  India  and  P.  erinaceus  of  West  Africa  ;  the  astrin- 
gent exudation  of  Butea  frondosa  is  well  known,  and  similar 
substances  are  recorded  from  Erythrina  indica  and  other  legu- 
minous plants. 

It  is  of  some  scientific  interest,  but  of  no  commercial  importance; 
for  the  kino  of  Milletia  megasperma  could  never  compete  with 
the  practically  identical  and  very  abundant  Ruby  kinos  of  the 
Eucalypts. 

2.  A  gum  from  "The  Barrister"  (Mezoneurum  scortechinii, 
F.v.M.). 

The  collector  of  this  gum  naively  reported — "  The  people  here 
call  this  plant  '  The  Barrister '  because  its  spines  are  hard  to  get 
away  from."  The  term  "Lawyer"  is  common  in  this  and  other 
countries  as  applied  to  plants  with  prickly  stems  ;  the  mention, 
under  the  circumstances,  of  the  name  of  a  particular  branch  of 
the  legal  profession  is  new  to  me.  The  genus  consists  of  climbing 
plants,  and  is  chiefly  confined  to  Africa.  I  am  not  aware  that  a 
gum  has  been  recorded  from  any  species  hitherto. 

M.  scortechinii  yields  a  horny  gelatinous-looking  gum  reminding 
one  of  that  of  Acacia  decurrens  as  far  as  external  appearance  is 
concerned.  It  only  slightly  dissolves  in  cold  water,  but  swells  up 
in  that  liquid  to  several  times  its  original  bulk.  It  does  not 
dissolve  in  boiling  water  within  a  reasonable  period.  It  does  not 
dissolve  in  either  potash  or  soda,  but  turns  a  canary-yellow  colour 
in  those  liquids,  the  colour  fading  on  cooling. 

It  dissolves  in  dilute  hydrochloric  acid,  and  a  precipitate  is 
formed  when  an  alkali  is  added  in  excess.     When  Barium  hydrate 


BY   J.  H.  MAIDEN.  681 

is  added  to  the  acid  solution,  a  precipitate  is  formed,  as  in  the 
case  of  tragacanth. 

From  the  above  and  other  tests  it  was  found  that  the  gum 
possesses  properties  very  similar  to  those  of  tragacanth.     At  the 
same  time,  the  quantity  of  gum  at  my  disposal  is  so  very  small 
that  I  have  been  unable  to  make  practical  tests  of  its  value  as  a 
substitute  for  that  well-known  gum.     It  is  proper  to  state  that 
the  gum  of  Mezoneurum  scortechinii  (or  even  of  its  allied  species 
br  achy  car piim)  can  never  be  sufficiently  abundant  to  form   an 
article  of  commerce.      It  may  be  mentioned  that  tragacanth  is 
also  the  product  of  a  leguminous  genus  (Astragalus),  which  is 
not,  however,  closely  related  to  Mezoneurum. 

The  composition  of  this  sample  of  Barrister  Gum  may  be  stated 
as  follows  : — 

Soluble  in  cold  water*  ...  ...      16*5 

Soluble  in  acids ;  insoluble  in  alkalies*   68-57 

Moisture         10-95 

Ash 3-98 


100-00 
Both  the  kino  and  the  gum  were  collected  in  the  Richmond 
River  district  by  Mr.  W.   Bauerlen,  Botanical .  Collector  to  the 
Technological  Museum,  and  I  have  been  helped  in  the  examina- 
tion of  them  by  my  laboratory-assistant,  Mr.  H.  G.  Smith. 

*  This  gum  appears  to  contain  neither  Arabin  nor  Metarabin.  The 
soluble  and  insoluble  constituents  of  tragacanth  and  some  tragacanthoid 
gums  are  discussed  in  a  paper  by  the  author — "  Sterculia  Gum  :  its  Simi- 
larities and  Dissimilarities  to  Tragacanth  "  (Pharm.  Joum.  [3],  xx.,  381) — 
to  which  the  reader  is  referred. 


682 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 


A  letter  was  read  from  Baron  von  Mueller  asking  that  in  the 
Abstract  mention  might  be  made  of  the  fact  that  in  his  paper  on 
Mr.  Bradshaw's  Plants  from  Prince  Regent  River,  read  at  last 
meeting,  he  had  pointed  out  that  the  genus  Osteocarpum  must  be 
restored,  and  that  Babbagia  as  a  sub-genus  should  merge  in  it. 

Mr.  Froggatt  exhibited  specimens  of  the  scales  of  five  species  of 
Psylla,  and  the  perfect  insects  of  three  species,  of  which  three  are 
from  Limestone  Creek,  Yass  ;  the  others  from  the  neighbourhood 
of  Sydney.  Also,  specimens  of  Homopterous  galls  belonging  to 
the  family  Brachyscelidce,  growing  somewhat  like  Brachyscelis 
pharefrata,  but  differing  in  the  female  gall  being  ribbed  ;  from 
Yass,  N.S.W. 

Mr.  Maiden  exhibited  the  kino  and  gum  referred  to  in  his 
paper.  Also  Boronia  Barkeriana,  F.v.M.,  collected  by  Mr.  J. 
Stack  at  Little  Sirius  Cove,  Port  Jackson,  believed  to  be  the  first 
Sydney  locality  recorded  for  this  species ;  some  of  the  lower 
leaves  are  succulent,  almost  fleshy  ;  the  odour  is  stronger  than 
that  of  B.  serrulata.  Also  the  following  three  plants  new  for 
New  South  Wales: — Psilotum  complanatum,  Swartz. ;  Ballina  and 
in  the  scrub  along  the  coast  northward,  mostly  on  low  swampy 
ground ;  found  not  rarely  epiphytic  on  trunks  of  Ficus  macro- 
phylla  chiefly,  and  also  amongst  masses  of  Platycerium  alcicorne, 
P.  grande,  and  Asplenium  nidus;  fronds  attain  a  length  of 
1-2  feet  or  more.  Micromelum  pubescens,  Blume;  near  Lismore; 
a  small  tree  from  15-25  feet  high  among  rocky  places  near 
watercourses.  Kibara  (Mollinedia)  longipes,  Benth. ;  rather 
abundant  on  the  higher  ground  near  Lismore,  Alstonville,  Uralla, 
and  Tintenbar;  seen  as  a  straggling  shrub  3-6  feet  high  as  a 
rule,  but  at  Uralla  as  a  small  tree  from  12-15  feet  high  and 
3  or  4  inches  in  diameter.  These  three  plants  were  collected  by 
Mr.  W.  Bauerlen,  collector  to  the  Technological  Museum. 


683 


WEDNESDAY,  NOVEMBER   25th,  1891. 


The  President,  Professor  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc.,  in  the  Chair. 


DONATIONS. 

V  Agricultural  Gazette  of  N.S.  W."  Vol.  ii.,  Part  9  (September, 
1891).     From  the  Director  of  Agriculture. 

"  Royal  Dublin  Society — Scientific  Transactions."  Vol.  iv., 
Series  ii.,  Nos.  6-8  (1891) ;  "  Proceedings."  n.s.,  Vol.  vi.,  Part  10  ; 
Vol.  vii.,  Parts  1  and  2  (1891).      From  the  Society. 

"  Australian  Museum — Advance  Copy  of  Portion  of  Hand-List 
of  Australian  Mammals"  (1891).  By  J.  D.  Ogilby.  From  the 
Trustees. 

"  Zoologischer  Anzeiger."  xiv.  Jahrg.,  Nos.  373  and  374  (Sep- 
tember and  October,  1891).     From  the  Editor. 

"  Annales  de  la  Societe  Geologique  de  Belgique."  Tome  xviii., 
ire  Livraison  (1891).      From  the  Society. 

"  A  Handbook  of  the  Flora  of  Extratropical  South  Australia 
containing  the  Flowering  Plants  and  Ferns"  (1890).  By  Ralph 
Tate,  F.L.S.,  F.G.S.     From  the  Author. 

"  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society."  Vol.  xlviii.,  Nos.  294  and 
295;  Vol.  xlix.,  Nos.  296-301 ;  Vol.  1.,  No.  302.     From  the  Society. 

"  Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Zoologique  de  France."  T.  xvi.,  No.  7 
(July,  1891).     From  the  Society. 

"The  Perak  Government  Gazette."  Vol.  iv.,  Nos.  31-34  (Sep- 
tember and  October,  1891).     From  the  Government  Secretary. 

"  Verhandlungen  des  Vereins  fur  naturwissenschaftliche  Unter- 
haltung  zu  Hamburg,  1886-1890."     vii.  Band.     From  the  Society. 

"  Journal  of  Comparative  Medicine  and  Veterinary  Archives." 
Vol.  xii.,  No.  9  (September,  1891).     From  the  Editor. 

"The  American  Naturalist."  Vol.  xxv.,  Nos.  294-297  (June- 
September,  1891).     From  the  Editors. 

"  Bulletin  of  the  American  Geographical  Society."  Vol.  xxiii., 
No.  3  (September,  1891).     From  the  Society. 


&     fc 


684  DONATIONS. 

"  Bulletin  of  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History."  Vol. 
iii.,  No.  2,  three  sheets  (pp.  323-370)  (September,  1891).  From 
the  Museum. 

"  Smithsonian  Institution — U.  S.  National  Museum — Proceed- 
ings."    Vol.  xiv.,  Nos.  856  and  861  (1891).     From  the  Museum. 

"  Bericht  iiber  die  Senckenbergische  naturforschende  Gesell- 
schaft  in  Frankfurt  am  Main,  1891."     From  the  Society. 

"  Jahresbericht  des  Vereins  fiir  Naturwissenschaft  zu  Braun- 
schweig fur  die  Vereinsjahre  1887-88  und  1888-89  "  (1891).  From 
the  Society. 

"  The  Victorian  Naturalist."  Vol.  viii.,  No.  7  (November, 
1891).     From  the  Field  Naturalists'  Club  of  Victoria. 

"  Annual  Report  of  the  Trustees  of  the  Queensland  Museum 
for  1890."     From  the  Trustees. 

"  Report  on  Oysters  and  Oyster  Fisheries  of  Queensland."  By 
W.  Saville  Kent,  F.Z.S.     From  the  Author. 

"Royal  Society  of  Queensland — Proceedings."  Title  page  of 
Vol.  v. ;  Title  page  and  Index  of  Vol.  vi. ;  Vol.  vii.,  Parts  1  and  2  ; 
Vol.  viii.,  Part  1.     From  the  Society. 

"British  Museum  (Natural  History) — Catalogue  of  Birds." 
Vol.  xix.  (1891);  "Catalogue  of  Fossil  Birds"  (1891)  ;  "Syste- 
matic List  of  British  Oligocene  and  Eocene  Mollusca  "  (1891); 
"Illustrations  of  Typical  Specimens  of  Lepidoptera  Heterocera." 
Part  viii.  (1891).     From  the  Trustees. 

"  The  Geological  Survey  of  India — .Memoirs."  Vol.  xxiii.  ; 
" PalaBontologia  Indica."  xiii.  Ser.,  Vol.  iv.,  Part  2  (1891). 
From  the  Director. 

"  Report  of  the  Board  of  Governors  of  the  Public  Library, 
Museum  and  Art  Gallery  of  South  Australia"  (1890-91).  From 
the  Director. 

"Public  Library,  Museums,  &c,  of  Victoria — Report  of  the 
Trustees  for  1890  ;  Rules  and  Regulations  for  1891."  From  the 
Trustees. 

"  Verhandlungen  des  naturhistorischen  Vereines  der  preussis- 
chen  Rheinlande,  Westfalens  und  des  Reg.-Bezirks  Osnabriick." 
xlviii.  Jahrgang,  Erste  Halfte  (1891).     From  the  Society. 


DONATIONS.  685 

"The  Australasian  Journal  of  Pharmacy."  Vol.  vi.,  No.  71 
(November,  1891).     From  the  Editor. 

"  Annual  Progress  Report  of  State  Forest  Administration  in 
New  South  Wales  for  the  Year  1890."  From  the  Director-General 
of  Forests. 


PAPERS    READ. 

THE  LAND  MOLLCJSCAN  FAUNA  OF  BRITISH  NEW 

GUINEA. 

(Anatomical  Supplement,  continued  from  p .  115.) 
By  C.  Hedley,  F.L.S. 

(Plates  xxxviii.-xlii.) 

Nanina  hunsteini,  Smith. 

Jaw  (pi.  xxxviii.,  fig.  1)  arched,  smooth,  with  a  slight  median 
projection  inferiorly,  emarginate  superiorly,  ends  rounded. 

Radula  (pi.  xxxix.,  fig.  11)  strap-shaped,  three  times  as  long  as 
broad  ;  formula  160  rows  of  90  :  20  :  1  :  20  :  90  ;  rows  nearly 
straight,  somewhat  bracket-shaped  ;  rachidian  twice  as  long  as 
broad,  tapering  to  a  single  rather  blunt  cusp  which  just  projects 
beyond  the  basal  plate ;  laterals  scarcely  larger  than  the  rachidian 
and  of  the  same  construction,  angle  of  basal  plate  scarcely  expanded, 
the  more  distant  laterals  grow  slenderer  and  more  inclined  ;  two 
or  three  transition  teeth  intervene  between  the  latter  and  the 
marginals,  which  are  sinuate  and  bicuspidate.  In  the  figure,  the 
marginal  teeth  should  be  transferred^  from  the  right  to  the  left  of 
the  centrals. 

I  lately  hazarded  a  conjecture  (Records  Aus.  Museum,  Vol.  i., 
p.  136)  on  the  affinity  of  N.  hunsteini  to  N.  sophice,  &c.  The 
dentition  here  described  does  not  support  this  view. 

Genitalia  (pi.  xlii.,  fig.  39),  penis  sac  long  and  cylindrical,  with 
a  globose  sessile  sac  seated  half  way  along  it  and  another  smaller 


686      THE  LAND  MOLLUSCAN  FAUNA  OF  BRITISH  NEW  GUINEA, 

sac,  to  which  the  retractor  muscle  is  affixed,  at  the  summit ;  the 
spermatheca  is  at  its  apex  boot-shaped,  expanding  after  a  con- 
striction into  a  second  globose  sac,  which  communicates  with  the 
system  by  a  short  wide  duct. 

N.  divisa,  Forbes,  var.  inclinata,  Pfr. 

Jaw  (pi.  xl.,  fig.  20)  smooth,  wide,  arched,  with  a  deep  beak-like 
projection  inferiorly. 

Radula  (pi.  xxxviil,  fig.  3)  strap-shaped,  three  times  as  long 
as  broad;  formula  96  rows  of  54  :  11  :  1  :  11  :  54 ;  rachidian  cusp 
large,  ovate,  considerably  overlapping  its  basal  plate,  supplied  at 
half  its  length  with  two  accessory  cusps ;  laterals  one-third  larger 
than  the  rachidian,  inner  accessory  cusp  lost,  outer  retained,  outer 
angle  of  the  basal  plate  alate ;  marginals  unicuspidate,  cusp  in 
profile  shaped  like  a  rose-thorn,  slender,  inclined. 

Genitalia  (pi.  xlii.,  fig.  38),  penis  sac  large,  dilated ;  spermatheca 
oval  on  a  wide  contorted  duct. 

Animal  exhibiting  a  caudal  mucous  pore,  pedal  line  and  tail 
diagonally  grooved. 

Microcystina  sappho,  Brazier. 

Jaw  (pi.  xxxvin.,  fig.  7)  short,  broad,  flat,  smooth,  with  a  blunt 
median  inferior  projection,  ends  smooth. 

Radula  (pi.  xxxvin.,  fig.  4)  ovate,  narrow,  three  times  as  long 
as  broad  ;  formula  96  rows  of36:10:l:10:36;  rachidian  twice 
as  long  as  broad,  tricuspid,  median  cusp  slender,  lanceolate,  over- 
lapping the  basal  plate,  auxiliary  cusps  seated  half  way  along  the 
reflection  ;  laterals  larger  than  the  rachidian,  median  cusp  narrow, 
sharp,  considerably  overlapping  the  basal  plate,  slightly  inclined 
towards  the  rachidian,  proximal  accessory  cusp  rudimentary,  distal 
one  well  developed  ;  the  marginals  follow  two  or  three  transition 
teeth  and  are  the  shape  of  a  scythe  blade,  the  concave  margin  is 
apparently  interrupted  by  an  acccessory  cusp,  which  on  careful 
examination  is  seen  to  be  the  posterior  angle  of  the  triangular 
base  of  the  adjoining  tooth. 


BY    C.  HEDLEY.  687 

This  dentition  bears  out  the  relationship  claimed  on  shell 
characters  with  western  species.  Compare  Godwin-Austen's 
account  of  the  anatomy  of  M.  rinkii  from  the  Nicobars  (Land 
and  F.  W.  Moll,  of  India,  p.  12,  pi.  in.). 

Helicarion  musgravei,  Hedley. 

Jaw  (pi.  xxxvni.,  fig.  9)  short,  wide,  with  a  stout  blunt  median 
projection,  ends  emarginate. 

Radnla  (pi.  xli.,  fig.  30)  oval,  three  times  as  long  as  broad, 
stained  brown  anteriorly ;  formula  128  rows  of  45  :  18  :  1  :  18  :  45; 
rachidian  bearing  a  slender  lanceolate  median  cusp  surpassing  its 
basal  plate  and  two  well  developed  accessory  cusps ;  laterals  long, 
narrow,  with  a  slender  median  cusp,  which  becomes  longer  and 
more  inclined  as  the  ranks  retreat,  proximal  accessory  cusp  rudi- 
mentary, distal  one  well  developed  ;  transitional  teeth  four  or  five, 
marginals  much  inclined,  cusp  bicapitate. 

Cristigibba  macgregori,  Hedley. 

Jaw  (pi.  xxxviii.,  fig.  6)  boomerang-shaped,  smooth,  ends  trun- 
cated, no  transverse  ribs,  inferior  margin  showing  traces  of  denti- 
culation,  centre  of  the  jaw  closely  longitudinally  wrinkled. 

Radula  (pi.  xxxix.,  fig.  12)  strap-shaped,  twice  as  long  as  wide  ; 
formula  110  rows  of  26  :  20  :  1  :  20  :  26  ;  rachidian  two-thirds 
the  size  of  the  immediate  laterals,  with  a  stout  square-headed 
cusp  extending  along  three-fourths  of  the  narrow  basal  plate ; 
laterals  also  square-headed,  very  slightly  inclined,  alate  angle  of 
basal  plate  scarcely  produced  ;  marginals  tricuspid. 

Chloritis  leei,  Cox. 

Jaw  (pi.  xxxix.,  fig.  15)  arched,  crossed  by  about  eight  stout 
flat-topped  ribs,  which  denticulate  either  margin  and  are  divided 
by  narrow  interstices,  ends  smooth,  truncate.  — 

Radula  (pi.  xxxix.,  fig.  13)  strap-shaped,  three  times  as  long  as 
broad,  rows  nearly  straight;  formula  167  rows  of  40  :  17  : 1  :  17  :  40; 
rachidian  unicuspidate,  stout,  linguiform,  two-thirds  the  length  of 


688       THE  LAND  MOLLUSCAN  FAUNA  OF  BRITISH  NEW  GUINEA, 

its  basal  plate,  which  is  twice  as  long  as  broad  and  slightly- 
expanded  posteriorly ;  immediate  laterals  rather  larger,  similar  in 
shape,  not  attaining  the  basal  margin,  basal  plate  briefly  alate, 
distant  laterals  longer  and  slenderer  ;  marginals  developing  a 
proximal  accessory  cusp,  which  assumes  a  sabre-like  aspect  and 
increases  in  size  as  the  ranks  retreat  j  a  distal  accessory  cusp  is 
also  added. 

Genitalia  (pi.  XL.,  fig.  23)  remarkable  for  the  extremely  long 
ilagellum,  which  arises  from  a  double  knob  at  the  summit  of  the 
slender  subcylindrical  penis  sac. 

C.  chloritoides,  Pilsbry. 

Jaw  (pi.  xxxix.,  fig.  17)  boomerang-shaped,  crossed  by  nine 
elevated  ribs,  which  denticulate  both  margins,  ends  smooth, 
rounded. 

Radula  (pi.  XL.,  fig.  22)  narrow,  strap-shaped,  three  times  as 
long  as  broad ;  formula  127  rows  of  24  :  11  :  1  :  11  :  24 ;  rachidian 
unicuspidate,  linguiform,  extending  more  than  half  way  along  its 
basal  plate ;  laterals  rather  larger,  slightly  inclined,  developing  a 
rudimentary  distal  accessory  cusp,  basal  plate  roughly  a  parallelo- 
gram ;  after  four  or  five  transition  teeth  the  marginals  show  the 
main  cusp  cleft  and  the  distal  accessory  cusp  much  developed. 

With  these  species  compare  the  anatomy  of  C.  porteri,  Cox 
(Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Q'land,  Vol.  vi.,  pi.  xv.). 

Hadra  broadbenti,  Brazier. 

Jaw  (pi.  xxxix.,  fig.  16)  arched,  boomerang-shaped,  crossed  by 
eleven  flat-topped  ribs,  which  denticulate  both  margins  and  are 
wider  than  their  interstices,  ends  rounded,  smooth. 

Radula  (pi.  xlil,  fig.  35)  strap-shaped,  twice  as  long  as  broad, 
rows  bracket-shaped,  bisinuate  across  the  marginals;  formula  160 
rows  of  57  :  12  :  1  :  12  :  57  ;  rachidian  two-thirds  the  size  of  the 
immediate  laterals,  cusp  simple,  linguiform,  with  a  small  cutting 
point,  extending  along  three-quarters  of  its  basal  plate;  immediate 
laterals  similar  in  shape,  the  remoter  ones  longer  and  slenderer  ; 


BY    C.  HEDLEY.  689 

in  the  marginals  the  main  cusp  is  cleft  at  its  summit  and   an 
accessory  cusp  appears  at  its  distal  base. 

Genitalia  (pi.  xli.,  fig.  27),  penis  sac  large  and  ovoid  •  sperma- 
theca  small,  cylindrical,  without  terminal  dilatation. 

Geotrochus  brumeriensis,  Forbes. 

Jaw  (pi.  xli.,  fig.  31)  boomerang-shaped,  central  half  crossed 
by  about  nine  weak  ribs,  which  denticulate  either  margin,  ends 
smooth,  angled. 

Radula  (pi.  xxxviil,  fig.  8)  tongue-shaped,  twice  as  long  as 
broad  ;  formula  110  rows  of  40  :  7  :  1  :  7  :  40 ;  otherwise  as  in 
G.  boyeri. 

Genitalia  (pi.  XL.,  fig.  21),  penis  sac  small,  conical ;  vas  deferens 
long  and  contorted ;  spermatheca  oval  on  a  long  peduncle. 

G.  louisiadensis,  Forbes. 

Jaw  (pi.  xxxviil,  fig.  2)  boomerang-shaped,  centre  crossed  by 
half-a-dozen  weak  ribs  denticulating  both  margins,  ends  smooth, 
rounded. 

Radula  (pi.  XL.,  fig  24)  tongue-shaped,  twice  as  long  as  broad  ; 
formula  142  rows  of  45  :  9  :  1  :  9  :  45  ;  rachidian.  smaller  than  the 
immediate  laterals,  square-headed,  extending  along  three-fourths 
of  the  basal  plate,  whose  anterior  angles  are  scarcely  expanded  ; 
laterals  large,  square-headed,  alate  angle  of  the  basal  plate  scarcely 
expanded  :  marginals  tricuspid. 

Genitalia  (pi.  xl.,  fig.  19),  penis  sac  large,  dilated  arid  contracting 
suddenly ;  spermatheca  oval  on  a  large  peduncle. 

G.  rollsianus,  Smith. 

Jaw  (pi.  xxxviil,  fig.  10)  thin,  arcuate,  central  quarter  crossed 
by  seven  very  delicate  ribs,  ends  smooth,  rounded. 

Radula  (pi.  xli.,  fig.  29)  strap-shaped  ;  formula  154  rows  of 
45  :  10  :  1  :  10  :  45 ;  rachidian  two-thirds  the  size  of  the  imme- 
diate laterals,  reflection  slightly  tapering,  terminating  in  a  single 
square-headed    cusp,   which    does    not   reach    the  basal  margin ; 


690      THE  LAND  MOLLUSCAN  FAUNA  OF  BRITISH  NEW  GUINEA, 

laterals  with  a  large  square-headed  cusp  ;  after  ten  series  a  hook 
develops  on  the  proximal  side  of  the  main  cusp,  which  latter 
diminishes  in  size  and  divides  into  two  or  three  cusps  in  the 
extreme  marginals. 

In  the  figure  the  marginal  teeth  should  be  transferred  from  the 
right  to  the  left  of  the  central. 

G.  woodlarkianus,  Souverbie. 

Jaw  (pi.  xli.,  fig.  28)  low,  boomerang-shaped,  central  third 
crossed  by  about  half-a-dozen  weak  ribs  with  narrow  interstices 
denticulating  either  margin,  ends  smooth,  rounded. 

Radula  (pi.  xlii.,  fig.  36)  tongue-shaped,  twice  as  long  as  broad; 
formula  130  rows  of  42  :  9  :  1  :  9  :  42  ;  rachidian  about  two-thirds 
the  size  of  the  immediate  laterals,  square-headed;  laterals  straight, 
square-headed,  with  the  alate  angle  of  the  basal  plate  scarcely 
shown ;  marginals  trifid. 

Genitalia  (pi.  xli.,  fig.  32)  closely  resembling  those  of  trobrian- 


G.  trobriandensis,  Hedley. 
Jaw  (pi.  xxxviii.,  fig.  5)  slightly  arched,  central  third  crossed 
by  half-a-dozen  weak  ribs  and  narrow  interstices,  which  denticulate 
both  margins,  ends  smooth,  obtusely  angled. 

Radula  (pi.  xxxix.,  fig.  14),  formula  154  rows  of  55  :  8  : 1 :  8  :  55; 
rachidian  square-headed,  projecting  along  three-fourths  of  the  basal 
plate,  rather  smaller  than  the  laterals,  which  are  also  square-headed, 
slightly  sinuate,  twice  as  long  as  broad,  alate  angle  of  basal  plate 
slightly  developed  ;  the  marginals  possess  in  addition  to  the  main 
cusp  a  proximal  falcate  and  a  minute  distal  accessory  cusp. 

Genitalia  (pi.  xlii.,  fig.  33),  penis  sac  slender,  much  contorted  ; 
spermatheca  ovoid  on  a  long  slender  peduncle. 

G.  boyeri,  Fischer  and  Bernardi. 

Jaw  (pi.  xli.,  fig.  25),  the  central  third  narrow,  crossed  by  half- 
a-dozen  weak  ribs  with  narrow  interstices,  ends  smooth,  rounded. 


BY    C.  HEDLEY.  691 

Radula  (pi.  xxxix.,  fig.  18),  formula  104  rows  of  33  :  6  : 1  :  6  :  33 ; 
rachidian  cusp  stout,  ovate,  two-thirds  the  size  of  the  first  lateral, 
extending  along  more  than  half  of  its  basal  plate  ;  the  cusp  of  the 
first  lateral  is  large,  oval,  blunt,  much  inclined  and  equalling  or 
surpassing  the  posterior  margin  of  its  basal  plate,  the  succeeding 
laterals  diminish  in  size ;  they  are  followed  without  any  transition 
teeth  by  the  marginals,  which  acquire  a  distal  cusp  in  the  same 
plane  as  the  chief  cusp  and  a  falcate  proximal  cusp  on  a  higher 
plane. 

Genitalia  (pi.  xli.,  fig.  26),  penis  sac  subcylindrical;  spermatheca 
oval  on  a  long  peduncle. 

Succinea  simplex,  Pfeifier. 

Jaw  (pi.  xlii.,  fig.  34)  ribless,  with  a  blunt  median  inferior 
projection,  ends  recurved. 

Radula  (pi.  xlii.,  fig.  37)  narrow,  strap-shaped,  three  times  as 
long  as  broad  ;  formula  85  rows  of  16:13  :  1  :  13  :  16  ;  rachidian 
with  basal  plate  twice  as  long  as  broad,  slightly  expanded  poste- 
riorly, reflection  small,  tricuspid,  main  cusp  ovate,  extending 
halfway  along  the  basal  plate,  accessory  cusps  about  half  the  size 
of  the  parent ;  laterals  bicuspid,  the  proximal  twice  as  long  as  the 
distal  but  shorter  than  the  basal  plate,  which  is  emarginate  on  its 
posterior  edge  ;  one  transition  tooth  is  followed  by  minute  mar- 
ginals with  trificl  or  quadrifid  cusps. 


Since  writing  the  previous  paper,  several  parts  of  the  "  Manual 
of  Conchology "  have  appeared.  Had  I  received  them  earlier,  I 
should  have  profited  by  much  additional  information,  and  have 
replaced  Geotrochus  by  Papuina,  transferred  rehsei  and  beatricis 
from  Hadra  to  Chloritis,  also  bevani,  oxystoma  and  elisus  from 
Geotrochus  to  Obba,  and  reduced  tapparonei  to  a  synonym  of  P. 
naso,  von  Martens.  I  find  that  S.  gracilis,  Hutton,  has  several 
years'  priority  over  S.  subtcla,  Pfr.  (ante,  pp.  98  and  557). 

In  alluding  (ante,  p.  100)  to  S.  simplex,  I  expressed  a  doubt  as 
to  the  correctness  of  the  determination.  Having  requested  Mr. 
45 


692       THE  LAND  MOLLUSCAN  FAUNA  OF  BRITISH  NEW  GUINEA, 

E.  A.  Smith,  of  the  British  Museum,  to  compare  my  Papuan 
specimens  with  Pfeiffer's  types,  I  received  from  that  gentleman 
the  following  courteous  reply  : — "  The  two  specimens  of  Succinea 
from  Mita,  Milne  Bay,  are  a  trifle  shorter  than  the  types  (3  speci- 
mens) of  S.  simplex,  Pfr.,  and  are  more  amber  in  colour,  but  they 
agree  in  the  latter  respect,  and  also  in  form,  exactly  with  another 
series  of  specimens  from  Treasury  and  Shortland  Islands,  Solomon 
Group,  which  I  identify  as  a  form  of  simplex"  Since  the  expe- 
riences of  Mr.  Brazier,  Dr.  Guppy,  and  myself  agree  in  finding  this 
mollusc  in  the  taro  gardens,  it  may  perhaps  be  introduced  with 
this  vegetable  from  island  to  island. 

I  am  also  indebted  to  Mr.  Smith  for  the  information  that  my 
species  Helicina  insularum  (ante,  p.  113)  is  identical  with  H. 
suprafasciata,  Sowerby  (Conch.  Icon,  xix.,  Helicina,  pi.  xxx., 
sp.  300),  with  whose  types  in  the  British  Museum  he  has  kindly 
compared  my  specimens.  Sowerby's  types  were  not  collected,  as 
stated,  during  the  cruise  of  the  "  OuraQoa,"  but  were  received 
from  an  island  trader  by  Mr.  Brazier,  who  after  the  return  of  the 
"  Curacoa  "  forwarded  them  to  Mr.  Julius  Brenchley,  by  whom 
they  were  presented  to  the  national  collection.  That  Sowerby 
assigned  the  species  to  "Australia"  (!)  I  offer  as  a  sufficient 
excuse  for  having  overlooked  his  figure  and  description. 

An  inspection  of  specimens  in  the  Australian  Museum  labelled 
Cyclotus  Levis,  Pfeiffer,  collected  at  Mam  Sound,  Guadalcanar, 
Solomon  Archipelago,  by  Mr.  Brazier,  suggests  that  this  name  is 
synonymous  with,  and  takes  priority  over,  G.  tristis,  Tapparone- 
Canefri.  This  species  (determined  as  levis)  is  described  by  Mr. 
Brazier  as  being  everywhere  abundant,  and  unlike  any  other 
shell  known  from  the  island.  There  can  therefore  scarcely  be  a 
doubt  that  the  shells  collected  by  MacGillivray  during  the  cruise 
of  the  "Herald"  in  1854,  upon  which  Pfeiffer  founded  the  species 
(P.Z.S.,  1855,  p.  118),  are  similar  to  those  quoted  as  "Guadalcanar 
(MacGillivray  in  Brit.  Mus.) "  by  Smith  in  the  P.Z.S.,  1885,  p. 
596.  These  he  identifies  with  others  collected  in  1882  during  the 
cruise  of  the  "  Lark  "  by  Dr.  Guppy  at  Faro,  Shortland  and  Santa 
Anna  Islands,  and  at  Choiseul  Bay  in  Bougainville  Straits,  Solomon 


BY    C.  HEDLEY.  693 

Archipelago.  The  chain  of  evidence  is  completed  by  the  recogni- 
tion (P.Z.S.,  I.e.)  of  Guppy's  specimens  as  a  variety  of  his  G.  tristis 
by  Dr.  Tapparone-Canef  ri,  himself.  I  do  not,  however,  understand 
why,  if  the  preceding  argument  be  correct,  the  learned  conchologist 
of  the  British  Museum  failed  to  see  Pfeiffer's  species,  of  which 
he  possessed  the  type,  in  the  specimens  labelled  "  Guadalcanar 
(MacGillivray) "  ;  but  the  loss  or  displacement  of  a  ticket  has 
originated  many  such  errors. 

Other  localities  where  this  widespread  and  variable  species  has 
occurred  to  Mr.  Brazier  are — Rubiana,  Solomons ;  Blanche  Bay, 
New  Britain  ;  and  Port  Hunter,  Duke  of  York  Islands.  After 
this  review  of  specimens  and  descriptions,  I  have  to  plead  guilty 
to  adding  a  third  name  (Leptopoma  parvum ;  ante,  p.  Ill)  to  the 
synonymy  of  the  species.  The  differences  presented  by  the  soli- 
tary shell  I  collected  in  Milne  Bay  from  the  figure  and  description 
published  by  Tapparone-Canefri,  which  alone  I  consulted,  sink 
into  insignificance  after  comparison  with  further  specimens,  figures 
and  descriptions.  Very  close,  if  not  identical  with  this  species, 
must  be  the  C.  novce-hibernce,  Pfeiffer. 

In  my  former  article  I  dealt  with  the  internal  distribution  of 
the  mollusca  of  the  province  whose  divisions  '  may  be  briefly 
summed  up  as  alpine,  insular  and  northern  or  southern  of  the 
axis  of  the  Owen  Stanley  chain  of  mountains.  A  few  remarks 
on  the  external  relations  of  this  fauna  have  since  suggested  them- 
selves. Wallace's  line,  so  conspicuous  a  severance  among  the 
vertebrates,  appears  to  be  quite  blotted  out  when  the  distribution 
of  animals  is  regarded  from  a  molluscan  standpoint.  No  sharp 
break  occurs  between  the  Malayan  fauna  as  exemplified  in  Borneo 
or  the  Philippines  and  in  New  Guinea.  All  the  characteristic 
Malayan  forms,  Atopos,  Xesta,  Helicarion,  Microcystina,  Trocho- 
morpha,  Obba,  Chloritis,  Cochlostyla,  Pitpina  and  Diplommatina, 
are  common  to  both  regions.  The  Solomon  Islands,  Fiji,  Samoa, 
&c,  appear  by  the  light  of  the  Papuan  shells  to  be  inhabited  by 
an  eastern  extension  of  this  Malayan  fauna,  which  has  also  over 
flowed  into  Queensland. 


694      THE  LAND  MOLLUSCAN  FAUNA  OF  BRITISH  NEW  GUINEA, 

One  of  the  most  remarkable  facts  yielded  by  an  analysis  of  the 
Australian  land  molluscan  fauna  is  that  the  operculate  snails  are 
confined  to  a  narrow  strip  of  land  along  the  Queensland  coast. 
Proceeding  southwards  from  Torres  Straits,  they  diminish  gradu- 
ally till  the  last  outpost  of  the  invading  army  is  reached  about 
the  Clarence  River.*     The  sole  apparent  exception  to  this  rule  is 
Truncatella,  which   spreads  to  Tasmania  and   South  Australia  ; 
but  as  this  genus  is  strictly  littoral  and  evidently  migrates  not 
by   land    but   by  sea,   it    cannot  be   considered   as   a  disturbing 
factor  in  my  generalisation.     Contrasting  the  fauna  of  Queensland 
with  the  more  typically  Australian  and  probably  archaic  fauna  of 
Tasmania,  Victoria  and  Western  Australia  on  the  one  side,  and 
that  of  New  Guinea  on  the  other,  it  will  be  seen  that  this  foreign 
aspect  of  the  operculate  genera  Pupina,  Helicina  and  Diplomma- 
tina  is  shared  by  the  inoperculate  forms  of  Atopos,  Iladra,  Chloritis 
and  Papuina;   A.  prismaticus  of  Papua  claiming  affinity  with 
A.  australis  of  Queensland  ;  H.  broadbenti  with  H.  informis  ;  C. 
chloritoides  with  C.  porleri  ;   and  P.  naso  with  P.  macgillivrayi. 
The  species  actually  common  to  both  regions  are  few;  B.  macleayi 
inhabits    both   countries,    T,   annula   only  finds  a  place  in  the 
Queensland  catalogue!  by  courtesy,  while  P.  pedicula,  S.  gracilis, 
T.  ceylanica,  T.  valida,  and  L.  vitreum  are  widespread  throughout 
Polynesia.       From   these  premises   it  may  be  deduced  that  the 
Queensland   mollusc   fauna,  though   isolated   sufficiently  long  to 
have  lost  specific  identity  with  that  of  Papua,  has  nevertheless 
been  derived  from  it. 

The  shallow  sea  of  Torres  Straits  now  severs  this  continent 
from  the  adjoining  island.  Were  its  bed  raised  but  seven  fathoms, 
the  two  countries  would  be  united,  while  an  elevation  of  ten 
fathoms  would  form  a  wide  bridge  between  them.  When  the 
marine  life  east  and  west  of  Torres  Straits  is  better  known,  it 
will  be  of  interest  to  observe  whether  the  influence  of  an  ancient 

*  The  furthest  straggler,  so  Mr.  Brazier  informs  me,  is  Helicina  jana, 
Cox,  from  Port  Macquarie,  N.S.W. 

f  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Queensland,  vol.  v.,  p.  52. 


BY    C.  HEDLEY.  695 

isthmus    is   still  visible  in  any  divergence  between  the  faunas 
inhabiting  the  two  areas. 

Further  to  the  westward,  the  coasts  of  Australia  and  New 
Guinea  again  converge,  being  separated  by  an  arm  of  the  Arafura 
Sea,  which  gradually  shoals  from  a  central  depth  of  40  fathoms, 
and  stretches  for  about  150  miles  between  Cape  Wessel  in  the 
northern  territory  and  Cape  Valsche  on  the  opposite  shore  of 
Dutch  New  Guinea. 

In  the  Transactions  of  the  Royal  Society  of  S.  Australia,  Vol. 
v.,  pp.  47-56,  Professor  Tate  enumerates  the  land  and  freshwater 
mollusca  of  tropical  S.  Australia ;  it  is  remarkable  that  whereas 
a  third  of  the  landshells  of  Papua  and  a  sixth  of  the  landshells 
of  Queensland  are  operculate,  his  census  includes  no  operculate 
landshells  whatever.  Thus  at  the  remote  date  when  the  ancestors 
of  the  present  Queensland  mollusc  fauna  migrated  from  New 
Guinea  across  the  ancient  isthmus  that  I  suppose  to  have  bridged 
Torres  Straits,  the  Arafura  Sea  appears  to  have  still  presented  an 
impenetrable  barrier  between  the  two  countries.  The  former 
elevation  of  land  in  this  region,  if  uniform  from  east  to  west, 
may  therefore  be  calculated  at  more  than  seven  and  less  than 
forty  fathoms. 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES. 

Plate  xxxviii. 

Fig.    1. — Jaw  of  N.  htmsteini.     Magnified. 

Fig.    2.  —Jaw  of  G.  louisiadensis.     Magnified. 

Fig.    3. — Two  rows  of  seven  teeth  from  the  centre,  and  of  the  eighteenth 

to  the  twenty-second  from  the  margin,  of  the  radula  of  N. 

divisa,  var.  inclinata.     Much  magnified. 

Fig.  4. — Two  rows  of  thirteen  teeth  from  the  centre,  and  of  the  twenty- 
fifth  to  the  thirtieth  from  the  margin,  of  the  radula  of  M. 
sappho.     Much  magnified. 

Fig.    5. — Jaw  of  G.  trdbriandensis.     Magnified. 


696       THE  LAND  MOLLUSCAN  FAUNA  OF  BRITISH  NEW  GUINEA, 

Explanation  of  Plates  (continued). 

Fig.    6.  —Jaw  of  G.  maegregori.     Magnified. 

Fig.    7. — Jaw  of  M.  sap2)ho.     Magnified. 

Fig.    8. — Two  rows  of  seven  teeth  from  the  centre,  and  of  the  forty-second 

to  the  forty-fifth  from  the  margin,  of  the  radula  of  G.  brume- 

riemis.     Much  magnified. 

Fig.    9. — Jaw  of  H.  musgravei.     Magnified. 
Fig.  10. — Jaw  of  G.  rollsiamis.     Magnified. 

Plate  xxxix. 

Fig.  11.— Two  rows  of  eleven  teeth  from  the  centre,  and  of  the  twenty - 
second  to  the  twenty-sixth  from  the  margin,  of  the  radula  of 
jV.  hunsteini.     Much  magnified. 

Fig.  12. — Two  rows  of  eleven  teeth  from  the  centre,  and  of  the  twenty  - 
seventh  to  the  thirty-first  from  the  margin,  of  the  radula  of 
C.  maegregori.     Much  magnified. 

Fig.  13.  —Two  rows  of  thirteen  teeth  from  the  centre,  and  of  the  twenty- 
second  to  the  twenty-sixth  from  the  margin,  of  the  radula  of 
G.  leei.     Much  magnified. 

Fig.  14. — Two  rows  of  eleven  teeth  from  the  centre,  and  of  the  twenty 
third  to  the  twenty-sixth  from  the  margin,  of  the  radula  of  G. 
trobriandensis.     Much  magnified. 

Fig.  15. — Jaw  of  G.  leei.     Magnified. 

Fig.  16. — Jaw  of  H.  broadbenti.     Magnified. 

Fig.  17. — Jaw  of  G.  chloritoides.     Magnified. 

Fig.  18. — Two  rows  of  eleven  teeth  from  the  centre,  and  of  the  eighteenth 
to  the  twenty-first  from  the  margin,  of  the  radula  of  G.  boyeri. 
Much  magnified. 

Plate  xl. 

Fig.  19.  — Genital  system  of  G.  louisiadensis. 

Fig.  20. — Jaw  of  N.  divim,  var.  inclinata.     Magnified. 

Fig.  21 . — Genital  system  of  G.  brumeriensis. 

Fig.  22. — Two  rows  of  fifteen  teeth  from  the  centre,  and  of  the  twenty- 
second  to  the  twenty-sixth  from  the  margin,  of  the  radula  of 
G.  chloritoides.     Much  magnified. 


BY   C.  HEDLEY.  GU7 


Explanation  of  Plates  (continued). 

Fig.  23. — Genital  system  of  G.  leei. 

Fig.  24. — Two  rows  of  nine  teeth  from  the  centre,  and  of  the  twenty-third 
to  the  twenty-seventh  from  the  margin,  of  the  radula  of  G. 
louisiadensis.     Much  magnified. 


Plate  xli. 

Fig.  25. — Jaw  of  G.  boyeri.     Magnified. 

Fig.  26. — Genital  system  of  G.  boyeri. 

Fig.  27. — Genital  system  of  H.  broadbenti. 

Fig.  28. — Jaw  of  G.  woodlarhianus.     Magnified. 

Fig.  29. — Two  rows  of  nine  teeth  from  the  centre,  and  of  the  forty-eighth 
to  the  fifty-first  from  the  margin,  of  the  radula  of  G.  rollsianus. 
Much  magnified. 

Fig.  30. — Two  rows  of  eleven  teeth  from  the  centre,  and  of  the  twenty - 
second  to  the  twenty-sixth  from  the  margin,  of  the  radula  of 
H.  musgravei.     Much  magnified. 

Fig.  31. — Jaw  of  G.  brumeriensis .     Magnified. 

Fig.  32. — Genital  system  of  G.  tooodlarhianus. 

Plate  xlii. 

-Genital  system  of  G.  trobriandensis. 
-Jaw  of  S.  simplex.     Magnified. 

-Two  rows  of  eleven  teeth  from  the  centre,  and  of  the  thirty- 
fourth  to  the  thirty-eighth  from  the  margin,  of  the  radula  of 
H.  broadbenti.    Much  magnified. 

-Two  rows  of  eleven  teeth  from  the  centre,  and  of  the  seventeenth 
to  the  twentieth  from  the  margin,  of  the  radula  of  G.  tuood- 
larkianus.     Much  magnified. 

-Two  rows  of  eleven  teeth  from  the  centre,  and  of  the  nineteenth 
to  the  twenty-second  from  the  margin,  of  the  radula  of  S. 
simplex.     Much  magnified. 

-Lower  portion  of  the  genital  system  of  N.  divisa,  var.  inclinata. 

-Genital  system  of  N.  hnnsteini. 


Fig. 

33. 

Fig. 

34. 

Fig. 

35. 

Fig. 

36. 

Fig.  37.- 

Fig. 

38.- 

Fig. 

39, 

698      THE  LAND  MOLLUSCAN  FAUNA  OF  BRITISH  NEW  GUINEA. 


ERRATA. 
PI.  in. — Fig.  5  is  incorrectly  described  as  "of  natural  size" ;  it  should  be 

X     Ig. 

Page  71,  line  29— for  *  read  +. 

Page  80,  line  11 — to  description  add  Nature,  Dec,  1890.  p.  115. 

Page  80,  line  34—  after  I  found  in  company  add  with. 

Page  85,  line  29 — for  Helix  Goldei  read  Helix  Goldiei. 

Page  86,  line  4 — after  goldiei,  Brazier,  add  1885. 

Page  93 — to  habitats  add  Douglas  River  (Bevan). 

Page  99,  line  15— to  anatomy  add  Proc.  Ac.  N.S.  Phil.,  1875,  pi.  xv.,  fig.  8, 

and  pi.  xvi.,  fig.  1. 
Page  99,   line  21— for    Tornatellina    terestris    read    Tornatellina 

TERRESTRIS. 

Page  107,  line  24— /or  antepenultimate  read  penultimate. 

Page  108— to  94  add  f. 

Page  111,  line  8— for  penultimate  whorls  read  penultimate  whorl. 


699 


ON   A   FORM   OF   WOMERAH,   OR   "  THROWING- 
STICK,"  PRESUMED  TO  BE  TJNDESCRIBED. 

By  R.  Etheridge,  Junr.,  &c. 

(Palaeontologist  to  the  Australian  Museum,  and  Geological 

Survey  of  N.  S.  Wales.) 

I  am  indebted  to  Mrs.  John  Storer  for  the  opportunity  of 
describing  a  Womerah,  or  "  Throwing-stick,"  different  to  any  I 
had  previously  seen  figured  or  described. 

The  late  Governor  Eyre  described  the  Throwing-stick  in  general, 
or  ?igd-wa-oak,  as  he  terms  it  in  one  of  the  Aboriginal  dialects,  as 
from  "  twenty  to  twenty-six  inches  in  length,  and  is  of  a  very 
similar  character  throughout  the  continent,  varying  a  little  in 
width  or  shape  according  to  the  fashion  of  particular  districts. 
It  consists  of  a  piece  of  hardwood,  broad  about  the  middle,  flattened 
and  sometimes  hollowed  on  the  inside,  and  tapering  to  either 
extremity ;  at  the  point  the  tooth  of  a  kangaroo  is  tied  and 
gummed  on,  turning  downwards  like  a  hook ;  the  opposite  end 
has  a  lump  of  pitch  with  a  flint  set  in  it,  moulded  round  so  as  to 
form  a  knob,  which  prevents  the  hand  from  slipping  whilst  it  is 
being  used,  or  it  is  wound  round  with  string  made  of  the  fur  of 
the  opossum  for  the  same  purpose.  In  either  case  it  is  held  by 
the  lower  part  in  the  palm  of  the  hand,  clasped  firmly  by  the 
three  lower  fingers,  with  its  upper  part  resting  between  the  fore- 
finger and  the  next ;  the  head  of  tne  spear,  in  which  is  a  small 
hole,  is  fitted  to  the  kangaroo  tooth,  and  then  coming  down 
between  the  forefinger  and  thumb,  is  firmly  grasped  for  throw- 
ing."* It  is  manifest  that  this  can  only  be  accepted  as  a  very 
general  description. 

*  Journ.  Exped.  Discovery  into  Central  Australia,  1845,  ii.,  p.  307. 


700  ON   A   FORM   OF   WOMERAH,    OR    "THROWING-STICK," 

Eyre  figured  four  different  kinds  of  womerah,  varying  in 
their  width,  sectional  outline,  and  shape,  but  all  with  the  mounted 
kangaroo  tooth  at  the  proximal  end,  and  a  lump  of  gum,  or  gum 
and  a  stone,  at  the  distal  extremity.  The  width,  and  in  conse- 
quence the  shape,  differs  in  all  four  types,  but  in  the  narrowest 
there  is  a  flattened  surface  on  which  the  spear  could,  if  necessary, 
lie. 

The  late  Mr.  R.  B.  Smyth  figured*  five  types  from  Victoria  and 
two  from  West  Australia.  The  Victorian  womerahs,  all  but  one, 
belong  to  the  shield-shaped  pattern,  the  exception  being  a  mere 
stick.  The  distal  end  is  either  mounted  with  a  tooth,  as 
described  by  Eyre,  or  carved  into  the  form  of  a  hook,  whilst  the 
proximal  extremity  is  devoid  of  any  check  to  the  hand  at  all.  The 
stick-like  womerah  is  a  very  rude  and  rough  weapon.  Smyth 
stated  that  the  womerah  was  known  to  the  Yarra  Tribe  as 
Kur-reeky  or  Gur-reek ;  by  the  Goulburn  (Victoria)  Tribe  called 
Murri-wun ;  or  at  Lake  Tyers  in  Gippsland  Merri-wun ;  on  the 
Lower  Murray  River,  Moor-oona ;  and  by  others  Meera  or 
Womerah.  The  West  Australian  throwing-stick  is  much  more 
shield-shaped  than  any  of  the  others,  and  is  mounted  at  the 
proximal  end  with  gum,  whilst  a  hardwood  peg  at  the  opposite 
end  does  duty  for  the  kangaroo  incisor. 

The  womerah  from  North- West  Australia  is  again  of  a  some- 
what different  type,  much  longer  and  rather  spatula-like,  without 
a  check  to  the  hand  at  the  proximal  end,  but,  on  the  contrary,  a 
portion  cut  out  to  accommodate  the  hand  of  the  thrower.  Smyth 
remarked  on  the  West  Australian  womerahs  : — "  The  flat  shield- 
like womerahs  in  my  collection  are  made  of  djarrah,  and  are  very 
thin  and  well  polished.  They  are  not  ornamented  in  any  way. 
The  point  for  receiving  the  end  of  the  spear  is  made  of  very  hard 
white  wood,  and  is  fastened  to  the  head  with  gum  ;  and  there  is  a 
lump  of  gum  at  the  end,  so  placed  as  to  prevent  the  implement 
from  slipping  in  the  hand.     The  length  is  one  foot  ten  inches,  and 

*  Aborigines  of  Victoria,  1878,  i.,  p.  309. 


BY    R.  ETHERIDGE,  JUN.  701 

the  greatest  width  five  inches.     The  weight  varies  from  seven  and 
three-quarter  ounces  to  ten  ounces."* 

The  woraerah  from  Agate  Creek,  a  tributary  of  the  Gilbert 
River,  and  the  subject  of  the  present  notice,  was  obtained  by  Dr. 
John  Storer,  and  its  genuineness  thereby  attested.     It  is  two  feet 


ten  and  a  half  inches  in  length,  one  and  a  quarter  inches  in 
breadth,  but  only  three-eights  of  an  inch  in  thickness,  wholly 
in  the  same  plane,  flat  at  the  sides,  and  sharp  and  ridge-like  above 
and  below,  with  hardly  any  perceptible  decrease  in  breadth 
towards  either  end.  The  weight  is  eight  ounces,  and  the  weapon 
is  quite  rigid  and  well  polished.  The  hinder  end  is  obliquely 
cut  off,  and  against  it  is  fitted  a  well  made  peg  of  hard  dark 
wood,  attached  by  black  gum-cement  and  sinews,  and  taking  the 
place  of  the  kangaroo  tooth.  At  the  proximal  or  fore  end, 
against  each  of  the  flat  sides  of  the  womerah,  is  affixed,  with  gum- 
cement,  portions  of  the  shell  of  Melo  diadema.  The  peg  is  one 
and  three-quarter  inches  long,  and  the  portion  of  shell  two  inches. 

This  weapon  is  a  very  peculiar  type  of  womerah,  owing  to  its 
rigid  lath-like  form  and  the  absence  of  any  flattened  transverse 
surface  similar  to  several  of  those  figured  by  Eyre  and  Smyth.  The 
pieces  of  shell  at  the  fore  end  take  the  place  of  the  lump  of  gum, 
or  gum  and  stone,  in  the  more  southern  types.  The  sides  of  the 
throwing-stick  are  quite  plain  and  uncarved,  but  smooth  and  well 
polished.  The  substitution  of  shell  for  gum  alone  at  the  fore  end  is 
evidently  not  of  common  occurrence. 

On  showing  the  Agate  Creek  womerah  to  my  Colleague  Mr. 
John  Brazier,  he  was  at  once  struck  with  its  resemblance  to 
throwing-sticks  obtained  at  Cape  Grenville,  North-East  Australia, 
during  the  progress  of  the  "  Chevert  Expedition;"  and  referred  me 
for  other  examples   to  the   Macleay  Museum.      Therein  I  saw, 

*  Aborigines  of  Victoria,  1878,  i.,  p.  338. 


702  ON   A    FORM    OF    WOMERAH,    OR    "THROWING-STICK." 

through  the  kindness  of  the  Curator,  Mr.  George  Masters,  a  series 
of  four  from  Cape  Grenville,  the  Herbert  River,  and  the  Batavia 
River,  Gulf  of  Carpentaria.  The  Herbert  River  weapon  is  exactly 
the  counterpart  of  that  from  Agate  Creek,  but  is  one  inch  longer; 
that  from  Cape  Grenville  swells  out  in  breadth  in  the  centre,  being 
two  and  seven-eighths  wide,  graduating  off  towards  the  fore  end 
so  as  to  accommodate  itself  to  the  hand  of  the  thrower.  At  the 
same  time,  it  is  equally  as  thin  as  the  woraerah  from  Agate  Creek, 
but  the  shells  are  set  at  right  angles  to  the  shaft,  instead  of 
obliquely.  The  length  is  two  feet  two  inches.  The  Batavia 
River  womerah  is  precisely  similar  to  the  last.  It  is,  however, 
two  inches  longer  and  three  inches  at  the  widest  point.  The 
hand-grasp  is  gummed  to  afford  a  better  hold  to  the  thrower,  the 
same  part  in  the  womerah  from  Cape  Grenville  being  bound  with 
a  reed  also.  These  throwing-sticks  form  a  well-marked  type, 
differing  entirely  from  those  used  in  the  south  and  south-west, 
and,  like  the  large,  irregularly  oval,  light  wood,  painted  shields, 
seem  to  be  chiefly  confined  to  the  north-east  of  the  continent. 

It  is  much  to  be  regretted  that  some  one  does  not  undertake  a 
systematic  description  of  the  Aboriginal  wooden  weapons  and 
implements,  district  by  district,  when,  I  am  quite  sure,  much 
useful  and  instructive  information  would  be  forthcoming.  A 
great  deal  of  praiseworthy  research  was  carried  on  by  the  late 
Robert  Brough  Smyth,  and  detailed  in  his  work  on  the  Aborigines 
of  Victoria*  but  so  much  information  has  been  gathered  since  he 
wrote  that  it  would  be  better  to  commence  the  subject  de  novo. 

*  2  vols.,  4to,  Melbourne,  1878.     By  Authority. 


703 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 


Mr.  Etheridge  exhibited  the  womerah  described  in  his  paper. 

Rev.  J.  Milne  Curran  exhibited  a  good  specimen  of  "  knotted 
schist"  from  the  aureole  of  altered  rock  surrounding  the  intrusive 
granite  at  Bathurst ;  also  a  specimen  of  the  auriferous  lode-stuff 
from  Pambula. 

Mr.  C.  W.  Darley  exhibited  a  collection  of  shells  dredged  up 
from  the  sandspit  off  Darling  Point  in  front  of  Rushcutters  Bay. 
The  dredge  "  Sydney,"  Mr.  H.  Orr,  master,  has  been  removing 
this  bank,  and  in  doing  so  has  lifted  an  immense  quantity  and 
variety  of  shells,  of  which  a  few  are  now  exhibited.  The  question 
is  how  was  this  large  sand-bank  formed;  and  did  the  shells  live  on 
it,  for  they  show  little  or  no  signs  of  abrasion,  as  would  probably  be 
the  case  if  they  had  drifted  any  distance?  If  they  did,  have  they 
all  been  killed  by  impurities  in  the  water,  for  none  are  found 
living1?  The  sand-bank  extends  from  the  N.W.  corner  of  Darling 
Point  a  distance  of  at  least  1200  feet  towards  Garden  Island. 
There  is  only  12  feet  of  water  at  the  end  and  6  feet  at  about  600 
feet  out.  As  deep  as  has  been  dredged,  say  for  28  feet  at  least, 
the  bank  is  all  pure  sand. 

Mr.  Fred.  Turner  exhibited  specimens  of  Telopea  oreades,  F.v.M. 
(narrow-leaved  form),  the  Victorian  Waratah,  collected  at  the 
Fitzroy  Falls,  N.S.W.,  the  most  northern  habitat  yet  recorded  for 
the  plant;  said  to  be  very  rare.  Also  three  fungus-smitten 
grasses  from  the  interior :  Eriochloa  punctata,  Hamilt.,  Panicum 
Mitchelli,  Benth.,  (two  valuable  pasture  grasses;  in  the  case  of  the 
second  of  these  the  first  occasion  on  which  he  had  seen  fungoid 
growth  on  it),  and  Aristida  ramosa,  R.Br.,  one  of  the  "three 
awned  spear  grasses,"  a  noxious  plant.  To  the  presence  in  fodder 
of  parasitic  fungi  such  as  these,  the  fact  that  many  sheep  died  so 
mysteriously  at  times,  was,  Mr.  Turner  thought,  sometimes 
possibly  attributable. 


704  NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS. 

Mr.  Fletcher  exhibited  specimens  of  a  fly  (f&m.Phytomyzidae)  the 
larvae  of  which  in  great  numbers  have  infested  several  composites 
— cinerarias,  thistles,  but  more  particularly  the  marguerites  and 
summer  chrysanthemums — in  Sir  William  Macleay's  garden 
adjoining,  during  the  last  two  months ;  so  numerous  have  they 
been  that  many  of  the  plants  have  been  quite  spoilt  for  horticul- 
tural purposes.  Also,  for  the  Hon.  W.  R.  Campbell,  M.L.C., 
specimens  of  crickets  (Gryllus  servillei,  Sauss.)  which,  in  the 
Macintyre  River  District  during  March  and  April  last  before  the 
frosts  set  in,  appeared  in  myriads,  doing  considerable  damage  to 
the  sweet  potato  and  lucerne  crops,  and  injuring  even  blankets. 

Mr.  Froggatt  exhibited  and  read  a  short  note  on  the  life- 
history  of  a  dipterous  insect  belonging  to  the  genus  Syrphus. 
The  specimens  exhibited  were  bred  from  some  pale  green  larvae, 
found  upon  Eucalyptus  leaves  which  were  covered  with  the  larvae 
of  Psyllidce.  While  keeping  the  Psylla  in  a  damp  box,  some 
very  minute  grubs  were  noticed  to  be  crawling  about  among  the 
cells  ;  these  grubs  rapidly  increased  in  size,  feeding  on  the  sweet 
sugary  matter  into  which  the  moisture  of  the  box  caused  the  lerp 
to  melt,  but  not  eating  the  helpless  little  larvae  whose  homes  they 
destroyed.  On  the  seventh  day  they  were  found  to  have  trans- 
formed into  top-shaped  pupae,  lying  at  the  bottom  of  the  box ; 
after  removal  to  a  glass-topped  box,  the  perfect  flies  emerged  on  the 
fifth  day.  Kirby  says  that  the  larvae  of  Syri^hus  in  England  live 
on  the  aphis. 

Also  specimens  of  a  small  leaf-boring  fly  (Phytomyza  sp.)  of  the 
same  species  as  that  exhibited  by  Mr.  Fletcher,  but  bred  from  the 
leaves  of  the  sunflower.  And  some  rare  galls  received  from  Mr. 
French,  F.L.S.,  recently  named  by  Maskell  "The  horn  scale" 
(Frenchia  casuarince).  These  remarkable  homopterous  galls 
come  from  the  Wimmera,  Victoria,  and  are  found  on  Casuarina 
suberosa. 


705 


IN   MEMORIAM 


§ix  milium  Jteleag,  It,  J.$.§.,  &.%$. 

goxrt  at  QTaithtuss,  $.§.,  June  13th,  1820, 
&itb  at  elites,  «gt.«S'.S®.,  December  7th,  1891. 


ilfofe. — Out  of  respect  to  the  memory  of  Sir  William  Macleay, 
the  December  Monthly  Meeting  was  not  held. — Ed. 


706 


WEDNESDAY,  JANUARY  27th,  1892. 


ANNUAL  GENERAL   MEETING. 


The  President,  Professor  Has  well,  M.A.,  D.Sc,  in  the  Chair 

The   mi 
confirmed. 


The   minutes    of  the   last    Annual    Meeting    were   read   and 


PRESIDENT'S  ADDRESS. 

The  past  year  is  one  which,  I  have  little  doubt,  will  always  be 
looked  back  upon  as  one  of  the  most  eventful  in  the  history  of 
this  Society.  During  its  course  we  have  lost  by  death  two  of  our 
most  valued  members,  one  of  whom  had  long  been  in  many  ways 
the  mainstay  of  the  Society,  and  we  have  been  placed  by  a 
generous  bequest  in  a  position  in  which  our  opportunities  of  doing 
good  work  ought  to  be  considerably  increased. 

The  attendance  at  the  monthly  meetings  during  the  year  has, 
on  the  whole,  been  satisfactory  :  and  a  number  of  papers  of  interest 
and  value  have  been  read.  In  addition  to  the  reading  of  these 
there  have  been  exhibitions  of  many  interesting  objects,  often 
suggestive  of  new  fields  of  inquiry. 

During  the  year  seven  new  members  have  been  elected,  and  five 
have  been  lost  by  death  or  retirement.  Four  members  have  died 
during  the  year,  namely,  Mr.  C.  S.  Wilkinson,  Mr.  K.  H.  Bennett, 
Sir  William  Macleay,  and  Sir  John  Hay. 

Charles  Smith  Wilkinson,  Government  Geologist,  who  died  on 
August  25th  at  the  comparatively  early  age  of  47,  was  born  in 
England  in  1843.  For  some  25  years  he  was  engaged  in  the  work 
of  geological  surveying  in  this  colony  and  in  Victoria,  and,  though 
the  demands  of  his  official  work,  relating  in  great  measure  to  the 
development  of  mining  industries,  left  him  but  little  leisure,  he 


president's  address.  707 

was  the  author  of  several  important  contributions  to  Australian 
geology,  partly  published  in  the  Annual  Reports  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  Mines,  partly  in  the  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of 
N.S.  Wales,  partly  in  those  of  this  Society.  His  duties  took  him 
frequently  away  from  Sydney  to  various  parts  of  the  country  ; 
but  when  in  town  he  was  a  regular  attendant  at  the  meetings  of 
this  Society,  of  which  he  was  President  in  the  years  1884  and 
1885.  His  contributions  to  the  Proceedings  of  this  Society  were 
the  following  : — 

(1)  Notes  on  a  collection  of  Geological  specimens  collected  by 
William  Macleay,  Esq.,  F.L.S.,  from  the  Coasts  of  New  Guinea, 
Cape  Yorke,  and  the  neighbouring  Islands.      [Vol.  I.,  p.  113.] 

(2)  Notes  on  the  Abercrombie  Caves.      [Vol.  iv.,  p.  460.] 

(3)  Notes  on  some  Customs  of  the  Aborigines  of  the  Albert 
District,  New  South  Wales.     [Vol.  VIII->  P-  436.] 

(4)  Presidential  Address,  1884.      [Vol.  viil,  p.  535.] 

(5)  Presidential  Address,  1885.     [Vol.  ix.,  p.  1207.] 
Kenrick  Harold  Bennett,  who  died  on  June  30th,  was  one  of 

that  unfortunately  not  too  numerous  school  of  educated  bush- 
naturalists,  who  spending  their  lives  in  the  country,  engaged  in 
pastoral  and  other  pursuits,  are  yet  sufficiently  in  touch  with 
societies  such  as  ours,  to  permit  of  their  observations  bein» 
recorded  and  utilised.  Mr.  Bennett's  observations  were  chiefly 
on  birds — their  habits,  their  nesting,  and  their  eggs  ;  and  he 
contributed  a  number  of  new  facts  in  connection  with  these 
subjects,  many  embodied  in  Mr.  A.  J.  North's  "  Catalogue  of 
Birds'  Nests  and  Eggs,"  published  by  the  Australian  Museum  ; 
but  he  at  one  time  devoted  much  attention  to  native  weapons, 
implements,  and  utensils,  in  which  he"  was  well  versed.  Several 
papers  from  his  pen  have  been  published  in  the  "  Proceedings  "  of 
this  Society. 

More  recently  we  have  to  deplore  also  the  death  of  Sir  William 

Macleay,  to  whom  this  Society  owes,  if  not  its  very  existence,  at 

least  its  prosperous  maintenance  for  a  good  many  years,  and  to 

whom  Australian  Science  is  indebted  for  many  benefits.     William 

46 


708  president's  address. 

Macleay  was  born  in  Scotland,  but,  coming  to  New  South  Wales 
as  a  very  young  man,  he  became  the  most  patriotic  of  colonists, 
and  spent  all  the  rest  of  his  life  in  this  country,  never  once 
leaving  it  except  on  the  occasion  of  his  expedition  to  New  Guinea. 
During  all  the  earlier  part  of  his  life  in  this  colony  he  was  engaged 
in  pastoral  pursuits  on  a  large  scale,  being  concerned  in  very 
extensive  stations  in  the  district  of  the  Murrumbidgee.  He  also 
during  these  earlier  years  took  an  active  share  in  the  political  life 
of  the  country.  But  during  the  last  15  or  20  years  of  his  life, 
though  he  never  ceased  to  take  a  keen  interest  in  all  public 
matters  and  remained  a  member  of  the  Upper  House,  and  though 
until  comparatively  recently  he  retained  the  ownership  of  large 
stations,  yet  he  gave  a  very  large  share  of  his  time  to  the  cultiva- 
tion of  Natural  Science,  and  left  his  stations  to  his  managers — 
very  rarely  indeed  leaving  Sydney  even  for  a  single  day.  With 
remarkable  single-mindedness  and  still  more  remarkable  absence 
of  ostentation,  he  set  himself  to  advance  the  study  of  the  Natural 
History  Sciences  in  this  colony ;  and  this  in  a  manner  which — 
though,  in  common  with  everything  he  did,  not  by  any  means 
free  from  the  impress  of  a  strongly-marked  individuality — was 
characterised  by  a  very  exceptional  breadth  and  liberality  of  view. 
There  are  several  ways  in  which  an  individual  possessed  of  the 
necessary  means  and  the  necessary  enlightenment  may  further  the 
ends  of  science.  He  may  himself  add  by  his  own  investigations 
to  the  sum  total  of  our  knowledge.  He  may,  without  himself 
prosecuting  any  researches,  accumulate  in  an  intelligent  way 
material  with  the  aid  of  which  others  may  be  enabled  to  advance 
the  science  in  which  he  is  interested.  He  may  by  his  personal 
influence  and  example  be  the  means  of  inducing  others  to  devote 
their  energies  to  scientific  work.  He  may  provide  facilities,  as, 
for  example,  by  building  laboratories  or  biological  stations,  fur- 
nishing instruments  and  apparatus,  and  forming  collections  of 
scientific  books,  by  which  scientific  workers  may  carry  on  their 
work  with  convenience  and,  thoroughness.  Or  he  may  provide 
funds  by  means  of  which  investigators  may  be  enabled  to  devote 
all  their  time  and  energy  to  the  work  of  research. 


president's  address.  709 

Now  I  think  I  may  say  that  Sir  "William  Macleay  contributed 
to  the  progress  of  science  to  a  greater  or  less  extent,  not  in  one  or 
two  only,  but  in  all  of  these  ways.  As  an  original  investigator 
his  name  is  best  known  as  an  entomologist  and  ichthyologist.  In 
the  former  field  he  worked  diligently  for  many  years,  devoting 
with  the  greatest  regularity  the  morning  hours  of  every  clay  to 
his  collections.  The  results  of  his  work  are  embodied  in  a  large 
number  of  papers  contributed  to  the  Transactions 'of  the  long 
defunct  Entomological  Society  of  New  South  Wales ;  and  to 
the  Proceedings  of  this  Society.  In  these  papers  very  many  new 
species  of  Australian  Coleoptera  of  a  number  of  families  are 
described.  Ichthyology  was  taken  up  as  a  special  study  at  a 
somewhat  later  stage — the  first  contributions  to  this  subject  being 
the  papers  descriptive  of  the  Fishes  of  the  "Chevert"  Expedition, 
in  which  the  late  Dr.  H.  G.  Alleyne  collaborated  with  him ;  these' 
were  published  in  1876.  In  subsequent  years  numerous  papers  on 
this  subject  appeared,  the  most  important  of  which  were  those 
entitled  "  Descriptive  Catalogue  of  the  Fishes  of  Australia,"  sub- 
sequently issued  in  a  separate  form,  and  constituting  a  most 
useful  and  convenient  handbook  to  the  study  of  Australian  Fishes. 
In  these  entomological  and  ichthyological  studies  Sir  William 
Macleay  had  pretty  constantly  in  view  the  economic  bearing  of 
his  subject,  as  is  witnessed  by  his  not  infrequent  notes  on  noxious 
insects  in  the  Entomological  Society's  Proceedings,  and  in  many 
observations  contained  in  his  ichthyological  papers.  His  know- 
ledge of  the  latter  subject  was  brought  specially  to  bear  on  the 
subject  of  the  fisheries  of  the  colony  in  the  work  of  the  Royal 
Commission  appointed  in  1880  to  enquire  into  the  subject  of  the 
fisheries — a  Commission  of  which  he  was  elected  chairman.  The 
practical  outcome  of  the  Report  of  this  Royal  Commission  was  the 
Fisheries  Act  of  1881,  still  in  force,  under  which  the  Com- 
missioners of  Fisheries  hold  their  appointment.  The  practical 
side  of  his  character  was  also  shown  in  the  efforts  which  he  made 
to  promote  and  support  various  enterprises  for  securing  to  the 
metropolis  a  more  adequate  supply  of  fish. 


710  president's  address. 

Sir  William  Macleay's  work  as  an  investigator,  though  it  was 
extensive  and  useful,  was  none  of  it  of  an  epoch-making  character, 
and  it  is  mainly  in  the  other  ways  to  which  I  have  directed 
attention  that  he  deserved  well  of  the  republic  of  science.  Our 
distinguished  friend  Baron  von  Mueller's  phrase  "  the  Maecenas  of 
Australian  natural  science "  is  scarcely  an  exaggeration ;  and, 
though  he  has  had  no  Horace  to  enshrine  his  name  in  immortal 
verse,  yet  his  benefits  are  of  such  a  kind  as  to  ensure  that  his 
name  will  be  handed  down  to  future  generations. 

Sir  William  Macleay's  services  to  natural  science  in  this  colony 
as  a  collector  of  specimens  which  have  proved,  and  are  likely  still 
more  to  prove,  of  value  in  adding  to  faunistic  knowledge  are  well 
known  to  all  of  you.  His  most  imposing  enterprise  in  this  direc- 
tion was  the  expedition  which  he  undertook  in  the  year  1875  to 
the  Northern  Queensland  Coasts,  to  the  Islands  of  Torres  Straits 
and  New  Guinea. 

In  a  paper  which  he  read  before  this  Society  on  his  return  in 
October,  1875,  Sir  William  Macleay  gave  a  general  sketch  of 
the  results  of  his  expedition,  of  some  of  the  more  interesting 
phenomena  observed,  and  some  of  the  more  important  collections 
which  had  been  made.  From  this  I  quote  the  opening  paragraph 
and  part  of  the  last : — 

"It  is  now  five  months  since  I  took  my  departure  from  Sydney 
for  a  few  months'  cruise  among  the  Islands  of  New  Guinea  and 
Torres  Straits.  I  was  accompanied,  as  you  are  aware,  by  Mr. 
Masters  and  Mr.  Brazier,  both  members  of  our  Society,  and  I 
had,  besides,  with  me  two  very  competent  taxidermists  and 
collectors — Messrs.  Spalding  and  Pettard.  The  results  of  the 
expedition  I  hope  to  be  able  to  exhibit  to  you  in  a  few  weeks  upon 
the  arrival  of  the  '  Ch evert,'  now  on  her  way  from  Cape  York. 
In  the  meantime,  I  have  jotted  down,  from  memory,  a  few 
notes  and  observations,  which,  I  trust,  will  not  be  altogether 
uninteresting  to  you."     .... 

"Altogether,"  he  sums  up,  "I  have  succeeded  in  getting  together 
a  vast  and  valuable  collection — a  collection  which,  considering  the 


president's  address.  711 

short  time  at  my  disposal,  seems  wonderful,  and  which  affords 
undoubted  proof  of  the  industry  and  zeal  of  my  staff  of  collectors. 
For  it  must  be  remembered  that,  though  the  full  time  of  my 
intended  absence  from  Sydney  has  expired,  the  actual  time  avail- 
able for  the  purposes  of  the  voyage  was  much  less  than  I  calculated 
on.  The  '  Chevert,'  though  a  good,  dry,  and  comfortable  ship, 
was  unable  to  sail  against  the  wind,  and  it  was  so  constantly 
against  us  during  a  great  part  of  the  expedition  that  I  do  not 
think  we  had  more  than  sixty  days  for  collecting  during  the  five 
months'  cruize." 

Though  this  expedition  was  in  some  .measure  disappointing — 
the  plans  formed  before  starting  not  having  been  fully  carried 
out — yet  the  result  in  the  acquisition  of  new  and  rare  objects  of 
natural  history  of  all  kinds  were  very  rich.  Most  of  the  new 
forms  have  since  been  described,  though  there  are  still  some 
groups  awaiting  investigation.  But  for  many  years  Macleay 
was  constantly  adding  to  his  collection  from  sources  nearer 
home — having  skilled  men  collecting  for  him  in  various  parts  of 
Australia,  and  haviug  for  years  a  taxidermist  and  articulator,  as 
well  as  his  curator,  working  in  his  private  Museum.  The  result 
was  the  accumulation  of  a  large  collection,  embracing  all  depart- 
ments of  Zoology,  which  was  always  accessible'  to  those  desiring 
to  make  use  of  it  for  purposes  of  research. 

This  generril  collection,  together  with  his  unrivalled  collection 
of  Australian  and  other  insects,  partly  inherited  from  William 
Sharpe  Macleay,  partly  accumulated  by  himself,  he  presented,  as 
you  are  aware,  two  years  ago  to  the  University,  stipulating  only 
that  a  suitable  building  should  be  provided,  and  that  the  collection 
should  be  accessible  to  members  of  the  Linnean  Society  of  New 
South  Wales  and  to  students  of  natural  science  generally,  as  well 
as  to  students  of  the  University.  Together  with  the  collections 
he  presented  the  sum  of  £6000,  the  interest  of  which  serves  for 
the  salary  of  the  curator.  A  large,  though,  unfortunately,  not 
very  handsome,  building  was  erected  by  the  Government  at  the 
request  of  the  Senate  of  the  University,  and  the  collections  were 
transferred  thither  in  the  course  of  the  year  before  last.     The 


712  president's  address. 

control  of  the  Macleay  Museum  has  been  vested  by  the  Senate  in 
a  Committee  consisting  of  the  Professor  of  Geology — Prof.  David 
— and  myself  as  Professor  of  Biology,  and  we  are  fortunate  in 
having  an  able  and  zealous  curator  in  Mr.  George  Masters. 

As  this  collection  and  its  fate  must  be  of  special  interest  to 
you  on  the  present  occasion,  I  propose  to  give  some  brief  account 
of  it,  the  building  in  which  it  is  housed,  and  of  the  way  in  which 
it  is  proposed  to  utilise  it. 

The  collection  is,  as  might  be  expected,  richest  in  Australian 
objects ;  but  many  specimens  from  various  parts  of  the  South 
Pacific  region  were  obtained  from  various  sources,  and  a  consider- 
able number  of  specimens  from  other  Zoological  regions  were 
purchased  from  dealers.  To  begin  with  the  anthropological  and 
ethnological  collections  :  there  are  over  200  crania  of  aboriginal 
Australians,  and  natives  of  New  Guinea  and  the  South  Sea 
Islands,  besides  six  entire  skeletons  of  natives  of  Torres  Straits. 
There  are  many  hundreds  of  specimens  of  weapons  and  utensils 
from  Australia,  New  Guinea,  Melanesia,  etc. 

The  collection  of  Mammalia  comprises  nearly  500  specimens 
(including  skins,  skeletons,  and  skulls)  of  Marsupials  and  Mono- 
trenies,  and  nearly  400  specimens  of  other  orders.  The  collection 
of  Birds  is  a  particularly  valuable  one,  comprising  no  fewer  than 
about  10,000  specimens — a  fair  number  of  representatives  of  the 
Australian  species  mounted,  the  rest  unmounted.  There  are 
upwards  of  f>000  specimens  of  Reptiles  of  all  orders,  mostly  in 
spirits.  The  collection  of  Fishes  is  very  extensive  ;  on  a  rough 
estimate,  there  are  about  13,000  specimens  of  all  kinds,  mounted 
and  in  spirits. 

Of  the  Invertebrata  the  Insecta  are  the  most  largely  repre- 
sented, and  it  would  be  quite  impossible  to  arrive  at  even  an 
approximate  estimate  of  the  immense  multitudes  of  representa- 
tives of  all  orders  that  fill  the  drawers  of  the  insect  cabinets. 

There  is  also  a  fine  collection  of  Crustacea,  comprising  7000 
or  8000  specimens,  and  a  good  series  of  Australian  Spiders. 


president's  address.  713 

The  Mollusca,  though  not  nearly  so  numerous  as  the  Insects, 
are  yet  a  very  numerous  collection,  which  Mr.  Masters  estimates 
at  not  less  than  50,000. 

Of  the  numbers  of  the  other  Invertebrata,  no  estimate  has  been 
formed  ;  but  there  are  many  thousands  of  specimens  of  Worms, 
Echinoderms,  Coelenterates,  and  Sponges. 

Besides  these  zoological  specimens,  there  is  also  a  considerable, 
though  much  less  important,  collection  of  geological  specimens 
from  various  sources. 

The  building  in  which  these  Macleay  collections  are  now  housed 
at  the  University,  contains  a  single  spacious  hall,  200ft.  long  by 
76ft.  wide.  Around  this  runs  a  gallery,  13ft.  wide  at  the  sides 
and  26ft.  at  the  ends.  The  space  below  the  gallery  is  divided  by 
partitions  into  a  series  of  bays,  eleven  on  each  side,  each  bay 
having  a  large  window.  The  presence  of  the  gallery,  divided,  like 
the  space  below  it,  by  a  number  of  partitions,  and  capable  of 
being  completely  closed  off  from  the  body  of  the  hall,  will  enable 
us  very  conveniently  to  effect  that  division  of  the  Museum  into 
general  or  public  collections  and  special  or  scientific  collections 
which  is  now  so  generally  aimed  at.  In  this  gallery  will  be  placed 
such  portions  of  the  collections  as  are  not  required  in  the  series  on 
exhibition  below  for  the  benefit  of  students  and  other  visitors  : 
these  will  comprise  the  unmounted  skins  of  Birds  and  Mammals 
and  all  the  duplicate  specimens  of  all  kinds,  together  with  the 
cabinets  of  Insects.  These  special  collections  will  be  open  for 
study,  with  permission  of  the  Committee,  to  any  student  of  zoology 
wishing  to  investigate  any  particular  group. 

One  of  the  special  features  of  the  Macleay  Museum  ought, 
in  my  opinion,  to  be  a  good,  well-displayed  series  illustrative 
of  the  Australian  fauna  in  all  its  branches.  For  this  there  is 
ample  material  in  the  Macleay  collection,  which  would  require 
but  little  supplementing  to  render  the  series  as  complete  as  need 
be.  This  will  occupy  a  considerable  part  of  the  available  space. 
While  this  faunistic  collection  will  form  an  important  feature 
of  the  Museum  and  will  always  be  the  most  interesting  to  the 


714  president's  address. 

general  visitor,  a  University  Museum  would  fall  very  far  short  of 
its  purpose  did  it  contain  nothing  more.  For  the  benefit  of  the 
general  student  of  science,  there  must  be  a  series  of  specimens  and 
preparations,  accompanied  by  models  and  explained  by  diagrams, 
illustrative  of  the  morphology  and  life-history  of  all  the  various 
main  groups,  both  of  plants  and  animals,  together  with  small 
collections  illustrative  of  various  special  biological  phenomena, 
such  as  variation,  mimicry,  and  the  like.  Such  a  series  as  this 
aims  at  enabling  the  student  to  see  for  himself  as  many  as  possible 
of  the  most  characteristic  features  in  the  external  form,  internal 
structure,  the  embryology,  conditions  of  life,  and  the  like,  of  the 
leading  types  of  animal  and  plant  life.  With  the  slender  resources 
at  present  at  our  disposal,  only  very  slow  progress  can  be  made  in 
this  important  department  of  the  Museum  ;  but  a  commencement 
at  least  has  been  made,  and  when  the  necessary  cases  are  con- 
structed, there  will  soon  be  a  good  educational  series  for  the 
use  of  the  student  of  science.  Another  section  of  the  Museum 
has  been  set  apart  for  the  geological  collections,  comprising 
all  the  mineralogical,  petrological,  and  palseontological  specimens 
previously  belonging  to  the  University,  supplemented  by  those  in 
the  Macleay  collection.  And,  finally,  the  ethnological  collections, 
which  are  not  very  large,  will  occupy  several  of  the  bays. 

During  the  greater  part  of  the  life  of  this  Society,  Macleay  has 
provided  it  with  a  home,  and  in  1885  he  presented  to  it  the 
commodious  building  in  which  we  are  now  met,  containing  not 
only  this  meeting  hall  and  library  with  the  secretary's  office  and 
council-room  attached,  but  also  the  spacious  laboratory  adjoining. 
Most  of  you  will  remember  the  manner  in  which  this  presentation 
was  made  on  Oct.  31st,  1885.  After  relating  how  the  Society  had 
been  previously  accommodated  with  a  temporary  home  (the  rent 
of  which  was  paid  by  himself,  though  this  he  omitted  to  mention), 
he  went  on  to  say — "  The  necessity,  however,  for  more  room,  and 
I  may  add,  less  noise,  has  induced  me  to  build  the  edifice  we  are 
now  assembled  in,  which  I  beg  to  present,  such  as  it  is,  to  the 
Society  for  the  period  of  89  years,  the  unexpired  term  of  my 
original  lease  of  the  ground  for  99  years." 


president's  address.  715 

He  spent,  moreover,  a  large  sum  of  money  in  the  purchase  of 
books  for  the  Society's  library,  and,  when  these  were  un- 
fortunately destroyed  by  fire  on  the  burning  down  in  1882 
of  the  Garden  Palace,  in  which  the  Society  was  then  lodged,  he 
immediately  set  to  work  anew  to  form  the  fine  collection  of 
scientific  works  constituting  the  greater  part  of  our  library  as  it 
now  stands. 

By  Sir  William  Macleay's  generosity  several  workers  in  various 
branches  of  science  have  been  enabled  to  carry  on  their  researches 
here  or  in  the  former  home  of  the  Society  in  Phillip-street,  without 
requiring  to  expend  their  time  and  energy  on  bread-winning  work. 
Dr.  R.  von  Lendenfeld  was  for  two  years  working  in  this  way  under 
the  auspices  of  the  Society,  and  the  results  of  his  work  have  seen 
the  light  in  a  large  number  of  papers  treating  chiefly  of  the  Sponges 
and  Hydrozoa  published  in  our  Proceedings.  Succeeding  Dr.  von 
Lendenfeld,  Dr.  Oscar  Katz  for  several  years  worked  in  the 
Linnean  laboratory,  the  outcome  of  his  researches  being  a  series 
of  contributions  to  Bacteriology  which  have  been  published  in  the 
Proceedings.  Mr.  Skuse  has  also  been  engaged  under  Sir  William 
Macleay's  auspices  in  entomological  work,  and  has  thus  been  enabled 
to  make  a  very  good  beginning  towards  filling  in  a  previously  blank 
space  in  our  knowledge  of  the  Australian  fauna  by  means  of  his 
numerous  descriptions  of  Dipterous  Insects  of  various  families. 

And,  finally,  I  must  not  omit  to  mention  that  by  his  appoint- 
ment by  Sir  William  Macleay  to  the  post  of  Director  and  Librarian 
of  this  Society,  Mr.  J.  J.  Fletcher  has  secured  sufficient  leisure  in  the 
intervals  when  his  numerous  secretarial  and  editorial  duties  have 
been  less  pressing,  to  carry  on  zoological  work,  the  results  of 
which  are  before  us  in  his  valuable  papers  on  the  Australian 
Earthworms,  the  Batrachia,  and  other  subjects. 

Not  only  did  Sir  William  Macleay  present  this  Society  with 
this  commodious  building,  and  the  greater  part  of  its  library,  he 
also  paid  all  salaries,  defrayed  the  expense  of  the  greater  number 
of  the  plates,  and  gave  it  most  generous  and  much-needed 
assistance  in   many  other  ways.      So   that  it  might  be   able  to 


:■/ 


716  president's  address. 

maintain  itself  in  the  position  to  which  he  had  raised  it,  he 
made  over  to  it  during  his  lifetime  an  endowment  of  £14,000,  to 
which  will  be  added,  in  accordance  with  his  will,  .£6,000  more,  so 
that  the  Society  will  be  shortly  in  the  possession  of  a  sum 
sufficient,  with  its  other  sources  of  revenue,  to  enable  it  to  carry 
on  its  work — to  issue  annually  well  illustrated  volumes,  to  pay  its 
officers,  and  to  maintain  and  add  to  its  library. 

As  3^ou  are  all  aware,  by  a  provision  of  his  will,  he  has  left  the 
munificent  sum  of  £35,000  to  be  applied  eventually  to  the  founda- 
tion of  four  fellowships,  to  be  called  the  Macleay  Linnean  Fellow- 
ships, and  to  be  held  by  Bachelors  of  Science  of  the  University 
of  Sydney,  who  shall  be  engaged  in  research  on  some  subject 
connected  with  natural  science.  The  election  to  these  is  to  be  in 
the  hands  of  the  Council  of  the  Linnean  Society  of  1ST.  S.  Wales, 
and  the  results  of  the  work  done  by  the  holders  are  to  be  published 
in  the  Society's  Proceedings. 

Now,  I  have  a  proposal  to  make  which,  I  hope,  will  meet  with 
your  approval.  This  Society  is  very  deeply  indebted  to  Sir 
William  Macleay,  and  it  is  felt  that  some  appropriate  means 
should  be  found  of  commemorating  the  generous  actions  to  which 
I  have  just  been  directing  your  attention.  And  it  has  appeared 
to  me  and  such  of  the  Society  as  I  have  had  the  opportunity  of 
consulting,  that  more  appropriate  in  every  way  than  any  monu- 
ment which  we  might  erect,  would  be  the  publication  of  a 
Macleay  Memorial  Volume  to  contain  a  series  of  original  contri- 
butions to  botany,  zoology  and  geology  by  members  of  the  Society. 
Such  a  Memorial  would,  it  appears  to  me,  be  peculiarly  fitting, 
when  we  take  into  account  the  nature  of  the  benefits  which  we 
aim  at  signalising,  and  the  views  and  tastes  of  our  benefactor ;  it 
would,  moreover,  if  the  contents  of  the  volume  were  worthy  of 
the  occasion,  be  a  monument  of  a  lasting  character,  and  one 
which  would  be  before  the  eyes  of  the  whole  scientific  world. 

I  should  like,  in  conclusion,  to  say  a  few  words  as  to  the  present 
position  and  prospects  of  the  Society.  You  will  hear  presently 
the  statement  of  the  Honorary  Treasurer  as  to  our  financial 
position ;  and  also  in  what  way  it  is  proposed  that  the  income 


president's  address.  717 

should  be  expended.  We  are  thus  assured  in  the  possession  of  a 
commodious  building  and  an  excellent  library  ;  we  have  sufficient 
funds  for  the  payment  of  the  necessary  salaries,  and  sufficient  for 
the  printing  and  illustration  of  the  Proceedings.  But  let  me 
remind  you,  in  the  contemplation  of  this  condition  of  material 
prosperity,  that  the  spiritual  ivellbeing,  if  I  may  so  call  it,  of  the 
Society  is  by  no  means  assured  by  this  ;  and  that  it  can  only  be 
by  continuous  and  well-directed  effort  that  the  essential  objects  of 
such  an  association  as  ours  can  be  carried  out. 

Our  object  is  defined  in  our  Rules  and  in  our  Act  of  Incorpora- 
tion as  being  "  the  cultivation  and  study  of  the  science  of  Natural 
History  in  all  its  branches."  Like  all  kindred  associations  we 
must  keep  before  us  as  our  principal  end  and  aim  the  advance- 
ment and  extension  of  exact  knowledge  in  the  departments  of 
science  with  which  we  deal.  Such  a  Society  as  ours  would  be 
falling  greatly  short  of  its  duty  could  it  not  show  every  year  in 
its  published  Proceedings  some  substantial  gain  to  science,  some 
little  area,  however  small,  added  to  the  domain  of  our  knowledge  of 
Nature.  It  is  true  that  the  Society  as  such  can  do  little  in  this  way  ; 
new  accessions  to  science  must  always  be  made  by  the  individual 
worker,  and  the  number  of  such  workers  in  such  a  Society  as  ours 
— though  I  hope  they  will  increase  as  time  goes  on  and  scientific 
training  becomes  more  widely  diffused — can  never  be  very  great. 
But  one  of  the  duties  of  the  Society,  which  its  members  should 
keep  steadily  in  view,  is  to  keep  up  and  increase  the  number  of 
such  investigators,  and  to  do  everything  in  its  power  to  aid  them 
in  their  work  and  facilitate  the  publication  of  its  results.  Now 
I  think  we  can  all  do  something  in  this  direction  :  we  can  all  do 
something  to  extend  a  taste  for  the  study  of  natural  science,  and 
we  may  even  occasionally  have  an  opportunity  of  encouraging  one 
or  another  to  devote  himself  to  it.  In  extending  the  sphere  of 
the  Society's  influence,  even  in  attending  its  meetings,  we  are 
doing  something  to  promote  the  objects  at  which  it  aims.  Were 
such  members  of  the  Society  as  are  not  active  workers  in  natural 
science  to  withdraw  all  but  their  nominal  and  pecuniary  connec- 
tion with  our  body,  the  working  members  would,  I  am  assured, 


718  president's  address. 

sustain  a  heavy  loss.  For  though  the  intrinsic  value  of  the 
scientific  work  done  can  only  be  finally  decided  upon  by  a  tribunal 
that  does  not  belong  either  to  the  present  time  or  to  any  particular 
society  or  particular  country,  yet  the  sympathy  and  co-operation 
of  those  with  whom  they  come  in  immediate  contact  must  always 
be  of  importance  to  investigators  in  science,  as  to  workers  in  any 
sphere  of  life. 

The  choice  of  subjects  for  investigation  which  the  devotee  of 
biological  science  resident  in  Australia  has  before  him  is  a  very 
large  one.  To  the  botanical  worker  there  are  very  numerous 
tempting  fields  promising  rich  harvests.  For  instance  among  the 
Algse  the  abundant  Siphonece  that  live  on  the  tropical  parts  of 
the  coast  are  only  known  as  regards  their  general  form ;  and  their 
structure  and  especially  their  development  offer  a  promising  field 
of  investigation.  The  same  holds  good  of  the  Red  Seaweeds; 
for  though  many  have  been  described  by  Agardh,  Sonder, 
Harvey  and  others,  yet  in  the  case  of  many — one  might  say 
most — of  the  genera  that  seem  to  be  specially  characteristic  of 
our  coasts  little  is  known  but  the  form  of  the  thallus. 

The  development  of  some  of  the  Australian  ferns  is  unknown, 
and  in  the  case  of  such  remarkable  genera  as  Schizcea,  Lyyodium, 
and  Alsophila  is  a  study  likely  to  lead  to  interesting  results. 
Among  the  Lycopodiacece  we  have  three  remarkable  genera — 
Tmesij)teris,  Psilotum  and  Phylloglossum ;  and  as  absolutely 
nothing  is  known  respecting  their  development,  whoever  should 
succeed  in  tracing  the  germination  of  the  spore  and  the  formation 
of  the  prothallium  stage  would  be  making  an  important  contri- 
bution to  botanical  science. 

Among  the  higher  plants  many  subjects  of  enquiry  lie  before 
the  Australian  botanist.  For  example  the  embryonic  development 
of  the  Proteads  and  the  development  of  the  parts  of  the  flower  I 
might  mention  as  untouched  subjects,  for  the  investigation  of 
which  a  botanist  resident  in  Australia  has  special  opportunities. 
The  mode  of  fertilisation  of  members  of  this  order  is  also  still  a 
matter  of  conjecture.     Another  promising  subject  for  investigation 


president's  address.  719 

in  the  ProteaceaB  is  the  leaves.  While  comparatively  uniform 
and  highly  specialised  as  regards  the  structure  of  their  flowers 
the  members  of  this  characteristic  order  are,  as  you  are  aware, 
distinguished  by  a  great  amount  of  variety  in  the  form  and 
texture  of  the  leaves :  it  is  the  foliage,  in  fact,  that  is  protean 
much  more  than  the  flower ;  and  the  remarkable  circum- 
stance connected  with  this  variability  in  the  leaves  is  that 
widely  divergent  forms  of  leaf  are  to  be  found  in  members  of  the 
order  otherwise  closely  allied.  How  are  such  extreme  differences 
to  be  explained  1  It  seems  probable,  a  priori,  that  a  thorough- 
going investigation  would  reveal,  in  some  instances  at  least,  a 
definite  usefulness  to  the  plant  of  the  particular  form  of  leaf  to  be 
observed ;  and  perhaps  this  order  is  one  through  which  general 
results  on  the  meaning  of  various  forms  of  leaves  might  favourably 
be  attained.  There  is  a  peculiarity  in  the  minute  structure  of  the 
leaves  of  certain  Proteacece  (species  of  Banksia)  which  they  share 
with  the  Oleander,  that  has  not  been  fully  accounted  for.  This 
consists  in  the  presence,  on  the  under  surface,  of  numerous  very 
minute  apertures  bordered  with  hairs,  leading  into  cavities  in  the 
substance  of  the  leaf — the  stomata  being  entirely  or  almost 
entirely  confined  to  these  cavities,  instead  of  being  dotted  over 
the  general  surface.  Whether,  as  has  been  conjectured,  the 
object  of  this  arrangement  is  to  prevent  the  stomata  from  being 
clogged  by  excessive  moisture,  transpiration  thus  being  seriously 
interfered  with,  remains  to  be  determined  :  it  seems  unlikely, 
taking  into  account  the  circumstances  under  which  the  Banksias 
now  live,  that  any  such  special  modification  to  provide  against 
excess  of  moisture  is  required. 

The  zoologist  has  before  him  in  Australia  a  very  extensive  field. 
Leaving  out  of  account  such  departments  of  his  subject  as  can 
equally  well  be  dealt  with  in  other  parts  of  the  world,  there  are 
many  themes  for  dealing  with  which  he  has  special  advantages 
owing  to  his  position  in  Australia.  Let  me  briefly  direct  your 
attention  to  a  few  of  these. 

The  Protozoa  are  so  cosmopolitan  in  their  distribution  that  they 
do  not  display  very  marked  geographical  features.      Most  of  the 


720  president's  address. 

Rhizopoda  and  Infusoria  which  we  find  in  the  sea  or  in  fresh 
water  here  are  nearly  i-elated  to,  though  very  often  clearly 
distinguishable  from,  northern  forms.  Some  peculiar  forms  have, 
however,  been  observed,  and  T  think  that  a  student  of  any  of  the 
groups  of  Australian  Infusoria  or  Rhizopoda  need  not  despair  of 
finding  something  new  of  importance  and  interest.  Among  the 
Sporozoa  a  species  of  Myxobolus  (  Myxosporidia)  is  common  as  a 
parasite  of  certain  frogs,  and  affords  a  good  opportunity  for  the 
investigation  of  the  unknown  life-history  of  that  group.  Sponges 
are  so  abundant  and  varied  that  the  working  out  of  the  embryology 
which  is  thoroughly  known  in  so  few  cases,  ought  to  be  a  fruitful 
subject  of  study. 

The  Australian  lower  groups  of  worms  have  only  been  examined 
as  regards  certain  small  and  restricted  groups — that  which  has 
hitherto  received  most  attention  being  that  of  the  Land-Planarians. 
The  Rhabdoccela  and  the  marine  Polycladidcn  and  Tricladidce  are, 
with  the  exception  of  a  few  superficially  described  (by  Stimpson 
and  Schmarda),  entirely  untouched  ;  and  the  same  holds  good  of 
the  Trematodes  and  Cestodes,  while  I  only  know  of  three  published 
descriptions  of  Australian  species  of  marine  Nenierteans.  Dr. 
Cobb  is  expected  to  render  a  good  account  of  the  free-living 
Nematodes  ;  but  the  parasitic  forms  are  in  the  same  position  as 
the  Cestodes  and  Trematodes,  and  the  same  may  be  said  of  the 
Acanthocephala.  No  Australian  Archiannelida  are  known  ;  but 
they  and  the  Australian  Enteropneusta  are  biding  their  time. 

Of  the  Ch^etopoda,  on  the  other  hand,  we  know  many.  Prof. 
Baldwin  Spencer  and  Mr.  J.  J.  Fletcher  are  both  occupied  with 
the  terrestrial  OligochaBta  ;  but  the  fresh-water  Oligocholia,  though 
numerous  and  varied,  have  not  yet  received  their  due  share  of 
attention.  Of  the  Polychce.ta  there  are  a  number  of  families  that 
have  not  even  been  touched  ;  though,  judging  from  what  is 
already  known,  there  is  not  likely  to  be  a  wide  divergence  from 
the  fauna  of  other  regions.  Of  the  Leeches  only  three  or  four 
species  have  been  described  out  of  a  considerable  number  that 
have  been  observed.  A  good  deal  still  remains  to  be  done  with 
the  Gephyrea,  though  a  few  have  been  superficially  described  by 


president's  address.  721 

Baird  and  others.  Neither  Echiurus  nor  Sternas]ns  have  as  yet 
been  observed  in  Australian  seas. 

In  the  great  group  of  the  Mollusca  one  of  the  most  promising 
entirely  new  fields  for  research  is  the  development  of  the  Pearly 
Nautilus,  for  though  this  survivor  from  remote  times  is  only 
occasionally  found  on  the  Australian  coast,  yet  operations  against 
it  would  best  be  conducted  with  Australia  as  a  base.  The 
development  of  the  Paper  Nautilus  (Argonauta)  is  also  an 
important  desideratum  in  Zoological  science ;  but  unhappily  the 
visits  of  the  Argonauts  are  not  to  be  reckoned  on.  The  develop- 
ment of  Sjrirula,  on  the  other  hand,  ought  not  to  be  beyond  the 
reach  of  well-directed  efforts. 

Among  the  Brachiopoda,  Waldheimia  Jlavescens  is  somewhat 
abundant  at  some  points  in  Port  Jackson,  and  whoever  takes  it 
in  hand  may  contribute  something  of  importance  to  our  somewhat 
scanty  knowledge  of  the  development  of  this  class. 

There  is  much  to  be  done  in  describing  species  in  the  various 
orders  of  Crustacea  and  Insecta,  while  among  the  Arachnida 
whole  sections  remain  untouched. 

The  Australian  Tunicata  offer  a  promising  field  for  research. 
Professor  W.  A.  Herdman  has  taken  in  hand  the  description  of 
a  number  of  them,  and  we  hope  soon  to  have  his  account  of  them ; 
but  there  is  much  in  this  class  that  can  only  be  adequately  done 
on  the  spot  with  abundance  of  fresh  material.  The  observer  in 
Sydney  ought,  I  may  here  remark,  to  be  peculiarly  favourably 
situated  for  working  out  the  development  of  that  most  interesting 
of  all  Tunicates — Appendicularia — since  both  Append icularia 
proper  and  Fritillaria  occur  in  abundance  in  Port  Jackson  right 
up  to  the  wharves  of  Sydney. 

The  investigation  of  the  development  of  some  of  the  peculiar 
Australian  forms  of  fishes  would  be  of  immense  importance  and 
interest.  I  may  mention  the  Port  Jackson  shark  ( Heterodontus 
or  OestracionJ,  Trygonorhina,  Pristiophorus,  and  Gallorhynchus 
as  particularly  tempting.  The  development  of  Ceratodus  is  still  a 
desideratum  ;  but  I  trust  we  shall  hear  something  about  it  before 
long. 


722  president's  address. 

There  are  so  many  peculiar  forms  of  Australian  Batrachia  that  a 
life-time  might  be  spent  in  working  out  the  development  of  some  of 
the  more  interesting  forms.  Pseudophryne,  with  its  limited  number 
of  large  ova,  undergoing  the  early  stages  of  their  development  out 
of  the  water,  and  that  remarkable  genus  Chelydobatrachus  may  be 
mentioned  as  particularly  likely  to  yield  important  results. 

Among  the  reptiles  the  development  of  the  crocodiles  is  now, 
since  the  publication  of  the  results  of  Clarke's  and  Yoeltzkow's 
observations,  no  longer  terra  incognita ;  but  the  peculiar  fresh- 
water tortoises  of  Australia  would,  doubtless,  well  repay  investi- 
gation in  this  direction,  and  so,  no  doubt,  would  many  of  the 
genera  of  Lacertilia  and  Ophidia. 

Of  the  birds,  the  anatomy  of  some  of  the  peculiar  families,  such 
as  the  scrub  birds,  the  lyre  birds,  and  others,  is  only  known  (and 
that  imperfectly)  as  regards  the  skeleton.  The  most  interesting 
of  the  birds,  as  regards  the  development,  is,  of  course,  the  emu, 
some  of  the  stages  of  which  I  have  had  the  opportunity  of 
examining,  though  the  later  stages  still  require  to  be  investigated. 

Our  information  on  the  development  of  those  characteristic  and 
remarkable  Mammals — the  Monotremes — is  still  of  the  most 
meagre  character,  and  among  the  Marsupials  not  only  is  there 
little  known  as  to  the  embryology,  but  in  many  cases,  such  as 
Peragalea^  Chaeropus,  and  ffypsiprymnodon,  even  the  anatomy 
of  many  of  the  systems  of  organs  is  unknown. 

The  foregoing  is,  I  am  conscious,  a  very  imperfect  sketch  of 
some  of  the  things  we  do  not  know  ;  but  it  may  serve  to  indicate 
how  much  still  remains  to  be  done  by  the  biologist  in  Australia, 
while  it  may  by  chance  be  of  use  in  suggesting  some  subjects  of 
investigation  likely  to  yield  interesting  and  important  results. 


On  the  motion  of  Dr.  Cox,  a  vote  of  thanks  was  accorded  to 
Professor  Has  well  for  his  able  address. 

Dr.  Cox  moved  and  Mr.  Maiden  seconded, — "  That,  in  the 
opinion  of  this  meeting,  in  order  to  commemorate  in  a  suitable 
manner  the  late  Sir  William  Macleay's  benefits  to  the  Society 


OFFICE-BEARERS    AND    COUNCIL.  723 

and  to  Science  in  general,  a  memorial  volume,  consisting  of 
original  scientific  contributions  by  members  of  the  Society  and 
others,  be  published,  as  suggested  by  the  President  in  bis  Address, 
and  that  the  Council  of  the  Society  be  asked  to  make  all  necessary 
arrangements." 

The  motion  was  carried  unanimously. 

The  President,  in  the  unavoidable  absence  of  the  Hon. 
Treasurer,  made  a  short  statement  as  to  the  finances  of  the 
Society,  showing  that,  on  December  31st  last,  there  was  a  credit 
balance  in  the  bank  of  £86  8s. 

The  following  gentlemen  were  elected 

OFFICE-BEARERS   AND   COUNCIL   FOR    1892. 

President  : 

Professor  W.  A.  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc. 

Vice-Presidents  : 

James  C.  Cox,  M.D.,  F.L.S. 

Rev.  W.  Woolls,  Ph.D.,  F.L.S. 

Henry  Deane,  M.A.,  M.I.C.E. 

Honorary  Secretaries  : 

P.  N.  Trebeck,  J.P. 

Thomas  Dixson,  M.B.,  Ch.M. 

Honorary  Treasurer  : 
The  Hon.  James  Norton,  LL.D.,  M.L.C. 

Director  and  Librarian  : 
J.  J.  Fletcher,  M.A.,  B.Sc. 

Council  : 

John  Brazier,  F.L.S.  Cecil  W.  Darley,  C.E. 

N.  A.  Cobb,  Ph.D.  J.  H.  Maiden,  F.L.S.,  F.C.S. 

Professor  T.  W.  E.  David,  E.  G.  W.  Palmer. 

B.A.,  F.C.S.  Percival  R.  Pedley. 

Robert  Etheridge,  Jun.  Thomas  Whitelegge,  F.R.M.S. 
47 


INDEX  TO  VOL.  VI 

(SECOND    SERIES.) 
Names  in  Italics  are  Synonyms. 


— *n 

PAGE 

st— 

PAGE 

Abispa  australiana 

...       15 

Adelium  similatum 

...  535 

Abraxas    ... 

...  631 

tropicum 

...  537 

Absyrtes  magnificaria    . 

...  653 

victoriae 

...  535 

Abutilon  leucopetalum  . 

...  460    .Echalia 

...  545 

Acacia  conspersa... 

.      468,  469 

Agarista  albamedia 

...  301 

decurrens           5 

37,  610,  621, 

cseruleotincta   ... 

...  303 

[654,  680 

donovani 

302,  303 

fiavescens 

468 

latinus   ... 

...  302 

hemignosta 

468 

semyron 

...  304 

kelleri  ... 

468 

simplex... 

...  301 

linaroides 

468 

tropica   ... 

302,  303 

lycopodifolia 

467 

Agathia  distributa 

...  296 

pallida  ... 

...  469 

iodioides 

...  296 

penninervis 

...   138 

laitata    ... 

...  297 

prominens 

.      572,  577 

lycsenaria 

...  297 

sentis    ... 

...     33 

Alastor      

...     13 

sericata 

...  468 

Albizzia  canescens 

...  469 

stipuligera 

...  468 

Alchornea  ilicifolia 

...  166 

suberosa 

...  469 

Alsophila ■ 

...  718 

tetragonophylla . 

...  138 

Amelora     582,  583,  646 

translucens 

...  467 

amblopa 

647,  649 

Acidalia  primaria 

.    642 

arotraea 

647,  651 

Ackama  muelleri 

...  138 

australis 

647,  649 

Actinotus  helianthi 

...     44 

catacris  ... 

647,  650 

Adansonia  gregorii 

...  133 

demistis... 

647,  648 

Adelium    ... 

...  543 

goniota  

...  647 

aequale  ... 

...  539 

leucaniata 

647,  651 

alpicola  ... 

...  536 

milvaria 

647,  650 

angulatum 

.      538,  540 

sparsularia 

647,  648 

augurale 

...  537 

Ammophila  suspiciosa    ... 

...     14 

auratum 

...  538 

Amphioxus  lanceolatus  ... 

...  155 

brevicorne 

...  536 

Anas  elapsa 

...  455 

calosomoides    . 

.      536,  537 

Ancylus  australicus 

563,  575 

cisteloides 

.      539,  540 

Andropogon  montanus  ... 

...  477 

iucouspicuum  .. 

...  536 

procerus     . . . 

...  477 

lindense...          1 

38,  539,  540 

sericeus  var. 

poly- 

neophyta 

.      535,  536 

stacha    . . . 

...  477 

parallelum 

...  540 

triticeus     . . . 

...  477 

porcatum 

...  537 

Aneitea  graeffei 

...  595 

pustulosum 

.      534,  535 

Angophora           

...  253 

INDEX. 


PAGE 

Angophora  cordif  olia     253 

intermedia,  61,  253,  254, 

[255,  257,  307 

lanceolata,  253,  254,  255, 

[257,  307 

subvelutina...         ...  253 

woodsiana    ...      253,  254 

Anisomeles  salvifolia      474 

Anoglypta  launcestonensis,  22,  25,  26 

Anoplognathus  boisduvali         ...  494 

brevicollis         ...  493 

macleayi  . .    495 

odewahni     494,  495, 

[496 

...  494 

...  300 

...  293 

...  293 

...  293 

...  293 

...  292 

...  477 

...     16 

...  531 

...  149 


rugosus. 
Anteia  canescens... 
Antheraea  banksii 

eucalypti 
helenae 
intermedia     . . 
loranthi 
Anthistiria  membranacea 
Anthopora  pulchra 
Apalochrus  cinctus 

Aphelenchus         

Apis  mellifica 

Aporoctena  

scierodes 

Appendicularia    ... 

Apteryx  449,  450,  451,  452,  453 

australis  ...         ...  451 

mantelli,  449,  451,  452,  453 
[456 
Arethusina 


585,  622 
...  622 
721 


Argonauta 

Aristida  ramosa  ... 

Artematopus 

Artocarpus  incisus 

Arundinella  nepalensis  . 

Aspilates  clarissa 
exfusaria 
pallidiscaria  . 

Asplenium  nidus ... 

Aster  axillaris 

Astrseus     ... 

badeni 
jansoni  ... 
major 
mastersi ... 
meyricki 


pygma'us 
samovelli 


Astragalus 


317 

...  721 

...  703 

...  523 

...  90 

...  477 

...  592 

...  590 

...  612 

559,  682 

...  665 

...  496 

...  496 

...  496 

...  496 

...  496 

...  496 

...  496 

...  496 

...  681 


Astur         

Asura  bisecta 
Atalaya  hemiglauca 
Atopos 

australis  ... 
prismaticus 
Babbagia  ... 

Badistes     

gidosa  . . . 
Balea  australis  ... 
Banksia  dentata  . . . 

sp. 

Barringtonia  acutangula 
Baza 
Bellardiella 

minor 
Bipalium  kewense 
Biziura 

exhumata 
Blepegenes  aruspex 
equestris 
nitidus 
Boarmia  acaciaria 
alienaria 
attacta  ... 
attenta  ... 
attributa 
bitaeniaria 
camelaria 
canescaria 
cognata... 
decertaria 
displicata 
disrupta 
epistictis 
exsuperata 
gelidaria 
illustrariti 
lyciaria 
poecilaria 
proposita 
semitata 
suasaria 
Boronia  barkeriana 

serrulata 
Bossirea  phylloclada 
Brachychiton  diversifolius 

paradoxus 
Brachyscelis  ovicola 

pharetrata 
Brada  inhabilis    ... 
mammillata 
Bradshawia 


PAGE 

...  438 

...  279 

...  463 

693,  694 

551,  694 

...  694 

465,  682 

321,  322 

324,  326 

...  570 

...  471 

...  719 

...  470 

123,  438 

...  560 

102,  116 

...  44 

...  449 

...  455 

...  533 

...  533 

...  533 

...  617 

...  617 

...  624 

...  613 

...  609 

...  616 

...  630 

...  603 

...  606 

...  609 

...  617 

...  59S 

...  619 

...  628 

...  617 

...  618 

...  604 

...  604 

...  601 

...  604 

...  601 

...  6S2 

...  682 

...  465 

...  460 

...  460 

...  577 

...  682 

346,  349 

...  340 

...  473 


INDEX. 


111. 


PAGE 

PAGE 

Bridelia  tomentosa 

...  463 

Carenum  brisbanense     ... 

...  431 

Bronteus    ... 

...  317 

campestre 

...  430 

Buechnera  browniana     . . . 

...  474 

castelnaui 

...  431 

Bulbine  bulbosa  ... 

...  135 

decorum 

...  431 

Bulimus  beddomei 

...     97 

dispar  ... 

...  429 

bidwilli  .. 

...  557 

distinctum 

...  430 

dufresni      19,  22, 

24,  25,  26 

habilis  ... 

...  428 

hobsoni  

...  567 

ignotum 

427,  428 

macconnelli 

...  570 

inconspicuum... 

...  428 

macleayi... 

97,  694 

kingi    ... 

...  431 

mastersi... 

...     21 

murrumbidgense 

...  431 

scotti 

...  568 

occidtum 

...  431 

tasmanicus 

21,  25 

odewahni 

...  430 

Bulinus      

...  563 

ordinatum 

...  430 

beddomei 

...  562 

scaritioides 

...  428 

brazieri ... 

...  575 

scittdum 

...  430 

fusiformis 

...  563 

sex  puncta  turn 

...  431 

gibbosus 

...  575 

subcostatum    . . . 

...  431 

gracilentus 

...  562 

submetallicum 

...  431 

kreffti      

...  562 

viridipenne 

...  430 

mammillatus    . . . 

...  562 

ivestwoodi 

...  430 

pectorosus 

...  562 

Carphibis  ... 

442,  443 

productus 

...  562 

Cartonema  spicatum 

...  475 

proteus  ... 

562,  575 

Carya  australis    ... 

...  470 

pyramidatus     . . . 

...  563 

Gasbia  irrorata    ... 

...  636 

reevei  var.  obesus 

...  562 

rectaria    ... 

...  636 

var.  truncatus  . . .  562 

Cassia  concinna   ... 

...  467 

Burtonia  subulata 

...  465 

mimosoidea 

...  467 

Butea  frondosa    ... 

...  680 

sp 

...  136 

Byblis  liniflora     ... 

..    458 

Casuarina  suberosa 

...  704 

Bythinia  tryoni    ... 

...  564 

Celmus 

...  313 

Callicarpa  pedunculata  . . . 

...  166 

Centranthera  hispida     ... 

...  474 

Callicoma  serratifolia     ... 

...  138 

Ceratodus ... 

236,  721 

Calligenia  melitaula 

...  279 

Ceroplatus  mastersi 

...  249 

pilch  eri 

...  279 

Cestracion 

...  721 

Callimorpha  selenaea 

...  653 

Chaeropus... 

...  722 

Calliscapterus      

...  430 

Chalcolampra 

...  542 

Callorhynchus 

...  721 

Chalcophaps 

...  121 

Calochromus 

...  528 

Charopa  duncani.., 

...  574 

Calophyllum  inophyllum 

...  134 

funerea  ... 

553,  574 

Caly cia  isseliana  ... 

...     97 

iuloidea 

...  553 

Calycothrix  microphylla 

...  469 

mussoni... 

...  574 

Camaena   ... 

...  325 

nautiloides 

...  574 

Canarium  australasicum 

...  463 

"  omicron... 

...  553 

Canavallia  obtusifolia    ... 

...  467 

paradoxa 

...  574 

Cardiophorus  bicolor 

...  516 

texta 

79,  116 

elisus 

...  516 

Cheilanthes  tenuifolia    ... 

..  478 

eucalypti... 

...  516 

vellea 

...  478 

victoriensis 

...  516 

Cheiragra  macleayi 

...  482 

Carenidium  kreusleree    . . . 

...  432 

Chelyconus  worcesteri    ... 

...  276 

lacustre 

...  432 

Chelydobatrachus 

...  722 

Carenum  arenarium 

...  431 

Ghemerina  cuneifera 

...  663 

bonellii 

...  430 

Chenopis    .. 

...  449 

IV. 


INDEX. 


PAGE 

Chiroleptes  australis       168,  264,  270 

platycephalus     125,  265, 

[269,  270,  271,  272 

Chlenias    ...  582,  583,  647,  652,  660, 

[662,  673 

arietaria  ...      662,  663 

auctaria...  ..         ...  664 

banksiaria         ...      662,  664 
beggaria  ...        ...  660 

belidearia  ...         ...  659 

carburaria         ...      662,  666 
crambaria         ...  ..  663 

fucata 658 

galearia ...  674 

indecisata  ...         ...  664 

melanoxysta     ...      662,  663 
porphyrinaria    ..          ...  660 

seminigra  ...      662,  666 

umbraticaria     ...      662,  664 
vittuligera  ...         ...  651 

zonaea   ...         ...      662,  665 

Chloraema  ...         ...         ...  343 

dujardinii      338,  342,  351 

edwardsii      338 

Chloritis 693,  694 

aridorum         ...         ...  555 

beatricis  ...         ...  691 

blackmani        ...         ...  555 

brevipila  555 

chloritiodes      688,  694,  696 

dinodeomorpha  ...     83 

leei       69,  83,  687,  696,  697 

var.  papuensis        ...     83 

var.  sudestensis      ...     83 

var.  woodlarkensis        83 

mansueta  ...         ...  555 

porteri  ...  84,  555,  688,  694 

rehsei 691 

subcorpulentus  ...     84 

Ghoara  siculoides 643 

Chosornis 448 

praeteritus       454 

Chromadora         154,  156 

Chrysis  sp.  ...         ...         ...      13 

Ciampa  defixella  .  .         ...         ...  663 

Ciconia      ...         ...         ...         ...  442 

Circus        438 

Cirratulus...         ...         ...         ...  347 

Claytonia  uniflora  ..  ...  464 

Gleora  velutinaria  ...         ...  630 

Cochlospermum  heteronemum ...  459 

Cochlostyla  693 

papuensis    ...        96,  116 


PACE 

Cocos  nucifera     ... 

133 

Coeliaxis  australis 

..      559,570 

Commelina  ensifolia 

475 

Conosara  

..      584,  660 

castanea 

660 

Conulus  maino     ... 

75,  115 

russelli  ... 

101 

starkei   ...     75,  76,  101,  115 

subrugosa         75 

turriculatus      553 

Couus  worcesteri 276 

Coppingeria   332,  336,  337,  340,  341, 

[344,  345,  347,  348,  349,  351 

longisetosa  329,  332, 

[351,  352,  355,  356 

Corbicula  minor 564 

nepeanensis    ...         ...  575 

ovalina  ...         ...  564 

prolong  ata      575 

Corchorus  allenii 462 

echinatus       462 

elderi 462 

hirsutus         ...         ...  462 

Cosymbia 583,  591 

clarissa  ...      591,  592 

penthearia      ...      591,  592 
rupicolor        ...         ...  591 

Crinia  froggatti 274,  275 

georgiana ...         ...         ...  276 

signif era  . . .         272,  273,  274 

victoriana 276 

Criomacha  ...         ...      583,  659 

belidearia     ...         ...  659 

Cristigibba  corniculum 82 

deaniana      ...         ...     81 

dentoni         ...         ...     82 

dominula      ...         ...     81 

macgregori    82,  116,  687, 

[696 

plagiocheila...          ...     81 

rhodomphala  var. 

alpha        81 

Crocallis  newmannaria  ...         ...  673 

Crocisa  nitidula  ...         ...         ...     16 

Crotalaria  alata   ...         ...         ...  466 

calycina         ...         ...  465 

crassipes  ..         ...  465 

incana  ...         ...  466 

laburnifolia   ...         ...  466 

linifolia  ..  ...  465 

medicaginea  ...         ...  466 

retusa...         ...         ...  465 

verrucosa       ...         ...  465 


INDEX. 


v. 


PAGE 

PAGE 

Ctenodrilus          

...  347 

Diastictis  australiaria    . . . 

...  587 

Cyathus 

...  167 

margaritis 

587,  588 

Cycas  media        

...  475 

Dicliptera  glabra 

...  474 

Cyclothorax  eyrensis 

...  480 

Didiscus  hemicarpus 

...  470 

f  ortis 

...  481 

Dinoria  picta 

...  543 

lophoides    . . 

...  481 

Dinornis 

...  453 

obsoletus    .. 

...  481 

queenslandiae . . . 

...  455 

peryphoides 

...  480 

Dioseorea  sativa ... 

...  475 

punctipennis 

480,  481 

Dipeltis     

143,  155 

Cyclotropis  papuensis    .. 

...  108 

cirrhatus 

...  156 

Cyclotus  belfordi... 

109,  116 

minor  ... 

...  156 

horridus             80, 

typicus 

...  157 

kowaldi 

109,  116 

Diphucephala  aurulenta 

...  482 

levis 

...  692 

elegans 

...  481 

novae-hibernae  .. 

...  693 

Diplommatina      

693,  694 

poirieri... 

...  108 

egregia    . . . 

...  561 

tristis    ...         108, 

minus 

...  561 

Cynanchum  floribundum 

...  473 

scalatella 

...  561 

pedunculatur 

n       ...  473 

symmetrica 

107,  116 

Cyphaspis 

...  319 

Diplomorpha  coxi 

...  571 

bowningensis 

...  312 

Diplosis  sp. 

...  249 

Cyphon     ...    517,  520,  521,  522,  523 

Diprotodon      160,  162,  163 

164,  165 

pallidulus 

521,  522 

Discalma  ... 

585,  590 

variabilis 

...  521 

normata 

...  590 

Cypraea  tigris      

...      8 

Discoelius  sp 

...     14 

Cystopelta 

...     29 

Distichostemon  phyllopterus   ...  463 

petterdi 

24,26 

Dolichandrone  heterophylla     ...  474 

Dacelo 

...  444 

Dorylaimus     143,  146,  147, 

148,  149, 

Dsedrosis  victoriae 

...  533 

[150,  151 

152,  153 

Daphnandra  micrantha  .. 

...  284 

latus 

...  150 

Darala  asciscens  ... 

...  288 

Dromaius 

447,  451 

expansa    ... 

...  286 

gracilipes      445, 

447,  448, 

linearis     ... 

...  289 

[455,  456 

magnifica 

286,  289 

novae-hollandiaa 

446,  447, 

rosea 

...  291 

[448 

rubriscripta 

...  291 

patricius       446, 

447,  448, 

scortea 

...  290 

[455 

stygiana  ... 

...  288 

Dromoeohis  interioris 

...  502 

succinea   ... 

290,  291 

lugubris 

...  503 

Dascillus 

...  518 

Dromornis            

...  453 

Deilinia     ...            584,  600,  633,  634 

australis 

...  455 

cremnias 

635,  638 

Drosera  indica     

...  458 

eccentritis 

...  635 

petiolaris 

...  458 

impressaria 

635,  636 

Drymoptila          

585,  670 

lithodora 

634,  637 

temenitis     . . . 

...  670 

ochthadia 

635,  639 

Echinocarpus  australis  ... 

140,  141 

oenias 

635,  637 

Echiurus  

...  721 

reetaria  ... 

635,  636 

Ectropis     ..          ...         583 

624,  625 

Dendrobium  speciosum   . 

...  125 

argalea  ... 

626,  627 

Dendrocygna  validipennis 

...  455 

camelaria 

626,  630 

Desmodium  biarticulaturr 

i        ...  467 

exsuperata        626 

627,  628 

parvifolium 

...  466 

fractaria            612, 

626,  629 

Diastictis 

583,  586 

isombra... 

626,  627 

VI. 


INDEX. 


Ectropis  pristis   . . . 

subtinctaria 
Ectrosia  leporina... 
Ellopia  cumularia 
Emex  australis     ... 
Enchytrajus 
Endotricha  crobulus 


PAGE 

...  626 
626,  628 
...  477 
...  673 
...  578 
...  347 
...  305 
dispergens    ...         ...  306 

pyrosalis      ...         ...  306 

Enoplus  cirrhatus  ...         ...   155 

Epicompsa  ...         ...      584,  585 

xanthcrossa  ...         .'..  585 

Epione  incaria     ...         ...         ...  673 

Equisetum  167 

Eremophila  373 

mitchelli      ...      278,  279 

Eriachne  obtusa    .  476 

squarrosa  476 

Erianthus  irritans  ...         ...  477 

Eriocaulon  setaceum      ...         ...  476 

Eriochloa  punctata         ...         ...  703 

Erythrauchen       121 

Erythrina  indica 680 

vesper tilio      ...         ...  467 

Esacus       442 

Eucalyptus    49,  53,  54,  55,  57,  58,  59, 

61,  65,  69,   253,  389, 

503,  504,  505,  507,  516, 

537,  670 

abergiana    ...         ...     65 

acervula      ...         ...     50 

acmenoides . . .         ...  391 

aliens  ...      391,  395 

ambigua      ...         ..      51 

amygdalina...  51,  56,  64 

aspera  53 

aurantiaca  ...         ...     53 

bauerleni     391,  402,  409 
baxteri         ...         ...     56 

bicolor          ...  53,  56 

bigalerita    ...         ...     53 

botryoides,  49,  50,  51,  58 
brachyandra  ...     53 

brevifolia 53 

calophylla    55,  392,  424, 

[425 

capitellata  ...    49,  50,  59 

cinerea         ...         ...     64 

citriodora  ...  53,  419 
clavigera  ...53,  56,  392, 
[411,  416 
cneorifolia  ...  51,  136 
conf  ertiflora  ...     53 


PAGE 

Eucalyptus  cordata        ...  51,64 

cornuta,50,  391,  392,401 

corymbosa  ...    8,  49,  50, 

51,  65,  254,  390,  392, 

402,  411,  412,  415, 

416 

corynocalyx       391,  392, 

[397,  400 

crebra  ...         ...     53 

cunninghami  ...     51 

dichromophloia      ...     53 
diversifolia  . . .         ..      51 

doratoxylon  ...     64 

elongata       ...         ...     51 

ery  throcorys  ...     64 

eugenioides...  56,  59 

eximia,  58,  392,  411,  416 
exserta        ..,         ...     53 
fabrorum     ...         ...  404 

fasciculosa  390,  391,  392, 
[396,  397 

ferruginea 53 

fibrosa  ...         ...     53 

ficifolia        ...  ...     65 

f  oelscheana ...         ...     65 

gamophylla  64,  65 

glauca  ...         ...     51 

globulus      ...  51,  58,  64, 

[392,  406,  407,  425 

gomphocephala      ...     51 

goniocalyx,  64,  391,  402, 

[404,  408 

grandifolia 55 

gunnii,  135,  391,  402,  407 

haamastoma...  49,  50,  51, 

[58,  59,  60 

hemilampra  ...     53 

hemiphloia...     391,392, 

[394,  395 

var.  albens       391,  395 

hypericifolia  51,  56 

incrassata    ...         ...     50 

largiflorens ...         ...     60 

latifolia       ...         ...     53 

leptophleba  ...     53 

leucoxylon,  63,  390,  391, 

392,  398,  399,  400, 

401,  577 

var.  minor  ...  400 

ligustrina    ...         ...     51 

lindleyana  ...         ...     51 

longifolia     ...  50,  56,  60, 
[392,  409,  411 


INDEX. 


Vll. 


PAGE 

Eucalyptus  macrocarpa...         ...     64 

maculata,  56,  58,  59,  255, 

256,  389,  390,  391, 

392,  408,  409,  417, 

418,  419,  422 

maideni      391,  402,  406, 

[407 

marginata 50 

media  ...         ...     51 

melanophloia  53,  64 

melissiodora  ...     53 

melliodora  ...     391,  392, 
[396,  400 
micrantha   ...         ...     50 

microcorys  ...     389,  390, 

[391,  392,  411,  422 

microphylla  ...     51 

microtheca  ...         ...     53 

myrtifolia    ...         ...     51 

obliqua        ...    49,  50,  51 
oblonga        ...         ...     50 

obtusifolia  ...         ...     51 

odontocarpa  53,  64 

odorata        391,  392,  395 

oldfieldii      65 

ovata  ...         ...     51 

pachyphylla  53,  65 

pallens          ...         ...     51 

paniculata  ...  49,  50,  51, 

60,  61,  63,  391, 

396,  577 

var.  angustifolia...  397 

patellaris     ...         ...     53 

pellata  ...         ...     58 

perfoliata    ...  56,  64 

persicifolia ...  ...     50 

phcenicea     ...         ...     53 

pilularis,  49,50,51,  60,  64 
piperita       49,  50,  51,  59 

platyphylla 53 

polyanthema  56,  63 

polycarpa    ...         ...     53 

populifolia  ...         ...  394 

populnea      ...         ...     53 

pruinosa      ...         ...     64 

ptycbocarpa,  53,  65,  469 
pulverulenta  51,  64 

pulvigera     ...         ...     51 

punctata      ...  50,  58,  60, 

[392,  409 

purpurascens  ...     51 

pyriformis  ...         ...     65 

radiata         ...         ...     51 


PAGE 

Eucalyptus  resinifera,  49,  50,  58,  425 
reticulata    ...         ...     51 

rigida  ...         ...     51 

risdoni         ...         ...     56 

robusta      49,  50,  59,  412 
rostrata       ...53,  61,  391, 
[402,  403,  406,  408 
saligna,  49,  50,  58,  59,  60 
santalifolia  ...  56,  65 

scabra  ...         ...     51 

semicorticata         ...     53 
setosa  ...  64,  65 

siderophloia  ...     56 

sideroxylon...       63,  391, 
[398,  399,  400 
signata         ...         ...     53 

stellulata     ...  50,  60 

stenophylla...         ...     51 

stricta  ...         ...     51 

stuartiana  ...       64,  391, 

[402,  405 

tectifica       ...         ...     53 

tereticornis...  49,  50,  53, 

[59,  60,  61 

terminalis    ...       53,  392, 

[411,  415,  469 

tesselaris     ...53,  65,  392, 

[411,  417 

tetragona    ...  64,  65 

tetrodonta  ...  53,  64,  469 

todtiana       ...         ...     65 

trachyphloia,53,392,426 
tuberculata ...         ...     51 

umbellata    ...         ...     51 

variegata     ...         ...     53 

viminalis    50,  56,  58,  60, 

64,  135,  391,  401,  402, 

404,  405,  406 

var.  multiflora    ...  405 

virgata        ...         ...     50 

Eucryphia  moorei  ...         ...   138 

Eulimella  laxa     247 

moniliforme   ...         ...  247 

Euowenia 160,  163,  164,  165 

grata   ...  160,  161,  162 

robusta  ...      160,  165 

Euphorbia  schizolepis    ...         ...  463 

Euschemon  rafflesias       ...         ...     30 

var.  albo-ornatus       30 
Eutoma  newmani  ...         ...  431 

punctulatum      ...         ...  431 

Exocarpos  latifolia  471 

Favosites  fibrosa 193 


Vlll. 


INDEX. 


PAGE 

PAGE 

Ficus  macrophylla 

... 

Geotrochus  hunsteiiii 

...     88 

platypoda  ... 

..  463 

lacteolatus  ... 

...     94 

Fidonia  amitaria  . . . 

..  673 

louisiadensis     69 

,  90,  92, 

atom  aria 

..  673 

[689,  695, 

696,  697 

Flabelligera  affinis 

... 

..  347 

macgillivrayi 

88,  694 

Flagellaria  indica 

..  476 

meditatus    ... 

...     93 

Flemingia  lineata 

..  467 

mendana 

...     94 

pauciflora 

..  467 

millicentee    ... 

...     90 

Fodina  gloriosa    ... 

..  304 

oxystoma       86, 

116,  691 

Foeniculum  vulgare 

..  135 

pelechystoma 

...    87 

Forbesia    ... 

312, 

ridibundus  ... 

...     93 

euryceps 

312,  313 

rollsianus  ...    70,  90,  91, 

Frenchia  casuarinse 

...  704 

[689, 

696,  697 

Fritillaria.. 

...  721 

siculus 

...     94 

Fruticola  coriaria 

...  325 

tapparonei  ... 

88,  116 

Fuirena  umbellata 

...  476 

taumantias  ... 

...     92 

Fulica 

...  439 

var  singulatus 

...     93 

prior 

439,  454 

taylorianus  ...    69,  87,  88 

Fusanus  spicatus . . . 

...  137 

var.  katauensis  ...     87 

Galaxias  monacha 

...  325 

var.  roseolabiatus      88 

Gallinula  ... 

...  439 

# 

var.  strabo 

...    87 

peralata 

440, 

454,  456 

var.  yulensis 

...     87 

strenuipes 

440, 

441,  454 

thomsoni 

...     91 

tenebrosa 

440,  441 

tomasinellianus 

...     93 

Gasteruption  sp 

...     13 

var.  alpha 

...     93 

Gastrin  a    ... 

584,  667 

var.  azonatus 

...     93 

cristaria 

...  668 

trobriandensis 

92,  116, 

erebina  . . . 

...  616 

[690,  695, 

696,  697 

Gastrolobium  grandiflorum 

...  465 

woodlarkianus 

91,  690, 

Geonemertes  chalicoph 

ora 

...  167 

[697 

palaensis 

...  167 

zeno  ... 

88,  116 

Georissa  multiliriata 

...  559 

var.  latiaxis 

...     88 

Geotrochus 

86,  691 

Glaucus  atlanticus 

...  576 

albocarinatus 

...     91 

var.  gracilis   ... 
var.  lineatus  ... 

...  576 

ambrosia 

...     94 

..    576 

bevairi 

116,  691 

var.  longicirrhus 

...  576 

boyeri    95, 

689, 

690,  696, 

jiagellum 

..    576 

[697 

pacificus... 

...  576 

bi^azierae 

70,  94 

peronii    ... 

...  576 

brumeriensis    69,  89,  90, 

Gleiche 

ilia  platyzoma     . . . 

...  478 

[116, 

689, 

696,  697 

Glenodinium  sp. 

...  167 

var.  albolabris    ...     89 

Gnophos  dentinal  aria 

...  613 

canovari 

...     95 

Gomph 

rena  canescens    ... 

...  464 

chapmani 

...     95 

flaccida 

...  463 

coniformis 

...     96 

globosa 

...  464 

coraliolabris 

...     95 

leptoclada    . . 

...  463 

dampieri 

...     96 

Gorgouia  sp. 

...      8 

diomedes 

...     89 

Gossypium  costulatum  ... 

...  460 

elisus 

"86, 

116,  691 

thespesioides 

...  459 

gestroi 

...     94 

Goura 

...  121 

(joldiei 

...     86 

Grevillea  agrifolia 

...  471 

gurgusti 

...     95 

dryandri 

...  471 

horderi 

..     96 

heliosperma    ... 

...  471 

INDEX. 


IX. 


PAGE 

...  140 
...  462 
...  704 
...  167 
...  645 
...  694 
84,  691 
...  556 
...  556 

broadbenti      69,  85,  688,  694, 
[696,  697 

coriaria 326 

derbyi       566 

f rased       ...         ...         ...  556 

gerrardi    ...         ...         ...     84 

gulosa    321,  322,  323,  326,  327 


Grewia  mollis 

polygama 
Gryllus  servillei  ... 
Gymnodinium  spirale     .. 
Gynopteryx  ada  ... 
Hadra        

beatricis  ... 

blomfieldi 

var.  warroensis 


hixoni 
incei 

var.  aureedensis 

var.  bay ensis    .. 

var.  lessoni 
inform  is    ... 
liverpoolensis 
monacha  ... 
morosa 
oscarensis... 
pachystyla 

var.  daemeli     .. 
rehsei 


84 
556 
556 

556 

556 

694 

...  574 

327 

324,  327 

565 

557 

557 
69,"  80,  84,  691 


rockhamptonensis          ...  555 

var.  pallida      ...         ...  556 

scotti         .. 326 

Hakea  arborescens          ...         ...  471 

saligna      ...         ...         ...  138 

Halia  australiaria          ...         ...  587 

Haliaetus 123,124,438 

leucogaster     ...      123,  437 

Haliastur 123,  124,  438 

Harpalus 543 

Hectomanes  crocea         ...         ...  2S3 

fusca           283 

simulans     ...         ...  283 

Hedleya 569 

macleayi            ...         ...  568 

Heleioporus  albopunctatus       ...  271 

pictus 
Helicarion 

fumosa 
hyalinus 
milligani 
musgravei 


robustus 


271,  272,  273 

77,  693 

24 

24 

24 

...77,  84,  llt>, 
[6S7,  691,  697 
24,  248,  552 


PAGE 

Helicarion  verreauxi 

24,26 

visi     

76,  116 

Helichrysum  lucidum    . . . 

...  472 

Helicina 

...  694 

congener 

...  112 

coxeni    ... 

69,  111 

dentoni  

...  112 

diversicolor 

...  561 

fischeriana 

...  112 

gladstonensis    ... 

...  562 

insularum    69,  113,  116,  692 
jana        ...         ...         ...  694 

leucostoma        ...         ...  115 

var.  muruensis  ...   113 

var.  rosselensis  ...  114 
var.  sinus  113,  114,  116 
var.  trobriandensis   ..   113 


Helodes 


...  114 

115,  116 

115,  116 

...  112 

...  112 

112,  114 

...  692 

114,  116 

...  474 

...     71 

...     85 

321,  322,  323,  324, 

[325,  326 

566 

576 

85 

...      321,  323 

321,  322,  323,  324, 

[325,  326,  327 

321 

.321,  322,  325,  326 

.321,  322,  324,  325 

322,  324,  325, 

[326,  327 

321,  322,  324,  325, 

[326,  327 

565 

scotti     321,  322,  324,  325,  326 


louisiadensis 

maino     ... 

multicoronata 

npvo-guineensis 

solitaria... 

Stanley  i... 

suprafasciata 

woodlarkensis 
Heliotropium  tenuifolium 
Helix  achilles 
bevani 


derbyi 

ericetorum 

goldiei 

grayi 

gulosa 

jervisensis. 
lessoni 

in  aster  si     . 
monacha    . 

morosa 

oscarensis  . 


adelaidas 
cinctus  . 
f rater 
lind  ensis 
minutus.. 
montivagans 


517,  518 
...  521,  522 
517,  518,  519 

520 

522 
'.'.'.  518,  519 
519 


olliffi      ...517,518,519,520 


X. 

INDEX. 

PAGE  i 

PAGE 

Helodes  ovensensis 

...  520 

1  Hyla  aurea           

264,  272 

pictus     ... 

520,  521 

cserulea       ...  44,  264 

,  265,  272 

princeps 

517,  523 

citropus 

212,  264 

spilotus 

...  521 

dentata 

...  274 

Htmerophila  excursa via 

...  598 

ewingii 

...  274 

luxaria 

...  609 

gracilenta  ...            44 

,  263,  264 

mundifera... 

...  598 

peronii        ...  44,  265 

,  272,  273 

silicaria 

...  598 

phyllochroa 

...  263 

vestita 

...  609 

rubella 

...  272 

Hemodia  lythrifolia 

...  474 

Hyperolia  mai-morata     ... 

...  272 

Hepialus  daphnandrse    ... 

...  284 

Hypochroma  aurantiacea 

...  297 

hilaris 

...  284 

diffundens 

...  298 

scotti    ... 

284,  285 

dissonata  ... 

...  629 

Heterodontus       

...  721 

muscosaria 

...  298 

Heteronyx           . . .          486 

,  490,  491 

nigraria    . . . 

...  629 

alpicola 

487,  489 

velutinata  . . . 

...  668 

anceps 

...  490 

Hypoestes  floribunda 

...  474 

auricomus 

...  490 

moschata 

...  474 

baldiensis 

...  485 

Hyposidra            

583,  588 

brevicornis    . . . 

...  492 

australis 

...  588 

consanguineus 

490,  491 

janiaria 

...  588 

deceptor 

...  489 

Hypsiprymnodon 

...  722 

diversiceps    ... 

...  492 

Icerya  purchasi   ... 

...  126 

f  roggatti 

...  489 

Idiodes 

585,  642 

frontalis 

...  491 

apicata    ... 

642,  643 

gracilipes 

...  488 

inspirata... 

...  643 

granum 

...  492 

introducta 

...  643 

ijicognitus     . . . 

487,  489 

mitigata  ... 

...  643 

lilliputanus  ... 

...  486 

primaria  ... 

...  642 

nasutus 

489,  490 

privata    ... 

...  658 

nitidus 

...  491 

punctiger 

...  643 

piceus...         486 

487,  488 

rinata 

...  643 

proditor 

...  492 

Indigofera  hirsuta 

...  466' 

pubescens 

...  489 

linifolia 

...  466 

punctipennis 

...  491 

trif  oliata 

...  466 

pygidialis 

..    492 

viscosa 

...  466 

raucinasus     ... 

...  491 

Iodis  barnardse     

...  293 

setifer 

..  491 

centrophylla 

...  295 

sloanei 

...  490 

crenulata     ... 

...  294 

spretus 

...  486 

implicata     ... 

...  293 

terrena 

486,  489 

leucomerata 

...  295 

tridens 

...  489 

militaris 

...  295 

victoris 

...  489 

multitincta... 

...  295 

Hibbertia  lepidota 

...  458 

ocyptera      

...  293 

Hibiscus  golds worthii    ... 

...  459 

Jasminum  simplicifolium 

...  472 

panduriformis  ... 

...  459 

Kibara  longipes  ... 

...  682 

tiliaceus 

...     90 

Knoxia  corymbosa 

...  472 

zonatus 

...  459 

Laccopterum  loculosum... 

...  430 

Hybernia 

584,  623 

variolosum 

...  430 

boreophilaria  ... 

...  623 

Lacon        504,506, 

507,  508  • 

indocilis 

...  623 

adelaidae    ...505,  506, 

508,  509 

Hydrobia  brazieri 

...  563 

andersoni 

508,  509 

Hydrusa  recedens 

...  281 

brightensis 

503,  509 

INDEX. 


XI. 


PAGE 

PAGE 

Lacon  caliginosus 

505,  507 

Liparetrus  apser ... 

...  483 

carinulatus 

...  506 

brunneipennis 

...  484 

divaricatus 

506,  509 

depressus 

...  484 

duplex       . . .         506 

508,  509 

ferrugineus   ... 

484,  4S5 

eucalypti  ...         507 

508,  509 

iridipennis    ... 

...  483 

h  umilis 

...  509 

spretus 

...  482 

lacrymosus 

505,  509 

sylvicola 

...  483 

lindensis    ... 

504,  509 

Lithophaps           

...   121 

murrayensis 

504,  509 

ulnaris          122 

123,  454 

sculptus     ... 

...  504 

Livistona  sp. 

...  475 

variabilis  ... 

...  504 

Lobivanellus 

...  442 

variolus 

...  504 

sp 

439,  454 

victoriae    . . .          507 

508,  509 

Lomatia  f raseri 

...  139 

Lagyra  agrealesaria 

...  588 

Lomographa 

584,  633 

diffasata  ... 

...  588 

isocyma     ... 

633,  634 

infusata  ... 

...  588 

spodina 

...  633 

Laius  cinctus       

...  531 

Lophiocephalus    . . .         338 

341,  342 

eyrensis 

...  531 

Lophodes  ...         ...         583 

620,  621 

femoralis   ... 

...  531 

sinistraria 

...  620 

pretiosus   ... 

..    532 

Lophoictinia 

...  438 

ruf  ovirens ... 

...  532 

Lopholaimus 

...  121 

Larentia  exprimataria  . . . 

...  604 

antarcticus 

...  121 

Larina  strangei 

...  564 

Loranthus  acacioides 

...  472 

Lecanomerus  flavocinctus 

479,  480 

sp 

...  293 

major 

479,  480 

Loxosoma... 

...  330 

striatus     . . . 

...  479 

Lucerna  gulosa    ... 

...  324 

Leptopoma  gianelli 

...  110 

Ludwigia  parviflora 

...  470 

luteum 

...  110 

Luffa  aegyptiaca  ... 

...  248 

nitidum 

...   110 

graveolens  ... 

...  472 

parvum  111,116,693,694 

Luperus     ... 

...  549 

venustulum... 

...  Ill 

flavipes  ... 

...  549 

vitreum          70 

110,  694 

Lycaon  expulsus  ... 

...  503 

Leptospermum     ... 

606,  624 

Lycus  ochraceus  ... 

...  526 

Leschenaultia  agrostophylla     ...  472 

Lygodium  sp. 

478,  721 

Leucosarcia 

...  121 

Macaria  fr  Ontario, 

...  587 

Libythea  ... 

27,  28,  29 

gratularia 

...  587 

myrrha... 

27,  28,  29 

injixaria 

....  5S7 

nicevillei 

...     28 

'panagraria 

...  587 

rohini    ... 

...     29 

porrectaria 

...  587 

Licinoma  ... 

...  543 

remotaria 

...  587 

pallipes 

...  542 

Macropygia 

...  121 

Limax  laevis 

...  553 

Manihot  aipi 

...  578 

Limnea  lessoni 

562,  575 

Manisuris  granulans 

...  476 

var.  angasi     ... 

...  562 

M-asicera  pachytyli 

...  249 

Liranodynastes  dorsalis  271 

,  272,  273 

Megacarpaea  polyandra... 

...  463 

ornatus . . . 

...  271 

Megachile... 

...     16 

peronii  ... 

...  272 

Megaloprepia 

...  121 

salminii  44 

265,  272 

Melaleuca  leucadendron 

...     16 

tasmaniensis    ...271, 

Melania  balonnensis 

...  575 

[272,  274 

denisonensis 

...  563 

Liodes  leucaniata 

...  651 

queenslandica  ... 

...  563 

Liparetrus            

...  484 

tatei 

..    563 

alpicola 

..  483 

Melanodes... 

585,  621 

XII. 


INDEX. 


PAGE 

PAGE 

Melanodes  anthracitaria           . . .  622 

Monocrepidius  australasiae       ...  513 

Melo  diadema      701 

baldiensis 

514,  515 

Melobasis  azureipennis 497 

brucki    .. 

...  512 

beltanensis     ...         ...  499 

cerdo 

...  510 

monticola       ...         ...  496 

fictus 

...  513 

nervosa           497 

frontalis  510,512,515 

obscurella      ...         ...  498 

jekeli 

512,  513 

rotundicoll  is 498 

macleayi 

512,  515 

simplex           ...         ...  498 

nitidulus 

...  512 

superba           ...         ...  498 

ovensensis 

514,  515 

verna  ...         ...         ..    497 

rectangulus       ...  511 

viridi-obscura            ...  498 

ruficollis 

509,  511, 

Mermra     121,  438,  444 

[515 

Metapteryx  bifrons        453,  455,  456 

Monoctenia  digglesaria .. 

...  300 

Metriorhynchus 524,  525 

Monohammus  frenchi    .. 

...  543 

clientulus        ...  525 

Monolepta  benallae 

...  549 

erythropterus     524, 

croceicollis   .. 

...  549 

[525,  526,  527 

f  roggatti 

...  549 

gigas     .  .         ...  524 

modesta 

...  549 

inquinulum     ...  525 

Monstera  deliciosa 

...  248 

laetus 527 

Myoporum  sp. 

...     41 

lugubris           ...  526 

Myristicivora 

...  121 

marginatus     ...  528 

Myxobolus 

...  720 

monticola        ...  526 

Nanina  bruijni     ... 

...     74 

occidentals     ...  526 

cairni 

...     73 

rufipennis     524,  527 

citrina     

...     71 

semicostatns  ...  525 

dorise       

...    71 

Metrocampa          584,  644 

divisa 

...     73 

ada 644,  645 

var.  inclinata... 

73,  686, 

glaucias       ..          ...  644 

[6< 

)5,  696,  697 

Metrosideros  paradoxa 469 

var.  minor 

...     74 

Mezoneurum  brachypodum       ...  681 

var.  rosseliana 

...     74 

scortechinii  ...  680,  681 

var.  woodlarke] 

isis   ...     74 

Microcystina 76,  693 

dora        

...  574 

calcarata     76,  115,  116 

exilis       

...     73 

rinkii         687 

f  raudulenta 

...     73 

sappho       75,  115,  686, 

hunsteini       69,  72,  685,  695, 

[695,  696 

[696,  697 

Micromelum  pubescens 682 

orbiculum 

...     74 

Mictodoca            584,661 

sophise     ... 

...  685 

toxeuta          ...         ...  661 

Necrastur 

437,  439 

Milletia  megasperma     . . .      679,  680 

alacer...         439,454,456 

Mitrasacme  longiflora    472 

Neoteristis           

582,  672 

Mnesampela         ...584,585,652,656 

paraph  an  es  .. 

...  672 

comarcha  ...         ..    656 

Neptunia  monosperma  .. 

...  469 

fucata         ...      656,  658 

Neritodes... 

584,  651 

lenaea         ...      656,  657 

verrucata 

...  651 

privata       ...      656,  658 

Nicotiana  suaveolens 

...  136 

Mochlotona          ...         ...      582,  672 

Ninox 

...  438 

phasmatias             ...  673 

Nisaetus 123,  438,  439 

Mollinedia  longipes        682 

Nisista  notodontaria 

...  667 

Monocrepidius     ...510,  511,  514,  515 

Notaden  bennettii         26 

5,  266,  267, 

alpicola ...      511,  515 

[268,  270,  271,  272 

INDEX. 

Xlll. 

PAGE 

PAGE 

Nototherium           160,  162, 

163, 

164 

Panicum  indicum 

..    476 

victorise    . . . 

163 

majusculum     ... 

...  476 

Nyctemera  arnica 

280, 

281 

minutum 

...  476 

annulata 

281 

mitchelli 

...  703 

crescens 

280, 

281 

Papuina     ... 

...  691 

secundiana  ... 

280, 

281 

bidwilli ... 

...  557 

tertiana 

280, 

281 

conscendens 

...  557 

Nymphaea  coerulea 

457 

fucata    ... 

...  557 

gigantea 

458 

naso 

691,  694 

stellata 

457, 

458 

Paralaea 

584,  670 

tetragona 

458 

promacha 

...  671 

Nyroca  robusta   ... 

455 

Paropsis 

...  545 

sp 

455 

latipes    ... 

...  546 

Obba          

693 

lutea 

...  545 

bevani        

691 

maculata 

...  545 

elisus          

... 

691 

marmorea 

...  545 

oxystoma 

691 

regularis 

...  547 

Ochthephila  albertisi 

79, 

116 

sublimbata    ■  ... 

...  547 

Odontopera  australis 

649 

waterhousei 

...  545 

Odynerus  bi color 

14 

yilgarnensis     ... 

...   545 

concolor 

14 

Partula  occidentalis 

98,  116 

(Edematophora  cacaalis... 

306 

sirailaris ... 

...     97 

Omphalotropis  brazieri,  80 

101 

116 

woodlarkiana     . . . 

...     98 

protracta 

101 

116 

Paryphanta          

...     69 

Onyx        143,  146,  148,  149 

151 

153 

f  umosa 

...     24 

perfectus     ...147,  152 

153 

154 

milligani 

...     24 

Ophideres  salinrinia 

249 

Paspalum  scrobiculatum 

...  476 

Ophiodes  disjungens 

304 

Passa  latifasciata 

...  668 

parcemaula     . . . 

304 

Patula  f abref acta 

80,81 

Osbeckia  australiana 

470 

Pedinogyra  cunninghami 

...  554 

Osteocarpum 

465 

682 

var.  minor 

...  555 

Osteodes    ... 

583 

589 

Pelicanns  ... 

444,  445 

procurata 

589 

conspicillatus 

...  445 

Ostrea  edulis  var.  angasi 

307 

proavus           444, 

455,  456 

Owenia 

159 

160 

Pelopoeus  ketus 

...     14 

Owenia  vernicosa 

459 

Penthea  vermicularia     ... 

...  544 

Oxytes  flyensis    ... 

71 

115 

Peragalea  ... 

...  722 

hercules  ... 

70 

115 

Perga  affinis 

...  307 

Pachtylus  australis 

249 

dorsalis 

...  307 

Palasobia  longestriata     . . . 

17 

Peridinium 

..  167 

Palseopelargus      

441 

Peripatus  leuckarti 

167,  577 

nobilis     442 

,  455 

456 

novse-zealandias 

...  577 

Palmeria  scandens 

166 

Persoonia  chamgepeuce  .. 

...  166 

Panaethia  matutinata    . . . 

632 

falcata  .. 

...  471 

Panagra  ferritinctaria  . . . 

589 

Petalostigma  quadriloculart 

...  462 

jucundaria 

640 

Petraia 

...  193 

rupicolor 

591 

Phaeton 

312,  313 

sparsularia 

648 

Phalacrocorax 

...  438 

undiferaria 

640 

Phallaria  conductaria    ... 

...  643 

Panda  falconari  var.  maconelli 

554 

inductaria 

..  643 

Pandanus  ...         

108 

Phallus      

...  167 

Pandion 

123 

Phascolomys        ...  235,  237 

238,  246 

Panicum  brevif olium 

476 

angustidens 

243,  244 

XIV. 


INDEX. 


PAGE 

Phascolomys  curvirostris  . . .  236 

gigas  ...      237,  239 

krefftii       236 

latifrons   236,  237,  240, 
[241,  246 

medius       23S 

mitchelli  239,  241,  242, 

[243,  244,  245,  246 

parvus       ...      236,  243 

platyrhinus      237,  238, 

239,  240,  241,  242, 

243,  244,  245,  246 

thomsoni 239 

Phascolonus     237,  239,  258,  260,  262 

Phillipsastraaa  currani 193 

verneuilii  ...  193 

Philoscaphus  tuberculatus         . . .  430 

Phylloglossum      718 

Phylloxera  vastatrix      166 

Phytomyza  sp 704 

Pimelea  punicea 470 

sanguinea  ...         ...  470 

Pison  tnarginatus  ...         ...     14 

spinolse       ...         ...         ...     14 

Pitta  444 

Placostylus  hobsoni        ...         ...  567 

Planispira  cyclostomata  . . .  554 

in  arise  ...         ...  554 

Planolocha  ...         ...      584,  645 

autoptis         ...         ...  646 

Planorbis  brazieri  ...         ...  575 

gilberti  563 

Platalea 443 

flavipes ...         ...         ...  444 

regia      444 

subtenuis  443,  455,  456 

Platycerium  alcicorne 682 

grande        682 

Plectroscelis  concinna    ...         ...  548 

olliffi  548 

Plotus  parvus      ...          ...         ...  455 

Pluchea  tetrodonta         ...         ...  472 

Podargus  ...         ...         ...         ...  444 

Polistes  humilis  ...         ...         ...     14 

variabilis  ...         ...     14 

Pollichia  zeylanica  474 

Polycarpaea  longiflora    ...         ...  463 

Polygala  chinensis  ...         ...  459 

leptalea  459 

Polyophthalmus 347 

Pomaderris  cinerea         ..  ...   139 

P&matia  coriaria  ...      325,326 

gulom 326 


PAGE 

Pomatia  monacha 

..      325,  326 

scotti 

325 

Pompilius  aurifrons 

14 

Porina  kershawi  ... 

282 

Porphyrio... 

439 

mackintosh!,  440,  454,  456 
reperta  ...      440,  454 

Portulaca  australis         464 

digyna  464 

Praxis  corvus       ...         622 

illapsa      ...         ...         ...  668 

Pristiophorus       721 

Proboloptera        584,  641 

clelia  642 

embolias 641 

Proetus      ..  ..  312,  313,  319 

archiaci  ...         ...         ...  319 

ascanius  ...         312,316,317 
australis  ...315,  318,  319,  320 
bohemicus  ...         ...  313 

bowningensis,  312,  313,  314, 

[315,  319 

corycceus  ...         ...  317 

decorus    ...         315,  317,  319 
euryoeps...         ...         ...  315 

latifrons...         ...         ...  315 

lepidus 313 

longicaudus        315 

loveni      319 

parviusculus      315 

prouti      ...         ...         ...  313 

rattei,  315,  316,  317,  319,  320 

rowi         313 

sculptus 315 

stokesii 312,  319 

striatus  ...          ...         ...  319 

Progura  gallinacea  ...         ...  454 

Prorocentrum  micans     ...         ...  167 

Pseudophryne      ...         ...         ...  722 

bibronii  ...     271,  272, 
[273,  274 

Psilosticha  585,  624 

mactaria       ...  ...  624 

Psilotum 718 

complanatum  ...         ...  682 

Psoralea  bodacana  ...         ...  466 

testariaa  ...         ..    466 

Psylla        682,  704 

Pterocarpus  ...         ...         ...  253 

erinaceus    ...         ...  680 

marsupium...      423,  680 
Ptilotus  alopecuroides   ...         ...  464 

corymbosus      ...         ...  464 


INDEX. 


XV. 


PAGE 

Ptilotus  gracilis   ... 

465 

spicatus... 

464 

Puccinia 

249 

Pultenaea  sp. 

...      650,  667 

Pupa  anodonta    ... 

558 

artends 

99 

hyalina 

99 

kingi 

558 

macdonnelli 

99 

nacca 

99 

nitens 

99 

pacifica 

...      558,  575 

pedicula,  76, 99, 101, 558, 575, 694 
reeondita    ...         ...         ...     99 

samoensis    ...         ...         ...     99 

Pupina      693,  694 

costata     ...         ...          ...  559 

coxi  559,  560 

gibba        ...         ...      107,  116 

meridionalis        ...         ...  560 

ovalis       106,  116 

petterdi  ...         ...         ...  560 

planilabris  ...         ...  560 

strangei  ...         ...         ...  561 

ventrorsa  ...         ...  560 

wilcoxi    ...         ...         ...  560 

Pupinella  angasi 103,104 

angasi  ,.         ...         ...  104 

brazierse     70,  91,  103,  105 
var.  aignanensis    ..    105 

crossei...  105 

forbesi 103 

grandis  ...        69,  103 

var.  minor  ...         ...  104 

intermedia      ...         ...   104 

leucostoma      ...         ...  104 

loiiisiadensis  ...         ...  104 

macgregori     ...      102,  103 

minor 102,  103 

moulinsiana   ...      103,  104 
rosseliana       ...         ...  105 

smithi 103,  104 

tapparonei     106,  116,  691 

tyjnca 105 

Pycnospora  hedysaroides  ...  467 

Pythia  scarabaeus  101 

Rhamphicarpa     473 

macrosiphonia  . . .  473 

Rhinodia 584,  640 

rostraria  ...         ...  640 

Rhopsea 493 

heterodactyla  ...         ...  493 

Rhynchonella  pleurodon  ...  194 

48 


PAGE 

Rhynchonella  sp.  229 

Rhytida  capillacea  ...         ...  574 

globosa 69,80,116 

lampra 23,  26 

splendidula       554 

var.  strangeoides     ...  554 
walkeri ...         ...         ...  553 

Ricinocarpus        ...         ...         ...  458 

Roeperia   ...         ...         ...         ...  458 

cleomoides       ...         ...  458 

Rotala  verticillaris  ...         ...  470 

Rottboellia  formosa        ...         ...  477 

Salsola  kali  ...         ...         ...  465 

Santalum  cygnorum       137 

Sarcostemma  australe    ...         ...  472 

Scardamia...         ...         ...      584,  639 

chrysolina     ...         ...  640 

Sceparnodon  164,  237,  238,  258, 

[260,  262 

ramsayi     ...         ...  259 

Schizaea 718 

Scioglyptis  583,  593 

hemeropa     ...      593,  594 
lithinopa      ...         ...  593 

Scirtes  helmsi      524 

hemisphaericus  ...         ...  524 

Sclerocyphon       ...         ...         ...  522 

maculatus  ..  523 

Scodiona  milvaria  ...         ...  650 

Scolia  coronata    ...         ...         ...     14 

Scotosia  fr aetata  ...         ...         ...615 

Sebastiania  chamaelea 462 

Sechium  edule     ...         ...         ...  168 

Segmentina  victoriae      ...         ...  563 

Seirotrana...         ..  ...         ...  540 

dispar  ...         ...  542 

integricolle  ...         ...  540 

monticola      541 

parallela        540,  541,  542 

simplex         ...      540,  542 

Selenia  apamaria  ...         ...  587 

Selidosema  582,  583,  586,  591,  593, 
[594,  622,  673 
acaciaria  596,  617,  618 
adelphodes  ...  596,  611 
aganopa  597,  610,  612 
agoraea  ...  598,  608 
amphiclina  ...  596,  599 
argoplaca  ...  595,  615 
bitaeniaria  ...  596,  616 
canescaria  ...  597,  603 
capnota  ...  596,  605 
cheleuta       ..       596,  598 


XVI. 


INDEX. 


PAGE 

Selidosema  cognata        597 

,  606,  607 

curtaria 

597,  602 

despicata     ... 

595,  612 

destinataria 

596,  613 

epistictis 

596,  619 

eremias 

596,  600 

euboliaria    ... 

595,  615 

excursaria    597 

,  609,  629 

exprimataria 

596,  604 

externaria    ... 

597,  602 

hemipteraria 

...  609 

illustraria    ... 

596,  618 

leptodesma... 

597,  606 

leucoplecta  ... 

596,  607 

luxaria 

597,  609 

lyciaria 

597,  604 

pallidiscaria 

597,  612 

penthearia    . . . 

...  592 

perfectaria  ... 

597,  614 

silicaria 

597,  598 

suasaria 

597,  601 

thermaea 

598,  600 

zascia 

596,  613 

Serpentulu8  gulosus 

...  324 

Sesbania  grandiflora 

...  466 

Seseli  harveyanum 

...  135 

Setaria  glauca 

...  476 

Sideroxylon  arnhemicum 

...  472 

Silis           ...         

...  531 

australis 

...  530 

Siphonostoma  diplocha'itos, 

338,  339, 

[342 

345,  351 

Siphonostomum  ...         336 

337,  341 

affine    329, 

347,  348, 

[350 

351,  356 

uncinatum 

...  351 

vaginif  erum     . . .  338, 

[350,  351 

Sloanea  australis... 

...  140 

Smyriodes... 

583,  666 

aplectaria 

...  667 

Sphserium  queenslandicum 

...  564 

Sphinx  eremophilse 

277,  279 

marmorata 

277,  278 

Spilopyra  olliffi 

...  544 

sumptuosa 

...  544 

Spirifer  disjunctus 

...  194 

»P 

...  229 

Spirogyra  ... 

...  247 

Spirula 

...  721 

Stackhousia  viminea 

.    470 

Stathmorrhopa    ... 

583,  659 

beggaria 

...  660 

PAGE 

Stegania  allogata..  640 

Stenocarpus  cunninghami         ...  471 
Stenogyra  artensis  ...         ...     99 

diaphanea     ...         ...     99 

gracilis  557,  691,  694 

gyrata  ...         ...     99 

juncea  98 

novemgyrata 99 

octonoides      ...         ...     98 

panayensis    ...         ...     99 

procera  ...         ...     98 

souverbiana  ...         ...     99 

subula  98,  557,  691 

tuckeri  98,  101,  557 

upolensis        ...         ...     98 

walli 98 

Sterculia  acuminata       ...         ...  578 

diversifolia      ...         ...  134 

Sternaspis...  -       ...         ...         ...  721 

Sthenomerus        ..  ...         ...   164 

Stibaroma 5S4,  669,  670 

melanotoxa  ...         ...  669 

Stictonetta  naevosa         ...         ...       8 

Strigoptera  499,  500 

australis  ...  501,  502 
frenchi  499,  500,  502 
marmorata  ...         ...  501 

Stromatopora  striatella 193 

Strychnos  lucida...         ...         ...  472 

Stylarioides    329,  332,  333,  336,  342, 
[345,  349 

capensis      334 

caribou m    ...         ...  334 

cinctus       333,  336,  341, 

344,  348,  350, 

351,  355,  356 

cingulatus  ...         ...  334 

horstii        335,  341,  351, 

[355,  356 

monilifer   329,  339,  341, 

[344,  356 

parmatus 334 

Succinea  arborea...         ...      559,  575 

simplex    100,116,691,692, 

[697 

strigata  ...         ...  559 

Syncarpia...         ...         422 

Syrphus     ...         ...         ...         ...  704 

Tachinasp.  249 

Tacparia  zalissaria        ...         ...  643 

Taphaetus  brachialis      ...      123,454 

Teara  albidescens  285 

edwardsi 285 


INDEX. 


XV11. 


PAGE 

PAGE 

Teara  fimbriata   . . . 

285 

Thy nnus  brenchleyi 

...     15 

togata 

285 

conspicuus 

15,  16 

Telephorus  fusicornis 

529 

pulchralis 

...     15 

galeatus 

529 

smithii ... 

...     16 

nobilitatus 

530 

sp 

...     15 

pauxillus 

528 

Thysanotus  chrysantherus 

...  475 

pusio... 

528 

Tigridoptera         

585,  631 

vibex . . . 

530 

mar  i  ana     ... 

...  631 

victoriensis 

..      528,  530 

matutinata 

631,  632 

Telopea  oreades  ... 

..      166,  703 

rotundata . . . 

631,  632 

Tephrina  adustaria 

592 

Tipula  sp 

...  577 

impressaria 

..    636 

Tmesipteris 

...  718 

normata 

590 

Tornatellina  eucharis     ... 

...  558 

procurata 

...  589 

terrestris   . . . 

...     99 

Tephrosia  absorpta 

624 

Trianthema  pilosa 

...  464 

bispinaria 

..      599,  673 

Tribonyx 

439,  440 

curtaria 

602 

effluxus 

439,  454 

despicata 

612 

mortieri 

...  440 

disperdita 

609 

Triodia  procera 

...  478 

disposita 

628 

Tristania  psidioides 

...  470 

euboliaria 

615 

Triumfetta  appendiculat 

...  461 

excursaria 

609 

bradshawii  ... 

460,  462 

exesaria 

674 

f abreana 

...  461 

exportaria 

609 

johnstoni 

...  461 

externaria 

602 

plumigera    ... 

...  461 

fractaria 

629 

winneckeana 

...  461 

gratularia 

601 

Trochomorpha  lomonti  ... 

...     78 

indirecta 

613 

nigrans  ... 

...     79 

integraria 

624 

var.  cornea    ... 

mactaria 

624 

planorbis 

...     78 

perfectaria 

614 

Trophonia... 

336,  347 

phibalapterai 

•ia       ...  609 

capensis 

...  334 

propinquaria 

..  601 

cincta ... 

...  347 

subtinctaria  . 

628 

eruca  ... 

...  339 

vagaria 

613 

horstii 

..,  347 

Terebella  ...  ' 

347 

monilifer 

...  344 

Terminalia  microcarpa 

470 

plumosa 

336,  347 

Tetracis  cachexiata 

673 

xanthotricha... 

...  338 

Thalaina 

...     585,  652 

Truncatella  cerea 

...  100 

angulosa 

..      652,  655 

ceylanica     . . . 

100,  694 

australiaria 

653 

co?ispicua     . . . 

...  100 

clara 

..      653,  654 

nitida 

...  100 

inscripta 

..      652,  655 

semicostata ... 

...  100 

klenaea... 

653 

sp 

...  694 

principaria 

655 

teres ... 

...  100 

punctilinea 

653 

valida 

100,  694 

selenaea 

653 

vitiacea 

...  100 

Thalassia  annula... 

78,  116,  694 

vitiana 

...  100 

delta    . . . 

553 

Trygonorhina       

...  721 

moretonensis 

552 

Tylenchus... 

...  149 

pudibunda 

552 

Unio  australis 

564,  575 

rustica... 

78,  552 

depressus  var.  angasi 

...  564 

Themada  arguens 

477 

var.  mutabilis...  564 

XV111. 


INDEX. 


Unio  novse-hollandise 
Uraria  cylindracea 
Uroaetus  .. 

audax   ... 

brachialis 
Vedalia  cardinalis 
Verbena  officinalis 
Verticordia  cunninghami 
Vitis  acetosa 
trifolia 
Vivipara  essingtonensis, 

sublineata 
Voluta  magnifica... 
Vunga  delineata  ... 
Waldheimia  flavescens  . 
Waltheria  indica... 
Weinmannia  paniculosa. . 


PAGE 

PAGE 

564 

Wistaria 

...  679 

467 

Xanthorrhcea 

...     16 

123 

Xenomusa  metallica 

...  299 

123 

monoda 

...  300 

..      123,  454 

Xenorhynchus     

442,  443 

..      126,  166 

nanus... 

...  455 

137 

Xerotes  brownii 

...  475 

ti 

..  469 

media 

...  475 

..  471 

Xesta 

...  693 

..  471 

Xiphogonium 

...  313 

..  564 

Xylocopa  restuans 

...     16 

..  564 

muscaria 

...     16 

..  307 

Zanclopteryx 

...  674 

..  667 

permensata 

...  674 

..  721 

Zerene  devinctaria 

...  674 

..  460 

Zermizinga  indocilisaria 

...  623 

..  138 

Zygomaturus       ...160,  163, 

164,  165 

F.  Cunninghame  6c  Co.,  Printers,  1U6  Pitt  Street,  Sydney. 


PLSN.5W.(2nd  SerOVoi-V! 


PJXXXVH1. 


Hed/ey  de/.adnar. 


STLeiph&Clith 


P.LS.NS.W.(2ndSer.)VoLVI 


PI  XXXIX. 


//is//* 


§h 


C  Medley  del.  adnat. 


STLeiph&L'lith. 


PL.SN.S.W.(2ndSer)VoLVI 


PI.  XL 


C  Hedle/.dei  ad  rial 


s-T-lttjbtPM. 


PLS.N5W.(2ndS^WoL.VI 


P1XLI, 


Hedky  del.ddnsr 


STLeigh&Plith. 


P.L5N.S.W.(2ndSer.)VoLVI 


PI  XL  11. 


■ffl 


19. 


37. 


C.Hedky.deJ.ddndt. 


ST-LeiphtPlirti 


Issued  September  9,  1891. 


yp^; 


K 


THE 

PROCEEDINGS 


OF    THE 


LINNEAN  SOCIETY 


OF 


NEW   SOUTH    WALES 


SECOND     SEEIES. 


VOL.  VI. 

PART    THE    FIRST. 
Containing  the    Papers  read  at  the  Meetings 

HELD    IN 

JANUARY,    FEBRUARY,    AND    MARCH,    1891. 

WITH    THIRTEEN    I»LATES- 

(Plates  i.-xii.  and  xii.  bis.) 


SYDNEY : 

PRINTED    AND    PUBLISHED  "FOR    THE    SOCIETY 
BY 

F.  CUNNINGHAME  &  CO.,   146  PITT  STREET, 

AND 

SOLD  BY  THE  SOCIETY. 
[Price,  10/  ] 

^g-zehstts  msr  eueope  -. 
^^S^>       Messrs.  Dulau  &  Co.,  37  Soho  Square,  London,  W. 
'f&Qf^k.  Messrs.  R.  Friedl.ender  &  Sohn,  Carlstrasse  11,  Berlin,  N.W, 


®S 


NOTICE. 


With  the  exception  of  Volumes  I. -VI.  of  the  Proceedings — of 
which  the  Society's  stock  was  totally  destroyed  in  the  Garden 
Palace  Fire — the  Publications  of  the  Linnean  Society  of  N.S.W. 
may  be  obtained  at  the  Society's  Hall,  Ithaca  Road,  Elizabeth 
Bay,  Sydney,  from  Dulau  &  Co.,  37  Soho  Square,  London,  W.,  or 
R.  Friedlander  &  Sohn,  Carlstrasse  11,  Berlin,  N.W.,  at  the  fol- 
lowing prices  : —  £    s   (| 

Vol.  VII.  Containing  Proceedings  for  18S2,  Part  1 0     7  6 

„      Part  2 0  10  0 

„                ,,                    ,,                     „      Part  3 0    5  0 

„      Part4 0  10  0 

Vol.  VIII.  Containing  Proceedings  for  1883,  Part  1 0  10  0 

„      Part  2 0     5  0 

„      Part  3 0     7  0 

,,                     ,,                     ,,      Part4 0     8  0 

Vol.  IX.  Containing  Proceedings  for  1884,  Part  1 0    8  0 

„      Part  2 0  12  0 

»      Part3 1     5  0 

,,                     ,,                     „      Part4 15  0 

Vol.  X.   Containing  Proceedings  for  1885,  Part  1 0  12  0 

„      Part  2 0     7  6 

„      Part  3 0  15  0 

„      Part4 0  17  6 

Vol.  I.  (Second  Ser.)  Containing  Proceedings  for  1886,  Part  1  0  10  6 

„        Part  2  0  12  0 

„        Part  3  0  13  0 

„       Part  4  0  12  6 

Vol.  II.  (Second  Ser.)  Containing  Proceedings  for  1887,  Part  10     7  0 

„        Part  2  0     8  0 

„        Part  3  0  12  0 

„        Part  4  1     7  0 

Vol.  III.  (Second  Ser.)  Containing  Proceedings  for  1888,  Part  1  0  15  0 

„        Part  2  1     4  0 

„        Part  3  1     0  0 

Part4  0  18  0 

Vol.  IV.  (Second  Ser.)  Containing  Proceedings  for  1889,  Part  10  110 

Part  2  0  16  0 

Part3  0  19  0 

Part4  0  11  0 

Vol.  V.  (Second  Ser.)  Containing  Proceedings  for  1890,  Parti  0  11  0 

Part  2  0     9  0 

,,       Part  3  0     9  0 

„        Part  4  0     9  0 

Vol.  VI.  (Second  Ser.)  Containing  Proceedings  for  1891,  Part  1  0  10  0 

A  reduction  of  20  per  cent,  on  the  above  charges  is  made 

to  Members  of  the  Society. 

Copies  of  Vol.  II.  of  the  Transactions  of  the  Entomological 
Society  of  New  South  Wales  are  also  obtainable,  price  fifteen 
shillings. 


CONTENTS   OF  VOL.  VI.,  PART  1 

(SECOND  SERIES.) 


PAGE 

Notes  on  the  occurrence  of  Stilbite  in  the  Eruptive  Rocks  of  Jamberoo, 

N.S.W.     By  B.  G.  Engelhardt.     (Plate  i  )  5 

Notes  on  a  small  Collection  of  Hymenoptera  from  Narrabri,  N.S.W. 

By  W.  W.  Froggatt      ...         13 

Description  of  a  new  Species  of.  Tortricidse.     By  J.  Hartley  D.crrant     17 

On  the  Anatomy  of  some  Tasmanian  Land  Snails.     By  C.  Hedley, 

F.L.S.,  Corr.  Mem.     (Plates  n. -in.) 19 

Stray  Notes  on  Lepidoptera.     No.  2.     By  A.  Sidney  Olliff 27 

Notes    on   Australian    Aboriginal    Stone   Weapons    and    Implements. 

Nos.  x.-xv.     By  R.  Etheridge,  Junr.     (Plates  iv.-viii.) 31 

On  the  Classification  of  Eucalypts.     By  the  Rev.  W.  Woolls,  Ph.D., 

F.L.S.  ...         49 

The  Land  Molluscan  Fauna  of  British  New  Guinea.     By  C.  Hedley, 

F.L.S. ,  Corr.  Mem.     (Plates  ix.-xii.  and  xu.  bis) 67 

On  the  Trail  of  an  Extinct  Bird.     By  C.  W.  De  Vis,  M.A.,  Corr.  Mem.  117 

Note  on  an  Extinct  Eagle.     By  C.  W.  De  Vis,  M.A.,  Corr.  Mem.      ...  123 

Elections  and  Announcements  ...          ...          ...          ...  ...        1,9,45 

Donations  ...  ...          ...         ...          ...          ...          ...         ...        1 ,  9,  45 

Notes  and  Exhibits      8,43.12.3 


Issued  December  22,  1891. 


THE 


PKOCEEDINGrS 


OF    THE 


LINNEAN  SOCIETY 


OF 


NEW   SOUTH   WALES. 


SECOND     SEEIES. 


w 


VOL.  VI. 

PART    THE    SECOND. 
Containing  the   Papers  read  at  the  Meetings 

HELD    IN 

APRIL,     MAY,     AND     JUNE,     1891. 

WITH    EIGHT    I>LATES_ 

(Plates  xiii.-xix.,  and  xxii.) 


SYDNEY : 
PRINTED    AND    PUBLISHED    FOR    THE    SOCIETY 

BY 

F.  CUNNINGHAME  &  CO.,  146  PITT  STREET, 

AND 

SOLD  BY  THE  SOCIETY. 
[Price,  9  6  1 

-A-GKEJISTTS    ZCUST    EUEOPE  = 

Messrs.  Dulau  &  Co,,  37  Spho  Square,  London,  W. 

Messrs.  R.  Fkiedl^ender  &  Sorix,  Carlstrasse  11,  Berlin,  N.W 


NOTICE. 

With  the  exception  of  Volumes  I.-VI.  of  the  Proceedings — of 
which  the  Society's  stock  was  totally  destroyed  in  the  Garden 
Palace  Fire — the  Publications  of  the  Linnean  Society  of  N.S.W. 
may  be  obtained  at  the  Society's  Hall,  Ithaca  Road,  Elizabeth 
Bay,  Sydney,  from  Dulau  &  Co.,  37  Soho  Square,  London,  W.,  or 
R.  Friedlander  <k  Sohn,  Carlstrasse  11,  Berlin,  N.W.,  at  the  fol- 
lowing prices : —  „        £    s   j 

Vol.  VII.  Containing  Proceedings  for  1 882,  Part  1 0     7  6 

„       Part2 ,  0  10  0 

„      Part3 0    5  0 

,,                    „      Part4 0  10  0 

Vol.  VIII.  Containing  Proceedings  for  1883,  Part  1 0  10  0 

„      Part2 0    5  0 

„                „                   „                   „      Part  3 0    7  0 

„      Part  4 0    8  0 

Vol.  IX.  Containing  Proceedings  for  1 884,  Part  1 0    8  0 

„      Part2 0  12  0 

„      Part3 1     5  0 

,,"              ,,                    ,,                    „      Part4 1     5  0 

Vol.  X.   Containing  Proceedings  for  1885,  Part  1 0  12  0 

„      Part  2 0     7  6 

„      Part3 0  15  0 

„      Part4 0  17  6 

Vol.  I.  (Second  Ser.)  Containing  Proceedings  for  1886,  Part  1  0  10  6 

„        Part  2  0  12  0 

Part  3  0  13  0 

Part  4  0  12  6 

Vol.  II.  (Second  Ser.)  Containing  Proceedings  for  1887,  Part  10    7  0 

„        Part  2  0    8  0 

„        Part  3  0  12  0 

„        Part  4  1     7  0 

Vol.  III.  (Second  Ser.)  Containing  Proceedings  for  1888,  Part  10  15  0 

„        Part  2  1     4  0 

»        P*rt  3     1     0     0 

Part4     0  18     0 

Vol.  IV.  (Second  Ser.)  Containing  Proceedings  for  1889,  Part  10  110 

Part2     0  16     0 

„        Part  3     0  19    0 

,,        Part  4     0  110 

Vol.  V.  (Second  Ser.)  Containing  Proceedings  for  1890,  Fart  1     0  11     0 

„        Part  2     0     9     0 

,,        Part  3     0     9     0 

„        Part  4    0     9     0 

Vol.  VI.  (Second  Ser.)  Containing  Proceedings  for  1891,  Part  10  10    0 

„       Part  2    0     9     6 
A   reduction  of  20  per  cent,  on  the  above  charges  is  made 
to  Members  of  the  Society. 

Copies  of  Vol.  II.  of  the  Transactions  of  the  Entomological 
Society  of  New  South  Wales  are  also  obtainable,  price  fifteen 
shillings. 


CONTENTS   OF  VOL.  VI.,  PART  2. 

(SECOND  SERIES.) 


PACE 

On  the  Occurrence  of  Barite  (Barytes)  in  the  Hawkesbury  Sandstone 

near  Sydney.     By  H.  G.  Smith,  Technological  Museum,  Sydney...  131 

Notes  on  Australian  Economic  Botany.      No.  II.     By  J.  H.  Maiden, 
F.L.S.,  F.C.S 133 

On  the  occurrence  of   a  Gum   in  Echinocarpus  ( SloawaJ   Austrdlis, 

Benth.     By  J.  H.  Maiden,  F.L.S.,  F.C.S 140 

Onyx  and  Dipeltis:  new  Nematode  Genera,  with  a  Note  on  Dorylaimus. 

By  N.  A.  Cobb      143 

In  confirmation  of  the  Genus  Owenia  so-called.      By  C.  \V  .De  Vis, 

M. A.,  Corr.  Mem.  (Plate  xm.)  159 

A  Contribution  to  the  Geology  and  Petrography  of  Bathurst,  N.S.W. 

By  Rev.  .1.  Milxe  Currax,  F.G.S.     (Plates  xiv.-xviii.)  ...  ...   173 

Remarks  on  Post-Tertiary  Phascolomyida-.      By  C.  W.  De  Vis,  M.A., 

Corr.  Mem.  235 

Description  of  a  new  Marine  Shell.     By  C.  Hedley,  F.L.S.,  and   C. 

T.  Mrssox,  F.L.S.     (Plate  xix.,  figs.  1-3)     247 

Note  on  the  Ova  of  Helicarion  robustiis,  Gould.     By  C.  Hedley,  F.L.S.  248 

Angophora  Kino.     By  J.  H.  Maiden,  F.L.S.,  F.C.S 253 

The  Incisors  of  Scepamodon.      By  C.  W.  De  Vis,  M.A.,  Corr.  Mem. 

(Plate  xxii.)  258 

Contributions  to  a  more  exact  Knowledge  of  the  Geographical  Distribu- 
tion of  Australian  Batrachia.     No.  II.     By  J.  J.  Fletcher  .    263 

Description  of  a  supposed  new  Cystignathoid  Frog.     By  J.J.  Fletch  er  27~> 

Description  of  a  new  Cone  from  Mauritius.      By  J.  Brazier,  F.L.S. 

(Plate  xix.,  fig.  4.)  27b' 

On  Queensland  and  other  Australian  Lepidoptera,  with  Descriptions 
of  New  Species.    By  Thomas  P.  Lucas,  M.R.C.S.E.,  L.S.A.      ...  277 

Elections  and  Announcements  ...          ...  ...  ...  ...       127,  169 

Donations  127,169,250 

Notes  and  Exhibits      166,248,307 


Issued  May  23,  1892. 


THE 


PROCEEDINGS 


OF    THE 


LINNEAN  SOCIETY 


OF 


NEW   SOUTH    WALES 


SECOITD     SERIES, 


VOL.  VI. 

PART    THE    THIRD. 
Containing  the   Papers  read  at  the  Meetings 

HELD   IN 

JULY   AND   SEPTEMBER,   1891. 
WITH     SEVENTEEN     PLATES. 


SYDNEY : 
PRINTED    AND    PUBLISHED    FOR    THE    SOCIETY 


BY 


F.  CUNNINGHAME  &  CO.,  146  PITT  STREET, 

AND 

SOLD  BY  THE  SOCIETY. 
[Price7l7/  ] 


^GKEZSTTS    I3ST    BI7EOPB  : 


<f^      Messrs.  Dulau  &  Co.,  37  Soho  Square,  London,  W. 

Messrs.  R.  Friedl.«nder  &  Sohn,  Carlstrasse  11,  Berlin,  N.W 


NOTICE. 

With  the  exception  of  Volumes  I.-VI.  of  the  Proceedings — of 
which  the  Society's  stock  was  totally  destroyed  in  the  Garden 
Palace  Fire — the  Publications  of  the  Linnean  Society  of  N.S.W. 
may  be  obtained  at  the  Society's  Hall,  Ithaca  Road,  Elizabeth 
Bay,  Sydney,  from  Dulau  &  Co.,  37  Soho  Square,  London,  W.,  or 
R.  Friedlander  &  Sohn,  Carlstrasse  11,  Berlin,  N.W.,  at  the  fol- 
lowing prices :—  £    s   d 

Vol.  VII.  Containing  Proceedings  for  1 882,  Part  1 0    7  6 

„      Part  2 0  10  0 

„      Part  3 0    5  0 

„      Part4 0  10  0 

Vol.  VIII.  Containing  Proceedings  for  1883,  Part  1 0  10  0 

„      Part  2 0    5  0 

„      Part  3 0    7  0 

„      Part  4 0    8  0 

Vol.  IX.  Containing  Proceedings  for  1884,  Part  1 0    8  0 

m      Part  2 0  12  0 

„      Part3 1     5  0 

„      Part4 1     5  0 

Vol.  X.   Containing  Proceedings  for  1885,  Part  1 0  12  0 

,,      Part  2..... 0    7  6 

„      Part  3 0  15  0 

„      Part  4 0  17  6 

Vol.  I.  (Second  Ser.)  Containing  Proceedings  for  1886,  Part  1  0  10  6 

„        Part  2  0  12  0 

Part  3  0  13  0 

,»       Part  4  0  12  6 

Vol.  II.  (Second  Ser.)  Containing  Proceedings  for  1887,  Part  10    7  0 

„       Part  2  0     8  0 

Part  3  0  12  0 

„        Part  4  1     7  0 

Vol.  III.  (Second  Ser.)  Containing  Proceedings  for  1888,  Part  1  0  15  0 

„        Part  2  1     4  0 

„        Part  3  1     0  0 

„       Part  4  0  18  0 

Vol.  IV.  (Second  Ser.)  Containing  Proceedings  for  1889,  Part  10  110 

,,                „       Part2  0  16  0 

„        Part3  0  19  0 

,,        Part4  0  11  0 

Vol.  V.  (Second  Ser.)  Containing  Proceedings  for  1890,  Parti  0  11  0 

„       Part  2  0    9  0 

,,       Part3  0    9  0 

„       Part  4  0    9  0 

Vol.  VI.  (Second  Ser.)  Containing  Proceedings  for  1891,  Parti  0  10  0 

„        Part  2  0     9  6 

Part  3  0  17  0 

A  reduction  of  20  per  cent,  on  the  above  charges  is  made 
to  Members  of  the  Society. 

Copies  of  Vol.  II.  of  the  Transactions  of  the  Entomological 
Society  of  New  South  "Wales  are  also  obtainable,  price  fifteen 
shillings. 


CONTENTS   OF  VOL.  VI.,  PART  3. 

(SECOND  SERIES.) 


PAGE 

The  Silurian  Trilobites  of  New  South  Wales,  with  References  to  those 
of  other  parts  of  Australia.  Part  i.  By  R.  Etheridge,  Junr. , 
Palaeontologist  to  the  Australian  Museum,  and  Geological  Survey 
of  N.S.W.;  and  John  Mitchell,  Public  School,  Narellan.     (Plate 

xxv.)  311 

On  the  Synonymy  of  Helix  (Hadra)  gulosa,  Gould.     By  John  Brazier, 

C.M.Z.S.,  F.L.S 321 

Observations  on  the  Chloraemidae,  with  special  Reference  to  several 
Australian  Forms.  By  W.  A,  Haswell,  M.A. ,  D.Sc.  Edin.,  F.L.S., 
Challis  Professor  of  Biology,  University  of  Sydney.     (Plates  xxvi.- 

xxviii.)      329 

Notes  on  Australian  Aboriginal  Stone  Weapons  and  Implements.  Nos. 
xvi.-xvii.  By  R.  Etheridge,  Junr.,  Palaeontologist  to  the  Aus- 
tralian Museum,  and  Geological  Survey  of  N.S.  W.     (Plates  xxix.- 

xxxvi.)       357 

The  Examination  of  Kinos  as  an  Aid  in  the  Diagnosis  of  Eucalypts. 

Part  iii.— The  Turbid  Group.     By  J.  H.  Maiden,  F.L.S.,  F.C.S.  389 
Descriptions  of  two  new  Species  of  Carenum  from  West  Australia, 
with  Notes  on  the  Synonymy  and  Distribution  of  some  previously 

described  Species.     By  T.  G.  Sloane 427 

Jottings  from  the  Biological  Laboratory  of  Sydney  University.     By 
Professor  W.  A.  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc— 
15.  On  a  simple  Method  of  substituting  strong  Alcohol  for  a  watery 

Solution  in  the  Preparation  of  Specimens 433 

Residue  of  the  Extinct  Birds  of  Queensland  as  yet  Detected.     By  C. 

W.  De  Vis,  M.A.,  Corr.  Mem.     (Plates  xxiii.-xxiv.)       437 

Observations  on  Plants  collected  during  Mr.  J.  Bradshaw's  Expedition 
to  the  Prince  Regent's  River.     By  Baron  von  Mueller,  K.C.M.G., 

M.D.,  Ph.D.,  F.R.S 457 

Notes  on  Australian  Coleoptera,  with  Descriptions  of  new  Species. 

Part  x.     By  the  Rev.  T.  Blackburn,  B.A.,  Corr.  Mem 479 

On  a  Collection  of  Land  and  Freshwater  Shells  from  Queensland.     By 

C.  Hedley,  F.L.S.,  and  C.  T.  Musson,  F.L.S 551 

Descriptions  of  some  new  Species  of  Pulmonate  Mollusca  from  Australia 
and  the  Solomon  Islands.     By  J.  C.  Cox,  M.D.,  F.L.S.     (Plates 

xx.  and  xxi.)         565 

Description  of  a  new  Diplomorpha.  By  W.  D.  Hartman,  M.D. 
(Communicated  by  J.  G.  Cox,  M.D.,  F.L.S.)     (Plate  xxi.,  figs.  1, 

3,  and  6)     571 

Some  New  South  Wales  Plants  illustrated.     By  R.  T.  Baker,  Assistant 

Curator,  Technological  Museum,  Sydney.     (Plate  xxxvn.)  ...572 

Elections  and  Announcements  308,  382,  383 

Donations  308,  383 

Notes  and  Exhibits      307,381,574 


jo)^ 


Issued  June  10,  1892. 


^\  THE  ^ 

PKOCEEDINGS 


OF    THE 


LINNEAN  SOCIETY 


OF 


NEW   SOUTH    WALES 


SECOND     SEZRIIES. 


VOL.  VI. 

PART    THE    FOURTH. 
Containing  the   Papers  read  at  the  Meetings 

HELD    IN 

OCTOBER    AND    NOVEMBER,    1891. 
WITH    FIVE    2PI-ATE6_ 


SYDNEY : 
PRINTED    AND    PUBLISHED    FOR    THE    SOCIETY 

F.  CUNNINGHAME  &  CO.,  146  PITT  STREET, 

AND 

SOLD  BY  THE  SOCIETY. 
[Price,  7/6.] 


-A.GKE3STTS    IUST    ETJEOPE  -. 

Messrs.  Dulau  &  Co.,  37  Soho  Square,  London,  W. 

Messrs.  R.  Fuiedl.-endkr  &  Sohn,  Carlstrasse  11,  Berlin,  N.W 


NOTICE. 

With  the  exception  of  Volumes  I.-VI.  of  the  Proceedings — of 
which  the  Society's  stock  was  totally  destroyed  in  the  Garden 
Palace  Fire — the  Publications  of  the  Linnean  Society  of  KS.W. 
may  be  obtained  at  the  Society's  Hall,  Ithaca  Road,  Elizabeth 
Bay,  Sydney,  from  Dulau  &  Co.,  37  Soho  Square,  London,  \V.,  or 
R.  Friedlander  &  Sohn,  Carlstrasse  11,  Berlin,  N.W.,  at  the  fol- 
lowing prices  : —  £    s.  d. 

Vol.  VII.  Containing  Proceedings  for  1882,  Part  1 0    7  6 

„      Part2 0  10  0 

„      Part  3 0    5  0 

"                .I                    „                    „      Part4 0  10  0 

Vol.  VIII.  Containing  Proceedings  for  1S83,  Part  1 0  10  0 

„      Part  2 0    5  0 

„      Part3 0    7  0 

„      Part  4 0    8  0 

Vol.  IX.  Containing  Proceedings  for  1884,  Part  1 0    8  0 

-       „                „                    „                    „      Part  2 0  12  0 

,.                     „      Part3 1     5  0 

„      Part4 1     5  0 

Vol.  X.   Containing  Proceedings  for  1885,  Part  1 0  12  0 

„      Part  2 0     7  6 

,.      Part  3 0  15  0 

„      Part4 0  17  6 

Vol.  I.  (Second  Ser.)  Containing  Proceedings  for  1886,  Part  1  0  10  6 

m        Part  2  0  12  0 

„       ,          „        Part  3  0  13  0 

;;                „                    „                    ,.                 »       Part  4  0  12  6 

Vol.  II.  (Second  Ser. )  Containing  Proceedings  for  1887,  Part  10     7  0 

„                    „                „       Part  2  0     8  0 

„       Part  3  0  12  0 

..        Part  4  1     7  0 

Vol.  III.  (Second  Ser.)  Containing  Proceedings  for  1888,  Parti  0  15  0 

„        Part  2  1     4  0 

„        P*rt3  1     0  0 

»       Part  4  0  18  0 

Vol.  IV.  (Second  Ser.)  Containing  Proceedings  for  1S89,  Part  10  110 

„       Part  2  0  16  0 

„        Part  3  0  19  0 

...        Part4  0  11  0 

Vol.  V.  (Second  Ser.)  Containing  Proceedings  for  1890,  Part  10  110 

»       Part  2  0    9  0 

,.       Part  3  0    9  0 

.,       Part  4  0    9  0 

Vol.  VI.  (Second  Ser.)  Containing  Proceedings  for  1891,  Part  1  0  10  0 

..       Part  2  0     9  6 

„       Part3  0  17  0 

„       Part  4  0    7  6 

A  reduction  of  20  per  cent,  on  the  above  charges  is  made 
to  Members  of  the  Society. 

Copies  of  Vol.  II.  of  the  Transactions  of  the  Entomological 
Society  of  New  South  Wales  are  also  obtainable,  price  fifteen 
shillings. 


CONTENTS   OF  VOL.  VI.,  PART  L 

(SECOND  SERIES.) 


Revision  of  Australian  Lepidoptera.      By  E.  Meyrick,  B.A.,  F.L.S. 

Part  v 5S1 

On   two   undescribed   Exudations  from  the   Leguminoste.     By  J.  H. 

Maiden,  F.L.S. ,  &c 679 

The  Land  Molluscan  Fauna  of  British  New  Guinea.  (Anatomical 
Supplement,  continued  from  p.  115.)  By  C.  Hedley,  F.L.S. 
(Plates  xxxviii. -xlii.) 685 

On  a  Form  of  Womerah,  or  "  Throwing-stick,"  presumed  to  be  undes- 
cribed. By  R.  Ethekidge,  jun.  (Palaeontologist  to  the  Australian 
Museum,  and  Geological  Survey  of  N.  S.  Wales)     ... 

In  Memoriam— Sir  William  Macleay,  Kt.,  F.L.S.,  M.L.C. 

Donations  

Notes  and  Exhibits      

President's  Address 

Office  bearers  and  Council  for  1892 

Title-page,  Contents,   Index  to  Vol.  VI.  (2nd  Ser.),  List  of   Plates,  and 
Corrigenda. 


699 

705 

579, 

683 

682, 

703 

706 

723